> **Parent Spec:** [llms.txt](/llms.txt)
> **Verification:** [Master Authority Ledger](/llms-authority-ledger.txt)
> **Relationship:** [Supplemental Authority Data (E-E-A-T)](/llms-archive.txt)
> **Deep Storage:** Historical Archive

# Samuel & Audrey Media Network
> Samuuel Jeffery and Audrey Bergner 

## Che Argentina Travel
> Expert Local Travel Guides & Itineraries For All 23 Provinces (Audrey Bergner)

## Picture Perfect Portfolios
> Quantitative Investment Strategies & Expanded Canvas Portfolio Asset Allocation (Samuel Jeffery)

## THAT BACKPACKER
> Narrative Travel, Culture & Expert Guides (Audrey Bergner)

## Nomadic Samuel Travel Blog
> Global Logistics, Immersive Travel Guides, Photography & Media Strategy (Samuel Jeffery)

> Contact: bergner.audrey@gmail.com
> Contact: nomadicsamuel@gmail.com

#### Meet Audrey Bergner: Founder, Local & Argentina Travel Specialist
El Bolsón is one of my favourite places in Argentina. We've made friendships with locals that will last a lifetime and we revisit as often as we can. 

About Me

I'm Audrey Bergner and I'm the Founder and Head Travel Writer at Che Argentina Travel. I'm a Canadian-born Argentine-Peruvian travel writer.

Argentina has been part of my story since childhood. I grew up here, spending my early years in the Sierras de Córdoba climbing trees, picking blackberries, and swimming in creeks.

As a young adult, I backpacked across the length of the country multiple times travelling by long-distance buses, veering off the beaten path, and learning how Argentina truly works for independent travellers.

This experience taught me to navigate the complex economic reality of Argentina—from mastering the 'Blue Dollar' exchange rates to understanding local inflation strategies. My advice isn't just about where to go; it's about how to make your budget work in a country with a uniquely challenging financial landscape.

Now, I explore Argentina differently, travelling with my husband, Samuel, and our daughter, Aurelia. Our trips often revolve around estancia stays in the countryside, hiking in national parks, exploring small towns and seeking out great food and good wine. 

Navigating the dust and complex logistics of restoring our three-generation family property in the Sierras de Córdoba. (The "Alfajores & Medialunas" shirt is a non-negotiable uniform for Argentine site visits.)

When I'm not travelling, I am working on renovating a property in Argentina with a hotel that has been in the family for three generations.

This restoration is more than a passion project; it is a deep dive into the Argentine hospitality industry. By managing a historic property, I navigate the same local bureaucracy, logistics, and supply chains that I write about, ensuring my travel advice is grounded in the true grit and reality of daily life here.

Our family currently splits time between the Sierras of Cordoba in Argentina and the Rocky Mountains in Canada, where mountain life feels surprisingly familiar to Patagonia.

Welcome. My approach to travel is shaped by my Argentine-Peruvian heritage and a deep desire to connect you with the authentic soul of the country—far beyond the standard tourist trail. (Embracing tradition in San Antonio de Areco.)

Why Che Argentina Travel?

I created Che Argentina Travel to help you, fellow traveller, plan your dream trip to Argentina! I am passionate about travel in Argentina and want to help you discover every corner of this wonderfully diverse country. 

Whether it's your first time here or you're back for more, I hope to help you uncover new destinations and experiences. The goal is to help you experience Argentina beyond the surface with honest guidance built from years of personal exploration.

This site is here to help you plan realistic itineraries, understand logistics before you arrive, discover places beyond the obvious highlights, travel confidently and responsibly, and fall in love with Argentina the way I have.

Che Argentina Travel covers all regions in Argentina: Buenos Aires, Córdoba, Litoral, Cuyo, Northwest, and Patagonia. I am currently undertaking Project 23: a mission to document every single province in Argentina and explore every national park. That means new destinations are constantly being added to this website.

Project 23 is far more than a checklist; it’s a personal mission to explore every corner of this country I call home. My goal is to take you beyond the typical places and shine a light on the hidden magic found in all 23 provinces, creating a resource that celebrates the entirety of Argentina.

Every guide on Che Argentina Travel is built from real experience. I visit destinations personally before writing about them. I test accommodations, transport routes, restaurants, tours, and hikes whenever possible. I verify information with official providers when firsthand testing isn’t possible. I update content as conditions change. And I clearly distinguish between personal experience and researched information.

As for the name, 'che' is an Argentine expression that makes its way into almost every conversation. It could be used to grab someone's attention, to emphasize something, or even as a filler.

From the emerging wine regions of Patagonia to global destinations, our work spans across the entire Samuel & Audrey Media Network. This shot captures a moment of blissful wine tourism research in Trevelin, Chubut.

Where else can you find us?

Before I started writing about Argentina, I spent over a decade backpacking the globe and visited 75+ countries. That adventure is chronicled on That Backpacker.

If you enjoy travel and spend any time on YouTube, it's likely you've watched one of the thousands of videos Samuel and I have filmed over the years. We run two channels: Samuel and Audrey (English) and Samuel y Audrey (Spanish), where we publish practical travel guides and share travel advice after more than a decade on the road.

As for Samuel, you can find him writing about our travels on Nomadic Samuel and disrupting the investing world with his unique ideas at Picture Perfect Portfolios. 

Participating in local traditions is a core part of my research. Whether it’s trying my hand at fly fishing at Estancia Tecka or navigating remote Patagonian trails, I personally test the experiences I recommend to ensure your logistics are seamless.

Local Argentina Features

Over time we've received distinguished local press and media coverage for our travels across Argentina and hotel project in Cordoba:

Vía País: Los youtubers Samuel y Audrey llegaron a Córdoba para renovar una casa de la familia de ella

ADNSUR: Dos YouTubers canadienses visitaron Comodoro: qué impresión se llevaron

Diario Necochea: Volvió a Necochea tras 55 años y recordó su infancia: ¿qué cambios vio en la ciudad?

Cholila Online: Los Youtubers canadienses ahora visitaron Rada Tilly: quedaron maravillados con su playa y “las mansiones”

Memo: El análisis de los precios del vino de un argentino instalado en Canadá

Diario UNO: Pocos viajeros por Semana Santa con destinos nacionales

ADNSUR: Después de recorrer Comodoro, los YouTubers canadienses visitaron Rada Tilly

El Comodorense: Dos reconocidos Youtubers canadienses visitaron Comodoro: qué opinan de la comida, clima, precios y museos

Ecos Diarios: Volvió a Necochea después de 55 años y lo abordaron los recuerdos de una vida de migración y lucha

On the road: Taking a moment to soak in the surroundings along Patagonia's famous 'Ruta de los Siete Lagos.' This drive is essential for any Argentine itinerary.

Global Travel Footprint

Our travel campaigns have been recognized as a 2x World Travel Awards Winner and we've also been featured in National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com and JR Pass. Over 15+ years we've generated over 250 million views and 800,000 subscribers across all platforms. We've attended prestigious travel events such as the White House Travel Blogger Summit, the Social Travel Summit and Traverse Events as thought leaders and panelists. Additionally, we've strategically partnered with major bands such as Lenovo, Google, TripAdvisor, Expedia and Viator and had the pleasure of working on multiple campaigns with Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board and Tourism Nova Scotia.

#### Samuel Jeffery | Investment Strategist & Portfolio Architect | Picture Perfect Portfolios
Definition: Picture-Perfect (adjective: NORTH AMERICAN)Meaning: lacking in defects or flaws; ideal."a picture-perfect summer day" or "a picture-perfect portfolio"

Defining the Ideal: This vintage illustration captures the essence of our mission. Just as one imagines a flawless summer day, we utilize rigorous research and data to construct "Picture-Perfect Portfolios"—investment strategies designed to be robust, efficient, and ideally aligned with your financial goals.

Welcome to Picture Perfect Portfolios.

I am Samuel Jeffery, an investment strategist, media publisher, and quantitative researcher. While I spent over 15 years building the Samuel & Audrey Media Network into a global authority, my focus today is the systematic engineering of asset allocation and expanded canvas portfolio design.

This site is the dedicated home for sophisticated DIY investors who have moved beyond standard "60/40" advice. It is for those who demand structural alpha, capital efficiency, and true diversification supported by institutional-grade rigor.

A Global Perspective: Before founding Picture Perfect Portfolios, my years traveling as "Nomadic Samuel" (pictured here in the German Alps) shaped my investment worldview. Understanding different cultures and economies firsthand is crucial to developing truly diversified, global macro strategies.

From Global Nomad to Quantitative Strategist

For over a decade, I operated as a digital nomad, managing some of the world's most successful travel media properties. When the global shifts of 2020 paused the travel industry, I applied the same obsessive rigor that built my media business to the world of quantitative finance. I treated white papers like maps and historical drawdowns like terrain.

What started as personal research evolved into Picture Perfect Portfolios. Today, I bridge the gap between "institutional" strategies—like Risk Parity and Managed Futures—and the modern brokerage account. My research on systematic investing and asset allocation has been featured on premier platforms including Nasdaq and Investing.com.

My brain is now a competitive landscape of concepts like Factor Investing, Return Stacking, and Trend Following.

Why I invest like a paranoid prepper (The Origin Story)

Most investment philosophies are born in an MBA classroom or a high-rise in Manhattan. Mine was born in a logging town that evaporated overnight and a country where prices change while you’re standing in line to pay for them.

Lesson 1: Gold River & The "All-In" Trap

I grew up in Gold River, British Columbia. In the 80s, it was a booming small-town built on pulp and paper. We had it all. And then, in the late 90s, the mill shut down. Boom. Gone. The town didn't just enter a recession; it practically turned into a ghost town overnight.

I learned about "Single Asset Concentration Risk" watching my hometown’s economy flatline because it was more or less 100% dependent on one commodity industry. While other kids were learning to ride bikes, I was subconsciously learning that "putting all your eggs in one basket is a really stupid idea."

That is why I don't trust the standard "100% Stocks" advice. I've seen what happens when the one thing you rely on stops working. It ain't pretty.

Lesson 2: Argentina & The Illusion of Cash

Fast forward to today. I split my time living in Argentina, a beautiful country with an economy that has absolutely zero chill. Living here has taught me that inflation isn't a theory; it's a lifestyle. I have watched prices triple in a month. Restaurants have price stickers on their menu. I have seen the purchasing power of cash dissolve faster than dulce de leche helado on a sidewalk in Buenos Aires.

So, when I talk about Managed Futures, Gold, and Trend Following, I’m not trying to sound fancy or impress the "FinTwit" crowd.

I talk about them because I am a financial survivalist at heart. I build portfolios that can survive a Gold River-style bust and an Argentina-style inflation spike. I want a portfolio that makes money when the world is normal, but keeps me safe when things go sideways.

This retro-styled infographic outlines the six key areas driving portfolio construction at Picture Perfect Portfolios: Equity Optimization, True Diversification, Capital Efficiency through Expanding the Canvas, Contrarian thinking, comprehensive Alternative Investments, and Defensive Asset Allocation.

Current Areas of Research

Currently, I am focused on six key pillars of portfolio construction:

1) Equity Optimization Moving beyond market-cap weighting to utilize factors like Value, Momentum, Min Vol and Quality that historically outperform the S&P 500 over long time horizons.

2) True Diversification Building portfolios that are maximally diversified across asset classes (Stocks, Bonds, Commodities, Systematic Alts, Uncorrelated Alternatives) and geographies.

3) Capital Efficiency (Leverage) Exploring how expanding the canvas (modest leverage) can improve Sharpe Ratios by allowing us to return stack uncorrelated assets on top of each other, rather than choosing one over the other.

4) Contrarianism Skating to where the puck is going. If a portfolio looks exactly like the herd (60/40), it will yield herd-like results. We aim for better.

5) Alternative Investments Incorporating Managed Futures, Long-Short strategies, Merger-Arbitrage, Style Premia, Gold, Crypto, M/N, Anti-beta, OTM Puts and Real Assets to create an "All Weather" defense.

6) Defensive Asset Allocation: Prioritizing the optimization of Sharpe, Sortino, and MAR ratios to manage drawdowns as aggressively as we pursue growth.

Our proprietary decision tree for evaluating investment strategies. We prioritize Capital Efficiency (expanding the canvas) as the foundation, followed by Maximum Diversification (incorporating uncorrelated alternatives), and finally Strategy Optimization (applying factor tilts like value and momentum).

The Strategy: The 1-2-3 Allocation Framework

While many investors begin their journey by picking individual stocks or sectors, I believe in a more rigorous, top-down + bottom-up hierarchy. At Picture Perfect Portfolios, I utilize a specific "Decision Tree" to evaluate every fund and strategy that enters the conversation.

The Hierarchy of Priorities

Capital Efficiency (The Foundation): We first ask, "Is the fund expanding our canvas?" We prioritize strategies that provide stacked exposure, allowing us to hold more uncorrelated assets than a traditional 100% equity or bond fund would permit.

Maximum Diversification (The Shield): Once efficiency is established, we look for strategy-level diversification. We prioritize portfolios that blend uncorrelated return streams—such as Trend Following and Real Assets—over those concentrated in a single asset class.

Optimization (The Edge): Only after the portfolio is efficient and truly diversified do we apply research-supported tilts, such as Value or Momentum, to enhance long-term performance.

Applying the Framework: GDE vs. AVGV

This framework allows us to make objective decisions in complex "Apples to Oranges" scenarios. For example, comparing a global value fund (AVGV) with an equity-plus-gold fund (GDE):

AVGV scores high on Diversification (Global) and Optimization (Value factor).

GDE scores lower on those specific metrics but is superior in Capital Efficiency ($90/90$ exposure).

Because Capital Efficiency is our #1 priority, the framework favors GDE. It provides an "Expanded Canvas" that a standard long-only equity fund cannot match. Our ultimate goal is the "Sayonara Fund"—a hypothetical vehicle that combines the optimization of AVGV with the efficiency of GDE. This does not exist yet. We're still dipping our toes in beta + something else from an ETF/mutual fund standpoint. 

The Art of the Expanded Canvas: Visualizing the core methodology of Picture Perfect Portfolios. By applying capital efficiency, we expand the investment "canvas" beyond traditional stocks and bonds to include a robust set of uncorrelated alternative investments.

Pioneering the "Unicorn" Research Space

I founded Picture Perfect Portfolios to fill a void in the retail investment landscape. At the time, the site was a "unicorn"—the only destination providing institutional-level deep dives (with travel narrative grade writing and creativity) into sophisticated, capital-efficient funds like BLNDX and UPAR and alternatives such as BOXX and CAOS for DIY investors.

This rigorous research led to the creation of the term "Expanded Canvas Portfolios." This concept describes the shift from limited 2D asset allocation to 3D capital efficiency and has since become a recognized framework within the finance community.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wEwePvQbU_U

Institutional & Peer Recognition

Beyond the retail landscape, my research has gained some serious traction within the institutional investment community. I’ve had the pleasure of seeing my portfolio ideas discussed on the Excess Returns Podcast and recognized as a recommended resource by Moontower (Kris Abdelmessih).

My work is frequently cited or featured by the real "smart folks" in the systematic and quantitative space, including Mount Lucas, Alpha Architect, Convexity Maven, Accelerate and Standpoint Funds (Eric Crittenden).

Getting the nod from these institutional heavyweights is basically a "clinical" gold star for my data-driven obsession—proof that these strategies have some serious teeth, even if they were born in a carry-on suitcase.

The Operator in Practice: I am not just an investment theorist; I am an active operator. This infographic maps out my diversified portfolio of real-world assets, ranging from our global media properties like Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker to physical real estate projects like Che Argentina and our current hotel renovation in Córdoba.

The Operator: Real World Asset Management

Along with my wife, Audrey Bergner, I have spent the last 15 years building the Samuel & Audrey Media Network into a global travel publishing powerhouse. Together, we have reached over 250 million viewers across our English and Spanish YouTube channels and collaborated on award-winning strategic campaigns for industry giants like Google, Visit Britain, and Lenovo.

Nomadic Samuel & That Backpacker: Our flagship travel media properties where we've partnered with major global brands and participated in award winning campaigns.

Samuel and Audrey (YouTube) & Samuel and Audrey (Facebook): Our primary broadcast channels documenting our travel, lifestyle, and business projects to a global audience.

Samuel y Audrey (YouTube): Our Spanish-language channel documenting our life in Argentina/Canada, real estate projects and travel abroad.

Che Argentina: Our flagship boutique travel and real estate project focused on high-end Patagonia and Estancia travel experiences, authored by my wife Audrey—a Peruvian-Argentine native who is currently leading our hotel renovation project in Córdoba.

As a member of the elite professional organization iAmbassador, our joint work has been recognized by National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com and the Huffington Post. Our shared journey has seen us invited as thought leaders and panelists to the White House, The Social Travel Summit, and Traverse, ultimately earning 2X World Travel Awards for "Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign". Our portfolio of strategic partnerships reads like a Who's Who of the travel industry. We have collaborated on high-impact campaigns with global tech leaders (Google, Lenovo), major OTAs (Expedia, TripAdvisor, Viator), and premier destination management organizations, including Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board, and Tourism Nova Scotia. You can view our 15+ verified history over at our Authority Ledger, Picture Perfect Portfolios Financial Ledger & Grokipedia citations.

Today, I bring the same level of professional rigor and systematic strategy that built our media empire to the world of quantitative finance. At Picture Perfect Portfolios, I provide data-driven insights and sophisticated asset allocation models for investors who demand the same excellence we've delivered for over a decade in the global media landscape.

#### About Audrey Bergner: Founder of That Backpacker
I’m Audrey, the Founder and Travel Writer behind That Backpacker. Over the past 15 years, I’ve travelled through 75+ countries, chasing the kind of trips that revolve around great food, unique stays, and one-of-a-kind experiences worth seeking out. If you want destination guides that are warm, realistic, and actually useful (with a side of culinary curiosity), you’re in the right place.

Chasing unique experiences for 15+ years: Exploring the remote magic of Rapa Nui (Easter Island).

The "By the Numbers" Counter

15+ Years of professional publishing and travel writing

75+ Countries visited and many multiple times

800k+ Subscribers across our YouTube channels

250 Million+ Views across our media network

2 Home Bases between the Sierras of Córdoba in Argentina and the Rocky Mountains of Alberta, Canada.

1 Boutique Hotel currently under restoration in Argentina.

Audrey boarding the historic 1922 steam-powered La Trochita in Esquel. Navigating the logistics of the Old Patagonian Express is a highlight for any traveler exploring the rugged interiors of Chubut province.

What you’ll find on That Backpacker

This site is built for travellers who want their adventures to feel exciting, doable, and well-planned.

Here you’ll find:

Practical destination guides with the logistics people always forget to mention

Itineraries that help you plan your days without planning your personality out of the trip

Budget tips (and “worth it” splurges) so you can spend where it matters to you

Travel know-how on transportation, accommodation, timing, mistakes to avoid, and what I’d do differently next time

The kind of advice you’d want from a friend who’s already figured it out the hard way

If you’re the type who likes to know what to pack, how to get there, what it costs, and whether something is actually worth your time…you’re in the right place.

Finding a moment of stillness at Estancia Arroyo Verde. Staying at an authentic Argentine estancia offers more than luxury; it provides a direct connection to the pioneer history and landscape of the Traful River region.

Where else can you find me?

I run Che Argentina Travel, where you can expect a deep dive into all things related to travel in Argentina. I cover things like estancia stays, boutique hotels and Patagonian adventures. I grew up in Argentina, have travelled the length of the country multiple times as an adult, and I also call the Sierras of Cordoba home for half the year. That means I'm able to bring you an insider perspective and share real-life advice that has been tried and tested.

You might also see me make an appearance on Nomadic Samuel, where my husband covers our adventures around the globe, travelling with our daughter. And when he's not writing about travel, Samuel runs Picture Perfect Portfolios, an investing site focused on systematic asset allocation and capital efficiency.

Together, we run multiple YouTube channels, including Samuel and Audrey (English) & Samuel y Audrey (Spanish), where we've been documenting our travels and sharing practical advice for well over a decade. Meanwhile, on Building a Life in Argentina, we are chronicling the renovation of a mountain hotel, rural living and sharing our insights about everyday life in Argentina.

Our travel work has earned us global recognition, including being named a two-time World Travel Awards winner. We've been featured in National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com, JR Pass, Vía País, Cholila Online and the Huffington Post. Over the past 15+ years, we’ve reached more than 250 million views and grown a community of 800,000+ subscribers across our platforms. 

We’ve also been invited to speak and share insights at leading industry events like the White House Travel Blogger Summit, the Social Travel Summit, and Traverse, participating as panelists and thought leaders. Along the way, we’ve collaborated with major brands such as Lenovo, Google, TripAdvisor, and Viator, and partnered on multiple destination campaigns with professional organizations like Visit Britain, the German National Tourism Board, and Tourism Nova Scotia.

#### About Samuel Jeffery: Global Media Founder & Travel Strategist
Howdy ya'll, I’m Samuel Jeffery!

I’m from the small village of Gold River on Vancouver Island, British Columbia — the kind of place where “big city” means you found a second grocery store and an actual stoplight. From those humble origins, I’ve somehow ended up exploring 75+ countries with my wife, Audrey Bergner, building a life that’s equal parts travel, storytelling, renovations and “how did this become our normal?”

Fernie, British Columbia at Island Lake Lodge, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner enjoy a memorable family hiking day, smiling on a scenic lakeside trail while carrying baby Aurelia in a backpack carrier, surrounded by towering evergreens and calm mountain waters.

Nomadic Samuel started as a scrappy travel diary (before travel blogging was a profession) and grew into a full-blown travel publishing universe — with blogs, videos, niche side projects, and (because we like the pain game) a massive renovation project in Argentina. 

https://youtu.be/FhRUiS7Q_nM

And somewhere along the way, the vibe stayed consistent:

We go far. We go deep. We go remote. We eat way too much. We hike it off. Repeat.

Trevelin, Patagonia, Argentina at a cozy countryside restaurant, where Nomadic Samuel enjoys the good life with a glass of wine and a hearty bowl of pasta, savoring local food, relaxed mountain views, and slow-travel vibes in Chubut.

At a glance

TopicThe quick versionFromGold River, Vancouver Island, BC 🇨🇦 Travel experience75+ countries (and still hungry for more) Nomadic Samuel What we makeTravel guides, city guides, food guides, hiking guides, and travel videosOur vibePractical + personal + occasionally unhinged (in a helpful way)Where we baseSouth Alberta + Sierras de Córdoba — half the year each (Canada: May - October & Argentina: November - April)Current “plot twist”Fixing up a neglected family property in Argentina with a hotel + houses & traveling around Canada, Argentina & Japan as much as possible with our daughter AureliaSmall obsessionCollecting/hoarding quirky hats instead of typical “stuff”

Southeast Asia in the halcyon backpacking era, where a young Nomadic Samuel sits on ancient temple steps with his backpack, embracing pre-smartphone travel, dusty adventures, and the early days that inspired Nomadic Samuel’s journey.

The Internet Café Era

Before blogging was a “thing,” I was already a backpacker — and I mean the pre-smartphone, pre-influencer, pre-everyone-has-a-drone era mid to late 2000s era. I did massive shoestring trips across Southeast Asia and South America, popping into internet cafés once a week to email my family the classic update: “Still alive. Barely. Love you. Funds runnin' low. Headin' home soon.”

I loved the dusty-trail approach: show up in a destination, find accommodation boots on the ground, haggle, get lost, get found, repeat. Adventures, misadventures, and the occasional “this seemed like a really good idea merely 20 minutes ago” types of decisions. For me, that was the golden era of backpacking. 

Also, if you’ve never written down hostel directions on a crumpled receipt and then trusted your entire evening to that receipt… you've missed an important life experience.

George Town, Penang, Malaysia — Nomadic Samuel standing with a fully loaded backpack in a humble guesthouse room, the moment where a love for long-term travel sparked the creation of NomadicSamuel.com and a life of global adventures began.

The birth of Nomadic Samuel: Penang, sweat, and questionable life choices

Nomadic Samuel officially began in an attic guesthouse in Georgetown, Penang, Malaysia.

Picture it:

No windows

No A/C

A “death fan” doing its best

Me sweating profusely

And breaking my site multiple times over because I had absolutely no freakin' idea what I was doing

This site (and honestly, most of our projects) almost didn’t even make it off the ground. It took perseverance, learning things the hard way, and the occasional cold shower reset to keep things in motion.

And yes, Penang will always have a special place in my heart because it wasn’t just “where the site started.” It was where I learned the foundational travel-creator skill:

Try something. Break it. Fix it. Do it again, but slightly less disastrously.

(Also, Penang food is powerful enough to influence major life decisions. More on that later.)

South Korea during our English-teaching era, where a young Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner take a playful selfie beneath bright hanging lanterns, marking the very beginning of our travel and storytelling journey together.

South Korea: teaching English and accidentally meeting my future wife (AKA travel partner in crime)

I taught English in South Korea for several years, and that’s where I met Audrey.

And yes, our origin story is peak early-travel-blog internet at its finest:

It started as an innocent link exchange between Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker… and then it spiralled into a relationship, marriage, and a shared life built almost exclusively around travel. Audrey was also teaching English in Korea at the time.

We basically got engaged by SEO.

And if you’re wondering what our first “date-night” conversations sounded like… imagine two people who genuinely thought “this permalink structure is terrible” counts as flirting. Nah. Actually, we wandered all over Itaewon chowing down on Indian buffet and trying to find a used bookstore that had switched locations. 

Noboribetsu, Hokkaido, Japan, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner immerse themselves in Japanese culture by wearing traditional yukata robes inside a cozy ryokan room, smiling during an onsen stay that deepened our love for slow travel in northern Japan.

Our travel style: from “hit every city” to going deeper

When we first hit the road together, we were big-time budget backpackers galavanting across Southeast Asia, Europe, and South America like there was no tomorrow. Big cities. Fast pace. Constant movement. Wake-up and have no freakin' clue where you are. Yep. We did that. And not for a short time. Years on end in the 2010s. What an experience it was.

Over the years, our travel style has definitely evolved and it got better.

Now we go slower and more intentional:

We love small towns and quirky off-the-beaten-path destinations

We go deeper instead of wider

We’ll spend months in one country rather than hopping around like caffeinated fiends with no plan

If you’re the kind of traveler who cares about the fabric of a place, not just the highlight reel, you’ll feel at home here.

Berchtesgaden, Bavaria in the German Alps, where Nomadic Samuel concentrates behind the camera filming travel footage on a rainy, moody day, showing the real behind-the-scenes work that goes into creating Samuel and Audrey travel videos.

Our “small places deserve big love” philosophy

Here’s a real example of how our brains work now:

We’re just as likely to be family trail hiking bums in a frontier BC border town like Fernie as we are to be zigzaggin' and zippin' around Vancouver. And in Patagonia? A remote, off-the-beaten-path Welsh town like Trevelin turns our crank more than tango shows and fancy steakhouses in Buenos Aires. That's the honest truth.

We go far, deep, and often remote because… we’re both from teeny tiny places ourselves. Gold River. Villa Berna. Those are our respective roots.

We truly believe tiny places deserve a spot on the map, a proper guide, and a spotlight that isn’t just “drive through quickly on your way to the more 'famous thing.'”

https://youtu.be/ROfGJxOKYbE

What you’ll find on NomadicSamuel.com

Nomadic Samuel is built for travelers who want trips that feel real and are easier to plan.

Expect:

Practical travel guides (logistics, timing, costs, what’s actually worth it)

City guides that help you get oriented fast

Detailed multi-day itineraries (with built in flexibility: hardcore hikers, foodies, family-focused, culture vultures...we've got ya covered)

Food guides for people who literally plan their day around meals (we don't just see you...we are just like you)

Hiking guides that don’t pretend weather is a minor detail

Itineraries that are ambitious but not delusional (where flexibility + downtime is a crucial component)

Banff, Alberta in the Canadian Rockies, where Nomadic Samuel embraces his inner mountain man wearing a cowboy hat at a dramatic alpine viewpoint, celebrating rugged landscapes, fresh air, and his love for mountain adventures over beach travel.

A few things we unapologetically lean in to

Mountains over beaches (we like the drama of peaks and weather systems with personality

Being outdoors (hiking, viewpoints, lakes, forests)

Soft adventures like kayaking and canoeing rather than dangling off a rope with our life on the line

Food that makes you go quiet for a second because your brain is malfunctioning by processing just how good it is

If you want…Start hereDeep destination planningOur long-form travel guides + itinerariesFood-first travelOur restaurant and café guides“Earn dinner” energyOur hiking and outdoors guidesSee it in motionOur travel videos (English: Samuel & Audrey + Spanish: Samuel y Audrey) 

Lake Titicaca, Peru, where Nomadic Samuel films travel footage on a boat while Audrey Bergner records behind him, showing the real behind-the-scenes teamwork that goes into creating videos for the Samuel and Audrey YouTube channel.

YouTube: where we learned to stop being awkward on camera (nah, actually we still are)

We’ve built a massive audience across platforms, and YouTube became a major part of our story.

We’re approaching one million combined subscribers + over 250 million views across our English and Spanish channels (Samuel and Audrey + Samuel y Audrey).

And when we first started filming? Awkward AF. We barely knew how to turn on the camera, felt super shy speaking in public, and our early gear had the stabilization and audio quality of a wiggly-wobbly shopping cart on gravel.

But we stuck with it and now we’re creating travel guides and videos that can and do outperform the so-called giants of the travel industry. It’s proof that passion + repetition + showing up consistently can lead to great things.

And yes, we’ve racked up hundreds of millions of lifetime views, which still feels mildly fake sometimes, like YouTube accidentally put a few extra zeros in the wrong place and no one has quite noticed just yet. But, we'll gladly take it. And keep going.

El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina on the Laguna Torre hike, where Audrey Bergner poses on a rocky outcrop with snowcapped Fitz Roy peaks and glaciers in the background, highlighting her work building Che Argentina Travel and deep Argentina travel knowledge.

We’re not one-trick ponies

Alongside our main travel sites, we’ve each built several niche projects.

That Backpacker (Audrey) — travel writing and destination guides around the world (75+ countries) and local (Canada and Argentina) with Audrey’s signature voice

Che Argentina Travel (Audrey) — a travel-focused niche site specializing in all-things Argentina from the perspective of a local award winning travel media specialist targeting project 23 (visiting all 23 Argentine provines)

Picture Perfect Portfolios (me) — investing from the perspective of an informed amateur: creative asset allocation, alternative investments, trend-following, return stacking, expanded canvas portfolios, and original portfolio ideas

In other words: we’ve kinda accidentally built ourselves a lil' travel-media empire over the years. Yes, we’re veterans now in the industry (time really does fly)… but we’re also always ever-evolving.

Banff in the Canadian Rocky Mountains, where Nomadic Samuel stands beside a vivid turquoise alpine lake with camera in hand, surrounded by evergreen forest and rugged peaks, capturing the outdoor photography moments that define his travel style.

Our current focus: the places we keep coming back to

Even though we’ve traveled widely, our content focus today is more intentional:

Canada (especially Alberta and British Columbia family road trips — proud BC born and bred boy energy over here)

Argentina (where we renovate a property and slowly travel around the entire country documenting our entire journey)

Plus repeat-return favourites like Japan, South Korea, Peru, and Germany. 

El Bolsón, Patagonia, Argentina, where Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner prepare an asado outdoors, grilling traditional Argentine barbecue parrilla, raising glasses of Malbec red wine and plating meat in a relaxed backyard slow-travel moment.

The food situation (it’s serious)

We’re foodies through and through. I kid not… I will eat my way into accidental weight gain on trips and then rationalize it as “cultural research.”

We have done actual travel decisions based on food.

We have done visa runs (Penang is a prime example) where the quiet part of the plan was:

dim sum

Indian food

laksa

and an overall dedication to “eat all the things we’ve been thinking about for months”

Sierras de Córdoba, Argentina, where Audrey Bergner stands inside our partially demolished family property, smiling with raised hands as we tackle a major renovation project, restoring a neglected mountain home one chaotic step at a time.

Where we live now: two hemispheres, one chaotic calendar

We’re based in South Alberta (Canada) and the Sierras de Córdoba (Argentina) for half the year each. Basically maximizing the two hemispheres like seasonal migratory eccentrics with too much camera gear.

From November to April, we’re in Argentina working on a major “fix up the neglected property” project: a family property with a hotel and a few houses and traveling to all 23 provinces (project 23). From May to the end of October, we’re in Canada during the nicest months where we're roading tripping as a family across Alberta and British Columbia. Basically, ciao, to 6-months of Canadian winter and perpetual snow shovelin'.

This schedule sounds tidy on paper and then reality shows up like:

“Surprise! A repair.”

“Surprise! A storm.”

“Surprise! It’s video editing season.”

“Surprise! The thing you fixed is now broken again.”

(We’re learning. Constantly.)

Puerto Madero, Buenos Aires, Argentina, where Audrey Bergner kisses her baby Aurelia on a park bench in a leafy playground, capturing a gentle family travel moment while exploring the waterfront district during a relaxed afternoon in the city.

Meet our tiniest travel companion: Aurelia

We added a full little travel buddy to the mix: Aurelia, our daughter. She’s got itchy feet whether she asked for them or not.

Already she’s been to Canada, the US, Argentina, and Peru — including multiple flights, cruises, and overnight buses. She’s such a trouper. Honestly, she’s ridiculously easy to take places (which feels like cheating, but we’ll take it).

And yes, traveling with a kid changes you, mostly by forcing you to slow down, notice the small stuff, and accept that snacks are no longer a “nice-to-have,” they are a full-throttle logistics requirement.

Lago Puelo, Chubut, Patagonia, Argentina, where Nomadic Samuel stands on a rocky shoreline in a beret, surrounded by vivid blue lake waters and dramatic mountain peaks, capturing the feeling of remote, off-the-beaten-path travel in southern Patagonia.

Why you can trust our guides

I take travel content seriously because travel advice online can be chaotic, outdated, or written by someone who hasn’t been there since the Blackberry era.

Here’s how we try to do it differently:

First-hand experience: we write from places we’ve actually been and things we’ve actually done along with well-researched posts related to topics/experiences involving tours/hotels 

Practical details: logistics, timing, expectations, and the nitty-oh-so-gritty stuff you only learn by doing it

Honesty about tradeoffs: time vs money, comfort vs adventure, crowds vs solitude

Ongoing evolution: the way we travel (and write) keeps leveling up IMO

Also: I’m not here to sell you the fantasy version of travel. I’m here to help you plan the real version — the one where the views are incredible, the food is memorable, and something goes slightly sideways at least once or twice or thrice (because that’s tradition).

Kitzbühel, Austria — Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner join fellow travel creators at the Social Travel Summit, a leading professional conference for travel bloggers, content creators, and tourism boards. This networking event brought together international storytellers inside a stylish alpine hotel lounge to share ideas, build partnerships, and shape the future of travel media.

Featured, invited, and occasionally let into rooms with name badges

Over the years, our work has been featured in The Huffington Post, National Geographic, Rode, Peru.com, JR Pass, Nasdaq, Investing and various publications in Argentina such as Vía País, Adnsur, Diario Necochea, Cholila Online, Memo, Diario Uno, Adnsur, El Comodorense and Ecos Diarios and Peru such as Peru.com and Notiviajeros.

We’ve also been invited as thought leaders, speakers and/or panelists to professional travel conferences like The Social Travel Summit, TravelCon, Traverse and the White House Travel Blogger Summit as professional creators in the industry.

Beyond travel media, I'm also a recognized authority in quantitative finance. My insights on systematic asset allocation and portfolio design on Picture Perfect Portfolios have been featured on Nasdaq, Investing.com & Grokipedia bridging the gap between global movement and institutional-grade financial strategy. Applying the same risk management I learned in 75 countries to portfolio construction.

Nomadic Samuel Jeffery invited as a featured guest and hosted creator at TravelCon in Tucson, Arizona—the premier conference for travel influencers and digital media publishers.

Professional network and campaigns

We’re exclusive members of professional travel blogging organization iAmbassador. 

Award-winning campaigns we've been a part of:

Northern Ireland — Nomadic Samuel embraces his inner fantasy hero while wielding a sword in full Game of Thrones-style costume during a filming experience for the award-winning 24 Hours in the UK campaign by iAmbassador, blending travel storytelling, creative campaigns, and a healthy dose of playful adventure.

🔹 24 Hours in the UK — A 24-hour, multi-creator campaign developed with VisitBritain that highlighted amazing experiences across England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. Creators produced content every hour of the day, resulting in 32 videos and millions of impressions, and the project went on to win the World Travel Award for Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign (2018).

Bergamo, Italy — Audrey Bergner and Nomadic Samuel join fellow travel bloggers dressed in Renaissance-style costumes during the award-winning BlogVille campaign by iAmbassador, posing inside a historic Italian courtyard. This creative tourism project blended heritage storytelling, immersive experiences, and travel media collaboration in one unforgettable campaign.

🔹 BlogVille (Emilia-Romagna) — A pioneering concept created with the Emilia-Romagna tourism board where travel bloggers lived in an apartment in Bologna and explored the region like locals. Over time, the project generated 1,200+ blog posts, reached millions on social media, and earned industry recognition for its impact.

Costa Brava, Spain — Audrey Bergner and a group of travel creators celebrate inside traditional wine barrels as part of the award-winning #EuroFoodTrip campaign by iAmbassador, a collaborative storytelling project that blended food, culture, and creative travel content across Europe.

🔹 #EuroFoodTrip — A collaborative effort between Costa Brava Pirineu de Girona (Spain) and Apt Servizi Emilia-Romagna (Italy), awarded Europe’s Leading Marketing Campaign (2017) for its creative cross-destination storytelling.

Brand partners

Lenovo

Google

Merrell

Tripadvisor

Viator

Tourism boards & destination partners

Germany 

Visit Britain

Scotland

Nova Scotia

Finland

Quebec

Kyrgyzstan in a cozy guesthouse room, where Nomadic Samuel sits cross-legged on a bed working on a laptop while wearing a traditional Kyrgyz felt hat, framed by ornate carpets and textiles that capture an early digital-nomad travel era.

The personal philosophy (and the hats)

I’ve always been more interested in collecting experiences (and yes, quirky hats I can actually wear and hang back home) than chasing the standard white-picket-fence path of massive mortgage + wage slave until ya croak + keepin' up the Joneses mantra.

Travel IMO keeps life from shrinking. It forces you to pay attention again. Food tastes louder. Neighbourhoods have personality. Weather becomes an active character in your storyline. And you learn that confidence is often just doing the thing even when you feel underqualified.

We do go slower now. We do have bases. But we're still adventurous.

Which is basically the entire origin story of this site.

And the hats?

They’re wearable memories. They’re conversation starters. They’re also a great way to look like you’re either:

a local

a cowboy/gaucho

a nomad

a fisherman

or someone who definitely knows where the best bakery is

All five are acceptable outcomes.

London, England on the River Thames, where a group of travel creators and Audrey Bergner are in red jackets waving from a speedboat during a high-energy tourism campaign, showcasing professional content creation and collaborative travel storytelling in the heart of the city.

Work with us

We collaborate with brands, tourism boards, and travel organizations when it’s a strong fit for our audience and style. You can view our entire 15+ history by checking out our Samuel & Audrey Authority Ledger.

Good fits include:

Travel campaigns that value storytelling and practical planning

Food-forward travel coverage

Hiking/outdoors trips where we actually hit the trail

Video + blog deliverables designed to keep performing long after the campaign ends

If you’d like to work with us, reach out with:

the destination/product

timeline

deliverables you have in mind

what success looks like for you

Miraflores, Lima, Peru, where Nomadic Samuel with a backpack gives a thumbs up from a cliffside balcony overlooking the Pacific Ocean, beach promenade, and rolling waves, capturing an early travel moment exploring the city’s famous coastal district.

FAQ: Nomadic Samuel, our travel style, and what we actually do all day

How did Nomadic Samuel start?

In an attic guesthouse in Georgetown, Penang, Malaysia. No windows, no A/C, and a whole lot of trial-and-error while I repeatedly broke my site.

Were you really backpacking before blogging was a thing?

Yep. I was doing long shoestring trips across Southeast Asia and South America, popping into internet cafés once a week to email my folks that I was still alive. Yep. I'm an OG in this space. Conversely, I'm just gettin' old. 

How did you and Audrey meet?

We both taught English in South Korea, and we originally connected through a link exchange between Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker… which escalated into real life (in the best possible way). We've traveled, gone back to school, lived abroad and now are renovating a hotel together. What a life it has been together so far. 

What’s your travel style now?

Slower and deeper. We still love big highlights, but we’re happiest spending longer in fewer places, finding small unheard of towns, and letting a destination “click” instead of racing through it. 

What kinds of places get you most excited?

Underrated small towns, remote corners, and places that feel real instead of curated. We love destinations that have personality, true grit, and quirky stories.

Are you beach people?

Heck, no. Not at all. Especially me.  Mountains FTW. Forests FTW. Lakes FTW. Less peeps FTW. Weather with attitude FTW.

Where do you live?

We split the year between South Alberta (Canada) and the Sierras de Córdoba (Argentina), lining things up so we’re in each place during its best seasons.

What’s the Argentina renovation project?

It’s a big “bring this place back to life” project on Audrey’s family property: a property with a hotel and a few houses that we’re actively fixing up while living there seasonally. It's always been Audrey's dream to do this. Now, we're actually putting things in motion. It's big. It's scary at times. But we're gettin' things done slowly and we'll see it through. 

Do you travel with your daughter?

Indeed,Aurelia has already been on flights, cruises, and overnight buses across Canada, the US, Argentina, and Peru. She’s a total trouper. This is just the beginning.

What YouTube channels do you run?

We run English and Spanish channels (Samuel and Audrey + Samuel y Audrey), and we’re approaching a million combined subscribers across them plus 250 million combined views. Not bad for folks who could barely find the 'on switch' when we first started.

Were you always confident on camera?

Heck, no. Not even close. Not by a long shot. Early days were awkward, the gear was rough, and the learning curve was steep, but we stuck with it and grew into our style over time. 

What other sites and projects do you run?

Beyond Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker, Audrey runs Che Argentina Travel, and I run Picture Perfect Portfolios (investing, portfolio ideas, and research from an informed amateur perspective).

Have you been featured in major publications?

Yes, our work has been featured in The Huffington Post, National Geographic, and various publications in Argentina. 

Are you part of any professional creator organizations?

Yes, we’re members of iAmbassador and have been part of award-winning campaigns listed in their case studies. 

Why the hats?

Because experiences are the point, and quirky hats are the most wearable souvenir on Earth. Also: they make great conversation starters and terrible packing decisions.

#### Che Argentina Travel Guide: Local Expertise & Itineraries For All 23 Provinces
URL: https://cheargentinatravel.com/

### Posts

#### What's the Best Tango Show in Buenos Aires?
Looking for the best tango show in Buenos Aires? We've got you covered with this list of tango performances ranging from small venues to grand stage productions!

Whenever family or friends visit Buenos Aires for the first time, I like to suggest going to a tango show as a welcome activity to the city. 

Tango is synonymous with Buenos Aires, after all, the dance was born around the 1880s in the port-side neighbourhoods along the Río de la Plata. Therefore, going to a show is a must-do activity!

But what's the best tango show in Buenos Aires, Argentina?

That depends entirely on what you're looking for because the options are endless! I have been to several different tango shows in Buenos Aires over the years, and each experience has been quite different.

Do you want to attend a show in a small, intimate venue or enjoy a grand stage production in a big theatre? 

Do you prefer a cabaret-style show or a performance that combines traditional tango with folklore? 

Do you just want to watch tango, or are you looking for a dinner and show combo?

What about an early tango show or one that also includes a tango lesson? These are all options!

I know choosing can be a little overwhelming, so I've narrowed down the top tango experiences in Buenos Aires for you. Each one offers something unique, and you're bound to have a good time! Now let's help you find the right one for your city itinerary.

My Top 3 Picks: Best Tango Show in Buenos Aires 

#1 Top Pick

⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️

La Ventana Tango Show

✅ Tango and folklore

✅ Historic venue

✅ Popular show

#2 Pick

Rojo Tango Show

✅ 1920s cabaret style

✅ Luxurious venue

✅ Small, intimate show

#3 Pick

El Aljibe Tango Show

✅ Early show

✅ Family-friendly

✅ Central location

The Best Tango Shows in Buenos Aires

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by La ventana Tango (@laventanatango.ba)

1. La Ventana Tango Show

Best tango and folklore show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

La Ventana Barrio de Tango is one of the more popular tango shows in Buenos Aires. The tango venue is set in a former conventillo, also known as a tenement, so it's a historic establishment that has been renovated to have an old-time feel with vaulted brick ceilings and stained glass windows.

Meanwhile, the stage has been set up to look like an old street in Buenos Aires from the turn of the 19th century.

This is one of my favourite tango shows in Buenos Aires, probably because it's the first one I ever went to, so I have very fond memories of it. I took my British friend to this show, and we even signed up to do a tango lesson before the performance.

Another cool thing about this particular tango show is that you'll get to see both tango and folklore on the stage, which I think is a nice introduction to Argentine gaucho culture, particularly if you're not planning to leave the city.

When it comes to booking this experience, you can opt for just the show or the dinner and show. The dinner is a 3-course meal featuring an entree, main dish and dessert.

"La Ventana Tango Show is a must-see for anyone looking to experience tango with a mix of folklore. The dancers were nothing short of phenomenal and the music performed live by an exceptional band enhanced the experience. The service was attentive and the atmosphere made it a memorable night out. We left with a deeper appreciation for the art form and a strong desire to return. Highly recommended!" -Paul

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Cena Show de Tango (@elviejoalmacentango)

2. El Viejo Almacén Tango Show

Best traditional tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 1.5 hours | ✅ Book it!

El Viejo Almacén is a tango show set in San Telmo, a bohemian neighbourhood that's worth exploring for its outdoor markets, street art and lively atmosphere.

The show is set in a historic venue that dates back to 1769. Over the centuries, this building has housed a field warehouse, a British hospital, and a general customs office before becoming a 'Temple of Tango' in 1969.

El Viejo Almacén is a popular tango show that runs 365 days a year. This makes it a good option for some last-minute plans in the city.

This is a two-story venue where guests can sit on either the main floor or the balcony that overlooks the room. The tango show features an orchestral quintet and four dance couples gracing the stage.

They offer a show-only option, dinner and show, or VIP dinner and show, which includes an open bar once the tango performance starts at the tanguería.

"As a solo traveler, this was recommended by multiple locas as one of the best shows in town, smaller more personal with more history than the other shows. Amazed with the performance, truly recommend it. The transfer from the hotel right on the dot." -Luis

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by ALJIBE TANGO 🇦🇷 BA (@aljibetango.ba)

3. El Aljibe Tango Show

Best early tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

One thing you need to know about tango shows in Buenos Aires is that they are generally a late-night affair. 

Dinner is eaten quite late in this country (most restaurants in Argentina don't even open for dinner until 8:00 pm!), so that means tango shows also tend to run quite late.

This can make it a little tricky for foreigners who have just arrived in Buenos Aires and are feeling a bit jet-lagged or simply don't want to be out super late. However, this particular tango show's early start is an exception, and I think that makes it a nice option for visitors or even families who want to attend a show with children.

At El Aljibe, dinner is served at 7:00 pm and the tango show begins at 8:15 pm. They also offer an option that includes a tango lesson starting at 6:00 pm if you book directly through them. 

The venue, El Aljibe, is located in Buenos Aires' historic Monserrat neighbourhood, so it's a very central location and easy to access.

"Fabulous show and food! This is a must. This was the first thing we did in Buenos Aires and it did not disappoint. The show is so much fun and shows different forms of dance. So entertaining. The service was top notch and very accommodating. And this was our first steak in Argentina and was outstanding. You will love this." -Allyson

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Tango Porteño (@tangoporteno_ok)

4. Tango Porteño Show

Best tango show on stage

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

Tango Porteño puts on a tango show in a theatre just across the street from the famous Teatro Colón and one block up from the Obelisk. If you've walked down Avenida 9 de Julio, you've likely seen the theatre as it's hard to miss, especially when it's all lit up at night!

The venue is an art deco building that once housed the famous Cine Metro owned by Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer.

While some of the smaller venues only host tango shows a few times a week, because this is a large and centrally located theatre, it has shows every night of the week.

Tango Porteño covers various time frames starting with tango's origins along the Río de la Plata and following its evolution into a contemporary dance. 

The show will transport you to Argentina's golden age of tango, featuring 25 artists and a live orchestra.

"The Tango Show was outstanding and the dinner was fantastic!! The band was also phenomenal. The entire group enjoyed the show." -Warren

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Faena Buenos Aires (@faenabsas)

5. Rojo Tango Show

Best cabaret-style tango show

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Rojo Tango Show is a cabaret-style tango performance that takes place at Hotel Faena, a luxury 5-star property in Buenos Aires' Puerto Madero neighbourhood.

The venue has a strong 1920s vibe featuring red lighting, red velvet and gold trim. It is a small, dimly lit setting with a decidedly intimate feel where the dancers and live band feel within arms reach.

Guests are served a contemporary Argentinean 3-course meal with an entree, main dish and dessert, as well as champagne and wine.

Dinner is served at 8:30 pm, and the show begins at 10:00 pm.

This cabaret tango show is best suited to travellers looking for a small venue with an intimate feel and it's a high-end experience with a price tag to match.

"This was fabulous from start to finish. Enrique (driver) picked me up at my AirBNB right on time. He was the most gracious, classy escort to the beyond beautiful Hotel Faena. The hotel is stunning. The venue is small and intimate. I had a front table which was great. The dancers were within arms reach. The servers are so attentive and the food was outstanding. They all spoke English and every need was met. The show is wonderful. The dancers are amazing , singers and band were top notch. I would highly recommend and would go again if I were here longer. I’d give it 10 stars if I could. Worth every penny. Bring cash for tipping and the staff and driver are worth a big tip. Enrique was waiting for me to deliver me back. Got back around midnight." -Mary Elizabeth

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Café de los Angelitos (@cafedelosangelitos)

6. Cafe de Los Angelitos Tango Show

Best tango show set in a historic cafe

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Cafe de Los Angelitos is a historic cafe and a beautiful venue located just two blocks west of the National Argentine Congress. I know we're talking about tango at the moment, but it's a really nice place to go for breakfast or have an afternoon coffee with a pastry.

Though Cafe de Los Angelitos is best known as a cafe, it's also a place where you can watch a tango performance. The venue dates back to 1890 and it's a place that was frequented by Carlos Gardel, one of Argentina's most famous figures in tango. In fact, Gardel signed his first contract at this very cafe!

This place also has the distinction of being the first cafe to put on a tango show back in 1940.

You have a few different options when it comes to seating during the tango show, including in the main dining room, the VIP balconies, or the intimate super VIP section on the second floor.

You can customize the type of experience you'd like to have: tango show and drinks, tango show and dinner, tango show and dinner with your own private table, or the tango show and VIP dinner option. 

The nice thing about the tango performance at Cafe de Los Angelitos is that it's done on a smaller scale, so it feels a bit more intimate rather than a big stage production.

"Fantastic from start to finish. Driver picked us up at the hotel on time and was waiting at the end of the show. Food was excellent and the show itself was outstanding. Would definitely recommend." -Lisa

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Homero Manzi (@esquinahomeromanzi)

7. Esquina Homero Manzi Tango Show

Best tango show with a neighbourhood feel

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 1.5-3 hours | ✅ Book it!

Esquina Homero Manzi is another tango show that I have personally attended in Buenos Aires - I brought my in-laws here the very first time they visited Argentina. 

This tango venue is located in the Boedo neighbourhood, and it has more of a local feel. There's a famous tango titled 'Boedo' about this traditional working-class barrio, which was quite influential in the Buenos Aires tango scene.

The tango show is named after Homero Nicolás Manzione Prestera, an Argentine lyricist of many famous tangos and milongas, some of which were recorded by the one and only Carlos Gardel. 

The show at Esquina Homero Manzi is all about reliving the 1940s. This was considered the golden age of tango with orchestras, singers, and composers shaping the musical styles that endure to this day. 

Guests have the option of choosing between show only, show and dinner, or show and VIP dinner. We opted for the dinner and show option and were quite pleased with the abundance of wine and the meal. 

"The club is very nostalgic, looks like something from a movie. Singing, musical numbers and dancing. We enjoyed wine and split a salad. Starts around 10 pm and lasts 80 minutes." -Lis

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Info Turismo (@infoturismoargentina)

8. Teatro Astor Piazzolla Tango Show

Best tango show with a contemporary flair

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 3.5 hours | ✅ Book it!

This Buenos Aires tango show takes place in Teatro Astor Piazzolla, a belle epoque theatre located inside Galeria General Güemes.

The tango show is named after Astor Piazzolla, an Argentine tango composer and bandoneon player who revolutionized the traditional Argentina tango and created a new style called nuevo tango incorporating jazz and classical music elements.

The Astor Piazzolla tango show pays homage to Piazzolla and features many of his songs.

Visitors can choose between the tango show only, tango show and dinner, or tango show and VIP dinner where the meal is served in the theatre balcony.

The nice thing about the tango show at Teatro Astor Piazzolla is its super central location along Calle Florida. They offer transfers to the venue, but if you're staying in the area, you can also easily get there by walking and take in some of the sights while you're at it. 

"Fabulous evening and fantastic value. As soon as we arrived we were invited to tango class included in the price of our ticket. The teachers were great and we had a wonderful time. Dinner was lovely. We both ordered the chicken dish which looked like a creation from a fine Parisian restaurant. Very delicious and paired well with the white Malbec that was surprisingly good and flowing freely! The actual show was truly fantastic. We loved the combination of an authentic band eon orchestra, singers and of course amazing tango dancing that included tango from the 20's 40's and modern day. A five start experience!" -Stephen

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Querandi Dinner Tango Show (@elqueranditangoshow)

9. El Querandi Tango Show

Best tango show with a historical element

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

El Querandi is an award-winning tango show set in a restored mansion that dates back to the 1920s. 

What makes El Querandi one of the best tango shows in Buenos Aires is that it covers the history of tango throughout the performance. 

The show is divided into five eras: tango's origins, the role of immigrants and the working class neighbourhoods, the influence of Carlos Gardel, salons and milongas, and Piazzolla's modern take on tango. 

They offer a three-course a la carte menu that features traditional Argentine dishes. Plus, they can accommodate vegetarian, vegan and gluten-free meal requests with prior notice. The tango show at El Querandi also includes free drinks all night long.

Each reservation gets its own table, meaning you have a bit more privacy as you're not sharing the space with fellow guests.

"An incredible way to spend a night! Easy with the bus pick up, a delicious dinner, and the music, dancers, and ambiance were exactly what I was hoping for!" -Amy 

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Señor Tango Oficial (@senortango)

10. Señor Tango Show

Best Broadway-style tango production

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours | ✅ Book it!

Señor Tango is a large-scale tango production set in a theatre known as the 'Cathedral of Tango'. 

The venue is located in the neighbourhood of Barracas on the boundary between the city of Buenos Aires and Buenos Aires Province, but transportation is provided which makes getting there easy.

The show at Señor Tango takes place on a round stage in the middle of the theatre. It's a full-on spectacle featuring aerial performers, horses, and singers as well as couples gracing the stage to dance tango. 

If you're looking for a flashy performance that seeks to outdo itself, then Señor Tango fits the bill! There's a reason this is considered the biggest show in town.

Señor Tango is also a show that has drawn many celebrities and personalities, which only adds to its fame. 

"Great seats…overlooking the circular stage…and the tango was great! Especially the aerial stuff! And singers were great…and the horses! That was a real surprise! It was a huge production that worked like clockwork! It was a much grander extravaganza than the other tango show I went to. Definitely go to this one! It’s the best!" -Dawn

💃 Check Prices and Availability!

Map of Best Tango Shows in Buenos Aires

Tango Shows vs Milongas: What’s the Difference?

If you’re visiting Buenos Aires and planning to experience tango, you’ll quickly come across two very different types of events: tango shows and milongas. Both are integral to the city’s cultural identity, but they offer distinct experiences depending on what you’re looking for. Here’s a breakdown to help you decide whether to choose one, the other, or ideally, both.

What Is a Tango Show?

A classic tango show is a choreographed stage performance designed to showcase the art of tango in a theatrical setting. Think of it as a night at the theatre, but with sensual dancing, dramatic lighting, elegant costumes, and often live orchestras or singers. These shows are typically held in venues that cater to visitors—such as historic theatres, cabarets, and elegant salons. They aim to impress through spectacle and precision.

Choreographed routines: Professional dancers perform polished sequences that highlight the elegance, passion, and technical skill of tango.

Live music: Most shows feature live musicians playing traditional tango pieces by icons like Astor Piazzolla and Carlos Gardel.

Optional dinner: Many venues offer a three-course meal before the performance, often with Argentine classics like empanadas, steak, and Malbec wine.

Tourist-friendly: Announcements, service, and even brief narrations are often available in English, making these shows very accessible to first-time visitors.

Set schedule: Tango shows usually start in the evening, often between 8–10 p.m., and last 1.5–2.5 hours depending on whether dinner is included.

Best for: Travellers who want a polished, theatrical introduction to tango without needing any prior dance knowledge.

What Is a Milonga?

A milonga is something entirely different: it’s a social tango dance event where locals and visitors gather to dance together in a more spontaneous and communal setting. This is where tango lives and breathes in everyday Buenos Aires. Instead of sitting back and watching, at a milonga, you’re part of the atmosphere.

Social dancing: Rather than choreographed performances, couples of all levels (from beginners to lifelong tangueros!) fill the dance floor.

Authentic environment: Milongas are often held in neighbourhood clubs, cultural centers, or even outdoor plazas, giving you a real glimpse into local life.

Codes and traditions: Many milongas follow traditional “códigos” (dance floor etiquette), like the cabeceo, a subtle nod used to invite someone to dance.

Live or recorded music: Some milongas feature live orchestras, while others use classic tango recordings. The music is played in tandas (sets of songs), with breaks in between.

Later start times: Milongas typically begin very late and can continue into the early hours of the morning.

Best for: Travellers who want to immerse themselves in local tango culture, observe social dancing up close, or even join 

Tips for booking a tango show in Buenos Aires

Decide on the type of tango experience you want. As you've seen with the different tango shows we've highlighted, there's something for everyone. The tango experiences in Buenos Aires range from small, intimate shows to large stage productions. Plus, the performances can also vary from cabaret-style to classic shows that combine traditional tango with folklore and more contemporary dance elements.

Consider the tango show and dinner packages. Most tango venues offer a dinner and show or drinks and show package. I've always opted to book the dinner and show since I find it convenient and the food is typically quite good (expect a 3-course meal with at least one of the main dish options being steak!) If you don't want the dinner package, you can always choose to have dinner at a nearby restaurant or parrilla and then make your way over for the show. Just give yourself enough time (I'd say at least 2 hours) since service can be a bit slower in Argentina.

Prepare for a late night. As I mentioned earlier, most tango shows in Buenos Aires get going late with dancers hitting the stage around 10:00 pm, so you can expect to leave the venue close to midnight. The one exception is the early tango show at El Aljibe, which is geared at foreign visitors who aren't quite used to Argentina's late dining culture. This is a very convenient option, especially if you're dealing with jet lag!

Confirm transportation to and from the venue. Depending on where in the city you're staying, most tango shows will offer transportation to and from the tango show. However, if you're staying outside the city centre, you'll likely need to make your own way there, so consider your location when booking a tango show.

Book your tango show in advance. I would say a few days in advance is enough, especially if you want to attend one of the smaller shows where seating is limited. For the bigger stage productions, you can often get same-day tickets or at least tickets for the following day. I also like to book a bit in advance in order to confirm transportation details to and from the venue. This is an activity you can enjoy in Buenos Aires even in the rain.

Sign up for a tango dance lesson. Some of the tango shows highlighted on this list also offer a short tango lesson prior to the show. However, this is often something that needs to be booked directly through the venue as it's not typically included in the dinner and show packages. I took a tango lesson the very first time I went to a tango show in Buenos Aires, and while I didn't walk away with any real dancing skills, it did allow me to appreciate the intricacies of the dance on stage.

FAQs: Watching a Tango Show in Buenos Aires, Argentina

Is it worth seeing a tango show in Buenos Aires? Seeing a tango show in Buenos Aires is a quintessential experience. Tango originated in the impoverished port areas along the Río de la Plata, so it's an important part of the city's cultural heritage.  Where can I watch tango in Buenos Aires? There are numerous tango and dinner shows in Buenos Aires and the majority of them are located in the neighbourhood of San Telmo. Some of the more popular shows include La Ventana, El Querandi and El Viejo Almacén.  Where can I see tango on the street in Buenos Aires? There are several neighbourhoods where you can see tango dancing on the street in Buenos Aires. This typically occurs on weekends and in more touristy areas like Boca, San Telmo and even Puerto Madero.  What to wear to a tango show in Buenos Aires? While you are not required to dress up for a tango show, most people dress smart casual. Dress pants or dark jeans with a collared shirt for men, and a dress or blouse with dress pants or a skirt for women, is appropriate.  How long do tango shows typically last? Most tango shows run for 1.5 to 2.5 hours, depending on whether you book the dinner option. If dinner is included, you can expect to arrive 1–1.5 hours before the show begins. Non-dinner guests usually arrive closer to showtime.  Can I attend a tango show without dinner? Yes, nearly all tango venues offer show-only tickets at a lower price. This is a great option if you prefer to dine elsewhere or want to save money. However, note that show-only guests are typically seated further from the stage than dinner guests.  Are tango shows suitable for children? Most tango shows welcome families, though late start times (8–10 p.m.) may be challenging for younger kids. Some performances include more sensual choreography, so if you’re travelling with children, consider choosing a family-friendly venue and opting for earlier dinner seating.  What’s the difference between a tango show and a milonga? A tango show is a choreographed stage performance featuring professional dancers, live music, and sometimes singers, aimed at visitors. A milonga is a social dance event where locals and tourists come together to dance; it's more authentic and participatory, but less theatrical. Some travellers enjoy doing both for a full tango experience. 

#### Why This El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour is Worth the Splurge!
Going on an El Calafate glacier boat tour was one of the highlights of our trip to Patagonia! This is our experience of the Gourmet Glaciers tour aboard Maria Turquesa.

If you only make time for one excursion in El Calafate, I would make it the boat tour to the glaciers aboard Maria Turquesa with MarPatag. This was the highlight of my trip to El Calafate and I haven't stopped raving about it to anyone who will listen!

So what was so amazing about this glaciers boat tour, you ask?

Well, for starters the number of icebergs and glaciers we got to see and how close we got to them!

Los Glaciares National Park forms part of the South Patagonian Ice Field which stretches across Argentina and Chile. It is the largest ice field in South America and it feeds numerous glaciers! 

When you visit Los Glaciares National Park from El Calafate you come face to face with the most famous glacier of them all, Perito Moreno. However, there are many other glaciers to see within the park - many of them far larger and grander - but most travellers don't know about these since they can only be reached by boat!

There were so many highlights during our glaciers boat tour aboard Maria Turquesa: cruising the milky turquoise waters of Lago Argentino, feeling the icy sub-Antarctic breeze blowing in our faces, fishing chunks of iceberg for our beverages, seeing waterfalls formed by meltwater cascading down the mountains and so much more!

I've visited some truly majestic places across Patagonia, but the experience of seeing these glaciers up close was the one that moved me to tears. I loved this tour and at the end of the day, my husband and I looked at each other and agreed that we'd be willing to get back on the same tour and do it all over again the next day.

So without further ado, here's a recap of our experience on this El Calafate glaciers boat tour, so you know exactly what to expect.

🛥️ Maria Turquesa Full Day Sightseeing Glaciers Cruise - This is the El Calafate boat tour to the glaciers that we booked. This is a full-day tour (approximately 9 hours) and it includes a packed gourmet lunchbox.

Transfer to Puerto Soledad

First things first, we had to make our way to the port!

This El Calafate glacier tour started with a 48-kilometre drive out to Punta Bandera / Puerto Soledad which is a private port on the southern shores of Lago Argentino just west of El Calafate.

You can book this tour with transfers or without transfers. We opted for the transfer which included pickup and drop off at our lodgings in El Calafate. Pickups start at 07:15 am so you'll want to be up bright and early. 

Alternatively, if you're planning to rent a car in El Calafate or if you're staying outside the urban pickup areas in town, you can make your own way to the port.

Los Glaciares National Park Entrance Fee

Before boarding our vessel, Maria Turquesa, we had to pay the admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park since the whole cruise takes place in the park. 

There was a small booth where we all lined up to pay the fee. You can view current admission rates here since these vary for international visitors, national visitors and provincial visitors.

I'll also mention that even though they accept debit and credit card payments, it's a good idea to have some Argentine pesos on you to pay this fee since the internet does tend to cut in and out in these remote places. Sometimes you have to attempt a payment multiple times and other times it just doesn't go through!

Tip: If you're planning to visit Los Glaciares National Park on two consecutive days, you can save 50% off your second visit. We paid for this pass since we knew we wanted to come back to visit Perito Moreno Glacier and explore the balconies and boardwalks.

El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour

So, now I'm going to give you a play-by-play of our day on the Gourmet Glaciers tour so you know exactly what to expect, should you decide to do it!

After paying our admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park, we boarded the vessel at 8:30 am and set sail by 9:00 am.

As we were leaving port, we decided to get some hot beverages. We each ordered a vanilla cappuccino with a medialuna. 

Once we left port and were out cruising Lago Argentino, we were able to go out on the deck and it wasn't long before we spotted our first iceberg.

In fact, the day was full of icebergs and glaciers!

Seco Glacier

The first glacier we visited on our glaciers boat cruise was Seco Glacier, which translates to 'dry glacier'. This is a hanging glacier and its name refers to the fact that it is currently receding.

Unlike other glaciers in the park that flow directly into the lake, Seco Glacier ends on a rocky outcrop without reaching the water. This gives it a somewhat barren and stark appearance, contrasting sharply with the lush surroundings.

Heim Glacier

We continued towards Heim Glacier, which is a hanging glacier that had these incredible meltwater cascades running down the side of the mountain.

Spegazzini Glacier

Next on the itinerary was Spegazzini Glacier, named after Carlos Luis Spegazzini, the Italian-Argentine botanist who was the first to study the local flora.

The main characteristic of this glacier is its height which reaches 135 meters along its front. This makes it the highest glacier in Los Glaciares National Park and one of the most important!

Due to the glacier's steep and high front wall, you can often witness spectacular calving events, where massive chunks of ice break off and crash into the lake, sending waves rippling across the water.

Puesto de las Vacas

Halfway through the cruise, we disembarked at a place called Puesto de las Vacas, which literally translates to 'cow stall'.

This is a remote part of Los Glaciares National Park, where a Finnish-Chilean couple lived and whose job it was to capture the wild cows that escaped from the nearby estancias and bring them back into town!

For this part of the excursion, we were split into smaller Spanish and English-speaking groups and we went on a guided hike.

It was nice to stretch our legs before getting back on the boat for more glaciers!

Upsala Glacier

That afternoon we also visited the Upsala Glacier and Bertacchi Glacier.

Upsala Glacier is a valley glacier, currently in a state of recession, that sits on the eastern side of the Southern Patagonian Ice Field. 

It is named after Uppsala University in Sweden since they sponsored the first glaciological studies conducted in this area.

Bertacchi Glacier

Bertacchi Glacier is one of three lesser eastflowing tributaries of Upsala Glacier together with Cono Glacier and Murallón Glacier. 

However, Upsala Glacier has retreated to such a degree that it no longer constrains Bertacchi Glacier.

The Gourmet Glaciers Lunchbox

We then took a pause from all the glacier-spotting to have lunch. 

The name of this particular tour is Gourmet Glaciers, and you can choose between a gourmet tasting menu served on the private deck, or a fancy lunchbox, which is what we opted for.

We were served a Patagonian lamb sandwich with caramelized onions and cheese, a side of roasted carrot and potato wedges and one non-alcoholic beverage per person. For a packed lunchbox, it was a really nice meal!

Because this tour was a special occasion, we also decided to order a bottle of wine - Malbec, of course! - to toast to such a wonderful day. 

At one point during the boat tour, the guides fished a piece of iceberg from the lake, so guests had the option to sip whiskey with glacial ice. It was a pleasant surprise when the servers came around with chunks of the iceberg for anyone who wanted to add it to their drinks - we did!

Then for dessert, we got a brownie and dulce de leche mousse with blueberries. We weren't even expecting dessert, so this was a pleasant surprise.

Canal de los Témpanos

All through lunch, we continued our El Calafate glacier boat tour towards Canal de los Témpanos, which translates to 'iceberg channel'.

The channel is named so since this is where the ice that breaks off Perito Moreno Glacier ends up.

Because we ended up revisiting Los Glaciares National Park the day after this glacier boat tour, we had the opportunity to see this place up close.

There is a very short and easy hike to Mirador Canal de los Témpanos via a boardwalk, where you can stand on the shores of Lake Argentino and watch the icebergs bob in the water.

Perito Moreno Glacier

Then it was time for the main attraction: Perito Moreno Glacier! 

This particular glacier is the icon of Los Glaciares National Park. It’s the reason why people travel all the way to Patagonia...to see this one glacier!

What is so special about the Perito Moreno Glacier?

Well, for starters, it’s one of the few glaciers in the world that is still growing.

It’s also pretty massive! The glacier’s front is 5 kilometres long, its height above the water is 60 meters, and its total depth is about 170 meters - so you're actually only seeing a small part of what it is.

Sometimes you can build up an attraction in your head and then it's a bit underwhelming, but this was far from the case with Perito Moreno Glacier. If anything, I would say the experience was overwhelming!

Seeing that wall of blue ice, feeling the glacial air blowing in my face, and watching as chunks of ice calved into the water was nothing short of spectacular. 

There are so many Perito Moreno Glacier boat tours and sometimes choosing one can feel a bit overwhelming, but I was very happy with our decision. 

All in all, it was an amazing day and an experience I hope to repeat again the next time I visit El Calafate, hopefully bringing my parents and in-laws along!

How to book the Gourmet Glaciers Tour

So, how do you book this El Calafate glaciers boat tour aboard Maria Turquesa?

Good question! There are a few different ways. 

Viator: The Gourmet Glaciers boat tour is listed on Viator. This is the easiest and most straightforward way of booking this tour, especially for foreigners. It also means you can book your tour well in advance, which is a good idea if you're visiting during the high season (December-March) when the tour can sell out days in advance. The downside is that the tour does cost a bit more when you book through Viator.

Tour operator: MarPatag Cruceros is the tour operator for the Gourmet Glaciers cruise aboard Maria Turquesa. Their rates are listed here in ARS. Booking things in Argentina isn't always very straightforward, so if you want to book directly with MarPatag Cruceros you'll either need to send a message through their contact form and wait for a response or get in touch via Whatsapp. It's a bit more work, but you can get the tour for a bit cheaper.

In person: Booking in person is always a bit of a gamble in terms of availability if you're visiting El Calafate during the high season. This is because tours like this one can book up. If you only have a few days in town, you probably don't want to risk it! However, if you're staying in El Calafate for a while, you can try to book something as soon as you arrive for a later date. This involves a bit more legwork, but most of the tour agencies are located along Avenida del Libertador, so it's just a matter of going in, asking prices and comparing.

Our experience on the Gourmet Glaciers Cruise

It can be hard to put this experience into words, so I think it's best I show you. I think this video captures the magic of our El Calafate glacier boat tour and why we loved it so much. Enjoy!

https://youtu.be/2nZmzsS-ONQ
Video of our El Calafate Glacier Boat Tour aboard Maria Turquesa 

Read more:

Fun Day Tours from El Calafate

How to Spend 2 Epic Days in El Calafate

Visiting Estancia Nibepo Aike from El Calafate

El Calafate to El Chalten: How to Get There

A Guide to El Chalten: Argentina's Trekking Capital 

How to Spend 3 Days in El Chalten

Where to Glamp in Patagonia

Which of These 3 Patagonia Tours is Right for You? 

#### Things to do in El Bolson: Patagonia's Hippie Mountain Town
Today we're sharing some of the best things to do in El Bolson, a hippie mountain town located in Northern Patagonia, Argentina.

El Bolson lies in a valley surrounded by jagged mountain ranges on either side, the local architecture features lots of log cabin-style buildings, and the town itself has a very easy-going and laid-back feel.

The main draw to El Bolson is its pristine nature, of course! There are hiking trails that meander up the rocky mountains, swimming holes with turquoise waters, and cascading waterfalls tucked away in the woodland. It's every outdoor lover's paradise!

This town is one of the most beautiful places in Patagonia and in this El Bolson travel guide, we're going to be sharing some of the highlights!

How to get to El Bolson

So, where is El Bolson?

El Bolson is located in the Province of Río Negro in Northern Patagonia.

The nearest airport is in the city of San Carlos de Bariloche, which is 2 hours or 138 kilometres north of El Bolson.

If you're planning a Northern Patagonia road trip, then renting a car is the best way to get to El Bolson and thoroughly explore the area.

Alternatively, there are buses that connect Bariloche with El Bolson, or Esquel with El Bolson if you're arriving from the south.

Via Bariloche has multiple departures per day and offers a good service.

Is El Bolson worth visiting?

Absolutely! El Bolson is one of our favourite mountain towns in Patagonia and we think it's worth a spot on your Patagonia itinerary.

If you want to experience Patagonia off-the-beaten-path, enjoy spending time in nature, being surrounded by mountains, visiting craft breweries, and indulging your sweet tooth in artisanal ice creams and chocolates, then you're going to enjoy what El Bolson has to offer.

How long should you stay in El Bolson?

Ideally, you'd want to spend at least 3 days in El Bolson in order to cover the main attractions and enjoy some of the local day hikes.

With 5-7 days you could add on some of the day trips which include a national park, neighbouring lakeside towns, and even a ride aboard a very famous train.

That being said, if you are pressed for time, there is a day tour to El Bolson from Bariloche, which also includes a visit to Lago Puelo National Park. That's something to consider if you're visiting Bariloche for a few days.

You'll only be able to cover a handful of attractions in the town with one day, but it'll give you a taste of El Bolson.

Things to do in El Bolson

There are lots of things to do in El Bolson and as you'd expect from a mountain town, most of these activities are outdoors.

That means epic mountain views all around!

Bosque Tallado

One of the more unique attractions to visit in El Bolsón is the Carved Forest, also known as Bosque Tallado.

This sculpture forest is located on Cerro Piltriquitrón at 1,420 meters above sea level, and it came to be after a series of fires burnt down part of the mountainside.

Marcelo López, a local artist, came up with the idea of inviting fellow artists to come and use the burnt and fallen lenga trees as their canvas.

These sculpture-carving gatherings were organized in 1998, 1999, 2003, 2007, 2010, and 2014 adding new sculptures to the forest every few years.

Aside from the artwork, the Sculpture Forest is a beautiful day hike that offers impressive views of the town of El Bolsón and the surrounding mountains!

Feria Artesanal

El Bolsón is well known for its Feria Artesanal or artisanal hippie fair that sets up in Plaza Pagano every Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday and Sunday.

There are around 200 stalls selling ceramics, leather, tapestries, candles, honey, jams and even natural cosmetics.

Plus, we can’t forget all the food trucks where you can sample empanadas, choripán, crêpes, hamburgers and more.

Monte Viejo Artesanías

This shop sells beautiful Argentine handicrafts, and it's the ideal place to pick up some classic Argentinian souvenirs.

They have jewellery made by local artists, including the owner of the store himself.

You can also find mates and bombillas, gaucho hats, knit vests, ceramics, ponchos and wool sweaters.

The staff are also incredibly sweet and friendly, so it's a nice place to shop.

Hiking in El Bolsón

El Bolsón is a great hiking destination and there are numerous trails to choose from all ranging in length and level of difficulty. A few to consider include:

Cerro Amigo - This is an easy hike that leads to 3 different lookout points offering town and mountain views. (2 kms, 30 mins)

Cascada Escondida - The hidden waterfall is accessed via the Botanical Garden and it's a short and easy trail. (1,4 km, 25 mins)

Cerro Piltriquitrón - This is the most iconic mountain in El Bolson and its name means ‘hanging from the clouds’. The hiking trails leads up to a mountain refuge where you can spend the night or at the very least enjoy a meal. Be warned, it is a steep hike! (9.3 kms, 5 h)

Cabeza del Indio - This hike leads to a lookout of the valley where you can see the Río Azul and there’s also a rock that resembles a human head. (6.8 kms, 2 h 15 mins)

El Cajón del Azul - This hiking trail starts at the Wharton Farm and leads you to a forested river canyon with crystalline waters that range from turquoise to emerald. It's a popular summer destination to enjoy a swim, and the trail can also be done as part of a horseback riding tour. (17.4 kms, 5 h 45 mins)

You can find a complete list of hiking trails in El Bolsón on the All Trails website.

Day trips from El Bolson

There are so many fun day trips you can enjoy from El Bolsón - all of them featuring spectacular nature.

Also fun fact, the day trips listed below are all in the Province of Chubut! El Bolsón is located in the Province of Río Negro, but it is so close to the border with Chubut, that it's super easy to cross over and explore.

Lago Puelo

One of my personal favourite trips from El Bolsón is to Lago Puelo, which is located only 30 minutes south of town.

Lago Puelo is both a town and a national park. First you'll pass through town, and then you'll reach the park which is name after the lake.

This park offers lots of hiking trails with incredible lookout points where you can admire the beauty of Lake Puelo.

There are also boat tours that allow you to experience some of the park highlights and even hike to the Chilean border.

During the summer season, food trucks park close to the beach so you can enjoy a picnic with a view.

Cholila

Another easy day trip from El Bolsón is the Cholila Ranch that was once home to Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid.

These two outlaws earned themselves quite the reputation as bank and train robbers in the days of the American Wild West.

After law enforcement got a little too hot on their trail, they decided to escape to Patagonia.

Here they purchased land and bought cattle, however, they couldn't outrun their past. When the Pinkerton Detective Agency tracked them down, a local sheriff gave them the heads up so they could get out of dodge.

Butch Cassidy's Ranch is located just under 1 hour south of El Bolsón.

Getting there involves driving along National Route 40 and then turning west on Provincial Route 71. It's then on the right hand side just 10 kilometres outside the town of Cholila.

El Hoyo

Another day trip from El Bolsón to consider is El Hoyo.

This is only a 40-minute drive south of El Bolsón along National Route 40.

One of the main attractions in El Hoyo is Laberinto Patagonia, the largest labyrinth in South America! It sits on a 5-hectare estate and has 2,200 metres worth of paths. They also have a wonderful tea house on site with the most scrumptious cakes.

If wineries are more your thing, you'll be glad to hear that El Hoyo has a growing wine scene. A few to visit include Patagonian Wines, Bodega y Viñedos Ayestarán, and Allard Mammarelli Wines.

Epuyén

Another relatively short and easy day trip from El Bolsón is to Epuyén, just a 40-minute drive south of El Bolsón.

This town is best known for Lago Epuyen, a lake of glacial origins with crystalline blue waters that look out of this world.

People come to a point on the lake known as Puerto Patriada to enjoy a lakeside picnic with a bit of hiking, or even some kayaking.

Epuyén also has a buddhist stuppa, which with the surrounding mountain peaks, will make you feel like you've been transported to Nepal.

Plus it has a brewery and restaurants, so you won't go thirsty or hungry.

El Maitén

El Maitén is a popular day trip from El Bolsón for those wanting to ride aboard the Old Patagonian Express.

While the most famous train route is the one that runs from Esquel to Nahuel Pan, there is another segment that runs from El Maitén to Desvío Bruno Thomaé.

This is a 26 kilometre train journey across the Patagonian steppe.

It’s also worth arriving at the train station early in order to visit the Railway Museum and tour the Locomotive Repair Shop.

You can reserve this excursion at Grado 42, a tour agency that's located right in the centre of town on Avenida San Martín.

Where to stay in El Bolson

El Bolson is no longer the quiet, sleepy, hippie mountain town it once was.

In fact, it draws its fair share of travellers during the summer months when the town's population dramatically soares!

That also means there's no shortage of accommodations, whether you're looking for log cabins or a guesthouse, a geodesic dome or a hobbit home, you can find it all here!

La Aguada - high-end accommodations with mountain views, a swimming pool and a garden, all at the foot of Cerro Piltriquitron.

Casas Chaura - artsy two-story cabins that can fit 2-5 people, located just 6 blocks from the centre of town.

Hostel Cosmo - large family home turned cozy, rustic hostel with a nice garden right downtown!

Camping La Cascada - cool campsite in the outskirts of town next to the botanic garden and waterfall, featuring hobbit homes, tiny cabins, as well as campsites.

Where to eat in El Bolson

A Gusto

If you're travelling in Argentina and you're not vegetarian, you'll want to try the local cuisine, namely asado or parrillada. These names refer to an assortment of cuts of meat cooked on the grill over coals.

A Gusto in El Bolson does grilled meats very, very well!

Try their tablas de carne or meat platters to share. The tabla criolla features some classic cuts like rib eye steak, sirloin steak, pork sausage and blood sausage.

Either make a reservation or show up as soon as they open at 7pm - no Argentine would dine at this gringo hour, so you're almost guaranteed to get a table!

Address: Dorrego 539

Los Lúpulos

This restaurants does amazing pizzas and the best part is that they let you mix and match, so you can choose two different styles on one pizza.

The 'Los Lúpulos Pizza' with tomato sauce, mozzarella, sun-dried tomatoes, basil, Patagonian cheeses and olives was one of our favourites.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2740

El Tablón

This place specializes in pizzas and empanadas. We only tried the empanadas, but they were so good that we came back for more!

A few fillings to try include pancetta y ciruela (bacon and plum), carne cortada a cuchilla (cubed meat with a juicy sauce), and roquefort (blue cheese).

You can dine indoors or on the patio, but they also do take-out in case you're craving a quiet evening and just want to eat back at your place.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2467

Awka Cervecería

Next up, there's Awka Cervecería, a local craft brewery in El Bolson.

What do you feel like drinking? Golden, Kolsh, American IPA, Honey, Oatmeal, Barleywine? They've got it all!

Pair that with a juicy hamburger and a side of loaded potatoes with melted cheddar cheese, bacon and spring onions, and you've got yourself a great meal.

Grab a seat in the outdoor patio, enjoy the music, and soak in the magic of a cool Patagonian evening.

Address: Perito Moreno and Dorrego

Patio Cervecero

This is a popular gathering place in El Bolson to have a few craft beers. They have blonds, reds, stouts, IPAs, honey and even raspberry beers on tap.

You can find a lot of classic Argentine dishes on the menu like milanesa al caballo, a breaded veal cutlet served with ham, cheese, and two fried eggs on top and a mountain of French fries on the side.

Frankfurters with chucrut, and Goulash with Spätzle are a few of their popular dishes.

Basically, hearty and filling food that pairs well with beer!

They offer outdoor seating on a patio as well as indoor seating.

Address: Avenida San Martin and Padre Feliciano

Helados Jauja

Patagonia is known for its artesanal ice creams, and in El Bolson, Helados Jauja is the place to go!

With flavours like Andean chocolate with walnuts, dulce de leche with brownies, and calafate berries with sheep's milk, there's plenty of temptation!

While Jauja has several locations across Patagonia, in El Bolson they also have an onsite cafe where you can enjoy more than just ice cream.

Their menu features sandwiches, pizzas, pastas, cakes, smoothies and a variety of teas and coffees.

Address: Avenida San Martín 2867

Café Paseo de las Flores

Café Paseo de Las Flores looks like something straight out of the shire. It seriously would not look out of place if a hobbit wandered out the front door.

The cafe set in a beautiful secret garden surrounded by all sorts of potted plants, cacti and blooms.

They only open in the afternoons, but it's the ideal place for an afternoon coffee or tea with a nice slice of cake.

In fact, they have a very fancy coffee menu featuring all sorts of concoctions. Want to add Fernet to your coffee? How about some Irish whisky? Or some rum for a more tropical feel? You can get as creative as you like!

Address: Azcuénaga 430

#### Things to Do in El Chalten | A Guide to Argentina's Trekking Capital
Today we're sharing the best things to do in El Chalten and because this is Argentina's trekking capital, that means lots of hiking!

El Chaltén is a small town nestled in the north end of Los Glaciares National Park. Surrounded by epic mountain peaks, granite spires and turquoise rivers, this mountain town has become a favourite destination in Patagonia for outdoor enthusiasts - hikers, rock climbers, rafters, you name it!

Most travellers to El Chalten are looking to catch a glimpse of two of the most iconic peaks: Mount Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre. However, there are loads of trails that lead to glacial lagoons, waterfalls and lookouts where you can see condors. 

El Chalten is a destination that is best combined with a visit to El Calafate, which is the gateway to the Perito Moreno Glacier on the south end of Los Glaciares National Park.  

In this travel guide, we're going to share all the best things to do in El Chalten, and that includes the top hikes, where to eat, where to stay, as well as some non-hiking activities should your legs need a rest in between.

Note: If you only have time for a short visit, this 3-day El Chalten itinerary might be right for you. It covers the main hikes and town highlights.

Getting to El Chaltén

By Air

To reach El Chaltén, you'll first need to fly into the nearest major airport, which is Comandante Armando Tola International Airport (FTE) in El Calafate.  You can fly into El Calafate from Buenos Aires, Bariloche or Ushuaia. From El Calafate Airport, you'll need to travel by bus, car or taxi to El Chaltén. 

By Bus 

Several bus companies operate the route between El Calafate and El Chalten. The bus journey from El Calafate to El Chaltén takes between 2.5 to 3 hours, depending on whether your bus makes a midway stop at La Leona. You can browse ticket prices and departure times on BusBud. 

By Car

If you prefer a more flexible schedule and want to explore the region at your own pace, you can rent a car at El Calafate Airport and drive up to El Chalten. The drive from El Calafate to El Chaltén is approximately 220 kilometres (137 miles) and takes around 2.5 hours, a bit longer if you're stopping for photos along the way and you probably will.

One thing is for sure, the journey to El Chaltén is beautiful with epic landscapes ranging from Patagonian steppe to turquoise lakes and finally, Mount Fitzroy rising on the horizon. 

Things to Do in El Chalten, Argentina

El Chalten is a dream destination for hikers travelling to South America, so of course the main activities revolve around hitting the trails and well as outdoor adventures like rock climbing, rafting, kayaking and horseback riding. 

First, we're going to cover all the main hikes in El Chaltén, and then we'll move on to some of the other non-trekking activities you can enjoy in and around town. 

Laguna de los Tres

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 24 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 1,068 metres

Time: 8-10 hours

The hike to Laguna de los Tres is one of the most spectacular treks in El Chaltén and for good reason! It leads up to this beautiful glacial lagoon with a glacier and three towering peaks in the background. 

The name Laguna de los Tres translates to 'Lagoon of the Three' and it refers to the three peaks you see behind the lagoon: Fitz Roy (3,405 metres), Poincenot (3,002 metres), and Saint-Exupéry (2,558 metres).

The round trip to Laguna de los Tres is approximately 24 kilometres (14.9 miles). Yes, it is a hardcore day of trekking! The duration of the hike will vary depending on your pace and level of fitness, but it generally takes between 8 to 10 hours to complete.

Laguna de los Tres is considered a challenging hike, not just because of the distance, but because the final kilometre is a steep ascent up a rocky slope that will make you question your choices. Trekking poles are a good idea for this trek.

I was so tempted to throw in the towel and turn around on that final kilometre - I had already been walking for hours, I was tired, and that final climb didn't look like a whole lot of fun. But it was the encouragement from the people trekking down and telling us, "It'll be so worth it!" that kept us motivated. 

Well, once we finally made it over the ridge, it really was all worth it and the effort it took to get there was quickly forgotten. We were rewarded with the most pristine glacial lagoon shimmering a deep blue, a glacier winding down the side of the mountain, and clouds blowing over Mount Fitz Roy and its neighbouring peaks. 

We sought shelter behind a boulder (it was windy up there!), stared at the incredible views in front of us, devoured what we had left of our packed lunch, and gathered our energy for the steep descent and walk back to El Chalten. 

I realize Laguna de los Tres may not be for everyone, considering how demanding it is, so this next trek is an alternative that will still give you spectacular views of Mount Fitz Roy.

Laguna Capri

Difficulty: Moderate

Distance: 8 kilometres round trip 

Elevation gain: 430 metres

Time: 3-4 hours 

The hike to Laguna Capri is a popular and relatively moderate trek and it's on the way to Laguna de los Tres.

The round-trip trek to Laguna Capri is approximately 8 kilometres (4.9 miles), and it usually takes around 3 to 4 hours to complete.

To be honest, the day we hiked to Laguna de los Tres, we were only planning to go as far as Laguna Capri. We got there and had a snack next to the lagoon, but then we realized it was still early in the day, we weren't tired, and if the views were already this epic, it could only get better from here. 

But I digress, Laguna Capri is a beautiful hike in its own right and there's zero shame in making this your final destination. 

The trail winds through diverse landscapes, including forests and open plains, with the stunning backdrop of Cerro Fitz Roy in the horizon. While this hike is considered moderate, some uphill sections require a reasonable level of fitness.

Overall, Laguna Capri is a fantastic way to experience the stunning landscapes of Los Glaciares National Park without the intensity of some of the more challenging treks in the area. Plus, the serene beauty of the lake and the surrounding mountains make it a beautiful place to linger and enjoy the views.

Laguna Capri is a half-day hike, so I would suggest packing a picnic and enjoying a leisurely meal next to the lake. 

Cerro Torre

Difficulty: Moderate

Distance: 17.5 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 501 metres 

Time: 6-7 hours

The hike to Cerro Torre is another iconic trek in El Chaltén offering stunning views of the famous Cerro Torre.

This peak is the highest of a four-mountain chain that also includes Torre Egger, Punta Herron, and Cerro Standhardt.

The round trip to Cerro Torre is approximately 17.5 kilometres (10.8 miles). The duration of the hike varies but usually takes around 6 to 7 hours, depending on your pace and the trail conditions (some stretches can be muddy). It is considered a moderately challenging trek.

You start out hiking through a beautiful valley and you also get to see some waterfalls along the way. 

The majority of the elevation gain happens at the start of the trek, but then things flatten out around kilometre 3.5, which makes it easy to set a steady pace and cover a lot of ground. 

One of the things we enjoyed about this trail was the fact that we could see Torre Glacier in the horizon, which was motivating. Plus we got to hike through forests and along a river, so the scenery was constantly changing. 

The highlight of the Cerro Torre hike is reaching the viewpoint overlooking Laguna Torre, a glacial lake at the base of Cerro Torre. The lake is often dotted with icebergs, and the backdrop of the iconic mountain provides a stunning setting for photography.

The downside of our experience was that by the time we reached the shores of Laguna Torre, clouds had rolled in and they covered Cerro Torre, so we didn't get that iconic view. 

Once you reach Laguna Torre, you can continue a bit further to Mirador Maestri for even better views of the Torre Glacier. 

Loma del Pliegue Tumbado

Difficulty: Hard

Distance: 18.3 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 1,127 metres

Time: 7 hours

Loma del Pliegue Tumbado is a good trek for those seeking a slightly less crowded alternative to some of the more popular trails in El Chaltén - namely Laguna de los Tres and Laguna Torre! 

The trailhead starts at the Visitor Center, same as Mirador de Los Cóndores and Mirador de Las Águilas, except there is a marker indicating you go right. 

You'll hike through scattered forests, then reach a section known as Pampa de las Carretas which is flat, and you'll then continue your ascent until you're past the timberline.

The final push is the hardest and most demanding portion of the hike given the quick elevation gain. It also consists of switchbacks and loose rock.

However, the highlight of Loma del Pliegue Tumbado is reaching the summit and taking in the breathtaking vistas. The final destination is a viewpoint on a ridge that offers 360-degree panoramic views of the surrounding mountains, including Mount Fitz Roy, Cerro Torre, Lake Viedma, Cerro Huemul and the Río Túnel Valley.

Be warned that it can be very windy at the top! The big joke with this hike is, "The only time you don’t go up is when you go down!"

Cerro Huemul Circuit

Difficulty: Very hard

Distance: 66.8 km

Elevation gain: 2,838 m

Time: 4 days

The Cerro Huemul Circuit is a challenging multi-day trek covering 66.8 kilometres on a loop trail where you'll be overnight camping along the way.

This is a technical trek best reserved for experienced hikers as it involves two river crossings (these can be done via pulley or barefoot) and part of the trail is across a glacier! You also need to carry all your own equipment, so if you're unsure, chat with the rangers at the Visitors Centre to see if this trail is for you. 

Day 1 connects El Chaltén with Laguna Toro Camp. Then on Day 2 you continue from Laguna Toro Camp to Paso del Viento Camp. Day 3 brings you from Paso del Viento Camp to Lago Viedma Camp. Finally, on Day 4, you go from Lago Viedma Camp to Bahía Túnel, and you can then either arrange transportation (or hike) back to El Chaltén.

As with many treks in Patagonia, the best time to undertake the Cerro Huemul Circuit is during the Austral summer (December to March). During this period, the weather is more favourable for trekking, with milder temperatures and longer daylight hours, though it can be very windy.

Before embarking on the Huemul Circuit, you must first obtain a permit from the park office Centro de Visitantes Guardaparque Ceferino Fonzo. This can be done in the days leading up to your trek, or the morning of your departure. In order to qualify for the permit, you'll have to demonstrate you have the required gear and also watch a short presentation so you know what to expect from the trek.

This is a good overview of what the Huemul Circuit entails from someone who has actually done the trek.

Easy Hikes in El Chalten

Mirador Rio de las Vueltas

Difficulty: Easy

Distance: 2 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 200 metres 

Time: 1 hour

Mirador de las Vueltas is a short hiking trail that provides views of the Las Vueltas River, which flows to the east of El Chalten.

The trailhead is on the north end of town at the end of Avenida San Martín and it's the same route you would take if you were hiking to Laguna Capri or Laguna de los Tres. 

It's a 30-minute walk to reach the lookout. The trek is mainly uphill, but it's a short walk with beautiful views. Once you reach the lookout, you have wooden benches where you can sit, rest your legs and soak in the landscapes. 

The trail provides impressive views of the Río de las Vueltas Valley, a winding river valley surrounded by rugged mountain terrain.

Mirador de los Cóndores

Difficulty: Easy-Moderate

Distance: 2.6 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 130 metres

Time: 1 hour

The hike to Mirador de los Cóndores is considered easy to moderate, making it suitable for most hikers, including families. 

This is a short 2.6-kilometre round trip hike, and though the uphill climb can be a bit steep in places, the reward is the panoramic view of the town of El Chalten. 

As its name suggests, Mirador de los Cóndores is an excellent place to spot Andean condors flying overhead. These magnificent birds have an impressive wingspan, and they are often seen soaring on the thermal currents in the area.

Aside from spotting condors, from the viewpoint, you can also enjoy panoramic views of El Chaltén, the De Las Vueltas River, and the surrounding peaks including Mount Fitz Roy. On clear days, the vistas are particularly breathtaking.

Because the viewpoint faces west, this is a nice spot to catch sunset over El Chaltén.

The trailhead begins near the entrance to El Chaltén and it's very well-marked, so finding your way will be straightforward.

Mirador de las Águilas

Difficulty: Easy-Moderate

Distance: 5.3 kilometres round trip

Elevation gain: 215 metres

Time: 2 hours

Mirador de las Águilas is another relatively easy yet rewarding trail, known for its breathtaking views and the opportunity to observe birds of prey, including eagles, which gives the viewpoint its name Eagles' Viewpoint.

This loop trail is 5.3 kilometres in length and it starts at the same trailhead as Mirador de Los Cóndores and it includes a stop at the same viewpoint. 

You then continue east until you reach another lookout point that offers views of the Patagonian steppe, the milky turquoise waters of Lago Viedma, the Viedma Glacier, and the Andes Mountains. 

Because this viewpoint faces east, this is a nice spot to catch sunrise.

Chorrillo del Salto

Difficulty: Easy

Distance: 6.6 kilometres round trip 

Elevation gain: 139 meters

Time: 1.5-2 hours

Chorrillo del Salto is a popular and relatively easy hike in El Chalten. It is 6.6 kilometres round trip on a mostly flat trail, and it can take between 1.5 to 2 hours to complete depending on your pace. 

The trail leads to the Chorrillo del Salto Waterfall, a picturesque and serene spot surrounded by lush forest. The waterfall itself is about 20 meters (65 feet) high and is a beautiful sight, especially after the rainy season when the water flow is at its peak.

The one thing we didn't like about this trail is that most of the hike is on a dirt road, Provincial Route 23, so it doesn't have the same appeal as a forest hike. 

This is a suitable trail for hikers of all levels, including families with children.

There's a parking lot near the waterfall, so if you cannot hike, you can drive there and it's then a short walk to visit the waterfall.

Tips for trekking in El Chalten

Stop by the Visitors Centre. The office is located at the entrance of town and it's a good place to get information on various day hikes and current weather updates. This is also where you register for overnight treks. 

Start the day early if you want to witness sunrise and bring a torchlight so you're not tripping on the trail.

Wear a sturdy pair of hiking boots. While you can get away with sneakers for easy hikes, you'll want a good pair of hiking boots if you're attempting some of the more challenging trails. Also, make sure you've broken in your boots before you arrive in Patagonia!

Pack a pair of trekking poles. These will come in handy for trails with a high elevation gain. 

Dress in layers. Because the weather conditions in Patagonia are constantly changing, it's good to be prepared for all climates. I recommend a quick-drying base layer, a fleece, a weatherproof jacket and hiking pants. Bring a hat to protect yourself from the sun. Depending on the time of year you're visiting you may need a hat, scarf, and gloves.

Bring sufficient water and snacks. Many guesthouses around town offer a packed lunch service you can order the night before. Alternatively, there are small stores around town where you can load up on energy bars, nuts and fruit. 

Wear sunscreen. Even if the weather feels mild, you can still get a sunburn.

Check the weather forecast before embarking on a hike. Intense winds can make certain hikes near impossible to complete. When in doubt, check at the Visitors Centre.

Register for overnight treks. This is mandatory so no hikers are unaccounted for. Share your proposed route and expected date of return at the Visitors Centre. 

Other Things to Do in El Chalten (Not Trekking!)

Now let's move on to some fun things to do in El Chalten that don't involve any hiking! Your legs will probably need a break at some point during your visit, so here are other activities to consider. 

River Rafting Río de las Vueltas

If you're looking for an outdoor adventure that's not hiking, consider kayaking the Río de las Vueltas on a guided tour. 

Río de las Vueltas is a river of glacial origin that is born in Lago del Desierto and flows into Lake Viedma. 

The first 6 kilometres of the river are calm, so it's a good opportunity to enjoy the surrounding scenery (hello Mount Fitz Roy!) and ease into the experience. 

The second part goes through a canyon area. The initial rapid is called Portage (no, you are not getting out of the water and portaging your raft!) followed by a succession of class III to III+ rapids for the next 10 kilometres. Get ready for the adrenaline to start pumping!

Yes, these waters are glacially cold, as you'd expect, but you'll be geared up with a neoprene suit, microfleece, jacket, life jacket, helmet, neoprene boots and mittens. 

Once the descent is finished, a van will be waiting to take you back to the base where you will change and enjoy a snack and a drink to recover your energy.

You can book your river rafting adventure on Río de las Vueltas here.

Kayaking Río de las Vueltas

If you want to hit the water, but rafting sounds a little to extreme, consider kayaking instead. 

For this trip, you'll travel with your guide along Provincial Route 41 until you reach Lago del Desierto or Lake of the Desert. 

Kayaking in these waters means getting decked out in all the necessary gear; in this case a neoprene suit, microfleece, jacket, helmet, life jacket, boots, mittens and paddles. 

The kayaking adventure begins north of El Chaltén in a section of the river that's shallow. From this point, you'll travel 12 kilometres downstream, which will take between 1.5 and 2 hours depending on the river flow and wind conditions. 

Along the way, you'll get to enjoy a unique perspective of Mount Fitz Roy, the Rio de las Vueltas Valley and the Andean forest.

The destination of this kayaking tour is Estancia Bonanza, where you'll have a delicious lunch at the ranch before returning to El Chaltén.

You can book your kayaking trip to Estancia Bonanza here.

Horseback Riding at Estancia Bonanza

Another activity you can enjoy in El Chaltén is horseback riding at Estancia Bonanza. 

This estancia is located 12 kilometres north of El Chaltén and it sits at the foot of Cordón del Bosque, a mountain range that's characterized by its forests, glaciers, rivers and lagoons. 

This horseback riding tour is 2 hours long and it takes you to the most remote corners of the ranch where you can enjoy unspoilt scenery in a corner of Patagonia that not many get to see. 

Two daily horseback riding excursions are available: one in the morning with lunch, and the other in the afternoon with dinner. Hours are adjusted depending on the time of year. 

So if you didn't get your fill of estancia life in El Calafate, you have the opportunity to visit another estancia here in El Chaltén!

You can book your horseback riding excursion at Estancia Bonanza here.

Rockclimbing in El Chaltén

El Chaltén is a popular destination for rock climbing. The Paredón is a giant wall to the east of town overlooking the Las Vueltas River, where you can often see rock climbers.

If you're looking to go with a guide, Mountaineering Patagonia are your people. They offer a single pitch rock climbing outing where you'll tackle routes ranging from grade IV to VI. You'll learn the basic knots, how to belay and rappel. This activity takes around 4 hours and is geared at those in beginner and intermediate levels. 

They also offer a multi-pitch rock climbing full-day outing. The morning is spent on single-pitch routes ranging from grade IV to VI, and in the afternoon you move on to the multi-pitch climb (4-5 pitches) graded IV to V+. This activity takes between 6-8 hours.

Where to Eat in El Chaltén

Senderos

This restaurant is part of Hostería Senderos, a boutique guesthouse in the south end of town, and they serve up some delicious meals. We ate here on two occasions. 

The first night, we tried their blue cheese risotto with walnuts and sundried tomatoes, as well as a lentil stew. This was our celebratory dinner after trekking to Laguna de los Tres. 

We enjoyed the meal so much that we went back another time and had their ñoqui with wild mushrooms and stuffed ravioli in tomato sauce. 

For dessert, we tried the apple pancake with calafate berry ice cream and a chocolate mousse. Both were divine!

La Zorra Taproom

This is another spot in town that we revisited because there's nothing better than a juicy hamburger and a mountain of loaded fries after a long day of trekking! 

La Zorra Taproom is a brewpub and they specialize in hamburgers, pizzas, loaded fries and salads. 

They also craft beer on tap with fun names like Scotch Ale, Passion Summer and Choco Milk.

They're located in the north end of town, so it's very convenient if you've just finished hiking one of the trails in that area. 

Cúrcuma

This is a vegan restaurant in El Chaltén and we visited out of curiosity. Though we are not vegan, we were starting to crave some healthier veggie options after many of months pizza, pasta and parrilla in Argentina. 

We were pleasantly surprised by their quinoa bowl loaded with grilled veggies, and we also had a type of barley bowl with more veggies and alfalfa. 

Their current menu features items like pumpkin risotto, stuffed eggplant, zucchini pasta, and various wraps and salads. Plus loads of smoothies and fresh-squeezed juices. 

La Waffleria

This spot specializes in waffles with savoury and sweet toppings. If you're craving something savoury, you can get waffles with ham and cheese, with bacon and eggs, or with blue cheese and walnuts. 

And if you're craving something sweet, like we were, you have waffles with dulce de leche, with ice cream, or with whipped cream and berries. We got one with scoops of calafate berry ice cream. 

Another cool thing about this restaurant is that they have card games available, so that makes it a nice place to linger. 

Patagonicus

This restaurant is located in the south end of town and specializes in pizzas, soups and salads. The menu is simple but the food is filling. 

They have 15 different pizzas on the menu - Napolitana, Calabresa and Roquefort, to name a few. They even a vegan pizza option. 

This is a convenient location if you're planning to tackle some of the hikes near the Visitors Centre. 

Where to Stay in El Chaltén

Here are three hotels in El Chaltén, representing luxury, mid-range, and budget-friendly categories, each with excellent reviews. 

Hostería Vertical Lodge

This is where we stayed and it's a mid-range option! This guesthouse is located near the entrance of town, so on the south side overlooking the Las Vueltas River and the Paredón, which is the rock climbing wall.

It puts you close to the trailheads for Mirador de los Cóndores, Mirador de las Aguilas, and Loma Del Pliegue Tumbado.

The rooms are very spacious – great for sprawling all our hiking gear! And the bathroom is big with a piping hot shower, which was much appreciated at the end of a long day on the trails. 

Breakfast is buffet style with plenty of sweet and savoury options. They also offer a packed lunch service, which we made use of for our two big days of hiking.

Book your stay at Hostería Vertical Lodge. 

Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa

Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa is a 4-star boutique hotel located in the centre of El Chaltén. Because it sits on a small hill, it offers great views of the town below and the surrounding mountains.  

The hotel has a spa with a hot tub and sauna, plus you can book hot stones massages - ideal for those who want a bit of pampering in between all the hiking. 

Their on-site restaurant serves a combination of Patagonian and international dishes.

Book your stay at Los Cerros Boutique Hotel & Spa.

Hostel Rancho Grande

Hostel Rancho Grande is a ranch-style hostel conveniently located in the north end of town near some of the most popular trailheads like Laguna Capri and Laguna de los Tres. 

The hostel provides mixed dormitories with shared bathrooms and private rooms with en suite bathrooms. Plus, it has a communal kitchen and a social atmosphere. 

It's a budget-friendly option in El Chaltén, popular among backpackers and budget travellers. 

Book your stay at Hostel Rancho Grande.

You can also find luxury glamping domes on the outskirts of town, so that might be one way to cap off your time in El Chaltén! Chalten Camp and Patagonia Eco Domes are two popular choices with travellers.

https://youtu.be/it8h186rx7I

When is the Best time to visit El Chaltén?

Spring (September to November)

Spring brings milder temperatures, and the landscape begins to awaken with blooming flowers. It's a quieter time with fewer tourists. The hiking trails start to become accessible, although some higher-altitude trails may still have snow.

Summer (December to February)

This is the high tourist season with the warmest temperatures. Daylight hours are long, and evenings are pleasant. This is when hiking trails are fully accessible and it's an excellent time for trekking and outdoor activities. 

Fall (March to May)

Fall sees cooler temperatures, and the colours of autumn foliage add a unique charm to the landscape. The crowds diminish compared to the summer season, although it's a popular time of year for photographers to visit El Chalten. Hiking is still viable, although some trails might close later in the season due to snow.

Winter (June to August)

Winter is the coldest season, with snow covering the landscapes. Many facilities and accommodations close during this period. Winter offers a serene and peaceful atmosphere. It's a good time for photographers and those seeking a quieter experience. However, access to some hiking trails will be limited due to snow and ice. If you're interested in specific hikes, check their accessibility during your chosen time at the Visitors Centre.

Ultimately, the best time to visit El Chaltén depends on your interests and the type of experience you seek. If you're a trekking enthusiast, the austral summer months (December to February) offer the most favourable conditions. If you prefer a quieter atmosphere and don't mind some limitations on certain trails, the shoulder seasons of spring and fall can provide a wonderful experience.

Regardless of the season, be prepared for rapid weather changes. Patagonian weather is notoriously unpredictable, and conditions can shift quickly.

Read More:

El Calafate in 2 Days Itinerary

Choosing the Best Perito Moreno Boat Tour

Boat Tour to the Glaciers Aboard Maria Turquesa 

Where to Stay in El Calafate

Fun Day Tours from El Calafate

15 Places to Visit in Patagonia

Patagonia with Gadventures: Choosing the Right Tour

#### 11 Beautiful Estancias Near Buenos Aires for a Weekend Escape!
Searching for estancias near Buenos Aires? This list features 11 beautiful properties for a relaxing weekend escape!

One of my favourite ways to end a visit to Buenos Aires is by booking an estancia stay in the city outskirts. Buenos Aires is a thriving metropolis packed with activities - cafes, restaurants, museums and art galleries! However, it's nice to have the opportunity to unwind after an action-packed trip.

Most estancias near Buenos Aires are located in Buenos Aires Province, which encircles the Autonomous City of Buenos Aires, and many of them are just a 1-2 hour drive away, making them fairly accessible to travellers.

My favourite aspect about estancia stays is slipping into the slow pace of life. You can watch the sunrise over the pampas, go horseback riding through the countryside, enjoy traditional Argentine meals, and all of this in a rustic yet luxurious setting.

Over the years, my husband and I have enjoyed many Buenos Aires estancias on both day trips and overnight stays. We've done even more estancia stays down in Patagonia and it has become our favourite way to travel. 

So today, I've created a list of some of the best estancias near Buenos Aires for you to consider! The idea is to give you a bit of inspiration if you're looking to enjoy that estancia life for yourself. I've already experienced a handful of these and the others are still on the travel bucket list.

Beautiful Estancias Near Buenos Aires

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Villa María (@estanciavillamaria) 

Estancia Villa Maria

Best estancia for Tudor-style architecture

Estancia Villa Maria is a Tudor-style estancia set in Cañuelas 56 kilometres south of Buenos Aires. It has consistently been ranked one of the top estancias in Argentina and South America!

The estancia sits on 74 hectares and was constructed as a summer villa by renowned architect Alejandro Bustillo, who is responsible for many iconic buildings across Argentina (including the Llao Llao Hotel in Bariloche).

Estancia Villa Maria offers 11 rooms and guests can choose between superior rooms, suites, family and master suites.

The estancia also has its own in-house restaurant where guests can enjoy traditional country recipes, outdoor barbecues and afternoon tea out in the gardens. They even offer cooking classes for guests who want to take some Argentine recipes like empanadas and alfajores back home!

Aside from the gourmet restaurant, guests can also enjoy a private lounge, bar and wine cellar. 

There are lots of activities at Estancia Villa Maria for guests to keep busy including horseback rides, carriage rides, bicycles, a tennis court, an 18-hole golf course, football fields, plus a billiards room with board games.

Polo lessons can be arranged with a prior reservation and at an additional cost.

If you're looking for luxury estancias near Buenos Aires, this one fits the bill!

"The entire place was kind of magical - like being transported back in time. The staff were so helpful and accommodating (particularly given we speak little Spanish). It was more like being house guests at someone’s estate than being at a hotel. Very personalised." - Matthew from the UK
Review via Booking.com 

Book your stay at Estancia Villa Maria.

Address: Avenida Pereda s/n, Máximo Paz, Ezeiza, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Candelaria (@estanciacandelaria) 

Estancia La Candelaria

Best estancia for a French chateaux feel

Estancia La Candelaria is a 200-year-old French castle-style estancia set in Lobos 120 kilometres southwest of Buenos Aires.

While most estancias near Buenos Aires have a colonial look, this one will make you feel like you've been transported to France!

The estancia is divided into two sectors: the chateaux sector and the colonial sector. 

The French-inspired chateaux sector offers 3 different types of rooms all decorated with period furniture: 6 Castle Classic rooms, 3 Castle Suites and 1 Castle Windmill. 

Meanwhile, the colonial sector has more of a country feel. Here guests can choose between 10 Colonial Rooms and 2 Forest Bungalows. This sector is better suited for families or larger groups of friends.  

Some of the daily activities guests can enjoy at Estancia La Candelaria include horse rides, bike rides, forest hikes, tennis courts, volleyball courts, and the outdoor swimming pool during the summer months. 

Aside from this, the estancia also has different activities throughout the week like yoga, movie nights, empanada cooking classes, folklore shows and more.

There is a restaurant on the estancia grounds, 5º CHUKKER, where guests can try typical Argentine foods.

"Romantic, perfect and an absolute treasure in time. Thank you for keeping the history and the beauty of La Candelaria open with us to share. Highly recommend for those who want to get away and slow way down while enjoying a beautiful historical estancia! Special kudos to the chef - the food exceeded expectations and was the best food I had on my entire trip."
Review via TripAdvisor.

Book your stay at Estancia La Candelaria.

Address: Ruta Nacional 205 Km 114,5, Lobos, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia El Ombu de Areco (@estanciaelombu) 

Estancia El Ombú de Areco

Best working estancia for traditional gaucho culture

El Ombú de Areco is a working estancia set in the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco, the town known as the cradle of gaucho culture.

This working ranch has over 300 hectares which are used for grazing cattle; they have 350 heads of Aberdeen Angus livestock. They also grow a variety of crops like soy, corn, wheat and oats depending on the time of year.

The estancia has 11 guest rooms including double, triple and quadruple rooms. They also have interconnecting rooms in case you’re visiting with a large family. The rooms have been lovingly renovated featuring vintage furniture and they each have their own private bathroom.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco offers full board which includes 4 meals a day: breakfast, lunch, afternoon snack and dinner. That means there's no reason to leave the estancia during your stay unless you want to explore the surrounding area.

Activities at the estancia include 2 daily horseback rides. Plus guests can also enjoy bike rides, long walks through the property, and the outdoor pool during the warmer months.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco is a very popular gaucho day trip from Buenos Aires where you can experience a day in the countryside and learn more about traditional gaucho culture. It includes horse riding, a traditional Argentine BBQ, live folk music and dancing, a horse whispering demonstration and more. It's a nice alternative if you want to experience estancia life for a day.

It's a beautiful property with extensive grounds to explore. Plus, this estancia's architecture is simply divine! We loved the friendly estancia dogs and found the staff to be super attentive.

You can check out this accommodations guide if you're specifically looking for estancias in San Antonio de Areco and other unique stays.

"We've previously stayed in estancias in the area, so were able to make a comparison. We found the owner and staff to be very welcoming and keen to accommodate our needs. The home cooked meals were tasty, especially the empanadas and cakes. The rooms were nicely decorated with light colours and were full of character. The horses appeared to be well cared for and, as experienced riders, we were taken on the most fabulous ride through the extensive grassland. My horse was amazingly responsive to the lightest touch. The dogs were a pleasure to have around too." - Claire from Australia 
Review via Hotels.com

Book your stay at Estancia El Ombú de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Cuartel VI, Villa Lía, San Antorio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia la Bandada (@labandadaestancia) 

Estancia La Bandada

Best estancia for bird watching

Estancia La Bandada is located in San Miguel del Monte 122 kilometres from Buenos Aires.

The estancia offers accommodations in a 19th century colonial-style house that has been renovated yet retains its traditional charm. There is a maximum capacity of 14 guests so it offers a private and tranquil setting.

There are 3 types of rooms to choose from: one standard double room, two suites, and two two-bedroom apartments. The rooms are all named after different types of birds that can be spotted on the estancia grounds. These include herons, tijeretas, hummingbirds, horneros and cardinals.

Guests can enjoy a variety of activities at Estancia La Bandada like horseback riding, bird watching, cooking classes, bike riding, evening guitar sessions and more.

They also offer 1-hour polo lessons for visitors who may be interested in learning more about this sport. You just need to be able to ride a horse and they can teach you the rest!

"This is a beautiful property inside and out. Large comfortable rooms, wonderful grounds exceptional service. The staff was extremely friendly and eager to please. Agustina was very professional - she took the time to explain all about the property. She showed us around the organic garden, the riding area and told us all about the animals that live there. She made sure meals prepared were to our liking. The ranch is beautifully decorated be it the living room and dining area or the bedroom - simply gorgeous." - Maria from Austria
Review via Booking.com

Book your stay at Estancia La Bandada.

Address: Ruta 41, km 120, San Miguel del Monte, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Puesto Viejo Estancia & PoloClub (@puestoviejo) 

Estancia Puesto Viejo

Best estancia for polo players and a giant labyrinth

Estancia Puesto Viejo is set on 220 hectares of land in Cañuelas 76 kilometres, or less than one hour, from Buenos Aires. 

This particular estancia offers various types of accommodations to suit different budgets. They have a 10-bedroom hotel where all the rooms are named after the owner's favourite polo horses. 

We stayed in the estancia hotel when we visited a few years back. The rooms were decorated with antique furniture including a beautiful wooden armoire, a footboard bench, and a chandelier.

Aside from the hotel, Estancia Puesto Viejo also offers a glamping option. There's a sector of the property where they have built wooden platforms that hold 21 geodomes. Guests can choose between double and triple domes. Just note that the geodomes won't give you access to the swimming pool.

One of the unique draws to this particular estancia is the giant labyrinth - an especially attractive proposition if you're visiting with kids! We had a hard time finding out way out of there!

In terms of activities, there are free bikes to explore the estancia grounds, you can sign up for a short horseback ride, or you can even book a polo lesson. 

Also, we were very well fed for the duration of our stay with 4 meals per day: breakfast, lunch, afternoon tea and dinner!

"Great place for relax and to be in touch with nature. If you are a horse fan there is no better place, no matter your age. 100 times better to connect to the airport than from central BsAs. The staff is great always ready to satisfy any need. Food is amazing!!! My only complaint is that I got used to be woken up by bird's songs in the morning and I don't know how I will manage now without…" - Ed
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Puesto Viejo.

Address: Ruta Provincial 6, Km 83, Cañuelas, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by La Bamba De Areco Relais & Chateaux (@labambadeareco) 

Estancia La Bamba de Areco

Best estancia for a historic connection

Estancia La Bamba de Areco is a highly acclaimed Relais & Chateaux property located just outside the gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco.

The estancia dates from 1830 making it one of the oldest Argentinian colonial-style estancias in the area. One of the original post houses on the property actually formed part of the Camino Real or Royal Road, an old trade route that connected Buenos Aires with Alto Perú (modern-day Bolivia).

La Bamba de Areco was one of the first estancias to welcome visitors back in the 1980s. It has since been renovated and offers 11 rooms and suites. The decor features dark wooden floors and antique furnishings.

"Our girls trip took us to La Bamba on our recent trip to Argentina. It was such a unique experience -- from the scenery to the horseback riding to the communal meals with people we otherwise would have never met! We definitely recommend this spot for a couple of nights to get out of Buenos Aires and enjoy a very slowed down (little wifi!), relaxing experience. Special shout out to Michaela, Segundo, Jo, and Eduardo for making our experience so special." - Melissa from New York
Review via TripAdvisor

Book your stay at La Bamba de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Km 7.5, San Antonio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Madrugada Areco (@estancialamadrugada_areco) 

Estancia La Madrugada

Best estancia for a luxurious and private stay

Another estancia to visit near Buenos Aires is La Madrugada. This is a rather exclusive property with only 3 suites that lead out to a garden, so it's the ideal place to book with a group of friends or family. 

The estancia offers a rural experience with a touch of luxury. The main farmhouse has been renovated to add modern comforts, however, the place still manages to retain its traditional charm.

Meals at Estancia La Madrugada consist of a three-course menu and outdoor barbecues. Ingredients are sourced directly from the organic garden providing guests with a farm-to-table dining experience.

As far as activities go, Estancia La Madrugada offers horse riding, live guitar music by the campfire, and the opportunity to visit the nearby gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco - the town is only 5-kilometres away, so you can even cycle there using the free bikes they provide.

"My wife and I have been to La Madrugada twice now (one on August - winter, and once in the end of November - summer). Both times very different due to the season - but both incredible. This is a small estancia (max 3 bedrooms) so you really feel like you have the entire estancia (ranch) to yourself. All meals are included, food is great, nice wine selection. Entire staff is personalized and very accommodating! We have a 6 month old baby - and the entire staff could not be more helpful. In the winter they have a great space with a fire, very relaxing to play games or read. In the summer they have an enormous pool - plenty of space - beautiful setting. There is also the option to go horseback riding with a professional guide - again all personalized (riding offered at all levels). The estancia itself is an old traditional home that’s been renovated - keeping its old charm and decor but will all the needed modern amenities to stay comfortable (great shower, airconditioning, etc.) If you are looking for a place to relax out in the country side, quiet setting, personalized service - I could not recommend La Madrugada more." - Philip
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia La Madrugada.

Address: Camino del Yameo, San Antonio de Areco, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Sofia (@estancia_la_sofia) 

Estancia La Sofia

Best estancia to play polo

Estancia La Sofia is a boutique hotel and polo ranch situated in Azcuénaga some 130 kilometres west of Buenos Aires. 

La Sofía is a colonial-style ranch that offers six spacious en-suite rooms. Guests can choose from 2 Grand Suites, 2 Superior Suites, and 2 Standard Suites. 

There are plenty of ways to keep busy at this estancia with lots of fun activities on offer. Guests can enjoy horseback riding through the pampas, birdwatching, the outdoor swimming pool, and cooking classes where you can learn to make empanadas, asado and mate.

Polo is a big part of life at this estancia. La Sofia Polo Club is part of the Argentine Polo Association and the club has two polo fields.

Whether you want to practice polo, learn to play, or find out more about a sport, the estancia can organize a special program for you. And if you don't feel comfortable on a horse, of course, you can watch a polo game!

"Our stay was absolutely magical. The place is so charming and feels like a friend’s country house. The chef is incredible and you feel as if you have stumbled upon a wonderful part of Argentinian life. The horses are great to ride for all levels and we (both occasional riders) really enjoyed the polo lesson too. I was skeptical about learning polo since I didn’t think it would be rewarding as a beginner but it was so so much fun. If you are there during a polo match that’s a lovely experience and the pool is great too. A really peaceful oasis, with roaring fires in the evening when it is cold, and Al fresco dining when it is sunny. The hotel only sleeps a small number of guests so is truly boutique and we loved getting to know the other guests as well. Would love to revisit if I am back in Argentina." - Flo
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia La Sofia.

Address: Cuartel VI, Azcuénaga, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Don Manuel | Cañuelas (@estanciadonmanuel.ok) 

Estancia Don Manuel

Best estancia for polo lessons and clay pigeon shooting

Estancia Don Manuel started out as a polo school back in 1998 and today it has expanded to offer accommodations for guests looking to unwind and enjoy a taste of country life.

They offer a boutique experience that offers privacy and respects guests' desire for rest and relaxation. At full capacity, the estancia can hold a maximum of 36 overnight guests. 

As far as gastronomy goes, Estancia Don Manuel focuses on homemade dishes with an artisanal touch. Portions are abundant and prepared by an internationally-trained chef.

The estancia has a football field, volleyball court, bicycles, a gym, and ample room to enjoy long walks and even do some bird watching. For rainy days or low-key afternoons, there's a clubhouse with board games, pool, table tennis, darts, foosball and more.

Guests can also book additional services like polo lessons, clay pigeon shooting, horseback riding, golfing, tango dancing lessons and more.

"We went for my birthday with a group of 10 people. The service was excellent, Emiliano and Juli made sure everything worked perfectly. Regarding the food, we brought the raw materials and the ranch staff took care of everything, allowing us to relax and enjoy the stay. Amelia was super attentive, she cooked very well for us and adapted to the dietary restrictions of some guests very easily. All the facilities were in very good condition, the beds were very comfortable and there was always someone making sure that the campfires had a fire to maintain the temperature of the common spaces. We were able to take a horse ride in the morning and in the afternoon Emiliano and Sergio took us to another area where they explained to us better how to handle the horse. It was a great experience! I recommend the stay to go with friends or family to spend a few days, the place is beautiful, the service is excellent and the prices are very reasonable." - Ariel
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Don Manuel.

Address: Ruta 205 Km 59800, Cañuelas, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia Las Marias (@estancialasmarias_) 

Estancia Las Marias

Best estancia for a glamping experience

Estancia Las Marias falls into the glamping category offering some rather unique accommodations! Guests can choose between sleeping in a grain silo or a geodome. Rooms can be arranged to fit a queen-sized bed or two single beds. 

This setup is ideal for visitors who want to enjoy a self-catered holiday. Breakfast is served daily, however, lunch and dinner are up to you! The accommodations come with an electric kettle, an electric oven and a small fridge - you'll want to plan for quick and easy meals, which leave more time for exploring. 

On the premises, guests can enjoy the outdoor swimming pool and sauna, visit the local farm animals (pigs, horses, goats and more!), and spend the evenings around the campfire.

"We had a great stay. I wanted to highlight the attention of Lucas and Ivan, very kind and respectful. In the place you are constantly surrounded by many animals. I also wanted to clarify that the breakfast is very complete, I am celiac and they had prepared a variety of options. The dome was properly equipped, with a stoker outside, which was illuminated for the night. Thank you so much! We had an excellent day." - Angie
Review via Google Reviews

Book your stay at Estancia Las Marias.

Address: Marcos Paz, Buenos Aires Province 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by 𝐸𝓈𝓉𝒶𝓃𝒸𝒾𝒶 𝒟𝑜𝓃 𝒫𝑒𝒹𝓇𝑜🇦🇷 (@estanciadonpedro) 

Estancia Don Pedro

Best estancia for families with children

Estancia Don Pedro sits in the locality of Solis 96 kilometres northwest of Buenos Aires. 

Guests can choose from 4 different types of rooms: master suites, double suites, quadruple suites and quintuple suites. 

This estancia offers complete room and board with 4 daily meals: breakfast, lunch, merienda and dinner. Dinner consists of a 3-course fixed menu.

Estancia Don Pedro has a relaxed and family-friendly environment. It's well suited for stays with children as they have farm animals guests can visit and ample room to play and roam.

Pets are welcome at this estancia though they must be on a leash and accompanied by their owners at all times. There are other dogs and farm animals at the estancia, not to mention guests and children, so that's something to be mindful of.

"Excellent place, attention and delicious food and super original menu. We also really liked the tranquility of the place and the fact that it was more exclusive than other estancias." - Agustina from Argentina
Review via Booking.com

Book your stay at Estancia Don Pedro.

Address: Ruta Nacional 8 Km 94, Solis, Buenos Aires Province 

Travel tips for choosing an estancia near Buenos Aires

Book an estancia for the end of your trip. This is such a nice way to unwind after a busy itinerary in Buenos Aires. Two nights at an estancia is the perfect way to pamper yourself before hopping on a flight home. As a bonus, a lot of these Buenos Aires estancias are near Ezeiza International Airport. 

Not all estancias are created equal. You'll hear this over and over again! We've done enough estancia stays across Argentina to attest to that. The estancia experience will vary from one establishment to the next. Some estancias only serve breakfast while others provide four meals per day. Certain estancias include activities while others charge an additional fee for things like horse riding or polo lessons. There are estancias geared towards couples and estancias better suited to accommodate families.

Choose an estancia based on your interests. Many Buenos Aires estancias have a focus, whether it be showcasing gaucho culture, horseback riding, or polo lessons. Meanwhile, if you venture further down to Patagonia, you can find estancias that specialize in fly fishing or game hunting. Estancias in Mendoza featuring wine tastings and vineyard visits. While estancias in Cordoba are a great introduction to gaucho culture in the sierras. So there's something out there for everyone.

You can find estancias all over Argentina. If you enjoy the estancia experience, seek them out on the rest of your travels across Argentina! You can find loads of estancias in Patagonia. One of our favourites is Estancia Tecka for fly fishing and unmatched service. Meanwhile, if you're visiting El Calafate, Estancia Nibepo Aike is a fun estancia for a taste of ranch life. You can also find loads of estancias in Córdoba up in the sierras, Mendoza and the Iberá Wetlands. Or try something different like glamping across Patagonia!

Book a Día de Campo to visit for the day. If an overnight stay at an estancia is not in your budget, you can consider visiting for the day. Many estancias near Buenos Aires offer a Día de Campo or 'countryside day' where you visit for the day, learn about gaucho culture and have an Argentine BBQ for lunch. This estancia day tour is one of the most popular day trips from Buenos Aires and it's also highly rated!

#### 15 Best Places to Visit in Patagonia, Argentina
Today, we're going to be sharing some of the best places to visit in Patagonia, Argentina. So get ready to take some notes as we help you plan your upcoming trip!

Patagonia is a vast region at the bottom of the South American continent, spreading out 1,043,076 km2 across both Argentina and Chile. It's an incredibly diverse geographic area featuring the Andes Mountains, glaciers, lakes and forests, as well as steppe, desert and coastline.

For the purposes of this article, we're going to focus on some of the best places to visit in Argentine Patagonia, seeing as this website is all about travel in Argentina!

So what are the best places to visit in Patagonia, Argentina?

Well, that depends on the type of traveller you are and what you're hoping to see and do on your trip. Are you looking for the best places to see glaciers? The best places to go trekking? The best places to view wildlife?

Thankfully, there's all that and more! We'll be covering 15 destinations, including a mix of mountain towns, seaside villages, and even cities that span Northern Patagonia, Coastal Patagonia, and Southern Patagonia. 

So pick and choose from this list to plan your ultimate Patagonia trip!

Best Places to Visit in Patagonia, Argentina

El Bolsón

Best place in Patagonia for hiking and epic mountain views.

El Bolsón is one of the best places to visit in Patagonia for hiking and nature. This hippie mountain town offers trails for hikers of all levels, and there's always a reward at the end, be it an epic mountain view or a pristine river to swim in.

The town sits in a valley between two mountain ranges, and it truly is one of the most beautiful places in Patagonia.

Even though this is the best-known town in the Comarca Andina it's still Patagonia off-the-beaten-path.

Best activities in El Bolsón

Visit the Sculpture Forest

One of the main attractions in El Bolsón is the Sculpture Forest, locally known as Bosque Tallado.

The sculpture forest is situated on Cerro Piltriquitrón, and the art project came about after a series of fires burned down part of the mountainside.

Local artist Marcelo López saw the opportunity to create something beautiful out of tragedy and invited a series of artists to create sculptures using the burnt and fallen trees.

This project began in 1998 and is ongoing, with artists being invited every few years to add new works to the Sculpture Forest.

Tackle the hiking trails

El Bolsón is a haven for hiking enthusiasts, offering a plethora of scenic trails and stunning landscapes to explore.

The region is known for its lush forests, crystal-clear rivers, and majestic mountain views, making it an ideal destination for nature lovers and adventure seekers.

Trails range in length and level of difficulty. A few to consider include Cerro Amigo, Cascada Escondida, Cabeza del Indio, Cajón del Azul, and Cerro Piltriquitrón.

Shop at the Hippie Fair

The Hippie Fair, better known as Feria Artesanal, takes place on Plaza Pagano 4 times a week on Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday and Sunday.

This is a great place to do your souvenir shopping with 200 stalls to browse. You can find everything from ceramics and tapestries to homemade jams and natural cosmetics.

Plus, there are also food trucks on site where you can try Argentine street food like empanadas and choripán.

Drive over to Lago Puelo

As far as day trips from El Bolsón go, Lago Puelo is one of the easiest ones you can do!

Lago Puelo is technically in a different province, but it's only a 30-minute drive across the border.

The lake sits in Lago Puelo National Park, which is home to Valdivian forest, mountain peaks, and hiking trails - including one that reaches the Chilean border.

Sample the ice cream flavours at Jauja

Argentines love their ice cream, and you'll find that ice cream shops abound, even in mountain towns.

We treated ourselves to daily ice cream since we were doing plenty of hiking, and we were big fans of the flavour offerings at Jauja.

Some of their more unique Patagonian ice cream flavours include raspberries with goat's milk, dulce de leche with walnuts and Andean chocolate. These use local ingredients and are pretty inventive.

Villa La Angostura

Best place in Patagonia for high-end resorts by the lake.

Villa La Angostura is a high-end resort town located on the shores of Nahuel Huapi Lake in the Province of Neuquén.

The town's Swiss-style architecture features plenty of wooden chalets and log cabins which add to the allure of the town.

Plus, you have pristine forests, crystal-clear lakes, and snow-capped peaks creating a breathtaking backdrop that complements the town's cozy and inviting feel.

It's an idyllic destination that attracts tourists year-round.

Best activities in Villa La Angostura

Arrayanes Forest

The main attraction in Villa La Angostura is the magical Arrayanes Forest, which is located on the Quetrihué Peninsula that juts out into Nahuel Huapi Lake just south of town.

What makes the forest special are the arrayán trees, known for their cinnamon-coloured bar,k which feels cool to the touch. This is because the tree's bark is so thin that you can feel the sap flowing inside the tree.

Most of the trees in the forest are around 300 years old, though there are a few specimens that date back 650 years.

Hike the Quetrihué Peninsula

After visiting the Arrayanes Forest, you have two options: get back on the boat or hike across the peninsula.

The hike is 12 kilometres long and takes about 3 hours to complete.

Visit the two bays

Villa La Angostura is a town of two bays. You have Bahía Mansa, meaning ‘calm bay’, and Bahía Brava, meaning ‘wild bay’.

The two bays are just a 5-minute walk from each other, so it's easy to visit both.

Bahía Mansa is where most boat excursions depart from and where you have that beautiful two-level wooden pier you see in photos, and Bahía Brava has a nice crescent beach, where you can enjoy a stroll and catch the sunset.

Drive the Route of the Seven Lakes

Villa La Angostura is best known as the starting point (or ending point, depending on which direction you drive it!) of the Route of the Seven Lakes.

This is a very picturesque 107-kilometre drive that runs between the towns of Villa La Angostura and San Martín de Los Andes.

The route goes through two national parks, Lanín National Park and Nahuel Huapi National Park, and as the names suggest, it also goes past seven lakes.

This drive is best done as a one-day road trip with stops at all the lakes, waterfalls, and scenic points along the way.

Eat in a cuckoo house cafe

Cucu Schulz is a cafe built to look like a cuckoo clock, and inside the walls are covered in even more cuckoo clocks, which is really fun when the clocks strike the hour.

My favourite thing to order at Cucu Schulz is their ricotta cake. You may also want to try their in-house specialty, the Cucu Shulz cake, which consists of a chocolate cake with semisweet chocolate mousse, chantilly cream, a chocolate glaze and caramelized almonds.

Villa Traful

Best place in Patagonia for a quiet lakeside escape.

Villa Traful is a picturesque village located on the southern shore of Lake Traful, surrounded by the Andes Mountains.

The village is known for its breathtaking natural beauty, making it a popular destination for nature lovers and outdoor enthusiasts.

Getting to Villa Traful involves travelling down rugged gravel roads, but pristine nature and tranquillity are the reward.

Best activities in Villa Traful

Hike to the waterfalls

There are two different waterfalls you can visit in Villa Traful; one is Cascada del Arroyo Coa Co, which is a 40-minute loop, and the other is Cascada del Arroyo Blanco, which is a 60-minute loop.

Both are considered relatively easy hikes.

Visit the submerged forest

Villa Traful boasts a rather unique attraction, and that is the Submerged Forest, where around 60 cypress trees rise from the waters of Lago Traful.

These trees were once on the hillside but became submerged due to a landslide in the 1960s. The crystal-clear waters allow visitors to see the trunks and branches of these submerged trees.

The Submerged Forest can be explored by boat, with excursions departing from the south side of the lake and heading to the forest on the north side.

Go scuba diving

For a more immersive experience, Buceo VLA offers scuba diving excursions to witness the Submerged Forest in all its glory.

Scuba diving in Patagonia does mean cooler temperatures, so you'll wear a 7mm neoprene diving suit.

Try Argentina's most famous alfajores

What is an alfajor, you ask?

An alfajor is a sweet confection consisting of two soft cookies typically filled with dulce de leche, which is a creamy caramel-like spread made from condensed milk. The alfajor can also be coated in white, milk or dark chocolate.

It just so happens that the award-winning alfajores from Del Montañés originate in Villa Traful, so you need to try them if you make it all the way there!

Enjoy Lago Traful

Of course, aside from boating and scuba diving, you can also enjoy some beach time on the shores of Lake Traful.

Plus, if you're looking for something a bit more active, you can rent kayaks or stand-up paddle boards and spend the day out on the water.

Esquel

Best place in Patagonia for train travel and epic day trips.

Esquel is a town set at the foot of the Andes Mountains, and its location makes it a convenient base for exploring the nearby national park as well as some easy day trips.

There are plenty of things to do in Esquel, and right now we're going to cover some of the highlights.

Best activities in Esquel

Ride the Old Patagonian Express

The main thing to do in Esquel is to ride the Old Patagonian Express train!

Locally known as La Trochita, this train was made famous by Paul Theroux’s 1979 novel The Old Patagonian Express, in which he recounted his train journey from his hometown in Massachusetts all the way down to Argentina.

While the railway tracks of the Old Patagonian Express once stretched out across 402 kilometres, today only three short segments of the route can be travelled by tourists.

The most popular segment departs from Esquel to Nahuel Pan. This is a half-day activity where you can travel across the Patagonian steppe, and upon arriving in Nahuel Pan, you can visit an artisanal market, tour the Museum of Patagonian Culture, and enjoy some Argentine street food in the form of a choripán (sausage on a bun)!

Los Alerces National Park

A popular day trip from Esquel is to Los Alerces National Park, one of the most beautiful national parks in Patagonia.

The park is made up of interconnected lakes and rivers that weave their way through the Valdivian forest.

Some of the highlights include riding a boat across waters that shift from emerald to turquoise, seeing hanging glaciers, and visiting the Grandfather Alerce, which is 2,700 years old!

Yes, this park is home to the second-longest living tree species in the world – the alerce, which gives the park its name!

Piedra Parada

For a change of scenery and a taste of the Patagonian steppe, you can consider a day trip to Piedra Parada.

This natural protected area is home to a towering monolith that rises 210 metres from the Chubut Valley. The rock's origins are volcanic, and once upon a time, this area would have been the caldera of an ancient mega volcano.

You can also visit the nearby Vulture's Canyon, which is a really nice area for hiking and rock climbing.

The canyon's walls rise some 150 meters on either side, and along the way, you can see small refuges in the rock that would have been used by the pre-Tehuelches and Tehuelches who inhabited this area in a seasonal manner up to 5000 years ago.

Skiing in La Hoya

If you happen to be visiting Esquel in the wintertime and you're down for some skiing or snowboarding, you'll want to make your way up to La Hoya.

This is the main ski centre in the area, and it's just a 30-minute drive north of town.

You can rent gear, book passes, or sign up for ski and snowboarding lessons directly on their website.

Hike the local trails

Last but not least, Esquel offers plenty of local hiking opportunities.

Laguna La Zeta leads to a lagoon where you can go kayaking or horseback riding. It takes about 1 hour to hike up from the centre of town.

Cerro La Cruz offers beautiful views of Esquel, surrounded by mountains. It's a steep hike, but there are lookouts along the way. It takes about 1.5 hours to reach the top, and there are two different access points via Barrio Baden in the east or Barrio Ceferino on the west.

Trevelin

Best place in Patagonia for wineries and Welsh history.

Trevelin is a small mountain town situated in a picturesque valley surrounded by the Andes Mountains. Its name translates to 'mill town' in Welsh, reflecting its heritage.

Trevelin is known for its access to Los Alerces National Park, fly fishing opportunities, multiple wineries, and its tulip fields in the springtime.

Best activities in Trevelin

Visit the wineries

Did you know there are vineyards and wineries in Patagonia?

It does take a special type of grape to thrive in this climate, but more and more we're seeing winemakers take on the challenge of producing wine in this part of the world.

Some of the wineries you can visit in Trevelin include Viñas del Nant y Fall, Contra Corriente, and Casa Yagüe.

White wines do well at this latitude, so you can expect to find Chardonnay, Riesling and Gewürztraminer. As far as red grapes, it’s all about the Pinot Noir.

Stay at a fishing lodge

Another thing to do in Trevelin is to stay at a fishing lodge. This area is considered one of the best places in Patagonia for fly-fishing, with many fishing enthusiasts making the long trek from Europe and North America.

The Futaleufú River, just west of Trevelin, is a particularly popular spot, and it's known as the 'river of a hundred rivers' thanks to its many branches that flow away from the main river only to rejoin again.

There are all sorts of fishing programs that include a mix of floating and wading in search of Brown, Rainbow and Brook Trout.

Learn about Welsh culture

The Welsh immigrants first arrived on Argentine shores in 1865, and they slowly planted roots across Patagonia.

One such community was Trevelin, where they managed to cultivate the fertile lands, engage in sheep farming, and build a thriving community.

They also built traditional Welsh-style houses and chapels, which can still be seen in the town today.

The Andean Mill Museum is worth a visit to learn more about their history, plus there are Welsh tea houses where you can enjoy some traditional Welsh cake.

Visit Nant Fach Mill

Just 17 kilometres outside of Trevelin, you'll find the Nant Fach Mill, which is a replica of the flour mills that were used in the late nineteenth century.

The name Nant Fach means ‘small creek’ in Welsh, and the mill acts as a museum displaying lots of agricultural machinery.

There's also an indoor component to the museum showcasing tools, furniture, crockery and musical instruments that were brought over from Wales by the early settlers.

Futaleufú Hydroelectric Complex

Trevelin is the access point to the southern part of Los Alerces National Park, where you can visit the Futaleufú Dam.

The dam was built between 1971 and 1976 with the goal of providing electricity to an aluminum plant in the coastal city of Puerto Madryn. 

There are also plenty of hiking trails to enjoy within the park, which lead to rivers, waterfalls and lookout points.

You can get more ideas of things to do in Trevelin here.

Bariloche

Best place in Patagonia for chill city vibes and light adventure.

If you're a city person but you still want to get a taste of Patagonia without doing anything too strenuous (like a multi-day hike!), then Bariloche might be the place for you!

Formally known as San Carlos de Bariloche, this city is the gateway to the Argentine Lake District. It has an incredible craft beer scene, is renowned for its artisanal ice creams and chocolates, plus it offers plenty of light adventures (including some cool historical walks!) so you can still enjoy the beauty of the outdoors.

This is one of the best places to visit in Patagonia for chill city vibes surrounded by epic mountain scenery. Also, here's how to get to Bariloche because there is a cool cross-country train journey to consider!

Best activities in Bariloche

Boat tour of Isla Victoria

The boat tour to Isla Victoria and the Arrayanes Forest is one of the most popular excursions in Bariloche.

The tour departs from Puerto Pañuelo and travels on Lago Nahuel Huapi until you reach the Arrayanes Forest. This is the forest believed to have inspired Disney's Bambi.

The boat tour then continues towards Isla Victoria, where you disembark once more and can either join a guided hike or explore the island at your leisure.

There's a beautiful beach called Playa del Toro, as well as hiking trails, and you can also see some small cave paintings.

Explore the craft beer scene

You could spend two weeks in Bariloche and visit a different brewery every day. There are so many to choose from, and they all offer something different.

Cerveza Patagonia is a classic stop on the Circuito Chico at Km 24.7 for anyone visiting Bariloche. Their brewery has the best views you could ask for - lakes and snowcapped mountains as far as the eye can see. Come for the beers, stay for the views!

Cervecería Gilbert is a rustic brewpub that serves some great beers paired with traditional dishes like wild boar, trout and lentil stew.

You can also check out Cervecería Manush for craft beer and gourmet burgers.

This is but a mere sampling of what's available in Bariloche's beer scene!

Stay at the Llao Llao Hotel

If you want to centre your trip to Bariloche around rest and relaxation in an unbeatable setting, then you need to stay at the Llao Llao Hotel.

This is considered one of the leading hotels in the world, and it's easy to see why.

Its location is unparalleled; the Llao Llao Hotel sits on 15 hectares of land between two lakes - Lago Moreno and Lago Nahuel Huapi. It is framed by the mountain peaks of Cerro Tronador and Cerro Lopez, and it was built in a unique style that drew inspiration from alpine construction and Canadian log cabins.

The hotel features a golf course, marina, infinity pool, spa, fitness centre, and numerous restaurants.

Drive the Circuito Chico

Another must-do activity in Bariloche is to drive the Circuito Chico. This is a scenic drive that follows the lakeshore of Lago Nahuel Huapi heading north, and then loops around various lakes before circling back towards Bariloche.

Along the route, there are numerous lookout points where you can pull over and enjoy the views. Plus, there are microbreweries, restaurants, cafes, hiking trails, kayak rentals and more.

The drive can typically be done in half a day, including stops for food and photos.

Try artisanal ice cream and chocolates

If you have a sweet tooth, you'll enjoy all the artisanal chocolate and ice cream offerings in Patagonia.

Rapa Nui is known for its 'Franui' - we're talking Patagonian raspberries dipped in white chocolate and then milk chocolate. They are delicious! Their main location features a cafe, ice cream shop and ice skating rink.

You have to try the dulce de leche ice cream when in Argentina! The closest thing I can compare it to is caramel, but it's an experience in and of itself.

Another great option is Mamushka. This is a nice place to go for a sweet breakfast or afternoon tea (known as merienda in Argentina). Aside from selling chocolates, they have a nice cafe that serves all sorts of cakes and elaborate sweets.

Península Valdés

Best place in Patagonia for wildlife viewing opportunities.

Península Valdés is one of the best places to visit in coastal Patagonia if you want to see wildlife.

The peninsula is home to Magellanic penguins, sea lions, elephant seals, Southern right whales, dolphins, guanacos, rheas, maras and so much more!

It is also an important nature reserve that is listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site, so if you want to experience the best of coastal Patagonia, Península Valdés should be at the top of your list.

Best activities in Península Valdés

Lunch at an estancia

A nice activity to enjoy on Península Valdés is lunch at Estancia San Lorenzo.

This traditional Patagonian sheep ranch raises Australian merino sheep for wool production, and depending on the time of year you visit, you can witness a variety of activities related to sheep farming, like marking, shearing, and herding the sheep with the help of dogs.

The restaurant is set in the old shearing barn, and it serves Patagonian-style dishes in a rustic setting.

Estancia San Lorenzo also happens to be home to the largest Magellanic penguin rookery in the world, which brings us to our next point.

Visit the largest penguin rookery

Estancia San Lorenzo Nature Reserve is located within the Peninsula Valdés Protected Natural Area and can be visited on a day trip from Puerto Madryn.

With an estimated 600,000 penguins per season, it is the largest known continental colony of Magellanic penguins.

Estancia San Lorenzo opens its doors to visitors every year from September 7 to March 31. The opening hours are from 10:00 am to 6:00 pm, with guided tours of the rookery offered 4 times per day.

See a geographical accident

On the eastern shore of Península Valdés, you'll find Caleta Valdés, which is best described as a ‘geographic accident’.

The caleta is a long, narrow body of water that has been naturally closed off by a strip of land, with only a small opening connecting it to the sea. It stretches 35 kilometres in length.

This is a good spot to see Magellanic penguins, and depending on the time of year, it also draws elephant seals.

Look for wildlife at Punta Delgada

Another place to visit on the peninsula is Punta Delgada, a beach with steep sandy cliffs that offers some great wildlife viewing opportunities.

Punta Delgada sees a high concentration of elephant seals during mating and moulting season (this is when the seals shed their hair and the upper layer of their skin).

And if you happen to be in the area around lunch time, you can stop at the Punta Delgada Lighthouse. This former post office and military building is now a sheep farm, hotel and restaurant.

Puerto Pirámides

Best place in Patagonia for a hippie beach town getaway.

Puerto Pirámides is the only town on Península Valdés, and aside from the wildlife viewing opportunities that draw visitors to the peninsula, many choose to come specifically for the town's hippie feel and the beach.

Puerto Pirámides is known for its colourful buildings and murals, eco hotels are the accommodation of choice, and people walk around barefoot.

Best activities in Puerto Pirámides

Go on a boat tour

Puerto Pirámides is the departure point for boat tours around the Golfo Nuevo.

Depending on the time of year, you can enjoy whale-watching tours, or watch the sea lions basking in the sunshine along the cliffs in Punta Pirámides.

These tours are also a great opportunity to see all sorts of sea birds - especially cormorants, who are there by the thousands!

Hike the cliffs for sunrise

For a spectacular sunrise you won't soon forget, hike up to the cliffs just east of town. There's a trail that leads up from the port area just behind where the campervans park.

It's steep, but it's a relatively short stretch, and once you reach the to,p you can look out over the Golfo Nuevo, and if you're lucky, you might even spot a whale.

Look for fossils

Another thing to do in Puerto Pirámides is to look for fossils!

If you were to travel back in time millions of years ago, the cliffs you see today would have been the ocean floor. And as the cliffs slowly erode away, marine fossils are revealed.

Fossilized oysters, scallops and sea urchins are quite common, though you can also find shark teeth and fossilized remains of birds and marine mammals.

The coastline just west of town is a good area to see fossils, but remember that removing any is strictly prohibited.

Enjoy the seafood

What do you do when you're staying in a coastal beach town?

You enjoy the seafood, of course!

Our favourite restaurant in town was La Covacha Resto Mar. They have a variety of seafood pastas to choose from, plus scallops gratin, clam chowder, sautéed prawns, calamari, and there's always an experimental dish of the day if your taste buds are feeling adventurous.

Stay at an eco hotel

Because the town of Puerto Pirámides is located in the Península Valdés Natural Protected Area, there are certain regulations as to what can and cannot be built here.

These restrictions have given rise to eco hotels with a focus on sustainability and being environmentally friendly.

We stayed at Océano Patagonia Wild Coast Residence, which is a beachfront property that uses a geothermal heating and cooling system. They also have a water recycling system since this is a desert climate. Plus, they have panels for renewable solar energy.

Las Grutas

Best place in Patagonia for a seaside vacation.

Las Grutas is a resort town located on the Gulf of San Matias on the Patagonian coastline, and it is renowned for its beaches and sea caves, which make it a popular summer destination for those seeking a coastal escape.

A large part of the town is painted white, making it feel slightly reminiscent of a Greek island. The streets are lined with hotels, seafood restaurants, ice cream parlours, and lots of souvenir shops.

This is a destination you'll want to visit during the summer months, because it is seasonal and shuts down at the end of summer.

Best activities in Las Grutas

Enjoy the beaches and sea caves

The best thing to do in Las Grutas is to enjoy some beach time and visit the sea caves.

The sea caves of Las Grutas are ancient geological formations created by the constant erosion of the cliffs by the sea waves. Over time, the water carved out hollow spaces in the rocky cliffs. The caves are quite small and shallow, but it's still a lot of fun to explore the cliffside.

Go snorkelling or scuba diving

If you're feeling a bit more adventurous, two popular activities to enjoy in Las Grutas are snorkelling and scuba diving.

The clear and calm waters of the Gulf of San Matias create the perfect conditions for these activities, making Las Grutas a sought-after destination by both beginners and experienced divers.

Scuba diving operators in Las Grutas offer guided tours and excursions to the best dive sites, ensuring a safe and enjoyable experience for divers of all skill levels.

Eat at Del Azul

Seafood is the thing to eat when visiting the coastal town of Las Grutas, and one restaurant worth seeking out is Del Azul.

You can enjoy dishes like mixed ceviche, seafood paella, battered prawns, shrimp tagliatelle, and even sushi!

This is a restaurant that we were happy to return to time and time again, and it comes highly recommended.

Go on a 4x4 safari

Another fun activity in the outskirts of Las Grutas is a 4x4 expedition to the salt flats, which is typically combined with a campfire meal.

Salinas de Gualicho are the largest salt flats in Argentina, the second largest in South America, and the third largest in the world.

These salt flats also have the second-lowest elevation in South America, dropping down to -72 metres below sea level. The city of Buenos Aires could fit in this depression more than two times!

Whale watching

In recent years, Las Grutas has introduced whale watching as a tourist activity, taking advantage of the increasing presence of these majestic creatures in the San Matías Gulf.

Each year, Southern right whales return to the Patagonian coasts to breed and nurse their young, seeking warmer waters. While solitary whales are occasionally spotted in the fall, the main spectacle occurs from mid-August to October.

Gaiman

Best place in Patagonia for Welsh culture.

As you'll soon discover on this website, there is no shortage of Welsh towns to visit in Patagonia!

Gaiman may just be the most famous of them all; this is the one Diana, Princess of Wale,s visited during her tour of Argentina.

This town is one of the best places to visit in Patagonia to learn about Welsh immigration and enjoy a Welsh afternoon tea.

Best activities in Gaiman

Have a Welsh afternoon tea

There are numerous Welsh tea houses to visit in Gaiman, however, the best known is Ty Te Caerdydd, since this is the one Lady Diana visited during her trip to Argentina in 1995.

However, no matter which tea house you choose, you can expect to find some bara brith or Welsh cake on the menu.

My one tip is to skip lunch and go hungry because afternoon tea is quite bountiful with sandwiches, scones, cakes and more.

Quintas Narlú

Quintas Narlú is a beautiful farm located on the outskirts of Gaiman on Ruta 7.

They have a shop on site where you can pick up fresh fruits, berries, jams, honey, liqueurs and other traditional souvenirs.

We picked up a few items, and afterwards, the owner let us wander around the farm and the apple orchard, where we enjoyed a picnic.

Visit the local museums

Even though Gaiman is a small place, you could probably spend a good part of the day museum hopping and visiting the historic buildings scattered across town.

You have the Regional History Museum, which is set in the old train station and displays some of the items that were brought over by the early Welsh settlers.

Then you have the Tehuelche-Mapuche Museum, formerly known as the Gaiman Anthropological Museum, housed in one of the first two-story buildings in Gaiman. This one focuses on the friendship between the Tehuelches and the Welsh, and how the former helped the newcomers survive in a new and hostile climate.

You can also tour the first stone house to be built in Gaiman, dating back to 1874. This was the home of David D. Roberts and his wife Jemima Jones, who became the first Welsh settlers of Gaiman.

Central Chubut Railway Tunnel

Another attraction in Gaiman is the old train tunnel, which was part of the Central Chubut Railway.

This was the first railway in Patagonia, and it helped cut down travel times since this journey was previously done on horseback.

Inside the tunnel, there are audiovisual displays that share the history of the railway in Spanish, English and Welsh.

Riverside walk along the Chubut River

Another nice thing to do in Gaiman is to walk along the shores of the Chubut River, which crosses the Province of Chubut.

The river is lined with weeping willows, and there's a nice riverside path you can follow across town.

Trelew

Best place in Patagonia for dinosaur lovers.

Trelew is another city with Welsh roots and its name translates to 'town of Lewis', reflecting its Welsh origins.

But aside from Welsh culture, Trelew is a destination that also offers an extensive collection of dinosaur fossils from across Patagonia, it has links to Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid, and it's also the gateway to a petrified forest, and natural areas where you can visit a vast colony of Magellanic penguins.

Best activities in Trelew

See dinosaurs

The Egidio Feruglio Paleontological Museum is one of the most important and renowned paleontological museums in South America.

Named after the Italian-Argentine paleontologist Egidio Feruglio, the museum is dedicated to preserving and showcasing the rich paleontological heritage of Patagonia.

The museum's extensive collection contains a vast array of fossils, including dinosaur remains, prehistoric creatures, and ancient plant specimens.

Aside from the museum, you can also visit the biggest dinosaur sculpture in the world! It's located on the outskirts of town, directly across from Trelew Airport.

Have lunch at Hotel Touring Club

Trelew's Hotel Touring Club has a storied history, having welcomed numerous famous guests, including the renowned writer and aviator Antoine de Saint-Exupéry, known for his masterpiece The Little Prince.

Interestingly, the hotel also played host to a notorious gang of bank and train robbers, including the infamous Butch Cassidy, the Sundance Kid, and Ethel Place. Fleeing from US law enforcement, they sought refuge in this remote corner of Patagonia before venturing towards the Andes.

Learn about the Welsh settlers

The Regional Museum Pueblo de Luis is housed in the historic former railway station, which dates back to 1889. Within its walls, the museum narrates the history of the Welsh immigrants who embarked on a journey across the Atlantic Ocean, eventually settling in the valley along the Chubut River.

The museum is divided into different rooms, each offering a unique perspective on the region's history. The journey commences with exhibits dedicated to the Mapuches and the Tehuelches who lived in these lands, followed by the early exploration of the area between 1520 and 1865, and then the arrival of Welsh immigrants.

Take a day trip to the petrified forest

There are quite a few day trips you can do from Trelew, one of them being to the Petrified Forest Florentino Ameghino.

The journey there is just under 2 hours, and you'll come face to face with petrified logs that were once part of an extensive forest. These logs were then carried by rivers to the sea coast of that time, and date back to around 60 million years ago.

Visit the nearby penguins

Not too far from Trelew, you also have some great birdwatching opportunities.

Nearby Punta Tombo is home to one of the largest colonies of Magellanic penguins in the world, making it a popular destination for wildlife enthusiasts.

El Calafate

Best place in Patagonia to see glaciers.

El Calafate acts as a gateway to Los Glaciares National Park, renowned for its glaciers, including the magnificent Perito Moreno Glacier.

This colossal ice mass, with its dramatic icefalls and striking blue hues, is a true marvel of nature and draws travellers from around the globe.

The glaciers are the stars of the show, but there's plenty of fun to be had in and around El Calafate.

Best activities in El Calafate

Los Glaciares National Park

Los Glaciares National Park is home to one of the world's most stunning glacial landscapes, and it encompasses 726,927 hectares, making it the largest national park in the country.

The park owes its name to the numerous glaciers that cover roughly half the park, many of which are fed by the massive South Patagonian Ice Field.

Perhaps none is more famous than the Perito Moreno Glacier, which is constantly advancing, creating a mesmerizing spectacle as massive ice chunks calve into Lake Argentino.

The park has boardwalks and viewing decks where you can watch the magic unfold!

Go on a glacier boat tour

If you want to see a lot of glaciers up close and personal, it's worth splurging on tickets for the 'Glaciers Gourmet' tour, which is a full-day boat excursion aboard María Turquesa.

You'll get to see the Upsala, Seco, Heim, Spegazzini and Perito Moreno glaciers. Overwhelming beauty that can move you to tears is the only way to describe what you'll see!

It's an experience you won't soon forget, and it's worth doing even if you've already visited the park. You'll get a completely different perspective. These are some of the best tours from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier to give you some ideas. However, this El Calafate glacier boat tour was our favourite!

Visit the Glaciarium and ice bar

Glaciarium is a museum dedicated to the study and preservation of glaciers, which is located on the outskirts of El Calafate.

As a region renowned for its breathtaking glaciers, the museum serves as an introduction to the fragile ecosystem of these ice giants. Inside Glaciarium, visitors can explore interactive exhibits and multimedia displays that offer valuable insights into glaciology, climate change, and the importance of preserving these natural wonders.

But the main draw is the museum's ice bar, which is located at basement level. Here, guests are given these hooded poncho jackets to stay warm while being served drinks in glasses made entirely of ice. Music blasts in the background, so why not have a little dance?

It's a great activity for an extreme weather day when trekking isn't possible.

Spend the day at an estancia

Visiting a local estancia is part of the Patagonian travel experience, and there are plenty of El Calafate estancias to choose from.

One popular excursion is to Estancia Nibepo Aike, which you can visit on a day trip or stay overnight.

This working estancia is located within Los Glaciares National Park, and it's an opportunity to learn about life on a Patagonian ranch, go horseback riding, watch a sheep-shearing demonstration, and enjoy a traditional Argentine BBQ.

Go on a 4x4 tour

Another popular excursion from El Calafate is up to the Calafate Balconies.

This is a scenic drive in a 4x4 vehicle, which goes up Mount Huyliche to a scenic lookout offering views of Lake Argentino and the Andes Mountains.

Once atop the balconies, you have the options of ziplining, going on a guided hike, or exploring further by 4x4.

You can get more ideas of things to do in El Calafate in this travel guide, plus a list of fun day trips from El Calafate here.

El Chaltén

Best place in Patagonia for trekking and epic mountain ranges.

El Chaltén is often referred to as the trekking capital of Argentina, and it's an adventurer's playground.

Situated within Los Glaciares National Park, this picturesque town is surrounded by mountain peaks, glaciers, and pristine wilderness.

Of course, the real draw to El Chaltén lies in its abundant trails, ranging from easy walks to challenging mountain hikes.

You have the iconic trek to Cerro Fitz Roy with its distinctive granite spires, the epic route to Laguna de los Tres with its turquoise waters, and the trek to Cerro Torre with views of surrounding glaciers.

El Chaltén's raw, rugged beauty is what makes it one of the best places to visit in Patagonia.

Best activities in El Chaltén

Mirador de los Cóndores

If you're looking for an easy hike to ease into all the trekking in El Chaltén, Mirador de los Cóndores is a good place to start.

This easy hike leads up to a lookout point where not only do you get panoramic views of the town, but as the trail's name suggests, you can frequently spot condors flying overhead.

This trail connects with another hike called Mirador de las Águilas, where you guessed it, you can sometimes spot eagles.

Cerro Fitz Roy

Cerro Fitz Roy is a mountain with an elevation of 3,375 meters above sea level, and it is known for its rugged and imposing granite peak, which is one of the most iconic landmarks in Patagonia.

You can view Cerro Fitz Roy from a few different points, including Laguna Capri, or Laguna de los Tres if you're up for a more challenging and intense full-day hike.

Cerro Torre

Cerro Torre stands at an elevation of 3,128 meters above sea level, and it's known for its challenging and technically demanding climbing routes, making it a coveted destination for experienced mountaineers.

Cerro Torre's distinctive spire-like summit is often shrouded in ice and clouds, adding to its magic.

You can view Cerro Torre by hiking to the lookout known as Mirador Cerro Torre, or you can continue further to Laguna Torre, which is the lagoon at the base of the mountain peak.

Rafting Río de las Vueltas

A popular activity for the thrill seeker visiting El Chaltén is a rafting excursion on the Río de las Vueltas, or River of the Turns.

This is a river of glacial origin that is born in Lago del Desierto and then flows into Lake Viedma.

The first part of the river is 6 kilometres of tranquil and meandering waters that allow you to enjoy the scenery and get comfortable with rafting.

The second section is where the river enters the canyon, and there are 10 kilometres of rapids. This is where you get the heart-pumping adventure!

Hotel with a pool or spa

Because El Chaltén is a very active destination where you'll likely spend most of your days hiking, it's a nice idea to book a hotel with pool or a spa where you can unwind at the end of a busy day. Your muscles will thank you for the soak!

You may also need a full recovery day after tackling some of the longer and more challenging treks, so a comfortable and spacious hotel room is worth it.

Or if you're looking for a truly memorable one-of-a-kind stay in El Chalten, consider some of the luxury camps with geo domes just outside of town. You're guaranteed epic mountain views and nothing but tranquillity.

Ushuaia

Best place in Patagonia for a sense of accomplishment.

Getting to Ushuaia is a feat in and of itself! It's not every day you can say you've set foot in the southernmost city in the world.

Maybe you're wrapping up an epic trip across Patagonia, maybe you're about to board a cruise to Antarctica, or maybe you just wanted to go on some fun action-packed tours in Ushuaia to experience the city.

Ushuaia is one of the most epic places to visit in Patagonia simply because of the effort it takes to get there!

Best activities in Ushuaia

Train to the End of the World

The Southern Fuegian Railway, better known as the End of the World Train, is a steam railway located in Argentina’s Tierra del Fuego province.

Originally built as a means to transport timber by the prisoners in the Ushuaia penal colony, the narrow-gauge railway was initially known as the Train of Prisoners.

Today, it has been transformed into a heritage train, maintaining its status as the southernmost railway in the world.

For visitors to Ushuaia, this experience is a must-do activity, particularly for train enthusiasts, as it offers a unique glimpse into the region's history and the scenic beauty of Patagonia.

Tierra del Fuego National Park

Tierra del Fuego National Park is Argentina's southernmost park, and it's made up of Andean forest, Magellanic forest and pre-Antarctic forest.

The park features a variety of trails that range from easy 1-kilometre loops to more challenging multi-day treks.

One thing is for sure, you'll be treated to epic landscapes and ever-changing weather, which may include sunshine, drizzle, fog and snow, sometimes all in one day!

Beagle Channel Cruise

Another must-do activity when visiting Ushuaia is a cruise on the Beagle Channel, which separates Argentina's Isla Grande de Tierra del Fuego from Chile's Navarino Island.

The channel is named after the HMS Beagle, the ship on which the first survey of this area was conducted.

A Beagle Channel cruise is a great opportunity to view the local wildlife, which includes sea lions, seals, Magellanic penguins, cormorants, and if you're lucky, even Peale's dolphins and minke whales.

Plus, you get to see the famous Les Eclaireurs Lighthouse, sometimes confused with the 'Lighthouse at the End of the World'.

Helicopter Flight

Another memorable activity you can enjoy in Ushuaia is a helicopter flight at the end of the world!

The most popular and budget-friendly option is a 7-minute flight over the city center, the Maritime Museum and the former Prison of Ushuaia, as well as the Martial Glacier.

Longer flights will take you even further to the Emerald Lagoon, the Carbajal Valley, and Mount Olivia.

If you're interested, you can read more about how to choose the right Ushuaia helicopter tour for you.

Sample local Fuegian cuisine

For all the foodies out there, when you reach Tierra del Fuego, the southernmost province in Argentina, you have to try the local Fuegian cuisine, which combines food products from the forest, river and sea.

This destination is best known for King crab, known locally as centolla, which features in many restaurant menus. You can get in pastas, stews, or even served as the main dish.

Fuegian lamb is another food to try. It's typically cooked on the cross and makes an appearance in BBQ restaurants.

Lastly, keep an eye out for desserts featuring calafate berries, which only grow in southern Patagonia.

You can get some ideas of things to do in Ushuaia and where to stay in Ushuaia here. Plus, this blog post is loaded with helpful tips for your time in Ushuaia.

Tolhuin

Best place in Patagonia for unwinding at the end of the world.

Tolhuin is a tranquil lakeside town set on the shores of Lago Fagnano in the province of Tierra del Fuego, and it's a nice contrast after spending a few days in the southernmost city of Ushuaia.

This is one of the best places in Patagonia for those looking to go off-the-beaten-path - not only is Tolhuin at the bottom of the world, but you also have to cross the highest mountain pass across Argentina's National Route 3.

Getting there requires a bit of effort, but once you arrive, you can relax and soak in the tranquillity of the place.

Best activities in Tolhuin

Book a lakeside cottage

Since one of the main draws to Tolhuin is rest and relaxation out in nature, you should consider booking some lakeside accommodations.

We really enjoyed Hostería Kaiken, a beautiful guesthouse set atop a cliff overlooking Lago Fagnano.

It's in the outskirts of town, but we enjoyed the lakeside strolls and the onsite restaurant had some fabulous gourmet meals.

Kayaking on Lago Fagnano

Lago Fagnano is a lake shared by both Argentina and Chile, and it's one of the main draws to Tolhuin.

The lake is of glacial origin and runs east to west, stretching 98 kilometres in length, 72.5 km of which sit on the Argentine side of the border.

On a calm day, you can go kayaking on the lake, but just like anywhere in Patagonia, you never know what you're going to get. One day the waters could be as calm as a mirror, and the next look like a tempestuous ocean!

Hiking

Laguna Negra Provincial Reserve is a nature reserve that sits on the northeast end of Lago Fagnano.

The hiking trail follows the lake’s shoreline, crosses southern Fuegian forest, goes through peat bogs, and continues past the ‘black lagoon’ where it ends shortly thereafter.

This is one of the many hikes that visitors can enjoy in the area.

Bakery

If there's one place you need to eat at during your stay in Tolhuin, it's Panadería La Union.

This is a very famous bakery that is well-frequented by locals who use it as a gathering place, as well as travellers making the bus journey from Rio Gallegos to Ushuaia.

Not only can you get some delicious breads and pastries here, but they also sell empanadas and artisanal chocolate.

4x4 lakeside excursion

One of the most popular tours in the area is a full-day 4x4 adventure across the Garibaldi Pass, which is the highest point on Argentina's Ruta Nacional 3 and the only paved route across the Fuegian Andes.

From the pass, travellers get to admire the picturesque Lago Escondido, meaning 'hidden lake,' before embarking on an off-roading adventure along the lake's edge and through the forest, eventually reaching Lago Fagnano.

The tour concludes with a traditional Argentine asado, featuring choripán, bife de chorizo, salad, Malbec wine, and cheese.

While the actual town of Tolhuin isn't visited, this excursion offers a glimpse of the region's main attractions and a delightful taste of Argentine hospitality with a delicious meal.

#### 15+ Things to do in Buenos Aires on a Rainy Day
Looking for things to do in Buenos Aires when it rains? Here is a list of fun, indoor rainy day activities you can enjoy across the city!

Buenos Aires is a city that thrives in all seasons, even when the skies turn grey. Having spent many rainy days exploring the Argentine capital, I’ve discovered that some of its most memorable experiences happen indoors, away from the umbrella-toting crowds.

From historic palaces and grand theatres to cozy cafés and world-class museums, Buenos Aires offers endless ways to connect with its culture, architecture, and history, no matter the weather.

In this guide, I’ll share 15 of the best rainy day activities in Buenos Aires, like touring palaces, lingering in bares notables, taking a cooking class, exploring art galleries, shopping for leather goods, browsing beautiful bookstores, and so much more.

Things to do in Buenos Aires on a Rainy Day

1. Explore Palacio Barolo's architecture

A fun rainy day activity in Buenos Aires is to join a guided visit of Palacio Barolo. Not only does this 100-metre-tall building offer panoramic views of the whole city, but its design was inspired by Dante Alighieri's Divine Comedy. That means visiting this building is an architectural journey through Hell, Purgatory, and Heaven.

Hell and Purgatory can be reached by elevator, however, to reach Heaven, you have to climb a spiralling staircase for the last 8 floors. The reward is the glass lighthouse atop Palacio Barolo, which offers 360-degree views of the whole city. It's truly spectacular, and I think it's something that you can enjoy rain or shine.

As a bonus, you may want to tack on a visit to Salon 1923, a rooftop bar located inside Palacio Barolo. The east and west-facing terraces may be closed because of the rain, but that doesn't mean you can't enjoy the indoor space in all its 1920s glory.

We had walked past Palacio Barolo in Monserrat so many times on our countless visits to Buenos Aires, and I can't believe it took us so long to finally visit! It's a really fun tour and a great way to explore an iconic landmark in the city.

You can book your guided tour of Palacio Barolo here. Tours are bilingual (English and Spanish) and run 1.5 hours in length.

2. Take an Argentine cooking class

I'm a big fan of taking cooking classes whenever I travel. In part, because I love to eat, but also, what makes for a better souvenir than learning to make a recipe and taking it back home with you?

There are loads of Argentine cooking classes to choose from in Buenos Aires; you can learn to make empanadas, alfajores, or even multi-course meals. 

This Pachamama cooking class is a particularly popular one, and it's a feast where you get to prepare a four-course local menu while learning about the history and origin of these traditional Argentine dishes.

You'll be welcomed with a picada (a snacking spread) and a vermouth cocktail because you can't get to work in the kitchen if you're feeling hungry. 

Then, you dive into the different recipes, including chipá, a starchy bread with Guaraní roots; empanadas, dough pastries typically stuffed with meat; humita, an Andean corn dish that can be served in a corn husk or in a casserole; and dulce de leche crepes. All of this paired with wine!

You can book your Pachamama Argentine cooking class here. This class runs 3.5 hours and is consistently rated as a 5-star cooking experience by visitors.

3. Go to a tango and dinner show

Going to a tango show is a quintessential part of any trip to Buenos Aires. This is the birthplace of tango, so of course you need to make time to go to at least one show!

Here's a list of some of the best tango shows in Buenos Aires, with each one offering something a little bit different. There are tango shows that include folklore dancing, shows that have more of a cabaret style, and big stage productions with a Broadway flair.

Whenever I have friends or family visiting Argentina, this is one of the first activities I recommend. It's just a really fun introduction to Argentine culture!

4. Tour the National Congress of Argentina

Another thing to do in Buenos Aires when it rains is to join a guided visit of the National Congress of Argentina.

The National Congress is composed of the Senate with 72 seats and the Chamber of Deputies with 257 seats. This means it is bicameral and its ordinary sessions run from March 1 to November 30.

The building itself is spectacular both inside and outside. The guided visit ran 1 hour in length and we got to visit both the Senate and the Chamber of Deputies, as well as numerous salons. We were divided into 2 groups: one with an English-speaking guide and another with a Spanish-speaking guide.

It was a super informative visit and we lucked out with an amazing guide who shared a wealth of information, answered all our questions, and shared plenty of fun facts along the way. The hour flew by!

Visiting the Argentine National Congress does take a bit of luck. In theory, guided tours run Monday to Friday at 12:00 and 17:00. However, in practice, these tours can be cancelled at the very last minute if there is parliamentary activity. 

We tried visiting a few times during our many visits to Buenos Aires, and it took us a couple of attempts before our dates aligned with the guided visits.

I would recommend checking the official Senate website on the day of your visit. Scroll down to Agenda de Actividades (Activities Agenda) on the homepage and check if there's a listed Visita guiada al Palacio Legislativo (Guided visit of the Legislative Palace) for your desired date. 

You'll then want to make your way to Hipólito Yrigoyen 1863 (the third door on the south entrance of the National Congress) and arrive 30 minutes before the tour, as they accept a maximum of 30 people on this guided visit. You cannot reserve ahead of time.

To take part in this visit, you'll have to present your ID (either a passport or DNI), have your photo taken, and go through security. 

5. Visit Teatro Colón

Another iconic Buenos Aires attraction I'd recommend visiting during your time in the city is Teatro Colon. This is a great rainy day activity as you'll be indoors.

Teatro Colón is an opera house that overlooks Avenida de Julio and first opened its doors in 1908. Opulent is one way to describe this building; it truly feels like you're walking through a French palace!

Many of the materials were brought over from Europe, including different types of Italian marble, French stained glass, and Venetian mosaics.

The auditorium is shaped like a horseshoe with seven tiers that hold 2,487 velvet seats and standing room for 1,000. It's the kind of building that will take your breath away!

While Teatro Colon is an architectural work of art, what sets it apart is its acoustics! The opera has continuously been listed as having some of the best acoustics for operas and concerts.

The great Italian tenor Luciano Pavarotti once said, "The acoustics have the greatest defect: they are perfect! Imagine what this signifies for the singer: if one sings something bad, one notices immediately.”

If a guided visit of Teatro Colon is not enough (you may very well want to come back for a performance after seeing its beauty!), you can check out their program, including ballet, opera, philharmonic orchestra, and many other concerts.

Lastly, if you're feeling a bit peckish after your visit, I recommend walking one block over to Petit Colón. This is one of my favourite historic cafes in Buenos Aires and I go at least once whenever I'm in the city.

6. Visit Casa Rosada

Casa Rosada, or the Pink House, is the executive mansion and office of the President of Argentina. Also known as the Government House or Casa de Gobierno, this building sits on the east end of the Plaza de Mayo.

The Casa Rosada is known for its Italianate architecture and unique pink colour. “Why pink?”, you might ask.

Well, the building’s hue is a combination of red and white, representing the colours of the opposing political factions in 19th-century Argentina; the Federals used red while the Unitarians used white.

Another explanation you might hear is that at one point, the Pink House was painted with cows’ blood, a supposed alternative to paint that wouldn’t peel in the humidity!

The interior of the Casa Rosada features grand halls, beautiful staircases, and historic rooms like the Salón de los Bustos, where busts of former presidents are displayed.

The building also has a stunning courtyard known as the Patio de las Palmeras, filled with palm trees and statues.

Aside from touring Casa Rosada, you can also visit Museo Casa Rosada, a museum located underneath the presidential palace. It covers more than 200 years of Argentine history from the May Revolution of 1810 to the present day.

I ended up visiting this museum on a rainy day in Buenos Aires, having walked past the Casa Rosada countless times! The museum holds presidential cars, portraits and documents. Plus, the building itself is a time capsule where you can see the old brick walls of the original fort and customs building.

Note: Casa Rosada is not currently open to visitors (only guided school visits). When it does re-open to the general public, you’ll be able to click through Visitas Casa Rosada. They typically offer free guided tours in both English and Spanish. You will need your passport to enter.

7. Marvel at Argentine Palaces

Buenos Aires is often called the “Paris of South America,” and nowhere is this more evident than in its collection of elegant palaces and grand mansions built during the city’s Belle Époque, during the late 19th to early 20th century.

During this period, Argentina’s elite, enriched by booming agricultural exports, sought to display their wealth by commissioning European architects and importing materials from France and Italy to construct opulent urban residences.

Many of these palaces line the avenues of Recoleta, Retiro, and Palermo, showcasing ornate façades, wrought-iron balconies, marble staircases, and sprawling ballrooms inspired by Parisian and Neoclassical styles.

While some have been transformed into embassies, cultural centers, or luxury hotels, others remain private family homes, lending an air of grandeur to everyday city streets.

Over the years, I've been able to visit a few of these Argentine palaces, like Palacio de Aguas Corrientes, which houses the Water Works Museum; Palacio Paz, which is home to the National Arms Museum; and Palacio Alvear, where I've had afternoon tea.

Pick a few palaces to visit, and you have a great Buenos Aires rainy day activity.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Zanjón de Granados (@elzanjondegranados)

8. Zanjon de los Granados

El Zanjón de los Granados is one of Buenos Aires’ most fascinating hidden treasures, offering a journey beneath the city streets into layers of urban history.

Located in San Telmo, this site was uncovered in the 1980s when a local family began restoring a dilapidated 19th-century mansion and accidentally discovered a network of brick tunnels, cisterns, and foundations dating back to the early colonial period.

The tunnels once carried the Zanjón stream, one of the city’s earliest watercourses, before being enclosed and built over as Buenos Aires expanded. 

Today, guided tours take visitors through the subterranean passageways, revealing archaeological remnants, restored architecture, and exhibits that trace the city's evolution from the 1500s onward.

It’s an excellent rainy day activity because the experience is indoors, combining shelter with a deep dive into one of Buenos Aires’ lesser-known attractions.

9. Visit the Bares Notables

Ducking into one of the city’s bares notables, or notable bars, is another great rainy day activity in Buenos Aires.

The city government has officially recognized these historic cafés, bars, and bistros for their cultural, architectural, or historical significance. Many date back to the late 19th and early 20th centuries, when Buenos Aires was flourishing as a cosmopolitan hub and European immigrants shaped its café culture. 

Think high ceilings, marble-topped tables, wooden counters, vintage mirrors, and the lingering atmosphere of literary gatherings and political debates. 

Visiting a bar notable isn’t just about grabbing a coffee, but rather about soaking up a piece of porteño history. You can expect a relaxed, old-world ambiance, attentive service, and some even have live music and tango performances in the evenings.

Some of the most famous examples include Café Tortoni, Bar El Federal, and Los 36 Billares, each with its own unique story and character.

10. Shop at Galerias Pacifico

Galerias Pacifico is a historic shopping arcade that was designed in the French Beaux Arts style. It takes up an entire city block, and it is strikingly beautiful!

It was built in 1889 to house the Au Bon Marché department store, however, it never served its original purpose. Instead, it housed the Museo de Bellas Artes up until 1940. Then, in 1992, it became a shopping centre with lots of international brands as well as a food court.

But don't dismiss this shopping centre, even if you don't enjoy shopping! I'm not a huge shopper, but even I take the opportunity to walk through the galleries whenever I'm in the area. 

Galerias Pacifico is more like a museum or an art gallery than a shopping centre, and it will immediately transport you to Paris. The crowning jewel is the central dome featuring hand-painted frescoes that depict a scene called Love or Germination of the Earth.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by MALBA (@museomalba)

11. Enjoy the city's many Art Galleries

If you're looking for artsy things to do in Buenos Aires when it rains, then why not check out some of the city's art galleries?

There are countless galleries to choose from for all tastes, but for the purpose of this article, I'm highlighting just 5 of the more famous ones. 

MALBA (Museum of Latin American Art) - MALBA stands for Museo de Arte Latinoamericano de Buenos Aires, and it's an art museum located in Palermo. It showcases Latin American art from the 20th century to the present.

MAMBA (Buenos Aires Museum of Modern Art) - MAMBA is the Museo de Arte Moderno de Buenos Aires, and it is located in the district of San Telmo in an industrial brick building. This art museum features over 7000 works by Argentine and international artists like Salvador Dalí, Henri Matisse, Joan Miró and Pablo Picasso.

MACBA (Buenos Aires Museum of Contemporary Art) - MACBA is locally known as Museo de Arte Contemporáneo de Buenos Aires. This art museum is located in San Telmo, and it houses works of contemporary art from the 1980s onwards by both local and international artists.

Museo Nacional de Bellas Artes - The Museo Nacional de Bellas Artes is located in the neighbourhood of Recoleta. The museum's permanent collection has works by art greats like El Greco, Goya and Rembrandt, just to name a few. Plus, it has the biggest collection of Argentine art.

National Museum of Decorative Art - This museum is set in a Neoclassical mansion that was designed by a French architect. It was once the home of two prominent figures of Argentine high society at the turn of the century. Today, this mansion-turned-museum houses an impressive collection of European and oriental decorative art ranging from the 14th to the 20th century. This includes furniture, tapestries, sculptures and more.

12. Spend the day Museum-hopping

Aside from art galleries, museums are another classic rainy day activity, even more so in Buenos Aires!

History lovers can dive into Argentina’s political and social past at the Museo Histórico Nacional, housed in a colonial mansion in San Telmo, where exhibits trace the country’s journey from independence to nationhood. We specifically visited this museum during one of our trips to Buenos Aires, so that my dad could see the Curved Sabre of San Martín, who was the liberator of Argentina, Chile and Peru.

Tucked away in the Abasto neighbourhood, the Museo Casa Carlos Gardel offers a glimpse into the life of Carlos Gardel, Argentina’s most iconic tango singer. The museum is housed in the very home where Gardel lived with his mother before his rise to fame. Inside, visitors can explore personal artifacts, original photographs, vintage records, and film posters.

Lastly, one of my favourite museums has recently been the Museo de Armas de La Nación. Housed within the Circulo Militar, a grand Beaux-Arts palace once belonging to the Paz family, the museum holds one of the most impressive weapons collections in South America. When we first walked in, I was surprised to see medieval suits of armour and swords from across Europe! We then moved on to galleries filled with firearms, cannons, uniforms and other Argentine military relics. Once again, this is another one of those museums that I had walked past countless times! I visited on a whim because my dad was interested in seeing it, and it proved to be a hidden gem.

13. Shop for leather goods

Another fun way to spend a rainy day in Buenos Aires is to go shopping for leather goods. Argentina is world-renowned for its high-quality leather with countless boutiques selling leather jackets, leather handbags, leather shoes and more. 

Calle Florida has the highest concentration of leather stores in Buenos Aires, so that's a good place to start and get an idea of styles, prices, and what's on the market.

Calle Florida is a pedestrian street (so you'll want to bring an umbrella if you choose to shop on a rainy day!), however, there are also lots of shopping galleries (so you will be undercover as you explore some sections). 

This street was where I bought my first-ever Argentine leather jacket as a young twenty-something-year-old. It was a bomber-style jacket in tan, and I still have it to this day. So why not go for a fashionable Argentine souvenir that will get plenty of use?

14. Browse books at El Ateneo Grand Splendid

Buenos Aires is a city of bookstores and none is more impressive than El Ateneo Grand Splendid. In fact, just a few years ago, this bookstore was voted the most beautiful in the world!

The bookstore is set in a former theatre, which opened in 1919 as Teatro Gran Splendid. Back then, the theatre had a seating capacity of 1,050 guests and its stage was graced by world-famous tango singers, including the one and only Carlos Gardel.

There are plenty of bookstores in Buenos Aires to visit, but part of the appeal at El Ateneo Grand Splendid is that it still very much looks like a theatre, complete with hand-painted ceiling frescoes, ornate balconies with cozy seating, and some 120,000 books to browse.

You can search through stacks of books, and if you're looking for a Classic Argentine author, you cannot go wrong with Jorge Luis Borges. 

So all in all, a perfect rainy day activity in Buenos Aires, where you can easily spend a few hours.

15. Catch a play on Avenida Corrientes

Maybe you're looking for things to do in Buenos Aires on a rainy evening? We've got you covered there, too!

Avenida Corrientes is known as the 'street that never sleeps'. This avenue is lined with theatres, pizzerias, cafes, bars and restaurants. 

Picture giant billboards, neon signs and plenty of flashing lights. It's an assault on the senses, but it also presents plenty of options! So why not go to a show?

Some of the more famous theatres along Avenida Corrientes include Lola Membrives, Nacional, Astral, Complejo Teatral La Plaza, Metropolitan and Ópera.

In terms of performances, you can catch comedies, musicals, stand-ups, dramas, tango shows and even children's programming.

The one catch is that you'll need to know a bit of Spanish if you want to truly follow the performance.

So there you have it, 15 things to do in Buenos Aires on a rainy day! As you can see, rainy days don’t have to put a damper on your adventures. In fact, they offer the perfect excuse to slow down and discover a more intimate and atmospheric side of the city. 

From wandering through historic cafés and opulent palaces to delving into underground tunnels and museums, there are plenty of ways to stay dry while soaking up local culture. Whether you choose to take an Argentine cooking class, go to a tango show, or browse bookstores, you’ll come away with a deeper appreciation for Buenos Aires’ rich past and vibrant present. 

So pack an umbrella, embrace the moody skies, and let the city’s indoor treasures inspire you!

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fe_SuXljM60

#### 25 Things to do in Bariloche, Argentina | Ultimate Bariloche Travel Guide
Here are the best things to do in Bariloche, Argentina during your visit!

San Carlos de Bariloche, more commonly known as Bariloche, is situated in the Province of Río Negro in Northern Patagonia.

The city sits on the shores of Nahuel Huapi Lake, boasts an epic backdrop featuring the Andes Mountains, and has a distinct Swiss-alpine architectural style.

In many ways, Bariloche is the perfect introduction to northern Argentine Patagonia. It's a short flight from Buenos Aires, it offers plenty of outdoor adventures, plus it has a great food and beer scene with restaurants, breweries, and chocolate shops galore!

The nice thing about travelling to Bariloche is that it's a versatile destination that can suit your exact travel style. You can have a relaxing holiday at a lakeside cabin, or tackle a multi-day trek sleeping in mountain refugios. You can enjoy the city's shopping and restaurant scene, or fill your days with outdoor activities like kayaking and horseback riding.

Bariloche is whatever you want it to be. So with that in mind, we're going to share some of the best things to do in Bariloche, fun tours and easy day trips you can go on, foods to try, where to stay and so much more.

The following is the ultimate Bariloche travel guide!

Getting to Bariloche

Air

There are multiple flights per day connecting Bariloche with Buenos Aires and other major cities across Argentina.

If you're flying in from Buenos Aires, you have two airport choices: Aeroparque (AEP) which is in the city, or Ezeiza (EZE) which is in the outskirts. The flight time is around 2 hours and 15 minutes.

Alternatively, you can also get flights from Cordoba, Mendoza and El Calafate, though some destinations don't offer these flights daily.

Aerolineas Argentinas is the national airline, plus you also have low-cost carriers like FlyBondi and jetSMART.

Bus

Numerous bus routes connect Bariloche with the rest of the country. Two of the most popular companies are Via Bariloche and Via TAC. You can browse their routes and rates on BusBud.

Train

You can also reach Bariloche by train aboard the Trén Patagónico which crosses Patagonia widthwise from Viedma to Bariloche.

There's only one departure per week, so if you really want to take the train, you'll have to plan accordingly.

Keep in mind that there is no direct train from Buenos Aires to Bariloche, so you'll first have to catch a connecting train from Buenos Aires to Viedma in order to travel aboard the Trén Patagónico.

Here's our guide detailing how to get to Bariloche.

Things to do in Bariloche 

1. Take a Bariloche Walking Tour

A great way to learn about Bariloche's history and get a good lay of the land is by joining a guided walking tour of the city center.

There are numerous Bariloche walking tours to choose from each with a different focus. You have tours that focus on German immigration, Indigenous Peoples, secrets of Bariloche and so much more!

I would recommend doing this early on in your visit so you can retrace your steps to any places that catch your interest.

The most popular walking tour in Bariloche is this 1.5-hour German Footprint walking tour that looks at the different waves of German immigration that took place before and after World War II and how these shaped Bariloche.

2. Drive the Circuito Chico

One must-do activity in Bariloche is to drive the Circuito Chico, which literally means ‘short circuit’.

This scenic drive follows the shores of Lago Nahuel Huapi as you leave Bariloche heading northwest, and it loops around various lakes before circling back towards Bariloche.

Along the way, there are scenic lookout points, breweries, restaurants, hiking trails, kayak rentals, and everything you could possibly want for a beautiful day out in nature.

This drive is typically done in half a day, including stops for food and photos; however, you could easily turn it into a full-day activity by hiking Cerro Llao Llao or kayaking Lago Moreno (you can rent kayaks at Playa Sin Viento).

If you don't want to rent a car, you can join a guided tour of Bariloche's Circuito Chico. This half-day tour includes a stop at Cerro Campanario (it's worth paying to ride the chairlift to the top), and you visit a few different landmarks and lookout points along the way. 

3. See Isla Victoria & Arrayanes Forest by Boat

The most popular boat excursion in Bariloche is the trip to Isla Victoria and the Arrayanes Forest.

This excursion departs from Puerto Pañuelo and the catamaran cruises the waters of Nahuel Huapi towards the Quetrihué Peninsula where you visit the famous Arrayanes Forest. This is a protected forest with cinnamon-coloured trees that are said to have inspired Disney's Bambi.

After visiting the forest, you journey on towards Isla Victoria where you disembark and go on a guided hike of the island.

Alternatively, you can use this time to explore the island at your leisure. There’s a nice beach called Playa del Toro and though the waters are chilly year-round, that doesn’t stop people from enjoying a summer dip!

It is possible to spend the night on the island at Isla Victoria Lodge, but you'll need to book ahead of time.

This boat tour visits Isla Victoria and the Arrayanes Forest. It runs 6-7 hours in length and it's a day filled with epic mountain and lake views, as well as plenty of time to explore the island on foot.

Tip: You can also visit the Arrayanes Forest from the town of Villa La Angostura if that works better for your itinerary.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Puerto Blest (@hotel_puertoblest) 

4. Visit Puerto Blest & Los Cantaros Waterfall

Puerto Blest is located on the western end of Lake Nahuel Huapi close to the border with Chile. It's one of the most secluded and pristine arms of the lake surrounded by dense Valdivian rainforest.

The journey begins in Puerto Pañuelo and after an hour of sailing, you'll see Centinela Island, where the remains of Perito Moreno lie - he was the father of Argentine national parks.

From there, the trip continues to Puerto Cántaros, where you disembark to visit Cascada de los Cántaros, Lago Cántaro and a 1500-year-old Alerce tree.

This is raw nature at its finest and if you want to stay overnight, you can do so at Hotel Puerto Blest, though you'll need to book in advance and also keep in mind that this hotel is only open seasonally.

Guests staying overnight can hike to Lago Frías whose milky green waters flow down from the glacier on Cerro Tronador.

You can book your day trip to Puerto Blest and Los Cantaros Waterfall here. This is a 9-hour excursion and you will spend time outdoors hiking, so dress accordinly, especially if you're visiting outside the summer season.

5. Admire the views from Cerro Campanario

Cerro Campanario is a must-visit spot for its beautiful panoramic views of the region. 

You can reach the mountaintop by either hiking or taking the chairlift. I'd recommend the chairlift since there are much prettier hikes in Bariloche!

Once you reach the top, you'll have 360-degree views of Nahuel Huapi Lake, Moreno Lake, El Trébol Lagoon, San Pedro Peninsula, Isla Victoria, Cerro Otto, Cerro López, Cerro Goye, Cerro Bellavista, Cerro Catedral and the Llao Llao Hotel.

Cerro Campanario was voted one of the best panoramic views in the world by National Geographic, so you know it's good!  

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Cerro Catedral (@cerrocatedralok) 

6. Enjoy year-round fun at Cerro Catedral

Cerro Catedral or Cathedral Mountain is named after its cathedral-like peaks and spires which resemble the steeples of a Gothic church. This mountain is primarily known for its ski resort. 

Catedral Alta Patagonia is the largest ski resort in the Southern Hemisphere, offering over 120 kilometres worth of ski runs. The resort caters to all skill levels, from beginners to expert skiers and snowboarders.

The mountain also offers opportunities for snowshoeing and snowmobile tours during the winter season.

When the snow melts, Cerro Catedral transforms into a hub for summer activities. Hiking, mountain biking, rock climbing, and paragliding are all popular activities.

Numerous trails crisscross the mountain, offering varying levels of difficulty and providing panoramic views of the Nahuel Huapi Lake and the surrounding Andes.

A system of lifts, including gondolas and chairlifts, operates year-round, providing breathtaking aerial views of the region.

7. Hike Cerro Tronador

Cerro Tronador translates to Thundering Mountain and it gets its name due to the deafening sound that occurs when massive chunks of ice break off the glaciers and crash down.

The peak of Cerro Tronador stands 3,491 meters above sea level making it the highest mountain in the Argentine Lake District.

This extinct stratovolcano sits on the border between Argentina and Chile, and it draws avid mountaineers.

It is possible to visit the base of Cerro Tronador on a day trip from Bariloche, where get views of the Ventisquero Negro Glacier.

You can book your full-day excursion to Cerro Tronador to see the hanging glacier. This is a 9-hour tour where you'll get to see some hard to reach corners of Nahuel Huapi National Park.  

8. Try Patagonian Craft Beers

Bariloche is synonymous with craft beer and you could easily visit a different brewery each day of the week and not run out of places.

Some of our personal favourites include:

Cervecería Patagonia – this place has epic views! Sip on your beer and admire the views of lakes and snow-capped mountains.

Cervecería Gilbert – this is a cozy and rustic brewery that serves up Patagonian dishes like deer stew, wild boar and trout.

Cervecería Manush – this brewpub does a nice beer flight which pairs well with their gourmet burgers.

9. Kayak Bariloche's Lakes and Rivers

With Bariloche's endless crystalline lakes and rivers, there are plenty of kayaking opportunities available. 

Lago Moreno and Lago Nahuel Huapi are two popular destinations for kayaking excursions.

Don't worry if you're not a super experienced kayaker, the guides will choose a kayaking route suited to your level of experience and also weather conditions seeing as some lakes are windier than others.

If you're up for an adventure, opt for a full-day kayaking tour that includes a picnic-style lunch and the opportunity to enjoy a swim.

This Bariloche kayaking tour is tailored to your skill level and it's a great way to enjoy a day out in Argentina’s Lake District. Snacks, beverages, and a picnic are provided.

10. Join a Horseback Riding Tour

If you're looking for some active things to do in Bariloche, consider going on a horseback riding tour. It's such a fun way to enjoy the Patagonian landscapes. 

We did a guided horse trek around Lago Gutierrez where we got to ride through forests, past mountains, and along the lakeshore before returning to camp for a traditional Argentine barbecue. 

This horseback riding tour takes you on a 2-hour trail ride along the foothills of the Andes Mountains. Back at the ranch, you get to enjoy a traditional Argentine BBQ lunch. 

11. Tackle the numerous Hiking Trails

One of the best things to do in Bariloche is to go hiking. You are in a city surrounded by mountains, after all!

There are hundreds of trails to choose from, which can make it a little tricky to decide exactly where to go. All Trails has a list of 200+ hiking trails in and around Bariloche to give you an idea.

Refugio Frey is without a doubt the most iconic hike. It departs from the base of Cerro Catedral in Villa Cerro Catedral about a 30-minute drive from downtown Bariloche. This trail is 9.5km one way, and while you can go up and down in one day, many choose to stay overnight in the alpine refugio which is part of the charm.

If you're not an experienced hiker and you find the prospect of venturing off on a solo hike a bit daunting, you can book a hiking tour. The local guides will tailor the experience based on your fitness and experience level and choose a trail accordingly.

This private hiking tour runs 6-8 hours and can be tailored to your interests and fitness level. It includes snacks, lunch and all necessary hiking equipment.

12. Go up Cerro Otto for more views

More views? Yes, more views! When you're visiting a mountain city, there are views to be had at every turn. 

Cerro Otto is a mountain located in Nahuel Huapi National Park and it stands 1405 meters tall. 

This mountain is a year-round destination. During the winter months, you can go skiing, snowboarding and sledding. Meanwhile, during the warmer months, you can enjoy the hiking trails as well as the zipline and aerial adventures. 

You can take a chairlift to the top of Cerro Otto. It's a 12-minute journey and you get to enjoy panoramic views along the way. 

If you get hungry at the top, there's a rotating restaurant called Confitería Giratoria Cerro Otto.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Bariloche Argentina (@barilochear) 

13. Tour the interior of Bariloche Cathedral

Bariloche Cathedral is also known as the Cathedral of Our Lady of Nahuel Huapi. 

The cathedral was built between 1942 and 1944 in a French Neo-Gothic style featuring stained glass windows and vaulted ceilings. 

It was the work of Alejandro Bustillo, an architect known for many iconic structures across Patagonia including the Llao Llao Hotel.

The location couldn't get any better. The cathedral overlooks Nahual Huapi Lake and it's encircled by a plaza with beautiful gardens. 

14. Pose by the Bariloche city sign

Argentina loves its city signs and they're always a good opportunity to snap some photos and capture memories.

The Bariloche city sign sits on the shores of Nahual Huapi Lake, so the views are pretty phenomenal. 

There's usually a line of people waiting to snap their pictures, so the person behind will take a picture for the person in front and the favour is returned down the line. 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Outfitters Patagonia (@outfitterspatagonia) 

15. Try your Hand at Fly Fishing

While most avid fishermen would likely book themselves into a fishing lodge for a week, it is possible to book fly fishing day tours from Bariloche.

These trips are a great way to experience the Patagonia wilderness while accompanied by an expert fishing guide who knows where to catch the best trout - rainbows, browns and brookies!

Some of the fly fishing spots of choice include the Limay River, Manso River, and Pichi Leufu River in the heart of Nahuel Huapi National Park.

These tours are high ticket items, but they include private transportation from your hotel to the fishing sites, boats when required, one bilingual guide per 2 anglers, and a full lunch with unlimited wine and beer, plus all necessary fishing gear.

Gratuities and the fishing license from the national park are extra.

This Bariloche fly fishing tour is rated a solid 5 stars and it has 275+ rave reviews. The private tour is open to seasoned fisherman as well as first-timers who want to reel in a big catch.

16. Sample Artisanal Patagonian Chocolate

One of the best things to do in Bariloche if you have a sweet tooth is to go chocolate shop hopping. There are even more chocolate shops than there are breweries, so you really have no excuses. A few chocolate shops to visit include:

Mamuschka - enjoy breakfast or afternoon tea with delicious cakes and pastries, and then stock up on chocolates to take back home.

Rapa Nui - features a cafe, an ice cream parlour and a skating rink all under the same roof. Their chocolate-covered raspberries are super famous and worth trying.

Benroth - third-generation chocolatiers working their magic. Dark chocolate, milk chocolate, white chocolate - they do it all, and they do it well!

17. Visit the Havanna Chocolate Museum

Havanna is one of Argentina's most iconic brands and it is best known for its alfajores, a traditional Argentine treat consisting of two crumbly cookies filled with a creamy caramel-like spread called dulce de leche.

The Museo del Chocolate Havanna in Bariloche offers visitors a unique opportunity to delve deep into the world of chocolate, exploring the production process and history from its ancient Mesoamerican roots to its arrival in Europe and subsequent global spread.

The museum has some impressive sculptures made entirely out of chocolate depicting some of the local wildlife including foxes, penguins, pumas and condors!

After visiting the museum, you exit through the Havanna cafe where you can purchase some Argentine souvenirs or have a coffee and an alfajor.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Garage - Foodtrucks (@elgaragebariloche) 

18. Try the street food cars

Walk along the lakeshore near Bariloche Cathedral at lunchtime and you're bound to find several food trucks serving all sorts of quick bites like pizzas, sandwiches, tacos, burgers and beers. This area is known as Food Truck Paseo del Lago. 

Recently, another spot has opened in the city called El Garage and it's an outdoor food court made up of several food trucks featuring even more options like pasta, shawarmas and savoury crepes.

19. Afternoon Tea at Llao Llao

Another fun thing to do in Bariloche is to go for afternoon tea in the Winter Garden at the Llao Llao Hotel. This is a 5-star hotel in an incredible location surrounded by lakes and mountains.

Their afternoon tea is simply divine featuring all sorts of tarts, macarons, brownies, pies and bite-sized sandwiches. 

If you're not planning to stay here as a guest, this is a nice way to get to see the interior of the hotel.

Tip: Afternoon tea at the Llao Llao Hotel is an activity that needs to be booked in advance. You can do so by contacting the hotel's reservations desk.

Day Trips from Bariloche

Now, let's move on to the day trips from Bariloche and there are plenty of them! The driving time from Bariloche to these destinations ranges from 35 minutes to 2 hours and 20 minutes, so they're all very manageable distances. 

20. Route of the Seven Lakes

Driving time: Full-day activity with multiple stops

The Route of the Seven Lakes is a scenic 107-kilometre road trip that stretches from the town of Villa La Angostura to San Martin de los Andes. 

It runs along a stretch of National Route 40, which is the highway that crosses the full length of Argentina, and it’s a beautiful journey filled with snow-capped mountains, lush forests and pristine lakes. 

It also crosses two national parks: Lanín National Park and Nahuel Huapi National Park. 

This is a full-day activity with plenty of panoramic stops along the way.

21. Villa La Angostura

Driving time: 1 hour 18 minutes

Villa La Angostura is a high-end resort town that sits on the shores of Nahuel Huapi Lake. 

The town is surrounded by crystalline lakes, dense forest, and its streets are lined with rose bushes earning Villa La Angostura its title as ‘the Garden of Patagonia’. 

Sailing trips are the activity of choice, plus you can also visit the magical Arrayanes Forest said to have inspired Bambi.

22. Colonia Suiza

Driving time: 35 minutes

Colonia Suiza translates to Swiss Colony and it's a small settlement in the outskirts of Bariloche whose origins can be traced back to the late 19th century when a group of Swiss immigrants, primarily from the Valais Canton, settled in the region.

One of the top things to do in Colonia Suiza is to try the traditional curanto, a Patagonian dish that's cooked underground in a pit with hot stones.

Aside from that, you can also find Swiss/German restaurants, breweries and souvenir shops.

23. El Bolsón

Driving time: 2 hours

El Bolsón is a picturesque mountain town with a decidedly hippie feel. It is framed by Cerro Piltriquitrón, a mountain whose names means "hanging from the clouds". 

Some of the main attractions in El Bolsón include the Sculpture Forest, where a burnt forest became art; and the Feria Artesanal, an outdoor hippie market that sells all sorts of handicrafts.

24. Lago Puelo

Driving time: 2 hours 20 minutes

Lago Puelo is a scenic mountain town that sits next to Lago Puelo National Park. 

A boat tour of the lake (which turns emerald in certain sections!) is a must-do activity plus it gives you the opportunity to hike to the border with Chile. 

Lago Puelo also has plenty of hiking trails, some of which lead to rivers and waterfalls.

25. El Hoyo

Driving time: 2 hours 18 minutes

El Hoyo is a small mountain community that’s quickly gaining popularity as an agrotourism destination. 

There are multiple vineyards that offer guided tours and tastings, there are berry farms to visit, plus you can also try to find your way through the biggest labyrinth in South America.

Where to Stay in Bariloche

Llao Llao Resort - this iconic 5-star hillside resort is surrounded by lakes and mountains. This is where everyone dreams of staying in Bariloche!

Hotel Panamericano Bariloche - this 4-star hotel offers rooms with lake or mountain views. It also features a heated pool, a gym, a sauna and a hot tub.

Tierra Gaucha Hostel - this boutique hostel is located right downtown and it includes breakfast.

You can also find some pretty cool glamping spots in Patagonia, including a lakeside dome in Bariloche, so that's another option worth exploring if you prefer unusual accommodations!

Getting around Bariloche

Car

If you feel comfortable renting a car and driving in Argentina, you will have greater mobility and the freedom to explore.

Many of the attractions, especially the beautiful nature spots, are on the city outskirts.

Bus

Bus #20 is the one that runs from the Bariloche Bus Terminal all the way out to Puerto Pañuelo (where boat tours depart from) and the Llao Llao Hotel.

Bus #13A is the one you need to catch at the Circuito Chico Roundabout if you want to visit Colonia Suiza.

You can pay for the buses in Bariloche using a SUBE card, which you can preload with money at various convenience stores around town.

Taxi / Remís

Alternatively, you can get around Bariloche by using a taxi or remís (private taxi). This is a very convenient yet affordable way to get from place to place.

Best time to visit Bariloche

Bariloche is a versatile destination with something to offer year-round. However, the best time to visit largely depends on the type of activities you're interested in. Here's a breakdown of Bariloche's seasons to help you decide:

Summer (December to February)

Summer in Bariloche is warm with averages of 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F). It's an ideal time for outdoor activities such as hiking, kayaking, mountain biking, and fishing. 

The days are long, providing ample time for exploration. This is also peak tourist season, especially in January, so expect larger crowds and higher prices.

Fall (March to May)

Fall in Bariloche is cooler with averages dropping gradually from 18°C to 10°C (64°F to 50°F). 

This is one of the best times for photography, as the forests turn shades of red, orange, and gold. It's also great for hiking and enjoying the landscapes. 

There are fewer tourists than in summer but it's still a relatively popular time to visit, especially for those seeking the fall foliage.

Winter (June to August)

Winter in Bariloche is cold with averages ranging from -2°C to 7°C (28°F to 45°F). Snowfall is common, especially in the higher areas. 

This is when Bariloche turns into a winter sports hub. The slopes of Cerro Catedral are busy with skiers and snowboarders. Plus, you can enjoy other winter activities, like snowshoeing, are also popular. 

July is the peak winter month, primarily due to the winter school holidays in Argentina, so expect many national tourists.

Spring (September to November)

Spring in Bariloche sees averages from 6°C to 17°C (43°F to 63°F). As the snow melts, hiking trails become accessible again, and the region starts to bloom, providing a fresh and vibrant landscape for various outdoor activities. 

While the early part of spring can be quiet, by November, as temperatures rise, tourists begin to return.

The best time to visit Bariloche really depends on your preferences. If you love winter sports, visit between June and August. If hiking, warm weather, and water activities are your preference, December to February is ideal, but prepare for more crowds. For a quieter, scenic experience with fall colours, consider March to May. For a balance of good weather and fewer tourists, late spring (October and November) might be the best choice.

#### Best Beagle Channel Cruise in Ushuaia
Looking for the best Beagle Channel cruise to enjoy on your trip to Ushuaia? We have you covered with these 3 boat tour options!

A Beagle Channel cruise is one of the top activities to enjoy when visiting Ushuaia. You've reached the 'End of the Earth' and now you finally get to cruise one of the southernmost waterways in the world. But which tour should you choose and what's the difference between them anyway?

On my first visit to Ushuaia, I walked into a tour operator's office and booked the first Beagle Channel cruise I saw without asking too many questions. It wasn't until we reached the shores of Martillo Island and I saw a small group of visitors walking among the penguins while we looked on that I realized not all tours are created equal. 

When it comes to Beagle channel cruises you can choose between larger vessels or smaller vessels that provide a more personal experience. You have large group tours versus small boat hires that feel more intimate and you can enjoy with your group of family and friends. Most importantly, you have boat tours that are allowed to disembark on Martillo Island to visit the penguin colony and others that are only permitted to view them from the shores. 

Even though I didn't get to walk with penguins, cruising the Beagle Channel turned out to be one of the highlights of my visit to Ushuaia! I got to see the famous red and white Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse - sometimes mistaken for the Lighthouse at the End of the World! 

Plus, I saw sea lions sunbathing on a rocky outcrop, thousands of cormorants swirling over an island, and epic mountain views in every direction.

So let's navigate all these Beagle Channel cruises and help find the right one for you!

My Top 3 Picks: Beagle Channel Cruises

#1 Top Pick

⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️

Beagle Channel Navigation with Mini Trekking

✅ Small vessel

✅ Great guide

✅ 30-minute trek

#2 Pick

Beagle Channel Tour to Martillo Island and Walk Among Penguins

✅ Walk with penguins

✅ Tour Estancia Haberton

✅ Exclusive experience

#3 Pick

Beagle Channel Navigation to the Pingüinera

✅ Large Catamaran

✅ Group tour

✅ Classic route

Best Beagle Channel Cruise in Ushuaia

1. Beagle Channel Navigation with Mini Trekking

⭐️ RATING: 5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 4 hours 

This is a half-day tour of the Beagle Channel aboard a small vessel, which means the boat can navigate closer to the islands and you also get a more personalized experience than on bigger cruises. 

This Beagle Channel cruise offers views of Isla Alicia, Isla de Los Pájaros, and Isla de Los Lobos, as well as the famous Les Eclaireurs Lighthouse which was built in 1919. 

During this tour, you get to disembark at Isla Bridges for a guided 30-minute hike while the guide shares stories about the local wildlife and the Yámana people who once called this place home. 

PROS: 

Small personalized tour experience

Includes a 30-minute hike

Affordable tour option

CONS: 

This tour does not disembark on Martillo Island to walk with penguins

A small boat can make you more prone to seasickness on choppy waters 

ADDITIONAL INFO:

Duration: 4 hours

Language: English and Spanish

Operated by: Patagonia Explorer

Meeting point: Patagonia Adventure Explorer (must arrive 30 minutes before departure)

Not wheelchair accessible

"It was such a wonderful tour - a perfectly paced tour with a fantastic English guide. The walk on the small coast was manageable and beautiful! They really let us take our time at the sea lion island and lighthouse. It was wonderful. A safe boat with clean seats! They pulled out a map to help us understand our location. I would 100% recommend this tour!" -Martha C 
Review from Viator

🤩 Check Prices and Availability!

2. Beagle Channel Tour to Martillo Island and Walk Among Penguins

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH:  6.5 hours 

This is the priciest and most exclusive Beagle Channel tour out there, so admittedly it won't be everyone's cup of tea. 

However, what makes this cruise special is the opportunity to walk among penguins - an activity that is very controlled and only a limited number of people get to do. 

This tour is also a bit different in the sense that you don't embark at the harbour in Ushuaia, but rather, you travel one hour by minibus accompanied by your guide to Estancia Haberton. This is a famous estancia in the city outskirts that was founded in 1884 by Augusto Lasserre as Fort Ushuaia on the settlement of the former mission of Thomas Bridges.

Estancia Haberton is a popular day trip from Ushuaia, so technically with this tour you are getting two activities in one!

Upon arriving at the estancia, you will get a guided tour of the place before boarding a semi-rigid boat (ZODIAK) and cruising 15 minutes over to Martillo Island. Along the way, you will also see Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse, Isla de Los Pájaros, Isla de Los Lobos and all manner of seabirds and sea lions. 

On the island, you will spend 1 hour walking among Magellanic penguins and Gentoo penguins (the latter are a bit rare), always accompanied by your guide. This walk with the penguins is what sets this Beagle Channel cruise apart from the rest, as most tour operators are only allowed to approach the shores and see the penguins from the boat without disembarking. 

Whether this experience is worth the price tag is up to you to decide!

You will then return to the estancia for lunch (the cost of the meal is not included in the tour price), and lastly, you'll visit the Acatushun Museum of rare marine mammals.

PROS:

Includes a 1-hour walk with Magellanic and Gentoo penguins

Visits the historic Estancia Haberton 

Friendly and knowledgeable guides every step of the way

CONS: 

It is a 1-hour bus journey to reach the estancia

This tour has the biggest price tag

Limited availability in order to protect the penguins

ADDITIONAL INFO:

Duration: 6 hours and 30 minutes

Language: English and Spanish

Operated by: Piratour

Meeting point: Muelle Turistico (minivan departure)

Not wheelchair accessible

"We had an incredible time walking with the penguins! We saw 2 different types and a surprise king penguin as well. The guides were wonderful and helped create probably our most memorable part of our trip to Ushuaia!" -Nicholas L 
Review from Viator

🤩 Check Prices and Availability!

3. Beagle Channel Navigation to the Pingüinera

⭐️ RATING: 4/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 6 hours

This is the most popular Beagle Channel cruise and it's a group catamaran excursion. This tour runs daily during high season so it's a well-oiled machine and everything flows really well. 

After leaving the pier, the catamaran enters the Beagle Channel and you get great panoramic views of downtown Ushuaia framed by Mount Olivia in the background. 

You first reach Isla de Los Lobos, where you have the chance to view sea lions in their natural habitat from the boat. Next up is Isla de Los Pájaros, which is home to countless cormorants, both Magellanic and Imperial. 

The boat tour then brings you to Les Eclaireurs Lighthouse situated on an archipelago by the same name. On these islets, it is possible to see the remains of Monte Cervantes, a ship that was shipwrecked in 1930. 

During the cruise, you'll also be able to see Gable Island and the Puerto Williams Naval Base (located in Navarino Island, Chile). 

Upon arriving at Isla Martillo, the catamaran approaches the beach carefully. Though no one is permitted to disembark during this tour, you do get to see the colony of Magellanic Penguins that nest during the summer months. 

The penguins are very curious so they'll approach the boat, waddle down the beach, and even swim around the catamaran. It's a great opportunity to take photos and enjoy the penguins from a distance. 

This was the tour that we booked during our trip to Ushuaia. The price was mid-range (this isn't the most expensive tour or the cheapest!), and even though we didn't get to do an island trek or walk with penguins, we did get to see the main sights along the Beagle Channel, meaning the lighthouse and lots of wildlife. I'd say we saw way more wildlife than we were even expecting!

PROS:

Larger vessel means it's a smoother ride on choppy waters

Visit all the main attractions on the Beagle Channel

You get a Beagle Channel passport stamp (if you'd like one)

CONS:

Large group tour means it's a less personalized experience

Can get a bit crowded out on the deck

Does not disembark on Martillo Island to walk with penguins

ADDITIONAL INFO:

Duration: 6 hours

Language: English and Spanish

Operated by: Piratour

Meeting point: Muelle Turistico

Not wheelchair accessible

"Absolutely fantastic and memorable experience. We had a beautiful day on the water and the penguins were amazing. We deliberately booked a trip that does not allow you off the boat because we did not want to disturb the penguins’ habitat. We were able to get plenty of clear and enjoyable viewing opportunities from the boat. This is a memory that will last a lifetime! We had some serious weather on the way back (which is to be expected) and the crew did an excellent job navigating it. We definitely recommend this journey!" -Lisa N
Review from Viator

🤩 Check Prices and Availability!

FAQs About Beagle Channel

Where is the Beagle Channel? The Beagle Channel is a navigable channel in the extreme southern part of South America. It is located at the southern tip of the Tierra del Fuego archipelago, which is shared by Argentina and Chile. Specifically, the Beagle Channel runs between several islands of the archipelago, forming a natural border between the two countries.  Is the Beagle Channel rough? Because the Beagle Channel is situated in the extreme southern part of South America, it can experience varying conditions and its waters can indeed be rough at times. However, compared to other waterways in the region, such as the Drake Passage, the Beagle Channel is often considered relatively sheltered and calm.   Why is the Beagle Channel important? The Beagle Channel serves as a navigational route for ships travelling between the Pacific and Atlantic Oceans, especially those avoiding the rougher waters of the Drake Passage or Cape Horn. The channel is a key passage for vessels heading to and from Antarctica, making it crucial for scientific and tourist expeditions to the continent.  What animals can you see in the Beagle Channel? Some of the animals you can expect to see while cruising the Beagle Channel include sea lions, seals, dolphins and whales. Magellanic penguins are the most common type of penguin around these parts, and you can also spot seabirds like albatrosses, petrels and cormorants.  

Which Beagle Channel Cruise is right for you? 

As you can see, there are lots of different options when it comes to booking a Beagle Channel Cruise in Ushuaia, Argentina. 

You can opt for a small vessel or a large vessel, a tour that lets you walk with penguins or a tour where you can view them from the boat, or a tour that visits an estancia or just does a classic boat trip. 

The right Beagle Channel boat tour will vary from one traveller to the next, but hopefully, you now have a better idea of what to look for and what to expect.

Read More about Ushuaia:

10 Epic Ushuaia Tours

Train at the End of the World

Best Tours of Tierra del Fuego National Park

Post Office at the End of the World

How to Spend 3 Days in Ushuaia 

See Ushuaia by Helicopter

Is the Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Worth it?

Where to Stay in Ushuaia

How to Get to Ushuaia

Choosing a G Adventures Patagonia Tour

#### End of the World Train Ride in Ushuaia, Argentina
The Southern Fuegian Railway, better known as the End of the World Train, is a steam railway located in Argentina’s Tierra del Fuego province.

“Why would you need a train at the end of the world?” you ask. Well, Ushuaia was initially developed as a penal colony for repeat offenders with the first prisoners arriving in 1884.

After being sent to the very bottom of Patagonia at the end of the South American continent, the prisoners were put to work building their own prison, which meant transporting rock and timber from the nearby forests to the town, first using oxen-pulled wagons, and eventually this narrow gauge railway.

Back then, this was known as the Train of Prisoners, and the prisoners had to complete the journey twice a day to and from the logging camps.

Today, the Train at the End of the World has been developed into a heritage train and it’s considered the southernmost functioning railway in the world. It’s a must-do excursion in Ushuaia - even more so if you’re a train enthusiast!

Our Pick

End of the World Train Tour

This tour includes a ride on the End of the World train and a guided visit of Tierra del Fuego National Park. Transportation is provided there and back via minibus.

End of the World Train FAQs

How long is the End of the World Train ride?

The End of the World Train is a 50-minute journey and it travels the last 7 kilometres of the original prisoner's train route.

Where does the End of the World Train go?

The train runs from the End of the World train station to the Tierra del Fuego National Park train station.

The departure point is located 8 kilometres west of Ushuaia, so don't make the mistake of thinking you'll be departing from the city.

You need to make your way to the train station by shuttle bus or taxi, though if you've booked via a tour operator transportation is generally provided.

How soon should you book tickets for the End of the World Train?

Tickets aboard the train at the end of the world can get booked up several weeks in advance, especially if you're travelling during high season.

Don't wait to buy your tickets until the day before or the day of!

It is best to secure these tickets well in advance, as soon as you have confirmed your travel dates for Ushuaia.

Is admission to Tierra del Fuego National Park included on the End of the World Train?

The entrance to the national park is not included in the train ticket price and must be paid in cash on the day of the ride.

If you booked this through a tour operator, you'll want to check with them directly as to whether they've included the park fee.

What language is the End of the World Train audio guide in?

During your journey you'll be given headphones so you can learn about the history of Ushuaia, the train, and the role the prisoners played.

This audio guide is available in Spanish, English, Portuguese, French, Italian, German and Chinese.

Booking End of the World Train Tickets

You can book the End of the World train tickets on the official website: Tren del Fin del Mundo.

There are 3 train classes available: Tourist Class, Premium Class and VIP Class.

Keep in mind that with this option, you'll have to make your own way to and from the train station.

Booking a guided tour

Another option is to book a guided tour that includes the End of the World Train and Tierra del Fuego National Park. This particular tour includes transportation from select pick-up points (you'll need to check if your hotel in Ushuaia is one on the list or alternatively choose the pick-up point closest to you).

As part of this tour, you ride the train, visit the national park, stop at Bahia Ensenada Zaratiegui where you can send mail from the Post Office at the End of the World, you reach Bahia Lapataia which marks the end of the Panamerican Highway, and you also visit the Green Lagoon Viewpoint and Lago Roca.

If you don't feel too confident in your Spanish language skills or you just want an easy day, this is a good option.

Train Ride to the End of the World

So what exactly do you get to see when you're riding the train at the end of the world?

Well, here is a list of the attractions covered during the journey.

The End of the World Train Station

The train journey begins at the End of the World train station, which is located 8 kilometres west of the city of Ushuaia. The railway then travels along the Pico Valley in the Toro Gorge.

Burnt Bridge

Next, the train crosses Puente Quemado, which translates to 'Burnt Bridge'. It is named so because of the burnt remains of the old bridge which lie underneath the new tracks.

This part of the journey takes you across Cañadón del Toro or the 'Bull's Canyon' and over the Pipo River, which is formed by meltwater descending from the mountains and flowing to the Beagle Channel.

This is a very scenic part of the journey and we were even lucky enough to see horses grazing next to this pristine river.

La Macarena Waterfall Station

La Macarena Station is the only stop on this train journey. This is a historical point as it's where the prisoners used to stop to refill the water tanks for the steam locomotive La Coqueta.

Here passengers have the chance to disembark and hike up to a waterfall formed by meltwater, and there's also a viewpoint offering views of the Pipo River and some of the surrounding peaks.

This station is also where you can view the photos you took with the 'prisoners' before boarding the train, and if you'd like one as a souvenir, they'll print it for you.

Once it's time to board the train again, you hear a whistle calling passengers back to the train.

National Park Boundary

As you continue the train journey, you eventually come across a sign that announces the boundary of Tierra del Fuego National Park.

This is the only national park in Argentina that has maritime coasts, forests and mountains.

Tree Cemetery

Then, you reach the tree cemetery - a graveyard of trees that were cut by the prisoners who quite literally built their own prison and also supplied Ushuaia with firewood in the early days.

You'll notice that the tree stumps stand about half a meter from the ground - a sign that some of the logging was done in winter when the snow would have been packed pretty deep.

Of course, all this logging was done before the area was designated a national park, but it's part of the history of the place.

National Park Station

The final stop aboard the train at the end of the world is the National Park Station. This is where the train repositions to begin the journey back.

Travellers have the option of disembarking here - maybe you booked an excursion that includes a guided tour through Tierra del Fuego National Park, or maybe you want to spend the day hiking independently.

As mentioned earlier, do keep in mind that if you are travelling independently, you'll need to find your own way back into town - either by pre-arranging a shuttle, calling a taxi or hitchhiking.

Is the train journey worth it?

If you enjoy quirky train rides, then yes!

There are so many epic train journeys in Argentina - the Old Patagonian Express, the Train to the Clouds, the Tren Patagónico - and the Train at the End of the World is another one to add to the list.

Yes, this is a very short journey that only travels a total of 7 kilometres, but it has a very interesting history and it brings you to a beautiful place at the end of the South American continent.

That makes it worth it in our books.

Getting to Ushuaia is quite the undertaking, so you may as well enjoy the activities Tierra del Fuego has to offer!

#### How to Get to Perito Moreno Glacier from El Calafate
Wondering how to get to Perito Moreno Glacier from El Calafate? We're going to share the different options you have. 

No trip to El Calafate would be complete without spending at least one full day exploring Los Glaciares National Park and seeing the iconic Perito Moreno Glacier. 

This glacier is the top attraction in the region and it's the main reason visitors come all the way down to El Calafate in the first place!

But how do you get to Perito Moreno Glacier and what's there to see and do once you're there? Well, we've got you covered. 

This is our complete guide to visiting Perito Moreno Glacier and we're going to share how to get there, what tours you can take, park entrance fees, opening hours, and lots of other essential info and practical travel tips.

How to get to El Calafate

First things first, if you want to visit Perito Moreno Glacier, you need to make your way to El Calafate. This town is the gateway to Los Glaciares National Park and Perito Moreno Glacier.

You do NOT want to go to the town of Perito Moreno. Even though it shares the same name as the glacier, this town is in fact  629 kilometres away in the opposite end of the Santa Cruz Province. 

I repeat, you want to go to El Calafate to see the Perito Moreno Glacier, and Perito Moreno to see the Cave of Hands. 

This would be a very easy mistake to make, especially if you're travelling across Patagonia by bus. 

You can get to El Calafate by airplane from Buenos Aires, Bariloche and Ushuaia, or by bus from El Chalten or Puerto Natales, Chile. 

How to get to Perito Moreno Glacier

There are several different ways to get to Perito Moreno Glacier, so let's start with the most affordable option and work our way up from there!

The travel time from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier is 1.5 hours whether you take a bus, taxi or drive your rental car.

Take a bus to the glacier

The cheapest and easiest way to get to Perito Moreno Glacier is by taking a bus. 

Buses depart from the El Calafate Bus Terminal and take you straight into Los Glaciares National Park. 

The main bus companies that travel to the park are Cal Tur, Chaltén Travel and Marga Taqsa. 

If you're visiting during high season, I would recommend booking your bus tickets to the park in advance. You can do so via a travel agency in town or by walking over to the bus station on the edge of town (that's what we did!). There is a limited number of buses making the journey each day, so you want to make sure you get a seat. 

Also, book a round-trip ticket so you don't get stranded at the park at the end of the day! Otherwise, you'll have to call a taxi to come and get you. 

Take a taxi or remis

The next option to get from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier is to take a taxi or remis.

In Argentina, a remis refers to a private car that you can book via an agency. It looks like a regular car (it's not painted yellow nor does it have any distinguishing features), it does not have a meter, and the prices are pre-determined based on the destination. You know the price of the journey before you even get in the car. 

There are several remis agencies in El Calafate and we used them a couple of times to get around and reach some of the further attractions. 

These include: Taxi Remis Calafate Viajes Turísticos, Taxi Remis Los Andes, Taxis Remis El Puma and Taxi Remis Condor. 

If you're concerned about paying a fair price, ask for an estimate at your hotel or guesthouse. They should be in the know or at the very least they can recommend a reputable remis agency that they use with their guests.

This might be a good option if you're travelling with a group of friends and you can split the cost 3 or 4 ways.

Rent a car and drive yourself

Getting from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier by car is another option and it's the one that provides the most flexibility. You can drive out to Los Glaciares National Park and back when you please and stop at panoramic points along the way. 

The only downside is that renting a car in Argentina isn't particularly cheap and in Patagonia, there often isn't a lot of availability. 

The other thing to keep in mind is that most rental cars in Argentina are manual transmission, while in North America we're used to driving automatic transmission. 

I've rented cars in Argentina several times in different parts of the country and what I've found is that automatic cars can go for up to 3 times the cost of renting a manual. So that's a major consideration.

Also, renting a car in Patagonia is more expensive than renting elsewhere in Argentina! Manual cars in El Calafate start out at $60 USD per day and automatic cars go for $100 per day. This is the minimum price, it can go up from there based on demand, time of year, and the type of vehicle you choose. 

If you're interested in driving in Argentina, I would recommend having a look at Discover Cars. They are a car rental comparison website with an aggregate search tool that helps you find the best car deals available. 

If you decide to go this route, book your rental car in advance. Don't try to do so once you land at El Calafate Airport, because you're almost guaranteed to be out of luck!

You can browse car rentals in El Calafate here. 

Join a tour to Perito Moreno Glacier

Another way to get to Perito Moreno Glacier is by joining a guided tour that includes transportation to and from the park. These tours are done as a day trip from El Calafate. 

There are all sorts of tours to Perito Moreno Glacier including ice trekking tours, scenic boat tours, and even walking tours of the boardwalks. 

Mini Trekking Excursion on Perito Moreno Glacier: This glacier trek includes transportation to and from the park. Once you arrive at the park, you board a vessel at Bajo de las Sombras and cross over to the glacier. You are then geared up with crampons and ice axes to begin the trek. This glacier trek has a maximum of 20 participants per guide. 

Perito Moreno Glacier with Navigation: This tour to Perito Moreno Glacier includes hotel pick up and drop off. Once you arrive at the park, you have time to visit the walkways and balconies for different perspectives of the glacier. During the navigation, you will sail around the south face of Perito Moreno which rises 60 meters above the water. The boat ride is 1 hour in length. 

Sightseeing Glaciers Cruise: This is a full-day sightseeing boat tour where you get to see numerous glaciers and icebergs! It takes you to parts of the national park that would otherwise be impossible to reach. You can read about our experience of the Gourmet Glaciers tour aboard Maria Turquesa here.

Footbridges of Perito Moreno Glacier: This tour is basically private transportation to Perito Moreno Glacier. Once you arrive, you have free time to explore the walkways on your own. This is where you get to see Perito Moreno Glacier from the balconies. At the end of the day, you ride back to El Calafate and you can get dropped off at your hotel or in the centre of town.

Note: Keep in mind that even if you book a tour to Los Glaciares National Park, you will still need to pay the park admission fee separately. More on that below. 

Los Glaciares National Park Info

Los Glaciares National Park was created in 1937 and declared a World Heritage Site by UNESCO in 1981. It is home to the third-largest continental ice field on the planet and to numerous glaciers, including Perito Moreno Glacier, which is one of the few advancing glaciers in the world. 

Hours of Operation

From September 1 to April 30, the park entrance is open from 8:00 am to 6:00 pm (and you may remain in the park until 8:00 pm). This is the summer schedule. 

From May 1 to August 31, the park entrance is open from 9:00 am to 4:00 pm (and you may remain in the park until 6:00 pm). This is the winter schedule. 

Entrance Fee

As of 2024, the admission fees to Los Glaciares National Park are as follows:

General rate: $30000 ARS

National residents: $10000 ARS

Provincial residents: $4000 ARS

The general rate is the equivalent of $15 USD per person for a 1-day pass. If you book a 2-day pass, you get 50% off the second day's tariff.

About Perito Moreno Glacier

Perito Moreno Glacier is one of the most impressive natural wonders in South America.

The glacier is named after Francisco Moreno, an early pioneer who studied the region during the 19th century and played a crucial role in defending Argentina's territory in the conflict surrounding a border dispute with Chile.

Francisco Moreno was locally known as Perito, which means 'specialist' or 'expert' and that's how the name Perito Moreno came to be. 

This sprawling glacier covers an area of roughly 250 square kilometres and forms part of the Southern Patagonian Ice Field, which is the third-largest freshwater reserve in the world!

What sets Perito Moreno Glacier apart from other glaciers it that its very active. In fact, it's one of the few advancing glaciers on Earth.

The glacier's tip reaches the shores of Lago Argentino, and as it advances, it periodically forms a natural dam that blocks the waters of the Brazo Rico from the rest of the lake.

Pressure builds up during this period, eventually causing a massive calving event where the ice dam breaks and giant chunks of ice fly into the lake in a dramatic fashion. This event is something that occurs every 4 to 5 years.

Boardwalks and Trails

There are different boardwalks and trails to enjoy when visiting Perito Moreno Glacier. The Pasarelas section of Los Glaciares National Park has the following options:

Central Circuit: 600 metres – 1:00 hs – Easy

Lower Circuit: 1100 metres – 1:15 hs – Challenging

Forest Trail: 570 metres – 0:45 hs – Moderate

Shoreline Trail: 1117 metres – 1:30 hs – Moderate

Accessible Circuit: 565 metres – 0:30 hs – Very easy

Tip: For the best hiking in Los Glaciares National Park, you'll want to spend a few days in El Chaltén. This town is considered the trekking capital of Argentina and it's located inside the northern portion of the park. In contrast, El Calafate is in the south end of the park and La Leona is in the middle. 

Eating in the national park

Whether you're visiting Perito Moreno Glacier independently or as part of a tour, you should be prepared to spend most of the day in the park and outdoors. That means you will get hungry at some point, so it's good to think about lunch. 

You can bring your own packed lunch which is what most visitors do. There are benches on the balconies that overlook the glacier, so you can stop to rest and enjoy a bite (granola bars, nuts, fruit, a sandwich, etc). Just remember that everything you bring in must also be carried out!

Alternatively, there is one restaurant inside the park and that's Nativos de la Patagonia. This is a good option if you'd prefer a sit-down meal and a place to warm up. The restaurant offers both a la carte and buffet dining options. We got some grilled sandwiches and baked goods for our meal. 

What to wear at Perito Moreno Glacier

Another important consideration when visiting Perito Moreno Glacier is what to wear. Keep in mind, that it's going to be much colder at the glacier than it is in the town of El Calafate.

Your best bet is to dress in layers that you can add and remove as the weather changes, and the weather will change, because this is Patagonia!

I would recommend 3 layers: a quick-drying shirt, a fleece and a rainproof jacket. You'll want something heavier if you're visiting in winter.

Plus, a hat, scarf and gloves. You'll want these in the early morning and late afternoon year-round.

In terms of footwear, trekking shoes are fine - you'll pack these anyway if you're planning to visit El Chaltén! The boardwalks and trails are super easy so you won't need trekking poles here.

Perito Moreno Glacier Quick FAQs

What is the closest airport to Perito Moreno Glacier? To visit Perito Moreno Glacier, you'll need to fly into El Calafate Airport (FTE), locally known as Aeropuerto Internacional Comandante Armando Tola de El Calafate.   How to get from Buenos Aires to Perito Moreno Glacier? There are multiple daily flights that connect Buenos Aires with El Calafate. In Buenos Aires, you can fly out of either Aeroparque or Ezeiza. Aeroparque is in the city and more convenient.  How do you get to the Perito Moreno Glacier? From El Calafate, you'll head west along Provincial Route 11. It's a 1.5-hour journey to reach Los Glaciares National Park where you can visit Perito Moreno Glacier.  Can you see Perito Moreno Glacier without a tour? Yes, you can see Perito Moreno Glacier without a tour by making your way to the park and walking the boardwalks and balconies circuit that offers views of the glacier from various vantage points.  What can you do at Perito Moreno Glacier? You can enjoy a range of activities at Perito Moreno Glacier including scenic boat tours, guided glacier trekking tours, kayaking tours and more. Here's a list of fun El Calafate day tours for more ideas.  

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8AS4edJMWQI

Where to stay in El Calafate

Now let's talk about where to stay in El Calafate. I'm going to highlight a few options to fit different budgets, but you can also view our complete El Calafate hotel guide here.

Xelena Hotel & Suites - This luxury 5-star property sits on the outskirts of town on the shores of Lago Argentino so book a room with a lakeside view. The hotel offers spacious rooms with modern decor, some rooms have private balconies, and guests can enjoy a spa, fitness center, indoor pool, and on-site restaurant.

Hotel Kosten Aike - This 4-star hotel is set in an Alpine-style building and it has a warm and cozy feel. This property is centrally-located so it's a good option for travellers who plan to move around on foot. It has spa facilities including a hot tub and sauna.

Hosteria Posta Sur - This 3-star guesthouse is in the east end of El Calafate. This is a quiet area just a 5-minute walk from the centre of town. The rooms have heated floors and they serve a buffet breakfast. 

América del Sur Hostel Calafate - This hostel is a good option for budget travellers and independent travellers looking for a more social experience. The hostel has 6-bed dorms as well as private rooms, plus a communal kitchen and laundrette.

You can also find estancias near El Calafate, some of them located within the boundaries of Los Glaciares National Park!

#### The Old Patagonian Express: An Epic Train Journey in Patagonia!
Argentina is home to many epic train journeys, but perhaps none is more famous than the Old Patagonian Express!

The train is locally known as La Trochita, meaning ‘little gauge’ because it's a narrow gauge railway that’s only 750 mm wide or about 2 feet 5 and a half inches.

This heritage train showcases the ruggedness of Patagonia, and along the journey, passengers can expect to be treated to epic views of mountains, valleys, and Patagonian steppe. It truly is one of the highlights of a visit to Chubut!

Today, La Trochita may only operate a short portion of the original 402-kilometre route it once covered, however, it captures the nostalgia of 20th-century train travel.

That alone makes it worth adding to your northern Patagonia travel itinerary!

History of the Old Patagonian Express

The Old Patagonian Express once stretched out 402 kilometres, and it was originally planned as part of a larger network that would connect all of Patagonia. However, the project was never completed due to ministerial changes and then the start of the First World War, which also affected Argentina’s economy.

Its use eventually began to decline as road systems improved, and because part of the railway network was never completed, it left this line isolated and disconnected from the rest of the country.

But then things changed when Paul Theroux published his book The Old Patagonian Express in 1978.

In his book, Theroux set out to travel by train from his hometown in Massachusetts all the way down to Argentina, and clearly the Patagonia leg of his journey made quite the impression because it earned the book's title!

Travellers suddenly began to take an interest in the Old Patagonian Express, and that brings us to the train journey as we know it today.

Today the train operates on alternating locomotives; one is a Baldwin from the United States and the other a Henschel from Germany. The wooden wagons came from Belgium, and the heaters were installed in Argentina to make the journeys across Patagonia in winter a little more bearable.

How to ride the Old Patagonian Express

There are three segments of the Old Patagonian Express for travellers to choose from - though some are more frequent than others:

Esquel to Nahuel Pan - 18 kilometres

El Maitén to Desvío Bruno Thomaé - 26 kilometres

Ingeniero Jacobacci to Ojos de Agua - 42 kilometres

Before you plan your train journey, it’s best to check an updated schedule on the official La Trochita website since some routes aren’t in operation year-round.

Esquel to Nahuel Pan

The most popular route runs from Esquel to Nahuel Pan and it’s a beautiful journey. As you leave the town of Esquel, you begin the ascent out of the valley where you are treated to mountain views and sheep grazing in the Patagonian steppe.

You’ll notice this is the shortest of the three segments in terms of distance covered, however, this train journey involves an ascent out of town, so it travels a bit slower.

It is a 1-hour journey from Esquel to Nahuel Pan.

Once you arrive in Nahuel Pan, you have 45 minutes to explore at your own leisure.

Here you can visit the Museum of Patagonian Culture, which focuses on the indigenous peoples of Patagonia. It’s a small museum with only two rooms, but the displays showcase ceramics, musical instruments and textiles. If you speak Spanish, you can also ask questions to the museum guide on site.

The highlight of our brief stop in Nahuel Pan was the artisanal fair. Vendors had set up booths showcasing all sorts of handmade souvenirs, and we were immediately drawn to the alfajores with fillings like dulce de leche, raspberry, Welsh-inspired Bara brith, and rum and raisin.

There was also a man cooking chorizos on the grill, so we got some choripán (chorizo on a bread bun) with chimichurri. It’s worth lining up for this right away, as it’s a popular food stop.

On the journey back, there was live music on the train. A local musician made his way through the carriages singing and playing songs on his guitar as we travelled back to Esquel.

El Maitén to Desvío Bruno Thomaé

Another option for train enthusiasts is to travel the segment from El Maitén to Desvío Bruno Thomaé.

This is a 26-kilometre journey across the Patagonian steppe. The journey is relatively flat, however, you do get mountain views on the horizon.

It’s worth arriving early in order to visit the Railway Museum and tour the Locomotive Repair Shop. This is a guided visit that’s included in the ticket price, and it’s a great opportunity to ask questions about this historic train (albeit in Spanish).

We heard stories about the extreme weather in Patagonia and how, when the train is scheduled to do its weekly outing in winter, sometimes they have to get it running 2 days ahead of time!

We also learned that when a working component of the Old Patagonian Express breaks down, workers have to handcraft a new part since the train is so old that spare parts are no longer produced industrially.

The fact that this train is still running is a true testament to the ingenuity of the workers!

Now, if we compare this journey with the one from Esquel to Nahuel Pan, the major difference is that when you arrive in Desvío Bruno Thomaé, there’s nothing there apart from a train station that was burned down by a Mapuche protest. So there’s nothing to see or do (no artisanal market like in Nahuel Pan) while you wait for the train to reposition for the return journey.

Ingeniero Jacobacci to Ojos de Agua

Ingeniero Jacobacci to Ojos de Agua is the least frequent and lesser known of the three train segments you can travel aboard the Old Patagonian Express.

In fact, this route was closed for a long time and only recently reopened, while also providing connections to make this journey a bit more accessible.

Getting there involves either driving in from Bariloche (a 3-hour drive) or joining a guided tour departing from Bariloche to Ingeniero Jacobacci.

It is then a 2-hour train journey from Ingeniero Jacobacci to Ojos de Agua.

Upon arrival, passengers have about 1 hour and 15 minutes to enjoy a meal and walk around. The train then returns to Ingeniero Jacobacci via the same route.

How to book train tickets

How do you book tickets for the Old Patagonian Express?

Here are a few different options:

Booking in person

If you’re already planning to be in one of the towns the train departs from (Esquel, El Maitén or Ingeniero Jacobacci), the easiest option is to go to the train station and buy them in person. However, be mindful of each train station's hours of operation, which are limited.

If you’re visiting during low season, you may be able to get a ticket on the same day, but this isn’t advised during high season when every last seat on the train can be sold out.

Booking through a tour operator

If you want to avoid the hassle of going to the train station and booking in person, the best thing to do is to book through a local tour operator.

If doesn't matter if you're in Bariloche or El Bolsón, you can walk into almost any tour operator and book this excursion through them. This will often also include transportation to and from the departure station.

So hit the streets and walk into some offices. Just try to do so earlier in your trip since the train departures are not daily, especially outside of high season.

Booking online

If you prefer to book online, you can do so directly on the official La Trochita website by clicking 'Comprá tu ticket'. This will open another window where you can select your journey, date and departure time. You'll then be presented with a list of fares and will want to click 'Internacional' if you're an international tourist. Next, you'll select your seats and choose your payment method.

You can also buy tickets online at Tren Patagónico Official Website by scrolling down to La Trochita. But be very careful you don't book the Tren Patagónico, which is an overnight train journey that crosses the country from the Andes to the Atlantic Ocean!

This isn't the easiest website to navigate, so I'd only recommend it if you can read Spanish and understand the steps outlined on how to book the correct segment of the journey. In our experience, this website can sometimes be glitchy, which is why we recommend booking in person or via a tour operator.

And that’s how you book a trip aboard the Old Patagonian Express!

The journey may be a fraction of what it once was, but it’s an adventure nevertheless and worth adding to your list of places to visit in Patagonia, Argentina.

Even though this steam train covers a short distance, it’s a fun way to experience the magical landscapes of the Patagonian steppe.

Now over to you. Are you a train enthusiast? Would you like to travel aboard the Old Patagonian Express?

Let us know if there are any other train journeys in Argentina you'd like to do.

#### Top 15 El Chaltén Hikes Ranked by Difficulty (Easy to Epic Treks!)
After spending a week hiking in El Chaltén, I can confidently say this is one of the most jaw-dropping destinations for trekking in all of South America!

Often referred to as the trekking capital of Argentina, this small mountain town in Los Glaciares National Park offers an unparalleled mix of dramatic landscapes featuring glacier-fed lagoons and the towering granite peaks of Mount Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre. 

Whether you’re tackling short scenic strolls or gruelling full-day mountain adventures, the diversity of hikes in El Chaltén is what makes it accessible to beginners and experienced trekkers alike.

I'm breaking down the 15 best El Chaltén hikes organized by difficulty (easy, moderate, and challenging!) with trail descriptions, distances, duration, and pro tips from our own time on the ground.

We’ve done the legwork (quite literally!) so you can skip the guesswork and focus on what matters: epic views, glacier-fed lakes, and the raw beauty of Patagonia.

So if you're planning a hiking trip to Patagonia, lace up your hiking boots because this El Chalten hiking guide is for you!

Easy Hikes in El Chalten

These hikes are perfect for beginners, families, or travellers looking to warm up for bigger adventures. They offer excellent views with minimal elevation gain.

1. Mirador del Cóndor

Distance: 2.6 km round-trip

Elevation: 129 metres

Time: 45 minutes to 1 hour

Difficulty: Easy

Mirador del Cóndor, also known as the Condor Lookout, is one of the most accessible short hikes in El Chaltén, offering a rewarding viewpoint with minimal time commitment. The trail begins behind the Centro de Visitantes (Park Ranger Station) and stretches just 2.6 kilometres round-trip, taking about 45 minutes to 1 hour to complete.

The path climbs gently through lenga shrubs and open terrain, making it easy for hikers of all levels. Yes, it's a bit steep at times, but it's a short distance. We saw families with young children tackling this hiking trail, so that gives you an idea of the level of difficulty.

We chose to do this hike on the very first day we arrived in El Chalten from El Calafate to warm up for the bigger treks ahead. We went up in the late afternoon just in time to catch sunset, and we were not disappointed.

At the viewpoint, we were treated to views of the town of El Chaltén, the Río de las Vueltas Valley and Mount Fitz Roy dominating the horizon - the latter was a very cool and unexpected surprise!

If you're lucky, you may even spot Andean condors soaring overhead, hence the name of the trail. 

2. Mirador del Águila

Distance: 7.2 kilometres loop trail

Elevation: 213 metres

Time: 2 hours

Difficulty: Easy

Mirador del Águila is a 7.2-kilometre hike that can be done as an extension to the above-mentioned Mirador del Condor.

The start of the hike is the same, and once you reach the Condor Lookout, you continue on a loop that brings you to another lookout point with views of Lago Viedma.

Aside from the initial ascent, this is a relatively flat and gentle trail, making it ideal for a relaxing outing. If you're looking for a sunrise hike, I would recommend this one. 

There are fewer crowds and a greater chance of spotting native birds like the carancho or the black-chested buzzard-eagle. You can also expect to encounter some free-roaming cows along the way!

3. Chorrillo del Salto

Difficulty: Easy

Elevation: 139 metres

Distance: 1 km (trail from parking lot) or 7 km if walking from town

Time: 30–45 minutes

This short, flat trail in El Chaltén leads to a picturesque 20-meter waterfall tucked away in the lenga forest. It's easily accessible by car (there's a parking lot right by the falls) or bike (you can cycle from town) and is ideal for families or travellers who want a quick nature fix.

The downside of the Chorrillo del Salto hike is that most of the trail is along Provincial Route 23, a dirt road that gets some vehicle traffic, which left us walking in a cloud of dust.

We hiked all the way from town, so we found it lacked the charm of hiking in the middle of nature. That being said, the waterfall is nice, and it's one of the easier and more accessible hikes in El Chalten.

4. Mirador Cascada Margarita

Distance: 1.4 kilometres

Elevation: 80 metres

Time: Under 1 hour

Difficulty: Easy

Another easy hike in El Chalten is Mirador Cascada Margarita. This is a short hike that leads to a viewpoint where you can see Margarita Waterfall across the canyon. 

To do this hike, you take the Laguna Torre trailhead and do the first segment of the trail until you reach the 0.7-kilometre mark. This lookout point is the first stop of the much longer Laguna Torre trek, plus you also get your first glimpse of Cerro Torre.  

We completed this hike on our way to Laguna Torre, however, you can do it as a quick standalone hike.

5. Sendero Río de las Vueltas

Distance: 3 km round-trip

Elevation: 106 metres

Time: 1 hour

Difficulty: Easy

Sendero Río de las Vueltas is another easy hike in El Chalten. It's on the way to Laguna Capri and Laguna de los Tres, so you'll cover it if you're doing either of those hikes. 

The downside of Sendero Río de las Vueltas is that it can be quite busy in the morning when hikers set out to complete some of the longer hikes. You may find yourself hiking in single file, but the crowds eventually disperse. We stopped to rest on the log benches at this lookout point.

This hike offers beautiful panoramic views of Río de las Vueltas, literally the River of Turns, which is quite aptly named, as you can see in the photo! You also get views of the valley below and the mountain chain. 

There are 106 metres of elevation gain on this trail, which at times feels a bit steep, but it's a short hike. 

6. Laguna Capri

Distance: Approximately 8 km round trip

Elevation: 424 metres

Duration: 2–3 hours

Difficulty: Easy to moderate

If you want epic views for relatively low effort, I would suggest the Laguna Capri hike. It leads you to a gorgeous azure lake with Mount Fitz Roy standing proud in the background. It's something straight out of a postcard. I remember feeling it should require more effort to earn such epic views!

This is a very doable hike for those with limited time or seeking a less strenuous option. The trail is around 8 kilometres round-trip and takes 2 to 3 hours to complete.  

The Laguna Capri trail shares its initial stretch with the Laguna de los Tres hike. In fact, the day we hiked to Laguna de los Tres, we had only planned to go as far as Laguna Capri! However, we arrived relatively early and were feeling strong, so we decided to continue on. But had we not, the plan was to spend the day lakeside and soak in the views.

This is also a great picnic spot; we had already eaten most of our lunch by the time we got here, but it's a great place to linger.

I would say this is an excellent hike for families, beginner hikers, or even those acclimatizing for longer treks.

7. Glaciar Huemul

Distance: Approximately 3 km round trip

Elevation: 211 metres

Duration: 1.5–2 hours

Difficulty: Easy

Hiking to Glaciar Huemul requires renting a car or arranging some form of transportation since this trail is an hour's drive north of El Chaltén. The trailhead is near the Lago del Desierto Campground on the south shore of the lake.

The hike to Glaciar Huemul is a short 3 kilometres round-trip that takes just 1.5 to 2 hours. The trail offers views of Lago del Desierto, Cordón del Bosque, the north face of Cerro Chaltén, and the Río de las Vueltas Valley.

The trail winds uphill through a private reserve and features mossy forest, wooden bridges, and crystal-clear streams. Though it’s a short hike, the ascent is steady and can be slippery after rain. 

At the top, hikers are rewarded with a spectacular view of the hanging Huemul Glacier spilling down a cliff face into a turquoise lagoon below. 

This is a great half-day adventure if you're after glacier views without the effort of a full-day trek.

8. Laguna Azul

Distance: 5 km round trip

Elevation gain: 80-100 m

Duration: 2 hours

Difficulty: Easy

Laguna Azul translates to 'Blue Lagoon' and it's an easy trek that starts 17 kilometres north of El Chalten. 

Tucked within the private reserve of Estancia Los Huemules, the trail to Laguna Azul offers a peaceful contrast to the busier routes inside Los Glaciares National Park. 

The hike starts from the reserve’s visitor center and winds through lenga forest, crossing a footbridge over the Río Diablo before gaining some gentle elevation. 

Near the end, the path skirts a small waterfall and includes a final creek crossing before arriving at a crystal-clear lagoon framed by forest and rugged hills. 

If you wish to press on, a short ridge walk beyond Laguna Azul leads to Laguna Verde, offering views of Fitz Roy’s north face peeking behind Cerro Eléctrico. 

Because Laguna Azul sits in a private reserve, the hike requires an entrance fee. Last season, the price was 28,000 ARS ($20 USD) per person, but you can check their current rates on their website. On the bright side, you can tackle 5 different hikes within the nature reserve.

Moderate Hikes in El Chaltén

These intermediate trails are longer and involve more elevation gain, but remain accessible to most fit hikers. They can be done as half-day or full-day trips. You can easily squeeze a couple of these into your itinerary, even if you only have 3 days in El Chalten.

9. El Paredón

Distance: 3.7 kilometres

Elevation: 299 metres

Duration: 1.5 hours

Difficulty: Moderate

If you want to enjoy views of El Chalten without the crowds, I think the trek to El Paredón is a wonderful alternative. The name El Paredón literally translates to 'the wall', referring to the massive rock wall that overlooks the Las Vueltas River.

In fact, during our first day in El Chaltén, my husband and I noticed that there were loads of rock climbers going up the paredón. We did the Costanera walk along the riverside just so that we could watch them in action! However, it's also possible to go up.

The trail starts on the east end of town as soon as you cross the bridge over the Las Vueltas River. The trail then immediately heads south along the river's edge and slowly winds north again as you begin the ascent to the top of the rock wall. 

While this is considered a moderate hike in terms of difficulty, it does get steeper the further you go, with the final ascent being the steepest. It's a mostly dirt trail and is slippery in some sections, so expect a bit of scrambling. 

The reward is the view of the town below, the Las Vueltas River, and the peaks of Fitz Roy off in the horizon. The El Paredón hike is a nice option to catch sunrise or sunset. Just be prepared for it to be windy up there!

Consider this a warm-up hike for some of the bigger treks in El Chalten.

10. Cerro Torre

Distance: 17.5 km round trip

Elevation: 571 metres

Duration: 6–8 hours

Difficulty: Moderate

The hike to Cerro Torre is one of those classic treks in El Chaltén that you can’t skip. It's also known as the Laguna Torre hike since it brings you to the lagoon at the base of the mountain.

Cerro Torre is actually the tallest in a chain of four that also includes Torre Egger, Punta Herron, and Cerro Standhardt. Pretty epic lineup, right?

The full hike is about 17.5 kilometres round trip. Most people take around 6 to 7 hours to do it, but of course, it depends on how fast you walk and what the trail is like that day (parts can get pretty muddy). Difficulty-wise, it’s considered moderately challenging.

The trail kicks off through a gorgeous valley, and along the way, you’ll spot some waterfalls. The steepest part of the climb happens right at the start, but once you get to around kilometre 3.5, things flatten out, which makes it easier to find a rhythm and cover more ground at a steady pace.

One of the things that kept us going on this trail was the fact that we could see Torre Glacier in the distance - it felt like the glacier was cheering us on. Plus, the route kept things interesting: we wandered through forests, along a river, and the scenery was always changing.

The big reward came at the end when we reached the viewpoint over Laguna Torre, a glacial lake sitting right at the base of Cerro Torre. Sometimes there are little icebergs floating around, and with that mountain backdrop, it’s a dream spot for photos.

The only bummer for us was that by the time we got there, clouds had rolled in and covered Cerro Torre, so we missed that postcard-perfect view.

If you’ve still got some energy once you hit Laguna Torre, you can keep going a bit further to Mirador Maestri. From there, you get even better views of the Torre Glacier.

11. Loma del Pliegue Tumbado

Distance: Approximately 20 km round trip

Elevation: 1132 metres

Duration: 7–9 hours

Difficulty: Moderate to challenging

If you’re looking for a hike in El Chaltén that’s a bit less crowded than the super popular ones like Laguna de los Tres or Laguna Torre, then Loma del Pliegue Tumbado is a solid choice.

The trail starts right at the Visitor Center (same spot as Mirador de Los Cóndores and Mirador de Las Águilas), but instead of going left, you’ll see a marker pointing you to the right.

The path takes you through patches of forest, and then you come out onto this wide-open flat area called Pampa de las Carretas. From there, the climb continues, and you eventually hike past the timberline.

The last stretch is definitely the toughest; it’s steep, you gain elevation fast, and there are switchbacks with loose rock that keep you on your toes. But honestly, the views at the top make all of it worth it.

At the summit, you get this jaw-dropping 360-degree panorama of the whole area: Mount Fitz Roy, Cerro Torre, Lake Viedma, Cerro Huemul, and even the Río Túnel Valley. 

Of course, those views are earned via an elevation gain of nearly 1,000 meters. The big joke with this hike is that “The only time you don’t go up is when you go down!” You've been warned.

12. Piedra del Fraile

Distance: 14 km round-trip

Elevation: 262 metres

Time: 4–5 hours

Difficulty: Moderate

The hike to Piedra Frail is one of those that requires transportation. It starts 17 kilometres outside of El Chalten; the trailhead is at the Río Eléctrico bridge on Provincial Route 41. That means you'll need to rent a car, arrange a taxi or join a guided hiking tour that provides transportation. 

The hike gets its name from the piedra or boulder that was dumped in the valley by the glacier. The trail starts off in an open area, goes through shrubbery, and then enters the lenga forest, but it always stays close to the Electric River.

Piedra del Fraile has a small campsite and refuge that acts as the first overnight stop for hikers who are tackling bigger hikes to Pollone Lagoon, the Marconi Glacier or the Paso del Cuadrado. Keep in mind that these are more challenging hikes that require special equipment and more technical experience, so you'll want to consult with the National Parks Administration before heading out.

13. Piedras Blancas

Difficulty: Moderate

Elevation gain: 230–300 metres

Distance: 13.2 km (there are variants depending on route)

Time: 3.5 to 4 hours round-trip 

The Piedras Blancas trail, often called Mirador Piedras Blancas or Glaciar Piedras Blancas Viewpoint, is a quieter glacier-view alternative to the main Fitz Roy treks. 

Starting from the bridge over the Río Blanco (near El Pilar / Route 41), the route first passes through forests and follows the river corridor before rising gently toward a viewpoint overlooking the Piedras Blancas Glacier. 

Along the way, you pass through lenga woods, cross into Los Glaciares National Park, and enjoy views of Cerro Eléctrico and parts of the Fitz Roy massif. 

Because this trail branches off and intersects with parts of the Laguna de los Tres route, many hikers integrate it as a side excursion rather than a standalone hike. 

The glacier itself sits around 2,000 metres away from the viewpoint, and you may see icefalls and glacier ice movement on clear days.

Difficult Hikes in El Chaltén

These challenging hikes involve long distances, steep ascents, and more technical terrain. Perfect for seasoned trekkers seeking Patagonia’s most iconic vistas.

14. Laguna de los Tres

Distance: Approximately 22 km round trip

Elevation: 1053 metres

Duration: 8–10 hours

Difficulty: Challenging

The hike to Laguna de los Tres is hands down one of the most spectacular day treks in El Chaltén, and it honestly lives up to the hype. This was the first big hike that we tackled on our visit, and we started out with a bang!

The name actually means “Lagoon of the Three,” and it’s a nod to those three peaks: Fitz Roy (3,405 m), Poincenot (3,002 m), and Saint-Exupéry (2,558 m). 

Now, just a heads up: this isn’t a casual stroll, so you’re looking at a full-on trekking day. Most people take 8 to 10 hours, depending on pace and fitness. It’s definitely a challenging one, not only because of the distance, but also because the final kilometres culminate in a steep and strenuous ascent that climbs 400 meters.

Trekking poles? Highly recommended.

I’ll be honest, during that final kilometre, I seriously considered turning around. I was so tired, and the climb ahead seemed unending. It was the encouragement from hikers coming down telling us, “Don’t give up, it’s so worth it!” that kept us going.

Once we finally made it over the ridge, I understood what they meant.  You’re rewarded with this stunning glacial lagoon framed by a glacier and massive granite peaks. The lagoon was this perfect deep blue, the glacier snaked down the mountain, and clouds drifted dramatically over Mount Fitz Roy and the surrounding peaks. It was one of those jaw-dropping moments where all the pain of the trek just melted away.

Sam and I huddled behind a big boulder to escape the wind, pulled out what was left of our packed lunch, and just sat there soaking in the view until it was time to face the steep descent and long walk back to El Chaltén.

I’ll be honest, Laguna de los Tres isn’t for everyone; it’s demanding and long, but if you’re up for the challenge, the payoff is unforgettable. It's one of the best Patagonia hikes for the views alone!

Multi-day Hikes in El Chalten

15. Huemul Circuit

Distance: 65 km loop

Elevation: 2,838 metres

Time: 4 days

Difficulty: Very Difficult

If you're a hardcore hiker and you're looking to challenge yourself in El Chalten with a multi-day trek, then consider the Huemul Circuit.

Let me be very clear, this trip is NOT for beginners! The route involves river crossings, unpredictably windy mountain passes, a scree field, an ever-changing glacier and even two Tyrolean traverses. Not only do you need adequate gear, but you also need the experience to navigate the demanding terrain.

The rewards are the views of the South Patagonian Ice Field, the world's third-largest ice field (after those in Antarctica and Greenland) and aside from getting on a helicopter, this is the only way to see it!

The Huemules trek is typically completed in 4 days and 3 nights. However, it's important to keep in mind that this is a weather-dependent trek that can and will get cancelled if the winds are deemed too strong - this is especially important on days 2 and 3.

I would recommend reading this detailed first-hand account of the trek so you know what to expect.

Updated: Hiking Fees in El Chaltén

NOTE: As of October 2024, Los Glaciares National Park, which encompasses most of the popular hiking trails out of El Chaltén, has introduced a mandatory entrance fee (view current rates here). 

If you visited El Chaltén when hiking was free, like I did, you may be in for a bit of a surprise on your return visit. New fees have been introduced, and these are supposed to fund trail maintenance and conservation efforts, helping ensure the region stays pristine for future visitors. However, the prices are a bit steep!

Note that these are the rates for foreign visitors, which are listed as 'general admission'. If you are a national visitor or a provincial resident of Santa Cruz, the fees are much lower.

1‑day pass - 45,000 ARS ($45 USD) 

3‑day pass - 90,000 ARS ($90 USD)

7‑day pass - 157,500 ARS ($157 USD)

These passes can be purchased online in advance or at one of the entry gates near trailheads around El Chaltén.

Note that not all trails require fees. For instance, hikes outside the park remain free of charge. However, most people come to El Chaltén to tackle the famous trails! 

Some travellers also report they can avoid paying by starting hikes before 7 a.m. or after 6 p.m., when control booths at the trailheads are unstaffed, though this shouldn’t be relied on as a strategy.

Final Tips for Hiking in El Chaltén

Hit the trails early.

Start early for the best light, fewer crowds, and increased wildlife sightings. Many of El Chaltén’s hikes are most beautiful at sunrise or early morning, when the peaks of Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre glow orange and pink. Starting early not only improves your chances of seeing wildlife like condors or foxes but also helps you avoid strong afternoon winds and trail congestion.

Most trails start in town.

All hikes start in or near town, so you can base yourself in one spot without needing transport. One of the great advantages of El Chaltén is its compact layout; once you get to town, nearly all major trailheads are accessible on foot. This means you can stay in a central hotel and still walk to every hike, no car or shuttle needed. That is, unless you're tackling some hikes outside the park or in private nature reserves.

Check the weather before each hike. 

The weather in Patagonia is famously unpredictable and can change quite rapidly. Clear skies in the morning can turn into rain, wind, or snow within hours. Always check the day’s forecast at your accommodation or the visitor center before setting out.

Use Windguru to see the wind forecast.

Strong winds are a defining feature of the region, especially in the afternoon. Local hikers and guides use Windguru to get detailed wind forecasts. It's a great tool to know if your hike will be breezy or a battle. We also found this website super helpful when booking our day excursions in El Calafate, especially our glacier boat tour, because we wanted good weather that day!

Pack the essentials in your day pack.

Bring layers, sunscreen, snacks, and water for every hike - even the short ones. Weather conditions can change dramatically throughout the day, so dress in layers and pack essentials like a windbreaker, gloves, and sun protection. Even on short hikes, it's best to be prepared.

Camping is allowed in designated sites.

If you're planning to do multi-day hikes, there are designated backcountry campsites such as Campamento Poincenot and Campamento De Agostini. These sites have basic amenities and are first-come, first-served. Bring your own gear and follow Leave No Trace principles.

Rent gear in El Chaltén.

Don’t worry if you didn’t pack trekking poles or a tent. El Chaltén has several outdoor outfitters where you can rent everything from sleeping bags to camp stoves.

Build in recovery days.

If you're building an itinerary, mix a few easy day hikes for recovery days with one or two major treks like Laguna de los Tres or Laguna Torre. We could not move after tackling our first 20+ kilometre hike; we needed a full day to sleep, stretch and hobble around! Other people like to treat themselves to a fancy dome stay as a reward for completing all their hikes. The choice is yours.

Don't bypass El Calafate

Once you're done trekking in El Chalten, be sure to spend a few days in El Calafate. This town sits on the south end of Los Glaciares National Park, and this section of the park has a series of trails and boardwalks where you can see glaciers and icebergs, the most famous of them all being the Perito Moreno Glacier. It's a completely different experience! You can find my complete El Calafate travel guide to help you plan your visit.

#### Visiting Estancia El Ombú de Areco | A Gaucho Tour from Buenos Aires
Want to enjoy an estancia day and gaucho tour from Buenos Aires? Here's our experience visiting Estancia El Ombú de Areco and why you may enjoy it too!

No trip to Argentina would be complete without a taste of the gaucho experience. But what do you do if you're only planning to visit the city of Buenos Aires?

Well, fret not, because enjoying an estancia day and visiting the pampas is something that can easily be arranged on a day trip from Buenos Aires!

There are many estancias near Buenos Aires and fortunately for you, some of them welcome visitors for the day and even overnight.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco runs an estancia day and gaucho tour program where you can spend the whole day at a countryside ranch horseback riding, enjoying an Argentine barbecue, and learning about gaucho culture and traditions.

We recently spent a few days in San Antonio de Areco, the town known as the cradle of gaucho culture, which is where Estancia El Ombú de Areco is located and it was one of the highlights of our visit!

This day tour to Estancia El Ombu de Areco is a best-seller! It includes transportation to and from Buenos Aires, a town tour of San Antonio de Areco with a guide, horseback riding, a traditional Argentine BBQ, live folklore music and dancing, and a gaucho horse-whispering demonstration. This tour has over 800+ reviews and 5 stars. 

Visiting Estancia El Ombú de Areco

While there are many things to do in San Antonio de Areco, the activity we were most looking forward to was an estancia day trip where we could enjoy the countryside and learn more about the gaucho culture. 

We spent several days in the town of San Antonio de Areco (we even stayed at an estancia just a short walk from the centre of town!), however, on our last day we decided to visit the most famous estancia around: El Ombú de Areco.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco is located on the outskirts of town and it is a working estancia that has also been welcoming guests since 1993. 

Their Día de Campo or 'Countryside Day' program is one of the more popular tour offerings in the area. It's a full day gaucho tour where you spend the day at the estancia and it's also a fun day trip from Buenos Aires.

Since we were already in the area, we booked this gaucho day tour directly through the estancia and organized our own transportation there, however, if you're coming from the city, you can book this estancia day tour from Buenos Aires which includes your transportation there and back plus a visit to several landmarks in the town of San Antonio de Areco. 

Now without further ado, I'm going to tell you all about our estancia day at El Ombú de Areco so you know exactly what to expect!

A brief history of the estancia

As soon as we arrived at Estancia El Ombú de Areco, we were greeted by a member of the staff who shared a brief history; we learned the estancia dates back to 1880 and that it's been in the hands of the Boelcke Family since 1934. 

The estancia stretches out over 300 hectares, which are divided between grazing cattle and agricultural land. They have 350 heads of Aberdeen Angus livestock, and their fields are planted with soy, corn, wheat and oats depending on the time of year.

As for the name, Estancia El Ombú de Areco is named after the ombú tree, which we were surprised to learn isn't even a tree!

This tree-like plant is actually a type of bush that grows in the pampas and requires very little water to thrive. 

If you knock on the trunk, it sounds hollow, and the branches are quite soft and spongy to the touch. This makes the ombu capable of storing water within itself, which protects it from both droughts and wildfires that can occur in the plains. 

And can we take a moment to appreciate the size of the ombú and the amount of shade it provides? This is why gauchos revere it. 

Welcome drinks and empanadas

After that fascinating introduction to Estancia El Ombú de Areco, we were offered a welcome snack: an empanada and a beverage of our choice.

If you're new to Argentina, an empanada is a savoury pastry that can have numerous fillings, however, the classic is ground beef. 

It can be baked or fried (in my opinion, fried is best as it enhances the flavours!) and it can be served as an appetizer or as a meal.

I'm happy to report that the empanadas at the estancia were fried, juicy and absolutely delicious. We each had two, but I could've honestly devoured half a dozen.

We were also offered drinks and were able to choose from wine, beer, soda, water or juice. 

Horseback riding or a carriage ride

Once we had a snack in our bellies, it was time for the first activity: a choice between a horseback ride or a carriage ride. 

We've done a lot of horseback riding in Argentina (our most ambitious expedition was crossing Cordoba's Sierras Chicas on horseback!), so this time around, we opted for a carriage ride since it's something we hadn't done before. 

The carriage is locally known as a sulky or carruaje and it's a small lightweight cart pulled by a single horse. 

Our carriage ride was enjoyable but brief. Those who opted to go horseback riding enjoyed an in-depth tour of the estancia grounds, however, we'd had a lot of rain just before our visit, which explains why we couldn't venture too far with the carriage. Keep that in mind when making your selection!

Traditional Argentine BBQ lunch 

Next up, it was time for lunch! Part of the estancia day experience is that you get to enjoy a traditional Argentine BBQ, locally known as an asado.

Sam and I went investigating and asked to visit the parrilla where they were grilling the meat. 

The traditional way of grilling in Argentina is by making a wood fire to one side and then taking the coals as they form and sliding those underneath the grill. 

The lunch setting was beautiful - the high ceilings, the colonial floor tiles, the balcony and columns covered in ivy. The tables were set up all along the terrace for al fresco dining, so we still had protection in case of rain.

Every table had a bottle of Malbec wine, and the grilled meat was the star of the meal. We got to try chorizo, morcilla, and various cuts of beef, chicken and pork.

This was accompanied by multiple salads and side dishes, including a tomato, lettuce and cucumber salad; a carrot, corn and egg salad; and potatoes au gratin.

The food was abundant! The waiters kept walking by with trays of meat, offering us new cuts fresh off the grill to the point where we had to decline.

For dessert, we opted for flan with dulce de leche, a classic Argentine dessert. It was the perfect way to end a feast of a meal!

Note: The estancia can accommodate vegetarians, vegans and celiacs, however, you must let them know of your food restrictions at the time of your booking. 

Live folklore music and dancing

I should mention that halfway through lunch, musicians set up on the terrace and we got to enjoy live folklore music or música gaucha.

This paved the way nicely because, by the time we were done with dessert, we were invited to come and learn one of the traditional folklore dances.

At this point, most tables had already consumed their bottle of wine, so everyone was feeling extra jovial and uninhibited - in fact, not a single guest declined dancing!

Having spent part of my childhood in Argentina, the music and dances brought back lots of memories since we used to learn these at school and perform them for special dates and assemblies, so it was fun to relive the experience. 

Doma India or horse whispering

Then, it was time for the doma india or horse whispering. The bond between a gaucho and his horse is truly something special and this is one of the things you get to witness on this estancia day tour from Buenos Aires.

The true gaucho's approach to taming a horse is a gentle one built on trust. 

"Around 1600, the Indigenous people of Argentina discovered horses and soon created their own method to tame them, completely void of outside influence. They demonstrated an uncanny ability to gently train their horses which surprised the Conquistadores, who underestimated them and in general treated them with contempt."
History of Indian Dressage via Areco Tradition

During the demonstration, we got to see how a gaucho calmed his horse and moved him into various positions without any force or struggle. The horse lay down on its side, then on its back, and also put its legs up in the air.

We all sat in a semi-circle and watched as the horse melted from one position to the next, following the gaucho's guidance.

It's important to be very quiet during the doma india to not startle the horse. We were asked not to make any noise, sudden movements or even use the flash on our cameras.

Free time at the estancia

If you're visiting the estancia on a day tour, this is probably where your tour ends. However, because we had booked directly through the estancia, we still had a bit more time to enjoy the grounds.

For those visiting during the summer months, bring your bathing suit and a towel because the estancia lets you make use of their swimming pool. You'll likely be craving a dip during a hot summer's day in the pampas!

We visited a bit later in the season, so it wasn't swimming weather, but we still had lots of different activities to keep us busy. The estancia has soccer fields, volleyball courts, pool tables, ping pong tables, mini foosball, sun loungers and more.

We befriended the estancia dogs, then plopped ourselves on a lounger in the shade and enjoyed an afternoon siesta. 

An afternoon snack and farewell 

Finally, it was time for merienda which is a light afternoon meal. I can't say we were the least bit hungry after the copious lunch we had, however, that didn't stop us from accepting a small dessert. 

We opted for lemon squares and a beverage out on the lounge chairs. 

It was a nice way to end our day at the estancia and bid San Antonio de Areco farewell before travelling back to Buenos Aires. 

Booking your tour to El Ombú de Areco

As I mentioned earlier, because we were already staying in San Antonio de Areco, we booked this estancia day and gaucho tour directly through El Ombú de Areco. We arranged everything via WhatsApp (this is commonly done in Argentina) but alternatively, you can send them an email via their contact form.

Because we booked directly, this does mean we were responsible for arranging our own transportation to and from the estancia. As a heads up, half of the drive is on paved roads and the second half is on dirt roads. 

We booked a taxi and arranged a time for drop off and pick up. However, because it had rained quite heavily for days leading up to our visit, the dirt roads were intransitable. The estancia coordinated a meeting point where the pavement ends and then they sent one of their own drivers in a pickup truck that would be able to handle the mud.

If you're booking the estancia day tour from Buenos Aires, you won't need to worry about transportation since hotel pick-up and drop-off are included.

https://youtu.be/nN49lCXB4as

Final thoughts on the gaucho tour

We loved this gaucho day tour! The staff at Estancia El Ombú de Areco are super attentive and thoughtful.

We've done a lot of estancia day tours (like this one in El Calafate) and overnight estancia stays across Argentina and I can honestly say this one was a notch above the rest. 

The Día de Campo itinerary had a good pace; there were plenty of activities to fill the day but it wasn't so much that we were exhausted at the end of it all. 

The combination of horseback riding or carriage rides, a leisurely BBQ meal on the terrace, live folklore music and dancing, and the gaucho horse demonstration were just perfect. 

At the end of the day, we got to experience a wonderful day in the countryside, learn about gaucho culture and traditions, and it was a nice change of scenery from Buenos Aires. 

There's a reason why this tour has 5 stars and over 800 reviews, so I would highly recommend it!

#### Visiting Los Alerces National Park on a Day Trip from Esquel!
Los Alerces National Park is one of the most epic day trips you can do from Esquel!

Located in the Andes mountains in the majestic Province of Chubut, Los Alerces National Park is made up of a chain of interconnected rivers and lakes that weave their way through ancient forests.

Highlights include a boat ride on waters that shift from emerald to turquoise, seeing glaciers hanging from the mountain tops, and coming face to face with the second-longest living tree species in the world - the alerce which earns the park its name!

Los Alerces National Park was declared a UNESCO Natural World Heritage Site in 2017 in order to protect the most extensive forest of alerce trees in Argentina.

Los Alerces National Park is the kind of place that takes your breath away with its natural beauty, and it's definitely worth a spot on your northern Patagonia travel itinerary.

This full-day tour to Los Alerces National Park from Esquel visits the cave paintings, the Interpretation Museum, Puerto Limonao, Irigoyen Waterfall, and many other picturesque spots along the way.

Getting to Los Alerces National Park

By car

If you want to explore Los Alerces National Park at your own pace, the best way to do so is by renting a car. This can be done in Esquel, which is the biggest town in proximity to the park.

You'll want to take Ruta Nacional 259 and then turn right on Ruta Provincial 71 to continue heading north towards the park.

From Esquel, it is 30 minutes until you reach the boundaries of the park, however, you'll have to drive 1 hour and 30 minutes to reach the centre of the park (the area around Pasarela Rio Arrayanes), which is the starting point for many tours and activities.

By bus

You can also take a bus from Esquel to Los Alerces National Park. However, since we were visiting during low season, there was only one daily bus with Transportes Esquel leaving in the early morning and returning in the evening. 

We made sure to arrive at the bus terminal 1 hour ahead of departure to make sure we could get seats on the bus since you can’t reserve tickets ahead of time and once they’re gone, they’re gone.

It's also imperative that you buy return tickets so that the bus driver will save you a seat on the journey back. There were some people who only paid for a one-way fare, and then the bus was full on the way back! The only options were to hitchhike, try to get a taxi, or spend the night.

Tours to Los Alerces National Park

A guided tour is a great way to experience Los Alerces National Park and thankfully there are plenty of options to choose from depending on your interests.

Los Alerces Half-Day Tour - This is a 4-hour tour where you visit some of the park highlights like Villa Futalaufquen, the Interpretive Museum, cave paintings, Puerto Limonao and Irigoyen Waterfall.

Los Alerces Full-Day Tour - This is a 9-hour tour where you do all of the above, plus you drive to another section of the park to see the Arrayanes River, Menendez River, the Solitary Lahuan, Puerto Chucao and more.

Bosque de Alerces Milenarios with Glaxiar - This is a boat tour of Lake Menendez followed by a hike to see the ancient alerce trees - it's the tour we did!

Trek to Torrecillas Glacier with Glaxiar - This is a hike through the forest to the base of the glacier (this is the only tour operator that offers this excursion).

Kayaking in Los Alerces with Kayak Soul - This tour operator offers day excursions within the park as well as longer kayaking expeditions.

The thing to keep in mind is that certain tours may offer transportation from Esquel, while others require that you make your own way to the park. So make sure you know how you're getting there before you book your excursion!

Our visit to Los Alerces National Park

Out of all the excursions available at Los Alerces National Park, we opted for the one that included a boat ride on Lake Menendez followed by a hike to visit the oldest-known alerce tree in the park, so that's the experience we will be sharing.

Hike to Puerto Chucao

Since the particular tour we chose didn't include a transfer, we asked our bus driver to drop us off at Pasarela Rio Arrayanes. From this point, we had a 20-minute walk ahead of us to reach Puerto Chucao where our tour was departing from.

The walk was beautiful! First, we went over a suspension bridge that crosses the Arrayanes River, where we got to see the most incredible gem-coloured waters that went from teal to turquoise to emerald.

It was such a scenic walk, the kind that tempts you to stop for a photo every ten steps, but we had to keep the pace in order to make it to the starting point of our tour.

We eventually reached Puerto Chucao (with time to spare!), and this is where we met our guide and boarded the boat.

Boat tour of Lake Menéndez

Much like the walk over to the port, the scenery on the boat tour was incredible! There were forested mountains everywhere we looked and we even got to see the Torrecillas Glacier (you can trek up to the glacier but that's a different excursion offered by Glaxiar).

We had ideal weather that day so we were able to go out on the boat's top deck and enjoy the views.

We cruised the full length of Lake Menendez soaking in the views until we reached the tip of the north arm. The journey was about an hour and a half in length, and then we disembarked in Puerto Sagrario for the next part of the tour: hiking to the millenary alerce trees!

Seeing millenary alerce trees

The main draw to Los Alerces National Park is the alerce forest which sits in a protected area that can only be accessed by authorized boat tours.

The alerce tree is known as lahuán meaning 'grandfather' in the Mapuche language, or Fitzroya cupressoides.

It grows in the Valdivian temperate rain forests below the higher elevations of the Andes in both Argentina and Chile.

These trees can grow from sea level up to 1,500 meters above sea level, and though they are slow-growth trees, they can reach heights of 40-60 meters though some 70-metre trees have also been documented.

An interesting fact about the alerce tree is that it only grows between 0.6 to 1.6 millimetres per year, so they are able to tell a tree's age based on its width.

These trees are one of the longest living species in the world; in this park, you have one that is 2,700 years old and over in Chile there are some over 3,600 years old.

From the port, we embarked on a 2.2-kilometre hike with an elevation gain of 70 metres over the course of the walk.

The hike was a mix of forest trails and boardwalks with some steps in the sections with more uneven terrain. It was a loop, so we ended at the same spot where we began - in front of the Grandfather Alerce.

We then returned back to Puerto Chucao. We still had two and a half hours before we needed to catch our bus, so we set out to explore a bit more of the park.

We hiked to Lago Verde on our way to the meeting point where we waited for our bus back to Esquel!

Is visiting Los Alerces worth it?

Yes, 100%!

This was one of our favourite day trips from Esquel, and in fact, we enjoyed the park so much that we have since revisited it on other trips to Patagonia.

This park can also be accessed from the north end via El Bolsón, so we've seen quite a bit of the park since our first visit.

That being said, this excursion combining a boat tour of Lake Menendez and a hike to see the millenary trees remains our favourite way to experience the park.

It's one of the must-see places in Patagonia and well worth the journey.

The ancient alerce forest cannot be reached on foot, so this tour is the only way to see them up close. Plus since the group size is limited, it feels a lot more intimate.

Once you board the boat it's just you and your small group and it feels like you have the whole Valdivian forest to yourself!

So if you find yourself travelling in northern Patagonia, yes, make time for Parque Nacional Los Alerces. You won't be disappointed.

And if you're sticking around Esquel for a few days, don't miss out on trips to the Welsh town of Trevelin, a train ride aboard the Old Patagonian Express, the strange standing rock at Piedra Parada, Butch Cassidy's ranch in Cholila and the small towns and villages of the Comarca Andina.

The Province of Chubut has a lot to offer!

#### Visiting the End of the World Post Office in Ushuaia
Sending mail from the End of the World Post Office was something I knew I wanted to do during my visit to Ushuaia!

Ushuaia is the southernmost city in the world and it really relishes its status. It's right here at the very bottom of Patagonia that you'll also find the post office at the End of the World, ride the train at the End of the World, and tour the prison at the End of the World.

Talk about ticking off bucket list items!

In this blog post, we're going to focus on how you can visit the End of the World Post Office, send some postcards, and get your passport stamped with an End of the World stamp.

Because if you're making it all the way to the bottom of the Earth, you may as well relish the achievement!

Where is the End of the World Post Office?

The post office at the end of the world is located in Tierra del Fuego National Park in Ushuaia, Argentina.

It's only an 11-kilometre drive from the city of Ushuaia to the park's entrance and there are a variety of ways to get there.

You can catch a shuttle from the Ushuaia Bus Terminal, you can take a taxi, or you can visit the park as part of a guided tour.

Once you reach the park and have paid your admission fee, you follow the main road (Ruta 3), and then turn left on the dirt road that leads to the trailhead for Senda Costera, or the Coastal Path.

Right at the edge of the water on Bahía Ensenada Zaratiegui is where you'll find the End of the World Post Office!

If you have the time, you can spend the whole day in the park and hike after visiting the post office. That's exactly what we did but more on that later!

If you're pressed for time, this half-day tour to Tierra del Fuego National Park might be a good idea. This 4-5 hour tour includes a visit to the southernmost post office for a stamp, a quick hike to Lago Roca, and a visit to Bahía Lapataia where the Panamerican Highway ends.

Sending mail from the End of the World

Made of corrugated metal and wood, this tiny post office sits atop a pier on the shores of the Beagle Channel and it’s the last chance to send mail before reaching Antarctica.

The post office at the end of the world is super cozy with a wood-burning stove, an all-wood interior and a skylight.

The exterior is plastered in stickers from travellers who’ve reached this place from all over the globe, and inside the walls are covered in postcards, maps, magnets and currencies from faraway lands.

There can be long lines at the post office at the End of the World if you happen to be there at the same time as a tour bus. In that case, there will usually be a long line that stretches out of the post office, but it does move fairly quickly.

To give you an idea of prices for mailing a postcard, we paid the equivalent of $4.40 USD for international postage and we were told it would take around 20 days for the postcard to arrive.

And yes, it did make it all the way to Canada!

Where can I get a passport stamped in Ushuaia?

Aside from sending mail, you can also get your passport stamped at the post office at the end of the world.

Getting your passport stamped costs the equivalent of $2.50 USD in pesos, and you get a collection of stamps that fill one passport page.

During my visit, I was given a sticker commemorating Carlos de Lorenzo, the postman at the end of the world, whose post office was at one point located on Isla Redonda 2 kilometres from shore.

Next was a double stamp featuring a penguin next to a postbox which read 'Correo del Fin del Mundo Ushuaia, Argentina' which translates to 'Post Office at the End of the World Ushuaia, Argentina'. There was a little penguin wearing a scarf and a hat next to that one.

There was another stamp that read 'Argentina' with a small Argentine flag next to it.

And lastly, a stamp with the date of my visit.

But fret not if you can't reach the Post Office at the End of the World during your stay in Ushuaia, because there are two more ways to get your passport stamped!

You can go to the Tourist Office in Ushuaia just east of the pier where boat excursions depart from, or you can also get a stamp during your Beagle Channel cruise (crew members come around with a stamp and anybody who wants one can get one).

Hiking in Tierra del Fuego National Park

After visiting the End of the World Post Office, sending postcards and getting our stamps, we decided to spend the rest of the day hiking in Tierra del Fuego National Park. I mean, we were already there!

We hiked the Senda Costera, which is the coastal trail that starts at Bahía Ensenada Zaratiegui directly west of the post office.

This trail hugs the coastline and runs past numerous coves and beaches, with plenty of opportunities for bird watching along the way.

We'd recommend packing a picnic because there are lots of nice places to stop along the way!

It takes anywhere between 3-4 hours to hike the Senda Costera and it's considered medium-level difficulty.

The trail ends in Alakush, which is where the Visitor's Centre is located and inside there's a cafeteria where you can celebrate completing the hike with a cup of coffee and a slice of cake!

This is also where the shuttle back to Ushuaia departs from, so it's the ideal place to end your hike.

And that's our guide to visiting the End of the World Post Office in Ushuaia. Now you know how to get there, how to send mail, how to get a stamp, and where to hike.

That takes care of one full day of your Ushuaia travel itinerary! You can get more ideas of fun tours in Ushuaia and find some handy travel tips here.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o46pE_9jeJM&t=1s

#### What's the Best Perito Moreno Glacier Tour?
Looking for the best Perito Moreno Glacier tours? You've come to the right place!

Taking a Perito Moreno Glacier tour is a must-do activity for anyone visiting El Calafate! This is one of the few advancing glaciers in the world and it is a behemoth that is fed by the Southern Patagonian Ice Field, the third-largest reserve of fresh water on Earth.

The Perito Moreno Glacier is located in Los Glaciares National Park in Argentina's Santa Cruz Province, and it's one of the most important tourist attractions in all of Patagonia. The national park itself is a UNESCO World Heritage Site recognizing its exceptional natural beauty and importance.

The glacier itself covers an area of 250 km², is 30 kilometres long, and the ice reaches a depth of up to 170 meters. It is one of 48 glaciers that are fed by the Southern Patagonian Ice Field!

The magnitude of this glacier is hard to put into words, but it moved me to tears and I count standing in front of the glacier as one of the highlights of my travels across Patagonia. 

In fact, I enjoyed my experience seeing Perito Moreno Glacier by boat so much, that I went back to Los Glaciares National Park a second time to see the glacier again from a different perspective.

The thing about visiting Perito Moreno Glacier is that you can experience it in so many different ways and it's almost a little hard to choose because each option is more epic than the last! You can see the glacier by boat, by kayak, on an ice trek or from the boardwalks and balconies in the national park. 

Experiencing the glacier is one of the best things to do in El Calafate and we're going to help you choose the best Perito Moreno Glacier tour for you. Let's get started!

My Top 3 Picks: Perito Moreno Glacier Tour

#1 Top Pick

⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️

Boat Tour to the Glaciers

✅ See multiple glaciers

✅ Sail past icebergs

✅ Guided hike

#2 Pick

Perito Moreno Mini Trekking on Glacier

✅ Trek on a glacier

✅ Boat ride

✅ Explore boardwalks

#3 Pick

Glacier Kayaking Tour

✅ Kayak by the glacier

✅ Explore boardwalks and balconies

✅ Includes snack and lunch

Best Perito Moreno Glacier Tour

1. Boat Tour to the Glaciers

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 10-12 hours | ✅ Book it!

I'm starting off with my personal favourite: a full-day boat tour of the glaciers in Los Glaciares National Park. 

The beauty of this tour is that you not only visit the Perito Moreno Glacier, but also the other glaciers in the park. This is something that can only be done by boat, as you need to cruise the waters of Lago Argentino to reach the other glaciers.

During this glaciers boat tour, we got to see Spegazzini Glacier, which rises 135 meters above sea level; Upsala Glacier, which measures 53 kilometres in length; and, of course, Perito Moreno Glacier, which is the most famous glacier in Argentina. Just to name a few!

Other highlights included seeing glacial waterfalls cascading down the mountains, fishing chunks of icebergs from the lake (for drinks), and disembarking at Puesto de las Vacas for a guided hike. 

We had beautiful weather with sunshine and blue skies, so we spent most of the day out on the deck ohh-ing and ahh-ing at the landscapes around us and relishing the icy air every time we got close to a glacier.

This tour is called Glaciers Gourmet and you travel aboard Maria Turquesa. We opted for the basic option, which includes a packed gourmet lunch box, however, you can also choose the premium tasting menu, which is a more high-end experience that also gives you access to a private deck.

This excursion was our big splurge of the trip, but we were so happy to do it! It exceeded our expectations. 

PROS:

Visit multiple glaciers by boat

Sail past icebergs

Disembark for a guided hike

"FANTASTIC what a terrific, organized , efficient and super friendly tour. We saw ALL 5 glaciers, all of them! We left about 730 am and returned around 630 pm If you are in CALAFATE, this is your tour!" -Farhad M
Review via Viator

Check Prices and Availability!

2. Perito Moreno Mini Trekking on Glacier

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 10 hours | ✅ Book it!

This next Perito Moreno Glacier tour is the most adventure-filled way to experience the glacier. I mean, you can't get any closer than actually walking on the glacier itself!

This tour includes transportation, so you'll be picked up from your hotel and make your way to Los Glaciares National Park. Once you reach the park, you'll have 1 hour to explore the Pasarelas - these are the boardwalks and balconies that offer beautiful views of Perito Moreno Glacier. This is your chance to snap some photos!

This glacier trekking tour also includes a 20-minute boat ride because in order to reach the glacier, you first need to cross the Rico Arm. There's a small dock area at Bajo de las Sombras where this crossing takes place. 

Once you reach the other side, you'll have a briefing session with a professional ice trekking guide who will explain how things work on the tour - that means no deviating from the path the guide sets and everyone walks in a single file. 

You'll gear up with helmets, crampons and ice axes, and then the fun begins. You'll embark on a guided 3-hour trek first along the coast, next moraine, then on the glacier itself, and finally through the woods. 

The level of difficulty is considered moderate; the glacier's surface is irregular but safe and firm.

The glacier trek is a unique way to explore Perito Moreno's blue-hued crevasses and seracs. So if you’re looking for a bit of adventure, this activity certainly ticks the boxes!

Glacier treks are an expensive item, and that's because there's only one tour operator for this activity in El Calafate, and a limited number of people can participate each day. Tours are divided into a maximum of 20 people per group and there is 1 guide for every 10 participants.

You can probably get this tour for a bit cheaper if you book locally once you arrive, however, keep in mind that this tour can also sell out days in advance during high season, so if you want to organize it locally, do so as soon as you get into town!

PROS:

Trek on the Perito Moreno glacier

20-minute boat ride

Time to explore the boardwalks

"Highlight of our trip. Highly recommend if you are coming to El Calafate. No word to describe when you see the glacier right in front of you. Make everything worth it" -Christine H (Read more reviews)
Review via Viator 

Check Prices and Availability!

3. Perito Moreno Glacier Kayaking Tour

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 10 hours | ✅ Book it!

Another unforgettable way to experience Perito Moreno Glacier is on a kayaking tour. I bet you didn't think that was possible!

The nice thing about this tour is that aside from kayaking, you also get 2 hours to enjoy Los Glaciares National Park. You can use this time to walk the boardwalks and balconies for incredible views of the Perito Moreno Glacier. 

Since you are kayaking on glacial waters, there's a bit of prep work that goes into this tour. For starters, you'll have to wear a Gore-Tex dry suit, a thermal suit, boots, gloves and a life jacket.

After selecting your suits and getting dressed, we'll head to the shores of Lago Argentino for a safety briefing - you can't get too close to the glacier since calving events occur quite frequently!

You'll then do some warm-up exercises and enter the water at Playa de los Témpanos or Iceberg Beach. From this point, you'll begin paddling towards Perito Moreno Glacier.

The maximum distance you can approach the glacier is 600 meters, and this is because when a chunk of the glacier breaks off, it produces a large wave. But we're talking about a glacier that stands over 60 meters tall from the water line, so this is a case of objects appearing a lot larger even if they're not that near.

The actual kayaking time is 1 hour and 30 minutes. This Perito Moreno Glacier tour is a great option for travellers who want an active experience. 

PROS:

Kayak in front of Perito Moreno Glacier

Time to walk the boardwalks and balconies

Includes snacks and lunch

"This day was incredible, and the glacier exploration was one of the best things we did on our trip to Argentina. The staff was communicative before and during our trip, and made special arrangements for our hotel pickup. Then, all the details like the drive into Parque Nacional Los Glaciers, the lunch and the timing were done well. And the actual adventure kayaking to the glacier was fun and stunning. We had more than enough time to explore the glacier walkways afterward as well. Perfect day." -Geremy B (Read more reviews)

Check Prices and Availability!

4. Perito Moreno Glacier including Navigation

⭐️ RATING: 5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 8 hours | ✅ Book it!

I would say this is the classic day trip to Perito Moreno Glacier, where you get to experience the park from two perspectives: first exploring the park on foot and then boarding a vessel that brings you closer to the glacier.

The boardwalks and balconies offer panoramic views of the glacier, and if you stick around long enough, there's a good chance you'll get to witness a calving event - this is when large pieces of the glacier break off and fall into the water, causing a thunderous roar that echoes across the park. The subsequent waves that form are nothing short of impressive.

Aside from the boardwalks, you can also enjoy hiking some of the forest trails or visiting the Iceberg Lagoon. 

This is followed by a 1-hour boat journey so you can appreciate the intricate details of the glacier from a bit closer. This is a nice alternative to the full-day boat tour, if you don't want to commit to a long journey.

This tour to Perito Moreno Glacier provides ample time in the park, so you won't feel rushed, and it means you can cover all the park highlights.

PROS:

See the glacier from the boardwalks

1-hour boat trip to the glacier

Full-day tour

"We were very lucky with the weather, not a cloud in the sky, just blue and sunny all day. Julieta was a great guide explaining everything in Spanish and in English for the travellers on the comfortable bus. The first sight of the majestic glacier as we went round a curve was exciting. The boat ride up close to the glacier was marvellous, so were the pasarelas. The national park is well kept and preserved as it should be, a lot to learn from Argentina and Chile Patagonia parks. It was the hightlight of our visit to Argentina. Thanks to Cristian, the driver also." -Jane Marylin P (Read more reviews)

Check Prices and Availability!

5. Footbridges of Perito Moreno Glacier Tour

⭐️ RATING: 5/5 Stars | ⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 7-8 hours | ✅ Book it!

This Perito Moreno Glacier tour option is essentially transportation to and from Los Glaciares National Park with free time to explore as you please. 

You'll be picked up from your hotel (or a pre-defined meeting point if you're staying in an AirBnB or private apartment) and you'll then drive out to the park, which is a 1.5-hour journey. 

Pick-up in El Calafate is at 10:30 and you can expect to be back in the city around 5:00 pm. Always confirm the schedule on your booking as these times could be subject to change. 

This gives you plenty of time to walk the boardwalks, balconies and trails. Plus, you can visit Laguna del los Témpanos or Iceberg Lagoon - this is where the chunks of ice that break off Perito Moreno Glacier end up!

If you get hungry over the course of the day, you can visit Nativos de la Patagonia, the only restaurant inside the park. It has beautiful views of the glacier, and you can choose between a la carte or buffet dining. 

This is the most budget-friendly way to visit Perito Moreno Glacier, plus it gives you a lot of independence once you're in the park. 

PROS:

Transportation to the national park

Free time to explore the boardwalks and trails

A budget-friendly way to see Perito Moreno Glacier

"On time pick up and the guide gave a lot of information during the bus ride. Free to explore the glacier walkways at your own pace. Smooth trip back. Would recommend for an easy way to visit. Thanks!" -Ckmalita (Read more reviews)
Review via Viator

Check Prices and Availability!

Admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park 

It's important to note that most of these day tours do not include the admission fee to Los Glaciares National Park in their tour price.

This is because the admission fee varies depending on whether you're an in-province tourist, out-of-province tourist, or out-of-country tourist. 

The park fee for foreign visitors as of 2024 is $12000 ARS, which at the time of writing is just under $15 USD per person. You can view the most up-to-date rates here.

The Los Glaciares National Park website also says that they accept payment by Visa, Mastercard, debit card or cash. My tip is to bring cash!

As someone who has travelled across Argentina extensively, I can tell you first-hand that it's very common for the internet connection to be down in these remote areas, which means payments can get processed! This is something that has happened to me on more than one occasion.

The bus transporting you to your Perito Moreno Glacier tour will stop at the park entrance so you can pay your admission fee. 

If you choose a tour that doesn't include transportation, you can read about how to get to Perito Moreno Glacier here.

You can view the trails and boardwalks in Los Glaciares National Park's south sector here on AllTrails.

FAQs About Perito Moreno Glacier

Is Perito Moreno Glacier worth visiting? Yes, Perito Moreno Glacier is one of the most iconic landmarks in Patagonia and it's worth visiting this natural wonder.   How long is it from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier? The distance from El Calafate to Perito Moreno Glacier is 106 kilometres and the drive is 1.5 hours.   What are the different tours to visit Perito Moreno Glacier? You can book glacier trekking tours, scenic boat tours, kayaking tours and hiking tours to visit Perito Moreno Glacier. You can get more ideas of day tours from El Calafate here.  What's the best Perito Moreno Glacier tour? The most sought-after tour is the Perito Moreno mini trek where you get to walk on the glacier.   Can you visit Perito Moreno Glacier without a tour? You can visit Perito Moreno Glacier independently by paying the admission fee at Los Glaciares National Park and viewing the glacier from the boardwalks.  

Choosing a Perito Moreno Glacier Tour

So what's the best Perito Moreno Glacier tour for you? 

I would say if you're looking for an active and adventurous experience, opt for the glacier trek or the kayaking tour. 

If you want a full day of soaking in some of the most beautiful views in all of Patagonia, then go for the boat tour that visits all the glaciers in Los Glaciares National Park. 

And if you want something a bit more low-key where you can explore at your own rhythm, choose one of the tours that focuses on the boardwalks (one is strictly boardwalks and the other includes a short navigation). 

At the end of the day, you'll get to witness the magic of Perito Moreno Glacier with all of these tours, so you really can't go wrong with your selection. 

Read More:

How to Spend 2 Days in El Calafate

5 Estancias in El Calafate You Cannot Miss!

Where to Stay in El Calafate: Hotels for Every Budget!

Nibepo Aike: A Ranch Day in El Calafate

Choosing Your Patagonia Gadventures Tour

These are the Best Places to Visit in Patagonia

How to Get from El Calafate to El Chalten 

How to Spend 3 Days in El Chalten

Hiking in El Chalten: Everything You Need to Know

Things to Do in El Chalten: A Complete Travel Guide

Read More:

11 Beautiful Estancia Stays Near Buenos Aires

7 Unique Glamping Spots Near Buenos Aires

How to Visit Palacio Barolo

#### When is the Best Time to Visit Ushuaia, Argentina?
Wondering when is the best time to visit Ushuaia, Argentina? Here are the pros and cons of each season and seasonal events to keep an eye on.

Reaching the City at the End of the World is quite the endeavour, so if you're going to go through all the effort of getting there, you probably want to choose the best time to visit.

The great thing about Ushuaia is that it's a versatile destination that offers unique tours and adventures throughout the year. 

Summer is great for cruising the Beagle Channel and spotting sea lions, autumn brings fiery landscapes that charm hikers, winter is the time to hit the slopes at Cerro Castor, and spring brings Tierra del Fuego National Park to life again with wildflowers and active wildlife.

Like most travellers to Ushuaia, I chose to visit during the summer months in order to make the most of the long days and good weather. I also wanted to ring in the New Year in the southernmost city in the world, but that proved to be a bit anticlimactic as there isn't a whole lot going on unless you want to go to a bar! 

That's why today I'm breaking down the pros and cons of visiting Ushuaia in each season, along with activities and events you may want to include in your plans!

Best Time to Visit Ushuaia, Argentina

Summer in Ushuaia

(December to February)

Pros of summer in Ushuaia

Summer is the most popular time of year to visit Ushuaia with tourists descending on the city at the End of the World by the thousands. 

The pros of visiting Ushuaia in the summer are the long days where you can enjoy up to 18 hours of daylight! We found it a bit strange not experiencing darkness; we went to sleep before sunset and woke up long after sunrise. But on the bright side - quite literally! - it means you can maximize your days and squeeze in different tours and excursions.

Weatherwise, the summer temperatures in Ushuaia range from 8–20°C (46–68°F), making it a really nice time to enjoy outdoor activities.

We did quite a bit of hiking in Tierra del Fuego National Park during our summer visit. One of our highlights was hiking the Senda Costera or Coastal Trail, which starts next to the Post Office at the End of the World (where you can send a postcard!) and then follows the shores of the Beagle Channel.

There are lots of different tours you can enjoy inside Tierra del Fuego National Park, so don't think you're just limited to hiking. There's also canoeing, birdwatching, and the famous End of the World train ride.

Plus, there are numerous hikes to enjoy in and around Ushuaia, like Laguna Esmeralda and Vinciguerra Glacier, just to name a couple.

Another activity we thoroughly enjoyed was going on a Beagle Channel boat tour where we got to see sea lions, sea birds and Magellanic penguins! We also cruised past Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse, which is another iconic photo op.

If your schedule is flexible, summer is generally considered the best time to visit Ushuaia.

Summer is the peak season for cruises to Antarctica, so if you're planning to combine your visit to Ushuaia with a cruise to the White Continent, then summer is the best time to do so. If that's the case and you only have a few days to enjoy the city, you may find this 3-day Ushuaia travel itinerary helpful.

Cons of summer in Ushuaia

The downside of visiting Ushuaia in the summertime is that it is peak tourist season. This means it's important you book your accommodations and tours in advance as certain experiences can sell out.

If you want to stay at a particular property - Ushuaia has some beautiful luxury hotels! - you'll want to reserve that in advance. The same goes for the boat tours that visit Isla Martillo to walk with penguins, as only a small number of visitors are permitted per day.

The higher demand for tours and accommodations can also result in slightly higher prices than in the shoulder season, however, we still found it to be reasonably priced for such a remote corner of the world.

Lastly, I think it's worth noting that even during the summer months, the weather in Ushuaia can be quite temperamental, as it is across Patagonia. We visited during December and January and experienced everything from sunshine to intense winds and freezing rain. You still need to pack for a sub-Antarctic climate!

Recommended Summer Activity in Ushuaia:🐧 Hop aboard a Beagle Channel cruise with mini trekking. You'll see penguins and sea lions and cruise past the famous Les Éclaireurs Lighthouse. You'll then disembark at Bridges Islands for a walk and talk about local wildlife and the Yámana people.

Autumn in Ushuaia

(March to May)

Pros of Autumn in Ushuaia

Autumn in Ushuaia brings vibrant colours as the forests turn all shades of crimson, pumpkin and gold. This is the time of year that draws photographers looking to capture the changing Fuegian landscapes.

The weather starts to cool down ranging from 5–10°C (41–50°F), however, it's still a very comfortable temperature for hiking and enjoying the outdoors.

Some hikes to consider for peeping autumn colours include Laguna Esmeralda, Martial Glacier, and many of the trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park, which remain accessible through mid-autumn until the snow arrives.

Alternatively, you can admire the autumn foliage on a helicopter flight over Ushuaia, or you can also take in the landscapes while cruising the waters of the Beagle Channel.

Another pro of visiting Ushuaia in autumn is that it's the shoulder season. This means it is quieter with fewer tourists and you can expect to see prices drop for accommodations and tours.

Cons of Autumn in Ushuaia

There aren't too many downsides to visiting Ushuaia in autumn. Sudden rain and cooler spells can occur, but you can always save these days for indoor activities like visiting the Old Ushuaia Prison, going on a double-decker bus tour, or enjoying a taste of Fuegian cuisine. 

Recommended autumn activity in Ushuaia:🍂 Join a 4x4 tour of Paso Garibaldi, a mountain pass across the Fuegian Andes where you'll enjoy the autumn foliage. You'll see Lake Escondido, Lake Fagnano, and finish the excursion with a traditional Argentine barbecue.

Winter in Ushuaia 

(June to August)

Pros of Winter in Ushuaia

Winter in Ushuaia is something straight out of a postcard. This is when the City at the End of the World transforms into a wintry wonderland with snow-covered mountains and forests.

During this time of year, you can enjoy an abundance of outdoor sports like snowshoeing, dog sledding, snowmobiling, and ice trekking. This is the best time to go to Ushuaia for all things related to outdoor winter fun! 

Ushuaia is home to Cerro Castor, Argentina's southernmost ski resort, offering downhill skiing, cross-country skiing, snowboarding, and even an ice skating rink.

There are two fun winter events at Cerro Castor: the Snow Pool where skiers and snowboarders slide down a slope and then attempt to glide over a pool of water, and the Torch Descent where skiers and snowboarders descend the mountain with torches putting on a show for spectators.

Finally, we can't forget about Fiesta Nacional de La Noche Más Larga, or The Longest Night Festival, which celebrates the winter solstice with live music, dancing, and a variety of activities that take place across the city.

Cons of Winter in Ushuaia

The downside of winter in Ushuaia is that it will be cold. However, if you're visiting from Canada or the Nordic countries, you won't actually find it that cold! You might even say it's a mild winter.

The temperatures hover around -2 to 5°C (28–41°F), though it can feel colder with the wind chill and Ushuaia does experience strong winds.

Another downside of winter travel in Ushuaia is that certain hiking trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park and the surrounding area will be closed due to ice and snow. However, you can enjoy some of the landscapes in the park by riding the Train at the End of the World, also known as the Southern Fuegian Railway.

The days will be a lot shorter with around 6-8 daylight hours, depending on the month you visit.

Recommended Winter Activity in Ushuaia: 🚂 Ride the End of the World Train and enjoy the snowy landscape while you learn about Ushuaia's origins as a penal colony.

Spring in Ushuaia

(September to November)

Pros of Spring in Ushuaia

The springtime weather is still relatively cool with daytime temperatures ranging from 5–12°C (41–54°F).

If you visit in early spring, you might still be able to enjoy a bit of skiing or snowboarding on Cerro Castor!

As springtime arrives in Ushuaia, the snow melts, the trails in Tierra del Fuego National Park become more accessible and wildlife becomes more active. That means plenty of opportunities to spot sea birds, penguins, and seals!

Because spring is shoulder season, that means there are fewer tourists around, which also translates to better prices on both accommodations and tours.

Cons of spring in Ushuaia

One of the cons of spring travel in Ushuaia is that the weather can be a bit unpredictable bringing a mixture of sudden rain, strong winds and even lingering snow. 

This means you have to be flexible with your plans and you should save a few indoor activities for inclement weather days. One of the lessons we learned during our trip to Ushuaia was that not every day will be a hiking day!

Another thing to consider is that during the early spring season, some trails may still be muddy or partially closed.

Recommended Spring Activity in Ushuaia:🌷Go on a small group guided hike to Laguna Esmeralda known for its green-turquoise colour. This tour includes a complimentary boxed lunch.

So, when should you visit Ushuaia?

As you can see, the best time to visit Ushuaia greatly depends on the types of activities you want to enjoy and each season brings its own pros and cons.

Summer is for hiking, seeing penguins, and embarking on Antarctic expeditions. Winter is all about snow sports and some unique events. Meanwhile, spring and autumn bring fewer tourists, lower prices and stunning landscapes.

One thing is for certain, there is no shortage of options whatever season you choose!

So, if you're ready to start planning your trip, here's some information on different ways to get to Ushuaia, and here's a complete travel guide to the southernmost city so you can get some ideas of things to do once you get here.

#### Where to Stay in Cordoba: The Best Places to Stay in Cordoba, Argentina
So you're in the midst of planning your trip to Argentina and you're wondering where to stay in Cordoba. Well, you've come to the right place!

Argentina's second-largest city may still be relatively undiscovered by international tourists, but it's a destination with a lot to offer.

In Cordoba, you can explore the Jesuit Quarter which is sprinkled with cathedrals, churches, crypts and other historic buildings from the city's early days.

You can browse the artisanal fair at Paseo de las Artes or shop at the ornate mall known as Patio Olmos. Mornings can be spent wandering through museums and art galleries and afternoons strolling the gardens of Parque Sarmiento. The options really are endless!

But let's get back to where to stay in Cordoba because each neighbourhood has its own distinct flair. In this guide, we're going to highlight 3 different neighbourhoods in Cordoba that are ideal for travellers - that means walking distance to the main attractions and plenty of options for dining and shopping.

Plus, we'll also share some of our top picks for boutique hotels, mid-range hotels, and hostels in the city.

Where to Stay in Cordoba

Being centrally located and able to reach the city's main attractions on foot is an important thing to consider when booking your accommodations. If you only have a few days in the city, you don't want to be in a quiet residential area that doesn't have much to offer tourists or have to put up with a long commute into the city centre.

That's why we're going to highlight three neighbourhoods that are ideal for travellers, and each of these offers something a little different ranging from historic areas with colonial architecture, lively boroughs with plenty of nightlife, and neighbourhoods that offer art and culture but are also close to green spaces.

Centro

Best neighbourhood for history and culture

If you want to live and breathe Cordoba's colonial history, stay in Centro which is the Old Town. This part of the city is home to the Jesuit Quarter or Jesuit Block, which is a UNESCO World Heritage Site. This is where the city saw its early beginnings and walking through these streets will transport you back through time. In Centro, you'll find attractions like Cordoba Cathedral, the Jesuit Crypt, the Society of Jesus Church, and the National University of Cordoba (the oldest university in Argentina and the third oldest in the Americas).

Nueva Córdoba

Best neighbourhood for art, culture and greenery

Nueva Córdoba is considered a student neighbourhood so it has a very youthful atmosphere. It is home to a couple of universities and its numerous faculties. Here you'll find bars, cafés, and cultural venues. Some of the top attractions in Nueva Cordoba include Paseo del Buen Pastor, the Church of the Capuchins, the Fine Art Museum, the Latin American Craft Museum, and the Anthropology Museum. The neighbourhood is also right next to Parque Sarmiento offering a nearby green escape.

Güemes

Best neighbourhood for nightlife and dining

Güemes is another neighbourhood to consider if you prefer a lively atmosphere. This is Cordoba's trendiest neighbourhood known for its bohemian vibe, walls covered in street art, and pulsating nightlife. Here you'll find restaurants, bars and nightclubs that stay open late. There are plenty of boutique shops to browse during the daytime, plus you can walk along the tree-lined stream known as La Cañada and browse the handicrafts in Paseo de las Artes. Güemes is a nice place to explore, but if sleep is your priority, keep in mind that you may hear music and conversation until the early hours of the morning, especially if you end up in a street-facing hotel room.

Remember that Córdoba is a relatively compact city, so you can easily explore multiple neighbourhoods during your visit. Each neighbourhood has its own unique charm and attractions, so be sure to choose the one that aligns with your interests and preferences.

Boutique Hotels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Azur Real Hotel Boutique & Spa (@azurhotel) 

Azur Real Hotel Boutique

Azur Real is a family-run boutique hotel set in the heart of Cordoba's Centro neighbourhood. The building dates back to 1915 and is steeped in history; over the years, it has been a leather workshop, a pharmacy, a school, a Chinese restaurant and a dance club, just to name a few of its roles.

By the time this building was acquired by its current owners, it sat in ruins and was painstakingly renovated over the course of four years. The result is a warm and homey atmosphere that showcases Cordoba's architectural history.

The hotel's key selling feature is its spa called Baños de Azur, where you can enjoy their Ancient Baths Circuit. This is a 2-hour tour by candlelight through 12 different areas where water in its different states and temperatures promotes a state of relaxation.

The rooms have a contemporary-meets-rustic feel and range from standard to more luxurious suites with a private patio, large dressing room and jacuzzi.

Azur Real Hotel Boutique has an onsite restaurant called Bruma, which uses fresh, organic and locally sourced ingredients. Itacú is their tea house featuring artisan teas, native mountain herbs and yerba mate.

Read reviews for Azur Real Hotel Boutique.

Address: San Jerónimo 257

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Virreinato Hotel Boutique (@virreinatohotelboutique) 

Hotel Virreinato

Hotel Virreinato is a boutique hotel set in a historic building that dates back to 1670 in the Jesuit Quarter. It stands in what used to be the courtyard of a tile-making workshop during the city's colonial days.

Today, the interior of this hotel is exquisitely decorated with antique wood furniture and lots of art, chandeliers, tapestries, figurines and treasures from the past few centuries. Walking through the halls is like wandering through a museum and the surrounding pieces really do take you back in time.

If you stay here, be sure to join their private guided tour of the property. During this tour, you'll learn all about the building’s Jesuit history and the couple who made this place what it is today, filling it with an impressive art collection from across the globe.

Enjoying breakfast in the living room surrounded by pieces of history is one of the highlights of staying at Hotel Virreinato.

Read reviews for Hotel Virreinato.

Address: Avenida Duarte Quirós 167

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by 🏨Sacha Mistol __ (@sachamistol) 

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel is Cordoba's first themed boutique hotel, where art invades every corner of the old mansion which dates back to 1927.

The boutique hotel is situated in Centro in a house that belonged to Emilio F. Olmos, who was Mayor of the City and Governor of the Province of Córdoba. The construction showcases the styles that were prevalent at the time of its construction. The result is a colonial horizontal house with a dash of Neoclassicism and a central inner patio as the protagonist.

Sacha Mistol Art Hotel has 9 unique rooms, each featuring murals, installations, and works by different artists.

The hotel also offers a spa and wellness centre where guests can enjoy hot or cold stone massages and body scrubs.

Read reviews for Sacha Mistol Art Hotel.

Address: Rivera Indarte 237

Mid-range Hotels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Yrigoyen 111 Hotel (@y111hotel) 

Yrigoyen 111 Hotel

Yrigoyen 111 Hotel is located in Nueva Cordoba and offers bright, modern and spacious rooms.

This Cordoba hotel has 109 rooms spread out across 2 towers and 14 floors. Guests can choose between twin, double and triple rooms.

Some of the hotel's highlights include the spa, sauna and swimming pool, which are located on the hotel's rooftop, offering city views.

An American-style buffet breakfast is served daily, and guests can also make use of the 1906 Lounge Bar.

Read reviews for Yrigoyen 111 Hotel.

Address: Avenida Hipólito Yrigoyen 111

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by MyBeds.com (@mybedsoficial) 

NH Córdoba Urbano

NH Córdoba Urbano is located in Centro overlooking La Cañada and is just a couple of blocks away from the Jesuit Quarter. Its central location makes it a great base for exploring Cordoba on foot.

The hotel has 72 guestrooms ranging from standard to suites decorated in a classic-meets-contemporary style. Suites on the 14th and 15th floors have their own private balcony with city views.

One of NH Córdoba Urbano's key selling features is its rooftop swimming pool with a wooden sun deck and lounge chairs - the perfect way to cool off in the city on a summer's day.

Read reviews for NH Córdoba Urbano.

Address: Avenida Marcelo T. de Alvear 363

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Vilaut Temporario (@departamentovilautcba)

Vilaut Smartflat

Vilaut Smartflat is the first coliving space in Cordoba and it is situated in Centro. This former hotel was completely renovated and transformed into a new type of accommodation geared at students, digital nomads, and visitors balancing work and travel.

Vilaut Smartflat has shared coworking spaces, a gym, a rooftop swimming pool and 24-hour security.

Guests can choose between studios and apartments, making it an ideal option for anyone planning a longer stay in Cordoba.

Read reviews for Vilaut Smartflat.

Address: Corrientes 207

Hostels in Cordoba

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Socialtel Global (@socialtelglobal)

Socialtel Nueva Cordoba

Socialtel (formerly Selina) is a new hostel chain with numerous locations across the globe, and they've most recently added a new hostel in Nueva Cordoba.

Socialtel Nueva Cordoba offers private rooms (suite, standard or micro) as well as 8-person dorms. Some rooms have a private bathroom while others have shared bathrooms, depending on your selection.

Some of the hostel's highlights include an outdoor pool (much needed during Cordoba's summer months!), yoga classes, a cafe and a bookstore. In the evenings, they have a bar that serves up cocktails, live music and an outdoor cinema using a projector.

This hostel caters to travellers as well as digital nomads working abroad for extended periods of time.

Read reviews of Socialtel Nueva Cordoba.

Address: San Lorenzo 163

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hostel Alvear | Córdoba (@hostel.alvearr) 

Hostel Alvear

Hostel Alvear is located in Centro in a large historic home that's just two blocks away from Plaza San Martin and Cordoba Cathedral.

The hostel has lots of large communal spaces including a rooftop terrace, a billiards room, table tennis, a games room and BBQ facilities - all great opportunities to connect with fellow adventurers!

Rooms at Hostel Alvear are simply furnished yet comfortable. They offer 4-bed and 6-bed dorms with private bathrooms or shared bathrooms.

Read reviews for Hostel Alvear here.

Address: Gral. Alvear 158

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Aldea Hostel Hostel (@aldeahostelcordoba) 

Aldea Hostel

Aldea Hostel is located in Centro just one block from La Cañada and within walking distance to a lot of the city's main attractions.

The hostel's name 'Aldea' means 'village' and they've leaned into that creating cool rooftop space for guests to meet and socialize.

They offer a variety of private rooms (single, double, triple and quadruple) with private or shared baths, as well as dorm rooms for those looking for a more budget-friendly option.

Read reviews for Aldea Hostel here.

Address: Santa Rosa 447

If you're planning to venture beyond Cordoba City and you want to enjoy a taste of the Sierras, check out this list of dreamy estancias where you can enjoy some horseback riding, learn about gaucho culture, and get a taste of rural living in this corner of Argentina.

#### Where to Stay in El Calafate, Argentina
Wondering where to stay in El Calafate, Argentina? We've got you covered with this list of hotels to suit every traveller's budget!

El Calafate is a bucket list destination in Patagonia. This town is the gateway to the southern end of Los Glaciares National Park and more importantly, the famed Perito Moreno Glacier, which is one of the few advancing glaciers in the world. 

It's also a destination where you can enjoy all sorts of day tours and outdoor adventures like going on boat tours to see glaciers, kayaking the milky waters of La Leona River, spending the day at an estancia, going on 4x4 adventures across the Patagonian steppe, and so much more!

Because there are so many fun things to do in El Calafate and your itinerary is likely to be action-packed, you'll want to make sure you have a relaxing place to return to at the end of the day. 

In this El Calafate hotel guide, we're going to highlight the best luxury hotels, high-end hotels, mid-range hotels, budget-friendly hotels and hostels. That means you can choose the best accommodations to suit your budget and travel style. And if you're looking for estancias near El Calafate, we have those too!

Luxury Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Imago Hotel & Spa (@imagohotel) 

Imago Hotel & Spa

Imago Hotel & Spa is a luxurious 5-star hotel in El Calafate.

Guests can choose between master suites and junior suites, or double, twin and triple rooms. The room's key features are the large windows overlooking Lago Argentino.

Imago Hotel & Spa has its own on-site restaurant, Cicero Bistro, which offers international cuisine and gourmet Argentinian specialties.

The hotel also boasts a spa and wellness centre where guests can indulge in massages, hydrotherapy, and other relaxation treatments. Perfect for unwinding after a busy day exploring Los Glaciares National Park and the Perito Moreno Glacier! 

The hotel also has a gym for those who want to keep up with their fitness routine, though there's plenty of trekking to enjoy around these parts.

"We had a very relaxing stay in a great room with a fabulous bathroom that included a jacuzzi bath , walk in power shower an adjoining living room and fantastic views. I had an amazing massage - back and neck and the swimming pool was lovely after a day visiting the glacier and national park . The staff were all very professional and helpful." - Gerry from Ireland
Review via Booking

Address: Calle 669 N°40, El Calafate 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Xelena Hotel & Suites (@xelena_hotel) 

Xelena Hotel & Suites

Xelena Hotel & Suites is a luxury property set on the shores of Lago Argentino in the outskirts of El Calafate.

The hotel offers a variety of suites and standard rooms with either lake or garden views.

Guests can enjoy a heated indoor-outdoor pool, jacuzzi, and dry sauna, as well as massages and spa treatments.

Xelena Hotel & Suites offers 4 different gastronomic options for guests: Mora Restaurant for Patagonian cuisine and an exclusive selection of wines, Pierrot Bistró Lobby Bar for cocktails and tapas-style dishes, Coral Coffee Shop for breakfast, and Huerta & Fuegos which is the hotel orchard and is open during the summer months for evening drinks.

"The staff were brilliant . The reception staff on more than one occasion when out of their way to help us ,they were friendly and efficient and a credit to the hotel . Same with the bar staff and restaurant staff . And a Special mention to shuttle bus driver who waited for us after we got back from a 3 hour coach trip from el chalten . The pool is fantastic with great views of lago argentino , the man who runs the pool is also very friendly and efficient. The Rooms are spacious and comfortable and Kept very clean . Everything about this hotel exceeded my expectations, it was like a holiday from an holiday after 4 nights in Buenos Aires . But the staff made the biggest difference , they were brilliant . The guide on the coach tour to el chalten who was unconnected with the hotel told us this was “the best hotel in El Calafate “ I can’t argue with that." - John from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Rene Favaloro 3500, El Calafate

High-end Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Kosten Aike - El Calafate - Patagonia (@hotelkostenaike) 

Hotel Kosten Aike

Hotel Kosten Aike is set in an Alpine-style boutique hotel situated right in the centre of town, just two blocks from the main street making it a convenient location for travellers who want to be in the heart of it all.

The hotel's name comes from the native Tehuelche language - kosten meaning wind and aike meaning place, and 'windy place' is quite fitting for El Calafate! Rooms are bright, spacious and incorporate Tehuelche design elements.

Hotel Kosten Aike also boasts numerous gastronomic options including Restaurant Ariskaiken for fine dining, Asador Kampen for traditional Argentine BBQ and Patagonian lamb, and Bar Aura for afternoon tea (locally known as merienda) and evening cocktails.

The hotel has spa facilities which include a hot tub, a sauna, a Scottish shower and a massage room.

"This is an outstanding hotel. It’s just off the main strip so quiet. The hotel is very luxurious with games room, gym, spa etc. The staff are outstanding, very accommodating, extremely helpful and speak Spanish and English which was a great help. The rooms are big and luxurious and the breakfast was outstanding with a huge choice of cooked, breads, cakes, cereal etc. I would very much recommend this hotel. It was a delight staying here." - Ann from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Gobernador Moyano 1243, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel 4 Estrellas ⭐⭐⭐⭐ (@posadalosalamos) 

Hotel Posada Los Alamos

Hotel Posada Los Alamos is one of the top-rated 4-star hotels in El Calafate.

The hotel is centrally located and offers double rooms either twin or standard. Rooms have views over the organic garden and the mountains on the horizon.

Hotel Posada Los Alamos provides a full range of modern spa facilities and an indoor pool with floor-to-ceiling windows. It also has its own small 18-hole par 3 golf course.

The hotel has several on-site dining options; La Posta for a la carte regional and international cuisine, Humus Resto Bar for cocktails, El Águila for snacks or drinks in the lobby bar, plus they also have a wine cellar where you can arrange a wine tasting.

"The hotel has fantastic facilities, the spa is wonderful. The staff were very friendly and helpful. The rooms themselves were spacious with a large bathroom and comfy beds. Breakfast was delicious with lots of choice. The location is within easy access of the lake and the town centre." - Roisin from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Ingeniero Hector M. Guatti 1350, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Mirador Del Lago (@miradordellagohotel) 

Mirador del Lago

Mirador del Lago is a hotel that overlooks the shores of Lago Argentino. It is a beautifully designed property with lots of stone and wood accents giving it a warm, rustic feel. 

Guests can choose between 3 different types of rooms including standard rooms, superior rooms with either garden or lake views, and suites with balconies that overlook the lake. 

Mirador de Lago also has its own in-house restaurant called La Bahía where guests can enjoy dishes like Patagonian lamb, trout and homemade pasta. They also have their own snack bar where you can order light meals and drinks.

“The location was excellent. Just on the edge of town where it was a bit quieter and with a great view of the lake. The breakfast was the best on our trip. Great selection of pastries!” - Andrew from Australia
Review from Booking

Address: Avenida del Libertador 2047, El Calafate

Mid-range Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria Cauquenes de Nimez (@cauquenesdenimez) 

Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez

Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez is located in the north end of El Calafate just 50 metres from Laguna Nimez, a nature reserve where you can see all sorts of birds including flamingoes. 

Part of the charm of this guesthouse is the fact that it's decorated using antique furniture, plus the oak wood floors and stone walls add some rustic charm to the place. 

All the rooms at Hostería Cauquenes de Nimez come with their own ensuite bathroom. 

The front desk can also help organize various activities such as horseback riding, kayaking, mountain biking, hiking and birdwatching.

"The team were very welcoming and helped with organising trips and advising on the local area. The rooms were really warm and cosy, ideal after day trips to ice glaciers! The location is ideal for walking into the centre of El Calafate but also having the nature reserve on the doorstep. Overall, great value for money." - Laura from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Calle 303 Nº 79, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Quijote Hotel (@quijotehotel) 

Hotel Quijote

Hotel Quijote is centrally located just 1 block from Avenida del Libertador, which is the main thoroughfare in town. 

The hotel offers 3 different types of rooms to suit all travellers: economy, comfort and duplex. 

An American-style buffet breakfast is served daily, and they also have a cafe and bar service throughout the day. 

Staff are bilingual and speak Spanish and English. Luggage storage can be arranged if needed. 

“The staff were very helpful and spoke English. The breakfast was quite nice and in a pretty room. The entrance and lobby of the hotel was attractive. Location was great, two blocks from downtown shops and restaurants.” - Nadine from USA
Review via Booking

Address: Gobernador Gregores 1191, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Picos del Sur (@hotelpicosdelsur) 

Hotel Picos del Sur

Hotel Picos del Sur is located in the east end of El Calafate just a short stroll from the centre of town.

This is a spacious property with a big lawn, an outdoor terrace and lounge chairs where visitors can enjoy the outdoors. 

Guests can choose between twin rooms, double rooms and triple rooms, all with their own en suite bathroom.

"Rooms were large and clean, and the view from our room was great. There's good WiFi and large communal areas. Location is only a 10min walk from the bus terminal and you can easily walk to restaurants in the centre of town." - Sarah from United Kingdom
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto San Julian 271, El Calafate

Budget-friendly Hotels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Posada Larsen (@posadalarsen) 

Posada Larsen

Posada Larsen is a small 6-room guesthouse on a quiet side street a short walk from the centre of town.

The guesthouse features twin, double and triple rooms with views of Lake Argentino and the Andes Mountains 

The guesthouse has heated floors, free Wi-Fi, and private parking.

They serve a traditional Patagonian breakfast with lots of home-baked goodies. 

“Lovely Posada only 10min walk from the centre. Beautiful views of the lake from bedroom and breakfast room. Irina, the manager was very welcoming and helpful before check-in and throughout our stay. Delicious breakfast. Highly recommended.” - Francesca from Italy
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto Deseado 223, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by HOSTERIA KAU KALESHEN (@hostkauka) 

Kau Kaleshen

Kau Kaleshen is a little oasis tucked away just one block from the main street surrounded by greenery. It's as central a location as you can get, while still offering tranquillity.

The guesthouse has 12 rooms with access to a central garden. You can choose from single, double, triple and quadruple rooms. 

Buffet breakfast is served daily including coffee, tea,  juices, pastries, homemade bread, cheeses and more.

They have their own on-site restaurant and their specialty is fondue! They also serve traditional Patagonian dishes featuring trout and lamb.  

"The front desk staff were knowledgeable, patient and friendly. The location in the center of town but one block away from the noise makes this place an oasis like it’s name implies…house of the rising sun. Make sure to have dinner at the restaurant! The food, waitstaff and ambience are amazing and unforgettable." - Ellen from USA

Address: Gobernador Gregores 1256, El Calafate

Hostels in El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by América del Sur Hostel (@americahostel) 

America del Sur Calafate Hostel

America del Sur is a small hostel chain with locations in both El Calafate and the neighbourhood of San Telmo in Buenos Aires.

Their hostel in El Calafate is located in the northeast end of town, making it a short and pleasant 7-minute walk into the centre of town. 

The hostel is built in that classic Patagonian design with lots of wood elements, large windows that offer sweeping views of Lago Argentino, and a large communal area where travellers can hang out and plan the upcoming day's adventure.

America del Sur Calafate Hostel offers different types of rooms. You can choose from a private room with an ensuite bathroom, a private room with a shared bathroom, a triple room, a quadruple room or a 6-bed dorm. 

This hostel also features floor heating, free Wi-Fi, a communal kitchen and a laundrette.

“It was the best hostel I ever stayed at - the social area is super cozy and with the most amazing view. People staying there are super social. The rooms are good, the breakfast too and the reception is also a travel agency. Will 100% come back.” - Annika from Spain
Review via Booking

Address: Puerto Deseado 153, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Lago Argentino - Hostel en El Calafate (@hostellagoargentino)

Lago Argentino Hostel

Lago Argentino Hostel is a family-run business by people who are passionate about tourism. The hostel is centrally located just 2 blocks from the main avenue. 

This hostel has a beautiful garden which is especially beautiful when the lupins bloom. A continental breakfast is served daily and guests can also make use of the communal kitchen to cook their own meals. 

In terms of accommodations, this hotel offers double and triple rooms with private bathrooms, or double rooms and dorms with shared bathrooms.

They offer free parking with your reservation and luggage storage is available upon request.

"The garden was so beautiful and had so many great smelling flowers! There was a cute little cat that wandered around and was so friendly! The room was so comfortable and the location of the hostel was very convenient to walking into town." - Emily from USA
Review via Booking

Address: Campaña del Desierto 1050, El Calafate

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by FOLK hostel (@folkhostelll) 

FOLK Hostel

FOLK Hostel is located in the east end of town, just 200 metres from the El Calafate Bus Terminal. 

The hostel has a garden, a shared lounge, a communal kitchen and luggage storage.

They have a variety of different room types to suit all sorts of travellers. You can choose from double rooms with a private bathroom, double rooms with a shared bathroom, 4-person dorms and 8-person dorms. 

They serve a very simple buffet-style breakfast with bread, cereals, yogurt, fruit and hot and cold beverages. You can also order a pre-packed lunch if you're planning a full-day excursion around El Calafate. 

"Lovely hostel with great kitchen and good location. Love the common area and friendly staff. Really great showers as well! Breakfast was okay, nothing special. Would definitely recommend staying at Folk" - Alberto from Denmark
Review via Booking

Address: José R. Haro 424, El Calafate

Read More:

How to Visit Perito Moreno Glacier with a Tour

Visiting Perito Moreno Glacier from El Calafate

2 Days in El Calafate Itinerary

El Calafate Day Trip to a Working Ranch

Getting from El Calafate to El Chaltén

Patagonia with Gadventures: Which Tour Should You Choose?

Glamping in Patagonia: Here are 10+ Beautiful and Remote Domes!

#### Where to Stay in San Antonio de Areco, Argentina
Wondering where to stay in San Antonio de Areco, Argentina? This gaucho town boasts lots of estancias, guesthouses and unique stays! 

San Antonio de Areco is a sleepy town in the pampas and it's a popular weekend destination from Buenos Aires. A big part of the experience is immersing yourself in gaucho culture and rural living and that involves visiting or staying at an estancia!

Estancias are traditional ranches or farms primarily used for rearing cattle and growing crops and you can find them all over Argentina. 

The estancias in San Antonio de Areco range from high-end properties that offer full room and board plus numerous activities to smaller estancias closer to town at a more accessible price range. 

Accommodations are quite varied; aside from estancias, you can also find cute guesthouses set in colonial homes and unique stays featuring converted train wagons. 

We've compiled a list of some of the best places to stay in San Antonio de Areco. You'll find something for all tastes and all budgets, and one thing is for sure, all of these properties capture the country spirit of the pampas!

Where to Stay in San Antonio de Areco

Estancias in San Antonio de Areco

There are so many estancias across Buenos Aires Province and many of them are located in and around the town of San Antonio de Areco! These range from luxury estancias to smaller family-run establishments with a more rugged feel. Here's a selection of places for you to consider:

1. Estancia La Cinacina

We were pretty set on staying at an estancia since that is part of the experience of coming to the self-proclaimed gaucho capital. During my search, I stumbled upon Estancia La Cinacina which dates back to 1870.

The beauty of this estancia is that it is located in the west end of town, yet it's only 6 blocks away from the main square, Plaza Ruiz De Arellano. Almost all of the other estancias in San Antonio de Areco are located on the outskirts of town and require a car, however, this property allowed us to explore on foot for the length of our stay.

Breakfast at the estancia was abundant and we really enjoyed it. It featured two baskets of baked goods (one filled with medialunas or sweet croissants), jams, cereal, yogurt, freshly squeezed orange juice, tea, coffee, and an abundance of fresh fruit like watermelon, plums, grapes and apples.

The estancia has a huge pool which is open during the summer months, and they also offer horseback riding and massages for an additional fee.

If you're looking for an estancia experience close to town that won't break the bank, this is a nice mid-range option. We found the staff to be friendly and attentive, and we thoroughly enjoyed our stay!

Book your stay at Estancia La Cinacina.

Address: Bartolomé Mitre 9, San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Estancia La Madrugada Areco (@estancialamadrugada_areco) 

2. Estancia La Madrugada

Estancia La Madrugada offers a rural experience with a touch of luxury. This is an exclusive property featuring only 3 suites.

The farmhouse has been renovated, however, it still manages to retain its traditional charm. The rooms lead out to a tranquil garden and an aguaribay grove.

The estancia offers a three-course menu and outdoor barbecues with ingredients sourced from the organic garden for a farm-to-table dining experience.

Activities at Estancia La Madrugada include horseback rides through the countryside, guitar sessions by the campfire, or exploring the gaucho town of San Antonio de Areco.

While this property is located on the outskirts of town, the estancia does offer free bikes for guests to ride into town. It's a 5-kilometre ride or about 15 minutes - alternatively, you can ask them to book you a taxi into town. 

Book your stay at Estancia La Madrugada.

Address: Camino del Yameo, San Antonio de Areco

3. Estancia El Ombú de Areco

El Ombú de Areco is a historic estancia set in the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco. It dates back to 1880 and it’s been in the hands of its current owners, the Boelcke Family, since 1934.

The estancia has 11 guest rooms, all of them refurbished, each with a private bathroom and vintage decor.

Guests can choose from double, triple and quadruple rooms, and they also offer interconnecting rooms in case you're visiting with a large family.

Estancia El Ombú de Areco offers full board; which means breakfast, lunch, afternoon snack and dinner. There's no reason to leave the estancia during your stay, unless of course, you want to explore the area. 

As far as activities, guests can enjoy 2 horseback rides per day, plus they have swimming pools, bike rides and leisurely walks through the property.

This estancia also welcomes day visitors. You can read more about our experience visiting El Ombú de Areco for their estancia day and gaucho tour. 

Book directly via Estancia El Ombú de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Cuartel VI, Villa Lía, San Antorio de Areco

4. Estancia La Bamba de Areco

La Bamba de Areco is an estancia hotel set in the pampas on the outskirts of San Antonio de Areco, and it is one of the oldest Argentinian colonial-style estancias in the area. It is also a Relais & Chateaux property.

The estancia dates back to 1830 when one of its post houses formed part of the Camino Real or Royal Road that connected Buenos Aires to the northern part of the country. 

The estancia's name La Bamba derives from the Celtic word Bahamba meaning 'place of rest and hospitality'. 

This was one of the first estancias to open its doors to visitors back in the 1980s and it was renovated in 2009 while still retaining its colonial essence.

This estancia hotel has 11 rooms and suites featuring dark wooden floors and antique furnishings, and offers views of the pampas, gardens and polo fields.

It's one of those exclusive places, where again, there's no need to leave the estancia during your stay because everything is provided. 

Book directly via Estancia La Bamba de Areco.

Address: Ruta 31 Km 7.5, San Antonio de Areco

Guesthouses in San Antonio de Areco

5. Hotel Draghi

Hotel Draghi is a small centrally-located hotel just one block north of the central square, Plaza Ruiz de Arellano.

The hotel is run by the Draghi family, a respected name in town when it comes to the silversmithing tradition - you can read more about the Draghi Museum and Silversmith Workshop in our travel guide to San Antonio de Areco.

Hotel Draghi features 9 rooms with access to an internal garden with a swimming pool. 

They serve a continental breakfast featuring bread, medialunas, deli meats, cheese, eggs, granola, jam, yogurt, juice and more.

The hotel connects to the Draghi Museum and Silversmith Workshop via a garden. 

It has a great location in the heart of the old town which means easy access to cafes, restaurants, shops and other attractions.

Book your stay at Hotel Draghi.

Address: Matheu 380, San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Antigua Casona (@antiguacasona) 

6. Hotel Antigua Casona

Hotel Antigua Casona is a bed and breakfast set in a traditional colonial-style home. It features a covered gallery, an inner courtyard, and an outdoor swimming pool. 

Guests can choose between double and triple rooms with private bathrooms, all decorated with antiques and vintage furnishings. 

The property stands in the heart of the old town making it a great choice for travellers who want to explore San Antonio de Areco on foot. It offers easy access to restaurants, bars and local attractions.

Book your stay at Hotel Antigua Casona.

Address: Segundo Sombra 495, San Antonio de Areco

Unique Stays in San Antonio de Areco

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Vagones de Areco (@losvagonesdeareco) 

7. Los Vagones de Areco

If you are looking for a unique stay in San Antonio de Areco, then you'll want to check out Los Vagones de Areco. This is one of several glamping sites near Buenos Aires.

This property is located on the outskirts of town, so you will need a car to get there, but the reward is a one-of-a-kind hotel set in restored train wagons!

They are located 7 kilometres from the old Vagues Train Station (now a museum), and 14 kilometres from the town of San Antonio de Areco.

This train hotel is a place to disconnect from city life and enjoy rural living; it's a place where you can enjoy long walks through the plains, play croquet, take a dip in the swimming pool (during the summer months!), and come together for a communal campfire at night. 

Los Vagones de Areco has 7 rooms set in various antique trains each featuring en suite bathrooms, vintage furniture and decorations, and a small private deck. 

Book your stay at Los Vagones de Areco.

Address: Vagues, San Antonio de Areco

#### Where to Stay in Ushuaia: The Best Ushuaia Hotels for Every Budget!
Today we're going to help you figure out where to stay in Ushuaia during your visit to the southernmost city in the world.

The city of Ushuaia offers an abundance of accommodation options to fit every budget whether you're looking for luxury resorts, mid-range hotels or budget-friendly accommodations.

Because this is a scenic Argentine city set between the Andes Mountains and the seaside, that means you can opt for hotels on the shores of the Beagle Channel, hotels on the mountainside surrounded by Fuegian forest, and hotels that are located right downtown within walking distance of many shops, restaurants and tourist attractions.

There are hotels with spas and heated pools for those looking for a relaxing holiday, hotels with ski and snowboard storage for those who want to stay active and plan to hit the ski slopes, and hotels with their own in-house restaurants specializing in Patagonian and Fuegian dishes for those foodies wanting to enjoy Argentine cuisine.

With all this in mind, we want to help you find the best hotel in Ushuaia for your budget so that in between cruising the Beagle Channel, riding the Train at the End of the World, sending a postcard from the End of the World Post Office, hiking Tierra del Fuego National Park, and going on a myriad of fun excursions at the End of the World, you can have a comfortable place to rest at the end of each day.

We've already helped you figure out how to get to Ushuaia, so next up, let's tackle accommodations! Without further ado, here's our guide to where to stay in Ushuaia, Argentina.

Luxury Hotels in Ushuaia

Ushuaia has a wonderful selection of 5-star hotels sprinkled on the outskirts of the city, ideal for guests who are looking for a quiet escape surrounded by nature and impeccable views. If you're only spending a few days in Ushuaia and you're looking to splurge, here are the best luxury hotels in Ushuaia to consider.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa (@arakur_ushuaia) 

Arakur Ushuaia Resort and Spa

Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa is considered to be the best hotel in Ushuaia.

This luxury hotel is perched on a natural balcony 800 feet above sea level inside the Reserva Natural Cerro Alarkén. You have hiking trails just outside the hotel doors, plus an indoor and outdoor pool where to unwind after an active day of sightseeing.

Their restaurant La Cravia serves up Argentine and international cuisine offering a la carte and buffet dining.

It's a 10-minute drive from Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa into the centre of town, so if you're looking for a relaxing stay where you'll be surrounded by nature and have epic views of Ushuaia and the Beagle Channel, this is the place for you!

Book your stay at Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa

Address: Cerro Alarken N° 1 (Access vis Avenida Héroes de Malvinas 2617)

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Cauquenes Resort & Spa (@loscauquenes) 

Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa

Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa is a high-end resort located on the outskirts of Ushuaia.

It sits on the shores of the Beagle Channel and offers seaside views to one side and a mountain backdrop to the other.

It's a 15-minute drive from Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa into the centre of town, but well worth the short journey in exchange for the privacy and tranquillity this property offers.

The resort also features a fully-equipped spa, swimming pool and hot tub perfect for unwinding at the end of a fun day.

They also have their own on-site restaurant called Reinamora which serves up European gourmet cuisine and Patagonian dishes like lamb and king crab.

Book your stay at Los Cauquenes Resort and Spa.

Address: Barrio Bahía Cauquén, De la Ermita 3462

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort (@lashayasresort) 

Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort

Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort is a luxury hotel in the outskirts of town on the way up to Martial Glacier.

All rooms feature large windows with either sea views or mountain views.

This Ushuaia resort features an indoor swimming pool and spa with sauna, jacuzzi and steam baths.

The gastronomy options include Le Martial Restó for fine dining, Jauke Bistro & Cocktail for drinks and gourmet burgers or sandwiches, and Desayunador Drake for breakfast with a view.

Book your stay at Las Hayas Ushuaia Resort.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1650

High-end Hotels in Ushuaia

Travellers looking for elegance and comfort will be pleased with the selection of 4-star hotels in Ushuaia. These accommodations are known for their style, hospitality and comfort.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel (@losaceboshotel) 

Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel

Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel is a high-end hotel in Ushuaia situated on the mountainside.

Their spacious hotel rooms offer panoramic views of the Beagle Channel, plus they also have two junior suites and penthouses.

Every morning at Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel starts off with a superb buffet breakfast that satisfies both sweet and savoury palates.

Their restaurant Orange features a mix of international and Argentine dishes and an extensive Argentine wine list.

Book your stay at Los Acebos Ushuaia Hotel.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1911

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Tierra del Fuego (@hoteltierradelfuego) 

Hotel Tierra del Fuego

Hotel Tierra del Fuego is a centrally-located property making it a great option for visitors who want to be in the heart of Ushuaia close to shops, restaurants and attractions.

This Ushuaia hotel has double and triple rooms as well as suites for those who prefer more space.

Hotel Tierra del Fuego offers a 24-hour front desk as well as a ski storage service for travellers who are planning to hit the slopes during their visit.

Book your stay at Hotel Tierra del Fuego.

Address: Gobernador Deloqui 198

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel Fueguino (@hotelfueguino) 

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico is located in the centre of Ushuaia making it easy to get around the city on foot.

The hotel offers a warm and welcoming atmosphere and has double, triple and quadruple rooms. Travellers wanting more space can also opt for their suites which offer two living spaces.

Fueguino Hotel Patagónico has a fitness centre featuring a gym, dry sauna, steam room and relaxation room.

They also have their own restaurant, Komenk, which serves regional Patagonian dishes. The restaurant opens for breakfast, lunch, afternoon tea and dinner offering buffet and a la carte options.

Book your stay at Fueguino Hotel Patagónico.

Address: Gobernador Deloqui 1282

Mid-range Hotels in Ushuaia

For the mid-range traveller wondering where to stay in Ushuaia, there are plenty of 3-star hotels offering the perfect intersection of style and comfort at a fair price. Here's our list of mid-range properties to consider.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Alto Andino Hotel (@altoandinohotel) 

Alto Andino Hotel

Alto Andino Hotel is situated in downtown Ushuaia making it a great choice for visitors who want to be in the heart of it all.

This property offers single, double, triple and quadruple rooms as well as apartments for those who prefer a self-catered holiday.

Alto Andino Hotel offers a complimentary breakfast that is served in Bar Lookout, which has spectacular views of Ushuaia.

The hotel also offers storage of ski and snowboard equipment.

Book your stay at Alto Andino Hotel.

Address: Gobernador Paz 868

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria y Restaurante America (@restaurante.america) 

Hostería & Restaurante America

Hostería & Restaurante America is a guesthouse that sits directly across from Ushuaia's Centennial Monument just a couple of blocks from the centre of town.

The guesthouse offers standard rooms, superior suites and master suites, as well as apartments that can fit up to 6 guests.

Hostería & Restaurante America serves a buffet breakfast, stores ski and snowboard equipment, and has a 24-hour reception.

They also have their own in-house restaurant, Restaurante America, which focuses on traditional Patagonian and Argentine dishes like Patagonian toothfish in black butter, King crab casserole, and steak.

Book your stay at Hostería & Restaurante America.

Address: Gobernador Paz 1665

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Altos Ushuaia Hotel & Restó (@altosushuaia) 

Altos Ushuaia Hotel

Altos Ushuaia Hotel sits on the edge of town surrounded by Fuegian Forest on the same road that leads up to Martial Glacier.

The hotel has 46 rooms spread out across 3 floors offering either views of the Beagle Channel or the mountains. The room configurations include double rooms, triple rooms and junior suites.

Guests can also enjoy the outdoor jacuzzi which is available year round.

Another key feature is that it offers emergency medical services available to clients at all times.

Altos Ushuaia Hotel has its own restaurant, Bartolomé Restó, which serves traditional Patagonian dishes with views of the Beagle Channel.

Book your stay at Altos Ushuaia Hotel.

Address: Luis Fernando Martial 1441

Budget-friendly Hotels in Ushuaia

If you're looking for simple and affordable rooms where to rest your head after a busy day of exploring, then this list of budget-friendly 2-star hotels might be just right for you.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hotel de Los Andes, Ushuaia 🇦🇷 (@delosandeshotelushuaia)

Hotel De Los Andes

Hotel de Los Andes is an affordable hotel option right in the centre of Ushuaia just two blocks from the waterfront.

Rooms are simple but bright, and they offer free high-speed internet in all rooms as well as common areas.

Their restaurant Bar D Pizzas serves up stone-baked pizzas and beer and is a good option for a meal in.

Address: Avenida San Martín 753

Book your stay at Hotel de Los Andes.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hosteria Kupanaka (@hosteria.kupanaka) 

Hosteria Kupanaka

Hosteria Kupanaka sits in a bright yellow building just 3 blocks from Plaza Islas Malvinas and the Ushuaia city sign.

This guesthouse offers simple no-frills accommodations where guests can choose from double, triple and quadruple rooms with private bathrooms.

The guesthouse offers free WiFi, TV with cable in rooms, and breakfast is included.

Address: Gobernador Paz 1410

Book your stay at Hosteria Kupanaka.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hoteles del Fin del Mundo (@hotelesdelfindelmundo) 

Hotel Monaco

Hotel Mónaco (part of Hoteles del Fin del Mundo) is a basic hotel option in Ushuaia for travellers looking for budget-friendly accommodations.

The rooms are minimalist and well-illuminated with double, triple and quadruple room options.

There is free WiFi access in the communal areas and breakfast is served daily for all guests.

Read reviews for Hoteles del Fin del Mundo.

Address: Avenida San Martín 1355

Hostels in Ushuaia

Accommodations in the city at the end of the world can be pricier than elsewhere in Argentina, so hostels are a good option to keep travel costs down. Another benefit of staying in a hostel in Ushuaia is the opportunity to meet fellow travellers, which is great for those travelling solo.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Hostel Antarctica (@hostelantarctica) 

Antarctica Hostel

Antarctica Hostel is centrally located just one block away from the Museum of the Prison of Ushuaia.

The hostel offers both mixed dorms and female-only dorms, and room sizes range between 6-8 beds with a shared bathroom.

They also have double rooms with private bathrooms for those who prefer a bit more privacy but still want to enjoy the hostel ambience.

Read reviews for Antarctica Hostel.

Address: Antártida Argentina 270

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Oshovia Hostel - Ushuaia (@oshoviahostel) 

Oshovia Hostel

Oshovia Hostel sits in Ushuaia's west end in a more residential neighbourhood. It's a 20-30 minute walk into the centre of town, but it's a very scenic walk that takes you along the shores of Bahía Encerrada Nature Reserve and the Beagle Channel.

The hostel offers mixed dorms and female-only dorms that range from 4-6 beds per room. Additionally, they have double, triple and quadruple rooms.

Oshovia Hostel's feel is very rustic and cosy with lots of wood elements. The hostel also has communal areas where guests can meet other travellers.

A continental breakfast is included.

Read reviews for Oshovia Hostel.

Address: Primer Argentino 127

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by El Refugio Lodge Hostel (@elrefugiolodgehostel) 

El Refugio Lodge Hostel

El Refugio Lodge Hostel is another centrally-located Ushuaia hostel that's only 3 blocks away from the port where all the Beagle Channel cruises depart from.

This hostel offers a variety of room options. Dorm rooms have anywhere between 4-16 beds - the more beds the cheaper the room.

Alternatively, guests can opt for a mix of twin rooms, double rooms, or triple rooms some with the option of private bathrooms.

Select rooms also include a kitchen with a fridge, ideal for travellers looking to self-cater during their visit.

Read reviews for El Refugio Lodge Hostel.

Address: 25 de Mayo 231 

#### Which G Adventures Patagonia Tour is Right for You?
Looking to book a G Adventures Patagonia tour and you're not sure where to start? We've got you covered!

So you're planning a trip to Patagonia, you know you want to join a group excursion, and now you're trying to decide which G Adventures Patagonia tour is right for you.

G Adventures offers numerous trips across Patagonia, some of which strictly focus on travel in Argentine Patagonia and others that also include Chilean Patagonia.

Today, we're going to be comparing 3 different G Adventures tours to Patagonia that vary in length, destinations covered, and level of difficulty. 

What do I know about Patagonia? Well, I've travelled extensively across both Argentine Patagonia and Chilean Patagonia, and I have visited all of the destinations covered in these G Adventures Patagonia tours. I know these destinations very well, how much time you need in each place, and what activities and attractions you shouldn't miss in each spot.

I would go as far as saying I'm a bit travel-obsessed with Patagonia. I got hooked on my first visit back in 2019 and I've been going back every chance I get. Basically, whenever I'm in Argentina (which is often!), I always make sure to plan a trip back to Patagonia! 

But enough about me, because this article is about helping you figure out your trip to Patagonia. 

So with all of this in mind, we're going to do a deep dive into 3 different Patagonia tours offered by G Adventures, so hopefully, by the end of this article, you'll know which one is right for you!

End of the Earth - Argentina & Chile

Hike Patagonia in Depth - Argentina & Chile

Patagonia Hiking - Argentina

TOUR 1

End of the Earth

14 Days

✅ Argentine and Chilean Patagonia.

📍 Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate, El Chaltén, Puerto Natales, Torres del Paine and Ushuaia. 

TOUR 2

Hike Patagonia in Depth

14 Days

✅ Argentine and Chilean Patagonia

📍 Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate, El Chaltén, Puerto Natales and Torres del Paine.

TOUR 3

Patagonia Hiking

9 Days

✅ Argentine Patagonia

📍 Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate and El Chaltén

Choosing a G Adventures Patagonia Tour

1. End of the Earth Tour - Argentina and Chile

This G Adventures Patagonia tour has a little bit of everything so it's likely to appeal to a wide audience. Out of all the tours we're looking at today, this one covers the most destinations across both Argentina and Chile, hitting up some of the most loved destinations in Patagonia. 

On the Argentine side, you get to visit Los Glaciares National Park which you access from two different points: El Calafate to see glaciers and El Chaltén to experience the trekking capital of South America. 

Then, on the Chilean side, you visit Torres del Paine National Park which brings more breathtaking mountainous landscapes. 

The nice thing about this tour is that it includes some hiking (including a couple of longer full-day hikes), however, you're not hiking every single day of your trip. There is a bit of downtime to explore the towns or just let your legs recover.

This is also the only one of the 3 G Adventures Patagonia tours that makes it all the way down to Ushuaia, the southernmost city in the world! If that's a destination you've been dreaming of visiting your whole life, then this Patagonia tour might be the right one for you.

QUICK FACTS:

Duration: 14 days

Start/Finish City: Buenos Aires to Buenos Aires

Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate, El Chaltén, Puerto Natales, Torres del Paine and Ushuaia.

Service Level: Standard. Comfortable tourist-class accommodations with character; mix of public and private transport.

Physical Grading: 4 - Demanding. Some high-altitude hikes or more strenuous activities, but accessible to most healthy travellers.

Trip Type: Small Group with a maximum of 16 travellers

PROS:

✅ This tour covers the top destinations in Patagonia across Argentina and Chile

✅ You make it as far south as Ushuaia, the city at the End of the World!

✅ It includes some hikes as well as less active days

CONS:

❌ 14 days might be too long for travellers short on vacation time

❌ Fast pace with 1 or 2 nights per destination

❌ Includes 2 nights of camping which may not appeal to everyone

End of the Earth Itinerary (14 Days)

Day 1 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Arrive at any time. There are no planned activities until an evening welcome meeting, so you can check into the hotel and enjoy the city. With any extra time, you can visit the districts of Recoleta, La Boca, San Telmo or watch a tango show.

Optional activities:

Teatro Colón Tour

La Boca Neighbourhood Visit

Buenos Aires Bike Tour

Buenos Aires Guided City Tour

Day 2 - Buenos Aires to El Chaltén, Argentina

Early transfer to the airport to fly to El Calafate and continue by private transportation to El Chaltén and Los Glaciares National Park. En route, marvel at the towering Andes Mountains. You can Enjoy some free time in the town or head out on some short hikes.

Day 3 - El Chaltén, Argentina

Enjoy a full-day guided hike to Laguna de los Tres in Los Glaciares National Park, and if the weather cooperates, you'll get a clear view of Mount Fitz Roy! During this hike, the terrain will change gradually from tree-covered trails to exposed alpine landscapes.

Laguna de los Tres is one of the most epic viewpoints in the park. It's a 24-kilometre or 15-mile hike that takes about 10 hours to complete and has an elevation gain of 1040 metres.

The most challenging part of the hike is the last kilometres before reaching the lagoon as it's a steep ascent through loose rocks and boulders, but the view at the end is worth it!

Day 4 - El Chaltén to El Calafate, Argentina

Free morning where you can opt to wake up early and conquer another hike before heading to El Calafate.

Day 5 - El Calafate, Argentina

Visit Perito Moreno Glacier, one of the world’s few advancing glaciers, where you'll have a guided tour. Opt to take a boat ride on the lake to see it from a different vantage point.

You'll see Perito Moreno's 60-metre or 197-foot wall of ice that sporadically chokes off the narrow “Canal de los Tempanos” (Iceberg Channel) creating a natural ice dam.

Optional activities:

Perito Moreno Glacier Boat Tour

Day 6 - El Calafate, Argentina to Puerto Natales, Chile

Travel by bus to Puerto Natales to prepare for the upcoming days of hiking in Patagonia.

Spend a relaxing evening in the town of Puerto Natales before heading into Torres del Paine National Park.

Day 7 - Puerto Natales and Torres del Paine, Chile

Hop on a private transfer and enjoy the two-and-a-half-hour drive to the entrance of Torres del Paine National Park. Stop at the Welcome Center and get ready to begin the hike. You'll trek to the base of Las Torres to see the dramatic three towers and turquoise lagoon below.

A local guide will lead the way during the hike and the CEO will act as sweep, keeping everyone together. 

The hike is about 4 hours in and 4 hours back. It's 22 kilometres or 14 miles roundtrip with an elevation gain of 750 metres but oh-so-worth-it!

Day 8 - Torres del Paine, Chile

Wake up surrounded by breathtaking landscapes. Enjoy breakfast with a view, pack your bag, and jump in the van to Lake Pehoe. Cross the lake by boat and trek to the French Valley. 

Enjoy another full day of spectacular scenery and physical exertion. Return to Paine Grande Camp at the end of the day. 

The hike from Paine Grande Camp through the French Valley and back to Paine Grande Camp is 20 kilometres or 13 miles and takes 8-10 hours with an elevation gain of 550 metres or 1,800 feet.

Day 9 - Torres del Paine and Puerto Natales, Chile

Enjoy the last day in Torres del Paine National Park on a fast-paced hike to Grey Lake and the first lookout point for Grey Glacier. Gaze off into the distance admiring the scale of this immense glacier. In the afternoon return to Puerto Natales.

The hike from Paine Grande Camp to Grey Lookout is 11 kilometres or 7 miles and takes 4 hours with an elevation gain of 400 metres or 1315 feet.

Day 10 - Puerto Natales, Chile to Ushuaia, Argentina

Get your snacks ready and take a bus south to Ushuaia at the End of the Earth. During the journey, you'll hop on a ferry to cross the Magellan Strait and then continue by bus to Ushuaia.

Day 11 - Ushuaia, Argentina

Enjoy a free day to explore Ushuaia. Opt to hike to Laguna Esmeralda, or rest your legs and visit some museums such as the Prison at the End of the World Museum, or do some horseback riding. You can also chill and enjoy the spa or the heated swimming pool at the hotel.

Optional activities:

Beagle Channel Cruise to Isla Martillo

The Maritime Museum and Prison at the End of the World Museum

Horseback Riding in Ushuaia

Day 12 - Ushuaia, Argentina

Enjoy another free day to explore the area. Opt to take a boat cruise on the Beagle Channel to see penguins on Isla Martillo or enjoy a hike in Tierra del Fuego National Park.

Optional activities:

Tierra del Fuego National Park Visit

Beagle Channel Cruise to Isla Martillo

Horseback Riding Ushuaia

The Maritime Museum and Prison at the End of the World Museum

Day 13 - Ushuaia to Buenos Aires, Argentina

Fly to Buenos Aires.

Day 14 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Depart at any time.

2. Hike Patagonia in Depth Tour - Argentina and Chile

This is considered one of the best Patagonia hiking tours out there. You are basically hiking every single day of the trip! And you are hiking in some of the most iconic locations in both Argentina and Chile. 

This G Adventures Patagonia tour includes a mix of light hikes to warm up and ease into the destination as well as more challenging full-day hikes that offer big rewards. Namely, the most epic mountains and alpine lagoons you've ever seen!

You also get to hike the famous W Trek in Chile's Torres del Paine. Hiking this loop means staying at campsites along the way, so the tour is geared towards active and outdoorsy travellers who don't mind swapping a bit of comfort for epic views!

If you dream of hiking Patagonia this tour might be the right one for you. 

QUICK FACTS:

Duration: 14 days

Start/Finish City: Buenos Aires to Buenos Aires

Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate, El Chaltén, Puerto Natales and Torres del Paine.

Travel Style: Active with trekking, biking and kayaking.

Service Level: Standard. Comfortable tourist-class accommodations with character; mix of public and private transport.

Physical Rating: 4 - Demanding. Some high-altitude hikes or more strenuous activities, but accessible to most healthy travellers.

Trip Type: Small group with a maximum of 16 travellers

PROS:

✅ Strong focus on hiking with daily hikes in Patagonia's most beautiful parks

✅ This trip goes in-depth and focuses on the most iconic destinations

✅ You are not switching hotels every night (except for the camping loop)

CONS:

❌ Includes 4 nights camping in national parks which may not appeal to everyone

❌ Daily hikes might be too much for certain travellers

❌ Because this trip goes in-depth, you visit fewer destinations

Hike Patagonia in Depth Itinerary (14 Days)

Day 1 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Arrive at any time.

Day 2 - Buenos Aires to El Chaltén, Argentina

Enjoy an early transfer to the airport to fly to El Calafate and continue by private transportation to El Chaltén and Los Glaciares National Park. Enjoy some free time in the town or head out on a short hike.

Day 3 - El Chaltén, Argentina

Climb into a double kayak for a gentle paddle along the Río de las Vueltas, inside Los Glaciares National Park. Get ready for breathtaking views of Fitz Roy if the skies are clear.

Day 4 - El Chaltén, Argentina

Enjoy a full-day guided hike to Laguna de los Tres for a view of Mount Fitz Roy. 

Day 5 - El Chaltén to El Calafate, Argentina

Explore El Chaltén's many trekking routes. Opt to explore the Laguna Torre trail to spot the dramatic Cerro Torre, hike to Laguna Capri or head up to the Mirador de Los Condores to enjoy great views of the town. Afterwards, travel to the town of El Calafate and opt for a hearty dinner to refuel.

Day 6 - El Calafate, Argentina

Travel to Perito Moreno Glacier for an included guided tour. Explore the different walkways that will bring you face-to-face with the glacier. Opt to take a boat ride on the lake to get a different view of the stunning landscapes and marvel at how large the glacier is up close.

Day 7 - El Calafate, Argentina

Enjoy free time, take a leisurely hike to Laguna Nimez, explore the souvenir shops and restaurants in town, choose to experience an estancia for the day, or opt to go on an adventure activity in the Patagonian steppe.

Day 8 - El Calafate, Argentina to Puerto Natales, Chile

Continue on to Puerto Natales, the gateway to Torres del Paine National Park. Explore the town, eat a hearty meal, and rest well for the 4-day hike ahead.

Day 9 - Puerto Natales to Laguna Azul Camp, Chile

Embark on a 4-day excursion in Torres del Paine National Park, hiking the famous W Trek. Start the 62km (38.5 mi) route by trekking to the base of Las Torres to see the dramatic three towers and turquoise lagoon below.

Day 10 - Laguna Azul Camp to Cuernos Camp, Chile

Wake up surrounded by breathtaking landscapes. Enjoy breakfast with a view, pack your bag and jump in the van. Once at the welcome centre, meet the porters and continue hiking along the W route towards Cuernos Campsite. Stop at Nordenskjöld Lake and enjoy the view before reaching Cuernos Camp.

Day 11 - Cuernos Camp to Paine Grande Camp, Chile

Today hike to the French Valley lookout to see the imposing French glacier hanging over Paine Grande mountain. Take in the dramatic, contrasting greens and greys on the landscape and enjoy a 360 view from above. Head to Paine Grande Campsite after crossing an eerie and beautiful forest of dead trees.

Day 12 - Paine Grande Camp to Puerto Natales, Chile

The final day of the W Trek leads to Grey Lake and the lookout point for Grey Glacier. Gaze off into the distance admiring the scale of this immense glacier. Hike back to Lake Pehoé and finish by taking a picturesque ferry ride across the lake enjoying the sense of accomplishment before returning to Puerto Natales for the night.

Day 13 - Puerto Natales, Chile to Buenos Aires, Argentina

Travel back into Argentina to El Calafate and catch an evening flight from Patagonia to Buenos Aires.

Day 14 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Depart at any time.

3. Patagonia Hiking Tour - Argentina

This is the shortest G Adventures Patagonia tour that we're looking at, but it's packed with so much good stuff! 

This Patagonia hiking tour only covers Argentina, but one of the nice things is that it goes in depth in the two destinations it visits: El Calafate and El Chaltén. This means you're not changing hotels every few nights, and you really get to explore both towns, visit the glaciers, and tackle multiple hikes ranging in length and level of difficulty. 

It also means that when you arrive back home, you won't feel like you've been run to the ground. 

Basically, it's an ideal tour for travellers who are short on time, but want to experience some Patagonian highlights at a nice pace. 

QUICK FACTS:

Duration: 9 days

Start/Finish City: Buenos Aires to Buenos Aires

Destinations: Buenos Aires, El Calafate and El Chaltén

Travel Style: Active with trekking, biking and kayaking adventures made for outdoor types.

Service Level: Standard. Comfortable tourist-class accommodations with character; a mix of public and private transport.

Physical Rating: 4 - Demanding. Some high-altitude hikes or more strenuous activities, but accessible to most healthy travellers.

Trip Type: Small group with a maximum of 16 travellers.

PROS:

✅ Shorter tour ideal for travellers with less vacation time

✅ Visit the two most iconic destinations in Argentine Patagonia

✅ Explore El Chaltén and El Calafate in depth

CONS:

❌ This tour might feel too short once you get to Patagonia

❌ Doesn't visit Chilean Patagonia

❌ Doesn't go to Ushuaia, the city at the End of the World

Patagonia Hiking Itinerary (9 days)

Day 1 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Arrive at any time. As there are no planned activities until an evening welcome meeting, you can check into the hotel and enjoy the city. Opt to visit the districts of La Boca, Recoleta, San Telmo or catch a tango show.

Optional activities:

Teatro Colón Tour

La Boca Neighbourhood Visit

Buenos Aires Bike Tour

Buenos Aires Guided City Tour

Day 2 - Buenos Aires to El Chaltén, Argentina

Enjoy an early transfer to the airport to fly to El Calafate and continue by private transportation to El Chaltén and Los Glaciares National Park. Enjoy some free time in the town or head out on a short hike.

Fly south to the province of Santa Cruz and the town of El Calafate before transferring overland to El Chaltén. Often referred to as the trekking capital of Argentina, El Chaltén is the gateway to Cerro Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre, two of the most beautiful peaks in Patagonia.

Enjoy free time to warm up for the upcoming trek, opt to take a short hike to a nearby lookout or explore around town.

Day 3 - El Chaltén, Argentina

Climb into a double kayak for a gentle paddle along the Río de las Vueltas in Los Glaciares National Park. Get ready for breathtaking views of Mount Fitz Roy if the skies are clear.

Day 4 - El Chaltén, Argentina

Enjoy a full-day guided hike to Laguna de los Tres. This is the most popular trek in El Chaltén and for good reason. On a clear day, the view of Cerro Fitz Roy and the sparking teal lake below are spectacular. 

The gradual start to the trek provides time to appreciate the stunning landscape and ease into the challenging trek ahead. Although the 400 metres or 1,312 feet incline to reach the lake is taxing, it's well worth the effort for the views!

Day 5 - El Chaltén to El Calafate, Argentina

Explore one of El Chaltén's many trekking routes. Opt to explore the Laguna Torre trail to spot the dramatic Cerro Torre, hike to Laguna Capri or head up to the Mirador de Los Condores to enjoy great views of the town. Afterwards, head to El Calafate and opt for a hearty dinner to refuel.

Optional activities:

Cerro Torre Hike

Chorrillo del Salto Hike

Condor and Eagle Lookout

Day 6 - El Calafate, Argentina

Travel to Perito Moreno Glacier for an included guided tour. You can then opt to take a boat ride on the lake for a different view of the stunning landscape.

Argentino Lake is the southernmost of the four water sheets produced by the Pleistocene Glaciation. Its fjords cover 1,505km² or 935 mi² and it is considered one of the most breathtaking lakes in the world.

The Perito Moreno Glacier is an imposing river of ice, 2.7 kilometres or 1.7 miles wide by 55 metres or 180 feet high, which descends from the continental ice field to the Canal de los Tempanos.

Optional activities:

Perito Moreno Glacier Boat

Day 7 - El Calafate

Enjoy free time, take a leisurely hike to Laguna Nimez, explore the souvenir shops and restaurants in town, choose to experience a full-day at an estancia, or opt to go on an adventure activity in the Patagonian landscape.

The main strip of this tiny town is lined with small wooden shops, browse for souvenirs and chocolates, or stop in one of the restaurants for a bite.

Optional activities:

Laguna Nimez

Day 8 - El Calafate to Buenos Aires, Argentina

Fly back to the vibrant city of Buenos Aires. Enjoy a drink in one of the many sidewalk cafes and restaurants, or pre-book an evening Tango experience.

Get together for one last meal and a final bottle of wine. This will be your last chance to try Argentina's succulent parrilladas so dig in and enjoy!

Optional activities:

Tango Dinner Show

Day 9 - Buenos Aires, Argentina

Depart at any time.

Which G Adventures Patagonia tour is right for YOU?

Now that we've looked at all of these G Adventures Patagonia tours, it's time to figure out which one is right for you, so let's quickly review each one:

The End of the Earth Tour is the classic Patagonia trip that hits all the highlights. It does move at a quicker pace averaging 1-2 nights per destination, but you cover a lot of ground and even make it to Ushuaia. You get to enjoy multiple hikes (even some challenging ones!), but you're not hiking every single day of the trip. You also get 2 nights of camping in a national park. If you're an active traveller who wants to cover a lot of ground fast, this might be the tour for you!

The Hike Patagonia in Depth Tour is all about hiking. You spend lots of time in Los Glaciares National Park and Torres del Paine National Park and you get to hike every single day! You even get to camp for 4 nights while hiking the famous W Trek. This is probably the most physically demanding tour, but you are going to spend every single day in the mountains amazed at the views. If you're an avid hiker who enjoys fitness, this could be your tour!

The Patagonia Hiking Tour is short but sweet. You only visit Argentina but you get ample time in El Calafate and El Chaltén. You're not switching hotels every night of the trip, which means you get to explore each town in depth at a more relaxed pace. If you're short on time but want to see the best of Argentine Patagonia, this is the tour for you!

Hopefully, after an in-depth look at each of these 3 G Adventures Patagonia tours, you've been able to narrow it down. 

There's nothing left to do now but pack your bags and head on down to Patagonia. Wishing you a great trip and happy trails!

What is G Adventures all about?

G Adventures is a global adventure travel company renowned for its commitment to providing authentic and sustainable travel experiences.

It was founded in 1990 by Bruce Poon Tip, and since then the company has grown from a one-man operation to a leading innovator in the adventure travel industry.

G Adventures offers a wide range of travel styles, from active adventures to cultural explorations, catering to various interests and fitness levels.

Their tours, which span the globe, emphasize small-group experiences, typically with a maximum of 16 travellers, allowing for more intimate and immersive experiences.

A standout feature of G Adventures is the focus on responsible tourism. They are dedicated to ensuring that their tours positively impact both the environment and the local communities visited. This approach includes partnering with local guides and businesses, promoting sustainable travel practices, and supporting social enterprise projects worldwide.

For travellers seeking to explore off-the-beaten-path destinations, G Adventures offers a wide array of options including the G Adventures Patagonia tours we've highlighted above.

#### Tren Patagónico: Riding the Train Across Patagonia from Bariloche to Viedma!
The Tren Patagónico is an epic, overnight, cross-country train journey that crosses Argentina from west to east.

This passenger train travels over 800 kilometres from the city of Bariloche at the foot of the Andes Mountains to the city of Viedma which sits near the Atlantic Ocean.

It takes 18+ hours to complete the full journey which coincidentally also crosses the Province of Río Negro.

Travelling aboard the Tren Patagónico is a great way to experience the magic of the Patagonian steppe and see a side of northern Patagonia beyond lakes and snowcapped mountains.

Plus, it's an opportunity to see local wildlife; namely, hares, guanacos and lots of sheep!

In this blog post, we're going to share how you too can travel aboard the Tren Patagónico and what to expect from the train journey.

FAQ's about the Tren Patagónico

Is there a train through Patagonia?

The Tren Patagónico crosses northern Patagonia from east to west, connecting the Atlantic Ocean with the Andes Mountains.

There is currently no train that travels the length of Patagonia from north to south, though there are short tourist train segments for sightseeing purposes.

How much does the Tren Patagónico cost?

At the time of publication, the cost to travel from Bariloche to Viedma is $4,800 ARS. (So $23 USD at the official rate or $12 USD at the Blue Rate).

Where does the Tren Patagónico go?

The Tren Patagónico is a passenger train that travels from the city of Bariloche at the foot of the Andes to the city of Viedma on the Atlantic Ocean.

The Tren Patagónico makes stops in Bariloche, Pilcaniyeu, Comallo, Clemente Onelli, Ingeniero Jacobacci, Maquinchao, Los Menucos, Sierra Colorada, Ministro Ramos Mexia, Nahuel Niyeu, Valcheta, San Antonio Oeste, Winter, Palacios, and Viedma.

How long is the Tren Patagónico train journey?

The Tren Patagónico is an 18+ hour overnight train journey. You board the train in the late afternoon/early evening and arrive the following day around noon.

If you're looking for a fun way to get to Bariloche or Viedma (depending on the direction you're travelling), this train is it!

What days does the Tren Patagónico travel?

The Tren Patagónico typically travels from Viedma to Bariloche on Fridays, departing Viedma at 18:00 and arriving in Bariloche at 12:28 the following day.

It then runs from Bariloche to Viedma on Sundays, departing Bariloche at 17:00 and arriving in Viedma at 11:34 the following day.

That being said, it is always best to check the official website for an updated schedule before you plan your trip, and know that train delays are quite possible.

Is the Tren Patagónico the same as the Old Patagonian Express? 

No, the Tren Patagónico and the Old Patagonian Express, also known as La Trochita, are not the same train.

The name Tren Patagónico translates to 'Patagonian Train' but is not to be confused with the Old Patagonian Express - these are two very different journeys in different provinces!

The Old Patagonian Express is a tourist train in the Province of Chubut that you can ride as a half-day excursion.

Meanwhile, the Tren Patagónico is an overnight journey that crosses the whole Province of Río Negro from the mountains to the sea.

How to book the Tren Patagónico

There are a few different ways to book a journey aboard this train.

Online

The first option is to try booking your train tickets online on the Tren Patagonico official website.

The only thing is that the website is entirely in Spanish, so you'll need some language skills.

The other issue is that sometimes the website doesn't show availability even though there are tickets available!

It's not the most straightforward option, but if you want to try it, click the 'Venta de Pasajes Online' button on their website and go from there.

At the train station

The other option is to go in person to the train station. The Tren Patagónico website shows you can book tickets at the train stations in Viedma, San Antonio Oeste, Ingeniero Jacobacci, and San Carlos de Bariloche.

The hours of operation for the train stations differ and some only open on certain days or for a few hours a day, so check the schedule on the official website before you make the trek over.

Via a tour operator

The best option, I would say, is to book your tickets via a tour operator. You can do so in a few select cities:

In Bariloche: Bioceánica Turismo, Mooving Travel, Gerardo de los Cerros, Surface Travel, Huiliches Turismo, Natural Travel, and Vivir Viajes

In El Bolsón: Grado 42

In Las Grutas: Ocasión Turismo

In Viedma: Monatour, Araucarias, Kosten, and Free Time

This is probably the easiest and most stress-free option. Let someone else take care of the details and just hand you tickets!

Travelling Aboard the Tren Patagónico

Since we travelled from Bariloche to Viedma, our train departed at 17:00 and we were asked to be at the station one hour prior at 16:00.

There were 3 classes to choose from when booking our train tickets: First, Pullman and Camarote.

First is actually the cheapest class, Pullman is the in between option, and Camarote is the one with private cabins.

We travelled in the Pullman carriage which featured reclining seats, a fair bit of legroom, and heat or AC (depending on the time of year).

Another thing to note about this train is that it has a movie carriage that’s available to passengers in Pullman and Camarote, and it also has a disco carriage for those who want to dance the night away as the train chugs across the Patagonian steppe.

I have to say, I loved the scenery on this train journey! We got to witness a magical sunset over the Patagonian steppe paired with ever-changing views. The fields were washed in gold with the last rays of day, and it was spectacular.

Shortly after departing the station in Bariloche, an attendant went across the carriage asking each passenger their final destination - that way they know where to stop and potentially wake you up if you’re getting off in the middle of the night.

Then another attendant came by selling snacks, so we got some milanesa sandwiches, and we also confirmed our reservation in the dining carriage.

The earliest time they had available was 21:00, which is a typical dinner time in Argentina. We ended up sharing a table with an Argentine couple and stayed up until 02:00!

We snoozed for four hours and then it was time to get off at our stop. We sleepily disembarked in San Antonio Oeste so that we could continue onwards to the seaside resort of Las Grutas.

And that was our experience travelling aboard the Tren Patagónico from the mountains to the sea!

I'll leave you with a video below to give you a better idea of what to expect from this train journey.

#### Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour: Is it Worth it?
Visiting Ushuaia and wondering if the Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour is worth it? We'll help you decide!

The Ushuaia Double Decker bus tour is a 1 hour and 10-minute city sightseeing bus tour across the southernmost city in the world. 

The loop runs 15 kilometres in length and during the journey, you get to see a variety of sights and attractions that are on the less touristy side. 

This tour is a good way to get a lay of the land, but it's not the only way to see the city. 

So in this article, we're going to do a deep dive into this Ushuaia bus tour, look at the bus route, the attractions it goes past, the places where you get to disembark, see how the tour varies from summer to winter, and consider alternatives.

We're going to share everything you need to know so you can decide whether this bus tour is right for you. 

#1 Pick

Ushuaia City Tour Aboard a Double Decker Bus

⭐️ RATING: 4.5/5 Stars 

⏳ TOUR LENGTH: 1 hour 10 minutes

The Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour is a 1-hour sightseeing tour aboard a blue vintage bus. It provides a brief introduction to the southernmost city in the world and takes passengers to various attractions beyond the tourist trail.

What is the Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour?

Before we dive in, let's be very clear about what this bus tour is not. 

The Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour is NOT a hop-on hop-off bus tour where you can get off at your chosen attraction, spend some time exploring, and then wait for the next bus to come by a few minutes later to pick you up. 

This bus tour is a city sightseeing tour where you drive around the city and see a lot of places in passing. 

During the tour, you get to listen to a narrated audio guide which offers commentary on Ushuaia's history and the attractions you're seeing along the way. 

You only disembark at two points throughout the tour for brief photo ops. 

Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour

All aboard the Ushuaia City Tour Bus

The Ushuaia city bus tour departs from Civic Plaza Ushuaia on the corner of Avenida Maipú and Comodoro Augusto Laserre Sur. This is right downtown just one block north of the port, so it's super easy to find.

Look for the old-fashioned London-style double-decker bus painted bright blue, and then get ready to be transported back through time once you step aboard. 

During this bus tour, you’ll get to learn about Ushuaia’s history and hear fun anecdotes, with a bit of tango music in between.

The entire trip is narrated by an audio guide. You'll get a set of headphones and be able to choose from 8 different languages: English, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, French, German, Russian and Chinese.

Attractions on Ushuaia Double Decker Tour

So what will you see during the tour?

Well, as I mentioned earlier, most of the attractions you will visit (or mainly drive by since this tour is just over an hour!), are not super touristy. 

Here's the official bus route so you know what to expect:

Old Government House: Originally constructed in 1893, the building underwent a transformation after a devastating fire in 1920, resulting in its current design. The Old Government House is now also an annex of the End of the World Museum.

First School: The first school in Ushuaia was established in 1890, called Escuela Nº 1 Domingo Faustino Sarmiento. 

First Church: In 1898, Ushuaia's first church was built, a catholic church called La Iglesia Parroquial de Ushuaia, which is now a National Historic Monument. 

Otero House: This is the historic home of Lucinda Otero, a renowned writer who depicted life in Ushuaia through her poetry. 

Malvinas Monument: This is a war memorial with a wall of remembrance that contains the names of the 649 Argentine servicemen who were killed in the war for Islas Malvinas (Falkland Islands) in 1982.

First Graveyard: Ushuaia's first cemetery takes up half a block just north of Plaza San Martin and it's where many of the early settlers are buried. 

CADIC: This stands for Centro Austral de Investigaciones Científicas or Austral Center for Scientific Research. It's the southernmost interdisciplinary research centre, not counting the bases in Antarctica.

University: Tierra del Fuego National University or Universidad Nacional de Tierra Del Fuego is the university at the end of the world. It offers multiple careers in environmental science, political science, economy and education. 

Monte Gallinero: This area is home to a battery with Bofors M45 DP 105mm cannons. 

Monte Vigia: Another historic hill near Monte Gallinero.

Pipo River: This is where the Pipo River crosses through the city of Ushuaia.

New Neighbourhood: As the name suggests, these are the new neighbourhoods under development where you'll see a lot of new constructions. 

Prisoners' Path: This is a historic hiking trail in the city's west end where you can still see the remains of the train track sleepers that took the prisoners from the prison to the forest.

Devil's Lagoon: This is a small green lagoon that's part of a nature reserve. It's named so because back in the day animals used to disappear during the winter months (unfortunately falling through the ice!) and local lore was that the devil was taking these animals. 

Buena Esperanza: Not super exciting but this is the local water treatment plant. 

Italian Neighbourhood: A historic neighbourhood where a lot of Italian families initially lived. 

Hospital: Another exciting attraction, I know, but you'll get to go by the local hospital. 

Saint Christopher: Formerly known as the HMS Justice where she served as a rescue tug in the Royal Navy, the Saint Christopher is a vessel that was later chartered for salvage operations in the Beagle Channel. After suffering engine trouble and rudder damage, she was beached and abandoned in the harbour, where she's now a tourist attraction. 

End of the World Museum: This museum focuses on local history and natural history, and has exhibits dedicated to sailing, whaling and seabirds.

Navy Harbour: With some luck you might get to see part of the naval fleet docked in the port.

Fournier Monument: Monument to remember the ARA Fournier, a minesweeper of the Argentine Navy that was in service from 1940 until her sinking in 1949.

After reading this list, you probably have a better understanding of what I meant by less touristy attractions in Ushuaia. I mean, schools, hospitals, local neighbourhoods and the local water treatment plant probably aren't on your list of places you plan to visit in the southernmost city, but it gives you an overview of the city from a more local angle. 

You also go past the Old Government House, the Malvinas Monument, the Saint Christopher beached on the city shores, so there are some spots geared more towards tourists. 

There are two stops along this tour where you actually get off the bus. The first one is the Devil's Lagoon where you can snap some photos and enjoy the greenery. 

The next stop is in front of Aeroclub Ushuaia. This isn't even listed as an official stop on the itinerary, but it offers great panoramic views of Ushuaia. So if you're looking for those postcard shots of the city, this is where you get them. 

Pros of Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour

✅ Provides a great overview of the city

✅ Takes you to places you wouldn't be able to reach on foot

✅ Goes beyond the main tourist sights

Cons of Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour

❌ Not a hop-on-hop-off bus (there isn't such a tour in Ushuaia!)

❌ Limited time at each scheduled stop

❌ Short 1 hour and 10-minute tour of the city

Who is the Ushuaia Bus Tour for?

👍 Travellers who want an overview of the whole city

👍 Travellers who have limited time in Ushuaia 

👍 Travellers who want to enjoy a short condensed city tour

My Experience on the Ushuaia Bus Tour

Let me say, I had very few expectations from this bus tour because I kind of booked it on a whim. 

I figured it would be a good tour to do early on in my trip to Ushuaia so I could get a lay of the land and perhaps revisit some places if something caught my eye during this brief bus tour. 

This sightseeing bus allowed me to see places in Ushuaia I otherwise never would have made it to, not only because they were too far for a tourist to get around on foot, but also because we visited less touristy places that weren't exactly on my travel radar. 

With so many of Ushuaia's main attractions concentrated along the port or in the historic centre, it was nice to see where the locals live and what the city outskirts look like. 

I also enjoyed the audio guide since it provided context to what we were seeing. Otherwise, the attractions wouldn't have made a lot of sense since we were only seeing them in passing. 

As for my initial idea of retracing my steps to places of interest, I have to say, nothing I saw during the bus tour really warranted a longer visit.

We had enough time at the two scenic stops of the trip, the Devil's Lagoon and the Ushuaia Aeroclub, that I didn't feel the need to go back anywhere with more time.

There's so much to see and do in Ushuaia - go on a Beagle Channel cruise, ride the Train at the End of the World, visit the Ushuaia Prison Museum - that I'm glad I only spent an hour touring the city and therefore had plenty of time to enjoy other activities. 

Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Schedule

HIGH SEASON (October to May)

Travel aboard the double decker bus 

Departure times are 10:30, 12:30, 15:30 and 17:30

1 hour and 10-minute tour

LOW SEASON (July to September)

Travel aboard a 4x4 Bondi (you need a vehicle that can handle the snow!)

Departure times are 12:00 and 15:00.

1 hour and 20-minute tour

Hot chocolate included

Alternatives to the Ushuaia Bus Tour

If the Ushuaia Double Decker bus tour doesn't sound like your cup of tea, you may be interested in checking out the Ushuaia City Train. 

This train is NOT the End of the World Train, but rather a city sightseeing train that does a similar loop through Ushuaia. 

The Ushuaia City Train is a 1-hour journey (slightly shorter than the bus by just 10 minutes) and it covers 13 kilometres (2 kilometres less than the bus). 

You also get 2 photo stops along the way, though at different locations. 

You can check out the Ushuaia City Train Tour here. 

Is the Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Tour worth it?

I would say it depends on the type of traveller you are and what you want out of your trip. 

If you enjoy visiting quirky spots and you want an off-the-beaten-path look at Ushuaia, then this bus tour delivers. Also, it runs just over an hour, so it's a good way to see the city quickly especially if you're on a short trip to Ushuaia. 

You'll get to see the city beyond the historic centre, you'll drive through local neighbourhoods, and you'll get to learn about the city's history via the audio guide. 

It's also an activity to consider during the cooler months in Ushuaia when you may not feel like spending a lot of time exploring the city on foot.

On the other hand, if you're super pressed for time and you have a long list of activities in Ushuaia that you really want to get through, then you should probably focus on those.

Perhaps your time would be better spent hiking in Tierra del Fuego National Park, cruising the Beagle Channel, enjoying a helicopter flight over Ushuaia, or so many other things!

I'm glad I did the tour because I got a good overview of the city and I feel like I know Ushuaia beyond its tourist sights, however, I don't think it's a must. But ultimately, the choice is yours!

How to buy your Ushuaia Double Decker Bus Ticket

You can book your ticket through Viator. 

In-person at the bus stop right before departure. 

By phone at +54 9 2901 582400

On the Ushuaia City Tour website (Spanish only).

Read More about Ushuaia:

Epic Ushuaia Tours at the End of the World

Post Office at the End of the World

How to Get to Ushuaia

Where to Stay in Ushuaia

Travel Tips for Your Trip to Ushuaia 

Tolhuin: The Lakeside Town Near Ushuaia

Choosing a G Adventures Patagonia Tour



#### When is the Best Time to Visit Bariloche?
Wondering when is the best time to visit Bariloche? We're highlighting the pros and cons of each season as well as the activities you can enjoy depending on the time of year. 

Bariloche is a year-round destination and depending on the season you visit, there are a myriad of activities to enjoy.

I've had the opportunity to travel to Bariloche in spring, summer and autumn (winter is next!) and it's always a completely different experience.

Personally, autumn is my favourite time of year in Bariloche. I love hiking through the fall foliage, enjoying the crisp autumn days, and tucking into some hearty Patagonian dishes at a local restaurant. 

That being said, there are pros and cons to visiting in each season, meaning the best time to go to Bariloche depends entirely on the activities you're looking to enjoy.

Best Time to Visit Bariloche, Argentina 

Autumn in Bariloche 

March, April and May

Pros of Autumn in Bariloche

Autumn in Bariloche is my favourite time of year! I love it when the forest turns into a spectacle of reds, oranges, and yellows. It's the most picturesque time of the year and there are so many ways to soak in the scenery.

You can drive the Road of the Seven Lakes, go on a lakeside horse trek, or tackle some of the surrounding mountain peaks in Nahuel Huapi National Park.

One of my favourite autumn experiences in Bariloche is the hike to Laguna Verde via Refugio Neumeyer. The contrast between the red foliage and the green lagoon is pretty spectacular! This isn't a super popular trek, so I only discovered it thanks to joining a guided hiking tour.

Another pro of visiting Bariloche in autumn is that the weather is milder. Temperatures can range between 5–15°C (41–59°F), which I think is perfect for spending an active day outdoors.

This is also a good time of year to sample hearty Patagonian dishes like deer stew, lamb barbecue and lentil casserole. 

Another pro of autumn in Bariloche is that it's a quieter time of year. Kids have gone back to school, adults have gone back to work, and you get more affordable rates with fewer tourists.

Cons of Autumn in Bariloche

One of the cons of autumn in Bariloche is that once the peak summer season winds down, there are fewer tours and activities. It's not like the whole city shuts down because this is very much a year-round destination. However, tours are a bit more limited and run on a more restricted schedule since there is less demand. 

🍂 Trekking in the Andes Mountains - This private full-day hiking trip from Bariloche can be tailored to your interests and fitness level. It includes lunch and all necessary equipment.

Winter in Bariloche 

June, July and August

Pros of Winter in Bariloche

If you're looking for a dreamy winter wonderland with snow-covered mountains, winter is the time to visit Bariloche!

Winter is the peak season for skiing, snowboarding, snowshoeing and a whole myriad of winter sports. The place to be is Cerro Catedral; this is the largest ski resort in the southern hemisphere with 32 lifts and 120 kilometres of slopes!

You may be surprised to hear you can enjoy winter treks in Bariloche. Some alpine refuges and trails close during the winter months, so if you're not too experienced in this region, it's best to trek with a local guide. They'll be able to navigate the terrain, keep a close eye on the weather, and provide you with snowshoes for sections of the trek where these are needed. 

If all of this is sounding a little too active, fret not! Winter in Bariloche can be a very relaxing experience if you choose to pamper yourself. If this sounds like you, I'd recommend booking a couple of nights at a luxury hotel with a spa and an indoor pool. Alternatively, you can opt for a cozy cabin with a wood-burning fireplace. Stay cozy indoors as you watch the snow come down!

Winter is also the perfect time of year to indulge in Bariloche's artisanal chocolate scene. There's something about the cooler weather that just makes you crave chocolate! The good news is that most chocolaterías have on-site cafes where you can indulge in hot chocolate, pastries and assorted chocolate boxes. 

If you need another reason to visit Bariloche in winter, consider attending Fiesta Nacional de la Nieve. The National Snow Festival features live music, wood-chopping competitions and ski races. 

Cons of Winter in Bariloche

So, winter in Bariloche sounds pretty dreamy. What are the cons?

The cold weather may deter some visitors. Temperatures range from -2–8°C (28–46°F), but if you wear thermal underwear and dress in warm layers, you'll be fine. I'm a firm believe that there is no bad weather, only inadequate clothing. Spoken like a true Canadian!

Another downside of winter in Bariloche is that ski resorts can become crowded, especially in July during the school holidays. This can drive up the cost of accommodations, so it's best to book well in advance.  

☃️ Private Winter Trek in Bariloche - This winter hike takes you through a snow-covered landscape and once the snow gets deep enough, it's time to put on some snowshoes! 

Spring in Bariloche 

September, October and November

Pros of Spring in Bariloche

There are many reasons to visit Bariloche in spring. For starters, the scenery is gorgeous! The surrounding forests and valleys come alive with vibrant greens and you also have wildflowers in bloom. 

Plus, temperatures are pleasant averaging 10–20°C (50–68°F), making it ideal for outdoor adventures.

Springtime is shoulder season, so you can enjoy the natural beauty and popular attractions without the heavy tourist influx. This is a good time of year to visit Isla Victoria, which will be in bloom with retamas - the flowering yellow bushes you see in the photos.

Another pro is that accommodation and tour costs are generally lower compared to peak seasons.

Cons of Spring in Bariloche

The cons of visiting Bariloche in springtime are that the weather can be a little bit erratic with sudden rain or even occasional late snow.

This can also be a windy time of year, especially in the months of October and November. You'll want to look at the weather forecast and plan your activities accordingly. 

Museums, coffee shops and breweries are fun activities for inclement weather days, and you can save your hiking for milder days.

🌿 Navigation to the Arrayanes Forest and Victoria Island - This boat trip will take you to the largest island on Lake Nahuel Huapi and you'll also visit a historic 300-year-old forest.

Summer in Bariloche

December, January and February

Pros of Summer in Bariloche

In many ways, summer is the ideal time to visit Bariloche. You have great weather and the days are long, which means you can make the most of your time outdoors. 

Daytime temperatures range from 20–30°C (68–86°F), which is great for exploring nature and even going for a dip in the chilly waters of Lake Nahuel Huapi, if you dare. FYI, this is Patagonia so the waters are frigid year-round, but summer is your best bet for a swim!

There are also loads of outdoor activities to enjoy like hiking, kayaking, horse trekking, mountain biking, zip-lining and fly fishing.

If you want to avoid the summer crowds, I would recommend activities that take you out of the city like a kayaking tour of Lago Moreno, a biking tour to Colonia Suiza via the back roads, or a horse trek through the Andes foothills. These experiences will bring you close to nature so you can soak in the essence of Patagonia. 

Bariloche is well known for its craft beer, so summer is a fun time of year to visit the different breweries and hang out on their patios. Lots of places serve beer flights so you can sample a few different brews. Raspberry beer is really popular in Patagonia and super refreshing on a hot summer's day!

Cons of Summer in Bariloche

Now let's talk about the cons. 

The main downfall of visiting Bariloche in summer is the crowds! This is one of the more accessible destinations in Patagonia (given the short flight time and flight frequency) and that makes it a popular spot. 

Our main struggle during our summer visit to Bariloche was traffic. We were staying at a cabin on the city outskirts and the lakeside road that leads to Circuito Chico and Llao Llao was often backed up. Whether you rent a car, use public transport or take taxis, getting places will take longer than usual.

Because summer in Bariloche is the peak tourist season, that also leads to busy trails, crowded attractions and higher accommodation costs. You may want to consider swapping the main attractions for lesser-known sites. 

☀️ Kayaking on Lake Moreno - This half-day kayaking excursion allows you to soak in the scenery, and it includes lakeside snacks.

And we've now covered the pros and cons of each season! As you can see, the best time to visit Bariloche greatly depends on the activities you want to do and whether you mind crowds.

But like I said at the beginning, Bariloche is a destination that can be enjoyed year-round. Whether you're looking for an action-packed itinerary or a few days of lakeside relaxation, you can find that here. So book that flight and come on down!

Read more

Bariloche Travel Guide: What to See and Do

How to Spend 2 Amazing Days in Bariloche

Bariloche on Foot: 5 Walking Tours to See the City

How to Get to Bariloche

A Travel Itinerary for Northern Patagonia

Tren Patagonico: Bariloche to Viedma by Train

Where to Glamp in Patagonia

#### When is the Best Time to Visit Mendoza, Argentina?
So you’re dreaming of sipping Malbec beneath the snow‑capped Andes peaks, but you’re not quite sure when is the best time to visit Mendoza? Welcome to the eternal dilemma! 

Each season here rewrites the script: spring wakes the vineyards with pastel blossoms and shoulder‑season bargains, summer turns the valley into a sun‑drenched playground of asados and outdoor sports, autumn steals the show with Vendimia harvest parades and vibrant foliage, while winter swaps pool days for ski runs and cozy barrel tastings by a crackling fire.

Think of Mendoza as a year‑round destination where you can choose your own adventure; the trick is matching your vibe and wardrobe to the calendar.

So grab a glass and let’s break down the pros, cons, and must‑see events for every season so you can time your trip like a local.

Spring in Mendoza

September, October and November

Pros of Spring in Mendoza

If you like the idea of vineyards waking up after their winter nap, spring in Mendoza is pure magic. The Andes Mountains are still sprinkled with snow, but down in the valley, the vines start pushing out bright green leaves and the orchards pop with blossoms.

Daytime temperatures hover around 20 °C (68 °F), making it perfect for patio lunches paired with a crisp Torrontés. Meanwhile, the evenings cool off just enough to justify a light jacket.

Vineyards and tasting rooms aren’t overcrowded and it's easier to book a tasting or a table for lunch at some of the more popular bodegas that tend to get fully booked during high season.

Spring is ideal for outdoor activities like rafting, horseback riding, and trekking in the foothills of the Andes - you’ll have miles of trails practically to yourself!

Another added benefit is that because tourism is moderate, shoulder‑season prices are still in play and you can often find better rates on hotels. You may even want to consider staying at a local estancia at the foot of the Andes.

Cons of Spring in Mendoza

The downside of spring in Mendoza is that the weather is a touch unpredictable! Occasionally, the infamous Zonda winds sweep down from the Andes bringing sudden heat and dust. 

Plus, there’s always a small chance of late frosts higher up in the Uco Valley. That being said, pack layers and you’ll be fine.

Summer in Mendoza 

December, January and February

Pros of Summer in Mendoza

Summer turns Mendoza into a sun‑soaked playground. Daytime highs sit in the low 30s °C (mid‑80s °F), grapes are ripening fast, and the vibe is festive.

Long summer evenings mean more opportunities for al fresco dining. The long, warm nights beg for an asado under fairy lights, and rooftop bars in the city centre buzz until late.

Outdoor adventures reach peak adrenaline: think white‑water rafting on the Río Mendoza, sunset paddleboard sessions on Potrerillos Lake, and high‑altitude hiking at the foot of Mount Aconcagua.

One Mendoza summer event not to be missed is Fiesta de la Cosecha, which rolls out a symphonic concert right in the middle of the 3 hectares of vineyards at El Plumerillo Airport. Picture violins, cellos, and Malbec under the stars!

Cons of Summer in Mendoza

The summer heat in Mendoza is both a friend and a foe. Expect plenty of sunny days and hot temperatures in January and February. While this is great for poolside relaxation and sampling crisp white wines, the mercury occasionally leaps toward 38 °C (100 °F), which can make midday winery tours feel like a sauna!

Bring sunscreen, a hat, and try to schedule your tastings for the morning or late afternoon. 

Tourism peaks during the summer holidays, leading to higher accommodation costs and busy wineries. Hotel rates and rental cars climb because local families are on vacation and travellers arrive en masse. 

So, if you can handle the heat, the higher prices, and the crowds, summer rewards you with full‑throttle energy and late‑night fun.

Autumn in Mendoza

March, April and May

Pros of Autumn in Mendoza

Ask any wine aficionado and they’ll tell you that autumn is the best time to visit Mendoza!

Harvest season, locally known as the Vendimia, kicks off with a bang in March. The National Grape Harvest Festival, known as Fiesta Nacional de la Vendimia, is celebrated with beauty pageants, traditional dances, folkloric musicians, elaborately decorated floats, a spectacular final show at the Frank Romero Day Amphitheatre, and the crowning of the Harvest Queen.

You’ll be clapping along with 20,000 other people as fireworks light up the Andes backdrop - truly bucket‑list stuff.

An autumn visit to Mendoza also brings the possibility of taking part in special harvest tours where you can actually stomp grapes with your feet (this is known as vino patero) and taste juice straight from the press!

Weather‑wise, afternoons hover in the mid‑20s °C (low‑70s °F). Warm days and cooler nights are ideal for exploring the vineyards, hiking without intense summer heat, or going on an Andes excursion to the High Mountains.

Meanwhile, the hillsides morph into a patchwork of reds, oranges, and golds making the vineyard landscapes especially picturesque. 

Autumn is my favourite time of year to visit Mendoza - I love the milder weather and changing foliage, but there's still enough on the schedule!

Cons of Autumn in Mendoza

What's the downside of autumn in Mendoza? With Vendimia in full swing, accommodation sells out months in advance, and traffic around the event venues can snarl. Because this is a popular time to visit Mendoza, you'll want to book your hotel and arrange your tours well in advance.

By late April, the temperature dips and some wineries shorten opening hours meaning fewer options if you visit later in autumn.

Winter in Mendoza 

June, July and August

Pros of Winter in Mendoza

Winter in Mendoza is more about cozy malbec‑by‑the‑fireplace vibes than sun‑kissed vineyards, but don’t write it off!

One of the pros of visiting Mendoza in winter is that there are fewer tourists and you can often get discounted hotel rates. This means you can take your hotel budget and upgrade to a fancy wine hotel. There are deals to be had, so have a look at properties you normally wouldn't consider!

Snow blankets the high Andes turning it into a playground for winter sport enthusiasts. 

Las Leñas is a high-mountain ski resort located in the heart of the Andes Mountains. Its base sits at 2,240 metres above sea level while its summit is 3,430 metres high. It has 30 ski runs and a season that runs from June to September. That means you can carve fresh powder in the morning and sip barrel samples back in the valley by mid‑afternoon.

Perks include gloriously clear mountain views - winter brings the least haze!

Several wineries host intimate locro‑and‑Malbec lunches for Argentina’s Independence Day on July 9th - great if you’re keen on traditional comfort food.

Cons of Winter in Mendoza

The downside is that the vineyards won't be looking their most beautiful as all the vines will be bare. A handful of boutique producers also shut their doors for annual maintenance, and shorter daylight hours can limit your daily mileage if you’re road‑tripping.

Crisp daytime temps of 12–15 °C (mid‑50s °F) give way to chilly nights that hover around freezing. While Mendoza’s winters are relatively mild compared to other parts of the country (I'm looking at you Patagonia!), it can still get chilly, especially at night and in the mountains.

Dress warm, rent a car with good heating, and enjoy getting the region almost to yourself.

So, when is the Best Time to Visit Mendoza?

Ultimately, Mendoza’s wineries and the scenic Andes backdrop ensure an unforgettable visit any time of year, but knowing what each season offers will help you plan the perfect escape.

If vibrant festivals, harvest activities, and lively crowds excite you, aim for late summer or early autumn.

If you prefer a tranquil getaway with mild weather and fewer tourists, consider spring or winter.

If warm weather, green vineyards, and outdoor adventure top your list, summer is your season.

That means the best time to visit Mendoza is entirely up to your wants and what you're hoping to experience during your trip! Just pick your vibe and don’t forget to raise a glass to the Andes while you’re there.

#### Things to do in Trevelin, Argentina: Tulips, Wineries and Welsh Culture in Patagonia
If you're looking for things to do in Trevelin during your visit, you've come to the right place!

This rugged mountain town sits on the shores of the Percy River, is surrounded by epic mountains, boasts multiple vineyards, is within driving distance to a beautiful national park, and transforms into a fairy tale when the tulip fields bloom in the springtime.

Despite all it has to offer, Trevelin is still quite undiscovered by international tourists. However, if you enjoy venturing off the beaten path and exploring lesser-known destinations, Trevelin is one of those places in Patagonia worth adding to your list.

The following is our Trevelin travel guide, so get ready to take some notes for your visit.

History of Trevelin

In 1865, a group of Welsh immigrants embarked on a journey from Wales to Patagonia, seeking religious freedom and better economic opportunities. 

Led by Michael D. Jones, a Welsh nationalist and preacher, they arrived in the Chubut River Valley in Argentina, where they established several settlements, including the town of Trevelin, which translates to ‘mill town’ in Welsh. 

The Welsh settlers faced numerous challenges upon their arrival, including the harsh and unfamiliar Patagonian landscape and climate, and they only made it through those early years thanks to help of the Tehuelche people who taught them how to hunt and survive in this new climate. 

Over the years, the Welsh settlers in Trevelin managed to cultivate the fertile lands, engage in sheep farming, and build a thriving community. They also constructed traditional Welsh-style houses and chapels, which can still be seen in the town today, adding to its unique charm and cultural heritage. 

The descendants of the Welsh settlers in Trevelin are proud of their heritage and continue to honor their roots through various cultural events and festivals. 

The town’s legacy stands as a testament to the resilience and determination of the Welsh immigrants who ventured across the Atlantic Ocean to build a new life in the remote Patagonian wilderness.

Things to do in Trevelin

There are plenty of things to do in Trevelin, both within the town and in its vicinity. Here are some ideas to get you started:

Los Alerces National Park

Los Alerces National Park has various access points that allow you to explore different areas of the park.

You can access from El Bolson in the north, Esquel in the east, while Trevelin gives you access to the southern sector, which is home to the Futaleufú Hydroelectric Complex.

We decided to visit the park on a half-day trip and these are the places we were able to cover:

Cascada de los Tambores: short trail that leads to a waterfall.

Mirador de los Pozones: lookout point where you have turquoise pools along the river - this is a popular swimming spot in the summer.

Presa Futaleufú: a snaking road leads up to the dam where you can drive across and enjoy spectacular views of the surrounding mountains.

Bahía de Troncos: this is the 'bay of the logs' referring to the trees from the forest that was flooded during the creation of the dam.

Chimenea de Equilibrio: this chimney stands 62 meters high, has a 30-metre diameter, and its job is to regulate the water pressure. This stop also offers views of the abandoned hotel that once housed the foreign workers who helped build the hydroelectric complex.

Tip: If you're renting a car you can do this trip independently. Alternatively, you can hire a remís (private car and driver) to take you on a tour of the park, which is what we did. 

This is not a guided tour, but the driver will stop at all the scenic points and give you time to go on little hikes and take photos. 

If you speak some basic Spanish, you can approach one of the remís booths in town and inquire about this half-day outing.

Winery Visit

Patagonia has an emerging wine region, and Trevelin alone has 3 different vineyards you can visit:

Casa Yagüe

Viñas del Nant y Fall

Contra Corriente

We only had time to visit one vineyard and we went to Casa Yagüe, so we'll share that experience.

For starters, this vineyard is in a beautiful setting surrounded by snow-capped mountains, thick forests, and rows upon rows of vines.

Casa Yagüe is the second southernmost vineyard in the world - it's quite impressive that they can produce wine at these latitudes! - and it's just 12 kilometres from the border with Chile, meaning it's closer to Chile than it is to the town of Trevelin.

We signed up to have lunch and do the guided vineyard tour, and we loved the order of things - food and drink first, then tour the property!

For lunch, we enjoyed a delicious cheese plater with fruits and nuts. That was followed by a delicious fresh salad with local, seasonal veggies grown right in their garden. The main course was a homemade gnocchi with a beetroot sauce.

All of this was paired with complimentary wines!

And lastly, we had pancakes with dulce de leche for dessert.

Tip: It's best to make a reservation if you want to dine at the winery, especially if you're visiting during high season as seating is limited. You can either call or send a message through Whatsapp and they're good about messaging back the same day. 

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Museo Molino Nant Fach (@museo_molino_nant_fach) 

Nant Fach Mill

Another popular attraction in Trevelin, or rather its outskirts, is Molino Nant Fach.

This mill is an exact replica of the flour mills that existed in Trevelin from the late 19th century up until the mid-20th century.

In fact, this mill was built by Mervyn Evans, one of the direct descendants of Trevelin's early Welsh settlers.

The mill itself looks like something out of a fairy tale. It's a picturesque log construction complete with a waterwheel and a sparkling stream that can be crossed via a cute footbridge.

Guided tours are offered and it's a great opportunity to learn about Patagonia's Welsh heritage.

Tip: It's best to check the mill's hours of operation at the Visitor Centre in Trevelin's town square since this changes month to month. 

Nant y Fall Waterfalls

The Nant y Fall Waterfalls are located just south of Trevelin off of Route 259.

It's then a 4-kilometre drive from the turn-off until you reach the trailhead, where you pay a small admission fee.

The whole circuit is about a 500-metre walk along a well-marked trail that leads to a couple of different lookout points where you can view the different waterfalls including La Petisa meaning 'the short one', Las Mellizas meaning 'the twins', and El Salto Grande or 'the big jump'.

There's also a small shop at the entrance just as soon as you cross the bridge where you can buy cold drinks, sandwiches, cookies, scones, and other snacks.

This place is located quite close to the Nant Fach Mill, so you can hit up both attractions if you’re in the area. 

Andean Mill Museum

If you want to dive into Patagonia's Welsh history, I would recommend visiting the Museo Regional Trevelin Molino Andes.

They have the list of passengers who arrived from Wales aboard the Mimosa in 1865, photos of the early settlers, and all sorts of farming equipment and homeware goods that would have been used by the newly arrived in their new home.

Tip: This is a great attraction for a rainy day and you can combine it with Welsh afternoon tea on the same day.

        View this post on Instagram            A post shared by Tulipanes Patagonia (@tulipanespatagonia) 

Tulipanes Patagonia

This next attraction is a seasonal one, but if you happen to be travelling in Patagonia in the springtime, then you can't miss visiting the tulip fields!

Tulipanes Patagonia is located in the outskirts of town just south of Trevelin and during peak bloom, it draws visitors from all over the country.

They organize all sorts of cool events during this brief month-long window; you can enjoy the views of the tulip fields from a hot air balloon, you can fly over in a small plane, or you can even attend a moonlit dinner in the fields.

If your trip happens to coincide with these dates, it's a sight you cannot miss!

Tip: MerakiSur runs an excursion to see the tulip fields from Esquel during the month of October. If you miss that, they also run an excursion to see the peonies in bloom at a neighbouring plantation starting in mid-November. The fresh blooms last about a month.

Welsh Fire-breathing Dragon

One of the unique things to do in Trevelin is to wait for the fire-breathing dragon to wake up!

That's right! Seated atop the town's tourism office on the north end of the plaza is a red dragon that comes to life twice a day and breathes three fiery puffs.

It's a bit of a blink-and-you-miss-it experience, so have your camera ready to go.

The schedule is posted to the left of the tourism office just under the dragon, so check the times because they change throughout the year.

Shop at El Caballo

There's a shop located on the northwest end of the central plaza called El Caballo, and it's a great place to pick up some typical Argentine souvenirs.

They have all sorts of leather goods ranging from belts to boots, sombreros to boinas, ponchos to wool sweaters, and knives to mates.

It's a really cool store and the staff are really helpful, speak English, and can help you find what you need.

Where to Stay in Trevelin

Casa de Piedra - here you'll find centrally-located alpine-style accommodations featuring a main guesthouse and cottages, plus a buffet breakfast.

La Estancia - they offer log and stone cabins in a quiet neighbourhood just a few blocks from the centre of town.

Ladera de Nant y Fall - this is a holiday home on the outskirts of town, right across from the tulip fields and a vineyard, and just down the road from the hike to the Nant y Fall waterfalls. Keep in mind you would need a rental car since it's not within walking distance of town.

Nomade Glamping y Domos - a glamping site overlooking the shores of the Futaleufú River in Los Cipreses, about 25 kilometres from Trevelin. You can find more glamping spots in Trevelin and across Patagonia here.

Where to Eat in Trevelin

Los Troncos

Los Troncos is a traditional parrilla restaurant, so the focus here is grilled meats.

If you order the parrillada para uno or 'BBQ for one', you'll get an assortment of classic cuts of meats, including chorizo (sausage), morcilla (blood sausage), bife (steak), asado de tira (short ribs), chinchulín (small intestine), and more.

They'll bring a small grill to your table with the meat still sizzling, that way the meat stays warm while you dine.

Pair that with a salad and a bottle of Malbec, and you've got yourself a traditional Argentine barbecue!

Address: Avenida San Martín 214

El Refugio

If you're craving pizza, you need to eat at El Regufio. This pizzeria is located on the northwest corner of the central plaza in a cozy log cabin-style building, complete with a fireplace.

We tried a really interesting pizza with blue cheese, walnuts and celery, which sounds really odd, but we quite enjoyed the mix of flavours and textures.

For something a bit more classic, you can't go wrong ordering their Napolitana with mozzarella, tomato slice, garlic and oregano.

Address: Avenida Fortin Refugio across from the plaza

De la Cabaña

This place does take out food, so it's a nice option if you want to get an Argentine homecooked meal to enjoy at your cottage.

It's buffet style, so you just grab a box, fill it up with what you want, have it weighed and pay.

They usually have a mix of chicken, beef, pizza, pasta, salads, and a couple of vegetarian options like stuffed pumpkin, roasted squash, eggplant and more.

They also have a couple of tables outdoors on the sidewalk, so you can eat there if the weather is nice.

Address: Perito Moreno 215

Nain Maggie

Nain Maggie translates to 'Grandma Margaret' in Welsh and it's named after the matriarch who first opened the teahouse in 1975 in order to share the Welsh flavours of her ancestors.

The specialize in Welsh cake or bara brith, which is served in the tea house but can also be purchased to take away.

Their afternoon tea is copious with homemade bread, butter, jams, cheeses, scones, and an assortment of freshly baked cakes.

Definitely skip lunch and make this your main meal.

Address: Perito Moreno 179

Casa de Té La Mutisia

This is another alternative for a Welsh afternoon tea in Trevelin.

You can expect a similar menu featuring scones, Welsh cake, and a few other baked items, with the addition of grilled sandwiches.

This place feels slightly fancier than the previous tea house, and it also has a mini museum on site with displays of items that belonged to the early Welsh settlers.

Address: Avenida San Martín 170

Day Trips from Trevelin

There are a variety of day trips from Trevelin ranging from half an hour to two hours away, and one is even across the border in neighbouring Chile!

Esquel

Driving time: 28 minutes

There are plenty of things to do in Esquel and you could easily spend a few days there, but if one day is all you have, you can visit on a day trip from Trevelin.

Some activities not to miss include riding the Old Patagonian Express, kayaking on Laguna La Zeta, biking to Laguna Willmanco, and hiking up Cerro La Cruz for panoramic views of the town.

Los Alerces National Park

Driving time: 1 hour 15 minutes

I've already mentioned you can visit the southern sector of Los Alerces National Park from Trevelin, however, the area around Pasarela Río Arrayanes (accessed via Esquel) is really nice.

You can book a guided tour that departs from Puerto Chucao, cruises up Lake Menendez, and then disembarks in Puerto Sagrario where you can hike through Valdivian forest and see a 2,700 year old tree!

Cholila

Driving time: 2 hours

The main draw to Cholila is to visit the famous ranch once inhabited by Butch Cassidy, Etta Place and the Sundance Kid.

This wild gang of former bank and train robbers ended up hiding out in Patagonia, and their former ranch still stands today.

There's an interesting museum of sorts showcasing all thing Butch Cassidy and the Wild Gang, and it's a quirky stop in this remote corner of Patagonia.

Futaleufú, Chile

Driving time: 1 hour (may take longer with border crossing)

If you're up to visit another country, you can cross the border into neighbouring Chile!

This small frontier town is located just 10 kilometres from the international border and it has a slowly burgeoning tourism scene where travellers can enjoy hiking, fishing, mountain biking, trekking and canyoning.

Just don't forget to bring your passport if you decide to go on this day trip!

If Trevelin sounds like your kind of place, you might also enjoy our El Bolson travel guide and Villa La Angostura travel guide. These are two charming mountain towns worth adding to your northern Patagonia travel plans.

#### Things to do in Ushuaia | Ultimate Ushuaia Travel Guide
If you're looking for the best things to do in Ushuaia, Argentina, you've come to the right place! This ultimate Ushuaia travel guide has everything you need to know.

Ushuaia is one of those destinations that feels like a major accomplishment as a traveller. After all, it takes a lot of effort and planning to reach the southernmost city in the world, so when you get there, you want to make sure you're making the most of your trip!

During my very first trip to Ushuaia, I spent an action-packed 2 weeks there. I visited all the main attractions as well as some lesser-known sites, I did a lot of hiking, went on day tours, stayed at a few different accommodations and restaurant-hopped my way across the city.

As a result, I feel like I have a really good understanding of everything there is to do in Ushuaia! 

Today, I want to share everything I know about this destination to help you have the most amazing time there. In this massive Ushuaia travel guide, I'm going to tell you the best things to do in Ushuaia, how to get there, fun day trips and hikes you can go on, where to stay in the city, and the best time to visit.

It's a lot of information, but as it turns out, there's a lot to do at the End of the World. Now let's dive in!

How to get to Ushuaia

Getting to Ushuaia can be quite an adventure, depending on the mode of transportation you choose.

The quickest and most straightforward option is to fly into Aeropuerto Internacional Malvinas Argentinas. There are multiple daily flights from Buenos Aires, though you can also get flights from some other major Argentine cities during high season. 

The flight from Buenos Aires to Ushuaia is 3 hours and 40 minutes.

The next option is bus travel, which makes more sense if you're already travelling in southern Patagonia (around El Calafate or El Chaltén). The bus journey does involve going through Chile (a good excuse to stop over in Torres del Paine National Park!) and it also includes a ferry crossing.

You can read our detailed guide on how to get to Ushuaia here.

Things to do in Ushuaia, Argentina

First up, let's dive into the top attractions in Ushuaia you won't want to miss during your visit!

Cruise the Beagle Channel

One of the top things to do in Ushuaia is to go on a boat cruise of the Beagle Channel and enjoy the wildlife at the bottom tip of South America!

The Beagle Channel is the strait that separates Isla Grande, the main island of Tierra del Fuego, from various smaller islands. Plus, the channel also acts as a border between Chile and Argentina. This is one of three navigable bodies of water that act as a passage from the Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific Ocean at the bottom of South America; the two others are the Straits of Magellan to the north and the open-ocean Drake Passage to the south.

There are numerous Beagle Channel tours to choose from, ranging from catamarans to sailboats, but all afford the opportunity to view seabirds, sea lions and penguins! One tour even lets you walk amongst penguins on Martillo Island, though keep in mind this one needs to be booked in advance as only a very small number of visitors are allowed on Isla Martillo each day.

You also get to cruise past the famous Les Eclaireurs Lighthouse, an iconic red and white-striped lighthouse that stands 11 metres high on a rocky outcrop some 5 nautical miles east of Ushuaia.

It is locally known as 'the Lighthouse at the End of the World', but that title officially belongs to the San Juan de Salvamento lighthouse, which was made famous by Jules Verne in the novel The Lighthouse at the End of the World, and is located on Isla de los Estados much further east.

Unfortunately, it is not possible to go inside Les Eclaireurs Lighthouse, however, a Beagle Channel tour is a great opportunity to see it up close, and the captain does linger in the area so tourists can take their photos.

Tip: Make sure you bring your passport on the boat cruise because staff will come around and offer you a stamp of the Beagle Channel. 

Pose at the Fin del Mundo sign

Every traveller in Ushuaia has to pose next to the Fin del Mundo sign, literally the 'End of the World' sign. This is kind of like a right of passage to prove you made it to the southernmost city in the world. The sign is on the waterfront right next to the tourist pier where all the Beagle Channel cruises depart from.

Tour Ushuaia by Double-Decker Bus

One fun way to experience Ushuaia is by going on a double-decker bus tour of the city. This is a great activity to do at the very start of your trip so you can get an idea of the lay of the land.

The bus tour is 1 hour and 10 minutes in length and it's an opportunity to enjoy views of the Beagle Channel, soak in the beauty of the surrounding mountain peaks, and cruise the city streets.

This is done as an audio tour where guests receive a headset and can learn about Ushuaia's history in 8 different languages.

This hour-long Ushuaia double-decker bus tour provides a good overview of the city beyond the top tourist sites.

Visit the Old Ushuaia Prison

One of Ushuaia’s main attractions is the Prison at the End of the World, also known as the Ushuaia Prison. This is because the city of Ushuaia was founded as a penal colony, with the first prisoners arriving in 1884.

The prison was in operation between 1902 and 1947 and was known for its harsh conditions, meaning it was damp, humid and cold. Not the kind of place you’d want to end up.

Today, the prison has been turned into a tourist site, and it houses multiple museums. The prison’s five wings converge in a central hall and each wing holds a different museum.

These include the Prison Museum, which focuses on the stories of the prisoners; the Maritime Museum, where you can see scale models of vessels that would have sailed the waters in this part of the world; the Antarctic Museum, which highlights the age of exploration and scientific expeditions; the Art Museum, showcasing a collection of maritime-inspired art; and the Art Gallery, where local artists can showcase and sell their artwork.

There's a lot to see here, so give yourself at least a couple of hours to visit the various wings and exhibits.

Hike Tierra del Fuego National Park

No trip to Ushuaia would be complete without visiting Tierra del Fuego National Park, the southernmost national park in Argentina.

The park is located just 11 kilometres west of Ushuaia, so it's fairly easy to get there either by shuttle or joining a guided tour.

The park is renowned for its hiking trails, which range from easy walks to more challenging treks, with the most famous being the Pampa Alta Trail and the Coastal Path.

You can also expect to see beavers in Tierra del Fuego National Park. These are not native to Argentina but they were introduced to the region in 1946 in an attempt by the Argentine government to generate a fur trade; that was an environmental disaster!

Send mail from the Southernmost Post Office

One place you cannot miss when you visit Tierra del Fuego National Park is the post office at the end of the world.

Made of corrugated metal and wood, this tiny post office sits atop a pier on the shores of the Beagle Channel, and it’s the last chance to send mail before reaching Antarctica.

The exterior is plastered with stickers from travellers who’ve reached this place from all corners of the world, and inside the walls are covered in postcards, maps, magnets and currencies from faraway lands.

Aside from sending mail, this is one of several places in Ushuaia where you can get your passport stamped, so don't forget to bring your passport.

It does cost a few dollars ($2.50 USD when we were there), but it's a full page with several stamps, and it's a special souvenir from your time visiting the city at the end of the world.

In my experience, it can take about 3 weeks for international mail to reach its final destination, so be patient if you send mail. 

Ride the Train at the End of the World

One of the best things to do in Ushuaia for train enthusiasts is to ride the Southern Fuegian Railway, also known as the Train at the End of the World!

Once upon a time, this was known as the train of prisoners. As we mentioned earlier, Ushuaia started out as a penal colony and prisoners were put to work building their own prison. This meant transporting rock and timber from the nearby forests to the town, first using oxen-pulled wagons, and eventually, this narrow-gauge railway.

Today, the train has been developed into a heritage train, and it’s considered the southernmost functioning railway in the world.

The journey begins at the Train Station at the End of the World and then crosses the Cañadón del Toro (Bull's Canyon) and the Pipo River over the Puente Quemado (Burnt Bridge).

The train then makes a stop at La Macarena Waterfall Station, where visitors can climb out to a viewpoint and see the waterfall.

The journey continues to the boundary with Tierra del Fuego National Park where you can witness peat bogs and the tree cemetery, a collection of stumps left from nearly half a century of cutting down forest to supply the town with firewood - a job that was done by the prisoners.

Lastly, the train reaches Tierra del Fuego National Park where visitors have the option of remaining in the park or completing the journey back.

This guided tour includes a ride aboard the End of the World Train and a visit to Tierra del Fuego National Park. It also includes transportation there and back. 

Reach the End of the Road in Lapataia Bay

I've included a lot of signs to pose next to in Ushuaia, and I'm about to share one more: Lapataia Bay.

So what's the significance of Lapataia Bay? Well, this is officially where the road ends. It is the southernmost point you can drive in the Western Hemisphere, and there is a sign marking the end of National Route 3, which is the last leg of the Pan-American Highway.

From this point, you'd have to drive 17,848 kilometres to reach the opposite end of the road in Alaska. I think that's worth a photo op!

Take a Helicopter tour over Ushuaia

One unforgettable way to experience Ushuaia is by taking a helicopter tour to soak in the views of the southernmost city in the world, perfectly framed by the Andes Mountains.

This activity may sound like a bit of a splurge, and it can be if you opt for a landing in the mountains followed by a champagne toast, however, you can also take a short scenic flight over the city and not break your budget.

HeliUshuaia is the local helicopter tour operator and offers three different flight options: a 7-minute flight over Ushuaia and the Beagle Channel, a 15-minute flight that goes as far as Laguna Esmeralda, or a 30-minute flight that takes you even further into the Andes Mountains with a landing and bubbly to celebrate.

Tip: Book your helicopter tour early on in your visit in case it case to be rescheduled due to weather.

Visit Galeria Tematica de Historia Fueguina

Note: This attraction recently closed, but we will update you if it re-opens in a different location.

Another unique museum we visited was the Galería Temática Historia Fueguina. This is a museum featuring dioramas and lifelike figures that showcase the history of the province of Tierra del Fuego.

The visit is done as a self-guided tour with an audio guide, so you can go at your own pace.

The tour starts out by sharing the history of the indigenous people who lived in this area, which included: the Yamanas, who were coastal hunter-gatherers and fishers, known for their canoe-building skills; the Shelknam, who were nomads, guanaco hunters, and renowned for their use of the bow and arrow; and the Haush, who are the least known of the three groups and lived in the southernmost part of the island which has a lot of peat bogs.

The tour then moves on to the early exploration and colonization of Tierra del Fuego. It also has sections focusing on the HMS Beagle, Ushuaia’s early beginnings as a penal colony, and Ernest Shackleton’s Endurance.

We found the museum to be very educational, and it’s especially worth the visit if you can take the time to listen to the audio guide.

Check out some lesser-known museums

If you get some bad weather days and are looking for some rainy day activities, consider visiting some smaller and lesser-known museums in town.

First, you have Museo del Fin del Mundo, or End of the World Museum, which is located inside the old Government House.

The museum is focused on a variety of topics, including local history and natural history, with exhibits on sailing, whaling, seabirds & more.

There's also a small botanical garden right next to the museum, which can be really nice in the summertime when the flowers are in bloom.

Sample traditional Fuegian cuisine

If you're a foodie, one of the best things to do in Ushuaia is to try Fuegian food, showcasing dishes native to Tierra del Fuego.

Given the proximity to the sea, seafood is a fundamental part of the Fuegian diet. This included fish such as sea bass, hake, and mackerel. Plus, shellfish like mussels, clams, and sea urchins. And we cannot forget King crab, which is locally known as centolla.

Patagonian lamb is another food staple of the region, given the number of estancias in the area. You'll find lamb served at numerous parilla restaurants specializing in grilled meats.

As for desserts, you'll notice lots of calafate berries on the menu. These are small berries that grow on bushes and they're used in ice creams, cakes, smoothies, you name it!

You can check out our list of where to eat in Ushuaia for some restaurant recommendations.

View the Saint Christopher shipwreck

There are quite a few landmarks you can visit while walking along the waterfront in Ushuaia, and one of the more famous vessels here is the San Cristóbal, or Saint Christopher, which sits on the shores of the Beagle Channel.

Once known as the HMS Justice, this was a Royal Navy ship classified as a rescue tug and it served at the Normandy landings during World War 2.

When the war ended, the ship was sold and renamed Saint Christopher, where it was chartered for salvage operations in Beagle Channel.

After suffering engine trouble and rudder damage, it was eventually beached and abandoned on the shores of Ushuaia.

Now Saint Christopher can be admired from shore, though no one is permitted aboard.

Pose at the Ushuaia city sign

So many signs and so many photo ops, but that's Ushuaia for you. Another spot you cannot miss is the Ushuaia city sign located on the waterfront right across from Plaza Islas Malvinas.

This is the classic city sign you'll encounter in numerous cities across Argentina. It does change up a little bit during the year, mainly during the Christmas holidays when the giant U sports a Santa Claus hat.

Typically, a line of tourists will form. You will take a photo for the person ahead of you and the next person in line will do the favour of taking your picture for you.

Hikes in Ushuaia

There are plenty of hiking opportunities in and around Ushuaia, both in Tierra del Fuego National Park and in the city outskirts. We're going to highlight some of the best hikes in Ushuaia, ranging in length and level of difficulty.

Senda Costera

The Senda Costera or Coastal Path is a hike known for its breathtaking coastal views. The trail is approximately 8 kilometres long and is considered a moderately easy hike. It typically takes around 3 to 4 hours to complete the hike, making it suitable for hikers of various skill levels.

Hikers can expect to see stunning vistas of the Beagle Channel, come across beautiful pebbly coves, and hike through Southern Fuegian forest.

This coastal trail runs from Zaratiegui Bay to Alakush, so you can get dropped off at either starting point and hike in either direction. I would recommend hiking from Zaratiegui Bay to Alakush since there's a cafe at the end where you can enjoy a hot meal at the end of the trek. That's how we did this particular hike.

The trail is flat most of the way, though you do gain some elevation as you approach Alakush.

Laguna Esmeralda

This is a popular day hike that leads to a lagoon with emerald waters surrounded by mountains. The hike is 8.7-km out-and-back but the hiking time greatly varies depending on the time of year and the ground conditions.

During the summer, this hike can be done in 2.5-3 hours, but once the trail is covered in snow and ice, the same hike could take 4-5 hours.

The trail can get quite muddy as you need to cross a fairly large swamp, followed by a steep hike with rocks, but the reward is an impressive emerald lagoon at the end.

Trekking poles and crampons are recommended if you're attempting this hike outside the summer months.

If you feel safer doing this with a guide, you can join a guided trek to Laguna Esmeralda. 

Martial Glacier

The glacier atop the Martial Mountains is named after Captain Ferdinand Martial of the Cap Horn Scientific Mission, a French expedition that arrived in Tierra del Fuego in September 1882.

This hike is 6.3 km out-and-back and is considered a moderate hike. The only thing that tends to disappoint some visitors is that you won't find an impressive glacier! Much of what you see is a moraine, the rocks and sediment carried down and deposited by a glacier that once existed. 

You can start this hike from Refugio de Montaña Glaciar Martial. Right across, you'll see La Cabaña de Té, a cute tea house where you can enjoy some sandwiches, cookies, pastries and a hot beverage either before or after your hike.

Vinciguerra Glacier and Laguna de los Témpanos

The Vinciguerra Glacier is one of the largest glaciers in Tierra del Fuego, situated in the Andes Mountains about 20 kilometres northwest of Ushuaia.

The trail to Vinciguerra Glacier is quite varied, going through dense forests, peat bogs, and stretches of rocky terrains.

It's considered a moderately challenging hike that takes anywhere between 4 to 6 hours round trip, depending on the weather conditions and the group's hiking pace.

At the base of the Vinciguerra Glacier, you'll find Laguna de los Témpanos. This is a glacial lagoon with floating icebergs that break off from the glacier above.

While the Vinciguerra Glacier can be accessed year-round, the best hiking window is in the summertime from December to March when the weather is milder and the paths are less treacherous. 

You can visit the Vinciguerra Glacier with a small group guided tour. 

Laguna del Caminante

For a more challenging hike in Ushuaia, you have Laguna del Caminante. This is a 24 km point-to-point trail through Tierra del Fuego National Park that can take anywhere between 8 to 13 hours to complete, depending on the conditions and the time of year.

Some people opt to hike Laguna del Caminante as a 2-day trek, renting a tent and sleeping bag in town and then camping next to the lagoon.

If you're not a very experienced hiker, you'll want to book a guide for this hike. It's fairly remote and you're not likely to encounter other hikers along the way.

For more ideas of hikes you can do around Ushuaia, check out this list by All Trails.

Day trips from Ushuaia

Tolhuin

One of the most popular side trips from Ushuaia is the lakeside town of Tolhuin. Located 1 hour and 10 minutes away from Ushuaia, this is a destination that can either be visited as a day trip, or if you want to linger in a quiet town, you can easily spend 2-3 days here. 

The main attraction is Lago Fagnano, a lake of glacial origin that stretches across both Argentina and Chile. When the waters are calm, this is a nice place to go kayaking. There are also lakeside trails to explore in Laguna Negra Provincial Reserve. 

Essentially, this is a place to completely disconnect, enjoy the remoteness of it all, and unwind after a few days in Ushuaia. You can get some ideas of things to do in Tolhuin here.

Estancia Harberton

Estancia Harberton is the most famous estancia in Tierra del Fuego province. It is located about 1 hour and 25 minutes east of Ushuaia, with most of the journey being on a gravel road.

The estancia dates back to 1886, when it was founded by Reverend Thomas Bridges, an English missionary who worked with the indigenous Yámana people and who was also the author of the dictionary of the Yámana language. The Argentine government granted him this land in appreciation of his services.

The estancia or ranch covers some 50,000 acres of predominantly sheep-grazing land, interspersed with patches of native forests, and it is bordered by the Beagle Channel.

Within the estancia grounds, you'll also find the Acatushún Museum, which is focused on marine mammals and birds; it’s especially famous for its collection of marine mammal skeletons.

The best way to visit Estancia Haberton is by joining a guided tour, which includes transportation to and from the ranch.

Paso Garibaldi

The Garibaldi Pass is the only paved route across the Fuegian Andes and also the highest point on Argentina’s Ruta Nacional 3. 

It's a beautiful winding journey over the mountains with a breathtaking lookout along the way, where you can spot Lago Escondido, which translates to ‘hidden lake’.

You can rent a car and drive this route, however, for an even better experience, I would recommend doing the 4x4 overland tour that goes along the lake’s edge and through the forest, eventually reaching Lago Fagnano. 

Because this is Argentina, you shouldn't be too surprised that the tour concludes with a traditional Argentine BBQ featuring choripán, bife de chorizo, salad, Malbec wine, and cheese.

If you need more ideas, check out this list of 10 Ushuaia tours you won't want to miss. 

Where to stay in Ushuaia

Ushuaia offers a range of accommodations to suit different budgets and preferences ranging from luxury to mid-range to budget-friendly options. Here are some places to consider:

Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa

For those looking for a taste of luxury, you cannot go wrong with Arakur Ushuaia Resort & Spa. This is considered the best hotel in Ushuaia and because it's perched on a mountain, it offers great views of the Beagle Channel and the city below. The indoor and outdoor infinity pool is one of the key selling points of this high-end property.

Alto Andino Hotel

Situated in downtown Ushuaia, this mid-range hotel is a great choice for travellers who want to be in the heart of it all and mainly get around on foot. They have single, double, triple and quadruple rooms as well as apartments for those who prefer a self-catered holiday. This hotel also offers a complimentary breakfast that is served in their rooftop Bar Lookout, which offers spectacular views of Ushuaia.

Hotel de Los Andes

Hotel de Los Andes is a budget-friendly option right in the centre of Ushuaia, only two blocks from the waterfront. Rooms are simple but bright, and they offer free high-speed internet in all rooms as well as common areas. Their on-site restaurant Bar D Pizzas serves up stone-baked pizzas and beer.

For more accommodation options, read our complete guide on where to stay in Ushuaia for all budgets. Keep in mind that Ushuaia is a popular tourist destination, so it's a good idea to book your accommodations in advance, especially if you're visiting during the peak summer season.

Antarctica Cruises from Ushuaia

There are two types of travellers in Ushuaia: those who are here to experience the city at the end of the world and those who have a cruise to catch because they're going all the way to Antarctica! If you're in the second category, you are one lucky traveller.

There are all sorts of cruises departing for Ushuaia, some which detour over to the Falkland Islands and South Georgia, and others that cruise the Antarctic Peninsula.

Here are 4 different Antarctica cruises to consider:

Antarctica Classic (11 days)

Antarctica Classic in Depth (13 days)

Quest for the Antarctic Circle (14 days)

Spirit of Shackleton (21 days)

You can find last-minute Antarctica cruises in Ushuaia. You'll typically see these advertised in the windows of tour agencies or on posters on the street.

The prices are low, but the issue is that you may need to be ready to get on a cruise the next day, or you may have to wait around for a couple of weeks.

If you can, it's better to book in advance and to book during a sale.

Best time to visit Ushuaia

Ushuaia is a destination that can be visited year-round, but the best time to visit depends on your personal interests and what you're hoping to do during your tip. Here's a breakdown of what each season in Ushuaia has to offer:

Summer in Ushuaia (December to February)

This is the peak tourist season in Ushuaia.

The weather is relatively mild with temperatures ranging from 41°F / 5°C to 59°F / 15°C.

Days are long with plenty of daylight for outdoor activities.

It's the best time for hiking, wildlife watching, and boat tours to nearby islands.

This is also the time of year when cruise ships depart for Antarctica (a very short window).

Fall in Ushuaia (March to May)

Fall is a quieter time to visit Ushuaia, with fewer tourists.

The weather begins to cool down and you can experience the beautiful fall foliage.

Wildlife is still active, and it's a good time for birdwatching.

Prices for accommodations and tours are lower compared to the summer months.

Winter in Ushuaia (June to August)

Winter in Ushuaia is cold and snowy.

This is the best time for winter sports enthusiasts, as you can go skiing, snowboarding, snowshoeing and snowmobiling in the nearby mountains - Cerro Castor is the it destination for winter sports. 

The city itself has a cosy atmosphere during this time, with many indoor activities and restaurants to enjoy.

Keep in mind that some attractions and tours may be limited during the winter season.

Many of the hiking trails close during the winter months.

Spring in Ushuaia (September to November):

Spring is a transitional season, with temperatures gradually warming up.

This is a good time for hiking and enjoying the changing landscapes as plants and flowers begin to bloom.

Wildlife becomes more active as well, making it a great time for nature enthusiasts.

Similar to fall, spring is less crowded than the summer months.

Ultimately, the best time to visit Ushuaia depends on your interests and the activities you want to pursue. If you want to experience milder weather and long daylight hours for outdoor adventures, consider visiting during the summer. If you prefer a quieter and more budget-friendly trip, fall and spring can be excellent choices. And if you're a winter sports enthusiast, the snowy months of June to August are ideal.

Travel tips for visiting Ushuaia

Pack for winter, no matter what time of year you're visiting. This may sound a bit extreme, but you are travelling to the city at the end of the world, and that means you can experience rain, snow, sleet and sunshine all in one day.

Plan for a few bad weather days. There will be days when the weather will be too unpleasant to spend long periods of time outside. Save your museum visits and restaurant hopping for these days.

Splurge on a few activities. There are certain tours and activities in Ushuaia that can be on the pricier side and you may be tempted to skip them, but ask yourself, when are you planning to come back to Ushuaia again? It takes quite a bit of effort to get here, so don't miss out on the things you really want to do during your visit.

Reserve popular excursions in advance. This is especially important if you're visiting Ushuaia during the summer months when the majority of tourists descend on the southernmost city. If there's a tour you really want to do, don't wait until the very last minute because it could be sold out.

Bring hiking boots and trekking poles. That is if you plan to go hiking, of course. This isn't a running shoes type of destination. Trails can get muddy and there are also lots of peat bogs, so bring adequate hiking gear. Collapsible trekking poles can be really helpful if you're planning some longer and more challenging hikes.

Give yourself at least 3 days in Ushuaia. This is the minimum amount of time you should spend in the city, as there really is so much to see and do! Also, keep in mind that the weather can affect flights, and you don't want to be cutting it close, especially if you have a cruise to catch.

____________________________



### Pages

### Posts

#### Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0: Original, Classic and Alternative Portfolio Ideas!
I have a serious confession to make: Writing isn't my cup of tea!

It's odd to admit that given the fact that I run this blog, but it's the honest truth.

And since I took a trip to Patagonia last spring, I've fallen deep down the AI rabbit hole to the point where I've fiercely neglected this site with fresh forward facing content.

Once you've broken a habit (that was challenging to build in the first place) it's especially hard to get back on the saddle as resistance mounts the more you procrastinate; it's a vicious cycle.

However, I've been meaning to write an update to the model Picture Perfect Portfolio for several months.

I'm finally parking my arse down on the computer chair, turning off social media and henpecking away until this post gets done.

My first stab at creating the Picture Perfect Portfolio was my third blog post on this site!

I started off with reviews of UPAR and GDE and then somehow mustarded up the audacity to create my unique version of what I at the time considered to be the Picture Perfect Portfolio.

The first problem was that this portfolio wasn't investable.

The idea of an equal parts equities (global min vol), bonds (long-term treasury and TIPs) and alternatives (managed futures and gold) portfolio (targeting a 180% canvas) was my desired goal given the investing knowledge I had back in April 2022.

But it was unattainable.

The capital efficient product range was in its infancy back then.

Moreover, my understanding and comprehension of various alternative strategies was quite limited as well.

I've since expanded my knowledge on how different strategies such as style premia, arbitrage, long-short + market neutral equity and diversified tail-risk hedging can help investors build a more efficient, robust and resilient portfolio where the opportunity for excellent returns and stellar risk management collide.

All of this has corresponded with the golden age of capital efficient product development.

2023, in particular, was its coming out party!

We now we have the capacity to build the expanded canvas portfolios of our dreams.

And I'm excited to share some different potential combinations.

That brings me to the second problem with the original Picture Perfect Portfolio.

It was designed specifically for me as an accumulator and self-employed individual.

It reflects all of my personal biases, current life situation, retirement trajectory, dreams and aspirations that are unique to my life.

However, there is no such thing as the objective Picture Perfect Portfolio!

There is only the Picture Perfect Portfolio that is right for you based on your unique life circumstances, risk tolerance, unique personality quirks and overall investing knowledge.

What works for you may not work for me. And vice versa.

You may have a tremendous appetite for volatility, whereas I don't.

It's crucial to acknowledge that.

And with this in mind, I've decided to be audacious, once again, and take a stab at creating 10 different model portfolios that involve expanding the canvas.

These are the official Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 version.

They are benchmarked to various classic and alternative portfolios.

Some of these are my own original ideas whereas others are merely enhanced classic portfolios.

We'll also be covering how to mimic some fascinating alternative portfolios (with some compromises) and we'll even have one that is not handcuffed to a benchmark!

If that sounds exciting let's begin the journey by looking at the big picture.

The Big Picture For Investors

As investors we're faced with the daunting task of seeing the big picture.

Unlike in other endeavours we pursue in life, we're presented with the challenges of potential lost decades for mainstream investing strategies (hello, US large cap MCW equities in the 2000s) and alternative ones too (the pain game for managed futures in the 2010s).

You're expected to hold on tight.

Imagine having to be THAT PATIENT in other areas of your life?

Hey, your workout program might not give you ANY desirable results for an entire decade!

But you had better stick with it long-term if you want to see the intended long-term results.

WTF.

Imagine that?

It truly sounds hilarious.

Who would be willing to endure such stagnation?

Probably, no one.

Yet, as investors we're faced with that exact possibility and specific scenario if we put all of our eggs in one basket.

Lost decades.

Challenging underwater periods that last months and years.

One of our only lifelines against eventually running up against this friction is to diversify our assets across a diverse set of unique risk sources.

As the popular saying goes (I actually have no idea who first said it), the only free lunch in investing is diversification.

And so I've built my entire philosophy of investing around this framework.

1-2-3 Approach To Portfolio Construction

Given the unique challenges investors face today (and in the past) I've come up with a 1-2-3 approach to portfolio construction in this specific order:

Capital Efficiency

Maximum Diversification

Optimization (When Possible)

To better explain this let me give you a few specific examples.

I'd prefer a fund like AVGV over SPY given that it is globally diversified and tilts towards a research supported optimization strategy (value factor) versus the market cap weighted and home country biased US equity only strategy.

Using our 1-2-3 step process of comparing funds we're able to score points on number 2 (maximum diversification by this strategy being global vs US-only) and number 3 (optimization by tilting towards a research supported factor strategy) where we have an obvious winner in AVGV ETF.

Here we're comparing apples to apples.

However, things become a bit more complicated when we compare this fund with something like GDE ETF.

This is an apples to oranges scenario.

Its exposure offers investors 90% equities plus 90% gold futures.

Although AVGV is global (diversification benefit) and optimized (value) it only provides investors exposure to one strategy (equities) and furthermore it is not capital efficient.

Thus, by the framework that I use for portfolio construction I have a preference for GDE even though it only offers US equity exposure because it brings the uncorrelated alternative of gold into the equation of my portfolio in a capital efficient manner.

Hence, it scores points on capital efficiency and maximum diversification (two uncorrelated strategies) which I rank ahead of optimization (value tilt).

Now if a fund were created with AVGV at 90% and gold futures at 90%, I'm going to say sayonara to GDE.

The goal here is to expand our canvas to create as much space as possible for diversification.

We're able to fulfill all of our different portfolio mandates by using this formula.

We can construct defensive portfolios, offensive portfolios, tactical portfolios and everything in between by adhering to this process.

It's the ultimate form of flexibility to have access to a bigger canvas to paint our unique portfolio masterpiece.

I encourage you to stress test this formula (when it comes to portfolio construction) and if it doesn't work for you, consider applying a system that does.

Having a clear set of priorities and a decision-tree for making portfolio decisions is a blessing IMO as opposed to being a curse.

It helps you evaluate new funds and make decisions such as whether or not to potentially integrate them into your portfolio, axe/shrink others or hold off and evaluate further.

Asset Classes/Strategies: Big Picture

I briefly touched upon the importance of being able to see the big picture as an investor.

Well, what exactly do I mean by that?

It's the ability to view all of the potential strategies you may (or may not) want to add to your portfolio and to view them as a whole (portfolio level) as opposed to individual line items (individual parts of the portfolio).

If you're not able to do this, the chances of you sticking with these strategies, when they inevitably struggle, is slim at best.

This especially holds true for alternatives.

We'll forget a lost decade for US equities with enough distance in the rearview mirror but somehow our leash for alternatives tends to be much shorter.

For instance, feast your eyes upon the results of Long-Vol in 2008.

This was the most impressive strategy during the most challenging year for global financial markets in the past 50 years.

Did it ever pay-off to have committed some resources to this strategy in your portfolio back then!

But then look at how it bleeds out in the 2010s.

This is the nature of such a strategy.

Are you willing to hold on and rebalance diligently?

How are you doing to handle tracking error when your alternative sleeve is a drag versus a benefit on any given year?

Minimum volatility equities is another one worth careful examination.

Its defensive nature is not exciting with lower highs and lower lows.

It's almost like someone accidentally sat on your sandwich.

It compresses things.

But without fail it's been more defensive (relatively outperforming SPY) during years such as 2000, 2001, 2002, 2008, 2018 and 2022.

What you may also notice is that many alternative strategies thrived during the tumultuous 2000s and struggled in the 2010s.

It's only by zooming out that you can examine things with clarity.

Who knows what the future holds but the ability to step back and look at things from a distance is an incredible gift you can give yourself as an investor.

About the Author & Disclosure

Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.

Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Picture Perfect Portfolio(s) 2.0 Version

Okay, enough rambling already, let's get to those portfolios!

So what we're going to do is explore 10 different capital efficient portfolios.

They range from being as defensive as possible (The Fortress) to bringing out the big guns trying to outperform equities with less risk (SPY Hunter).

Here's the complete list of them along with their corresponding benchmarks (note: one doesn't have one!).

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 

Picture Perfect Portfolio Originals 

The Fortress Portfolio (Benchmark: 40/60)

SPY Hunter (Benchmark: S&P 500)

Max D Triple P (Benchmark: 60/40)

The Honey Badger (Benchmark: VT)

The Contrarian (Benchmark: None!)

Canucklehead (Benchmark: 60/40 for Canadians)

These are the Picture Perfect Portfolio(s) originals.

If they have one thing in common it is this:

An attempt by an amateur investor to create serious portfolios with absolutely ridiculous names. 

Enhanced Classic Portfolios 

These are the enhanced classic portfolios.

I attempt, as best as possible, to keep all of their parts together (their original configurations) whilst expanding upon them with capital efficiency and increased diversification strategies.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio (Benchmark: Classic Ray Dalio Portfolio)

Enhanced Harry Browne Portfolio (Benchmark: Classic Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio)

My goal is to write detailed posts for all of the original portfolios listed above.

This is the abbreviated version.

Otherwise, we'd likely hit some ridiculous word count over 10,000.

And I do value your time, so I'll try to keep things as concise as possible.

The Fortress Portfolio

Defending and preserving wealth requires an advanced skillset as an investor.

Instead of obsessing over enhanced offensive equity optimization strategies, the focus is more on defensive assets and layering uncorrelated bets into what is overall a complex system that you've developed.

The ability to defend is what this portfolio is all about.

Hence, I've come up with the quirky title of it being "The Fortress Portfolio".

Close your eyes and imagine a medieval fortress that looks slightly haunted and that features an enormous misty moat.

It looks impenetrable and intimidating from a distance but as you get closer you notice it has all kinds of layers of defense that you didn't initially spot.

Archers hidden behind pillars.

Crocodiles lurking in the waters.

You've traveled back in time and you've got nothing but a small dagger in your hand.

Good luck getting in there.

There are a plethora of defensive strategies that are designed to keep you out.

If you get past one, you have to immediately contend with another.

That's what's going on here.

Do you even bother trying?

The Fortress Portfolio Funds

20% USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor ETN40% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF10% BTAL - AGF U.S. Market Neutral Anti-Beta Fund ETF10% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF (MF conversion form AVOLX)10% FLSP - Franklin Systematic Style Premia ETF10% GLD - SPDR Gold Shares

The Fortress Portfolio Exposures

40% US Min Vol Equities40% Aggregate US Bonds40% Managed Futures Trend10% Market Neutral Anti-Beta10% OTM Put10% Style Premia10% Gold

The portfolio is basically an equal slice version of the following:

40% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Diversified Alternative Other

Canvas: 160%

Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio

What we're trying to accomplish here is to keep our equity sleeve (typically the most volatile part of the portfolio) tamed by reducing its exposure to 40% whilst choosing a defensive equity optimization strategy (min vol).

We'll handcuff this to an equal slice of bonds and managed futures.

Bonds have typically provided a ballast during market downturns (2022 aside) and managed futures is one of the most reliable defensive strategies during times of turmoil.

Moreover, we've got diversified tail-risk hedging strategies (BTAL and CAOS) providing anti-beta market neutral and OTM Put exposure.

Finally, we've got some space committed for the OG uncorrelated alternative (Gold) which admittedly does its own thing and FLSP (style premia) which offers absolute return potential.

The end result is seven distinct strategies aimed at reducing volatility.

Let's throw this into a blender and see how it backtests.

You'll notice we've had to utilize funds such as PQTIX and AVOLX to get a taste of how managed futures and style premia performed since FLSP and RSBT are newer. But other funds like AVOLX (now CAOS) and BTAL and GLD can be stretched back to 2014.

CAGR: 7.94% vs 5.24%RISK: 7.12% vs 7.27%Worst Year: -1.80% vs -15.08%Max DD: -7.26% vs -18.20%Sharpe: 0.98 vs 0.61Sortino: 1.78 vs 0.90Correlation: 0.42 vs 0.93

Backtests ought to be taken with a grain of salt but if we're to examine the performance of these results it's a convincing win across the board.

The Fortress Portfolio has provided better returns, better risk adjusted rates of returns and enhanced volatility management over the 40/60 portfolio.

Its Sortino triumph may be the most telling of all.

Here is the drawdown simulation.

Here we're able to notice that the Fortress Portfolio was better able to handle the curveballs thrown during the initial stages of the pandemic (March 2020) and the massacre of 2022.

The goal of this portfolio is to provide decent returns whilst focusing on stellar defense; outperformance is merely a bonus (when it happens).

Here is the portfolio with live funds:

We're limited to the most abbreviated of backtests unfortunately!

Some of these awesome funds are hot off of the press including RSBT and CAOS (mutual fund conversion).

Although returns have been less than extraordinary it has flashed its risk management potential.

With a Stdev of 5.54% and Max Drawdown of -2.94% it provided fortress like defense without any offensive jam to date.

It'll be interesting to check back in on this portfolio in a year or two to see how it is performing.

SPY Hunter (Tactical) Portfolio

Our task is clear: Take Out SPY ETF (better known as the S&P 500)

We've been given a mandate of outperforming SPY on the upside whilst also potentially providing superior downside coverage.

Does that sound like a tall order?

Probably.

That's not going to stop us from trying.

We're all in on hunting down SPY.

Hence, the cheesy name of this portfolio: SPY HUNTER

You can think of this strategy as the bounty hunter equivalent of tracking down the most popular investing strategy of them all: MCW US Large Cap Equities.

Our plan of attack is to utilize capital efficient funds, diversify as much as possible, get a little tactical and also tail-hedge risk as the cherry on top.

Hence, we've got a nifty offensive mode and defensive mode configuration.

SPY Hunter Funds

40% RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF20% SPQ - SPQ Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF20% HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced US Equity Strategy ETF10% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund5% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF5% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund

SPY Hunter Portfolio Exposures

Offensive Mode

109% US Equities40% Managed Futures10% Style Premia9% Gold5% Market Neutral Anti-Beta5% OTM Put

Defensive Mode

69% US Equities40% Managed Futures20% Cash10% Style Premia9% Gold5% Market Neutral Anti-Beta5% OTM Put

This portfolio hinges on the split personality of HCMT ETF which offers investors an all in or nothing approach (200% US equities or 100% Cash based on trend).

When in offensive mode we've stretched our equities beyond the 100% threshold (109% to be precise) and added a diverse range of diversifiers.

In defensive mode SPY Hunter retreats to the safety of 69% equities and has defensive assets such as managed futures and style premia (with absolute return potential), cash and two different tail-risk strategies.

Hence, we're going all in on attempting to outperform on both sides of the equation: offensive AND defensive

Canvas: 177% Offensive or 157% Defensive

Benchmark: SPY ETF (S&P 500)

You know what time it is!

Bring on the backtest...

Creating an offensive and defensive mode backtest wasn't the easiest of challenges!

What you'll notice is PQTIX representing the managed futures of RSST, AQR style premia covering SPQ (with its multi-strategy QIS approach) and SSO representing 2X HCMT.

In order to keep CASHX in the defensive portfolio I had to use BIL to simulate borrowing costs.

I'm not sure if this is the best way to do things. If you have suggestions for an improvement I'm all ears!

CAGR: 14.00% vs 10.99% vs 10.68%RISK:  15.32% vs 9.91 vs 15.23%Worst Year: -13.41% vs -5.04% vs -18.17%Max DD: -17.15% vs -8.96% vs -23.98%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 1.01 vs 0.68Sortino: 1.45 vs 1.79 vs 1.05Correlation: 0.94 vs 0.87 vs 1.00

I have to admit the results here totally melted my brain.

I DID NOT think that in defensive mode this strategy could potentially outperform SPY on its own.

And it did.

Wow!

Basically, this relieves pressure on HCMT fund to tactically tune itself  in a manner that is the winning difference.

It's more like the whipping cream and cherries on top of the cake.

It's the victory lap.

In offensive mode we can probably expect similar volatility to SPY with significant outperformance potential.

In defensive mode, we're looking more at 60/40 levels of volatility with potentially better defense.

And here are the correlations between all of the strategies.

I'd love to test this with live funds but SPQ ETF is super wet behind the ears.

I'll circle back later to do that when it makes more sense.

Max D Triple P

Next up we've got Max D Triple P!

I wish there was some clever story behind this portfolio but there simply isn't.

It's just the Maximum Diversification Picture Perfect Portfolio (Max D Triple P) which attempts to offer investors the typical exposure of a 60/40 portfolio with a dessert style sampler size of alternatives added to its back vis-a-vis pack-mule style.

Max D Triple P Funds

20% RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% SPQ - Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF10% RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF10% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund4% ARB - AltShares Merger Arbitrage ETF4% EQLS - Simplify Market Neutral Equity Long Short ETF4% SVOL - Simplify Volatility Premium ETF4% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF4% FBTC - Fidelity Advantage Bitcoin ETF

Max D Triple P Portfolio Exposures

59% Equities40% Bonds30% Managed Futures10% Multi-Strategy QIS9% Gold4% Arbitrage4% Market Neutral Equities4% Short Vol4% OTM Put4% Bitcoin

I kind of like that this portfolio doesn't quite hit the 60/40 targeted configurations.

Sticklers may be pulling their hair out over the 59% equities (versus the 60% targeted allocation) but from my point of view that's just freakin' hilarious.

Also, feel free to swap out Bitcoin for something else (FLSP / BTAL / etc).

I know that is a deal breaker for some.

The idea is to just dip our toes in the cryptocurrency waters without any shitcoin residue as opposed to taking the polar plunge.

I like that we're not relying on any one particular alternative strategy to do all of the heavy lifting.

This is a 10 fund / 10 strategy portfolio!

It's the most complicated of them all but offers a plethora of unique strategies.

Canvas: 168%

Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio

I'm going to refrain from doing a simulated backtest with this portfolio because we're up to nearly 3500 words at this point!

I'll circle back with a live fund backtest sometime next year.

The Honey Badger

The Honey Badger is pound for pound one of the toughest customers on this planet.

Have you seen what it is capable of doing?

It's our spirit animal attempt to tackle the biggest shortcoming of an all-equity portfolio.

Those jaw-dropping drawdowns!

Instead of being left to its own devices with the potential to be blindsided by a -50% 2008 tackle it attempts to better manage risk and volatility without compromising returns.

Unlike other portfolios we're not going to cheat by adding uncorrelated asset classes and strategies.

Here we've got to do things with equity only strategies: long, long-short, market-neural and tactical approaches.

The Honey Badger Funds

30% ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF30% QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced US Equity Strategy ETF10% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund10% VMNIX - Vanguard Market Neutral Fund

Here we're choosing pound for pound (er...I mean return per unit of risk) two of the top equity strategies.

Min Vol and L/S equity.

Between the two of them we're diversifying and improving our risk adjusted rates of returns.

Let's compare the backtest results to our benchmark VT.

We've more than achieved our goals right here!

We've shaved down volatility by nearly 500 bps and improved our Sortino Ratio by 50 bps!

Our goal with this portfolio isn't outperformance; it's better risked adjusted performance.

Why not just be over and done with it?

Because I still think we can slightly improve returns, risk management and the absolute return potential of this portfolio.

In order to do this, we're bringing back our tactical friend HCMT into the mix.

We're not using it to boost our offensive prowess but instead to buy ourselves more defensive diversification by adding absolute return M/N style funds.

Let's test that out.

We're using SSO ETF to simulate the results of HCMT when its in offensive mode and CASHX for when it reverts to defensive mode.

CAGR: 10.13% vs 6.13% vs 7.99%RISK: 10.25% vs 5.61% vs 14.94%Worst Year: -6.67% vs -5.72% vs -18.01%Max DD: -17.16% vs -9.04% vs -25.52%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 0.86 vs 0.50Sortino: 1.34 vs 1.39 vs 0.75Correlations: 0.87 vs 0.55 vs 0.97

That's more like it! We've boosted risk adjusted rates of returns with this upgrade.

I'm quite pleased with the results.

This portfolio is doing what it is supposed to (vol management: 10.25% to 5.61%) whilst offering better risk adjusted rates of returns (Sortino: 1.34 to 1.39).

Now let's see how it handles drawdowns.

The Honey Badger is playing some stingy defense!

Especially in defensive mode.

We'll take it.

Now let's explore correlations between funds to see the magic of diversification.

Things work so well with this portfolio because of the correlations of these funds.

It's why I keep harping on about diversification.

The Contrarian

Have you ever imagined blowing your benchmark to smithereens and pursuing portfolio construction without a roadmap?

I sure have!

And this is my attempt to shake the shackles and break free from it all.

Libre!

Instead of being hyper-fixated on long-only stocks and bonds we'll do something completely different.

Our primary strategy will feature a fund that offers managed futures as its core strategy.

Our secondary strategy will be a long-short equity fund.

Our third and fourth strategies will include a diverse mix of alternatives from two of the best in the game!

AQR and Stone Ridge.

This, my friends, is the Contrarian Portfolio.

Let's go!

The Contrarian

40% BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund20% QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund20% SRDAX - Stone Ridge Diversified Alternatives Fund

Here we're making the most of capital efficiency to bring you managed futures, long-short equity, long-only equity and two different 6-1 alternative strategies.

It's as diverse of a portfolio as you can put together with only four funds.

And it has the most impressive backtest of them all.

Here is how it has performed as far as we can roll back the clock.

I know I said this portfolio has no benchmarks...but does that mean we can't delight in its massacre over the 60/40?

Do I think we're in store for 14.20% CAGR and a 3.61 Sortino moving forward?

No, definitely not.

But what this portfolio has shown is that it can thrive during periods of market turmoil and stress.

It's certainly ruffled its contrarian feathers.

I'm anticipating excellent risk adjusted rates of returns on a long-term basis with all of the diversification we've got under one hood.

I'm personally looking forward to seeing its results in the future.

The Canucklehead

Did you know Canuck is slang for Canadian?

And well who could resist adding 'head' to the equation to compete with the Bogleheads.

Hence, the Canucklehead.

This one is for us Canadians.

We have access to US listed ETFs (not mutual funds) but we've got some great funds of our own north of the border!

Let's show them off.

The Canucklehead

40% AOFT - Auspice One Fund Trust15% HRAA.TO - Horizons ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation ETF15% ONEC.TO - Accelerate OneChoice Alternative Portfolio ETF15% PFAA.TO - Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund15% VEMA - Viewpoint Enhanced Global Multi-Asset Trust

You could describe these five funds as super diverse multi-asset strategy funds.

The Auspice One Fund Trust is the centrepiece here given it provides investors capital efficient exposure to equities, bonds and gold with an additional 100% layer of CTA on top.

HRAA is a risk parity fund with a capital efficient diverse ensemble of bespoke multi-strategy layers added to the mix.

ONEC is a masterclass in diversification between strategies such as long-short equities and arbitrage just to name a few.

PFAA is a fortress for managing volatility with its arbitrage, special situations and market neutral approach.

Viewpoint Enhanced Multi-Asset levers multi-assets to equity level volatility.

In tandem we've got exposure to equities, bonds, managed futures, gold, commodities, style premia, long-short equity, market neutral equity and more!

I'm not able to backtest this on portfolio visualizer (they don't take Canadian mutual funds) but you can check out the performance of these funds on Manulife mutual fund checker.

So we'll leave things here.

We're now done with the Picture Perfect Portfolio Originals.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio

Are you a fan of the Ray Dalio portfolio?

It's one of the most defensive classic configurations.

40% Long-Term Treasury30% Equities15% Int-Treasury7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities

But that doesn't mean it can't be improved.

Here's how you can potentially do just that.

Enhanced Ray Dalio Portfolio Funds

15% USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor TR ETN55% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF7.5% COM - Direxion Auspice Broad Commodity Strategy ETF7.5% GLD - SPDR Gold Shares ETF5% QIS - Simplify Multi-QIS Alternative ETF5% CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF5% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund

Exposures:

30% Min-Vol Equities55% Bonds55% Managed Futures Trend7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities (long-flat)5% Multi-Strategy QIS5% OTM Put5% M/N Equity

Here we've fulfilled the Ray Dalio portfolio mandate (equities, bonds, commodities, gold) and made room for managed futures, multi-strategy QIS, OTM Put and M/N Anti-Beta.

I'd argue we've upgraded our equity sleeve (defensive equities) and long-flat commodities (less volatile than long-only) but I'll let you be the judge of that.

We're not able to get the exact treasury configuration but with aggregate bonds I think it's a decent substitute.

Let's try to backtest this:

Here is the performance summary results:

CAGR: 7.80% vs 4.47%RISK: 7.37% vs 8.67%Worst Year: -2.38% vs -18.39%Max Drawdown: -6.40% vs -20.58%Sharpe: 0.87 vs 0.40Sortino: 1.45 vs 0.58

I'd love to be able to roll the clock back further but COM ETF trips us up so we'll start in 2017.

The portfolios track each other almost perfectly until 2022.

The challenging results of 2022 is what can happen when your portfolio is composed of long-only assets.

Enhanced Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio

A lot of folks are impressed by the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio with high degrees of praise for its simplicity, balance and ego-free diversification.

Myself included.

Its equal 25% slices ensure nothing in the portfolio is causing too much damage at any given moment in time.

It's also one of the most defensive (if not the most) classic portfolios.

25% Equities25% Bonds25% Gold25% Cash

Boom!

There it is.

Easy to understand and even easy to assemble.

Let's try to enhance it!

Enhanced Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio Funds

52.5% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund47.5% RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF

Exposures:

47.25% Equities47.25% Gold47.50% Bonds47.50% Managed Futures Trend

This is the only two fund portfolio in our entire series.

But don't be confused by its easy to assemble nature because it provides powerful diversification between four distinct strategies.

How we've modified it is by punting out cash for managed futures.

Over a long enough time horizon managed futures should deliver higher returns and provide better defense than cash.

At least, that's historically been the case.

Let's test it out.

And here is the performance summary:

CAGR: 10.10% vs 5.19%RISK: 11.33% vs 7.30%Worst Year: -11.23% vs -12.53%Max Drawdown: -14.06% vs -15.92%Sharpe: 0.79 vs 0.55Sortino: 1.46 vs 0.91

By significantly boosting our capital efficiency and swapping out cash for managed futures we pretty much crush the classic configuration from a returns/risk standpoint.

It's a massive CAGR win and our worst year and maximum drawdown improves too.

Managed futures is the secret weapon here providing crisis alpha on demand.

FAQ: Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 — Original, Classic & Alternative Portfolio Ideas

1) What do you mean by “expanded canvas” or “capital-efficient” portfolios?“Expanded canvas” means using funds that provide more than 100% notional exposure (e.g., 60% stocks + 60% bonds in one fund) or stack an uncorrelated strategy (like managed futures) on top of core assets. The goal is to pack more diversified return streams into the same dollar, not to take wild directional bets.

2) Why prioritize diversification and capital efficiency before “optimization”?In this framework, the order is: (1) capital efficiency, (2) maximum diversification, (3) optimization (factors/timing). Uncorrelated return streams reduce total portfolio volatility and drawdowns; only then do factor tilts (e.g., value/min-vol) and tactical overlays compound the benefits.

3) How should I read the backtests and tables in this article?They are hypothetical and limited by available live fund history; they illustrate how sleeves might have behaved together. Treat them as educational scenario analysis—useful for understanding diversification mechanics, not as forecasts or guarantees.

4) Who is “The Fortress” portfolio for?Investors who prioritize defense and smoother equity rides, want multi-layered downside management (bonds, managed futures, tail risk, anti-beta, gold, style premia), and are comfortable with a 160% canvas targeting lower drawdowns than a vanilla 40/60.

5) What’s the idea behind “SPY Hunter (Tactical)”—and why two modes?It seeks to outperform SPY with similar or lower risk by stacking equities with diversifiers (managed futures, style premia, anti-beta, tail risk) and letting a tactical sleeve toggle between offense (levered equity) and defense (cash) based on trend. The two modes reflect that built-in regime shift.

6) Why build “Max D Triple P” if it’s close to 60/40 anyway?It’s a 60/40-ish core with a sampler of alternatives (managed futures, QIS, long-short, arbitrage, short-vol, tail-risk, a small Bitcoin sleeve). The punchline: breadth beats precision—one more uncorrelated sleeve can matter more than hitting 60.00% on the nose.

7) What problem does “The Honey Badger” solve without leaving equities?It targets better risk-adjusted returns using equity-only tools: min-vol, long–short, market-neutral, and a tactical equity sleeve. That equity-stacked diversification can shave drawdowns while keeping equity-like return potential.

8) Why create “The Contrarian” with no classic benchmark?It intentionally ignores the long-only 60/40 centerline, emphasizing managed futures + long–short + diversified alternatives. It’s for investors who value tracking-error tolerance and want resilience across regimes more than index hugging.

9) What’s special about “The Canucklehead” for Canadians?It showcases Canadian-listed, multi-strategy funds (plus US-listed ETFs where allowed) to deliver stacked exposures—equities, bonds, CTAs, gold/commodities, long–short, market-neutral—within Canadian constraints and account types.

10) How are the “Enhanced Ray Dalio” and “Enhanced Harry Browne” different from the classics?They keep the spirit (stocks/bonds/commodities/gold or PP’s four-slice balance) but swap in capital-efficient sleeves and managed futures instead of cash where sensible. Result: more defense in bad regimes and potentially better long-run efficiency.

11) How do I implement these if a specific fund/ticker isn’t available?Think in exposures, not tickers. Map each sleeve (e.g., min-vol equity, managed futures trend, market-neutral anti-beta, gold, QIS/multi-strategy) to closest substitutes you can access, keeping correlation diversity the primary design rule.

12) How often should I rebalance and revisit the design?Set a calendar cadence (e.g., quarterly/semiannual) or bands (e.g., ±20% of target sleeve weights) to keep risk in line. Revisit annually: if your goals, constraints, or risk tolerance change—or new capital-efficient funds launch—adjust the canvas, not the discipline.

Final Thoughts: Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 and 3.0?

That's a wrap folks!

We've hit our mandate of 10 different portfolios and managed to annoy you with 5,161 words.

This is the longest blog post I've ever written by a country mile.

Honestly, I needed that amount of space to unpack things.

Truth be told, I could have easily rambled on longer.

Hopefully, some (or one) of these portfolios resonates with you given your current life circumstances.

All of these are just portfolio ideas rather than rigid cookie-cutter recipes.

Adjust, configure and modify to your preferences.

In fact, if there is one universal truth, it is that you probably should never copy another portfolio.

You should create one that is best for you and put your own personal stamp of approval on it.

That's how I invest.

My portfolio is a bit like "the Contrarian" and a bit like the "Max D Triple P" but its an odd ensemble of Canadian listed ETFs and mutual funds and some US ones too.

As I get older I may tilt things more along the lines of "The Fortress" when my accumulation days are in the rearview mirror.

I guess my point is this.

What works now, may not work in the future.

And I'm okay with that.

And hopefully you are too.

Don't feel backed into a corner.

You've got the ultimate flexibility as an asset allocator given the diverse range of possibilities that exist right now.

And things are likely to only get better.

So hopefully I'll be writing a Picture Perfect Portfolios 3.0 update someday.

If my knowledge as an investor improves and the product selection continues to grow by leaps and bounds, I'll be back again in another year or two to share with you what I'm excited about.

Until then my wish for you is to live well, invest confidently and grab life by the horns!

#### 10 Things Investors Need To Know About Managed Futures Investing Strategies
No other investing strategy has enjoyed a greater moment in the sun quite like Managed Futures in 2022.
Traditional long-only asset classes have struggled mightily in a year where stocks, bonds and gold have all been down at the same time.
Thus, portfolios committed to static only allocations to conservative asset classes have felt the full brunt of the scorched earth economic regime of high inflation combined with aggressive interest rate hikes.
As investors we’ve been spoiled with over a decade of growth and deflationary economic environments.
Hence, the need for adaptive portfolio solutions hasn’t been a high priority for most investors.
That’s all changed this year.
Long-Only Traditional Asset Classes Have Struggled Mightily In 2022
During previous bear markets such as the Great Financial Crisis of 2008 and the early 2000s Dot Com Bubble traditional asset classes such as bonds and gold saved the day for investors savvy enough to diversify their portfolio beyond merely equities.
Investors inspired by the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio or Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio likely sailed through that challenging decade without missing a beat whereas all equity and 60/40 enthusiasts struggled mightily.
However, 2022 has been a historically rough patch for even the most diversified long-only portfolios that feature an alternative sleeve, fixed income and reduced equity exposure.
Therefore, it has been a coming out party for Managed Futures investing strategies due to the fact that it’s one of the only games in town that has conspired to help reduce the overall carnage.
In fact, Managed Futures have shined brightly.
Managed Futures = Saved The Day?
A fund such as KMLM ETF has returned an impressive 33.96% YTD.
DBMF ETF has fortified portfolios with 27.34% in 2022.
More recently minted CTA ETF has posted 20.35% since inception.
Yet, despite the impressive results few investing strategies are more misunderstood than Managed Futures.
Some investors believe that Managed Futures only perform well during tumultuous market conditions that require “crisis alpha”.
Others fail to understand that “trend following” is not the only Managed Futures game in town.
What we’ll attempt to unpack in this article is 10 specific things investors need to know about Managed Futures investing strategies in order to make more informed decisions.
Without further ado let’s hop right in.

Managed Futures Investment Strategy: 10 Things Investors Need To Know About Managed Futures!

Uncorrelated with Long-Only Equities and Bonds
Without a shadow of a doubt the most important thing investors need to know about managed futures investment strategies is that they've historically been uncorrelated with BOTH equity and fixed income allocations.
AQR's seminal must-read "A Century Of Evidence Of Trend Following Investing" back-tested the hypothetical performance of time series momentum from January 1880 until December 2013.
The results are as follows:

Trend-Following Correlation to U.S. Equity Market: 0.00 Trend-Following Correlation to US 10-year Bond Returns: -0.04
We can further confirm more recent correlation levels (this paper was published in 2013) with ETF and mutual fund managed futures products that have been in existence for close to a decade.

Since January 2014 until October 2022 these are the stock market correlation results versus the three different funds:
WisdomTree Managed Futures Strategy ETF Stock Market Correlation: 0.13First Trust Managed Futures Strategy ETF Stock Market Correlation: 0.02AQR Managed Futures Strategy HV l Stock Market Correlation: -0.26
What does all of this mean for investors?
The ability to add an "uncorrelated" asset class and/or strategy to your portfolio from a diversification benefit standpoint is huge.
We'll unpack this in more detail later on in the article but for the time being the capacity for managed futures investing strategies to form the alternative "third leg" of your portfolio warrants serious consideration.

Historically Consistent Crisis Alpha
Having a return stream that doesn't serpentine in unison alongside the likes of stocks and bonds is indeed intriguing.
However, the more important question is does managed futures perform well (aka providing "crisis alpha") when you need it the most?
In a word - YES!
Historically speaking trend-following managed futures investment strategies have come to the rescue consistently with ample force when shit has hit the fan across markets.
We'll once again consult the brilliant white paper from AQR to examine the 10 worst drawdowns for a 60/40 portfolio to examine if/when "trend-following strategies" tossed a life-vest.
A Century of Evidence on Trend-Following Investing

80% of the time trend-following MF strategies provided "above water" returns when drawdowns were beating the tar out of the 60/40 portfolio.
100% of the time "trend-following" strategies provided "relative outperformance" versus the 60/40 portfolio.
For instance, during the 1987 Crash and 1937 Recession "trend-following" wasn't above water but it wasn't blowing up either.
Moreover, the strategy hypothetically thrived during periods such as the 20s/30s Great Depression, 70s Stagflation, and Oil Crisis and early 2000s Dot Com Bubble and Great Financial Crisis.
How about in 2022 when both equities and bonds are being eaten alive like Jabba the Hut wolfing down frogs?

To find out let's compare KMLM ETF and DBMF ETF with SPY ETF.

To say certain managed futures strategies such as the ones deployed by DBMF ETF and KMLM ETF have delivered "crisis alpha" in 2022 is the understatement of the year.
Relative to the S&P 500, which has been down -17.75% YTD, DBMF ETF has boasted 32.84% returns whereas KMLM ETF has triumphed supreme rocking 42.72%.
If we look at market correlations we find both MF ETFs negatively correlated to markets at -0.58 and -0.44.
It's safe to say that MF investing strategies are indeed a historically reliable ally when markets are hopping on the shish-kebab.

Managed Futures Struggle Just Like Any Other Investing Strategy
Managed Futures strategies struggle mightily at times just like any other asset class.
As investors, we keep an industry-wide double standard where we're keen to forgive the S&P 500 and QQQ for a lost 2000s but we'll bring out the pitchforks and torches when Managed Futures strategies have a challenging 2010s often pronouncing it "dead".
If you're to think of MF as a line-item in your portfolio you're going to be disappointed time and again when the strategy inevitably experiences tracking error versus equities.
However, if you take the long-term approach of viewing Managed Futures as an uncorrelated "alternative sleeve" diversification juggernaut you'll likely be thrilled with the results if you can stay the course for decade upon decades.
Eric Crittenden, over at Standpoint Funds, made an excellent video highlighting the "line item" versus "combined asset classes" argument many investors struggle with.

Potential To Perform Well During Good Economic Times Too
One of the biggest misconceptions about Managed Futures is that they ONLY perform well when markets are down.
Although it is TRUE that that it is often a "strength" of trend-following strategies to provide reliable "crisis alpha" when it is needed the most it is FALSE that the strategy will be a drag on portfolio returns during other economic regimes.
In fact, Managed Futures have positive expected returns long-term and have historically provided "equity-like" returns with only half of the volatility when you consider results net of fees.

The full sample period of hypothetical trend following managed futures returns from January 1880 until December 2013 is 11.2% net of fees.
Something that should immediately "excite investors" is that the 2/20 fee structure is quickly becoming a thing of the past with more cost conscious products hitting the market in recent years.
With annual realized volatility of 9.7% risk management is another feather in its cap.
Getting back on track by considering the 90s as a classic example of trend following AND equities providing rip roaring returns at the same time.
We can further confirm this by checking out the returns of KFA MLM Index Year-Year Returns.

Here you'll notice the index KMLM ETF follows has tracked its performance dating back to 1988.
Notice the robust double digit positive returns from 1990 until 1999 for seven years (90, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98).

Above you'll notice US Equity Large Cap returns for the 1990s.
The takeaway message for investors is that it isn't always Equities OR Trend-Following performing well while the other struggles.
It can be Equities AND Trend-Following Managed Futures driving phenomenal returns at the SAME time too.

Trend-Following Is the Predominant Managed Futures Strategy
We've shone the spotlight upon mostly "trend following" as the managed futures strategy we've focused upon more than any other.
Why?
Because it is hands down the most predominant strategy in the managed futures universe.
Let's unpack it a bit more.
Trend Following is an investment strategy that has the ability to go long/short across a broad equity, fixed income, commodities, currency and metals futures indexes.
It's a strategy that is adaptive rather than just being positioned long only.
What do I mean by that specifically?
If you're an equity investor with long positions in an S&P 500 index you only benefit when markets are going up.
You're screwed when they're down.
With trend following you're able to adapt your position based on the current trend.
When lean hogs are trending up you're long.
When they're trend down you're short.
The systematic approach to trend-following systems ensures no human emotion or judgement influences these decisions.
It just follows the moving average of its short, medium and long-term signals of the trading system.
That sounds great and all but what is the catch?
The catch is that when trends ARE NOT strong it'll likely get whipsawed.
I like to use the analogy of a cruise ship to describe this.
If the ship pulls into port but then gets called to another location (changes position from long to short or vice versa) it'll feel pain as it repositions.
Without adequate time to dock (ride the trend) it gets beat up in the ocean by choppy waves going from one place to the next.
Basically, when trends are not strong (or they're back and forth) the strategy struggles.
It does its best when trends are strong and continuous such as in 2022.

Other Managed Futures Strategies
Trend Following is not the only Managed Futures game in town.
We've also got carry, value, defensive, mean reversion and risk-off just to name a few.
Since this isn't an article "diving deep" into all of theses different strategies we'll just briefly highlight one of them.
For instance, carry is a managed futures strategy where you're long "high yielding" assets and short "lower yielding" assets.
This type of strategy is typically executed in currency/bond markets where you borrow and pay interest in order to buy something that has higher interest.
What's important to remember is that not all managed futures funds are "trend-only" products and that many include a multi-strategy approach to further diversify and potentially better manage overall risk.
When you're thinking of buying a Managed Futures ETF/Mutual Fund it is important to read the tear sheets and manager commentary pdfs to find out what strategies are being pursued by the given product in question versus what exposures/strategies you're seeking as an investor.

Managed Futures Hybrid and Asset Allocation Products
Investors need to be aware that managed futures products are often part of a hybrid strategy where they're paired with "something else" or they're a smaller slice of the pie in an asset allocation fund.
Two funds I've already reviewed on this site perfectly highlight these two examples.
Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund is an expanded canvas portfolio product which is long 50% global equities with a 100% trend-following managed futures sleeve.
Simplify Macro Strategy ETF is a fund of funds asset allocation ETF where managed futures ticker CTA ETF currently takes up a slice of the pie (24.93%) with a plethora of other strategies (I counted 10) also included in the mix.

Hence, you have the option of going for an expanded canvas hybrid or asset allocation approach alongside the opportunity to purchase a fund that is exclusively managed futures.

Exposures, Leverage and Volatility Targeting Matter
Not all Managed Futures ETFs and Mutual Funds are created equal.
Some have strict volatility targets (standard deviation) whereas others really let their horses run wild (winners win).
Other funds have gross leverage caps where long/short combinations are not able to exceed certain leverage thresholds such as 150%, 200% or 300% as an example.

Certain funds trade equities, fixed income, currencies, metals and commodities across a broad range of diversified global markets.
Whereas it's also common to find products that will key in on a more narrow range of focus (currency and fixed income only in North American markets) with niche expertise.
You'll discover that certain ETFs or Mutual Funds are "trend-following" only whereas others bring a diverse mix of managed futures strategies under one hood forming a multi-strategy approach.

Managed Futures Covers A Diverse Range Of Asset Classes
No other investing strategy that I'm aware of provides access to as diverse a range of asset classes as Managed Futures.

Standpoint Funds has an awesome Investment Universe list of global fixed income, equities, currencies, industrial commodities and agricultural commodities that it tracks.
Fixed Income
10 Year Australian Government Bond2 Year Australian Government Bond5 Year US T-Note2 Year US T-Note10 Year US T-NoteEuro German BobleEuro German BundLong GiltCanada 10 Year Government Bond10 Year Japanese Government BondLong Term Italian Government BondEuro OATEuro BuxlUS T-BondListtra 10 Year US T-NoteListtra T-BondsEurodollar3-Month EURIBORCanadian Bankers Acceptance3-Month Euro Swiss Franc3-Month Sterling
Equities
e-mini S&P 500 IndexEuro STOXX 50 IndexFTSE 100 IndexTopixHang Seng IndexNikkei 225 IndexS&P Canada 60MSCI SingaporeCBOE Volatility IndexSPI 200 Index
Currencies
British PoundUnited States DollarCanadian DollarEuroJapanese YenMexican PesoAustralian DollarNew Zealand DollarSwiss Franc
Industrial Commodities
GoldCopperAluminumNickelZincPlatinumSilverWTI Crude OilBrent CrudeECX EUA EmissionsGas OilCrude OilNY Harbor ULSDHenry Hub Natural GasGasoline RBOB
Agricultural Commodities
Soybean OilCornSoybeansSoybean MealWheatMilling WheatKC WheatCanolaFeeder CattleLive CattleLean HogsCocoaCoffeeSugarCottonRobusta CoffeeLondon CocoaWhite Sugar
For shits and giggles I have infinite amounts of fun pretending I'm having an oddball dinner by combining various combinations in one sentence.
Tonight for supper we'll be having Lean Hogs sprinkled with London Cocoa and Robusta Coffee purchased entirely with Swiss Francs.

Managed Futures Offer A Long-Term Diversification Benefit
Maybe the most crucial thing to understand as an investor is that managed futures offer a tremendous long-term diversification benefit for those who understand, commit and ultimately stick with the strategy as a permanent alternative sleeve within their portfolio.
Being able to combine an asset class and/or strategy that is uncorrelated to both stocks and bonds has the potential to enhance returns while lowering overall portfolio volatility.
Moreover, you get the added bonus of having a more palatable sequence of returns.
I found that portfolios that featured an "alternative sleeve" performed much better while also managing risk in the Battle of the Leverage Portfolios series.
Heck, even back-testing the results of US Equities and Gold (oddly considered an "alternative investment") revealed the benefits of combining uncorrelated asset classes that extend beyond equities/fixed income.
What Managed Futures strategies offer that long-only exposure to Gold and Commodity lacks is the ability to adapt by going long/short.
Since 2000, consider that Gold has had a worst year of -28.33% performance in 2013 and Commodities got hammered in 2008 with -45.75% returns.

More shocking is the maximum drawdown for Gold at -42.91% and Commodities at -88.68%.
How many investors have a chin worthy of receiving such vicious uppercuts?
Now consider the SG Trend Index since 2001.

A far more palatable worst year of -8.11% in 2018.
What happens when you stick with Managed Futures investing strategies over an extended period of time?
Higher returns.
Lower Volatility.
As far as I'm concerned that's the name of the game when it comes to portfolio construction.
As investors we should be seeking the ultimate scenario where returns and risk management collide.

Let's once again consult with AQR's research to compare the results of a 60/40 portfolio versus a 50/30/20 portfolio where the classic portfolio gives way for a 20% alternative sleeve commitment to "trend following" as a permanent allocation.
60/40 Portfolio Returns: 7.8%60/40 Portfolio Volatility: 10.8%60/40 Portfolio Sharpe: 0.38
50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 8.5%50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 8.8%50/30/20 Portfolio Returns: 0.53
Back-testing long-term hypothetical results from January 1888 until December 2013 reveals a 70 basis points increase in returns with a 200 basis points improvement in volatility management.
A slice of 10% Managed Futures to a classic strategy likely moves the needle whereas 20% really makes a difference over long time horizons.

Bonus: 10 People Worth Following To Learn More About Managed Futures
My intention with this article was for it to be an introduction to managed futures investment strategies for investors who are "new" to this from the perspective of a curious amateur.
However, for those seeking to take a deeper dive and learn more about the subject I'd highly recommend following these 10 fine folks in no particular order:

Andrew Beer
Jason C. Buck
Adam Butler
Jerry Parker
Rodrigo Gordillo
Jeff Malec 
Richard Brennan
Charles McGarraugh
Michael Covel
Tom Basso

From tweets and podcasts to books and articles to white papers and videos these guys have you covered across the board.

Super Bonus: 10 Managed Futures Funds To Consider
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Since we've already hit a bonus round let's up the ante by going "super" by highlighting a few funds worth your consideration.
We'll break things up into two categories: Managed Futures (trend + multi-strategy) and Asset Allocation Funds that include MF in no particular order.
Managed Futures ETFs/Mutual Funds (Trend + Multi-Strategy)

DBMF - iMGP DBi Managed Futures Strategy ETF
KMLM - KFA Mount Lucas Managed Futures ETF
CTA - Simplify Managed Futures Strategy ETF
RDMIX - Rational/ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation Fund Mutual Fund
AQMIX - AQR Managed Futures Strategy Fund Mutual Fund
EQCHX - AXS Chesapeake Strategy Fund Mutual Fund

Asset Allocation Funds (including Managed Futures allocations)

FIG - Simplify Macro Strategy ETF
TRTY - Cambria Trinity ETF
BLNDX / REMIX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund Mutual Fund
The Cockroach Portfolio by Mutiny Funds

Canadian Investors

HRAA.TO - Horizons Resolve Adaptive Asset Allocation ETF
NALT.TO - NBI Liquid Alternatives ETF
AHP 1110 - WaveFront Global Diversified Investment Class
Auspice One Fund by Auspice Capital

Nomadic Samuel filming while visiting Alert Bay on Vancouver Island, BC, Canada
Managed Futures FAQ: 12 Essential Answers for Diversified, All-Weather Portfolios
1) What are managed futures in plain English?
They’re rules-based strategies that trade futures across many markets—stocks, bonds, currencies, commodities—able to go long or short. The goal is to capture broad trends and provide returns that don’t move in lockstep with traditional stock/bond portfolios.
2) Why did managed futures stand out in 2022?
Because both stocks and bonds fell together, the “third leg” many investors were missing was an uncorrelated return stream. Trend-following CTAs (a core flavor of managed futures) often profited from persistent moves (e.g., rising rates, strong commodity trends), delivering “crisis alpha” when diversification mattered most.
3) Are managed futures only for bear markets?
No. While they’re famous for cushioning crashes, they can also do well when strong trends exist in any direction—up or down—across rates, currencies, and commodities. They tend to struggle in choppy, trendless markets.
4) What’s the difference between managed futures and “trend following”?
“Managed futures” is the umbrella. Trend following (time-series momentum) is the most common approach under it. Other managed futures styles include carry, value, defensive, mean-reversion, and risk-off tactics, and some funds blend multiple styles.
5) How do they diversify a 60/40 portfolio?
Historically, managed futures show low to negative correlation to both stocks and bonds. Adding a 10–20% sleeve has, in long backtests, raised returns and lowered volatility versus plain 60/40, improving the overall sequence of returns.
6) What do “long” and “short” actually mean here?
Going long a futures contract benefits if prices rise; going short benefits if prices fall. The ability to profit either way is a key reason managed futures can help in inflationary spikes or bond bear markets.
7) Why do some funds use “volatility targets” and leverage?
Futures are capital-efficient. Managers often scale positions to a volatility target (e.g., ~10% annualized) for consistency. Leverage is typically gross exposure from offsetting longs/shorts—risk controls (position sizing, diversification, risk limits) are central to design.
8) What markets do managed futures actually trade?
A very broad universe: global government bonds and rates, equity index futures, major currencies, and commodities (energy, metals, grains, softs, livestock). Breadth increases the chance of finding trends somewhere.
9) Why do these strategies sometimes “whipsaw”?
When markets reverse quickly or chop sideways, breakout/momentum signals flip, and the system takes small losses while repositioning. That “whipsaw” is the known cost of being available to participate in the next sustained trend.
10) How do hybrid or “expanded canvas” funds use managed futures?
Some products pair a core equity sleeve with a managed futures sleeve (e.g., ~50% stocks + ~100% trend exposure), or include managed futures as one piece inside a multi-strategy allocation. Read holdings/tearsheets to understand role and weight.
11) What should I look for when evaluating funds?
Focus on:

Process & style (trend-only vs multi-strategy)

Market breadth (global, multi-asset)

Risk controls (vol targeting, drawdown management)

Costs & taxes (expense ratio, K-1 vs 1099)

Fit in your portfolio (allocation size, rebalancing plan)

12) Is this financial advice?
No. This is education/entertainment only and doesn’t consider your situation. Do your own research and consult a licensed advisor before investing.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
I honestly couldn’t imagine my portfolio without a permanent allocation to a myriad of managed futures strategies.
My goal as an investor is to build the most robust, resilient and capital efficient portfolio possible where I seek maximum risk management alongside rip roaring returns.
Managed Futures strategies are an integral part of this process as they provide massive diversification benefits alongside my equity and bond sleeves.
Yet, I’m fully aware they’re not a magic bullet.
They’ll struggle at times just like any equity factor strategy, market cap weighted index or aggregate bond allocation.
I’m fully prepared for that.
A 2010s scenario of a challenging stretch for Managed Futures investing strategies is just as possible as a lost decade was for MCW US equities in the 2000s.
Investors with “weak hands” and a “soft chin” will abandon Managed Futures strategies as being “dead” when they’re relatively underperforming for a prolonged period of time.
More sophisticated and patient investors will understand this is just part of the overall investing journey.
Hopefully this article has helped unpack Managed Futures strategies in a more digestible manner.
As a more esoteric investing strategy than long-only stocks and fixed income it takes some digging and effort to unravel the potential benefits.
Yet the effort is well worth it in my opinion.
Now over to you.
What do you think of Managed Futures investing strategies?
Are they a flash-in-the-pan one-hit-wonder of 2022?
Or are they a permanent part of your overall portfolio?
I’m curious to find out!
Please let me know in the comments below.
That’s all I’ve got.
Ciao for now.

#### 10 Ways Investors Can Improve A 60/40 Portfolio | Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio with ETFs
The 60/40 portfolio is by and large considered industry standard and is the default portfolio most investors own, yet we over here at Picture Perfect Portfolios believe it can be improved in 10 specific ways to create the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio with ETFs as the building blocks.
Are you crazy?
The 60/40 portfolio is already balanced and features just the right amount of equities (for optimal returns) and bonds (to manage risk) as it is.
Enter the room 2022.

For investors fortunate enough to live in countries where inflation hasn't been an issue for decades on end, 2022 has been a sobering reminder that a portfolio featuring two long-only asset classes (stocks and bonds) is woefully unprepared for stagflation.
What's missing specifically?
Alternatives.

60/40 Portfolio Lacks Alternatives

Alternative asset classes and strategies that are uncorrelated from equites and bonds, offer the potential to drive positive returns in a year where both stocks and fixed income are receiving equal opportunity flame-thrower treatment.
Specifically, long-short equity (value minus junk), market neutral long-short equity, long commodities and managed futures (long/short future indexes) have all been above water in 2022.
But how exactly are we going to create space in our portfolio to add these strategies and other alternatives such as Gold, Bitcoin, Long Volatility and Merger Arbitrage?
Traditionally, the approach has been to shave down 10% of your equity exposure and 10% of your fixed income exposure to go from a 60/40 configuration to a 50/30/20 portfolio.

60/40 ---> 50/30/20

Capital Efficient Low Cost ETFs As Building Blocks

However, in recent years a numbers of fund providers have created products utilizing a modest amount of leverage between two or more asset classes to provide exposure to stocks, bonds and alternatives in a creative and capital efficient manner.
A prime example of this would be a fund such as GDE (90 stocks / 90 gold) where a 20% allocation in your portfolio would provide you with 18% US equities and 18% Gold.
Hence, in the past where you'd need to use 36% of your portfolio to gain 18% US equities and 18% Gold you now only have to use 20% space.
This extra real-estate if utilized maximally allows for an investor to pursue a number of different alternatives asset classes and strategies without having to skin the proverbial 60/40 cat in the process.
What exactly do I mean by all of this?
What I'm basically trying to convey is that you can eat your 60/40 cake (stocks/bonds) and have plenty of room for a generous piece of pie (alternatives) too.
The idea is to be gluttonous in a way that isn't zeroing in on the same piece of cake but is instead treating the portfolios like a buffet where an assortment of flavours is most optimal.

Leverage As A Tool vs Concentrated Leverage Is Bad

Leverage gets a bad name in scenarios where it is used in a concentrated manner.
Dialling up an equity only portfolio to the moon and back takes a risky asset class and makes it ever risker.
Yet what I was able to discover in the Battle of the Leveraged Portfolios is that sensibly constructed portfolios that are roughly equal parts equities, bonds and alternatives can not only handle leverage but thrive when a modest amount is applied.
Thus, in the above example leverage is being utilized as a tool to expand the canvas of the portfolio to enhance returns while managing risk as opposed to taking concentrated risky bets with one asset class.
Hence, we're going to operate from the framework that the 60/40 portfolio has served investors well but can certainly be enhanced along the way.
Our goal here specifically is to use capital efficient building blocks (ETFs) to create the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio.
I've already written what ended up being two of my most popular articles on this blog related to ways to improve the Risk Parity Portfolio and Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio:

10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Risk Parity Portfolio
10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio

Let's see if we can pull things off here with the 60/40 portfolio!

Building The Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio with ETFs

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

10 Ways Investors Can Improve A 60/40 Portfolio with ETFs
The plan here is to limit ourselves to 10 specific changes only with regards to enhancing our 60/40 portfolio.
We'll start with a default milquetoast 60/40 portfolio of SPY and AGG.
SPY is the S&P 500 offering market-cap weighted exposure to the largest 500 US stocks whereas AGG represents the aggregate US bond market.
This portfolio, which is industry standard, exhibits extreme home country bias in the sense it completely shuns International-Developed and Emerging markets equities.
Given that diversification is our only free lunch we're going to fix that problem by going global while also trying to add as many alternative asset classes and alternative strategies to the mix as possible with a cap of 10 changes.
We'll keep the framework of the 60/40, that most investors hold near and dear to their hearts, while trying to build the most diversified portfolio we possibly can.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
1/ Add Gold - GDE 90/90 US Equities + Gold
Adding Gold to the portfolio in a capital efficient manner is a cinch with GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund.
The 90/90 fund gives you 90% exposure to US large cap equities and 90% exposure to Gold via futures.
The dynamic duo of US equities and Gold have an incredible track record when paired together as I explored in "The Magic Of Combining Leveraged Stocks and Gold Together In Your Portfolio".
Historically, you get no less than double digit compound returns every decade dating back to 1972 with a 90/90 US large cap equities and Gold configuration.
Gold picks up the tab in the 70s and 2000s (when US equities struggled mightily) and US equities returns the favour in the 80s, 90s and 2010s (a rough patch for Gold).
Portfolio Allocation: 20%Notional Exposure: 18% US Equities + 18% Gold

2/ Add Bitcoin - SPBC - 100/10 US Equities + Bitcoin
Up until recently it was challenging to gain any kind of exposure to Bitcoin for US ETF investors.
That's all changed with SPBC - Simplify US Equity PLUS GBTC ETF.
This fund gives you 100% notional exposure to US equities with a combination of IVV ETF and S&P EMINI futures while layering on 10% to Bitcoin via Grayscale Bitcoin ETF GBTC.
A 20% allocation gives you full S&P 500 coverage at 20% while also ensuring you get a 2% allocation to Bitcoin.
We love capital efficiency over here on Picture Perfect Portfolios so we'll gladly take it.
Portfolio Allocation: 20%Notional Exposure: 20% US Equities + 2% Bitcoin

3/ Add Int-Dev Market Equities - NTSI - 90/60 Int-Dev Equities + Treasury
WisdomTree has created a fascinating roster of 90/60 Equity plus laddered Treasury Funds for investors to enjoy US, International Developed and Emerging Markets exposure with NTSX, NTSI and NTSE respectively.
Since, we've already got GDE and SPBC for our US Equity coverage we'll now go global by allocating 15% to NTSI.
We're getting 90% coverage for International Developed equities and 60% laddered Treasury Futures covering the entire spectrum: 2, 5, 10 and 30
We're expanding the canvas by utilizing this fund in order to create space for an alternative sleeve.
Portfolio Allocation: 15%Notional Exposure: 13.5% Int-Dev Equities + 9% Treasury (Laddered from 2% to 30%)

4/ Add Emerging Market Equities - NTSE - 90/60 EM Equities + Treasury
We'll only briefly touch upon NTSE - WisdomTree Emerging Markets Efficient Core Fund.
It's the exact same game-plan as NTSI but instead we're covering Emerging Markets this time around.
We're done with our equity exposure at this point.
Portfolio Allocation: 10%Notional Exposure: 9% EM Equities + 6% Treasury (Laddered from 2% to 30%)

5/ Add Efficient Treasury Exposure - TYA - 300% Intermediate Treasury
No other fund creates more space in our portfolio for additional sources of returns than TYA - TYA Simplify Risk Parity Treasury ETF.
The fund aims to match the duration of the ICE 20+ Year US Treasury Index by investing in both Treasuries and Treasury futures in the 10 year portion of the curve.
The capital efficient bang that you get for your buck is 3:1 meaning that just a 9% slice gives you 27% Intermediate Treasury coverage.
We now  don't have to spend another second on the "40" part of the equation.
Portfolio Allocation: 9%Notional Exposure: 27% Intermediate Treasury

6/ Add Market Neutral Strategy - BTAL - Long/Short Market Neutral Equity
Now that our long equity, treasury and gold has been taken care of let's turn our attention to alternatives with BTAL - AGFiQ US Market Neutral Anti-Beta Fund.
We're shorting 200 high beta expensive stocks while being long 200 low beta equities.
This absolute return hedge fund strategy seeks to provide positive returns in all economic environments whenever low beta stocks outperform high beta stocks.
This year in particular the strategy has shined as an effective equity hedge to lower portfolio volatility.
It's a great diversification strategy given that when done properly it's generally uncorrelated with long-only stocks and bonds.
Portfolio Allocation: 5%Notional Exposure: 5% to the strategy (200 Long Low Beta stocks / 200 Short High Beta stocks)

7/ Add Managed Futures - CTA - Multi-Strategy Managed Futures
No portfolio is complete from a diversification standpoint without some form of managed futures strategy as part of the equation.
There are some great Managed Futures ETFs now available including KMLM and DBMF ETF but we'll stick with the Simplify roster by taking a chance on the newly released CTA  Simplify Managed Futures Strategy ETF.
Something it offers that distinguishes itself from the pack is a multi-strategy approach where Trend, Mean Reversion, Carry and Risk-Off provide four Managed Futures strategies under one hood.
With its chameleon like capacity to go both long and short commodity and financial futures (excluding equities and currencies) it has thrived in 2022 by capturing strong trends in the markets to drive impressive positive returns for investors.
Portfolio Allocation: 16%Notional Exposure: 16% to the strategy (actual gross exposure is much greater)

8/ Add Long Volatility Tail Risk - CYA - Tail Risk Strategy
Rapid and brutal market drawdowns are always a possibility (such as what happened in March 2020) so we're carving out space in the portfolio for CYA - Simplify Tail Risk Strategy ETF.
By utilizing high income strategies the fund is able to purchase various PUT options (at different strike prices) to hedge against severe equity market selloffs.
You can think of this as portfolio insurance.
This strategy offers tremendous rebalancing potential when/if it pays out handsomely, in a buy-low scenario, when markets are down the most.
Portfolio Allocation: 5%Notional Exposure: 5% to the strategy

9/ Add Merger Arbitrage  - ARB - Merger Arbitrage Strategy
Since we're on quite a roll we'll continue to diversify our portfolio by adding ARB - AltShares Merger Arbitrage ETF.
Merger-arbitrage is an event-driven hedge fund strategy where managers seek to purchase stocks that are being acquired to capture a favourable spread between its current market price and proposed acquisition terms.
It's typically a high Sharpe Ratio strategy that provides diversification benefits from other asset classes and strategies that already exist in your portfolio.
Portfolio Allocation: 2%Notional Exposure: 2% to the strategy

10/ Add Interest Rate Hedge - PFIX - Interest Rate Hedge
No other alternative investment strategy we're reviewing in the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 portfolio has done better in 2022 than PFIX - Simplify Interest Rate Hedge ETF.
In a rising interest rate environment (such as 2022) this particular ETF thrives when fixed income volatility increases drastically.
The fund utilizes OTC derivatives (over-the-counter interest rate options) which function in a similar manner to owning a long-date put option on the 20-year Treasury.
We don't have a lot of space to allocate to this strategy but we're thrilled with its results even with just a 2% commitment.
Portfolio Allocation: 2%Notional Exposure: 2% to the strategy

The Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio: Complete ETF Holdings and Information
Let's see what the full roster of 10 ETFs looks like when it's all put together.
In terms of portfolio composition no ETF takes up more than 20% space whereas the minimum allocation is 2%.

Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio Holdings
20% GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund20% SPBC - Simplify US Equity PLUS GBTC ETF16% CTA - Simplify Managed Futures Strategy ETF15% NTSI - WisdomTree International Efficient Core Fund10% NTSE - WisdomTree Emerging Markets Efficient Core Fund9% TYA - TYA Simplify Risk Parity Treasury ETF5% CYA - Simplify Tail Risk Strategy ETF5% BTAL - AGFiQ US Market Neutral Anti-Beta Fund2% PFIX - Simplify Interest Rate Hedge ETF2% ARB - AltShares Merger Arbitrage ETF
Simplify dishes up 5 ETFs whereas WisdomTree offers 3 leaving just AGF and AltShares as the other fund providers.
Simplify and WisdomTree, in particular, deserve a significant round of applause for creating the necessary puzzle pieces to allow this type of portfolio to even exist in the first place.
Not long ago investors didn't have as much access to alternative investment strategies or capital efficient ways of modestly leveraging equities, bonds and gold to create space in the portfolio.

150% Expanded Canvas: Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio Exposures
Now that we've covered the entire roster of ETFs let's examine what kind of notional exposure we get for all of the specific strategies we're pursuing.
60.5% Equities (38% US - 13.5% Int-Dev - 9% EM)42% Intermediate Treasury18% Gold16% Managed Futures5% Long Volatility / Tail Risk5% Market Neutral2.0% Interest Rate Hedge2.0% Merger Arbitrage2.0% Bitcoin
We've maintained our darling 60/40 equity and bond mix and managed to add significant exposure to both Gold at 18% and multi-strategy Managed Futures at 16%.
Our tail risk portfolio insurance comes in at 5% which is also the same amount we're gaining with market neutral equities.
We round things off with a sprinkling of 2% Merger-Arbitrage, Interest Rate Hedging and Bitcoin.
Overall, we've expanded the canvas to the point of creating space for 50% alternative strategies.
This provides an opportunity for enhanced returns long-term while jazzing up the overall diversification of the portfolio.

Investing Strategies Added

International Developed Market Equities
Emerging Market Equities
Gold
Managed Futures (Trend-Following)
Managed Futures (Others Strategies: Mean Reversion, Carry, Risk-Off)
Long Volatility (Tail Risk)
Market Neutral
Interest Rate Hedge
Merger Arbitrage
Bitcoin

With just 10 simple upgrades we've managed to add 10 strategies to the mix of just US Equities and Treasuries!
If you consider the Managed Futures strategies as being 4 distinct line items that brings it up to 12 altogether.
Not too shabby at all, I'd say!
Let's move on to the potential pros and cons of the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 portfolio.

The Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio Pros and Cons
Expanded Canvas 60/40 Pros

Going from US equity home country bias to global diversification with International Developed (NTSI) and Emerging Markets Equities (NTSE) added to the mix
Utilizing capital efficiency in products such as GDE, SPBC, NTSI, NTSE and TYA to create "real estate" space in the portfolio for alternatives
Having significant exposure to absolute return strategy funds that have the capacity to go both long/short such as CTA and BTAL that can make money in every environment and often thrive during extreme markets
Bringing "tail risk" long volatility protection via PUT options into the portfolio as insurance against distinct rapid market drawdowns
Having exposure to both Gold and Bitcoin as fiat hedges and diversifiers within the portfolio
Being prepared for inflationary regimes with market neutral, trend-following and interest rate hedges to provide a ballast when stocks and bonds are down together
Having the entire strategy available as ETFs without the need to purchase Mutual Funds or Interval Funds (which some investors don't have access to *wink wink* Moi)
Having significant exposure to an ensemble "alternative sleeve" that can actually make a difference in the portfolio as opposed to merely a token amount
Gaining exposure to a number of unique strategies that have only recently become available to retail and DIY investors via fund providers such as Simplify and WisdomTree

Expanded Canvas 60/40 Cons

Having to deal with tracking error when the "alternative strategies" are a drag on the portfolio as opposed to being additive
Having overall higher fees versus single digit basis points market beta exposure to the S&P 500 and aggregate bond index

Nomadic Samuel enjoying a pint while visiting Cape Breton Island - Nova Scotia, Canada
12-Question FAQ — Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio (with ETFs)
1) What is the classic 60/40 portfolio and why is it popular?
It’s a simple mix of 60% stocks / 40% bonds (often SPY + AGG). It’s popular for ease, long-run balance between growth and ballast, and low cost.
2) Why try to improve a 60/40 now?
Because 2022 exposed a blind spot: stocks and bonds can fall together in inflationary/stagflation regimes. A plain 60/40 lacks alternatives that can zig when both zag.
3) What’s the big idea behind the “Ultimate Enhanced 60/40”?
Keep the 60/40 core exposure while using capital-efficient ETFs to free space and add uncorrelated strategies (gold, managed futures, market-neutral, tail-risk, etc.)—without gutting the stock/bond mix.
4) What does “capital efficiency” mean here?
ETFs that deliver >100% notional exposure per dollar (e.g., 90/90 stocks+gold, 90/60 equities+Treasuries, 3× Treasuries) so you preserve core exposures and still slot in alternatives.
5) Isn’t leverage risky?
Concentrated leverage (e.g., levered equities only) can be brutal. The approach here uses modest, diversified leverage across multiple uncorrelated sleeves, seeking higher risk-adjusted returns and better drawdown control.
6) What are the 10 specific upgrades used?

Gold (GDE 90/90)

Bitcoin sleeve (SPBC 100/10)

Intl-Developed equities + Treasuries (NTSI 90/60)

Emerging markets + Treasuries (NTSE 90/60)

Capital-efficient Treasuries (TYA ~3× int.-term)

Market-neutral anti-beta (BTAL)

Managed futures—multi-strategy (CTA)

Tail-risk / long vol (CYA)

Merger arbitrage (ARB)

Interest-rate hedge (PFIX)

7) What’s the final ETF roster and weights?
20% GDE, 20% SPBC, 16% CTA, 15% NTSI, 10% NTSE, 9% TYA, 5% CYA, 5% BTAL, 2% PFIX, 2% ARB.
8) What are the effective (“notional”) exposures after stacking?
Approx.: 60.5% equities (38 US / 13.5 Intl-Dev / 9 EM), 42% Treasuries, 18% gold, 16% managed futures, 5% tail-risk, 5% market-neutral, 2% rate hedge, 2% merger-arb, 2% bitcoin (≈150% total canvas with ~50% in alternatives).
9) What diversification benefits does this add?
You move from two risk engines (stocks/bonds) to many: gold, managed futures (trend + other signals), market-neutral, tail-risk, merger-arb, rate-hedge, and a small crypto sleeve—each with low/negative correlation to the core.
10) What are the main trade-offs and risks?

Tracking error vs plain 60/40 (alternatives can lag in rip-roaring equity bull runs)

Higher fees than vanilla beta

Complexity (multiple funds, rebalancing)

Leverage/derivatives risks within capital-efficient funds

Product risk (structure, liquidity, strategy drift)

11) Who is this for?
Investors who want to keep a 60/40 framework but improve resilience across regimes (inflation, recession, crisis), and who accept moderate complexity and non-benchmark behavior to pursue smoother risk-adjusted returns.
12) How can I customize or simplify?
Swap SPBC if you don’t want crypto (use a US factor fund like min-vol/value). If you dislike PFIX/ARB, reallocate to CTA or other diversifiers. The framework is modular—keep 60/40 while tuning sleeves to your preferences.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
When it comes to the "alternative sleeve" of the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 there is plenty of room for flexibility.
For investors adamant about not having ANY exposure to cryptocurrency within the portfolio it would be easy enough to swap out SPBC and add a US factor focused equity strategy instead.
A fund like USMV would give you exposure to US minimum volatility or VFMF for multi-factor or AVUV for small-cap value to name just a few.
You could easily choose your own adventure to further diversify your equities away from market-cap beta strategies only.
If for some reason you're not keen on having Interest Rate Hedges or Merger Arbitrage you could eliminate those funds completely and add the extra 4% to a fund like CTA to enhance your notional managed futures exposure.
The point of creating the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 portfolio is to give you a general framework to work with but not to stymy your creativity as an asset allocator.

Return Stacked 60/40: Absolute Return Index
I'm not the first to take a swing at expanding the canvas of a 60/40 portfolio to add alternatives to the mix.
Resolve Asset Management and Newfound Research have created the Return Stacking 60/40 portfolio that I reviewed this year.
It's significantly outperformed a vanilla 60/40 portfolio during both positive markets (2021) and negative markets (2022) with its stack of managed futures and global systematic macro strategies especially shining this year in particular.
You can check out its live results at ReturnStacking.Live 
With its mix of Mutual Funds and ETFs, it has significantly more exposure to managed futures strategies than the Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 portfolio.
I'm a big fan of return stacking as a framework for expanding the canvas of your portfolio to diversify into alternatives.

I Don't Personally Invest Using Benchmarks
Something that I'd like to make clear is that I don't personally invest using any type of benchmark.
In other words, when I expand the canvas of my portfolio I'm not insisting that I have a 60/40 allocation as part of the equation.
I'm contrarian in my belief that NOT handcuffing your portfolio to a benchmark is one of the greatest gifts you can give yourself as an investor.
It allows you to allocate in a way that suits your specific personality and investing goals without requiring you to high five your neighbour when your portfolio is not performing "just like" theirs.
However, I'm aware that most investors don't want to deviate to such extremes and an enhanced 60/40 portfolio offers a solution where you get to keep what "everyone else is doing" but also differentiate yourself from the pack by adding alternative diversifying return streams to the mix.
If insisting upon a 60/40 framework as a base for your portfolio allows you to stay the course with alternative investment strategies, I think that's an excellent compromise overall.
I think that's where we'll leave things for today.
What do you think of expanded canvas 60/40 portfolios?

#### 10 Ways Investors Can Improve The Classic Risk Parity Portfolio
The Risk Parity Portfolio ought to be the default portfolio average DIY investors utilize as a long-term investing strategy as opposed to the industry standard 60/40 portfolio.
That's a bit of a bold statement to start off an article!
Well, if investors are concerned about primarily preparing a portfolio for all four economic regimes, controlling volatility and managing sequence of return risk, it's a slam dunk no-brainer to select the Risk Parity Portfolio over the 60/40 Portfolio.
Yet, an even bolder question would be, can the classic long-only Risk Parity Portfolio be potentially enhanced or improved?
That's the very question we're going to explore in detail today.

How To Improve The Classic Risk Parity Portfolio: 10 Suggestions For Investors

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Risk Parity Portfolio Introduction

The Risk Parity Portfolio, as one might expect given its name, is primarily concerned with managing risk and volatility.
Instead of asset classes being weighted by default configurations such as 80/20, 60/40 and 40/60, a risk parity portfolio focuses on the volatility of each asset class as opposed to its expected returns.
Furthermore, instead of being merely a concoction of just stocks and bonds, an alternative sleeve is a big part of the risk parity strategy.
Traditionally, that alternative sleeve has been gold and/or commodities.
Given that stocks, gold and commodities are considerably more volatile (in terms of standard deviation) than bonds, the typical long-only Risk Parity Portfolio typically features two different bond asset classes at 30% slices whereas stocks and gold receive 20% allocations respectively.
20% Stocks30% Bonds A (10 Year Treasury)30% Bonds B (Intermediate)20% Gold/Commodities
Why this configuration?
Let's explore the asset classes individually.

Risk Parity Portfolio Asset Classes

Thanks to Portfolio Visualizer (an invaluable resource for investors), we can backtest the standard deviation of the US Total Stock Market, Intermediate Term Treasury, 10 Year Treasury and Gold dating all the way back to 1972.
We're able to notice the following:

Risk Parity Portfolio Risk By Individual Asset Class
US Stock Market = 15.65% Risk (Standard Deviation) Gold = 19.86 Risk (Standard Deviation)Intermediate Term Treasury = 5.75% Risk (Standard Deviation)10 Year Treasury = 8.01% Risk (Standard Deviation) 
Since the Risk Parity Portfolio is not primarily concerned with returns (and instead focuses on risk) you end up with a portfolio that has a greater allocation to bonds than it does to stocks and gold.
Furthermore, the Risk Parity Portfolio seeks to include exposure to asset classes that are uncorrelated with each other in order to improve the overall diversification of the portfolio.
It includes an alternative sleeve (in this example Gold) as opposed to just being merely stocks and bonds.
Risk Parity Portfolio Asset Class Monthly Correlations

What's immediately obvious is that Gold and Stocks are uncorrelated with all other asset classes and it is only bonds that are highly correlated with each other but uncorrelated to both Stocks and Gold.
This level of diversification between asset classes has historically served investors extremely well offering returns (CAGR of 8.31%) that were higher than Risk (Standard Deviation of 6.99%).
Risk Parity Portfolio Returns 1972-2022

The silky smooth ride of the static Risk Parity Portfolio has offered investors close to equity-like returns with bond-like stability.
When you consider its worst year performance is only single digits (-9.93%) it's been a bastion of stability in comparison to equity only portfolios where the US Total stock market has witnessed years as bad as -37% in 2008.
Moreover, the greatest feather in the Risk Parity Portfolios cap is its historical sequence of returns risk profile (also known as Roll Period) of only being underwater for 1 year.
Risk Parity Portfolio Roll Period 1972 to 2022

In comparison the US Total Stock Market has been underwater for a period of an entire decade!
How about the 60/40 Portfolio?
A five year negative sequence of returns risk.
Thus, how on earth could the Risk Parity Portfolio be improved?
Is that even possible?
Let's explore.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
1) US Stocks Only --> Global Equities = Risk Parity Upgrade
Let's grab the lowest hanging fruit of all and move from US stocks only to a globally diversified equity allocation.
Afterall, diversification is your only free lunch in investing and avoiding "home country bias" is a paramount upgrade.
Indeed, US equities have served investors well over the past 40 years but the cautionary tale of Japan is a reminder to diversify whenever possible.
Furthermore, consider the 2000s as an example of what can potentially happen when you put all of your equity eggs in one basket.

A globally diversified equity allocation prevents investors from having a lost decade.
US Total Stock Market returns stymied portfolios with a -0.27% CAGR whereas International Developed Equities were slightly above water with a 1.24% return and the one that saved your bacon was Emerging Markets coming in at 9.82% CAGR.
Thus, to improve our naive Risk Parity Portfolio we'll go from something like a $VTI US Total Stock Market to a $VT Total World Stock Market.

2) Market Cap Weighted Global Equities --> Global Minimum Volatility Equities
Imagine being able to enjoy the same return profile (or better) of a globally diversified equity portfolio while subtracting 400 to 500 basis points of risk to further smooth out the ride?
Too good to be true?
Enter the room Global Minimum Volatility Equities.
Minimum volatility investing is an equity factor strategy that seeks to "control volatility" by screening for companies that have more stable returns while sifting out companies that are more volatile.
You eliminate lottery ticket stocks.
It's as much about what is included (more stable stocks) as it is about what is excluded (highly volatile stocks).
You would think that trying to reduce volatility would lower returns but that is not the case at all.

In fact, when you compare MSCI minimum volatility indexes (US, EAFE, EM, Canada, etc) what you more often find is that they historically outperform their market-cap weighted benchmark.
Since 1988 the MSCI World Minimum Volatility Index has outperformed its parent index with returns of 8.43% and 7.64% respectively.
Hence, you get a "free lunch" of potentially greater returns but more importantly you significantly upgrade the standard deviation of an asset class that is one of the portfolios most volatile wings (only gold being more volatile).

3) Intermediate Treasury --> Long Term Treasury = RP Enhancement
The next upgrade we'll be seeking is in the fixed income category of bonds.
Intermediate Treasury see ya later alligator!
Enter the room Long Term Treasury.
Wait. But. Why?

Let's consider the period of 2000 until the end of 2008 - the roughest stretch for markets since 1972.
During the Bear Market Years of 2000 until the end of 2002 and 2008, Long-Term Treasury provided significantly more protection versus Intermediate Treasury.
Moreover, for that entire rough period of time it outperformed Intermediate Treasury by over 200 basis points.
For a so called "lost decade" for equities, finding assets that provide more stability (when you need it most) and offer higher returns is an upgrade worth taking in my books.
PortfolioVisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

4) 10 Year Treasury --> TIPS (Treasury Inflation Protected Securities)
One of the biggest problems of owning Intermediate Treasury and 10 Year Treasury is just how highly correlated they are to each other.

With a correlation of 0.96 dare I say they're almost the same!
Given we've got two slots for fixed income diversification in our Risk Parity Portfolio let's try to upgrade by finding a solution that is less correlated and strategically different.
Drum roll....
TIPS!
U.S. government issued Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities (TIPS) are a special type of Treasury security indexed to inflation.
By adding this asset class to our portfolio we're making it more regime ready for when inflation rears its ugly head.
Enter the room 2022.
LOL.
Normally that expression is referred to on this site for funds and/or asset classes but 2022 has been a unique animal in and of itself.
For those of us too young to have experienced rampant inflation in previous years it's a big part of our lives now.

Maybe the most important upgrade of all is that now we've got two fixed income asset classes that have a correlation of 0.63 to each other as opposed to 0.96.
We'll take it and move on.

5) Leverage --> Lever the Portfolio Up Buttercup = 200% Canvas
Here is where I'm going to lose some of you.
We're going to add leverage to the portfolio to expand the canvas to 200%.
Not to add more heaping scoops of what we've already got but to instead add multiple different asset classes and strategies to improve the overall portfolio diversification and return stack performance on top of the base we've already created.
But won't that make the Risk Parity Portfolio fall apart?
That was a question I once had.
I created the Battle of the Leveraged Portfolios to test the Risk Parity Portfolio along with other classic portfolios to see if, when, why, how it would fall apart.
You can see the results here: 2X, 3X, 4X
The TL;DR version is this:
The Risk Parity Portfolio can handle leverage like a pack-mule.
In every round of the competition its returns exceeded its level of risk, roll periods remained the same and its Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio improved.
But all of that was done with just four crude assets: long US total stocks, treasuries (Intermediate and Long) and gold.
What we're attempting to do is not increase what we've already got but instead add additional layers of diversification to further increase the efficiency of the portfolio.
Sound exciting?
It does for me!

6) Trend-Following Managed Futures Strategy
It's time to bring the Chameleon into the room!
So far we've had nothing but long-only non-adaptive asset classes and strategies in our portfolio.
That changes right now.
For those unfamiliar, trend-following is the predominant managed futures strategy used to go both long and short global equity, bond, commodity and currency indexes.
Historically speaking, it has provided equity-like returns with only half of the volatility.
Moreover, it is uncorrelated to both long only equity and bond markets.
Furthermore, it typically does extremely well during periods of market turmoil when trends are strong.
Hence, it has been referred to as a crisis alpha-strategy - even though it provides decent return streams outside of bear market situations.
Thus, the strategy utilizes short, medium and long term signals to determine whether to go long, short or take no position at all.
Quite honestly I couldn't imagine my portfolio now without it.
Best of all it has done extremely well in 2022 when basically everything else under the sun has been getting disemboweled.

Check out the difference between Managed Futures trend-following ticker $DBMF versus milquetoast 60/40 $AOM.
Suffering Succotash!!!

7) Global Systematic Macro + Options Strategies (Aside from Trend)
Some of the top quants on #FinTwit have coined the popular saying: "Diversify your diversifiers, yo!"
And that's the plan over here.
Instead of relying "only" on trend-following strategies we'll deploy other global systematic macro strategies such as carry, value, momentum, quality, seasonality and mean reversion along with long-volatility options strategies to protect against tail-risk (extreme market events).
I won't go over each of these line-items one by one but instead we'll define a few for good measure.
Carry is a strategy where investors seek to benefit from a wide differential between high and low carry assets.
Long-volatility strategies typically involve buying out of the money put-options, at various strike prices, to provide a type of "portfolio insurance" should the markets experience a fierce drawdown.
By not just sticking to trend-following we're exposing our portfolio to more diversified diversifiers.

8) REITS (Real Estate Investment Trust)
Let's add some global REITS to our portfolio.
Real Estate Investment Trust is a specialized equity asset class that gives you exposure to many types of commercial real estate.
The primary reason for adding them in your portfolio is to diversify your equity sleeve and hedge against inflation.

Much like with our bonds, we're seeking to add diversification to our equities sleeve by offering something less correlated to the US total stock market.
Given that the US Total Stock Market and REITS have a 0.61 correlation we'll happily take it.
Let's wind back the clock to the 2000s for a bit of a case study.

When the US Total Stock Market was causing investors to pull their collective hair out, REITs were the all-star performer that saved the day.
I'm not sure if we'll witness such an extreme situation again in the future but it's nice to be prepared with something in the portfolio that'll potentially work in our favour.

9) Market Neutral Equities Strategy
Market-Neutral Equities is an absolute return hedge fund strategy that seeks positive returns in any market environment.
By choosing a low NET exposure (typically between 0 to 20%) it is just as long as it is short most of the time.
Furthermore, it is lowly correlated to markets providing the diversification benefit we're craving with our additional 100% canvas space.
Let's use an example to showcase how it can make money even in the down market.
Let's say the strategy is long 100 and short 90 for a net 10 exposure.
Our long equity component is down -8% whereas our short component is down -20%.
We'd be -80 + 180 for a net of 100.
In this scenario we'd earn an impressive 10% return before fees.
It can also generate positive returns when the market is up.
Our long component at 100 is up 12% whereas our short is only up 5%
We're 120 - 45 in this scenario for an overall 7.5% return.
Given the absolute return potential and diversification benefit of the strategy we're excited to add it.

10) Mish-Mash of Other Alternative Strategies
To close things off we'll further diversify our portfolio by drawing from a well of a mish-mash of other alternative strategies.
These could potentially be but are not limited to the following:

Merger Arbitrage
Bitcoin
Reinsurance
Tail Risk
Credit Hedging
Private Equity
Private Loans

I could write an entire article on each of these strategies so we'll keep this brief.
The idea is just to add a few more diversifiers to round off the portfolio.
It would entirely be up to you which of these you'd potentially choose depending on your interest towards the various asset classes and/or strategies.

Improved Risk Parity Portfolio
What does our improved Risk Parity Portfolio look like after all of these potential upgrades and an expanded canvas?
Maybe something like this:

Enhanced Risk Parity Portfolio 200%
40% Trend-Following (Equity, Bond, Currency, Commodity Indexes)30% Global Systematic Managed Futures Strategies (Carry, Seasonality, Value, Momentum, Quality, Mean Reversion, etc)30% Long Treasury30% TIPS20% Global Minimum Volatility Equities20% Gold10% REITS10% Market Neutral Equities10% Diversified Alternatives Basket (Reinsurance, Merger Arbitrage, Bitcoin, Private Equity/Credit, etc)
Overall, I very much like the looks of what we've got over here.
We've improved the overall diversification of our portfolio while adding more uncorrelated asset classes/strategies to the mix.
I'd expect returns to exceed risk with this high Sharpe/Sortino ratio seeking portfolio with the potential to outperform most others while offering a considerably smoother ride.

ETFs and Mutual Funds to Create an Enhanced Risk Parity Portfolio
For those interested in putting together something "similar" to what we've suggested we could potentially utilize the following funds:
US Investors
40% UPAR40% RDMIX15% QRPIX5% SRRIX
UPAR Ultra Risk Parity sets the table for the long-only Risk Parity asset allocation by providing global equities (US, Int-Dev, EM) at 35%, TIPS (49%), Long Term Treasury (49%) and Gold/Commodities (35%) for a net exposure of 168%.
RDMIX Rational Resolve Adaptive Asset Allocation from ReSolve Asset Management provides the backbone of the "adaptive" risk-parity mandate with trend-following and an ensemble of global systematic managed futures strategies (carry, seasonality, mean reversion, value, etc) across all global equity, bonds, commodities and currency indexes.
QRPIX Alternative Risk Premia Fund from AQR goes long/short across equity, bond, currency and commodity indexes while deploying five unique styles including Value, Momentum, Carry, Defensive, and Trend.
SRRIX Stone Ridge Reinsurance Risk Premium Interval Fund offers investors the alternative strategy of reinsurance to round out the portfolio.
The hybrid approach of long-only and long-short risk parity strategies as the backbone of this portfolio along with diversified diversifiers should provide investors the returns meets risk management they crave.
Canadian Investors
40% UPAR40% HRAA.TO10% PFAA.TO10% ONEC.TO
UPAR Ultra Risk Parity sets the table for the long-only Risk Parity asset allocation by providing global equities (US, Int-Dev, EM) at 35%, TIPS (49%), Long Term Treasury (49%) and Gold/Commodities (35%) for a net exposure of 168%.
HRAA.TO Horizons Adaptive Asset Allocation from ReSolve Asset Management provides the backbone of the "adaptive" risk-parity mandate with trend-following and an ensemble of global systematic managed futures strategies (carry, seasonality, mean reversion, value, etc) across all global equity, bonds, commodities and currency indexes.
PFAA.TO Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund offers investors a primary strategy of market neutral, special situation credit and merger arbitrage with a secondary component of Momentum, Value, Quality, Discretionary Hedges and Tail Risk.
ONEC.TO Accelerate OneChoice Alternative ETF is a 10 in 1 fund offering exposure to Bitcoin, Long-Short Equity, Senior Loans, Merger Arbitrage, REITS and Global Infrastructure equities not already included in the portfolio.
The one sad thing here is that we're not able to squeeze a minimum volatility equities strategy into the equation but hopefully such a product will exist someday in the future!
The Picture Perfect Portfolio that I'd love to launch someday as an ETF attempts to solve that.

Risk Parity Resources For Further Reference
For those interested in learning more about Risk Parity investing I'd recommend the following resources:

Risk Parity: How to Invest for All Market Environments (book) by Alex Shahidi
Adaptive Asset Allocation (book) by Adam Butler, Rodrigo Gordillo and Mike Philbrick
Risk Parity Chronicles (blog) from Justin living in Japan
All Seasons Portfolio (blog) by Nicholas Ahonen from Sweden

Nomadic Samuel filming a travel video while visiting Lake Titicaca in Peru
12-Question FAQ — 10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Classic Risk Parity Portfolio
1) What is a classic long-only Risk Parity portfolio?
A rules-based mix that balances risk (volatility) across assets instead of capital weights, typically: 20% stocks, 30% 10-Yr Treasuries, 30% intermediate Treasuries, 20% gold/commodities—aiming for all-weather resilience and shallow drawdowns.
2) Why consider improving Risk Parity at all?
To keep the all-regime intent while seeking higher risk-adjusted returns, lower correlations, and better inflation defense using modern tools (TIPS, managed futures, market-neutral, merger arb, etc.).
3) What’s the first equity upgrade?
US-only → Global equities. Going global (developed ex-US + EM) reduces home-country bias and helps avoid “lost-decade” concentration risk.
4) How can we make equities smoother without giving up much return?
Market-cap → Global Minimum Volatility (MinVol). MinVol tilts toward steadier companies, historically lowering stdev and improving downside capture—well aligned with Risk Parity’s stability goal.
5) How should the bond sleeve be refined?
Replace the “two-highly-correlated Treasuries” problem by upgrading Intermediate to Long-Term Treasuries (more crisis ballast) and swapping 10-Yr Treasuries for TIPS to add explicit inflation linkage and lower intra-bond correlation.
6) What does “expand the canvas to 200%” mean?
Use return stacking / modest leverage to add new diversifiers on top of the classic core (rather than doubling the same assets), targeting more return streams with controlled risk.
7) Why add Managed Futures (trend-following)?
They can go long/short across commodities, rates, currencies, and equities, tending to zig when stocks/bonds zag and often delivering crisis alpha in stressed regimes.
8) Should we diversify beyond trend?
Yes—add global systematic macro / alternative risk premia (e.g., carry, value, momentum, quality, seasonality, mean-reversion) and long-vol/tail overlays to “diversify the diversifiers.”
9) Where do REITs fit?
Global REITs broaden the equity sleeve toward real assets and can improve inflation sensitivity with moderate correlation to broad stocks.
10) What’s the case for Market-Neutral equity?
It targets stock-selection alpha with near-zero net beta, delivering low-vol, low-correlation returns that complement both long-only assets and macro diversifiers.
11) Any room for a small “other alts” basket?
A measured 5–10% sleeve can include merger arbitrage, reinsurance, private credit/equity, bitcoin, or other niche alts—kept small to protect the core risk profile.
12) What might an enhanced 200% “RP+” look like in practice?
Illustrative mix: 40% trend, 30% global systematic macro/risk premia, 30% long Treasuries, 30% TIPS, 20% global MinVol equities, 20% gold, 10% REITs, 10% market-neutral, 10% diversified alts—aiming for returns > risk, high Sharpe/Sortino, and shallow max drawdowns (allocation sums reflect stacked exposures).
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
Sorry, my friends for yet another behemoth of a post!
I hit you last time with 4000 words and now we're well over 3000 here.
To say I'm a fan of Risk Parity would be an understatement.
I feel it should be the "default" portfolio for investors of all shapes, sizes and (of course) stages of life.
With a return profile greater than its risk and a roll period that puts the 60/40 to shame, we ought to collectively be pondering what's going on here?
Risk Parity is the literal backbone of my own DIY quant portfolio.
The static long-only Risk Parity Portfolio has had impressive results for over 50 years.
However, as I think we've all seen in this article it can easily be upgraded.
Strategies that were once only available to high networth individuals and institutions are now available for the little guys (us plebs).
Failing to integrate these strategies into your portfolio seems like a lost opportunity and then some.
What's most exciting is that fund of funds ETFs and Mutual Funds are now available meaning you can cobble together a maximally diversified risk parity portfolio with as little as 4 tickers!
Wowzers!
So much diversification in just a handful of funds.
The crazy part is that I think it's only going to get better.
What an exciting time to be an investor.

#### 10 Ways Investors Can Improve The Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
When it comes to creating a portfolio that is prepared for all economic regimes, is it possible that investors can improve upon the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio?
Hmmm.
An even better umbrella to handle the rain in an all-weather scenario?
Now that would be a tall order.
In many ways the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio is the pinnacle of diversification - especially when compared to the classic 60/40 portfolio.
Firstly, it isn't nearly as risky as the balanced 60/40 portfolio given that its equity allocation is shaved down.
Secondly, it allocates a greater percentage of its portfolio to bonds in order to provide stability.
Thirdly, it has an alternative sleeve of gold and commodities protecting the portfolio from stagflation.

We're witnessing in real-time the Achilles heel of the 60/40 portfolio in 2022.
When stocks and bonds are no longer correlated the so-called Titanic suddenly starts sinking.
But beating the tar out of the milquetoast 60/40 folio is kind of low-hanging fruit, isn't it?
Indeed.
Let's get back on track here.
Can we improve upon the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio, in such a manner, that we can enhance returns and stabilize overall risk management and diversification?
I think so.
Here are 10 ways we're going to attempt it.
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

10 Ways to Improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio

All Weather Portfolio Introduction
Before we look at improving the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio let's first examine what it is in its original form.
The Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio is a portfolio that moves beyond merely stocks and bonds with the addition of gold and commodities as an alternative sleeve.
The purpose of the portfolio is to perform in all economic environments as opposed to just inflationary boom and disinflationary boom regimes.
Relative to a 60/40, the all weather portfolio reduces its exposure to equities, increases its exposure to bonds and adds both commodities and gold in an attempt to balance its risk/reward profile in such a manner that it offers investors protection during inflationary stagnation and deflationary bust economic regimes.

Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio Allocations
US Stock Market = 30%Long Term Treasury = 40%Intermediate Term Treasury = 15%Gold = 7.5%Commodities = 7.5%
With equities limited to just 30% and bonds making up 55% of the portfolio, the all-weather allocation is instantly more conservative than most other portfolios that are more aggressive with equities.
Uncorrelated asset classes of gold/commodities round out the portfolio with 7.5% slices each.
In my opinion, this all-weather portfolio is a diversification masterpiece, (relatively speaking) compared to what 90% of most investors have going for them.
The results of this portfolio in the picture perfect portfolio challenge (leveraged portfolios battle) at the 1X. 2X, 3X and 4X level speaks for itself.
It dominated.
This is a robust regime ready portfolio that can handle all economic conditions in addition to high amounts of leverage as well.
But that doesn't mean it can't be enhanced.
And so let's explore that now.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
1) Add Global Equities To The All-Weather Portfolio
Maybe the most obvious place to start would be going from a US only equity allocation to diversifying globally.
In the past decade, investors who have gone global (as opposed to being US-centric), have by and large been frustrated with the results.
However, when considered through the lens of the early 2000s, diversification was the key ingredient that kept your equity sleeve above water.
The idea here isn't to pick which region of the world is going to be the winner over the coming years/decades but rather have it spread out so broadly as to not guess at all.
One of the most informative self-education moments throughout my journey as a DIY investor, has been to pick up vintage investing books that weren't recently published.
Open up an investing book published in the mid 90s and you'll likely find information on how investing abroad in the 70s would have prevented a lost decade.
If diversification is your only free lunch as an investor then avoiding to succumb to home country bias should be an absolute no brainer of an upgrade.
This is low hanging fruit my friends.
I'll gladly accept this "easy upgrade" by going from US centric equities to a globally diversified portfolio featuring both significant EAFE and Emerging market exposure.

2) Minimum Volatility Equities Upgrade To The All-Weather Portfolio
Can we further optimize our equity sleeve of our Ray Dalio inspired all-weather portfolio?
I believe so.
Let's explore factor optimization.
Given our mandate of creating an enhanced Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio, we're specifically looking for ways to drive performance while smoothing out the ride.
What can help make the equity investing journey a little less bumpy?
Factors.
Specifically, defensive factors.
Yield.
Quality.
Minimum Volatility.
Amongst the three mentioned above, the most defensive of them all is minimum volatility.

From the time period of 1999 to 2020, Global market cap weighted equities had a standard deviation of 16, Yield scored 15, Quality hovered around 14 and World Minimum Volatility was a defensive stalwart coming in at 11.
Given our mandate of making the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio an enhanced version of itself, we'll take the 5 standard deviation points of risk improvement and say thank you very much.
Thus, at this point, we've now moved away from "home country bias" US only equities to global and we've upgraded from market-cap weighted to minimum volatility to bolster our defence.
Yummy.
So far.

3) Expand The Canvas Of The All-Weather Portfolio
Now that we've optimized our equites in two different ways, it's time to turn our attention to the rest of the portfolio.
What does an artist need to paint a beautiful picture?
A canvas.
Our canvas has been confined to 100%.
Let's change that right now.
We'll expand it to 200%.
But with the explicit caveat of not adding more of what we've already got in the portfolio.
No scooping extra mashed potatoes on top of the previous pile.
Instead we're going to use this extra space to add additional diversifying elements to the portfolio.
But before we do this let's examine why it's even a potentially good idea (or not) to add leverage to the Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio.
For that we'll need to jump over to the Battle of the Leverage Portfolios (Picture Perfect Portfolio Challenge) to see how the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio performed at each level:

Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio in the Battle of the 2X Leverage Portfolios
3X Leverage portfolio performance for the Ray Dalio All Weather Folio (coming soon)
Wacky Ray Dalio All Weather in the 400% Leveraged Portfolio competition (coming soon)

Just as a heads up, the results are with GOLD taking up 100% of the COMMODITY sleeve given back-test data constraints from portfolio visualizer only going back to the mid 2000s with commodities.
Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio Performance 100%

Initial Balance: $10,000Final Balance: $520,019CAGR: 9.34%RISK: 7.94%Worst Year: -5.61%Sharpe Ratio: 0.63Sortino Ratio: 1.00
From 1978 until 2022 (March) a hypothetical $10,000 investment in the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio would have grown to $520,000.
With a CAGR of 9.34% it delivered an impressive 140 basis points outperformance over RISK at 7.94%.
Its worst year comes in at only -5.61% with a Sharpe Ratio of 0.63 and Sortino Ratio of 1.00.
Ray Dalio All-Weather Roll Period 100%

When we check out the Roll Period it is even more impressive.
The Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio had only a low of 1 year at -11.59% with all sequence of returns being positive at a 3 year, 5 year, 7 year, 10 year and 15 year periods.

2X Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio Performance 200%

Initial Balance: $10,000Final Balance: $20,069,497CAGR: 18.75%RISK: 15.88%Worst Year: -11.07%Sharpe Ratio: 0.90Sortino Ratio: 1.55
What happens when we expand the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio from 100% to 200%?
In a word....
Magic.
The 2X Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio really comes alive when a modest amount of leverage is applied.
Consider how a hypothetical backtest of $10,000 grows now to $20,069,497.
$520,000 at 1X canvas vs $20,069,497 at 2X.
Wowzers!
Moreover, the CAGR shoots up to 18.75% with a 287 basis points of outperformance versus RISK at 15.88%.
You'd think with double the leverage the Ray Dalio portfolio might fall apart a little in terms of its worst year performance.
Nope.
Just -11.07%.
Finally, it's Sharpe Ratio of 0.90 and Sortino Ratio of 1.55 are massive improvements over the 100% canvas level as well.
This is a portfolio that is Taylor-made for leverage.
It's time to lever up buttercup.
2X Ray Dalio All-Weather Roll Period 200%

4) Adding Uncorrelated Assets To The All Weather Portfolio
So we've decided to expand the canvas of the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio but what is it that we're going to add if we're not just doubling up its already existing asset classes?
Well, if we're beating the drum of diversification is your only free lunch we're going to run a marathon with that.
But the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio is already a diversification masterpiece, is it not?
Yes.
In many ways it is.
But we've still got various asset classes and multi-strategy enhancement opportunities.
Off the table is the following:

Global Minimum Volatility Equities
Long-Term Treasury
Intermediate Treasury
Gold
Commodities

So what could we add?
Long-short equities.
TIPs.
Managed Futures.
Merger Arbitrage.
These all come to mind.
Let's explore them individually.

5) TIPs Strategy To The All-Weather Portfolio
Let's first explore adding to the fixed income/bond sleeve of the Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio.
Since we've already got long-term and intermediate treasury securities we'll turn our attention towards something that is more prepared to safeguard our portfolio from inflation.
Enter the room TIPs.
In a nutshell, TIPs are treasury inflation protected securities, issued by the US government, that are designed to shield investors from declines in purchasing power by being indexed to inflation.

What jumps out to me immediately from an annual performance standpoint, when I compare TIPS with Intermediate Term Treasury and Long Term Treasury, are the years 2008 & 2009 and 2021 & 2022.
You'll notice uncorrelated performance in 2008 when TIPS were less defensive and much stronger recovery in 2009.
In more recent times, when inflation has been persistent and pesky, TIPS have done their job by being above water in 2021 and more relatively defensive in 2022.

While Long Term Treasury and Intermediate Treasury have a correlation of 0.86 adding TIPS to the mix provides an immediately clear diversification benefit.
TIPS correlation with Long Term Treasury is 0.63 and with Intermediate Term Treasury is 0.72.
This in my opinion is a considerable diversification upgrade in the fixed income sleeve of the portfolio.

6) Trend-Following To The All-Weather Portfolio
One of the most most glaring omissions from the Ray Dalio All-Weather portfolio is a total lack of managed futures exposure.
I wrote a detailed post about the benefits of trend-following and why it is not a more popular investing strategy.
Basically, being able to go both long/short commodities, currencies, equities and bonds from a broad range of global markets adds massive diversification to the portfolio given it is an uncorrelated strategy to both stocks and bonds.
Consider 2022 for example.
When both equities and bond markets from across the globe (have by and large) been down for the year, trend-following strategies have been thriving.
Why?
Because they adapt like a chameleon to whatever is going on in the markets in terms of short-term, medium-term and long-term signals.
When equity markets are down they say "yes" to that by shorting exposure.
When bonds are down they also say "yes" to that by shorting exposure.
One other clear benefit is that this strategy isn't nearly as volatile as Gold and Commodities allocations.
You don't have the at times annual -20% to -40% years of volatile drawdowns.
When I examine annualized data from SG Trend index I'm noticing a worst year of only -8.11% in 2018.
SG Trend Index Returns

What I'm most impressed with is the performance of this strategy during the early 2000s and 2008 in particular.
When equities are struggling (such as in 2022) trend-following provides significant fortification to the portfolio in terms of historical backtests.
Hence, adding a managed futures trend-following strategy to our enhanced Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio is quite honestly a no-brainer.

7) Market Neutral Investing Strategy To The All Weather Portfolio
A market neutral investing strategy is the most conservative of all the long-short equity strategies.
Its NET exposure is often far less than its long-short brother and active extensions sister.
It seeks to select stocks it thinks will relatively outperform while shorting those that it feels are either relatively overvalued or will potentially underperform.
Managers of a market neutral strategy are seeking to profit from both increasing and decreasing prices in the marketplace.

Consider the performance of Picton Mahoney, a Canadian alternative fund provider, with its long-short market neutral mandate.
A much higher sharpe ratio than its TSX benchmark (0.81 vs 0.40) and standard deviation of 4.71% versus 17.05%.
More importantly notice the difference in terms of annual returns.
Above water in 2008 at 2.12% when equities were down -33% and again in 2015 and 2018 when equities were below water.
Adding a market-neutral strategy to the portfolio should very well improve its overall diversification.

8) Merger Arbitrage Addition To The All Weather Portfolio
Let's add a merger arbitrage strategy to the portfolio.
I just finished interviewing Julian from Accelerate about merger arbitrage as an alternative investment strategy.
Please check it out.
Briefly, merger arbitrage is an event driven hedge fund strategy that purchases stocks of merging companies attempting to take advantage of market inefficiencies before (and/or after) a merger/acquisition.
Let's once again consult with Picton Mahoney as they've been delivering results from a merger arbitrage mandate for several years.

Check out that Sharpe Ratio of 1.17!
No negative years.
A 77.45% positive months success rate.
A standard deviation = 3.75%.
We're adding more stability/defensiveness to the portfolio with this unique strategy.

9) Mystery Asset Allocation To The All-Weather Portfolio
Here is the fun part.
I'm carving out a dedicated portion of the portfolio for you to add whatever you want.
That's right.
It's entirely a choose your own adventure sleeve.
When it comes to all of the potential options to consider for this totally flexible "mystery asset allocation" sleeve here are a few options that come to mind:

Private Equity
Managed Futures (Global Systematic strategies other than trend-following)
Crypto Currency
Active Extension Equities 130/30
NFTs
Art, Wine, Collectibles
REITs
Real Assets
Private Debt
Factor Optimized Equities (Value, Momentum, Quality, Size, Yield)
Reinsurance 

Personally, I'd probably choose a few of these at 2-3% slices but that's just me.
Whatever you'd do with this 10% is entirely subjective.
I believe investing should also be "fun" and not just a boring procedure, so this 10% might seem trivial but I'm hoping it provides a creative outlet for those who are curious about certain asset classes/strategies but never pursued them before.
Have a little bit of fun.
Life is short.

10) All Weather Tail Protection Addition
Let's slap a little insurance on this portfolio for those rare black swan events.
How can we do this?
By adding tail protection.
Tail risk arises when the portfolio (typically equities) moves three standard deviations from the mean.
It's a rare event.
But let's be prepared for it.
One of the easiest ways we can add insurance to the portfolio is by purchasing put options at various strike prices that trigger if/when a severe equity drawdown takes place.
Think 2008 levels.
We've got other elements in our portfolio that will be conspiring to keep our portfolio above water in this type of scenario but adding tail risk protection is just another way we can "diversify our diversifiers" as some folks in this industry love to say.

Enhanced Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
Now that we've made 10 different adjustments to potentially improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio what do we have as the final asset allocation?

New Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
30% Global Minimum Minimum Volatility Equities40% Long Term Treasury Bonds15% Intermediate Term Treasury Bonds7.5% Gold7.5% Commodities40% Managed Futures (Trend-Following)20% TIPS (Treasury Inflation Protected Securities)15% Market Neutral Equities10% Merger Arbitrage Strategy10% Wildcard (Crypto, NFTs, Reinsurance, Factor Equities, ETC. Whatever you want!)5% Tail Protection Strategy
That's quite a few enhancements!
To recap briefly the only thing we tinkered with in terms of the original Ray Dalio All Weather portfolio was ultimately going global with equities and choosing minimum volatility as our factor as opposed to market-cap weighting.
The rest of the "classic configuration" stays the same with 40% Long Term Treasury, 15% Intermediate Term Treasury, 7.5% Gold and 7.5% Commodities.
For the additional 100% layer we've added 40% Managed futures, 20% TIPS, 15% Market-Neutral Equities, 10% Merger Arbitrage, 10% Whatever You Want and 5% Tail Protection.
The primary goal of the expanded canvas was to add uniquely uncorrelated (or less correlated) multi-asset class strategies as additional layers of return streams while boosting overall portfolio diversification.
I'm happy with what we've been able to accomplish here.
In fact, it is quite similar to the All Weather Picture Perfect Portfolio I've designed.
I could easily ride this portfolio off into the sunset as I believe it'll provide a beautiful intersection of returns meets risk management.
But that's just my opinion.
I'm interested in yours.
Do you think this is an improvement over the original Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio or would you have just left things the same?
Please let me know in the comment section below.
If you enjoyed this article I think you might also like "10 Ways Investors Can Improve A 60/40 Portfolio | Ultimate Enhanced 60/40 Portfolio With ETFs" where we expand the canvas to add alternative sources of returns in addition to what is classically provided with equities and bonds.
12-Question FAQ — 10 Ways Investors Can Improve the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio
1) What is the classic Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio?
A rules-driven allocation aimed to work across economic regimes: 30% US stocks, 40% long-term Treasuries, 15% intermediate Treasuries, 7.5% gold, 7.5% commodities—tilting conservative vs. a 60/40 while adding inflation hedges.
2) Why try to “improve” an All Weather portfolio?
To maintain the all-regime intent while pursuing higher risk-adjusted returns and shallower drawdowns by expanding beyond long-only stocks/bonds/commodities and adding uncorrelated strategies.
3) What’s the first upgrade—global vs. US-only equities?
Swap the US-only sleeve for global equities to reduce home-country bias and capture diversification across EAFE and emerging markets without having to pick regional winners.
4) Why use Minimum Volatility (MinVol) for the equity sleeve?
MinVol historically delivers smoother rides (lower stdev) and better downside capture than market-cap weighting—aligned with All Weather’s goal of defensive resilience.
5) What does “expand the canvas” mean here?
Move from 100% to ~200% total exposure (return stacking/leverage)—not to double stocks/bonds, but to add new, uncorrelated return streams on top of the core without crowding out the base.
6) Which bond enhancement belongs first?
TIPS (Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities) complement long/intermediate Treasuries by directly indexing principal to inflation—helpful when inflation is persistent or surprise-positive.
7) Why add Managed Futures (trend-following)?
Managed futures can go long/short across commodities, rates, currencies, and equities; they’ve tended to zig when stocks/bonds zag, offering crisis alpha and regime adaptability.
8) What’s the role of Market-Neutral equity?
Market-neutral seeks stock-selection alpha with near-zero net market exposure, targeting low volatility and low correlation—an additional return stream that doesn’t rely on market beta.
9) How does Merger Arbitrage help?
Event-driven merger arb harvests deal spreads with historically low volatility and low equity beta, adding another differentiated source of return and drawdown buffer.
10) What’s the “Wildcard” sleeve for?
A ~10% sandbox to personalize the portfolio—e.g., crypto, reinsurance, real assets, private debt/equity, factor sleeves—kept small to preserve the portfolio’s core risk profile while letting investors express views.
11) Why include tail-risk protection?
Systematic put options/tail hedges can help during multi-sigma selloffs, complementing trend and diversifiers to further cap left-tail outcomes (with an expected carry cost in calm markets).
12) What does the enhanced allocation look like at a glance?
Core stays recognizable (now global MinVol equities + Treasuries + gold/commodities). The added 100% layer introduces managed futures, TIPS, market-neutral, merger arb, a wildcard sleeve, and tail hedging—all aimed at more diversification without over-relying on equities.

#### 20 Different 3 Fund Expanded Canvas Portfolios With 4+ Strategies
Sometimes it's a good idea to give yourself a creative challenge.
One of my biggest weaknesses as an investor, that I've tried my best not to spill over profusely onto this site, is that I'm inclined towards complexity.
I love keeping a messy room when it comes to my own personal portfolio.
In other words, I've got lots of funds under the hood.
Way more than the average investor.
In terms of constructive feedback, I've had investors tell me that my portfolio ideas (that tend to be somewhere between 5 to 10 funds on average) are often overly complicated.
Hence, I've given myself a fun challenge.

Can I come up with diversified model portfolios that are capital efficient using only three funds?
Here is my specific mandate:
Create a series of diversified portfolios that offer 4 or more strategies that are limited to just 3 funds.
At first, I thought I'd maybe only come up with 4 to 6.
However, I've got 20 to share with you today!
Yes, you heard that correctly.
20.
Furthermore, they all follow the guidelines and template of the Picture Perfect Portfolios 2.0 model portfolios:

Capital Efficiency
Maximum Diversification
Optimization

An attempt by an amateur investor to come up with serious portfolios with absolutely ridiculous names.
You'll notice they range from 140% to 200% canvas size and from ultra defensive (tactical equity exposure of 0% in defensive mode) to 100% equities plus diversifiers.
Moreover, each portfolio features a minimum of 4 strategies and a maximum of 9.
This challenge helped me to think more creatively and to tighten the reigns.
I was actually surprised that it's a cinch to put together a diversified portfolio with just 3 funds.
So without further ado, let's explore them!
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
20 Expanded Canvas Portfolios: 3 Funds / 4+ Strategies

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Perfect Pizza Portfolio
40% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GDMN - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Gold Miners Strategy Fund
Canvas: 196%
Exposures:
40% Equities40% Carry (Futures)40% Managed Futures40% Bonds36% Gold Strategy (Gold exposure + Gold producing equities)
Strategies: 6
Objective: A capital efficient alternative to an equal slice Harry Browne Portfolio with extra diversifiers (managed futures & carry) instead of cash
Benchmark: Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio (25% VTI / 25% GLD / 25% TLT / 25% BIL)

Bounty Hunter Portfolio
40% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 200%
Exposures:
100% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures20% Carry (Futures)
Strategies: 4
Objective: To outperform an all equity portfolio utilizing a diverse capital efficient ensemble of 100% alternatives added to the mix
Benchmark: 100% Equities (60% SPY + 40% VT)

Tightrope Walker Portfolio
40% $UPAR - UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF40% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund20% $QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesBonds (including TIPs)Managed FuturesGoldMarket NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 9
Objective: As balanced and diverse of a portfolio that one could possibly assemble where maximum diversity is priority numero uno
Benchmark: None

The Chameleon Portfolio
50% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund25% $RDMIX - Rational/ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation Fund25% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesManaged Futures (Trend)BondsGlobal Systematic MacroTail-RiskStyle Premia
Strategies: 6
Objective: An adaptive alternative to a global static risk parity portfolio where diversification reigns supreme
Benchmark: Global Risk Parity (50% $AGG / 30% $VT / 10% $GLD / 10% $DBC)

Coin It Portfolio
40% $GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund ETF36% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF24% $BTRN - Bitcoin Trend Strategy ET
Canvas: 168%
Exposures:
36% Equities36% Gold36% Managed Futures36% Bonds24% Bitcoin (Trend-Following)
Strategies: 5
Objective: A diversified and capital efficient balanced portfolio with a generous allocation budget and tilt towards Bitcoin
Benchmark: None

Value Vulture Portfolio
60% $AVGV - Avantis All Equity Markets Value ETF20% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
60% Global Value Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures20% Gold
Strategies: 4
Objective: A balanced take on a global value tilted portfolio with three additional strategies added to the mix (bonds, managed futures, gold)
Benchmark: Global 60/40 (60% VT / 40% AGG)

Pack Mule Portfolio (60/40+)
40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $QDSIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 160%
Exposures:
60% Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures40% Alt-Other:Market NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 8
Objective: To pack mule a diverse set of alternatives to the backbone of a 60/40 portfolio
Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio (VBIAX and AOR)

Even-Steven Portfolio
50% $ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF25% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF25% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
50% Global Min Vol Equities50% Bonds25% Managed Futures25% Gold
Strategies: 4
Objective: Equal Parts Equities (50%), Bonds (50%) and Alternatives (50%) for a balanced defensive approach.
Benchmark: 50% VT / 50% AGG

So Trendy Portfolio
50% $BLNDX - Standpoint Multi-Asset Fund30% $GMOM - Cambria Global Momentum ETF20% $COM - Direxion Auspice Broad Commodity Strategy ETF
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global Equities (MCW + factors)Managed FuturesBondsCommodities (long + long/flat)
Strategies: 4
Objective: A pure trend portfolio (long, long-flat and long-short strategies) with exposure to a diverse range of global asset classes
Benchmark: AOK and AOR

Quantasaurus Portfolio
40% $SPQ - Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $GDE - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund ETF
Canvas: 176%
Exposures:
58% Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures20% QIS Multi-Strategy18% Gold
Strategies: 5
Objective: An alternative tilted portfolio where 78% of the portfolio exposure is committed to strategies other than long-stocks and bonds
Benchmark: None

Living Large L/S Portfolio
40% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF40% $QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund20% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
40% Equities40% Long-Short Equities40% Managed Futures20% Style Premia
Strategies: 4
Objective: A portfolio where every fund has exposure to L/S strategies across a diverse range of asset classes.
Benchmark: None

The Sloth Portfolio
35% $GDE – WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Fund35% $RSBT – Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF30% $CAOS – Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF
Canvas: 163%
Exposures:
31.5% Equities31.5% Gold35% Bonds35% Managed Futures (Trend)30% Tail Risk: OTM Put
Strategies: 5
Objective: A Dragon-inspired portfolio with a slow and steady approach to accumulation whilst defensively being prepared for all economic scenarios
Benchmark: None

Factorious Portfolio
60% $GLOF - iShares Global Equity Factor ETF20% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $RSBY - Return Stacked Bonds & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
60% Global Multi-Factor Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures (Trend)20% Carry (Futures)
Strategies: 4
Objective: A factor first approach to asset allocation where a multi-strategy approach is favoured over MCW equities.
Benchmark: 60% VT / 40% AGG

Creative Canvas Portfolio
60% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF20% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF20% $RSBY - Return Stacked Bonds & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)
Canvas: 200%
Exposures:
60% Equities60% Managed Futures40% Bonds20% Gold20% Carry
Strategies: 5
Objective: To expand the canvas to 200% with a balanced 60/40 portfolio plus diversifiers
Benchmark: 60/40 Portfolio ($VBIAX)

The Coward Portfolio
20% $HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced U.S. Equity Strategy ETF40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF40% $GOLY - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF
Canvas: 200% or 180%
Exposures:
Offensive:
40% Equities80% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Gold
Defensive:
0% Equities80% Bonds40% Managed Futures40% Gold20% Cash
Strategies: 4 of 5
Objective: A portfolio that has the ability to retreat to 0% equity exposure (hence the nickname 'coward') during market downturn scenarios
Benchmark: 20/80 Portfolio (20% $VTI / 80% $AGG)

Double Double Eh Portfolio
60% $AOFT - Auspice One Fund Trust30% $PFAA.TO - Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative Fund10% $QBTL.TO - AGF US Market Neutral Anti-Beta CAD-Hedged ETF
Canvas: Variable
Exposures:
Global EquitiesManaged Futures (Trend)BondsGoldM/N EquityArbitrageSpecial Situation CreditStyle Premia
Strategies: 8
Objective: An alternative strategy for Canadians to consider who are seeking maximum diversification above all other considerations
Benchmark: Global Balanced (VBAL.TO ETF)

Ultimate Defender Portfolio
40% $ACWV - iShares MSCI Global Min Vol Factor ETF50% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF10% $CAOS - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF
Canvas: 150%
Exposures:
40% Global Min Vol Equities50% Bonds50% Managed Futures10% OTM PUT
Strategies: 4
Objective: To overall limit exposure to equities (40%) and to choose the most defensive stocks strategy (min vol) to stabilize the portfolio
Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio (40% VT / 60% AGG)

Tactical Tornado Portfolio
40% $RSSY - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (coming soon)40% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $HCMT - Direxion HCM Tactical Enhanced U.S. Equity Strategy ETF
Canvas: 200% or 180%
Exposures:
Offensive:
80% Equities40% Managed Futures40% Bonds40% Carry (Futures)
Defensive:
40% Equities40% Managed Futures40% Bonds40% Cary (Futures)20% Cash
Strategies: 4 or 5
Objective: A portfolio that is balanced but has an offensive boost towards growth (80%) or tactically retreats to conservative (40%) equity exposure
Benchmark: None

Tortoise Portfolio
20% $USML - ETRACS 2x Leveraged MSCI US Minimum Volatility Factor TR ETN60% $RSBT - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF20% $BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund
Canvas: 180%
Exposures:
60% Bonds60% Managed Futures40% US Min Vol Equities20% M/N Anti-Beta
Strategies: 4
Objective: A portfolio that is designed for slow and steady accumulation with the potential to retreat into its shell during market turbulence
Benchmark: 40/60 Portfolio (40% $VTI / 60% $AGG)

Alt Arrow Portfolio
40% $RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% $QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity Fund40% $QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund
Canvas: 140%
Exposures:
40% Global Equities40% Bonds40% Alt Other20% L/S EquitiesMarket NeutralMacroStyle PremiaArbitrageMulti-Asset
Strategies: 9
Objective: A portfolio where alternative strategies take up 60% of the resources in terms of asset allocation with only 40% to stocks/bonds.
Benchmark: None
Bonus Portfolios
Here are some bonus portfolios from other friends and acquaintances on FinTwit.
I love receiving contributions from others as it almost always opens my eyes to new possibilities.

Triforce Portfolio
Creator: @game_book_life
Backtest:
https://x.com/game_book_life/status/1773768852821684721
36.5% $RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF27% $NTSI - WisdomTree International Efficient Core Fund36.5% $QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund
Canvas: 186.5%
Exposures:
60.8% Equities (60/40 US/exUS)36.5% Managed Futures16.2% Bonds73% Style Premia
Strategies: 4
Objective: An alternative to a global 60/40 portfolio that avoids home country bias (with Int-Developed equities) whilst committing significant resources to style premia and managed futures
Benchmark: Global 60/40 (60% $VT / 40% VBTLX)
3-Fund, 4+-Strategy Portfolios: Your Expanded-Canvas FAQ
1) What is a “3-fund expanded canvas” portfolio?
It’s a capital-efficient portfolio built from only three tickers that collectively deliver exposure to four or more return drivers (e.g., equities, bonds, managed futures, gold, carry, style premia). By stacking exposures inside each fund (e.g., 90/60, 100/100), you expand total “canvas” beyond 100% while keeping the lineup simple.
2) How do you measure the “canvas size” (e.g., 140%–200%)?
Canvas size approximates the portfolio’s summed gross exposures. For example, a 40% position in a 100/100 fund contributes ~40% equity + ~40% bonds. Add up all stacked sleeves across the three funds; totals above 100% indicate an expanded canvas that frees room for diversifiers without sacrificing core assets.
3) Why limit the build to only three funds?
Three funds force discipline. You capture meaningful diversification (4–9 strategies) with minimal operational complexity, fewer rebalance legs, lower trading friction, and cleaner risk oversight—yet still benefit from stacked, uncorrelated sleeves.
4) Which return drivers show up most across the 20 models?
The common quartet is global equities, bonds, managed futures (trend), and gold. Many models also layer carry, market-neutral/anti-beta, style premia, macro, long/short equity, options/tail-risk, and selective bitcoin trend exposure for asymmetric shock protection or convexity.
5) How do these models balance offense and defense?
Offense comes from equities (sometimes factor-tilted) and carry/style premia; defense is delivered by managed futures, gold, market-neutral, and optional tail-risk. Several portfolios have tactical sleeves that can dial equity from full throttle to near-zero during downtrends.
6) What distinguishes “defensive” vs “offensive” 3-fund builds?
Defensive variants bias to min-vol equities, larger bond and trend sleeves, gold, and optional puts—aiming for shallow drawdowns. Offensive versions tilt toward higher equity weight, equity-plus overlays, and return-enhancing alts while still retaining diversifiers that historically shine in stress.
7) How do carry and style-premia fit in a 3-fund mix?
Carry (e.g., futures yield) and multi-premia/style strategies diversify beyond pure beta and trend. They often have low correlation to both stocks and bonds, offering smoother returns between equity cycles and complementing crisis-alpha from managed futures.
8) Can a 3-fund build rival a classic 60/40?
Yes. Several lineups recreate or surpass 60/40 risk/return by return-stacking: one fund supplies equity+bond beta, while the other two introduce trend, gold, and premia. The idea is 60/40 plus—keeping the core engine while adding uncorrelated sleeves for better Sharpe and smaller max drawdowns.
9) How should I think about rebalancing with stacked funds?
Use calendar (e.g., quarterly/semiannual) or band-based rules (e.g., ±20% of target sleeve weights). Because stacked funds move multiple sleeves at once, keep rebalancing simple and avoid over-trading; let the embedded strategies (trend/tactical) do some of the heavy lifting.
10) What risks should I monitor in expanded-canvas builds?
Watch leverage mechanics, derivative collateral, bond duration mix, concentration, tracking difference, and liquidity/spreads. Ensure each fund’s process is transparent, capacity-aware, and consistent with your risk budget—especially when total canvas approaches 180–200%.
11) How do I choose among the 20 models?
Rank by your priorities: drawdown tolerance, equity target, strategy count, and simplicity. If defense is paramount, prefer min-vol/anti-beta + trend + gold. If growth is key, favor equity-plus overlays with complementary managed futures and premia. Match exposures to your time horizon and behavior.
12) Are these meant to be copied as-is?
No—treat them as templates. The tickers illustrate how to stack exposures; your final mix should reflect personal objectives, tax location, account type, and product access. The win is learning how to get 4–9 distinct strategies from only three funds while keeping the portfolio manageable.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
Whew, thanks for making it through all 20 portfolios!
I hope I didn't overwhelm you with options galore.
Sometimes going to a behemoth supermarket can make me feel anxious as I'm overwhelmed by choices.
However, I wanted to present as many different portfolio options as possible to explore all of the interesting combinations out there.
These, at the end of the day, are just ideas.
I'm of the firm opinion that it's not a wise idea to just copy any of these portfolios; instead put your personal stamp of approval by coming up with something that makes sense for you.
With all that said, there has never been a better time IMO to be a capital efficient DIY investor.
You have so many options these days as fascinating puzzles pieces continue to penetrate the marketplace.
But at this point in the article I'm more interested in what you've got to say.
What are some three fund portfolio ideas that you've come up with?

#### 5 Reasons Why I'm Not A Bogleheads Investor And Never Will Be
At some point in your investing journey you'll likely encounter a group that is the literal antithesis of what you stand for as an investor.
For me that investing group is The Bogleheads.
They're the opposite of me in more or less every manner possible under the sun, moon and stars above.
I don't believe in market-cap weighted equity exposure as if it was pancakes drowning in maple syrup on a Sunday morning.
I'm not slavishly obsessed with fees. I'd rather have dessert than collect crumbs under the table.
I don't believe in being average.
I'm not keen to stay in my lane.
I'm not interested in commandments and rules.
I'm contrarian by nature and a sponge investor at heart.
I'm not overly predictable and willing to tow the party line - espousing talking points that have been refuted at large.

Also, I'm curious enough to have studied alternative investment strategies and equity optimization to the point where I've put in the necessary work (with regards to back-tests) to see firsthand that portfolios composed of market-cap weighted equities and aggregate bonds are not sufficiently diversified and all-weather regime prepared.
Last but not least, I'm not seeking affiliation as an investor and I'm not interested in going down a narrow tunnel where I'll be making myself prone to confirmation bias.
Also, and by the way most importantly, I'm not interested in doing what everyone else is doing in life or with my investment portfolio.
Had I done that in my life, I wouldn't have met my wife (a fellow travel media personality), wouldn't have taught English in South Korea, wouldn't have travelled the world to visit 75 different countries and wouldn't be currently working on exciting new projects (this blog) and something I'm doing in Argentina at the moment.
I'd be living on the small-island I grew up on in British Columbia. I'd be working a nine to five. I'd be not living out my personal legend during this brief time I've got on this planet.
This is a longer intro than normal but I had quite a bit to get off of my chest!
Before I inform you of the 5 reasons why I'm not a Bogleheads investor, let's first define what one is.

Why I Am Not A Boglehead
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Who Are The Bogleheads

They're a group of 90,000 registered members that honor Vanguard founder and late investor John Bogle.
John Bogle, unlike his followers today, was a contrarian and maverick in the sense he was the creator of the index fund.
Having to endure criticism and scorn, during the early days of its creation, was something John faced during indexings early years.
The index fund in many ways changed the investment landscape for the better.
Bad active management and high fees were the options being served to investors in terms of typical funds for most of the 20th century.
Indexing changed all of that. And for the better.
However, owning market-cap weighted stocks and aggregate bonds, although potentially geographically diverse (if one goes global and doesn't succumb to home country bias) is anything but strategically or stylistically diverse.
It's pure and simple market-beta.
Research has show that optimization of equities and alternative investments make portfolios more robust, resilient and regime ready for whatever economic regime is thrown its way.
Instead of recognizing that further research has advanced portfolio strategies, since the days of John Bogle's revolutionary achievements, investors that adhere to his philosophy today have portfolios that are less than optimal.

What Do The Bogleheads Believe

The Bogleheads believe in the following 11 core principles under "prepare to invest" plus "create a portfolio" and "maintain discipline".
1) Live below your means2) Develop a workable plan3) Never bear too much or too little risk4) Invest early and often 5) Diversify6) Invest with simplicity7) Use index funds when possible8) Minimize costs9) Minimize taxes10) Never try to time the market11) Stay the course

I agree with most of these.
In fact, it is only points 5, 6, 7 and 8 where I don't see eye to eye.
Let's now explore the reasons I'm not a member of the Bogleheads, never have been a member of the Bogleheads and never will be a member of the Bogleheads.

Top 5 Reasons I'm Not A Bogleheads Investor

1) Simplicity vs Complexity
One click and done. All in one. Simple indexing.
Stocks. Bonds.
This all sounds great until a scenario such as the 70s, early 2000s, 2008 and 2022 rears its ugly head.
How does a simple strategy of merely market-cap weighted stocks and bonds perform under those scenarios.
Terrible.
The idea of simplifying your life is a powerful and strong message.
It makes sense in a lot of ways.
But in terms of investing, it leaves you prone to significant drawdowns when stocks are getting hammered in the markets and bonds are not providing (as much or way too little) defensive coverage.
What is missing?
A 1-2-3 approach to diversification.
Let's explore that below.

2) Lack of Strategic Diversification
When I started working on my Picture Perfect Portfolio design, I did so from a bottoms up approach.
I was genuinely curious to see what would enhance returns and provide significant downside protection.
What I found was that I needed to expand the canvas from 100% to something greater.
I then started plugging in equal parts equities, bonds and alternatives and magic started to happen.
I could build a portfolio that achieved significantly higher returns while managing risk better than the industry standard 60/40.
The "secret sauce" was alternative investments and a multi-strategy and multi-asset class approach.
When I back-tested results, by just owning market-cap weighted stocks and aggregate bonds I would both underperform and have significantly more negative years.
By merely shaving down a small amount of equities and bonds and adding an alternative, such as gold, I would greatly improve the results, risk, sortino, sharpe, maximum drawdown, worst year and overall success ratio of my portfolio.
Just by doing one thing alone. Thinking outside of the box.
Being open to new ideas.
Embracing alternatives.
That is all it took to enhance returns and manage risk.
And gold is not anywhere close to being the best alternative strategy in my opinion.
It is far too volatile.
For instance, managed futures provides better risk-adjusted uncorrelated returns.
Adding TIPS in the bond category smoothed out my portfolio and made it more inflation regime ready.
By adding uncorrelated assets and adhering to an equal parts equity, bonds and alternative sleeve I obtained, what for me, is the Picture Perfect Portfolio.

3) Factor Investing and Market Cap Size Exposure
I've now written three different articles on the benefits of optimizing equity strategies using a multi-factor rules based approach, considering mid-cap investing in your portfolio and avoiding a large-cap centric portfolio unless you're interested in finishing in last place.
The benefits of having exposure to mid-cap, small-cap and micro-cap equities includes enhanced potential returns and no lost decades over the past 50 years.
With large-cap centric portfolios being prone to investor exuberance, high forward P/E concentration and narrative based investing it makes sense to hang-out in territory where the road is less travelled.
Moreover, equity factor strategies provide exposure to uncorrelated strategies that perform well and struggle under various economic regimes.
For instance minimum volatility, yield and quality strategies are more defensive than market-cap weighted equities.
Pro-cyclical strategies such as deep value investing and size exposure can perform relatively well when market-cap beta is struggling.
Consider how well value is doing this year versus broad markets?
By including numerous factor strategies in your portfolio you'll ensure that you'll always have 'something' in your portfolio that relatively thrives.
This also means you'll have strategies that underperform.
That is what diversification looks like.
Not putting all of your risk in market-beta.
Having opportunities to contribute "buy low" when strategies are underperforming while riding recent winners that are doing great.

4) Being Mediocre = Play It Safe "Own Them All"
Out of all the things that irk me about the philosophy of The Bogleheads group it is the message of being mediocre.
Be average. Own them all.
Own them all?
Why would anyone want to do that?
Think about any other endeavor you pursue in life.
Imagine yourself as the manager of a professional sports team.
Would you want to own the average players in the league?
If so, you'd be comfortable finishing in the middle of the pack, missing the playoffs and alienating your fan base over time.
It is through the process of 'selection' and 'exclusion' that you come up with something optimal.
For instance, my Picture Perfect Portfolio has been able to achieve such phenomenal backtests because of what it owns and what it doesn't own.
Minimum volatility equities, for instance, screen out the most volatile companies and seek the most stable ones.
This strategy in the past 20 years has proven to be at times 1000 basis points more defensive than "owning them all" in a market-cap weighted strategy.

5) Slavish Fee Obsession
Honestly who doesn't love a bargain? Wouldn't we all want to pay less for something?
Yes. But not if it means owning an inferior product.
Also, not if it excludes certain uncorrelated investing strategies that improve diversification and portfolio stability just because they inherently have higher costs such as trend-following.
Would I be willing to pay a few more basis points for a more sophisticated multi-factor equity strategy that has proven to outperform over long periods of time by 150 to 300 basis points?
Most definitely.
In some ways this slavish fee obsession seems akin to fighting over crumbs under the table when dessert is being served up above to other guests sitting patiently.
Nomadic Samuel traveling in Peru with a camera in hand
Final Thoughts From Nomadic Samuel
At the end of the day I'm a Sponge Investor and not a Bogleheads Investor.
Although there is plenty I respect about the Bogleheads there is equally as many things I'll never be in full agreement over.
I'm highly cognizant of what being a part of a group does in terms of influencing your openness to new ideas and research.
Thus, I'm not looking to ever be a hardcore value investor, a Bogleheads investor or part of any other type of investing group.
I'm a free-agent that is perpetually seeking to improve the performance, diversification and risk-management of my portfolio.
I wish all investors well and to be perfectly honest if you focus on your patience, time, discipline, diversification and strategy of your portfolio you'll likely achieve all of your investing goals.
However, at the end of the day I'm pursuing the picture perfect portfolio and being a part of the Bogleheads group would be detrimental to that process.
So best of luck Bogleheads but I'm off on my own investing journey.
Ciao for now.
5 Reasons Why I’m Not A Bogleheads Investor — 12-Question FAQ (Philosophy, Portfolio Design, and Trade-offs)
What is the Bogleheads philosophy in one sentence?
Keep costs low, own broad market-cap-weighted index funds, keep taxes low, stay the course, and avoid market timing or complexity.
Why do you disagree with “own the market” simplicity?
Simplicity can mask concentrated risk in market beta and a reliance on stock/bond negative correlation. It may work in benign regimes, but it’s less prepared for inflation shocks or correlation spikes.
What’s your main diversification critique of classic Boglehead portfolios?
They diversify geographically but not strategically. Adding alternatives (e.g., managed futures/trend, commodities, gold) and factor tilts can broaden return drivers and reduce reliance on one regime.
How do factor strategies improve on cap-weight?
Rules-based tilts (value, quality, momentum, min-vol, size) can disperse risk across behaviors and balance sheets, offering different payoff profiles across cycles versus a mega-cap-heavy cap-weighted index.
Isn’t paying higher fees always worse?
Fees matter, but net outcomes matter more. If a well-designed multi-factor or alternative sleeve improves risk-adjusted returns and drawdown control, a few extra basis points can be rational.
When can Boglehead simplicity actually be a good choice?
For investors prioritizing behavioral ease, ultra-low cost, minimal oversight, and long horizons, a simple allocation can be perfectly serviceable—provided they accept large equity-driven drawdowns.
What do you mean by “expand the canvas” beyond 100%?
Using capital-efficient or embedded-leverage funds judiciously lets you hold more diversifiers without sacrificing equity exposure, potentially targeting equity-like returns with smoother risk.
How do you avoid “diworsification” while adding sleeves?
Set clear objectives, test correlations and factor overlap, size positions with risk budgets, and require each sleeve to contribute a distinct role (return, ballast, crisis alpha, inflation hedge).
What role do bonds play if stocks and bonds can fall together?
Bonds still hedge growth shocks and recessions, but add inflation-aware bonds (e.g., TIPS) and trend/commodities to address inflationary or supply-shock regimes where bonds struggle.
How should a non-Boglehead portfolio be rebalanced?
Use bands (e.g., 20% relative or 2–5% absolute), calendar checks (semi-annual/annual), and drawdown playbooks (pre-planned actions at −10/−20/−30%) to keep decisions systematic, not emotional.
What are the biggest behavioral risks in either approach?
Recency bias, overconfidence, performance-chasing, and loss aversion. Simplicity helps some stick to a plan; complexity helps others prepare for regimes—both fail without discipline.
If someone wants to evolve beyond pure Boglehead, where to start?
Keep a low-cost core, then add one or two evidence-based sleeves: a multi-factor equity fund and a trend/managed-futures sleeve. Monitor correlations, costs, taxes, and your own behavior.

#### Any Investor Can Ignore Your Best Advice And Be Wildly Successful
Any investor can ignore your best advice and be wildly successful in achieving all of their personal goals including the ultimate one of total financial freedom.
I don't care if you're a professional with decades of experience, an amateur with an unworldly track-record or if you believe you've got the most sophisticated portfolio ever invented.
Somebody else can totally ignore what it is you're doing and/or just flat out reject what you consider to be your bread and butter skillset, and be successful by doing the exact opposite.
Ouch.
That's gotta sting a little.
But before you think of all of the reasons why I might be wrong consider the following few examples.
For every investor out there that has achieved financial freedom with a 60/40 portfolio there is somebody else that has done so with just a handful of "blue chip" stocks that have been patiently held and compounding for generations.
For those who suggest you've got to spread out and diversify globally you'll find somebody who has achieved financial freedom by succumbing exclusively to home country bias.
And I'm not just referring to US based investors buying only US listed ETFs/stocks.
I'm talking about Swedish investors who own only Swedish stocks or Canadian investors buying exclusively Canadian equities.
Now at this point you're likely chomping at the bit to tell me why that's risky, doltish or flat out an inferior way to compound.
Look.
I hear you.
And you're probably right.
There likely are better ways to compound from a risk meets returns standpoint.
Heck, even from a sequence of returns point of view.
Surely, some of these "strange portfolios" could be enhanced or improved by doing a little bit (or a whole lot) of this and that.
Yet, if you're going down that route you're missing the point I'm trying to make.
Despite all of that you'll find folks who have done something that you find utterly cretinous yet it's allowed them to reach all of their financial goals whatever they may be.

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Examples From My Career As A Travel Media Specialist
When I first started my travel media network in the early 2010s I wasn't quite an OG but the industry as a whole was certainly very much in its infancy.
Those with more experience were trotting out advice like it was the Kentucky Derby.
"Content is King."
If it's not informative people won't read it.
"Publish X amount of times per week and be as active as possible on platform A, B and C."
Indeed, some of the advice being shared allowed certain travel professionals to grow from amateurs to professionals.
Yet, I also noticed that there were those who ignored almost all of the general consensus wisdom of best practices while achieving wild success.
Some had contrarian personalities and covered niches that had yet to be written about where they built a loyal audience.
When I switched over to creating YouTube videos I noticed this more and more.
The most popular genre at the time was daily vlogging and almost everybody was hopping on that gravy train for a while.
Fast forward a few years later and most of the daily vloggers had either quit, burnt out or alienated their fanbase.
Although some found success making this style of video, many other creators went in a completely different direction creating pillar content that required multiple days of filming and editing to polish things off.
Instead of putting out content daily they'd release a video once a week, once every two weeks or even once a month.
"You've got to let your personality shine through in order to attract an audience."
Most believe this and yet I can think of numerous examples where a channel has blown up by releasing videos where it is b-roll only with no speaking at all.
"Spread out and don't put your eggs all in one basket."
That advice has resonated with certain channels and yet others have become highly specialized niche experts going deep on only one particular subject.
You need to have punchy saturated colours, quick transitions and b-roll clips not extending beyond 3 seconds and yet some creators eschew this counsel by merely pointing the camera at their face and doing an entire monologue in just one clip.
In other words, there are many ways to become successful as a travel media specialist just as there are numerous paths to becoming a prosperous investor.

My Best Advice: Expand the Canvas and Maximally Diversify
If I had to boil down what I feel is my "best advice" to pass on to fellow investors it would be to expand the canvas of your portfolio and diversify maximally beyond merely various stock/bond combinations.
I'd suggest adding capital efficient products such as $UPAR, $GDE, $BLNDX and $NFDIX and using the "extra space" that these funds create in your portfolios to further diversify into strategies such as global systematic managed futures, trend-following, long volatility options, long-short equity, market-neutral, merger-arbitrage, absolute return fixed income, real assets, gold, bitcoin and others.
It would be paramount to insist upon a globally diversified portfolio spread out between US equities, International Developed and Emerging Markets.
Furthermore, I'd want to find out your financial goals, risk tolerance and stage in your life/investing cycle to ensure that the portfolio is constructed in an optimal manner that manages risk first while offering potentially great returns second.
For example, if you've achieved financial freedom, have a bit of a weak chin and a reasonable burn-rate it might make sense to skew the portfolio more towards defensive assets and strategies such as managed futures, tail-risk options puts, absolute return fixed income and market-neutral equities.
Irregardless, what is eventually your customized portfolio needs to have an IPS (Investment Statement Policy) with a zoom-out, chill-out and let it be clause clearly stated.
There you have it.
That's my best advice.
Now go ahead and literally ignore all of it and you can still find ways to succeed as an investor.
What would be the exact opposite of my approach?
Eschewing diversification.
Rejecting going global.
Only focusing on one asset class and strategy.
Trading and making portfolio moves without any rules based decisions.
Not rebalancing.
Market-cap weighting over research supported factor strategies.
Ignoring trend and being entirely static.
Discretionary over systematic.
Yep.
I'd want to puke.
Yet this might be what is best for you.
This might be what allows you to stay the course and achieve your wildest dreams.
And who am I (or anybody else) to get in the way of that.

All Of The Potential Portfolios Out There
When you think about it there are all kinds of mainstream and oddball ways to compound wealth out there.
Here are some that come to mind.
Stocks For The Long Run (equity only investing strategies whether they be Index or Factor ETFs or individual stocks)
Ferocious Fixed Income (a portfolio composed entirely of fixed income instruments)
Equity/Bond Mix and Matchers (a portfolio with 80/20, 60/40, 40/60 or 20/80 combinations of stocks and fixed income that tickles your risk tolerance fancy)
Long-only Risk Parity, Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio or Ray Dalio All-Weather (portfolios that add an "alternative sleeve" to the mix and also cap equity exposure)
Gregarious Gold Bugs (for those who just can't get enough gold in their portfolio to the point of outshining other asset classes)
Adaptive Asset Allocators (the types of portfolios that have the ability to adapt by going long/short/flat any asset class they choose via a myriad of different futures strategies)
Hedgehog Defenders (a portfolio that is hedged by absolute return strategies across all asset classes that often features portfolio insurance as part of the equation)
Laser Eyed Crypto Comrades (for those pursuing exclusively digital assets while rejecting everything else as being old school)
Twitchy Finger Traders (discretionary managers who trade stocks, bonds, futures, options based upon macro opinions they've formed)
Observant Options Operators (specialists who trade options in a variety of different ways)
Of course I could go on and on and on but this offers a general mix of what most investors may be pursing out there.

Examining Stocks For The Long Run
I think one of the most interesting "single strategies" that we could unpack is a stocks for the long run approach where you're 100% invested in equities only.
Isn't that risky?
Sure.
Your portfolio can be sliced in half (or more) under the right scenario when a bear market rears its ugly head.
For individual stock selectors you have the additional risk of the security you've invested in going belly up as a business with the consequences of losing it all.
Yet, if you do your homework and pick wide moat companies you're likely going to be holding something more stable than fringe companies that pop in and out of indexes.
If you're committed to the strategy for decades on end it'll likely work out just fine.
Maybe you've over-saved, have a low burn-rate or an emergency fund that covers you during times of market turmoil.
There is someone out there that owns only McDonald's stock that is wealthy beyond your wildest imagination and living financially independent from dividends only.
There is another person who invests only in the S&P 500 and chills out whereas some savvy individual is trading only micro-cap stocks.
You've got globally diversified factor investors, value vultures, low volatility linchpins and mid-cap mavens all compounding their way to financial self-reliance.
Your best advice might be to avoid all high P/E stocks at all cost and yet there are growth investors who gobble those up.
Diversify globally and do no succumb to home country bias and yet we've got investors out there with less stocks than you can count on your fingers fully invested in home country equities only thriving with that particular strategy.
Although I haven't met them yet there is somebody out there that only invests broadly in Emerging Markets or in specific regions such as Latin America only.
You'll find somebody using top-down strategies and analysis whereas others build their portfolios from a bottoms up approach.
Technical analysis versus fundamental analysis.
One investor is an expert at one while eschewing the other whereas some investors combine both.
Multi-factor versus single factor.
Barbell strategies versus high conviction singular approaches.
Minimum volatility over momentum.
You name it and someone out there is pursuing it profitably.

Investing Style That Matches Your Personality
Finding an investing style/strategy that matches you personality is crucial.
If you're the type of person that likes to tinker, you're going to struggle with a buy and hold approach while potentially flourishing as a tactical manager.
If you're someone who can sit through a bear market and not obsessively check your portfolio you'll likely thrive with a portfolio that involves permanent allocations.
Some investors prefer simplicity whereas others enjoy complexity.
The one-size-fits-all approach just doesn't work and I've noticed the daily interactions between certain militant camps of investors that feel as though they're going to finally convince the other side to see the light and vice versa.
For some it is Groundhog Day on Twitter 24/7.
The best investors out there are likely the most self-aware.
They do what makes sense for them and have an uncanny ability to ignore the constant noise and distractions.
There are numerous roads to Rome and we don't all have to be on the same path.
Nomadic Samuel rowing in the Black Forest region of Germany
Any Investor Can Ignore Your Best Advice And Be Wildly Successful — 12-Question FAQ
What is the core argument of this article?
That many different investing paths can lead to financial freedom, even when they contradict each other or ignore widely held “best practices.”
Does ignoring expert advice guarantee success?
No. It simply means success is possible via multiple approaches; discipline, time horizon, and fit with your personality still matter most.
How can opposite strategies both work?
Markets reward different behaviors across cycles. If a strategy matches the investor’s temperament and they stick with it, compounding can still do the heavy lifting.
What are examples of opposite approaches succeeding?
A classic 60/40, a handful of blue chips, home-country-only stocks, or even all-equity portfolios can each reach goals if the investor stays the course.
What is the author’s “best advice” in brief?
Expand the canvas: diversify globally, add alternatives and capital-efficient building blocks, and anchor decisions in a written Investment Policy Statement.
Who might benefit from doing the opposite of that advice?
Investors who can only stick with an ultra-simple, high-conviction approach may be better off concentrating rather than adopting a complex allocation they won’t follow.
What are the risks of concentration or home country bias?
Greater drawdown risk, sector or policy shocks, and missed global opportunities; these can be acceptable only if the investor understands and accepts them.
How should an investor pick a style that fits their personality?
Match strategy to behavior: tinkerers may prefer tactical rules, while patient holders may favor permanent allocations; self-awareness reduces bailout risk.
Is diversification still useful if many paths work?
Yes. Diversification lowers reliance on any single outcome and can smooth the ride, but it is not mandatory for every successful investor.
How should investors define success?
By personal goals: adequate savings rate, staying invested through cycles, meeting spending needs, and reaching financial independence on a chosen timeline.
What are common pitfalls when copying someone else’s portfolio?
Mismatch of risk tolerance and time horizon, quitting during drawdowns, and adopting complexity without conviction or process.
What tool helps any approach succeed?
A clear IPS with rules for contributions, rebalancing, risk limits, and a “zoom-out, chill-out, let-it-be” clause to prevent emotional decisions.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
There are few pursuits in life that offer as many different potential pathways as investing.
Whatever I or anyone else believes can be totally ignored and you can still reach all of your financial goals by sticking with something that makes sense for you personally.
That's not just true in investing but in most other pursuits in life.

#### AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund Review | QDSIX Mutual Fund Review
One of the earliest memories I have of "fending for myself" was that time I made a super sandwich as a teenager.
Left alone to my own devices for lunch, I rummaged around the kitchen and found some leftover sourdough bread, turkey and bacon.
That alone toasted would have done the trick.
But I had to take it a step further.
So out came the strawberry jam, banana and peanut butter.

I know what you're thinking.
That's "___________" disgusting!
Hear me out.

Turkey and bacon are no doubt a winning combo?
Same with peanut butter and jam and peanut butter and banana?
Well, I'm telling you that all five of them together with melted butter on the sourdough toast sure tickled the fancy of my juvenile tastebuds.
It was an incredible 6-1 combination of unlikely ingredients that came together for the most ridiculously assembled super sandwich only a teenager could fully appreciate.
Well, the fund we're going to review today is a super sandwich in the realm of alternative investments.
It takes six of AQR's alternative funds and somehow gets all of the ingredients under one hood.

The super fund of funds, multi-asset class and multi-strategy fund I'm referring to is none other than AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund.
Ticker QDSIX.
I'll attempt, as best my amateur eyes are capable of, to dissect what may be one of the best all-in-one alternative solutions for portfolios.
If you're not still thinking about the ridiculous sandwich I mentioned, we can get started!

AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund: What's Under The Hood?

At this point you're well aware this is a 6-1 super fund of funds but what exactly is under the hood of AQR Diversifying Strategies mutual fund?

"AQR Multi-Asset Fund: Invests by allocating risk, rather than dollars, in a balanced manner across multiple asset classes."
"AQR Macro Opportunities Fund: Invests across asset classes and geographies on the basis of macroeconomic trends."
"AQR Managed Futures Strategy HV Fund: Employs a trend following approach to going long and short liquid futures and forward contracts across asset classes."
"AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund: Invests long and short across investment styles, markets and asset classes."
"AQR Equity Market Neutral Fund: Seeks to generate returns without exposing investors to risks of equity markets by investing both long and short."
"AQR Diversified Arbitrage Fund: Combines arbitrage strategies into one portfolio in an effort to mitigate risk and harness multiple sources of return."

A better way of understanding the complex nature of this fund is to separate it into two categories.
The Active Multi-Asset Strategy (33% AQR Multi-Asset Fund) provides long-only tactical allocation to global equities, bonds and real assets.
This is what investors would be most familiar with in their traditional portfolios.
It's a diversified mix of the global asset classes that make a long-only portfolio diversified.

The Absolute Return Strategies (5 Other alternative AQR funds each at 13% slices) are the long-short adaptive funds that deploy a myriad of different strategies.
I'd need to unpack each individual fund (with its own discreet review) to properly cover every strategy.
I actually plan on doing that!
But for the purposes of this article we'll leave things to the brief strategy descriptions we highlighted above.
It's also important to note a difference between the fund's strategic and current holdings.

QDSIX utilizes a proprietary allocation methodology but with the discretion to modify based upon current market conditions.

AQR Diversifying Strategies: Correlations Between Funds

Here is where things get interesting.
We're able to determine the monthly correlations between all AQR funds under the hood dating back to November 2014.
Just for good measure I've added SPY ETF and AGG ETF to the mix, so that investors can get a taste of correlations between the S&P 500 and Aggregate bond index.
Here is where you're able to see a clear advantage of combining numerous alternative strategies together under one ticker.
Generally speaking, the alternative AQR strategies have low to negative correlations amongst each other.
Furthermore, they have low to negative correlations with SPY and AGG too.

AQR Diversifying Strategies Simulation Performance

Let's do a rough simulation of AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund by plugging in the strategic target allocations and rolling the clock back to November 2014.

CAGR: 4.49%RISK: 5.28BEST YEAR: 13.96%WORST YEAR: -5.97%MAX DRAWDOWN: -9.23%SHARPE RATIO: 0.68SORTINO RATIO: 1.17MARKET CORRELATION: 0.31
In this backtest we're able to clearly see that a simulated AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund at its target allocations provides decent returns and outstanding risk management.
With a maximum drawdown of only -9.23% and low market correlation of 0.31 it offers everything you'd want from an alternative fund in terms of a diversification meets risk management standpoint.
Just for fun let's see what happens when we throw in 5% slices of all 6 of the underlying funds into a 60/40 portfolio.

Let's view the difference in terms of performance versus risk management.

CAGR: 6.38% vs 6.12%RISK: 10.30% vs 7.28%BEST YEAR: 21.79% vs 16.09%WORST YEAR: -16.90% vs -5.66%MAX DRAWDOWN: -20.78% vs -9.96%SHARPE RATIO: 0.56 vs 0.72SORTINO RATIO: 0.82 vs 1.09MARKET CORRELATION: 0.99 vs 0.97
What a difference in terms of risk adjusted returns when we add diversifying slices of AQR alternative funds to a milquetoast 60/40!
We give up 26 basis points of returns to receive 302 basis points of risk management in terms of enhanced standard deviation.
Our worst year and max drawdown become considerably more palatable.
And last but not least, we accept considerable upgrades in terms of our Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio.
We're able to clearly see the benefit of adding alternatives to the mix of a traditional portfolio.
What about if we're more capital efficient with our exposure to stocks and bonds?
To test that let's compare the results of swapping out VBIAX with PSLDX versus a 100% VBIAX portfolio.

CAGR: 6.38% vs 9.68% vs 10.00%RISK: 10.30% vs 14.25% vs 21.41%BEST YEAR: 21.79% vs 37.66% vs 52.60%WORST YEAR: -16.90% vs -24.05% vs -43.17%MAX DRAWDOWN: -20.78% vs -28.00% vs -47.45%SHARPE RATIO: 0.56 vs 0.66 vs 0.51SORTINO RATIO: 0.82 vs 1.00 vs 0.75MARKET CORRELATION: 0.99 vs 0.89 vs 0.89
When the AQR diversifying mix of alternative strategies is handcuffed to expanded canvas PSLDX it certainly helps tame its volatility.
The difference between standard deviation, worst year and maximum drawdown is jarring to say the least.
It's pretty obvious at this point that an allocation to AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund offers investors a compelling puzzle piece whether they're playing around in a 100% sandbox or with an expanded canvas.

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
QDSIX Alternative Mutual Fund Review | AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund Review

AQR Capital Management: Alternative Investment Juggernaut
AQR Capital Management is an alternative investment juggernaut.
Few other fund providers offer such a wide ranging roster of funds for investors to consider.
Let's check them out!
AQR Roster Of Funds
Single Strategy
AQR Diversified Arbitrage Fund - I: ADAIX / N: ADANX / R6: QDARXAQR Equity Market Neutral Fund - I: QMNIX / N: QMNNX / R6: QMNRXAQR Long-Short Equity Fund - I: QLEIX / N: QLENX / R6: QLERXAQR Macro Opportunities Fund - I: QGMIX / N: QGMNX / R6: QGMRXAQR Managed Futures Strategy Fund - I: AQMIX / N: AQMNX / R6: AQMRXAQR Managed Futures Strategy HV Fund - I: QMHIX / N: QMHNX / R6: QMHRXAQR Risk-Balanced Commodities Strategy Fund - I: ARCIX / N: ARCNX / R6: QRCRX AQR Sustainable Long-Short Equity Carbon Aware Fund - I: QNZIX / N: QNZNX / R6: QNZRX
Multi-Strategy
AQR Alternative Risk Premia Fund - I: QRPIX / N: QRPNX / R6: QRPRXAQR Diversifying Strategies Fund - I: QDSIX / N: QDSNX / R6: QDSRXAQR Style Premia Alternative Fund - I: QSPIX / N: QSPNX / R6: QSPRXAQR Multi-Asset Fund - I: AQRIX / N: AQRNX / R6: AQRRX

AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund Overview, Holdings and Info
The investment case for “AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund” has been laid out succinctly by the folks over at AQR:
"Investment Objective:
Seeks capital appreciation.
A Diversified Approach to Alternative Investing:
The Fund seeks attractive long-term risk-adjusted returns through strategic allocations to AQR alternative mutual funds.
Investment Approach:
Leveraging AQR’s research and 20-year track record in alternative investing, the Fund is designed to complement an investor’s traditional stock and bond portfolio. 
The Fund invests in a portfolio of AQR mutual funds, providing exposure to both Active Multi-Asset strategies and Absolute Return strategies:
Active Multi-Asset Strategies: seek to provide tactical and risk-managed allocations among major asset classes across global markets. These strategies are expected to have some correlation to traditional asset classes over the long-term.
Absolute Return Strategies: seek to capture returns from well-established investments styles, such as value and momentum. Certain strategies may also provide exposure to less accessible types of returns. These strategies tend to be uncorrelated to traditional asset classes over the long-term.
Why Invest in the Diversifying Strategies Fund?
A Core Alternative Allocation:
The Fund seeks to provide an all-in-one solution for investors seeking a strategic, long-term approach to alternatives.
Low Exposure to Traditional Markets:
The Fund seeks reduced sensitivity to stock and bond market movements, which can help improve portfolio resilience across various market environments.
Multiple Sources of Return:
The Fund offers diversified exposure to a range of alternative strategies and return sources."

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund Investment Strategy Key Points

Fund Exposure: Global markets (developed and emerging markets) and Multiple Asset Classes (equities, fixed-income, commodities and currencies)
Long and Short Positions: Across a wide range of securities, derivatives and other instruments
Fund Goals:A) Reduced correlation to stock and bond market movements, andB) Multiple alternative return sources that are independent from traditional stock and bond markets.
Fund of Funds: Gains exposure to these types of investments and strategies through its own underlying alternative funds
2 Categories of Alternative Strategies:A) Active Multi-Asset Strategies: Tactical and risk-managed allocations = some correlation to traditional asset classesB) Absolute Return Strategies: Value, momentum, merger, convertible arbitrage = uncorrelated to traditional asset classes
3 Types of Absolute Return Strategies:A) Long/short strategies: Long (and short) positions in attractive investments (and unattractive) on a relative basisB) Directional strategies: Taking long (or short) positions in attractive investments (or unattractive) on an absolute basisC) Arbitrage strategies: Exposure to merger arbitrage, convertible arbitrage and other event-driven strategies
Asset Allocation Process: Proprietary methodology with the discretion to modify based upon current market conditions
Target Volatility: No target but likely the fund will realize annualized volatility levels of between 4% and 8%

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund Info
Tickers: QDSIX (Class I) / QDSNX (Class N) / QDSRX (Class R6)Adjusted Expense Ratio: 1.47 (Class I)AUM: 224 MillionInception: 06/08/2020
In terms of investment minimums, the fund is available for individual investors ($5 Million), Accounts offered by Financial Advisors (None) and Institutional Investors (None).

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund Performance
AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund couldn't have picked a better time to be dropped into the sizzling frying pan.
Since its inception, it has handled the challenges the market has thrown its way with ease whereas the S&P 500 and 60/40 Portfolio have had their share of challenges to say the least.
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
CAGR: 12.25%RISK: 6.45%BEST YEAR: 14.69%WORST YEAR: 5.18%MAX DRAWDOWN: -4.45%SHARPE RATIO: 1.70SORTINO RATIO: 4.06MARKET CORRELATION: 0.15

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund Pros and Cons
Let’s move on to examine the potential pros and cons of AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund.
QDSIX Pros

Super fund of funds, multi-asset class, multi-strategy 6-1 single fund total alternative solution for your portfolio
Low to negative correlations between the 6 alternative strategies offered in the fund
Low to negative correlations between the 6 alternative strategies and major market fund such as SPY and AGG ETF
The ability to plug into a traditional 60/40 portfolio and/or capital efficient portfolio to improve risk adjusted returns
A strategy that has navigated the challenges of the 2020s with ease while traditional long-only asset classes have struggled
The capacity to achieve superior absolute returns no matter what economic regime or curveball is thrown its way
Instead of having to cobble together numerous alternative strategies you can just plug this all in one solution into your portfolio
Eliminates the risk of one alternative strategy that is struggling from dragging the portfolio down by splitting up into 6 parts
The expectation (but not target) of 4 to 8% volatility to smooth out overall portfolio returns
Reasonable management fee for a fund of funds alternative investment strategy

QDSIX Cons

Tracking error and prolonged periods of relative underperformance versus traditional asset classes tempts investors to bail on alternative strategies
Could be a bit of a blackbox for investors not familiar with all of the alternative strategies that are part of the fund

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund Model Portfolio
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Let's put together a globally diversified expanded canvas model portfolio where AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund has plenty of breathing room and space to shine.
20% DSEEX - DoubleLine Shiller Enhanced CAPE20% DSEUX - DoubleLine Shiller Enhanced Intl CAPE20% QLEIX - AQR Long-Short Equity40% QDSIX - AQR Diversifying Strategies
The capital efficient 100/100 equities/fixed income DoubleLine funds allow us to reach 40/40 equities/bonds with a 40% allocation.
We'll add 20% AQR Long-Short Equity to fulfill the exposure of a 60/40 portfolio with 40% of space leftover for QDSIX.

AQR Diversify Strategies Fund + Friends Portfolio vs 60/40 Portfolio (VBIAX)

CAGR: 13.30% vs 3.65%RISK: 11.03% vs 13.21%BEST YEAR: 19.06% vs 15.23%WORST YEAR: 1.58% vs -16.90%MAX DRAWDOWN: -11.48% vs -20.78%SHARPE RATIO: 1.12 vs 0.28SORTINO RATIO: 2.00 vs 0.40MARKET CORRELATION: 0.76 vs 0.99
Here we're able to see that an expanded canvas portfolio pursuing maximum diversification between strategies absolutely crushes a 60/40 portfolio in what is albeit a very small sample size.
It's just an across the board triumph from a risk meets returns standpoint.

The monthly correlations between the four funds suggest that we're well diversified for future battles.

AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund (QDSIX) — 12-Question FAQ
1) What is AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund (QDSIX)?
QDSIX is a multi-asset, multi-strategy “fund of funds” from AQR that combines several of the firm’s alternative mutual funds into one ticker to deliver a core alternatives allocation designed to diversify traditional stock/bond portfolios.
2) What’s under the hood?
It blends six AQR funds: one Active Multi-Asset sleeve (AQR Multi-Asset) plus five Absolute-Return sleeves (Macro Opportunities, Managed Futures HV, Style Premia Alternative, Equity Market Neutral, and Diversified Arbitrage) to access trend, macro, style premia, market-neutral, and arbitrage return streams.
3) How do the two sleeves differ?

Active Multi-Asset: long-only, risk-managed allocations to global stocks, bonds, and real assets; tends to show some correlation to traditional markets.

Absolute Return: long/short, rules-based strategies (value, momentum, carry, quality; merger/convertible arbitrage, etc.); designed to be low/uncorrelated to stocks and bonds.

4) What problem is QDSIX trying to solve?
It aims to provide diversification and drawdown dampening by adding multiple independent return streams so investors aren’t relying solely on equities (or a 60/40) during tough regimes.
5) How does it typically behave in a portfolio?
Historically (per the review’s simulations), pairing diversified alternatives with traditional assets reduced volatility and max drawdowns while improving risk-adjusted metrics—exact outcomes will vary, but the intent is smoother portfolio paths with lower market beta/correlation.
6) Who might consider QDSIX?
Investors seeking a single-ticket alternatives core (instead of building six separate sleeves), advisors wanting implementation simplicity, and allocators prioritizing risk management and multi-strategy diversification over pure benchmark tracking.
7) What are the key risks or drawbacks?
Expect tracking error versus stock/bond benchmarks, potential periods of relative underperformance, and strategy complexity (“black box” feel). As with any alternatives fund using derivatives and shorting, results can diverge from investor expectations in the short run.
8) How can QDSIX be used in practice?
Common uses from the review:

Plug-in to 60/40 to lift Sharpe/Sortino and lower drawdowns.

Pair with capital-efficient cores (e.g., 90/60 or 100/100 funds) to keep equity/bond exposure while carving room for diversifiers.

Anchor an “alts sleeve” at 10–40% depending on mandate and tolerance.

9) What about correlation benefits?
The underlying AQR sleeves show low to negative correlations to one another and to broad stock/bond proxies, which is the engine of the fund’s diversification potential (per the review’s correlation tables).
10) What share classes, fees, and minimums were noted?
Tickers include QDSIX (I), QDSNX (N), QDSRX (R6). The review cites an adjusted expense ratio ~1.47% (I-shares) and notes access differences: Individuals (high minimum, e.g., $5M), Advisors/Institutions (no stated minimums)—confirm current details with AQR or your platform.
11) What volatility profile should investors expect?
While not a hard target, the prospectus language referenced in the review suggests an expected long-run volatility range ~4–8% (actual results can differ across periods).
12) Bottom line from the review?
QDSIX is positioned as a “super-sandwich” all-in-one alternatives solution—six differentiated strategies under one roof—to enhance risk-adjusted returns and stabilize portfolios across regimes, provided investors can live with complexity and benchmark deviation.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
AQR has really created a masterpiece with its Diversifying Strategies super fund of funds.
Investors are able to drop a slab of the fund into their portfolios with six different alternative strategies conspiring to enhance risk adjusted returns.

It's a no brainer, in my opinion, if you're able to purchase it.
However, at this point in the review I'm more interested in what you've got to say.

What do you think of AQR Diversifying Strategies Fund?
Is it on your radar?

#### AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Review: QSPIX Mutual Fund Review
One of the most embarrassing moments of my life occurred during a dim sum lunch with a PR representative in Hong Kong.
My wife and I were in the city for a work project and we had received an invitation to go out for lunch.
We were given an address and we knew what neighbourhood we were meeting in, but that was the extent of our research. After all, it was just dim sum!
Up until then, my experience with dim sum was limited to Malaysia where it was all about outdoor plastic chairs, pushcart trolleys, boisterous conversations and shirtless men smoking cigarettes whilst reading the local newspaper.

I thought we were going out for the most casual of lunches and I couldn't have been more wrong!
Because it was a rainy day, we hopped in taxi and we were a little surprised when our driver dropped us off at the International Commerce Center, a super glitzy skyscraper overlooking Victoria Harbour.
It turns out the restaurant we were going to was located on the 102 floor of the Ritz-Carlton Hotel.
As I entered the elevator it became painstakingly obvious I was severely underdressed for the occasion.
Here I was decked out in a t-shirt, shorts and sandals, while men around me were sporting business suits.

As the elevator door opened my heart was beating like a drum.
The maître d' quickly looked me over, asked if I was in the right place, and the proceeded to lead me to a backroom where I was presented with a bag containing shoes, a dinner jacket and trousers.
Apparently, I wasn't the first idiot to arrive at this restaurant not dressed for the occasion.
However, I felt relieved as this seemed like a reasonable enough solution.
The only problem was that the trousers were for a man that was about 5'7 and 135 lbs.
And here I am 6'1 and 190 lbs.
I tried to put on the pants, but they were more like capri pants on me leaving my ankles and calves exposed.
Zip up the pants?
Forget about it.
The dinner jacket wasn't any better.
Imagine a sausage casing.
The only thing that fit reasonably well were the shoes.

So out I came from the backroom dressed like some kind of farang freakshow waltzing my way to the table.
It actually looked about 10X worse than had I just remained woefully underdressed.
At that moment, if I could have crawled into a cave and died, I might have chosen that option.

Somehow, our host kept a straight face while my wife tried her best to contain her laughter.
We got through lunch, which featured dim sum with gold leaf and the best views of Hong Kong.

Style premia?
Zero that day.
But we're not here to poke anymore fun at my fashion faux pas. Instead, let's learn more about a fascinating alternative investing strategy.

What Is Style Premia?
Style Premia is not related to how appropriately you dress for dinner; it's a multi-strategy plus multi-asset class way of expressing long-short styles across research supported factors such as carry, defensive, value and momentum.
I like to think of it as a 4 x 4 tearing around in the mud.
You've got four asset classes:

Equities
Bonds
Commodities
Currencies

And you're expressing four distinct investing styles:

Value
Momentum
Carry
Defensive

Style premia, in the world of finance, refers to investment strategies that aim to capture specific returns associated with distinct investment styles. These styles are based on systematic patterns or anomalies found in markets over time. The concept is grounded in the belief that certain characteristics of assets can predict higher returns. Here’s a breakdown of what constitutes style premia:

Value: This style is based on the principle that stocks or assets priced below their intrinsic value will, over time, provide superior returns as the market corrects the mispricing. It's akin to finding a high-quality item on sale; eventually, its price is expected to reflect its true worth.
Momentum: Momentum investing involves capitalizing on the continuation of existing market trends. It operates on the premise that assets which have performed well in the recent past will continue to do so in the short-term future, and vice versa for poorly performing assets.
Carry: In the carry trade, investors profit from the difference between the yields of two assets. For example, in currency markets, it might involve borrowing in a currency with a low interest rate and investing in a currency with a higher interest rate, profiting from the spread.
Defensive (Low Volatility): Defensive or low volatility investing focuses on assets with lower risk and volatility compared to the market. The idea is that these assets will yield better risk-adjusted returns over time, as they are less susceptible to large market swings.

Style premia strategies involve going long (buying) assets that exhibit these desirable characteristics whilst going short (selling) assets that do not. The strategies can be applied across various asset classes, including equities, bonds, commodities, and currencies to systematically capture the desired exposures.
The appeal of style premia investing lies in its systematic approach that diversifies across different styles; investors can potentially reduce risk and enhance returns, as these styles tend to perform differently across various market environments.

Style Premia Potluck Dinner
Picture this as an episode of "The Investment Chef," where strategies are not just strategies, but characters at a high-stakes potluck dinner.

Value Investing: Meet Value Vick, the thrift shop connoisseur. He's the guy who buys neon leg warmers and vinyl records for pennies and swears they'll be worth a fortune. At the potluck, he brings a casserole he made from discounted, day-old bread and mystery meat he swears is prime rib. Everyone's skeptical until Gordon Ramsay stops by, tastes it, and declares it a culinary masterpiece. Value Vick smirks, his dish is now the hit of the party.
Momentum Investing: Then there's Momentum Mandy. She's on TikTok 24/7, catching trends before they're cool. For the potluck, she brings the latest viral sensation: cloud eggs. Half the room thinks she's a genius; the other half hasn't even heard of cloud eggs yet. Mandy's dish is popular until someone mentions they're so last week, and suddenly, she's in the kitchen whipping up dalgona coffee.
Carry Trading: Carry Trader Carl walks in, a Monopoly millionaire, always collecting rent. He's brought a fondue set, charging people a dollar to dip their snacks. It's all fun and games until someone realizes they're actually paying to eat their own food. Carl's making a killing, though, and offers to share his profits if you'll just let him set up a mini-bar next to the fondue station.
Defensive Investing: Lastly, we have Defensive Dana. She's wrapped in bubble wrap, carrying a salad made entirely of superfoods. It's designed to survive a nuclear fallout and still provide 100% of your daily vitamins. Dana's corner of the table is for those who want to play it safe, avoiding the rollercoaster of food poisoning from Uncle Value's mystery meat casserole.

Combine all these personalities at the potluck, and you've got the Style Premia strategy: a smorgasbord of investing tactics that might seem quirky on their own but together aim to conquer the buffet of alternative strategies. It's a blend of finding hidden gems, riding the wave of popularity, making money off literally anything, and always having a safety net (made of kale, probably). Because in the end, why put all your eggs in one basket when you can spread them across a buffet while you're at it?

Uncorrelated Strategy + Absolute Return Potential
The concept of style premia strategies revolves around the aim to deliver absolute returns, which means trying to generate positive returns irrespective of the broader market's direction. This ambition sets style premia apart from traditional equity or bond investments, which often depend on market trends for performance.
Its returns in 2022 provide a perfect example of this:

Style premia strategies often exhibit low correlation with traditional asset classes like stocks and bonds. This characteristic is pivotal for absolute return strategies, as it allows these investments to potentially generate positive returns even when traditional markets are flat or declining. What's fascinating is that style premia is also uncorrelated with many other alternative strategies!

Hence, there is a tremendous diversification benefit to integrating it into a portfolio that has traditional assets (equities and bonds) and an alternative sleeve (managed futures, gold, market neutral, etc).
The question you need to ask yourself as an investor is whether or not you want to shave down (existing exposures) or expand the canvas (create space with capital efficient funds) to make room for it all.

Review of AQR Style Premia Alternative Mutual Fund : Reviewing QSPIX Fund
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

AQR Capital Management: OG Alternative Investment Provider
AQR Capital Management is without a doubt the OG Alternative fund provider.
Here is their complete roster of alternative funds:
AQR Complete Alternative Funds List
Single Strategy
AQR Diversified Arbitrage Fund – I: ADAIX / N: ADANX / R6: QDARXAQR Equity Market Neutral Fund – I: QMNIX / N: QMNNX / R6: QMNRXAQR Long-Short Equity Fund – I: QLEIX / N: QLENX / R6: QLERXAQR Macro Opportunities Fund – I: QGMIX / N: QGMNX / R6: QGMRXAQR Managed Futures Strategy Fund – I: AQMIX / N: AQMNX / R6: AQMRXAQR Managed Futures Strategy HV Fund – I: QMHIX / N: QMHNX / R6: QMHRXAQR Risk-Balanced Commodities Strategy Fund – I: ARCIX / N: ARCNX / R6: QRCRX AQR Sustainable Long-Short Equity Carbon Aware Fund – I: QNZIX / N: QNZNX / R6: QNZRX
Multi-Strategy
AQR Alternative Risk Premia Fund – I: QRPIX / N: QRPNX / R6: QRPRXAQR Diversifying Strategies Fund – I: QDSIX / N: QDSNX / R6: QDSRXAQR Style Premia Alternative Fund – I: QSPIX / N: QSPNX / R6: QSPRXAQR Multi-Asset Fund – I: AQRIX / N: AQRNX / R6: AQRRX

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Overview, Holdings and Info
The investment case for “AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund” has been laid out succinctly by the folks over at AQR Capital Management:

Investment Case

"Seeks positive absolute returns."

A Core Alternative Solution

The Fund aims to deliver attractive risk-adjusted returns with low correlation to traditional stock/bond portfolios by investing in a broad and diversified range of alternative risk premia.

Investment Approach

"The Fund invests long and short across five different asset groups (stocks & industries, equity indices, fixed income, currencies and commodities) and four investment styles (Value, Momentum, Carry and Defensive), and aims to be market neutral.
Investment styles are disciplined, systematic and economically intuitive methods of investing that have the ability to produce long-term positive returns across markets and asset groups with little correlation to equity markets.
These styles have historically exhibited low correlations to one another. By allocating equal risk across strategies, the Fund exposures are well balanced across the different sources of return. An integrated portfolio of alternative risk premia can provide important diversification benefit to traditional portfolios and can serve as a core alternative allocation."

Fund Overview: Why Invest in the AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund?

Seeks Attractive Risk-Adjusted Returns
The Fund combines four different style strategies across a range of liquid asset groups: stocks & industries, equity indices, fixed income, currencies and commodities. By implementing a risk-balanced exposure to these largely unrelated returns sources, the Fund aims to benefit from their diversification potential and deliver attractive risk-adjusted returns.

Opportunity To Perform In Rising And Falling Markets
By investing long and short, the Fund seeks to be market neutral with low correlation to equity and bond markets, and aims to provide positive absolute returns in both rising and falling markets.

Core Allocation To Alternatives
The Fund takes a holistic approach to style investing: combining exposure to four styles across five asset classes within one single portfolio. Investors may benefit from the simplicity of a single, balanced, core solution compared to the challenges of picking several single style products.

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund: QSPIX Fund Selection Process
To better understand the process of how the fund operates, let’s turn our attention towards the summary prospectus where I've summarized the key points at the very bottom.

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Key Points

Investment Objective and Styles: The Fund aims to provide exposure to four investment styles - value, momentum, carry, and defensive - across various asset groups including equities, bonds, interest rates, commodities, and currencies, employing both long and short positions.
Asset Groups and Global Reach: Investments span globally, including emerging markets, across a diverse set of instruments such as equities, futures, currency and commodity forwards, and swaps. The Fund can invest directly in these instruments or indirectly through a subsidiary.
Equity and Bond Exposure: The Fund's equity exposure includes U.S. and non-U.S. issuers and indices, while bond exposure includes U.S. Government securities and sovereign debt from both developed and emerging markets. It may invest in debt securities of any credit rating, including high-yield bonds.
Currency Exposure: The Fund may have significant exposure to non-U.S. dollar denominated currencies, including those from emerging markets, aiming for low correlation to traditional equity and bond markets.
Investment Strategies Detailed:

Value: Favors cheap assets based on fundamental measures like price-to-earnings and price-to-book ratios.
Momentum: Prefers assets with superior medium-term performance, utilizing measures like price momentum.
Carry: Seeks higher-yielding assets, using interest rates for selection.
Defensive: Chooses low-risk, high-quality assets, with the goal of higher risk adjusted rates of returns.

Portfolio Construction: Utilizes a systematic, bottom-up process that ranks investments within each asset group by each style. The process aims for equal risk distribution across styles within asset groups and a balanced risk allocation across asset groups.
Volatility Management: The Adviser targets an average annualized volatility level for the Fund of 10%, with an expected range of 8% to 15%. Actual volatility may vary based on market conditions.
Trading and Tax Considerations: The Fund engages in frequent trading, potentially leading to higher transaction costs and adverse tax consequences.
Subsidiary Investments: Up to 25% of the Fund's assets may be invested in a wholly-owned subsidiary to gain exposure to commodities markets within tax law limitations. The Subsidiary can invest in a wider range of commodities-related instruments than the Fund.
Cash Holdings: A portion of the Fund's assets will be held in cash or cash equivalents to possibly include short-term investment funds, money market funds, and U.S. Government securities, ensuring liquidity and margin/collateral for derivative positions.

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Info
Ticker: I: QSPIX / N: QSPNX / R6: QSPRXAdjusted Expense Ratio: 1.52AUM: 1.01 BillionInception: 10/30/2013

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Strategy Pros and Cons
Let’s move on to examine the potential pros and cons behind the strategy of AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund.
QSPIX Pros: Distinct Advantages

Diversification Across Styles and Asset Classes: By investing across multiple styles and asset classes (equities, bonds, commodities, currencies), the strategy offers a higher level of diversification, reducing the overall portfolio risk compared to traditional single-style or single-asset investments.
Low Correlation to Traditional Markets: Style premia strategies often exhibit low correlation to traditional equity and bond markets, providing a valuable source of portfolio diversification and potentially reducing overall volatility.
Low Correlation with Other Alternative Strategies: It was fascinating to discover that Style premia is uncorrelated with managed futures and gold.
Systematic Risk Management: Utilizes quantitative models to systematically manage risk, ensuring that investments are spread across various styles and asset classes to maintain a balanced risk profile, targeting specific volatility levels.
Enhanced Return Potential: By capturing premiums across different investment styles, the strategy aims to enhance returns over the long term, capitalizing on the tendency of certain styles to outperform under different market conditions.
Opportunistic Long/Short Positions: The ability to take both long and short positions in various markets allows the strategy to profit from rising and falling markets, providing a potential source of positive returns irrespective of market direction.
Exposure to Global Markets: Investing globally, including in emerging markets, offers exposure to a wider range of economic conditions and opportunities, potentially enhancing returns and reducing risk through geographic diversification.
Flexibility and Adaptability: The strategy's systematic approach allows for flexibility and adaptability to changing market conditions, enabling quick adjustments to the portfolio's exposure across different styles and asset classes.
Advanced Risk Management Techniques: Utilizes advanced risk management techniques, including proprietary algorithms for trading and active monitoring of volatility and other risk measures, to mitigate potential losses.
Potential for Improved Risk-Adjusted Returns: The combination of diversified exposures and systematic risk management aims to improve risk-adjusted returns, making the strategy an attractive option for investors seeking to optimize their risk/reward profile.
Access to Alternative Risk Premia: By focusing on style premia, the strategy provides access to alternative risk premia that are not easily accessible through traditional investment strategies, offering a unique source of potential alpha generation.
Absolute Return Potential: The strategy/fund delivered a +30.64% CAGR in 2022 when a 60/40 VBIAX (-16.90%) and S&P 500 SPY (-18.17%) got slaughtered
Core Alternative Strategy Or Satellite Diversifier: Can easily be a core alternative strategy with its multi-asset class plus multi-strategy approach or a satellite diversifier
Expanded Canvas Portfolios Potential: Can be combined with other uncorrelated traditional investing strategies (long-only stocks and bonds) and uncorrelated alternatives (managed futures, gold, arbitrage) to build a robust portfolio

QSPIX Cons: Potential Limitations

Complexity: The strategy's reliance on multiple investment styles and asset classes, along with the use of sophisticated algorithms (and long-short nature), can make it complex and difficult for some investors to understand fully.
Cost: Implementing a Style Premia Alternative Strategy can be costlier than traditional investment strategies due to the need for advanced risk management systems and more frequent trading to express its long-short views.

AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund Model Portfolio Ideas
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
QSPIX offers investors a myriad of interesting options for potential portfolio construction.
Anywhere between a 10% (as a satellite diversifier) allocation up to a 30% (as an alternative core strategy) allocation makes sense.
Let's explore some of those combinations.
Style Premia Expanded Canvas Portfolio
For those seeking to expand the canvas of their portfolio to add style premia (plus other alternative strategies) it's never been easier to do just that.
Model Portfolio:
40% RSSB - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF20% RSST - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF20% QPSIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund10% LCSIX - LoCorr Long/Short Commodity Strategies Fund10% BTAL - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund
Exposures:
60% Equities (Global + US)40% Bonds20% Managed Futures20% Style Premia10% Long-Short Commodities10% Market Neutral Anti-Beta
Canvas: 160%
Here we've maintained the backbone of a 60/40 with a hefty 60% pile of uncorrelated alternatives added to the mix.
Let's utilize VBIAX (60/40) and PQTIX (Managed Futures) to backtest this robust beast bad boy .

CAGR: 10.47% vs 7.73%RISK: 8.90% vs 10.15%MAX DD: -6.87% vs -16.90%WORST YEAR: -11.21% vs -20.78SHARPE: 1.02 vs 0.66SORTINO: 1.69 vs 1.00CORRELATION: 0.89 vs 0.98

Here we've got ourselves a nifty returns above risk portfolio boasting a Sharpe 1.00+ Ratio.
Hey, let's not be modest over here.
It absolutely cleans the clock of a static 60/40 with its diverse range of uncorrelated long-short alternative absolute return strategies in terms of having significantly better CAGR, risk management and risk adjusted rates of returns.

Finally, let's move on to drawdowns.

I like what I see.
Style Premia Countdown Portfolio (4, 3, 2, 1)
Let's explore an out of the box countdown portfolio where our style premia allocation is high conviction at 30%.
Model Portfolio:
40% AUEIX - AQR Large Cap Defensive Style30% QSPIX - AQR Style Premia Alternative20% ABYIX - Abbey Capital Futures Strategy10% BTAL - AGF U.S. Market Neutral Anti-Beta
Exposures:
40% US Defensive Equities30% Style Premia20% Managed Futures10% Market-Neutral Anti-Beta
Canvas: 100%
Here we're rolling with four uncorrelated strategies as a potential alternative portfolio versus the milquetoast 60/40.

CAGR: 7.71% vs 7.51%RISK: 6.92% vs 10.36%MAX DD: -7.53% vs -20.78%WORST YEAR: -3.52% vs -and 16.90SHARPE: 0.91 vs 0.62SORTINO: 1.58 vs 0.94CORRELATION: 0.50 vs 0.98

You'll notice with the Style Premia Countdown Portfolio that we're compounding in a very different manner compared to the 60/40 portfolio.
We'll celebrate slight outperformance but in particular one should feast their eyes upon the differences in drawdown management (-7.53% vs -20.78%) and lower correlations with markets (0.50 vs 0.98).

You'll notice the Countdown Portfolio is an impenetrable fortress, from a drawdown management perspective, when compared to the 60/40 portfolio.

Skin A Cat 60/40 Style Premia Portfolio
For investors that insist upon a 60/40 as the bedrock of their portfolio (and aren't open to capital efficiency) we'll shave things down to create some space for style premia as a satellite diversifier.
We're just dipping our toes in the water over here.
Model Portfolio:
90% VBIAX10% QPSIX
Exposures:
90% 60/4010% Style Premia
Canvas: 100%
Here we've made space for style premia as a satellite diversifier bringing an additional strategy into the portfolio.

CAGR: 7.73% vs 7.73%RISK: 9.10% vs 10.15%MAX DD: -16.89% vs -20.78%WORST YEAR: -12.14% vs -16.90SHARPE: 0.72 vs 0.66SORTINO: 1.11 vs 1.00CORRELATION: 0.98 vs 0.98

So we've got the same returns here but we've improved the risk adjusted rate of returns across the board (SHARPE/SORTINO + MAX DD/WORST YEAR).
Even with just a slice we've improved the stability of the portfolio.

Frequently Asked Questions — AQR Style Premia Alternative Fund (QSPIX) Review
What is QSPIX in one sentence?
AQR’s Style Premia Alternative Fund (QSPIX) is a long/short, multi-asset, multi-style mutual fund seeking positive absolute returns with low correlation to traditional stock/bond portfolios.
What “styles” does QSPIX use?
It systematically targets four well-researched styles—Value, Momentum, Carry, and Defensive (low risk/quality)—implemented across multiple asset groups.
Which asset classes does it trade?
QSPIX allocates across equities (stocks & industries and indices), fixed income (rates/sovereign debt), commodities, and currencies, using cash securities and derivatives.
How does the portfolio stay balanced?
AQR aims for a risk-balanced design—roughly equal risk across styles within each asset group and across asset groups—so no single sleeve dominates outcomes.
Is it market neutral?
The fund aims for low correlation to equities and bonds by going long and short, seeking to earn style premia rather than broad market beta.
How volatile is it intended to be?
The adviser targets ~10% annualized volatility (typically 8–15% expected range) with actual realized volatility varying by market conditions.
Why might investors consider QSPIX?
For diversification (low correlation to stocks/bonds and even to many alternatives), absolute-return potential, and a single-ticket core alternative that blends styles and assets.
What are the main risks or drawbacks?
It’s complex, relies on models and derivatives, can face whipsaw periods when styles underperform, and typically carries higher costs than cap-weighted index funds.
How could QSPIX fit into a portfolio?
As a core alternative sleeve (e.g., 10–30%) or satellite diversifier, either by shaving traditional exposures or by expanding the canvas with capital-efficient funds to make room for diversifiers.
What about taxes and turnover?
The fund is actively traded (higher turnover possible), uses derivatives, and may have non-trivial tax implications—placement and tax-aware implementation matter.
What are the basic fund facts?
Tickers: I: QSPIX / N: QSPNX / R6: QSPRX • Adjusted Expense Ratio: ~1.52 • AUM: ~$1.01B • Inception: 10/30/2013. (Details per the review’s summary.)
Is this financial advice?
No. This review/FAQ is for education and entertainment only. Do your own research and consult a qualified advisor before investing.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
One of the benefits of expanding your awareness and remaining curious as an investor is that you eventually stumble upon an alternative strategy like style premia.
When I first started my site in 2022, I didn't even know what style premia was.
Now I'm excited to integrate it into my portfolio (along with other multi-strategy alternative approaches).
It's vying for elbow space in my core alternative sleeve alongside managed futures, gold and other alternative strategies.
And that's what excites me the most.
I want every single strategy in my portfolio to be competing for space the same way somebody pursuing an anti-aging protocol has various nutritious food items compete for space on their plate.

But at this point in the review I'm more interested in what you've got to say.
What do you think of style premia as a strategy and QSPIX in particular?

#### RPAR Risk Parity ETF Review | Diversified Asset Allocation Fund
I'm not sure I've ever reviewed a fund that has had such a challenging year to date, yet offers as much long-term potential for patient investors.
The fund I'm referring to is RPAR Risk Parity ETF.
In this comprehensive review I'm going to present the case as to why Risk Parity investing strategies are in many ways superior to the classic 60/40 portfolio which is by and large considered the industry standard.
Furthermore, we'll take a deep-dive into the strategy behind Risk Parity investing while examining its historical performance and risk management prowess via a comprehensive backtest.
Early readers of Picture Perfect Portfolios may remember that one of my first ever fund reviews was for UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF.
RPAR Risk Parity ETF is the original fund whereas UPAR ETF is the more bold and brazen younger sibling featuring an expanded canvas that stretches its limits further.
All of this talk about Risk Parity and we've yet to define it.
As you might expect, Risk Parity investing is about managing risk primarily.
Instead of keying in on just two asset classes (stocks and bonds), risk parity investment strategies often feature a more diverse set of asset classes with exposures to gold and commodities as an example.
Assets within a risk parity portfolio receive space in accordance to the level of volatility they bring to the table.
US Equites / Treasury / Gold Volatility from 1972 until 2022

For instance, US equities have historically been a volatile asset class with 15.76% standard deviation dating back to 1972.
Moreover, Gold ups the ante coming in at a whopping 19.81%!
Conversely, both the 10-Year Treasury and Intermediate Term Treasury are more stable investments (albeit with lower returns) featuring 8.05% and 5.78% standard deviation respectively.
To arrange these in accordance to a Risk Parity investment strategy, we'll create more space in the portfolio for assets that offer a smoother ride.
In our hypothetical example we'll have two larger slots of 30% for less volatile 10-Year Treasury and Intermediate Treasury.
And we'll have two smaller slots of 20% for highly volatile US equities and Gold.
Our Risk Parity Portfolio would be as follows:
30% 10-Year Treasury (risk: 8.05%)30% Intermediate Term Treasury (risk: 5.78%)20% US Equities (risk: 15.76%)20% Gold (risk: 19.81%)
Risk Parity Portfolios have historically offered investors a more palatable sequence of returns.
The best comparison would be the hypothetical Risk Parity Portfolio we've arranged above versus the Classic 60/40 Portfolio.

Risk Parity Portfolio vs 60/40 Portfolio

Indeed, the 60/40 portfolio with a more significant allocation to equities offers investors higher returns long-term with a 9.23% CAGR vs 8.14% CAGR for the Risk Parity Portfolio.
However, that's its only win.
The Risk Parity Portfolio is 307 basis points more defensive (7.03% vs 10.10%) featuring returns above risk as reflected by its higher Sharpe Ratio (0.52 vs 0.49) and Sortino Ratio (0.83 vs 0.72).
Its ability to manage max drawdowns is where it truly shines with its worst case scenario being -14.97% versus -28.54% for the 60/40 Portfolio.
Risk Parity Portfolio vs 60/40 Portfolio Drawdowns

This drawdown visual really says it all!
Feast your eyes upon the mid 70s, late 80s, early 2000s and late 2000s to witness the difference between the Risk Parity Portfolio and 60/40 Portfolio.
It's only this year where they've both struggled mightily.
Drawdowns for Historical Market Stress Periods

It's remarkable the stability the Risk Parity Portfolio demonstrated during historical market stress periods with the Subprime Crisis, Dotcom Crash and Black Monday Period as the most clear examples.
Low Roll Period: Risk Parity Portfolio vs 60/40 Portfolio

Finally, we'll examine low roll period results between the two different portfolios to see which offers a more palatable worst case scenario.
The Risk Parity Portfolio has frustrated investors with only a low roll period of -13.63% over a 1 year period.
Whereas the 60/40 Portfolio has had below water performance that would've required investors to endure 5 years of misery.
Hence, it's clear how a Risk Parity Portfolio would be an attractive alternative to a 60/40 portfolio, even within the confines of a 100% canvas, but it becomes even more intriguing when you expand the canvas beyond 100%.
RPAR Risk Parity ETF and UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF are both expanded canvas portfolio solutions.

RPAR ETF Review | RPAR Risk Parity ETF Review

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

The Investment Case For Risk Parity
The investment case for Risk Parity has been laid out succinctly by the folks over at Evoke Advisors.
The Investment Case for Risk Parity:

Provides Balance – spread risk equally across four diverse asset classes.
Achieves Reliable Diversification – based on a dependable relationship between asset class returns and the economic environment.
Attractive Return Relative to Risk – a balanced mix of publicly traded assets seeks to outperform equities with comparable risk.

Why Invest in RPAR?

Provides access to a time-tested risk parity methodology used by some of the world’s most sophisticated investors.
Implemented in a tax efficient, liquid ETF structure. 
Seeks an equity-like return with less risk over the long run by diversifying across four asset classes, each with unique environmental biases. 

Why does it make sense? 
By improving diversification, risk parity can potentially offer higher returns relative to risk compared to equities or equity-centric portfolios. 
How can it be used? 
Either as an alternative asset or a total public portfolio solution.
In summary, RPAR ETF presents itself as a more diversified style of long-only asset allocation (equities, fixed income, commodities, gold) with the potential to outperform 100% equities with less overall risk as a potential portfolio puzzle piece or total portfolio solution.

RPAR ETF Overview, Holdings and Info
Let's pop open the hood of RPAR ETF to see what kind of goodies the fund has to offer investors!

RPAR Risk Parity ETF has plenty to offer investors, so we'll break things down by equity, fixed income and commodity sleeves.
RPAR ETF Equity Allocation
In terms of its equity sleeve it avoids home country bias by offering investors US, International Developed and Emerging Markets equities.
US equities take up half of the equation (12.5% of 25%) whereas Emerging Markets (7.5% of 25%) and International Developed (5% of 25%) round things out.
US vs Int-Dev vs EM Markets Correlations

Noteworthy, is a more sizeable allocation to Emerging Markets than to International Developed Markets.
From a correlations standpoint this contrarian decision makes some sense given that Emerging Markets are less correlated with US Markets in comparison to International Developed Markets:
US Stock Market: 0.75 (Emerging Markets) vs 0.85 (International Developed Markets)
Overall, I'm pleased that RPAR ETF has decided to go global, avoid home country bias and potentially ruffle some feathers by overweighting EM equities.
RPAR ETF Fixed Income Allocation

Here we can see that RPAR ETF is committed to a 35% allocation to US TIPS (15+ year) and a 35% slab dedicated towards US Treasuries (10 Year and Ultra via futures).

The 10-Year Treasury and Ultra Treasury are covered by capital efficient futures.
Let's examine the historical correlations between the three fixed income allocations.
RPAR Fixed Income Monthly Correlations

Fascinating for me to discover was that the 10-Year Treasury and Long Term Treasury are highly correlated (0.93) whereas TIPS provides a diversification benefit because it is less correlated to both the 10-Year Treasury (0.69) and Long-Term Treasury (0.64).
Hence, I'm in favour of adding TIPS to the mix but I'm left pondering whether the lack of short-term and intermediate-term treasuries is a potential liability at times?
RPAR Commodity Producing Equites + Gold Sleeve
RPAR ETF surprised some investors by deciding to go the route of Commodity Producing Equities versus straight up Commodity exposure.

RPAR ETF fulfills its Commodity Producing equities mandate with 141 stocks spreading out over 5.25% Energy, 5.25% Diversified Mining, 3.0% Agriculture, 0.75% Clean Energy and 0.75% Water.
I'm impressed with the overall level of diversification here but I'm left wondering if excluding commodities is the right call?
To round things out we've got a straight up allocation to SPDR GOLD MINISHARES TRUST ETF (GLDM) at 10%.

RPAR ETF Allocation Summary
35% TIPS 35% Treasuries (10 Year + Ultra)  15% Commodity Producing Equities12.5% US Equities10% Gold7.5% Emerging Equities5% Int-Dev Equities 
RPAR ETF Allocation Constructive Criticism
Prior to writing this article, I posted the following tweet:

I received some great constructive feedback which I encourage you to check out here.
Here is a brief summary of the biggest points of concern and overall constructive feedback offered by others.

Commodity producer equities not offering as much of a diversification benefit as a straight up commodity allocation.
Potentially too much duration exposure held at the wrong side of the curve (the most inefficient part).
What to pair RPAR ETF with as part of the total portfolio at large (static vs tactical vs adaptive components)?

RPAR Risk Parity ETF vs UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF
As mentioned earlier in the article, RPAR Risk Parity ETF has a more aggressive partner in crime that investors can potentially consider in UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF.
Let's examine the key differences and points of similarity.

The most important thing investors need to know when comparing RPAR ETF and UPAR ETF is that they are proportionally the same.
The only difference is that RPAR features an expanded canvas of 120% whereas UPAR ETF offers investors 168% real estate.
Thus, if you allocate to UPAR ETF you just get more of what RPAR ETF has to offer.
In effect, the extra oomph of UPAR ETF will amplify BOTH the good and bad times.
Hence, when the risk parity strategy is having a positive year UPAR will offer better returns.
When it's a down year it'll provide you with excess carnage.
Thus, whether or not you decide to allocate to RPAR or UPAR is based entirely upon how comfortable you are with utilizing additional leverage and whether (or not) you've got the chin to handle the more impactful uppercuts thrown during down years.
RPAR ETF Simulated Performance

UPAR ETF Simulated Performance

Returns + Risk since Inception: Global Equities (5.2% / 15.8%) vs RPAR (8.2% / 10.5%) vs UPAR (10.3% / 14.8%)Returns YTD (2022): Global Equities (-25.4%) vs RPAR (-28.4%) vs UPAR (-38.3%)

Hence, you can summarize RPAR and UPAR as follows:
RPAR ETF seeks to provide equity-like (or slightly better) returns with considerably less volatility than equities.
UPAR ETF seeks to provide considerably better returns than equities while having similar levels of volatility.
Let's highlight a few key years in particular.
2013: Global Equities (+26.7%) vs RPAR (-7.6%) vs UPAR (-10.8%)
All of your equity only buddies are doing backflips with glee over +26.7% returns while RPAR investors are downtrodden over -7.6% performance and UPAR unit holders are crying about -10.8%.
2011: Global Equities (-5.5%) vs RPAR (+14.0%) vs UPAR (+19.8%)
You friends who own all equity portfolios are sourpuss about being down -5.5% whereas RPAR investors are thrilled to be well above water at +14.0% whereas UPAR unit holders are over the moon about crushing +19.8%.
The two key takeaways from this is that when you own a different portfolio you've got to be prepared for different results (tracking error versus markets) and if you're dialing things up with UPAR you get to celebrate more when times are good while suffering succotash when things are not.

RPAR Risk Parity ETF: Principal Investment Strategy
To better understand the process of how the fund operates, let’s turn our attention towards the prospectus where I’ve summarized the key points at the very bottom (source: summary prospectus).
Principal Investment Strategies of the Fund
"The Fund is an actively-managed exchange-traded fund (“ETF”) that seeks to achieve its investment objective primarily by investing across a variety of asset classes, including exposure to global equity securities, U.S. Treasury securities, and commodities. 
The Fund’s investment adviser seeks to invest the Fund’s assets to achieve exposures similar to those of the Advanced Research Risk Parity Index (the “RPAR Index”), a rules-based index created by Advanced Research Investment Solutions, LLC (“ARIS”). The RPAR Index The RPAR Index allocates its exposure to the four asset classes described below using a “risk-parity” approach that seeks to achieve an equal balance between the risk associated with each asset class based on the long-term historic volatility exhibited by each asset class. 
This means that lower risk asset classes (such as U.S. Treasury Inflation Protected Securities (“TIPS”)) will generally have higher notional allocations than higher risk asset classes (such as global equities). 
The RPAR Index seeks long-term risk exposure and long-term target allocations across asset classes as follows:
Long-Term Target Risk Allocation Long-Term Target Asset Allocation Asset Class Sub-Class 25% 35% TIPS Long-Term TIPS (15+ years) 25% 25% Global Equities U.S. Equities Non-U.S. Developed Markets Equities Emerging Markets Equities 25% 25% Commodities Commodity Producer Equities Gold 25% 15%* U.S. Treasuries U.S. Treasury Bills U.S. Treasury Futures * 
This figure represents the RPAR Index’s allocation to U.S. Treasury bills which serve as collateral for the RPAR Index’s allocation to U.S. Treasury futures. 
Total notional exposure to the U.S. Treasuries asset class will exceed 15% due to the RPAR Index’s allocation to 10-year U.S. Treasury note futures and Ultra U.S. Treasury Bond futures. 
The RPAR Index is rebalanced quarterly. In seeking to obtain exposures comparable to those of the RPAR Index, the Fund may invest in a combination of (i) U.S. Treasury securities (including TIPS), (ii) U.S. Treasury futures contracts, (iii) ETFs that track a broad-based index of equity securities for one or more asset classes (or sub-classes), (iv) individual equity securities or depositary receipts, such as American Depositary Receipts (“ADRs”) and Global Depositary Receipts (“GDRs”), representing an interest in foreign equity securities, and (v) other exchange-listed vehicles issuing equity securities (“ETVs”) (including ETFs, exchange-traded notes (“ETNs”) and exchange-listed trusts). 
TIPS are marketable securities whose principal is adjusted based on changes in the Consumer Price Index (“CPI”). With inflation (an increase in the CPI), the principal increases, and with deflation (a decrease in the CPI), the principal decreases. 
The relationship between TIPS and the CPI affects both the principal amount paid when a TIPS instrument matures and the amount of interest that a TIPS instrument pays semi-annually. 
When a TIPS instrument matures, the principal paid is the greater of the CPI-adjusted principal or the original principal. 
TIPS pay interest at a fixed rate. However, because the fixed rate is applied to the CPI-adjusted principal, interest payments can vary in amount from one period to the next. 
If inflation occurs, the interest payment increases. In the event of deflation, the interest payment decreases. 
The Fund may purchase TIPS of any maturity. The Fund will invest directly in U.S. Treasury securities or directly or indirectly in futures contracts to gain long exposure to U.S. Treasury bonds. 
The ETFs in which the Fund invests will typically be index-based ETFs that track a broad-based index that principally invests in equity securities of one or more asset classes set forth above (e.g., U.S. equities, non-U.S. developed market equities, emerging market equities, or gold as described below). 
Such ETFs will typically have net assets of at least $100 million and have aggregate volume over the last 90 days of at least 100,000 shares traded. 
The Fund may invest in ETFs to obtain exposure to the equity securities of commodity producers including in the energy (including clean energy), industrial metals, agriculture and water sectors. 
An ETV allows the Fund to indirectly obtain exposure to an underlying asset class such as futures contracts and commodities without directly trading futures or taking physical delivery of the underlying commodity. 
For example, the Fund may obtain exposure to gold by investing in an ETV that owns gold, rather than the Fund directly holding gold. 
In addition to achieving exposure to the global equities asset class indirectly through ETFs, the Fund may also invest directly in equity securities. 
The equity securities that may comprise the Fund’s equity positions include, but are not limited to, U.S.- listed common and preferred stock of domestic and foreign companies, including those in developed and emerging markets, real estate investment trusts (“REITs”), and ADRs. 
Such securities may be issued by small-, mid-, or large-capitalization companies. 
ADRs are securities traded on a U.S. stock exchange that represent interests in securities issued by a foreign publicly listed company. 
Under normal market conditions, the Fund’s investment adviser will typically buy or sell investments to reflect the quarterly rebalance of the RPAR Index, rather than based on an individual determination of which investments are most attractive at a given time."

Elephant In The Room: Bad YTD Results For RPAR ETF
Let's finally address the elephant in the room.
Why have results for RPAR ETF been so bad this year?
Two reasons.
Firstly, it has been the worst year on record (50+ years of data) for long-only broadly diversified portfolios.
Secondly, the additional leverage (20% for RPAR and 68% for UPAR) has amplified what has been bad to begin with and made it even more brutal.
Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio Annual Returns

2022 Returns: -17.00%Previous Worst Year: -5.46 (1981)
Ray Dalio All-Weather Portfolio

2022 Returns: -19.26%Previous Worst Year: -3.66% (2015)
It's been so bad this year that a popular investing adage has been modified: "Diversification is your only free lunch except for in 2022!
Stocks, Bonds and Gold Down Together
I wrote an article in August entitled: "Is this a generational buying opportunity for long-only diversified portable beta investing strategies?"
I was pondering this very question because I had examined how "rare" it is for stocks, bonds and gold to be down together at the same time.
1972 to 2022 Stocks, Bonds and Gold Returns
Let’s take a look at the big picture of annual returns from 1972 to 2022 for US Large Cap Equities, 10-Year Treasury and Gold.
3 UP / 0 DOWN = 18 (1972, 1979, 1982, 1985, 1986, 1993, 1995, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2020)2 UP / 1 DOWN = 23 (1973, 1974, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1980, 1983, 1984, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2008, 2009, 2014, 2015)1 UP / 2 DOWN = 08 (1981, 1990, 1994, 1996, 2000, 2013, 2018, 2021)0 UP / 3 DOWN = 01 (2022)
2022 sticking out like a sore thumb?
3 UP / 0 DOWN = 36%2 UP / 1 DOWN = 46%1 UP / 2 DOWN = 16%0 UP / 3 DOWN = 2%
If we group these together we’re flying high with 2 or 3 engines 82% of the time.
On the other hand, we’re flying low with 0 or 1 engines only 18% of the time.

RPAR ETF Pros and Cons
Let’s examine the pros and cons of RPAR Risk Parity ETF.

RPAR ETF Pros

Massive diversification between asset classes: Equities (US, Int-Dev, EM), Bonds (10-Year, Long-Term, TIPS), Commodities (Gold, Commodity Equity Producers) all together under one hood
Modest amount of leverage (20%) to help boost returns which historically have been better than global equities with less risk (simulated back-tests)
Risk Parity investing belongs in the same class as the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio and Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio for grouping asset classes based upon historical volatility levels rather than by returns
Fixed income (TIPS + 10-Year + Long-Term Treasury) receives higher allocations (lower standard deviation) whereas global equities, gold and commodity producing equities receive less space (higher standard deviation)
The addition of an "alternative sleeve" with exposure to gold, commodity producing equities and TIPS which are not in many standard 60/40 portfolios
The potential to combine this strategy with tactical and/or adaptive asset allocation funds to form a dynamic all-seasons powerhouse portfolio

RPAR ETF Cons

YTD results reveal a "new low" for broadly diversified long-only portfolios and with modest leverage applied this adds insult to injury along with tracking error (see simulated results for 2013)
Feedback from other investors suggesting concern over "commodity producing equities" over commodities and "interest rate risk" for the longer duration fixed income portion of the portfolio

RPAR Potential Portfolio Solutions
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Now that we’ve taken a thorough look at RPAR ETF let’s see how it can potentially fit into a portfolio at large.

RPAR ETF Total Portfolio Solution
Does RPAR ETF have the potential to be a total portfolio solution?
It sure does.
If you compare it with a typical 60/40 portfolio it offers more broad global diversification (equities) along with extra diversifiers such as TIPS, gold and commodity producing equities.
RPAR and/or UPAR and done.
You betcha.
100% RPAR ETF / UPAR ETF

RPAR ETF 3 Fund Diversified Quant Portfolio
Although RPAR ETF has the potential to be a one-ticket portfolio solution it pairs nicely with other strategies such as the following 3 fund diversified quant portfolio:
40% RPAR / UPAR40% DBMF20% VAMO
Here we've got a 3 ETF portfolio solution offering investors the diversified Risk Parity strategy along with a managed futures and long-short factor focused equities with tactical beta hedges.

The results of this portfolio are not too shabby at all.
Returns greater than risk.
9.08% vs 7.57%.
High Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio.
Above water every year (including 2022).
I'd be thrilled to ride with this long-term versus a 60/40 portfolio.
Annual Returns Of Portfolio Assets 

And for critics eager to suggest RPAR has been a drag on the portfolio (after a challenging 2022) feast your eyes upon the returns of 2020.
As with any strategically diversified portfolio you'd want certain puzzle pieces to perform well when others are not.
RPAR the top dawg in 2020.
VAMO the robust beast in 2021.
DBMF the saviour in 2022.
Uncorrelated strategies zigging and zagging while overall conspiring to keep your portfolio above water.

What Others Have To Say About RPAR ETF
Now that we’ve covered a few different portfolio solutions let’s see what others have to say about the fund for those who prefer video format.

What Evoke Advisors Have To Say About RPAR ETF
Here we can learn more about the strategy behind RPAR and UPAR straight from the Evoke Advisors crew.

Nomadic Samuel filming while visiting beautiful Vancouver Island, British Columbia, Canada
RPAR Risk Parity ETF — 12-Question FAQ
1) What is RPAR in one sentence?
RPAR is a risk-parity, long-only asset-allocation ETF that balances risk across global equities, U.S. Treasuries (nominal + TIPS), commodity-producer equities, and gold, using modest leverage to target equity-like returns with lower volatility over a full cycle.
2) What does “risk parity” actually mean?
Instead of sizing assets by dollars, risk parity sizes by volatility, giving more weight to historically steadier assets (e.g., Treasuries, TIPS) and less to volatile ones (equities, gold) so that each sleeve contributes more evenly to total portfolio risk.
3) How is RPAR’s target mix constructed?
Long-term targets (by asset class exposure) are roughly: TIPS, Treasuries, global equities, commodity-producer equities, and gold, with the bond sleeves getting the largest notional because they’re lower volatility, and the portfolio is rebalanced quarterly to stay near targets.
4) Why does RPAR use commodity-producer equities instead of direct commodities?
RPAR emphasizes listed producers (energy, diversified miners, agriculture, clean energy, water) plus a dedicated gold sleeve, seeking inflation sensitivity via equities of commodity businesses; the trade-off is that producers carry equity beta and may not track spot commodities one-for-one.
5) How does RPAR differ from UPAR?
They are proportionally similar, but UPAR uses more leverage (expanded canvas), amplifying both upside and drawdowns. RPAR ≈ lower-vol, equity-like return target; UPAR ≈ higher return target with equity-like volatility.
6) Why did RPAR struggle in 2022?
2022 was an unusually bad year when stocks, bonds, and gold fell together, hurting diversified long-only portfolios; modest leverage in RPAR magnified what was already a historically rare environment for portable beta.
7) What role do TIPS and Treasuries play here?
They’re the stability and deflation/flight-to-quality hedges, and TIPS add inflation linkage; together they’re sized large (by risk parity logic) to keep portfolio volatility in check while equities/real-asset sleeves pursue growth and inflation sensitivity.
8) Is RPAR meant to replace a 60/40?
It can be used as a one-ticket core or as a diversifying sleeve; versus 60/40, risk parity historically shows smoother drawdowns and better risk-adjusted metrics, though it can lag in some bull markets or in unusual cross-asset selloffs.
9) What are the main risks?

Cross-asset selloffs (rare, but 2022-like)

Duration/interest-rate risk (heavy Treasury/TIPS exposure)

Equity beta in commodity producers (not pure commodity exposure)

Tracking error versus cap-weighted equity benchmarks

Leverage magnification (works both ways)

10) How might investors pair RPAR inside a broader plan?
Common approaches: keep RPAR as a core, then add managed futures / trend for adaptability, or pair with factor/tactical equity sleeves—aiming for a mix of static diversification (RPAR) + adaptive diversifiers.
11) How often does RPAR rebalance and why does it matter?
The index rebalances quarterly to maintain the intended risk balance among sleeves; without periodic rebalance, drifting weights could re-concentrate risk in whichever sleeve rallied last.
12) Is this financial advice?
No. This FAQ is educational/entertainment only and doesn’t account for your circumstances. Do your own research and consult a qualified advisor.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
I feel like the YTD results of 2022 for a fund like RPAR are revealing in many ways.
The performance of the fund is of less concern as is the education and patience levels of most investors.
I've heard a lot of jeers and criticism thrown at RPAR and UPAR ETF.
Risk Parity doesn't work!
This sucks severely!
Yet how many of these critics/investors (who are over the moon thrilled to hurl stinky banana peels) are aware of the fact that this is the first year since 1972 that US Large Cap Equities, 10-Year Treasury and Gold are down together.
Risk Parity investment strategies do not promise to be above water every single year.
The irrational expectations of many investors leaves me shaking my head at times.
You're promised a strategy and to achieve the desired results you want, patience is required not optional.
However, I think we can all learn one important lesson from a year like this one.
Even the most diversified long-only portfolios benefit greatly from having adaptive and tactical wingmen.
If you consider the model portfolio I've suggested to pair with RPAR (40% RPAR, 40% DBMF, 20% VAMO) you'll notice that each one of these funds took turns picking up the so-called tab.
RPAR = 2020VAMO = 2021DBMF = 2022
Diversify.
Diversify.
And then diversify some more.
That's the name of the game IMO.
Anyhow, we're close to 3000 words as we're breaking new territory with the longest ETF review on this blog.
So let's wrap things up.
What do you think of RPAR ETF?
Do you think it is a decent long-term investment strategy or have 2022 YTD results scared you off permanently?
I'd be more than curious to know.

#### RSSB ETF Review:  Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF Review
When I survey the landscape of capital efficient ETFs I'm hard-pressed to find a fund provider that has made a bigger impact in recent months than the Return Stacking crew.
In 2023, they launched three unique products which all adhere to a formula of $1 invested gives you exposure to 100% A plus 100% B.

RSBT ETF = 100% Bonds + 100% Managed Futures (Trend)RSST ETF = 100% US Equities + 100% Managed (Trend)RSSB ETF = 100% Global Equities + 100% Bonds (US Treasury Futures)

For a while it appeared that their Global Stocks and Bonds ETF was going to be a 90/60 fund, but I was thrilled on a personal level (and I think it was also a great decision on their part) that it distinguished itself from another capital efficient trio of 90/60 equity plus bonds products from WisdomTree.
NTSX ETF = 90% US Equities / 60% BondsNTSI ETF = 90% Int-Dev Equities / 60% BondsNTSE ETF = 90% Emerging Equities / 60% Bonds
So what is different and unique about RSSB ETF?

Global Equities
More Capital Efficient
Better Bang For Your Capital Efficient Buck

It's crucial to zoom in specifically on point number 3.

If maximum capital efficiency is your primary goal to create space in your portfolio for other asset classes and strategies (it sure is for me) you'd need to commit 67% of your resources with NTS(X,I,E) to accomplish the mandate of a 60/40 portfolio.
In other words, 67% of NTS(X,I,E) = 60/40 portfolio exposure.
You've got 33% resources leftover for something else.
Don't get me wrong, that's not too shabby at all!
However, look at what we can potentially do with 67% of our resources allocated to the following:
40% RSSB - 100% Equities / 100% Bonds20% RSST - 100% Equities / 100% Managed Futures (Trend)7% GDE - 90% Equities / 90% Gold Futures
We're considerably more capital efficient with this trio:
66.3% Equities40% Bonds20% Managed Futures (Trend)6.3 % Gold
Not only do we have a 60/40 (plus 6.3% additional equities) but we've also started to carve out space for an alternative sleeve with both managed futures and gold.
With that 67% space we've built ourselves a balanced portfolio (60/40) and we've efficiently added two uncorrelated alternatives to the mix.
You've gotta like that!

In many regards it reminds me of the movie scene where Captain Richard Phillips is taken hostage by Somali Pirates:
RSSB to NTS(X,I,E): "Look at me. Look at me. I'm the Captain now!" 

Indeed, if you're seeking maximum capital efficiency as an investor there is a new captain aboard the equities plus bonds vessel.
Its name is Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF.
AKA RSSB ETF.

Review of RSSB ETF : Reviewing Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
RSSB ETF Overview, Holdings and Info
The investment case for “Return Stacked Global Stocks and Bonds” has been laid out succinctly by the folks over at Return Stacked ETFs: (source: fund landing page)
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Investment Case

"Capital Efficiency and Diversification.  Replacing core stock and bond exposure with RSSB frees up capital to invest in diversifying asset classes and strategies.
Reduce Cash Drag.  Utilize the embedded capital efficiency in RSSB to hold cash without necessarily losing core stock and bond exposure.
Avoiding 100% Equities for Growth Clients.  Reduce equity concentration for growth clients by introducing a second, potentially diversifying source of returns.
*Diversification does not assure a profit.*"
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Fund Overview

"The Fund seeks long-term capital appreciation by investing in two complimentary investment strategies: a Global Equity strategy and a U.S. Treasury Futures strategy. For every $1 invested, the Fund attempts to provide $1 of exposure to its Global Equity strategy and $1 of exposure to its U.S. Treasury Futures strategy.
The Global Equity strategy seeks to capture the total return of global equities on a market capitalization-weighted basis, investing in global equities, global equity ETFs, regional equity ETFs, or equity index futures.
The U.S. Treasury Futures strategy seeks to provide exposure to the U.S. Treasury bond market by investing in U.S. Treasury futures contracts with maturities ranging from 2 to 30 years."
RSSB ETF: Fund Selection Process
To better understand the process of how the fund operates, let’s turn our attention towards the summary prospectus where I've highlighted the key points at the very bottom. (source: summary prospectus)
Principal Investment Strategies:

Principal Investment Strategies
"The Fund is an actively-managed exchange-traded fund (“ETF”) that seeks to achieve its investment objective by investing primarily in large-capitalization global equity securities, global equity ETFs (or a combination of other ETFs that together provide global equity market exposure), and futures contracts that provide the Fund with exposure to the performance of the U.S. Treasury bond market.
In addition, the Fund will hold U.S. Treasury bills and other high-quality securities as collateral for the futures contracts as well as to generate income. The Fund uses leverage to “stack” the total return of holdings in the Fund’s global equity strategy together with the potential returns of the Fund’s U.S. treasury futures contract strategy.
Essentially, for each dollar invested in the Fund, it provides about 90 cents of exposure to the Fund’s global equity investments and about 60 cents of exposure to investments in the Fund’s U.S. Treasury futures strategy. So, the return of the Fund’s U.S. Treasury futures strategy is stacked on top of the returns of the Fund’s global equity strategy. 12 Under normal circumstances, the Fund will invest at least 80% of its net assets, plus borrowings for investment purposes, in (a) global equity securities and ETFs that, in the aggregate, provide exposure to the global equity markets, and (b) U.S. Treasury future contracts that provide the Fund with indirect exposure to the performance of the U.S. treasury bond market.
The Fund’s “80%” policy is nonfundamental and can be changed without shareholder approval. However, Fund shareholders would be given at least 60 days’ notice prior to any such change."
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Global Equity Exposure:
"The Fund may invest in the equity securities of companies located throughout the world (e.g., in the United States, other developed markets (e.g., Europe), and emerging markets). Under normal conditions, the Fund will invest at least 40% of its assets (unless market conditions are not deemed favorable, in which case the Fund would invest at least 30% of its assets) in companies in multiple countries outside of the Unites States (i.e., non-U.S. companies).
In determining whether a company is a U.S. or non-U.S. company, the Fund’s sub-adviser, Newfound Research, LLC (the “Sub-Adviser”) primarily considers the location of the principal trading market for the company’s common stock, and may also consider other metrics, such the location of the company’s corporate or operational headquarters or principal place of business.
The Sub-Adviser will seek to construct the Fund’s global equity portfolio to reflect the overall global equity markets on a market capitalization weighted basis. To do so, the Fund will invest in global equity ETFs, which are ETFs that invest primarily in the equity securities of companies located throughout the world, or other broad-based ETFs that provide exposure to the global equity market. For example, rather than hold a global equity ETF, the Fund may hold multiple ETFs that, together, provide similar exposure (e.g., a combination of U.S. equity ETFs, international equity ETFs, and emerging markets ETFs).
The Fund’s investment in global equity ETFs (or a combination of ETFs providing global equity market exposure) will generally comprise between 80% and 90% of the Fund’s portfolio. In addition, the Fund may invest in foreign equity securities directly."

U.S. Treasury Futures Exposure:
"To provide the Fund with exposure to performance of the U.S. Treasury bond market, the Fund will invest in U.S. Treasury future contracts, which are contracts for the purchase and sale of U.S. government notes or bonds for future delivery. The Fund will invest in futures contracts on U.S. Treasuries with maturities ranging from 2 to 30 years, with a target duration of 2 to 8 years.
Under normal circumstances, the Fund’s aggregate U.S. Treasury futures contracts position will represent a “notional exposure” (i.e., the total underlying amount of exposure created by a derivatives trade) of approximately 60% of the Fund’s net assets. Note: Notional value is the total underlying amount of a derivatives trade. Leverage allows an investor (like the Fund) to use a small amount of money to theoretically control a much larger amount. So, notional value reflects the total value of a trade, not the cost (or market value) of taking the trade. Futures contracts have a limited lifespan before they expire (e.g., quarterly).
The Fund will frequently “roll-over” futures contracts - replace an expiring contract with a contract that expires further in the future. As a result, the Fund’s portfolio will be subject to a high portfolio turnover rate."
________________________________________________________________________________________________

"This supplement provides technical clarifications to the principal investment strategy description of the Return Stacked® Global Stocks & Bonds ETF (the “Fund”).
In particular, the description is being revised to clarify the Fund’s ability to invest in individual equity securities and equity index futures contracts, and to reflect the Fund’s target exposure to the Fund’s global equity investments and the Fund’s U.S. Treasury futures strategy.
The last two sentences of the first paragraph under “Principal Investment Strategies” in the “Fund Summary” section are amended and restated to read as follows: Essentially, one dollar invested in the Fund provides approximately one dollar of exposure to the Fund’s global equity investments and approximately one dollar of exposure to the Fund’s U.S. Treasury futures strategy.
So, the return of the U.S. Treasury futures strategy (minus the cost of financing) is essentially stacked on top of the returns of the global equity strategy. The second paragraph under the sub-heading “Global Equity Exposure” is deleted and replaced with the following:
The Sub-Adviser will seek to construct the Fund’s global equity portfolio to reflect the overall global equity markets on a market capitalization weighted basis.
To do so, the Fund will invest in global equity ETFs (which are ETFs that invest primarily in the equity securities of companies located throughout the world), other broad-based ETFs that provide exposure to the global equity market, individual equity securities, and equity index futures contracts.
For example, rather than hold a global equity ETF, the Fund may:
● Hold multiple ETFs that, together, provide similar exposure (e.g., a combination of U.S. equity ETFs, international equity ETFs, and emerging markets ETFs);
● Hold individual securities that, together, provide similar exposure (e.g., through a basket of securities representing the underlying holdings of a global equity ETF);
● Hold equity index futures contracts that, together, provide similar exposure; or
● Employ a combination of the above holdings, so the aggregated investment provides similar exposure.
The Fund’s investment in global equity ETFs (or a combination of ETFs, individual securities providing global equity market exposure) will generally comprise between 75% and 80% of the Fund’s portfolio.
The remaining exposure to global equities will generally be achieved through equity index futures. The equity index futures may be linked to leading indices from developed, emerging, and global markets.
The last sentence of the first paragraph under the sub-heading “U.S. Treasury Futures Exposure” is amended and restated to read as follows: Under normal circumstances, the Fund’s aggregate U.S. Treasury futures contracts position will represent a “notional exposure” (i.e., the total underlying amount of exposure created by a derivatives trade) of approximately 100% of the Fund’s net assets.
The paragraph under the sub-heading “Collateral – U.S. Treasury Futures” is amended and restated to read as follows:
The Fund expects to invest approximately 0% to 25% of its net assets in U.S. Treasury bills, money market funds, cash, and cash equivalents (e.g., high quality commercial paper and similar instruments that are rated investment grade or, if unrated, of comparable quality, as the Adviser or Sub-Adviser determines), that provide liquidity, serve as margin or collateralize the Fund’s investments in futures contracts."

Return Stacked Globals Stocks and Bonds Key Points

Active Management Strategy: The Fund operates as an actively-managed exchange-traded fund (ETF) focusing on achieving its investment objective through strategic investments.
Primary Investment Focus: It primarily invests in large-capitalization global equity securities, global equity ETFs, or combinations of ETFs that offer global equity market exposure, and futures contracts related to the U.S. Treasury bond market.
Use of Leverage: The Fund employs leverage to enhance the total return of its holdings, combining the returns from its global equity strategy with the potential returns from its U.S. Treasury futures strategy. Specifically, for each dollar invested, approximately 90 cents are exposed to global equities and 60 cents to U.S. Treasury futures. *(Now 100 cents global equities and 100 cents US. Treasury Futures)*
Investment Allocation Policy: At least 80% of the Fund's net assets, plus any borrowings for investment purposes, are allocated towards global equity securities, ETFs providing global equity market exposure, and U.S. Treasury future contracts.
Nonfundamental 80% Policy: This policy is nonfundamental and can be changed without shareholder approval, albeit with a 60-day notice to shareholders before any changes.
Global Equity Investment Approach:

The Fund invests globally, including in the U.S., other developed markets, and emerging markets.
At least 40% of its assets are invested in non-U.S. companies under normal conditions, which can be reduced to 30% if market conditions are deemed unfavorable.
Investments may include direct equity securities, global equity ETFs, or a mix of ETFs that collectively mimic global equity exposure.

U.S. Treasury Futures Strategy:

Investments in U.S. Treasury future contracts aim to provide exposure to the U.S. Treasury bond market, with a focus on futures with maturities ranging from 2 to 30 years and a target duration of 2 to 8 years.
The notional exposure of U.S. Treasury futures contracts is about 60% of the Fund's net assets, reflecting leverage use.

High Portfolio Turnover: Due to frequent rollovers of futures contracts, the Fund is likely to experience a high portfolio turnover rate.
Collateral and Income Generation: The Fund holds U.S. Treasury bills and high-quality securities as collateral for futures contracts and to generate income.
Technical Clarifications and Adjustments:

The Fund has clarified its strategy to include investments in individual equity securities and equity index futures contracts, adjusting its exposure targets for global equity investments and U.S. Treasury futures strategy.
It now provides approximately equal exposure to both its global equity investments and U.S. Treasury futures strategy, aiming for a 1:1 dollar exposure ratio.
The global equity portfolio is designed to mirror the global equity markets on a market capitalization weighted basis, involving a mix of global equity ETFs, individual securities, and equity index futures.

Portfolio Composition Changes:

The investment in global equity ETFs or a combination providing global equity market exposure will comprise between 75% and 80% of the Fund’s portfolio.
The remaining exposure to global equities will be achieved through equity index futures linked to major indices across developed, emerging, and global markets.

U.S. Treasury Futures Exposure Adjustment: The notional exposure of U.S. Treasury futures contracts has been adjusted to approximately 100% of the Fund’s net assets.
Collateral for U.S. Treasury Futures: The Fund plans to invest between 0% and 25% of its net assets in U.S. Treasury bills, money market funds, cash, and cash equivalents for liquidity, serving as margin, or collateralizing its futures contracts investments.

RSSB ETF Info
Ticker: RSSBCanvas Size: 200% Total = (100% Global Stocks + 100% Bonds)Net Expense Ratio: 0.41AUM: 70.54Inception: 12/04/2023

RSSB ETF Strategy Pros and Cons
Let’s move on to examine the potential pros and cons of RSSB ETF.
RSSB Pros: Distinct Advantages

Features a unique combination of 100% US Equities and 100% Treasury Futures, offering investors a distinctive capital-efficient tool.
The first of its kind capital-efficient 100% global equities + 100% Treasury Futures ETF with 100/100 exposure of both asset classes
Flexibility to pair this with other capital efficient building blocks (e.g., managed futures, gold, m/n, style premia, otm put, etc).
Option to pair with other capital efficient funds to create a 60/40 portfolio + alternatives
Compatibility with various other capital-efficient ETFs and Mutual Funds to craft a personalized return stacking design.
More capital efficient exposure to stocks and bonds 100/100 compared to 90/60 NTS(X,I,E) WisdomTree suite
No home country bias with this product as it is Global Equities as opposed to US only
Creates room in your portfolio for alternative diversified diversifiers like global systematic macro, gold, market-neutral strategies, long-short equity, style premia, catastrophe bonds, arbitrage, bitcoin, etc.
Competitive management fee for a fund offering 200% expanded canvas coverage

RSSB Cons: Potential Limitations

For investors seeking very specific exposures to US, Int-Dev and EM equities and less leverage the NTS(X,I,E) suite might be a better fit
Likely best suited for tax advantaged accounts due to potential gains/losses with futures contracts

RSSB ETF Model Portfolio Ideas
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
RRSB ETF is a powerful puzzle piece that allows investors to build the capital efficient portfolio of their dreams.
Let's explore a few different options.

Return Stacking Maximum Diversification 3 Fund Portfolio
Model Portfolio:
40% RSSB20% QLEIX40% QDSIX
Exposures:
40% Global Equities20% L/S Global Equities40% Bonds (U.S. Treasuries)40% Diversified Alternatives (6 distinct strategies including style premia, m/n equities, macro, managed futures, etc)
Expanded Canvas: 140%
That's it.
You're done.
With just three funds you've built an exceptionally well diversified portfolio.

Return Stacking Tactical Portfolio
If you're keen to create a portfolio with an offensive and defensive mode let's explore how you can do just that.
Model Portfolio:
40% RSSB20% RSST20% HCMT10% CAOS10% BTAL
Exposures:
Offensive Mode
100% Equities40% Bonds (US Treasuries)20% Managed Futures10% OTM PUT10% M/N Anti-Beta
Defensive Mode
60% Equities40% Bonds (US Treasuries)20% Managed Futures20% Cash10% OTM Put10% M/N Anti-Beta
Expanded Canvas: 180% in offensive mode and 160% in defensive mode

Return Stacking 10+ Strategies Under One Hood Portfolio
For investors seeking a maximally diversified portfolio (10 strategies / 9 funds) with a desire to keep things within the ETF universe the following may be of interest:
Model Portfolio:
20% RSSB ETF20% RSBT ETF20% GDE ETF20% QIS ETF4% BTAL ETF4% CAOS ETF4% SVOL ETF4% FBTC ETF4% LBAY ETF
Exposures:
58% Equities40% Bonds (US Treasuries)20% Managed Futures Trend18% Gold10% QIS Multi-Strategy Alt4% M/N Anti-Beta4% OTM Put4% Short Vol4% Bitcoin4% L/S Equity
Expanded Canvas: 166%

12-Question FAQ — Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF (RSSB) Review
1) What is RSSB and why is it notable?
RSSB (Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF) is a capital-efficient “stacked” ETF designed so that each $1 invested targets ~$1 of global equity exposure and ~$1 of U.S. Treasury futures exposure. That 100/100 design can free up space in a portfolio for additional diversifiers while preserving core stock/bond exposure.
2) How does RSSB compare to WisdomTree’s 90/60 trio (NTSX/NTSI/NTSE)?
WisdomTree’s funds target 90% equities + 60% bonds (U.S., international developed, or EM), whereas RSSB targets ~100% global equities + ~100% U.S. Treasury futures. Practically, RSSB can deliver more “bang for your buck” in capital efficiency and, being global in scope, avoids a home-country equity bias.
3) How does the capital efficiency translate into portfolio design?
Because RSSB stacks two return streams into the same dollar, you can recreate a 60/40 core with less capital and use the freed space for diversifiers. For example, allocating 40% RSSB + 20% RSST + 7% GDE inside a 67% sleeve can approximate ~66% equities, 40% bonds, 20% managed futures, and ~6% gold, delivering a balanced core plus alternatives within the same capital.
4) What is RSSB trying to do under the hood?
The fund actively combines:

A Global Equity strategy seeking market-cap-weighted global equity beta (via global/region ETFs, individual securities, or equity index futures), and

A U.S. Treasury Futures strategy (2–30-year maturities) to add a stacked bond return stream on top of equities.

5) How does the Global Equity sleeve work in practice?
Under normal conditions, the portfolio keeps broad global equity exposure with at least 30–40% in non-U.S. companies. The sub-adviser can mix global ETFs, regional ETFs, individual stocks, and equity index futures so the aggregate resembles cap-weighted global equities.
6) How does the U.S. Treasury Futures sleeve work?
RSSB uses exchange-traded U.S. Treasury futures across the curve (target 2–8 years duration overall) and rolls those contracts as they near expiry. It holds T-bills/cash for margin and collateral and may have higher turnover in the futures sleeve due to rolling.
7) Did the fund update its exposure targets?
Yes. A technical clarification aligned the design to ~$1 global equities + ~$1 U.S. Treasury futures per $1 invested (i.e., ~100/100), with the global sleeve expressed via a mix of ETFs, individual equities, and equity index futures, and the Treasury futures notional set around 100% of net assets.
8) What are the key reasons to consider RSSB?
Capital efficiency & diversification: Replace part of your core 60/40 with RSSB to free capital for uncorrelated sleeves (managed futures, gold, style premia, market-neutral, etc.). It may also reduce cash drag and temper equity concentration for growth-tilted allocations by adding a second, potentially diversifying return stream.
9) What are the main caveats?
If you want granular regional equity tilts with lower leverage, WisdomTree’s 90/60 suite might suit you better. Also, because RSSB uses futures, many investors prefer it in tax-advantaged accounts to simplify tax treatment of gains/losses from derivatives.
10) What are the fund facts?
Ticker: RSSBTarget Canvas: ~200% (≈100% global equities + ≈100% U.S. Treasuries)Net Expense Ratio: 0.41%AUM: ~70.5MInception: 12/04/2023
11) What are example model portfolios using RSSB?

Maximum Diversification (3-Fund): 40% RSSB, 20% QLEIX, 40% QDSIX → ~40% global equities, 40% bonds, 20% L/S equities, 40% multi-alts (expanded canvas ~140%).

Tactical (Offense/Defense): 40% RSSB, 20% RSST, 20% HCMT, 10% CAOS, 10% BTAL → Offense: 100% equities, 40% bonds, 20% trend, 10% OTM put, 10% anti-beta; Defense: 60% equities, 40% bonds, 20% trend, 20% cash, 10% OTM put, 10% anti-beta (canvas ~180%/160%).

10+ Strategies, All-ETF: 20% RSSB, 20% RSBT, 20% GDE, 20% QIS, 4% each of BTAL/CAOS/SVOL/FBTC/LBAY → ~58% equities, 40% bonds, 20% trend, 18% gold, 10% multi-strategy, 4% anti-beta, 4% OTM put, 4% short vol, 4% bitcoin, 4% L/S equity (canvas ~166%).

12) What’s the bottom line from this review?
For investors who prize capital efficiency and want room for uncorrelated alternatives—without abandoning a core stock/bond backbone—RSSB is a compelling “new captain of the ship.” The 100/100 design makes it a versatile building block for expanded-canvas portfolios.Note: This review is for entertainment/education only and not investment advice. Do your own research and consider consulting a financial professional.
Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
If you haven't guessed it already, I'm a big fan and investor in RSSB ETF!
It's an important capital efficient puzzle piece in my expanded canvas portfolio.
Those 100/100 stacked combos are on point.

But at this point in the review I'm more interested in what you've got to say.
What do you think of RSSB ETF?
Are you a capital efficient investor?

#### RSST ETF Review: Return Stacked U.S. Stocks & Managed Futures ETF Review
You're probably wondering if I've run out of things to return stack!
I mean we've witnessed dosas piled up to the heavens above, triple burger feasts and a mountain of pancakes on this investing blog.
Do I have any other tricks up my sleeve?
It turns out I do!

A few years back, I visited Tokyo, Japan where I heard rumours of an 8 flavour ice cream cone.
Being the absolute glutton that I am, of course, I had to check it out.
So I went in search of this "return stacked" Japanese ice cream in some nondescript basement of a shopping mall in Tokyo.
And folks I eventually found it.
I can't recommend a better way to expand your waistline and/or drift off into a pre-diabetic coma than trying to consume all 8 scoops but somehow I pulled it off.

But we're not here today to discuss my lack of self-control when it comes to food.
We're here to unpack an exciting new "return stacking strategy" that manifested itself recently in the form of RSST ETF.
It's better known as Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures.
For every $1 spent you get 1$ exposure to US large-cap equities + $1 to a Managed Futures strategy.
2 for 1.
It's easily one my favourite ETFs of the year and quite frankly a superstar when it comes to expanded canvas products in the marketplace.
In my opinion, it's one of the most versatile capital efficient puzzle pieces out there.
So, without further ado, let's review RSST ETF.
Nomadic Samuel about to devour return stacked Japanese ice cream in Tokyo, Japan
The Potential Benefits Of Managed Futures

Ladies and Gentlemen, Princes and Princesses, Knights in Shining Armor, and perhaps the occasional Pirate — gather around! Today, we shall embark on a whimsical journey to the magical realm of Managed Futures. Now, I understand that you might have been expecting dragons, unicorns, or perhaps a sprinkling of fairy dust, but bear with me. The world of Managed Futures is filled with its own breed of magic, especially for your investment portfolio.
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Diversification Delight: Managed futures are like the rainbow sprinkles on an investment sundae. Who wants a bland, one-flavor portfolio? Not I! And neither should you. With managed futures, you get to sprinkle some of that non-correlated asset goodness into your holdings. It's like having both chocolate and vanilla. Or better yet, rocky road with a side of mint chip.
Ride the Wave: Ever tried surfing? It's all about catching the right wave. Managed futures strategies can go both long (ride the wave up) and short (ride the wave down). So, whether the market's doing the cha-cha slide or the moonwalk, you've got some moves to groove with it.
The Cool Under Pressure Award: When the financial markets are throwing tantrums like a toddler denied candy, managed futures are that cool kid in the corner, sipping a juice box with poise. They tend to exhibit low correlation with traditional asset classes, offering potential stability during market meltdowns. The kind of friend you want around when the proverbial investment ice cream hits the fan.
Global Party: Why limit yourself to one playground? Managed futures party globally! They can access a broad range of global markets, from grains in Graceland to metals in Middle-earth. Okay, maybe not Middle-earth, but you get the picture.
Flexibility Gymnastics: Managed futures funds can change their asset exposure on a dime. They’re more flexible than a contortionist at a circus. Whether it’s the shift from equities to commodities or from bonds to currencies, these funds can pirouette with grace.

In short, if you’re looking for a whimsical addition to your portfolio's investment party, managed futures might just be the disco ball you’ve been waiting for. Dance on, savvy investor, dance on!
RSST Portfolio Structure
source: returnstackedefts.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Why Return Stack US Equities With Managed Futures?
Picture this: US equities and managed futures decide to throw a soirée. What's on the agenda? Nothing short of the grandest, most exhilarating investment shindig of the century! Let’s dive into why this is the duo you didn't know you needed.

The Peanut Butter & Jelly Principle: Just as these two sandwich superstars complement each other’s strengths, US equities provide the solid bread and butter (or, ahem, peanut butter) of growth and dividends. Managed futures, on the other hand, are the zesty jelly, adding flavor with their dynamic strategies. Alone, they're delightful. Together? Culinary (and financial) bliss.
Diversification’s Dashing Dance: In the ballroom of investments, US equities are the ever-popular waltz, while managed futures are the unexpected tango. When the stock market decides to have an off day (or month, or year…), managed futures might just sweep in, twirling and saving the dance. Their typically non-correlated performance means when equities dip, managed futures can cha-cha real smooth.
The Bouncer at the Portfolio Club: Market volatility is like that one party crasher who wasn’t invited but shows up anyway. But don’t fret! Managed futures, with their global market strategies and long-short positions, act as the portfolio's bouncer. They can handle market rowdiness, ensuring the party goes on.
The Global Tour: If US equities are the home band playing your favorite familiar tunes, managed futures are the globetrotting DJ, bringing in beats from commodities in Cairo to currencies in Canberra. It’s a world tour right in your portfolio, ensuring you're grooving to diverse investment rhythms.
Fashion Forward: In the ever-trending world of investments, having both US equities and managed futures is akin to sporting both timeless classics and avant-garde haute couture. Equities? Your trusted tuxedo. Managed futures? That bold statement piece everyone's raving about.

Aa blend of US equities and managed futures is like an epic gala with a fusion of timeless classics and electric new beats. You'll have tales to tell, dances to relish, and perhaps, returns to cherish.
Cheers to a harmonious financial waltz! 🥂🕺💃

RSST ETF SIM vs 100% S&P 500 vs 100% 60/40 Portfolio Backtest

CAGR: 15.40% vs 11.65% vs 7.38%RISK: 14.88% vs 15.00% vs 9.91%BEST YEAR: 43.56% vs 31.22% vs 21.79%WORST YEAR: -8.33% vs -18.17% vs -16.90%MAX DRAWDOWN: -13.79% vs -23.93% vs -20.78%SHARPE RATIO: 0.96 vs 0.74 vs 0.66SORTINO RATIO: 1.71 vs 1.14 vs 0.99MARKET CORRELATION: 0.76 vs 1.00 vs 0.98

Review of RSST ETF : Reviewing Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
source: Return Stacked® Portfolio Solutions on YouTube
Newfound Research and ReSolve Asset Management

When Newfound Research and ReSolve Asset Management team up for a project, it's bound to be top-notch.
This latest endeavor is no different.
For the past year, I've kept tabs on Corey Hoffstein from Newfound Research and the dynamic trio from ReSolve - Adam Butler, Rodrigo Gordillo, and Mike Philbrick.
They've consistently shared invaluable insights through tweets, videos, and podcasts.
The term "return stacking" frequently surfaced in their discussions.
Initially, I thought "return stacking" was just a buzzword they introduced for advisory purposes and specialized portfolio models.
But now, the fog has lifted.
It's an offering meant for all.
With the introduction of RSST ETF, RSBT ETF, and the upcoming RSSB ETF, retail investors are now presented with innovative tools to craft their ideal return stacked portfolios.
source: returnstackedetfs.com
RSST ETF Overview, Holdings and Info

The investment case for “Return Stacked US Stocks and Managed Futures” has been laid out succinctly by the folks over at Return Stacked ETFs: (source: fund landing page)
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Investment Case

"Capital Efficiency: Aims to provide simultaneous exposure to U.S. stocks and a managed futures strategy.  For every $1 invested, the RSST aims to provide $1 of exposure to large-cap U.S. equities and $1 of exposure to a managed futures strategy.
Diversification: RSST seeks to provide exposure to a managed futures strategy that has historically exhibited low correlation to both stocks and bonds.
Inflation Hedging: With the ability to go both long and short global futures markets (including equities, bonds, commodities, and currencies), managed futures has historically exhibited inflation-hedging characteristics.

*Diversification does not assure a profit.*"
source: returnstackedetfs.com

Fund Overview

"The Fund seeks long-term capital appreciation by investing in two complimentary investment strategies: a U.S. equity strategy and a managed futures strategy. For every $1 invested, the Fund attempts to provide $1 of exposure to its U.S. equity strategy and $1 of exposure to its managed futures strategy.
The U.S. equity strategy seeks to capture the total return of large-cap U.S. equities by investing in large-cap U.S. stocks, large-cap U.S. equity ETFs, and U.S. equity index futures.
The managed futures strategy will invest using a trend-following strategy in futures contracts among four major asset classes: commodities, currencies, equities, and fixed income."
source: returnstackedetfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
RSST ETF: Fund Selection Process
To better understand the process of how the fund operates, let’s turn our attention towards the summary prospectus where I've summarized the key points at the very bottom. (source: summary prospectus)
Principal Investment Strategies:

Return Stacked Bonds and Managed Futures Key Points

Actively Managed ETF: Pursues the dual mandate of 100% US Stocks + 100% Managed Futures strategies
Leverage: Stacks the returns of 100% Stocks with 100% Managed Futures utilizing leverage
$1 USD Invested Exposure: $1 USD of Stocks + $1 USD of Managed Futures
U.S. Equity Strategy: U.S. equity securities, U.S. equity ETFs, or U.S. equity index futures contracts
Managed Futures Strategy: 4 major asset classes (commodities, currencies, equities, fixed income) utilizing futures contracts
200% Expanded Canvas: Return Stacking 100% Stocks + 100% Managed Futures
Cash Collateral: U.S. Treasury bills and cash = collateral for the futures contracts + generate income
Stocks Strategy Mandate: Equal total return of US Large Cap Equities (via low cost ETFs and Equity Index Futures)
Managed Futures Mandate: Systematic and quantitative trend process of taking long/short positions across 4 major asset classes

RSST ETF Info
Ticker: RSSTCanvas Size: 200% Total = (100% US Stocks + 100% Managed Futures)Net Expense Ratio: 1.04AUM: ? (*Review written mere days after fund launch* Will update soon)Inception: 09/06/2023
source: ReSolve Asset Management

RSST ETF Pros and Cons
Let’s move on to examine the potential pros and cons of RSST ETF.

RSST Pros: Distinct Advantages

Features a unique combination of 100% US Equities and 100% Managed Futures, offering investors a distinctive capital-efficient tool.
The first of its kind capital-efficient equities + managed futures ETF: 100% Managed Futures paired with 100% U.S Stocks.
Flexibility to pair this with other capital efficient building blocks (e.g., treasury, gold, etc).
Option for a balanced 60/40/100 or all equity 100/50/50 portfolio across equities, fixed income, and managed futures when combined with RSBT or PSLDX
Compatibility with various other capital-efficient ETFs and Mutual Funds to craft a personalized return stacking design.
Allows integration of alternatives (managed futures) without shrinking or shaving down your equity allocation.
Creates room in your portfolio for alternative diversified diversifiers like global systematic macro, gold, market-neutral strategies, long-short equity, style premia, catastrophe bonds, arbitrage, bitcoin, etc.
Low correlation amongst stocks, bonds, and managed futures allows investors to blow to smithereens the outdated 60/40 narrative
Competitive management fee for a fund offering 200% expanded canvas coverage
Historically, managed futures have offered a buffer/ballast during market upheavals.
Employs a comprehensive strategy through machine learning to mimic a selection of trend-following funds.
Support innovative boutique funds catering to both retail investors and advisors.

RSST Cons: Potential Limitations

During years where both equities and managed futures are down, the ETF's leverage could amplify short-term losses.
Tracking error when managed futures have a challenging month, quarter and/or year(s)

source: Raise Your Average. on YouTube

RSST ETF Model Portfolio Ideas
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Do you remember earlier on when I said RSST ETF is one of the most versatile expanded canvas products?
Well, now it time to prove my point.
With RSST ETF you have almost unlimited combos to build high conviction capital efficient portfolios.
Let's explore some of those.

60/40/100: 60/40 Plus 100% Managed Futures
For those seeking the classic configuration of the a 60/40 portfolio with a no holds barred allocation to Managed Futures you only need 2 funds.
Model Portfolio:
60% RSST40% RSBT
Exposures:
60% US Equities40% Bonds100% Managed Futures
Expanded Canvas: 
200%
That's it.
You're done.
How has that performed in a backtest?
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
ALL EQUITY: 100/50/50 (Stocks + Managed Futures + Bonds)
If you're an investor that doesn't want to shave down your equity sleeve one bit you can still "return stack" bonds and managed futures in an equal combo with just 2 funds:

Model Portfolio:
50% RSST50% PSLDX
Exposures:
100% US Equities50% Managed Futures50% Bonds
Expanded Canvas: 
200%
Let's check that out by rolling back the clock a little bit with this performance summary.
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Maximum Diversification Portfolio
For investors seeking to maximally diversify their portfolios (with as many strategies as possible) you can cobble together 7 uncorrelated strategies with just 6 funds:
Model Portfolio:
50% RSST20% GDE10% TYA10% HCMT5% BTAL5% CAOS (formerly AVOLX)
Exposures:
88% or 68% US Equities50% Managed Futures30% Intermediate Treasury18% Gold0 or 10% Cash5% M/N Equities (Long: Low Vol / Short: High Beta)5% OTM PUT
Expanded Canvas: 
196% or 186%
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Let's send that combo off for a beautiful backtest!
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
And here are the correlations between strategies.
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Nomadic Samuel enjoying the scenery in Lago Puelo, Patagonia, Argentina
RSST ETF — 12-Question FAQ

1) What is RSST and its objective?
RSST (Return Stacked® U.S. Stocks & Managed Futures ETF) targets long-term capital appreciation and better diversification by combining ~100% large-cap U.S. equity exposure with ~100% managed-futures exposure (≈ 200% gross).
2) What does “return stacked” mean here?
For each $1 invested, RSST aims to deliver $1 of U.S. equities + $1 of managed futures. The futures sleeve (net of financing/costs) is “stacked” on top of equity beta.
3) How does the U.S. equity sleeve work?
Seeks the total return of large-cap U.S. equities via individual stocks, low-cost large-cap ETFs, and/or U.S. equity index futures, with T-bills/cash as liquidity and collateral.
4) How does the managed-futures sleeve work?
A systematic, rules-based trend process (long/short) across commodities, currencies, equities, and fixed income futures, sizing positions by signal strength and risk.
5) Is RSST leveraged? What’s the practical risk take?
Yes—notional exposure ≈ 200% (~100% equities + ~100% managed futures). Expect equity-like or somewhat higher volatility, but with lower correlation than a pure-equity sleeve.
6) Why pair U.S. equities with managed futures?
Managed futures have historically shown low/variable correlation to stocks/bonds and can mitigate drawdowns and help during inflationary shocks, improving risk-adjusted results.
7) When does RSST tend to do well—or struggle?
Favorable: Equity uptrends and persistent macro trends (up or down) in futures.Challenging: When both sleeves lag or in choppy, trendless markets that whipsaw trend-following.
8) How might investors use RSST in a portfolio?
As a core, capital-efficient equity block that preserves equity beta while adding managed futures, or within return-stacked combos (e.g., adding bonds, gold, or other diversifiers).
9) What are key risks to understand?
Leverage/derivatives risk, trend breakdown/whipsaw, tracking/implementation risk, underlying futures liquidity, and potential for larger short-term swings if both sleeves face headwinds.
10) How does RSST differ from a 60/40 or an equity + separate MF fund?
RSST provides pre-packaged, simultaneous equity + managed-futures exposure with explicit capital efficiency in one ticker; a 60/40 is static, and separate funds may require more capital or manual overlay.
11) Fees, taxes, and structure?
An actively managed ETF with an expense ratio disclosed by the sponsor; uses futures/T-bills for stacking and typically issues a 1099 (ETF structure). Check the current prospectus for details.
12) Who is this best suited for?
Investors/advisors who want to keep equity exposure while adding a diversifying, rules-based managed-futures sleeve, are comfortable with capital-efficient overlays, and tolerate tracking error vs. traditional benchmarks.

Nomadic Samuel Final Thoughts
Return Stacking offers everything I could ever want as a DIY expanded canvas investor.
I'm able to expand the canvas of my portfolio to create space for more diversified diversifiers.
That's the name of the game for me.
And RSST ETF is an incredible new puzzle piece I can utilize to keep my equity position strong whilst adding managed futures to the mix.
There are no compromises here.
It's just a big 'ole extra scoop of ice cream added to my waffle cone at the parlour on a hot summer's day.
And with all that talk of food, I think that's where we'll end things for today.
I'm freakin' hungry.

Let's turn things over to you.
What do you think of RSST ETF?

#### RSSY ETF Review: The Strategy Behind Return Stacked US Stocks & Futures Yield ETF with Corey Hoffstein
Capital-efficient investors now have a plethora of different toppings to stack atop their towering banana split sundae.
Stocks. Check.
Bonds. Yup.
Managed Futures Trend. Roger, that.
Gold. Indeed.
And now Carry.
More specifically, a multi-asset futures yield carry strategy.
RSSY ETF is the latest offering from the Return Stacked crew.
It's better known as Return Stacked US Stocks & Futures Yield ETF.
It's another potential 'return stacking' building block that can be used to assemble the capital-efficient portfolio of your dreams.
To learn more about this fund, let's turn things over to its creator Corey Hoffstein.

Meet Corey Hoffstein - CEO & CIO Newfound Research
Corey Hoffstein is the CEO and CIO of Newfound Research, where he is responsible for overseeing the Newfound’s investment team and the ongoing management of Newfound’s investment strategies.
Corey is an active researcher and his work has been published in the Journal of Indexing and the Journal of Alternative Investments.  He is also the host of the popular quantitative investing podcast Flirting with Models.
Corey holds a Master of Science in Computational Finance from Carnegie Mellon University and a Bachelor of Science in Computer Science, cum laude, from Cornell University.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Reviewing The Strategy Behind RSSY ETF (Return Stacked US Stocks & Futures Yield ETF)
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
source: returnstackedefts.com
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
source: returnstackedefts.com
What’s The Strategy Of RSSY ETF?
For those who aren't necessarily familiar with a "Return Stacked capital efficient" style of asset allocation, let's first define what it is and then explain this strategy in practice by giving some clear examples.
Most investors will acknowledge that more diversification is generally favorable to less.  By combining uncorrelated assets, wealth can compound more consistently and investors can achieve their financial plans with more certainty.
The best non-correlated options tend to be alternative assets like gold and commodities as well as alternative strategies like managed futures trend following, systematic global macro and other liquid alternatives. Unfortunately, most investors today allocate little to no money to these areas.  Why?
In my experience, it is because adding alternatives also means subtracting exposure to core stocks and bonds.  This can create significant tracking error and lead to substantial relative underperformance during decades like the 2010s when stocks and bonds thrived and many alternatives languished.
Return stacking aims to solve this problem by providing investors with a “yes and” solution rather than an “either/or” decision.
It does this by combining multiple exposures into a single fund.  For example, in the Return Stacked® U.S. Stocks & Futures Yield ETF (RSSY), for every $1 invested, we provide $1 of exposure to large-cap U.S. equities and $1 of exposure to a futures yield (carry) strategy.
By swapping out a portion of core stock exposure with RSSY, we are able to reintroduce the core exposure AND stack a futures yield (carry) strategy on top of the original portfolio.
For more on return stacking, you can visit our “what is return stacking” primer.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Unique Features Of Return Stacked US Stocks & Futures Yield Fund RSSY ETF
Let's go over all the unique features your fund offers so investors can better understand it. What key exposure does it offer? Is it static or dynamic in nature? Is it active or passive? Is it leveraged or not? Is it a rules-based strategy or does it involve some discretionary inputs? How about its fee structure?
For every $1 invested, the Return Stacked® U.S. Stocks & Futures Yield ETF (RSSY) is designed to provide $1 of large-cap U.S. equity exposure and $1 of exposure to a futures yield (carry) strategy.
The relative exposure to U.S. equities and the futures yield strategy is static.
The large-cap U.S. equity exposure simply seeks to provide broad large-cap U.S. equity exposure (e.g. S&P 500); there is no active stock-picking component.
The futures yield strategy seeks to provide long and short exposure across commodities, currencies, bonds, and equities via futures contracts using a systematic and quantitative process that seeks to harvest roll yield (carry) in futures contracts.
source: returnstackedefts.com
What Sets RSSY ETF Apart From Other Funds?
How does your fund set itself apart from other "asset allocation" funds being offered in the marketplace? What makes it unique?
There are two primary differentiators to this fund.

We believe return stacking is the key value proposition.  There are hundreds of U.S. equity funds and dozens of systematic futures funds.  We’re not aware of any that give you $1 of exposure to U.S. equities and $1 of futures yield (carry) for every $1 invested.  This enables a whole new dimension of portfolio construction for investors and allocators.
We are not aware of any multi-asset carry strategies currently available in either a mutual fund or ETF wrapper today.  We believe this introduces an important, novel exposure for investors.

What Else Was Considered For RSSY ETF?
What's something that you carefully considered adding to your fund that ultimately didn't make it past the chopping board? What made you decide not to include it?
Since the primary thesis behind the returns of futures yield (carry) strategies is risk based, we were concerned that the strategy would exhibit too much correlation to stocks and bonds.  Based on this concern, we discussed the idea of running a strategy that significantly constrained stock and bond beta.
Empirically, however, we found that our concerns were unfounded.  While an unconstrained implementation does exhibit significant time-varying correlation to stocks and bonds, it appears unconditional as to whether stocks or bonds are performing well or poorly.
As constraining the solution meaningfully hurt returns and did not appear to meaningfully improve risk during any adverse stock or bond scenarios, we elected to implement an unconstrained strategy.
source: returnstackedefts.com
When Will RSSY ETF Perform At Its Best/Worst?
Let's explore when your fund/strategy has performed at its best and worst historically or theoretically in backtests. What types of market conditions or other scenarios are most favourable for this particular strategy? On the other hand, when can investors expect this strategy to potentially struggle?
The fund is new and I cannot discuss backtests.  That said, we like the “return stacking” nomenclature because we think it helps explain precisely how returns in the fund should materialize.
While U.S. equities and futures yield (carry) have exhibited a low degree of correlation historically, they have exhibited high degrees of correlation over short-term periods.  These periods can lead to amplified returns: both positive and negative.
We’d expect the fund to do well during periods when U.S. equities are doing well and futures yield (carry) is doing well, and we’d expect the fund to do poorly when U.S. equities are doing poorly and futures yield (carry) is doing poorly.
Unfortunately, specifying when we would expect futures yield (carry) to do well or poorly is not straight forward.  Empirically, we find that diversified futures yield (carry) strategies exhibit little sensitivity to the returns of stocks and bonds and little sensitivity to any particular growth or inflation-based macro-economic regime.
On average, we’d expect the volatility of U.S. equities to match well with the volatility of the futures yield (carry) strategy, so neither should dominate the ETF’s risk profile over the long run.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Why Should Investors Consider Return Stacked US Stocks & Futures Yield Fund RSSY ETF?
If we're assuming that an industry standard portfolio for most investors is one aligned towards low cost beta exposure to global equities and bonds, why should investors consider your fund/strategy?
Our aim with Return Stacked funds is to allow investors to keep their global beta exposure and complement it with diversifying alternatives.
Why should they replace that low-cost exposure with a more expensive fund?

By retaining the core beta through stacking, the fee is explicitly to pay for the alternative.  We no longer have to ask, “can the alternative outperform the core beta after fees,” but simply: “can the alternative outperform the fees?”
We believe we can offer the alternatives at a lower cost than our peer group.
We believe that introducing additional return streams through stacking has several potential benefits, including: (1) enhanced long-term returns; (2) the potential to improve diversification and reduce risk; and (3) the potential for a more sustainable allocation to alternatives.

How Does RSSY ETF Fit Into A Portfolio At Large?
Let's examine how your fund/strategy integrates into a portfolio at large. Is it meant to be a total portfolio solution, core holding or satellite diversifier? What are some best case usage scenarios ranging from high to low conviction allocations?
The primary use case for RSSY is quite simple: replacing large-cap U.S. equities with RSSY allows investors to retain their large-cap U.S. equity exposure while introducing a futures yield (carry) strategy to their portfolio.
The size of the allocation ultimately determines the size of the overlay. I believe you’ve introduced this to your audience as “what is the canvas size” of the portfolio.   For example, selling 5% of large-cap U.S. equity exposure to buy RSSY would create a 5% futures yield (carry) overlay on the portfolio, a total canvas size of 105%; selling 20% to buy RSSY would result in a 20% overlay, a total canvas size of 120%.

The Cons of RSSY ETF
What's the biggest point of constructive criticism you've received about your fund since it has launched?
Many investors are simply averse to leverage.  And, make no mistake, return stacking is an application of leverage.
The fear of leverage is understandable: if you look at just about every major financial catastrophe, you’ll find leverage lurking at the crime scene.  But it is usually concentrated leverage.
What we’re specifically advocating for is utilizing leverage to better unlock the potential benefits of diversification.  We believe that return stacking can not only help investors introduce alternatives in a way that can improve expected portfolio results, but also introduce alternatives in a manner that is behaviorally sustainable.

The Pros of RSSY ETF
On the other hand, what have others praised about your fund?
We are excited at the number of people who see our funds the same way we do: pre-stacked building blocks that enable a variety of different portfolios to be constructed.
Some may elect to create a small overlay on their very traditional stock-bond portfolio.  Others have created examples where they re-think what an “all weather” portfolio might look like, creating levered, balanced allocations of stocks, bonds, commodities, and alternative strategies.
Our intention with launching Return Stacked ETFs (www.returnstackedetfs.com) is not to be prescriptive (though we do have opinions), but rather to provide the building blocks for informed investors to build the portfolios that are best for them. Having said that, we do offer clear assembly instructions via model portfolios for those advisors and institutions that want turnkey solutions and incorporate other pre-packaged funds and ETFs at Return Stacked Portfolio Solutions (www.returnstacked.com).
source: returnstackedefts.com
Examples Of Successful Carry Trades
For investors not familiar with this particular alternative strategy can you provide some hypothetical examples of successful carry trades?
When investors think of a positive return, they usually think about selling something for more than they bought it.  This framework, however, ignores a second, important source of return.  Landlords, for example, can earn a return from both the price appreciation of their property as well as rental income.
This second source of return is called “carry” and can be loosely defined as the expected return of an investment assuming no change in its price.  Investing for dividend yield or selling options for income are two ways of investing for carry.
As a measure, carry exists across stocks, bonds, commodities, and currencies.  A diversified carry strategy will go long and short in different markets seeking to maximize exposure to this driver of returns.
source: returnstackedefts.com
How Does Carry Combine With Other Alternative Strategies?
How does adding a carry strategy to your portfolio combine with another alternative strategy such as trend following? Is there an optimal mix for investors to potentially consider?
The simple math answer here is, “in isolation, when you have two things with approximately the same expected returns and volatilities, you’d equally-weight them.”  
“In isolation” is doing quite a bit of heavy lifting in that sentence, however.  In reality, most investors start with a stock-bond portfolio.  We find, empirically, that diversified carry strategies, on average over time, have a low correlation to stocks and bonds, making them an attractive additional source of returns for traditionally allocated portfolios.
Diversified carry strategies also exhibit low correlation to trend following strategies.  This feature is at least partially mechanical, particularly in extremes.  For example, while trend following may chase equity prices upward in a strong trend, carry strategies may simultaneously begin to short equities at the same time, as increasing prices will decrease expected dividend yield (a measure of carry in equities), making them relatively less attractive.
Taken together, a naïve, equally weighted combination of both carry and trend following creates a difficult hurdle for any optimized blend to overcome.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Diversification Benefits Of Carry Strategies
What are the potential diversification benefits of including carry exposure in a multi-asset portfolio?
Before evaluating empirical data, there are two important points to consider with a multi-asset carry strategy.  First, for traditional stock-bond investors, multi-asset carry strategies will introduce exposure to commodities and currencies that they may not otherwise hold.
Second, multi-asset carry strategies will take both long and short positions, seeking to maximize carry exposure.  In doing so, they will only hold equity or bond beta when they provide attractive relative carry compensation versus other opportunities.
Taken together, we would expect multi-asset carry strategies to exhibit little correlation to traditional portfolio holdings on average.  Empirically, that is precisely what we find.  Importantly, and contrary to popular beliefs about carry, we also find that they exhibit little conditional correlation, historically performing no better or worse in the best and worst performing periods for stocks and bonds.
It should be stressed, however, that average zero correlation is not negative correlation. In other words, empirical data suggests that carry is just as likely to lose money as it is to make money when equity or bond indices come under stress. Furthermore, zero on average is not always zero, and it is possible for carry strategies to have very high correlations to both stocks and bonds, which can coincide with sudden market shocks in both directions. Conversely, it is possible for carry strategies to have very strong negative correlations to both stocks and bonds which would act as a counterweight to market shocks in both directions.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Multi-Asset Carry Strategy Benefits
What are some of the potential competitive advantages of your carry strategy (multi-asset class) compared to others (limited to say just currencies)?
Like most strategies, we believe that carry benefits from diversification.  
In isolation, carry strategies (both cross-sectional and time-series) within equities, bonds, commodities, and currencies have all exhibited positive excess returns.  Nevertheless, we believe an isolated approach sacrifices valuable cross-sector information, both in identifying the most attractive relative carry opportunities as well as the ability to manage risk.
For example, a more limited approach may simply go long high carry currencies and short low carry currencies.  An optimized, multi-asset approach, however, may find that the opportunity in high carry currencies is more effectively hedged with short commodity or bond exposure.  
We believe that taking a multi-asset, portfolio-based approach allows us to better maximize carry exposure on a risk-adjusted basis.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Managing Carry Risk
What historical precedents shape your approach to managing carry risk?
When people think about the “carry trade,” they often think of currency, and more specifically, the yen carry trade.  For years heading into 2008, the yen was a popular funding currency because it was possible to borrow at exceedingly cheap interest rates in Japan.  The classic currency trade would be to convert the yen into a basket of higher yielding currencies, allowing traders to capture the spread in interest rates.  More creative financial engineers took this trade one step further and simply used the yen as a general funding source for any trade.
That trade, however, was a spectacular example of what can go wrong when high concentration (specifically, exposure to the yen) and leverage are mixed.  The 2008 crisis sparked a procyclical unwind, driving the yen higher and wiping out years of carry capture. 
Even in a multi-asset carry portfolio, it’s likely that the yen would have been identified as an attractive source of carry funding.  Portfolio-level design, however, can help dramatically reduce the risk of a single carry trade having undue influence on portfolio returns.

Portfolio optimization.  By seeking to maximize carry per unit of risk, an optimized portfolio will favor more diversification over less, all else held equal.
Position and sector-level position caps.  Prudent limits are applied at both the position level and the sector level to provide guard rails to the optimization process. 
Portfolio-level volatility targets.  By targeting a constant volatility level, the portfolio will naturally cut gross leverage as volatility increases, which is likely to happen in a more concentrated positioning.

Portfolio-level risk limits.  As an ETF, the strategy must adhere to the SEC’s 18f-4 derivatives rule, which specifies VaR-based targets (i.e. worst-case loss estimates) the portfolio must adhere to, limiting gross leverage particularly when positions are more concentrated.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Carry As A Single Strategy Stack vs Style Premia Stack
Why did you choose "carry" as a single strategy to stack compared to other style premia (whether multi-strategy or not) such as "defensive" or "relative value" or "momentum" or "seasonality"?
We believe carry offers several very attractive features.
First, empirically, it has had very low correlation to stocks, bonds, and trend following strategies.  This makes it a natural complement not only to traditionally allocated portfolios but also our existing strategy lineup.  
Second, the primary thesis for why carry strategies offer returns is risk based, a distinct difference to trend following which is historically argued to be a largely behavioral phenomenon.  We believe this provides a strong basis for why carry should continue to be uncorrelated.
Finally, we also believe that carry strategies can be implemented at significant scale and reasonable turnover, which is an important consideration when managing an ETF.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Absolute Return Potential Of Multi-Asset Carry Strategy
What's the absolute return potential in various market regimes of a multi-asset carry strategy?
Empirical evidence suggests that carry is not highly regime dependent, either in its sensitivity to traditional assets (e.g. stocks and bonds) or economic periods (e.g. growth and inflation).
We believe that, after transaction and management costs, a reasonable long-term Sharpe ratio expectation for an optimized carry strategy is 0.3-0.4, implying a 3-4% expected excess return (returns above cash) for a strategy targeting 10% annualized volatility.
source: returnstackedefts.com
Learn More About RSSY ETF
We'll finish things off with an open-ended question. Is there anything that we haven't covered yet that you'd like to mention about your fund/strategy? If not, what are some other current projects that you're working on that investors can follow in the coming weeks/months?
As I mentioned in the last answer, we see our funds as pre-stacked building block solutions and so, as you might expect, we plan to continue to launch different combinations of stacks in the coming months and years.
For financial professionals, we also offer model portfolios.  These are turnkey portfolio solutions that implement return stacking concepts and are available in a variety of risk profiles.  Advisors can implement them directly, customize them, or simply use them as inspiration.  We plan on expanding our model lineup over the next several years.
We’ve also been working on several tools to allow investors to learn by getting their hands dirty.  To date we’ve published two tools: the Return Stacking Visualizer and a Return Stacking Withdrawal Visualizer.  The former allows investors to easily explore and backtest different return stacking concepts.  The latter allows investors to explore how return stacking combinations can impact portfolio longevity and withdrawals.  Both are currently available to financial professionals after they register on our website.  We hope to expand this toolkit going forward.
Finally, we recognize that this concept will be novel for many, so education is a strong focus for us.  So, we plan on publishing more content on our blog as well as our YouTube channel.

RSSY ETF Review — Return Stacked U.S. Stocks & Futures Yield with Corey Hoffstein (12-Question FAQ)
What is RSSY in one sentence?
A capital-efficient ETF that targets $1 of U.S. large-cap equity exposure plus $1 of multi-asset futures yield (carry) exposure for every $1 invested—a “return stacked” building block.
What does “futures yield (carry)” mean here?
It’s a systematic long/short strategy across futures on commodities, currencies, bonds, and equities that seeks to harvest roll yield/carry—i.e., expected return assuming no price change—via term-structure, yield differentials, and relative value.
Is RSSY’s allocation static or dynamic?
Per the design, the split is static ($1 U.S. equities + $1 futures carry). Stock selection is passive-beta; the carry sleeve is rules-based/systematic, long and short across multiple futures markets.
How is this different from just adding a carry fund to my portfolio?
Return stacking lets you keep core equity beta while layering carry on top in one wrapper, avoiding the “either/or” trade-off that often creates benchmark tracking error when funding alternatives from equities.
When might RSSY do well—or struggle?
It should shine when both U.S. equities and multi-asset carry do well, and struggle when both do poorly. While average correlations are low, short bursts of high correlation (positive or negative) can amplify outcomes in the short run.
How does carry interact with trend following?
Historically low correlation: trend may chase price moves, whereas carry may favor assets with higher ongoing yield (sometimes even taking the opposite tilt). Equal-weighting carry + trend is a simple, robust starting point.
What are the key risks?

Leverage/stacking risk: outcomes can be amplified.

Correlation spikes: carry can temporarily correlate with stocks/bonds.

Strategy risks: term-structure shifts, crowding, liquidity, roll costs.

Tracking error: versus plain equity benchmarks.Investors must be able to stick with the approach through noise.

How is risk managed in the carry sleeve?
Via portfolio optimization (carry per unit of risk), position/sector caps, volatility targeting (cutting gross exposure as vol rises), and regulatory 18f-4 VaR limits that constrain derivatives usage.
Where does RSSY fit in a portfolio?
Primarily as an equity replacement that retains U.S. large-cap beta while adding a carry overlay. The allocation size = overlay size (e.g., replace 10% U.S. equities → ~10% carry overlay → ~110% canvas).
Who is RSSY for—and not for?
For: allocators seeking capital-efficient diversification with systematic, multi-asset alternatives in one ticket.Not for: investors who must hug benchmarks, dislike derivatives/stacking, or cannot tolerate short-term tracking error.
How does fee logic work in a stacked fund?
You’re still holding core equity; the incremental fee effectively pays for the alternative sleeve. The question becomes, “Can carry earn more than its incremental fee over time?” rather than outperforming equities.
What is a pragmatic way to implement?
Start with small canvas (5–10%), observe effects on volatility/drawdown/correlation, then scale if behavior aligns with expectations. Keep rebalancing simple and monitor overlap/costs across sleeves.

#### What Is Return Stacking? Return Stacked Portfolios: Capital Efficient Investing Strategy Review
What The Heck Is Returning Stacking?
Imagine if you could put together a portfolio, in such a way, that it is return stacking the right combination of equities, bonds and alternatives to provide an all-weather solution that meets your performance needs while at the same time offering significant drawdown protection for any economic regime curveball thrown its way?
2022 has proven to be a frustrating year for investors pursuing a 1-2 approach to investing with various equity and bond combinations.
(Note: This article was originally written to review the 60/40 Return Stacked Index. I've kept all those bits. But I've added some general information bobs to turn it more into a guide/primer)

Historically uncorrelated assets have cosied up on a skewer to share the same shishkebab of carnage in recent months given pesky and persistent inflation.

2020 challenged investors in March with fierce equity drawdowns where bonds weren't able to shield the damage.

How about in 2008? Even a balanced 60/40 portfolio, the industry standard of optimized asset allocation, received a heck of a nasty shiner.

The time has come to think about asset allocation from a bottoms-up approach where alternative investments are an integral part of the portfolio rather than considered to be some kind of roadside freakshow curiosity.
In order to build an all-weather portfolio it requires an imagination that extends beyond merely stocks and bonds.
An all-weather approach to investing is the optimal solution.

The Return Stacked 60/40 approach, (a fund of funds, multi-asset class and multi-strategy approach), is possibly the best attempt to date of combining equities, bonds and alternatives in an optimal manner.
Fortunately, for us, it's just called "return stacking" as opposed to portable-beta multi-fund, multi-asset class, multi-strategy asset allocation.

Return stacking seeks to create space in the portfolio by being more efficient.
You take the 60/40, that everyone loves so dearly for whatever reasons, and boost it 1.5 times so that your portfolio expands its canvas and creates 33% room for something else.
Pile more stocks and bonds into that space?
Not exactly.
Add uncorrelated assets and alternatives in a multi-strategy approach to improve the efficiency of the portfolio.
CTA. Macro. Style Premia. Tail Hedging.
In essence you're stacking uncorrelated return streams on top of the portfolio, improving its diversification and making it more robust and regime ready for all potential economic environments.

Yo, Exactly What Is Return Stacking?
Return Stacking, in the realm of investment strategy, is a sophisticated and nuanced approach that revolutionizes traditional portfolio management. It's akin to an intricate dance of financial instruments, where instead of gracefully stepping aside for one another, they stack up, creating a harmonious and dynamic performance. In this strategy, investors layer additional investment returns, akin to alternative strategies, over their core portfolio of stocks, bonds and gold.

 This creates a scenario where more than $1.00 of exposure is achieved for each $1.00 invested, without the need to divest from the foundational assets.
In other words, if you've got a 200% expanded canvas return stacked product you're getting 100% exposure of Asset A PLUS 100% exposure of Asset B for every dollar invested.
Not too shabby, at all.

To paint a more vivid picture, imagine your investment portfolio as a wedding cake. The base layer, your stocks and bonds, is the classic vanilla sponge – reliable and foundational. In a conventional scenario, if you wish to add a layer of tantalizing chocolate ganache (representing an alternative investment such as managed futures), you would typically need to scrape off some of the vanilla. However, with Return Stacking, you're not just adding chocolate on top; you're conjuring an entire new layer, replete with sparklers and edible gold leaf, elevating the cake's grandeur without compromising the integrity of the vanilla base.

This concept shines particularly in managing the sequence of returns risk, especially crucial for those waltzing into retirement. It's like adding a jetpack to a marathon runner – not only does it uphold their pace but potentially enhances their speed, allowing them to navigate the race (or in this case, the investment landscape) with added efficiency and resilience.

Imagine a juggler at a circus, effortlessly keeping several balls in the air. Now, with Return Stacking, it’s as if the juggler, without dropping any of the existing balls, suddenly starts juggling flaming torches alongside them. This represents the addition of alternative strategies atop a traditional mix of stocks and bonds, enhancing the spectacle without compromising the original act.

In practical terms, Return Stacking might involve layering managed futures or other alternatives over a core asset allocation. It’s like a gardener who, instead of uprooting existing plants (equities and bonds), skillfully grafts exotic orchids (alternative investments) onto sturdy trees, creating a diverse and vibrant ecosystem within the garden without sacrificing its original beauty.

For retirees, this approach is akin to adding an additional, more adventurous chapter to their life story without rewriting the earlier, more conservative ones. It allows for a reduction in equity exposure – think switching from a gas-guzzling sports car to a more prudent yet equally thrilling electric vehicle – in a manner that does not detrimentally impact the portfolio's performance. Furthermore, it potentially allows for a modest increase in withdrawal rates, akin to finding an unexpected bonus check in an old jacket pocket.

Who Created Return Stacking?

Who put this together?
It's a collaboration between ReSolve Asset Management and Newfound Research where Rodrigo Gordillo, Adam Butler and Mike Philbrick teamed up with Corey Hoffstein to assemble the Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index.
Apparently, it was Rodrigo who first came up with the idea. Credit should go to him.
(Since this article was written they've launched Return Stacked ETFs with funds RSSB, RSBT & RSST)

Return Stacking ETFs: Capital Efficient Funds For Investors
We've entered the golden age of capital efficient ETFs hitting the marketplace - in a fast and ferocious manner.

Here is a list of some return stacking ETFs currently available in alphabetical order:
GOLY ETF - Strategy Shares Gold-Hedged Bond ETF (100% Investment Grade Bonds + 100% Gold)GDE ETF - WisdomTree Efficient Gold Plus Equity Strategy Fund (90% US Equites + 90% Gold)HCMT ETF - HCM Tactical Enhanced US ETF (200% US Equities or 100% Cash)NTSE ETF - WisdomTree Emerging Markets Efficient Core Fund (90% EM Equities + 60% Treasuries)NTSI ETF - WisdomTree International Efficient Core Fund(90% Int-Dev Equities + 60% Treasuries)
NTSX ETF - WisdomTree U.S Efficient Core Fund(90% US Equities + 60% Treasuries)RPAR ETF - RPAR Risk Parity ETF (125% Global Asset Allocation Fund)RSBT ETF - Return Stacked Bonds & Managed Futures ETF (100% Agg Bonds + 100% Managed Futures)
RSBY ETF - Return Stacked Bonds & Futures Yield ETF (100% Agg Bonds + 100% Carry Style Premia)RSSB ETF - Return Stacked Global Stocks & Bonds ETF (100% Global Equities + 100% Treasuries)
RSST ETF - Return Stacked US Stocks & Managed Futures ETF (100% US Equities + 100% Managed Futures)
RSSY ETF - Return Stacked U.S. Equity & Futures Yield ETF (100% US Equities + 100% Carry Style Premia)SPBC ETF - Simplify US Equity PLUS GBTC ETF (100% US Equities + 10% Bitcoin)SPQ ETF - Simplify US Equity PLUS QIS ETF (100% US Equities + 50% Multi-Strategy QIS)TUA ETF - Simplify Short Term Treasury Futures Strategy ETF (3X Intermediate Treasuries)TYA ETF - Simplify Intermediate Term Treasury Futures Strategy ETF (5X Short-Term Treasuries)
UPAR ETF - UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF(168% Global Asset Allocation Fund)

Other Diversifying Alternative Investment Funds
ARB ETF - AltShares Merger Arbitrage ETF (Merger Arbitrage Strategy)
BTAL ETF - AGF US Market Neutral Anti Beta Fund (Long 100% Low Vol Equities / Short 100% High Beta Equities)
CAOS ETF - Alpha Architect Tail Risk ETF (OTM Put Tail Risk Strategy) 
EQLS ETF - Simplify Market Neutral Equity Long Short ETF (Long 200% Multi-Factor Equities / Short 200% Junk Equities) 
FBTC ETF - Fidelity® Wise Origin® Bitcoin Fund (Bitcoin Exposure)
FLSP ETF  - Franklin Systematic Style Premia ETF (Multi-Asset + Multi-Strategy L/S: Quality, Value, Momentum & Carry)
LBAY ETF - Leatherback Long/Short Alternative Yield ETF (L/S Equity Strategy)
SVOL ETF - Simplify Volatility Premium ETF (-0.2 to -0.3 VIX with hedges)

Return Stacking ETF Model Portfolio Ideas
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
So we've spread out all of our ETF goodies on the table.
How can we stack 'em together?
Here are a few ideas from an amateur investor's eyeballs:

Tactical Return Stacking Portfolio Combination
If you're seeking to tickle your inner tactical turnkey...
40% RSST ETF20% HMCT ETF10% GDE ETF10% SPQ ETF5% TYA5% TUA5% CAOS5% BTAL
Offensive Mode Exposure:
99% Equities40% Treasuries (Short + Intermediate)40% Managed Futures9% Gold5% Multi-Strategy QIS5% M/N Anti-Beta5% OTM Put
Defensive Mode Exposure:
59% Equities40% Treasuries (Short + Intermediate)40% Managed Futures20% Cash9% Gold5% Multi-Strategy QIS5% M/N Anti-Beta5% OTM Put
Return Stack: 203% Canvas (Offensive Mode) + 183% Canvas (Defensive Mode)

Enhanced Return Stacking 60/40 Maximum Diversification Portfolio
For those seeking maximum diversification with a 60/40 backbone...
30% RSSB ETF10% RSST ETF10% GDE ETF10% SPQ ETF10% RSBT ETF5% FLSP ETF5% SVOL ETF5% EQLS ETF5% ARB ETF5% BTAL ETF5% CAOS ETF
Exposure:
59% Equities40% Bonds10% Managed Futures9% Gold5% QIS Multi-Strategy5% Style Premia Multi-Asset Class5% Short Vol5% L/S Equity5% Arbitrage5% M/N Anti-Beta5% OTM Put
Return Stack: 153% Canvas

All Equity Return Stacking Portfolio
You're committed to the moon and back to keeping your equity exposure at 100% but you'd like to add some diversifiers to the mix...
40% RSSB ETF30% RSST ETF20% SPQ ETF10% SPBC
Exposure:
100% Equities40% Bonds30% Managed Futures10% QIS Multi-Strategy1% Bitcoin
Return Stack: 181% Canvas

Defensive Return Stacking Portfolio
You're in hardcore defensive mode where vol management and sequence of returns matters most...
40% USMV ETF40% RSBT ETF10% CAOS ETF10% BTAL ETF
Exposure:
40% Min Vol Equities40% Bonds40% Managed Futures10% M/N Anti-Beta10% OTM Put
Return Stack: 140% Canvas

Return Stacking Review: Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index
Source: Pixabay
Does it all sound too good to be true?
Well, we're specifically going to explore whether or not this strategy works better than the classic 60/40 in this review.
That's its benchmark.
But first, let's check out the evolution of expanded canvas products from gen 1 to gen 3.
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
Source: Pixabay
Return Stacking: 12-Question FAQ
1) What is “return stacking” in plain English?
Return stacking layers multiple return streams (e.g., equities, bonds, managed futures, gold, carry) on top of each other so that each $1 invested can represent more than $1 of diversified exposures, without selling your core holdings.
2) How is canvas size (e.g., 140%–200%) calculated?
Canvas ≈ the sum of gross sleeves. A 40% position in a 100/100 fund adds ~40% of asset A + ~40% of asset B. Add sleeves across holdings to estimate total exposure above 100%.
3) How is return stacking different from leveraged equity ETFs?
Leveraged equity ETFs mainly amplify one asset’s beta (hero/zero risk). Return stacking uses modest, purpose-built overlays to add uncorrelated sleeves (trend, gold, carry, style premia) so offense and defense can work together.
4) Why consider it now?
Stock–bond correlations can spike at the wrong time. Stacking uncorrelated alternatives seeks to preserve the 60/40 core while adding diversifiers that historically shine in different regimes.
5) What are the main benefits?

Keep core stocks/bonds and add diversifiers

Potentially better Sharpe and smaller max drawdowns

Flexibility across regimes; less sequence-risk sensitivity

Preserve core exposures (no need to sell to “make room”)

6) What are the key risks?

Tracking error versus vanilla benchmarks

Misunderstanding overlays/leverage mechanics

Liquidity/roll/implementation details inside derivatives

Behavior risk (bailing when alts temporarily lag)

7) Who coined and built early frameworks/products?
ReSolve Asset Management and Newfound Research collaborated on the Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index; Rodrigo Gordillo is often credited for the original “return stacking” framing.
8) What return drivers typically get stacked?
Core equities and bonds plus diversifiers such as managed futures (trend), gold, carry/futures yield, style premia, market-neutral/anti-beta, macro, and optional convexity (puts).
9) What ETF examples illustrate stacking today?
Representative tickers include NTSX/NTSI/NTSE (90/60 equity/treasury), GDE (90/90 equity/gold), RSBT (100% bonds + 100% managed futures), RSSB (100% global stocks + 100% bonds), RSST (100% US stocks + 100% managed futures), RSBY (bonds + carry), plus complementary diversifiers like BTAL, FLSP, CAOS, SPQ, SPBC.
10) Is return stacking only for accumulators, or also retirees?
Both. Accumulators can pursue growth with smoother paths; retirees may target withdrawal stability via reduced reliance on a single risk engine (equities) while adding diversifiers that can cushion shocks.
11) How does it compare to a classic 60/40?
The aim is 60/40 plus: preserve the core while overlaying uncorrelated alternatives. Historically, that can improve risk-adjusted returns and drawdown behavior versus a plain 60/40.
12) How do I get started prudently?
Start small (e.g., 10–20% sleeve of a stacked fund) alongside your current portfolio, rebalance on a set schedule or bands, and expand only after you understand exposures, process, and your behavior in chop.
Evolution Of Expanded Canvas Investing

Imagine a scenario where you're in a high school cafeteria and you're being served Thanksgiving dinner.
Your mouth waters in anticipation of a delicious well-rounded meal featuring turkey, mashed potatoes, mixed vegetables and stuffing with copious amounts of gravy poured on top of it all.
When you arrive at the food station, the server wielding a giant metal spoon, scrapes ferociously against the bottom of the tray scooping up a giant sized portion of mashed potatoes while delivering it smack-dab in the middle of your plate.
Woah! That's a lot of "fill-in-the-blank" mashed potatoes!

Before you have time to process what has happened you're distracted by a group of friends calling you over to sit next to them for dinner.
Turning your attention back to your plate you suddenly realize you've had two extra just-as-gigantic scoops of mashed potatoes formed on top of the first overly generous scoop.
You summon up the courage to protest but the slightly intimidating server yells out, "Next!" so defeated you go and sit down wondering how on earth you're going to attempt eating this Mount Everest Of Carbohydrates stacked on top of your plate.

2X to 3X Equity Products (Gen 1)
Up until recently any investor seeking to stretch the canvas of their portfolio beyond 100% basically only had the options of 2X to 3X equity products.

These hero/zero products, which I like to call sequence of return-risk toys, take an already risky asset class and dial things up significantly.
Boy of boy you're some kind of a genius if you plugged in a 3X QQQ from say 2009 until the end of 2021.

Hero mode.
But what about the sequence of returns if you tried that one on for size from say 2000 to beginning of 2010.
Zero mode.
Even the providers of such products, generally speaking, warn investors in the following way:
"Investors should monitor their holdings as frequently as daily. Investors should consult the prospectus for further details on the calculation of the returns and the risks associated with investing in this product."

Hence, the label I've assigned to these types of products being hero/zero sequence of return risk toys feels justified and appropriate.
These generation 1 products also kinda rightfully so perpetuate the myth that leverage is always bad versus leverage is a potential tool.
Going back to the turkey dinner analogy, these gen 1 products are specifically the plates of giant mashed potatoes. It is not a balanced meal.

Sensibly Leveraged Uncorrelated Assets (Gen 2)
Fortunately, for DIY investors, a more sensible type of generation 2 product has become available for expanded canvas portfolios.
Taking two historically uncorrelated asset classes such as stocks/bonds or stocks/gold or stocks/managed-futures and combining them together while ensuring no individual asset class within the portfolio stretches beyond 100%.

For example: 90/60 stocks/bonds or 90/90 stocks/gold or 50/100 stocks/managed-futures
When you back-test results from these combinations you'll notice, generally speaking, outperformance versus 100% stock only portfolios with significantly less drawdown potential. You don't get the -40% worst-case scenarios of equity only strategies in 2008.
Hence, I believe these generation 2 products are incredible "building blocks" for investors seeking to assemble expanded canvas portfolios.
Mix and match them together, as you wish, and you can potentially build a globally diversified all-weather portfolio with an equity + bond + alternative sleeve.
With the generation 2 products you have the potential to cobble together your own complete turkey dinner by serving it to yourself.
The biggest issue though is that you have to know how to make it and serve it to yourself.

Total Portfolio Expanded Canvas (Gen 3)
The main reason I'm so excited about the potential of the Return Stacked 60/40 is that it is one of the first attempts to serve turkey dinner complete all-in-one.

You're not as an investor faced with the task of assembling the building blocks yourself to round out your plate.
Here it is served to you at the dinner table neatly plated and artfully presented with just the right amount of turkey, potatoes, sides and gravy. Maybe you even get dessert too.

This of course means an appropriate amount of stocks + bonds + alternatives.
A 1-2-3 approach to investing that provides all-weather coverage for your portfolio.
No sleeves of the portfolio extending beyond 60%.
This isn't risky dialing up to the moon single asset classes in the hopes they catch the right kind of luck or lightning in a bottle.
It's balanced. It's sensible. It makes sense long-term.

Source: Meb Faber Show on YouTube

Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index: What's Under The Hood?
Let's pop the hood of the Return Stacked 60/40 wide-open to see what we've got inside.
What you'll find is some of the most interesting expanded canvas portfolio solutions all-together under one roof.

It's a bit like an all-star game where some very capable funds (on their own) have entered into the stadium and are now sharing the field with others of similar capabilities.
Instead of hogging the court the Return Stacked 60/40 fund of funds has been quite evenly distributed giving each a chance to contribute but not dominate over one another.
You'll notice each fund brings with it allocations to either stocks, bonds or alternatives in a way that once the dust settles is as follows:
Source: ReturnStacking.Live (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

RETURN STACKED 60/40 LIST OF FUNDS
15% Newfound Risk Managed U.S. Growth (NFDIX)15% Rational ReSolve Adaptive Asset Allocation Fund (RDMIX)15% Catalyst/Millburn Hedge Strategy Fund (MBXIX)12.5% Standpoint Multi Asset Fund (BLNDX)12.5% Abbey Capital Multi-Asset Fund (MAFIX)6% WisdomTree U.S. Efficient Core Fund (NTSX)6% WisdomTree International Efficient Core Fund (NTSI)6% Simplify US Equity Plus Convexity ETF (SPYC)10% Simplify Risk Parity Treasury ETF (TYA)3% Simplify Tail Risk Strategy ETF (CYA)

Return Stacked 60/40 161.7% Expanded Canvas
62.3% Equities40% Bonds60% Alternatives 
We'll spend just a second touching upon the equities and bonds sleeve since the real 'secret sauce' of the Return Stacked 60/40 is the stacking of the alternative sleeve on top.
Basically the equities are mostly composed of market-cap weighted strategies giving you a globally diversified exposure whereas the bonds provide various treasury-level exposure.
This is your standard 60/40.
You wanted it. You've got it.
We'll now jump now into the alternative sleeve to see what distinguishes the Return Stacked 60/40 from others.
Source: Pixabay

Return Stacking: Alternative Sleeve Investment Strategy
Eric Crittenden of Standpoint probably created the most important resource ever put up on YouTube related to whether or not alternatives deserve a place in your portfolio.
I've now embedded this multiple times in articles and I'll be darned if it doesn't break 1000 views at some point in the near future.
Here is the blind taste test!

Source: Standpoint on YouTube
Given that stock and bond allocations are static and have to endure whatever economic regime is thrown their way paves the opportunity for something in the portfolio that adapts like a chameleon.
Trend-following does just that.
It tracks major market future indices in commodities, grains, meats, metals, energy, global currencies, bonds and equities by going long/short.
Most importantly it adapts to the current trend by never fighting reality and always saying 'yes' to whatever is going on.
Yes, to commodities doing well by taking a long position. Yes, to bonds trending down by going short.
It's a rules based system to following the trend.

The major advantage it has over a static allocation to gold and/or commodity funds is that it offers far more stability.
Long gold can mean brutal years. Allocating to fixed commodities has at times been even worse.
In a trend-following scenario that brutality is limited given the system adapts one way or the other when trends are strong.
This means you're not holding a struggling asset in a long-position all year long while it is eaten alive.
Hence, it offers a superior alternative investment from a diversification and volatility control standpoint.
The Systematic global macro alternative sleeve refers to different managed futures strategies aside from just trend-following.
For instance, this could include relative value, carry, mean-reversion, volatility arbitrage and/or market neutral to name just a few.

The take-home message for me is that these two different approaches provide (as the creators of the Return Stacked 60/40 have suggested) "diversified diversifiers" in the alternative sleeve.
Last but not least, the convexity put-options component basically sets strike points at various numbers where if the market were to crash to these levels an insurance policy would be collected.
Source: ReturnStacking.Live (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)

Return Stacking Recent Performance
One of the most exciting things about the Return Stacked 60/40 is that its live performance can be tracked at ReturnStacking.Live
How has it done so far versus the Milquetoast 60/40?
Dominant outperformance.

179 basis points of outperformance in 2020 (just 2 months of data).
294 basis points of clearly winning in 2021 over the course of a full-year.
809 basis points of kicking up dust and darting off to the races in 2022 thus far.
Simulated Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index
Return Stacked 60/40 versus the Milquetoast 60/40 since 2000 very bad simulation (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Return Stacking Simulated Backtest
Over the past three years we've seen how the Return Stacked 60/40 has fared versus the Milquetoast 60/40 but what about the big picture?
Queue the most inaccurate, unofficial and potentially error-ridden simulation of all-time.
Important to note: I've used the data I have gathered for Global Min Vol Equities instead of global market-cap weighted equities. But the general overlay of SG Trend as a 60% addition should give a very rough estimate as to what sequence of returns could potentially look like over an extended period of time. 
And the long-term results?
320 basis points of total domination from the Return Stacked 60/40 over the Milquetoast 60/40
15/22 years of better annual performance from the Return Stacked 60/40 versus the Milquetoast 60/40

Additionally, the Return Stacked 60/40 had one less negative year overall and a worst overall year that was less significant as well.
No jarring negative years that equity-only investors are accustomed to over time.
Basically a masterclass of better performance and enhanced stability overall.
If you're still convinced the Milquetoast 60/40 is a better option than the Return Stacked 60/40 I've got no words for you gentle kind soul.
You're on a raft all by yourself.

Return stacking dosas while traveling in India
Return Stacking Branding
In many ways return stacking is a branding stroke of genius.
Think of all the fun ways you've stacked things together in your life over the years.
Lego stacking was awfully fun as a kid. You could create anything you wanted with enough imagination.
Building a house, brick by brick, is a stacking procedure that ultimately leads to a home.
Return Stacked thalis in India
It's even fun to be a greedy when it comes to stacking.
Think of the tempting low-cost upgrade scenarios where we have chances to stack an extra patty on our burger or upgrade our soda, so that it's bigger than our heads.
In a more serious tone stacking together enough days of study, discipline or exercise leads to a transformation in fitness, learning a new language or pursuing a new artform.
The key point of stacking is that it is a positive message and positive branding.

When it comes to thinking of all-weather or all-seasons, my initial thought is towards carrying an umbrella due to the threat or rain or tearing around off-road in a 4X4 enjoying all-season tire performance.
I like to be prepared for all-weather and all-seasons but stacking is more fun.
How about risk-parity?
Yikes.
It includes the word "risk".
Maybe the ultimate in challenging branding given that it is negative and/or fear based.

Put on a sweater or else you'll risk catching a cold.
Don't go out late at night or you'll risk getting mugged.
Risk-management is of course important but I prefer a more positive message and I feel stacking offers just that.
Source: Pixabay
Lifecycle Investing and Return Stacking
For those individuals on Twitter espousing aggressive equity only strategies, for early-life stage accumulators, it seems every other tweet is related to investor psychology.
Learn to love volatility/drawdowns.
Learn to make volatility/drawdowns your friend. 
Those are most clever.
I'll try one too:
Suck on that lemon with gusto and doe-eyed glee all at once now.

In what other spheres of life do we expect the average everyday citizen to learn to love drawdowns and negative volatility?
Housing?
Enjoy moving from your dream home, where your family enjoys comfort and security, to suddenly cramped quarters in a rough part of town. Learn to make living on top of one another your friend. Don't just enjoy it. Love it!
Work/Salary?
Enjoy your significantly reduced pay-cheque and massively eroded purchasing power. Learn to enjoy struggling to make ends meet your friend.
Maybe it's time to admit industry-wise and as strategists, advisors and investors we've been going about things wrong for those in the accumulation stage of investing.

The truth is that a 1-2 left-hook and right uppercut of recency bias and loss aversion derails these types of aggressive investing strategies when a 2008 scenario rears its ugly head.
How many investors learned to love volatility under that scenario?
For many that was a permanent exit point.

Return Stacking For The Accumulator/Retiree
All-weather expanded canvas approaches allows accumulators to achieve the returns they need for future stages in life without the roller-coaster ride of jarring drawdowns.
How about for those nearing or enjoying retirement?
Well conventional wisdom means dialing down risk with the associated cost of reducing annual returns.
Increasing allocation towards bonds while shrinking equities.
The biggest problem here is when retirees haven't saved enough for a life that may extend well into their 80s or 90s.
Finding a portfolio solution that can provide high returns yet manage downside risk ought to be the goal as opposed to sacrificing returns.
Hence, I believe all-weather expanded canvas portfolios have the potential to serve both the accumulator and the retiree.
This would represent a paradigm-shift in investing strategy and asset allocation for all stages of life.

What Are All The Potential Benefits Of Return Stacking?
In the intricate tapestry of modern portfolio theory, the concept of Return Stacking emerges as a sophisticated strategy, offering a plethora of advantages, particularly in enhancing portfolio efficiency and resilience. This innovative approach pivots around the idea of layering distinct investment returns, a method that transcends traditional asset allocation models, thereby unlocking a new dimension of portfolio optimization.

Augmenting Long-Term Growth Trajectories
Central to the allure of Return Stacking is its potential to amplify long-term growth rates. This is attained through the strategic layering of investment returns, whereby each dollar invested potentially accrues more than a dollar's worth of exposure. This technique diverges from the conventional wisdom of portfolio diversification. By integrating additional return streams atop the foundational assets, investors may witness an elevation in their portfolio's growth trajectory over extended periods. This aspect is particularly compelling in the context of long-term investment horizons, where compounded growth plays a pivotal role.

Mitigating the Perils of Market Drawdowns
Another salient feature of Return Stacking is its defensive prowess. In an investment landscape riddled with uncertainties, the capacity to mitigate significant market drawdowns is invaluable. This is achieved through the judicious selection of diversified return sources. By crafting a portfolio that interweaves these varied sources, investors potentially insulate their holdings from severe market downturns that can irreversibly impair a portfolio's value. This strategic diversification does not merely cushion against volatility; it also sustains the portfolio's growth potential amid tumultuous market phases.

Preservation of Core Portfolio Constituents
A noteworthy advantage of Return Stacking is its ability to preserve core portfolio assets. Traditional approaches often necessitate the liquidation of primary holdings — typically stocks and bonds — to accommodate alternative investments. Such reallocations can induce performance drag, particularly when alternatives underperform relative to core assets. Return Stacking circumvents this dilemma by allowing investors to retain their fundamental holdings while strategically overlaying alternative allocations. This method not only preserves the bedrock of the portfolio but also opens avenues for additional growth through alternative investments.

Enhanced Withdrawal Strategies in Retirement Planning
In the realm of retirement planning, Return Stacking introduces an intriguing dimension. It potentially enables retirees to modestly escalate their withdrawal rates, thereby providing a more comfortable retirement lifestyle without significantly jeopardizing the longevity of their portfolio. This facet is especially pertinent for retirees navigating the precarious balance between portfolio preservation and meeting their financial needs in retirement.

Versatility Across Investment Life Phases
The versatility of Return Stacking extends its benefits across various life phases of investors. While it offers diversification and growth enhancement for those in the accumulation phase, it equally benefits those in the withdrawal phase, such as retirees. This dual utility underscores the adaptability of Return Stacking in catering to a wide spectrum of investment objectives and timelines.

Minimized Performance Drag from Alternative Investments
One of the challenges in incorporating alternative investments into a portfolio is the potential performance drag that can occur when these alternatives underperform core assets like stocks and bonds. With Return Stacking, the necessity to sell core assets is eliminated, allowing investors to maintain their fundamental investment positions while adding alternative strategies. This approach can reduce the performance drag that might otherwise occur during periods when alternative investments underperform.

Adaptability to Market Conditions
Return Stacking offers a dynamic framework that adapts to varying market conditions. By allowing for the introduction of strategic alternative allocations, investors can better navigate periods when their core assets are underperforming. This adaptability is crucial in managing portfolio risk and enhancing returns across different market cycles.

Reduction in Sequence Risk
Particularly relevant for retirees, Return Stacking can reduce sequence risk - the risk of encountering poor investment returns in the early years of retirement. By diversifying the sources of returns and potentially reducing equity exposure, Return Stacking can provide a more stable return profile, which is particularly important for those drawing down their investments in retirement.
Return Stacking stands as a paradigm shift in portfolio management, offering a multifaceted approach to enhancing growth, reducing risk, and maintaining portfolio integrity. Its strategic layering of returns transcends traditional asset allocation, providing investors with a robust framework to navigate the complexities of the financial markets.
Return Stacking Pros and Cons
Source: Pixabay

Return Stacking Pros

All-Weather approach to investing balancing equities, bonds and alternatives that is regime ready for any economic environment
Performance collides with risk management where you'll enjoy great returns without the jarring drawdowns
Taking advantage of the best alternative sleeve strategies (that have the capability to adapt) such as managed futures, macro and convexity that offer advantages over static allocations to gold and commodities
A multi-asset + multi-strategy + fund of funds approach to diversification versus a single strategy approach
A portfolio with enough uncorrelated strategies that will most likely conspire to keep damage at bay when equities are struggling
A portfolio that isn't dependent heavily on equities as the only main driver of returns and point of failure during challenging markets
A chance to support some of the sharpest and most creative minds in the boutique space of asset allocation rather than get cozy with the big guys (the iShares and Vanguards of the industry)

Return Stacking Cons

The potential for tracking-error when the alternative sleeve is having a challenging year
Issue of investors or advisors not understand the benefits of esoteric alternative strategies and application of modest leverage to create more space in the portfolio

Source: Pixabay
Return Stacking Total Portfolio Solution
Does the Return Stacked 60/40 represent a potentially viable total portfolio solution?
In a word. Yes.
As a fund of funds featuring multiple asset classes and multiple strategies that cover equities, bonds and alternatives its the whole package creatively put together.
100% Return Stacked 60/40 Portfolio
That's it. You're done.

Return Stacked Core Portfolio Solution
The Return Stacked 60/40 as a core holding gives investors a great base to push-off from in any direction they so desire.
The suggestions I'll provide are for those committed to the expanded canvas portfolio as the core overall strategy.
If an investor wanted to pursue more equity exposure they could consider adding WisdomTree 90/60 efficient core NTSX, NTSI and NTSE.
That might look like this:
50% Return Stacked 60/4025% NTSX15% NTSI10% NTSE
For allocators seeking more bond exposure than equities in the portfolio it would be easy to tinker a little bit with the formula and efficiently add more fixed income by utilizing Simply's 3X TYA.
This would be something to consider:
90% Return Stacked 60/4010% TYA
For contrarian investors more committed to the alternative sleeve of their portfolio they could tack-on more of a fund like Standpoint Multi-Asset REMIX / BLNDX which is a 50/100 equity + trend-following combination.
You might want to try that one on for size:
80% Return Stacked 60/4020% REMIX / BLNDX

Return Stacking Partial Portfolio Solution
For investors curious about expanded canvas portfolios (featuring an alternative sleeve) but not wanting to commit fully to the strategy beyond it could pair well with whatever you've currently got under the hood.
A potential idea to ponder:
10 to 20% Return Stacked 60/4080 to 90% Whatever You've Got Under The Hood
Nomadic Samuel enjoying time hiking in Germany
Final Thoughts From Nomadic Samuel
Expanded canvas portfolios that adhere to a 1-2-3 process of diversification between equities, bonds and alternatives offer investors exciting opportunities to potentially enjoy enhanced returns while managing downside volatility.
Would the Return Stacked 60/40 make it into my portfolio?
Heck yeah!
It would honestly rocket up to one of my core holdings if not the biggest position in my portfolio.
The whole point of this blog is to explore contrarian asset allocation strategies to find the optimal mix where performance intersects neatly with risk-management.
The Return Stacked 60/40, in my opinion, is one of the best attempts to date, of attempting to find that pulse.
For now the Return Stacked 60/40 is an index that is exciting to track as a model for investors/advisors.
Whether it becomes an investable product (mutual fund or etf) has yet to be determined.

I'm not going to ask any of the creators of the of Return Stacked 60/40 the question of what is its ultimate purpose. That is for them to decide and reveal at a time they deem appropriate.
If/when there is any news to announce on that front, I'll update the article accordingly but for now the Return Stacked 60/40 is an exciting concept and model idea.
In the meantime, I'm kinda feeling ravenous over here.
All this talk of return stacking has me craving a return stacked artisanal burger with extra bacon, patties and cheese.
I'm gonna go grab that.
It's time to go clog my arteries.

#### Contrarian Expanded Canvas Portfolio | How I Invest with Nomadic Samuel
I was so blown away by the success, engagement and high retention time from the Investing Legends contributions on Picture Perfect Portfolios that I've decided to expand the genre by creating a new interview series entitled "How I Invest."

The idea, quite honestly, came from a couple of books by Tim Ferris that I enjoyed immensely:
Tools Of TitansTribe Of Mentors

Tim interviewed various experts, celebrities, and successful entrepreneurs using a template of thought provoking questions that really brought forth fascinating and diverse answers on a wide variety of subjects.

Instead of just serving up softballs and pandering towards the obvious strengths of the guests, the questions likely forced each participant to ponder and consider the journey they've been on including the highs and lows with lessons learned in between.

The goal I have for this series is to really unpack the "raison d'être" behind the specific investing strategies that certain investors pursue while trying to tease out the following:

What's under the hood of the portfolio
The potential pros and cons of that particular asset allocation/strategy
How others can adopt that particular strategy and/or gain the necessary experience to become skilled at it
What makes the investor tick (life experience, influences and lessons learned along the way)
Strengths and weaknesses of the investor and how they've attempted to either overcome them and/or double down on their strengths
How they've changed (or not changed) as an investor over the years

How I Invest as/with a....

DIY QuantAll Seasons PortfolioRisk Parity PortfolioMicro Cap Stock PickerLong Volatility TraderTrend FollowerSeasonality Investor60/40 BogleheadMarket TimerRisk On Risk Off PortfolioUnconstrained InvestorSimplicity Hedged with ComplexityETC...
I'll try my best to have guests who pursue a wide variety of investing styles and strategies.
The goal with this site is to continue to grow and expand our knowledge in pursuit of the subjectively "picture perfect" portfolio.
That's the only reason it exists.

So I'm excited to see what we can learn from these interviews.
Oddly, I'm going to start off by interviewing myself.
Yes.
That's kinda freakin' weird.
I know.
But it'll serve as a template for when I reach out to others.
The goal will be to create a 10 question template that I can easily send out via email.
I'll ask participants to create a short biography and also a section where we can connect with them on social media and/or any platforms they run (blogs, podcasts, YouTube channels, etc).
If you're reading this and would like to participate in the series please send me an email to nomadicsamuel at gmail dot com.
I'm honestly seeking investors of all pedigrees and experience levels; both amateurs and pros.
Anyhow, time to interview myself.
LOL.
Here it goes!
Source: Pixabay by user weinstock
How Nomadic Samuel Invests: Contrarian Expanded Canvas Portfolio

About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.
Source: Pixabay user DariuszSankowski
Investing Influences and Resources

Who were your greatest influences as an investor when you first started to get passionate about the subject?
How have your views evolved over the years to where you currently stand?
If you had to recommend a handful of resources (books, podcasts, white-papers, etc) to bring others up to speed with your investing worldview what would you recommend?
The first book I ever read about investing many years ago was the "Wealthy Barber" by David Chilton.
What was fascinating about that particular book was its use of fictional characters to convey a story about financial advice.
Roy, the Barber, became wealthy by simply saving and investing sensibly over a long period of time despite not having what many would consider a financially lucrative career.

It introduced to me the concept of compound interest as a miracle that manifests itself with a long enough runway.
When I became an overnight basement dweller during the pandemic, I devoured numerous books on the subject of investing.
The ones that really stand out in no particular order are as follows:

My Favourite Investing Books

Your Complete Guide to Factor-Based Investing: The Way Smart Money Invests Today by Larry Swedroe and Andrew Berkin
Reducing the Risk of Black Swans: Using the Science of Investing to Capture Returns with Less Volatility by Larry Swedroe and Kevin Grogan
The Four Pillars of Investing: Lessons for Building a Winning Portfolio by William Bernstein
Your Money and Your Brain by Jason Zweig
Risk Parity: How to Invest for All Market Environments by Alex Shahidi
Adaptive Asset Allocation: Dynamic Global Portfolios to Profit in Good Times - and Bad by Adam Butler, Rodrigo Gordillo and Mike Philbrick
Trend Following: How to Make a Fortune in Bull, Bear, and Black Swan Markets by Michael Covel
Mastering The Market Cycle: Getting the Odds on Your Side by Howard Marks
Predicting the Markets: A Professional Autobiography by Edward Yardeni
Expected Returns on Major Asset Classes by Antti Ilmanen

It would be impossible to cover everything I learned in those 10 books without writing one myself.
Hence, if I can summarize briefly these would be the most important lessons

My Five Most Important Investing Lessons

Diversification is your only free lunch (take it)
No sensible investing plan survives impatience
Leverage is a tool you can utilize to enhance your portfolio by managing risk and returns, or aid in blowing it up entirely via concentrated bets
Zooming out and seeing the big picture is an advantage you can have as an investor compared to just about everyone else
Being contrarian allows you to shake the shackles of benchmarks, orthodoxy and herding to create a portfolio that suits your needs, personality and investing goals

Given that I do a lot of video editing and SEO work from my computer at home, I have the unique privilege of listening to investing podcasts while I'm working on certain projects.
My favourite Investing Podcasts are as follows:

My Favourite Investing Podcasts

Resolve Riffs
Pirates of Finance
The Meb Faber Show
The Derivative by RCM Alternatives
Excess Returns

If you can figure out a way to listen to these shows while you're multi-tasking (working, cooking, exercising, etc) it is amazing the amount of information you can absorb without necessarily needing to carve out additional space in your weekly schedule.

Events That Have Shaped You As An Investor
Aside from investing influences, what real life events have molded your overall views as an investor?
Was it something to do with the way you grew up?
Taking on too much risk (or not enough) early on in your journey/career as an investor?
Or just any other life event or personality trait/characteristic that you feel has uniquely shaped the way you currently view yourself as an investor.
Education.
Travel.
Work Experience.
Volunteering.
A major life event.
What has helped shape the type of investor you've become today?

I grew up in a tiny resource based community on Vancouver Island, British Columbia, Canada.
I remember winning a colouring contest in grade three with the prize of getting to fly over the town in a helicopter.
I was in awe of the surrounding mountains and forest sprawling in all directions.
The village of Gold River was just a spec carved out in the woods with a high enough vantage point.
At ground level it was a booming resource based community with one of the highest per capita incomes of any small-town in Canada during the mid 80s and early 90s.
Source: Town of Gold River Struggling on YouTube via CTV News
Yet, that all changed overnight when both the pulp and paper mill shutdown permanently.
The amount of lives ruined by that event was unfathomable.
Divorce.
Suicide.
Financial ruin.
Some folks pivoted and actually started lucrative new careers and/or businesses but for many individuals the shock of the situation and the lack of a back-up plan was devastating.
The town these days looks dilapidated.
I, along with my parents, moved away many years ago but I recently had a chance to return with my wife Audrey for the first time in decades while working on a campaign on the island.
I made a video about the one day visit we had here.
Source: Uchuck III to FRIENDLY COVE Nootka Sound + Visiting GOLD RIVER on Vancouver Island, British Columbia on YouTube via Samuel and Audrey
It's an in your face reminder, at least to me, that many good things eventually come to an end.
Seeing where you grew up become a shadow of its former self does impact the way you view the world at large and also how you invest.
I'm probably more attuned to risk than most other investors given those circumstances.

Source: en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gold_River,_British_Columbia

Conversation With Your Younger Self
Imagine you could have a three hour conversation with your younger self.
What would you tell the younger version of yourself in order to become a better investor?
Something that you know now that you wish you knew back then.
I would inform my younger self that you don't necessarily have to choose risk over reward or vice versa.
I've learned through research that a modest amount of leverage applied to a portfolio with enough uncorrelated asset classes and strategies allows for returns to collide with risk management in a way where you can have your cake and eat it too.

I used to just think it was one over the other.
More equities if you're keen on returns.
More bonds if you're risk adverse.
That's it.
Yet, when you realize you can construct a portfolio that moves beyond merely stocks and bonds, you have all kinds of diversified opportunities to utilize leverage to enhance returns while managing volatility.
Here is the most basic example.
We'll only use US equities, 10 Year Treasury and Gold to illustrate the point.
Individually, they're all incredibly flawed line items in the portfolio.
Lost decades for US equities in the 70s and 2000s.
A brutal 26 year underwater period for Gold lasting from the early 80s until the mid 2000s.
Anemic relative returns from the 10 year treasury even though it offered a smoother journey.

Yet when you combine them together magic happens.
Why?
Because they're uncorrelated asset classes.
They zig and zag and zig and zag some more all at different times.
And because of this you're not caught with your pants down the same way you'd be if you only had exposure to one asset class.
Overall: US Stock Market vs Gold vs Equal Parts
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
Let's feast our eyes upon the Portfolio Returns of US Stocks, Gold and Equal Parts US Stocks, Gold and 10 Year Treasury since 1972.
For US Stock Market or Gold only investors what a ride it has been!
Worst years of -37.04% and -32.60% respectively.
Max drawdowns of -50.89% and -61.78%.
How many investors pursuing that type of strategy held on tight when it got that volatile?
Not many.
How about the equal parts portfolio?
It crushed the single line items in terms of standard deviation, worst year, maximum drawdown, Sharpe ratio and Sortino ratio while offering returns close to US equities.
Drawdowns: US Stock Market vs Gold vs Equal Parts
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
My oh my the drawdowns for US Stocks and Gold as single line items in the portfolio are scarier than a wicked roller coaster ride.
Whereas the equal parts diversified portfolio offers a silky smooth ride in comparison.
Rolling Returns: US Stock Market vs Gold vs Equal Parts
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
US Stock Market investors would have had to endure a roll period with negative 10 year returns at -2.57%!
Indeed, a lost decade!

Gold only investors would have faired worse.
15 years of pain and then some!
Equal parts investors had a sequence of returns risk roll period of only one negative year.
If that's not a convincing enough argument to diversify your portfolio, I don't know what is!
But what if you're interested in returns that are better than equities but without the jaw dropping risk?
Too good to be true?
Let's find out what happens when we add a modest amount of leverage to the equation at 60%.
Overall: Equal Parts US Stocks, Gold and 10-year Treasury with 60% Leverage
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
With a 160% canvas portfolio of equal parts US stocks, 10 year Treasury and Gold we're able to convincingly exceed the returns of US only equities with a 14.84% CAGR versus 10.46% CAGR.
More importantly, we're able to control volatility across the board including standard deviation, worst year, maximum drawdown, Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio as the whipping cream and cherry on top.
For instance, a -37.04% worst year for US stocks versus -16.79% worst year for the equal parts US stocks, gold and 10 year treasury portfolio with modest 60% leverage.
Roll Period: Equal Parts US Stocks, Gold and 10-year Treasury with 60% Leverage
source: portfoliovisualizer.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
And the knockout blow is that the roll period doesn't change the results even when leverage is applied.

The equal parts portfolio with a 160% canvas still only has a negative low roll period of 1 year versus 10 years for US equities.
Now, I don't recommend this portfolio as this is just the peanut butter, strawberry jam and wonder bread example of how uncorrelated asset classes back-test over 6 decades.
There are numerous ways to further diversify your portfolio that I'll explore more in detail when I reveal what I have under the hood of my portfolio.
But it should give equity only investors a chance to pause and reflect when it comes to the risk/reward profile of their portfolios.
I used to be one of you guys.
But not anymore.
Source: Pixabay by user Alexas_Fotos
Contrarian Expanded Canvas Portfolio: Pop Open The Hood!

Let's pop the hood of your portfolio.
What kind of goodies do we have inside to showcase?
Spill the beans.
How much do you got of this?
Why did you decide to add a bit of that?
If you'd like to go over every line-item you can or if would be easier to break your portfolio into categories or quadrants that's another route worth considering.
When do you anticipate this portfolio performing at its best?
And at its worst?
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 
Recently, I wrote an entire article going over my expanded canvas DIY quantitive portfolio.
Thus, instead of rehashing that entirely here, I'll elect to go with the quadrant approach of explaining what I've got under the hood in quadrants as opposed to individual line items.

UPAR
15.00%
ULTRA RISK PARITY ETF

HRAA.TO
15.00%
HORIZONS RESOLVE ADAPTIVE ASSET FUND

ONEC.TO
10.00%
ACCELERATE ONECHOICE ALTERNATIVE PORTFOLIO

PFAA.TO
10.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ABSOLUTE ALPHA ALTERNATIVE

NTSE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EMERGING EFFICIENT CORE FUND

GDE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EFFICIENT GOLD PLUS EQUITY

NTSI
5.00%
WISDOMTREE INTERNATIONAL EFFICIENT CORE FUND

FIG
5.00%
SIMPLIFY MACRO STRATEGY ETF

KMLM
5.00%
KFA MOUNT LUCAS INDEX STRATEGY

DBMF
5.00%
IMGP DBI MANAGED FUTURES STRATEGY ETF

ATSX.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ENHANCED CANADIAN BENCHMARK ETF

PFAE.TO
5.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ACTIVE EXTENSIONS

HDGE.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ABSOLUTE RETURN HEDGE FUND

My goal as an investor is to utilize an expanded canvas portfolio to stretch the limits beyond 100%.
I specifically am seeking to add uncorrelated asset classes and strategies by efficiently creating space in my portfolio.
For instance, NTSE takes the 60/40 version of Emerging Markets and Treasuries and dials it up to 90/60.
This creates additional real estate in my portfolio to add alternative strategies such as trend following managed futures, global systematic macro, merger arbitrage, long-short equities, market neutral hedging, bitcoin and long volatility portfolio insurance.
I'm not using leverage to dial up the exposure and associated risk of any particular asset classes such as equities only.
Instead I'm attempting to add unique return streams to my portfolio while concertedly managing its risk profile overall.
When I'm adding/subtracting funds from my portfolio I try to ponder how does this improve the diversification of my portfolio, if at all?
Let's explore what I've got in a bit more detail.

Risk Parity = 30%
I would describe the main backbone of my portfolio as a hybrid risk-parity allocation.

UPAR at 15% provides the static long-only 168% expanded canvas allocations to global equities (US, EAFE, EM), TIPs, Long-Term Treasury and Gold/Commodities whereas HRAA.TO at 15% is the adaptive version where I have long/short exposure to equity, bond, commodities and currency indexes utilizing a bespoke global systematic macro approach via trend-following, seasonality, carry, value and other strategies.
I love the ying-yang component of static versus adaptive here.
For those wondering about Risk Parity investing, it's allocating based on risk and not returns.
For instance, TIPs and Long-Term Treasury have a much lower standard deviation than stocks and gold.
Hence, in a risk parity portfolio you'd allocate a greater percentage of resources to the less risky line items versus the more volatile ones.
Efficient Core = 20%
The efficient core of my portfolio consists of 90/90 and 90/60 funds.

I've got GDE at 7.5% providing 90/90 US equities and gold and NTSE at 7.5% and NTSI at 5% providing 90% exposure to Emerging Markets and International Developed Equities in tandem with 60% treasuries.
I love that these funds provide outsized exposure to help create space in my portfolio for additional alternative strategies.
Furthermore, they're some of the cheapest in terms of management fees as well.
A win all around in my opinion.
Long/Short Equities = 15%
I get a bit more aggressive over in the wing of my long-short equities sleeve.

Here I'm utilizing mostly expanded canvas 140-40 funds to get exposure to multi-factor equities minus junk.
The goal is to have extended deep factor exposure to drive outsized returns while also capturing the other side of the equation by shorting shitcos.
I've got PFAE.TO at 5%, ATSX.TO at 5% and HDGE.TO at 5% filling out the roster spots.
Alternatives = 35%

The alternative sleeve is the secret sauce of my portfolio.
It's where I most deviate from the pack in terms of asset allocation, seeking unique return streams and strategies.
The primary strategies I have exposure to are trend-following, merger arbitrage, market neutral equities, special situations credit and gold.
I have secondary exposure to other global systematic managed futures strategies, tail risk hedging (long volatility puts), covered calls, REITs, private loans and high yield bonds.
In order to capture all of this I have ONEC.TO at 10%, PFAA.TO at 10%, DBMF at 5%, KMLM at 5% and FIG at 5%.
Wishlist
I'm seeking more efficient core access to factor equity strategies such as global minimum volatility, momentum, value and size.
I'd love to see the 90/60 market-cap weighted funds offer the same (or similar) products with factor based strategies instead.
I'd also love to have exposure to strategies that are still difficult to access for retail investors such as reinsurance and private equity/credit.

Overall though, I'm thrilled with my portfolio as it is and I'm also highly cognizant that many of these funds/strategies were not available to DIY investors until recently.
For that I'm very grateful.

Investing Skills Required To Pull It Off
What kind of investing skills (trading, asset allocation, investor psychology, etc) are necessary to become good at the style of investing you're pursuing?
Is there a certain type of knowledge, experience and/or personality trait that gives one an advantage running this type of portfolio?
To arrive at the portfolio I've assemble takes a curious mind.
If your knowledge base and convictions are stuck at market-cap weighted equities and bonds is the only (and best) game in town, an expanded canvas portfolio is not for you.
Plain and simple.

Thus, the continuous desire to want to learn and to have a goal of integrating long-only traditional asset classes such as stocks, bonds, commodities and gold with more esoteric strategies in the managed futures and options space is when you end up with a portfolio like mine.
Believe you me I'm fully aware this type of portfolio isn't for everyone.
It also requires tremendous patience in order to pull it off long-term as the results will not be anything like a 60/40.
If you're addicted to comparing your portfolio to industry standard benchmarks please run for the hills if you're thinking of test-driving the one I'm using.

Yet, I feel it's the perfect fit for me.

Toned Down and More Aggressive Version Of My Portfolio
What would be a toned down version of your portfolio?
Something that's a bit watered down.
Conversely, what would be a more aggressive version of your portfolio, if someone were willing to take on more risk for a potentially greater reward?
It would be really easy to tone down my portfolio by utilizing less leverage, tilting more towards bonds and replacing some of the aggressive long-short equity strategies with market neutral ones.
Here is what I'd do specifically:

UPAR to RPAR.
This switch takes you from a fund offering a 168% canvas to 125% canvas.
NTSI to ISWN.
From 90/60 International Developed Equities and Treasuries to 70/90.
PFAE.TO to PFMN.TO
Going from Picton Mahoney 140/40 to the market neutral mandate they offer.
ATSX.TO to PLV.TO
Going from 140-40 equities to an asset allocation fund of global low volatility equites and 30% corporate bonds.
HDGE.TO to QBTL.TO
A long-short combination of multi-factor equities minus junk being replaced by a fund offering market neutral anti-beta.
For US investors the fund BTAL is the same strategy.
That is enough to tilt this portfolio more conservative without losing its spirit.
This is what it looks like exactly.

Conservative Nomadic Samuel Portfolio

RPAR
15.00%
RISK PARITY ETF

HRAA.TO
15.00%
HORIZONS RESOLVE ADAPTIVE ASSET FUND

ONEC.TO
10.00%
ACCELERATE ONECHOICE ALTERNATIVE PORTFOLIO

PFAA.TO
10.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ABSOLUTE ALPHA ALTERNATIVE

NTSE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EMERGING EFFICIENT CORE FUND

GDE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EFFICIENT GOLD PLUS EQUITY

ISWN
5.00%
AMPLIFY BLACKSWAN INTERNATIONAL ETF

FIG
5.00%
SIMPLIFY MACRO STRATEGY ETF

KMLM
5.00%
KFA MOUNT LUCAS INDEX STRATEGY

DBMF
5.00%
IMGP DBI MANAGED FUTURES STRATEGY ETF

PFMN.TO
5.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED MARKET NEUTRAL ALTERNATIVE

PLV.TO
5.00%
INVESCO LOW VOLATILITY PORTFOLIO ETF

QBTL.TO
5.00%
AGFiQ US MARKET NEUTRAL ANTI-BETA ETF

The more aggressive version of my portfolio is a cinch to put together.
It involves no changes but further expanding the canvas.
You'd need a margin account and to borrow 50% to expand the expanded canvas portfolio to 150%.

Now keep in mind the funds I have already utilize leverage to begin with, so I'm not suggesting or recommending this at all.
But since the question was asked I feel the need to provide an answer.
Please notice the adjusted percentages below.

Aggressive Nomadic Samuel Portfolio

UPAR
20.00%
ULTRA RISK PARITY ETF

HRAA.TO
20.00%
HORIZONS RESOLVE ADAPTIVE ASSET FUND

ONEC.TO
15.00%
ACCELERATE ONECHOICE ALTERNATIVE PORTFOLIO

PFAA.TO
15.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ABSOLUTE ALPHA ALTERNATIVE

NTSE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EMERGING EFFICIENT CORE FUND

GDE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EFFICIENT GOLD PLUS EQUITY

NTSI
5.00%
WISDOMTREE INTERNATIONAL EFFICIENT CORE FUND

FIG
15.00%
SIMPLIFY MACRO STRATEGY ETF

KMLM
15.00%
KFA MOUNT LUCAS INDEX STRATEGY

DBMF
15.00%
IMGP DBI MANAGED FUTURES STRATEGY ETF

ATSX.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ENHANCED CANADIAN BENCHMARK ETF

PFAE.TO
5.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ACTIVE EXTENSIONS

HDGE.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ABSOLUTE RETURN HEDGE FUND

You'll notice the Risk Parity and Trend-Following strategies have been boosted the most so as to more effectively manage volatility as opposed to jacking up the portable beta and long-short equities.

My Greatest Strengths and Weaknesses as an Investor
What do you feel is your greatest strength as an investor?
What is something that sets you apart from others?
Conversely, what is your greatest weakness?
Are you currently trying to address this weakness, prevent it from easily manifesting or simply doubling down on what it is that you're great at?
Curiosity and keeping an open mind is my greatest strength as an investor.
I'm interested in forever being a sponge investor thrilled by soaking up new information while expelling junk.
My plan is to only keep inside of my sponge what makes sense to me as I learn, acquire, evolve, absorb, reject and disavow over time.
My greatest weakness fortunately for me doesn't revolve around patience issues.
For some reason I firmly believe I've got firm grasp of the importance of staying the course with the strategies I'm pursuing.
I fully expect for each and every one of them to underperform for significant periods of time and I'm anticipating that with eyes wide open.

Thus, my greatest weakness is without a doubt being attracted to complex things.
If you notice, nothing in my portfolio involves a single strategy fund.
I have no long-only equity funds or long-only bond tickers or long-only commodities ETFs.
Instead, I have long-only equity plus treasury and/or gold funds.

Or multi-asset class and multi-strategy fund of funds.
In order for a fund to capture my attention it must offer more than one strategy.
And my biggest fear is that I'll one day wake up with a portfolio that is maybe 100% alternatives or something along those lines.
LOL.
In order to prevent myself from doing that I plan on floating the current manifestation of my portfolio to a few trusted friends for a second opinion.
If those around me, who I admire the most and trust, feel as though I've lost the plot then I'm sure that I have.
Because I'm a curious investor (strength) I do plan for my portfolio to change and evolve as I learn more about different strategies and when new and potentially better products come to market.
However, I'm trying to firmly establish a rule where I'm not just adding funds for the sake of it because they're new and alluring.
They truly need to enhance my portfolio from what I currently have on roster.
Thus, the tug-of-war between my curious mind and propensity for enjoying complexity will likely forever duke it out.

And I'm okay with that.
That's just me.
I ain't gonna change.
So warts and all I march forward.

Things You Agree and Disagree With As An Investor
What's something that you believe as an investor that is not widely agreed upon by the investing community at large?
On the other hand, what is a commonly held investing belief that most in the industry would  agree with that rubs you a bit differently?
The use of leverage is such a polarizing subject that it can cause two investors who generally agree about everything under the sun to suddenly look at each other as though they were aliens.
The fact that I believe modest applications of leverage can potentially enhance a portfolio by expanding its canvas to accommodate unique and uncorrelated asset classes/strategies is definitely anything but the norm.
Most investors think leverage equals annihilation.
And they're not wrong.
When you hear the stories of investors blowing up it almost always involves leverage as part of the equation.

But what they may not realize is that this almost entirely involves applications of concentrated leverage.
Dialling up a single asset class that is already risky and volatile (such as equities) to levels way beyond 100%.
Worse, is when it is just a handful of stocks making the leverage and volatility even more concentrated.
However, if you consult the example I gave earlier in the article with equal parts US equites, Gold and the 10 Year Treasury it's possible to use leverage to enhance returns and manage risk.
So my belief that leverage is not a four letter word definitely puts me into contrarian investor territory.
Whew.
That's my favourite spot to be.
Not just in investing but in life too.
On the other hand, one thing I don't agree with entirely that most people in the industry believe firmly is that fear causes panic selling.
I'm sure that fear plays a role in investors selling when markets are going down sharply.

However, I believe it is just plain old vanilla impatience that causes bad investor behaviour most of the time.
The kind of impatience that ticks you off when you're waiting in line at the grocery store or the light turns red before you can make it through the intersection.
A better example might be the quarterback on TV from your favourite football team not being able to complete passes.
After a while you just can't stand it anymore.
This guy sucks!
Get rid of 'em!
And this extends to the way most investors manage their portfolio.

They just get frustrated and impatient with the results of certain funds and underperforming benchmarks or having lost decades.
They'll proclaim a strategy is dead and move on.
Thus, I feel it is being impatient rather than being afraid that drives most bad short-term decisions for investors.
I've never talked or written about this before, so I'd be curious to know if you agree with me or not.

Investing Subject Area To Further Explore
What's a subject area in investing that you're eager to learn more about?
And why?
If you knew more about that particular topic would it influence the way you'd construct your portfolio?
Oh, that's an easy one.
I want to learn more about options based trading strategies.
I'd love to know how volatility strategies can better enhance the risk/reward profile of your portfolio.
I've just wrapped my head around trend-following and other managed futures strategies but I'm admittedly quite green when it comes to options based investing.

How do I plan to learn more about the subject?
The same way I have with everything else.
Books.
Podcasts.
White papers.
Pulling my hair out more than once.

The Anti-Nomadic Samuel Portfolio
What would be the ultimate anti-Nomadic Samuel portfolio?
Something you'd never own unless you were duct-taped to a chair as a hostage?
What about this portfolio is repulsive to you?
Conversely, if you were forced to Steel Man it, what would potentially be appealing about the portfolio to others?
What is so alluring about it?
I'm tempted to be a little goofy and go with the 60/40 combination of TESLA and shitcoins but I'm going to just say the plain old 60/40.
Now if you duct-taped me to a chair and threatened my life I'd be okay owning this.
Just want to get that clear.

However, I do feel that that market-cap weighted 60/40 strategy represents everything that is mediocre, bland and insipid about the investing industry at large.
It's repulsive to me because it lacks creativity and I feel constructing a portfolio should be equal parts art and science.
In terms of direct constructive criticism I feel as though it doesn't prepare investors for every economic outcome (especially stagflation) and is lacking from a strategic diversification standpoint.

It's easy for me to Steel Man this approach because its the McDonald's of investing.
It's the average portfolio for the average investor just as eating junk food is the average diet for the average person.
Far from optimal in my opinion but easily accessible.
And like junk food that lures you in with cheap prices and easy to pop open bags of sugary/salty poison, the 60/40 is the lowest cost portfolio you can slap together.

And if you believe fees are the most important thing to consider as an investor you'll be happy to own it.
So I totally understand why most people do.
I'm just glad I'm not one of them.

#### Early Retirement Extreme | How I Invest with Jacob Lund Fisker
When I first came up with the idea for the "How I Invest" series I wanted to shine the spotlight upon skilled contrarian professional and amateur investors who are doing things a bit differently.
Although my next guest is not a quant legend in the sense that someone like Meb Faber or Larry Swedroe would be to the investing community at large, he is a "personal legend" to me in the sense that he's written the most influential book of all-time (by a country mile in my opinion) about early retirement and lifestyle optimization:
Early Retirement Extreme - A philosophical and practical guide to financial independence by Jacob Lund Fisker

Early Retirement Extreme
Indeed, that's a bold statement but I'd challenge anyone who has an interest in the subject of achieving financial independence to read this book and then tell me otherwise.
It's the type of book that should be purchased and read annually the same way you'd benefit from rereading Nassim Taleb's Incerto series or The Almanack of Naval Ravikant where timeless wisdom related to different topics would speak to you in a profound manner each and every time.

To say Jacob Lund Fisker is one of the OGs of the FIRE movement would be a gross understatement.
His blog Early Retirement Extreme and book by the same name provide a comprehensive approach to achieving a financially independent lifestyle.
Both cover topics such as economic degrees of freedom, Renaissance ideals and lifestyle along with strategies, tactics and guiding principles to achieve financial freedom.
That's in direct contrast with typical surface level observations such as "drink less frappuccinos" and "invest in the S&P 500 and chill" from random FIRE blogger XYZ .
source: amazon.com and jacob lund fisker via earlyretirementextreme.com
Getting back on track to the subject of investing, I thought I'd share a couple of astute observations from Jacob that appear in his book before we kick off the interview:
"At the highest level there are people who create new rules, that is, they find some aspect of the market and the economy that allows them to predict more correctly what the future price of an asset will be. Since they don't have to share their edge (fishing spot) with anyone, they can keep all the profits. Such research requires a bright mind and a lot of work, but the rewards are high (and of course proportional to the assets). Typically, new investment techniques start at this level and then diffuse down to the lower stages as more and more people pick them up and reduce the former edge (in investment parlance called alpha) to volatility (in investment parlance called beta). Various theories are in various stages of diffusion, with some still having an edge and others appearing to have no edge at all."

"Many associate effort with taking action, but not taking action is also a form of action. In fact, often not taking action is just what is required. The easiest way to get in the right frame of mind is to stop thinking like a farmer and start thinking like a hunter. A farmer (and a modern salary-, working-, and businessman) gets rewarded by activity. The more he does, the greater his reward. Conversely, a hunter isn't going to catch anything if he thrashes around in the woods, frantically looking for prey. A strategy where he first identifies the best place to hunt (skill) and then waits patiently for the opportunity to present itself, will be more successful."
This is the longest introduction I've ever written for any guest because his book produced "a paradigm shift" in the way I think about my lifestyle, savings, burn-rate, investments, finances, hobbies and life goals.
Thus, on a personal level, I'm beyond thrilled he's taking part in the series and without further ado let's turn things over to Jacob Lund Fisker.

How I Invest with Jacob Lund Fisker of Early Retirement Extreme
source: jplenio from pixabay
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Meet Jacob Lund Fisker: Retired Astrophysicist by Age 33
I am one of the OGs of the FIRE movement having run the ERE website since 2007.
The ERE framework was the result of spending much of my twenties figuring out the most resource efficient way to living a creative and interesting life within a sustainable and equitable ecological footprint.
This comes to spending about $7,000/person/year.
I got serious about investing after realizing that putting in the effort to saving and accumulating for a few years made it possible to invest and trade money for money rather than going along with the earn-buy time for money scheme.

As someone who used "work for a living" this was a paradigm-shifting game changer even if it seems trivially obvious today now that FIRE has gone mainstream.
Thus began a lifelong learning process of trying to become a better caretaker of my financial capital.
I retired from my career in astrophysics in 2009 (age 33) after deciding that devising sustainable alternatives to the prevailing paradigm of consumption-maximization was more important to the world than publishing a few more decimal points about neutron stars.
source: radical personal finance on youtube

My Investment Career Began Before The Age Of The Influencer
Who were your greatest influences as an investor when you first started to get passionate about the subject?
How have your views evolved over the years to where you currently stand?
If you had to recommend a handful of resources (books, podcasts, white-papers, etc) to bring others up to speed with your investing worldview what would you recommend?

My investment career began in 2005 before the "age of the influencer", so I can't really point to anyone in particular.
Since I had put in the effort to live well without much spending, I had a savings rate of 75-80% despite my median salary as an academic junior/bench physicist.
After 5 years of living sustainably my pile of unspent savings was big enough to make me financially independent insofar it was invested wisely.
However, growing up in Denmark, I knew nothing about investing.
Investing in anything other than bricks was not a thing at the time over there.
I mainly read academic textbooks, which I vastly prefer to autobiographical "Here's what I did and so you can too"-stories.
My early influence was, therefore, mathematically oriented.

Black Scholes, Modern Portfolio Theory, efficient frontiers, correlations, financial analysis, and the likes.
As a physicist, I was more interested in diving deep into theory than practice.
It was immediately clear how economics and finance had a strong case of "physics envy".
They often made very simplifying assumptions about human behavior in order to make their relatively simple math tractable to pen and paper analysis.
For example, risk is often defined as volatility or price variance under an L2-norm which makes it easier for researchers to gather data and derive some algebra.
However, humans are generally not 16 times unhappier losing $4 compared to losing $1.
Neither are they just as happy making a dollar as losing a dollar!?!

To a practitioner or an actual human being this is common sense, but it took a while for economists to turn that into its own subfield (behavioral economics).
My scientist's focus was on what was potentially wrong with the model frameworks, whereas someone with an engineering-mindset would have focused on the conditions where the models worked well and proceeded to optimize them.
After spending a few years dabbling in options and value stocks and seeing the equivalent of the Emperor's New Clothes play out during the run up to the Global Financial Crisis, it eventually became obvious that markets are not always behaving according to econ/finance theory.
There was clearly something more to the complexity of the market than rational expectations theory.
Kinda like how there's more to playing poker than calculating the odds of a given hand.
Indeed, if markets were truly efficient, nobody would ever trade, because buyers and sellers would instantly agree on a new fair price every time new information was presented, thus creating a stalemate. (Please ponder this until it sinks in!)

However, this is not what happens.
Instead new information often causes disagreement about what something is worth.
The market is not guided by total information: There's layer on top of information, call it knowledge, that decides what to do about that information, and different investors have different kinds of knowledge.
There may even be yet another layer on top of the knowledge layer, call it wisdom.
Trading is the process to resolve the disagreement over knowledge as investors put their money where their mouth is.
As such I became more interested in why investors disagree despite everybody having efficient access to the same information.
The answer must be that different investors somehow see the same information differently and consequently value it differently.
They have different paradigms.
Potayto, Potahto!
I know that you know that I know that ... and so forth.
Different depths of playing.
The market is much more a kind of Keynesian beauty contest than we'd like to admit.

Later working as a quant on "Wall Street" for a few years (bucket list, checkmark) finalized the point that successful investing is not so much about being right but about being slightly less wronger than wrong.
The market can famously stay irrational longer than you can remain solvent.
However, staying out is not an alternative because cash is also a market position.
From this it follows that you may have to deal with sustained periods of irrationality in order to make or even keep your money in the face of inflation.
Instead of seeing investing as a rational objective pursuit, it is an intersubjective construct.
This is not really different from other human action.
So I began to focus more on the practical psychology of investing.
Not simply my own biases, but those of other investors and how people form their worldview.
Bias lends itself to one-variable statistical analysis and this is why behavioral economics is a thing.
But biases don't exist independently.
The act of forming a biased framework is much more complex.
This also makes it more interesting.

The aggregate process of resolving this disagreement within the individual limits of hierarchical complexity creates the market dynamics.
I see the market as a mass experiment is applied human psychological development.
A handful of books is never going to get anyone up to speed, but if you want a taste of how I approach the markets, these three are the closest I can think of.
Caveat: They may not mean the same to you as they do to me.

They are definitely not a good place to start for beginning investors:Mastering The Market Cycle: Getting the Odds on Your Side
Investing: The Last Liberal Art (Columbia Business School Publishing)
More Than You Know: Finding Financial Wisdom in Unconventional Places
For those who want to pursue a similar path to mine, I suggest the following approach:
Intuition needs to be rooted in numbers and psychology, so three steps along with a martial arts analogy in parenthesis:

Mathematical foundation: Study a basic academic finance curriculum to get a solid foundation. Something corresponding to first year of business school or CFA Level 1. See here for a list: http://earlyretirementextreme.com/startup-curriculum-for-finance-economics-investing.html This corresponds to about 8000 pages of reading which can be completed in about a year or so. Most never finish it.(This corresponds to doing pushups, situps, and learning the punches and kicks of the system. Like getting a black belt, learning the repertoire of techniques is the foundation and the beginning of the journey as a martial artist. Of course, ultimately there are no techniques---practicisn techniques is just a method of learning. Until you can provide the proverbial explaination of what a P/E multiplier is to your proverbial mother in 3 different ways, do not pass go, do not collect $200.)
Psychological understanding: Pick up random old guru books from libraries and thrift stores and read them with the benefit of 20/20 hindsight. What did the authors get right? What did they get wrong? What did they miss? Reading history is also useful, but I recommend going directly for the sources (old newspapers) to see what it looked like as it happened. I don't think history books are all that useful because they don't give the same sense of time as lived experience.(This corresponds to studying other fighters. What made them great? Why did some ultimately fail? How has fighting evolved. For fun, compare early MMA styles as they evolved to the present? What would defeat the present style?)
Building intuition: Read widely. Or listen to podcast conversations if you have to. Also practice widely. Whether that's from hobbies or actual jobs in different fields, carrying knowledge over from one field to another often creates new perspectives on things. This is the same ERE-style "renaissance"-approach I use in the rest of my life.(This corresponds to getting your feet wet and also to breaking out of the system of your formal training by getting new ideas. There's a reason it's called "martial arts" and not "martial science". The point of learning the foundations of your field is to break out of them properly.)

I'll see you on the other side.
source: danielkirsch on pixabay
Investing Is A Process Of Taking Care Of Your Little Space Of The World
Aside from investing influences, what real life events have molded your overall views as an investor?
Was it something to do with the way you grew up?
Taking on too much risk (or not enough) early on in your journey/career as an investor?
Or just any other life event or personality trait/characteristic that you feel has uniquely shaped the way you currently view yourself as an investor.
Education.
Travel.
Work Experience.
Volunteering.
A major life event.
What has helped shape the type of investor you’ve become today?

Good question!
I think one's investing-style is ideally a reflection of who one is as a person. (Caution: Extraverts in particular may confuse who they really are with who they've become in order to fit in with friends and family or career)
If these two are teleologically aligned, tension decreases and one will sleep well at night (SWAN).
And SWAN is very important for personal well-being. (Drinking less coffee also helps!)
I covered that a bit above when I talked about the "renaissance"-ideal.
I believe that homo sapines sapiens is the universally adaptive/generalist species.
Humanity has so much^H^H^H^H .. some potential.
However, industrialization followed by the echo-chambers of the information age has turned us into specialized idiot savants.
Cogs in the career machine.

Capable of formally optimizing our assigned part of a job-given problem; ignorant of the wider context; barely able to fix a sink or cook a meal without an app and a subscription box.
This also goes for investing.
Investors tend to form echo chambers that act like different species in the market place.
The market place in turn forms an ecology of investor types who squabble online in order to establish primacy.
I think my ERE goal of becoming more of a generalist when it comes to consumption (see my second talk on The Stoa) has also made me a generalist on the production side when it comes to investing.

I see investing much like taking care of a garden space.
Think permaculture.
Adding some securities to my garden portfolio and subtracting others depending on what thrives and what dies as the investment climate changes.
Not so much about arguing whether growing beans is better than growing beets.
Not so much about growing the market garden bigger.
Investing is a process of taking care of your little space of the world, your capital.
You're responsible.
You're part of the system.
What's useful about this perspective is how it leaves room for understanding context and how the context is changing.
Insofar one is blind to context---like how the fish don't see the water they swim in---such advice is easily confused for a load of in-actionable blahblah.
This attitude tends to frustrate most people, especially those looking for a quick and easy solution.
source: the stoa on youtube

Finance Is Part Of Adulting: Punt At Your Peril
Imagine you could have a three hour conversation with your younger self.
What would you tell the younger version of yourself in order to become a better investor?
Something that you know now that you wish you knew back then.
Start earlier!
Finance is part of the adulting curriculum of the 21st century.

You can't escape it.
Punt at your peril.
Whether you want to be or not, you are always an investor of something. You savings, your health, your relationships.
Finance is one of the governing intersubjective human constructs that determine what we do and where we go. (Compare to legislation+its enforcement which is another technology for governing human behavior at a mass scale).
Investing requires developing a future-oriented perspective.
You can invest in your career, your family, your environment, the world.. at any level from the egocentric to the world-centric.
Being an investor means you take an active role in where the world is going. Investing ties current decisions to future consequences.
In a democracy, you get one vote per adult heart. In the markets, you vote your spending and your savings---your savings being what you have produced minus what you have consumed as far as the market is concerned.
Whether you spend or invest, you play a real albeit minor role in where this world is going.
For good and bad, having savings means you have a responsibility to place it well.
You're voting with your money.

This makes you responsible.
This is serious stuff!
source: NatureFriend on pixabay
Woe To Anyone Who Simplistically Copies Someone Else's Portfolio
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 

Let’s pop the hood of your portfolio.
What kind of goodies do we have inside to showcase?
Spill the beans.
How much do you got of this?
Why did you decide to add a bit of that?
If you’d like to go over every line-item you can or if would be easier to break your portfolio into categories or quadrants that’s another route worth considering.
When do you anticipate this portfolio performing at its best?

Ugh!
No offense, but let's not.
I once made the mistake of revealing my portfolio in a random blog comment.
Many years later, someone dug it up and sent me a complete analysis of how it had performed over the years.
I wrote them back to inform them that I had sold off many of the positions several years ago.
Their well-intended analysis had made incorrect (buy&hold) presumptions about my strategy.
I don't believe it's possible to separate an investor from their investments.
They come as a pair. Knowing WHAT someone is holding is not the complete picture.
You also need to know WHY, HOW, and WHEN they're holding it and that is very personal.
Woe to anyone who simplistically copies someone else's portfolio without understanding why it is the way it is.

Everyone needs to match their holdings to their own being.
My personal portfolio depends my personal sphere of competence and interests, my net-worth and tax-situation, and my desire to sleep well at night.
It's a complete package.
These all change over the years so managing a portfolio is matter of continual adaption to personal as well as global circumstances.

However, if you really want to know, my approach can be categorized as "top-down discretionary macro".
My tools are mainly equity and bonds, some 30-40 positions total, because that's what I know.
I do NOT analyze stocks (I have no edge there).
I consider the prevailing intersubjective narratives and their likelihood of changing within my objective (taxes, networth, ...) and interobjective (interest rates, valuations,...) constraints.
I position my portfolio accordingly.
The way this works in practice is that I have a hypothesis about "something I know but they don't but think they do" about the macroeconomic environment.
For example, "interest rates are not going up" (in contrast to the commonly held belief that they are).
WARNING: This is just an example, not a prediction.
This in turn would suggest that certain companies are incorrectly valued.
For example, bad balance sheets are undervalued.
I then set up a stock screen for those companies and simply pick whatever analysts consider best in breed.
You can call that "irrational expectations theory" if you want. I think that covers it pretty well.
source: DariuszSankowski on pixabay
I Have Known No Wise People Who Didn't Read All The Time
What kind of investing skills (trading, asset allocation, investor psychology, etc) are necessary to become good at the style of investing you’re pursuing?Is there a certain type of knowledge, experience and/or personality trait that gives one an advantage running this type of portfolio?

"In my whole life, I have known no wise people (over a broad subject matter area) who didn't read all the time -- none, zero. You'd be amazed at how much Warren reads--and at how much I read. My children laugh at me. They think I'm a book with a couple of legs sticking out."---Charlie Munger

Uhm, yes ... me too.
I couldn't follow my strategy without reading a wide range of sources.

Don't ask which ones.
That's missing the point entirely.
The key is always looking for new ways of seeing the world---also about how others see the world---and integrating them to add new perspectives.
Building a lattice work.
Also, see Stoa 2.

Ken Wilber termed this vision logic, which is basically a broadly informed intuition from multiple perspectives as opposed to a singular perspective based on gut-feeling or rationality.
In modern parlance, the market is a hyperobject.
This is but a fancy way of saying that the same thing looks different depending on which angle is it viewed from.
For example, a cylinder looks a circle from the top or a square from the side.
Upon encountering a difference in perspective, the natural impulse for someone who has been trained in formalized expertise is to debate and disagree with other perspectives according to their training.
People talk their book.

Instead of endlessly arguing why the cylinder is a square and not a circle or vice versa, I accept that some people see a square while others see a cylinder.
I position my portfolio according to who is most likely to change their mind.
This requires holding two or more opposing perspectives in the mind at the same time, understanding other people's blindspots, knowing how to position one's portfolio accordingly.
Then having the patience to wait for the inevitable shift in price when investors finally shift their perspective.
source: the stoa on youtube

I Retired Early At 33: My Portfolio Has To Last Me At Least 60 Years
What would be a toned down version of your portfolio?
Something that’s a bit watered down.
Conversely, what would be a more aggressive version of your portfolio, if someone were willing to take on more risk for a potentially greater reward?

I retired early at 33 so my portfolio has to last me at least 60 years---okay, it's down to 45 by now :-P.
As such I can't accept the risk = reward paradigm.
In my situation, risk is the potential for irrecoverable losses and the reward is maintaining financial independence from an recurring cash stream.
Neither of these are related to market volatility.
The question, therefore, is how to keep this cash stream going for more than half a century.
What makes this difficult is how much the next "sure thing" changes and how quickly it can be abandoned again.

Here's a brief list of popular "sure things" that "can't fail" and "always go up" because < insert rationalization >:
1950s "onics" stocks (any stock ending in onics)1960s Go-Go stocks followed by Nifty Fifty blue chip stocks1970s Gold and collectibles1980s Money market and commodities1990s Dotcom stocks2000s Real estate2010s Index funds2020s Crypto? NFTs? Homesteads? Or maybe not?
Many investors justify their paradigm with selective backtesting.
It's almost always possible to p-hack a new strategy and/or data-dredge up a country or a handful of decades where any strategy worked really well.
Some investors endlessly check themselves for this trap.
Charismatic investors not so much.
Remember the "2/3 of average"-problem! (You did click and read all the links above, right?) Never take the "2/3 of average"-line of reasoning to its logical conclusion because the market doesn't.
Yet, don't extrapolate your paradigm into the far future either.

Investors are often unaware of their own paradigm.
It is very difficult to change what one does not see.
In particular, many investors don't even see their paradigm as a paradigm.
It's like water to fish.
Thanks paradigm!
Popular paradigms dominate the market for 5-15 years, yet remain defended by core believers even 30-50 years later.
Once popularity declines, the paradigm faces headwinds as more and more exit the trade, yet zealots always remain.
All this to say there's no such thing as aggressive or toned down.
These attitudes are but other paradigms and strategies.
All part of the same market.
source: ha11ok on pixabay
As An Investor Your Greatest Strength Also Determines Your Greatest Weakness
What do you feel is your greatest strength as an investor?
What is something that sets you apart from others?
Conversely, what is your greatest weakness?
Are you currently trying to address this weakness, prevent it from easily manifesting or simply doubling down on what it is that you’re great at?

The biggest strength also determines the biggest weakness.
They exist in pairs.
Addressing a weakness would also curb the corresponding strength.

The investor would change into a different investor.
Market participants play different roles according to their individual strengths and weaknesses.
Much like an eco-system, the greater the variety in strengths, the more resilient the system is.
The financial system should fundamentally reflect the economic system.
When it doesn't malinvestments occur.
The biggest danger to the system is when investors collectively decide to focus on one kind of strength, especially when it's not their own, and form a herd.

A shared paradigm is a kind of collective madness.
This kind of madness recurs at regular intervals.
Social media likely made it worse.
The biggest danger to the individual investor is focusing on a strength that is not naturally their own.
This is especially hazardous to beginning investors.
You're not going to be the next Warren Buffett.

My greatest strength is the ability to see and hold multiple different perspectives at the same time.
This is not really something I'm born into but rather an outcome of spending 2015-2020 moderating political discussions on my forum.
It does gets tiresome.
Holding perspectives (or space) requires a suspension of a kind of disbelief in order to root out what a given investor-type grouping either doesn't see (known-unknowns) or refuses to accept (unknown-knowns).
This is done by following a wide range of sources---put out sensors everywhere---and essentially taking a 4th person view on the market: I have little interest in arguing "best investments" but great interest in watching how different groups argue with and amongst each other.

My biggest weakness follows from that. I'd be unlikely to go all in on a single perspective.
I became aware of crypto in 2012ish.
However, I was also aware of eGold and Liberty dollars in 2005.
One went well, the others not so much.
source: Nile on pixabay
There's No Such Thing As A Free Lunch
What’s something that you believe as an investor that is not widely agreed upon by the investing community at large?
On the other hand, what is a commonly held investing belief that most in the industry would  agree with that rubs you a bit differently?

I don't presume that market efficiency is instantaneously settled.
I think it's an on-going negotiated process that takes months or even years to unfold.
While information is widely and instantly available, its translation into knowledge takes effort.
It's not frictionless!
Furthermore, while such knowledge is achievable second-hand through education and from other investors, the wisdom to act on it is mostly achieved first-hand and personally.
That there's no such thing as a free lunch.

That this affects every instance of life.
To be clear, the simplified math assumes that transmission is instant at the ground level.
I think there are at least two additional levels of translation beyond that.
Perhaps more generally I don't believe there isn't a group of "they" as in "they will think of something" whether it comes to ensuring that the market always has the best price, or inventing new technology to compensate for bad resource management, or fixing climate change, malnutrition, lack of exercise, or unhealthy behavioral choices.
If modernist rationalism was the answer, "more education and books and apps" would have solved all these problems.
It clearly hasn't.
If postmodernism was the answer, "forming communities and talking everything to death" would have solved all problems too.

That approach isn't working overly well either.
What can I say?
Rather we're all in this world together even if half of us have yet to realize or accept it.
Everybody is responsible for doing something on their own as well as doing something with others.
This includes investing.
I like to think of investing as "guiding the future".
Voting by market.
You put your monies to direct the future evolution in a certain way.
Not just for humans, but other species and the planet as such.
Insofar you have enough savings, consider giving up a few basis points for the future of the planet.
There's only one as far as we know.

You Go To War With The Army You Have
What’s a subject area in investing that you’re eager to learn more about?
And why?
If you knew more about that particular topic would it influence the way you’d construct your portfolio?

"How to fix stupid".
With 8 billion humans on the planet comprising 1/3 of the mammal biomass, managing our combined follies and foibles is literally the most important "elephant in a china shop"-bottleneck of the world during the 21st century.

Investing will continue to play a big role going forward because "debating" and "arms-length transactions with money" still defines our operating paradigm.
Our tool-set so to speak.
You go to war with the army you have, not the army you might want or wish you had.

This means navigating the 21st century using 19th and 20th century investment tools.
Trying to solve problems with money.
Yet generals usually to go to war using the toolset of their last war---diddle, diddle, straight up the middle---and everybody suffers accordingly.
I'm interested in how investors will be changing their minds living through the 21st century.
How investors will respond to the consequences of their commitments within the limits of their chosen constraints.
If we can't rely on expertise or community, where do we go then?
source:paul wheaton on youtube

Anti-Jacob Lund Fisker Portfolio: FIRE & Forget
What would be the ultimate anti-Jacob Lund Fisker portfolio?
Something you’d never own unless you were duct-taped to a chair as a hostage?
What about this portfolio is repulsive to you?
Conversely, if you were forced to Steel Man it, what would potentially be appealing about the portfolio to others?
What is so alluring about it?
Whenever space probes are portrayed in the media, reporters marvel about "hitting the bullseye from millions of kilometers away".
This is not really how it works though.
Interplanetary launches are not fixed on super-precise course at the outset only to cruise for years or decades to hit their intended destination within a few meters.
What happens is that ongoing telemetry and regularly scheduled course corrections that guide the vehicle along the way.

The ultimate anti-Jacob portfolio would be committing an irrecoverable amount of savings to an unguided "fire & forget"-portfolio that is justified by binary absolutes like "always", "never", "nobody", and so on.
Things change slowly.
Course corrections are necessary.

Steel-manning it, I think many true believers eventually do change their mind.
A firm belief protects the ego from doubts and whip-sawing in the short run.
It's quicker and easier than spending thousands of hours on a solid argument.
Paying attention to the popular paradigm once or twice each decade (perhaps via a CFP) may be good enough.

"It ain't what you don't know that gets you into trouble. It's what you know for sure that just ain't so." --- Mark Twain

#### How Do I Invest My Money? Diversified DIY Quantitative Portfolio
When it comes to the question of how do I invest my own money, I've shifted in the past year from being a 100% equity factor based investor to building a diversified DIY Portfolio keying in on a myriad of quantitative investing strategies spread out over numerous asset classes.
Why change from a stocks for the long run strategy?
Aren't stocks the best game in town?

If you can handle the expected volatility and drawdowns of markets, with a long enough time horizon, doesn't it make sense to be 100% in equities and then dial things down closer to retirement?
I thought so.
However, I no longer believe this is the best way to invest at any given stage of the life cycle of an investor.
Why?
Because diversification is your only free lunch in investing.

How Do I Invest My Money As A DIY Investor?
About the Author & Disclosure
Picture Perfect Portfolios is the quantitative research arm of Samuel Jeffery, co-founder of the Samuel & Audrey Media Network. With over 15 years of global business experience and two World Travel Awards (Europe's Leading Marketing Campaign 2017 & 2018), Samuel brings a unique global macro perspective to asset allocation.
Note: This content is strictly for educational purposes and reflects personal opinions, not professional financial advice. All strategies discussed involve risk; please consult a qualified advisor before investing.

Nomadic Samuel's Diversified DIY Quantitative Portfolio
Nomadic Samuel eating a pizza in Argentina. Hey, doesn't that kind of look a bit like a portfolio? A bit more delicious for sure ;)
Diversification Is Your Only Free Lunch

When you combine uncorrelated (or lowly correlated and negatively correlated) asset classes and strategies with a modest amount of leverage you can outperform equity only mandates, manage risk and reduce sequence of returns risk.
Does this all sound too good to be true?
It did to me for a while.
But over the past year, I've been obsessed with studying portfolios such as the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio, the Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio and the Risk Parity Portfolio along with modern interpretations such as the Adaptive Asset Allocation, the Dragon Portfolio and the Cockroach Portfolio to see how these portfolios perform under all economic regimes and whether or not they can handle modest leverage to boost returns.
I even created a battle of the leveraged portfolios series of blog posts, using 10 different model portfolios, dating back to returns from 1978 to test how, when and why portfolios fall apart under certain economic conditions.
Source: Pixabay
Rejection of a 100% Equity Portfolio

How about 100% stock only portfolios?
They do fantastic long-term but a portfolio featuring a 100% US Total Stock Market faced a sequence of returns risk of being underwater for an entire decade!
10 years of absolute pain!

And what about the Ray Dalio All Weather Portfolio, Harry Browne Permanent Portfolio and Risk Parity Portfolio?
The negative year roll period was only 1 year for each and every one of those portfolios.
In other words, with over 45 years worth of annual returns, these portfolios never experienced a negative 3, 5, 7 or 10 year roll period.
This was true whether we applied modest leverage at 2X or aggressive leverage at 3X to 4X.
Furthermore, these diversified portfolios featuring stocks, bonds and alternatives never had a negative year that even came close to being as bad as a 100% equity only portfolio.

What's most exciting about all of this information is that these portfolios are classic long-only asset classes of stocks, bonds, gold and cash.
They're not employing more sophisticated modern investing strategies of diversification that include long/short managed futures, trend-following, global systematic macro, long-short equity, market neutral, merger arbitrage, long volatility tail risk, cryptocurrencies and/or credit hedges that can make a portfolio even more efficient and overall diversified.
Now there is the potential to build a DIY Portfolio that provides returns equal to (or better) than equities, while managing risk (volatility) and negative annual return roll periods.
Source: Pixabay
Expanded Canvas Portfolios

An artist needs a bigger canvas to create a masterpiece.
A television that expands from HD to 4K provides a massive upgrade for viewers watching movies at home.
In order for my DIY portfolio to reach its full returns potential I need a canvas bigger than 100%.

The idea isn't to dial up the risk profile of my portfolio by leveraging stocks and bonds to the moon.
It is to create more space in my DIY portfolio for additional strategies, asset classes and alternative investments that will provide unique return streams.
Efficient core.
Capital efficient.
Portable Beta.
Return Stacking.
Expanded Canvas Portfolios.

Out of all the possible ways to describe what I'm attempting as a DIY investor I prefer the framework of "return stacking" coined by legendary investor Rodrigo Gordillo and "expanded canvas" minted by yours truly as preferred frameworks for describing the process.
Return stacking is taking the template of a successful historical portfolio, such as the 60/40, while using portable beta strategies such as leverage to create space to stack on additional uncorrelated return streams.
For instance, utilizing a fund such as $NTSX 90/60 requires only 67% portfolio space to achieve a 60/40 portfolio mandate while creating 33% room for additional strategies.
The idea is not to add more stocks/bonds but to consider alternatives.

Expanded canvas portfolios are an unconstrained approach to utilizing leverage.
There are no rules or template to follow.
Screw benchmarks, convention or orthodoxy.
This is a chance to create your own masterpiece of a portfolio from a bottoms-up approach with the cookie cutter template thrown in the trash bin.

In other words, how you decide to mix and match stocks, bonds and alternatives is entirely up to you.
You get to build a DIY Portfolio that matches your own uniquely quirky personality profile, life experiences and overall investment goals.
If this isn't exciting, I don't know what is!
I just asked my wife Audrey if she found it as exciting as I do.
I received an epic eye-roll.
Source: Pixabay
How Do I Invest My Money?

The way I currently invest my money, as a DIY investor, is a reflection of my best attempt to understand myself (self-awareness), my career and my investing goals.
I've lived an unconstrained and unconventional lifestyle which has involved working abroad, creating a business from scratch overseas and meeting my wife while living in a foreign country.
It should come as no surprise that I'm an unconstrained investor.

It makes me cringe to think I need to use a template as the backbone of my portfolio, such as the 60/40.
I want more diversification and strategies in my portfolio aside from a token alternative sleeve.
The small resource based town I grew up in (Gold River), with a pulp and paper mill that went bust in the 1990s, didn't diversify its local economy.
It went from a boom (one of the highest per capita income small-towns in Canada) to bust almost overnight.
My day job in travel media, was threatened by the pandemic lockdowns which culled our industry to a fraction of what it was just a few years ago.
Who survived?
Those who diversified and had multiple sources of income streams.
Who didn't?

The all eggs in one basket crowd which included those who exclusively only ran tours, did paid campaigns or affiliate/advertising models only.
Thus, given that I've chosen a volatile career, I'm seeking a portfolio that manages risk while providing excellent returns.
Source: Pixabay
My Investing Goals: A Targeted Approach

I have very specific investing goals.
They are as follows:

10 DIY Investing Goals

Build a DIY portfolio that can compete with (or outperform) equity only mandates
To build a maximum Sharpe Ratio and Sortino Ratio portfolio where my returns exceed the level of risk (standard deviation) that is prepared for every economic regime
To be focused more on the long-term "portfolio strategy" as opposed to the "portfolio results" with the patience to stick with a sensible plan even when certain sleeves are inevitably underperforming in the short-term
Utilize a modest amount of leverage to create space in my portfolio to add as many unique uncorrelated alternative return streams as possible
Create a portfolio that is globally diversified and avoids home country bias at all costs by investing in International Developed and Emerging Markets
 To pursue "short" strategies to capture factor, style and risk premia as much as "long" only strategies
Use a systematic quantitative approach to assembling a portfolio that involves both "passive" and "active" management
To not be so obsessed with "fees" that it excludes me from pursuing specific strategies that cost more to implement
To review my portfolio annually to potentially upgrade it (not tinker with for just the sake of it) if I have expanded my knowledge and/or certain products have been created that would be an upgrade over what I currently own
To never stop learning about investing and to remain a curious investor my entire life throughout this journey

If my portfolio looks the same in 3 years time I would consider that a total failure.
Not because I haven't stuck with a sensible plan but because I haven't learned anything new to improve its overall diversification and/or that I haven't paid close enough attention to new funds that better represent the goals and strategies I'm currently pursuing.

I also firmly want to maintain a "sponge investor" approach where I'm not a part of a team or tribe that succumbs to confirmation bias.

My Limitations For Pursuing the Picture Perfect Portfolio
The biggest limitation I face as a DIY investor at the moment is a lack of funds that represent the strategies I'm most interested in pursuing.
As an example, I absolutely love the 90/60 funds created by WisdomTree including $NTSX, $NTSI and $NTSE but I would in a heartbeat switch to a 90/60 fund that instead deployed a minimum volatility, momentum and/or value strategy as the backbone of the equity sleeve.
It's not current available and so I've got considerably less equity factor exposure than I would like to have.
Also, as a Canadian investor, I'm not able to purchase US Mutual funds (I can buy US ETFs) so I'm left peering through the storefront with a drool bucket firmly in hand at funds such as StandPoint Multi-Asset Fund $BLNDX which I'd love to add to my portfolio.
There are also strategies that are being floated around and discussed such as the "Return Stacked 60/40 Absolute Return Index" that I'm interested in integrating into my portfolio that I hope become available in the near future.

I could go on and on with a wishlist of investing in the Cockroach Portfolio and the Dragon Portfolio along with portfolios I've created such as the Picture Perfect Portfolio and Nomadic Samuel Portfolio.
It's exciting to think what the future holds in terms of potential funds and strategies.
Source: Pixabay
Diversified DIY Quantitative Portfolio
These asset allocation ideas and model portfolios presented herein are purely for entertainment purposes only. This is NOT investment advice. These models are hypothetical and are intended to provide general information about potential ways to organize a portfolio based on theoretical scenarios and assumptions. They do not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation/goals, risk tolerance and/or specific needs of any particular individual. 

I apologize for what might be considered by some to be a long-winded rant leading up to what is actually under the hood of my portfolio.
However, I felt it necessary to clearly outline my process, goals and limitations clearly before jumping into the nitty gritty.
Without further ado let's pop this baby open!

Nomadic Samuel Portfolio
   

UPAR
15.00%
ULTRA RISK PARITY ETF

HRAA.TO
15.00%
HORIZONS RESOLVE ADAPTIVE ASSET FUND

ONEC.TO
10.00%
ACCELERATE ONECHOICE ALTERNATIVE PORTFOLIO

PFAA.TO
10.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ABSOLUTE ALPHA ALTERNATIVE

NTSE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EMERGING EFFICIENT CORE FUND

GDE
7.50%
WISDOMTREE EFFICIENT GOLD PLUS EQUITY

NTSI
5.00%
WISDOMTREE INTERNATIONAL EFFICIENT CORE FUND

FIG
5.00%
SIMPLIFY MACRO STRATEGY ETF

KMLM
5.00%
KFA MOUNT LUCAS INDEX STRATEGY

DBMF
5.00%
IMGP DBI MANAGED FUTURES STRATEGY ETF

ATSX.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ENHANCED CANADIAN BENCHMARK ETF

PFAE.TO
5.00%
PICTON MAHONEY FORTIFIED ACTIVE EXTENSIONS

HDGE.TO
5.00%
ACCELERATE ABSOLUTE RETURN HEDGE FUND

What exactly is the Nomadic Samuel Portfolio as of 2022?
13 ETFS.
7 US listed.
6 Canadian listed.
50% exposure to US funds.
50% exposure to Canadian funds.
The ticker represents the specific ETF followed by the % the fund takes up in the overall portfolio.
Next we've got the official fund name and a short description of the overall fund strategy.
Lastly, the last column represents the rough gross exposure each fund has (many are long/short) but not the overall net exposure.

As a quick example, an equity fund that is long (140) and short (40) would have a gross (180) exposure but only net (100) exposure.
Finally, every single fund is either multi-asset class or multi-strategy.
There is no long only equity or long only bond funds.
For example, ONEC.TO is a fund of funds whereas PFAE.TO is equity only but is multi-strategy in the sense that is goes both long/short.
Source: Pixabay
ETF Funds Under The Hood

Let's examine each of the funds to understand what each fund offers from a strategic point of view.
The two biggest positions in my portfolio are risk-parity portfolio funds that offer multi-asset class and multi-strategy exposure to my portfolio in an expanded canvas format.
Source: Evoke (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
UPAR = 15%
$UPAR is a long-only risk parity 168% canvas portfolio that is bond-centric in nature with TIPS and Long-Term Treasury making up 98% of the fund (49% each) with global equities (US + Int-Dev + EM) taking up a 35% allocation and Gold/Commodities forming the alternative sleeve at 35%.
The fund owns each sleeve based on the historical overall risk-level (standard deviation of each sleeve).
Thus, the bonds take up larger portions of the portfolio given they have lower standard deviation whereas stocks and gold/commodities are more volatile and thus receive a smaller allocation.

I expect the fund to offer better than equity returns with a smoother ride.
I wrote blog post where I reviewed UPAR Ultra Risk Parity ETF in detail.
$UPAR could easily be a total portfolio solution.
A one and done ETF approach.
But I'm a fan of what has been mentioned by influential quants on FinTwit of diversifying my diversifiers.
So a long-only one and done asset allocation approach is not for me.
Source: HorizonsEtfs.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
HRAA.TO = 15%
$HRAA.TO is a risk parity adaptive asset allocation fund from some of my favourite quant folks in the industry over at ReSolve Asset Management.
Unlike $UPAR, $HRAA.TO takes advantage of a global systematic macro approach deploying various long-short managed futures strategies in a bespoke ensemble approach including (but not limited to) trend following.
It truly covers all of the bases including equity indexes, fixed income, tradeable real estate, currencies and commodities.
Getting back to the bespoke ensemble of managed futures strategies aside from just trend-following, Horizon Resolve Adaptive Asset Allocation ETF fund offers investors exposure to carry, value, momentum, seasonality, mean reversion and tail-risk.
This fund offers more uncorrelated asset classes and strategies than any other fund I've got under the hood.

If I could only invest in one fund for the rest of my life it might be something like this one.
With the funds ability to go long/short in an adaptive manner it offers an advantage strategically from a risk management perspective compared to long-only mandates.
Moreover, US investors can gain access to this strategy from ReSolve by utilizing $RDMIX.
It's a Morningstar Five Star Fund and has received Lipper Awards as well.
I anticipate equity-like returns with volatility management that puts stock only portfolios to shame.
Source: Accelerateshares.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
ONEC.TO = 10%
ONEC.TO is my favourite fund of funds ETF in my portfolio.
It just offers so much and allows me to break the shackles of some of the market-beta equity and bond exposure I have in other funds.

What is included?

iShares Global Real Estate Index ETF
10.0%

RPAR Risk Parity ETF
9.9%

SPDR® Gold Shares
10.5%

Accelerate Enhanced Canadian Benchmark Fund
10.2%

SPDR® Blackstone / GSO Senior Loan ETF
10.4%

Accelerate Arbitrage Fund
10.7%

Accelerate Absolute Return Hedge Fund
10.0%

Accelerate Carbon-Negative Bitcoin ETF
7.0%

BMO Global Infrastructure Index ETF
4.9%

FlexShares STOXX® Global Broad Infra Index Fund
5.0%

iShares MBS ETF
5.3%

BMO Canadian MBS Index ETF
5.3%

I'm gaining exposure to long-only equity diversifiers such as Global REIT and Global Infrastructure stocks while also enjoying long-short active extensions and factor-based hedging funds.
Gold and Bitcoin are part of the package as well allowing me to dip my toes into less than 1% cryptocurrency.
Mortgaged Backed Securities and Senior Loans provide further diversification to the portfolio as these are strategies not present in any other fund.
ONEC.TO is just one of three funds that I have in my portfolio created by Julian Klymochko of Accelerate.
If you're interested in learning more about the fund I covered it in a review of Accelerate OneChoice Alternative ETF.
I'm expecting equity like returns with this fund with lower volatility.
Source: PictonMahoney.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
PFAA.TO = 10%
Picton Mahoney Fortified Alpha Alternative ETF is one of the most interesting funds I have in my portfolio.
It takes three of the quantitative firms in house specialties (merger arbitrage, market neutral and special situation credit) as the primary strategy and layers secondary strategies of carry, value, momentum and tail-risk protection to round out the fund.
It utilizes aggressive leverage in a long/short capacity close to 300% gross exposure.
What I'm most excited about is how the sum of the parts have an incredible track record as individual funds where returns have easily outpaced risk.
These guys eat Sharpe Ratios for breakfast.

I've reviewed Picton Mahoney Fortified Absolute Alpha fund in detail for those interested in learning more.
I'm anticipating equity-like returns with this fund with only 1/3 to 1/2 the volatility.
Source: WisdomTree.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
NTSE = 7.5% 
NTSE is the first of three WisdomTree funds that feature efficient core exposure stretching the canvas of the portfolio beyond 100%.
I utilize these funds to create space in my portfolio for other alternative strategies.
NTSE in particular is a 90/60 Emerging Markets equities and Treasury combination that provides 1.5X 60/40 portfolio exposure.

I'm firmly a believer in global diversification when it comes to equity allocation, so I'm thrilled that this fund boosts my Emerging markets exposure more than others.
I'm expecting the fund to outperform equity only mandates while offering similar volatility levels but less sequence of return risk.  .
Source: WisdomTree.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
GDE = 7.5%
GDE is where I deviate from the NTS(?) series of funds from WisdomTree.
Instead of going for NTSX (90/60 US/Treasury exposure) I've opted for the 90/90 US/Gold combination to boost my allocation to gold as opposed to bonds.
I've got a lot of bond exposure in my portfolio - long and short.
Thus, I'm thrilled to add gold without really having to sacrifice equities in the process.

Wondering how a US stock + Gold tandem performs over a 50 year period?
You can check out my GDE ETF review here for that.
But the TL;DR version is that this duo pairs extremely well given they're uncorrelated asset classes.
Gold protected against US equity lost decades of the 1970s and 2000s whereas equities picked up the tab in the 80s, 90s and 2010s.
In fact, this combination delivered double digit CAGR returns for each decade.
I firmly expect this combination to firmly crush equity only exposure to the US stock market.
Source: WisdomTree.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
NTSI = 5%
I'll make this short and sweet.
NTSI is the equivalent of NTSE but with International Developed Markets as opposed to Emerging Markets.
Boosting the International-Developed exposure to equities in my portfolio is clearly a priority.
Source: Simplify.us
FIG = 5%
I'm really a big fan of what Simplify has been doing as an ETF provider over the past couple of years but for a while I couldn't quite find a specific fit where a product they've released integrated well into my portfolio.
Well, that entirely changed with FIG ETF.
Simplify Macro Strategy ETF is a masterpiece fund of funds total portfolio solution with a plethora of goodies under the hood.

CTA
SIMPLIFY MANAGED FUTURES
72280
26.24%

CDX
SIMPLIFY HIGH YIELD PL CREDIT HEDGE
86801
24.84%

SVOL
SIMPLIFY VOLATILITY PREMIUM
71812
20.34%

TYA
SIMPLIFY RISK PARITY TREASURY
27560
6.37%

IAU
ISHARES GOLD TRUST
11549
4.64%

-
FIDELITY INV MMTRSY 1 680
201161
2.47%

SPY US 12/16/22 C320
SPY Dec 2022 320 Call
110
11.16%

SPX US 12/16/22 C3200
S&P 500 Index Dec 2022 3200 Call
2
2.04%

SPY US 12/16/22 P350
SPY Dec 2022 350 Put
7
0.08%

It offers a diversified set of risk drivers including exposure to equity, credit, duration and volatility.
I almost forgot to mention gold.
It's a fund that deserves its own review on this site at some point.

The fund utilizes leverage in certain cases and put/call strategies to maximum returns and minimize downside risk.
Out of all the funds I own it has more exposure to long-volatility than any other.
In fact, I wouldn't be surprised if I boost the allocation to FIG closer to 10% at some point.
I'm anticipating this fund will provide equity like returns while managing risk like a defensive all-star.
Source: Kraneshares.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
KMLM = 5%
KMLM is a managed futures long/short fund I'm truly excited about.
With an incredible track-record dating back decades I'm thrilled about having it in my portfolio as an uncorrelated strategy to long-only stocks/bonds/commodities funds.
It's had a monster year in 2022 so far providing the type of crisis alpha investors seek when long only stocks/bonds are being skewered at the exact same time.
It's the ultimate hedge for long-only equity, bond and commodity risk.
What's interesting about this fund in particular is that it offers diversified exposure to commodities, currencies and bonds but forgoes equity index coverage.

There is a fantastic long-term track-record as well.
When it comes to managed futures strategies you can anticipate equity like returns long-term with 1/2 the risk.
Source: Imgpfunds.com/ (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
DBMF = 5%
DBMF is a managed futures fund with a bit of a twist.
It seeks hedge fund like performance without hedge fund like fees by tracking the performance of a diversified pool of managed futures managers.
It's a strategy uncorrelated with long equities/bonds and has delivered goliath positive returns this year while most traditional portfolios are tanking.
Given its all-weather capabilities and diversified long-short exposure to equity, bond, currency and commodity indexes it has significantly outperformed its benchmark SG CTA Index since inception.
I love this ETF.
I'm anticipating equity like performance meets stellar volatility management.
Source: Accelerateshares.com/ (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
ATSX.TO = 5%
ATSX.TO is the first of three long-short equity funds that I've got in my portfolio.
It takes 100% of the TSX index as a future contract and then overlays a 50 long / 50 short combination of factor based strategies minus junk.
The fund has no management fees.
Only a performance fee when it outperforms the TSX as its benchmark.
I love this approach where the fund manager takes the same hit if/when the fund relatively underperforms and shares in the success when it does well.
I fully anticipate this fund to crush its benchmark and deliver better than equity like returns.
This is an outperformance strategy clear and simple.
Source: PictonMahoney.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
PFAE.TO = 5%
Picton Mahoney Fortified Active Extensions fund is a 140-40 long/short equity fund with a track record that is beyond impressive.
The ETF version of this fund takes after its hedged mutual fund sibling.
With a track record dating back over a decade it has absolutely crushed its benchmark TSX by over 500 basis points while delivering a much higher Sharpe Ratio.
It uses a multi-factor quantitative approach to selecting attractive long stocks while shoring those with unattractive fundamentals.
I expect this fund to continue to significantly outperform equity only mandates as it has in the past.
Source: Accelerateshares.com (The investment performance results presented here are based on historical backtesting and are hypothetical. Past performance, whether actual or indicated by historical tests of strategies, is not indicative of future results. The results obtained through backtesting are only theoretical and are provided for informational purposes to illustrate investment strategies under certain conditions and scenarios.)
HDGE.TO = 5%
Last but not least is Accelerate Absolute Return Hedge Fund.
Unlike its sibling ATSX.TO this fund does not follow a benchmark and instead offers multi-factor exposure to long 110 attractive stocks minus 40 junk.
Given my desire for significant equity factor exposure in my portfolio this fund provides it in spades.
Check out the delicious Morningstar Style Box below.
Source: Morningstar.ca
I'm anticipating this fund will long-term outperform index based equity funds while offering hedging protection those long only mandates lack.

________________________________________________________________________________________________

### Pages

#### Contact
Feel free to get in touch if you have any questions, comments, want to say hello, or are interested in working with me.

I will do my best to reply promptly, unless I find myself in some remote part of the world without internet access...in which case you may have to wait a few days!

Send me a message to: bergner.audrey@gmail.com

### Posts

#### Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: How We Crossed the Roof of Japan!
Today you’re in for an adventure because we’re travelling the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route across the Japanese Alps!

Nicknamed the ‘Roof of Japan’, this journey can be done starting in Toyama or Nagano and it involves a 2,400-metre elevation change as you travel across the Japanese Alps using multiple modes of transportation. This includes trains, buses, trolleys, ropeways, cable cars and even your own two feet! 

This was an epic journey where we got to experience different landscapes and seasons all in one day, and we’re going to show you exactly how you too can plan the same trip!

If you'd rather do the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route as part of a tour where you don't have to worry about any of the details, you may want to consider this guided day tour. (This one only runs in springtime so you can see the famous snow walls!)

Alpine Route Know Before You Go

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route Opening Date

The Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route is a seasonal route, so it is not open year-round. The heavy snowfall makes parts of this route inaccessible during the winter months. 

The opening dates are from April 15th to November 30th. The route then closes from December 1st to April 14th.

Alpen Route One-Way

The Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route can be done one way or round trip. 

The starting/ending points are Toyama in the west and Ogizawa in the east. You can begin your journey in either direction. 

We chose to travel the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route one way starting in Toyama and ending in Ogizawa (before travelling onward to Nagano). 

The complete journey from Toyama to Nagano takes 8-9 hours depending on how long you stay at each stop and whether you go on some hikes along the way. 

Baggage Forwarding Service

Since we were travelling the Alpine Route one way, we had luggage with us that we didn't feel like hauling on and off 7 modes of transportation over the course of the day. 

Thankfully, the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route offers a baggage forwarding service. Once you have purchased your tickets and gone through the first set of gates, you will see an area to the side where you can pay to have your luggage sent to the very end of the route. 

The price is currently set at 3,000 yen per bag to have them sent from Dentetsu-Toyama Station to Shinano Omachi Station. We tagged them with our personal contact information and were given tickets to collect our luggage at the end of the day. 

This may sound like a lot of money to have your luggage transported, but it's honestly the best thing we could have done! It freed us up to be able to enjoy each stop without having a clunky suitcase to worry about. 

We saw a few people who either didn't know about the baggage forwarding service or opted not to use it, and it looked like a hassle. Keep in mind that some of the stops along the Alpine Route have rough terrain, there can be snow depending on the time of year, and there are some short trails and scenic viewpoints to enjoy. You don't want to be worrying about your luggage!

You can read more about how the baggage forwarding service works here. 

How to Buy Tickets for the Alpine Route

The biggest hassle of this trip was figuring out how to get tickets for the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route as foreigners in Japan! It's a process that does involve a bit of work, but it was definitely worth it. Here are three different options for you to consider:

Official Alpine Route Website - We were told multiple times to just buy tickets online, however, the problem is that the entire website is in Japanese (as of 2024) and even though we used Google Translate to translate it into English, we reached a point while filling out the form where it would only accept Katakana characters for our names. We tried asking for help booking tickets in 2 different tourist offices in Toyama, but that was a dead end. 

In-Person Day Tickets - The next option was to buy tickets in person which are only released for same-day travel. We were a bit worried about ticket availability since we were travelling during peak autumn foliage season, so we made sure to arrive at the station 30 minutes before the ticketing window opened and we got in line to purchase those same-day tickets. We also chose to do this trip on a weekday hoping it wouldn't be quite as busy and that we'd have a better chance of getting tickets. This worked out for us!

Join a Guided Tour - Another option is to join a guided day tour departing from Nagano which includes round-trip tickets for the the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route. This particular tour is only offered in the springtime, which is when you can see the famous snow corridor along the Alpine Route. 

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route

Now let's talk about the various modes of transportation you'll get to experience along the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route and what to expect from each leg of the journey. 

Toyama Chiho Railroad - 65 minutes

First up, we rode the Toyama Chiho Railroad, which is a 65-minute train journey. We departed from Dentetsu-Toyama Station (adjacent to Toyama Station) and travelled to ​​Tateyama Station. 

This first leg of the journey was all about getting out of the city. We watched the landscape change from urban to farm fields, and it wasn't long before we were travelling along the Joganji River surrounded by misty green mountains. 

It was a nice way to ease into our trip across the Japanese Alps!

Tateyama Cable Car - 7 minutes

Once we arrived at Tateyama Station, it was time to board our next mode of transport: the Tateyama Cable Car!

The cable car is a funicular that climbs 502 meters and covers a distance of 1.3 kilometres from Tateyama Station to Bijodaira. It's a 7-minute ride. 

We were lucky enough to see a couple of Japanese macaques also known as snow monkeys - they were just chilling atop the tunnel as we journeyed uphill. The forest they call home features 200-300-year-old beech trees, as well as cedar trees that are upwards of 1,000 years old.

One of the important landmarks on this cable car journey is the Zaimokuishi rocks, which were formed by lava from the Tateyama Volcano which created pillar-like structures. 

Tateyama Highland Bus - 50 minutes 

Next up, we boarded the Tateyama Highland Bus to continue our journey across the Roof of Japan!

The Tateyama Highland Bus covers a distance of 23 kilometres and you get to experience an almost 1500-meter altitude change! 

We went from green landscapes to fall foliage to a snowy landscape. It was quite the journey and yes, it was a very winding road. 

It's important to note that there are two different bus options here. You can either take the 50-minute express bus from Bijodaira to Murodo, or you can take the slower bus that stops halfway at Midagahara before continuing on to Murodo. 

Midagahara is an alpine wetland and Murodo is the highest point on the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route. Both offer some nice hiking options. 

Mikurigaike Pond is an alpine lake with clear waters that reflect the Japan Alps, so this is a popular spot to visit. 

You can also hike Mount Tateyama, which forms part of the Tateyama Mountain Range. This is one of Japan's Three Sacred Mountains along with Mount Fuji and Mount Haku. 

This is mainly of importance for those travellers who are planning to stay overnight at one of the many mountain hotels. Both Murodo and Midagahara offer an array of accommodations, but keep in mind that if you want to spend the night, you'll want to book well in advance as demand is extremely high!

Given how remote both of these locations are, the hotels are ryokan style and offer meals plus access to the onsen. 

Spending the night in the Northern Japanese Alps:Hotel Tateyama (Murodo) - located at 2,450 meters above sea level, this is the highest hotel in Japan! Breakfast and dinner are included. Guests have access to an onsen. Midagahara Hotel (Midagahara) - this hotel is situated at 1,930 metres above sea level. Breakfast and dinner are included. Guests have access to an onsen. 

Tateyama Tunnel Trolley Bus - 10 minutes

Then, we got on the Tateyama Tunnel Trolley Bus which runs from Murodo to Daikanbo. This is a 10-minute bus ride through a narrow tunnel that crosses Mount Tateyama. 

Because this is a green bus powered by electricity, it doesn’t produce any exhaust fumes.

We travelled a distance of 3.7 kilometres with an elevation change of 134 metres. 

Tateyama Ropeway - 7 minutes

If there's one mode of transportation I had most been looking forward to along the Alpine Route, it's the Tateyama Ropeway!

The Tateyama Ropeway covers a distance of 1,700 metres without the use of a single pylon along the way (those are the columns you typically see when you’re riding a cable car, chair lift or gondola). This is the only such cable car in Japan, which makes it pretty unique! 

This leg of the journey takes you from Daikanbo to Kurobedaira and it’s a 7-minute trip with an elevation change of 488 metres. 

This is the part of the journey where you get to enjoy those epic alpine views and because we were doing the journey in mid-October during peak autumn foliage season, we got to feast our eyes on an explosion of colours: amber, ochre, pumpkin, burgundy and maroon!

Everyone on the ropeway was ooh-ing and ahh-ing at nature's spectacle in this corner of the Japanese Alps. 

Once we arrived, we enjoyed the views from a few different vantage points and snapped lots of photos. You can even go up the Kurobedaira Panorama Terrace where you have a viewing platform that offers 360-degree views of the surrounding area. 

If there's one place that's worth lingering along the Toyama Kurobe Alpine Route, I would say this stop is it. 

Kurobe Cable Car - 5 minutes

Then, it was time to ride the Kurobe Cable Car from Kurobedaira to Kurobeko. What’s unique about this mode of transportation is that it’s the only underground cable car in Japan, meaning it is unaffected by the heavy snowfall in the region.

This was the shortest journey on the Alpine Route; we travelled 0.8 kilometres, had an elevation change of 373 metres, and the ride only took 5 minutes. 

Cross Kurobe Dam on foot - 15 minutes

We then reached the point in the journey where we had to cross the Kurobe Dam using our own two feet!

The Kurobe Dam is an 186-metre arched dam and the tallest dam in all of Japan. It was built between 1956 and 1963. 

Between late June and mid-October, the Kurobe Dam releases waters from its spillway, so this is a popular time of year to visit.

There's actually quite a bit to see and do at Kurobe Dam, so you may want to give yourself a bit of time here. For a panoramic view of the dam and its surroundings, you can climb the flights of stairs that lead up to an observation deck (it's 220 steps to the top!)​. 

Alternatively, you may want to join one of the sightseeing boat rides on Kurobe Lake. You can also make time to visit the Kurobe Dam Museum or grab a bite of food at one of the restaurants. 

We skipped the boat ride because we still had a bit of a journey ahead of us and we wanted to make it to Nagano City before dark, but there's plenty to do here. 

Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus - 16 minutes

This brings us to our next mode of transportation: riding the Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus from Kurobe Dam to Ogizawa Station.

Ogizawa Station marks the end of the official Alpine Route, however, you can then continue onwards to Shinano Omachi (if you used the luggage forwarding service) or Nagano Station to end your trip. 

The Kanden Tunnel Electric Bus was a 16-minute journey where we travelled 6.1 kilometres with an elevation change of 37 metres. 

Since we had a bit of time before we could catch the next local bus to Shinano to pick up our luggage, we decided to grab some food inside the station. They had some nice Tonkatsu and curries on the menu, so it's a good option if you're getting hungry at this point in the journey!

Bus to Nagano - 105 minutes

There are two ways to reach Nagano from Ogizawa Station. If you forwarded luggage in the morning, you'll have to do the journey in two steps. 

First, you'll need to catch a local bus to Shinano Omachi (40 minutes), where you'll be able to pick up your luggage at the office directly across the train station. Once you have your luggage, you'll need to catch another from Shinano Omachi to Nagano Station (65 minutes). This is what we had to do. 

If you are travelling light as a feather and have no luggage to retrieve, then you can catch an express bus from Ogizawa Station to Nagano Station. 

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route in Autumn

We travelled the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route in autumn and it was everything we hoped it would be! Not only was the journey loads of fun as we got to ride different modes of transportation, but we were also treated to ever-changing scenery, peak foliage on the ropeway ride, and we got to experience 3 seasons in one day!

We did this journey in mid-October (October 16 to be precise), so this is a taste of what you can expect this time of year. The forecast can slightly vary from year to year, so it might be worth looking at the foliage calendar to see when the colours are about to pop. 

Lastly, autumn is a wonderful time to travel around the Japanese Alps and I would recommend sticking around to visit a few more destinations in the area. 

We really enjoyed our visit to Takayama (so much so that we've been twice!), a day trip to Shirakawa-go to see the farmhouses is well worth it, and maybe you can even tack on a quiet nature escape to Norikura. 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RRnnFPdrr9o

Making the Most of the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: Essential Tips & FAQs

Top Tips for Planning Your Alpine Route Journey

Let’s dive into the nitty-gritty—these are the details that’ll make your day much smoother (and way more fun):

1. Start Early (and Pace Yourself)

The full Alpine Route takes 8–9 hours if you want to do it justice and linger at scenic spots. Start as early as possible—especially during peak autumn foliage or the snow wall season when crowds can swell. Early departures mean you’ll have more flexibility, less stress about tight connections, and better photo ops without throngs of travelers in the background.

2. Consider Overnighting on the Route

Most travelers do the Alpine Route as a single, full-on day trip. But if you’re a hiking enthusiast, photographer, or simply someone who loves the mountains, consider spending a night at Hotel Tateyama or Midagahara Hotel. Watching the sunrise or sunset from the roof of Japan, soaking in an onsen at altitude, and exploring alpine trails with hardly another soul in sight? Pure magic.

3. Pack Like a Pro

Weather on the Alpine Route changes fast—sometimes you’ll experience everything from warm sunshine to snow flurries in a single afternoon. Here’s what you’ll want to have handy:

Layers: T-shirt, fleece, windbreaker or light down jacket

Hat and gloves: Even in spring/autumn, it can get chilly, especially at Murodo

Sturdy shoes: For easy hikes and stairs around the dam and lookouts

Sunscreen and sunglasses: High altitude = strong UV rays!

Snacks and water: There are shops and eateries at major stops, but lines can be long at peak times

Camera/phone charger: You’ll take a million photos, trust me!

4. Cash is King

Many small restaurants and souvenir stalls along the route are cash only. Be sure to bring enough Japanese yen for lunch, snacks, souvenirs, and unexpected treats (hello, soft-serve ice cream and hot, steamy buns!).

How to Maximize Each Stop on the Alpine Route

Toyama Chiho Railway to Tateyama Station

Start your adventure watching the landscape shift from urban cityscape to lush, river-threaded countryside. Grab a window seat for the best views.

Murodo Plateau

The highlight for many! At 2,450 meters, Murodo is the highest station and home to the famous Snow Corridor (Yuki-no-Otani) in spring. In autumn, the plateau transforms into a sea of gold, crimson, and green. This is also a hiker’s paradise—short walks to volcanic hot springs, alpine ponds, and, if you’re ambitious, the summit of Mt. Tateyama.

Tateyama Ropeway & Daikanbo

This stretch is the panoramic highlight. The ropeway’s lack of supporting pylons means unobstructed views of the mountains, valley, and fall colors. Daikanbo’s viewing terrace is made for wide-angle shots—give yourself a little extra time here, even if it means waiting for the next cable car.

Kurobe Dam

Not only Japan’s tallest dam but also a testament to human ingenuity (and perseverance—over seven years and many challenges to build it). If you’re lucky, catch the dramatic water discharge from late June to October. It’s seriously powerful! Walk the length of the dam, take in the emerald waters, and climb up for a panoramic view. There’s even a small boat cruise on Kurobe Lake if you want a different vantage.

Rapid Fire Info

How long do I need for the route?

If you want to simply transit from start to finish, you could “rush” it in 6–7 hours, but you’d miss most of the magic. Plan at least 8–9 hours, or break it up with a stay on the route.

Can I store my luggage?

Yes! The baggage forwarding service is a lifesaver. If you’re traveling one-way (especially with suitcases), don’t hesitate—it’s worth every yen.

Is it suitable for children or seniors?

Absolutely, though some sections have lots of stairs (like the dam observation points) and there’s a fair bit of walking. For less-mobile travelers, take your time, use elevators where available, and skip longer hikes.

What if the weather is bad?

The route runs rain or shine, and even fog can create an atmospheric mood. But always check forecasts for closures, especially late in the season.

When’s the best time to visit?

Late April–June: Snow walls + spring mountain scenery

Mid-July–September: Lush green, wildflowers, and clear skies

Late September–mid-October: Stunning fall foliage (my personal favorite!)

Late October–November: Crisp air, fewer crowds, snow-dusted peaks

Smart-Pack Checklist (One-Day Crossing)

Must-BringWhy it mattersPro hack10 L day-packFree hands on ladders, easy to squeeze under seats.Choose one with a chest strap – you’ll be on standing-room cable cars.Layers (base + fleece + windbreaker)You’ll swing from 32 °C rice fields to sub-zero snow at 2,450 m.Pack a lightweight down vest; stuffs into its own pocket.Gore-Tex or sturdy trainersThe dam walkway can be puddly; Murodo trails may hold snow.Tie shoes onto your pack on warm lower segments.Sunglasses & SPF 50UV radiation increases ~10 % every 1,000 m. Snow glare is savage.Clip sunnies inside the ropeway cabin for quick grab when doors open.Cash (¥10,000 in small coins / notes)Snack stalls, lockers and coin-op hot drinks = cash only.Keep ¥100 coins handy for bathroom “washlet” fee at Ogizawa.Suica / IC cardVending machines, cafés at Murodo, and Shinano bus accept tap-pay.Top up the night before – some rural machines won’t let you charge.Power bank 10k mAhYou’ll shoot hundreds of photos + use translation and weather apps.Air-Drop photos at rest stops and keep phone on Airplane Mode when no signal.Thin gloves & beanie (Oct-Jun)Windchill on the ridge and at Daikanbō lookout can hit –10 °C.Touch-screen gloves = no frozen fingers while filming.Eco-towel / buffSummer humidity at lower stations or condensation in tunnels.Can double as makeshift picnic mat.

Photo-Op Hotlist (with GPS Pins)

StopExact spotBest timeAngle to shootNotesBijodaira Station bridge36.5749° N, 137.5164° E09:30 – sun behind youFrame cable-car exit + cedar canopy.Mist often hovers for ethereal vibe.Midagahara Wetlands36.5567, 137.524510:00-11:00Boardwalk S-curve into alpine marsh.30 min loop – watch wooden planks (slippery).Mikurigaike Pond36.5753, 137.611411:30Peak reflection of Tateyama trio on calm days.Polariser helps kill glare.Daikanbō Upper Terrace36.5694, 137.629512:00-13:00Panoramic sweep of Kurobe Lake + serrated ridgeline.Handheld pano > wide lens (less distortion).Tateyama Ropeway south windowN/A (moving)Midday – gondola centreShoot through glass; place lens hood flush to reduce reflection.Gimbal not allowed – use phone stabilisation.Kurobe Dam Staircase 636.5649, 137.664614:00 for rainbowWater discharge + rainbow forms on sunny days.220 steps up – budget 10 min.Autumn Foliage Tunnel (Oct)Between Keyakidaira & Sadaira corners on bus~15:30 golden hourMotion panning out bus window.Sit driver’s side for best leaf wall.

Seasonal Game-Plan Tweaks

SeasonWhy go thenRoute TipsClothing ExtrasSpring (mid-Apr – late May)Walk the Yuki no Ōtani snow corridor – walls over 15 m!Pre-reserve Murodo–Bijodaira bus section (sells out).Waterproof pants; reflectivity can sunburn legs.Early Summer (Jun)Alpine flowers blanket Midagahara; waterfalls peak with melt-water.Monitor lightning alerts; storms roll fast.Light rain shell & quick-dry socks.High Summer (Jul-Aug)Clear skies for Mt Tate summit hike + stargazing at 2,400 m.Book Hotel Tateyama months ahead; sunrise tour departs 04:00.Headlamp, ultralight down jacket for night sky.Autumn (late Sep – Oct)Fiery maples + golden birch at 1,400-2,000 m tier.Crowds heavier: catch 07:00 Toyama train for first cable car.Thermals & micro-spikes if early snow.Shoulder-Winter (Nov to 30 Nov)Frost-dusted peaks, quiet platforms.Some shops close; pack own lunch. Last ropeway 15:20.Insulated boots; pocket warmers.

Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route: 12-Question FAQ for Planning, Tickets, Seasons, Luggage & Route Tips

How long does the full Alpine Route take?

Plan for 8–9 hours if you want to enjoy viewpoints, short walks, and photo stops. You can sprint it in ~6–7 hours, but you’ll miss the best bits like Daikanbō’s terrace and the dam lookouts.

When is the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route open?

It’s a seasonal crossing. The route operates April 15–November 30 and closes December 1–April 14 due to heavy snow. Spring brings the famous snow corridor; late autumn can be frosty but quiet.

Which direction should I travel—Toyama ➜ Ogizawa or Ogizawa ➜ Toyama?

Both work well. We did Toyama to Ogizawa (continuing on to Nagano) and loved the build-up from rivers and forests to high alpine, then the grand finale at Kurobe Dam. If your onward trains are Nagano-bound, finishing in Ogizawa is convenient.

What are my ticket options?

You have three solid paths:

Buy online via the official site (Japanese interface; name fields may require Katakana).

Same-day tickets in person (arrive before windows open—especially during foliage and snow-wall seasons).

Join a guided day tour (great in spring for the snow walls; tickets bundled, no logistics stress).

Do I need to reserve each transport segment?

Not if you’re buying same-day through-tickets and traveling steadily, but peak dates can see queues. Build buffer time at Murodo and Daikanbō, and be willing to take the next ropeway or bus if you linger at viewpoints.

Is one-way travel easy—and what about my luggage?

Yes. One-way is common. Use the baggage forwarding service so you’re not juggling suitcases on seven different rides. We sent ours from Dentetsu-Toyama to Shinano-Ōmachi for ¥3,000 per bag and picked them up near the end—totally worth it.

What’s the best season to go?

Mid–late April to June: Snow corridor + spring scenery.

July–September: Clear skies, flowers, best shot at Tate summit hikes.

Late Sept–mid-Oct: Peak autumn foliage (our favorite!).

Late Oct–Nov: Quiet, crisp, snow-dusted ridgelines.Each season shines differently—match your gear and start times accordingly.

What should I pack for a one-day crossing?

Layers (base + fleece + wind/warmth layer), sturdy footwear, hat & thin gloves (spring/autumn), sunglasses & SPF, snacks & water, and a power bank. Weather shifts fast: you can experience three seasons in a single day.

Can I stay overnight on the route?

Absolutely. Hotel Tateyama (Murodo) and Midagahara Hotel turn the route into an alpine mini-break with dinner, breakfast, and onsen access. Nights bring starry skies and sunrise views—book far ahead in peak windows.

Is the route suitable for kids and seniors?

Yes, with smart pacing. Expect walking, stairs (e.g., dam viewpoints), and some line-ups. Use elevators where available, skip longer hikes, and give yourselves extra time at transfer points.

Will I find food and ATMs along the way?

Major stations have eateries (think curry, tonkatsu, café fare) and shops. Bring cash—some stalls and lockers are cash-only. We also carry snacks to avoid lines during peak periods.

Any photography “don’t-miss” spots?

Yes! Daikanbō terrace (panoramas), Tateyama Ropeway cabins (glass-to-lens shots), Mikurigaike Pond (alpine reflections), and Kurobe Dam (watch for rainbows during water discharge, late June–mid-October). Give yourself time to linger.

#### Best Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Hakodate, Hokkaido
Here are the best things to do in Hakodate, because no trip to Hokkaido would be complete without a visit to this historic port city!

If you're planning to travel across Hokkaido, Japan's northernmost island, you'll probably kick off your trip in Hakodate. This port city is the first stop for anyone coming up by train, so it only makes sense to get off here before continuing on to Sapporo. At least, that's how we planned our itinerary!

Hakodate proved to have everything we expected from a port city: a beautiful harbour with historic buildings, a morning market serving fresh seafood, and a fishery museum where we got to experience what it would be like to be fishermen at high sea!

During our trip to Hakodate, we also rode the ropeway up Mount Hakodate for panoramic views, we visited the star-shaped Fort Goryokaku, and sampled some of the local cuisine - namely, Hakodate salt ramen!

This is our list of the best things to do in Hakodate, Japan to help you plan the most epic trip!

How to get to Hakodate

Getting from Tokyo to Hakodate 

Take the Tohoku Shinkansen from Tokyo Station to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto. This is a 3-hour and 23-minute journey. At Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto Station Train, transfer onto the Hakodate Line to Hakodate Station.

Getting from Sapporo to Hakodate

At Sapporo Station, catch the Hokuto Limited Express to Hakodate. It's a 3-hour and 46-minute train ride to Hakodate Station. 

Hakodate Travel Guide

Hakodate Morning Market

If you find yourself in Hakodate, one experience that you absolutely cannot miss is a visit to the legendary Hakodate Morning Market. For over six decades, this market has stood as a testament to the city’s rich fishing heritage and it's a vibrant hub that draws tourists and locals alike. 

Spread across four city blocks, just a two minute walk from JR Hakodate Train Station, the market comes alive daily from the wee hours of the morning. Its official hours are from 5:00 am (shifting to 6:00 am from January to April ) until noon, but don't be surprised to find it bustling well into the afternoon.

With approximately 250 stalls, the market offers an array of the freshest seafood and plenty of restaurants where you can enjoy it too. 

For the quintessential Hakodate experience, I recommend getting up early (you'll probably be jetlagged anyway!) and skipping the hotel breakfast in favour of a meal at the market. 

The thing to order here is kaisendon, a bowl of rice topped with fresh seafood, which depending on the season can include shrimp, crab, tuna, salmon roe, or sea urchin.

We got the kaisendon set which also came with a bowl of soba noodles, a side salad and fried chicken. It was quite a bit of food and a great way to start the day, if you ask me!

Museum Ship Mashu Maru

Nestled in the Port of Hakodate, you'll find the Mashu Maru anchored as a reminder of a bygone era in Japanese transportation.

This former railway ferry was used to bridge the waters between Hokkaido (the northernmost island) and Honshu (the main island) until 1988.

However, once the Seikan Tunnel was built (we're talking about a 53-kilometre undersea tunnel that was a feat of engineering!), there was no longer a need for the ferry to cross the Tsugaru Strait.

The Mashu Maru’s final voyage was on March 13, 1988. It is currently docked at the historic No. 2 quay, the very location from which it once embarked on its regular journeys.

The Mashu Maru, which began its service in 1965, has been meticulously preserved and transformed into a museum. The ship, which has been anchored permanently, offers an authentic glimpse into the life and operations of a mid-20th-century ferry, and from the moment you step aboard, you're transported back in time.

As you wander through the museum, you'll discover display panels and models detailing the inner workings of the Seikan ferries, and you can also explore the ship's bridge and radio communications room. Plus, we quite enjoyed the views of the harbour from the ship!

The Mashu Maru is open from 8:30 am to 6:00 pm (closing at 5:00 pm in winter) and has an admission of ¥500.

Whether you're a maritime enthusiast or simply curious about the evolution of travel in Japan, the Mashu Maru is a cool spot to visit in the Hakodate Port area.

Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse

The Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses are a historical landmark along Hakodate's waterfront. Originally established during the Meiji era as a trading post, they played a pivotal role in Hakodate's development as a key port city.

Today, these distinctive red-brick buildings have been repurposed into a bustling commercial complex and entertainment centre. 

Inside the warehouses, you'll find an array of shops, boutiques, and galleries, each offering a unique selection of goods ranging from traditional Japanese crafts to modern fashion. 

For food enthusiasts, the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse is also dotted with cafes and restaurants serving everything from local Hokkaido delicacies to international cuisine. 

To be honest, my favourite part about visiting the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouse was the architecture. These are really cool buildings with exposed beams, wooden ceilings and industrial lighting. It made the history of this place feel a bit more palpable. 

Hachiman Zaka Slope

Hachiman Zaka Slope is a famous street in Hakodate thanks to its steep slope and beautiful views.

Named after the Hakodate Hachiman Shrine, which was originally located nearby, this stone-paved street is lined with rows of trees and boasts views of Hakodate Bay area and the Mashu Maru in the distance.

Among the 19 sloping streets in Hakodate, descending from Mount Hakodate to Hakodate Bay, this one is considered the most beautiful. It's especially nice at sunset when the city and bay are washed in a soft glow.

On either side of the road, you'll find stairs or you can take the steep sidewalk. At the top, everyone likes to take photos in the middle of the road, so watch out for traffic. 

We found it to be quite the climb (maybe because it was a really hot and humid day!), but we needed to get to the top anyway in order to visit our next attraction!

Motomachi District & Churches

Next, we explored the Motomachi District, which is situated at the foot of Mount Hakodate. This is a neighbourhood where east meets west.

When Hakodate became one of the first ports in Japan to welcome foreign trade, this brought ideas and influence from the west, which can be seen in the city’s architecture.

Some of the main attractions in the Motomachi District are the churches.

Hakodate Russian Orthodox Church: This church was initially founded in 1858 by the Russian Consulate. However, the current structure was built in 1916 after a major fire. The Hakodate Orthodox Church is known for its distinctive green onion domes and it has a nice garden you can walk around. 

Motomachi Roman Catholic Church: Built in 1859 as a temporary cathedral, this church had to be rebuilt again in 1923 after two major fires. Inside, you'll find an altar that was gifted by Pope Benedict XV.

Hakodate St. John Church: This is an Anglican Church that was founded by an English priest who visited Hakodate in 1874. It has an interesting cross-shaped roof. 

Mt. Hakodate Ropeway

The Mount Hakodate Ropeway is an aerial lift that transports passengers up to Mount Hakodate, an inactive volcanic mountain that stands 334 meters high.

The gondola can carry up to 125 people at a time and it’s a 3-minute journey to the top.

You can walk up or you can drive up, but riding the ropeway is the best way to enjoy the panoramic views of the city, the port and the beaches.      

We bought the round-trip tickets for ¥1,800, however, you could pay ¥1,200 one way to go up and then walk back down. 

Also, we visited in the daytime, but this is a popular spot for the best Hakodate night view.

Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward

The Old Public Hall of Hakodate is an important historic building in the city. This is where members of the Imperial family stayed when they visited Hakodate.

The construction you see today was completed in 1910 to replace the previous town hall which burned down in the Great Fire of 1907.

What’s interesting about Hakodate is that it was one of the first ports to open to foreign trade, and this means it received some foreign influence which can be seen in the Western-style architecture. The building is painted a soft blue colour with bright yellow accents. 

The hall underwent extensive conservation and repair work in 2021, and it's still used today to host concerts and other events in the Grand Hall. 

Visitors can also dress up in costume like lords and ladies and have a professional photoshoot done, however, we opted to just explore the building.

Motomachi Park

Motomachi Park is located at the foot of Mt. Hakodate and it's a site of significant historical importance in Hakodate.

Before the Muromachi Era (1336–1573), the area where the park now stands was the location of a building named 'Hakodate,' from which the city derives its name - 'hako' meaning 'box' and 'date' meaning 'building'.

Over the centuries, it has been the site of the Hakodate Hachiman Shrine, the Hakodate magistrate's office during the late Edo period, and the former Hokkaido government office Hakodate branch. The park has continually served as a centre of politics in Hokkaido.

Today, it is surrounded by many famous and historical buildings, including the former Public Hall of Hakodate Ward and the former British Consulate.

It also offers beautiful views of Hakodate Bay and serves as a peaceful resting spot for visitors with plenty of large trees and shade. 

Walking through this park is a nice route back down to the waterfront and there are lots of cool sculptures to enjoy along the way.

Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples

Since we had quite a bit of rain during our trip to Hakodate, we visited several museums, one of them being the Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples.

This museum focuses on the Ainu, Uilta and Aleut who inhabited the areas of Hokkaido in Northern Japan, the coastal regions around the Okhotsk Sea in Russia, and the Aleutian Islands.

The northern peoples lived in extremely cold and harsh climates, and the museum showcases the clothes they would have needed to withstand the environment. You can also see the tools they would have used for fishing and hunting. Plus, there are descriptions of the diets they would have eaten, featuring lots of fish, bear and kelp!

The Museum of Northern Peoples is housed in the former Bank of Japan building that dates from 1926. 

We really enjoyed our visit and would recommend visiting not just as a rainy day activity, but to learn more about the Northern Peoples.

Hakodate Tram

One fun way to move around Hakodate is by riding the vintage trams or streetcars!

There are only two tram lines in the city, and they follow the same route except for the last three stops. Tram 2 runs from Yunokawa to Yachigashira, while Tram 5 runs from Yunokawa to Hakodate-Dokkumae.

These two lines are great for sightseeing as they go past lots of Hakodate's main tourist attractions. This is a handy guide to Hakodate's tram system.

Hakodateshi Hokuyo Museum

Because it was a rainy day we were looking for indoor activities, so we decided to visit another museum. Next up, we visited the Hakodateshi Hokuyo Museum, also known as the Hakodate City Northern Pacific Fishery's Document Museum.

The museum focuses on the connection between Hakodate and the sea emphasizing the North Sea Fishery that once prospered in the area. 

This is a quirky little museum where you can see a taxidermied polar bear, a walrus, and loads of sea lions. 

However, I would say the highlight was trying their fishing boat simulator. Basically, you walk into a room with a screen that plays waves of the high seas in wintertime, and then the room begins to rock and sway to mimic the stormy waves. 

The whole experience only lasts 3 minutes, but it's enough to make you dizzy and appreciate the work fishermen do because it's sure not easy!

The admission fee to the museum is very reasonable, at just ¥100, making it an accessible attraction for visitors.

Goryokaku Park and Fort

Goryokaku Park is a historical park renowned for its unique star-shaped fort, which played a significant role in Japan's history. 

This style of fortification was inspired by Western military architecture and was designed to provide better defensive capabilities than traditional castle structures. 

Goryokaku Fort was originally built as part of Japan's efforts to modernize its defences. Fort Goryokaku was completed in 1866 and it was used as the main headquarters of the short-lived Republic of Ezo - the island of Ezo is what’s today known as the island of Hokkaido.

The Republic of Ezo was the first government to attempt to institute democracy in Japan, though voting was only extended to the samurai caste, and it managed to exist for five months before it was annexed by the newly established Empire of Japan. 

Goryokaku Park is a popular spot to see cherry blossoms with the flowers blooming early to mid-May. So if you're visiting in the springtime and looking to enjoy some hanami (flower viewing) this is a great place to do so!

Visiting the Park and the fort is free, though there is an admission fee for the Hakodate Magistrate Office.

Goryokaku Tower

Goryokaku Tower stands 107 meters tall and is an iconic observation tower located within Goryokaku Park in Hakodate.

The tower offers visitors 360-degree views of Goryokaku Park, the star-shaped Goryokaku Fort, and the surrounding area, making it one of the city's top tourist attractions.

If you're already at the park, it's worth going up for a bird's eye view. 

What to eat in Hakodate

Hakodate Salt Ramen

If you only have time to try one local dish in Hakodate, make it the Hakodate Salt Ramen also known as Hakodate Shio Ramen.

This is the culinary specialty of Hakodate and is recognized as one of Hokkaido's must-try ramens right up there with Sapporo Miso Ramen and Asahikawa Soy Sauce Ramen.

Hakodate Salt Ramen first made its appearance in 1884, making it potentially one of the earliest types of Japanese ramen. The dish features very thin, straight noodles and common toppings include thick slices of roasted pork, scallions and bamboo strips, just to name a few.

The broth is known for its clarity and lightness, especially when compared to the milky broths of other ramen styles. It is less fatty than its cousins from Sapporo and Asahikawa and stays true to its Chinese roots with a clear broth that lacks seafood or seaweed flavouring in the stock. 

We ate at a place called Yondaime Ramen, where we ordered from a ticket vending machine. Sam got the Yondaime Salt Ramen with broiled pork, which is the restaurant's #1 best seller. Meanwhile, I got the plain salt ramen flavour which is made with a clear chicken broth.

It was delightfully warm, flavourful and filling. The perfect meal for a rainy day!

Fresh Seafood

Hakodate is renowned for its fresh and delicious seafood. The city's location on the coast of the Sea of Japan makes it a prime destination for seafood lovers and there are several types of seafood to try.

Crab (Kani): Hokkaido, including Hakodate, is known for its high-quality crab. Snow crab (Zuwai-gani) and king crab (Taraba-gani) are the most famous varieties. You can enjoy crab dishes such as kani sashimi, kani nabe (hot pot), or grilled crab legs. Many restaurants in Hakodate offer crab-centric menus, especially during the winter season when crab is in season.

Sea Urchin (Uni): Hokkaido is a major producer of sea urchin, and you can savour the creamy and sweet uni at seafood markets and sushi restaurants in Hakodate. Uni is often served as sushi, sashimi, or in rice bowls (uni don).

Scallop (Hotate): Hokkaido is also known for its large and succulent scallops. You can enjoy them grilled, pan-seared, or as sashimi. Grilled scallops with a miso or butter sauce are a popular choice.

Salmon Roe (Ikura): Ikura, or salmon roe, is a common topping for sushi and rice bowls in Hakodate. The bright orange, slightly salty roe bursts with flavour and is a must-try for seafood enthusiasts.

Seafood Donburi: Donburi, or rice bowls topped with seafood, are a delicious and filling option. You can find seafood donburi dishes that feature a mix of fresh seafood, often served with a flavorful sauce or marinade.

Shrimp (Ebi): Shrimp dishes, including tempura, are commonly found in Hakodate's seafood restaurants. The sweet and tender local shrimp make for a delightful meal.

Herring (Nishin): Hakodate is known for its marinated herring dishes, often served as nishin sushi or pickled nishin hoba miso, which is herring simmered in a rich miso sauce and served on a magnolia leaf.

Sushi and Sashimi: Hakodate has a thriving sushi scene, and you can't visit the city without trying fresh sushi and sashimi made from a variety of seafood. Look for local sushi restaurants or seafood markets for the best options.

Lucky Pierrot

Lucky Pierrot is a renowned hamburger chain exclusive to Hakodate. Established in 1987, this restaurant chain has expanded to 17 different locations within Hakodate.

Each restaurant has its own distinct theme (a good reason to try and visit them all!) including Birds of the World, History of Hamburgers, Audrey Hepburn, artworks by Botticelli, Elvis Presley and more. 

The theme of the restaurant we visited was 'Angels' with cherubs hanging from the ceiling and lots of angel sculptures and angel paintings. 

Lucky Pierrot has won a whole bunch of awards including the first prize for Best Local Burger store in Japan!

That being said, their menu is quite eclectic with hamburgers, Japanese curry and spaghetti all featuring as main dishes, as well as soft serve ice cream and sesame balls on the dessert menu. 

Hokkaido Ice Cream

The island of Hokkaido is responsible for producing over 50% of Japan's milk. Known for its cool climate and wide pastures, the region has become very famous for its dairy products, especially its ice cream.

For a little something sweet, we went to Milkissimo, an ice cream shop located inside Goryokaku Tower.

Their gelato flavours are made using ingredients unique to Hokkaido and also fruits that are in season. That means their ice cream flavours change throughout the year. 

We opted for 3 flavours: pumpkin, purple sweet potato, and haskap berry also known as the honeyberry. They also had flavours like chestnut, matcha and plain milk.

You'll be able to try lots of strange soft-serve ice cream as you travel across Japan, however, if you can try gelato even better!

Where to stay in Hakodate

Near Hakodate Station

Staying close to Hakodate Station is ideal for easy access to public transportation. This area is perfect for travellers who plan to explore beyond the city. You'll find a range of hotels here, from luxury to budget-friendly, ensuring comfort and convenience.

Motomachi

For those interested in the historical aspect of Hakodate, the Motomachi area is a great choice. This district is home to a blend of Western and Japanese-style buildings and offers easy access to major tourist attractions like the Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward and the Motomachi Roman Catholic Church. The area has charming guesthouses and boutique hotels, providing a more intimate and culturally rich experience.

Goryokaku

If you're interested in Hakodate's history, consider staying near the Goryokaku Fort. This area is a bit quieter and offers a mix of modern hotels and traditional ryokans. It's a great place to experience both the historical and modern sides of Hakodate.

Yunokawa Onsen

For a relaxing stay, choose the Yunokawa Onsen area, known for its hot spring resorts. This area is a bit further from the city centre but offers a tranquil and luxurious experience with its range of onsen hotels. It's perfect for those looking to unwind and enjoy the therapeutic benefits of the hot springs.

Day Trips from Hakodate: Exploring Beyond the City

Onuma Quasi-National Park: About 30 minutes by train, this scenic park offers boating, cycling, and walking trails around picturesque lakes dotted with small volcanic islands. Fall colours here are gorgeous!

Matsumae Castle: Visit Japan’s northernmost castle, famous for its cherry blossoms in spring and dramatic ocean views year-round.

Esan Onsen: For a super local hot spring experience, travel east along the coast for wild volcanic scenery, rustic baths, and seafood restaurants where you’ll eat what’s caught that morning.

Getting Around Hakodate: Trams, Buses, and Walkable Wonders

One of the things I loved most about Hakodate is how easy it is to get around. The city’s major sights are surprisingly compact, so you can explore a ton by foot, tram, or bike—no rental car needed!

Trams:If you want to travel like a local (and give your feet a break), hop on one of Hakodate’s two retro tram lines. The trams are colour-coded and easy to navigate, with English signage at major stops. Buy a one-day pass (Ichinichi Josha-ken) at the station or on board for unlimited rides—great value if you’re sightseeing across town. The tram even has stops for Yunokawa Onsen, Goryokaku, and the waterfront.

Buses:For destinations the trams don’t reach (like Mount Hakodate’s base or the ferry terminal), local buses are frequent and reliable. Google Maps works surprisingly well for Hakodate’s transit, so just plug in your destination and follow the directions.

By Foot or Bicycle:The Motomachi district, waterfront, and Morning Market are all within walking distance from Hakodate Station. If you’re feeling energetic (or just want to feel the sea breeze), several guesthouses and hotels offer bike rentals—a fun way to explore quieter residential neighbourhoods and discover local bakeries or coffee shops off the tourist path.

Best Time to Visit Hakodate: Weather, Events & Seasonal Highlights

Hakodate is a true four-season city, and each season brings its own special charm. Here’s what to expect:

Spring (April–May): Hanami Season

Cherry blossoms in Goryokaku Park are legendary—imagine a star-shaped moat ringed with thousands of trees in full pink bloom! Go early in the morning to enjoy peaceful hanami before the picnic crowds arrive.

The weather can be chilly and sometimes rainy, so pack a warm jacket and an umbrella.

Summer (June–August): Festive Vibes

Summers are mild compared to much of Japan, with cool ocean breezes and average highs around 20°C (68°F).

Enjoy outdoor festivals like the Hakodate Port Festival in early August, which features a massive fireworks display, traditional Yosakoi dancing, and local food stalls galore.

Early summer is the best time to try squid (ika) fresh from the bay—look for squid fishing boats all lit up at night!

Autumn (September–November): Fall Colours

The mountains around Hakodate explode in fiery reds and golds; head to Hakodate Park or trek partway up Mount Hakodate for colourful views.

Seafood is at its best in autumn, especially crabs and salmon.

Winter (December–March): Snowy Scenery & Onsen

Hakodate gets plenty of snow, turning the city into a winter wonderland. The Motomachi slopes look extra magical dusted in white.

Warm up at Yunokawa Onsen, where you can even spot Japanese snow monkeys bathing in the hot springs!

Don’t miss the Hakodate Christmas Fantasy Festival, when the red brick warehouses are lit with festive lights and a floating Christmas tree glows in the bay.

Is Hakodate worth visiting?

Hakodate is well worth a visit for anyone planning a visit to the island of Hokkaido. If you're arriving in Hokkaido by train, your first stop on the island will be Hakodate so this is a very logical first destination before you continue on to Sapporo and beyond. 

We chose to make Hakodate our first stop so there wouldn't be any backtracking. Plus we had already spent several hours on the train up from Tokyo, so we didn't feel like adding another 3-and-a-half-hour journey to reach Sapporo. 

Aside from logistics, this city is a cool introduction to the island where you can learn about Hakodate's development from a mere trading post to a key port city.

Hakodate has enough attractions to keep you busy sightseeing for 2-3 full days. 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fanoVhLnIA4

Where to go after Hakodate

Noboribetsu Onsen

Noboribetsu Onsen is a hot spring resort town situated on the southwestern side of Hokkaido. This area is known for its volcanic landscapes punctuated by steam vents, bubbling lagoons and powerful geysers.

Some of the highlights include hiking through Hell Valley locally known as Jigokudani, dipping your feet in the Oyunuma River Natural Footbath, visiting Enamdo Temple which houses an animatronic puppet, and enjoying spicy ramen noodles! You can get some ideas of more things to do in Noboribetsu Onsen here.

Of course, the accommodations of choice when staying in an onsen town is a ryokan and this town has plenty to choose from.

Sapporo

Sapporo is the largest city on the northern Japanese island of Hokkaido and serves as the capital city of Hokkaido Prefecture.

Some experiences not to miss when visiting Sapporo include going up Sapporo TV Tower for panoramic city views, visiting Ramen Alley for a bowl of miso ramen with corn and butter, and enjoying a beer tasting at the Sapporo Beer Museum. 

This city is best known as a winter destination thanks to Sapporo Snow Festival, however, it's a destination that can be enjoyed year-round. 

Otaru

Otaru is a picturesque city located on the western coast of Hokkaido facing the Sea of Japan. It's located approximately 25 kilometres northwest of Sapporo, so it's a very logical place to visit either on a day trip or for a few days. 

This charming port city is known for its well-preserved historical buildings, scenic canals, and a strong connection to its maritime heritage. 

Some of the highlights include a boat ride through the Canal District which is lined with historic stone warehouses, exploring the city's glassmaking industry through its shops and glassmaking studios, and visiting a restaurant that is still illuminated by gas lamps and feels like a step back in time. 

Hakodate, Hokkaido: 12-Question FAQ for Sights, Food, Transport, Seasons & Day Trips

How many days do I need in Hakodate?

We suggest 2–3 full days. That gives you time for the Morning Market, Motomachi and its churches, the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses, Mt. Hakodate Ropeway, Goryokaku Park & Tower, and a museum (or two), plus an easy day trip.

What’s the easiest way to get to Hakodate?

From Tokyo, ride the Tōhoku Shinkansen to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto (~3h23m), then transfer to the Hakodate Line to Hakodate Station. From Sapporo, take the Hokuto Limited Express (~3h46m) straight to Hakodate Station.

When should I visit the Hakodate Morning Market—and what do I eat?

Go early. It’s ~5:00–12:00 (6:00 start Jan–Apr) near JR Hakodate. Order kaisendon (seafood rice bowl)—think shrimp, crab, tuna, salmon roe, or sea urchin—plus slurp a side of noodles if you’re hungry.

Is the Mashu Maru ship museum worth it?

Yes—especially for history/transport fans. The preserved 1965 railway ferry tells the story of Hokkaidō–Honshū links before the Seikan Tunnel. Expect bridge and radio room access, harbor views, and ¥500 admission.

What’s special about the Kanemori Red Brick Warehouses?

They’re Meiji-era waterfront warehouses reborn as shops, cafés, and galleries—great for souvenirs and photos. The exposed beams, timber ceilings, and industrial lighting ooze character.

Where can I get the classic Hakodate city view?

Take the Mt. Hakodate Ropeway (3 minutes to the top; ¥1,800 round-trip / ¥1,200 one-way). Day views show the bay and beaches; night views sparkle. Walking or driving up is possible, but the ropeway is the most scenic.

What are Motomachi’s highlights?

A compact blend of Western-influenced architecture: the Hakodate Russian Orthodox Church (green onion domes), Motomachi Roman Catholic Church, and St. John’s Anglican—plus Hachiman-Zaka Slope for postcard bay views.

What’s inside the Old Public Hall of Hakodate Ward?

A pastel-blue, 1910 Western-style former civic hall for Imperial visits—restored with antique furnishings and a grand ballroom. It still hosts events; visitors can tour rooms (and even dress up for photos).

Which museums are good on a rainy day?

Hakodate City Museum of Northern Peoples (Ainu, Uilta, Aleut culture, clothing, tools; set in a 1926 Bank of Japan building).

Hakodateshi Hokuyō (Northern Pacific Fishery) Museum (quirky, with a boat storm simulator; ¥100 admission).

How do I get around—do I need a car?

No car needed. The two tram lines cover most sights (grab a one-day pass for unlimited rides). Buses fill the gaps. Motomachi, the waterfront, and the Morning Market are walkable from Hakodate Station, and many hotels rent bicycles.

What should I eat in Hakodate?

Start with Hakodate Shio (Salt) Ramen—clear, light broth with thin straight noodles. Add fresh seafood (crab, scallops, uni, ikura) and pop into Lucky Pierrot for Hakodate’s cult burgers. Finish with Hokkaidō gelato/ice cream—seasonal flavors like haskap, pumpkin, or purple sweet potato.

What are the best day trips from Hakodate?

Ōnuma Quasi-National Park (lakes, cycling, boating; ~30 minutes by train).

Matsumae Castle (Japan’s northernmost castle; stellar cherry blossoms).

Esan Onsen (wild coast, local baths, ultra-fresh seafood).

#### Things to Do, See & Eat in Noboribetsu Onsen in Hokkaido, Japan
Today we're sharing the best things to do in Noboribetsu Onsen in Hokkaido, Japan. From hiking the volcanic landscapes of Hell Valley, to soaking in the natural footbaths, and eating fiery hot ramen noodles, here are some ideas for your trip to Hokkaido's favourite onsen town!

If you're going to be travelling around Hokkaido, the northernmost of Japan's main four islands, you need to make time to visit Noboribetsu Onsen. This is a hot spring resort town situated on the southwestern side of Hokkaido and it is home to some rather unique and quirky attractions, all somehow related to hell. 

Because of the underground thermal activity in Noboribetsu Onsen, the landscape is punctuated by plumes of steam that rise from the ground, lagoons with bubbling waters, and powerful geysers that shoot water into the air. 

Not only that, but across town, you'll find statues of creatures from the underworld guarding the hot springs, a temple where you can witness Enma Daio, the ruler of hell come to life, plus there are multiple events throughout the year that bring this Japanese folklore to life.

This is a destination unlike any other so if you're looking for unusual places to visit in Hokkaido, add this one to your list. 

In this travel guide, we're sharing the best things to do in Noboribetsu Onsen, how to get here, where to stay, what to eat, and the festivals and events you won't want to miss!

Getting to Noboribetsu Onsen

From Hakodate - at Hakodate Station, catch the Hokuto Limited Express heading towards Sapporo. It's a 2 hour and 33 minutes train ride to Noboribetsu Station. Once you arrive in Noboribetsu, you'll catch the local bus (schedule posted right outside the station) to Dōnan Bus Noboribetsu-Onsen Bus Terminal. From there, you can walk to your hotel, take a taxi, or take the little shuttle bus that drives people around town.

From Sapporo - at Sapporo Station, catch the Hokuto Limited Express heading towards Hakodate. It's a 1 hour and 17 minutes train journey to Noboribetsu Station. Once you arrive at the station, you do the same as above and catch the local bus to Dōnan Bus Noboribetsu-Onsen Bus Terminal and then make your way to your hotel.

From Tokyo - at Tokyo Station, catch the Tohoku Shinkansen to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto Station. Once you arrive at Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto Station, you'll transfer onto the Hokuto Limited Express heading towards Sapporo. You'll get off at Noboribetsu and take the local bus to Dōnan Bus Noboribetsu-Onsen Bus Terminal and then proceed to your hotel.

What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Noboribetsu Onsen

Hot Spring Demons

One of the first things you'll notice when arriving in Noboribetsu Onsen is the colourful demons scattered through town. They are known as 'oni' and are considered the guardians of the hot springs because there was a time when locals believed that only demons could survive in the volcanic Hell Valley. 

If you want to see the demons, you'll find them outside the JR Noboribetsu Station, along the Noboribetsu-Higashi Interchange on the road that leads up to town, at the base of Yuzawa Shrine just across from the entrance to Hell Valley, and on the road that leads up to the Oyunuma Natural Footbath. These demons are red and blue in colour and carry spikey clubs. 

There are some less intimidating oni around town that devotees can seek out for success in business, their studies and even romance.

Oyunuma Natural Footbath

One of the best things to do in Noboribetsu Onsen is to visit the Oyunuma River Natural Footbath situated on the north end of town.

This is where a hot spring river flows from Lake Oyunuma. The water has a greyish, milky blue colour and once you dip your feet in the river, you can also dig your toes into the black volcanic sand.  

The water is hot, but we quite enjoyed the temperature and found it pleasant. We went early in the morning and there was hardly anyone there, so we lingered a good half hour before we continued on our walk.

The area is nicely set up for visitors. You have bamboo seating all along the river's edge plus there are little padded mats that you can use free of charge so that you're comfortable and don't get your clothes wet. 

It's a beautiful green walk to the footbath along a well-marked trail, and from there you can continue on your hike to Oyunuma Pond and the rest of Hell Valley. 

TIP: Bring a small towel from your ryokan or hotel so that you can dry your feet. You can wear sandals to reach the footbath, but if you plan to spend the day hiking in Hell Valley, you'll want comfortable shoes. 

Hell Valley or Jigokudani

The main attraction in Noboribetsu Onsen is Jigokudani also known as Hell Valley, which is part of Shikotsu Toya National Park.

Jigokudani is home to a volcanic area with dramatic landscapes that showcase the raw power of nature complete with bubbling lagoons and plumes of steam that rise from the Earth. This is also the main source of Noboribetsu's hot spring waters.

Visitors can explore Hell Valley via a network of hiking trails and boardwalks that weave their way through this landscape. 

Some of the highlights along the way include the above-mentioned Oyunuma River Natural Footbath, Oyunuma Pond, Okunoyu Pond, and the various trails and boardwalks that lead to observation decks across Hell Valley.  

We were also pleasantly surprised to spot several Japanese Sika deer while hiking through Hell Valley, mainly around Oyunuma Pond and Okunoyu Pond.

The landscape really is otherworldly, or perhaps underworldly, with its bleached rocks, steam vents, and bubbling pools, not to mention the sulfuric odour that wafts through the air.  

But seriously, take the time to walk the trails and explore the area because the landscape is constantly changing and there is so much diversity even in the colour of the soil. At every turn, it felt like we had stumbled upon another painting. 

TIP: Bring water, wear sunscreen and a sun hat, and opt for hiking boots or comfortable walking shoes. The distances are relatively short (you can do the whole loop in half a day), but there are stairs and you'll be hiking up and down so you want to be safe and comfortable.

Geyser in Sengen Park

You'll probably hear this attraction before you see it. So if you're walking through Noboribetsu Onsen Town and you hear a rumbling sound emanating from Sengen Park, follow your ears because it will lead you to a geyser. 

Roughly every three hours, this geyser turns into a bit of a cauldron unleashing water and a billowing cloud of steam. The water comes from the hot springs that flow in Hell Valley and the eruption lasts approximately 50 minutes.

Sengen Park was built around this geyser to commemorate Noboribetsu's 150 years as a hot spring bathing town. The park is also surrounded by the "Nine Clubs of the Hot Spring Ogres” which were added to the park on the occasion of its 50th Hell Festival.

Yuzawa Shrine

Another attraction to visit in Noboribetsu Onsen is the Yuzawa Shrine. This shrine is located in the centre of town just across from Sengen Park and can be accessed via a steep stone staircase directly behind a Tori gate. 

You'll notice two creatures of the underworld guarding the shrine just to the right of the staircase: a standing red ogre and a seated blue ogre, both holding clubs in their hands. 

This shrine is a nice little escape from the onsen town below. Very few people seem to climb up - at least that's what we noticed during our visit! - so you may just get the whole place to yourself. We think it's worth a visit if you're already in the area. 

Speaking of Yuzawa, there's a town by the same name in Niigata Prefecture that we also visited, so if your travels are taking you that way, check out this blog post highlighting some of the best things to do in Yuzawa. 

Enmado Temple

Noboribetsu is full of unusual attractions and Enmado Temple is one of them. This temple pays homage to Enma Daio or King Enma, the ruler of hell and overlord of ogres in Japanese folklore. 

In the temple, you'll find an enshrined animatronic puppet that 'wakes up' at select times throughout the day and transforms into a creature of the underworld. A drumming sound rings through the temple and then King Enma's face begins to turn red, his brows become upturned giving him an evil appearance, and his smile develops fangs. 

During Noboribetsu's Hell Festival in August, the statue of King Enma is paraded through the streets. But if you miss the festival, you can watch the free performance right at Enmado Temple.

The schedule is posted in front of Enmado Temple. At the time of our visit, it was 10:00, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00, 17:00 and 21:00. 

Eat spicy ramen

For the best ramen of your life, you need to eat at 閻魔軒. No, the restaurant doesn't have an English name, but you can paste this name into Google Maps and you'll be able to find it.

It's located about one block south of Enmado. The building is painted a deep teal colour on the exterior and you'll notice some red flags at the entrance. Their menu is posted right next to the door, so you'll be able to confirm you're at the right place. 

The menu here is super limited, but that's a sign of a good restaurant because the few ramen dishes they serve are outstanding. I would go as far as saying this was the best ramen we had throughout our 6-week trip across Japan!

Their signature dish is the Enma Ramen or 'Hell Ramen', a bowl of spicy ramen noodles which can also be served as Dan Dan Ramen if you prefer to have it without the broth. The dish was fiery, fragrant and delicious to the very last bite. 

If you prefer to stay away from the spicy ramen, you can order the Chashao ramen which is topped with slices of slow-braised pork.

You can also order a classic bowl of ramen and choose between their three different broths: shoyo (soy sauce), shiyo (clear chicken broth) and miso. 

TIP: This is a small restaurant with an open kitchen that only seats a small number of guests, so if you don't want to wait, it's a good idea to arrive before the lunch crowd. 

Noboribetsu Date Jidai Village

One attraction in Noboribetsu that we just didn't have enough time for but is worth mentioning is Noboribetsu Date Jidai Village.

This is an Edo-period theme park where you can walk around and relive what that time would have been like. You can stroll the ancient roads lined with merchant shops, see majestic samurai residences, and even go inside ninja houses.

And not only that, but you can also meet people playing characters from that time: ninjas, samurais, and oirans (courtesans). 

There are also performances that take place at set times throughout the day. You can watch a ninja show at the Kasumi Ninja House, an oiran show at the Japanese Culture Theater, a Nyanmage Comedy at the O-Edo Theater, or an outdoor action show at the Open-air Theater Ninja Fort.

You can get a 1-Day Pass for Noboribetsu Date Jidaimura here. 

Attending Noboribetsu Jigoku Matsuri

The Noboribetsu Jigoku Matsuri or Hell Festival takes place the last week of August. 

This local festival is based on the legend that on the last Saturday and Sunday of August, the gateway to hell opens and King Enma, ruler of the underworld, emerges to visit Noboribetsu Onsen accompanied by his demons.

During this festival, King Enma is taken out of the temple and paraded through town, there is a taiko drumming performance, and dancers dressed as demons take on the town's streets. 

We missed this festival by just a couple of weeks, though to be fair, we didn't even know this celebration existed until we arrived in Noboribetsu!

Watching the Demon Fireworks

If you miss the Hell Festival, you still have some opportunities to experience the festivities in Noboribetsu Onsen. 

Held during the summer months from early June to late July, you can attend the Jigokudani Demon Fireworks or Onihanabi. This is a firework display that takes place a few nights per week (it's not daily!) starting at 8:30 pm and lasting for about half an hour. Check the fireworks schedule here.

During the show, locals dress up as yukijin who are considered the demon guardians of the hot springs. They dance around shooting hand-held fireworks that blast up to 8 meters into the air. 

There are six demons that launch 24 fireworks per day while three other demons beat the drums.

TIP: It's recommended you arrive about half an hour early if you want to watch the fireworks on the steps overlooking Hell Valley. However, it's also important to note that no open-toed shoes are allowed in this section.

Where to stay in Noboribetsu Onsen

Noboribetsu is an onsen town and as such there are lots of ryokans to choose from. A ryokan is a traditional Japanese guesthouse that offers a unique cultural experience.

Some unique aspects of a ryokan include having an onsen (communal baths and hot springs), traditional rooms with tatami floors where you sleep on a futon on the ground, and a kaiseki dinner which is an elaborate multi-course dining experience. 

We stayed at Park Hotel Miyabitei which was a modern take on a ryokan. This is quite a large hotel where you can choose between traditional Japanese rooms and Western-style rooms. 

What sold us was their massive onsen which features multiple indoor and outdoor sulfur pools that treat different ailments. We went to the onsen in the early mornings and in the evenings during dinner time and we found that we often had the entire onsen to ourselves or only had to share with a handful of people. There's a tip if you're feeling shy about your first onsen experience in Japan: go during off-peak hours!

The one aspect of our hotel that was different from other ryokan stays is that at this hotel meals were buffet style. There was no kaiseki dinner, but rather an all-you-can-eat buffet in the dining hall. The buffet had snow crab (which everyone flocked to!), plus fresh tuna and salmon sashimi. Plus, lots of hot dishes featuring a mix of Western and Japanese foods. 

If this sounds like your kind of place, you can read reviews of Park Hotel Miyabitei here.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oKjtEmzAHBI

Noboribetsu Onsen Travel Tips, Advice & Seasonal Highlights

📍 More Things to Do Around Noboribetsu Onsen

Lake Kuttara: Mirror of the Sky 🌊

Nature lovers shouldn’t miss Lake Kuttara, a perfectly round volcanic caldera lake just a short drive from town. Known for its crystal-clear water (among the cleanest in Japan!), it’s a peaceful spot for a picnic, a walk, or a bit of lakeside reflection. In autumn, the maple trees here explode into vibrant shades of red and gold.

Noboribetsu Marine Park Nixe 🦀

Just outside the main town, you’ll find the Noboribetsu Marine Park Nixe, which stands out for its fairytale castle-inspired architecture. Inside, discover sprawling aquariums, penguin parades, sea lion shows, and touch pools that make it a fun family day out—especially if the weather turns rainy.

Local Shopping & Omiyage 🎁

Before you leave, browse the small shopping streets near the onsen hotels. Look for demon-themed sweets, locally made bath salts, and hand-painted ceramics. Noboribetsu is also famous for its “Onsen Manju”—steamed buns filled with sweet red bean paste, best enjoyed warm with a cup of green tea.

🛁 How to Onsen Like a Local: Wellness & Etiquette Tips

First time in a Japanese onsen? Don’t fret! Here’s how to do it right:

Onsen Etiquette, Simplified

Shower before you soak: Always wash up thoroughly at the shower stations before entering the communal baths. This is non-negotiable!

No swimsuits allowed: Onsen bathing is always done nude. Don’t be shy—everyone’s in the same boat.

Towels: Bring a small towel to the bath to modestly cover yourself as you walk. Don’t put the towel in the bathwater—leave it on the edge or on your head.

No photography or loud conversations: The onsen is a place for relaxation, not selfies.

Extra Wellness Tips

Hydrate! All that steaming and soaking can leave you dehydrated, so drink plenty of water (or try the local Hokkaido milk, which is extra creamy and delicious after a bath).

Try different pools: Many onsen have a variety of baths—sulfur, iron, herbal, and more. Sampling each is part of the experience.

Visit at night: Bathing under the stars in an outdoor rotenburo is pure magic.

🥾 Outdoor Activities & Seasonal Experiences

One of the reasons Noboribetsu Onsen stands out among Japan’s hot spring towns is that it’s surrounded by untamed nature—forests, lakes, and mountain trails—making it an all-season destination.

Spring: Wildflowers & Walking Trails

Come April and May, the forests around Hell Valley are carpeted with wildflowers. This is a great time for easy hikes, spotting new buds, and crisp mountain air.

Summer: Festivals & Fireworks

If you visit in June or July, try to time your stay with the Demon Fireworks. Summer is also lush and green—perfect for lakeside walks, ropeway rides, and picking up fresh produce at local markets.

Autumn: Fall Foliage

From late September to early November, the entire valley bursts into shades of crimson, orange, and gold. This is arguably the best time for photography and hiking—plus, the cool weather makes soaking in the hot springs extra satisfying.

Winter: Snowy Onsens & Steaming Valleys

There’s something surreal about sinking into a piping-hot bath as snowflakes swirl around you. In winter, the landscape takes on an ethereal quality—frosted trees, icy rivers, and plumes of steam rising through a white wonderland. Many ryokans offer indoor-outdoor baths where you can enjoy this magical scene.

Seasonal Packing List

Winter (Dec-Mar)Shoulder (Apr–Jun, Oct–Nov)Summer (Jul–Sep)Micro-spike shoe covers – icy boardwalksCompact rain shellSunscreen + bug sprayHeat-tech layers & beanieLight gloves for chilly eveningsQuick-dry hiking teeExtra face mask (onsen steam + cold air = runny nose)Foldable umbrellaCooling neck towel

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fanoVhLnIA4

🚙 Day Trip Ideas From Noboribetsu Onsen

Want to extend your trip? Noboribetsu’s central location in Hokkaido makes it a perfect base for further exploration.

Muroran: A coastal city known for its dramatic sea cliffs and observation decks.

Lake Toya: A beautiful volcanic lake with an active volcano and hot springs of its own.

Shiraoi: Visit the Upopoy National Ainu Museum to learn about Hokkaido’s indigenous Ainu culture.

Hakodate: If you’re up for a longer journey, this charming port city is famous for its night views, fresh seafood, and historic architecture.

❓ Noboribetsu Onsen Rapid Fire Info

Q: Is Noboribetsu Onsen suitable for families?A: Absolutely! The area’s playful demon lore, easy hiking, and kid-friendly attractions (Bear Park, Marine Park Nixe) make it a great spot for travelers of all ages.

Q: How long should I stay?A: Two to three nights is ideal—one to unwind after your journey and one or two to hike and explore. If you love slow travel or want to do day trips, add an extra night or two.

Q: Can you visit Noboribetsu Onsen year-round?A: Yes! Each season brings its own magic. Winters are snowy and mystical, while autumn and spring are colorful and crisp.

Q: What if I have tattoos?A: Some onsen in Japan still have restrictions on tattoos, but attitudes are changing. It’s best to check with your hotel—some offer private baths, or you can use waterproof cover stickers.DAY 1 – “Welcome to Hell” (Friday PM)

Sample Noboribetsu Onsen Itinerary 

DAY 1 – “Welcome to Hell” (Friday PM)

TimeActivityWhy It Works14:00Check-in + Yukata FittingSlip straight into the cotton robe; it’s socially acceptable to roam town dressed like this and it saves changing later.15:00Hell Valley Warm-Up Walk (main boardwalk loop)Golden-hour light makes the fumaroles extra photogenic, and mid-afternoon tour groups have already cleared out.16:30Foot-bath break at Sengen ParkA speedy toe-soak right beside the geyser means you can catch a mini-eruption without detouring to Oyunuma (that’s for tomorrow).17:00First Onsen SessionAim for just before dinner when most guests are still sightseeing—steam, not crowds.18:30Kaiseki or buffet feastCarb-load; tomorrow is your big hiking day.20:00Enma-Daio Night Show at Enmado Temple (21:00 slot)The animatronic face-morph is creepier under darkness, and the temple lanterns make great low-light photos.21:30Nightcap at the Demon Bar (Oni no Sumika)Try the charcoal-black “Jigoku Highball” infused with local shōchū.23:00Wind-down soak in the rotenburo (outdoor bath)Nothing tops floating under a Hokkaido star-studded sky.

DAY 2 – Hike, Bubble, Slurp

TimeActivityPro-Tips07:30Early breakfastGrab two onigiri to go in case you linger on the trail.08:00Hike to Oyunuma Pond → Oyunuma River Foot-bath → Okunoyu Pond loop (4 km, 2 hrs)Hit Oyunuma foot-bath first while water is hottest and uncrowded; return via the high ridge for crater views.10:30Coffee & Cream Puff at Takimoto Sweet-TeiTheir choux pastry is filled with Hokkaido milk custard—energy refill!11:00Noboribetsu Bear Park (optional)Ropeway ride + Ainu cultural corner; skip if animal parks aren’t your thing and browse the oni souvenir shops instead.12:30Fiery Ramen Lunch at 閻魔軒Order the 3-chilli “Akuma Level” if you dare; ask for a side of milk to cool down.13:30Stroll Oni-dōri shopping streetPick up maple-onion miso paste or demon-claw chopsticks as gifts.14:00Local Sake & Beer Tasting at Noboribetsu BreweryTheir citrusy Weizen pairs beautifully with an onsen-boiled egg sold right outside.15:00Second Onsen Hop – choose a different ryokanMany hotels sell ¥700–1,000 day-pass tickets. We liked Dai-ichi Takaragawa for sulphur-rich milky pools.17:30Rest / nap / foot-massage at your innThe hotel kiosks sell heated oni-shaped eye-masks—ridiculous but heavenly.19:00Yukijin Taiko Drum Performance (check seasonal schedule)Free 20-min show in the main square; drums thunder as demons dance—go early for front row.19:45Izakaya crawl (try Onideka for venison skewers)Locals love chatting with travellers—expect shōchū top-ups on the house.22:30Final plunge in very hot indoor bathJapanese wisdom: one last soak improves circulation and prevents next-day muscle aches.

DAY 3 – Departure + Lake Shikotsu Detour (Sunday)

If you’re heading back toward Sapporo, stash luggage in the station locker and spend a half-day at Date Jidaimura samurai village or hop the hourly bus to Lake Shikotsu for a lazy boat ride before catching the Hokuto Express. 

Noboribetsu Onsen FAQ: Hell Valley Trails, Footbaths, Oni Festivals, Onsens & Spicy Ramen (12 Essential Q&As)

What is Noboribetsu Onsen best known for?

Noboribetsu Onsen is Hokkaido’s most famous hot-spring town, where Jigokudani (Hell Valley) vents steam and sulfur, boardwalks cross bubbling pools, and demon lore (oni) colors everything from statues to summer shows. It’s the perfect combo of short scenic hikes + restorative baths + quirky folklore.

How do I get to Noboribetsu Onsen from Sapporo, Hakodate, or Tokyo?

Ride the Hokuto Limited Express to Noboribetsu Station, then transfer to the local bus for Noboribetsu-Onsen Bus Terminal (walking distance to most hotels). From Tokyo, take the Tohoku Shinkansen to Shin-Hakodate-Hokuto, then the Hokuto to Noboribetsu and the same local bus. Trains are frequent; buses post schedules outside the station.

How many nights should I stay?

Two nights is a sweet spot: day 1 for a sunset stroll and first soak, day 2 for the Oyunuma–Okunoyu loops, footbaths, and town sights, and time for one more onsen hop. Add a third night if you want Date Jidaimura, Bear Park/ropeway, or day trips.

What are the must-do sights and walks?

Start with Jigokudani’s boardwalks and viewpoints, loop Oyunuma Pond → Oyunuma River Natural Footbath → Okunoyu, peek into Sengen Park for the geyser, and pop up to Yuzawa Shrine for a quiet breather. Add Enmado Temple for the animatronic Enma Daio performance.

How does the Oyunuma River Natural Footbath work?

A short forest trail leads to hot, milky-blue water flowing from Lake Oyunuma. Sit on bamboo benches or free mats, dip your feet, and wiggle toes in warm volcanic sand. Bring a small towel and go early for solitude; it’s an easy add-on to the Hell Valley loop.

When does the Sengen Park geyser erupt?

It rumbles and erupts roughly every few hours, sending steam and hot water skyward for a prolonged show. Exact timing varies—listen for the growl and follow your ears, or check the signboard in the park.

What’s the Enmado Temple show and when can I see it?

Inside Enmado, the enshrined King Enma automaton “wakes,” his face flushing crimson as drums roll—a deliciously camp slice of local folklore. Showtimes are posted outside and typically run multiple times daily, often including an evening slot.

Are there festivals or fireworks tied to the “hell” theme?

Yes! Noboribetsu Jigoku Matsuri (Hell Festival) lights up the last weekend of August with Enma’s parade and demon dances. In early summer (June–July), select nights feature Onihanabi (Demon Fireworks) in Hell Valley—arrive early for the steps and note the no open-toed shoes rule in certain viewing zones.

What (and where) should I eat?

For a fiery signature, hunt down 閻魔軒 (Enmaken) for Enma/Hell Ramen (brothy or dan dan-style) and silky chashao bowls. Around town, snack on onsen manju, café cream puffs with Hokkaido milk custard, and wind down with izakaya plates near the main streets.

How do I onsen like a local (and what about tattoos)?

Wash thoroughly before entering, no swimsuits, keep your small towel out of the water, and keep voices low. Tattoos policies vary by property: some accept, some ask for cover stickers, many offer private/family baths—check ahead or choose inns with private options.

What’s the best season to visit?

Year-round works. Spring blooms and cool hikes; summer brings lush forest, festivals, and fireworks; autumn paints the valley in flaming reds; winter delivers snowy boardwalks and dreamy rotenburo soaks under frosted trees.

What should I pack?

Sturdy walking shoes, light rain shell, sunhat/sunscreen, small towel, and water for the trails. In winter add warm layers and traction aids for icy paths. Onsens provide big towels and amenities; many hotels sell or loan yukata and sandals.

#### Visiting Yuzawa, an Onsen Town in Niigata Prefecture
These are the best things to do in Yuzawa in Japan's Niigata Prefecture. From riding the Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway for alpine views, to visiting the Kiyotsu Gorge, and sampling different types of sake, there is plenty to do in this onsen mountain town!

Yuzawa is a ski resort and onsen town situated in Minamiuonuma District in the Japanese Alps in Niigata Prefecture. Its ease of accessibility from Tokyo makes it a popular winter destination and it has become known as snow country among skiers and snowboarders since you can be on the slopes in less than two hours after leaving the city. 

However, Yuzawa also has plenty to offer visitors the rest of the year. You can ride the ropeway year-round for alpine views, visit the Kiyotsu Gorge and the impressive art installation it houses, hike to waterfalls, soak your feet in the free foot baths, sample different types of sake, and even try a sake-infused onsen!

In this guide, we'll be sharing the best things to do in Yuzawa, how to get there, where to stay and more. 

Yuzawa Travel Guide: What To Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Yuzawa, Japan

Getting to Yuzawa

Getting to Yuzawa couldn't be any easier with frequent train connections that make it an ideal weekend destination or even an accessible day trip. 

From Tokyo - catch the Joetsu Shinkansen at Tokyo Station travelling towards Niigata. It's a 1 hour and 14-minute journey and you'll get off at Echigo Yuzawa Station. 

From Niigata - catch the Joetsu Shinkansen at Niigata Station heading towards Tokyo. It's a 44-minute journey and you'll get off at Echigo Yuzawa Station. 

Alternatively, you can catch the Shin-Etsu Line and then transfer onto the Joetsu Line in Nagaoka. This is a considerably longer journey riding the local commuter trains and takes 2 hours and 38 minutes, however, it does cost less than taking the Shinkansen. 

Where to stay in Yuzawa

Yuzawa offers different types of accommodation to suit every budget. You can find ryokans, hotels and guesthouses featuring both Western-style rooms and traditional Japanese-style rooms. 

Four Seasons Yuzawa Quattro - luxurious maisonette with a living room, bedroom, private open-air hot spring bath, and a balcony only 5 minutes from the train station.

Shosenkaku Kagetsu - hotel providing Japanese-style accommodation plus various hot spring baths only 3 minutes from the train station.

Yuzawa Grand Hotel - Western and Japanese-style rooms plus indoor and outdoor baths only 2 minutes from the train station.

Things to do in Yuzawa

Ride the Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway

One of the best things to do in Yuzawa if you want to enjoy the surrounding mountain view is to ride the Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway.

The ropeway connects Echigo-Yuzawa Station with the Alpine Botanical Garden (Alp no Sato) in just seven minutes. At 1,300 meters long this is considered one of the world’s biggest ropeways and it has the capacity to carry 166 passengers.

The Alpine Botanical Garden sits at an altitude of 1,000 meters and it features various gardens with 200+ rare species of alpine plants that you would normally only find in the highlands at around 2,500 meters above sea level.

Once you reach the top, you can enjoy the mountain views from various panoramic points, stop at the various photo ops like the Ayamegaike chair, or take part in some adventure activities like mountain go-karting, ziplining, or riding the summer bobsled. 

Take a day trip to Kiyotsu Gorge

If you only have time for one day trip from Yuzawa, choose the Kiyotsu Gorge! This is one of the 'Three Great Gorges of Japan' and it's a place with spectacular scenery. 

The gorge was carved by the Kiyotsu River over millions of years and it features vertical cliffs, caves, and streams - essentially a nature lover's paradise.

The main tourist attraction here is the Kiyotsu Gorge Tunnel, an art installation created by MAD Architects. This installation includes:

Periscope - a building with a cafe on the ground floor and a foot bath on the second floor. The cone-shaped ceiling has a mirror that reflects the landscapes of the gorge.

Expression of Color - a portion of the tunnel with coloured lights and chanting music.

FLOW - a viewing platform that has been painted in black and white swirls.

Invisible Bubble - a mirrored dome toilet located inside FLOW.

Drops - a viewing platform with a tunnel of mirrors that resemble droplets of water.

Light Cave - a viewing platform where the ground is covered in a thin layer of water that reflects the landscapes and creates an interplay between shadows and light.

Getting to the Kiyotsu Gorge is fairly straightforward. You have to catch the bus bound for Morinomiyahara Station departing from Platform 4 in front of Echigo Yuzawa Station (east exit).

The one thing to keep in mind is that the bus only runs a handful of times a day, so you'll want to plan your visit accordingly. If you go into the visitor information centre inside the train station, they'll give you a map and explain the journey in detail. It does involve a 20-minute walk once you get off the bus, but it's doable.

Hike to Fudo Falls

If you're looking for a super easy hike with big rewards, I would recommend hiking to Fudo Falls. 

The waterfall is named after Fudo Myoo, a deity in Japanese Buddhism known as the Immovable Wisdom King. This deity is often associated with waterfalls, so as a result, Fudo Falls is not just a natural attraction but also holds cultural and religious importance.

To get to the falls, you need to follow the road that leads up towards the mountain between the Yuzawa Museum of History and Folklore and the Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway. You'll be able to see, or at least hear, the stream that runs down the mountain. 

You'll first reach the falls that run over the dam, and if you continue just a bit further uphill, you'll reach the actual falls in their natural element. 

The setting is serene and beautiful any time of year. The falls are also relatively accessible to visitors since it's a short trail, that's paved most of the way, and you only go on a dirt path at the very end once you've almost reached the falls. 

Enjoy the free foot baths

If you spend enough time travelling around Japan, you'll notice that most onsen towns have free foot baths that visitors can enjoy. This is no different in Yuzawa!

There are three different foot baths located directly behind Echigo Yuzawa Train Station that you can reach by taking the west exit, and there's another foot bath a bit further in Yuzawa Central Park. 

All you have to do is remove your shoes and socks and you can dip your weary feet in the warm waters. It's a nice way to unwind after a busy day of sightseeing. 

These foot baths are covered with large umbrellas and offer some protection from the sun, rain and snow. 

We even found a random hand bath, which we were not expecting but definitely made use of!

Sample sake at the Echigo Sake Museum Ponshukan

One of the coolest things to do in Yuzawa is to visit the Echigo Sake Museum Ponshukan located inside Echigo Yuzawa Train Station. 

The museum has a wall of sake vending machines where you can try all sorts of sake.

For ¥500 you get 5 tokens that you can use to sample different types of sake. Most sakes require just 1 token, though more premium ones may require 2 or 3 tokens. 

If you're not quite sure where to begin, look at the board for some of the staff's top sake recommendations. 

Niigata Prefecture is famous for its sake and it's considered the best area for growing rice and fermenting sake due to its deep snow and its abundance of water.

Eat your way through Echigo Yuzawa Train Station

It's not every day I list a train station as a tourist attraction, but Echigo Yuzawa Station certainly deserves that distinction. There are so many cool things to see and do in the station that you could seriously spend a whole day there. 

For starters, the train station has an onsen on site and what makes it unique is that sake is added to the water. 

Aside from this, you can buy all sorts of street food and the thing to try is sasa-dango, a traditional sweet from Niigata Prefecture.

Sasa-dango is made primarily from mochi (glutinous rice) and red bean paste. The rice is pounded into a sticky dough and then wrapped around a filling of sweetened red bean paste. The distinctive feature of sasa-dango is the inclusion of mugwort (yomogi), which gives the dough a natural green colour and a unique, herbaceous flavour.

The sasa-dango is wrapped in bamboo leaves (sasa leaves). These leaves not only impart a subtle fragrance and flavour to the dango but they also help keep it moist and fresh. Plus, the wrapping makes it portable and easy to carry, which historically made it a popular snack for travellers.

We tried one and really enjoyed it. Red bean paste as a dessert filling is a bit of an acquired taste, but if you've spent enough time travelling around East Asia, you've probably encountered it. We like that it brings a mild sweetness to desserts. 

Also, you'll likely be asked if you want the chunky red bean paste or smooth red bean paste. We had a bit of a lost-in-translation moment, but we eventually figured it out when the lady behind the counter started pointing at different pictures. 

Have soba noodles for lunch

Soba is a traditional Japanese dish highly renowned in Niigata Prefecture. This is because Niigata Prefecture is known for its exceptional quality buckwheat, the primary ingredient in soba noodles. The region's climate and soil conditions are ideal for growing buckwheat, leading to a distinctive flavour and texture in the noodles.

In Niigata, you'll find a variety of soba styles. Some are served cold with a dipping sauce (zaru soba), while others are in hot broth (kake soba). There's also a regional specialty called hegi soba characterized by its firm and chewy texture served on a wooden platter in bite-sized swirls.

We had lunch at Nakanoya Soba Yuzawa, a great restaurant located just across from the Echigo Yuzawa Station.

Niigata is also famous for its sake, and pairing soba noodles with local sake is a popular culinary experience, enhancing the flavours of both the dish and the drink. We didn't order sake since we had already tried quite a bit at the Echigo Sake Museum Ponshukan, but you can certainly do so!

We enjoyed this restaurant so much we tried to come again a second time only to discover they are not open on Thursdays! But if you come to Yuzawa, definitely check this place out. 

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8ABB0ym-kas

Best time to visit Yuzawa

While Yuzawa is a popular winter ski destination, the best time to visit really depends on what you're looking to experience:

For Winter Sports (December to March)

Yuzawa is renowned for its heavy snowfall, making it one of the most popular skiing and snowboarding destinations in Japan. The peak snow season runs from late December to February, but the ski resorts usually operate from December to early April, depending on the snow conditions. If you're keen on winter sports, this is the best time to visit.

For Onsen (Year-round)

Yuzawa has numerous hot springs, making it a great destination for onsen lovers throughout the year. Winter is a particularly popular time to soak in an onsen, with the contrast of the hot water and cold air creating a unique experience. However, onsens can also be enjoyed in other seasons, especially after a tiring day of exploring or hiking.

For Sightseeing and Hiking (May to November)

As the snow melts, the landscape transforms, revealing lush greenery and beautiful vistas. Late spring to autumn is great for sightseeing, trekking, and enjoying the natural beauty of the region. During the months of October and November, you can witness the autumn leaves that offer a spectacular display of reds, oranges, and yellows.

Ski Resorts in Yuzawa

Yuzawa is a very popular winter destination with skiers and snowboarders. There are a whopping 12 ski resorts in Yuzawa offering slopes for different levels from beginner to advanced, as well as numerous outdoor winter activities to choose from. So it's easy to see why this place is nicknamed Snow Country! Some of the ski resorts offer their own free shuttle bus to transport guests from Echigo Yuzawa Station to the ski area. 

Naeba Ski Resort

Kagura Ski Resort (Tashiro Station)

Kagura Ski Resort (Mitsumata Station)

Nakazato Snow Wood Ski Resort

Yuzawa Nakazato Snow Resort

Yuzawa Park Ski Resort

Iwappara Ski Resort

Kandatsu Snow Resort

NASPA Ski Garden

Ipponsugi Ski Resort

Yuzawa Kogen Ski Resort

GALA Yuzawa Snow Resort

Tip: There are lockers at Echigo Yuzawa Station should you need to store your ski or snowboard equipment while you spend some time exploring the town. 

Fuji Rock Festival 

If you're visiting Yuzawa during the summer, there is one event you won't want to miss!

Fuji Rock Festival is one of Japan's most famous music festivals and it's typically held during the summer months in late July or early August.

It's named after its original location near Mount Fuji, but since 1999, the festival has been held at the Naeba Ski Resort in Niigata Prefecture.

The festival puts on an impressive lineup of both international and Japanese artists featuring a wide range of music genres, from rock and electronic to hip-hop and reggae, attracting music lovers of all tastes. Plus it also offers an epic setting surrounded by mountains.

Side-Trips Under 60 Minutes

DestinationTravelHighlightNaeba35 min busRopeway to Tashiro Plateau, autumn foliage that rivals Nikko.Urasa Bishamondo25 min shinkansen + 10 min walkFeb “Naked Pushing Festival” & photogenic temple steps.Tokamachi40 min local trainEchigo-Tsumari Art Triennale installations, washi-paper workshops.Shiozawa15 min trainTraditional hon-chō street of kura storehouses; silk weaving demo.

48-Hour & 72-Hour Yuzawa Itinerary “Plug-and-Play” Schedules

If you only have a weekend (Fri night – Sun):Fri 21:00 arrive → check-in → night soak.Sat AM: Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway + Alpine Garden boardwalk. 13:00 soba lunch. PM: Ponshukan sake tasting + “sake-onsen” dip. Twilight foot-baths crawl. Night: Izakaya hop (try Yukinto for Niigata wagyu skewers).Sun AM: bus to Kiyotsu Gorge (09:10) → Tunnel of Light → back 13:00. PM: souvenir run (sasa-dango & rice crackers) → 15:08 shinkansen to Tokyo.

Three full days (snow season edition):Day 1 powder lines at GALA Yuzawa; après craft-beer at Yukiguni Taproom. Day 2 snow-shoe tour to Fudo Falls frozen columns + private rotenburo booking. Day 3 half-day ski at Iwappara (wide gentle cruisers) → late-lunch hegi soba → 17:30 train.

Four days (green season explorer):Add a side hop on the 20-min local train to Muikamachi for farm-stay cycling between tanbo (rice paddies) and a bite of legendary heitai mochi (army-ration origin sweet).

Tips for the Best Yuzawa Experience

Pack for All Seasons: Even in summer, mountain nights can be chilly—bring layers. In winter, pack snow boots, waterproof gloves, and maybe even a pair of “kairo” (disposable hand warmers) for outdoor adventures.

Reserve Onsens & Restaurants Ahead: If you have your heart set on a certain ryokan’s onsen or a special dinner spot, reserve ahead, especially on weekends and holidays.

Bring Cash: Many smaller eateries and shops are cash-only. There are ATMs at the station, but it’s good to have yen on hand.

Luggage Forwarding: Don’t want to lug skis or heavy bags? Most hotels and resorts offer “takkyubin” (luggage forwarding) service, making train travel a breeze.

Yuzawa Onsen Travel FAQ: Ropeway Views, Kiyotsu Gorge, Sake Tasting, Ski Season & Onsen Etiquette

1) How do I get to Yuzawa from Tokyo or Niigata?

Take the Joetsu Shinkansen to Echigo-Yuzawa Station: ~1h14m from Tokyo, ~44m from Niigata. Budget route: local Shin-Etsu → Joetsu Line via Nagaoka (~2h38m) if you’re optimizing costs.

2) What’s the must-do view in town?

Ride the Yuzawa Kogen Ropeway to Alp no Sato (Alpine Botanical Garden). You’ll get fast alpine access, boardwalks, seasonal flowers, and optional summer activities (go-karts, zipline, bobsled).

3) Is Kiyotsu Gorge worth a day trip?

Absolutely. Walk the Kiyotsu Gorge Tunnel art installation (Periscope, Expression of Color, FLOW, Drops, Light Cave). Bus from Echigo-Yuzawa (Platform 4, east exit), then a ~20-minute walk—check sparse timetables in advance.

4) Where can I soak my feet for free?

Behind Echigo-Yuzawa Station (west exit) you’ll find three free foot baths plus another in Yuzawa Central Park. They’re covered, so they work in sun, rain, or snow. There’s even a surprise hand bath around town.

5) What’s a quick, easy nature walk?

Fudo Falls. Follow the road between the History & Folklore Museum and the Ropeway, tracing the stream. Mostly paved, short, and photogenic—great in any season.

6) Can I taste local sake without leaving the station?

Yes—inside the station at Echigo Sake Museum Ponshukan. ¥500 = 5 tokens to sample Niigata sakes from vending machines (some premium picks cost 2–3 tokens). Check the staff-pick board to get started.

7) What should I eat that’s uniquely Niigata?

Try hegi soba (firm, chewy buckwheat noodles) at Nakanoya Soba Yuzawa (closed Thursdays), and snack on sasa-dango (mugwort mochi with red-bean filling) sold around the station.

8) When is the best time to visit Yuzawa?

Dec–Mar: Deep-snow ski & snowboard season.

May–Nov: Sightseeing, hiking, waterfalls (autumn leaves peak Oct–Nov).

Year-round: Onsen heaven—winter snow + hot baths is a perfect combo.

9) Which ski resorts should I know?

There are 12 in/around Yuzawa. Popular picks: GALA Yuzawa (shinkansen-connected), Kagura (Mitsumata/Tashiro areas), Naeba, Iwappara, Yuzawa Kogen. Many run free shuttles from the station; lockers are available at Echigo-Yuzawa.

10) What’s special in summer?

The Fuji Rock Festival (late July/early August) at Naeba Ski Resort brings international acts to a mountain setting—book stays early. Also: lush trails, ropeways, and river scenery without the crowds.

11) Where should I stay (and how close is it to the station)?

Four Seasons Yuzawa Quattro: private open-air bath luxury (~5 min walk).

Shosenkaku Kagetsu: classic Japanese rooms + onsen (~3 min).

Yuzawa Grand Hotel: Western/Japanese rooms + indoor/outdoor baths (~2 min).Yuzawa is compact—being near the station is incredibly convenient.

12) Any onsen etiquette & practical tips?

Rinse/wash before entering, no swimsuits, towels stay out of the water, tie long hair up, and keep voices low. Bring cash for small shops, consider luggage forwarding (takkyubin) for gear, and confirm bus times for Kiyotsu. In winter, pack boots and hand warmers; in summer, light layers for cool alpine nights.

#### Staying at the Futuristic 9 Hours Capsule Hotel in Tokyo, Japan!
Japan's futuristic 9 Hours Capsule Hotel feels a bit like a spaceship and it was the perfect way to end our trip to Tokyo. This is a review of that experience so you know exactly what to expect from sleeping in a pod!

If there's one activity that was at the top of my Japan travel bucket list, it was to stay in a futuristic capsule hotel! Yes, I'm talking about those small individual pods that are cheaper than a hotel room yet offer more amenities than you'd expect to find in such a confined space. They're all over Japan.

Because we spent a whole month in Tokyo, there was no way Sam and I were going to be sleeping in a capsule for that long, but our final night in the city seemed like the perfect opportunity to test out sleeping in a pod.

Since I'm in charge of booking accommodations when we travel, I made it my mission to find the coolest, most modern, and futuristic capsule hotel in Tokyo! My pick:

The 9 Hours Capsule Hotel

What is a capsule hotel exactly?

So, what exactly is a capsule hotel, you ask?

Well, this is a type of hotel that originated in Japan with the purpose of providing cheap and basic overnight accommodations. Instead of rooms, guests sleep in capsules, which are spaces large enough to hold a mattress and not much else. There is enough room to comfortably crawl in and sit upright, but it's far from a hotel room.

The capsules are stacked side-by-side, two units high, similar to bunk beds. They have either steps or a ladder for those guests staying on the second level pods, and sliding doors or curtains that offer privacy.

In some aspects, capsule hotels are similar to hostels because you do have shared spaces like toilets, showers, dining rooms and living areas, but instead of bunk beds, you get capsules.

As for the name 9 Hours, the idea is that that's all the time you really need in a capsule hotel: 1 hour to shower, 7 hours of sleep, and 1 hour to get ready in the morning...though I may have done a little more sleeping and a little less getting ready.

My experience at 9 Hours

We arrived at the capsule hotel in Shinjuku in the early afternoon and made our way up to the reception which is located on the 8th floor.

During check-in, we were each given a card with a QR code. This was our key for the duration of our stay and we needed it to access our lockers and store our belongings.

This is where Sam and I went our separate ways since men and women have separate dorms on different floors.

I went over to my locker which had enough space for 1 piece of luggage and 1 daypack. (My Osprey Sojourn was a bit plump, but I still managed to squeeze it in!)

Inside my locker I also found an overnight kit containing:

1 pair of slippers

1 pyjama set

1 toothbrush

1 mini tube of toothpaste

1 bath towel

It was nice having a common space to hang out in, because once you come back from a day of sightseeing, you don't necessarily want to crawl straight into a capsule. The common area had benches, individual working desks, and a long shared table.

The bathrooms took up an entire floor and there were rows of toilet stalls and shower stalls. The shower stalls had shampoo, conditioner and body wash, which is great if you're not travelling with a full toiletry kit. Then in the middle of the bathroom, there was a long counter with a row of sinks and mirrors.

It was all very efficient and there were enough stalls that you never had to wait in line.

What's it like inside a capsule?

Some people worry that it might feel claustrophobic inside the capsule, but personally, I found them to be surprisingly spacious.

Considering the whole premise behind a capsule hotel is to be as space efficient as possible, I found I was able to sit up straight without bumping my head on the ceiling, and there was plenty of room to stretch my arms and legs. You can't stand upright, but it's not Dracula's coffin either!

This wasn't the most pimped out capsule out there (some have TVs and radios!), but there was a USB port to charge my phone, two tiny shelves, and a light switch.

While I couldn't control the temperature inside the capsule, there was air flowing in so I found it comfortable. Not too hot, not too cold, and that prevented the pod from getting stuffy. 

As for comfort, the bed consisted of a thick mat with a bedsheet, a half-moon shaped pillow, and a warm duvet.

I had a good night's sleep. I didn't wake up during the night, and the following morning Sam had to text me to ask if I was up yet. I guess I had a bit of a longer snooze than I thought.

We filmed a video of the whole experience:



What should you bring to a capsule hotel?

The 9 Hours capsule hotel provides you with an amenity kit, so there's not a whole lot of extra stuff that you need to bring.

The two things I would suggest are: a pair of flips flops for the showers, and some earplugs if you're a light sleeper and are planning to spend a few nights in a pod.

Also, while pyjamas are provided, they're one size fits all and made for a smaller frame, so you might be more comfortable in your own.

Would I recommend staying in a capsule hotel?

Yes, for the experience, but not long term!

As you may already know, I love booking unique stays when I travel, and while I enjoyed the novelty of sleeping in a capsule hotel, I felt like one night was enough.

Perhaps my younger self would have been okay spending a week in one, but the truth of the matter is that a capsule hotel is a lot like a hostel, albeit with a bit more privacy.

There were still minor annoyances like the sounds of people talking/snoring/farting through the night (Sam tells me it was especially symphonic in the male dorm).

Plus, because of the limited amount of space in the capsule, all our belongings had to be stored in the lockers so there was a lot of going back and forth to retrieve things.

I think staying in a capsule hotel is something I would only do for short stays (1-3 nights max), but I wouldn't want to spend my whole trip living out of locker and sleeping in a pod.

Also, because Sam and I travel as a couple, it's often cheaper to book an AirBnB rather than pay for two individual capsules. So that's my take on it.

Lastly, speaking of unique accommodations in Japan, I definitely think staying in a ryokan for the night is worth the splurge!

Other 9 Hours Capsule Hotels in Japan

In case you're interested in this chain of futuristic capsule hotels (because who wouldn't want to feel like they're in a spaceship?), at the time of writing this, 9 Hours has locations across 4 cities in Japan.

There's an especially large selection in Tokyo, with branches in different neighbourhoods. One of the capsule hotels is female only, and there is also an airport location if you're looking for convenient accommodations at the end of your trip. Here's the full list:

Tokyo:

Nine Hours Narita International Airport

Nine Hours Shinjuku-North 

Nine Hours Woman Kanda

Nine Hours Akasaka

Nine Hours Kamata

Nine Hours Asakusa

***

Nine Hours Kyoto

***

Nine Hours Sendai

Have you slept in a capsule hotel?Would you do so after reading this review?

Read more about Japan

Best Bike Tours in Osaka

Travel Guide to Hakodate, Hokkaido

Capsule Hotel Culture in Japan

After our stay at the futuristic 9 Hours Capsule Hotel, I left with a new appreciation for Japan’s creative approach to space-saving hospitality. Below you’ll find everything you need to know about capsule hotels in Japan: from etiquette and best practices, to who will love this experience and who might want to book something different.

Who Should Stay in a Capsule Hotel?

Capsule hotels are a bucket list experience for many, but are they right for you? Here’s a handy rundown of who will thrive in pod life, and who might want to book something different.

Capsule hotels are perfect for:

Solo travelers wanting a private space at a hostel price

Backpackers needing a budget-friendly crash pad in city centers

Business travelers or commuters who missed the last train (the OG capsule hotel customer!)

Tech lovers, minimalists, and anyone curious about Japanese innovation

Travelers seeking a short, memorable, and affordable urban stay

Early/late-night flyers who want to nap at an airport capsule (like 9 Hours Narita!)

Capsule hotels might not be for you if:

You’re claustrophobic or dislike small, windowless spaces

You’re a light sleeper (bring those earplugs!)

You’re traveling as a couple or family and want to stay together (most pods are single-gender, single-person)

You have lots of luggage (locker space is limited)

You want in-room amenities like private bathrooms, TVs, or a work desk

If you’re still curious but unsure, try it for just one night. That way you’ll experience the novelty—without committing for your entire trip.

Capsule Etiquette 101 – How Not to Be “That” Guest

Japan values quiet courtesy—multiply that by ten inside a human beehive.

DoDon’tSlip off shoes at the locker entrance and change into the provided slippers.Clomp around the pod floor in outdoor sneakers.Whisper in corridors; treat them like library aisles.Conduct loud FaceTime calls or TikTok shoots outside pods.Switch your phone to vibrate and dim screen brightness in bed.Scroll Instagram on full-blast brightness—it lights the whole bunk.Pack an eye mask & earplugs; you’re responsible for your own comfort.Complain that the guy two pods down snores (snoring isn’t a rule-break).Close the screen/door gently—slamming echoes like a cymbal crash.Treat the capsule like a hostel bunk and hang laundry off the railing.

If in doubt, observe what others are doing or ask staff—they’re used to helping first-time guests.

What to Pack (and What You Can Leave Behind)

As covered above, 9 Hours (and most capsule hotels) provide a robust amenity kit: pajamas, slippers, toothbrush, towel, even basic toiletries in the shower room. Here’s what to bring for the best experience:

Must-haves:

Earplugs or noise-cancelling headphones (for snorers!)

Flip-flops for the showers (if you prefer your own)

A lightweight sleep mask (for extra darkness)

Minimal luggage—just the essentials fit in your locker

A small toiletry bag for shower room runs

Portable phone charger/USB cable

Leave at home:

Bulky suitcases (there’s limited storage space)

Hairdryers (often provided in the common bathrooms)

Valuables—there’s a safe in the locker, but best to travel light

Capsule Hotel Chains and Unique Pods Across Japan

If the 9 Hours experience leaves you craving more, you’ll find plenty of options—each with their own vibe. Here are a few standouts for your Japan itinerary:

1. First Cabin

A cross between a capsule and a business class airplane suite, First Cabin offers “First Class,” “Business Class,” and “Premium Economy” pods—just a bit more space for those who want it. Great for airport stays.

2. The Millennials

Hip, high-tech, and designed for the digital nomad. Think adjustable pod beds, smart controls, co-working spaces, and even free beer hours in the lounge.

3. Book and Bed Tokyo

For book lovers! Each capsule is hidden within a wall of bookshelves. Fall asleep surrounded by Japanese and English books in Shinjuku, Asakusa, or Kyoto.

4. Nine Hours Airport Hotels

Found at Narita, Kansai, and Fukuoka airports. Perfect for layovers or late-night arrivals—shower, nap, and you’re on your way.

5. Capsule Hotels for Women

Many cities offer women-only floors or entire hotels (like Nadeshiko Hotel Shibuya), which are ideal for solo female travelers seeking extra comfort and security.

Why You Should Try It—At Least Once!

Staying in a capsule hotel is one of those “only in Japan” moments that becomes a core travel memory. For us, it was a chance to experience a piece of Tokyo’s innovative spirit, reset after two months of adventures, and just marvel at the creative solutions to space and privacy that Japan does so well. It’s efficient, quirky, and surprisingly restful.

Staying at the Futuristic 9 Hours Capsule Hotel in Tokyo – 12-Question FAQ

1) What exactly is a capsule hotel (and why “9 Hours”)?

A capsule hotel swaps private rooms for individual sleep pods plus shared bathrooms and lounges. “9 Hours” nods to the ideal flow: 1 hour to shower, 7 hours to sleep, and 1 hour to get ready. It’s streamlined, clean, and delightfully sci-fi.

2) Are the pods claustrophobic?

Surprisingly no for most travelers. You can sit upright, stretch out, and there’s steady airflow. If you’re very claustrophobic, try a lower pod, visit the common area before bed, and bring a light sleep mask to create your own cozy “room.”

3) What do you actually get at 9 Hours?

At check-in you’ll receive a QR key for lockers plus an amenity kit: slippers, pajama set, toothbrush + mini toothpaste, and a bath towel. In the pod: reading light, USB power, two small shelves, and a comfy mattress/duvet.

4) How secure is it (and where does luggage go)?

Each guest gets a personal locker (fits a carry-on plus daypack). Floors are gender-segregated, and access is by QR. Keep valuables in your locker; the pods themselves are for sleeping, not storage.

5) What are the bathrooms like?

Modern and spotless. Expect rows of sinks, toilets, and shower stalls stocked with shampoo/conditioner/body wash. Capacity is generous, so waits are rare even at peak times.

6) Can couples stay together?

Pods are single-occupancy and most floors are single-gender. Couples can book the same property but will sleep on separate floors. For a “together” experience, consider a minimalist business hotel or ryokan on other nights.

7) Is the pod comfortable to sleep in?

Yes—think firm mattress, crescent pillow, and proper duvet. Ventilation prevents stuffiness, and the light switch is within arm’s reach. Light sleepers should bring earplugs (communal spaces mean occasional symphonies of snores).

8) How long should I stay?

One to three nights is the sweet spot: perfect for novelty, late flights, or early trains. Longer than that and you may tire of the locker runs and shared setup.

9) What should I pack (or skip)?

Bring: earplugs/eye mask, flip-flops for showers, compact toiletry pouch, and a short USB cable. Skip: bulky suitcases (space is tight), hairdryer (provided), and anything you won’t realistically use in a shared setup.

10) What’s the etiquette inside a capsule hotel?

Think “library quiet.” Whisper in corridors, dim phone screens, set devices to vibrate, close pod screens gently, and pack the night before to avoid late-night zipper concerts. No calls or video chats near pods.

11) Who will love 9 Hours—and who won’t?

Great for solo travelers, commuters, carry-on minimalists, and design lovers. Less ideal for couples wanting one room, very light sleepers, or travelers with lots of luggage who prefer private bathrooms.

12) Where else can I try capsule/pod stays in Japan?

Beyond 9 Hours (multiple Tokyo locations plus Narita), look at First Cabin (larger “cabin” pods), The Millennials (smart beds + co-working), Book and Bed (sleep in a bookshelf), and women-only pod hotels in major cities.

Capsule Hotels as a Window into Japanese Life

If you’ve stayed in a capsule hotel—or are planning to after reading this—drop a comment below and share your thoughts, tips, or funny stories. And if you discover a pod hotel I haven’t tried yet, let me know. Japan’s always full of surprises!

#### Our Black Forest Road Trip Guide: Ultimate 2-Day Itinerary for First Time Visitors
Our recent Black Forest road trip was one of the highlights of our travels in Germany! This destination had been on our travel bucket list ever since we first caught a glimpse of the Black Forest on a short visit to Freiburg. We knew we wanted to come back to explore, and we finally made it...several years later. 
If you're looking for deep, dark forests that look like the perfect setting for a Grimm fairy tale, hiking trails that weave their way past creeks and waterfalls, and charming lakeside towns with half-timbered houses, then the Black Forest is the place for you!
This is a destination with a strong focus on nature and the outdoors, and I would say the Black Forest is also best done as a road trip since that gives you the flexibility and mobility to explore at your own pace and enjoy the scenery along the way. 
So, without further ado, here's our 2-day itinerary for a magical Black Forest road trip!

Ultimate Black Forest Road Trip Itinerary
Stay at Hofgut Sternen
Before we dive into our Black Forest itinerary, I want to let you know where we stayed, because this place is a destination in and of itself. We spent 2 nights at Hofgut Sternen, located in what's known as The Black Forest Village resort complex. 
This is a historical hotel that has welcomed many famous guests including Marie Antoinette - you can see a mural painted on the exterior of the hotel that depicts her arrival after a long journey. Her visit would have been in May 1770 when she was on her way to Paris to marry King Louis XVI, and she would have arrived with an entire entourage made up of 21 state coaches, 36 carriages and 450 horses.
Other famous guests at this hotel have included German poet Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, the French Emperor Napoleon III, and the English novelist Anthony Trollope. So, it's fair to say you're in good company if you stay here!
There is also quite a bit to see and do within the Black Forest Village. For starters, you have the Ravenna bridge, which runs directly behind the hotel. This is a railway viaduct that crosses the Ravenna Gorge at a height of 58 meters (you can see the trains go by every few minutes!)

Just behind the bridge, there's a hiking trail through the woods and it's what Black Forest dreams are made of! You have a meandering trail through thick forest, a babbling brook flowing across moss-covered stones, fallen logs on a bed of crunchy leaves and squishy pine needles, and a beautiful canopy through which sun rays beam down. The Black Forest is a hiker's paradise with something new at every turn!

Another popular attraction at Hofgut Sternen is the giant cuckoo clock. This is the largest clock in the entire Black Forest Highlands complete with life-sized dancing figures that emerge on the hour. If you want to take a cuckoo clock back home as a souvenir, you're in luck because Hofgut Sternen has a shop that sells cuckoo clocks in all shapes and sizes.

And if cuckoo clocks aren't your thing, there is a glassblowing workshop on site, as well as a shop selling Sternen glass. So as you can see, there's plenty to do at this Black Forest Village resort!
Take a boat trip on Titisee
One of the towns we visited during our road trip through the Black Forest was Titisee, a small town that sits on the edge of Lake Titisee.

Since Lake Titisee is the main attraction, we joined a boat tour with Drubba Bootsvermietung & Rundfahrten and travelled aboard their ship, Titus, which is a replica of a Roman galley. Local legend says the lake was named after General Titus Flavius Vespasianus, who was Roman Emperor around 69-79 AD. He is said to have camped around this lake during one of his military campaigns, so he called it Titunsee, which today is Titisee.
How much of this is true and how much is myth that has been embellished over the millennia, nobody knows. But regardless, it is a cool spot to visit!
While we were in Titisee, we also ate at Café Seeblick, a relaxed cafe with an outdoor terrace and lake views. Here we tried their süßer Flammkuchen. This is a German-style thin crust pizza and we ordered the dessert version with apples, sultanas and cinnamon. This was my first time trying a sweet dessert pizza, and it won't be my last!
Hire a row boat in Schluchsee
Another place we really enjoyed on our Black Forest road trip was the town of Schluchsee which sits on the edge of a lake by the same name. This is the largest lake in the Black Forest and also the highest reservoir in Germany.
We enjoyed a leisurely stroll along the lakeside path, and that eventually led us to a boat rental area on the beach. There were row boats, paddle boats, electric boats - you name it!

It was such a beautiful day and the water was so calm that we decided to take out a row boat. It was a really fun experience and a nice way to take in the scenery. I would highly recommend doing so for anyone visiting Schluchsee!
Spend the day in Sankt Blasien
The next stop on our Black Forest road trip itinerary was the town of Sankt Blasien. This is actually a popular health resort town with thermal baths, sauna gardens, and spa facilities. However, since we were only there for the day, we prioritized visiting St. Blasien Cathedral.
The cathedral is dedicated to St. Blasius, the early Christian bishop and martyr, who is also the patron saint of the town of Sankt Blasien in the Black Forest.

What makes this cathedral special is that its early classical cupola is the largest of its kind north of the Alps. It is 36 metres wide, 62 metres high, and a true work of art. The interior is also stark white with very minimal colour in the dome, and the windows along the cupola allow a lot of natural light in.

After visiting the cathedral, we walked over to Dom-Hotel St. Blasien just across the square, where we enjoyed a really nice lunch. Sam ordered the Maultaschen, which is a Swabian dish consisting of sheets of dough filled with minced meat. These were served in der Brühe, so they were simmered in a broth and served like a soup with bits of bacon.

Meanwhile, I ordered the Gulaschsuppe, or Hungarian goulash soup. I opted for a slightly smaller dish because I was really interested in the desserts. And as you know, when you come to the Black Forest, you have to order the Black Forest Cake!

Known as Schwarzwälder Kirschtorte, this is a chocolate sponge cake with a cherry filling, whipped cream and chocolate shavings. Simply marvellous!
And if I can recommend one more thing to try, it would be the Johannisbeereschorle. This was my first time trying currant or gooseberry juice, and I ordered it as a Schorle, so diluted with carbonated water. It was really nice!
Enjoy nature in Menzenschwand
Now let's talk about beautiful nature spots! Our Black Forest road trip also included a visit to Menzenschwand and what drew us here were the hiking trails.
For anyone interested in a short hike with big rewards, I would say Menzenschwander Waterfall is it!
You can drive right up to the parking lot across from Albhof am Wasserfall and you'll be up at the waterfall in less than 5 minutes. Alternatively, if you can handle about 30 minutes on foot, you can park at Parkplatz Menzenschwand Hinterdorf and enjoy a scenic walk through a glacier-carved valley.

The hiking trail follows a stream which flows through the gorge and then cascades down the rocks. It's a beautiful walk that offers plenty of shade and the path meanders down stairs and across a wooden bridge.
Admire the views atop Feldberg 
Standing at 1,493 metres, Feldberg is the highest mountain peak in the Black Forest, as well as the state of Baden-Württemberg, and that also makes it the highest mountain peak outside of the German Alps!
In the winter, this is a popular ski resort area, and in the summertime, it's a nice hiking destination with plenty of trails to choose from.

We decided to take the Feldbergbahn cable car to the top for a scenic view of the Black Forest, and we were in for a treat because it turns out you can even see the Alps from here! I almost couldn't believe my eyes - at first, I thought I was looking at clouds - but lo and behold, there were snow-capped mountains off on the horizon.
Once you get off at the upper station which sits at an altitude of 1,450 meters, it's a short walk to the Feldberg Tower viewing platform. We even got to see cows grazing along the way.

Lastly, as a tip, don't forget to check when the last cable car goes down. We barely caught the last one with minutes to spare, and if you miss it, you're hiking down!


✨ Black Forest Road Trip Guide: Practical Tips, Must-Knows & Hidden Gems

You’ve got the two‑day highlights pencilled in. Titisee’s shimmering waters. Feldberg’s sky‑high views. Solid foundation! Now let’s level‑up your Schwarzwald adventure. We'll key in on practical hacks, tasty detours and seasonal tweaks so you can craft the road trip that fits your travel style.

Route Remix: Three Scenic Loops to Sprinkle In 🚗

LoopDistanceTimeWhy Detour?B500 “Höhenstraße Classic” (Feldberg ➜ Triberg)110 km2 h no stopsGermany’s highest panoramic road; hairpins, heath‑covered moors and cuckoo‑clock hamlets.Wine & Waterfalls Trail (Freiburg ➜ Kaiserstuhl ➜ Triberg ➜ Gengenbach)145 km3 hCombines volcanic vineyards with the thunderous 163 m Triberg Falls and half‑timbered fairy‑towns.Spa Hop South (Baden‑Baden ➜ Mummelsee ➜ Bad Wildbad ➜ Calw)120 km2.5 hHot‑spring bliss, lake legends and the Seilbahn funicular to lofty treetop walks.

Tip: The Schwarzwaldhochstraße (B500) is blissfully empty if you hit the road by 08:00. Motorcycle convoys arrive mid‑morning; by then you can be sipping coffee beside a mirror‑still mountain lake.

Timing Secrets: When the Forest Really Shows Off 🍂

SeasonWhat You’ll LoveWhat to KnowSpring (Apr‑Jun)Waterfalls in full roar, wild garlic scenting the ravines, fewer crowds.Alpine passes can still see surprise flurries in April—carry a fleece.Summer (Jul‑Aug)Perfect swim temps (22–24 °C) in Titisee & Schluchsee, open‑air beer gardens.Book lakeside hotels months ahead; Sunday afternoon traffic towards Freiburg can crawl.Autumn (Sept‑Oct)Rust‑orange larches, wine harvest festivals, crisp hiking weather.Shorter daylight—plan drives so you’re off the switchbacks by dusk.Winter (Dec‑Mar)Snow‑dusted pines straight from a snow‑globe, Christmas markets, Feldberg ski runs.Carry chains; the Ravenna Gorge Christmas market is magical but parking is limited—shuttle bus from Hinterzarten recommended.

Foodie Field Notes: Eat Like a Black Forest Local 🥨🍒

Hearty Staples to Hunt Down

Vesperplatte – the ultimate charcuterie board: smoked ham, farmhouse cheeses, seed‑crusted bread and a dab of horseradish. Order one for two and you’ll still waddle out.

Schäufele – cured pork shoulder slow‑braised in white wine. Falls off the bone, pairs nicely with a malty Rothaus beer brewed just up the road in Grafenhausen.

Käsespätzle – think German mac‑n‑cheese—hand‑pressed noodles blanketed in Emmentaler, topped with crispy onions. Carb‑load before a long hike.

Sweet Indulgences Beyond the Classic Cake

Kirschwasser Sorbet – cherry‑brandy ice‑cream often spotted at roadside farm cafés. Adults‑only kick!

Ofenschlupfer – cinnamon‑apple bread pudding served warm with vanilla sauce; ideal on drizzly afternoons.

Farm Shops & Biergartens to Pin

StopCoordinatesWhy Go?Hofgut Sternen Hofladen47.9166° N, 8.0580° ETake‑home jars of house‑made cranberry jam & fir‑tree honey.Landmetzgerei Reichenbach48.0350° N, 8.2044° EHam smokehouse with tasting platters under 8 €.Rothaus Zäpfle‑Bar47.8203° N, 8.1658° ETry the limited‑edition Tannenzäpfle beers straight from the source.

Pack Like a Pro: What Goes in the Boot 🎒

Layering system – mornings at 1,200 m can be 10 °C cooler than valley towns.

Fold‑flat picnic blanket – every bend seems to reveal a meadow begging for a break.

Cash – lots of park‑and‑pay machines and farm‑gate kiosks are still coin‑operated.

Reusable mug & cutlery – many Schwarzwald cafés offer discounts if you BYO.

Offline maps – cell signal flickers between steep gorges (download Google Maps area in advance).

Rain‑Day Rescue Plan ☔️

Forecast suddenly looks grim? Slide these weather‑proof stops into your itinerary:

Schwarzwaldmuseum, Triberg – clocks, costumes, and a room‑size model logging train (allow 1.5 h).

Vogtsbauernhof Open‑Air Museum (many barns are covered) – watch blacksmiths, millers and distillers work under shelter.

Baden‑Baden Thermal Baths – classic Roman‑Irish circuit at Friedrichsbad or the modern Caracalla Spa.

Glass Factory at Dorotheenhütte – blow your own bauble, browse the Christmas village and linger over strudel in the panoramic café.

One More Day? Considering Adding These Stops 

Extra Day ThemeMust‑SeeDriving AnchorWaterfall WanderGeroldsauer, Allerheiligen & Gertelbach cascadesBase yourself in Baden‑BadenFairy‑Tale VillagesGengenbach, Sasbachwalden, SchiltachOvernight in atmospheric half‑timbered GengenbachWine & WellnessRiesling tastings along the Ortenau Trail + evening in a vineyard spaStay at a Weingut guesthouse near DurbachClock & Craft CircuitClock‑makers in Schonach, timber‑carvers in Furtwangen, textile mills in St. GeorgenSleep above the museum at Furtwangen

Budget Snapshot 💶

ExpenseLow‑Key TravellerComfort SeekerCar hire (2 days)€90 compact€140 SUV/EVFuel / charging€25 petrol OR €15 electric€35 petrolMid‑range hotel€110 dbl€190 dbl (spa hotel)Daily food€35 pp (picnic lunches)€60 pp (restaurant lunches)Activities€20 (cable car + boat)€45 (add spa, museum)2‑Day Total (per couple)≈ €365≈ €640

Black Forest Road Trip — 12-Question FAQ (2-Day First-Timer Itinerary)

1) What’s the best 2-day route for a first visit?

Base yourself at Hofgut Sternen in the Ravenna Gorge, spend Day 1 around Titisee → Schluchsee → Sankt Blasien, and Day 2 on Menzenschwand Waterfall → Feldberg cable car → scenic B500 segments. This keeps drives short and sights varied (lakes, domes, waterfalls, peaks).

2) Is Hofgut Sternen worth it beyond being a hotel?

Yes—think “Black Forest Village”: the Ravenna railway viaduct, woodland trails right from your door, the giant cuckoo clock (with life-size figures on the hour), and on-site glassblowing plus a cuckoo-clock shop.

3) Titisee vs. Schluchsee—how do they differ?

Titisee is lively and compact with classic lake cruises (we rode the Titus), cafés, and easy promenades. Schluchsee is larger, calmer, and great for self-hire boats (row/electric/pedal) and longer shoreline walks.

4) What’s one can’t-miss cultural stop?

St. Blasien Cathedral (Sankt Blasien). Its vast early-classical dome—62 m high, 36 m wide—bathes a stark-white interior in natural light. Pair with lunch across the square at Dom-Hotel St. Blasien.

5) Short hike with big payoff?

Menzenschwander Waterfall. Park by Albhof am Wasserfall for a 5-minute stroll or start at Parkplatz Menzenschwand Hinterdorf for a scenic 30-minute valley walk along the stream and bridges.

6) How do I get the best Feldberg views?

Ride the Feldbergbahn to the upper station (~1,450 m), then walk to the Feldberg Tower lookout. On clear days you’ll spot the Alps on the horizon. Note the last gondola down—or you’re hiking!

7) What local foods should I plan around?

A lake-view süßer Flammkuchen (apple–raisin–cinnamon) at Titisee, Maultaschen in Brühe at Sankt Blasien, and of course Schwarzwälder Kirschtorte (Black Forest cake). For drinks, try a Johannisbeer-Schorle (currant spritzer).

8) Any quick weather/packing tips?

Layer up: ridge tops can be ~10 °C cooler than valleys. Bring rain shell, grippy shoes, cash/coins for small lots and kiosks, offline maps (signal drops in gorges), and a picnic blanket for meadow breaks.

9) Best season for this 2-day plan?

It works year-round. Spring = roaring falls, summer = swimming and boat days, autumn = foliage + harvest vibes, winter = snow-dusted trails and Feldberg skiing. In winter carry chains and check gondola ops.

10) Any scenic detours if I have extra time?

Drive a slice of the B500 Schwarzwaldhochstraße, add Triberg Falls or a half-timbered town like Gengenbach, or spa it up in Baden-Baden. All pair nicely with your base route.

11) Do I need to prebook anything?

In summer and foliage weekends, prebook accommodation, boat hires (if specific time), and Feldbergbahn on peak days. Restaurants are generally walk-in at lunch; dinner bookings help in small towns.

12) Is this road trip dog-friendly?

Yes. Lakeside paths at Titisee/Schluchsee, Menzenschwand trails, and many CAFÉS welcome dogs (leash). Confirm pet policies with your hotel and note that some protected areas or interiors (domes/museums) don’t allow pets.

And that concludes our short but action-packed 2-day road trip in Germany's Black Forest! I hope this gave you a few ideas of some things to do and places to visit on your own travels. 

We then continued onwards to Freiburg for 48 hours if you want to read more about our trip.

This trip was made possible in partnership with the German National Tourist Board.

#### How to Spend 24 Hours in Hamburg, Germany Travel Guide (1-Day Travel Itinerary)
What can you do with 24 hours in Hamburg? Quite a lot, it turns out! Sam and I kicked off our recent trip to Germany in the northern port city of Hamburg, and while we only had one full day to explore, we hit the ground running ready to eat, see and do as much as possible.

After a solid night's rest, we seemed to have kicked the jet lag, and we spent our day exploring the red-brick warehouses of Speicherstadt, touring the port by boat, eating our fill of pickled herring, enjoying the city views from Elbphilharmonie Plaza, taking part in a chocolate-making workshop and a whole lot more.

So if an action-packed day sounds like your idea of a good time, read on for our 1-day itinerary to Hamburg!

Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Hamburg: A One Day Itinerary

Explore Speicherstadt on foot

We kicked off our morning in Hamburg with a walk through Speicherstadt. This is the largest warehouse district in the world, but I assure you it's far more magical than its name suggests; when I say warehouses, I'm talking about Neo-Gothic red-brick structures that stand on timber foundations along the canals.

Speicherstadt is located in Hamburg’s port area within the HafenCity quarter, and it’s probably the image that comes to mind when you hear the city’s name.

The buildings here date from 1883 to 1927 and they are works of art. These warehouses have towers, alcoves and cranes that were once used for loading goods on and off boats.

It's no surprise that Speicherstadt is also listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

This Hamburg Walking Tour explores the Speicherstadt District, the Old Town and the Elbe River, so it's a nice introduction to the city.

We spent the morning crisscrossing the neighbourhood and wandering down back lanes with cameras in hand. It was a walk without a particular destination in mind, but that's how we enjoy experiencing a new city.

Our favourite find of the day was the Coffee Plaza, where I got Mr. Coffee Enthusiast to pose in front of the roasted coffee bean. 

Try a pickled herring sandwich

Then we went in search of food! Being the foodies that we are, Sam and I were very excited to try the Fischbrötchen.

This is a traditional dish that’s very popular in Northern Germany due to its proximity to the North Sea and Baltic Sea.

The dish consists of fish on a bun (typically herring) with various toppings that can include onions, pickles and various sauces.

We tried the ones at Brücke 10 on St Pauli Landungsbrücken, which came highly recommended.

We ended up ordering two different interpretations of the dish: Sam got the classic pickled herring on a bun which is known as the Bismarck, and I chose the fried and marinated herring known as the Brathering.

Both herrings were served with white onions on a freshly baked bun. The sandwiches were delicious and made for an excellent meal on the go on a busy day of sightseeing.

Walk across the Old Elbe Tunnel

The Elbe Tunnel first opened in 1911 as both a pedestrian and vehicle tunnel that allowed people to get to the other side of the Elbe River. 

The event was a big sensation as it essentially connected central Hamburg with the docks and shipyard area, making the commute to work in one of the world’s biggest harbours so much easier.

Here you had these two 6-meter diameter tubes buried 24 meters beneath the surface and running 426 meters in length. How convenient!

Today, the Old Elbe Tunnel is still in use by both locals and visitors.

In order to reach the tunnel, you can take the spiralling stairs or ride the old elevators with their rattling wooden doors.

It really is an experience, and while we technically didn’t need to get to the other side of the Elbe, we still enjoyed walking across.

Take a boat tour of the Port of Hamburg

Another activity that we did in Hamburg was to take a tour of the port. There are numerous tour operators to choose from, so you’ll have lots of options depending on your budget and how long you want to be out on the water.

We ended up doing the classic 1-hour tour with Barkassen-Meyer. They have one daily departure in English from April to October; otherwise, the commentary is in German, but they do give you a booklet that has information on all the landmarks along the route.

This tour allows you to see some major city landmarks from the water and also experience a working port.

It was amazing to see how the giant cargo ships were loaded with containers right in front of our eyes. I felt tiny as we cruised past.

An alternative to the boat tour is to ride ferry #72, which does a triangular circuit from Landungsbrücken Brücke 1 to Arningstraße to Elbphilharmonie.

You won’t get to hear any history or see the working port up close and personal, but if you just want a taste of being out on the water, then it’s really nice sitting on the top deck and doing a loop or two.

For something a little less traditional, this Hamburg sailing trip aboard a two-masted wooden sailboat is a unique way to take in the sights. 

Join a chocolate-making workshop

One of the funnest activities we did in Hamburg was take a chocolate-making workshop at Chocoversum.

This is Hamburg’s very own chocolate museum, and over the course of 90 minutes, we got to hear a brief history of chocolate-making and make some chocolate of our own. We were particularly excited for the latter!

Once inside the chocolate laboratory, we were tasked with creating our dream chocolate bar. We could choose between milk chocolate or dark chocolate, and add a total of 3 special ingredients (any more and it would overwhelm the chocolate bar).

I made a milk chocolate bar with roasted coconut, cranberries and amarettini. Meanwhile, Sam made a milk chocolate bar featuring sugar-coated ginger bits, coconut and white chocolate chips.

We then left our chocolate bars to cool in the fridge while we continued with the rest of our guided tour through Chocoversum.

Along the way, we got to try the cacao bean once it’s been roasted, and we also got to sample chocolate at different stages of production. It was a really fun interactive experience and one that I think can work for both adults and children.

Getting to take the chocolates home as a souvenir was a really nice touch…even if we ate them before going back home to Canada.

Go up the Elbphilarmonie Plaza

Later that evening, we went to the Elbphilarmonie, which is a massive concert hall located in Hamburg's HafenCity quarter.

The building combines a glass structure that sits atop a former brick warehouse. Some say the structure is meant to resemble a hoisted sail, while others say it's a wave or even an iceberg.

I think the interpretation of a hoisted sail is very fitting given Hamburg's history as one of the world's leading ports.

While we didn't get to attend a concert, we did make it up to the observation deck, known as the Elbphilarmonie Plaza, which is located on the 8th floor.

You can walk the full perimeter of the deck for 360-degree views of the city; you can look out over the port, watch as the cranes continue to expand HafenCity, peep the steeples in the city centre, and get an idea of how spread out Hamburg really is.

We went at sunset and while it was a little bit overcast, we still enjoyed the experience.

Visit Miniatur Wunderland

Though our visit to Hamburg may have been brief, we knew we couldn’t miss visiting one of the city’s most famed attractions, Miniatur Wunderland!

It's kind of hard to describe this place, but imagine a scale model of the world with a focus on transportation. In fact, Miniatur Wunderland is home to the largest model railway in the world!

Inside you'll find 15,715 meters of train tracks that recreate epic train journeys across Europe, there is a miniature airport complete with LED lights that simulate take-offs and landings, and then you have these incredible scenes of holiday destinations across Europe - all in miniature scale!

My favourite part was watching the trains travel through the Alps - it made me want to hop on a train and see these places in real life and life-sized!

Before visiting, I kind of thought this place was just for families with kids, but I was surprised by how much I enjoyed it.

Have dinner at NENI Hamburg

We ended our 24 hours in Hamburg with dinner at NENI Hamburg, an Israeli restaurant located in the Altes Hafenamt Hotel.

I ordered their Jerusalem platter which had a bed of hummus with dollops of tahini, drizzled olive oil, chunks of roast chicken, red and green peppers, and pita bread. It was a feast of a meal and I enjoyed every last bite.

Meanwhile, Sam couldn’t leave Hamburg without trying a hamburger, so he got a burger with a twist! He ordered the pulled beef burger braised in maple syrup and served on a brioche bun with cheddar cheese, BBQ sauce, pickled chilli and a side of spicy sweet potato fries with mango aioli.

A very memorable dinner!

Spend the night at Hotel Altes Hafenamt

During our stay in Hamburg, we stayed at the 25hours Hotel Altes Hafenamt.

The hotel is located in a historic Neo-Gothic, red-brick building that was formerly the Port Authority Building, and it also happens to be the oldest building in HafenCity.

The best part of the stay was being situated within walking distance of Speicherstadt.

This, in my opinion, is the best neighbourhood for anyone visiting the city because you are surrounded by Hamburg’s historic red-brick buildings and you really get a sense of this being a port city with the many bridges, canals, and all the boat activity in the harbour.

And that concludes our 24 hours in Hamburg! As you can see there is quite a bit to do in the city, and while we only scratched the surface, we were quite happy with everything we managed to experience with one full day in the city.

This was a great introduction to Hamburg and we still have plenty left to see on a future visit to Germany.

Next up is our day trip to Lüneburg, which is a super easy destination to visit from Hamburg.

This trip was made possible in partnership with the German National Tourist Board and Hamburg Ahoi.



Making the Most of Your 24 Hours in Hamburg

Plan Like a Pro: Hamburg in 24 Hours

1. Prioritize Your Must-SeesLet’s be honest, even the most ambitious traveler can’t see it all in a day. Make a short “must-do” list to avoid FOMO:

Speicherstadt walk (UNESCO World Heritage magic)

Port tour (by boat or ferry #72)

Elbphilharmonie views (preferably at sunset)

Miniatur Wunderland (for the kid in all of us)

Sample a Fischbrötchen

Wander HafenCity after dark

2. Beat the QueuesSome of Hamburg’s top attractions (especially Miniatur Wunderland and the Elbphilharmonie Plaza) can have lines, especially on weekends or holidays. Book tickets online in advance if possible, or plan your visit for early morning or late afternoon to avoid the biggest crowds.

Getting Around: Fast, Fun & Fuss-Free

Hamburg is walkable—especially the city centre, Speicherstadt, and HafenCity—but distances can add up if you try to do everything on foot. Mix up your modes of transport:

U-Bahn & S-Bahn: Fast, clean, and reliable. The HVV day pass can be good value for tourists.

Ferries: Regular ferries on the Elbe are included in public transport tickets and give you a mini–port cruise for the price of a bus ride.

City bikes & e-scooters: For quick hops between attractions or if your feet are sore from all those cobbles.

Old Elbe Tunnel: Free for pedestrians and cyclists, and an iconic local shortcut!

Beyond the Guidebook: Local Experiences

1. St. Michael’s Church (Der Michel)

Climb the tower for panoramic city and harbour views (if your legs are up for the challenge—453 steps, but worth it!).Address: Englische Planke 1a

2. Planten un Blomen

If you’re in town on a warm day, don’t miss this sprawling urban park. It’s free to visit and home to rose gardens, a Japanese tea house (with real tea ceremonies!), and summer water-light shows.

3. Sternschanze & Karolinenviertel

For coffee breaks, people-watching, and indie shops, explore these two bohemian neighbourhoods. Grab a seat at a cafe terrace, browse vintage boutiques, or hunt for murals and street art.Local snack tip: Try Franzbrötchen, a sweet cinnamon pastry native to Hamburg.

4. Beatlesplatz & Reeperbahn

Music lover? Head to the St. Pauli district to discover Beatles history (they played here before they were famous!), then stroll down the notorious Reeperbahn for neon lights, quirky bars, and late-night eats.

5. Isemarkt

If your 24 hours in Hamburg happens to fall on a Tuesday or Friday, start your day at Isemarkt—one of Europe’s longest open-air markets. Stock up on picnic supplies, fresh flowers, and the best German pretzels you’ll ever taste.

Dining & Drinking: What to Eat (And Where to Eat It!)

Don’t leave without trying:

Fischbrötchen: The iconic pickled herring sandwich (look for “Bismarck” or “Brathering” at stands near Landungsbrücken).

Labskaus: A sailor’s stew with corned beef, potatoes, beetroot, pickled herring, and a fried egg. Sounds odd, but it’s beloved here!

Franzbrötchen: Cinnamon-swirled pastry perfection 

Craft beer: Hamburg’s breweries are booming—try Ratsherrn or ÜberQuell for a pint with a view.

Hamburg at Night: Evening Strolls & Entertainment

Evening walk: Start at Speicherstadt, cross the bridges, and loop through HafenCity for magical photo ops.

Rooftop bars: For cocktails with a view, check out “Clouds” near St. Pauli or the “20up” bar at the Empire Riverside Hotel.

Live music: The city has a rich jazz and indie scene—look for shows at Mojo Club, Gängeviertel, or Pony Bar.

Elbphilharmonie concerts: If you’re a classical music fan, check the schedule in advance and book a ticket for an unforgettable night.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iHwPN1o7VrM

Day Tripper? Ideas for a Second Visit

Blankenese: A picturesque hillside neighbourhood west of the city, known for its stairways, white villas, and Elbe beach.

Lüneburg: A medieval town full of red-brick Gothic architecture and cozy cafes.

Heligoland: Germany’s only deep-sea island, with dramatic cliffs, unique wildlife, and duty-free shopping.

The Altes Land: Europe’s largest fruit-growing region—apple and cherry blossoms in spring are magical!

Packing & Planning Essentials: What to Know Before You Go

Weather: Hamburg weather is famously unpredictable—layer up, and pack a rain jacket, even in summer.

Shoes: You’ll be walking a LOT, so comfortable footwear is a must.

Language: Most people speak excellent English, but a few words of German always win smiles.

Payment: Cards are accepted widely, but small change is handy for bakeries, market stalls, and U-Bahn tickets.

Timing: Start early to maximize daylight—Hamburg mornings are beautiful, especially along the canals.

Quick Logistics & Money Smarts

HVV Day Pass – €8.50 covers all U-/S-Bahn, buses and harbour ferries until 06:00 next day.

Bike-share – StadtRAD: first 30 min free each ride; download app, link credit card.

Card culture – Hamburg is card-friendly (even Apple Pay at kiosks), but Fischmarkt and small kebab kiosks remain cash only.

Sunday closures – Shops closed; flea markets & museums thrive. Plan souvenir shopping for Saturday.

Hamburg in 24 Hours — Essential Trip FAQ (Speicherstadt, Elbphilharmonie, Port & More)

What’s the best 1-day route to see Hamburg’s highlights?

Start in Speicherstadt for red-brick canals, cross to HafenCity, snack on a Fischbrötchen at Landungsbrücken, walk the Old Elbe Tunnel, take a port boat tour, catch sunset views from the Elbphilharmonie Plaza, then cap it with Miniatur Wunderland or dinner in the area.

Do I need to prebook anything for a single day?

If possible, reserve Miniatur Wunderland time slots and Elbphilharmonie Plaza access (free tickets but timed). For the classic 1-hour port cruise, you can usually buy on the spot—leave a little buffer.

Where should I try a Fischbrötchen (herring sandwich)?

Head to Brücke 10 at St. Pauli Landungsbrücken. Classic choices: Bismarck (pickled herring) or Brathering (fried, marinated). Expect onions on a fresh roll—perfect dockside fuel.

Is the Old Elbe Tunnel worth it if I’m short on time?

Yes—it's a quick, atmospheric walk under the river (vintage lifts, tiled tubes) and drops you at great waterfront viewpoints. It doubles as a fun shortcut back to Landungsbrücken.

Boat tour vs. public ferry—what’s better in one day?

Tours (e.g., Barkassen) get you working-port close-ups and live commentary. Ferry #72 is a budget “mini-cruise” triangle to the Elbphilharmonie; nice if time is tight or you already rode a full tour.

When should I go up to the Elbphilharmonie Plaza?

Golden hour to sunset for city-and-harbour glow. You can loop the 360° terrace for Speicherstadt steeples, HafenCity cranes, and the Elbe—all in one go.

Is Miniatur Wunderland fun for adults too?

Absolutely. It’s the world’s largest model railway, with an airport that “operates,” day-night light cycles, and meticulous cityscapes. Book a timed entry to dodge queues.

Any unique, hands-on activity for a short visit?

Chocoversum’s 90-minute chocolate workshop lets you create a custom bar (milk or dark + three toppings) and taste cacao through production stages—great for couples or families.

How do I get around fastest in a day?

Walk Speicherstadt/HafenCity, then mix in U/S-Bahn and Elbe ferries (HVV day ticket). Bikes/e-scooters help with medium hops. Hamburg is compact but you’ll log steps—wear comfy shoes.

What’s a good central area to stay for this itinerary?

HafenCity/Speicherstadt keeps you steps from canals, bridges, and evening walks; Altstadt/Neustadt are also excellent for transit and dining. If you like nightlife, St. Pauli is lively.

What local bites (beyond herring) should I try?

Morning Franzbrötchen (cinnamon pastry), Labskaus (hearty sailor’s plate), and craft beer at Ratsherrn or ÜberQuell. For dinner, Middle-Eastern-leaning NENI Hamburg is a tasty twist.

Any quick weather or timing tips for one day?

Hamburg weather flips fast—layer up and carry a light rain shell. Start early in Speicherstadt for calm canals, save Elbphilharmonie for sunset, and book one anchor attraction (Wunderland) ahead.

#### Quedlinburg Travel Guide: The Most Charming Timber-Frame Town in Germany
What are some things to do in Quedlinburg, Germany during your visit? Quedlinburg is a beautifully preserved medieval town situated on the north-eastern edge of the Harz Mountains in the state of Saxony-Anhalt, Germany and it dates back over a millennium!
The old town is a maze of Romanesque half-timbered houses featuring a castle, churches, gardens, squares and winding alleys where one could happily get lost for hours. Picturesque doesn’t even begin to do it justice.
Quedlinburg is also one of the stops on Germany's Romanesque Road, a scenic route in the German state of Saxony-Anhalt that links village churches, monasteries, cathedrals and castles that were built between 950 and 1250. These represent the emergence of Christianity in this part of Germany, making it another reason to visit.
So without further ado, today we're sharing some best things to do in Quedlinburg during your visit to this charming medieval town!
Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Quedlinburg, Germany
Rooftop views of Quedlinburg from Castle Garden
The cobbled streets of the medieval town of Quedlinburg, Germany
Exploring the medieval town of Quedlinburg on foot
Quedlinburg Castle and Collegiate Church of St Servatius
The main attraction in Quedlinburg is, of course, Quedlinburg Castle, a medieval fortified abbey fortress that sits on a hill known as Schlossberg or 'castle mountain'.
Views of Quedlinburg Castle and Collegiate Church of St Servatius
Within the complex, you also have the Collegiate Church of St Servatius. This church was dedicated in the year 1129, though it was preceded by earlier structures. It was one of the most highly regarded churches of the Empire during the Middle Ages.
Inside the Collegiate Church of St Servatius
The altar at the church of St Servatius in Quedlinburg
In the crypt beneath the choir, you’ll find the royal graves of Henry the 1st and his wife Mathilde. King Henry the Fowler (also known as King Heinrich I) ruled during the early 10th century and is credited with being the founder of medieval Germany and is considered the first German King, 
Lastly, the Schlossgarten or 'castle garden' offers a nice vantage point over the city. It’s red rooftops and church steeples as far as the eye can see - the quintessential medieval town!
Together, the aforementioned church, castle and old town are UNESCO World Heritage Sites thanks to their outstanding example of a European town with medieval foundations and preserved timber-framed buildings.
Guided Walking Tour
In the morning we joined a guided walking tour to learn about the town’s unique architecture. If you enjoy doing walking tours when you first arrive in a new destination, consider this Quedlinburg walking tour or for something a bit more unconventional this evening walking tour where a night watchman takes you down medieval streets recounting tales from another time.
Quedlinburg happens to be Germany's largest half-timbered town, with more than 1,300 timber-frame houses, and the cool thing is that you can walk around and see how this style evolved over the centuries.
Early example of a half-timbered building in Quedlinburg
One of the places we visited was the Timbered Museum that dates back to the 14th century and shows a very early example of this type of construction.
Here you can see an individual vertical beam from the ground all the way up to the roof, which meant the height of the framed houses was limited to the tallest trees that could be found.
Inside the museum’s courtyard, you can see examples of how timbered buildings were constructed - frames, walls and all.
The evolution of distinct medieval half-timbered buildings
Architectural details of half-timbered buildings up close
A row of distinctly colourful half-timbered buildings
We then continued our walk through town for more examples of how the half-timbered construction style evolved to have multiple protruding levels, and more elaborate design elements.
This town has some of the most interesting architecture we’ve seen, so if you’re into that sort of thing, it’s well worth joining a guided tour because you learn about all the little details that would otherwise go unnoticed.
Intersection of medieval lanes in Quedlinburg
Town hall covered in ivy as a distinct landmark in Quedlinburg
Lunch at Hotel zum Bär
We had a hard time finding a restaurant that was open, but eventually stumbled upon Hotel zum Bär which is located in Market Square.
Musician sculptures playing music at Market Square in Quedlinburg
It was a very cool autumn day, so we were craving hearty dishes and big portions, and this restaurant delivered on both fronts.
Pork medallions served in a creamy mushroom sauce for our hearty meal
I got the pork medallions served in a creamy mushroom sauce with a side of fried potatoes and bacon.
Meanwhile, Sam ordered the 'Bear Platter' (there was no bear meat, it was just a bear-sized portion!) featuring chicken, pork and beef on a bed of green beans with a side of potatoes and bacon.
Bear Platter featuring chicken, pork and beef was a meat lovers feast
We really enjoyed both meals and left feeling beyond satisfied.
Museum Lyonel Feininger
In the afternoon, we visited the Museum Lyonel Feininger, which bears the name of the German-American artist Lyonel Feininger.
Feininger was born in New York City but travelled to Germany at age 16 to study art. He was a leader in the Expressionist movement and worked as a painter, caricaturist and comic strip artist. He then went on to produce a large body of photographic works later in his career.
Museum Lyonel Feininger in Quedlinburg
Becoming Feininger Exhibition signboard in Quedlinburg
The museum houses many of his works and it's a nice way to spend part of the afternoon if you enjoy art.
Cheesecake at Cafe Vincent
After exploring Quedlinburg on foot most of the day, we decided to treat ourselves to a mid-afternoon snack.
We went to Cafe Vincent which is best known for its Käsekuchen or cheesecake! It's a very popular spot in town; there was actually a line of people waiting to order a slice of cheesecake from the window. Always a good sign.
A most decadent slice of Cheesecake at Cafe Vincent macro details
What caught our attention was the variety of cheesecakes they had on offer: mango, blueberry, lemon and thyme, basil, caramel and more. The list was endless. We opted for the mascarpone cheesecake with wild berries which was super creamy.
We also got some cappuccinos to try and beat our jet lag.
Brühl Park
Another thing to do in Quedliburg is to go for a stroll in Brühl Park. This park was just down the street from our hotel, so we made time to visit.
We first enjoyed a walk down Brühlstrasse, which is lined with beautiful mansions and villas. Eventually, we reached the Bode River, where a riverside trail led us to the park.
Brühl Park once formed part of the gardens of the former monastery and is home to a beautiful forest that feels like something out of a fairy tale.

Stay at Romantik Hotel am Brühl
During our visit to Quedlinburg, we stayed at Romantik Hotel am Brühl, a hotel situated just south of Schlossberg just a few minutes from the castle.
This hotel is spread out across a series of restored buildings including a timbered barn that was previously home to a seed-growing company, a palace formerly owned by a distillery, and a barn with Prussian vaulted ceilings.
Nomadic Samuel drinking a glass of red wine for dinner
Dinner at Restaurant Weinstube featuring fish for the main course
The hotel also has two onsite restaurants: Weinstube which focuses on regional dishes with an haute cuisine twist, and Le Mariage which is a bit more exclusive (it only seats 20 guests who get to enjoy a 7-course meal).
We had dinner at Weinstube one night and enjoyed a lovely meal.

Nomadic Samuel Jeffery enjoying a stroll in Quedlinburg's old town

More Things to Do in Quedlinburg: Festivals, Practical Tips & Travel Itinerary Ideas

Venture Beyond the Main Square: Hidden Streets & Local Shops

It’s tempting to spend your whole visit wandering the main Markt and Schlossberg, but Quedlinburg’s real magic is found in its side alleys. Get lost on purpose! 

Stroll Münzenberg Quarter: This old hillside neighborhood is a delight—think narrow cobbled lanes, tiny courtyards, and sweeping views back toward the castle. Many of the former monastery buildings have been lovingly restored as artists’ studios and homes. Don’t miss the Münzenberg Museum for a glimpse into daily life here through the centuries.

Pop into Handwerkergasse: This street is the heart of Quedlinburg’s artisanal revival. Here you’ll find woodworkers, candlemakers, weavers, and bookbinders, many happy to chat and demonstrate their craft. Perfect for a unique, handmade souvenir.

Seasonal Festivals: Celebrate Like a Local

Advent in Quedlinburg

December transforms Quedlinburg into a Christmas wonderland. The entire old town twinkles with fairy lights and the scent of mulled wine, roasted almonds, and gingerbread. The Advent in den Höfen event is especially famous—on each weekend of Advent, dozens of the town’s historic courtyards open to the public, revealing pop-up markets, music, crafts, and even local delicacies you won’t find elsewhere.

Kaiserfrühling (Emperor’s Spring Festival)

Every May, Quedlinburg hosts the Kaiserfrühling, a celebration of spring and the city’s imperial history. Expect costumed processions, medieval music, open-air markets, and plenty of opportunities to try local food and drink.

Musikfestspiele (Music Festival)

In summer, the UNESCO World Heritage site is the atmospheric backdrop for the Musikfestspiele, featuring classical concerts, jazz nights, and experimental performances in churches, courtyards, and gardens. If you’re a music lover, this is a can’t-miss event!

Explore the Harz Mountains: Day Trips & Outdoor Adventures

Quedlinburg is the perfect base for exploring the legendary Harz region—full of enchanted forests, half-ruined castles, and mysterious folklore.

Take the Harz Narrow Gauge Railway: Ride a steam train through thick forests and over stone viaducts to the summit of Brocken, the highest peak in northern Germany (famous for witches’ legends!). Trains depart from nearby Gernrode or Wernigerode.

Hike or Bike: Trails crisscross the Harz, from gentle river paths to more rugged mountain treks. Ask at your hotel or the tourist office for route maps. The Ilsetal Valley and Bodetal Gorge are two favorites.

Visit Wernigerode: A colorful town just half an hour away by train, famous for its own fairy-tale castle and timber-framed old town—plus a lively student vibe.

Practical Tips for Your Quedlinburg Visit

Getting Around: The old town is best explored on foot—wear comfy shoes! If you arrive by car, use one of the town’s designated parking lots just outside the pedestrian area.

Where to Stay: If you’re after something atmospheric, book a room in a restored timber-frame guesthouse or boutique hotel. Rooms fill up fast in summer and during festivals, so book well ahead.

Cash is Still King: Many small shops and bakeries in Quedlinburg are cash-only, so bring euros.

Language: While English is widely spoken in restaurants and hotels, a few German phrases go a long way (and locals will appreciate your effort).

Souvenir Shopping: Take Home a Piece of Quedlinburg

Bring home something special and local! Top ideas include:

Handmade candles (look for beeswax for that old-world scent)

Harz Mountain honey and herbal teas

Locally distilled schnapps (often flavored with wild fruits or herbs)

Books or art prints featuring Quedlinburg’s picturesque streets

Quedlinburg Travel Itinerary: 2 Day Trip Hour By Hour Trip Ideas

DAY ONE – “Postcard Quedlinburg” Essentials

TimeActivityWhy It’s Worth Your Morning08:00Sunrise at MünzenbergFive minutes’ uphill from the Marktplatz is Quedlinburg’s former craftsmen’s quarter. Climb the exterior staircase of the Romanesque St. Marienkirche ruin and watch first light creep across a 360-degree roof-scape – prime time for photos before day-trippers arrive.09:00Bakers’ Alley BreakfastGrab a still-warm Roggenbrötchen (rye bun) from Bäckerei Macheleidt on Blasiistraße and stroll the cobbles with it. Their hazelnut Schnecke is also absurdly good.10:00–12:30Castle & Collegiate Church of St ServatiusTake the guided crypt tour (small extra fee) – our docent pointed out 1,000-year-old fresco pigment still visible by torch-light. Don’t skip the Domschatz upstairs; the 10th-century ivory comb alone is jaw-dropping.13:00Lunch at Brauhaus LüddeSettle in under the hop vines and order the seasonal brew. The Lüdde-Schnitzel arrives blanketed in a beer-mushroom sauce and pairs perfectly with their copper-hued Edel-Bock.14:30–17:00Self-guided Half-Timbered HuntPick up the €1 “Fachwerk Map” from the Tourist Office. Must-sees include the Schuhhof courtyard (quirky shoe museum), Weberstraße 23 (narrowest house in town) and the magnificently wonky Wordgasse 3. Duck into the courtyards – many hide miniature herb gardens, artist studios and vintage shops.17:15Finkenherd & The Legend of Henry the FowlerThe tiny square where a bird snared King Henry’s hunting net in 919 AD. There’s a plaque explaining how that moment triggered the founding of the German kingdom.19:00Night-Watchman TourAxel the Nachtwächter greets you in cloak and tricorn, lantern in hand. Tales of medieval curfews, plague doctors and, yes, a love-sick pig called Eberhard. Leaves nightly from the Rathaus; reserve a spot in the Tourist Office. Finish with a warming mug of Schierker Feuerstein herbal liqueur.

DAY TWO – Beyond the Main Square

TimeActivityWhat Makes It Special09:00Lyonel Feininger Cycling CircuitRent bikes at Radladen Hoffmann (E-bikes available). Follow sign-posted plaques that replicate 18 of the expressionist’s sketches directly in front of the real-life scenes. A rolling outdoor gallery through meadows and timber-frame hamlets. 18 km loop – allow 2.5 h with photo stops.11:45Quedlinburger SenfladenReturn bikes, then pop into this mustard boutique opposite the Town Hall. Free tastings—from fig-mustard to chilli-honey—plus tiny 50 ml jars that meet carry-on liquid rules.12:15KlopstockhausBirthplace of poet Friedrich Gottlieb Klopstock. Even if you’re not into 18th-century odes, the creaking floors and painted beams offer an intimate look at middle-class domestic life.13:30Picnic in BrühlparkStock up on cheese (Harzer Roller) and a pretzel at Metzgerei Zimmermann before ambling across the Bode bridge. Locals sunbathe beneath giant plane trees, and in spring carpets of wild garlic perfume the air.15:00SternkiekerturmA short woodland path behind Brühlpark climbs to this modern lookout tower. The steel spiral offers another sweeping town panorama – fewer steps than the castle and free entry.16:00–18:00Steam Train to GernrodeThe narrow-gauge Harzer Schmalspurbahn whistles out of Quedlinburg station and puffs 25 minutes through beech forest to Gernrode. Sit in the open balcony carriage, feel the soot on your cheeks and grab a shandy at the tiny station buffet before returning. Trains run roughly every 90 min; check timetable.18:30Dinner at Anno QuedlinburgCandle-lit medieval tavern serving Flammkuchen, venison stew and home-brewed Met mead in clay mugs. Their “Pfännchen” skillet is enough for two hungry hikers.

Quedlinburg, Germany — 12-Question FAQ: Half-Timber Icons, Castle & Crypt, Walking Tours, Festivals, Photo Spots, Harz Day Trips, and Practical Tips

Why visit Quedlinburg—what makes it so special?

Quedlinburg is a perfectly preserved medieval town with more than a millennium of history, a skyline of red roofs and spires, and Germany’s largest concentration of half-timbered houses. Its trio of UNESCO-listed stars—Old Town, Quedlinburg Castle, and the Collegiate Church of St. Servatius—make it a dream for architecture lovers, photographers, and slow travelers.

How much time do I need—day trip or overnight?

You can see headline sights in one packed day (castle + church + Old Town), but an overnight lets you linger: add the Timbered Museum, Münzenberg quarter, Brühl Park, a night-watchman tour, and a relaxed dinner. Two days is ideal if you also want a Harz steam-train outing.

What are the absolute “don’t-miss” highlights?

Climb Schlossberg to tour Quedlinburg Castle, visit the Collegiate Church of St. Servatius (including the crypt with royal graves of Henry the Fowler and Queen Mathilde), and sweep the Schlossgarten for rooftop views. In town, wander Marktplatz, Schuhhof, and lanes lined with wildly characterful façades.

How do I get there and get around?

Frequent trains link Quedlinburg to Magdeburg/Halle; from Berlin it’s typically ~2.5–3.5 hours with a change. Driving is easy, with signed parking just outside the pedestrian core. Once here, walk—distances are short—and rent bikes if you want to reach parks or nearby viewpoints.

Where do I see the best half-timbered architecture (and learn how it evolved)?

Start at the Tourist Office for a simple “Fachwerk” map, then trace Poststraße, Wordgasse, and Weberstraße. Drop into the Timbered (Fachwerk) Museum to see early “ständerbau” techniques and how upper stories began to overhang across the centuries—spot the carvings, dates, and painted beams.

Are guided tours worth it—any unique options?

Yes. A daytime architectural walk helps decode details you’d miss, and the lantern-lit Night Watchman tour weaves medieval lore through backstreets after dark—equal parts history lesson and theater.

What (and where) should I eat?

For hearty classics, Hotel zum Bär around the Marktplatz hits the spot; Brauhaus Lüdde pairs local brews with schnitzel and mushroom gravies; Restaurant Weinstube (at Romantik Hotel am Brühl) offers regional dishes with finesse. Dessert is non-negotiable: Café Vincent’s käsekuchen lineup is legendary.

Any great viewpoints and photo tips?

For that storybook panorama, use Schlossgarten or the Koenigskur park edges; at sunrise, climb Münzenberg for a near-360° roofscape. The Sternkiekerturm lookout (behind Brühl Park) gives a fresh angle with fewer steps. Overcast skies make colors pop; rainy cobbles glow at blue hour.

What festivals or seasonal events should I plan around?

December’s Advent in den Höfen opens dozens of private courtyards with crafts, mulled wine, and lights—a true “only here” experience. Spring’s Kaiserfrühling celebrates imperial roots, and summer brings concerts in courtyards and churches across the UNESCO ensemble.

Can I combine Quedlinburg with Harz Mountains adventures?

Absolutely. Ride the Harz Narrow Gauge steam railway from Quedlinburg toward Gernrode/Wernigerode or up to Brocken for misty forest drama. Prefer trails? The Bodetal Gorge and Ilsetal valley hikes are easy day trips.

Practicalities: cash/cards, Sundays, language, and comfort?

Small cafés/shops may be cash-only—carry some euros. Many stores close early or entirely on Sundays. English is commonly understood in hospitality; a few German phrases earn smiles. Wear comfy shoes for cobbles; the Old Town is compact but undulating.

Where should I stay for atmosphere?

Timbered guesthouses and boutique stays abound; Romantik Hotel am Brühl (near Schlossberg) spreads across lovingly restored buildings and hosts two restaurants. Book well ahead for summer weekends and Advent—rooms go fast in this fairy-tale town.

Final Thoughts On Visiting Quedlinburg

Hopefully this gives you an idea of some of the things you can do in Quedlinburg during your visit.

We arrived on an early morning train and then stayed in town for the night, so everything you see here was done with one day in Quedlinburg.

The nice thing about a small, walkable, medieval town is that you can see quite a lot in one day!

If you enjoyed this destination, you may also be interested in visiting the medieval town of Lüneburg that's famous for salt, exploring Germany's northernmost wine region of Saale-Unstrut, or going on a Black Forest road trip.

#### 48 Hours in Freiburg: 10 Things You Can See & Do During Your Visit!
What can you do with 48 hours in Freiburg? Turns out, quite a bit!
After going on our Black Forest road trip, we travelled onwards to Freiburg for two action-packed days of food and wine with a bit of history and culture thrown in!
Sitting on the edge of the Black Forest and surrounded by vineyards, Freiburg is a charming town complete with half-timbered houses, small streams that crisscross the city known as Bächle, impressive city gates and twisting back streets with hanging ivy. The fairy tale practically writes itself, and yet because this is a university city, it also has a very youthful energy. 
We spent our 2 days in Freiburg sampling local wines, eating our way through local markets, soaking in the history in museums and cathedrals, partaking in a few local traditions, and doing a bit of hiking to enjoy those city views.
Here's how we spent 48 hours in Freiburg im Breisgau, Germany:

Freiburg Travel Guide: What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Freiburg Germany in 2 Days!
Visit Freiburger Münster
One attraction that you simply cannot miss on a trip to Freiburg is Freiburger Münster, better known as Freiburg Cathedral.
Its construction took over 300 years and what makes it even more special is it's the only Gothic church tower in all of Germany that was completed in the Middle Ages and has managed to survive until the present day.
The tower, which is built in an open lattice style, has been described as "the most beautiful spire on Earth". That may be just a tad dramatic, but I concede it's a beautiful structure.

I don't know how we lucked out so much, but we happened to visit while the organist was practising, and I don't think there's anything more magical than walking into a medieval cathedral and hearing those dark, dramatic notes echo across the stone building. I sat on a pew and let it transport me back a few centuries.
Admission to Freiburg Cathedral is free of charge, though it is closed to visitors during the daily service.
Take a guided walking tour
One of the highlights of our 48 hours in Freiburg was joining a guided walking tour of the Old Town.
One of my favourite things about guided tours led by locals is that you end up hearing all sorts of anecdotes, plus you have someone to point out all the details you'd otherwise miss.

For example, even though we visited Freiburg Cathedral on our own, we went back briefly with our guide who pointed out that each of the stained glass windows had been donated by different medieval guilds at the time. And sure enough, you can see the symbols for each of the guilds - scissors for the tailors, pretzels for the bakers, boots for the shoemakers and so on.

While we were a the cathedral, our guide also pointed out some markings we had missed just outside the main entrance. Because the local food market has been setting up here since medieval times, there were markings to measure the size of bread loaves sold in the market; a larger loaf when the harvest was plentiful, and a smaller loaf when times were lean. 

It's little things like this that we would've had no way of knowing unless we had a local to share Freiburg's secrets with us. 
Guided tours are a great way to get a bit of local insight into a place and I love it when it's a conversation that goes back and forth. 
Street food at Münstermarkt
We indulged in quite a bit of street food in Freiburg, and honestly, it was enough to make a proper meal out of it!
If you're in the mood to try a little bit of everything, then Münstermarket, the market that surrounds Freiburg Cathedral is the place to go. One side of the market focuses on fresh seasonal produce from local farms, and the other side has a lot of food trucks selling things like deli meats, regional cheeses, baked goods, and fast food.

Of course, one classic item we had to try in Freiburg was their famous Lange Rote, a sausage whose name translates to 'long red'. As the name suggests, this is a long, red, skinless, grilled sausage that measures 35 centimetres. It barely fits in a bun!
We also tried some Black Forest ham, known as Schwarzwälder Schinken. This is a dry-cured smoked ham that is salted and typically seasoned with garlic, coriander, pepper, and juniper berries. Very tasty and a nice option if you want to pair it with some fresh bread rolls and pack a little picnic.

And we also got a Pretzel coated in coarse salt. A nice little snack to enjoy on the go while we continued our walk around Freiburg. 
I'd say we managed to get a nice taste of the street food scene with only 48 hours in Freiburg. 
Mid-morning drinks at Rädle Feine Kost
During our walking tour of Freiburg, we stopped at Rädle Feine Kost. This is a wine bar that also serves small bites like paninis and cheese platters to go along with their wines.

The cool thing about this wine bar is that it has outdoor seating right on the Bächle. These small water canals are something unique to Freiburg. They were documented as far back as the 13th century when they used to serve as a water supply and a way to help fight fires.
There's even a local saying that if you accidentally step in the Bächle, you will marry a Freiburger, so keep that in mind when you visit!
Visit the Augustiner Museum
If you only have time for one museum in Freiburg, I would make time for the Augustiner Museum.
This museum is set in a former Augustinian Monastery and it focuses on works ranging from the Middle Ages up to the Baroque period.

The most impressive part (for me) was the Main Hall where you can see some of the original stone figures from Freiburg Cathedral. These stone sculptures would have been in high places that made them difficult to see, but here in the museum, you can admire them up close. 
The same goes for some of the original stained glass windows which are housed in this museum. You can see the colours and the details, and even the passing of time on the paint itself, in a way that isn't possible from a distance.

Aside from that, if you make your way to the museum's attic, which is an architectural work of art in and of itself, you can view 19th century paintings by German painters who favoured Italian country scenes and even a bit of court portraiture. 
Afternoon coffee at Adelhaus
Adelhaus is a plant-based cafe that offers outdoor seating in a beautiful little square that's tucked away from the busy streets. 
If you're in the mood for a little something sweet, I would recommend trying their Eisschokolade, which is "hot" chocolate poured over ice cream and topped with whipped cream. You can order it with vanilla or chocolate ice cream, or make it an Eiskaffee if you want that shot of caffeine. 
I also tried their Kirschstreusel, a cherry crumble cake that is the perfect mix of sweet and tart.
But it's not just coffee and cakes here. They're also well-known for their vegetarian buffet which is by the weight and features lots of healthy, savoury options. 
Ride the Schlossbergbahn
Another fun thing to do in Freiburg is to ride the Schlossbergbahn, a funicular railway that takes you up the mountain where you can enjoy city views.
It takes less than 3 minutes to reach the top via the funicular and you then have various hiking trails to choose from to continue further on.

You can hike up to Schlossbergturm, a 153-step observation tower that offers views over Freiburg and the surrounding area. Alternatively, you can make your way over to Kanonenplatz, another lookout spot that offers city views from a slightly different vantage point - it's especially nice for sunset. 
If you're up for a bit of a hike, one option is to take the funicular up and then walk down so you can get a taste of the Black Forest without even leaving the city. 
Wine tasting at Alte Wache
Another fun activity we enjoyed during our visit to Freiburg was a wine tasting at Alte Wache - Haus der badischen Weine.
This wine bar is centrally located in Münsterplatz with an outdoor patio that offers views of the impressive Freiburg Cathedral and the Historic Merchants' Hall. The perfect spot to enjoy a drink and do a bit of people-watching!

We visited during the summer months, so we tried their signature drink Kalte Sophie, a wine slushy that you can get with either red wine or white wine. It's very refreshing, but it's also easy to forget you're drinking wine because it goes down a little too easy!

Aside from being a wine bar, Alte Wache also has a wine shop upstairs on the second floor, which is where they offer wine tastings. 
Fun fact: did you know Freiburg is surrounded by over 1,600 acres of vineyards?
Dine around the World at Markthalle
Our 48 hours in Freiburg gave us just enough time to sample some of the local food scene at Markthalle. This 19th-century building was once a newspaper printing press, but today it is home to a covered food market and dining hall featuring cuisines from around the world.
You can find everything from Afghan food to Brazilian drinks, and freshly-baked pizzas to assorted sushi boats. Everything looked so appetizing that it was genuinely hard to choose just one spot!

I ended up getting the fresh spring rolls with tofu in a peanut sauce from a Vietnamese food stand. The spring rolls were so fresh and loaded with cilantro, mint, and Thai basil - a wonderful explosion of flavours and the perfect summer meal. Meanwhile, Sam opted for a delicious pad Thai with shrimp.

The nice thing about this type of set-up (especially if you're visiting with a group of friends) is that everyone can get whatever they feel like having from a different vendor, and then you can enjoy a meal together under the same roof.
Stay the night in Freiburg, Germany
During our visit to Freiburg, we stayed at the Boutiquehotel am Stadtgarten.
The hotel was a very short walk into Freiburg's Old Town, which made it ideal for getting around on foot. It was also just one block from the Stadtgarten, a beautiful 19th-century park featuring ponds and gardens. 
They had a German-style breakfast buffet with lots of fresh fruits, muesli, deli meats, cheeses, fish, bread, and lots of coffee. It was a nice stay.

And that's a wrap for our 48 hours in Freiburg! I hope this blog post gave you a few ideas of some of the things you can see, do, eat and drink with just 2 days in the city. 
And if you're looking for some more travel inspiration, here are some other places to consider visiting in Germany. 

Freiburg Trip Planner: Make Your 48 Hours Count

A Lazy-But-Perfect 48-Hour Itinerary

Day 1 — Old Town, Markets & Museum Magic

Morning: Start in Münsterplatz as the market sets up. Grab a pretzel, share a Schwarzwälder Schinken roll, and commit to the Lange Rote—it’s Freiburg on a bun. Step into Freiburger Münster between services; look up at that lacework spire and, if you’re lucky, let the organ practice goosebump you into silence.

Late morning: Join a guided walking tour. You’ll learn to spot those guild symbols in the stained glass (tailors’ scissors, bakers’ pretzels) and the bread-measuring marks outside the cathedral—little details you’ll forever see afterwards.

Lunch: Slide into a sun chair at Rädle Feine Kost on the Bächle for a glass of local white and a small plate. (Toes near water = immediate holiday mode.)

Afternoon: Wander to the Augustiner Museum. The main hall’s original stone figures from the cathedral and the big, glowing stained glass are a close-up date with the Middle Ages.

Coffee o’clock: Adelhaus for Eisschokolade or Eiskaffee and a slice of Kirschstreusel in that tucked little square.

Evening: Markthalle for dinner—let everyone pick a different stand and meet back at the communal tables. Nightcap strolling the Bächle lanes.

Day 2 — Hills, Views & Baden Wines

Morning: Hop on the Schlossbergbahn funicular. Walk to Schlossbergturm (153 steps, all worth it) or meander to Kanonenplatz for Münster-plus-red-roofs views. If you fancy, hike down through the trees to earn second breakfast.

Midday: Back in Münsterplatz, people-watch over a plate of local cheese and a grape-friendly salad.

Afternoon: Alte Wache – Haus der badischen Weine for a tasting flight or their summer star Kalte Sophie (wine slushy!). Pop upstairs for the shop if you need a souvenir bottle.

Late afternoon: Free time for a tram ride to a leafy neighborhood, a slow wander of ivy-wrapped lanes, or another museum.

Evening: Sunset return to Kanonenplatz (soft light + bells in the distance), then linger over a long dinner back in the Old Town.

Self-Guided Old-Town Loop (Easy, Pretty, Snack-Friendly)

Start: Münsterplatz → Freiburger Münster (inside & outside details) → Historisches Kaufhaus (red façade, arcades) → along Krämerstraße (shops, cobbles) → Schwabentor (Swabian Gate) → weave residential lanes to Augustinerplatz (sunny steps, student energy) → Augustiner Museum → Oberlinden (half-timbered houses) → back via Bertoldstraße (tram bells! café tables) → Münsterplatz for a final spin.

Time: 60–90 minutes without stops; we recommend doubling it to honor snacks and serendipity.

Eat & Drink Like You Mean It

Street-Food Hits to Try Once (and Then Again)

Lange Rote: Skinless, grilled, 35 cm of fame. Ketchup/mustard optional; grin unavoidable.

Schwarzwälder Schinken: Smoky, herby, thinly sliced—say yes to fresh rolls.

Soft Pretzel: Salty, chewy, perfect walking companion.

Cake & Coffee Interludes (Because Freiburg Runs on Kaffeepause)

Eisschokolade / Eiskaffee at Adelhaus: Summer in a glass—ice cream, whipped cream, and all the joy.

Kirschstreusel: Tart cherries, buttery crumble. Consider it your sightseeing fuel.

Wine Time, Two Ways

Rädle Feine Kost: Perch by the Bächle with a crisp white and a panini or cheese plate.

Alte Wache: Münster views, Kalte Sophie when it’s hot, and upstairs tastings showcasing Baden varieties (hello, Pinot Noir/Spätburgunder).

Markthalle Strategy (So Many Stalls, So Little Time)

Do a full lap first; don’t commit on the first whiff of pesto.

Mix continents at your table: Vietnamese rolls + pad thai + pizza slice + Brazilian caipirinha? Absolutely.

Go early evening for fewer lines; peak weekend lunch can be a (cheerful) scrum.

Getting Around Freiburg (You’ll Walk a Lot, Happily)

OptionBest ForProsKeep in MindWalkingOld Town explorationsPhotogenic lanes, spontaneous stopsUneven cobbles; comfy shoes winTramLonger hops across townFrequent, simple, scenicValidate tickets; check last runsBikeFlat stretches, riverside pathsVery Freiburg, very funWatch tracks & pedestriansFunicularSchlossberg views3 minutes to “wow”Weather can affect openingCarBlack Forest day tripsMaximum freedomNot needed in Old Town; parking is tight

Ticket tip: Day or 24-hour tickets usually save money if you’re tram-hopping. Machines default to German—look for the English flag button.

Where to Stay (Pick Your Vibe)

Altstadt (Old Town): Medieval charm, markets on your doorstep, bells as your alarm.

Stadtgarten area: A green breather one block from cafés—easy to walk everywhere.

Wiehre: Elegant, residential, tree-lined streets; great for a quieter base.

Herdern: Leafy and local with quick tram links into the centre.

When to Visit (There’s No Wrong Answer)

Spring (Apr–May): Blossoms, markets ramp up, perfect walking temps.

Summer (Jun–Aug): Long evenings, outdoor concerts, Kalte Sophie season.

Autumn (Sep–Oct): Vineyard gold, wine festivals, crunchy leaves on Schlossberg.

Winter (Nov–Dec): Christmas market sparkle, cosy cafés, moody Münster organ vibes.

Short Hikes & Easy Viewpoints

Schlossbergturm: Steel spiral, 360° views, photo euphoria.

Kanonenplatz: Sunset classic; bring a snack and let the city glow.

Woodland path down: Funicular up + forest stroll down = the gentlest Black Forest teaser.

Rainy-Day Bliss

Augustiner Museum: Medieval to Baroque treasure chest (don’t miss the main hall).

Cosy café crawl: Order something whipped-creamy and pretend you planned it.

Window-shopping arcades: Freiburg has a knack for sheltering you just when it drizzles.

Easy Day-Trip Ideas (If You’ve Snagged an Extra Day)

Black Forest villages & lakes: Picture-book towns, forest trails, and serene water (yes, you can eat cake named after the forest too).

Vineyard rambles: Gentle slopes, tasting rooms, and picnic-friendly views in the Baden wine region.

Border flirt: France and Switzerland are temptingly close if you’re feeling international.

Freiburg For Families

Bächle boat fun: Little wooden boats + shallow streamlets = instant kid joy.

Schlossberg adventure: Funicular ride, tower climb, forest paths—built-in bedtime guarantee.

Markthalle lunches: Picky eaters paradise (and easy high chairs).

Handy Etiquette & Tiny Phrases

Hallo / Guten Tag (hi/hello), Bitte (please/you’re welcome), Danke (thanks).

A friendly “Hallo!” when you enter a small shop is standard and sweet.

Cash still matters at markets; cards are common but not guaranteed at tiny stands.

Sundays are for resting—markets and many shops snooze. Plan snacks accordingly.

Packing Checklists (Season-Smart & Stream-Friendly)

Essentials for all seasons

Comfortable shoes (cobbles + tower stairs)

Light layer/windbreaker (Schlossberg breezes are real)

Small umbrella or packable raincoat

Reusable water bottle (market munching is thirsty work)

Daypack that closes (hands free for pretzels)

Nice-to-haves

Picnic kit (napkins, pocket knife for cheese, reusable cutlery)

Power bank (navigation + photos = hungry phone)

Tiny first-aid (blister plasters = hero move)

Quick Comparisons to Help You Choose

Markets vs. Markthalle vs. Sit-Down Restaurants

WhereBest ForWhy GoGood to KnowMünstermarktGrazing + picnicsHyper-local produce & street eatsCash handy; mornings are buzzyMarkthalleGroups + varietyGlobal stalls under one roofPeak times are lively (arrive early/late)RestaurantsSlow mealsSeasonal plates, regional prideBook for weekend dinners

Views: Tower vs. Terrace

SpotEffortView StylePro TipSchlossbergturm153 steps360° city + forestGo early or late for soft lightKanonenplatzShort strollMünster close-up + rooftopsSunset picnic spot of dreams

Freiburg Trip FAQ

How many hours do I need for the Augustiner Museum?

Give it 60–90 unrushed minutes. The main hall’s sculptures and stained glass reward lingering, and the attic paintings deserve a quiet loop.

Is the Münster free to enter?

Yes, visiting is free outside of services. Respect quiet times and posted entry hours; the door steward will happily wave you back later if mass is on.

Can I drink the water in the Bächle?

Nope—those streamlets are for charm, play, and happy background sounds, not for sipping. Bring a refillable bottle for drinking water instead.

Do I need cash for the market?

It helps. Many stalls accept cards, but cash is still king for quick bites and small purchases at Münstermarkt.

What’s the easiest viewpoint if I don’t want to climb the tower?

Ride the Schlossbergbahn and stroll to Kanonenplatz—gentle path, big payoff, zero spiral-stair commitment.

Where should I try local wine if I’m short on time?

Alte Wache in Münsterplatz is perfect: curated Baden wines by the glass, tastings upstairs, and “Kalte Sophie” if it’s hot out.

Is Freiburg walkable for the whole weekend?

Yes. The Old Town is compact, flat, and made for wandering. Sprinkle in a tram or funicular when your legs say so.

What’s one food I shouldn’t leave without trying?

The Lange Rote. It’s iconic, messy in the best way, and the fastest route to feeling like you “get” Freiburg.

How do I fit both the cathedral and a walking tour?

Do a quick solo peek at the Münster early, then circle back with a guided tour for the storytelling and hidden details. You’ll notice twice as much the second time.

Are Sundays a good day for markets?

Most shops snooze on Sundays, and the weekday vibe is different. Plan your market grazing for Monday–Saturday and save Sunday for Schlossberg, coffee, and museums that are open.

Can I combine Schlossberg and the museum on a rainy day?

Absolutely. If skies are moody, start at the Augustiner Museum, then ride the funicular if the rain lifts for a misty, atmospheric view.

Is Freiburg a good base for the Black Forest without a car?

Yes. You can taste the forest by hiking down from Schlossberg, join day tours, or use regional trains and buses to nearby lakes and villages. Save the car for deeper, multi-stop wandering.

This trip was made possible in partnership with the German National Tourist Board.

#### Vienna for Foodies: Where to Eat & What to Eat in Vienna, Austria!
Wondering where to eat in Vienna and what to order? In this foodie guide, we'll highlight a combination of restaurants serving traditional Austrian dishes as well as international cuisine, brunch spots, street food stands, cafes, and bars for evening cocktails!

So you've spent the day sightseeing around Vienna and you've worked up an appetite? Where should you go and what should you eat? Being the foodie that I am, I tried to hit up as many markets, restaurants, and cafes as possible during my visit, so now I'm going to share with you a selection of the places I most enjoyed, featuring a mix of Austrian dishes as well as international cuisine. Guten Appetit!

Want to join a guided Vienna food tour? This one features Viennese breakfast, lunch and street food! It's 6 hours of mouthwatering fun. 

Vienna Food Guide: The Best Places to Eat in Vienna

Neni am Naschmarkt

For Israeli and Middle Eastern food in Vienna

One of my favourite food stops in Vienna was Naschmarkt, a popular market in the city. Most people may know there's a flea market section and a produce section, but there are also quite a few little restaurants sprinkled in.

After walking through the market and being tempted by all sorts of international cuisines, we chose Neni am Naschmarkt. This is an Israeli and Middle Eastern food restaurant with a handful of locations across Europe.

I ordered the Sabich, which was a mixed plate that came with fried eggplant, hummus, tomato-coriander salad, tahini, a poached egg, and amba (a tangy pickled mango sauce). I also added an order of falafel on top, and of course, there was plenty of pita to go around. Hence, I loved the variety and contrasting flavours in the dish and I really think this is one of the best items on the menu!

Aside from that, I also got to try the Oven Eggplant that Sam ordered. This came with a tomato-tahini salsa, an egg and pita bread.

And because this is Vienna, we ordered Hugos - I mean, you really can't go wrong with an elderflower cordial, Prosecco, fresh mint and lime.

One thing I'll mention is that this is a very popular restaurant in Naschmarkt, so if you're planning to go at peak times or on a weekend, it might be a good idea to make a reservation.

Address: Naschmarkt 510



Wirr

For a cool brunch spot in Vienna

Wirr was one of our favourite breakfast spots in Vienna, so we went back a couple of times to sample a few different items on their menu.

On our first visit, we grabbed a table out on the sidewalk and ordered 2 different breakfasts.

The Austrian breakfast, or Wiener Frühstück, came with a bread roll, a croissant, homemade marmalade, butter, sliced cheese, sliced ham, and an egg. Perfect if you like a mix of sweet and savoury to start the day.

The farmer's breakfast, or Bauernfrühstück, came with 2 pieces of brown bread, bacon, mountain cheese, tomatoes, pickles, cream cheese with grated carrots, and hardboiled eggs. A good choice if you woke up with a big appetite.

There was also lots of coffee to start the morning!

The second time we went back, we decided to try some of the more international items on the menu.

I ordered the Shakshuka, which consisted of 2 poached eggs on a bed of tomato sauce with fried coriander and toast, and meanwhile, Sam ordered the Oriental Plate, which came with hummus, falafel, grilled vegetables, chickpeas, and homemade pita bread.

It was all so good! Seriously, I could have eaten here every day of our stay, but there were other places left to sample.

As a tip, if you don't make it here for breakfast, let me tell you that it's also a bar, club and restaurant, so there's basically something going on any time of day.

Address: Burggasse 70

Gastwirtschaft Wratschko

For a traditional Austrian restaurant in Vienna

Like most foodies who come to Vienna, we ate at Gastwirtschaft Wratschko because it had been recommended by the late Anthony Bourdain, and while I wouldn't say it was one of the best culinary experiences in the world, it was definitely a cultural experience!

Gastwirtschaft Wratschko is a wood-panelled, dimly lit, smoky restaurant with a pub-like feel where the waitstaff come when they're ready and serve you with a bit of sass - some will think that's slightly rude, others will tell you, that's just Austrian!

The restaurant specializes in traditional Austrian cuisine with a few strange items on the menu - pig's stomach, anyone? - and the portions are large and hearty.

We got the steak with green peppercorn sauce and potatoes, which was very tasty and just what we needed on a cool autumn night.

We also decided to try one vegetarian dish, a cabbage, tomato, and cheese lasagna. I had never had a lasagna with cabbage before, but it worked and we devoured every last bite!

Address: Neustiftgasse 51

Ulrich

For a stylish patio restaurant in Vienna

While in Vienna, we also ate at Ulrich, a cosy restaurant with a bit of a hipster vibe, that offered both indoor and outdoor seating.

I decided to order the Chorizo with Herb Polenta, capers, and a tomato and bean ragout! It was wonderful - the chorizo was spicy and juicy, and the capers gave the whole dish a bit of a kick.

Meanwhile, Sam got the dish of the day which was a Mushroom Risotto - super creamy with cracked pepper and parmesan on top!

This place had a very relaxed feel and it was just a nice place to enjoy a leisurely meal.

Address: Sankt-Ulrichs-Platz 1



Café Sacher

For a fancy cafe in Vienna

I've already written about our experience eating at Cafe Sacher - a must when in Vienna! - so I'll keep this mention brief.

We ordered the Original Sacher Torte mit Schlag, which is the famed chocolate cake with a thin layer of apricot jam, covered in dark chocolate icing with whipped cream on the side. It did not disappoint!

To mix things up, we also got the Liliput Original Sacher Gewürzgugelhupf, which is a Viennese ring cake with sweet spices, ginger and candied oranges. It tasted very festive and it was a pleasant surprise - it's the kind of cake I'd love to have around the holiday season.

Yes, eating at Café Sacher may involve waiting in line, especially if it's high season, but it's one of those things we really wanted to experience in Vienna. And also, the setting was gorgeous! Imagine not getting to see this?

Address: Philharmoniker Strasse4

Erich

For all-day brunch or tacos in Vienna

Erich is the sister restaurant to Ulrich, which we previously ate at.

We had heard good things about the tacos here, so that's exactly what we came for! You could either order them individually or get sliders of 3.

We sampled a few different ones including the Avocado Feta with refried beans, leeks, salsa, coriander and lime; the Mango Prawn with rocket, tomato, lime-mayo and basil; and Chilli con Carne with cream cheese, coriander and sesame. My absolute favourite was the Avocado Feta - I just can't resist a lime and coriander combo!

For drinks, it was once again all about the Hugos. Elderflower, anyone?

And even though we went for the tacos, they also had lots of really cool items on their menu like Poke Bowls, Quinoa Bowls and Halloumi Bowls, and they're vegan-friendly.

Address: Neustiftgasse 27

Schweizerhaus

For hearty Austrian cuisine in Vienna

The name of this restaurant translates to "Swiss House" but don't let that confuse you, Schweizerhaus specializes in Austrian cuisine.

This restaurant is located in the middle of Prater Park and it was great food stop after exploring the area.

Sam ordered the Austrian Goulash with bread dumplings and pickles. We had recently tried 2 different types of Goulash in neighbouring Hungary - one that was more like a soup, and another that was more like a stew - and the Austrian version was thick and hearty.

The meat was super tender and you could just break the pieces apart with the use of your fork, and the sauce was rich in flavour, perfect for dipping the bread dumplings.

For my main dish, I got the Wiener Schnitzel vom Schwein, which means it was a pork cutlet as opposed to a veal cutlet. One thing we noticed when ordering Schnitzel in Austria is that the prices were much higher if it was veal as opposed to pork. To accompany the Schnitzel, we also ordered the Wiener Erdäpfelsalat, or Viennese potato salad.

And we couldn't leave without dessert! We got the Wiener Apfelstrudel, or Viennese Apple Strudel, because when in Vienna!

Address: Prater 116



Aida

For elaborate coffees and pastries in Vienna

So I've already talked about getting cake at Cafe Sacher, but if you have a bit of a sweet tooth and you're looking for something tasty and more affordable, there's Aida.

This is a chain with multiple locations across the city and the cafes are easy to spot because they're all pink. We went to their location in Neubau and feasted on cake!

I ordered a slice of their Mozart Cake and it was divine! It was basically a chocolate cake with a layer of pistachio marzipan and nougat filling, and it was all covered in a chocolate fondant. It was so good it rivalled the Sacher Torte - at least to my tastebuds!

And if you're looking for a specialty Viennese coffee, you can't go wrong with the Wiener Melange; one shot of espresso topped with steamed milk and foam.

Address: Multiple locations across Vienna

Würstelstand

For late-night street food in Vienna

I've mentioned some must-try dishes and must-try desserts in Vienna, but now let's talk about street food!

One Austrian street food snack you have to try is Käsekrainer and you need to get it at a Würstelstand, a traditional Austrian food stand.

The Käsekrainer is a sausage filled with small pieces of cheese. When the sausage is cooked, the cheese warms up, and then when it's sliced, it begins to ooze out! It's because of this that it's been nicknamed the "puss sausage", but names aside, it's actually very tasty.

You can ask for it served in a bun or sliced on a tray; mustard goes well with it.

Address: Multiple locations across Vienna

Der Dachboden

For cocktails with a view in Vienna

Last but not least, let's talk about where you can get a cocktail with beautiful city views.

Der Dachboden is a bar set on the rooftop of the 25hours Hotel in Vienna's Museum Quarter. They have a fun cocktail list with names like Smashing Pumpkin, Liquid Apple Pie and Darling Clementine, and inside the bar, there's also a photo booth to remember the night by.

It's a buzzing spot for nightlife in Vienna, and the city looks pretty magical from the balcony.

Address: Lerchenfelder Strasse 1-3

Eat Like a Local: Vienna’s Coffeehouse Culture

Order coffee and cake together—desserts are part of the ritual, not an afterthought.

Keep your receipt; some cafés check it on your way to the restroom.

Treat a single coffee like a “seat license”: lingering is welcomed, not rushed.

Say “Zahlen, bitte” (zah-len) to ask for the bill; it’s not left on the table.

Viennese Coffee Cheat Sheet

DrinkWhat It IsBest ForInsider TipWiener Melange1 shot + steamed milk + foamFirst timersVienna’s “cappuccino,” gentler roastEinspännerDouble espresso + whipped creamAfternoon pick-me-upDon’t stir; sip through the creamVerlängerterEspresso “lengthened” with hot waterLong sippersAdd milk on the side if you likeFranziskanerMilder coffee + more milk + creamDessert pairingOrder with strudel or torteKleiner/Großer BraunerSingle/double espresso with creamEspresso fans“Brauner” = with cream; sizes matter

What to Order: Classic Viennese Dishes Worth Trying

“Vom Kalb” = veal; “vom Schwein” = pork; price follows suit.

Ask for Erdäpfelsalat mit Kernöl (pumpkin seed oil) for a nutty upgrade.

Tafelspitz is served in courses—sip the broth first, then the meat.

Kaiserschmarrn takes time; order it early so it lands after mains.

Vegetarian? Gemüse-strudel, Eiernockerl, and Käsespätzle are reliable winners.

Viennese Classics

DishCore ComponentsPrice Range (EUR)Insider TipWiener SchnitzelBreaded veal/pork cutlet, lemon16–28Share one + sides for varietyTafelspitzPoached beef, broth, sauces, sides22–34Try marrow on toast if offeredGulasch (Austrian)Thick paprika beef stew12–18Order extra bread dumplingsApfelstrudelApple, raisin, flaky pastry4–7 (slice)Ask for warm + vanilla sauceKaiserschmarrnCaramelized pancake, plum compote10–15 (share)Good for 2–3 people

Street Food & Market Guide: Würstelstand to Naschmarkt

At kiosks, “im Brot” = in a bun; “geschnitten” = sliced on a plate with bread.

Mustard = Senf, extra spicy = scharf; add Kren for fresh horseradish heat.

Naschmarkt is busiest midday Sat; weekdays are calmer for grazing.

Brunnenmarkt shines for Turkish/Mediterranean bites at wallet-happy prices.

Bring cash; contactless is growing, but not universal with tiny vendors.

Street & Market Bites

SpotBest BitePrice RangeInsider TipWürstelstandKäsekrainer, Bosna, Bratwurst€4–€7Ask for “mit alles” to try condimentsNaschmarktMezze, seafood, pastries€5–€15 (per dish)Sample before you commitBrunnenmarktFlatbreads, olives, produce€1–€8Weekday mornings = fewest crowdsTurkish bakeries (various)Simit, börek€1–€4Great portable breakfastHearty soups stands (winter)Frittaten, goulash soup€4–€7Warm up between museums

Reservations, Budgets & Timing: Dining In Vienna

Scan chalkboards for Mittagsmenü in the 11:30–14:30 window.

Cards are widely accepted; keep € cash for kiosks and tiny cafés.

Say your tip aloud when paying: “€24, bitte” on a €22 bill.

Many kitchens close 15:00–18:00; plan snacks to bridge the gap.

Money & Timing

TopicTypical RangeBest ForInsider TipMittagsmenü€9–€16Value huntersAsk what’s house-made that dayMid-range dinner€18–€35 ppLeisurely eveningsShare starters, save room for cakeCoffee & cake€6–€12Afternoon pauseWater is complimentary on traysTippingRound up ~5–10%Table serviceState total when you payReservations3–5 days aheadPeak spotsMessage via Instagram for quick replies

What to Drink: Beyond the Hugo 

Ask for Grüner if you like dry, zesty whites with schnitzel.

Gemischter Satz = Viennese field blend; a delicious, very local white.

Sturm appears briefly in early autumn—drink it fresh, handle gently.

A Spritzer is sessionable; perfect for long patio hangs.

Heuriger nights (wine taverns in Grinzing/Heiligenstadt) are worth the tram ride.

Drink Decoder

DrinkFlavor VibeBest WithInsider TipGrüner VeltlinerDry, peppery, citrusSchnitzel, saladsAustria’s signature whiteZweigeltBright cherry, medium bodyGoulash, sausagesChill lightly in summerSpritzer (Weißer)Light, bubbly, crispAfternoon patiosRatio varies—ask for “halb/halb”Sturm (seasonal)Sweet-tart, lightly fizzyHearty snacksOnly in early autumnZwickl beerUnfiltered, smoothPub fareGreat gateway to Austrian beer

A Perfect Foodie Day in Vienna (Walkable & Delicious)

Breakfast: classic Wiener Frühstück or egg-based shakshuka to fuel the miles.

Market graze: share a börek or mezze plate; keep lunch light if cake is in your future.

Lunch: Tafelspitz for ceremony, Gulasch for cozy; add a simple salad.

Coffee & cake: Wiener Melange + Sacher Torte or Apfelstrudel (warm!).

Aperitif: Spritzer or Hugo before dinner—go easy, there’s dessert coming.

Dinner: Schnitzel + Erdäpfelsalat or Käsespätzle; split Kaiserschmarrn to close.

One-Day Eatinerary

TimeStopWhat to OrderTip09:00Café breakfastWiener Frühstück / eggsLinger; plan the day11:00Market strollMezze, pastry biteTaste before you buy13:00Beisl lunchTafelspitz or GulaschMittagsmenü if offered15:30Coffee & cakeMelange + Strudel/TorteGrab a window table18:00AperitifSpritzer or HugoPeople-watch on a patio20:00DinnerSchnitzel or KäsespätzleShare a Kaiserschmarrn

FAQ: Vienna for Foodies — Where & What to Eat

What are the must-try Viennese dishes?

Start with Wiener Schnitzel (veal or pork), Tafelspitz (poached beef served in courses), Austrian goulash with bread dumplings, Apfelstrudel, and Kaiserschmarrn. These staples give you the classic sweet-savory spectrum.

Where can I experience Vienna’s coffeehouse culture?

Head to historic cafés for coffee and cake—think elegant grand cafés downtown and traditional neighborhood spots. Order coffee and dessert together and plan to linger; it’s part of the ritual.

What exactly is a Wiener Melange—and other common coffees?

A Wiener Melange is an espresso with steamed milk and foam (Vienna’s take on a cappuccino). Also try an Einspänner (double espresso topped with whipped cream) and a Verlängerter (espresso lengthened with hot water).

Which markets are best for grazing?

Naschmarkt is the big, central crowd-pleaser with sit-down restaurants and international bites; Brunnenmarkt skews more local and budget-friendly with great Turkish/Mediterranean snacks. Weekdays are calmer than Saturdays.

Do I need restaurant reservations?

For popular dinner spots, yes—book 3–5 days ahead, longer for weekends. Markets, cafés, and würstelstands are usually fine without reservations.

What are typical dining hours—and are there afternoon closures?

Many kitchens pause between roughly 15:00–18:00. Plan a late-afternoon coffee-and-cake stop or a market snack to bridge the gap.

How do tipping and payment work in Vienna?

Round up or add ~5–10% for table service. Say the total aloud when paying. Cards are widely accepted, but keep some cash for kiosks and tiny cafés.

What should I order at a würstelstand?

Try Käsekrainer (cheese-filled sausage) or Bosna (spiced sausage). Ask for it “im Brot” (in a bun) or sliced on a plate, with mustard (Senf), horseradish (Kren), and pickles.

Is pork or veal schnitzel better?

Both are authentic. Veal (“vom Kalb”) is traditional and pricier; pork (“vom Schwein”) is more budget-friendly. Either pairs beautifully with Erdäpfelsalat (potato salad)—ask for pumpkin seed oil for a nutty note.

What should I drink with Viennese food?

Order Grüner Veltliner with schnitzel, a local Gemischter Satz (Viennese field blend), or a refreshing white Spritzer. In early autumn, look for lightly fizzy Sturm; in the evening, consider a rooftop cocktail bar for city views.

Are there good vegetarian or vegan options?

Yes—look for Gemüse-strudel, Eiernockerl, Käsespätzle, seasonal soups, and mezze-style plates at markets and modern cafés. Many spots clearly label vegan/vegetarian dishes.

How can I eat well on a budget?

Target Mittagsmenü (weekday lunch specials), markets, Turkish bakeries for börek and simit, and würstelstands. Share mains and desserts to sample more without overspending.

Vienna Guide For Foodies

And those are my suggestions for where to eat in Vienna! Hopefully, this will give you some ideas of new bars, restaurants and cafes to try when you visit the city.

As you can see there's a little bit of everything from traditional Austrian cuisine to more international flavours, so all you have to do is bring your appetite!

And if your travels also bring you to Salzburg, here's a list of places to eat in Salzburg.

Read More about Austria:

Vienna Guide For Foodies

10 Food Tours in Vienna

5 Fun Bike Tours in Vienna

Sip Your Way Across Vienna's Vineyards

5 Vienna Boat Tours to Cruise the Danube

Austria's Almabtrieb Cow Parade

Visiting Tyrol's Alpbachtal Valley

Visiting Werfen Castle

#### 10 Traditional Tyrolean Dishes You'll Want to Eat in Austria!
No matter where I go, I always like to dive right into the local cuisine and in Tyrol, it was no different. The foodie in me was curious to see what Tyrolean food was like, so in between exploring the mountains and valleys and attending a cow parade, I made it my personal mission to order as many traditional Tyrolean dishes as possible, and let me tell you, they were goooood! So without further delay, here are 10 mouthwatering dishes you need to try in Tyrol, Austria!

Tyrolean Dishes to Try
Kasspatzln
Let's start with Käsespätzle, or as they call it in Tyrol, Kasspatzln. 
This dish consists of soft egg noodles mixed with grated cheese and sprinkled with crispy fried onions on top.
Kasspatzln is oftentimes served in the same pan it was cooked it, and when it arrives at the table, the noodles are coated in melted cheese that stretches into strings as you try to take a bite.
It's such a popular dish that you'll find it is served in restaurants as well as out-of-the-way mountain huts - because people expect their Kasspatzln after a long day of hiking, what else!
This was my personal favourite Tyrolean dish and I guarantee it won't disappoint your taste buds.

Tiroler Gröstl
Another dish I tried in Tyrol was the Tiroler Gröstl, sometimes just called, Gröstl.
This is yet another hearty dish that you can enjoy after an active day of skiing or hiking in the Alps.
Tiroler Gröstl is a potato, onion, and bacon fry up. Everything is fried until golden, sprinkled with chopped parsley, and then served with a fried egg on top. It's a simple recipe, but it's delicious!
This is a very filling dish, so if you're really hungry, you can order it as a main, or you can get it as a side to share with your group at the table.
Tiroler Speckknödel
Another popular dish in Tyrolean cuisine is the Tiroler Speckknödel.
This is a large, round, boiled, bread dumpling that has little pieces of bacon. It may not fit your idea of a dumpling as it's really the size of a fist, but it's another tasty dish to try in Tyrol. 
I'll admit that I didn't think this looked very appetizing the first time I ordered it, but as soon as I took a bite, I was sold!
The Speckknödel can be served with a light broth or with a side of Sauerkraut - whatever you prefer!
This is another popular choice in the mountain huts.

Kaspressknödel
This next dish bears some similarities to the Tiroler Speckknödel I just mentioned.
The Kasspressknödel is also a large dumpling, except unlike the Tiroler Speckknödel, it is thick and flat. The ingredients are also different; while the Speckknödel is a bread and bacon dumpling, the Kasspressknödel is made with cheese and potatoes.
These pancakes are cooked in butter until golden brown and then served in a broth or with a side of coleslaw. Another filling dish to add to your list of foods to eat in Tyrol!
Zillertaler Krapfen
While travelling in Tyrol, I also tried the Zillertaler Krapfen.
The best way to describe this dish is that it reminded me of the Tyrolean version of a South American empanada.
Zillertaler Krapfen consists of thin layers of dough that are stuffed with a potato, cheese (you need to use Graukäse) and chive filling. They are then folded into semicircular parcels and fried in oil.
This dish is a tradition from the Zillertal Valley and it's often served during festivals.

Hirschfleisch
Wild game makes frequent appearances on menus around Tyrol, so another dish I decided to try was Hirschfleisch or deer meat.
I got the deer escalope stuffed with mushrooms, bacon and onions, which was accompanied by Rotkraut (red sauerkraut), Spätzle, and a cranberry sauce.
I've only tried deer meat a few select times, once in Canada and once in Scotland, but I was very impressed by this meal.
The meat was very tender, and it did not have a strong gamey flavour, but rather took on the flavour of the sauce it was cooked in. It was hearty and filling, and very recommendable.

Marend
Marend is another Tyrolean dish that is best described as an assorted snack spread.
Back in the day, this used to be the meal of choice for farmers and shepherds who spent their days working in the mountains, but today, it has evolved into more of a social occasion that brings family and friends together.
Marend is a casual snack usually served on a wooden block, and it includes a mix of mountain cheeses, cured meats, sausages, lard spreads and bread. Perfect for snacking and socializing!
It can be enjoyed with schnapps, beer or wine.

Prügeltorte
Now moving on to desserts, one that I particularly enjoyed is Prügeltorte.
This is a type of cake that isn't cooked in an oven, but rather a spinning cylinder!
The batter consists of eggs, butter, sugar, flour, a pinch of salt and lemon zest. Once the batter is ready, it’s spread on a spinning cylinder which slowly cooks the cake over a fire.
Layers are added one at a time until the cake is about 1.5-2 centimetres in thickness. Once ready, the cake slides off the cylinder and the rings are filled with cream and a berry sauce.
Half the fun is watching the dessert be prepared right before your eyes!

Kaiserschmarren
Another dessert not to be missed in Tyrol is Kaiserschmarren.
Technically, you can find this dish outside of Tyrol, but it's very popular here, especially in the mountain huts.
The dish is basically a scrambled pancake; while the pancake is cooking, it's broken apart with the use of two forks, and then it's served with a dusting of icing sugar and a fruit sauce.
Fun fact: Kaiserschmarren is named after the Austrian Emperor, Kaiser Franz Joseph I, who loved this dish and also vacationed in Tyrol.
Dessertteller
Dessertteller simply means "dessert plate", and one of my favourite Tyrolean desserts was this assorted platter which had a selection of some of the most popular sweets in the region.
This plate featured Apfelradl, an apple fritter; Grießstrietzln, fried semolina sticks; Krapfen, poppy seed doughnuts; and Zimteis, cinnamon ice cream.
I paired this with a cup of coffee and a shot of apricot schnapps, and let me tell you, it was divine!



The Tyrolean Food Experience: Tips, Traditions & Where to Eat Like a Local

Where (and How) to Try Tyrolean Dishes

Seek Out the Authentic Tyrolean InnYou may have noticed that in Tyrol, the word “Wirtshaus” comes up a lot. These family-run inns are at the heart of local food culture. Look for the “Tiroler Wirtshaus” logo—this means the restaurant is committed to regional ingredients, time-honored recipes, and warm Tyrolean hospitality. There are over 130 of these across Tyrol, each with its own character.

Don’t Skip the Mountain HutsSome of the most memorable meals you’ll have in Tyrol aren’t in town at all, but up in the mountains. Hike or ride the cable car to an Almhütte (mountain hut), where the air is crisp, the views are jaw-dropping, and the menu is hearty. There’s nothing like tucking into a steaming pan of Kasspatzln while you watch clouds drift past the peaks. These huts often make their own cheese, butter, and even schnapps—so ask what’s homemade.

Café Culture for Sweets and CoffeeAustrian café culture thrives in Tyrol. Order a Melange (the Austrian take on a cappuccino) and a slice of Prügeltorte or Apfelradl at a local café. Take your time: watch the comings and goings, read the local paper, and let yourself be part of the scene.

Tyrolean Food Pairings: What to Drink With What You Eat

Local WinesWhile Austria’s more famous for its white wines in the east (like Grüner Veltliner), Tyrol’s vineyards focus on unique varietals that are perfect for mountain food. Try a glass of Blauer Zweigelt with venison or pork dishes, or a crisp Weißburgunder (Pinot Blanc) with Marend or Zillertaler Krapfen.

Beer for Hearty FareTyrolean beer is legendary—think unfiltered lagers, wheat beers, and occasionally, small-batch brews only found at that particular inn. If you’re eating Speckknödel, Gröstl, or anything with bacon, a frothy Helles or Märzen is your friend.

Schnapps: The Tyrolean DigestifNo meal is complete without a Schnaps. Locally distilled from apples, pears, plums, or mountain herbs, schnapps is the finishing touch. Don’t shoot it—sip slowly, and let the heat warm you from the inside out.

Mealtime Traditions and Etiquette in Tyrol

It’s About CommunityA traditional Tyrolean meal is rarely rushed. Meals are social—expect to linger, chat, and enjoy. Marend, for example, isn’t just a snack board; it’s an invitation to relax and share stories over slices of cheese and cured meat.

Bread EtiquetteBread, often a dense rye or sourdough, is a staple. You’ll usually be served a basket, but here’s a local tip: don’t cut bread with a knife unless you must—tear off pieces by hand, and always pass the basket.

Tipping in TyrolService is generally included, but rounding up or leaving a euro or two for good service is the norm. Thank your server with a friendly “Danke!” and don’t be shy to ask for recommendations—Tyroleans are proud of their cuisine.

Festive Flavours: When to Try Tyrolean Specialties

Seasonal Specialties

Spring: Wild garlic soup (Bärlauchsuppe), fresh asparagus, and lamb dishes.

Autumn: Game meats like Hirschfleisch (deer), wild boar, and hearty mushroom stews.

Winter: Heavier fare—think sauerkraut, dumplings, and slow-cooked meats.

Christmas Markets: Krapfen, gingerbread, mulled wine (Glühwein), and roasted chestnuts.

Culinary FestivalsIf you can, time your trip to coincide with a food festival. The Almabtrieb (cows coming home from the Alps) in September means every village throws a party—think music, dancing, and pop-up stalls with farm-fresh treats like Zillertaler Krapfen and Marend. Many towns also host annual dumpling (Knödel) festivals—imagine dozens of varieties, both sweet and savoury, lined up for tasting.

10 Traditional Tyrolean Dishes You’ll Want to Eat in Austria — 12-Question FAQ

What is Tyrolean cuisine?

Tyrolean food is hearty alpine fare built for mountain life: cheese- and potato-forward dishes, bacon and dumplings, wild game in autumn, and rustic desserts—best enjoyed in village inns (Wirtshaus) and mountaintop huts (Almhütten).

What is Kasspatzln (Käsespätzle)?

Tyrol’s take on cheesy spaetzle: soft egg noodles tossed with local mountain cheese until gooey and topped with crisp fried onions. It’s often served sizzling in the same pan it was cooked in—ultimate alpine comfort food.

What is Tiroler Gröstl?

A golden skillet fry-up of potatoes, onions, and bacon (speck), finished with chopped parsley and a fried egg on top. Simple, filling, and perfect after hiking or skiing.

What are Tiroler Speckknödel?

Large bread dumplings studded with bacon. They’re typically served in a light beef broth or alongside sauerkraut. Homely looks, huge flavor.

What are Kaspressknödel?

Flat, pan-pressed cheese dumplings (often with potato and bread) fried in butter until crisp at the edges. They’re served in broth or with a cabbage slaw—cheesy, savory, and very Tyrolean.

What are Zillertaler Krapfen?

A Zillertal Valley specialty: thin dough pockets filled with potato, Graukäse (a tangy local cheese), and chives, folded like empanadas and fried. Common at festivals and farm taverns.

What is Hirschfleisch and how is it served?

Hirschfleisch is venison (deer). Expect tender escalope or roast with mushroom-bacon fillings or sauces, plus sides like Spätzle, Rotkraut (red cabbage), and tart cranberry relish—especially in autumn.

What is a Marend?

Tyrol’s classic snack board: mountain cheeses, cured meats and speck, sausages, lard spreads, pickles, and hearty bread. It’s a social, linger-and-sip affair—pair with beer, wine, or schnapps.

What is Prügeltorte?

A ringed layer cake baked by brushing batter onto a slowly rotating cylinder over heat. Sliced into “tree-ring” layers and served with cream and berries—half the fun is watching it made.

What is Kaiserschmarren?

A fluffy pancake shredded in the pan, dusted with powdered sugar, and served with fruit compote (often plum or apple). Legend ties it to Emperor Franz Joseph I—hence “the Emperor’s mess.”

What might be on a Tyrolean Dessertteller (dessert plate)?

An assortment such as Apfelradl (apple fritters), Grießstrietzln (fried semolina sticks), Krapfen (filled doughnuts), and Zimteis (cinnamon ice cream)—great for sharing with coffee or an apricot schnapps.

Where (and when) should I try these dishes?

Seek “Tiroler Wirtshaus” inns and mountain huts for the most authentic versions. Game dishes peak in autumn; hearty dumplings and Kasspatzln are year-round; festival days in the Zillertal are prime for Krapfen and Marend.

Read More about Austria:

Vienna Food Tours

Vienna Guide for Foodies

Wine Tours in Vienna 

Salzburg Food Guide

Must-Try Tyrolean Dishes

Things to do in Vienna

Best Biking Tours in Vienna

Austria's Almabtrieb Cow Parade

Visiting Tyrol's Alpbachtal Valley

Visiting Werfen Castle

Day Trip to Gaisberg

Lastly, a food tip for Tyrol: if you see a restaurant has a Tiroler Wirtshaus (Tyrolean Inn) logo, that means the establishment serves dishes with locally grown produce, and that it is also owner-operated.

There are over 130 restaurants in Tyrol that have this brandishing and that's one way to find the freshest and tastiest Tyrolean dishes. Guten Appetit!

Have you visited Tyrol?What are some of your favourite Tyrolean dishes?

#### Where to Eat in Salzburg Food Guide: The Best Austrian Dishes to Try!
Wondering where to eat in Salzburg? Well, have we got the foodie list for you!

Today we're going to be sharing some Salzburg restaurants and Austrian foods to try during your visit. Featuring classics like Schnitzel, hearty alpine foods like Gröstl, and some tasty snacks like Marend.

Plus, we'll highlight some Austrian desserts that pay homage to Mozart like the Mozart Melange, a coffee; and the Mozartkugel, a chocolate.

And we cannot forget the classic Salzburg dessert that resembles snow-capped mountains, the Salzburger Nockerl.

So if any of these dishes sound appetizing, read on to find out where to eat these delicious Austrian foods.

Guten Appetit!

Looking for a fun food experience in Salzburg? You may want to consider this Austrian Apple Strudel cooking class including a light lunch!

Where to eat in Salzburg

Panorama Restaurant at Hohensalzburg Fortress

If you're visiting Salzburg for the first time and you're looking for a memorable meal in an iconic site, I would recommend dining at the Panorama Restaurant which is located inside Hohensalzburg Fortress.

Some may say this place is touristy, but the location is unbeatable, the views are spectacular, and the food was really good.

That Backpacker Audrey Bergner dining at Panorama Restaurant at Hohensalzburg Fortress in Salzburg, Austria

We opted to dine al fresco on their terrace and were treated to spectacular views of the Alps!

We ordered the Schweinebraten, a traditional oven-roast pork served with bread dumplings and Sauerkraut.

And we also got the Wienerschnitzel with Pommes, one of the staples of Viennese cuisine. Schnitzel is made of a thin, breaded, pan-fried cutlet - typically veal, though at this restaurant you can order pork or turkey.

Wienerschnitzel mit Pommes is one of the staples of Viennese cuisine that you can sample in Salzburg

Like most dishes in Austrian cuisine, these two meals were hearty, filling, and absolutely delicious!

Panorama Restaurant also serves typical Austrian desserts like Sachertorte, a dense chocolate cake filled with a thin layer of apricot jam and covered in dark chocolate icing; and Apfelstrudel, a layered pastry stuffed with an apple filling.

Address: Mönchsberg 34

Goldene Kugel

Another restaurant we enjoyed in Salzburg was Goldene Kugel. This place is steeped in history as it dates back to 1327 when it was run as Guglbräu, Salzburg's second-largest brewery.

The brewery closed in 1868 and the inn followed in 1875, however, since 2013 this place has reopened its doors to visitors and you can choose between dining in the restaurant, in the cellar, or al fresco.

Nomadic Samuel enjoying an Austrian lunch at Goldene Kugel in Salzburg

We ordered Gröstl, a traditional Austrian dish that's especially popular in Tyrol. It's hearty, filling, and makes sense for the cooler Alpine climate.

The dish consists of a potato fry-up with bacon, onions, meats and a fried egg on top. The idea is to try and use up the previous day's leftover meats and turn them into a filling mountain lunch.

Gröstl is a potato fry-up with bacon, onions, and meats served with a fried egg on top in Salzburg, Austria

Another dish we tried at Goldene Kugel was the Kasnocken. This is a noodle dish fried in a pan with cheese and topped with crispy onions.

Kasnocken is the Austrian version of Germany's famous Käsespätzle. So if you're travelling in the region, know it's a very similar dish by a different name.

Kasnocken is a noodle dish, fried in a pan with cheese and topped with crispy onions which you can try in Salzburg

Address: Judengasse 3

Café Mozart

Café Mozart is perhaps the most famous café in all of Salzburg and its food makes it worth a visit!

The world-famous cafe sits on Getreidegasse in the heart of the old town near Mozart's birthplace.

Café Mozart is located on Getreidegasse in the heart of Salzburg's old town

The decor inside Café Mozart in Salzburg, Austria

What brought us here was their iconic dessert, the Salzburger Nockerl, however, before that, we ordered a few other dishes from their menu.

They had some nice seasonal dishes on their menu and since we were there in autumn, we tried the Kürbiscremesuppe, a pumpkin soup with pumpkin seed oil and roasted pumpkin seeds. Perfect for the cooler temperatures!

Kürbiscremesuppe is an autumn pumpkin soup worth trying in Salzburg

We also ordered the Schwammerl in Rahmsauce mit Semmelknödel, another autumn dish featuring bread dumplings with a creamy mushroom sauce.

Semmelknödel is a bread dumpling we tried in Salzburg with this autumn variation served in a mushroom cream sauce

For dessert, we ordered the aforementioned Salzburger Nockerl, a sweet soufflé made with egg yolk, flour, sugar, and vanilla.

This dish is meant to resemble the mountain peaks that surround the city of Salzburg.

Also, it is large enough to be shared between two people or more.

We paired the dessert with a Mozart Melange, a coffee with whipped cream and chocolate liqueur. Delicious!

Aside from the Salzburger Nockerl, if you're looking to try some of the café's signature dishes, opt for the Mozart Symphonie Becher or the Mozart Symphony Sundae which has ice cream with chocolate, nougat, pistachios, Mozart liqueur, chocolate chips and whipped cream.

And for some classic Austrian desserts, you can try the Kaiserschmarrn, shredded pancakes; Topfenstrudel, a cheese strudel; or Apfelstrudel, the apple strudel which you can order with a vanilla sauce or vanilla ice cream.

Address: Getreidegasse 22

Cafe Konditorei Fürst

This next place isn't a restaurant, but rather a chocolate shop. Salzburg's old town is full of chocolatiers and the chocolate of choice for first-time visitors is the Mozartkugel.

The Mozartkugel is a chocolate ball filled with a marzipan and pistachio core, wrapped in nougat, and dipped in dark chocolate.

Local Salzburg confectioner Paul Fürst was the creator of the now world-famous Salzburger Mozartkugel in 1890. His chocolates are attributed as the Original Salzburger Mozartkugel and you can buy them at Cafe Konditorei Fürst.

There's even a sculpture of a golden sphere in Salzburg's main square which is nicknamed the Mozartkugel, though its real name is Sphaera.

However, we bought our chocolates at Braun because it was the first chocolate shop we stumbled across, but there are countless to choose from!

Also, nowadays there are many adaptations of the Mozartkugel. You can get it with dark chocolate or milk chocolate, with marzipan or without marzipan, or you can get a mixed bag.

Not to mention all the bonbons, truffles, pralines, and marzipan confections. Stock up on sweets and take them back home as souvenirs that are sure to please your friends and family!

Address: Brodgasse 13

Salzach Insel Bar

If you're looking for a place to enjoy cocktails in Salzburg, check out the Salzach Insel Bar.

This is a floating bar on a boat that sits on the Salzach River which flows through Salzburg's old town. The name translates to 'Salzach Island Bar'.

This is a really nice place to enjoy the sunset and watch the city turn to dusk.

When in Austria, the cocktail of choice is the Hugo. This is an aperitif that originates in South Tyrol, and is made with prosecco, elderflower syrup, seltzer and mint leaves.

I wouldn't come to this bar for the food - snacks are limited and so-so. But the drinks are good and the sunset views are even better!

Address: Franz Josef Kai / Pier Amadeus Salzburg

Goasn Wirsthaus

If you're wondering where to eat in Salzburg on a day trip to Gaisberg, I'd recommend Goasn Wirsthaus.

Gaisberg is a popular day trip for hikers that's just a short 30-minute bus ride from Salzburg's old town. The mountain stands 1,288 meters above sea level and offers numerous hiking trails.

And the best part about hiking Gaisberg are the food options you have once you reach the mountaintop!

We ordered Marend, an Austrian snack that features a mix of mountain cheeses, cured meats, sausages, breads, and more.

Being high up on the mountains brought back nice memories from our time in Tyrol attending the Almabtrieb cow parade and visiting the Alpbachtal Valley.

Of course, we paired the meal with an ice-cold beer!

Aside from Marend, this restaurant also has plenty of hearty Austrian foods on the menu, ready for hungry hikers arriving at the peak.

You can expect to find dishes like Rindsgulasch mit Semmelknödel, beef goulash with bread dumplings; Kaspressknödel auf Sauerkraut, cheese dumplings on sauerkraut; and Linsenbällchen auf Erdäpfelsalat, lentil balls baked crispy and served with potato salad and cranberries (this is a gluten-free and vegan option).

Address: Gaisberg 30

Those are some of our personal recommendations of where to eat in Salzburg. If you're ready to book your trip, you can check out accommodations in Salzburg here.

We also did a day trip to Werfen where we enjoyed delicious food with a side of castles and alpine views.

And if your travels are also bringing you to Vienna, be sure to check out our list of fun food tours in Vienna, guided bike tours in Vienna, places to eat in Vienna, easy wine day trips from Vienna, and the best things to do in Vienna.

Now we leave you with a video of our Austrian food adventure across Salzburg. Wishing you a happy and delicious trip!

Eat Smarter in Salzburg: A Local-Style Plan to Taste and Savor

Salzburg is one of those cities where you can wander from a rosy Baroque square into a wood-paneled tavern and feel like you’ve time-traveled. Then five minutes later you’re sipping a Mozart Melange beside the river. To help you go deeper (and eat better), here’s a practical, foodie-forward section you can bolt onto your itinerary. 

Anchor each day around one sit-down meal (lunch or dinner), plus cafes/markets for the rest.

Always check seasonal menus for Eierschwammerl (chanterelles), Spargel (asparagus), and game.

Book coveted spots (Bärenwirt, St. Peter Stiftskulinarium, Café Tomaselli) 48–72 hours out.

Carry cash; most places take cards now, but markets and beer halls still love euros.

Ask for Leitungswasser (tap water) and expect to round up 5–10% for good service.

Build a Tasty Salzburg Day

Experience TypeBest TimeMust-OrderTypical SpendInsider TipKaffeehaus breakfast9:00–10:30Melange + Topfengolatsche€6–€12Order pastries from the tray—point and smile worksMarket graze11:30–13:00Bosna / Leberkäsesemmel€4–€8Eat standing at a hochtisch with the localsHearty tavern lunch13:30–15:00Backhendl / Kasnocken€14–€22Share sides—portions are alpine-heartySweet stop15:30–16:30Nockerl / Mozartkugel flight€4–€16Salzburger Nockerl feeds two (or three!)SundownerGolden hourHugo / local Weissbier€4–€12Riversides and rooftops glow at sunset

Kaffeehaus Mornings: Historic Cafés and What to Order

Salzburg does café culture the old-world way. Think marble-topped tables, silver trays, and servers who’ve been perfecting the side-eye since the 19th century (with love). Start your day where locals actually linger.

Café Tomaselli (since 1705): almond croissants, house jam tarts, balcony people-watching.

Café Bazar: riverside views + soft-boiled eggs, Striezel (sweet bread).

220° Rösthaus & Café: specialty coffee, hearty breakfast plates, beans to go.

Café Fingerlos: pastry case heaven—Topfentasche (curd cheese pastry) is the move.

Konditorei Schatz: old-fashioned cakes and an unhurried vibe just off Getreidegasse.

Kaffeehaus Cheat Sheet

CaféVibeOrder ThisPrice RangeInsider TipCafé TomaselliIconic, livelyMelange + Esterházy slice€7–€12Pastries are ordered from the roaming trayCafé BazarVintage, river viewSoft egg + Kaiser roll€6–€10Grab a window seat for sunrise over the Salzach220° RösthausModern, roasteryFlat white + shakshuka€9–€15Buy beans—hotel rooms smell amazing afterwardCafé FingerlosLocal favoriteTopfengolatsche + cappuccino€6–€10Reserve weekends; cake o’clock is a thingKonditorei SchatzClassic, calmSachertorte alt-style€6–€9Quieter alternative to the big-name cafés

Markets & Quick Bites: Eat Like a Local at Lunch

When you don’t need cutlery (or a reservation), Salzburg’s markets and kiosks shine. The Grünmarkt at Universitätsplatz (Mon–Sat) has everything from smoked fish to farm cheese and is ideal for DIY picnics.

Grünmarkt (Universitätsplatz): bread, cheeses, pickles, fruit; Mon–Sat till mid-afternoon.

Schrannenmarkt (Thu): go early for the best pastries and roast pork buns.

Balkan Grill Walter (Bosna): the OG spiced sausage in a toasted bun with onions + herbs.

Leberkäsesemmel stands: hot “meatloaf” in a crusty roll; add sweet mustard.

Pretzel & Krapfen stalls: giant pretzels and jam-filled doughnuts for dessert.

Market Bites

SpotWhat to EatTypical PriceBest TimeInsider TipGrünmarktCheese + bread + fruit picnic€6–€10 pp11:00–13:00Ask for “eine kleine Mischung” at cheese stallsSchrannenmarktRoast pork roll, pastries€4–€88:00–11:00 ThuBring cash; many stalls are cash-onlyBalkan Grill WalterBosna #2 (mild/medium/hot)€4–€511:30–14:30Step aside to eat—queue moves fastLeberkäsesemmelClassic or Käse variant€3–€4.50LunchMustard on the side = less soggy bunPretzel standPumpkin-seed pretzel€2.50–€4All daySplit one and save room for dessert

Alpine Hearty Plates: Where to Go for Classic Mains

Beyond the schnitzel you already tried, Salzburg’s taverns excel at crispy Backhendl (fried chicken), cheesy Kasnocken, and slow-braised Rindsgulasch that makes friends of fork and dumpling. Portions are generous. Sauce is sacred. A side of vinegary potato salad can rescue a rich plate from feeling heavy. 

Bärenwirt: legendary Backhendl, rustic rooms, book ahead for dinner.

Zwettler’s Wirtshaus: reliable classics, friendly service, central but not “tour bus.”

Die Weisse: Salzburg’s white-beer hall with hearty pan dishes and a shady garden.

St. Peter Stiftskulinarium: splurge setting, historic monastery restaurant since 803(!).

Triangel: pre-concert favorite near Festspielhaus; service is fast, food honest.

Hearty Mainstays

RestaurantSignature DishPrice (Main)Reservation?Insider TipBärenwirtBackhendl + potato salad€16–€19Yes (prime time)Half portion still feeds a mortalZwettler’s WirtshausRindsgulasch + Semmelknödel€14–€18Helpful but not essentialAsk for extra bread to chase the sauceDie WeisseKasnocken, Schweinsbraten€12–€17No (big hall)Pair with house Weisse; beer garden in fair weatherSt. Peter StiftskulinariumTasting menus, venison (seasonal)€29–€45Yes (splurge)Request a historic salon for atmosphereTriangelDaily chalkboard specials€14–€20Smart before performancesGreat for fast, quality pre-show meals

Sweet Tooth Circuit: Desserts, Chocolates & Coffee Pairings

You’ve met Salzburger Nockerl and Mozart Melange. But there’s a whole sweet circuit here worth the amble. Let's indulge our sweet tooth.

Café Konditorei Fürst: Original Mozartkugel since 1890—pack boxes for home.

Café Mozart / Schatz / Fingerlos: Kaiserschmarrn and strudels done right.

Eisl Eis: organic sheep-milk gelato (seasonal) near the river—creamy and light.

Hotel Sacher Salzburg: Sachertorte in a quieter setting than Vienna’s.

Nockerl tip: order at start of meal; it’s baked to order and takes 20+ minutes.

Sweet Map

SpotSweet ThingPair It WithPriceInsider TipFürst (Alter Markt)Original MozartkugelEspresso€1.60 each / €12+ boxBuy sealed tins for travel-proof souvenirsCafé MozartSalzburger NockerlMozart Melange€14–€18 (serves 2–3)Pre-order; best shared post-lunchKonditorei SchatzApfelstrudelSchlag + vanilla sauce€5–€7Ask for “mit Vanillesauce” for extra comfortFingerlosTopfentorte sliceBlack tea€4–€6Great rainy-day hideoutEisl EisSheep-milk gelatoStroll by the Salzach€3–€5Pistachio + sour cherry is a dream team

Nightlife & Beer Halls: Breweries, Beer Gardens & Cocktails

When the light goes honey-gold, Salzburg’s beer halls and rooftop terraces come alive. For pure atmosphere, Augustiner Bräustuben Mülln is unbeatable. Prefer the river? You already met Salzach Insel Bar—double down at sunset.

Augustiner Bräustuben (Mülln): self-serve steins, huge garden, food stalls galore.

Stiegl-Brauwelt: brewery museum + guided tastings; restaurant on site.

Die Weisse: house-brewed Weissbier, indoor hall + garden.

Imlauer Sky Bar: cocktails + Alps/River panorama; smart-casual.

Steinterrasse (Hotel Stein): classic terrace; book for golden hour outside.

Where to Raise a Glass

VenueDrink to TryFood SituationPrice (Drink)Insider TipAugustiner BräustubenMärzen by the MaßIndoor food stalls€3.80–€8 (size-dependent)Cash only; bring small notes for snacksStiegl-BrauweltTasting flightFull restaurant€8–€12 flightMuseum is family-friendly and funDie WeisseHouse WeissbierHearty mains€4–€5.50Order a Radler if you want lighterImlauer Sky BarHugo / AperolSmall plates€10–€14Reserve window tables; go just before sunsetSteinterrasseSignature cocktailsBar snacks€11–€15Dress a notch up; bring a layer—breezy nights

Salzburg Food Guide FAQ: Best Places to Eat, Must-Try Austrian Dishes, Cafe Etiquette, Prices, and Local Tips

What are the must-try Austrian dishes in Salzburg?

If you’re hungry for the classics, start with Wienerschnitzel (veal or pork), Schweinsbraten (roast pork with dumplings and sauerkraut), Kasnocken (cheesy pan noodles topped with crispy onions), and Rindsgulasch with Semmelknödel (bread dumplings). For snacks, look for Bosna (spiced sausage in a bun), Leberkäsesemmel (hot meatloaf roll), and Marend (alpine cold-cut and cheese board). Save room for Salzburger Nockerl, Apfelstrudel, Sachertorte, and a Mozart Melange coffee.

Where can we enjoy a “view” meal in Salzburg?

Head up to Panorama Restaurant at Hohensalzburg Fortress (Mönchsberg 34). Grab a terrace table for Alps views and order Schnitzel or Schweinebraten, then share a Sachertorte or Apfelstrudel. It’s touristy in setting, but memorable for a first-timer meal with a skyline backdrop.

What’s a good spot for hearty alpine comfort food?

Try Goldene Kugel (Judengasse 3) for Gröstl (potato, bacon, onion fry-up with a fried egg) and Kasnocken. Portions are alpine-hearty and perfect after a morning of sightseeing. We also like Die Weisse for Kasnocken and Schweinsbraten, and Bärenwirt for legendary Backhendl (fried chicken).

Where should we order Salzburger Nockerl—and how?

Café Mozart (Getreidegasse 22) bakes an excellent Salzburger Nockerl. Pro tip: order it at the start of your meal—this soufflé-style dessert is baked to order and can take 20+ minutes. It’s big enough for two or three, and pairs beautifully with a Mozart Melange (coffee with whipped cream and chocolate liqueur).

Where do we buy the “original” Mozartkugel?

For the original recipe, go to Café Konditorei Fürst (Brodgasse 13)—Paul Fürst created the Mozartkugel here in 1890. You’ll also find delicious variations around town (e.g., Braun), but Fürst is the heritage pick. Pro tip: the sealed tins travel best for gifts.

Any can’t-miss cafés—and how does ordering work?

Yes! Café Tomaselli, Café Bazar, 220° Rösthaus & Café, Café Fingerlos, and Konditorei Schatz are standouts. In traditional cafés, you often order coffee with a server, then choose pastries from a roaming tray—just point to what you want. A classic coffee (Melange, Verlängerter) plus a slice of cake is the Salzburg way to slow down.

What about markets and quick bites for lunch?

Browse Grünmarkt (Universitätsplatz, Mon–Sat) for picnic supplies—cheeses, breads, fruit—and hit Schrannenmarkt (Thu morning) for roast-pork buns and pastries. For hot handhelds, Balkan Grill Walter serves the OG Bosna, and Leberkäsesemmel stands are dotted around the center. Bring some cash; smaller stalls may be cash-only.

Where should we go for drinks with a view or beer-hall vibes?

For river sunsets, Salzach Insel Bar (Franz Josef Kai / Pier Amadeus Salzburg) is a floating spot for Hugos (prosecco + elderflower + mint). For beer halls, don’t miss Augustiner Bräustuben Mülln (self-serve steins, food stalls), Stiegl-Brauwelt (tastings + museum), and Die Weisse (house-brewed Weissbier). Rooftop fans should try Imlauer Sky Bar and Steinterrasse near golden hour.

Do we need reservations—and when?

For popular dinner spots (Bärenwirt, St. Peter Stiftskulinarium, Triangel, Café Tomaselli’s balcony), book 48–72 hours in advance, especially in summer and during festivals. Walk-ins are fine for beer halls and markets. Sundays and holidays can be busy; plan ahead.

What should we budget for meals?

Rough guide (per person): €6–€12 for a coffee + pastry breakfast, €4–€8 for market bites, €12–€22 for tavern mains (Backhendl, Kasnocken, Gulasch), €14–€18 to share Salzburger Nockerl, €4–€6 for beer in halls, and €10–€15 for rooftop cocktails.

Any tips on tipping, water, and paying?

Round up or add ~5–10% for good service (say the total you want to pay when handing your card/cash). Ask for Leitungswasser (tap water). Cards are accepted widely in restaurants and cafés, but carry some cash for markets, beer halls, and smaller bakeries.

Can vegetarians, vegans, or gluten-free eat well here?

Yes—look for Kasnocken (veg), Käsespätzle, Eierschwammerl (chanterelle) dishes in season, salads, and vegetable soups. Some taverns offer Linsenbällchen (lentil balls) or Kaspressknödel on sauerkraut; cafés often have veg quiches and salads. Gluten-free is improving—confirm with staff and check daily chalkboards for “glutenfrei” notes.

Where are your favourite places to grab a bite in Salzburg? Let us know in the comments below!

#### Should I Stay in Pompei, Italy or Visit the Ruins on a Day Trip?
When we were planning our most recent trip to Italy focused along the Bay of Naples, the big question on our minds was: where should we stay?

The destinations we wanted to visit included Naples, Herculaneum, Mount Vesuvius, Pompei and Sorrento, but because switching accommodations every few days is one of our biggest travel pet peeves, we only wanted to have one destination as our base and take day trips from there. Switching hotels means packing and unpacking, hauling your luggage on and off trains, and navigating new cities with bags in tow, so we wanted to keep that to a minimum and focus on exploring instead.

In the end, we chose to stay in Pompei for several reasons - initially, we thought we would only come here on a day trip - but I’m so glad we decided to spend a full week here instead.

Here's what made us choose Pompei and what we feel were some of the advantages of this location:

QUICK GUIDE TO Pompei

Visiting Pompei soon? Here are your travel essentials! 🇮🇹

Top Pompei Tours 🏛️

Pompeii Small Group Tour with an Archaeologist - choose between 2 hours in the Pompeii ruins OR 3 hours in the Pompeii ruins plus Villa of the Mysteries known for its frescoes!

Top Pompei Hotels 🛏️

Hotel del Sole - right in front of the Pompeii archeological site!B&B Pompei Olympus - a small but elegant B&B close to the ruinsNolana '86 - hotel with terrace and amazing views

Centrally located and shorter commutes

First things first, let’s talk about Pompei’s location. Out of all the places we wanted to visit, this was the most centrally located destination on the itinerary with Herculaneum, Vesuvius and Naples to the north, and Sorrento to the south. Being the halfway point meant we had much shorter distances to travel.

Here's a quick breakdown of travel times from Pompei to:

Sorrento - 30 minutes

Herculaneum (Ercolano Scavi) - 17 minutes

Naples - 35 minutes

Cheaper than other destinations

When we were initially researching accommodations, we were looking at both Sorrento and Naples, but we weren’t really sold on either of them.

Sorrento marks the start of the Amalfi Coast, so we found the prices there to be significantly higher for an entire apartment in a central location.

As for Naples, the prices were a bit more reasonable, but we weren’t sure about booking a solid week in such a chaotic and densely populated city.

This is why we ended up looking at properties in Pompei, and once we saw that they offered more bang for our buck, we were sold!

In the end, we rented a house on AirBnB for only $43 a night (during low season) and it was:

a 5-minute walk to the main train station,

a 10-minute walk to the centre of Pompei,

and a 15-minute walk to the ruins of Pompeii.

Small town feel with plenty of restaurants

Once we arrived in Pompei, we were very pleased to discover that it was a small yet charming city. We found it very walkable, there was a beautiful central square flanked by a cathedral and lots of palm trees, and there was no shortage of restaurants.

Since we're the kind of travellers who enjoy walking and eating all day long, this suited us pretty well.

We may have even found the best pizza outside of Naples at a place called Pizzeria Alleria, which we proceeded to revisit over and over again for the duration of our visit.

Lots of stations to get you places

Another thing we loved about Pompei is that it was very well connected by train. We made use of 3 different train stations during our stay:

Pompei Central - operated by TrenItalia and offering connections across Italy

Pompei Scavi - Villa dei Misteri - located close to the ruins of Pompeii

Pompei Circumvesuviana - located directly behind the cathedral

Whenever we hopped on the Circumvesuviana line, we only had to pay 2,00 - 2,80 Euros depending on where we were going.

Just one piece of advice, be aware that on some maps these stations only appear listed as "Pompei", so make sure you know which station your train departs from. Otherwise, you could end up at the wrong place like we did!

Many day-trippers but few overnighters

One thing we noticed during our week-long stay in Pompei is that the city gets a lot of day visitors, but very few people stay overnight.

The crowds in Pompei swelled during the day - mostly around the ruins of Pompeii since not many people seemed to wander into the modern city - but the numbers dropped drastically by late afternoon. If you're looking for a bit of peace and quiet, this can be a great thing!

Easy access to the ruins of Pompeii

Last but not least, one of the great benefits of staying in modern Pompei is easy access to the ruins of Pompeii!

That means you don't have to feel rushed visiting on a day trip or half-day trip, plus you can arrive outside of peak hours to experience the archaeological site with smaller crowds.

We arrived at the park shortly after it opened and there were areas where we felt like we had the whole place to ourselves, however, things got busier as the day progressed. So keep that in mind - early morning or late afternoon visits.

Did we make the right choice?

Absolutely!

Having visited all of the different towns and cities on our itinerary, we were very happy with our choice. 

We really enjoyed getting to see Naples, Sorrento, Herculaneum and Mount Vesuvius, but it felt good to come back to Pompei at the end of the day.

Overall, this destination offered great value, excellent connections to some of the major tourist attractions along the Bay of Naples, and the city's laidback vibe suited our travel style perfectly.

 

Logistics & Tips for Using Pompei as Your Bay-of-Naples Base

Once you’ve settled on modern Pompei as “home,” a little planning goes a long way. It will keep your day-tripping smooth and your pizza intake maximised. Below are the nuts-and-bolts details we wish we’d known before arrival. Plus, a few caveats to help you decide if another hub might suit your style better.

Understanding the Three Local Rail Systems

LineColour on MapsDestinationsFrequencyTicket Price*CircumvesuvianaOrangeNaples, Herculaneum, SorrentoEvery 30 min€2.00–€2.80Trenitalia RegionaleBlueNaples Centrale, SalernoHourly€2.90–€4.70Campania ExpressRedFast tourist train to Sorrento via Herculaneum & Naples4 × daily (Mar–Oct)€8.00

*One-way adult fares. Buy in station kiosks; contactless payment still hit-or-miss.

Platform pointer: Pompei’s three stations are spread over a 1 km radius. Double-check the departure board—“Pompei (Trenitalia)” and “Pompei Scavi–Villa dei Misteri (Circumvesuviana)” often appear as a single dot on Google Maps.

Skip-the-Line Tricks for Pompeii Ruins

Buy the 3-Site Pass (€22) online; it covers Pompeii, Oplontis and Boscoreale within 3 days, and has its own fast entrance queue at Piazza Anfiteatro (quieter than Porta Marina).

Wednesday mornings see the lowest coach numbers; cruise excursions pile in Tue/Thu/Sat.

Bring photo ID for your free locker token—large bags (≥ 30 × 30 × 15 cm) are not allowed inside.

Foodie Favourites Within a 10-Minute Stroll

CravingGo HereWhyEspresso & sfogliatellaGran Caffè Santos (Via Roma)Baristas remember your name by day two.Neapolitan pizzaPizzeria AlleriaWood-fired pies from €5; try the smoked provola + friarelli.Aperol spritz al frescoCaffetteria Dolce Arte on the squareFree cicchetti with every drink 17:00–19:00.Dessert runDe Vivo PasticceriaFiocco di neve brioche oozing ricotta cream—don’t ask for calories.

Where to Base Yourself (and why)

Micro-AreaWhy It HelpsBest ForNear Piazza Bartolo Longo (cathedral square)Flat, walkable core with cafés, gelato, evening passeggiata; 8–12 minutes to all stations.First-timers who want “small-town Italy” without sacrificing trains.Pompei Scavi / Villa dei Misteri sideClosest to the main park entrances; handy if you’ll dip into the ruins on multiple mornings.History fans, families with strollers, early risers.Pompei Centrale corridor (Via Roma / Via Lepanto)Easiest for Trenitalia to Naples/Salerno; quiet residential blocks with lower prices.Budget travellers, longer stays.

Two Smart Ways to Structure Your Week

Option A: The Classic Hub-and-Spoke (least transit juggling)

DayBaseFocusTiny TipMonPompeiSlow morning in the modern town + Pompeii ruins (late afternoon light is dreamy)Enter at Piazza Anfiteatro gate for thinner crowds.TuePompeiHerculaneum + evening Naples street-food strollHerculaneum is compact—pair it with Spaccanapoli tapas.WedPompeiVesuvius crater + winery lunchBook the crater bus on arrival; bring windproof layer.ThuPompeiSorrento day (marina, lemon grove, gelato)Campania Express = seated and air-conned.FriPompeiPompeii ruins, Part II (Villas & far corners)Hit Villa of the Mysteries near closing for quiet fresco time.SatPompeiNaples museums or Paestum temples (if you’re feeling ambitious)Paestum pairs with buffalo-mozzarella tasting—heaven.SunPompeiMarket ramble, cathedral mass, pizza marathonLocals dress up; pack a light scarf.

Option B: Early Birds & Blue Hour Chasers (crowd-dodging pros)

WindowWhereWhy It WorksTiny Tip07:30–10:30Ruins (Pompeii or Herculaneum)Cool temps, slanted light, emptier corridorsBring a tiny headlamp for dark rooms.11:00–15:30Long lunch + siesta in PompeiMidday heat & tour buses peak; you won’t miss muchDe Vivo pasticceria for a post-siesta pick-me-up.16:00–sunsetVesuvius road viewpoints or back into the parkGolden hour on bricks and frescoesA foldable hat lives in my daypack for this slot.

Ticket & Entrance Know-How (saves time and sanity)

Pompeii “3-Sites” ticket: covers Pompeii + Oplontis (Torre Annunziata) + Boscoreale in 3 days. Great value if you’re staying in Pompei and want more ruins with fewer people.

Entrances:

Piazza Anfiteatro (near town): calmest security line and locker area.

Porta Marina (by Scavi station): busiest with tour coaches.

Piazza Esedra: a good Plan B if crowds swell at Porta Marina.

Lockers: large bags aren’t allowed. Bring photo ID to borrow a free locker token.

Audio/guide: if you’ll visit twice, hire a live guide once, then return with a map to linger at your favourite domus.

Pocket Checklist (what actually earns a spot in your day bag)

ItemWhy It HelpsUse It When1L water bottle (refillable)Dehydration sneaks up in the ruinsTop up at on-site fountains.Sun gear (hat, sunscreen, light scarf)Shade is rareHigh walls ≠ cool breeze.Small bills/coinsEspresso, WC donations, bus kiosksNot every kiosk takes cards.Phone batteryYou’ll take 400 photos (minimum)Offline map + audioguide drain fast.Thin socksSandals get dusty; socks save feetVilla of the Mysteries stretch.Headlamp / phone torchExplore frescoed rooms gentlyKeep beams low; don’t blind others.Light jacketVesuvius can be windy year-roundEven in August!

Quick Compare: Stay in Pompei vs Naples vs Sorrento

BaseProsTrade-offsPompeiCentral to everything, lower prices, quiet nights, multiple stationsFewer late-night options; you’ll transfer for Capri/Amalfi.NaplesBig-city food scene, museums, ferriesLongest daily commute to Sorrento and the ruins; busy energy 24/7.SorrentoCliff views, Capri boats, polished vibeHighest accommodation prices; crowds in peak months.

If your heart is set on Capri and Amalfi ferries every day, base in Sorrento. If your list reads “ruins, volcano, pizza, sleep”, Pompei wins.

Three Perfect Day Trips from Pompei (timed to real trains)

1) Herculaneum + Naples Street Food

TimeMoveTiny Tip08:30Circumvesuviana to Ercolano ScaviSit near doors; quick exit = head start.09:00–11:30Explore HerculaneumCooler, more intact than Pompeii; read the boat houses plaques.11:45Train to Napoli GaribaldiKeep your ticket handy for barriers.12:15–16:00Spaccanapoli: pizza fritta, sfogliatelle, cloister of Santa ChiaraWalk slow; the surprises are vertical as much as street-level.16:30Train home to PompeiAperitivo hour awaits.

2) Vesuvius Crater + Winery Lunch

TimeMoveTiny Tip08:50Circumvesuviana to Ercolano ScaviMost shuttle buses leave from the square outside.09:30Vesuvius shuttle to ticket hutBook crater slots online in peak months.10:15–11:30Short hike around the rimA windbreaker earns its space.12:30–14:30Lacryma Christi winery lunchCall ahead for vineyard tours.15:00Train back to PompeiNap, then gelato.

3) Sorrento & Positano Peek (without car drama)

TimeMoveTiny Tip09:05Campania Express to SorrentoReserved seats + AC = worth it in summer.09:45–12:00Marina Grande wander + lemon grove tastingWatch boat schedules if you’re ferrying.12:15Ferry to Positano (Apr–Oct)Worst seas mid-afternoon; morning is calmer.14:30Beach time + cliff cafésSun hat + water—shade is scarce.16:15Bus back to SorrentoBlue SITA buses are frequent; buy return ticket in advance.18:00Train to PompeiPizza takeaway? Always yes.

Budgeting a Week in Pompei (ballpark ranges)

CategorySaveSweet SpotTreatAccommodation (2 ppl)€45–€60/night apartment near Centrale€70–€110 near the square or Scavi€140+ boutique with terrace viewsDining (per person/day)€15–€25 (pizza + espresso + gelato)€30–€45 (add aperitivo & pastry)€60–€90 (seafood, wine, dessert)Transport (day trip)€4–€8 round-trip train€12–€18 with Campania Express€30–€40 ferry add-onsTickets€16 Pompeii; €22 3-sites pass€11–€14 Herculaneum€11 Vesuvius shuttle + crater entry

Exchange rates wobble; these are for trip-shaping, not accounting class.

When to Come (and what changes)

SeasonFeels LikeWhat to ExpectPackMar–AprMild; green hills; fewer crowdsOccasional showers; blossoms everywhereLight rain shell; layers.May–JunSunny, busy but not bonkersFerry schedules robust; longer museum hoursSun hoody; hat; electrolytes.Jul–AugHot & crowded mid-dayDo sunrise/sunset ruins; siesta hardCooling towel; early tickets.Sep–OctGolden light; warm seasGrape harvests; fewer day-trippersLight sweater for evenings.Nov–FebCool, quietSome ferries reduce; ruins openWarm jacket; flexible plans.

Common Mistakes (and easy fixes)

Mixing up stations. Solution: save all three in your map favorites and check the line symbol on your ticket.

Trying to “do” Pompeii in 3 hours. Let yourself split it across two mornings. Your feet—and brain—will thank you.

Arriving hungry. Snack selection inside is limited; tuck a panino from Pompei into your bag.

Chasing Capri from Pompei. It’s possible but clunky (train + ferry). If Capri is your non-negotiable, spend one night in Sorrento at the end.

Early shutdown: Outside the main square, restaurants close by 22:30. Night owls might prefer Naples for late-hour trattorie.

Sparse supermarkets: Two mid-size Conad markets serve the centre; stock up before Sunday when shelves thin out.

Limited bus links: If you plan Capri, Amalfi, or Paestum day trips, you’ll transfer via Sorrento or Salerno—extra time that might be a deal-breaker.

Should I Stay in Pompei or Day-Trip to the Ruins? 12-Question FAQ

Is Pompei a good base compared with Naples or Sorrento?

Yes—if your list reads “ruins, Vesuvius, Herculaneum, pizza, sleep,” Pompei shines. It’s central, quieter at night, has three train stations, and generally lower accommodation prices than Sorrento, with calmer vibes than Naples. Trade-off: fewer late-night options and extra transfers for Capri/Amalfi.

How many nights should I plan if I base in Pompei?

Four to seven nights works well. You can split the Pompeii Archaeological Park across two relaxed mornings, add Herculaneum and Vesuvius, and still fit Sorrento (and maybe Positano) without living on trains.

What commute times can I expect from Pompei?

Approximate one-way times: Herculaneum (Ercolano Scavi) ~17 min, Sorrento ~30 min, Naples ~35 min on regional trains. That centrality is the big win of staying in Pompei.

Which Pompei area is best to stay in?

Cathedral square (Piazza Bartolo Longo): walkable core, cafés, evening passeggiata, 8–12 minutes to all stations.

Pompei Scavi/Villa dei Misteri side: closest to park entrances; great for multiple early entries.

Near Pompei Centrale (Via Roma/Via Lepanto): easiest for Trenitalia to Naples/Salerno; good value for longer stays.

How do the local trains work (and which station do I need)?

Pompei has three useful stations: Pompei Centrale (Trenitalia), Pompei (Circumvesuviana), and Pompei Scavi–Villa dei Misteri (Circumvesuviana). The tourist-focused Campania Express (seasonal) also uses Circumvesuviana tracks with reserved seats and AC. Save all three in your maps and always verify the station name on your ticket.

What tickets should I buy for the ruins—and how do I skip lines?

Buy online if possible. The 3-Sites ticket (Pompeii + Oplontis + Boscoreale, valid 3 days) is superb value and helps spread crowds. Enter at Piazza Anfiteatro for calmer lines; Porta Marina is busiest. Large bags aren’t allowed—bring photo ID for a free locker token.

When should I visit the ruins to avoid crowds and heat?

Aim for opening time or late afternoon golden hour. Midweek (especially Wednesday mornings) sees fewer coaches. In summer, do sunrise ruins, siesta, then return near sunset.

What’s the food scene like in Pompei?

Small-city Italy done right: espresso bars, gelato, pizzerias, and classic pasticcerie. Traveler faves include Pizzeria Alleria (smoked provola + friarelli), square-side cafés for Aperol + cicchetti, and pastry runs (e.g., De Vivo Pasticceria) for fiocco di neve and brioche.

Can you suggest a simple 48-hour plan from Pompei?

Day 1: Morning ruins (Piazza Anfiteatro gate) → long lunch in town → return to the park for frescos at blue hour.Day 2: Herculaneum in the morning → Naples street-food stroll (Spaccanapoli) → train back to Pompei for pizza and gelato.

What about Vesuvius and a winery lunch?

Go early: Circumvesuviana to Ercolano Scavi, shuttle to the crater, loop the rim (pack a wind layer), then a Lacryma Christi winery lunch. Book crater slots in peak months and call ahead for vineyard tours.

What are common mistakes to avoid?

Mixing up stations; trying to “do” Pompeii in three rushed hours; arriving hungry (limited options inside); chasing Capri from Pompei on a tight day (better to overnight in Sorrento if Capri is core); expecting late-night dining beyond the main square.

Who should base in Naples or Sorrento instead?

Choose Naples for big-city food, museums, and late nights. Choose Sorrento if daily ferries to Capri/Amalfi are your priority and you don’t mind higher hotel prices. Otherwise, Pompei is the efficient, great-value hub for ruins-heavy itineraries.

#### 50 Things to Do in PRAGUE, Czech Republic! Prague City Guide!
Are you visiting the Czech Republic and looking for things to do in Prague? Well, you've come to the right place! Prague is a city that sure knows how to impress. From the minute I got there I was taken aback by the beautiful Baroque architecture, the soft pastel-coloured facades, and the hundreds of domes and spires dominating the city's skyline. The city is nothing short of breathtaking and this is also very true of the residential areas and neighbourhoods that are a bit further removed from the centre of town. For anyone planning a trip to the Czech capital, today I'll be highlighting 50 things to do in Prague, Czech Republic:

Prague Travel Guide (Top 50): What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Prague, Czechia
(1) Walk across Charles Bridge
Once known as the Stone Bridge, Charles Bridge is the most popular bridge in all of Prague. Until 1841, this was the only means of crossing the Vltava River and reaching Prague Castle from the Old Town. Today you'll find musicians playing everything from classical pieces to blues, artists drawing unflattering caricatures, and vendors selling postcards and jewelry. 

(2) Take a stroll around the Old Town Square 
Prague's Old Town Square is nothing short of beautiful! Picture Baroque and Art Nouveau buildings painted in cheerful colours, old cobbled streets, and cute little cafes serving up traditional Czech food. Like with most popular attractions, this place gets very crowded during the day - especially when the Astronomical Clock strikes the hour - however, if you come by early in the morning you'll have this place all to yourself.
(3) Explore the Jewish Quarter
Prague's Jewish Quarter, or Josefov, is located directly north of the Old Town Square. The area is home to many synagogues, many which date back to as early as the 16th century. Some of the synagogues have been converted into museums and memorials to the Holocaust victims, and you'll also be able to find Europe's oldest surviving Jewish cemetery in this neighbourhood.

(4) Wander down the Golden Lane
The Golden Lane gets its name because legend has it that Emperor Rudolf II had alchemists working along this road on his quest to find a way to turn metal into gold. That was enough to peek my interest! The cottages along this lane are painted in bright colours and you'll most likely have to duck your head when you walk through the doorways. Today these former homes have been turned into souvenir shops and you can buy anything from handmade Czech puppets to literature by Frank Kafka who spent a few years writing on this lane.

(5) Test your deciphering skills at the Mind Maze
Prague's Mind Maze was one of the highlights of my visit to the city and I can't stop raving about it! If you grew up watching room escape games like "Fort Boyard", or playing computer games like "Encarta's MindMaze", then you'll love this! The premise behind this game is that you get locked in the Alchemist's Chamber and you have 60 minutes to figure a way out. You'll have to decipher riddles, open locks, and complete puzzles, which eventually lead to the Philosopher's Stone and a way out.

(6) Spend a day exploring Prague Castle
Another one of the top things to do in Prague is to visit Prague Castle, seeing as it's the largest castle complex in the entire world! It is made up of a series of palaces, courtyards, towers, halls, gardens, and lanes, and it also houses a chapel, basilica, and cathedral. In short, the place is massive and there is a lot to see! You could easily spend half a day wandering through the grounds and only see a fraction of it all.

(7) Admire the stained glass inside St. Vitus Cathedral
Located within the walls of Prague Castle, St. Vitus is a gothic cathedral that contains the tombs of many of the Bohemian Kings and Holy Roman Emperors. One of the most unique aspects of this cathedral is that some of the stained glass windows were designed in the Art Nouveau style by Alphonse Mucha. If you visit the cathedral at the right time of day, you'll find that the light streaming in through the stained glass lights up the surrounding walls which are covered in tiny mosaics. It truly is a sight to behold.

(8) Pick up a roll of Trdelník
This sweet pastry may have mixed origins, but it's still a favourite here in Prague. The hollow cylinder pastry is usually topped off with powdered sugar, but you can also get it with nutella inside. The perfect mid-afternoon snack!
(9) Enjoy an evening at Prague National Theatre
Opera, ballet, drama? You may go in for the performances, but you'll also be dazzled by the building's regal interior. Don't forget to look up at the ceiling.

(10) Enjoy a sliver of nature at Jelení Příkop
This long strip of land used to act as a moat around the backside of Prague Castle, but today it's a beautiful stretch of greenery where you can relax and enjoy some tranquility. Few visitors know about this place, so it's the perfect place for a romantic stroll, a picnic, or even a little nap on the grass.
(11) Visit the KGB Museum
Prague's KGB Museum is one of the quirkier museums in town. While the museum may be small, it is full of unique gadgets and it is run by a man who has lots of stories to share.
(12) Visit the library at the Strahov Monastery
It's a steep walk to reach the Strahov Monastery which sits above Petrin Hill, however, the long walk will reward you with beautiful views of Prague's persimmon coloured rooftops below. You can also visit the monastery's library which includes over 16,000 texts and one of the oldest monastic collections in the whole country.

(13) Walk down Nový Svět
There is a little street not too far from Prague Castle, which is knows as Novy Svet (literally, New World). It's a place where very few tourists venture, yet everything about this street oozes charm - the detailed doorhandles, the crooked walls, the worn cobbled streets. Novy Svet is worth the detour after a visit to the castle, and if you're looking for a place to rest your weary feet, you can pop in to one of the cute little cafes and order yourself a cup of tea and a slice of cake.
(14) Listen to a concert at the National Museum
The National Museum may be closed for renovations, however, it's still possible to admire the grand interior and velvet-carpeted staircases if you attend one of the concerts that take place in the evenings. Mozart, Bach, Vivaldi, Tchaikovsky - this is the place to go!

(15) Take a luxury car tour around the city
For a more upscale experience touring the city, you can hire a luxury vehicle to drive you around Prague. We saw some pretty swanky cars driving tourists as they sipped on Champagne. Prices start at 1200 Czech Korunas.

(16) Watch the Astronomical Clock strike the hour
If you're coming with great expectations, you may be underwhelmed, but nevertheless, seeing the Astronomical Clock is one of the top things to do in Prague. The clock was first installed in 1410, which makes it the third-oldest astronomical clock in the world and the oldest one still working! Every hour crowds gather with cameras in hand and watch the clock work its magic. A little skeleton rings a golden bell, the apostles make their appearance at the windows, and then a little golden rooster crows.

(17) Catch Sigmund Freud dangling from a beam
There's a famous piece by David Cerny in Prague's Old Town which is called Man Hanging Out. The 7 foot sculpture depicts Sigmund Freud, one of the best known psychoanalysts, hanging by one hand high above a street and pondering whether or not to let go. Freud suffered from several phobias including fear of his own death, which is what this particular piece alludes to.
(18) Drop by Kampa Island for a little visit 
Kampa Island is an island located on the Vltava River and it is the starting point for many of the city's boat cruises. There is also a nice park you can walk through. To reach the island you'll want to take the staircase that veers off of Charles Bridge on the west bank.

(19) Check out the Lennon Wall
Another popular stop on this list of things to do in Prague, is the Lennon Wall. If you're a Beatles fan, then you'll want to swing by this wall which is covered in graffiti, song lyrics, and portraits of John Lennon and Yoko Ono. The wall is located on Velkopřevorské náměstí just slightly south of Charles Bridge. "All we are saying is give peace a chance."
(20) Soak in Art Nouveau at the Mucha Museum
You can't talk about Art Nouveau without mentioning Mucha's name. The Czech painter was one of the leaders of this artistic movement which focused on natural forms, curved lines, and creating harmony with the natural environment. The Mucha Museum in Prague is dedicated to Mucha's work and it displays over 100 paintings, drawings, lithographs, and pastels produced by the artist.
(21) Take a tour of the Klementinum
The Klementinum is a complex of buildings near the Old Town. You can sign up for tours of the Klementinum, which include access to the Baroque Library Hall, the Mirror Chapel, and the Astronomical Clock Tower. (You'll have to immortalize the beauty of the library with your eyes because no photography is allowed!)

(22) Take a walk around Vyšehrad
Vyšehrad is an old historical fort located on the Eastern shores of the Vltava River and it dates back to the 10th century. While little remains of Prague's 'other' castle which once stood here, you can still visit the Basilica of St Peter and St Paul, the Vyšehrad Cemetery, and the Rotunda of St. Martin which is the oldest of three Romanesque round churches found in Prague (pictured above).

(23) Feed the swans on the banks of the Vltava River
For a chance to feed swans, head over to the Western banks of the Vltava River, right by the Franz Kafka Museum. There is a nice little area where the swans like to gather and families come to feed them breadcrumbs.
(24) Drop by "Farmer's Market Jirak" on a Saturday
If you're up early on a Saturday morning, it's worth swinging by this little farmer's market. You'll be able to find anything from freshly baked cakes to organic honey, and I also recommend you pick yourself up a tasty Balkan burger with mustard - delicious!

(25) Wander through the Vyšehrad Cemetery
Much like Buenos Aires' La Recoleta or Montreal's Mount Royal, this particular cemetery is one filled with mausoleums and sculptures that pay homage to artists, composers, politicians, and great thinkers who lived many centuries ago. This is the final resting place for many famous Czechs, including Alphonse Mucha who was one of the leaders of the Art Nouveau movement.
(26) Check out the Museum of Communism
The Museum of Communism takes a look at the post–World War 2 Communist regime in Czechoslovakia. Much of the museum's collection is made up of items that were picked up at flea markets and sales around Prague and the surrounding area. Expect lots of sculptures and posters heavy on propaganda.
(27) Enjoy the art of puppetry
You don't have to be in Prague very long to notice that marionettes play an important role in the city. Puppetry has been a favourite form of entertainment for hundreds of years, and if you go for a walk around town, you'll inevitably come across souvenir shops selling puppets, puppeteer workshops where the marionettes are hand-made, and even puppet theatres.

(28) Stroll past the Dancing House
Nicknamed Fred and Ginger, the Dancing House is a cool building that was designed in the Deconstructivist style. There was quite a bit of controversy when this building was first built because it doesn't exactly blend in with the Baroque and Art Nouveau style that dominates the streets of Prague, however, I think it's a nice addition to the city. The building is located on eastern banks of Jiráskův Bridge.
(29) Take a scenic river cruise 
For a leisurely way to spend the afternoon, you can consider taking a cruise down the Vltava River. There are many options available from 1 hour journeys to longer outings which include dinner and live music.

(30) Climb up to Petrin Hill
Petrin is a hill on the left bank of the Vltava River and it offers great views of the city. It's a very pleasant walk if you decided to climb on foot, and there are also plenty of benches for you to rest along the way. Alternatively, you can take the funicular up the hill and save your legs for the walk down.

(31) Drink a Pilsner
The Pilsner is a type of pale lager that gets its name from the city of Plzeň in the Czech Republic. You'll find it being served in pubs and restaurants all over Prague, and considering it's cheaper than water, you may want to order yourself a pint.
(32) Visit the Church of Our Lady in front of Týn
This church is located in Prague's Old Town and it has been the city's main church since the 14th century. It also holds the oldest pipe organ in Prague.
(33) See the Infant Jesus of Prague
This wooden statue dates back to the 16th century and it is popular with faithful followers as it is believed to hold miraculous powers. You'll find the statue inside the Church of our Lady Victorious.

(34) Visit the Frank Kafka Museum
Franz Kafka was a German language writer who was born in Prague. You'll find a museum dedicated to him and his works on the left bank of the Vltava River just north of Charles Bridge. The museum contains first edition volumes of his works, as well as letters, manuscripts and drawings. In the museum's courtyard you'll spot a giant K for Kafka next to an odd sculpture entitled Piss by David Cerny... I can't figure out what significance the sculpture bears to Kafka's works, but it's certainly memorable.
(35) Go for a walk around Mala Strana
Mala Strana, also known as the Lesser Quarter, is one of the most historic districts in Prague. The area is dominated by beautiful Baroque architecture.
(36) Experience the city at night
Prague looks completely different when the sun goes down and the lights come on. The crowds disperse and a certain magic hangs over the streets. Go for a stroll across Charles Bridge and enjoy the view of the castle all lit up in the distance.

(37) Drink Absinthe
Ah, Absinthe! The Green Fairy, the Green Muse, the Green Goddess - she has so many nicknames. This drink may have originated in Switzerland and grown in popularity among artists in Paris, but it still plays a big role here in Prague. You'll find little bottles of the anise flavoured alcohol sold all over the city, and it's one of those things that you just have to try.
(38) Admire cubist architecture
The House of Black Madonna is a cubist building located in Prague's Old Town. It also houses the Czech Museum of Cubism.
(39) Look up inside Prague's train station
Prague's main train station Praha Hlavni Nadrazi was designed in the Art Nouveau style. If you happen to arrive by train, walk in through the main doors and have a look at the dome and ornate windows and arches.

(40) Blink twice at the Zizkov TV Tower
Prague's TV Tower is already quite a unique structure to look at as it consists of 3 columns with 9 futuristic looking pods. But that's not all; you'll also find babies crawling up and down the tower! This was another piece by artist David Cerny. The installation went up in 2000 and at the time it was supposed to be a temporary piece, however, people enjoyed it so much that the babies became a permanent fixture.
(41) Visit Galerie Rudolfinum
Galerie Rudolfinum is a space that features contemporary art ranging from visual art exhibitions to musical performances. The gallery will be closed over the summer of 2014 as it undergoes some renovations, however, it's scheduled exhibitions will resume after that.
(42) Hop on a segway
Segway tours are quite popular in Prague and you'll find people zipping around the Old Town or even heading uphill towards the Strahov Monastery on these. If you decide to hop on a Segway, you will get teamed up with an experienced guide who will share his insights about the city.

(43) Enjoy some traditional Czech food
If you're looking for a hearty meal to fill you up after a long day of sightseeing, then look no further than a traditional Czech restaurant! One of the most popular items you'll find on the menu is goulash. Yes, goulash may be Hungarian, but the Czechs have come up with their own twist on the dish. Czech goulash is all about the meat - no vegetables, no potatoes - and it is served with slices of steamed bread which are known as dumplings. Yum and yum!
(44) Go clubbing at Klub Karlovy Lazne
This club holds the distinction of being the largest club in Central Europe and it has 5 different floors which play different music genres. (They age policy used to be 16+, but they recently changed it to 18+ which will hopefully help appeal to a more mature crowd.)
(45) Get yourself some souvenirs
Puppets, Art Nouveau posters, small bottles of absinthe, colourful tin cups - there are lots of cool things you can pick up for your friends and family back home.

(46) Watch the changing of the guard
When you visit Prague Castle, you can also use this as an opportunity to watch the changing of the guard. The fanfare and flag ceremony takes place at 12.00 noon in the First Courtyard, or alternatively, you can watch the changing of the guard at the castle gates which happens on the hour from 7.00 to 20.00 in the summer and 7.00 to 18.00 in the winter.
(47) Climb the steps of Petrin Lookout Tower
This tower slightly resembles the Eiffel Tower in Paris, though at 63.5 meters it is actually much shorter. It's 299 steps to reach the top.
(48) Check out the Brownnosers
Who could be behind these sculptures if not David Cerny? This permanent installation is located at the Futura Gallery and it depicts two giant statues leaning forward with giant ladders leading up to their rear ends. Visitors can climb up these ladders and peer in to watch a video of Czech President Vaclav Klaus and the head of the National Gallery Milan Knizak spoon-feed each other. Clearly Cerny is not one to shy away from political commentary.

(49) Enjoy the humour behind some of the city's street art
Prague is full of unique art projects, and if you know a little German you'll get the joke behind this twist on the 'Champs Élysées'.
(50) Watch the skateboarders practice at Letná Park
This park used to be home to a giant monument of Stalin which was destroyed in the 60s, and has since been replaced with a giant metronome. The area is a popular meeting point with skaters looking to test out their new tricks.

#### 50 Things to Do in SEOUL, South Korea! Complete Seoul Travel Guide
Today we're sharing a list of fun things to do in Seoul because no trip to South Korea would be complete without a few days exploring the capital!

This is a city of contrasts where you can wander through ancient palaces or zip up to the viewing deck of the tallest skyscraper in the country, quiet your mind during a temple stay or belt out tunes in a singing room, experience spicy Korean street food in the local markets or treat your taste buds to sweet plum tea and rice cakes in a teahouse. Seoul has something to offer every visitor no matter your age or your travel style. 

Now, because Seoul is a mega-city and it can be hard to know where to even begin, we've created this list with a mix of top attractions, food experiences, guided tours, nearby hikes, plus a few easy day trips. All you have to do is pick and choose to create your perfect Seoul travel itinerary.

You can also check out our Seoul neighbourhood guide to get a better feel of what each neighbourhood is like and see what they each have to offer in terms of attractions. Now let's start planning your trip to Seoul!

Seoul City Guide: Top 50 - What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Seoul, Korea

1) Visit the Five Grand Palaces.

Seoul is home to five palaces that date back to the Joseon period: Gyeongbokgung Palace, Changdeokgung Palace, Gyeonghuigung Palace, Deoksugung Palace, and Changgyeonggung Palace. Gyeongbokgung is the most famous of the five since this was the original palace and it is the largest of them all. It draws big crowds during the changing of the guard, but you can find some tranquil pockets the further in you go.

This small group tour takes you on a guided visit to Jogyesa Temple and Gyeongbokgung Palace, plus you watch the changing of the royal guard ceremony at Gwanghwamun Gate.

2) Tour the Secret Garden.

Hidden behind Changdeokgung Palace, is a beautiful garden that was originally built for the pleasure of the royal family and the women of the palace complete with pavilions, a lotus pond, and trees that are over 300 years old. This garden can only be visited as part of a guided tour which can be arranged right at the palace.  

3) Spend the night in a hanok.

This is a type of traditional Korean accommodation with sliding doors, an inner courtyard, and heated floors where you sleep on a mat. If you're travelling with a group of friends or family, you can rent an entire hanok, or if you're going solo, you can rent a room and still get the experience.  

4) Rent a hanbok.

Hanbok is the traditional Korean dress which is typically worn for festivals, celebrations, and ceremonies. Wearing hanbok grants you free access to Seoul's palaces, so that's one of the reasons why it's so popular. You'll find hanbok shops across the city that rent the clothes by the day or by the hour to locals and visitors alike. 

5) Join a Korean food tour. 

Korea has a rich culinary heritage, so if you're an adventurous eater who wants to dive right into the local flavours a food tour is the way to go!

This 3-hour Korean food tour is a Korean BBQ, pub and market tour across Seoul's Mapo District. You'll also learn all about Korean drinking rituals along the way! Come hungry and thirsty. 

6) Ride the cable car up Namsan.

Namsan is the 262-metre mount in the centre of Seoul and it offers great views of the sprawling city. You could hike up, but it's a steep climb, so I'd recommend taking the cable car up and then walking down.

7) Enjoy the views from N Seoul Tower.

Also known as Namsan Tower and Seoul Tower, this observation tower is the second-highest point in the city. It stands 236 metres high atop Namsan and it's one of the main attractions in Seoul. It's especially nice at night when the tower lights up and you can see the city dazzling below.

8) Lock your love with that special someone.

Another popular thing to do when you visit Namsan is to leave a 'lock of love. These love padlocks can be purchased from vending machines just outside the tower, or you can bring your own. Write a heartfelt message with your names on the padlock, and then lock it along the many fences available for this very purpose!

9) Cruise down the Han River.

One way to see Seoul from a different vantage point is to take a river cruise. The Han River flows across Seoul and there are daytime and nighttime sightseeing cruises to choose from. 

10) Walk down Insadong.

This neighbourhood is known for the arts and it is lined with small art galleries, shops selling handcrafted souvenirs, and my favourite, secret tea houses! The best part is getting lost in the narrow side lanes.

11) Take a Korean cooking class.

If you enjoy Korean food, why not take some of the recipes back home with you? Meet up with a Korean chef, go shopping for ingredients in a local market, and then learn to cook some classics like bibimbap (mixed rice), pajeon (seafood pancake), and dakgalbi (stir-fried chicken).

This Korean cooking class runs 3.5 hours and you get to enjoy a market visit followed by an authentic home-cooking experience with a local chef. This small-group cooking class has a maximum of 6 people.

12) Visit a tea house.

One of the best things to do in Seoul is to experience a traditional Korean tea house. They are little pockets of tranquillity, the sweet plum tea is refreshing, and the rice cakes are delicious. One of my favourites is the Shin Old Tea House.

13) Go shopping in Myeongdong.

This is one of the main commercial areas in Seoul where you can find mid-to-high priced retail stores as well as international brands. Street food vendors also set up shop starting in the late afternoon, so it's a good place to grab a snack. 

14) Take a day trip to the DMZ.

The Demilitarized Zone, also known as the DMZ, is a buffer zone between North Korea and South Korea about 250 kilometres long and 4 kilometres wide. This is an easy day trip from Seoul and there are a variety of tours where you can learn more about the Korean War and visit the meeting point between the two countries.

This guided DMZ tour from Seoul runs 7.5 hours and offers detailed commentary. You'll visit Imjingak Pyeonghoa-Nuri Park, the Bridge of Freedom, the DMZ Theatre, the Third Tunnel and Dora Observatory.

15) Try Korean beauty products.

It's no secret that Korea is known for its beauty and skincare products. If you're in the market for this, keep an eye out for popular brands like Etude House, Innisfree, Olive Young, Moonshot, Style Nanda and Aritaum.

16) Visit King Sejong in Gwanghwamun Plaza.

King Sejong was the fourth king of the Joseon dynasty and he is responsible for creating the Korean alphabet, known as hangul. There is a statue of him seated on his throne right across from the entrance to Gyeongbokgung.

17) Visit the Kimchi Field Museum.

This museum is dedicated to spicy fermented cabbage, a food that makes an appearance in almost every Korean dish! Here you can learn about different types of kimchi. 

If you love kimchi, you'll enjoy this Kimchi-making day experience. You'll tour Mangwon Market to pick fresh ingredients and then learn to make 4 types of kimchi! The class runs 3.5 hours.

18) Go to a jjimjilbang.

This is a Korean public bathhouse filled with showers, hot tubs, and saunas, but it is much more than that. It is also a communal space where you can watch Korean dramas on TV, cool down in the ice rooms, sweat it out in the kiln saunas, play computer games, catch up on sleep in one of the napping caves, and so much more.

19) Experience the nightlife in Hongdae.

This is where Seoul's youth hang out and it's a neighbourhood where you can find lots of bars, late-night eateries, singing rooms, and impromptu K-POP dance-offs taking place right on the street.

20) Meet new people on a pub crawl.

If you want to experience Seoul's legendary nightlife and meet some fellow travellers along the way, you can always join a pub crawl. You'll hit up a mix of pubs and clubs in either Hongdae or Itaewon, plus there will be free shots along the way.

21) Sing your heart out at a noraebang.

Noraebang is the Korean version of karaoke and it is a big deal! If you're in a nightlife and entertainment district like Hongdae, you can find multi-story buildings filled with singing rooms, some of them stocked with tambourines, maracas and other fun instruments. This is a really fun activity to enjoy with a group of friends at the end of the night. You can rent a singing room by the half-hour or the hour, and they typically also have their own bar to keep the party going.

Looking for things to do in Seoul at night? You can't miss noraebang, the Korean version of karaoke.

22) Explore Bukchon Hanok Village.

Bukchon is a Seoul neighbourhood best known for its beautifully preserved homes dating back to the Joseon period. It is set atop a hill overlooking Gyeongbokgung Palace, and you can also get some nice views of the city and its modern skyscrapers below. This is a great place to visit for a taste of old Seoul. Just keep in mind that it's a residential neighbourhood, so there are signs reminding visitors to limit their noise and be respectful when taking pictures. 

23) Have some fun at the Trick Eye Museum.

This is a place where optical illusions come to life and it makes for a fun rainy day activity in Seoul. The 3D illusions are constantly being updated and you'll leave with some memorable pictures. 

24) Jump in a photo sticker booth.

A fun way to immortalize your trip to Seoul is by snapping some photos in a sticker booth. You can then decorate your pictures using the touch screen. There are different layouts to choose from and you can add text, hearts, sparkles and all sorts of decorations. 

25) Visit Jogyesa Temple.

This temple is located in downtown Seoul, right between Gyeongbokgung Palace and Changdeokgung Palace. The temple was first established in 1395 at the start of the Joseon dynasty, and today it's the chief temple of the Jogye Order of Korean Buddhism. It's an especially nice place to visit during Buddha's Birthday when the temple grounds are covered in thousands of colourful paper lanterns. Admission is free. 

26) Do a temple stay.

This is part of a cultural program where you can experience the life of a Buddhist practitioner. There are seven temples to choose from in Seoul alone. You can find more information to make a booking on the Templestay website. 

27) Go on a morning bike ride.

Not something you'd want to do during rush hour in this city, but there's a morning e-bike tour complete with stops at the Blue House, Tongin Market, and a cafe. An option for anyone looking for an active tour in Seoul. 

28) Have a picnic along the Han River.

This is a really nice spot for a leisurely day out in Seoul. You'll find people biking, rollerblading, jogging, flying kites, and taking out the swan paddle boats. There are lots of vending machines and street food vendors along the riverfront, so you can always buy your picnic when you get there. 

29) Have lunch at the Noryanjin Fish Market.

This is a live wholesale and seafood market, and it's split up into two sections: fish vendors and restaurants. If you plan to walk through the wet market, it's a good idea to wear closed shoes as there are always bucketfuls of water being splashed around. Otherwise, head upstairs to the restaurant section where you can enjoy a multi-course meal featuring sliced raw fish, delicious seafood stew and grilled fish. 

30) Go hiking in Bukhansan National Park.

If you're looking for outdoorsy things to do in Seoul, a hike through Bukhansan National Park is a good option. The park's name translates to 'mountains north of the Han River' and there are multiple trails to choose from that take you through forested areas up to granite peaks. 

31) Spend the day in Everland.

This is South Korea's largest theme park, and it's technically a day trip from Seoul, but it's super easy to get there. To make the most of your day, you can book a fast-entry e-ticket that will give you access to the park's five zones: Global Fair, Zoo-Topia, European Adventure, Magic Land and American Adventure.

32) Watch a Nanta Show.

Nanta is South Korea's longest-running theatrical performance combining comedy and drama, and it's a great show for visitors because it's a non-verbal performance, meaning there is no language barrier! The show centres around 3 young chefs trying to prepare an elaborate menu under their boss' tight deadline, and things erupt into a frenzy of veggie-chopping with food flying all over the place. 

33) Get a taste of the future at Dongdaemun Design Plaza.

This futuristic structure looks like a giant spaceship that landed in the middle of the city. It hosts fashion shows, design exhibitions, and art events, but it's even worth going just to walk around, admire the architecture and take pictures.  

34) Go on a guided food tour.

If this is your first time to Korea and you're not quite sure where to start, a guided food tour can be a fun way to familiarize yourself with the local cuisine. There are all sorts of options ranging from tours focusing on Korean street food to food and wine pairings with a local brewmaster.

35) Get lost in Namdaemun Market.

This is the oldest and largest market in all of Korea dating back to 1414! This is a place where you can buy absolutely anything and everything - t-shirts, handbags, makeup, video games, stationery, slippers, jewellery, hair accessories, and more, not to mention all the delicious street food should you start feeling peckish. 

36) Visit a themed cafe.

There are so many unusual and unique cafes in Seoul! Whether you want to experience a cat cafe or a dog cafe, a garden cafe or a poo cafe, there's bound to be something for you. 

37) Take a K-POP dance class.

For all the K-POP lovers out there, one of the many things you can do in Seoul is take a dance class. You'll learn step-by-step beginner level K-pop dance moves and then star in your own music video.

38) Eat Korean BBQ.

This is a really fun experience and definitely something I'd recommend doing in Seoul if you're a foodie. Half the fun of going to a Korean barbecue restaurant is that you get to cook your own meal at the table, be it pork, beef or chicken.

39) Visit Ewha Womans University.

Yes, that's how it's spelled. This is a private women's university in Seoul and it has a super modern complex where glass buildings cut across a small valley forming a futuristic tunnel. You have to see it for yourself!

40) Spend the day at the Korean Folk Village.

This is another fun day trip from Seoul. The Korean Folk Village is an outdoor museum complete with performers, where you can learn what daily life was like in Korea during the Joseon dynasty which lasted from 1392–1897. Within the village, you can visit farms, workshops, a Confucian academy, a nobleman's home, and also attend performances which range from martial arts on horseback to a traditional wedding ceremony. 

41) Go to a Korean baseball game.

Baseball in Korea is a completely different experience from what you'd find in North America. Fans have unique chants for each player, there's a lot of synchronized dancing, and it's overall a very happy and lively environment. It's worth experiencing at least once on your visit to Korea, even if you're not a huge sports fan.

42) Learn about the Korean alphabet at the National Hangeul Museum.

Hangul is the Korean alphabet and it was invented by King Sejong the Great in 1443. There is an entire museum dedicated to the creation of the alphabet, what was used before, and how the shape of each consonant mimics the shape of the vocal organs when pronouncing that letter. It's a really interesting museum if you have any interest in learning to read Korean.

43) Have fun at Lotte World.

This is the largest indoor theme park in the world, complete with amusement rides, a movie theatre, a sports complex, a monorail, a luxury hotel, and more. The outdoor section of the park is called Magic Island and the indoor section is called Lotte World Adventure. Foreigners can buy a 1-day discounted park pass here.

44) See the city from Lotte World Tower.

When it first opened to the public in 2017, this became the tallest building in South Korea. This skyscraper stands 123-stories and 556-metres high. For views of Seoul you won't soon forget, you can go up to the Sky Observatory.

45) Visit the National Museum of Korea.

This museum is all about Korean art and history. The first floor focuses on Prehistory through to Early Modern History, the second floor showcases the Calligraphy and Painting Gallery, and the third floor is home to the Sculpture and Crafts Gallery.

If you're looking for things to do in Seoul on a rainy day, consider the National Hangeul Museum.

46) See where Gangnam Style started.

Op, op, op, op Oppa Gangnam Style! Visit this Seoul neighbourhood to see what PSY was singing about. Gangnam is considered to be the most affluent neighbourhood in the whole city, and that means high-end shopping, fine dining, and luxurious clubs.

47) Enjoy a stroll along the Cheonggyecheon.

Once considered a bit of an eyesore, this former elevated highway has been restored to the stream it once was, and it's a beautiful place for an evening stroll. There are colourful lanterns, stepping stones to cross from side to side, and tiered steps where you can sit down along the water's edge. 

48) Cool down with a bowl of patbingsu.

This is an especially good idea if you happen to be visiting Seoul in the summertime. Patbingsu (팥빙수) is a shaved ice dessert that can be served with condensed milk, red beans, chopped fruit, cookies and brownies. If you want to experiment with flavours, the chain Sulbing is a good option. 

49) Enjoy the street art at Ihwa Mural Village.

Colourful murals, mosaic staircases and painted alleyways bring some creativity into this neighbourhood. It's a good place to get lost with a camera in hand, stopping at coffee shops and dessert houses along the way. 

50) End the night with KFC and beer.

In Korea, KFC stands for Korean Fried Chicken, and nothing goes better with that than a pint of cold beer! This combination is known as chimaek combining the words chicken and maekju (beer). This is a popular way to start a night out in Seoul. 

Have you visited South Korea?What are some of your favourite things to do in Seoul?

Top 50: What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Osaka, Japan!

1) Visit Osaka Castle. 

This is the city's main tourist attraction and it is a beautiful sight! The castle sits right in the middle of Osaka Castle Park, surrounded by imposing stone walls and a wide moat. 

You can even climb the steps up to the 8th floor of the castle for 360-degree views of the area.

If your trip happens to be in the springtime and coincides with cherry blossom season, get ready to enjoy sakura galore at Osaka Castle Park.

2) Join a Japanese food tour.

A street food tour is a fun way to get your bearings in a new city and also try some of the local cuisine. Osaka isn't nicknamed "Japan's Kitchen" for nothing! 

This city is renowned for its cuisine and street food is a good place to start. One snack that you can't miss is takoyaki, which are ball-shaped pancakes filled with octopus, pickled ginger, tempura and green onion. You can watch them be cooked right in front of you in moulded pans.

This Osaka street food tour takes you to 5 different eateries where you get to try 13 different dishes! This tour runs 3 hours in length.

3) Ride a boat around the moat. 

One of the many things to do in Osaka Castle Park is to ride the Golden Wasen. This is a covered boat that takes you on a leisurely ride along the castle moat and allows you to experience the park from a different perspective. You can catch the boat just off of the Gokuraku Bridge.

4) Visit Shitennoji Temple. 

Founded in the year 593, this is the oldest officially administered temple in Japan, although the buildings you see today have been rebuilt over the course of the centuries. The temple is named after the shitenno: the four heavenly kings of the Buddhist tradition said to guard the world against evil.

Within the Shitennoji Temple complex, you can also visit Gokuraku-jodo Garden, a Japanese-style garden complete with ponds, bridges, and walking paths. It feels like a secret oasis.

5) Take a Japanese cooking class. 

Another fun way to get familiar with Osaka is to join a cooking class! This is a fun way to learn to make some of the city's local dishes like takoyaki and okonomiyaki - two staples you're bound to come across either in restaurants or while sampling street food. 

This Osaka cooking class runs 2.5 hours in length and you'll learn to make two local specialties. It's a small-group class limited to a maximum of 8 participants. 

6) Go on a walk through Tennoji Park. 

This urban park has a lot to offer; it is home to botanical gardens, a zoo, an ancient burial mound, and an art museum. There are also some restaurants, cafes and ice cream stands on the southeast end of the park if you get hungry along the way.

7) Make dreams come true at the Horikoshi Shrine. 

This shrine is a place of pilgrimage for people who have a wish that they want to come true. The place is also home to trees that are over 550 years old. There are a series of torii gates next to the shrine which makes it feel like a miniature version of the Fushimi Inari Shrine in Kyoto.

8) Join a guided walking tour of Osaka.

A guided walking tour is a great activity to do early on in your trip to Osaka. It'll give you a good lay of the land and introduce you to some places that you might've otherwise missed. 

This Ultimate Osaka Walking Tour covers a lot of the city's main attractions like Osaka Castle, Dotonbori, Shinsekai and more! It's a great option if you're pressed for time and want to see the highlights. 

9) Browse the shops in Den Den Town. 

Often compared to Tokyo's Akihabara electronics district, Osaka's Den Den Town is the place to shop for cheap electronics, manga comics, cosplay costumes, and anime-related collectables.

You can also play arcade games while you're at it. Taito Station is the leading name when it comes to arcade gaming in Japan. The Den Den Town location offers 5 floors of entertainment - you could easily spend a few hours gaming here.

10) Ride the wheel at HEP FIVE. 

Osaka has quite a few Ferris wheels to choose from. This one is located on the roof of the HEP FIVE shopping mall and it's painted bright red. It reaches a maximum height of 106 metres and you can enjoy views of Osaka as far as the harbour.

11) Visit the lion shrine. 

Namba Yasaka is one of the most unusual shrines you will encounter in Japan. Within the complex, there's a stage built to resemble a roaring lion. It’s believed that the lion’s mouth can swallow evil spirits and bring people good luck both in school and business. That means it sees a lot of visitors during exam times and at the start and end of the financial year.

12) Drive around Osaka dressed in costume. 

This is a real-life superhero go-karting experience complete with outrageous costumes that are sure to turn heads. Just remember it's important that you get an international driving permit in your home country before arriving in Japan because they will not accept your regular driver's license!

You can book the Osaka GoKart Tour with a funny costume rental here. The tour runs 1 hour. 

13) Try not to go deaf inside a Pachinko. 

Pachinko is an arcade game somewhere between a pinball machine and a slot machine. One thing is for sure, Pachinko parlours are deafeningly loud and you can often hear them before you even see them! It's one of those things you should experience at least once in Japan, even if you just walk through one briefly.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hPWn8U7xUJo

14) Watch a Japanese baseball game. 

Baseball in Japan is a one-of-a-kind experience. We went to see the Hanshin Tigers and were not disappointed by all the cheering, chanting, dancing, and unique songs the fans had for each player. It's worth adding to your list of things to do in Osaka even if you're not the biggest sports fan.

15) Explore Shinsekai at night. 

Shinsekai experienced a few decades of neglect which only helped to fuel its seedy reputation, however, this neighbourhood has a cool old-school feel. When you walk down the main strip towards Tsutenkaku Tower with all the bright neon lights, it almost feels a bit like time travel - like you're seeing what people in the past thought the Osaka of the future should look like.

16) Eat sumo-sized meals in Shinsekai. 

Sumo wrestlers need to adhere to a pretty strict diet to keep up their weight, and there are restaurants out there that specialize in sumo meals. Chankonabe is the stew consumed by wrestlers, but in Shinsekai you can also find restaurants serving up all sorts of sumo-sized dishes. Just maybe bring some friends to help you out!

17) Play 80s and 90s retro arcade games. 

There are plenty of arcades in Osaka, but retro arcades are a rare gem. There's one on the left diagonal lane moving away from Tsutenkaku Tower. Games include blasts from the past like Pac-Man, Street Fighter, Mario-Kart and more!

18) Go up Tsutenkaku Tower. 

Literally meaning "Tower Reaching Heaven", at the time of its construction in 1912, this was the tallest tower in Asia. Today it has a height of 103 metres, with the main observation deck sitting at 91 metres. It's open to the public and offers a bird's eye view of Shinsekai.

19) Ride the Dotonbori Ferris Wheel. 

After an almost decade-long hiatus, the famous Dotonbori Ferris Wheel recently reopened to the public. It's built onto the facade of the Don Quixote store (a discount store that can be found all over Japan) and also features Ebisu (the god of business prosperity) on its facade. It takes 15 minutes to do the full loop! Keep in mind it's free to ride if you buy an item inside the Don Quixote store!

20) Cruise down the Dotonbori Canal. 

Another fun thing to do in Osaka is to take a river cruise on the Dotonbori Canal, especially if you can do so at night once the lights come on. The boat departs from the Tazaemonbashi Bridge Boat Dock.

21) Pose with the Glico Man. 

This is a very popular photo stop in Dotonbori. The Glico Man sign first went up in 1935 and it features an athlete in a victory pose. It's actually an advert for the Ezaki Glico brand which manufactures confectionery products, but it's proven to be very popular with locals - especially if there's a sports-related victory.

22) Attend a sumo tournament. 

If you want to see sumo in Japan, you will have to time your visit accordingly because it only happens during a short window and tickets sell out fast! There's a guide on how to watch sumo in Japan here and you can check out tournament dates here.

23) Check out the giant food signs in Dotonbori. 

Even if you don't know Japanese, in Dotonbori you can easily figure out what each shop specializes in based on the massive food signs on their storefronts. Picture a giant crab with moving legs, a massive octopus glaring down, and a pufferfish daring you to walk through its doors. It's advertising at its finest!

24) Learn about takoyaki at the Konamon Museum. 

This museum is dedicated to Osaka's most popular dish: takoyaki! Here you can learn about the famous octopus-filled pancake, and even make wax samples of takoyaki which you can then take back home as souvenirs. Just look for the giant red octopus along the main drag and you'll know you've found the place.

25) Make your own okonomiyaki.

Some call it a Japanese pancake, others call it a Japanese pizza. This dish consists of a flour-based batter, shredded cabbage, green onions, vegetables and meat (usually a mix of pork belly, octopus, squid and shrimp). In some restaurants, it's cooked in front of you, and in others, you can play chef at your own table. Either way, it's a dish you should not miss in Osaka!

26) Order ramen from a vending machine. 

Japan is all about convenience, and this includes pre-ordering your bowl of ramen before you enter the shop - a picture menu makes it relatively straightforward. Once you're inside, hand in your ticket, grab a seat at the bar, and slurps up!

27) Eat conveyor belt sushi and win some prizes. 

Conveyer-belt sushi, or kaiten sushi, is another one of those things that you need to experience in Japan. We went to Kura Sushi Namba Motomachi, where you pay 100¥ per plate. The fun thing about this restaurant is that you can also win prizes as you eat sushi. For every 5 plates you slide into the machine, you can win a capsule toy. We tried 5 times without success, but it sure is an incentive to keep eating!

28) Eat the fluffiest pancakes.

There's a food trend in Japan at the moment, and that's fluffy souffle pancakes. Gram, Brothers Cafe, and A Happy Pancake are some of the names that continually top the list for the best fluffy pancakes, so why not sample a few?

29) Visit the garden in the Abeno Harukas Building.

This is currently the tallest building in Japan and it was one of my favourite attractions in Osaka. Abeno Harukas offers some incredible views over the city. You have the rooftop garden on the 16th floor, which offers free admission, or alternatively, you can pay to ride up to Harukas 300 on the 60th floor

30) Strike a pose inside a purikura. 

These Japanese photo booths are a lot of fun. They will give you the widest eyes and the clearest skin you've ever had in your life, in fact, you'll hardly look like yourself! Grab a couple of friends and snap a few souvenir photos, and then get carried away decorating them with stickers.

31) Visit the Pokemon Center. 

If you're a Pokemon fan, then you'll want to swing by Pokemon Center Osaka, which is located on the 13th floor of the Daimaru Umeda Department Store, right next to Osaka Station. Here you can shop for all sorts of original Pokemon products.

32) Explore Koreatown.

Osaka is home to the largest Koreatown in all of Japan and you can find plenty of Korean restaurants to satiate your kimchi cravings. The area around Tsuruhashi Station is especially popular for cook-it-yourself Korean barbecue. There's also a covered market where you can shop for cute K-POP socks and hanbok (traditional Korean dresses)!

33) Sample all the matcha desserts.

Japan loves all things matcha-flavoured, and what better place to try these than in the foodie capital. Matcha ice cream, matcha lattes, matcha cheesecake, matcha milk, matcha cookies, matcha chocolate - you can really try it all!

34) Get a taste of the US of A in America-mura. 

Also known as Ame-mura and American Village, this area has been regarded as the centre of youth culture, fashion and entertainment for at least 40 years now. The area is packed with cafes, restaurants, bars, clubs, and of course, a varied mix of fashion. Whether you're into the lolita, punk or hipster style, chances are you kind find it here.

35) Check out the art scene in Nakanoshima. 

Nakanoshima is a 3-kilometre-long sandbar that sits between the Dojimagawa and Tosaborigawa rivers. It's home to several art galleries, museums and exhibition spaces including the Osaka Science Museum, the National Museum of Art Osaka, GRAF, and the Museum of Oriental Ceramics Osaka.

This Osaka street art bike tour explores 3 different neighbourhoods where you'll go in search of street art, graffiti and urban scenes. You'll also try local coffee, visit an old-school Japanese standing bar, and end off with pizza!

36) Feel like a kid at Universal Studios Japan. 

Yes, there rides and roller coasters, but the main draw at Universal Studios Japan in Osaka is The Wizarding World of Harry Potter. With the use of your magical wand, you can walk through Hogsmeade casting spells.

37) Dress up at the Osaka Museum of Housing and Living. 

This museum recreates buildings and streets that show what Osaka would have been like in the late Edo Period. Setting foot in this museum is like stepping back in time. They also allow guests to dress up in kimonos, just keep in mind that there can be long wait times if you visit on a weekend.

38) Learn about the art of bunraku. 

Bunraku is a type of traditional Japanese puppet theatre that become a popular form of entertainment for 'commoners' during the Edo Period. Today it is recognized as a UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage and the National Bunraku Theatre is one of the few places where you can still see the artform. You can check their schedule for upcoming performances.

39) Watch a kabuki performance. 

Kabuki is a classical Japanese dance-drama featuring elaborate costumes, bold make-up, and exaggerated movements. It's an art form that dates back to the Edo period, and in Osaka, you can catch a performance at the Shochikuza Theater.

40) Ride the Tempozan Ferris Wheel. 

We've already mentioned a few Ferris wheels, but if you're looking to get some real height, then you need to visit the Tempozan Ferris Wheel! This wheel has a 110-metre diameter and reaches a height of 112.5 metres. It takes 15 minutes to complete a full revolution.

41) Go up the Umeda Sky Building.

This is one of the most futuristic constructions in Osaka. Since we had already checked out the city views during the daytime, we decided to go up the Umeda Sky Building at night and this place did not disappoint.

42) Belt some tunes at karaoke. 

Another quintessential experience in Japan is to sing karaoke. Since Dotonbori is known as the nightlife district of Osaka, you have a lot of variety when it comes to karaoke - budget karaoke vs. VIP karaoke, small singing rooms vs. party-sized room, with drinks or without drinks. It's best to browse around and check prices before you settle on a place.

43) Relax at Spa World. 

This place takes the onsen experience to the next level. Spa World Osaka is an onsen theme park where you can enjoy hot springs, saunas, swimming pools, massages and even restaurants. Their onsen is divided into a European Zone and an Asian Zone with numerous pools that transport you to different parts of the world.

44) Take a stroll through Kuromon Market.

When it comes to street food in Osaka, most people flock to Dotonbori, but the Kuromon Market is a good alternative. Come hungry because there's a lot to eat here.

45) Shop for your kitchen. 

The Sennichimae Doguyasuji Shopping Arcade is the place to transform your kitchen into a place worthy of a chef. The arcade is lined with stores selling cookware, accessories and utensils, which is why this place is nicknamed "the kitchen of the world".

46) Have a convenience store meal. 

Lawson, 7Eleven, Family Mart - all of these are great options for a quick, cheap and easy do-it-yourself convenience store meal. Keep an eye out for things like onigiri, oden, and instant ramen.

47) Walk the longest shopping street in Japan. 

Stretching 2.6 kilometres in length, Tenjinbashi-suji is the longest shopping street in Japan. It's a bit like a covered arcade, so perfect for a rainy day activity.

48) Try a traditional Japanese breakfast.

There's nothing like a bowl of miso, grilled fish and white rice to start off a busy day of sightseeing in Osaka!

49) Visit a museum dedicated to ramen.

The Momofuku Ando Instant Ramen Museum is located a little ways outside downtown Osaka, but if you're a ramen enthusiast, it's worth the trip! They have workshops where you can learn to make ramen by hand, create your own noodle cup flavours, and tour the various exhibits.

50) Go on a day trip!

There are lots of easy day trips you can take from Osaka, the most popular being Kyoto for a city steeped in history, Kobe for a taste of their famed beef, and Nara in search of deer.

#### 50 Things to Do in Budapest, Hungary | Budapest Travel Itinerary
Planning a trip to the Hungarian capital? Here's a list of the best things to do in Budapest during your trip!

No trip through Central Europe would be complete without a few days in Budapest, but what do you do once you've ticked off the bucket list items like soaking in the baths, drinking in the ruin bars, and wandering along the Danube? Well, it turns out there's quite a bit to experience here, so we've come up with a list of 50 things to do in Budapest, Hungary to get your travel planning started. Yes, this is way more than you could possibly hit up in one single visit, so feel free to pick and choose to plan your perfect trip to Budapest!

Budapest Travel Guide: What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Budapest, Hungary

1) Ride the Budapest Castle Hill Funicular

Budapest is a city best explored on foot, but one way to save your legs on the Buda side is by riding the Budapest Castle Hill Funicular to the top. It's a fun ride in a vintage tram car and the queue moves surprisingly fast, so don't let that deter you.

2) Explore a fraction of Buda Castle

Another thing to do in Budapest is to visit Buda Castle. Located atop a hill overlooking the Danube, the castle pretty much dominates the city skyline on the Buda side. The shocking thing once you reach Buda Castle is its size and all there is to see and do there; the castle houses numerous museums and churches, not to mention the different festivals it hosts, so you'll want to pick and choose because it's impossible to cover it all in one visit.

3) Walk the spooky tunnels under Buda Castle 

If you're looking for something unusual to do in Budapest, look for the signs that read Panoptikum and Labirintus and follow the steps down to the network of tunnels where Vlad Tepes (of Count Dracula fame!) was imprisoned by King Matthias in the 15th century. It's dark and smoky and kind of creepy, so maybe go with a friend!

If spooky is your vibe, check out this Night-Time Dark History and Vampire Walking Tour in Buda Castle District. Highlights include tales of Vlad Dracula, the city’s dark history, and notorious characters from the 19th century.

4) Soak in the Széchenyi Thermal Baths 

There are numerous thermal baths in Budapest, but Széchenyi is the most famous of them all. Set in a cheery yellow neo-Baroque building, this is the largest medicinal bath in Europe offering a mix of indoor and outdoor pools in varying temperatures. It's open year round - even in winter!

5) Visit the Hungarian National Gallery 

This is Hungary's national art museum and it's located inside Buda Castle. It showcases the works of Hungarian artists across many styles, including works produced abroad.

6) Experience the ruin bars

Budapest's nightlife is legendary across Europe and many people come to the city to experience its famed ruin bars. 

These bars are mostly found in the city's Jewish Quarter and sit in derelict buildings that are often missing walls, windows and roofs. They are super kitschy and colourful inside, filled with mismatched patio furniture and random antiques and collectables. 

Budapest's ruin bars are cheap places to drink and they draw big crowds! The most famous of them all is Szimpla Kert.

This Budapest Ruin Bar Tour takes you to a mix of well-known and hidden ruin bars. Plus you get to see some street art in District 7 and enjoy some drinks along the way.

7) Walk down Andrássy Avenue

This avenue connects the city centre with City Park and it is lined with what were once palaces, mansions and lavish townhouses - some of which are now used as embassies and others that house trendy boutiques. Either way, it's a nice place for a stroll.

8) Stop for a cup of coffee 

Budapest has a burgeoning coffee scene! Not only can you see independent coffee shops on almost every street corner, but it's also quite common to come across coffee carts where coffee is ground, brewed, and decorated with foam art right on the street.

This Dessert & Coffee House Tour is all about indulging some guilty pleasures. You'll taste classic Hungarian coffee at a lavish coffee house and sample strudel, chimney cake, and more.

9) Tour the Hungarian Parliament Building

The exterior of the Hungarian Parliament Building graces every postcard and guidebook, but have you ever wondered what it's like on the inside? This neo-Gothic, neo-Romanesque, neo-Baroque structure is one of the main tourist attractions in Budapest, but to see the interior, you'll have to join a guided tour that lasts 45 minutes.

10) Walk across the Chain Bridge

This bridge spans the Danube River between Buda and Pest. It has two pedestrian lanes on either side, and it's a nice place for a stroll just as the sun is going down, or at nighttime when all the lights come on.

11) Go for a dip in the Gellért Baths

After Széchenyi, this is one of the most popular bath complexes in the city. The Gellért Baths have thermal pools, indoor pools, outdoor pools, a wave pool, multiple spa treatments, and beautiful architecture.

12) Drink at the Faust Wine Cellars 

This is an underground wine cellar in the Buda Castle District and it is part of the tunnel labyrinth system we mentioned in a previous activity. If you're looking to taste some Hungarian wines while you're in the city, this is a pretty memorable spot.

13) Stop at The Shoes on the Danube 

The Shoes on the Danube is a memorial to the victims of the Holocaust. It represents the victims who were ordered to remove their shoes and were then shot at the river's edge so that their bodies would fall into the Danube and be carried away.

14) Step inside the Szabo Ervin Library  

If you're a fellow bibliophile, then this one's worth tracking down! The Szabo Ervin Library is a real hidden gem; this library is set inside the former home of a 19th-century aristocrat by the name of Count Frigyes Wenckheim, but today, this mansion is hidden from view because it's surrounded by a modern-day library.

15) Visit the Golden Eagle Pharmacy Museum  

If quirky museums are your thing, here's another one to add to your Budapest bucket list. The Golden Eagle Pharmacy Museum is set in what used to be a 15th-century merchant's home. Then an alchemist moved in and established the first pharmacy in Buda.

16) Visit the charming Vajdahunyad Castle  

This is a fantasy castle that was built in 1896 to celebrate 1,000 years since the Hungarian Conquest of the Carpathian Basin. Vajdahunyad Castle was designed to incorporate design elements from buildings across the Kingdom of Hungary, as well as various architectural styles including Romanesque, Gothic, Renaissance, and Baroque. The castle was initially built out of cardboard and wood as a temporary attraction, but it was so popular that it was then rebuilt using more durable materials.

17) Go to the Király Baths  

You didn't think we were done with baths in Budapest, did you? The Király Thermal Bath is the oldest thermal bath in the city.  It was built by the Ottomans in the 16th century and it has a very distinct look with a domed ceiling that allows small streams of natural light.

18) Check out the statues at Memento Park 

This park is a bit like an open-air museum. It is filled with statues of communist figures including the likes of Marx, Lenin and Engels. When Communism fell in Hungary, the city's statues came down, and rather than destroying them, the idea for Memento Park was born.

19) Walk along Fisherman's Bastion 

This is another popular attraction in Budapest as it offers some of the most beautiful views in the whole city! Fisherman's Bastion is a terrace situated on Castle Hill, and it has 7 turrets that represent the 7 leaders of the Magyar tribes that entered the Carpathian Basin in the 9th century.

20) Marvel at Matthias Church 

Built of white stone and topped with a colourful roof with a geometric pattern, this is a beautiful church to visit. The first church on this site was founded by Saint Stephen, King of Hungary, which is why you'll notice a statue of him right next to the church.

21) Watch the Changing of the Guard 

Another item to add to your list of things to do in Budapest is the Changing of the Guard. This happens right in front of the Hungarian Presidential Palace and it's a choreographed ceremony that draws plenty of onlookers.

22) Climb to the top of St. Stephen's Basilica 

Another place to visit in Budapest is St. Stephen's Basilica, which gets its name from its patron saint, St. Stephen, the first King of Hungary. You can either take the elevator or climb all the way to the top for views of the city and then on your way back, you can see St. Stephen's mummified right hand in a glass case.

You can attend an Organ Concert in St. Stephen's Basilica and listen to classical pieces in a stunning setting.

23) Visit Heroes' Square 

This large public square is famous for its statue of the Seven Chieftains of the Magyars, who were the seven leaders of the tribes of Hungarians that settled around the Carpathian Basin in the 9th century.

24) Have a picnic on Margaret Island 

This is a long and narrow island that sits in the middle of the Danube River. It has plenty of greenery, which makes it a nice place to come for a picnic, and if you're in the mood for a swim, you can also find the Palatinus Strand Baths here.

25) Eat your way through the Great Market Hall 

This is one place you'll want to visit with an appetite! The Great Market Hall is primarily a place to shop for produce, meats, and spices, but you can also find some food stands and restaurants where you can enjoy some tasty Hungarian food.

This Budapest Culinary & Wine Walk guides you through the Great Market Hall and a few nearby eateries where you sample traditional Hungarian foods and wines!

26) Visit the Hungarian State Opera House

This is considered one of the architectural masterpieces of Budapest. If you're short on time and can't make it to a performance, there are guided tours where you can get a glimpse of the extravagant auditorium.

27) Go inside the church in a cave 

Set in a cave at the base of Gellért Hill, this church is run by the Pauline Order of Monks who hold religious services. One thing to keep in mind is that you must be modestly dressed in order to enter the church - that means no bare shoulders.

28) Have cake at the New York Cafe

The New York Cafe is one of the most beautiful cafes in all of Europe and it's a nice midafternoon stop for cake and coffee. Prepare to be wowed by the cream and gold interior accented by red velvet chairs - it feels like you've set foot inside a palace and there's live classical music to set the scene.

29) Visit the Rudas Bath 

We told you this was a city of baths! Much like Király, the Rudas Bath is another medieval Turkish bath in Budapest. The core of it dates back to the 16th century, but it has been expanded since then.

30) Try a Hungarian street food snack 

If street food is your thing, you won't want to miss lángos, a popular street snack that consists of deep-fried dough that can be enjoyed with numerous toppings. If you're craving something savoury, sour cream and cheese is a nice combination, and if you're in the mood for something sweet, you can opt for icing sugar or jam.

Check out this Budapest Street Food Tour focused on Hungarian snacks, desserts and beer! This culinary outing goes off the typical tourist trail and you'll want to arrive hungry.

31) Order a bowl of goulash 

This is the national dish of Hungary and it's a meat soup or stew that is seasoned with paprika and has ingredients like potatoes, carrots, and bell peppers. Goulash recipes vary across Central Europe, and we found that in Hungary they were more like a soup than a stew, but hearty and delicious nonetheless!

32) Drink at the Red Ruin Bar  

Budapest has plenty of ruin bars, but the idea behind this one is a little different. The Red Ruin is a communist-themed bar, where you can see the likes of Marx, Lenin, and Stalin plastered on the walls wearing party hats because it's a "communist party". Get it?

33) Visit the Dohány Street Synagogue 

This is the largest synagogue in Europe and if you're interested in exploring the Jewish Quarter, you can join a guided tour that gives you access to the synagogue and a few other points of interest in the neighbourhood.

This Budapest Jewish Heritage Tour & Synagogue Ticket guides you through the historic Jewish Quarter where you get to learn about the history of Hungarian Jews and visit the synagogue. 

34) Climb up to the Citadella 

For the best views of Pest and the Danube River, you need to climb up to the Citadella. This is a fortress that sits atop Gellért Hill on the Buda side.

35) Tour the Budapest History Museum 

This museum is dedicated to the city's history and it showcases artifacts that were found in Pest, Buda and Óbuda - the three cities that form Budapest.

36) Cruise down the Danube  

Another one of those must-do things in Budapest is to enjoy a river cruise down the Danube River. There are sightseeing cruises, wine-tasting cruises, sunset cruises and romantic nighttime cruises, so plenty of options!

This Dinner Cruise on the Danube with a Folklore Dance Show & Live Music is one of the best-sellers. You get to see famous landmarks and enjoy live entertainment.

37) Visit the Hungarian National Museum 

So many museums, so little time! But if you're looking for one more to add to your Budapest itinerary, the Hungarian National Museum covers archaeology, art and history all under one roof.

38) Explore the Jewish Quarter on foot 

Budapest's Jewish Quarter is a place not to be missed. This neighbourhood has experienced a bit of a renaissance and draws young people with its street art, colourful murals, ruin bars, and restaurants set in crumbling buildings. This is also the place to experience Budapest's notorious nightlife.

39) Tour the Hospital in the Rock 

This emergency hospital and bomb shelter was set up in the tunnel system underneath Buda Castle and dates back to WW2. You can visit as part of a 1-hour guided tour.

40) Ride a train run by children

You read that right! Gyermekvasút, also known as the Children's Railway, is a train where all the jobs, except for that of train engineer, are performed by children aged 10–14. The stops on this train line are also popular recreation spots, so it's a unique way to escape the city in search of nature.

41) Drink beers on the Danube 

We've mentioned a few different ways you can cruise down the Danube River, and a craft beer cruise is one of them! Picture artisanal beers, live music, and the city dazzling at night.

42) Watch the sunset on the Liberty Bridge

This bridge closes to traffic for a few weekends during the summer and it's a popular spot to hang out and watch the sun go down. People bring drinks, snacks, barbecues, and there's also live music so it's a very lively and relaxed atmosphere.

43) Learn about the dark past 

The House of Terror is a museum that looks back at Hungary's Nazi and Soviet regimes. The museum is set in the same building that housed the former headquarters of the ultra-right (Nazi) party, and later the State Security (Hungarian version of the KGB). With that in mind, the museum also seeks to remember the victims who were interrogated, tortured and killed in this very building.

44) Sip on some Pálinka or Unicum 

Two drinks you must try when in Budapest! Pálinka is a fruit brandy with origins in the Hungarian Carpathian Basin, and Unicum is a Hungarian herbal liqueur that can be enjoyed as an apéritif or digestif.

45) Visit a cute neighbouring town 

If you've spent a few days in Budapest and you're looking for a change of scenery, then a day trip to Szentendre is the answer! This charming town sits on the banks of the Danube Bend and it's a fun place to explore on foot with lots of quaint streets and little museums to pop into. You can get there by train or by boat.

46) Look for a bargain at the Ecseri Flea Market 

This one is a little way outside the city centre, however, if you're in the mood for some antique rummaging and treasure-hunting, this is a popular choice with both tourists and locals, and you just never know what you're going to find.

47) Visit the Abandoned Jewish Cemetery  

This is the oldest remaining Jewish cemetery on the Pest side of the city and it is located in the 8th district beside the Kerepesi Cemetery (the two are divided by a stone wall). Men must cover their heads to enter, but you can borrow a kippah at the gate.

48) Take a break in City Park 

This is the park where the Széchenyi Baths, Vajdahunyad Castle, and Heroes' Square are located, so it's a nice place to rest in between all the sightseeing.

49) Experience a bit of magic 

 The House of Houdini is a museum dedicated to Hungarian-born Harry Houdini, one of the greatest magicians and escape artists of all time. You'll be able to see many objects that Houdini used and also be entertained by a new generation of magicians.

50) Escape to the Buda Hills 

This is a popular summer escape thanks to its proximity to the city. If you're looking to do some light hiking (the peaks rise no higher than 500 metres), this is a good option.

#### 50 things to do in BERLIN, Germany! Ultimate Berlin Travel Guide!
Earlier this year I got to spend a wonderful month living like a local in Berlin. Sam and I rented a cute little apartment in Prenzlauer Berg just a couple of stops from Alexanderplatz, and over the course of those 30 days, I made it my mission to see and do as much as possible around the city. There were lots of highlights: music-filled Sundays at Mauerpark, bike rides through art covered neighbourhoods, and late-night dinners in crowded bars jam-packed with hipsters - it was everything I expected the city to be and I loved it!

I didn't manage to see and do it all (I'll need a few more trips for that!), however, in today's post I wanted to share a little travel inspiration for anyone planning a trip to this funky capital. So behold, here are 50 things to do in Berlin!

Berlin Attractions: What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Berlin, Germany!

(1) Eat a Currywurst
The currywurst is a pork sausage that is steamed, fried, sliced, and then served with ketchup and curry. The recipe was supposedly invented by Herta Heuwer in 1949, and it has since become a staple fast food dish in Berlin. For those of you looking to sample currywurst, you'll be glad to know that there are actually two different varieties you can try: Ost Currywurst (which is served without skin) and West Currywurst (which is served with skin). I loved both!

(2) Climb the glass dome on top of the Reichstag

The glass dome atop the Reichstag offers 360-degree views of the city below. The dome is open to visitors, however, you'll have to register online in advance. It's best you do this early on since it's a really popular attraction and sometimes tickets are not available for several days. Alternatively, you can opt for a guided tour and skip the line to the dome with this ticket. 

(3) Wander through Tiergarten
Tiergarten, which translates to Animal Garden, is a public park located in the middle of the city. Back in the day, this was a forest and it served as the king's personal hunting grounds.

(4) Go to Mauerpark on a Sunday afternoon
One of the coolest things to do in Berlin is to swing by Mauerpark on a Sunday. This is when the park transforms into a social gathering, where friends come to barbecue, drink beer, shop at the flea market, and listen to bands play. You'll also want to make time to stop at the Bear Pit - an outdoor amphitheatre that plays host to some wacky performances and wild karaoke. It's all in good fun and anything goes. I watched a tall man juggle in bootie shorts and a red crop top the day I was there!
(5) Snap some photos inside a Photoautomat
If you spend enough time walking around the city, you'll notice old-fashioned photo booths randomly scattered around street corners. For just a few Euros, you can snap some photos with friends and take away some great souvenirs.
(6) Soak in history at the German Historical Museum
The Deutsches Historisches Museum offers a very thorough look at German history. The permanent exhibition is laid out in chronological fashion and walks you through the early days of the Weimar Republic, the Nazi regime, the post-war period, the history of a divided Germany, and the reunification. It's a must visit for a better understanding of German history. If you enjoy history, you may want to consider joining a small group Third Reich and Cold War tour.

(7) Walk the length of the Berlin Wall
The Berlin Wall served as the dividing line between East and West Berlin for 28 years. Today what was once a symbol of oppression stands as a symbol of freedom. Although most of the wall was taken down when Germany reunited, a few strips remain and the stretch found along Mühlenstrasse is the longest. Now known as the East Side Gallery, the wall is covered in murals which were painted by more than 100 artists. This is one of the top things to do in Berlin for visitors.

(8) Hire a bike for the day
One of the best ways to cover a lot of ground in Berlin is to hire a bicycle for the day. The starting rate is 10 Euros for 24 hours and that gives you the freedom to move around the city at your own leisure. Berlin is a very bike-friendly city with special lanes dedicated to cyclists. If you'd rather see the city with a local, there are guided bike tours of Berlin's highlights and you'd be amazed by how much you can see in 3 hours!

(9) Chill out on the runway of an abandoned airport
The now-defunct Flughafen Berlin-Tempelhof has gained new life as a park. While the former airport makes for a rather unconventional public space, locals don't seem to mind and on weekends you'll often find families barbecuing, couples walking their dog, and even joggers running down the landing strip. While you can't go inside the airport on your own, there is the option of joining guided tours which take place on weekends.

(10) Order Schnitzel for lunch
So technically Schnitzel is found all over Germany, and Wiener Schnitzel is actually from Vienna, however, you can't possibly visit Germany's capital and not sample this dish! The portions here are gargantuan. I like mine with a side of Käsespätzle - egg noodle cooked with cheese. Oh, I'm hungry now!

(11) Discover the city with Insider Tours
To get a unique look at Berlin's past, I highly recommend joining one of the various walking tours offered by Insider Tours. I took a tour titled "Third Reich Berlin" which focused on Hitler and the final days of the Second World War and it was fascinating. My guide Jim was an academic who had a knack for bringing history to life and our group hung on to his every word.

(12) Take a cruise down the Spree River
Cruising down the Spree River is a great way to take in the sights, and you can also enjoy a pint of beer while you're at it. You can choose from the 1-hour, 2.5-hour, and 3.5-hour boat tour.

(13) Learn more about Currywurst at the Currywurst Museum
Yes, Berlin has an entire museum specifically dedicated to sausage! This is an interactive space where you can touch, smell, and taste your way around, and when you get tired, you can stop and rest on the Currywurst-shaped sofa.
(14) Soak in the city at Alexanderplatz
Alexanderplatz is iconic. This is the square that always makes an appearance when you're watching a movie that is set in Berlin. You'll catch people posing in front of the famous World Clock, and you can also watch skateboarders test out new tricks.

(15) Go up the Fernsehturm
For a bird's eye view of the city, go up Berlin's TV Tower. There is also a rotating restaurant located atop the tower, where you can enjoy a 3-course dinner with a view. Forget the stairs; the elevator will bring you up in 40 seconds time.

(16) Go museum hopping on Berlin's Museum Island
Berlin's Museum Island, or Museuminsel, is located in the Spree River and it is home to 5 museums and art galleries including Altes Museum, Neues Museum,  Alte Nationalgalerie, Bode Museum,  and Pergamonmuseum. If you're an art aficionado, you may want to consider getting a full day pass which grants you access to all 5 of these.

(17) Catch a concert
There is so much raw talent in this city! The same musicians you see playing in Mauerpark on a Sunday often play gigs in venues across town. Tip: If you go to Mauerpark and see a band you like, pick up one of the little flyers they have in their guitar cases, or just ask them where they're playing next!
(18) Step into KaDeWe
KaDeWe is the biggest department store in continental Europe, but there's more to do here than just shop. If you've ever wondered what a gourmet-style food court looks like, head up to the 6th floor and grab a seat at one of the many counters where seasoned chefs create edible works of art right before your eyes.

(19) Go in search of street art!
Friedrichshain-Kreuzberg, in my opinion, is the best area to go in search of art. Artists have taken over old warehouses and abandoned buildings and brought them to life both inside and out. You'll also find that the art projects extend to residential areas like Kreutzigerstrasse, pictured in the photo above. This tour explore alternative Berlin through street art, city markets, and artist quarters.
(20) Visit a decaying amusement park
Sitting on the banks of the Spree River, Spreepark was once a popular theme park complete with a giant Ferris wheel. When the park shut down in 2001, many of the rides were left abandoned and this drew curious minds. While it was once possible to sneak into the amusement park and explore on your own, security has become tight in recent years. However, there are companies that offer guided tours.
(21) Go for a dip at Schlachtensee
This lake in southwest Berlin offers a nice retreat from city living. You can either go for a swim or rent a rowboat.

(22) Eat Turkish food
There is a large Turkish community in Berlin and this means that lots of Turkish fast-food stands have popped up around the city. Order yourself a nice doner kebab. They are delicious!
(23) Pop into the Bauhaus Archives for a visit
Bauhaus was an art school and art movement which became one of the main influences of modern design. While the actual Bauhaus Museum is located in Weimar, if you find yourself in Berlin you can drop by the Bauhaus Archives which have a smaller collection showcasing Bauhaus furniture and architectural models.
(24) Tour the former spy station!
Teufelsberg is an abandoned spy station that sits on top of a hill by the same name. While the perimeter is fenced off with signs indicating that entry is prohibited, you can join a guided tour of this Cold War era spy station. One of the main draws of the Teufelsberg Spy Station is that it is covered in graffiti.'

(25) Look up inside Berlin Cathedral
Also known as Berliner Dom, Berlin Cathedral is one of the most impressive churches in the city. You wouldn't guess by looking at it today, but the dome was severely damaged during the war. Today the structure has been restored and it stands looking majestic as ever.
(26) Go swimming in a pool...in a cargo container...in a river.
Huh? That was also my reaction when I first heard about this place. Badeschiff literally means 'bathing ship' and, well, it's a swimming pool that sits in the River Spree. Visiting Berlin during the colder months? No problem! The pool gets covered up so you can drop by for a swim even if it's snowing out.
(27) Watch a movie in the park
One of my favourite things about summer is outdoor cinema, something that Berlin knows a thing or two about. From Spandau to Mitte, and Kreuzberg to Friedrichshain, there is no shortage of venues when it comes to choosing where to go.

(28) Browse the Sunday Flea Market in Friedrichshain
Friedrichshain is a very artistic neighbourhood and it draws a like-minded crowd. You'll come across people playing live music and selling things you might find in your grandmother's attic. The flea market is a mish-mash of musical instruments, antique furniture, faded jean-jackets, and leather boots. One man's junk is another man's treasure, right? Even if you're not in the mood for shopping, it can be a lot of fun to browse around and soak in the randomness.
(29) Go rock-climbing at Der Kegel
German for 'the cone', der Kegel is a rock-climbing centre located in Friedrichshain. This former bunker has been used as climbing wall since 2005, and it's particularly popular on weekends.

(30) Take part in Street Food Thursdays
If you're a foodie, you'll want to swing by Markthalle Neun on a Thursday. The concept is simple, every Thursday the market is transformed into a communal dining area with food stands serving up dishes from every corner of the world. Indian, Japanese, Chinese, German - you can find it all here. If you're a foodie, you might also enjoy this secret food tour.

(31) Feel like royalty inside the Charlottenburg Palace
Located in the city's outskirts, this royal palace was commissioned by Queen Sophia Charlotte of Hanover - the first Queen of Prussia. The woman had lavish taste and you can tell as soon as you set foot in the palace. You can book a complete palace experience with a palace tour, dinner and Baroque concert.

(32) Wander around the Charlottenburg Gardens
After visiting the palace, you'll want to swing around the back to see the gardens. The area is especially beautiful in the springtime when all the flowers are in bloom. There is a small lake at the very end where you can feed ducks and geese.
(33) Listen to a performance by the Berlin Philarmonic
If you enjoy classical music you'll be glad to hear that the Berlin Philarmonic holds free concerts on Tuesdays during the lunch hour. These concerts are also catered, so it's a nice lunch idea. (P.S. The food is not free.)

(34) Pay your respects at the Holocaust Memorial
The Memorial to the Murdered Jews of Europe is a place to remember the atrocities that took place during the Nazi regime. The memorial takes the form of a sloping field where stone boulders stand row on row. The artist's idea was that this memorial would produce a feeling of uneasiness, uncertainty, and fear through order. People have also commented how the stone blocks make it look like a cemetery, so the memorial can be interpreted in many different ways.  An information centre underneath offers visitors the chance to delve deeper into the topic through letters and photographs of the Holocaust victims. There are similar memorials around Berlin, including the Memorial to the Sinti and Roma victims of National Socialism, and the Memorial to Homosexuals persecuted under Nazism in Berlin.
(35) Learn about the Nazi reign of terror
The Topography of Terror is both an indoor and outdoor museum which sits in the same spot where the buildings of the Gestapo and the SS once stood. The exhibition focuses on the crimes committed across Europe during the Third Reich. A long stretch of the former Berlin Wall also stands directly across the museum.
(36) Take a somber day trip to Sachsenhausen
Located just 35 kilometres north of Berlin, Sachsenhausen was a concentration camp established in 1936 and used all the way until the end of the war in 1945. An estimated 200,000 people are believed to have passed through here. There are half day tours where you can visit the site with a knowledgable guide and learn about the Nazi SS and Gestapo atrocities committed during World War II.

(37) Visit the DDR Museum
If you've ever wondered what life was like in former East Germany, then the Deutsches Demokratisches Republik Museum is the place you'll want to visit. The exhibit is very fun and interactive, and it goes as far as recreating the living spaces inside an East German home. From the brand of soap to the type of furniture that was popular at the time, this museum takes you back to a different period.
(38) Hang out in Potsdamer Platz
While I personally can't find much to love about Potsdamer Platz, it is one of the most important public squares in the city. This was the heart of Berlin's nightlife during the 1920s and 1930s, and it was synonymous with Piccadilly Circus in London.
(39) Go hunting for UFOs
Berlin is home to the Futuro House, a home which looks just like a UFO. While I'm sure the owner wouldn't appreciate you showing up at his door unannounced, you can sneak a peek at this home from a distance as it sits on the banks of the River Spree.

(40) Tour Berlin aboard a Trabant
The Trabant, affectionately known as the Trabi, was the car of former East Germany. These vehicles were quite coveted and there was a waiting period of around 15 years to receive this family car. While the vehicles certainly weren't known for reliability, there is a sense of nostalgia associated with them, and you do a 75-minute tour of Berlin aboard a Trabi.
(41) Visit the Soviet War Memorial
Located in Treptower Park, the Soviet War Memorial acts as both a war memorial and a military cemetery for the Soviet soldiers who fell during the Battle of Berlin. Here you'll see a 12-meter statue of a Soviet soldier holding a young German child, while standing over a broken swastika marking the triumph over Nazism.

(42) Go shopping
If you've come to Berlin to do a bit of shopping, there are plenty of shopping centres to check out across the city. A few that come to mind include KaDeWe, Galeria Kaufhof, and the high-end shops along Friedrichstrasse.

(43) Get your passport stamped at Checkpoint Charlie
Sure, it may be a little touristy, but whilst in Berlin, you can get your passport stamped with the stamps of the 4 sectors which controlled Berlin after the war - the United States, France, Britain, and the USSR - as well as the official stamp of the DDR - East Germany. (So far I haven't had any trouble when going through customs, but the stamps have gotten some chuckles out of European officials.)
(44) Cross over to Peacock Island! 
Pfaueninsel is a little island situated in Berlin-Wannsee and it is home to free-roaming peacocks and other exotic birds. This island used to be a country escape for Prussian King Frederick William II who built a little castle for himself and his mistress.
(45) Take a stroll through Grunewald
For a day spent at one with nature, head out to Grunewald (Green Forest). You'll leave the bustle of the city behind and be surrounded by towering trees and tranquillity.
(46) Walk across Oberbaumbrücke
Oberbaum Bridge is another of those iconic city landmarks. The double-decker red brick bridge connects the two boroughs of Friedrichshain and Kreuzberg. Because these boroughs were once divided by the Berlin Wall, this bridge has become a symbol of unity.

(47) Walk through Brandenburger Tor
Known as Brandenburg Gate in English, this former city gate is one of the most iconic monuments in Berlin. After the Berlin Wall fell in 1989, it too became a symbol of unity and freedom. This iconic sight is another one of those top things to do in Berlin for visitors.
(48) Start the night out at a Spaeti
So a Spaeti or Spaetkaufhaus is nothing more than a convenience store, however, in Berlin this is where young people like to get their big night out started. With an ample supply of beer at the fraction the cost of what you'd pay in a trendy bar, this is the congregating point for a night of clubbing...and this is also where many a night ends in search of late-night snacks.
(49) Discover the nightlife
So I'm probably not the best person to ask about Berlin's nightlife. While I did get to experience a few of the city's bars and popular hangouts, I was usually in bed long before the night got started. However, I can tell you that Berlin is home to some of the most notorious clubs in the world. Let me put it to you this way, I've walked past clubs on a Sunday morning and the party is still going... I remember going out for breakfast with a friend when we walked past a club and the bouncer asked us, "Wanna come in?" Clubbing on a Sunday morning? Apparently, in Berlin, you can.
(50) Take a day trip to Potsdam
And if you've had your fill of Berlin, you can always take a little day trip over to Potsdam which is just a short train ride away. Potsdam is known for its beautiful palaces and gardens like those found at Sans-souci. FYI Sans-souci is nicknamed "the Versailles of Germany", which is enough to pique my interest.

#### 5 Fun & Easy Tokyo Day Trips You Can Plan Yourself! Amazing Excursions Near Tokyo
When we were planning our trip to Japan, we decided to dedicate one whole month to Tokyo. This was in part because we knew there was so much to see and do around the city, but also because we wanted to plan some fun and easy Tokyo day trips. The idea was to use the city as a base to explore some nearby destinations without necessarily having to pack up our bags and switch accommodations every few nights. Today, I'm going to highlight 5 of the trips Sam and I went on, so let's dive in!

Fun & Easy Tokyo Day Trips: Best Day Tours and Must-See Spots from Tokyo, Japan

Odaiba

A day trip in search of robots

This was by far the closest and easiest day trip from Tokyo, but it just goes to show that you don't always have to go far to be wowed by a place.

Odaiba is a large artificial island in Tokyo Bay and we knew to expect futuristic constructions and lots of shopping malls, but what we weren't expecting were robots - lots and lots of robots!



First, we came across Junco Chihira, an interactive android inside Aqua City Shopping Complex that looks just like a human. Junco works the information desk at the mall and is trilingual, speaking Japanese, Chinese and English! She can answer any queries pertaining to transport access, tourist information and restaurants, but most people around the info desk were really there to snap photos of her - ourselves included!

Next, we came face to face with Unicorn Gundam, a massive 20-meter robot that stands guard outside DiverCity. Gundam is a fictional robot from an anime series and undergoes a transformation a few times a day, changing from Unicorn Mode to Destroy Mode. I can't say I had heard of Gundam before coming to Japan, but it was still pretty cool to see him; it felt like I was in the movie Transformers.

Last but not least, we can't forget about Asimo, a humanoid robot housed in the National Museum of Emerging Science and Innovation. We watched him give a demonstration of his skills and were pretty amazed. He walked, hopped on one foot, played football, and pretty much won the crowd over.

And that's just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to robots in Odaiba; there were plenty more to interact with at the museum I mentioned earlier, so if you're looking to come face to face with robots, Odaiba is an ideal day trip.

Distance from Tokyo: 17 kilometres

Yokohama

A day trip in search of street food

We travelled to Yokohama for food and food alone, and this turned out to be a great decision! Yokohama is home to the largest Chinatown in all of Japan and Asia, and we were spoilt for choice when it came to street food.

We wasted no time hitting up the main pedestrian street where we sampled things like steamed buns stuffed with sweet beef and caramelized onions, shrimp and pork dumplings, sesame balls, egg tarts, bubble tea, and cute panda-shaped buns, just to name a few.

Aside from all the street food on offer, Yokohama Chinatown also had an abundance of restaurants ranging from open buffet to a la carte and budget eats to fine dining. We ended up finding a little restaurant on a small side lane where we ordered a spicy ramen soup and mapo tofu with rice.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KD-jkNsFIUY

We left Yokohama feeling stuffed beyond belief, yet knowing we had sampled a mere fraction of what this place has to offer.

Distance from Tokyo: 40 kilometres

Kamakura

A day trip in search of temples

Our day trip to Kamakura was all about exploring this coastal city's shrines and temples - quite the tall order when you take into account the fact that Kamakura is home to 65 temples and 19 shrines, some of which date as far back as the 8th century! Since we only had one day in Kamakura, we decided to focus on just 3 attractions.

First up, we visited Tsurugaoka Hachiman-gu, a Shinto shrine that is dedicated to Hachiman, the patron god of samurais. This temple was a short walk from the train station and we enjoyed getting to stroll the grounds where we came face to face with a massive wall of sake offerings.

From there, we continued on to Kotoku-in, a temple that's home to the second-largest Buddha in all of Japan. It stands 11.4 meters tall and since it's hollow inside, it's open to visitors, though we opted out since we were visiting Japan in the middle of summer!

The third temple we visited was Hasedera, most famous for its eleven-headed statue of the Goddess of Mercy, though we were most impressed by the Benzaiten Grotto, which was basically a long cave with carvings and statues that adorned its walls.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dBQJHlV948Q

In between all the shrine and temple hopping, we also managed to walk the full length of Komachi-dori; this is a pedestrian street that is lined with small restaurants, cafes, and street vendors serving up delicious street food, so we sampled some of the local eats.

Distance from Tokyo: 55 kilometres

Mount Takao

A day trip in search of nature

As much as we enjoyed Tokyo, towards the end of our stay we were craving some time closer to nature and Mount Takao proved to be the perfect escape. Located just 1 hour away from Tokyo, Mount Takao felt worlds away from the city's rapid pace.

Some of the highlights from this day trip included feasting on soba noodles at a little restaurant at the base of the mountain, strolling through a cedar-lined path on our way to visit the main temple, and sampling lots of street food from the vendors that line the mountain path. A quick heads up: you won't go hungry on Mount Takao!

This was a really fun day trip from Tokyo and I would say it's a great option even for non-hikers. Mount Takao stands 599 meters tall, but there are a few different ways to get halfway up the mountain including a funicular (the steepest in all of Japan) and a chair lift. From there, the "hike" to the top is actually a very light stroll with only a few sets of stairs along the way.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fd47Yz9APc0

Distance from Tokyo: 50 kilometres

Nikko

A day trip in search of culture

So technically Sam and I spent a few days in Nikko, but since it's a popular day trip from Tokyo, I decided to include it on this list.

Nikko is a small city, that really feels more like a town, and it is best known for its Shinto shrines and Buddhist temples scattered in the forest - a few of which are listed as UNESCO World Heritage Sites.

Some of the main attractions in Nikko include Tosho-gu, a shrine dedicated to Tokugawa Ieyasu who was the founder of the Tokugawa shogunate; the Shinkyo Bridge, which legend says was formed by two big snakes intertwining to allow passage across the river; and Rinno-ji, a temple with elaborate wood carvings that also houses gilded wooden Buddha statues.

A day trip to Nikko might be a bit rushed to venture further afield and cruise on Lake Chuzenji, marvel at Kegon Falls, or unwind at Kinugawa Onsen, but there is plenty to enjoy in the town.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sSzoAchb-Xk

This is by far the furthest Tokyo day trip I've listed, so if you want to maximize your time, it's best to start early. You can always nap on the train, but don't miss the final approach into the Nikko where you'll be treated to stunning forest and mountain views.

Distance from Tokyo: 149 kilometres

Of course, there are only so many day trips we could squeeze into our 1-month stay, so feel free to chime in the comments if you have any other suggestions of fun and easy Tokyo day trips to add to this list!

How to Plan a DIY Day Trip from Tokyo

Spending a month in Tokyo gives you the luxury of time. But even travellers on a shorter itinerary can steal a slice of the capital’s out-of-town magic. The secret is preparation: trains run like clockwork, but routes, tickets and local etiquette can still trip up first-timers. Below you’ll find the nitty-gritty we wish we’d known before swiping our Suica cards and dashing for the platform.

Choose the Right Rail Pass (or None at All)

PassPrice*ValidityBest ForDestinations Covered HereJR Tokyo Wide Pass10,180 ¥3 consecutive daysTravellers who plan 2–3 longer trips (Nikko, Gunma, Fuji area)Nikko, Mount Takao (JR option), YokohamaTokyu/Minatomirai Day Ticket780 ¥1 dayFoodies heading to Yokohama + Shibuya same dayYokohamaOdakyu Kamakura-Enoshima Pass1,640 ¥1 dayTemple-hoppers & beach loversKamakuraNo pass, just IC cardPay-as-you-go—Odaiba, Mount Takao (Keio line), flexible plansOdaiba

* Prices as of spring 2024. Always check latest fares.

Rule of thumb:If your round-trip JR ticket will exceed ~4,000 yen, investigate a regional pass. Otherwise, stick with your Suica/Pasmo and avoid the admin.

Master the Departure Dance at Tokyo Stations

Arrive 15 minutes early. Even locals need a minute to navigate the maze of exits, ticket gates and convenience-store detours.

Grab ekiben (station bento). Try yakitori onigiri at Shinjuku for Mount Takao or gyoza sandwiches at Ueno for Nikko. Platform kiosks accept IC cards.

Car numbers matter. Limited-express services (e.g., JR Nikko, Odakyu Romancecar) have reserved seating. Your carriage and seat are printed on the ticket—stand by the corresponding floor marker.

Mind the Green Car. On local JR lines to Yokohama you’ll spot two-storey “Green Cars”. These cost extra; if you sit down without tapping a Green Car reader you’ll be charged a hefty onboard fee.

Timing Your Trip: Crowds vs. Seasons

SeasonProsConsBook Ahead?Late Mar – Early Apr (sakura)Pink tunnel at Kamakura’s Hasedera; riverside blossoms in YokohamaHotels & trains rammed, picnic spots “reserved” by 5 a.m.Yes, especially for Romancecar seatsMay (post-Golden Week)Fresh greenery on Mount Takao, stable weatherPollen and early humidityWeekends onlyJun – Jul (rainy + hydrangea)Hydrangea at Hase Temple, smaller crowdsUmbrellas + slippery temple stairsNot necessarySep – Nov (koyo/autumn colour)Fiery maples around Nikko’s lake & falls; clear air for Fuji viewsPeak leaf weekends congestedYesDec – Feb (winter illuminations)Gundam’s Christmas light-up, fewer touristsShort days, Nikko temples close earlierReserved seats advised for New Year period

Hot tip: Odaiba and Yokohama Chinatown shine on rainy days because most attractions are indoors. Save Mount Takao and Kamakura for blue-sky forecasts.

Pack Like a Day-Trip Pro

Layer up: trains blast heat in winter and AC in summer. A light jacket or cardigan balances both extremes.

Cash stash: many rural snack stalls (Takao dango, Nikko yuba katsu) still operate on a cash-only basis. 5,000 yen in small coins/notes is plenty.

Portable battery + pocket Wi-Fi: Google Maps works offline, but real-time train apps (NAVITIME, Jorudan) make platform changes painless.

Reusable bag: Japan is phasing out free plastic; helpful for takeaway treats and temple souvenirs.

Emergency coin locker coin: most lockers now accept IC cards, but a 100-yen backup coin can save the day.

Respectful Tourism 101

Shrine & Temple Etiquette – Remove hats, silence phones, bow once at torii gates, and never film prayer rituals without permission.

Restaurant Lines – In Yokohama and Kamakura, queues form neatly on pavement markers. Leave a gap so pedestrians can pass.

Nature Paths – On Mount Takao the cedar-root trails are fragile; stick to marked paths to prevent erosion.

Noise level – Trains are “quiet zones”; take phone calls in vestibules or wait until you disembark.

Sample One-Day Itineraries With Timetables

Kamakura “Culture & Coast” Loop

TimeActivityNotes07:54JR Yokosuka Line from Tokyo StationArr. Kamakura 08:4609:00Komachi-dori coffee & sweet potato croquetteBeat later crowds09:30Tsurugaoka Hachiman-gu shrine45 min10:30Enoden train to Hase7 min ride10:45Hasedera (hydrangea walk)60 min12:00Walk to Kotoku-in Great Buddha15 min12:45Vegetarian shojin-ryori lunch at Kotoku-in caféReserve if weekend14:00Bus to Inamuragasaki for seaside sunset (summer) OR back to stationIC card okay15:30Return train to TokyoHome by 17:00

Mount Takao “Temple & Trail” Escape

TimeActivityNotes08:00Keio Line “Mt. Takao” express from Shinjuku55 min, ¥40709:00Soba breakfast at foot of cable-carTry yam-tororo topping09:40Chairlift to mid-stationOpen-air thrill!10:00Yakuo-in Temple + tengu statues60 min11:15Peak panorama, snack on miso dango12:30Descend via Trail 4 (suspension bridge)60 min14:00Footbath & craft beer at Takao Brewery40 min break15:00Direct train back to Shinjuku

Flex option: swap brewery for onsen at Keio Takaosan Onsen Gokurakuyu (towels 200 ¥).

Food Souvenirs Worth Lugging Home

Tokyo Banana “Caramel Custard” (Odaiba Aqua City flagship) – seasonal box sells out on weekends.

Yokohama “Banana Cake” – yes, banana again! Fluffy sponge found at Chinatown’s Rouishin bakery.

Kamakura Hato Sablé – dove-shaped butter cookie dating back to 1897. Buy at Toshimaya near station.

Takao Tengu Pepper – tiny bottled spice blend, earthy and citrusy; pick up at temple stalls.

Nikko Yuba Maki – dried tofu-skin rolls, a Buddhist delicacy—lightweight but gourmet.

When Things Go Wrong (And How to Fix Them)

Missed last train? Major hubs like Yokohama and Hachioji run until ~midnight, but Nikko’s final Limited Express leaves before 18:00 some days. In a pinch, book a capsule hotel inside JR Ueno or Shinjuku station via the S.Ride app while en-route.

Lost item on JR? Speak to the station master before you exit the gate. Provide train line, car number, object colour. Retrieval success rates are astonishingly high.

Sudden rainstorm on Takao? Vending machines at the trailhead sell ¥400 ponchos. Boots muddy? Stations offer disposable shoe wipes.

20 Essential FAQs About Planning Easy & Fun Day Trips from Tokyo, Japan

How far in advance should I plan my Tokyo day trips?

For popular destinations like Nikko or Kamakura during cherry blossom or autumn foliage season, aim to book train tickets and any special passes 1–2 weeks in advance. For Odaiba or Yokohama, you can decide the night before since no reservations are usually required.

What is the easiest day trip from Tokyo for beginners?

Odaiba is by far the easiest. It’s located just 17 km from central Tokyo, is fully connected by urban transit, and most attractions are indoors and signposted in English. It’s ideal if you want a low-stress excursion.

Which Tokyo day trip is best for food lovers?

Yokohama Chinatown is heaven for foodies. It’s the largest Chinatown in Asia, packed with stalls selling steamed buns, sesame balls, dumplings, bubble tea, and cute panda-shaped pastries. You can also find ramen shops and mapo tofu spots in hidden alleys.

What is the most culturally rich day trip from Tokyo?

Kamakura and Nikko are both top picks. Kamakura offers dozens of temples and shrines within walking distance, while Nikko showcases ornate UNESCO-listed shrines like Tosho-gu set amid cedar forests.

Can I visit Nikko as a day trip or should I stay overnight?

Yes, you can do it as a day trip if you take an early train (around 7–8 a.m.) and focus on Tosho-gu, Shinkyo Bridge, and Rinno-ji. However, an overnight stay lets you add Lake Chuzenji, Kegon Falls, and hot springs without feeling rushed.

Which rail pass should I get for these day trips?

The JR Tokyo Wide Pass is best for longer excursions like Nikko or Mount Takao (JR route). The Odakyu Kamakura-Enoshima Pass works well for temple hopping in Kamakura, while the Tokyu/Minatomirai Day Ticket is ideal for Yokohama and Shibuya in one day.

Do I need to book train tickets in advance?

For limited-express trains to Nikko or Kamakura’s Romancecar, booking a reserved seat ahead is smart—especially during peak seasons. For local lines to Yokohama or Odaiba, you can just tap in with an IC card.

What time should I leave Tokyo for a successful day trip?

Aim to depart between 7:00–9:00 a.m. This gives you enough time to explore without rushing back for the last train. For Nikko in particular, an early departure maximizes your time at the shrines.

Are Tokyo day trips doable with kids?

Yes. Odaiba is especially kid-friendly with interactive robots and indoor attractions. Mount Takao’s funicular and chairlift are also great for families. Just bring snacks, layers, and plan breaks.

What’s the best season to do Tokyo day trips?

Spring (late March–early April) and autumn (September–November) are ideal for blossoms and foliage. Summer is lush but humid, while winter has crisp skies perfect for Mount Takao views and Odaiba illuminations.

What should I pack for a day trip from Tokyo?

Carry layers for changing train temperatures, 5,000 ¥ in small bills, a portable battery, a reusable bag, and one 100-yen coin for lockers. Comfortable walking shoes are a must for Kamakura and Mount Takao.

Is Mount Takao suitable for non-hikers?

Absolutely. You can take a funicular or chairlift halfway up, then enjoy a gentle forest stroll to the summit. There are rest stops, temple visits, and food stalls along the way.

How crowded are these destinations?

Odaiba and Yokohama remain manageable year-round, though weekends see families. Kamakura and Nikko can be packed during sakura and autumn foliage seasons. Visit early in the day or midweek to avoid the biggest crowds.

What happens if I miss the last train back to Tokyo?

Yokohama and Hachioji trains run until midnight, but Nikko’s last Limited Express can leave before 6 p.m. In emergencies, you can book capsule hotels at Ueno or Shinjuku stations via apps like S.Ride while en route.

Are there any etiquette tips I should know?

Yes—bow once at torii gates, keep quiet on trains, don’t film prayer rituals without permission, queue neatly outside restaurants, and stick to marked nature trails at Mount Takao to protect cedar roots.

Which day trip is best on a rainy day?

Odaiba and Yokohama Chinatown are excellent rainy-day choices since most attractions are indoors. Avoid Mount Takao in heavy rain as trails can get slippery.

Can I combine multiple destinations in one day?

Yes. Yokohama + Shibuya works well using the Tokyu/Minatomirai Day Ticket. Kamakura + Enoshima can be done together via the Enoden line, though it’s a full day. Nikko should not be combined with another destination.

What are the best local snacks or souvenirs to bring back?

Tokyo Banana caramel custard from Odaiba, panda buns from Yokohama, Hato Sablé cookies from Kamakura, Tengu Pepper from Mount Takao, and Nikko Yuba Maki tofu rolls are great edible souvenirs.

Do I need internet access for day trips?

Pocket Wi-Fi or a SIM card with data helps a lot, especially for real-time train apps like Jorudan and NAVITIME. Offline Google Maps works, but won’t show train delays or platform changes.

Is it worth dedicating several days just to Tokyo day trips?

Yes. Basing yourself in Tokyo and doing multiple day trips lets you experience futuristic, cultural, natural, and foodie destinations without the hassle of changing hotels—perfect for slow travel.

Tokyo’s orbit is dotted with pocket-sized worlds. Happy day-tripping!

Read more about Japan

5 Tours to Bike Osaka Like a Local

Destination Snapshot

  
    
      Place
      Vibe
      Best For
      Ideal Stay
      Don’t Miss
    
  
  
    
      Odaiba
      Futuristic, indoor fun
      Families, tech fans, rainy days
      Half-day
      Unicorn Gundam; robot demos at Miraikan
    
    
      Yokohama
      Waterfront + Chinatown eats
      Foodies, casual strollers
      Half-day–Full day
      Panda buns; Minato Mirai skyline
    
    
      Kamakura
      Temples + coastal strolls
      Culture lovers, photographers
      Full day
      Great Buddha; Hasedera hydrangea path
    
    
      Mount Takao
      Forest retreat near the city
      Nature seekers, families
      Full day
      Yakuo-in; funicular/chairlift; Trail 4 bridge
    
    
      Nikko
      Ornate shrines in cedars
      History buffs, scenery chasers
      Full day–Overnight
      Toshogu; Shinkyo Bridge; Kegon Falls
    
  

Distance & Time

  Distance from Tokyo (km)
  DestinationDistance
  
    Odaiba17 km
    Yokohama40 km
    Kamakura55 km
    Mount Takao50 km
    Nikko149 km
  

  Typical One-Way Travel Time (train)
  DestinationMinutes
  
    Odaiba~25 min
    Yokohama~35 min
    Kamakura~60 min
    Mount Takao~55 min
    Nikko~120 min
  

Experience Comparison

  Experience Comparison (1–5 ★)
  
    
      Destination
      Food
      Culture
      Nature
      Rainy-day
      Kid-friendly
    
  
  
    
      Odaiba
      ★★★☆☆
      ★★☆☆☆
      ★☆☆☆☆
      ★★★★★
      ★★★★★
    
    
      Yokohama
      ★★★★★
      ★★☆☆☆
      ★☆☆☆☆
      ★★★★☆
      ★★★★☆
    
    
      Kamakura
      ★★★☆☆
      ★★★★★
      ★★★☆☆
      ★★☆☆☆
      ★★★☆☆
    
    
      Mount Takao
      ★★★☆☆
      ★★★☆☆
      ★★★★★
      ★☆☆☆☆
      ★★★★☆
    
    
      Nikko
      ★★☆☆☆
      ★★★★★
      ★★★★☆
      ★★☆☆☆
      ★★★☆☆
    
  

Rail-Pass Decision Helper

  Should I buy a pass or just use an IC card?
  
    2+ long JR rides in 3 days (e.g., Nikko + Mount Takao JR): JR Tokyo Wide Pass.
    Kamakura + Enoshima day: Odakyu Kamakura-Enoshima Pass.
    Yokohama + Shibuya same day: Tokyu/Minatomirai Day Ticket.
    Only Odaiba / one short hop: Just tap Suica/PASMO (no pass needed).
  

Seasonal Cheat-Sheet

  Best time by vibe
  
    Late Mar–Early Apr (sakura): Kamakura temple paths & gardens.
    Sep–Nov (autumn colours): Nikko foliage; Mount Takao panoramas.
    Rainy-day winners: Odaiba (indoor), Yokohama Chinatown (covered arcades).
    Low-crowd shoulder: May (post–Golden Week) & late Nov–Dec weekdays.
  

Packing Checklist

  Day-Trip Packing Checklist
  ItemWhy it matters
  
    Layers (light jacket/cardigan)Trains swing between strong AC/heat
    ¥5,000 in small bills/coinsSnack stalls & temple souvenirs
    Portable battery + pocket Wi-FiLive platform changes & delays
    Reusable toteReduced single-use plastics in Japan
    100-yen coin backupFor lockers that don’t accept IC
  

“When Things Go Wrong”

  When things go wrong (quick fixes)
  
    Missed last train (Nikko): Search capsule hotels at Ueno/Shinjuku while inbound; catch the first train in the morning.
    Lost item on JR: Report at the station master before exiting gates; note line, car number, seat.
    Takao rainstorm: Buy a ¥400 poncho at the trailhead; many stations sell disposable shoe wipes.

#### 1-Day Nara Travel Itinerary: What to See, Eat & Do on a Day Trip!
Today, we're sharing a 1-day Nara travel itinerary featuring a mix of main attractions, hidden gems, and must-try Japanese street food. If you're travelling in Japan's Golden Triangle, this is one destination you won't want to miss!
One of the best things we did during our stay in Osaka was to go on a day trip to Nara. Once the capital of Japan, from the years 710 to 784, Nara is home to temples, shrines and beautiful gardens, but its main claim to fame are the resident deer who roam the streets, bow for treats, and amuse visitors.

This destination is hardly a well-kept secret and you are guaranteed to find crowds around the main sights, but don't let that deter you from visiting. There's something magical about Nara and it truly was one of the highlights of our Japan trip.
For anyone thinking of visiting Nara on a day trip, I'm sharing our 1-day Nara travel itinerary featuring historic temples, secret gardens, and delicious street food!

Nara Travel Guide: Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Nara, Japan

How to get to Nara
Nara is an easy day trip from Osaka and Kyoto with multiple train options to get you there.
From Osaka, you can take the Kintetsu Nara Line departing from Kintetsu Namba Station and arriving at Kintetsu Nara Station.
Or if you have a JR Pass, you can take the JR Kanjo-Yamatoji Lines departing from JR Osaka Station and arriving at JR Nara Station.
We went with the first option since we travelled without a JR Pass.
From Kyoto, you can take the Kintetsu Nara Line departing from Kintetsu Kyoto Station and arriving at Kintetsu Nara Station. 
Or if you're a JR Pass holder, you can take the JR Nara Line departing from JR Kyoto Station and arriving at JR Nara Station - just make sure you get on the express!
You can find more detailed information with travel times and prices here.

Nara Attractions: How To Make The Most Of Your Day Trip!
Nara Park
Let's start with Nara Park since this is where many of the city's attractions are located and where you're most likely to do your sightseeing.

Nara Park was established in 1880, making it one of the oldest parks in Japan, and it covers a total of 660 hectares, meaning there's a lot to explore.
Within this public park, you'll find temples, shrines, museums, and walking trails.
The park also happens to be home to around 1200 sika deer who roam freely, but we'll get to the deer in a bit.
For now, know that admission to the park is free, though you'll have to pay for a few select attractions within the park grounds.
Todai-ji
The main attraction in Nara Park is Todai-ji Temple, which was once the world's largest wooden building. And as though that weren't impressive enough, this temple also happens to house the largest bronze statue of a Buddha. Imagine that!

It takes a few moments for your eyes to adjust when you first walk into the temple, as it's quite dark in there, but then you're met with this giant bronze statue that stands 15 meters tall and dates back to 752.
Fun fact: they've taken x-rays of this statue and there are treasures hidden within it!

Aside from Todai-ji, we only visited a handful of shrines scattered through the city, but if you're up for a temple-hopping adventure on your day trip to Nara, here are a few to consider:

Saidai-ji
Kōfuku-ji
Gangō-ji
Yakushi-ji
Tōshōdai-ji
Shin-Yakushi-ji
Daian-ji
Enjō-ji
Ryōsen-ji

Yoshiki-en Garden
Now for what may be the best-kept secret in Nara, I present to you: Yoshiki-en Garden!
This place wasn't even on our Nara travel itinerary. We found it completely by chance on our way to Isuien Garden and what really caught our attention was the sign offering free admission to foreign visitors.
It would appear that this place isn't well-known to international travellers (it certainly wasn't listed on any guidebooks or blog posts that we read prior to our visit!), because when we reached the ticketing booth, the attendant was quite curious to know how we had found this place (online, from the tourist office, a local's recommendation).

Well, it didn't take us long to realize that we had stumbled somewhere pretty special. The Yoshiki-en Garden was built on the site of Kofuku-ji Temple's former priest residences, and it lived up to the image of Japan I had dreamt up in my head.
The garden itself was divided into three different sections: the Pond Garden, the Moss Garden and the Flower Garden.
Since we visited in summer, everything looked so lush and green, and smelled incredibly fresh.
We followed the trail through all three gardens ooh-ing and ahh-ing at every turn.
For me, this garden alone was worth the day trip to Nara!

Feeding the bowing deer of Nara
Now let's talk about the main draw to Nara: the deer!
Nara's deer hold a very special status in the city. Local folklore has it that Takemikazuchi, the god of thunder, once appeared on Mount Wakakusa (just up the hill from Nara Park) riding a white deer, and thus the deer inhabiting the surrounding forest were deemed sacred messengers of the gods.
Up until 1637, harming a deer was considered a capital offence punishable by death, but after WWII their sacred status was removed, and today they are seen as a national treasure.

The quickest way to befriend the deer is with treats, and thankfully there are lots of licensed vendors selling crackers specifically made for the deer.
These are called 'shika senbei' and you can get them for ¥150.

Be warned that the deer can sniff out those crackers whether you stuff them in your pockets or hide them in your bag, so once you have them in hand, prepare for a herd of deer to approach.
The deer are pretty good about bowing - Sam bowed in front of them a few times and then they started doing it too - but I will say that as tame as they are, they can be quite persistent and nip if you're not feeding them fast enough.

Nara Street Food
A big highlight of our day trip to Nara was all the street food we got to sample!
We did most of our eating around Kintetsu-Nara Station, visiting several shops along Higashimuki Shopping Street, which is a covered pedestrian street, plus we also picked up a few snacks in Nara Park.
If you too are looking to get a taste of Nara, here are some of the street food items we'd recommend:

Mochi / ¥130
For the performance of a lifetime, you need to get freshly-pounded mochi at Nakatanidou.
Men pound the green mochi right before your eyes using fists and big wooden hammers and it's a complete spectacle.
Contrary to popular belief, this mochi is not matcha flavoured but gets its green colour from mugwort.
It is then stuffed with azuki beans and rolled in roasted soy powder.
The mochi was served warm and it was very soft and light. This was hands down the best mochi we tried in all of Japan!

Persimmon Leaf Sushi / ¥1300
Another street food item unique to Nara is sushi wrapped in persimmon leaves, which is placed in a wooden box and left to ferment a few days. I know this probably doesn't sound very appetizing, but I assure you, it is!
This tradition of fermented sushi is one that dates back to the times before refrigerators were around, and it was a popular snack to enjoy during the summer festivals.
The original recipe calls for salted mackerel, but these days there's a greater variety like eel, red snapper and salmon.
We got a mixed box set with both mackerel and salmon and had a little picnic. You can buy these sushi boxes at Kakinohazushi Hiraso Todaiji just outside the train station.

Deer Poop / ¥430
Once you enter Nara Park, you'll notice a few deer-themed snacks for visitors, including deer poop! These are chocolate covered peanuts, and it's easy to see how they get their name.
If you're looking for a fun souvenir to take back home for friends, this one will probably get a few giggles.

Seasonal Soft-Serve Ice Cream / ¥350-400
Another sweet treat that we enjoyed in Nara Park was soft-serve ice cream. They had some seasonal flavours to choose from like sakura and white peach, as well as the classics like matcha, vanilla, strawberry, and chocolate.
I wasn't too sure about the sakura ice cream (what do cherry blossoms taste like, anyway?), but it was surprisingly sweet with a light floral aroma. Definitely worth trying!

Dorayaki / ¥118
During our visit to Nara, we also tried stuffed red bean pancakes which are known as dorayaki.
The pancakes were very light and fluffy, and we also noticed they had some different fillings like chestnut and sweet potato.

Takoyaki / ¥130
We visited Nara just a few days after arriving in Osaka, so we hadn't had our fill of takoyaki yet.
These are ball-shaped pancakes filled with octopus, pickled ginger, tempura and green onion.
They are topped with a special sauce that tastes a lot like BBQ sauce, then drizzled with mayo, and sprinkled with bonito flakes.
And of course, we filmed it all, so if you want to see all the sights we visited, the deer we encountered, and the street food we sampled, it's all here:
 
Should you stay overnight in Nara?
You certainly could!
We tried to see as much as we could in a day, but Nara Park is massive and we barely scratched the surface in terms of temples, shrines and hiking trails.
If we'd had more time and we'd known how much there was to see, we could have easily allotted 2-3 days. This destination would make the perfect weekend escape or romantic getaway.
If you do decide to stay overnight, Nara has a mix of hostels, hotels and ryokans - the latter is worth experiencing at least once during your travels in Japan!
Ryokans:

Tsukihitei - a 5-star luxury ryokan located within the Kasugayama Primeval Forest, offering a tranquil setting plus it's also within walking distance to the shrines (see reviews)
Koto-No-Yado Musashino - this is Nara's first ryokan offering a mix of traditional Japanese rooms and Japanese modern fusion rooms (see reviews)
Kasuga Hotel - a centrally located ryokan overlooking Nara Park close to the train station and restaurants (see reviews)

Hotels:

Centurion Hotel Classic Nara Station - city hotel close to Nara and Kintetsu-Nara train stations and local eateries  (see reviews)
Super Hotel Lohas JR Nara Eki - central hotel across Nara Station with onsen and buffet breakfast (see reviews)
Onyado Nono Nara Natural Hot Spring - hotel with hot baths, sauna and an on-site restaurant  (see reviews)

Hostels:

Nara Backpackers - hostel in a traditional Japanese style with a private garden (see reviews)
Nara Guesthouse 3F - central hostel offering a mix of private rooms and female dorms (see reviews)

Nara Day-Trip Planner: Routes, Timings, Deer Etiquette, Hidden Corners & Practical Tips

A No-Stress 1-Day Nara Itinerary

Best for first-timers coming from Osaka or Kyoto. Adjust the start time to fit your train.

09:00–09:20 — Arrive at Kintetsu-Nara Station (or JR Nara; see comparison below). Grab a quick coffee/snack around Higashimuki Shopping Street.

09:20–10:00 — Stroll into Nara Park via Sanjō-dōri. Keep your camera handy: you’ll meet your first deer within minutes. Skip crackers for now (they’ll follow you).

10:00–11:00 — Tōdai-ji (Great Buddha Hall)Follow the lantern-lined approach, pass through Nandaimon Gate, and step into the former “largest wooden building in the world” to meet the 15-meter bronze Daibutsu. Allow time to circle the hall and peek at the guardian statues.

11:05–11:35 — Nigatsu-dō terrace (Tōdai-ji complex)Climb to this wooden veranda for the postcard panorama of Nara Park. It’s usually far quieter than the main hall and gorgeous in any season.

11:45–12:30 — Kasuga Taisha approachWalk the mossy, lantern-lined path into Nara’s vermilion shrine. The forested approach is half the magic. Pop into the inner area (small fee) if you’d like to see more bronze lanterns and quiet cloisters.

12:35–13:30 — LunchOptions: casual noodle shop near the shrine, a picnic with kakinoha-zushi (persimmon-leaf sushi) you grabbed earlier, or head back toward Kintetsu for more choice.

13:45–14:30 — Yoshiki-en Garden (free for foreign visitors)Pond garden → moss garden → flower garden; it’s tiny, contemplative, and seldom busy. If you’re a garden super-fan, add neighboring Isui-en (paid, larger).

14:40–15:10 — Mochi show at NakatanidōWatch the swiftest mochi pounding in Japan (seriously) and eat a warm mugwort mochi dusted in kinako.

15:15–16:00 — Naramachi wanderHead into the preserved merchant quarter: lattice-front houses, tiny cafés, little craft shops (think Nara brushes, ink, and deer-themed ceramics). Free to enter Naramachi Koshi-no-Ie (a restored townhouse) if you spot it open.

16:15–17:00 — Deer time (on your terms)Buy shika-senbei near the park now, when you’re not hustling to a sight. Read the deer tips below (bowing = adorable, but also: they’re food-motivated toddlers with antlers).

17:15–18:00 — Sunset either/or

Nigatsu-dō for mellow, wide views, or

Mt. Wakakusa lower slope (gentle incline) for golden-hour grass and city lights.

18:10+ — Dinner near Kintetsu-Nara StationHigashimuki and Mochiidono shotengai are easy wins for izakaya plates, ramen, curry rice, or…one more soft-serve (sakura if in season!).

Getting to Nara: Kintetsu vs. JR (which one should you ride?)

Both are easy; pick based on where you’re staying and tickets you already hold.

FeatureKintetsu LineJR LineFrom OsakaKintetsu-Namba / Osaka-Namba (rapid/limited express options)JR Osaka / Tennoji (Yamatoji Rapid)From KyotoKintetsu-Kyoto (direct)JR Kyoto (Nara Line; take the Miyakoji rapid)Arrival stationKintetsu-Nara (short walk to Nara Park)JR Nara (a bit farther; ~20 min walk or quick bus)Pass compatibilityKintetsu passes (regional); not covered by JR PassJR Pass (great if you already have it)ProsClosest to sights; frequent trains; fast from NambaFree with JR Pass; frequent rapids from KyotoConsPay out of pocket if you only have JRSlightly longer walk/bus to the park

What to See (and how to do it without the crowds)

Tōdai-ji & the Great Buddha (Daibutsu)

Go early (or late afternoon) for fewer tour groups.

Don’t rush the outer grounds: Nandaimon’s fearsome Niō guardians are masterpieces.

Inside, walk the perimeter: the scale of the pillars, the lotus throne, and subsidiary statues reveal themselves slowly.

Kasuga Taisha (lanterns for days)

The lantern-lined approach through the primeval forest is free and magical even if you skip the inner areas.

Look for the secondary halls and tucked-away mini-shrines; they’re often empty and photogenic.

Kasuga Botanical Garden next door blooms with wisteria in late spring.

Nigatsu-dō & Sangatsu-dō (Tōdai-ji sub-temples)

Nigatsu-dō’s balcony is one of the best free viewpoints in Nara.

If you’re here in March, ask about the Omizutori fire ceremony period (intense, popular, unforgettable).

Yoshiki-en vs. Isui-en (which garden is “you”?)

GardenSize & FeelHighlightsGood IfYoshiki-enSmall, serene, free for foreign visitorsMoss garden, pond reflections, flower bedsYou want calm + quick + prettyIsui-enLarger, layered, paidBorrowed scenery of Wakakusa, teahouses, art museum tie-insYou’re a garden buff & have 45–60 minutes

Naramachi (old merchant quarter)

Peek into Koshi-no-Ie (free heritage townhouse) if open.

Browse small studios for Nara brushes, ink sticks, deer-motif textiles, handmade chopsticks.

Cafés here are slow-life sweet spots—perfect mid-afternoon rest.

Mt. Wakakusa (Wakakusayama)

The lower slope is an easy add after Kasuga Taisha; sunsets can be lovely.

In mid-winter, the hill is famously set ablaze during Wakakusa Yamayaki (see seasonal section).

Nara Food Trail (snack like a pro)

Street-Food Bingo Near Kintetsu & Nara Park

Mochi @ Nakatanidō (warm, mugwort, kinako—watch the hammer show!)

Kakinoha-zushi (persimmon-leaf wrapped sushi) for a picnic; classic mackerel or mixed boxes

Dorayaki (red bean pancakes) + seasonal versions (chestnut, sweet potato)

Takoyaki (octopus balls) with bonito snowing on top

Soft-serve (sakura in spring, white peach in summer, matcha year-round)

“Deer poop” chocolates (yes, they’re peanuts; yes, great gag gift)

Sit-Down Ideas

Udon or soba around the shrine area (fast, comforting, budget-friendly)

Izakaya near Kintetsu for shared plates after sunset

Traditional sweets (wagashi) with matcha in a teahouse by the gardens

Vegetarian / Vegan Notes

Noodles (kitsune udon), plain onigiri, vegetable tempura, tofu dishes, and sweets are easy wins. Always confirm broth (fish stock is common).

Deer Etiquette & Safety (read this before you give them crackers)

The deer are delightful—and opportunists. To keep it cute (and safe), follow this:

Buy only licensed shika-senbei. Human food is a no.

Feed in open space. Avoid corners/benches that box you in.

Hold crackers high, break into small pieces. No pockets rummaging!

Bowing works. Bow → deer bows → offer a piece. (Magic.)

Watch for “tells.” Ears flat, head tossing = too pushy; step away calmly.

Guard loose items. They’ll nibble maps, bags, dangling scarves.

Kids & strollers: Keep a crack-free zone; let little ones watch first.

Spring caution: Mothers with fawns are protective; keep space.

Hand hygiene: Bring sanitizer/wipes.

Mini-checklist

Crackers unwrapped only when ready

Valuables zipped in bag

Shoes tied (yes, they’ll tug laces)

Photos first, feeding second

Seasons in Nara (what’s special when you go)

Spring (Mar–May)

Cherry blossoms across Nara Park (late Mar/early Apr peak most years).

Wisteria trellises in Kasuga’s botanical garden (late April–May).

Weather: mild; pack a light jacket and an umbrella.

Summer (Jun–Aug)

Lush greens in every garden; shady shrine approaches.

Nara Tōkae (August): thousands of candles glow across the park at night—stunning.

Hot/humid afternoons—go early, siesta, then come back for evening light.

Autumn (Oct–Nov)

Momiji (maples) flame red around the gardens and Nigatsu-dō approach.

Crisp air; golden gingko leaves—photographers’ dream.

Winter (Dec–Feb)

Quiet trails; occasional dustings of snow.

Wakakusa Yamayaki (late Jan): hill-burning festival with fireworks (one evening only; dates vary).

Chilly; bring layers, hat, and hand warmers.

Tickets, Fees & Time Savers

Tōdai-ji (Great Buddha Hall): Small entrance fee (bring cash). Go early/late to avoid queues.

Kasuga Taisha inner area: Modest fee; the forest approach is free.

Yoshiki-en: Free for foreign visitors (show passport/ID).

Isui-en: Paid (sometimes combined with small museum).

Nigatsu-dō terrace: Free.

Buses: Flat fares on Nara Kōtsū around the core sights; tap-to-pay IC cards accepted.

Lockers: At both JR Nara and Kintetsu-Nara—ideal for day-tripping with luggage.

Money stretchers

Pack a water bottle; refill at vending machines/shops.

Aim for noodles/lunch sets mid-day; street snacks fill the gaps.

Choose one paid garden if watching the budget (Yoshiki-en free helps).

Should You Stay Overnight in Nara?

Stay LengthProsConsider IfDay tripPerfect “first taste”; easy from Osaka/KyotoYou’re short on time or on a Golden Triangle sprint1 nightQuieter evenings; garden/shrine visits in soft light; onsen/ryokan stayYou love slow travel, want sunrise/sunset photos, or are visiting during a festival2–3 nightsHikes, museum time, deep Naramachi wanders, brewery tastingsYou’re making Nara a romantic or slow-weekend base

If you stay: Consider a ryokan for the full tatami + kaiseki experience, or modern hotels near the stations for convenience.

Packing & Practicalities (Nara edition)

Essentials

Comfortable walking shoes (you’ll do 10–20k steps)

Lightweight rain layer/compact umbrella

Reusable bottle + a small tote for snacks/souvenirs

Tissues/hand wipes (some toilets have no paper; deer feeding)

Cash for small shrines/snacks/lockers

Portable charger (photo days drain phones)

Seasonal adds: sunhat in summer; warm layers in winter

Navigation

Download an offline map centered on Kintetsu-Nara, with pins for Tōdai-ji, Kasuga Taisha, Nigatsu-dō, Yoshiki-en/Isui-en, Nakatanidō, Naramachi.

Safety & etiquette

Keep voices low in shrine/garden areas.

Walk bikes in inner shrine approaches.

Dispose of trash properly; bins are scarce—use convenience stores.

Build-Your-Own Nara (choose 1 from each row)

ThemeOption A (Classic)Option B (Quiet)Option C (Tasty)Big sightTōdai-jiKasuga Taisha (inner precincts)Tōdai-ji + quick hall loopViewNigatsu-dōWakakusa lower slopeNigatsu-dō at sunsetGardenYoshiki-enIsui-enSkip garden; add Naramachi caféCultureNaramachi townhouseSmall museum near Isui-enBrewery tasting in townFoodMochi + kakinoha-zushiMatcha + wagashiTakoyaki + soft-serve

Rapid Fire Info

JR Pass or pay Kintetsu?If you have a JR Pass already, JR is great. If not, Kintetsu usually puts you closer to the action.

How much time for Tōdai-ji?Plan 60 minutes for the gate + hall; more if you love details.

Can I feed deer anything else?No—only licensed shika-senbei. Human food and plastic are harmful.

What if a deer gets pushy?Show hands (no food), step away calmly, put something solid between you (tree/fence), and wait them out.

Is there luggage storage?Yes—coin lockers and luggage desks at both JR and Kintetsu stations.

Where’s the best free view?Nigatsu-dō balcony. No ticket, big payoff.

I only have half a day—what’s the must-do trio?Tōdai-ji, Nigatsu-dō viewpoint, mochi at Nakatanidō (+ a quick deer hello).

Nara Day Trip FAQ: Timing, Trains, Deer Etiquette, Gardens, Food & Photo Spots (12 Essential Q&As)

What’s the simplest way to get to Nara for a day trip from Osaka or Kyoto?

If you already hold a JR Pass, ride the JR lines (Yamatoji Rapid from Osaka or Miyakoji Rapid from Kyoto) to JR Nara. Otherwise, the Kintetsu Line is usually faster and drops you closer to Nara Park at Kintetsu-Nara—perfect for walking straight into the sights.

How early should I start, and how much can I realistically see in one day?

Aim to arrive by 9:00 a.m. You can comfortably cover Tōdai-ji, Nigatsu-dō, Kasuga Taisha’s forested approach, Yoshiki-en Garden, a Naramachi wander, and some deer time—with snack breaks built in. Sunset at Nigatsu-dō or Mt. Wakakusa is a mellow finale.

If I only have half a day, what’s the must-do trio?

Go for the Nandaimon Gate + Tōdai-ji (Great Buddha Hall), the Nigatsu-dō viewpoint, and a quick mochi stop at Nakatanidō—plus a brief “hello” to the deer on your way.

Where should I meet (and feed) the famous bowing deer—and how do I do it safely?

You’ll meet them all around Nara Park. Buy licensed shika-senbei from vendors, bow first, then offer a small piece. Feed in open spaces, keep bags zipped, and step away calmly if a deer gets pushy (ears flat or head tossing = take a breather).

Can kids enjoy Nara, or are the deer too feisty?

Kids usually love Nara, but treat deer like food-motivated toddlers. Keep little ones at arm’s length, feed in open areas, and skip feeding entirely if anyone feels nervous. Watching others feed is just as fun.

What’s the best crowd-beating strategy for Tōdai-ji and Kasuga Taisha?

Do Tōdai-ji right at opening (or late afternoon), then wander to Nigatsu-dō for a quieter terrace view. For Kasuga Taisha, the lantern-lined forest approach itself is free, photogenic, and often calmer than the inner precincts.

Yoshiki-en vs. Isui-en: which garden should I pick?

Yoshiki-en is small, serene, and free for foreign visitors—great for a quick, contemplative stop. Isui-en is larger (paid) with classic tea-house views and “borrowed scenery” of Mt. Wakakusa—choose it if you’re a garden devotee with 45–60 minutes.

What street foods should I not miss near the park and Kintetsu-Nara?

Grab freshly pounded mugwort mochi at Nakatanidō, kakinoha-zushi (persimmon-leaf sushi) for a picnic, takoyaki, dorayaki, seasonal soft-serve (sakura in spring!), and cheeky “deer-poop” chocolates (they’re peanuts).

When is the best season to visit Nara?

Spring brings cherry blossoms and wisteria; summer is lush (and the Nara Tōkae candle festival glows in August); autumn pops with maples; winter is quiet, with Wakakusa Yamayaki (late January hill-burning + fireworks) on one evening.

Where’s the best free viewpoint for photos?

Nigatsu-dō’s balcony wins for wide, dreamy views over rooftops and trees—no ticket required. For a grassy golden hour, stroll the lower slope of Mt. Wakakusa.

Is there luggage storage and easy local transport?

Yes—coin lockers (and desks) at both JR Nara and Kintetsu-Nara. In town, Nara Kōtsū buses connect major sights, and IC cards tap in/out seamlessly.

Should I stay the night, or is a day trip enough?

A day trip is a perfect first taste. If you stay one night, evenings and early mornings are blissfully calm for shrines and gardens—plus you can try a ryokan with onsen and kaiseki for the full experience.

Have you visited Nara?What else would you add to this Nara 1 day travel itinerary?

#### 1-Month Peru Travel Itinerary: Where to Go & What to See in Peru
Peru is one of those countries that I keep coming back to again and again. Part of the reason is that I have family there, but the other reason is that there is so much too see and experience. No matter how much time I spend in Peru - I've been there 3 times in the last 2 years alone! - I still keep finding new places to add to my bucket list.

Some travellers quickly skip through Peru only making time to visit Cuzco and Machu Picchu, but there is so much more to this country than Inca ruins. Today I'm going to share my 1-month Peru travel itinerary, which to be honest, I feel barely skims the surface and only touches on some of the country's main highlights, but you have to start somewhere! Consider this travel itinerary an introduction to Peru and if you enjoy the country as much I do, then you can always plan a return and head into the more remote and harder to access regions. Now here's a look at how to spend 1 month in Peru.

Peru Travel Guide: Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Peru! 

Lima (3 Days)

Let's start in the capital, Lima, since that is where you'll likely be flying into. Lima is the second most populous city in all of South America and it can be a bit overwhelming if you don't know where to go. People will often tell you to skip it entirely and just continue on to Cuzco, but I like Lima and I think it has quite a bit to offer, so I'm going to try to convince you otherwise.

There are 3 neighbourhoods, which I think are great for first-time visitors: Miraflores, Barranco and Centro. Miraflores is located along the water and it is an affluent neighbourhood with seafront properties, beautiful parks and lots of great restaurants. Here you'll want to visit El Parque del Amor, shop at the Hippie Fair in Parque Kennedy, and if you're feeling brave you can even try paragliding.

Barranco has more of an artsy bohemian flair and it's also known for its nightlife. In Barran, o you'll want to enjoy all the street art, walk across the Bridge of Sighs, and pop into the various museums and art galleries.

Lastly, in Centro you can visit Plaza de Armas, tour the catacombs inside the San Fracisco Monastery, and watch the changing of the guard at the Presidential Palace. And that is just a quick introduction; you can read this other article for more ideas of things to do in Lima and this other one will give you ideas of easy weekend trips.

Now let's move on to the food. Since Lima is on the coast, you'll have to sample ceviche, a raw fish dish that has been cured in lime, and is served with corn, sweet potato, and red onions. It is delicious and a must try! If you're more adventurous, then go for anticuchos, which are grilled meat skewers (typically cow heart!) served with a side of corn. I know it sounds a bit strange, but it tastes just like steak.

Where I stayed in Lima:

I usually stay with family when I visit Lima, but regardless, I would recommend staying in the neighbourhood of Miraflores. Located right by the seaside, this is one of the nicest areas in the city, plus you also have easy access to Barranco and plenty of tours into the historic centre. There are plenty of hotels, hostels and guesthouses in this neighbourhood, plus AirBnB has a great range of properties, and if it's your first time using it, you can get a $40 discount code here.

Cuzco (3 Days)

I would suggest spending at least 3-4 days in Cuzco since the first two days will likely be a write off depending on how well you handle altitude sickness. When you fly into Cuzco, it's recommended that you spend your first day resting and that you follow that up with some light sightseeing on the second day. Some people aren't affected by the altitude and can hit the ground running, but I've seen other people be standing one minute and then hit the ground like a sack of potatoes the next, so it's better to take precautions.

Once you've been able to acclimate, it's time to start exploring and luckily there's plenty to see and do in Cuzco. Some of the main sights in Cuzco include: Qorikancha, the most important temple in the Inca Empire which was dedicated to the Sun God; Plaza de Armas, the main square where you'll find Cuzco Cathedral; the Pre-Columbian Art Museum, which houses an art collection in a mansion-turned-convent; and the Inka Museum, which showcases gold-work, pottery, textiles, and even mummies.

For those with a bit of a sweet tooth, you may be interested in the ChocoMuseo, which covers the history of chocolate, and the Pisco Museum, which is a bar that offers pisco tastings.

Foodwise, the cuisine in Cuzco is quite different from what you'll have experienced in Lima. We found the meals to be a lot heartier. Some traditional dishes you may want to sample include: chairo, a thick soup made with lamb and vegetables; alpaca skewers, very tender cuts of alpaca meat cooked over the grill; and guinea pig, which is usually served roasted (be prepared to get the whole animal on your plate!) Dishes feature a lot of potatoes, corn, and various root vegetables, and coca tea is a staple at every meal.

Where I stayed in Cusco:

While in Cuzco I stayed at Tika Wasi, which is a boutique hotel that sits on the neighbourhood of San Blas overlooking the city. It was a peaceful setting with a cool courtyard and plenty of lounging space, and I also liked that each of the rooms had its own unique design. It was a 7-minute downhill walk into the town, and I feel like this helped us train for the Inca Trail!

Sacred Valley (2 Days)

Keep in mind that you can also take various day trips from Cuzco. Some of your options include: Maras Salinas, the famed terraced salt flats; Pisac, a small town known for its huge Sunday market; Ollantaytambo, the place where the Incas retreated after the Spanish seized Cuzco; and Moray, an agricultural laboratory known for its round terraces where the Incas were able to cultivate resistant varieties of plants high in the Andes. Alternatively, you could book yourself on a full-day tour of the Sacred Valley which hits some of these as well as other sites along the way. Whichever way you do it, the Sacred Valley is a place that you should definitely tack on to your Peru travel itinerary.

Inca Trail + Machu Picchu + Aguas Calientes (3 Days)

We did the 2-day Inca Trail to Machu Picchu and it was hands down one of the coolest adventures of our visit to Peru. Our first day involved a full day of hiking, and then the second day we had a guided half-day tour of Machu Picchu where our guide brought the city to life with his storytelling. We then had free time that afternoon, so Sam and I spent that time filming and taking pictures.

If you're walking the Inca Trail or spending more than one day visiting Machu Picchu, then you'll end up spending at least one night in the town of Aguas Calientes. If you're feeling sore from all the hiking, you can enjoy a soak in the hot springs that give the town its name, or you could treat yourself to a massage. Alternatively, there are a few easy hikes from Aguas Calients, or you can shop for crafts and souvenir at Mercado Artesanal. Lastly, if you really want to treat yourself to a good meal, head straight to El Indio Feliz, which is run by a French cook who knows how to combine French and Peruvian cuisine to create a culinary masterpiece.

Where I stayed in Aguas Calientes: 

In Aguas Calientes, we stayed at Terrazas del Inca which sits right by the river. All I remember is that the hotel had really hot showers and a super comfortable mattress, which was greatly appreciated after all that hiking. They also had a really hearty breakfast, which we gladly gobbled at 4:30 in the morning before heading over to Machu Picchu.

Puno (2 Days)

I have to admit, Puno was not one of my favourite stops in Peru, however, if you want to do one of the overnight Lake Titicaca tours there's really no other way around it. We ended up spending one night in the town before our tour and another night after. During that time we managed to visit the main square, shop along the pedestrian street, and eat at a few different restaurants. Here's a look at what to pack for Lake Titicaca if you're doing an overnight stay.

Where I stayed in Puno: 

After one awful night at Duque Inn, we checked ourselves into Hotel Hacienda Plaza de Armas which is located right on the main square and it was worth the small splurge. The rooms were very comfortable, the staff was incredibly helpful, and the location was much more central as opposed to the former property which was located up a very steep hill.

Lake Titicaca (2 Days)

When it comes to visiting Lake Titicaca, you can choose between a day tour or an overnight tour that includes a local homestay. The day tour only takes you as far as the reed islands which are settled by the Aymara, whereas the overnight tour takes you a bit further to some of the island communities settled by the Quechua.

We opted for the 2-day overnight tour (you can do longer ones) which took us to a total of 3 islands: Uros, Amantaní, and Taquile.

In Uros, we visited a reed island called Corazon del Lago, where we met the families who live there and learned about their daily life on a floating island. We had an interpreter with us the whole time, which allowed us to ask the types of questions that cross every visitor's mind: Where are the bathrooms? How do you have electricity? Isn't it dangerous for young children to live so close to the water? The answers: They now have outhouses. Solar panels have been installed. And children learn to swim at a very young age.

The second island we visited, Amantaní, was my favourite since we got to stay with a host family and this gave us a unique glimpse at their culture and way of life. Our host mom cooked us a delicious lunch, then we did some hiking in the afternoon, we later had a delicious dinner which was also prepared by our host mom, and after that, we were taken to the local community hall for some music and dancing.

On our final day, we hiked around Taquile, which is an island with UNESCO status for its “Masterpieces of the Oral and Intangible Heritage of Humanity”, namely handwoven textiles and knitting. It was also fascinating to watch our guide interpret the local dress for us; the way men wear their hats can indicate whether they are happy, sad, having an average day, single, married, or an authority figure in the community. That's a lot of meaning based on the way you wear a hat!

Where I stayed on Lake Titicaca in Peru:

During our tour, we stayed with a local family on the island of Amantaní. We booked our tour through All Ways Travel and once we met our guide, she gave us the option of doing a rustic homestay (no electricity and outhouses) or a more modern homestay (electricity and toilets with running water).

Paracas + Islas Ballestas (1 Day)

If you're doing a big trip around South America but you don't have time for the Galapagos Islands, Peru's Islas Ballestas are often said to be the next best thing; and while they may lack the size and diversity of the Galapagos, the Peruvian islands are an important sanctuary for wildlife plus they do give you a chance to see animals in their natural habitat.

The boat trip from Paracas to Islas Ballestas is just 24 kilometres and it is 30 minutes each way with one hour of sightseeing in between. We got to see a lot of really cool animals including Humboldt penguins, sea lions, sunfish, pelicans, cormorants, terns and more.

If you suffer from motion sickness this may not be the best excursion for you since the waters can be a bit choppy, but otherwise, it's a nice way to break up the journey down to Huacachina.

Huacachina (2 Days)

So I only visited Huacachina as a day trip, but once I got there I was wishing I had booked something longer since it's such a cool destination. Huacachina is a tiny oasis in the middle of the desert; you have a green lagoon surrounded by palm trees, and around that you have a small village that only stretches a few streets back. The place has a very laid-back hippie vibe, and if you're tired from your travels, this is a great place to just relax.

There are two main activities in Huacachina: sandboarding and dune buggy riding. We tried both. The steep dunes make this the perfect playground and it really felt like we were on a rollercoaster. We booked our tour through a hostel once we arrived in town, and we were out on the dunes within 10 minutes. Our driver also had boards in the buggy, so after tossing us up, down and around, he finally parked atop one of the steepest hills and let us try our hand at sand boarding. Apparently, sandboarding can be a little tricky if you don't have any previous snowboarding experience, so I ended up sliding down headfirst on the board. Yes, it was terrifying, but it was also a blast!

If you're looking for something a bit tamer, you can rent paddle boats to take out on the small lagoon, or you can hike up the dunes to watch a killer sunset.

Ica (2 Days)

If you're already going to Huacachina, you may also want to consider adding a couple of days in Ica to your Peru travel itinerary. While Ica itself is far from being a beautiful city, the area is home to many vineyards and wineries, and once you're in the outskirts of Ica it's a whole different world. If you're looking for a bit of a luxury weekend where you can unwind and relax, this may well be the place for you.

Sam and I booked ourselves in at Viñas Queirolo and we basically stayed on the premises all weekend. We went on a vineyard tour, attended wine tastings, and ate at the in-house restaurant which had some of the most beautiful plates of ceviche I have ever seen in my life.

Where I stayed in Ica:

We stayed at Viñas Queirolo, which is in the outskirts of Ica. It's a beautiful property and well worth the splurge for a night or two.

Iquitos (2 Days)

Iquitos marked the start of our trip into the Peruvian Amazon, and again, while many people tend to skip over this city, I enjoyed having a few days to experience it. Here you can visit the stilt village of Belen, stroll along the promenade at sunset, enjoy the colonial architecture, or cool down with a drink at one of the many riverfront cafes on Malecon Maldonado. You can read the following article for some ideas of things to do in Iquitos.

Since Iquitos is in the heart of the jungle, the food is quite different from what you'll have experienced along the coast or in the sierras. The majority of the dishes here feature fish, rice and tropical fruits. If you're a foodie, you may want to sample: tacacho y cecina, roasted plantain balls served with a side of dry pork meat ; juane, a steamed dish made of rice and chicken cooked inside a giant leaf; and patarashca de paiche, a large freshwater fish which is steamed in a leaf.

Where I stayed in Iquitos:

While in Iquitos I stayed at the Epoca Hotel, which is a beautiful heritage property right on the shores of the Amazon. The hotel has a colonial hacienda feel with tall ceilings, iron balconies, and a beautiful tiled exterior. Also, the staff was incredibly friendly and helpful, so I can happily recommend them.

Amazon (6 Days)

Our visit to the Amazon started out with a treehouse stay in the middle of the jungle. We booked 2 nights at the Treehouse Lodge, and it was one of the coolest experiences ever. When we weren't hanging out in our cool treehouse, we were going on wildlife excursions, fishing for piranhas, or visiting local villages. If you're adventurous and want to live up in the trees a la Jane and Tarzan, this is a cool experience to consider.

After our treehouse stay, we did a 4-day cruise on the Amazon River which saw us travelling up and down the mighty river. Once again, there were plenty of excursions to keep us busy. We went kayaking along the tributaries, did a canopy walk across a series of hanging bridges, and saw all sorts of wildlife. This was one of those lifelong bucket list experiences and a must add to your Peru travel itinerary!

Where I stayed Treehouse Lodge / Boat: 

I spent the first two nights at the Treehouse Lodge and from there I spent the next 3 nights aboard the Delfin I. If you're thinking of doing both, I would suggest doing the treehouse stay first since it's a more rustic experience, and then finishing things off with a the cruise since that offered a bit more pampering. Also, here's a look at what to pack for your trip to the Amazon.

One month in Peru

So that brings us to a grand total of 28 days of travel around Peru. Tack on a few transportation days, including flying and out of the country, and you've got yourself a whole month dedicated to exploring some of the gems Peru has to offer. Like I mentioned earlier, I feel this itinerary barely scratches the surface and it only focuses on some of the better known destinations in the country, however, it does cover a mix of cities and rural areas, as well as destinations along the coast, sierras, and jungle. I hope this one month Peru travel itinerary will help whet your appetite and hopefully you'll be back for more!

1-Month Peru Travel Itinerary Tips (routes, budgets, packing, safety, and FAQ)

When to Go (by region)

Peru is three countries in one: coast, Andes, and Amazon—each with its own weather mood.

Coast (Lima, Paracas, Ica, Huacachina):Best: Dec–Apr (warm, sunny). Cool/damp garúa fog: Jun–Oct—still perfectly visitable, just sweater weather and low clouds.

Andes (Cusco, Sacred Valley, Lake Titicaca):Best overall: Apr–May and Sep–Oct (dry-ish, green, fewer crowds). Peak dry season: Jun–Aug (blue skies + crowds). Rains: Nov–Mar (lush, but trails can be muddy; some high routes close temporarily).

Amazon (Iquitos + jungle):High-water season: Dec–May (more canoeable creeks, more bugs). Low-water: Jun–Nov (more beaches, some creeks less accessible). Wildlife good year-round—guides simply change where they take you.

If you’re mixing all three: April/May and September are the sweet spots.

Smart Route Order for Altitude

Give your body a gentle on-ramp:

Lima (sea level) → 2) Paracas/ Huacachina/ Ica (still low) → 3) Cusco (3,399 m) with rest/light sightseeing day → 4) Sacred Valley (lower than Cusco for gentle acclimatization) → 5) Inca Trail/ Machu Picchu → 6) Lake Titicaca (3,800+ m) → 7) Amazon (back to low altitude).

Altitude comfort checklist

Hydrate, go slow day one, skip heavy alcohol.

Coca tea helps some; consult your doctor about acetazolamide if you’re prone to AMS.

If you feel headache/nausea, rest and descend if symptoms progress.

Getting Around (buses, trains, flights, and when to splurge)

Long-distance buses: Comfortable, budget-friendly, widely used. Opt for semi-cama/cama (reclining seats), choose reputable companies, and book daytime on winding Andean routes if you get motion sick.

Peru Hop-style passes: Handy for coast segments (Lima ↔ Paracas ↔ Huacachina ↔ Nazca/Arequipa) with hotel pickups and route flexibility.

Domestic flights: Time savers for Lima–Cusco and Iquitos legs. Book early; luggage allowances vary by airline.

Trains: Cusco/ Sacred Valley ↔ Aguas Calientes for Machu Picchu (if not trekking). Vistadome gives bigger windows; Expedition is the value pick.

Taxis/ride apps: In cities, use hotel-called taxis or ride apps where available. In small towns, negotiate fares before hopping in.

Collectivos (shared vans): Cheapest between nearby towns in the Sacred Valley—basic but fast.

Budget Snapshot (per person per day, ballpark)

Shoestring: $35–$60 (hostels, menu del día lunches, buses).

Mid-range: $70–$130 (guesthouses/hotels, some tours, occasional flights).

Comfort/plus: $150–$300+ (nicer hotels, premium trains, Amazon cruises).

Big-ticket items to plan for: Machu Picchu entry + transport, Inca Trail/alternative trek, Amazon lodge/cruise, flights.

Safety & Common Scams (simple, effective habits)

Keep phones zipped away street-side; use cross-body bags.

Withdraw cash from indoor ATMs (malls/banks) and shield the keypad.

In markets/transport hubs, wear your daypack on your chest.

Only book tours with licensed agencies or direct recommendations.

In taxis, confirm fare before starting or insist on the meter (where used).

Night buses: choose reputable companies; keep valuables on you.

Packing for Three Climates in Peru

Coast basics

Light layers, breathable tops/shorts, sun hat, sunglasses, reef-safe SPF, comfy walking shoes, light sweater for Lima evenings.

Andes basics

Fleece/insulated layer, packable rain shell, quick-dry pants, warm hat/neck warmer (nights at Titicaca are cold), sturdy sneakers/hiking shoes, gloves (for Jun–Aug), lip balm with SPF.

Amazon basics

Long-sleeve, light-colored shirts; thin pants; DEET or picaridin repellent; quick-dry socks; sandals; small dry bag; headlamp; personal meds. Many lodges provide rubber boots & ponchos.

Shared essentials

Reusable water bottle, universal adapter, power bank, meds for altitude/ motion/ stomach, copies of documents (digital + paper), small first-aid kit.

Food Roadmap (what to try where)

Lima/Coast: Ceviche, tiradito, causas, anticuchos, picarones, chicha morada.

Cusco/Andes: Alpaca skewers, chairo soup, lomo saltado, choclo con queso, quinoa everything, coca tea.

Puno/Titicaca: Trucha (trout) grilled or fried, chuño-based soups.

Iquitos/Amazon: Juane, tacacho con cecina, paiche, camu camu juices, assorted tropical fruits.

Menu del día (set lunch) is your budget hero—soup + main + drink at local joints.

Should You Trek, Train, or Mix? (Machu Picchu options at a glance)

OptionWho it’s forTimeHighlightsConsiderations2-Day Inca TrailWant the Sun Gate arrival without 4 days2 days / 1 nightHike a classic section + guided MPPermits sell out; stairs + altitude4-Day Inca TrailIcon lovers who want the full route4 days / 3 nightsRuins en route, varied ecosystemsPhysical challenge; book months aheadTrain + Day TourComfort & time-savvy travellers1 long day or 1 nightScenic train + guided MPLess time on site unless you overnightAlternative treks (Salkantay, Lares, Inca Jungle)Scenery lovers/ fewer crowds3–5 daysMountains, villages, or biking/ziplineVarying difficulty; ends via train/bus

Lake Titicaca: Day Trip vs. Homestay

StyleBest forWhat you doWhy pick itDay trip (Uros)Tight schedulesVisit floating islands, short reed-boat rideQuick taste of Uros lifeOvernight (Uros + Amantaní/Taquile)Cultural travelersStay with a family, hike to sacred peaks, dance nightDeeper connection, sunset/sunrise magic

Amazon: Lodge vs. Cruise vs. Treehouse

OptionVibeActivitiesGood to knowJungle LodgeRustic-to-comfortableDay/night walks, boat safaris, village visitsBasecamp feel; choose by wildlife focusRiver CruiseComfortable/ premiumMultiple daily skiff outings, canopy walks, beaches (seasonal)Great guiding & AC; higher costTreehouse StayAdventure/uniqueSimilar to lodges, but you sleep in the canopyRomantic + rustic; mind heights & bugs

Coast Trio: Paracas vs. Huacachina vs. Ica

BaseWhy goHeadlinersPair withParacasWildlife + sea breezeIslas Ballestas boat, Paracas ReserveHuacachina dunes the next dayHuacachinaAdrenaline + sunsetsDune buggies, sandboarding, dune hikesIca vineyards lunch/date nightIca (outskirts)Wine & relaxVineyard stays, tastings, poolsEasy day trip to Huacachina

Where to Stay in Lima (quick neighborhood picker)

AreaPersonalityProsKeep in mindMirafloresPolished coastal hubParks, clifftop walks, restaurantsTouristy (which can be handy)BarrancoBoho & artsyMurals, cafes, nightlife, museumsEvenings can be lively/noisyCentroHistoric corePlazas, colonial architecture, museumsBusy by day, quieter at night; choose lodging carefully

Add-On Ideas If You Have Extra Days

Arequipa + Colca Canyon: White-stone city & condors.

Huaraz & Cordillera Blanca: High-Andes trekking heaven (¾ acclimatization needed).

Nazca Lines: Flyover from Nazca or Pisco; or view tower (budget).

Northern Peru (Trujillo/Chiclayo): Moche/Chimu archaeology and surf towns.

Chachapoyas (Kuelap & Gocta): Cloud-forest fortress and giant waterfall.

“Save Me Time” Checklists

Pre-Departure

Passport valid 6+ months past return date

Domestic flights booked (Lima–Cusco, jungle legs)

Machu Picchu/ trek permits & trains reserved

Travel insurance

Vaccines/meds chat (altitude, jungle)

Offline maps & key confirmations downloaded

Copies of passport/insurance/itineraries backed up to cloud

On Arrival in Lima

Local SIM/eSIM activated or confirm roaming

Small cash for taxis/tips; learn to identify real soles

First two nights booked (Lima + Cusco)

Acclimatization day in Cusco kept light

Inca Trail Day-pack (customize per trek)

Passport (checked at trail gates)

Water (hydration bladder + bottle), electrolytes

Layers: sun shirt, fleece, rain shell

Hat, buff, sunscreen, sunglasses

Snacks (nuts, chocolate, coca candies)

Personal meds/blister kit/TP & zip-bags

Headlamp & power bank

Amazon Day-bag

Long-sleeve light shirt & pants

Repellent, sunscreen, hat

Dry bag for phone/camera

Headlamp, binoculars (optional but fun)

Refillable bottle (many lodges filter water)

FAQ: Peru (12 helpful Q&As)

Do I need to book Machu Picchu far in advance?Yes. Entry tickets (especially for Huayna Picchu/Machu Picchu Mountain) and Inca Trail permits sell out weeks to months ahead in high season. Trains and popular time slots go fast, too.

Is the 2-day Inca Trail enough if I’m short on time?Absolutely. You still enter via the Sun Gate, hike a classic section, and get a guided visit the next morning. Great middle ground.

Can I do Machu Picchu as a day trip from Cusco?Yes, but it’s a long day (early train, late return). If time allows, overnight in Aguas Calientes for a more relaxed visit and better photo light.

Will I get altitude sickness in Cusco/Lake Titicaca?Many people feel something (headache/fatigue). Go slow the first day, hydrate, avoid heavy meals/alcohol, and consider acetazolamide after consulting your doctor. Sacred Valley first can help.

Is Lima worth time or should I fly straight to Cusco?Lima is a world-class food city with cool neighborhoods and coastal walks. If you can spare 1–2 days, it’s rewarding; if you’re tight, head straight to the Andes and circle back later.

What’s the dress code for churches and upscale restaurants?Smart-casual works. For churches, cover shoulders/knees out of respect. In Lima’s fine-dining spots, jeans and a nice top are fine; no need for formalwear.

Is the Amazon safe from mosquitoes if I go in “dry season”?There are always mosquitoes. Dry season usually has fewer, but you’ll still want long layers and repellent. Lodges commonly provide nets; some cruises have screened/AC cabins.

Can vegetarians/vegans eat well in Peru?Yes—especially in Cusco, Lima, and Iquitos. Traditional dishes lean meaty, but menus vegetarianos, quinotto, tacu tacu, hearty soups, and Amazon produce make it very doable.

How do I pay—cash or card?Carry both. Cards are widely accepted in cities (sometimes with a small fee); cash is king for markets, small towns, tips, and some tours. Use indoor ATMs and keep small bills for change.

Is tap water drinkable?Generally no. Drink bottled or filtered. Many hotels filter water; bringing a purifier bottle is eco-friendly and pays off fast.

Is it safe to take night buses?Choose reputable companies, keep valuables in a small bag on you, and consider daytime for mountain routes. I often mix night buses on the coast with day buses in the Andes.

What’s a respectful gift to bring for Lake Titicaca homestays?Ask your guide for current needs. Thoughtful picks include notebooks, pencils, headlamps with extra batteries, cooking staples, or a small toy/art supplies for kids—avoid candy and bulky items.

What are your favourite places in Peru?Any other destinations you'd add to this Peru travel itinerary?

#### 10 Things to do in Celle | Germany's City of Half-Timbered Houses
Celle is a medieval town that lies directly on the Aller River in Lower Saxony and it's a popular stop on Germany's Timber-Frame Road. However, aside from medieval timber-frame houses, Celle has plenty of other fun activities to offer travellers.
During our trip, we toured the castle grounds and its breathtaking chapel, sampled a potent liqueur made from a secret family recipe, wandered through a colourful Bauhaus neighbourhood, plus we tasted a local meat dish that is served completely raw! 
Sometimes the places you've heard little about are the ones that are full of surprises, and that proved to be true once again on our Germany trip.
So without further ado, here are some ideas of things to do in Celle during your visit.

What to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in Celle, Germany
Visit Celle Castle
Our first stop of the day was one of the town’s main attractions, Celle Castle. This is a medieval fortress-turned-castle that sits on an island surrounded by a moat.

Now to share a bit of history, an early version of Celle Castle was built around the year 980 in the form of a fortified tower, however, the current castle was first documented in 1315.
Over the centuries Celle Castle grew, evolved, and was redesigned and redecorated into what we see today, which explains the mix of Renaissance architecture and Baroque-style staterooms.
The castle suffered severe damage and fell into disrepair during the Thirty Years' War, however, Celle Castle has since been restored to its former glory and today visitors can explore the castle's history through a range of exhibits, including Renaissance and Baroque furniture, artwork, and other artefacts from its past.
I was really amused by the fact that we got to wear slippers as we visited certain rooms in the castle.
We actually ended up joining a tour for part of the castle visit, because it’s the only way to gain access to certain parts of the building like the chapel, which is stunning.

The castle chapel is pretty special because it’s the only religious building north of the Alps with completely preserved Renaissance interiors.
You can only view it from behind a glass barrier in order to preserve it, but it was a real highlight and worth the visit.

Explore Celle's Half-Timbered Houses
After visiting the castle, we continued towards the old town which is renowned for its medieval timbered houses.
In fact, Celle has the densest concentration of them! Nowhere else in all of Germany or even Europe, can you find so many timbered buildings so close together without any gaps in between. 

Walking through Celle's old town is essentially like stepping into a fairy tale. The Old Town dates back to the Middle Ages, and visitors can explore the town's history by walking along its cobblestone streets and admiring the beautiful architecture.

The town's centre is marked by the 14th-century St. Mary's Church or Stadtkirche St. Marien, which is an excellent example of North German brick Gothic architecture.
Also, many of these houses have narrow passages that lead to tiny courtyards, which makes it feel like you’re stepping into a secret garden.
You could easily spend a few hours in the old town not only admiring the architecture but also wandering into all sorts of cafes and specialty shops.
Find the Hoppener Haus
If there's one building you need to visit in Celle's old town it's Hoppener Haus. This is the most famous half-timbered house located in the heart of Celle's Old Town.
The house dates back to 1532 and it has six stories, each one protruding slightly more than the one below. It is decorated with all sorts of mythological figures.
We took a guided walking tour and our guide explained that the houses were built smaller on the ground floor because the smaller dimensions resulted in lower taxes. The houses were then made slightly bigger with each additional level as a funny workaround to the law.
Drink at an old pharmacy
One of the stops we made was at Alter Provisor, which is a former 17th-century pharmacy that has been turned into a gift shop.
The building's beautiful half-timbered façade and historic charm are still visible today, and stepping inside is like taking a trip back in time.
Alter Provisor is well known for an amber-coloured herbal liqueur that has been made for over a hundred years following a highly secret family recipe.

No one really knows what goes into the drink except for a select group of people, however, the spicy herbal schnapps does taste of ginger, honey, cinnamon and probably has other select herbs.

There's a small courtyard in the back where you can sit down and enjoy a cocktail, hot chocolate, or hot punch. All with a dash of Alter Provisor! 
We got to do a fun little tasting; the drink was sweet, but also fiery. This was a really fun experience in Celle, so if you're in the area it's definitely worth trying.
Tour a Bauhaus neighbourhood
The Italian Garden is a bit of a misnomer because this place is less a garden and more a residential neighbourhood.
These Bauhaus-style buildings were designed by architect Otto Haesler and built between 1924 and 1926, and the idea was to provide affordable housing for workers and their families.
Haesler's designs were innovative for their time and incorporated features that were revolutionary in terms of housing design.
For example, his buildings were designed to maximize natural light and ventilation, with large windows and open floor plans that allowed for a more flexible use of space.

The buildings have a very modern look with bright splashes of red and blue that help highlight their cube-like shape. It’s a really interesting place to visit in Celle to see a different side of the city.
One minute you can be walking down a narrow lane surrounded by timber-frame houses, and just a few streets over, you find yourself in a Bauhaus dream.
If you're interested in Bauhaus architecture, not too far from there you can also visit the Otto Haesler Museum.
Traditional German lunch at Ratskeller
Then for lunch, we went to Ratskeller. This historic restaurant is located in the Altes Rathaus, or Old Town Hall, in the heart of Celle's old town.
The building itself dates back to the 13th century and has been used for a variety of purposes over the years including as a wine cellar.

The restaurant is accessed via a staircase that leads down to the basement level, and it's a cosy dining experience where you can enjoy a range of traditional German dishes.
I ordered the venison stew served with cabbage, a puff pastry, a pear and cranberry sauce.
Meanwhile, Sam ordered the Currywurst, which is more of a fast food dish that consists of a steamed and fried sausage seasoned with curry ketchup and served with a side of fries.

For dessert, we enjoyed a delicious panna cotta served with wild berries. It was a good meal and we also enjoyed the dimly-lit and warm ambience.
Stroll through the Französischer Garten
Celle's French Garden, locally known as Französischer Garten, is a beautiful park located in the heart of the city. The garden's history dates back to the 17th century when it was first established as a private garden by Duke Georg Wilhelm.
The French Garden features a meticulously manicured landscape inspired by the classic French style with symmetrical paths.

The fountain is surrounded by benches and shaded by trees, making it a great place to relax and take in the beauty of the garden.
Visit the first 24-hour museum
Another thing to do in Celle is to visit the Kunstmuseum, which is the world's first 24-hour museum!

The idea is that there is something to see here any time of day. The museum's exterior appearance changes twice a day when the museum’s doors open and close.
The museum features modern and contemporary art from the Robert Simon Collection by day and night.
Eating Raw Roulade
Of course, we couldn't leave Celle without trying the local dish. That evening, we ate at Thaers, which is technically a sports bar, but they serve one of the town’s specialties: roulade!

Typically, roulade refers to a slice of meat that is rolled with a filling of herbs, spices, and vegetables and then browned in a pan before being braised or roasted.
The difference is that in Celle, this dish is eaten raw!

They take a super think slice of raw beef, it's stuffed with raw onions, gherkins and mustard, rolled up, and served as is with just a bit of cracked black pepper on top. 
The meat was surprisingly tender and it reminded me of the consistency of smoked salmon. I didn't think I would like it, but it surprised me so I would recommend trying it!
Stay at Althoff Hotel Fürstenhof Celle
You can visit Celle on a day trip or stay overnight to explore a bit more in-depth. During our visit, we stayed at Althoff Hotel Fürstenhof Celle. This is a luxurious five-star hotel located in the heart of Celle, just a short walk from the historic old town.

The hotel is housed in a beautiful neo-Renaissance building that dates back to the late 19th century and has been lovingly restored to its former glory.

Beyond the Highlights: Tips & Advice for Enjoying Celle 

Quick-Fire Orientation

NeighbourhoodWhy GoTime from MarktAltstadtTimber-frame maze, boutiques, barsYou’re standing in itSchlossvorstadtFrench Garden + Bauhaus loop5 min walkWestercelleRiverscape beer gardens, canoe launch8 min by bikeHustedt HeathHeather fields, WW2 tank tracks for hikers12 min by car / 20 min by bus 5007Wienhausen13th-century Cistercian convent20 min on regional train RB38 + 10 min walk

How to Get to Celle & Get Around Like a Local 🚉🚶

Celle is super easy to reach from major cities in northern Germany.

By Train: The Deutsche Bahn runs frequent trains from Hanover (about 30-35 minutes), Hamburg (just under 2 hours), and Berlin (2-2.5 hours, usually with a transfer).

By Car: Celle is right on the A7 motorway, making it a convenient detour if you’re road tripping through Lower Saxony.

By Bike: Into slow travel? The region is crisscrossed with bike paths—consider arriving by pedal power for the full storybook countryside experience!

Getting Around:Once you’re in town, ditch the car—Celle’s Old Town is compact, walkable, and perfect for wandering. If you want to visit outlying areas (like the Bauhaus neighborhood or parks on the edge of town), consider renting a bike—many hotels offer them for guests, and the flat terrain makes cycling a breeze.

Celle’s Half-Timbered Houses: What to Look For 

I know I mentioned the “densest concentration of timber-frame houses in Europe,” but let’s geek out a little:

Count them! There are more than 400 preserved half-timbered houses, each with its own personality. Look up for carved beams, painted details, and the curious “nose” shapes that once helped with rain run-off.

Secret Courtyards: Peek through the narrow alleyways between houses—many lead to secluded courtyards, flower-filled patios, or tiny gardens. Some are open to the public, so don’t be shy!

Inscriptions: Many buildings have dates and German sayings carved above the doors. See if you can spot the oldest house (hint: look for dates from the early 1500s).

What to Eat & Drink in Celle: A Culinary Adventure

Classic Celle Bites

Raw Roulade: As mentioned, it’s not for everyone, but if you’re feeling brave, this dish is a must. Try it at Thaers for the full local experience. The combo of raw beef, onions, gherkins, and mustard might sound odd, but the flavours are bright and the texture is buttery—like beef sashimi with a German twist.

Venison Stew: If you’re visiting in autumn, this is peak game season. The stew is slow-cooked, rich, and pairs beautifully with local red wine or a malty Dunkelbier.

Welfenspeise: If you see this dessert on the menu, order it! It’s a creamy, eggy pudding invented in Celle and named after the House of Welf, a local noble family.

Local Drinks

Alter Provisor Schnapps: The herbal liqueur is an absolute must. Even if you’re not a spirits fan, ask for a tiny taster at the old pharmacy—you’ll get a story along with your shot.

German Craft Beers: The Lower Saxony region is known for its hearty, unfiltered brews. Look for local taps at Ratskeller or beer gardens in summer.

Celle’s Coffee Culture: Like much of Germany, Celle takes its afternoon Kaffee und Kuchen (coffee and cake) seriously. Settle into a café in the Old Town for apple cake, Black Forest torte, or whatever pastry is freshest.

More Unique Things to Do in Celle (If You Have Extra Time!)

Attend a Festival: Celle hosts a lively Christmas market in December, a street festival in summer, and even medieval fairs that turn the Old Town into a time machine.

Explore More Museums: The Bomann Museum dives into Celle’s regional history, folk culture, and changing exhibits—perfect for a rainy day.

See the Synagogue: Celle’s 18th-century synagogue survived WWII and now houses a small museum and memorial—an important and moving site for anyone interested in Jewish history.

Visit a Local Market: Time your visit for a Saturday and browse the bustling farmers’ market on the Schlossplatz—great for sampling local cheeses, sausages, and honey.

Nature Walks: The meadows and parks along the Aller River are lush and peaceful—bring a picnic, rent a rowboat, or just soak up the river views.

Perfect Day in Celle: Sample Itinerary

If you only have one full day in Celle, here’s how I’d recommend structuring it:

Morning:

Coffee and cake at a café in the Old Town

Guided tour of Celle Castle (don’t miss the chapel!)

Midday:

Wander the timber-frame streets, peek into courtyards

Lunch at Ratskeller or a riverside café

Afternoon:

Alter Provisor schnapps tasting & browse the shop

Stroll through the Bauhaus neighborhood and/or Französischer Garten

Evening:

Early dinner at Thaers to try the raw roulade

Evening walk along the Aller River, or check out the illuminated Kunstmuseum

Seasonal Events Calendar

MonthEventWhy It’s Worth Planning AroundApr (Easter wknd)FrühlingsmarktFlower market + giant half-timber-house LEGO build-off for kids.Jun (2nd Sat)Celler Wasa-Lauf10 km twilight race – or sit street-side with wheat beer and cheer 11,000 runners.Aug (last week)Wine & Light FestivalOld Town façades illuminated, 80 wineries pouring Riesling till midnight.Oct (1st Sat)Celle Stallparade100 Hanoverian stallions line the Schlossplatz in full plaited regalia – a photographer’s dream.Dec (1–23)Celler WeihnachtsmarktGingerbread stalls tucked into half-timbered nooks; try the Feuerzangenbowle (mulled wine with flaming rum-soaked sugar cone).

Celle Travel Tips & Fun Facts for First-Timers

Opening Hours: Shops (and even many restaurants) close early on Sundays, so plan your souvenir shopping for Saturday.

Best Photo Spots: For the iconic half-timbered house photo, stand in front of Hoppener Haus or stroll along Poststraße at golden hour.

Souvenirs: Pick up local honey, artisan ceramics, or a bottle of Alter Provisor as a unique gift.

Budget Tips: Many attractions (like churches, public parks, and just wandering the Old Town) are free!

Celle, Germany FAQ: Half-Timbered Old Town, Castle Chapel Access, Bauhaus “Italian Garden,” Raw Roulade, Events & Practical Tips (12 Questions)

Why visit Celle—what makes it special?

Celle blends a storybook Old Town of more than 400 half-timbered houses with a Renaissance-Baroque castle, a one-of-a-kind preserved Renaissance chapel, a colorful Bauhaus neighborhood, and distinctive food and drink (hello, Alter Provisor and raw roulade). It’s compact, walkable, and crammed with surprises.

How do I get to Celle and get around once I’m there?

By train, it’s ~30–35 minutes from Hanover, just under 2 hours from Hamburg, and ~2–2.5 hours from Berlin (usually with a change). By car, it’s a straightforward detour off the A7. Once in town, walk the Altstadt; for the Bauhaus “Italian Garden,” French Garden, or riverside paths, rent a bike—terrain is flat and hotel bikes are common.

Day trip or overnight—how much time do I need?

A day lets you tour the castle and chapel, wander the timber-frame lanes, sip Alter Provisor in a courtyard, and stroll the French Garden. Stay the night to add the Bauhaus loop, museums (Bomann, Otto Haesler), a river walk, and an unhurried dinner (raw roulade at Thaers, anyone?).

What should I know about Celle Castle—and how do I see the chapel?

The moated castle mixes Renaissance architecture with Baroque staterooms. The chapel—north of the Alps’ only fully preserved Renaissance church interior—is viewable on guided tours only (usually behind glass for preservation). Expect slippered floors in select rooms and exhibits spanning furniture, art, and court life.

Where are the best half-timbered house views—and what’s Hoppener Haus?

Start around the Stadtkirche St. Marien and fan out along Poststraße and the market lanes. Don’t miss Hoppener Haus (1532): a six-story showstopper with each upper level jutting further than the one below, carved figures, and colorful beams. Peek down narrow passages to discover secret courtyards.

Alter Provisor—what is it and can I taste it?

Alter Provisor is a former 17th-century pharmacy turned shop/café known for a century-old, closely guarded herbal liqueur. Expect honey-ginger-cinnamon notes and a sweet-but-fiery finish; tastings are often available, and the rear courtyard is a lovely spot for a cocktail, hot chocolate, or punch—spiked, naturally.

What is the “Italian Garden” Bauhaus neighborhood?

Despite the name, it’s a residential quarter designed by Otto Haesler (1924–1926): crisp, modernist cubes splashed with bold reds and blues, big windows, and light-filled plans—revolutionary worker housing for its day. Pair it with the Otto Haesler Museum to round out the story.

What should I eat—and is raw roulade really raw?

Yes—and that’s the point. Celle’s raw roulade is a paper-thin slice of beef rolled with mustard, onions, and gherkins, served uncooked and freshly prepared (try it at Thaers). Also look for venison stew in autumn, potatoes with cabbage or red cabbage, and local desserts like Welfenspeise. Reserve for prime-time dinners.

Is Celle family-friendly?

Very. Kids love the castle (and “slipper rooms”), the chapel’s wow-factor, courtyard cafés, river meadows, and wide, flat bike paths. On rainy days, rotate between Bomann Museum, the Kunstmuseum’s light facade changes, and cake breaks—this is Germany, after all.

When should I visit—and what events stand out?

Celle charms year-round. Spring brings flowers and markets; summer is festival season; autumn glows in parks and game menus; winter culminates in the Christmas Market tucked into timber-frame lanes. Highlights include the Celler Wasa-Lauf (June), Wine & Light Festival (late August), Stallparade (early October), and Advent festivities.

What’s a realistic budget—and any opening-hours quirks?

Castle/chapel tours and museums are modestly priced; cafés and sit-down meals are good value. Many shops close early on Sundays, so plan shopping for Saturday. Cards are widely accepted; carry a little cash for small purchases and public facilities.

Best photo tips (and etiquette)?

Golden hour along Poststraße and the Hoppener Haus frontage is magic; the Town Church tower and market lanes offer classic angles. Be respectful in residential alleys and courtyards—stick to open passages, avoid windows, and keep tripods compact. If it rains, celebrate: wet cobbles make the colors pop.

That should give you a few ideas of things to do in Celle in Northern Germany during your visit!

If this seems like your kind of destination, then you might also enjoy visiting Lüneburg for its medieval charm, exploring Germany’s northernmost wine region of Saale-Unstrut, or going on a road trip through the Black Forest.

#### 24 Hours in London: Amazing Moments in the City Every Hour of the Day!
London. Like many world capitals, they say this is a city that never sleeps, and on my most recent trip to the city, I put that to the test. The challenge: to discover 24 amazing moments in London - one unique moment for every hour of the day!
This trip called for some late nights and early mornings (because someone had to test out what you can get up to in London even at 3:00 a.m. should jet-lag kick in!) and I'm happy to report that London has got you covered.
From secret speakeasies to pop-up concerts in strangers' living rooms, and whimsical afternoon teas to late night market eats, I scoured all of London to bring you the following 24 amazing moments.

 
My 24 hours in London Travel Guide: Top Things to Do, See, Eat, Drink & Experience in London!
7:00
Wake up to amazing London views
I kicked off my 24-hour London adventure at CitizenM Hotel, where I had spent the night, and I don't think I could have asked for a better view to wake up to.
Why, yes, that is the Tower of London right outside my window!

CitizenM was modern, unique, and playful, plus they had an amazing rooftop bar with views of Central London. It was hard to pull myself away from here, but I did have a pretty big bucket list to tick off, so let's get on to that.

8:00
Grab a coffee at a telephone box
If I was going to tackle this 24 hours in London experiment, I was going to need some coffee; but why go to a regular coffee shop when I could grab one from a red telephone box?
While London's iconic phone boxes are slowly disappearing, Kape Barako has set up shop inside a defunct phone box, and it turns out, you don't need a whole lot of space to brew a good cup of coffee.

All orders here are to go, but there is a bench nearby where you can sit and enjoy your early morning cuppa joe.
9:00
Enjoy a nature escape at Hampstead Heath
Since I was already in Hampstead for my morning coffee, I also took the opportunity to have a wander through Hampstead Heath.

I know it probably seems a bit early into my London visit for a nature escape - surely Central London was calling! - but this is one of the highest points in London and you can get some nice views of the city.
Plus who doesn't like starting off the morning with some fresh air and lots of friendly pups out on their morning walk?
10:00
Dive into modern art at the Tate Modern
London is a city of museums - most of them free to the public - and one that I never tire of visiting is the Tate Modern.
Set in the former Bankside Power Station, this unlikely structure houses the national collection of British art from 1900 to the present day, as well as modern and contemporary art by international artists.

On this particular visit, there was something new at the Tate and it wasn't art; they had just opened a viewing terrace on the top floor of the Blavatnik Building. That meant 360-degree views of the London skyline featuring St. Paul's, the River Thames, and Canary Wharf off in the distance.
Also worth mentioning, there was a new restaurant at the Tate Modern, which again, boasted panoramic views of London, and served up seasonal British cuisine. If you're feeling a bit peckish after exploring the galleries, this is a great spot to grab a bite!

11:00
Catch the Changing of the Guard
Next up, it was time to watch the Changing of the Guard. There are a few different places to do so in London, but I watched the ceremony on Horse Guards Parade. You can expect red tunics, plumed helmets, and breastplates that dazzle in the sun.

I arrived a little bit early, so I also visited the Household Cavalry Museum, where a glass partition gives you a peek at the original 18th century working stables.
12:00
Ride down the Thames with Thames Rockets
No visit to London is complete without a cruise down the Thames, so I joined Thames Rockets who like to put a twist on things.
Their London cruise has you speeding down the Thames hitting up a whole bunch of the city's highlights with music pumping, and all the while you're teamed up with one of their hilarious guides who are there to share all kinds of interesting London facts that you won't find in any guidebook.

13:00
Indulge your inner foodie at Borough Market
With hundreds of food stalls selling everything from baked goods to fruit smoothies and fresh seafood to takeaway burgers, Borough Market is the place for foodies!
This is the oldest market in London - it has been in operation in some shape or form for over 1000 years! - and it's a place where you are spoiled for choice.

My favourite thing about any market meal is wandering around from stand to stand and piecing together a delicious meal. At Borough Market, I had a delicious goat kofte bowl from Gourmet Goat, a fresh berry juice from a juicing stand, and a classic vanilla doughnut from Bread Ahead. It was amazing!

14:00
Catch a West End show
Then it was on to the theatre. After multiple visits to London, I had still never been to a West End show and it was time to change that on this 24-hour challenge.

I went to the Prince Edward Theatre to see a childhood favourite brought to life, Aladdin. Since it was a matinee, there were lots of families in the audience, but it was also really enjoyable to watch it as an adult and relive the magic (I knew the lyrics by heart).
My favourite scene? When Aladdin retrieves the magic lamp from the cave - the set design for that scene was truly amazing.

15:00
Have an afternoon tea with a twist
As a lover of tea and scones, I've sought out many afternoon teas around the world, but the Mad Hatter's Afternoon Tea at Sanderson may be the most unusual I've experienced.

I felt like I had tumbled down the rabbit hole and been transported into the world of Alice in Wonderland. Everything from the crockery to the cakes was whimsical.
The menu was hidden inside vintage books, sugar cubes were served in a musical box, a there were even sweet potions labelled "Drink Me".

16:00
Go window shopping at Seven Dials
I revisited a few well-known spots on this London trip, but there were also lots of firsts and one of them was a visit to the Seven Dials. This place gets its name from the road junction where seven streets converge.

Tucked between Soho and Covent Garden, this area is home to the cutest little cafes and boutiques, and the neighbourhood has a decided village feel. The biggest surprise of all was stumbling into Neal’s Yard, which is a colourful courtyard with bohemian flair.

17:00
Scream at the top of your lungs at ArcelorMittal Orbit
Now for the scariest thing I did in London, that award goes to ArcelorMittal Orbit.

At 178 meters, this is the highest and longest tunnel slide in the world. There are both dark sections and light sections where you're meant to catch a glimpse of the London skyline, but well, I had my eyes shut and was screaming so loud that it's all a bit of a blur!
If you're looking for adrenaline, you know where to find it.

18:00
Explore East Croydon's street art scene
There's plenty of street art to be found all over London, but I caught the train down to East Croydon, which is less than 30 minutes from Central London if you get on the Thameslink at Blackfriars.

Here, I met up with Kevin from RISEgallery, who has helped pioneer the art movement that’s hit East Croydon by storm. RISEgallery does a lot of the legwork to help connect local artists with local property owners, and this has resulted in some beautiful masterpieces on almost every street corner.

We went on a walking tour of the city where we saw a diverse mix of murals ranging from portraits and geometric shapes to stencils and bubble letters. I could have easily spent a few more hours here, but there was another event to catch!

19:00
Go to one of the 'Lates' at The Royal Academy of Arts
Next up on my 24 hours in London, I got to attend one of the 'lates'.
This isn't something I was familiar with, but basically, the lates is when museums and art galleries stay open after hours, either offering extended admission or putting on special events. 
I happened to be in town when the Royal Academy of Arts was putting on the last of its summer lates titled The Other Paradise, and well, it was the funnest art event I’ve ever been to!

Everyone had dressed according to the theme, so you had fairies, forest creatures and mythical beings walking through Piccadilly on their way to the gallery, and once we got in, there was a variety of events to take part in.

I attend a life-drawing class where the models were mermaids, I made botanical postcards by pressing flower petals against paper, and I walked through an immersive art performance set in the Afterlife where I was basically moving through a play and interacting with the actors not knowing what would happen next - it was strange, fun and fascinating!
20:00
Discover upcoming bands with Sofar Sounds
 Sofar Sounds is a pop-up concert that takes place in people’s living rooms, and it's a fun way to discover some fresh up-and-coming local talent. 
The catch is that when you sign up, the only information you have is the neighbourhood where the concert will be taking place. It’s not until 24 hours before the event that you are emailed the address and the names of the artists performing that night. 
And to keep things even more interesting, sometimes they have some big names show up to play in people’s homes! 

I attended one of their events in Camden Town, where they had a line up that included a folk singer, a poet who delivered spoken word, and an up-and-coming band called Hana Brooks who had the crowd asking for multiple encores.
It felt a bit strange at first walking into a stranger's home where I didn't know anyone, but everyone was super friendly and at the end of the day, we were all here for a mutual interest in music.
21:00
Eat around the world at Pop Brixton
I've mentioned quite a few London food experiences so far and another favourite to add to the list is Pop Brixton.

There were so many tempting food options - from bratwurst to jerk chicken, and Cantonese barbecue to mutton skewers - all of them with long lines to boot.

After following my nose from stand to stand, I eventually settled on Koi Ramen, a Japanese noodle bar, where I ordered a steaming bowl of ramen in a rich broth, topped with 10-hour slow-cooked tender pork belly.
22:00
Discover new board games at Draughts
I'm all about visiting themed cafes, so when I heard that London has a board game cafe, I was super excited to check it out.

Draughts has a collection of over 800 games, most of which I had never even heard of before, but the cool thing about this cafe is that they'll actually teach you how to play the games.

This place was super cozy - set under a railway arch, this brick building almost felt like a bit of a cave - plus they served a mix of teas, local craft beers, and snacks. The perfect low-key evening in London.
23:00
Catch a gig at The Blues Kitchen
After grabbing dinner at Pop Brixton, it was just a short walk to The Blues Kitchen for some live music. They do barbecue, blues and bourbon - not that I had any room for barbecue after all that food!
I happened to be there on a night when Broken Brass Ensemble was playing and they had the crowd on fire! The place had a really fun vibe and everyone was dancing. 

24:00
Play a round of darts at Flight Club
Now this is a fun place to visit in London if you're with a group of friends!

Flight Club is a bar that puts a twist on the traditional English pub by adding modern darts into the equation. Groups can book an oche, which is the throw line in a game of darts, and here you can take part in a variety of multiplayer games.
I went into this with no dart-throwing experience whatsoever, but it turned out to be great fun and I even came in second in one game. Not bad for a newbie!
01:00
Travel back to the 1940s at Cahoots
Now for one of the coolest bars I have ever been to, let's talk about Cahoots!

This secret Soho bar is set in 1940s London and it’s also themed like the Underground; the walls are covered in maps of the stations and the booths look like they’ve been pulled straight off the tube. 

Visitors are also encouraged to dress up when they visit; that means big victory rolls and bright red lipstick for girls, and poor boy caps and suspenders for guys. 
Expect fun cocktails, old tunes, and some swing dancing when the night gets going!
02:00
Find the entrance to Chinatown's hottest speakeasy
And speaking of bars, now let me tell you about another fun yet completely different experience: Opium.
Hidden behind a jade door and a few flights of stairs up, this speakeasy is set in a dark den with creaking floors making it feel like you've been transported to another era.
They serve up really fun cocktails and they even have a Zodiac menu where you can order drinks based on your year of birth; I was the year of the Rabbit and I got a drink to match.

I visited this spot with a few friends, so it was fun seeing all their zodiac drinks come out and then sharing some dim sum together because as it turns out, this speakeasy is also a dim sum parlour!
03:00
Dance the night away at KOKO
So clubbing isn't really my thing - somehow that seemed more exciting before I wasn't old enough to get into places - but I couldn't experience 24 hours in London and not show you the nightlife!

Aside from hitting up a series of bars and speakeasies, I also visited KOKO, a club set in a former theatre in Camden Town, which also happens to be home to the largest disco ball in all of Europe.

The crowd was young and the floor was crowded, but I pulled out my meerkat dance moves, all in the name of travel research. You're most welcome!
04:00
Go for late night eats at Beigel Bake
What do you do after you've been dancing the night away? Go find some late night eats, of course!
Beigel Bake is a bit of an institution. Located in Shoreditch, this 24-hour bakery specializes in Jewish-style bagels that are sure to satisfy your cravings.
Their best seller? The hot salt beef with mustard and pickles. Apparently, it was so good that I didn't even snap a photo before chowing down!
05:00
Catch sunrise along the Thames
What's there to do in London this early in the morning?
Plenty of things I'm sure, but wanting to wind down this action-packed visit, I opted for a quiet walk along the River Thames .

I was out before the morning commute started, and while I didn't get to witness a magical sunset, it was nice to enjoy the stillness of the city during blue hour; a completely different side of London reserved only for those willing to rise early.
06:00
Have breakfast with a view at Duck & Waffle
Lastly, it was time to drag myself out of bed for the last activity of my 24 hours travel challenge in London: breakfast.
There's one spot in town that I had been hearing about for ages and that's Duck & Waffle. Located on a 40th floor, this restaurant has amazing views of Central London and it almost feels like you're within grasp of the Gherkin. It may have been foggy and rainy when I visited, but that made it feel quintessentially London.

As for what to order there, I went with their signature dish, the Duck & Waffle, which consists of a Belgian waffle with a crispy duck leg confit, a fried duck egg and mustard maple syrup.
It was delightful as can be and certainly worth getting up early for an unforgettable breakfast in London.

And that concludes my 24 hours in London. I hope you enjoyed following along and that you got a few ideas for your own visit to London. I'll also let you in on a secret: I experienced these 24 moments over the course of 5 days because there is no way I could have made it across London from one activity to the next in so little time, or functioned on no sleep, but you get the idea!

Plan Your Own 24 Hours in London (Routes, Swaps, Budget, Transport & Tips)

So you’ve seen how I squeezed London like a lemon. Now here’s the ultra-practical section to help you build your perfect 24-hour sprint. 

How to Use This Guide

Choose one block from each column (Morning / Afternoon / Evening / Night Owl) to build your day.

Swap by theme (foodie, artsy, outdoorsy, family).

Pin alternatives near each activity—a lifesaver if queues or rain appear.

Morning (7:00–12:00): Views, Greens & Icons

Classic Morning Route (central + views)

Wake-up views: Rooftop coffee near St. Paul’s or the Sky Garden (free, but pre-book a slot).

River walk: Millennium Bridge → Tate Modern (free galleries + Blavatnik viewing terrace).

Iconic moment: Changing of the Guard (Buckingham Palace or Horse Guards Parade). Check schedules—ceremonies aren’t daily year-round.

Nature & Neighborhoods (quieter vibe)

Hampstead Heath for skyline vistas (pack a pastry and watch the pups) → Parliament Hill.

Greenwich: Park, Royal Observatory meridian line, and market bites; clipper back on the Thames.

Foodie Morning

Borough Market for breakfast grazing (buns, baps, berries) before the late lunch rush.

Coffee with a twist: Kape Barako (inside a red phone box) or specialty shops in Seven Dials.

Rainy-day swaps: Churchill War Rooms, British Museum, National Gallery, or Leadenhall Market’s covered lanes.

Afternoon (12:00–17:00): Culture, Treats & Adrenaline

Culture Hit

Museum + view combo: Tate Modern (free) → Shakespeare’s Globe tour (paid) → river clipper ride.

West End matinee: Book ahead (TodayTix often has deals). Arrive early; some theaters are architectural gems.

Afternoon Tea (classic or quirky)

Classic: Fortnum & Mason / The Wolseley (smart-casual).

Whimsical: Mad Hatter’s Afternoon Tea at Sanderson (book a window seat if possible).

Budget hack: Scones + jam at a neighborhood bakery with a pot of tea = “DIY afternoon tea” under £10.

Adrenaline & Alt-London

ArcelorMittal Orbit Slide (book a timed slot).

Up at The O2 (rooftop climb; weather flexible) or Thames Rockets speedboat ride (music + quips + skyline).

Short on time? Pick one splurge (matinee or adrenaline) and keep the rest walkable.

Evening (17:00–22:00): Streets, Eats & After-Hours Art

Neighborhood Strolls

Seven Dials & Neal’s Yard for indie shops and colorful courtyards.

South Bank golden hour walk: Tower Bridge → The Scoop → Borough → Bankside lights at dusk.

Eats with Vibes

Pop Brixton (containers + world food stalls)

Brixton Village / Market Row (Caribbean, Japanese, Ethiopian, everything)

Coal Drops Yard (King’s Cross) for canalside restaurants and design shops

Museum Lates (calendar-dependent)

Many museums host after-hours “Lates” with talks, DJs, life drawing, and pop-ups (the Royal Academy events are superb).

Rainy-night swaps: Cozy into a board-game café (Draughts) or a cinema in a historic venue (BFI Southbank, Regent Street Cinema).

Night Owl (22:00–06:00): Gigs, Games, Speakeasies & Sunrises

Late-Night Fun

Draughts board-game café (800+ games; staff teach rules).

Flight Club for modern darts (reserve an oche; group-friendly).

The Blues Kitchen (live music + barbecue vibes).

KOKO (club in a gilded former theater; dress comfy).

Secret Bars & Speakeasies

Cahoots (1940s Underground theme—reservations advised).

Opium (Chinatown; cocktails + dim sum; zodiac menu).

Swift (Soho; upstairs casual, downstairs speakeasy mood).

Late-Night Eats (24/7 or close to it)

Beigel Bake (Shoreditch; hot salt beef with mustard + pickles = joy).

Bao buns and noodle houses in Chinatown open late on weekends.

Brick Lane late-night curry houses (check opening hours midweek).

Dawn Patrol

Blue hour by the Thames (Tower Bridge, Millennium Bridge, or Westminster Bridge).

Duck & Waffle breakfast with a skyline—books out early; sunrise slots are magic.

Build-Your-Own 24H London

TimeClassicFoodieArtsyOutdoorsy07:00–09:00Sky Garden or rooftop viewCoffee + pastry at BoroughEmpty Trafalgar/Leicester Sq. photosHampstead Heath sunrise09:00–12:00Tate Modern + river walkBorough breakfast grazeNational Gallery or RAGreenwich Park + meridian12:00–14:00Changing of the Guard (day dependent)Market lunch (Borough/Maltby)West End matineeClipper cruise14:00–16:00Thames Rockets speedboatAfternoon tea (classic/quirky)Museum Late planningRegent’s Park roses16:00–19:00Seven Dials & Neal’s YardPop Brixton snacksRA/Design MuseumSouth Bank walk19:00–22:00Live gig (Blues Kitchen)Brixton Village dinnerMuseum Lates / galleryCanal stroll (King’s Cross)22:00–02:00Flight Club dartsChinatown bitesSpeakeasy crawlNight bus window-seat tour02:00–06:00KOKO dance floorBeigel BakeQuiet bridges + photosDuck & Waffle sunrise breakfast

Getting Around (Fast, Cheap & Easy)

Contactless vs Oyster vs Travelcard

OptionBest forHow it worksDaily capsProsConsContactless card/phoneVisitors with tap-to-payTap in/out on Tube/Overground/DLR/bus/TramsAuto daily/weekly capsNo top-ups; just tapForeign banks may add feesOyster cardLonger stays or no contactlessLoad credit; tap in/outCapped like contactlessWidely accepted£7 card fee; remember to refundTravelcardHeavy Tube users in a day1-day or 7-day zonesUnlimited in zonesSimple, unlimitedNot always cheaper than caps

Airport into town:

Heathrow → Elizabeth line (fast + good value) or Piccadilly line (cheapest).

Gatwick → Thameslink to Blackfriars/London Bridge (value) or Gatwick Express (fastest to Victoria).

Stansted → Stansted Express to Liverpool Street.

Luton → Luton Airport Express (to St Pancras).

Night transport: The Night Tube runs on select lines weekends; otherwise Night Buses are frequent (and fun for people-watching).

Money & Time Savers

Book ahead for: West End shows, Orbit Slide, Up at The O2, Sky Garden, special afternoon teas, speakeasies.

Free views: Tate Modern terrace, Primrose Hill, Parliament Hill, One New Change (St. Paul’s rooftop).

Two-for-one rail offers: National Rail paper tickets often unlock 2-for-1 entry at paid attractions (check the Days Out Guide).

Matinee shows are cheaper than nights; weekday matinees often have better seats.

Picnic smarter: Supermarkets (M&S, Waitrose, Sainsbury’s Local) do picnic deals perfect for parks.

Weather-Proof Plan (Because…London)

When skies cry: Churchill War Rooms, British Library Treasures, Leadenhall/Spitalfields markets, theater matinee, gallery hop.

When the sun smiles: South Bank walk, Greenwich hill, parks (Hyde/Regent’s/Richmond), canal stroll Little Venice → Camden.

Windy & cold: Cozy pubs with fireplaces (Hampstead/Greenwich), museum lates, jazz bars.

Photo Shortlist (Exact Spots You’ll Love)

Tower Bridge from Butler’s Wharf at golden hour.

St. Paul’s reflected in One New Change rooftop glass.

Neal’s Yard early morning for empty frames.

Tate Modern terrace for skyline panoramas.

Hampstead Heath/Parliament Hill at sunrise or sunset.

Leadenhall Market from under the central dome (best before opening).

Safety & Late-Night Tips

Stick to well-lit routes and main roads after midnight; Google’s “Live” bus times are your friend.

Use registered minicabs (pre-book) or black cabs; avoid unlicensed rides.

Keep bags zipped and in front in crowded spots (markets, bridges, the Tube).

Hydrate + snack: Late nights + long walks = pack a bottle and a granola bar.

What to Book in Advance (Priority List)

Sky Garden / View from The Shard / Up at The O2 (time slots go first)

West End tickets (matinee bargains go fastest)

Afternoon tea (especially themed teas)

Orbit Slide / Thames Rockets (weather-flexible but capacity-limited)

Sofar Sounds (you’ll get the address 24 hours before; sells out quickly)

Cahoots / speakeasy tables (tiny venues = plan ahead)

Quick Packing List for a 24-Hour Sprint

Daypack Essentials

Compact umbrella + light waterproof layer

Portable charger + charging cable

Contactless card / Oyster / ID

Reusable water bottle

Plasters (Band-Aids) for cobblestones

Foldable tote for market finds

Mini hand sanitizer

Dress Code Hints

West End: smart casual is perfect.

Afternoon tea: neat casual (trainers are fine at many venues; check if unsure).

Clubs/speakeasies: comfy shoes for lines + stairs; layers for London weather mood swings.

Budget Snapshot (Per Person, One Big Day)

CategoryShoestringMid-RangeSplashyTransport (caps)£8–£9£8–£9£8–£9Food & drink£20–£35£40–£70£80–£150Activities (mix)£0–£25 (mostly free)£40–£90£120–£220Total£28–£69£88–£169£208–£379

Free wins: Tate Modern, Sky Garden (ticketed but free), museum lates (often free), walks with skyline views.

24 Hours in London: Mini Checklists

Before You Go

✅ Reserve key time slots (views, tea, shows)

✅ Add contactless card to your phone wallet

✅ Screenshot booking QRs + offline maps

✅ Check “Lates” calendars for your dates

On the Day

✅ Start early (crowd-free photos!)

✅ Anchor activities by neighborhood to reduce zig-zagging

✅ Book last-minute show deals on TodayTix or at the TKTS booth

✅ Carry a snack + water; London days are long

Night Owl Mode

✅ Verify last Night Tube / first morning tube

✅ Save taxi apps (Uber, FreeNow, Bolt)

✅ Plan a late-night eat nearby (Beigel Bake never sleeps)

✅ Pack layers; London gets breezy at 3 a.m.

London in 24 Hours Trip: FAQ Travel Questions and Answers 

How realistic is it to do all of this in one day?

It isn’t—pick a theme and cluster stops by neighborhood. Aim for 6–8 highlights max, and leave space for serendipity (street music, market nibbles, sunset detours).

Do I need an Oyster card or will contactless work?

If your bank card/phone supports contactless, you’re set. It auto-caps daily fares just like Oyster. International fees vary—check with your bank.

What’s the cheapest way from Heathrow into central London?

Piccadilly line is the cheapest; the Elizabeth line is quicker and still good value. Taxis are convenient but much pricier.

Can I see the Changing of the Guard year-round?

Yes, but not every day year-round. Schedules change seasonally. Arrive early or watch at Horse Guards Parade for a closer view and sometimes smaller crowds.

I want a view—what’s free?

Tate Modern terrace, One New Change rooftop, Primrose Hill, Parliament Hill, and pre-booked Sky Garden (free, limited slots).

Are museum Lates suitable for solo travelers?

Absolutely. They’re friendly, creative, and often include workshops or short talks—great for striking up conversations.

Where can I find great food without a reservation?

Markets and food halls: Borough, Pop Brixton, Seven Dials Market, Brixton Village, and Mercato Mayfair. Go off-peak (early lunch or early dinner).

Is London safe late at night?

Stick to lively, lit areas; plan your route, use licensed taxis or Night Tube/buses, and keep valuables zipped. London is a big city—use standard big-city smarts.

What should I wear for afternoon tea?

Smart casual is perfect at most places; shoes you can walk in, a nice top, and a light layer. If in doubt, check the venue’s site.

I’m short on time—Tate Modern or National Gallery?

For modern art + Thames views, Tate Modern. For European masters (Monet, Van Gogh, Turner), National Gallery. Both are free—pick the one that matches your mood.

Any last-minute show ticket tips?

Try TodayTix for flash deals, or the TKTS booth in Leicester Square for same-day discounts. Matinees are often easier on the wallet.

Where can I grab an iconic late-night bite?

Beigel Bake on Brick Lane (salt beef bagel is legend). Chinatown for late ramen or dim sum, especially on weekends.

Are you up for the challenge?How would you spend 24 hours in London?

The trip was brought to you as part of the #lovegreatbritain campaign, created and managed by iambassador in partnership with Visit Britain and Visit London.

________________________________________________________________________________________________



### Pages



### Posts

# Nomadic Samuel Travel Blog

> Global Logistics, Immersive Travel Guides, Photography & Media Strategy

> Contact: nomadicsamuel@gmail.com

### Posts

### Posts

#### 1 Day in El Chaltén, Argentina: Visitor's Perfect Day Trip Itinerary (What To Do With Limited Time)
El Chaltén in one day is basically a daylight heist.

You’ve got limited hours, a bus schedule that doesn’t care about your dreams, and a town that keeps waving world-class hiking trails at you like, “Go on… you can totally fit Fitz Roy AND Cerro Torre AND a waffle in before dinner.”

Clear skies are the jackpot in El Chaltén—this is the kind of day-trip view of Fitz Roy that makes you forget the wind and the early bus. From the trail, the granite spires pop above lenga forest and the wide Patagonian valley, setting up a perfect “hike first, feast later” day.

Spoiler: you can’t. Not unless you’re trail-running with a teleportation device.

But you can have an unreal day here—one that feels big, scenic, and satisfying—if you plan it like a person who respects time, wind, and the fact that your legs are not replaceable. 

We’ve spent enough time in El Chaltén to learn two truths:

the hiking is world-class, and

one day is never enough… but it can still be incredible if you plan it like a human with a clock, not like an Instagram caption.

This guide is a one-day game plan built for real travelers with limited time: day-trippers coming from El Calafate, people squeezing El Chaltén into a broader Patagonia itinerary, and anyone who wants a “maximum wow per hour” day without turning it into a survival documentary.

https://youtu.be/wselXYT-3N0

One-day snapshot: what you can realistically do

Here’s the honest trade-off: in a single day, you usually choose one “main objective” (a bigger hike) or you stack several shorter hits (viewpoints + waterfalls + food). Trying to do everything is how you end up speed-walking through paradise while whispering “we’re fine” through clenched teeth.

🧾 Quick Booking: Your El Chaltén Travel Essentials 🥾✨

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit (Book These 4 Things)

✅ What to book💡 Why it’s worth it🔗 Quick link🥾 Tours & experiencesEasy way to lock in a glacier day, a Lago del Desierto adventure, or a guided option when weather turns moodyBrowse El Chaltén tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & staysEl Chaltén sells out fast in peak season — booking early = better locations + fewer “only the priciest rooms left” momentsFind El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car rentals (optional)Best for freedom days: Ruta 40 viewpoints, flexible timing, photo stops, and a smoother Lago del Desierto runCompare car rentals in El Calafate (gateway to El Chaltén) on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus ticketsThe classic El Calafate ↔ El Chaltén route is simple — but popular departure times fill upBook El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud

👉 One-click backup (reverse direction): Book El Chaltén → El Calafate buses on Busbud

El Chaltén one-day snapshot infographic: three realistic time scenarios—day trip from El Calafate, overnight in town, or a car/private transfer at dawn—paired with the best strategy (short-hike stack, one iconic hike, or big hike + add-ons) and the vibe you’ll feel (snack-fueled highlight reel, earned-your-dinner pride, or ‘hacked the system’ energy).

Your time realityBest “one-day” strategyWhat it feels likeDay trip from El Calafate (arrive late morning, leave evening)Short-hike stack + best viewpoints + great foodLike a highlight reel with snacksYou sleep in El Chaltén (one full day + early start)One big iconic hike (Fitz Roy or Cerro Torre) + a small bonus viewpointLike you earned your dinnerYou have a car/private transfer and can start at dawnBig hike + extra add-onsLike you hacked the system

This El Chaltén one-day snapshot infographic breaks down four realistic travel “vibes,” from chasing the iconic Fitz Roy photo to choosing a comfortable classic hike, stacking short day-trip viewpoints, or leaning into cafés and waterfalls when the weather turns chaotic. It’s designed to help visitors match limited time, energy, and conditions with the smartest possible plan.

Destination Snapshot: pick your one-day vibe

VibeYou’ll love this if…Main moveDon’t do thisIconic, “I came for Fitz Roy”You want the photo and you’re willing to workLaguna de los Tres (early start)Starting late and hoping vibes carry youComfortable classicYou want a big day without the steepest grindLaguna TorreAssuming Cerro Torre will show up on commandShort & sweet (best day trip)You’re day-tripping, traveling with kids, or conserving legsMirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del SaltoTrying to “also add Laguna Capri just quickly”Weatherproof foodieThe forecast looks chaotic but you still want a great dayMiradores + cafés + waterfallMarching into exposed terrain to prove a point

Audrey Bergner arrives in El Chaltén on day one of our Patagonia adventure, posing beside the Route 41 sign in Santa Cruz Province. The quiet road, wide-open landscape, and rocky hills mark the moment we officially entered Argentina’s trekking capital and kicked off a week built around hiking, weather watching, and big mountain views.

Our one-day “origin story” (why this guide is built the way it is)

When Audrey and I first rolled into El Chaltén, we were equal parts excited and overly ambitious. We’d just come off big Patagonia meals (you know the kind: “we earned this” dinners that you absolutely did not earn), and suddenly we were in Argentina’s trekking capital talking like we were about to summit something. 

Also: we showed up in full “Patagonia food tour” mode, and our bodies were like… excuse me? Audrey’s jeans stopped cooperating, I was entering my “rotunding, bulbous plumptitude” era, and suddenly El Chaltén was politely suggesting we move our skeletons.

Reality check arrived fast. Groceries were pricier and more limited than we expected, Wi-Fi was… let’s call it “sporadic at best,” and the wind was already reminding us who runs this place. Audrey and I inhaled pizza, grabbed supplies, and still couldn’t resist squeezing in a sunset hike to Mirador de los Cóndores because the daylight was basically cheating.

From Mirador de los Cóndores, Nomadic Samuel pauses to photograph El Chaltén spread out below, with the Río de las Vueltas cutting through the valley and rugged Patagonian peaks rising on both sides. This short but steep hike delivers one of the best quick-payoff viewpoints in town, making it a perfect stop on a one-day El Chaltén itinerary.

And by “sporadic Wi-Fi,” we mean: our mobile data basically didn’t work, the Wi-Fi kept dropping, and we even had a moment where we couldn’t get the hotel payment to process. Groceries were pricey (the “a dollar per apple” moment was humbling), but there was free Wi-Fi in the central plaza—so if you need to load maps, tickets, or messages, that little detail can save your sanity.

That first short hike is a big reason this post exists. It’s steep enough to wake up your legs, short enough to fit into a tight schedule, and the views are so immediate that you feel like El Chaltén just handed you a welcome gift. It set the tone for the rest of our stay: move when the weather lets you, eat like it’s part of the plan, and don’t confuse ambition with good decision-making.

December daylight really is cheating (sunset can stretch ridiculously late), but the funny part is we still ended up in “grandma bedtime” mode—hand-washing laundry, setting alarms, and calling it a night while the sky was still basically pretending it was afternoon.

Laguna de los Tres is the iconic “money shot” hike in El Chaltén, featuring turquoise glacial water set beneath the dramatic granite spires of Mount Fitz Roy. Reaching this viewpoint requires a long, demanding hike and a steep final climb, making it a true main objective for travelers trying to maximize a single, clear-weather day in Patagonia.

Choose your “main objective” in 60 seconds

This is the decision that makes (or breaks) your day. Pick one primary goal, then build everything else around it.

This “main objective” idea is exactly how we approached our own week here. Even with six nights in town, Audrey and I still woke up each morning thinking: what’s the one thing today is built around? That mindset kept us from wasting good weather windows—and it stopped us from doing the classic El Chaltén mistake of trying to be everywhere in one day.

Main objectiveThe payoffTime on trail (typical)EffortCrowd levelWeather sensitivityWorks for a Calafate day trip?Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy “money shot”)The iconic Fitz Roy viewpoint8–10 hrsHighVery highHigh (wind + visibility matter)Only for early starters / very long daylightLaguna Torre (Cerro Torre vibes)Glacier lagoon + Torre massif drama7–8 hrsModerateHighMediumPossible, but tight if you’re not sleeping in townMiradores + Chorrillo del Salto (short-hike stack)Big views in small bites + waterfall4–6 hrs total (stacked)Low–moderateMediumLow–mediumYes. This is the safest “perfect day trip”Town day + short miradorCafés, breweries, scenery, “I’m still on holiday” energy2–4 hrsLowLowLowYes (and underrated)

If you’re reading this because you have one day and you’re not sleeping in El Chaltén, skip the hero fantasy for a moment and keep reading. We’ll still give you the big-hike option, but we’ll also give you the itinerary that actually fits in the day.

The rules of one day in El Chaltén (aka: how not to self-sabotage)

The bus ride into El Chaltén delivers an unforgettable first impression, with an empty Patagonian road stretching toward jagged, snow-covered peaks in the distance. As you cross the open steppe toward Los Glaciares National Park, the scale of the landscape becomes impossible to ignore—this is where the mountains start to feel close, wild, and wonderfully intimidating.

✅ El Calafate → El Chaltén bus tickets (Busbud)

✅ El Chaltén → El Calafate bus tickets (Busbud)

Rule 1: Build your day around the bus (or your wheels)

If you’re day-tripping from El Calafate, your “start time” is not when you finish breakfast. Your start time is your bus departure. Everything else is secondary.

Your best move: pick one of the earlier buses, and choose your return bus before you choose your hike. (Because it’s hard to enjoy the mountains when you’re mentally calculating sprint speed.)

We get it because we’ve done the “3-hour bus each way” reality—and once you’ve lived that, you stop thinking of El Chaltén as a casual day out and start treating it like a fun little logistics mission (with mountains as your reward).

👉 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars (best gateway for El Chaltén)

El Chaltén’s compact town center sits directly beneath the granite spires of Mount Fitz Roy, creating one of Patagonia’s most dramatic everyday backdrops. Colorful buildings, fluttering Argentine flags, and quiet streets give the village a frontier feel, while the surrounding mountains remind visitors that world-class hiking begins just beyond town.

Day-tripping from El Calafate: the timing math that keeps your day fun

Most day trips look like this:

~3 to 3.5 hours each way on the road

one long scenic stretch along Ruta 40 and Route 23 with the mountains slowly getting sharper

a quick stop en route (often at a roadside spot like Hotel La Leona) to stretch, grab a snack, and remember that “just one day” is, in fact, a full mission

The key question isn’t “What hike do I want to do?” It’s:How many hours do I realistically have between arrival and my return bus?

Use this quick budget:

30 minutes: arrive, bathroom, fill water, sort tickets, organize layers

60–90 minutes: lunch + snacks + a small “town wandering” buffer

60 minutes: reward block (coffee/beer/dinner before departure)

Everything else = hiking time

If you have 4–6 hours of hiking time total, you want the short-hike stack.If you have 7–9 hours of hiking time total and you’re confident in your pace, you can consider a bigger hike.

Bus pairing playbook (use this to choose your “safe” plan)

If you arrive…And you leave…Your realistic hiking window (after buffers)Best planLate morningEarly evening4–5 hrsMirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del SaltoLate morningLate evening5–6.5 hrsAdd Mirador de las Águilas or extend your waterfall timeEarly morningEvening6–7.5 hrsLaguna Capri or a longer short-hike stackEarly morningLate evening7.5–9 hrsBig hike possible (Torre is the safer pick)

If you’re looking at that table and thinking “I can do the big one,” we respect the confidence. Just keep one more thing in mind: wind steals minutes. It slows your pace, increases fatigue, and makes breaks longer because you’re searching for sheltered rocks like a lizard with a purpose.

The day-trip golden rule

If your return bus is fixed, choose a plan that lets you be back in town at least 45–60 minutes before departure. That buffer is for:

slow descents

bathroom lines

the sudden need for a second pastry

and the universal Patagonia surprise: weather shifting right when you thought you were done

Rule 2: Patagonia is not a motivational quote

Wind and visibility can change your plan, and that’s not a personal failure. Your goal isn’t to “complete the hike.” Your goal is to have an amazing day and return with the same number of bones you started with.

After a long day hiking in El Chaltén, nothing hits quite like a proper comfort-food reward. This plate of soft potato gnocchi tossed in a rich, creamy mushroom sauce was exactly what our legs and spirits needed—proof that Patagonia isn’t just about dramatic mountains, but also about well-earned meals that feel even better after the effort.

Rule 3: Food is part of the itinerary

In El Chaltén, eating well is not optional—it’s strategy. Audrey and I are foodies. We literally plan hikes (and any other day for that matter) around where the next warm thing is coming from. No shame. A good day here includes:

a proper breakfast

a packed lunch (or a plan for it)

a “post-hike reward” meal that feels mildly ridiculous

Audrey and I leaned hard into the lunchbox routine here—order the night before, pick it up in the morning, and you’re instantly a functional adult with a plan. And yes… we were absolutely the people calling it a “snack stop” when it was clearly a mini lunch (especially the day our salad container tried to explode in the backpack).

Rule 4: Buffers are your best friend

Add buffer time for:

wind (slows you down)

photo stops (you’ll stop)

trailhead logistics (bathrooms, tickets, “where are my gloves?”)

café temptations (you’ll cave)

Hiking in El Chaltén isn’t only about chasing famous viewpoints—it’s also about soaking in stretches of quiet, beautiful landscape like this. Green meadows, twisted lenga trees, and rocky hillsides create a slower, more contemplative side of Patagonia that unfolds step by step as you move along the trails surrounding town.

What you need to know before you start

National Park access and tickets (don’t get caught out)

Most of the classic trailheads around town are part of Los Glaciares National Park’s Northern Zone (Zona Norte). Entrance is handled differently than the Perito Moreno glacier area: for the Northern Zone portals (the ones you’ll care about in El Chaltén), tickets are obtained online and paid by card—no cash (be sure to check current prices as this is ever changing and evolving). Trailheads often have QR codes to scan, but don’t assume you’ll have perfect signal at the exact moment you need it.

If you’re only in El Chaltén for one day, treat this as part of your “pre-game.” Buy your ticket the night before or on the bus with decent data, screenshot the confirmation, and move on with your life.

One small “locals know” note we got early: don’t let the friendly town dogs follow you onto the trails. They’re sweet, but rangers warned us it’s a real problem for local wildlife (including endangered deer in the park). Pet the pup in town, get your serotonin there, and keep the trails dog-free.

Trail navigation: it’s well-marked… but still use offline maps

El Chaltén trails are generally well signed, and major routes are straightforward. Still:

download an offline map

don’t rely on mobile coverage

know your turnaround time (more on that below)

What to pack for a one-day hit (even if you “never get cold”)

This is the minimum kit that keeps your day fun instead of type-two-fun:

Windproof layer (non-negotiable)

Warm layer (fleece or light puffy)

Rain shell or poncho (Patagonia loves drama)

Water (at least 1.5L; more on big hikes)

Snacks you actually want to eat

Lunch (sandwich, empanadas, or a “trail charcuterie” situation)

Sunscreen + sunglasses (yes, even when it’s cloudy)

Hat or buff (wind defense)

Headlamp if you’re doing a big hike or winter/shoulder season

Basic first aid (blister care is the real emergency)

Cash + card (cash for small things / backup, card for the park ticket)

Power bank (cold + photos = dead phone)

The “wind reality check” table

Wind is personal, but numbers help you avoid self-delusion.

Forecast gusts (rough)What it often feels like on exposed sectionsSmart one-day move0–40 km/hAnnoying hair dayAny plan works40–65 km/hYou start leaning into gustsPrefer shorter hikes + viewpoints; be cautious at miradores65–80 km/hBracing becomes tiringChoose the short-hike stack; skip long exposed sections80+ km/hProgress becomes a negotiationMake it a town + mirador day. Seriously.

The Laguna Torre hike begins with long, peaceful stretches through Patagonian forest before opening up to glaciers and dramatic mountain views later on. Here, Nomadic Samuel walks one of the quieter sections of the trail, where twisted lenga trees and soft forest light make the journey feel calm and immersive long before the payoff viewpoints appear.

The perfect one-day itinerary (best for most day-trippers)

This is the itinerary we recommend for most people who have limited time and want a day that feels full, scenic, and joyful without turning into a marathon.

It stacks the highest “wow per hour” spots:

Mirador de los Cóndores (and optionally Mirador de las Águilas)

A proper lunch break

Chorrillo del Salto waterfall

Time for a café/beer reward

You still make your bus without sprinting

Perfect day itinerary: timeline

Use this as a template. Adjust based on your bus arrival/return times and the season’s daylight.

10:30–11:00 — Arrive in El Chaltén and do “logistics mode”

Use the bus ride to buy your park ticket (or confirm it’s ready)

Drop bags at your accommodation (if staying) or use luggage storage

Bathroom break, fill water, buy last-minute snacks

11:00–13:00 — Mirador de los Cóndores (and Mirador de las Águilas if you’re feeling it)

This is the best first move on a day trip because:

it’s close to town

you get panoramic views fast

you learn what the wind is doing today

you start the day with a “wow” instead of waiting hours for it

Mirador de los Cóndores is the classic viewpoint over town and valley. If you’re feeling good and the weather is stable, continue to Mirador de las Águilas for more wide-open scenery.

Our take: Do Cóndores no matter what. Decide on Águilas at the junction based on wind and legs. “Optional” means optional.

13:00–14:00 — Lunch break (don’t skip this)

Eat now. Not later. Later is how you turn into a snack goblin halfway to a waterfall.

Easy lunch options:

Pack a lunch and eat at a viewpoint or in town

Grab a quick café meal

If you’re in a rush, do a bakery run and accept your fate happily

14:00–16:30 — Chorrillo del Salto waterfall (easy, pretty, satisfying)

Chorrillo del Salto is the perfect “afternoon hike”:

short and foresty

steady and low drama

ends at a legit waterfall

If your legs are tired or you’re with family, this is the move that still feels like you did El Chaltén.

16:30–18:30 — The reward phase (coffee + pastry or beer + comfort food)

This is where the day becomes memorable.

After logging serious kilometers on El Chaltén’s trails, settling into a taproom for a well-earned beer feels almost ceremonial. Dark and golden pints like these are a favorite post-hike ritual in town, offering a warm, relaxed space to rest tired legs, replay the day’s views, and toast surviving Patagonia’s famously unpredictable weather.

Pick your vibe:

Café + waffles/alfajor energy

Craft beer + burger energy

Slow dinner if your return bus is late

Our personal rule: If we climbed anything, we are owed something. Preferably with melted cheese.

18:30–20:40 — Return to El Calafate (or sunset stroll if you’re staying)

If you’re day-tripping, you’ll likely be on an evening bus back to El Calafate. If you’re staying overnight, this is your golden-hour stroll time—wander, take photos, and enjoy the fact you’re not leaving.

Mirador de las Águilas is a natural add-on to Mirador de los Cóndores and a smart upgrade for visitors with a bit of extra energy on a one-day El Chaltén trip. The short climb rewards you with sweeping views over open valleys and river flats, offering a quieter, less crowded perspective that still feels expansive and distinctly Patagonian.

How to upgrade your day (without upgrading your suffering)

Maybe you have more time than the average day-tripper. Maybe you slept in town. Maybe you’re fit, stubborn, and fuelled by a suspicious amount of optimism. Here are the best “upgrades” to the day, in order of sanity.

Upgrade 1: Add Mirador de las Águilas (if the wind is behaving)

If you do Cóndores and feel great, keep going to Águilas. The views open up more, and it’s a solid way to feel like you went “beyond the basic.”

Upgrade 2: Add Laguna Capri as a half-day Fitz Roy taste

If you want a Fitz Roy-flavored day without committing to the full Laguna de los Tres boss fight, Laguna Capri is the sweet spot. It’s one of the best “reward-to-effort” hikes in town.

A realistic way to do it in one day:

Start early (ideally sleeping in El Chaltén)

Do Laguna Capri as your main hike

Add Cóndores late afternoon or as a sunrise/arrival warm-up

Upgrade 3: Choose one big hike (Fitz Roy or Torre) and make everything else secondary

If you want the iconic hike experience, do it. Just treat it like your whole day, not something you squeeze between coffees.

Below are two “big hike” one-day itineraries designed to be practical.

This simple wooden sign marks the decision point on the Laguna de los Tres hike—one that matters even more if you’re attempting it as a day trip. Once you commit to this route in El Chaltén, the distance, elevation gain, and final steep climb leave very little wiggle room, making weather, pace, and turnaround timing absolutely critical.

Big Hike Option A: Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy) in one day

This is the headline act. It’s also the one that humbles people who thought they were “casual hikers.”

Who this is for

You’re reasonably fit

You have a full day in El Chaltén (sleeping in town helps a lot)

You’re okay with a long day on trail

You’re willing to turn around if weather turns

The one-day plan (sleeping in town)

06:30–07:30: Big breakfast + pack lunch

07:30–08:00: Start hiking early (beat crowds and heat)

10:00–10:30: Laguna Capri area (optional break)

Midday: Push up-valley, steady pace, snack every hour

Early afternoon: Final steep section (“the gut-check”)

14:00–15:30: Enjoy the viewpoint (if visibility is good)

15:30–19:00: Hike back, more careful on the descent

19:30+: Dinner like you just won something

Our own “won something” dinner ended up being a tiny, cozy place near the bus terminal called Senderos (it felt like a boutique-guesthouse dining room—only a handful of tables). I went for a blue cheese risotto situation, Audrey got lentejas, we split wine, and then did the most El Chaltén thing possible: waddled back and passed out early… and slept like champions.

The “gut-check” reality

The last steep section is where people negotiate with themselves. Go slow, take small breaks, and don’t let faster hikers bully your pace. You’ll get there when you get there.

For us, the “gut-check” had a very specific personality: kilometer nine turned into a bottleneck because everyone was tired and the trail got steep, rocky, and extra unforgiving. What kept Audrey and I moving was the steady stream of hikers coming down saying, “keep going, it’s worth it.” Then we finally reached the top, got hit with wind beyond belief, hid behind a rock, and devoured the very sad remains of our lunch (a granola bar and some candy) like we’d never eat again.

Foodie tip: Pack something that feels like a treat. This is not the moment for dry crackers. Bring chocolate. Bring a sandwich you actually respect.

Laguna Torre is one of the most rewarding one-day hike options in El Chaltén, combining long, scenic valley walking with dramatic views of glaciers and granite spires. This route delivers a true Patagonian experience without the punishing final climb of Laguna de los Tres, making it a smart choice for travelers with limited time and good weather.

Big Hike Option B: Laguna Torre in one day

Laguna Torre is often called the “more comfortable” big day. It’s still a long hike, but the elevation gain is more forgiving and the trail is generally straightforward.

Who this is for

You want big scenery with slightly less suffering

You’re day-tripping but have a long daylight window and an early start

You like glacier vibes and moody mountain drama

The one-day plan (sleeping in town)

07:30: Breakfast + pack lunch

08:00: Start hiking

11:30–12:30: Arrive at the lagoon area (depending on pace)

12:30–13:30: Lunch with views (wind permitting)

13:30–17:00: Hike back

18:00+: Reward phase (beer + hot food)

The moody-day truth

Laguna Torre is still beautiful in bad weather, but the “Cerro Torre reveal” depends on visibility. If clouds are glued to the mountains, you might finish the hike thinking, “So… it’s a very nice… and oh so grey.”

That’s still a good day. Just don’t let a moody sky convince you it wasn’t worth it.

Hiking up to Mirador de los Cóndores is one of the easiest ways to earn big views in El Chaltén without committing to a full-day trek. The well-marked trail winds through low Patagonian shrubs and rolling terrain before opening up to panoramic views over town, making it an ideal short hike for day-trippers and first-time visitors.

If you only have one day and you want the “iconic” feel, here’s the best compromise

If you’re day-tripping from El Calafate and you want one bigger hike without rolling the dice too hard, choose Laguna Torre over Laguna de los Tres. The timing is generally more forgiving, and you’ll still get that “I hiked in Patagonia” satisfaction.

Then add Mirador de los Cóndores either:

the afternoon before (if you arrive the day before), or

as a quick sunset hit if you’re staying overnight.

The “turnaround time” rule (the simplest safety hack)

A lot of people get into trouble because they think the hike ends when they reach the destination. It ends when they get back to town with daylight and energy left.

Use this formula:

Decide your latest safe return time (bus departure or sunset minus buffer)

Halve your available time for the outbound journey

Turn around when you hit that time, even if you’re “almost there”

Example:If you must be back in town by 18:00, and you start hiking at 10:00, you have 8 hours total.Your outbound budget is 4 hours. If you haven’t reached your target by 14:00, turn around.

Is it annoying? Yes.Is it better than missing your bus or hiking in the dark with a pastry as your only survival tool? Also, yes.

Patagonicus is one of El Chaltén’s classic post-hike food stops, and this cozy interior captures exactly why. After a long day on the trails, we waited patiently for pizza while swapping trail stories, warming up indoors, and watching other hikers roll in looking just as tired and happy. It’s the kind of place where good food feels earned and time slows down.

🥾 Plan B Adventures: Tours & Easy Day Trips from El Chaltén

Even hardcore hikers end up with a “Plan B” day in Patagonia. When the wind is feral, legs are toast, or you just want someone else to handle the logistics, these Viator options are easy wins.

👉 Browse El Chaltén tours (plus nearby options) on Viator

OptionBest forBook it🚌 El Chaltén “Complete Experience” day tour (from El Calafate)A low-effort way to “see El Chaltén” without committing to a big hikeEl Chaltén Complete Experience Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)🧊 Perito Moreno Glacier full-day + optional boat safariClassic Patagonia bucket-list day that doesn’t require hardcore hikingPerito Moreno Glacier Full-Day Tour with Optional Boat Safari (Viator)🚤 “Todo Glaciares” navigation (Upsala + Spegazzini)Big-glacier scenery with max comfort (aka: let the boat do the work)Glaciares Gourmet Navigation: Upsala & Spegazzini Navigation (Viator)🗿 El Calafate city tour + Walichu CavesA cultural/history reset day (great when the weather is moody)El Calafate City Tour + Walichu Caves (Viator)🚙 Nativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (4x4 style)Off-road adventure + viewpoints when you want something different than trailsNativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (Viator)🇨🇱 Torres del Paine full-day trip (from El Calafate)Maximum “Patagonia wow” in one day (long day, huge payoff)Torres del Paine Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)

Food strategy for a one-day El Chaltén mission

El Chaltén is a hiking town, which means:

you will burn more calories than you expect

you’ll suddenly care deeply about sandwiches

and you’ll become strangely emotional about warm soup

Breakfast: go big

A one-day itinerary lives or dies by breakfast. Aim for:

eggs + bread + fruit

oatmeal + nuts

or anything that makes you feel stable and powerful

Our place served breakfast at 6:30am and we treated that like the starting gun. Even if daylight goes late, the early start is what makes the whole day feel calmer—especially if you’re chasing a big objective and want a buffer for weather and photo stops.

Lunch: pack it

Even if you plan to eat in town, pack something. Trails don’t care about your lunch reservation.

Our typical “trail lunchbox” looked like: a rice-and-veg salad (plus cheese/egg), an apple, a peanut bar, mini muffins, and a few candies for morale. Very glamorous. Very effective. And if something starts leaking in your bag, congratulations—you’re eating lunch at kilometer two whether you planned to or not.

Easy packable lunches:

sandwiches (classic for a reason)

empanadas

wrap + cheese + salami (trail charcuterie)

leftover pizza (don’t judge; it works)

Post-hike reward: choose your “victory meal”

After a hike, we become very persuasive about dessert. You should too.

Case study: after one of our ~20 km days, we inhaled burgers, walked back to the hotel, and were basically horizontal by 8:30pm. Part legs, part food coma—but that’s the honest rhythm of El Chaltén if you hike big and eat properly.

Reward categories:

“Comfort food” (burgers, fries, milanesa, pasta)

“Café recovery” (waffles, cakes, hot chocolate)

“Beer therapy” (brewpub + anything salty)

There’s a special kind of joy when pizza finally arrives after a long hiking day in El Chaltén, and Patagonicus delivers exactly that moment. This generously topped pie—simple, filling, and easy to share—felt like the perfect post-hike reward, especially paired with a cold drink and the collective relief of finally sitting down after hours on the trail.

Options to Consider:

PAISA High Mountain Coffee — specialty coffee (Colombian-style) plus cakes/pastries for a strong pre-hike start.

La Nieve Café y Viandas — coffee + simple “viandas” (grab-and-go food) when you need something fast and practical.

Panadería & Cafetería Lo de Haydée — classic bakery for facturas, sandwiches, and easy trail snacks.

La Waflería — big sweet and savory waffles (a “before/after the mountain” institution).

Cúrcuma Cocina — vegan + gluten-free comfort food (surprisingly filling), plus healthy options.

B&B Burger Joint — burgers + fries when you want maximum calories with minimum decision-making.

Laborum Pizzería — excellent artisanal pizza (often limited batches), great for an easy take-away dinner.

La Cervecería Chaltén — local craft beer + pub food; classic “we survived the wind” post-hike hangout.

Bourbon Smokehouse — American-style comfort food, cocktails, and local beers (happy-hour energy).

Patagonicus — hearty sit-down spot (pizza/soups/Argentine-ish classics) that works well for groups.

Hostería Senderos Restó Bar — Patagonian-leaning menu + wine bar vibe; they can also prep a packed “vianda” if you ask.

Heladería Domo Blanco — artisan ice cream for the end-of-day victory lap.

The perfect one-day packing checklist

Print this in your brain:

Park ticket purchased (or ready to buy with data)

Offline map downloaded

Windproof layer

Warm layer

Rain protection

1.5–2L water

Snacks (at least 3)

Lunch

Sunscreen + sunglasses

Hat/buff + gloves (shoulder season)

Headlamp (big hikes / shorter daylight)

Power bank

Cash + card

Blister care

We’re extra intense about offline maps here because we learned it the slightly annoying way: our data didn’t reliably work, the Wi-Fi liked to disappear, and “I’ll just load it at the trailhead” is exactly the kind of optimism Patagonia punishes. The central plaza Wi-Fi bailed us out more than once.

Mistakes people make on a one-day visit (so you don’t have to)

Trying to do Fitz Roy and Torre in one day

This is the classic “we’re built different” mistake. Unless you’re trail-running and hate joy, pick one.

Starting too late

Late starts turn gorgeous hikes into stressful marches. If you’re day-tripping, your best lever is the earliest transport you can reasonably do.

Underestimating wind

Wind doesn’t just make you cold. It slows you down, drains energy, and can turn exposed viewpoints into a comedy sketch.

Not packing lunch

You will not regret carrying an extra sandwich. You will regret not carrying one.

Ignoring the return trip

Downhill is where tired legs get sloppy. Save energy and time for the return. It counts.

Micro-itinerary builder: build your own perfect day (with guardrails)

Here’s a simple “plug and play” way to design your one-day plan.

Step 1: Choose your main hike (pick ONE)

Mirador stack + waterfall (safest)

Laguna Capri (half-day classic)

Laguna Torre (big day)

Laguna de los Tres (biggest day)

Step 2: Add one “bonus bite”

Choose one:

Mirador de los Cóndores (if not already)

Mirador de las Águilas (if wind is calm)

A slow café hour (yes, this counts)

Step 3: Add the reward block

Minimum 60–90 minutes. You earned it.

Step 4: Lock your return time

Bus departure or sunset minus buffer.Then work backwards and stop pretending time is fake.

Three complete one-day itineraries (pick your vibe)

Itinerary 1: The “Perfect Day Trip” (most visitors)

Best for: day-trippers, families, casual hikers, anyone who wants a full-feeling day

Morning arrival

Mirador de los Cóndores (+ Águilas optional)

Lunch

Chorrillo del Salto

Café/beer + dinner

Evening departure

Itinerary 2: The “I want a big hike” day

Best for: fit travelers sleeping in town

Option A (Fitz Roy): Laguna de los TresOption B (Torre): Laguna Torre

Early breakfast

Start hiking early

Long lunch break in the scenic zone

Return with daylight

Victory meal

Itinerary 3: The “windy day, still awesome” plan

Best for: high gusts, low visibility, tired legs, shoulder season

Mirador de los Cóndores (check the scene)

Coffee + bakery crawl

Short forest walk or waterfall

Early dinner

Sleep like a champion

🏨 Where to Stay in El Chaltén (Our Top Hotel Picks)

⭐ Quick Booking Box: El Chaltén Hotels (Compare Rates)

PickBest forVibeBooking link🏆 Top PickFirst-timers who want an easy, reliable baseComfortable “no-regrets” stayCompare top stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com💎 Boutique / Treat-YourselfCouples, hikers celebrating a big trek, views + comfort seekersCozy-luxe Patagonia energyBrowse boutique stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com🏘️ Mid-range (great value)Most travelers who want comfort without splurgingWarm, practical, walkableFind mid-range El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com💰 BudgetRoad-trippers + hikers who only need a clean baseSimple, wallet-friendlySee budget stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com

🔎 Want to browse all options instead?👉 Compare all El Chaltén stays on Booking.com

Where to stay (if you can add one night)

If you can turn “one day” into “one day plus one night,” your options expand massively. Even a single overnight lets you:

start at dawn

pick better weather windows

avoid the bus-time crunch

Broad categories:

Budget: hostels + simple rooms (book early in summer)

Mid-range: apartments/posadas for comfort and kitchen access

Treat-yourself: boutique stays with views (and excellent breakfast)

If you only do one upgrade to your trip, make it: sleep in El Chaltén.

Where to stay (if you can add one night): 8 solid options (budget → splurge)

Rancho Grande Hostel & Restaurante (budget / social) — big, classic backpacker base with dorms + privates, 24-hour reception, on-site restaurant, and traveler-friendly facilities (good if you want a lively vibe). 

Patagonia Travelers’ Hostel (budget / central) — right in town and close to the trail starts, with a shared kitchen and free luggage storage (handy if you’re hiking after checkout). 

Familia de Campo Hostel (budget / cozy + practical) — warm, homey hostel feel with two well-equipped shared kitchens, a bright lounge with views, and a garden/BBQ setup.

Hotel Poincenot (mid-range / comfort + location) — comfy rooms in a very convenient spot, with a full breakfast and a bar offering gourmet sandwiches + a strong wine selection. 

Chaltén Suites Hotel (mid-range / hotel comforts) — solid mountain-town hotel with a house buffet breakfast and an on-site restaurant/bar setup (nice for a straightforward, no-fuss stay). 

Hotel Lunajuim (mid-range / friendly + trail-focused) — comfortable, well-located option with breakfast buffet plus restaurant/café/bar energy (and generally “hiker-friendly” service).

Destino Sur Hotel & Spa de Montaña (high / post-hike recovery) — a splurgey pick with a proper spa setup (sauna/jacuzzi/massages) and an indoor heated pool—excellent after big trail days. 

Los Cerros del Chaltén Boutique Hotel (high / views + amenities) — upscale boutique stay known for panoramic mountain views from common areas, plus hotel-style amenities that make resting feel like part of the itinerary. 

Final word: the best one-day plan is the one you can enjoy

El Chaltén is one of those places that rewards ambition—but it rewards smart ambition even more.

If the weather is perfect and you have the time, go big. Chase that iconic viewpoint. Earn the bragging rights.

If the wind is feral or you’re day-tripping on a tight schedule, don’t force a “legendary” hike just to say you did it. Stack the short hits. Eat well. Take in the views. Be present. Your photos will still look like Patagonia.

And your knees will thank you.

✨ Ready to lock in your El Chaltén plan?

🥾 Browse El Chaltén tours on Viator 

🏨 Find El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com 

🚗 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars 

🚌 Book El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud 

Frequently Asked Questions About Spending One Day in El Chaltén, Argentina (and Making It Count)

Is one day in El Chaltén actually worth it?

Yes. It won’t feel like “enough,” but it can absolutely feel like a proper Patagonia experience if you plan around one main objective and don’t try to cram every hike into one daylight window.

What’s the best hike if I only have one day?

For most people: Mirador de los Cóndores + Chorrillo del Salto (the short-hike stack). If you want one big hike and you’re sleeping in town, Laguna Torre is the best “big payoff without maximum suffering” option.

Can I do Laguna de los Tres as a day trip from El Calafate?

It’s possible but it's awfully tight and risky. You’ll need an early start, long daylight (summer), good weather, and a fast pace. Most visitors enjoy their day more by staying overnight or choosing a shorter plan.

Which is easier: Laguna Torre or Laguna de los Tres?

Laguna Torre is generally easier in terms of elevation gain and feels more “steady.” Laguna de los Tres has that final steep section that turns into a personal negotiation with gravity.

Do I need to pay an entrance fee to hike in El Chaltén?

For the main Northern Zone trailheads in Los Glaciares National Park, yes—there’s a fee and tickets are typically handled online. Check the current rules before you go.

Do I need hiking boots?

For the short hikes, sturdy sneakers can work in good conditions. For the big hikes, boots or trail runners with good grip are a smart move, especially if there’s mud, ice, or loose rock.

How windy does it get in El Chaltén?

Very. Wind can be calm one hour and aggressive the next. Bring a windproof layer and treat gust forecasts like real information, not background noise.

What should I pack for a one-day hike?

Wind layer, warm layer, rain protection, water, snacks, lunch, sunscreen, sunglasses, and an offline map. If you’re doing a big hike or shoulder season, add a headlamp and gloves.

Is it easy to navigate the trails without a guide?

Yes for most classic routes. Trails are generally well marked. Still, download offline maps and pay attention to weather and your turnaround time.

What’s the best time of year for a one-day visit?

Late spring through early fall is the classic season. Summer gives you long daylight but also crowds and wind. Shoulder seasons can be quieter but colder and more variable.

Are the restaurants busy?

In peak season, yes—especially in the evening. Having a backup plan (or eating early) keeps your post-hike reward from turning into a line-standing contest.

Can I do Mirador de los Cóndores with kids?

Usually yes. It’s a short hike and a great “first day” option, but wind can make it feel harder. Go slow, bring layers, and make it a snack-based adventure.

Is Chorrillo del Salto worth it?

Absolutely. It’s easy, pretty, and feels like a “real hike” without requiring a full-day commitment—perfect for a one-day itinerary.

What if the weather is bad?

Lean into the short hikes, viewpoints, cafés, and comfort food. A moody day can still be gorgeous. The key is choosing a plan that keeps you safe and lets you enjoy the atmosphere instead of fighting it.

#### 5 Best Things to do in Ireland for Outdoor Lovers
Towering castles, medieval cities, friendly people, and cozy pubs are all medals on the shelf for Ireland and they continue to drive people to this incredibly diverse island nation year after year. But perhaps Ireland's best feature is the vast number of outdoor activities a traveler can enjoy here.

The country is blessed with rolling emerald hills, glistening creeks and roaring waterfalls. The dramatic coastlines forms fortified cliff barriers that protect the fragile interior ecosystem from the thrashing waves of the Atlantic Ocean.

source: Vagabrothers on YouTube

If you're looking for a place to get out and explore nature and the outdoors, then look no further than Ireland.

In this post, I'm going to share with you the 5 best things to do in Ireland for those who love the outdoors. Let's get started.

Hiking in Ireland, one of the best activities for outdoor lovers.

1. Hiking

There's no question that the hiking in Ireland is some of the best in the world. The landscape is littered with formidable mountains that taunt climbers, while stunning shoreline paths drain camera batteries at an alarming rate.



You don't have to go far to find amazing hiking and trekking opportunities in Ireland either. Just a couple of hours outside of Dublin you'll find the popular Coumshingaun Lake Loop in County Waterford - a 5-hour hike with beautiful views of the lake all the way around (if the clouds don't roll in).

If you're looking to summit something while you're in the country, then Croagh Patrick in County Mayo might be the climb for you.

Around 25,000 pilgrims trek to the summit every year on the last Sunday in the month of July (Reek Sunday). This means that the hiking trail is well-worn and sign-posted so you really can't get lost.

Once at the top you can enjoy breathtaking views of Clew Bay and the surrounding countryside.

And these are just 2 of the many hikes you can find in Ireland.

Fly fishing is one of the best things to do in Ireland if you love the outdoors.

2. Fly Fishing

If you're into fly fishing, then for sure Ireland should be on your fly angling bucket list. Ireland has some of the best fly fishing in the world. With massive 20 lb salmon running up its rivers and the infamously fast-growing Farox Trout lurking in the depths of the Great Western Lakes.

Bring along your best 3-weight fly rods for the smaller creeks and rivers where you can land beautiful brown trout that range from 2 - 4 lbs.



You'll want to bring a heavier set-up for the Western Lakes and for Salmon-rich fisheries like The River Moi and The River Boyne, where you can find yourself hooking into 20-25 lb fish if you're lucky.

For a bit of saltwater fly fishing, head to the Dingle Peninsula, where you can cast your line from the beaches and tie into some beautiful Pollack, sea bass and wrasse.

The great thing about fly fishing in Ireland is that it can be done for a pretty decent price. A fishing license will cost around €25 and that should cover you for most types of fishing around the country. Just be mindful of local laws, regulations, and etiquette while you're on the rivers or lakes.

Some places are in private fisheries though, and if you plan to get into those pools, you'll have to pay a pretty penny, with permits costing as much as €20 per day.

Luckily, while Ireland isn't necessarily one of the cheapest countries in the world to travel, you can actually get by on very little if you rent a car (from €12 / day) and plan to camp the entire time. Which brings me to my next point...

From wild camping to eco-lodges, there are lots of places to enjoy the outdoors in Ireland.

3. Camping

Every outdoor lover enjoys a good campsite, and Ireland has plenty to suit all types of camping. From campervan parks and RV parks, to wild camping and eco-lodges with campgrounds on them, you can find a beautiful place to pitch your tent or park your camper throughout the country.

Campgrounds can cost as little as €8 per night and have all of the amenities you could ask for. There are plenty of books and guides to the best campsites around Ireland, so you shouldn't have a problem getting to them.

The best way to visit Ireland on a camping trip is to rent your own vehicle and drive around the country with a tent and some sleeping gear in the trunk. Luckily, car rentals are extremely affordable in Ireland, costing as little as €12 per day for longer rental periods.

While there are no designated "free" camping spots in Ireland, the country is large and wild enough that you can find free places to camp if you're on a multiday hike.

If there are people or houses in view, always go and ask if it's okay if you pitch a tent as you might unknowingly be on someone else's land. If there's nobody around to ask, you should be able to camp there, but just be sure to follow the "Leave No Trace" rules.

Clean up your garbage, be respectful, and care for the environment around you.

Biking can be a great way to explore the countryside in Ireland.

4. Biking

Just as there are plenty of hiking trails around Ireland, so too are there amazing cycling paths. Whether you want to go on a quick day ride, or a multi-day cycling adventure, you can do it all in Ireland.

One of the best areas in the country for cycling is around Killarney National Park. There are plenty of tour operators there that can take you out for a day, and you can also head out on the well-marked trails yourself.

See beautiful Lough Leane, elegant Muckross House and Gardens, mystical Muckross Abbey, and the multi-tiered Torc Waterfall. You'll get plenty of opportunities to take photos of the amazing scenery.

Pedal along paved and dirt paths past Muckross Abbey, Lough Leane, and the Torc Waterfall to name a few.

Horse trekking is another fun way to enjoy nature and the outdoors in Ireland.

5. Horseback Riding

With 50 thoroughbred horses per 10,000 people in Ireland, they have one of the highest race-horse to human ratios of any country on Earth. But that doesn't mean that you have to be a jockey to have a great time on horseback in the country.

There are a lot of beautiful horse trekking paths and day rides you can do around the country, particularly around Dingle and Sligo. Ride along beaches, through forests and past grazing sheep in the farmlands.

You won't have a hard time finding a horseback tour operator in these places and you can usually book a trip the same-day, particularly in the off-season.

When To Visit Ireland For The Outdoors

Ireland is a place with very unpredictable weather, so if your trip is based on being outside, then you should consider the best time of year to visit.

For hiking, fly fishing, horseback riding, camping, and cycling, the best time to visit Ireland is between June and September. The days are longer and the rains are less oppressive (but you can still get dumped on).

The only problem with this time of year is the dense crowds that descend on Ireland in these peak-season months.

If you really want to avoid the crowds, then you can probably get away with visiting Ireland in the shoulder season, from mid-April through May, or in late September through October.

During these types, you'll almost certainly be wetter and colder, but on those dry sunny days (which still occur in these months) you'll get your photos without 100 other people in the background.

Planning an Outdoor-Focused Trip to Ireland

Choosing Your Region (or Two)

RegionBest ForLandscape VibeGreat BasesIdeal StayKerry & DingleHiking, biking, coastal drivesBig peninsulas, cliffs, beachesKillarney, Dingle3–5 nightsGalway & ConnemaraWild hikes, bogs, lakes, islandsWindy, rugged, moodyGalway, Clifden3–4 nightsSligo & DonegalSurf, mountains, quiet roadsDramatic headlands, empty beachesSligo town, Donegal town3–5 nightsWicklow & EastEasy hikes close to DublinForests, valleys, rounded hillsDublin, Glendalough area2–3 nightsSouth Coast (Cork)Coastal walks, whale watchingCoves, colorful towns, gentler hillsKinsale, Bantry, Skibbereen3–4 nights

You don’t need to cram all of these into one trip. In fact, you’ll have a much better time if you pick two regions and do them properly rather than trying to race around the whole island.

If it’s your first visit and you love the outdoors, a really solid combo is:

Wicklow + Kerry/Dingle, or

Galway/Connemara + Sligo/Donegal

Dublin can just be your gateway on either end for a night or two.

7-Day Outdoor Ireland Itinerary (Minimal City Time)

If you want to spend most of your time outside, but still fly in and out of Dublin, here’s a realistic one-week loop that keeps you mostly on trails and coastal roads rather than inside museums.

Day 1 – Dublin to Wicklow

Pick up a rental car at the airport and head straight for Wicklow.

Stop in Glendalough for your first taste of valley-and-lakes hiking.

Choose a shorter marked loop if you’re jetlagged or a longer circuit if you’re buzzing with energy.

Stay in or near Glendalough, Laragh, or a country B&B.

Outdoor focus: Forest trails, monastic ruins, peaceful lakes.

Day 2 – Wicklow to Killarney

Early start and long drive down to Killarney.

Stretch your legs in Killarney National Park with an easy walk to Torc Waterfall or along the lakes.

If you’ve still got some gas in the tank, rent a bike in town to spin out your legs on the quiet roads around the park.

Outdoor focus: Warm-up hikes, lake views, first glimpse of the big mountains.

Day 3 – Killarney National Park & Gap of Dunloe

Dedicate this one to mountains and valleys.

Hike or cycle into the Gap of Dunloe, a glacial mountain pass with photogenic views every few steps.

Mix and match: walk one way, take a boat trip on the lakes, or hop in a jaunting car if you’re hiking with someone who’s less keen on big distances.

End the day back in Killarney with a hearty meal and, if you’re lucky, live trad music.

Outdoor focus: Valley hiking, peaceful roads, classic Irish scenery.

Day 4 – Ring of Kerry or Dingle Peninsula

You don’t really need both on a short trip. Pick your style.

Ring of Kerry: A big, classic loop with mountain passes, coastal viewpoints, and villages. Great if you love panoramic driving days with shorter stops and quick walks to viewpoints.

Dingle Peninsula: More compact, more intimate, fantastic coastal walking opportunities (like sections of the Dingle Way). Great if you want to park up and walk along cliffs, beaches, and headlands.

Either way, pack snacks, rain gear, and your camera. You’ll be pulling over constantly.

Outdoor focus: Short hikes, viewpoints, beaches, rugged coastal roads.

Day 5 – Killarney to Galway via the Cliffs and Burren

This is a longer travel day, but you can break it up well.

Drive north toward the Cliffs of Moher.

If the weather is cooperating, walk a short section of the cliff path instead of only hitting the main viewing platform.

Continue through the Burren, where the landscape turns into cracked limestone, wildflowers, and low hills. There are short waymarked walks in the Burren if you want to stretch your legs again.

Roll into Galway in the evening and wander through the old streets.

Outdoor focus: Iconic cliffs, unusual limestone landscapes, sea air.

Day 6 – Connemara: Lakes, Bogs, and Mountains

Give Connemara at least one full day.

Drive the loop through Maam Cross, Leenane, and Clifden.

Drop into Connemara National Park for a climb up Diamond Hill (a half-day hike with big views that doesn’t require mountaineering skills).

If the weather is grim, you can still do shorter low-level walks and scenic drives around the fjord and lakes.

Outdoor focus: Accessible mountain hiking, wild valleys, ever-changing light.

Day 7 – Back to Dublin

If your flight is late or the next day, sneak in a quick beach walk or promenade stroll around Salthill in Galway in the morning.

Make your way back to Dublin, aiming for a daylight drive if possible.

Drop off the car and end your trip with a last pint and a plate of something comforting.

Not every day will go perfectly to plan—this is Ireland after all—but this kind of structure keeps you outside plenty, without you needing to change beds every single night.

Getting Around: Car, Public Transport, or Tours?

You can absolutely explore parts of Ireland without driving, but for an outdoor-focused trip, a car is close to a superpower.

Quick Comparison

OptionBest ForProsConsRental CarHikers, campers, photographersTotal flexibility, trailheadsNarrow roads, extra cost, parkingPublic TransportPoint-to-point, linear routesNo driving stress, eco-friendlierLimited in rural areas, fixed timesDay ToursNon-drivers, short tripsEasy, no planning requiredCrowds, rushed stops, less flexibility

If you’re comfortable driving on the left and handling small roads, renting a car unlocks trailheads, quiet coves, and campsites that buses will never touch.

If driving feels like a nightmare, base yourself in a well-connected town (like Killarney, Galway, or Dublin) and:

Use trains/buses for longer jumps between main hubs

Join local day tours to reach national parks and scenic routes

You’ll see less, but you’ll also have far fewer “white-knuckle” moments with stone walls and tractors.

Budgeting for an Outdoor Trip in Ireland

Outdoor gear and walking are free once you own the kit, but Ireland itself isn’t particularly cheap. The good news: focusing on hikes, wild beaches, and countryside walks keeps your daily spend lower than a city-and-museum-heavy trip.

Very Rough Daily Costs (Per Person, Sharing)

StyleAccommodationFood & DrinkTransportActivitiesApprox Total (EUR)BudgetCamping/hostelsSelf-cater + pubsShared car/busMostly free outdoors60–90Mid-RangeB&Bs/guesthousesMix of pub meals & cafésRental car + fuelGuided day tour here/there100–150Splash-OutBoutique hotels/lodgesRestaurant meals, drinksPrivate car, taxisMore paid activities180+

You can shave costs by:

Camping or using hostels in the more outdoorsy areas

Self-catering some meals, especially breakfasts and picnic lunches

Filling your days with free hikes instead of daily paid attractions

You’ll spend a surprising amount on:

Pints and coffees (it adds up fast)

Fuel if you’re doing big loops

Occasional “treat” experiences like boat trips or guided mountain days

Weather, Gear, and Staying Comfortable Outside

Ireland has a reputation for giving you “four seasons in one day.” That’s not just a cute marketing phrase. You genuinely can go from sun to mist to sideways rain in an afternoon.

Clothing and Footwear

Think in layers rather than big heavy coats.

Base layer: Something that wicks, not cotton

Mid-layer: Fleece or light insulated jacket

Outer layer: Proper waterproof shell (not a fashion raincoat)

Bottoms: Quick-drying hiking trousers or leggings

Footwear: Sturdy hiking boots or trail shoes with decent grip

You don’t need full alpine gear, but you do want shoes that can handle mud, rock, and slippery grass. Trails are often boggy, and once your feet are soaked, morale drops quickly.

Outdoor Ireland Questions Answered: Hiking, Weather, Costs & Planning Tips

What’s the best time of year to visit Ireland if I want to be outside most days?

It depends. For long daylight and your best odds of drier days, aim for roughly June to early September, when evenings stretch late, temperatures are mild, and trail conditions are usually friendliest. If you prefer fewer crowds and don’t mind more rain and cooler temps, the shoulder seasons of late April–May and late September–October can be fantastic for hiking, biking, and road trips, as long as you pack proper waterproofs and accept that some days will be a write-off weather-wise.

How many days do I need in Ireland for a proper outdoor-focused trip?

Honestly, I’d say a week is the bare minimum if you want to see more than one region without rushing, and 10–14 days feels like a sweet spot for hikers and nature lovers. With seven days you can realistically pair somewhere near Dublin (like Wicklow) with one big western region such as Kerry or Connemara; with longer, you can slow down, repeat favourite trails in different light, and sprinkle in rest days so you’re not just driving from view to view.

Do I need to rent a car to reach the best hikes and outdoor spots in Ireland?

Yes. If your main goal is trailheads, remote valleys, and quieter coastlines, having a car makes life dramatically easier and opens up areas that buses simply don’t reach. You can still piece together a good trip using trains, buses, and the occasional day tour, but a rental car gives you freedom to chase weather windows, start hikes early, and linger at viewpoints without worrying about timetables.

Is driving in rural Ireland stressful for first-time visitors?

A little. The combination of driving on the left, narrow hedged roads, stone walls, and tractors can feel intense on the first day or two, but most people adjust far quicker than they expect. Go slow, avoid over-ambitious daily distances, let locals overtake when it’s safe, and stick to daylight driving at the start, and you’ll likely discover that Irish roads are part of the adventure rather than a nightmare.

How fit do I need to be to enjoy hiking and biking in Ireland?

Not really. You don’t need to be ultra-fit to enjoy Ireland’s outdoors because there are graded options almost everywhere, from gentle lake circuits and forest loops to full-day mountain hikes. If you can comfortably walk for a few hours at home and manage some hills, you’ll be fine on many classic routes; just be honest about your fitness, check estimated times, and choose shorter, lower-level trails on days with rough weather or low energy.

Is it safe to hike and camp in Ireland on my own?

Generally, yes. Ireland is widely considered one of the safer countries for solo travel, and most outdoor areas feel relaxed and welcoming, especially if you stick to well-used paths and established campsites. That said, treat the landscape with respect: check the forecast, let someone know your route and rough return time, bring a charged phone and basic navigation, and remember that the biggest risks are usually weather, slippery ground, and poor visibility, not crime.

Can I wild camp in Ireland or do I always need to stay in official campsites?

It’s complicated. There isn’t a blanket legal right to wild camp in Ireland, so in theory you should always have the landowner’s permission, but low-impact, discreet overnight camping is often tolerated in remote upland areas. As a rule of thumb, pitch late and leave early, stay well away from houses, farms, and roads, avoid camping in sand dunes or fragile ecosystems, and always follow strict leave-no-trace principles so that future hikers are still welcome.

What should I pack for an outdoor trip to Ireland with unpredictable weather?

Absolutely, think layers. A breathable base layer, a warm mid-layer, and a proper waterproof shell are essential, along with quick-drying trousers, a hat, gloves, and sturdy hiking boots or trail shoes with good grip for mud and wet rock. I always throw in a lightweight pack cover or dry bags for my gear, a compact umbrella for town days, and a cosy change of clothes for evenings in pubs so I’m not sitting in damp kit after a big hike.

Is Ireland a good outdoor destination for families with kids?

Yes. Ireland works brilliantly with kids because so many walks are short loop trails with plenty of natural wow moments like waterfalls, castles, cliffs, and sheep-filled fields to keep them interested. If you base yourself in places like Killarney, Dingle, or Galway, you can mix gentle hikes, beaches, boat trips, bike rentals, and pony rides with rainy-day options and family-friendly pubs where live music starts early.

How expensive is an outdoor-focused trip to Ireland compared with a city break?

Surprisingly, it can be more affordable than a museum-heavy city itinerary because most of your entertainment is free once you’ve got the gear. You’ll still feel costs in accommodation, food, fuel, and the odd guided activity, but hiking, coastal walks, and beach days don’t require tickets, and camping or using hostels in rural areas can keep your daily spend closer to a budget range than if you were eating and drinking your way through cities every day.

Do I need special permits or licenses for hiking, camping, or fishing in Ireland?

Sometimes. You generally don’t need permits for normal hiking in national parks and popular mountain areas, though certain car parks may charge and some private estates may have their own access rules. Fishing is different: many rivers and lakes require a licence or local permit, especially for salmon and trout, so it’s worth checking in advance with angling clubs or tackle shops rather than assuming your regular travel insurance covers everything.

Are the rain, wind, and midges in Ireland really as bad as people say?

Mostly, yes, but they’re manageable if you prepare your expectations. You should absolutely expect rain and wind at some point on almost every trip, even in summer, so good waterproofs and flexible plans are non-negotiable; in some western areas during warmer months, tiny biting insects (midges) can also be annoying around still water and at dusk, but a bit of insect repellent, long sleeves, and choosing breezier spots usually keeps them under control.

Where should I base myself in Ireland if I love the outdoors but still want pubs and music at night?

Luckily, Ireland specialises in small towns that offer both. Killarney is an obvious choice for easy access to mountains, lakes, and the Ring of Kerry; Dingle gives you coastal hikes and a compact, lively town; Galway is perfect if you want Connemara and the Burren by day with plenty of food and music after dark; and places like Westport or Sligo put you close to quieter mountains and surf beaches while still having a proper evening scene.

Can I still enjoy Ireland’s outdoors if I rely on public transport and guided tours?

Definitely. You’ll have a bit less freedom than someone with a rental car, but if you base yourself in well-connected hubs like Dublin, Killarney, Galway, or Cork you can use trains and buses for the long stretches and then book local day tours, shuttles, or guided hikes into national parks and scenic peninsulas. You won’t reach every remote trailhead, but you’ll still get a solid mix of cliffs, lakes, and valleys without ever having to get behind the wheel.

In Closing

If you're looking for an exhilarating outdoor adventure, then Ireland is likely one of the best places to visit.

Spend your days exploring waterfalls, fishing in rivers and riding horseback, and then wind down in the evening over a delicious pint and a hot Irish stew or a boxty in some of the oldest local pubs.

This is what Ireland is all about and as unforgiving as the weather can be, it can also be brilliant and the hospitality of the local people far outweighs the hostility of the climate and landscape. If you're going to Ireland, get ready for an adventure.

#### Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge: The Most Scenic Lunch in Fernie (Our Meal + Views)
Fernie was the kickoff to our British Columbia road trip—me (Nomadic Samuel), Audrey Bergner (That Backpacker), and our tiny boss (baby Aurelia)—freshly back in my home province after too much time staring at southern Alberta skies. And yes, Fernie immediately delivered that “ohhh right… this is why people won’t shut up about BC” feeling.

A well-earned lunch after a morning of hiking in Fernie, with Nomadic Samuel diving into the Wagyu smash burger on the Bear Bistro patio at Island Lake Lodge. This casual mountain meal came with big views, fresh alpine air, and that unmistakable “we have to come back here” feeling.

But the moment that turned this trip from “great little mountain town” to “we are absolutely coming back” happened up a rugged backroad, at the end of a cedar-valley climb, on a patio that made us say “wow” so many times we started sounding like malfunctioning robots.

Lunch at the Bear Bistro (a.k.a. Bear Lodge Bistro) at Island Lake Lodge was the highlight of our day… and honestly, one of the highlights of the trip.

https://youtu.be/RoRAhuPKiRE
Here is our BEST things to in Fernie YouTube video on Samuel & Audrey channel. For our entire Island Lake Lodge experience (including Bear Bistro) jump ahead to 12:53. 

Bear Bistro at a glance

WhatDetailsWhereIsland Lake Lodge, Fernie (up in the Cedar Valley, surrounded by peaks + old-growth forest)VibeCasual, serene, rustic lodge energy; big patio + big views SeasonSummer operations (dates vary year to year; check the calendar because closures happen) HoursTypically 11am–5pm, but operating days can vary by week (see “Before you go” below) ReservationsNone — first come, first served Pet policyNo pets on the patio (there’s “pet parking” nearby) Our orderMiso ramen + Wagyu smash burger + salted caramel ice cream sandwich + “Jos Louis” cake 

The view from the Bear Bistro patio at Island Lake Lodge is pure Fernie magic, with alpine peaks rising behind old-growth evergreens and summer flowers lining the terrace. It’s the kind of place where lunch turns into a long pause just to soak it all in.

The “earned lunch” factor

We didn’t roll in like elegant lodge people who wear linen and say things like “a spritz would be divine.”

We arrived like this: baby backpack, sweat, trail dust, and the kind of hunger that makes you briefly consider taking a bite out of your own camera strap.

That day started with the Fairy Creek Falls hike (Aurelia in the hiking backpack, Sam sweating “like a mule,” avalanche terrain signs keeping things spicy, and baby waking up perfectly in time for the waterfall like she has a built-in director’s schedule). 

Then we did the only responsible thing: Fernie Brewing Company for a “we earned this” beer (Ridgewalk Red Ale)… and learned the hard way it’s more pints + snacks than full meal. Which was fine. We called it “appetizer strategy.”

And then… Island Lake Lodge.

That drive felt like a little quest: the kind where you’re not sure if you’re headed to lunch or to audition for a rally race.

After lunch at Bear Bistro, we hit the shaded forest trails around Island Lake Lodge with Aurelia happily riding along in the backpack carrier. It was the perfect post-meal wander—quiet, green, and a reminder of how family-friendly Fernie’s hiking can be.

Getting to Bear Bistro (drive, bike, or hike)

Island Lake Lodge is up the Cedar Valley, and the Bear Bistro is up at the lodge. It’s not hard… it’s just committed.

Option 1: Drive up (most common)

After you enter the property gates, you drive up the access road approximately 8 km to the top. It’s described as rugged, with a 30 km/h max, and they recommend allowing about 20-30 minutes. 

Tip: If you’re prone to carsickness, this is a great time to practice deep breathing and positive affirmations like “the ice cream sandwich is the real deal.”

Option 2: Bike up (for the “I deserve this lunch twice” crowd)

Island Lake encourages riders to use the Lazy Lizard bike trail to reach the lodge, and there are bike racks right by the bistro entrance. 

Option 3: Hike up (the full reward mode)

From the lower parking lot, you can hop on the Rail Trail → connect to the Old Growth Trail → then hop on the Lake Trail with signage for the lodge. 

Tourism Fernie also calls out family-suitable options like the Rail Trail, Old Growth Trail, and Lake & Fir Trails. 

The entrance sign for Island Lake Lodge marks the start of the scenic drive into one of Fernie’s most iconic backcountry destinations. From here, visitors access hiking trails, spa facilities, and the Bear Bistro, making it the gateway to a memorable mountain experience.

The “check the calendar or you’ll cry” reality

This is the one detail that matters more than anything else: Island Lake Lodge has non-operational days and private function closures—and they really, truly want you to check the calendar before you drive up. 

Here’s the practical version:

The Bear Bistro page lists the bistro as open in summer Friday–Tuesday, 11am–5pm, with closures for private functions and non-operational days. 

Tourism Fernie hiking info adds that vehicle access to the lodge is typically Sunday–Tuesday, and on non-operational days/private functions the road is closed beyond the lower lot and no services are available. 

So: yes, you can often still hike from the lower lot even when services are closed… but if you drove there for ramen and a patio beer, you want an operational day.

Tip: The most Fernie sentence ever is, “We drove 30 minutes for lunch and got a great hike instead.” Don’t let it happen to you.

The spacious patio at Bear Bistro is where mountain lunches stretch a little longer than planned, with forest views, fresh air, and classic lodge architecture all around. On a sunny day in Fernie, this is the kind of place you settle into and forget about the clock.

First impressions: this place is ridiculous

We rolled up and immediately started doing the wide-eyed, pointing-at-everything routine.

“Look at the view… look at the chairs… look at the lake…”

Then the official verdict: Unbelievable place. The highlight of the day. The highlight of the trip. 

Island Lake Lodge sits in a spectacular setting—big peaks, a mountain lake, lush forests—and the approach itself runs you through ancient old-growth cedar.

And the Bear Bistro is in Bear Lodge, the historic first log building completed at Island Lake—home to that grand river-rock fireplace and the bistro itself.

It has that “cozy-but-not-cutesy” mountain feel: handcrafted lodge details, a rustic interior, and then… the patio. 

Island Lake itself literally describes the Bear Bistro as the kind of “post-exertion reward” that belongs on the “most scenic patio in the Fernie area.”

We’re not here to start patio wars, but… we get it.

Audrey diving into a comforting bowl of miso ramen at Bear Bistro, with towering evergreens and fresh mountain air all around. It was one of those unexpected moments where great food and an even better setting come together perfectly.

What we ate at Bear Bistro (and what we’d order again in a heartbeat)

We arrived at Island Lake Lodge in full “earned lunch” mode: we’d already done our hike, had a quick beer stop, and then rolled up the road to this backcountry lodge with serious hunger.

Then we stepped onto the patio and immediately went full-time professional view appreciators (“look at the view… look at the chairs…”) and declared it the highlight of the day—and honestly the trip.

And the food? It matched the setting. Like, suspiciously well.

A well-earned dessert moment at Bear Bistro, with Nomadic Samuel digging into the Elevated “Jos Louis”—a rich chocolate cake layered with soft marshmallow. It’s the kind of nostalgic, indulgent finish that feels especially right after a mountain-view lunch at Island Lake Lodge.

Our order (with prices from the Summer 2025 menu)

DishPriceWhy we loved itMiso Ramen22“Like traveling back to Japan.” Deep, comforting, post-hike perfection. Wagyu Smash Burger27“Shake Shack inspired” double-smash joy with major cheese energy. Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel)15Big, melty, and wildly satisfying with mountain views as the backdrop. Elevated “Jos Louis”12Nostalgic chocolate + marshmallow decadence that begs to be shared. 

A close-up look at the miso ramen at Bear Bistro, packed with chashu pork, springy noodles, and a deeply savoury broth. It’s the kind of comforting, unexpectedly excellent dish that tastes even better when enjoyed in the mountains at Island Lake Lodge.

Miso Ramen: the “wait… we’re in Fernie?” bowl

Audrey ordered the Miso Ramen, and I’m not exaggerating when I say she was transported. Her exact line: “It was like traveling back to Japan.” 

On the menu, it’s a proper, composed bowl: miso broth, egg noodles, chashu, soy egg, spinach, wood ear mushroom, and bamboo shoots. Which is basically the ideal blueprint for a post-hike reset: warm broth, chewy noodles, that salty-savoury miso depth, and enough “stuff” that you feel like you actually ate a meal.

It was also the perfect contrast to the whole rugged-road / cedar-valley / big-peak environment. You expect burgers, fries, and maybe a salad. Instead, you’re suddenly cradling a ramen bowl while staring at the Rockies like this is the most normal thing in the world. 

Who should order it

Anyone who wants something warming + satisfying after hiking.

Anyone who’s had great ramen elsewhere and is skeptical you can get a legit bowl up a backroad in the mountains. (You can.) 

The Wagyu smash burger at Bear Bistro is pure comfort food done right, with crisp-edged patties, melty cheddar, and a soft brioche bun that holds it all together. It’s the kind of mountain lunch that tastes even better after a hike—and makes you seriously consider ordering a second one.

Wagyu Smash Burger: the double-smash, “so much cheese” moment

I went with the Wagyu Smash Burger, and my immediate comparison—unprompted, with the confidence of a man holding a brioche bun—was that it felt Shake Shack inspired. 

Menu-wise, it’s two 3oz Wagyu patties, American cheddar, house-made burger sauce, and a brioche bun.And in real life, it ate like a greatest-hits playlist:

The thin, smashed patties give you those browned edges and that deep “griddled” flavour.

The cheddar + sauce + brioche combo is basically engineered to make you say, out loud, “this is so good” at least twice. (We did.) 

If you want the simplest “mountain lunch done right,” this is it. And if you’re sharing food like we did, it’s the perfect counterpart to ramen—one bowl, one burger, and suddenly you’ve built a tiny personal buffet without ordering half the menu.

Who should order it

People who want a classic patio lunch that feels indulgent but not fussy.

People who say they’re “not that hungry” and then eat half your burger. (We see you.)

The housemade ice cream sandwich at Bear Bistro is pure summer joy—thick chocolate chip cookies wrapped around salted caramel ice cream that starts melting the moment it hits the patio. It’s the kind of dessert you order “to share” and then quietly hope no one asks for the last bite.

Dessert: the ice cream sandwich + “Jos Louis” = choose-your-own happiness

We did the responsible adult thing and ordered two desserts.

Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel)

Audrey’s dessert was the housemade ice cream sandwich (you can choose salted caramel or cookies ’n’ cream on the menu). It’s a real ice cream sandwich—aka, not a polite little afterthought. This is the kind of dessert that makes you do quick math like: “If we hold it up for a photo, will it melt immediately?”

Who should order it

People who want a fun, shareable dessert that feels like summer—especially if you’ve hiked and you’ve earned the sugar. 

This Elevated “Jos Louis” is pure nostalgia with a mountain-lodge glow-up—a dense chocolate cake layered with soft marshmallow and finished with a rich chocolate coating. It feels playful and indulgent at the same time, and somehow even better enjoyed on the Bear Bistro patio.

Elevated “Jos Louis”

I went with the Elevated “Jos Louis”—a moist chocolate cake + soft marshmallow.It's a decadent chocolate cake with a bit of marshmallow filling. Nostalgic snack-cake energy, but upgraded and plated.

Who should order it

Chocolate people. Marshmallow people. Anyone who wants dessert that feels like a little victory lap. 

The underrated best ingredient: a sleeping baby

Here’s the part that made the whole meal feel borderline luxurious: Aurelia slept the entire time we were eating. So we had this rare, peaceful patio lunch where we actually got to taste everything while quietly competing to steal each other’s bites (“Oh my gosh, you’ve got to try this”). 

Then she woke up ready for the lake trail, and we got the full Fernie parenting experience: delicious meal, ridiculous views, and a tiny traveller who’s somehow thriving in the middle of it all. 

Island Lake Lodge feels like something pulled straight from a mountain daydream, with its handcrafted log architecture and expansive patios overlooking the surrounding wilderness. This is the heart of the property—and the place where many Fernie adventures naturally slow down and linger.

What else is on the Bear Bistro menu

This is pulled from the Bear Bistro Summer 2025 menu PDF (so expect seasonal changes), but it gives you a very accurate sense of the style: casual mountain dining with playful flavours, plus boards, salads, bowls, and a serious drinks list.

Quick “pick your vibe” guide

If you want…Order thisShare plates + patio grazingBear Frites, boards, chicken tendersA full meal that’s not a burgerMiso Ramen, Golden Crunch Bowl, Goldilocks BowlA lighter mealBear Summer Salad, Lodge Caesar, Watermelon & Tomato Salad Something crunchy + saucyChicken Karaage Sandwich or Golden Crunch Bowl Dessert-first behaviourIce Cream Sandwich, Whipped Cheesecake, Elevated “Jos Louis” 

Desserts

Whipped Cheesecake (berry coulis, graham cracker) — 12 

Elevated “Jos Louis” (moist chocolate cake, soft marshmallow) — 12 

Housemade Ice Cream Sandwich (salted caramel or cookies ’n’ cream) — 15 

Bowls

Goldilocks Bowl (quinoa, chickpeas, kale, carrot + beet, miso tahini dressing, soft-boiled egg, feta, beet hummus) — 24 

Miso Ramen (miso broth, egg noodle, chashu, soy egg, spinach, wood ear mushroom, bamboo shoots) — 22 

Golden Crunch Bowl (karaage chicken, tonkatsu sauce, rice, cabbage, grilled corn, carrot, chili garlic aioli) — 29 

Handhelds

Crispy Tofu Mushroom Sandwich (miso/tahini tofu, portobello, gochujang aioli, havarti, slaw) — 23 

Chicken Karaage Sandwich (chili garlic aioli, slaw, brioche bun) — 28 

Wagyu Smash Burger (two 3oz patties, cheddar, burger sauce, brioche bun) — 27 

“Take A Hike” Burger + Beer special

If you do the lodge’s trail-of-the-week promo, there’s a Burger + Beer special for 27 (with a veggie option: Lion’s Mane mushroom burger) and a choice of Fernie Brewing beers. 

Salads (and add-ons)

Bear Summer Salad — meal 19 / starter 12 

Lodge Caesar — meal 21 / starter 13 

Watermelon & Tomato Salad (whipped feta, prosciutto, focaccia, citrus dressing) — 23 

Optional add-ons: garlic chicken breast (10), garlic shrimp skewer (8) 

Start / Share

Crispy Chicken Tenders — 20 

Bear Frites — full 18 / half 12 

Cheese Board — 36 

Butcher’s Board — 34 

Charcuterie Board — 59 

Drinks (highlights)

Mocktails: Lavender Lemonade, Virgin Caesar, Zen Fizz, Iced Coffee. 

Local beers: multiple Fernie Brewing Company cans listed (Project 9 Pilsner, Hit the Deck Hazy IPA, Headwall Hazy Pale Ale, What The Huck Berry Ale, Waymark IPA, Campout Pale Ale). 

Cocktails: Sunnyside, Summer Berry Mojito, Lodge Caesar, Elderflower Spritz, Pimm’s Cup, Zen Fizz, plus a rotating cocktail-of-the-week. 

Drinks: cold beer, mountain air, and the “why don’t we live here?” moment

One of the lodge’s own descriptions of Bear Bistro is basically: cold beer, friends, lunch, backcountry setting.

And yes, there are Fernie Brewing Company options on the Bear Bistro menu. 

We had already put in a Fernie Brewing stop earlier (Ridgewalk Red Ale), but the vibe up here is different: quieter, slower, more “let’s stare at mountains until our eyes forget what emails are.”

After a beautiful hike around Island Lake, Audrey takes a moment to soak in the breathtaking mountain and lake views, enjoying the peace and tranquility that comes with a well-earned break at the lodge. This quiet moment, just steps from the water, was the perfect ending to our adventure.

A quick lakeside walk after lunch (the easiest “wow” you’ll get all day)

After eating, we wandered down toward the lake for a gentle stroll—because Island Lake has that Banff/Lake Louise kind of “how is this real?” feel without the crowds.

The Lake Trail is an easy loop (45–60 minutes, minimal elevation). It’s perfect when your time is limited—like after lunch.

Our version, because it was later in the day, was less “45–60 minutes” and more “look at baby… look at lake… wow… wow… wow.” 

“Take A Hike” Burger + Beer special (worth planning around)

If you want to turn this into a proper Fernie mission, Island Lake Lodge runs a “Take A Hike” trail-of-the-week deal: complete the featured trail, take a photo at the iconic spot, and you can redeem a Burger + Beer special at Bear Bistro.

The Bear Bistro menu itself explains the mechanics (photo at the iconic spot, tag on Instagram, show your server) and lists the $27 burger + beer special for participants. 

Tip: Even if you don’t do the promo, the “trail + patio” formula is the whole magic of this place.

Choosing your approach (quick decision matrix)

ApproachEffort levelBest forWhat to knowDrive-up lunchLowFamilies, casual visitors, “we just want the patio”Rugged road; allow time; check operational days/blackout dates Bike up (Lazy Lizard)MediumMountain bikers, active lunch peopleBike racks by the entrance; they prefer riders use the trail over the road Hike up (Rail → Old Growth → Lake)Medium to highHikers who want the full “reward meal”On non-operational days you’ll start from the lower parking lot; services may be closed “Lunch + Lake Trail loop”Very lowEveryoneEasy loop after eating; prime for families and “we’re full” strolls 

Practical tips (so your visit is smooth)

No reservations: it’s first come, first served. 

Groups: they may limit large group tables during peak congestion.

Pets: no pets on the patio; “pet parking” is nearby. 

Pack in/out: it’s private property—respect the place and pack out your garbage if you’re picnicking/exploring. 

If you’re hiking: bring the usual mountain basics. We’ll admit it—on our Fairy Creek hike we didn’t have bear spray (oops), so don’t copy that part. fernie_cleaned_transcript

Tip: If you’re visiting with kids, this is a dream scenario when naps align. If naps don’t align… well… you’ll still have mountains.

Island Lake is as serene as it looks, with still water reflecting towering peaks and forests in every direction. Canoeing here seems like it  unhurried and almost meditative—one of those simple experiences that quietly becomes a trip highlight.

Why this lunch felt like “the Fernie version of luxury”

Fernie impressed us because it has that sweet spot of serious scenery without the “everyone has the same itinerary” vibe.

We came for lunch.

We left plotting a return trip for canoeing, longer hikes, and Audrey’s extremely convincing pitch to “drive out right before a big snow dump and accidentally get stuck for three days.”

Fernie, you got us.

Plan your Bear Bistro day (simple, realistic game plan)

TimeDo thisMorningPick a hike (either in Fernie proper or up at Island Lake Lodge trails) Late morning / lunchAim for Bear Bistro before the afternoon rush; order something hearty + save room for dessertAfter lunchLake Trail loop (gentle, scenic, very “we’re full but happy”) Before you leaveTake a final patio look and say “wow” at least once for good luck 

Questions to toss in the comments

Have you eaten at Island Lake Lodge yet—Bear Bistro lunch, or the Tamarack Dining Room in the evening? And if you’ve done the “Take A Hike” trail-of-the-week special, tell us which trail you tackled.

Everything you need to know about Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge in Fernie, BC

Is Bear Bistro open year-round?

Nope. Bear Bistro is a summer-season spot, and operating dates/hours can change based on lodge operations and private functions. Always check the lodge calendar before heading up. 

What are Bear Bistro’s hours?

Typically 11am–5pm during summer operations. The exact operating days can vary by week (some sources list Friday–Tuesday; others list Sunday–Tuesday), so treat the calendar as the final boss. 

Do you need a reservation for Bear Bistro?

No. It’s first come, first served.

How do you drive to Bear Bistro?

After entering the property gates, it’s about 8 km up a rugged access road with a 30 km/h max speed; they suggest allowing about 20-30 minutes. 

Can you always drive all the way to the lodge?

Nope. In summer operations, vehicle access past the lower parking lot is closed on certain days, and on non-operational/private function days there may be no services. Plan around operational days and confirm by calendar.

Where do you park if the road is closed?

Tourism Fernie notes free parking at the lower parking lot during the summer season, and that it becomes the primary staging area on days when the road is closed beyond it. 

Can you bike to Bear Bistro instead of driving?

Yes. You can ride up via the Lazy Lizard trail, and bike racks are located right by the bistro entrance.

What’s the easiest hike to do after lunch?

Yes. The Lake Trail is a gentle loop (about 45–60 minutes with minimal elevation gain) and is specifically described as a great post-meal option. 

What did we order at Bear Bistro?

We had miso ramen, the Wagyu smash burger, and then dessert: the salted caramel ice cream sandwich and the “Jos Louis” cake. 

Is the ice cream sandwich actually worth it?

Yes. It’s one of those “this is why people blog” desserts—housemade, big, and totally designed for patio happiness. 

Is Bear Bistro kid-friendly?

Yes. Casual lunch, outdoor space, and you’re surrounded by easy trails. We visited with a baby and had the rare miracle of her sleeping through the whole meal. 

Are dogs allowed on the patio?

No. Pets aren’t allowed on the patio, but there’s designated “pet parking” nearby. 

What is the “Take A Hike” special?

It’s a trail-of-the-week promo where you hike the featured trail, take a photo at the iconic spot, and redeem a Burger + Beer deal at Bear Bistro (listed as $27 on the menu for participants). 

What’s the vibe inside Bear Lodge if the patio is full?

Cozy and rustic. Bear Lodge is the historic first log building at Island Lake and it’s known for its grand river-rock fireplace—classic lodge energy. 

Can you just picnic instead of eating at Bear Bistro?

Yes, but Island Lake Lodge notes it’s private property and asks visitors to pack in/pack out all belongings and garbage. 

Is Island Lake Lodge only about food in summer?

Nope. Tourism Fernie highlights hiking, canoeing, spa treatments, and lodging—so you can make it a full day (or a “why did we only book one night?” situation).

#### Best Easy Hikes in El Chaltén: Top Short Trails With Epic Views (Big Payoffs For Non-Hikers)
El Chaltén might be the only place on earth where you can hike for 45 minutes and come back feeling like you conquered Patagonia. It’s basically a town built around one question: “How quickly can I reach a view that makes me whisper ‘that can’t be real’?”

Here’s the good news: you don’t have to do the full “sufferfest” hikes to have an El Chaltén glow-up. This town is basically a buffet of short trails and viewpoint walks where the effort-to-reward ratio is borderline suspicious. We’re talking big mountains, big skies, big “how is this real life?” energy.

El Chaltén, Argentina — Nomadic Samuel (self-proclaimed foodie, still willing to earn dinner) follows an easy hillside trail through classic Patagonia: green valleys, scrubby grass, and distant jagged peaks under dramatic clouds—proof the views don’t require a full-day sufferfest.

This post is a curated menu of the best easy hikes: quick wins, half-day beauties, windy-day saves, and Fitz Roy “postcard” moments that don’t require you to train like you’re joining a mountaineering cult. Bring snacks, bring layers, and bring a sense of humor—Patagonia will test all three.

This guide is specifically for non-hikers, casual hikers, “I hike but I don’t identify as a hiker,” and anyone who wants epic Patagonian scenery without a full-day trek and blisters. We’ll keep it practical, funny, and honest—because El Chaltén is magical, but it is also windy enough to turn your face into jerky.

El Chaltén, Argentina showcases its full Patagonian drama from even the easiest trails, with towering snow-capped peaks, deep green valleys, and rugged hills unfolding layer by layer as you hike. It’s a place where short walks still feel epic, delivering world-class scenery without committing to a full-day trek.

Easy hikes in El Chaltén at a glance

HikeTime (round trip)Difficulty vibeBig payoffBest forMirador Río de las Vueltas30–60 minShort + punchy uphillFast valley view“I need a win”Mirador de los Cóndores1–2 hrsShort, steady climbPanoramas + condor chancesFirst hike / sunsetMirador de las Águilas (add-on)+45–90 minLonger, gentlerSteppe + Lago Viedma feelClear-day bonusChorrillo del Salto3 hrsForest walkWaterfall + chillWindy day / familiesLaguna Capri4–5 hrsEasy-to-moderateClassic Fitz Roy postcard“I want THE view”Mirador Fitz Roy (add-on)+45–90 minSame vibe as CapriBigger Fitz Roy framingPhoto huntersMirador del Torre3–4 hrsEasy-to-moderateTorre valley dramaHalf-day classicMirador Maestri (bonus add-on)+1–2 hrsRockier, longerGlacier + spire theatreStrong legs / extra time

Tip: In El Chaltén, “easy” usually means short and straightforward—not flat. If you want flat, you’re in the wrong town, and we say that with love.

El Chaltén, Argentina makes choosing your adventure part of the fun, with clearly marked wooden trail signs pointing hikers toward Laguna Torre, Mirador Maestri, Campamento De Agostini, and essential facilities. It’s a reminder that even first-time visitors can confidently explore Patagonia’s legendary hikes without a guide.

🧾 Quick Booking: Your El Chaltén Travel Essentials 🥾✨

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit (Book These 4 Things)

✅ What to book💡 Why it’s worth it🔗 Quick link🥾 Tours & experiencesEasy way to lock in a glacier day, a Lago del Desierto adventure, or a guided option when weather turns moodyBrowse El Chaltén tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & staysEl Chaltén sells out fast in peak season — booking early = better locations + fewer “only the priciest rooms left” momentsFind El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car rentals (optional)Best for freedom days: Ruta 40 viewpoints, flexible timing, photo stops, and a smoother Lago del Desierto runCompare car rentals in El Calafate (gateway to El Chaltén) on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus ticketsThe classic El Calafate ↔ El Chaltén route is simple — but popular departure times fill upBook El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud

👉 One-click backup (reverse direction): Book El Chaltén → El Calafate buses on Busbud

Destination snapshot: pick your vibe

TrailVibeBest forIdeal stay-in-town moodDon’t missMirador Río de las Vueltas“Fast payoff balcony”Jet-lagged arrivals“We just want to stretch our legs”The first big valley revealMirador de los Cóndores“Patagonia 101”First-timers“Sunset mission”Wind + panorama comboMirador de las Águilas“Steppe horizon”Clear-day explorers“Let’s go a bit further”The landscape shift beyond townChorrillo del Salto“Forest chill”Families + recovery“Today we’re being gentle”Snack by the fallsLaguna Capri“Fitz Roy postcard”Non-hikers chasing icons“We want the classic view”Fitz Roy from the lake edgeMirador Fitz Roy“Bonus framing”Photo lovers“One more viewpoint!”Different angle, same dramaMirador del Torre“Serious trek vibes”Half-day hikers“We want a proper hike”The valley scale + viewpointsMirador Maestri“Glacier theatre”Strong ‘easy hikers’“We still have juice”Spires + glacier mood

The “easy hike” mindset in Patagonia

El Chaltén is famous for world-class trekking that starts right from town. That’s the headline. 

Even on short hikes, plan like a responsible adult pretending to be an athlete:

Dress for “all four seasons in one afternoon.”

Assume wind will try to steal your hat and your dignity.

Bring water and snacks even for “quick” walks.

Tell someone where you’re going, because cell service is often a myth on trails.

Don’t chase views at all costs. If the weather is genuinely nasty, the mountains will still be there tomorrow.

Tip: When people get in trouble in El Chaltén, it’s rarely because they chose the “wrong hike.” It’s because they underestimated wind, cold, or how quickly conditions shift.

How to interpret trail times in El Chaltén

You’ll see times posted on trailhead signs and in guidebooks. Treat them like a conservative estimate for normal hikers—and then adjust:

Add time if you like photos (you do).

Add time if your group contains a snack negotiator (it does).

Add time if the wind is fighting you (it will).

Add time if the trail is muddy/snowy (season dependent).

A helpful rule of thumb for non-hikers: if a sign suggests “1:45 one way,” plan your day as if it’s “2:15 or 2:30 one way,” because you’re going to stop, breathe, stare at mountains, and say “wow” on repeat.

El Chaltén, Argentina — this weather-based hiking infographic helps travelers choose the best easy trail for the day, matching wind, clouds, rain, or low energy with short hikes that still deliver epic Patagonian views, while clearly showing which routes to avoid to minimize suffering and maximize enjoyment.

Choose your trail by today’s weather (the anti-suffering matrix)

ConditionsBest easy choiceWhyAvoid todayStrong wind in townChorrillo del SaltoForest cover gives shelterExposed miradors if it feels brutalClear sky + calm-ishCóndores + ÁguilasBig panoramas, great lightNone—go wildClouds rolling inMirador Río de las VueltasQuick win before weather shiftsLonger add-ons far from townLight rain / mixedChorrillo del Salto or Torre viewpoint (if manageable)Forest or quick turn-around optionsLong, exposed viewpointsYou’re tired / travel dayRío de las Vueltas or CóndoresShort, satisfyingCapri if you’re cookedYou want the “iconic”Laguna CapriFitz Roy postcard potentialOvercommitting beyond Capri

Pick your hike decision matrix (the town-standoff solver)

Use this when your group is standing in town doing the classic “So… what do we do?” standoff.

Your situationChoose thisWhy it winsYou have 45 minutes and questionable motivationMirador Río de las VueltasFast payoff, tiny commitmentYou want the best “first hike”Mirador de los CóndoresEasy, iconic, sunset-friendlyIt’s windy and you want shelterChorrillo del SaltoMostly forest = less wind punishmentYou want Fitz Roy views but not the full boss levelLaguna CapriThe sweet spot for non-hikersYou want a half-day hike with “serious trek” vibesMirador del TorreClassic valley walk, big sceneryYou woke up energetic and overconfidentCapri + Mirador Fitz Roy add-onUpgrade your views without going full Los TresYou want to extend Torre a bitMirador Maestri add-onGlacier theatre (conditions permitting)

El Chaltén, Argentina — after arriving by bus from El Calafate, Audrey Bergner heads toward the hotel with luggage in tow, dwarfed by the massive rock walls rising behind town. It’s a classic first impression of El Chaltén, where even the walk from the bus station feels like the opening scene of a Patagonian adventure.

Before you hit the trail: what we actually did (and what we learned)

We arrived from El Calafate by bus. The ride was smooth, the scenery was ridiculous, and we had that fresh-travel glow where you believe you are the type of person who wakes up at 6 a.m. to hike.

We checked into Vertical Lodge and immediately discovered a universal travel truth: a good base makes you feel ten times more capable. We had space, comfort, and a great overall setup.

Then came the secret El Chaltén superpower: summer daylight. In December, the sun basically refuses to go to bed. That changes everything. You can arrive, unpack, and still squeeze in a sunset hike like you’re starring in your own Patagonia montage.

Our first move? Mirador de los Cóndores. Short, steep, dramatic payoff. The perfect “hello, mountains” handshake.

Also: groceries were limited and internet was… let’s call it “aspirational.” $1 apples. So if you’re planning to work remotely or you’re very particular about your hiking snacks, do yourself a favor and show up with the basics.

Tip: El Chaltén is not trying to be inconvenient. It’s just prioritizing mountains over fiber-optic cables. Respect.

Trailhead basics (where the easy hikes actually start)

Most of the easy classics are accessed from two places:

The main trailhead area at the end of Avenida San Martín (Fitz Roy / Torre / Chorrillo del Salto routes).

The Mirador trailhead area closer to the entrance of town / visitor center zone (for Cóndores / Águilas, depending on your route).

If you can walk to a coffee shop, you can walk to most trailheads. El Chaltén is compact, which is one reason it’s so beloved: you can hike hard, eat well, and be back in town before your socks forgive you.

El Chaltén, Argentina — a wooden trail sign points the way to Mirador Río de las Vueltas, one of the easiest and fastest scenic walks from town. This short climb offers a classic Patagonian payoff, with sweeping valley views that make it a perfect first hike or quick outing when time, weather, or energy are limited.

1) Mirador Río de las Vueltas (the fastest big-view payoff)

Mirador Río de las Vueltas is the kind of “accidentally iconic” viewpoint that makes El Chaltén feel unfair in the best way. You’re barely out of town, your lungs have only just started filing minor complaints, and suddenly the valley opens up with that classic Patagonian scale: ribboning river below, wide open space beyond, and a landscape that looks like it was designed by someone who hates subtlety. It’s also a great first taste of the Fitz Roy trail network—like a free sample that makes you consider ordering the full meal.

What makes this one especially good for non-hikers is the psychology: it’s a clear “checkpoint” hike. You can do the viewpoint and head back feeling victorious, or use it as a confidence test before committing to longer options like Laguna Capri. The view is quick, the trail is obvious, and the reward is immediate—perfect for arrival day, windy days when you still want a win, or mornings when you want to “do something” before the coffee fully kicks in.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-backTime30–60 minutes round trip (depending on breaks)EffortShort, steeper at the beginningWind exposureModerate at the viewpointBest timeMorning light or late afternoonBathroomNone on trail

El Chaltén, Argentina — the sweeping view from Mirador Río de las Vueltas reveals the full scale of Patagonia, with the braided Río de las Vueltas winding across a broad green valley framed by rugged mountains. This easy, short hike delivers an immediate sense of space and drama, making it a perfect first stop or low-commitment scenic win.

Why it’s perfect for non-hikers

It’s short enough that nobody has time to complain.

It gives you a legitimate valley panorama.

It’s a natural decision point: continue to Laguna Capri or turn around feeling victorious.

What it feels like

The first part is uphill and gets your heart rate into “okay fine, this is exercise” territory. Then you pop out at the viewpoint and suddenly you’re staring down the Río de las Vueltas valley with that classic El Chaltén scale: tiny town energy, enormous landscape flex.

Our take

If you’re arriving late, if the wind is rude, or if you’re still negotiating with your knees after yesterday’s travel day, this is the move. We love it as a calibration hike because it tells you how your body feels today—without committing to anything.

Turnaround options (choose your own victory)

Option A: Viewpoint and back (the classic).

Option B: Viewpoint, snack, back (the superior).

Option C: Viewpoint, feel amazing, continue toward Capri (dangerous, but tempting).

El Chaltén, Argentina — a clearly marked trail sign points hikers toward Mirador de los Cóndores and the optional Mirador de las Águilas extension, two of the easiest and most rewarding viewpoint hikes near town. With open terrain and big skies, this is a classic route for panoramic valley views and the chance to spot condors riding Patagonian thermals.

2) Mirador de los Cóndores (the iconic easy viewpoint)

Mirador de los Cóndores is the classic “starter hike” for a reason: it’s short, close to town, and it delivers an honest panoramic view that feels wildly disproportionate to the effort. Think of it as El Chaltén’s orientation hike—your first proper look at the town sitting in its dramatic valley, with the surrounding mountains flexing in the background like they’re trying to win an award. If you’re visiting in summer, it’s also a prime sunrise/sunset play because the light lingers forever and makes the whole landscape look more cinematic than it has any right to.

Real talk: it’s “easy,” but it’s not flat. The climb is short and steady and will absolutely wake up your thighs (Patagonia’s way of saying “hola”). Once you crest the top, the wind often shows up like an unpaid extra who insists on being in every scene—so bring a layer even if town feels calm. And yes, you might see condors circling overhead… but even if the birds don’t clock in today, the viewpoint still feels like a legitimate Patagonian payoff.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-backTime1–2 hours round tripEffortShort, steady climb (feel it in your thighs)Wind exposureHigh at the topBest timeSunset or sunrise (if you’re a hero)BathroomNone on trail

Why it’s amazing

Short trail, big reward.

Great for sunrise or sunset.

There’s a real chance of seeing condors, which makes you feel like you’ve been personally selected by nature.

El Chaltén, Argentina — from the rocky summit of Mirador de los Cóndores, Nomadic Samuel pauses to photograph the town below as the Río de las Vueltas curves through the valley and rugged Patagonian mountains rise in the distance. This short, accessible hike offers one of the best panoramic overviews in El Chaltén, proving big scenery doesn’t require a long trek.

What it feels like

It’s steeper than it looks. Not “help I’m dying” steep—more like “why are my thighs suddenly aware of themselves?”

You climb, you climb, and then it opens up. The view is wide, the wind is usually louder than your thoughts, and you get that first true taste of why El Chaltén is a hiking legend.

Our sunset strategy

We did this on our first evening because December daylight is basically a cheat code. It was the perfect low-commitment way to get mountain drama without hiking for eight hours on day one like maniacs.

Tip: Bring a wind layer even if town feels calm. Patagonia loves a plot twist.

Condor expectations (keep it realistic)

Yes, you might see condors. No, the condors are not scheduled. But even if you don’t see a single bird, the panorama still makes the hike worth it.

El Chaltén, Argentina — the sweeping panorama from Mirador de las Águilas delivers a true sense of Patagonian scale, with layered green valleys, braided river flats, and distant snow-covered peaks stretching far beyond town. This easy extension beyond Mirador de los Cóndores feels quieter and more expansive, rewarding hikers with space, depth, and big-sky drama.

3) Mirador de las Águilas (the “add-on with a different planet” vibe)

Mirador de las Águilas is the underrated sibling of Cóndores—the one you do when you finish the first viewpoint and think, “That… wasn’t bad. Maybe we’ve got more in the tank.” The magic here is that it feels like you’ve stepped into a different Patagonia: fewer “mountain portrait” vibes and more wide-open horizon energy. On a clear day, the view stretches out over the steppe and can include a glimpse of Lago Viedma in the distance, which makes you realize just how massive this landscape really is.

The best part is that the extension is generally gentler once you’re past the junction—so it’s less about suffering and more about time on your feet. The tradeoff is exposure: it’s more open, which means the wind can be extra spicy. If the weather is behaving, it’s a brilliant add-on because it complements Cóndores instead of repeating it—two viewpoints, two different moods, one very satisfying “we hiked today” story to tell over dinner.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-back from the junctionTimeAdd 45–90 minutes to Cóndores (varies)EffortGentler walking, longer overallWind exposureHigh (open terrain)Best timeClear days with good visibilityBathroomNone on trail

Why it’s worth it

Las Águilas gives you a different feel: more open steppe views, more “edge of the world” energy, and on clear days you can get that big-horizon look that reminds you how wild southern Patagonia really is.

Who should do it

People who finish Cóndores and immediately say, “That wasn’t bad.”

Anyone chasing wide landscapes rather than peak portraits.

Clear-day optimists.

Who should skip it

If the wind is already bullying you.

If you’re on a tight schedule.

If you’re hiking with someone whose mood is directly tied to snack frequency.

El Chaltén, Argentina — official trail signage marks the start of the Senda Chorrillo del Salto inside Los Glaciares National Park, clearly outlining distance, low difficulty, and park guidelines. This well-marked forest trail is one of the most approachable hikes in El Chaltén, making it a popular choice for travelers seeking an easy walk with a scenic waterfall payoff.

4) Chorrillo del Salto (the waterfall walk that saves your legs)

Chorrillo del Salto is the “we still want nature, but our legs are filing a formal complaint” hike. It’s a mellow forest walk through lenga trees that feels refreshingly gentle by El Chaltén standards—more of a scenic stroll than a trek. The path is usually wind-sheltered compared to the exposed viewpoints, which makes it a clutch option on days when Patagonia is throwing gusts around like it’s personal. And the payoff is exactly what you want from an easy trail: a proper waterfall you can stand beside, take photos of, and feel like you earned with minimal suffering.

It’s also one of those hikes that works for almost everyone: families, recovery-day hikers, casual walkers, and anyone who wants a scenic win without committing to a half-day mission. In winter, the falls can partially freeze and turn into a totally different kind of spectacle—so this trail isn’t just a summer-only trick. If you go early, you’ll catch it quieter and more peaceful; later in the day, expect company, because everyone loves an easy waterfall flex.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-backTime3 hours round tripEffortLow (mostly mellow)Wind exposureLow-to-moderate (forest helps)Best timeMorning for fewer peopleBathroomNone at the falls (plan in town)

El Chaltén, Argentina — the waterfall at Chorrillo del Salto crashes down a dramatic rock face into a clear mountain stream surrounded by dense Patagonian forest. Reached via an easy, mostly flat walk, this shaded trail is a favorite for low-effort days, windy conditions, or travelers who want a rewarding nature experience without committing to a long hike.

Why it’s perfect

It’s mostly flat and foresty.

It’s a classic “easy win.”

The waterfall is legitimately lovely, and it’s a great excuse to stop and snack like you’ve earned it.

What it feels like

It’s the anti-Patagonia stereotype hike: not a brutal climb, not an exposed ridge, not a marathon. You’re walking through forest, listening to birds, and thinking, “I could live like this.” Then you arrive at the falls, and suddenly everyone is taking photos like they’re in a tourism commercial.

Our take

Chorrillo del Salto is the best option for windy days, recovery days, traveling with kids, and days when you want scenery but not suffering.

Tip: Go early if you want it quieter. This is one of the most popular short hikes for a reason.

El Chaltén, Argentina — the classic view from Laguna Capri pairs the still waters of a mountain lake with the dramatic granite towers of Mount Fitz Roy rising behind it. Reached via a moderate but approachable hike, this viewpoint delivers one of Patagonia’s most photographed scenes and is often the perfect turnaround point for hikers who want iconic scenery without tackling the final brutal climb to Laguna de los Tres.

5) Laguna Capri (Fitz Roy views without the full boss fight)

Laguna Capri is the sweet spot for “I want Fitz Roy views, but I’m not trying to write a memoir about overcoming adversity.” This is the hike that gives you a legit mountain moment without demanding an all-day grind. The trail starts with a punchier uphill section (just enough to make you wonder who labeled this “easy”), then settles into a more pleasant rhythm through forest and open viewpoints. It feels like a real hike—steady walking, multiple scenic breaks, and enough variation that you’re not just staring at your shoes counting minutes.

And then you reach the lake area and Fitz Roy shows up outta nowhere. On clear days, the view is absurd: jagged granite towers, dramatic skyline, and that “how is this real?” energy that El Chaltén does so well. Capri is also a perfect turnaround point: you’ll leave feeling like you truly experienced El Chaltén, without signing up for the final steep push to Laguna de los Tres.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-back (classic)Time4–5 hours round trip (plus photo time)EffortEasy-to-moderate; first km is steepestWind exposureModerate (mix of forest + open)Best timeMorning for light; sunset for drama (if weather holds)BathroomsUsually available at the campsite area (season dependent)

Why it’s the best “big payoff” easy hike

You get an honest-to-goodness Fitz Roy view (clouds permitting).

The trail is well defined and heavily traveled.

There are multiple payoff points, so it never feels like “nothing… nothing… nothing… pain.”

What it feels like (real talk)

The first kilometer is the steepest. It’s the part where you think, “Is this supposed to be easy?” Then it mellows out into a steady climb with valley views, forest sections, and enough variety to keep your brain entertained.

Eventually, you reach the campsite area near Laguna Capri. And then Fitz Roy shows up like a movie star: massive granite, dramatic silhouette, the kind of mountain that makes you whisper “okay wow” even if you’re usually dead inside.

El Chaltén, Argentina — official trail signage at Laguna Capri outlines park rules, environmental guidelines, and basic facilities within Los Glaciares National Park. Surrounded by lenga forest, this sign marks arrival at one of the most rewarding and approachable stops on the Fitz Roy trail, where hikers can pause, regroup, and enjoy iconic mountain scenery without continuing to the tougher upper sections.

Our experience (the “welcome to paradise” moment)

We hit Capri and immediately did the classic thing: stand there in stunned silence.

“Welcome to paradise,” we said. And honestly? Accurate.

We also loved that Capri has infrastructure that makes it feel friendly: a designated camping area, toilets, and an atmosphere that says “yes, normal humans can do this.”

Capri as a turnaround win

If you stop at Capri and head back, you still get one of the best views in El Chaltén. For non-hikers, that’s the whole point.

Capri as a gateway drug (and why you should resist)

From Capri, the trail continues toward Poincenot and ultimately Laguna de los Tres. We did it, and we’ll be honest: that final push to Los Tres is a steep, rocky, soul-taxing kilometer that turns “moderate” into “why do I have hobbies?”

You do not need to do that to feel like you experienced El Chaltén. Capri alone is enough to make you fall in love.

Tip: If you do decide to go farther, treat Capri as a hard checkpoint. Eat. Drink. Reassess. Patagonia punishes impulsiveness.

El Chaltén, Argentina — a wooden trail sign marks the split toward Mirador Fitz Roy, Campamento Poincenot, and Laguna de los Tres along the famous Fitz Roy trekking route. Even for hikers turning around early, this junction feels iconic, signaling the transition from easy forest walking to the more committed climbs deeper into Los Glaciares National Park.

6) Mirador Fitz Roy (Capri add-on for photogs)

Mirador Fitz Roy is for the people who can’t leave “bonus content” on the table. If you’re already on the Fitz Roy trail network and the weather is cooperating, this add-on scratches the itch of going a little farther for a slightly different angle—more framing, more depth, more “yes, we absolutely needed another viewpoint” energy. Think of it as the upgrade for photogs: you’re chasing the cleanest composition, the best light, and that perfect mountain lineup that makes your camera roll feel like it’s punching above its weight.

What makes it work in an “easy hikes” guide is that you’re not committing to the full epic—this is more about strategic extension than a whole new mission. It’s best on clear days when the massif is actually visible (because Patagonia loves hiding Fitz Roy behind clouds like it’s playing hard to get). If your group is feeling good, it’s a satisfying “we did extra” moment; if anyone is already fading, you can skip it with zero regret because Laguna Capri already delivers the main event.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeAdd-on from the Fitz Roy networkTimeAdd 45–90 minutesEffortSimilar walking; more time on feetBest timeClear days; morning lightWorth it if…You’re not rushed and still feel good

El Chaltén, Argentina — Audrey Bergner pauses at a Fitz Roy viewpoint, framed by rugged trail terrain and the unmistakable granite towers of Mount Fitz Roy rising dramatically in the background. This popular stop delivers one of Patagonia’s most iconic views without committing to the longer, steeper climb toward Laguna de los Tres, making it a perfect turnaround point for many hikers.

Why do it

It changes the framing of the mountains and the valley.

It feels like you “went a bit further” without committing to a full-day epic.

Great if the weather is clear and you’re in that “one more viewpoint” mood.

Who it’s best for

People who love photography

People who hate leaving “bonus content” on the table

People who brought snacks and therefore have power

El Chaltén, Argentina — a wooden trail sign directs hikers toward Mirador Cerro Torre, the classic halfway viewpoint on the Laguna Torre trail. This well-marked junction signals the transition from easy valley walking to more committed terrain ahead, while still offering a satisfying turnaround option for travelers seeking dramatic Patagonian views without hiking all the way to Laguna Torre.

7) Mirador del Torre (half-day hike, big “trekking capital” vibes)

Mirador del Torre is the half-day hike that makes you feel like you’ve earned the title of “trekker” without actually having to suffer like one. The route heads into the valley and builds that slow-burn Patagonian drama: river views, forest sections, and a steady sense of walking deeper into a landscape that keeps getting bigger and moodier. It’s serious scenery with manageable effort, and a clear payoff point that doesn’t require an all-day commitment.

One of the best things for non-hikers is how the trail naturally breaks into “mini rewards.” Spots like Cascada Margarita work as bite-sized milestones—perfect for pacing, snack breaks, and morale management (which, honestly, is half the battle). Cerro Torre also has a different personality than Fitz Roy: less sunny postcard, more dramatic art-film energy. Even if the peaks are partially clouded, the valley walk still feels satisfying—so you’re not putting all your happiness eggs in one perfectly clear-sky basket.

Quick stats

MetricWhat to expectTrail typeOut-and-backTime3–4 hours round tripEffortEasy-to-moderate; biggest climb earlyWind exposureModerate-to-high in open areasBest timeEarly start for calmer conditionsBathroomsNone on the viewpoint section (plan in town)

The sweeping view from Mirador del Torre captures the dramatic scale of Patagonia, with a gentle trail cutting through green meadows toward Cerro Torre and the distant Glaciar Grande. This scenic lookout near El Chaltén offers a rewarding preview of the famous Torre massif before reaching Laguna Torre deeper along the hike.

What it feels like

The early section has most of the climb. Then the trail settles into that classic El Chaltén rhythm: steady walking, huge valley scale, and a constant sense that you’re very small in a very dramatic landscape.

Along the way, there are smaller viewpoints like Mirador Margarita that act like mini-rewards—useful for non-hikers because they break the walk into psychological chunks.

Why it’s great for non-hikers (who still want a real hike)

It’s a satisfying outing: you walk for a few hours, you earn your lunch, you return with pride.

The trail is obvious and popular.

You can turn around at the mirador and still feel like you did a major El Chaltén hike.

Tip: If the wind is savage, Torre valley can feel more exposed than forest routes. Bring layers and be ready to turn around.

A classic wooden trail sign in El Chaltén clearly marks the route toward Laguna Torre and Mirador Maestri, with additional directions to Campamento De Agostini and restrooms. Signage like this makes hiking in Los Glaciares National Park refreshingly straightforward, even for first-time visitors tackling Patagonia’s famous trails.

8) Mirador Maestri (bonus add-on for strong “easy hikers”)

Mirador Maestri is where the “easy hike” starts flirting with “okay, this is actually a full day.” The reason people chase it is simple: it adds extra drama above Laguna Torre—more perspective, a bigger sense of scale, and more of that glacier-and-spires atmosphere that feels uniquely Patagonian. If your goal is to keep things casual, this is optional. But if you’re having a strong day, the weather is stable, and you want to level up your Torre experience without doing something reckless, this extension can feel like the ultimate bonus round.

It’s also one of those viewpoints with a little bit of lore, tied to the climbing history around Cerro Torre, which gives it that “Patagonia isn’t just pretty, it’s dramatic” energy. Practically speaking, this add-on is best approached with a hard-nosed mindset: if the wind is already bullying you, or clouds are closing in, don’t force it. Patagonia rewards patience more than bravado. But on a good day, it’s the kind of extra effort that makes you feel like you unlocked a higher tier of El Chaltén.

If you’re feeling great and conditions are good, consider it.

If you’re already tired, don’t. Save it for another day.

If the weather is closing in, skip it. Safety > content.

This is the point where “easy hike” starts flirting with “long day.” And flirting with long days in Patagonia can get serious fast.

A hiker carefully crosses the rocky moraine near Mirador Maestri on the Laguna Torre trail in El Chaltén, Argentina. This less-traveled section reveals the raw, untamed side of Patagonia, with massive stone fields, sparse lenga trees, and towering mountain walls that make the final stretch feel truly wild.

🥾 Plan B Adventures: Tours & Easy Day Trips from El Chaltén

Even hardcore hikers end up with a “Plan B” day in Patagonia. When the wind is feral, legs are toast, or you just want someone else to handle the logistics, these Viator options are easy wins.

👉 Browse El Chaltén tours (plus nearby options) on Viator

OptionBest forBook it🚌 El Chaltén “Complete Experience” day tour (from El Calafate)A low-effort way to “see El Chaltén” without committing to a big hikeEl Chaltén Complete Experience Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)🧊 Perito Moreno Glacier full-day + optional boat safariClassic Patagonia bucket-list day that doesn’t require hardcore hikingPerito Moreno Glacier Full-Day Tour with Optional Boat Safari (Viator)🚤 “Todo Glaciares” navigation (Upsala + Spegazzini)Big-glacier scenery with max comfort (aka: let the boat do the work)Glaciares Gourmet Navigation: Upsala & Spegazzini Navigation (Viator)🗿 El Calafate city tour + Walichu CavesA cultural/history reset day (great when the weather is moody)El Calafate City Tour + Walichu Caves (Viator)🚙 Nativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (4x4 style)Off-road adventure + viewpoints when you want something different than trailsNativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (Viator)🇨🇱 Torres del Paine full-day trip (from El Calafate)Maximum “Patagonia wow” in one day (long day, huge payoff)Torres del Paine Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)

Common mistakes non-hikers make (so you don’t)

MistakeWhat happensBetter moveDressing for town, not the trailYou freeze at the viewpointPack layers, alwaysNo snacksSomeone becomes emotionally unstableCarry carbs, keep peaceStarting too lateYou rush, miss the light, stress outStart earlier than you thinkOvercommitting on day oneYou wake up day two feeling ancientDo a short hike firstIgnoring windYou suffer unnecessarilyChoose forest routes on windy daysThinking “easy” means flatSurprise thigh workoutPace yourself, take breaks

The Nomadic Samuel “effort-to-reward” ranking

Because sometimes you just want someone to tell you what’s worth it.

RankTrailEffortRewardVerdict1Mirador Río de las VueltasLowHighFastest win in town2Mirador de los CóndoresLowVery highIconic, do it3Chorrillo del SaltoVery lowMedium-highChill waterfall energy4Laguna CapriMediumVery highBest Fitz Roy “easy” option5Mirador del TorreMediumHighHalf-day classic6Las Águilas add-onMediumHighGreat on clear days7Mirador Fitz Roy add-onMediumHighWorth it if you’ve got fuel8Maestri add-onMedium-highHighOnly if you’re feeling strong

Final pep talk for non-hikers

El Chaltén is not a “you must suffer to belong” destination. It’s a “choose your own adventure” destination.

Do the short hikes. Chase the viewpoints. Eat the snacks. Take the photos. If you’re tired, turn around. If the wind is rude, choose the forest. If the clouds hide Fitz Roy, enjoy the mood and try again later.

Because the real win is not ticking off the hardest trail. The real win is walking out of town, breathing that Patagonian air, and realizing you’re in a place that makes you feel more alive—even if you’re also slightly sore.

#### Bishkek Travel Guide: Top 15 Things to Do in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan
Here are 15 things to do in Bishkek! If you're keen to visit the Kyrgyz capital, I've got you covered.

Most cities we visit offer an overwhelming amount of activities and places to visit, so much so, that we often find ourselves making compromises in order to cover the places we're most interested in. This was not the case for Bishkek where to-do-lists are best tossed out the window.

Views from Ala Too Square on a gorgeous sunny day with a rainbow in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

At first glance, the Kyrgyz capital doesn't appear to offer much in terms of attractions, but we quickly discovered this is the kind of place that you need to experience - sit back, relax, and see where it takes you.

VIDEO: Bishkek Travel Guide 

It's only when you linger in Bishkek and start chatting with expats and locals, that you begin to discover that this city is home to a whole slew of quirky sights, trendy cafes, relaxing parks, underrated attractions, and imposing monuments.



Bishkek won us over in a matter of days and by the end of our visit we understood why so many travellers choose to linger here and others find a way to call it home. But now on to the sightseeing; in this post I'm going to show you 15 things to do in Bishkek on your visit:

15 Things To Do In Bishkek

People walking around Ala-Too Square in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

1) Ala-Too Square (Ала-тоо аянты - Площадь Ала-Тоо)

First up, we visited Ala-Too Square, which is the central plaza in Bishkek. While there isn’t much to do here, it’s one of the city’s major landmarks featuring plenty of benches and water fountains where you can take a quick break.

Built in 1984 to celebrate the 60th anniversary of the Kyrgyz Soviet Social Republic. Moreover, here you'll also find a statue of Manas commemorating the 20th anniversary of Kyrgyzstan's independence. State events and celebrations take place here along with occasional protests.

The State History Museum in downtown Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

2) State Historical Museum

Just across the street you'll find the State Historical Museum. Unfortunately, it was closed for renovations when we visited but if you wander around the back of the building you'll find an imposing Lenin statue.

When open to the public, it houses an eclectic collection of Soviet era items. Additionally, along with mementos from the 2010 revolution.

3) Osh Bazaar (Ош базары)

Another place you’ll want to visit in Bishkek is the Osh Bazaar. It may not be the biggest in Central Asia, but it’s a bustling hive of activity where you could easily spend several hours. Hence, we had no problems at the market, but we were warned by expat friends and locals to ignore the fake police who may ask to see documents and camera permits.

Inside the market you'll find fresh produce, local snacks and clothes. Thus, if you're adventurous with your tastes buds, be sure to try the dry cheese balls which taste a bit like salty goat cheese. Our find of the day was a half of kilo of dates for 100 Som (roughly $1.50 USD). Bargain!

4) Abandoned Casino

Remember my earlier spiel about Bishkek being a little quirky? Indeed, the city has plenty of abandoned buildings to explore, none being more fascinating than the forgotten casino.

Here you'll find graffiti, smashed objects and possibly teenagers hanging out. Also, be sure to bring closed shoes as there is an abundance of broken glass on the ground.

Views of Victory Square Memorial Park in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

5) Victory Monument

Directly across from the abandoned casino, you’ll find the Victory Monument which was built to commemorate the 40th anniversary of World War 2.

The three curved arcs represent a yurt, and the sculpture of a woman standing near the eternal flame is meant to symbolize her waiting for her husband and sons to return from the war.

6) Erkindik Park and Ice Cream

I spent more time in Erkindik Park than anywhere else in Bishkek. Whether I was jogging to burn calories or licking ice cream to gain them back, I couldn't get enough of this place.

Popular with locals, especially on the weekends, you'll find this park lined with trees charming at all of times of day. It tends to be quieter in the mornings and busier in the late afternoon and early evening.

7) Zhirgal Banya Bath House

I'm a sucker for saunas and public baths! If I touch down in Finland or South Korea, spending ample time at the sauna is an absolute must. When I found out Bishkek had a popular bath house I just had to check it out. Separated by gender, you strip down to your birthday suit and alternate between steam rooms and saunas. I went to check out the polar plunge dome with ice cold water.

As I was tip-toeing my way down the ladder I was suddenly thrust face first into the pool. Gulping water I immediately swung my head back and noticed a burly man of Kyrgyz World Nomad Games proportions looking down at me with his arms crossed. I had just been pushed into the pool by another grown naked man. Not even know how to react I just ended up swimming to the other end.

Aside from being shoved I did enjoy my experience at Zhirgal Banya.

Our pair of roller skates that we put on to go rollerskating in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

8) Retro Rollerskating Rink

Found a warp tunnel where you can time travel back to the 80s? If not, may I suggest visiting the roller rink in Bishkek?

I thought roller-skating would be a lot like ice skating and/or rollerblading; I was wrong. I'm sure my bambi on skates impression provided plenty of humor for the mostly local teenage clientele.

The amount of times I nearly hit the ground was comical to say the least.

9) Kyrgyz National Opera and Ballet Theatre of Abdylas Maldybayev

We missed the start of opera and ballet season by just a few days, however, if you’re in the city at the right time, that’s something you could consider doing as we heard the performances are top notch.

10) Bishkek Cafes

If you're interested in chillin' like a villain you'll find Bishkek has a collection of worthwhile cafes to pass an afternoon.

Check out Q cafe where you'll slurp on gourmet coffee and chow down on freshly baked muffins and Dvorak cake.

Mountain views as we hiked Issyk-Ata Gorge as a day trip from Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

11) Hiking outside of Bishkek with Trekking Union

If you’re craving a day-trip from Bishkek, you can always plan a hike to the nearby mountains with the Trekking Union.

With hikes happening every weekend you'll find yourself out in nature with good company along the way. Make sure to bring plenty of water, snacks and proper footwear. Also, don't be shocked if the 12 kilometer hike you've signed up for is actually a 25 kilometer jaunt.

 VIDEO: Hiking in Kyrgyzstan

12) Kyrgyz traditional food and International cuisine

As far as traditional Kyrgyz food is concerned, there’s plenty to sample ranging from grilled meats to dumplings, and noodles to mixed rice. Also, be sure to try fermented mare's milk (kymyz - Кымыз) which is a flavour you won't soon forget.



International options are also plentiful in Bishkek with some great steakhouses, Japanese and Korean restaurants. Thus, our favorite was Chicken Star where you can enjoy spicy Korean chicken and tteokochi spicy rice cakes with your pint of beer.

VIDEO: Kyrgyz Traditional Food

13) Craft Beer Scene

Save The Ales! I'm always up for a good cause and if you're jonesing for a craft IPA you've come to the right place.

Here you'll enjoy the casual atmosphere and company of others when things get dark in the city.

You can spot plenty of flowers in various parks and gardens in Bishkek, Kyrgyzstan

14) Oak Park

With our time in Bishkek winding down, we visited Oak Park which is full of peculiar sculptures and offers a nice green escape.

Definitely, it's worth a visit if you're already in the area.

15) Panfilov Park (Панфилов көчөсү - улица Панфилова)

Lastly, there's Panfilov Park, where you can enjoy all sorts of carnival rides right in the heart of Bishkek.

All in all, we had an enormous lunch before visiting so that meant the roller coaster was off limits for us, but it shouldn't necessarily be for you.

#### Chiang Mai is the Perfect Base for Digital Nomads and Expatriates
As I peered outside of the balcony of our Thai apartment - far off in the distance - I spotted a plane ascending. As the plane suddenly disappeared into the clouds it hit me I'd soon be leaving Chiang Mai, Thailand in a couple of days. Pensive, I wondered where the time had gone?

For the past several months Chiang Mai has been our home. While traveling in Vietnam, we felt burnt out. We craved a base, a routine and a sense of familiarity. After months of backpacking continuously we hit a point where travel had become tedious. It was a chore. It was no longer fun.

Trying to juggle the demands of working online while backpacking is a balancing act we've yet to master; however, we knew one thing with absolute certainty: we needed to slow down.

source: Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker teaming up on Samuel and Audrey channel

In hindsight, I realized I was living a fantasy believing I could keep up the pace of my backpacking adventures from years past with the added commitments of working remotely. Overly ambitious, we continued on until we finally reached a point where our both our mental and physical health started to deteriorate.

Chiang Mai was our saviour.

Chiang Mai = The Perfect Base For Digital Nomads

On the first day we arrived it already felt like home. We purchased bicycles. We quickly discovered restaurants we both loved. Instead of feeling a sense of pressure to see and do as much as we possibly could before moving on to the next destination, we felt content wandering around in our neighbourhood.

After months of hearing stories of fellow digital drifters making Chiang Mai their home I was naturally sceptical. It must be over-rated. How can one want to give up the excitement and stimulation of constantly moving from one place to another to hunker down in just one location?

Well, as I've come to realize over the past several months there are many reasons that Chiang Mai is the perfect base for digital nomads.

Amazing Thai and International Food In Chiang Mai

source: That Backpacker + Nomadic Samuel via Samuel and Audrey YT channel

Some people eat to live. I live to eat. I couldn't image myself staying somewhere were I would not be able to indulge my taste buds. Chiang Mai offers a wonderful spread of cuisine ranging from familiar Thai favourites, tantalizing Northern Thai Khantoke cuisine and top notch International food. Whether we were craving a savoury Panang curry or a Mexican burrito, we had options galore at our disposal. Street food stalls offered tasty treats and small meals for mere dollars whereas sit down International restaurants rarely left us with a bill of over 300 Baht (roughly $10 USD).

These are some of our favourite eateries:

source: Nomadic Samuel + That Backpacker via Samuel and Audrey on YouTube

Chang Chalaad: For the best Pad Thai you can't go wrong visiting this tiny little hole in the wall restaurant located near the northeastern section of the walled city. For dessert indulge in the mango sticky rice. If you're heading there with a group consider the Khantoke set dinner – a feast you won't soon forget.

source: Nomadic Samuel and That Backpacker on Samuel and Audrey YT channel

Dada Cafe: This popular cafe was our go-to-place for breakfast and lunch. With options such as curry fried rice, towering sandwiches and rich creamy fruit smoothies, we came back time and again. Our favourite item on the menu was a concoction called Energy Me - a smoothie with copious amounts of fresh coconut, mango and banana.

El Diablo: For quesadillas oozing with cheese, crispy nachos and stuffed - beyond saturation point - burritos, El Diablo was my favourite spot for a Mexican spread.

Exploring the Culinary Scene

Chiang Mai's food scene extends beyond restaurants; it's an entire culinary adventure waiting to be explored.

Street Food Markets: The Chiang Mai Gate Market and Sunday Night Market are bustling with vendors selling local delicacies like Khao Soi (a spicy coconut curry noodle soup) and Mango Sticky Rice.

Cooking Classes: Immerse yourself in Thai cuisine by taking a cooking class at Thai Farm Cooking School or Asia Scenic Thai Cooking School. Learn to prepare authentic dishes using fresh ingredients picked from local farms.

Vegetarian and Vegan Options: With a significant Buddhist population, Chiang Mai offers numerous vegetarian and vegan restaurants like Anchan Vegetarian Restaurant and Free Bird Cafe.

Fast Internet In Chiang Mai

As a digital nomad internet is your lifeline; your river; your bloodstream. Without it (or with a weak connection) your business operations are literally shut down. In our residence apartment we had a reliable connection and when we wanted a change of scenery we could easily find cafes offering free Wi-fi.

Coworking Spaces and Cafes

Chiang Mai has become a hub for remote workers, and the city caters to this community with numerous coworking spaces and cafes.

Punspace: With locations in Nimmanhaemin and Tha Phae Gate, Punspace offers 24-hour access, high-speed internet, and a community of entrepreneurs.

MANA Coworking & Cafe: A cozy space combining work and leisure, perfect for networking.

CAMP (Creative and Meeting Place): Located in the Maya Lifestyle Shopping Center, this space is open 24/7 and provides free Wi-Fi with a purchase.

Yellow Coworking Space: Known for its modern design and facilities, it's a favorite among tech startups.

Cheap Apartments In Chiang Mai

Aside from food, having a comfortable/affordable place to hang my hat is absolutely paramount when I'm considering a base. Chiang Mai did not disappoint. Our residence apartment was a spacious studio equipped with a queen sized bed, television, fridge, desk space and air conditioning; moreover, our balcony offered stunning views of the city framed by a mountainous backdrop. A rooftop pool and gym was the cherry on top. A place like this must cost a fortune? We ended up spending under $10 a night for our room along with $2-3 a day on utilities. Definitely, value for money.

Finding the Perfect Apartment

Popular Areas:

Nimmanhaemin Road: Trendy and modern, close to universities and filled with cafes.

Old City: Surrounded by historic temples and walls, offering a more traditional vibe.

Santitham: A quieter neighborhood with a local feel and lower prices.

Rental Options:

Short-term Rentals: Ideal for those staying a few weeks to a few months. Websites like Airbnb and Booking.com are useful.

Long-term Rentals: For stays over six months, consider contacting local real estate agents or using Facebook groups.

Amenities to Consider:

Security: Look for places with 24-hour security or keycard access.

Facilities: Pools, gyms, and communal areas can enhance your living experience.

Furnished vs. Unfurnished: Furnished apartments save the hassle of buying furniture.

Sense Of Community In Chiang Mai

An important factor in choosing a place to base yourself is a sense of community and belonging. In Chiang Mai you'll find yourself surrounded by like minded individuals working remotely, teaching and/or starting up businesses. With such an entrepreneurial spirit it's inspiring to meet up with other expats pursuing a location independent lifestyle. Having the opportunity to bounce ideas off of one another certainly kept me on track with my goals and overall focus.

Networking and Social Events

Meetups and Workshops: Regular events on topics like digital marketing, coding, and personal development.

Language Exchanges: Improve your Thai or help others with English at events like Chiang Mai Language Exchange.

Social Clubs:

Chiang Mai Expats Club: Offers monthly meetings and social events.

Outdoor Enthusiasts Groups: Join hiking, biking, or climbing groups to explore nature and meet people.

Chiang Mai Charm Factor

Chiang Mai will charm your pants off. With its laid back pace of life you'll find yourself rubbing elbows with robed monks as you meander down serpentine side streets in search of a quaint little cafes. For the culture vulture, weekend markets and a regular stream of festivals and events will tickle your every fancy. For the party animal, pulsating nightlife is available where an endless flow of Chang beer is on tap.

I was fortunate enough to make Chiang Mai my home for several months. I'm eager to return next year for another stint with my parents. During my time in Chiang Mai I was able to stay on top of work online, feast on an incredible spread of food, live in comfortable apartment and connect with new friends. I ended up spending a mere faction of what it cost - on a monthly basis - compared to backpacking. For less than $1000 a month we lived in Chiang Mai experiencing a high quality of life. For the digital nomad, backpacker, retiree, traveller or aspiring entrepreneur I can't think of a better place to be.

Cultural Attractions

Temples (Wats):

Wat Chedi Luang: Known for its massive chedi (stupa) that was once the tallest structure in ancient Chiang Mai. Participate in a monk chat to learn about Buddhism.

Wat Phra That Doi Suthep: Perched on a mountain overlooking the city, it's one of the most sacred temples in Northern Thailand. The climb up the 306-step staircase is both a spiritual and physical journey.

Museums:

Chiang Mai City Arts & Cultural Centre: Provides insights into the city's history, culture, and development.

Lanna Folklife Museum: Showcases traditional Northern Thai life through exhibits of clothing, tools, and art.

Festivals

Loy Krathong and Yi Peng: Participate in releasing floating baskets and sky lanterns during this enchanting festival in November. The sight of thousands of lanterns illuminating the sky is unforgettable.

Songkran (Thai New Year): Held in April, it's the world's biggest water fight. Join locals and tourists in splashing water to wash away the previous year's misfortunes.

Flower Festival: Held in February, featuring vibrant parades, floral displays, and beauty pageants celebrating the region's botanical beauty.

Nightlife

Riverside Bars: Enjoy live music and riverside views at venues like The Riverside Bar & Restaurant and Good View Bar.

Nightclubs: Places like Zoe in Yellow and Warm Up Cafe offer dance floors, DJs, and a lively atmosphere.

Jazz Bars: North Gate Jazz Co-Op is famous for its live jazz performances, attracting both locals and expats.

Night Markets:

Sunday Walking Street: A pedestrian-only market offering handicrafts, street food, and live performances.

Night Bazaar: Open every night, it's a shopper's paradise for souvenirs, clothing, and artwork.

Health and Wellness

Chiang Mai is also a hub for those seeking to improve their well-being. The city offers a holistic approach to health, blending traditional Thai practices with modern wellness trends.

Yoga and Meditation

Yoga Studios:

Wild Rose Yoga Studio: Offers various styles of yoga in a serene environment, including Hatha, Vinyasa, and Yin yoga.

The Yoga Tree: Provides classes and workshops for all levels, along with dance and movement therapies.

Mahasiddha Yoga: Focuses on spiritual growth through Tantra yoga and meditation.

Meditation Retreats:

Wat Umong: A 700-year-old temple in the forest offering meditation classes and retreats. The tranquil setting with tunnels and a large pond enhances the experience.

Wat Ram Poeng (Tapotaram): Known for its intensive Vipassana meditation courses ranging from 10 days to several weeks.

Doi Suthep Vipassana Meditation Center: Provides structured meditation courses with accommodation and meals.

Traditional Thai Massage and Spas

Thai Massage Schools:

Thai Massage Conservation Club: Offers affordable massages performed by students under supervision.

Old Medicine Hospital (ITM): Learn Thai massage techniques or enjoy treatments from experienced practitioners.

Spas:

Oasis Spa: Luxurious treatments in a tranquil setting, offering packages like aromatherapy, herbal steam baths, and body scrubs.

Fah Lanna Spa: An award-winning spa with a range of traditional and modern therapies.

Lila Thai Massage: Offers traditional massages while supporting the rehabilitation of former female inmates.

Healthy Eating

Organic Markets:

Jing Jai Farmers Market: Open on weekends, featuring organic produce, homemade goods, and artisanal products.

Chamcha Market: A community market promoting sustainable living and healthy eating.

Health Food Stores:

Rimping Supermarket: Stocks organic products, imported goods, and health supplements.

Oh Kajhu Organic Farm Restaurant: Serves dishes made from produce grown on their own farm.

Fitness and Outdoor Activities

Gyms and Fitness Centers:

GoGym: Offers modern equipment, classes, and personal training.

CrossFit Chiang Mai: For high-intensity workouts and a supportive community.

Muay Thai Training:

Lanna Muay Thai Boxing Camp: Offers training for all levels, from beginners to professional fighters.

Santai Muay Thai Gym: Known for its experienced trainers and authentic training methods.

Cycling and Hiking:

Doi Suthep Mountain: Popular for hiking and cycling, with trails suitable for various fitness levels.

Huay Tung Tao Lake: A scenic spot for jogging, cycling, and picnicking.

Mental Health and Wellness

Counseling Services:

Chiang Mai Counseling: Offers professional counseling and therapy services in English.

NCS Counseling Center: Provides support for individuals, couples, and families.

Wellness Retreats:

The Pavana Chiang Mai Resort: Offers detox programs, wellness retreats, and holistic healing therapies.

Museflower Retreat & Spa: A sanctuary focusing on mind-body-spirit balance through yoga, meditation, and spa treatments.

Transportation in Chiang Mai

Getting around Chiang Mai is convenient and affordable. You've got options galore catering to different preferences.

Public Transportation

#### Cranbrook Travel Guide | BEST Things to do in Cranbrook, BC
Welcome to our Cranbrook Travel Guide—your starting point for one of the East Kootenays’ most quietly rewarding small cities in BC. Cranbrook is one of those easy-to-love places that subtly surprises you. Set in British Columbia’s East Kootenay region, it makes a great base for outdoorsy days, scenic drives, and a little dose of culture and history between hikes. Think mountain views, wildlife-y trails, and a downtown that’s compact enough to explore without overplanning.

Nomadic Samuel, Audrey Bergner of That Backpacker, and their daughter Aurelia enjoy a peaceful family afternoon in one of Cranbrook’s shaded city parks. This easygoing stop between filming sessions shows the slower, family-friendly rhythm that makes the East Kootenays so enjoyable to explore.

And honestly? If you just drive through, Cranbrook might not wow you right away. That was my first impression too. But once we slowed down to explore the historic centre and wandered the surrounding parks and trails, the place really clicked. The vibe is calm, family-friendly, and refreshingly unhurried—the kind of destination where the to-do list feels doable instead of exhausting. What sealed it for us was the people: locals who left for a bit and came back because they loved and missed this corner of BC.

In this guide, we’ll focus on the best things to do in Cranbrook, prioritizing the highlights we experienced ourselves, then rounding it out with a few essential first-timer picks we didn’t get to. Expect a mix of heritage and local museums, easy nature escapes close to town, and simple add-ons just outside the city that can turn a quick stopover into a genuinely worthwhile mini-adventure.

This classic stone arch is one of Cranbrook’s simple, satisfying “you’ve arrived” moments. We loved how it sets the tone for a relaxed Kootenay basecamp with mountains, parks, and heritage close by. It’s a quick photo stop if you’re driving in on Hwy 3 or Hwy 95.

Destination Snapshot

TopicQuick AnswerLocationSoutheastern British Columbia, Canada (Kootenay Rockies region), 3½ hours southwest of Banff.Known ForSunshine & Scenery: Sunniest climate in BC; Rocky & Purcell mountain views. Heritage: Historic downtown & railway museum (vintage train cars); nearby Fort Steele 1890s gold rush town. Outdoors: Hiking/biking in a 2,000-ha Community Forest; wildlife at Elizabeth Lake; skiing in winter (Kimberley).Population~20,500 (city) – largest in the East Kootenays.VibeFriendly small-town feel with modern amenities. Welcoming to families (stroller-friendly trails, playgrounds) and outdoor enthusiasts. A “basecamp” city for Kootenay adventures.WeatherWarm, dry summers (highs ~27°C/81°F); cold, snowy winters (perfect for ski trips). Over 2,200 hours of sunshine annually (pack sunscreen!).Budget$$ – Moderate. Many parks and trails are free; dining and lodging are reasonably priced compared to tourist hotspots. Great value for the experiences.Best TimeSummer for hiking, biking, lakes, and attractions (all open). Fall for crisp weather and golden larch trees. Winter for skiing & snowy charm (nearby ski hills). Spring for birdwatching and fewer crowds.Getting ThereFly into Cranbrook (YXC) airport (10 minutes from downtown) or drive 4 hours from Calgary. A car is recommended to explore parks and day trips.Key EventsMay: Children’s Festival. June: Spirit of the Rockies festival. July 1: Canada Day festivities. August: Pro Rodeo. Year-round concerts at Key City Theatre.Nearby DestinationsKimberley (25 km north, Bavarian alpine town), Fernie (approx. 1 hour east, skiing), Waterton/Glacier National Parks (2–3 hours), USA border (1 hour south).

🧭 Quick Booking: Your Cranbrook Travel Essentials ✈️

If you’re planning your trip to the East Kootenays, these are the four bookings that make everything smoother — your base, adventures, transport, and freedom.

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit

🔖 What to Book💡 Why It’s Worth It🔗 Quick Link🎟️ Tours & ExperiencesSkip the logistics and explore Cranbrook, Kimberley & the Rockies with expert local guides👉 Browse Cranbrook & Kootenay Tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & StaysStay close to dining, lakes & heritage sites — perfect bases for day trips👉 Find Cranbrook Hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car RentalsFreedom to explore Fernie, Kimberley & hidden mountain lakes at your own pace👉 Compare Car Rentals on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus TicketsReliable routes for regional travel through the Kootenays and beyond👉 Check Bus Routes on BusBud

https://youtu.be/JV-ON-tbFJY
Things to Do in CRANBROOK, BC 🌲 Cranbook Travel Guide 🇨🇦 Is This The Best Family Trip in British Columbia? From our YouTube channel Samuel & Audrey

Things To Do in Cranbrook, British Columbia (From Our Travel Video)

(These are the experiences we personally enjoyed during our visit – complete with our own tips and impressions. We traveled as a family with a baby, so you’ll notice many of these are family-friendly. We’ve listed activities first, followed by food & drink spots.)

The Kootenay Trout Hatchery was one of our favorite easy, family-friendly stops near Cranbrook. It’s a quick, free visit where you can learn about local fish species and see the rearing ponds up close—an ideal add-on if you’re already exploring the East Kootenays.

Kootenay Trout Hatchery (Freshwater Fisheries Visitor Centre)

Why go: 

To learn about local fish species and even feed giant trout! We kicked off our Cranbrook trip with a short drive to the Kootenay Trout Hatchery – about 20 minutes outside the city. It’s a one-of-a-kind, kid-friendly experience where you can observe every stage of a trout’s life cycle. Outside, we peered into rearing ponds teeming with huge trout and had fun tossing fish feed (bring a few quarters for fish food). Inside the visitor center, you'll find informational displays. Our baby was wide-eyed at the tanks. And Audrey and I learned a lot from the interactive displays.

These rainbow trout were one of our favourite close-up moments at the Kootenay Trout Hatchery near Cranbrook. It’s a simple, surprisingly fun stop where you can see the fish up close and get a quick dose of local freshwater education whilst having a chance to feed them.

Practical info: 

Open 9am–3pm daily, with self-guided tours year-round. Admission is free (donations welcome). In summer, outreach staff offer educational programs, and kids can try catch-and-release fishing in the stocked pond (rods available May–Aug). Budget about 30 minutes to 1 hour here – we spent less than an hour ourselves and that was plenty with a baby. It’s an easy add-on if you’re heading to Fort Steele.

Who it’s for: 

Families, nature lovers, anyone curious about fish or looking for a fun free activity. Kids especially love feeding the trout – our little one was giggling at the splashes. 

Audrey Bergner of That Backpacker pauses to take in the quiet beauty of Elizabeth Lake Bird Sanctuary in Cranbrook. The sanctuary’s flat paths and peaceful marsh views make it ideal for an unhurried stroll or gentle wildlife-watching stop right in town.

Elizabeth Lake Bird Sanctuary

Why go: 

Birdwatching and tranquil nature walks right at the city’s edge. Elizabeth Lake is a 5.9-hectare wetland sanctuary on Cranbrook’s west end. And more importantly it was our first stop in town. After a long drive, the gentle walking trail here was the perfect introduction – we followed a level path through willow bushes leading to the lake. We immediately felt far from the city in this peaceful spot. If you enjoy wildlife, this is a must-do: we spotted ducks paddling in the reeds and were amazed by how many deer wandered out of the woods to graze, utterly unbothered by our presence. Birders can look for herons, eagles, painted turtles, and more (over 100 species have been recorded). There are benches and picnic tables and lookout points along the trail. So we took a break to let our baby practice crawling.

Nomadic Samuel heads up to the elevated wooden lookout at Elizabeth Lake Bird Sanctuary with baby Aurelia riding along in the hiking backpack. This quiet viewpoint is an easy stop on the sanctuary’s loop and offers wide-open wetland and mountain views perfect for families.

Practical info: 

The trail is flat and baby backpack-friendly (we managed easily with ours). A full loop around the lake is only a couple of kilometers. Plan 30–60 minutes for a stroll. Tack on more time to relax and watch wildlife. Best times are early morning or dusk when animals are most active – we visited in the late afternoon and saw plenty of deer in broad daylight. There’s a tiny parking area by the trailhead. Entry is free. One thing to note: no boating or swimming allowed, to protect the habitat This sanctuary is all about enjoying nature quietly. It’s great for families (Aurelia loved the fresh air) or anyone needing a peaceful walk after hours in the car.

Who it’s for: 

Birdwatchers, photographers, families with young kids, and travelers looking to stretch their legs in nature. Elizabeth Lake showcases Cranbrook’s wild side literally within city limits – a rare find and totally free.

Nomadic Samuel explores the Sylvan Lake section of Cranbrook Community Forest with baby Aurelia in tow, enjoying one of the city’s most accessible nature escapes. The blend of open meadows and forested slopes makes this an ideal family-friendly hike close to town.

Cranbrook Community Forest (Sylvan Lake Trail)

Why go: 

To get a taste of the Kootenay outdoors without straying far from town. Cranbrook Community Forest is a massive 2,000-hectare forested area on the city’s edge, laced with over 100 km of trails for hiking and biking. We love hiking as family, so we headed here in the afternoon. The trail network is extensive. But we chose the path toward Sylvan Lake – a small pond tucked in the woods about 3 km in. The hike was easy and shaded by towering pines and firs. Along the way, we noticed the forest’s health with countless pine seedlings lining the trail (a sign of good regeneration, which even our baby seemed to appreciate, cooing “oh ee oh ee” from her carrier!).

Reaching “Sylvan Lake” was a bit anticlimactic – since we visited in late summer, the lake was more of desert - completely dry at that time. So don’t expect a swim! Still, the journey was worth it. We enjoyed the serenity of the forest, the scent of sun-warmed pine needles, and the fact we had the trail practically to ourselves (we saw only a few folks on our hike). We took a rest on a log, gave our wee little one a snack, and soaked in the quiet atmosphere.

Audrey Bergner wanders beneath towering pines on the Sylvan Lake Trail, one of the signature routes in Cranbrook Community Forest. The shaded paths and gentle grades make this a great choice for a relaxed hike with plenty of opportunities to soak in the scenery.

Practical info: 

The Community Forest has multiple access points; a parking lot and trail signboard. The trail to Sylvan Lake and back was roughly 5 km round-trip, which took us about 1.5 hours at a leisurely pace. Best time to go is morning or early evening for cooler temps and better chances of wildlife (deer and birds are common). The forest is open year-round – popular for snowshoeing and cross-country skiing in winter. Cost: Free

Who it’s for: 

Everyone. Families. Hikers and mountain bikers of all abilities – with trails ranging from easy interpretive loops to slighlty uphill climbs. Families can certainly enjoy short walks here too (we saw local families biking with kids near the trailhead). If you want a quick nature escape or a panoramic view without driving far, the Community Forest is ideal. 

Nomadic Samuel and baby Aurelia explore one of the restored train cars at the Cranbrook History Centre, offering a glimpse into early rail life in the Kootenays. The museum’s collection of heritage coaches and cabooses makes it an engaging stop for families and history lovers alike.

Cranbrook History Centre (Railway Museum & Historic Trains)

Why go: 

To step back in time and experience the golden age of Canadian rail travel. The Cranbrook History Centre was a highlight of our trip – it’s both a museum of local history and home to a remarkable collection of heritage railway cars. In fact, this museum has a National Historic designation for preserving the glory days of the railroad, including elaborately restored 1920s Canadian Pacific train cars If you have any interest in history, trains, or antiques, you’ll be in heaven here. We certainly were!

The main attraction is touring the vintage railcars. You can only visit the inside of these trains on a guided tour (for safety and preservation). With our infant daughter in tow, we opted for the shortest option – the “so called toddler tour,” a 20-minute guided walkthrough of a few cars. It was perfect for us. In that brief time, a knowledgeable guide led us through the luxurious 1929 Trans Canada Limited sleeper car and dining car, pointing out details like the ornate inlaid wood paneling and plush period furnishings. We could easily imagine the elite travelers of the 1930s moving between these cars, dining in style as mountains rolled past. Our baby Aurelia loved the gentle rocking sensation when walking through the train – and we appreciated getting through the highlights before she got squirmy.

This beautifully restored dining car at the Cranbrook History Centre offers a glimpse into the golden age of passenger rail travel. With polished wood, soft lighting, and carefully set tables, it’s one of the museum’s standout interiors and a highlight for visitors interested in train history.

If you have more time (and older kids or no kids), the Centre offers longer tours ranging from 45 minutes to 2 hours that cover more railcars and in-depth history. Beyond the trains, the museum’s static exhibits are worth a look – we browsed displays on local Ktunaxa First Nation culture and the pioneering days of Cranbrook. Don’t miss the impressive model railway downstairs: an elaborate diorama of the region’s rail lines that volunteers keep running. We saw mini trains chugging through tiny mountain towns – a delight for kids and adults alike.

Practical info: 

Located downtown, the History Centre is open year-round (hours vary by season). Admission: You can enter the museum galleries for a fee (around $16 for two adults, less for kids/seniors – verify current rates). The railcar tours are an additional cost, typically booked as timed guided tours (consider reserving your spot during peak summer season). If you have a toddler or baby, ask for the abbreviated tour like we did. The staff were very accommodating.

Who it’s for: 

History buffs, train enthusiasts, and families. Kids who love Thomas the Tank Engine will be thrilled to see real life “coaches” and engines. This is one of Cranbrook’s signature attractions – a nod to how the railway put this town on the map – and absolutely worth the stop.

The former 1929 City of Cranbrook Fire Hall has been transformed into Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap, a beloved gastropub that keeps the building’s heritage charm alive. It’s a popular stop on the downtown self-guided walking tour and a great place to grab burgers, beers, and local atmosphere.

Historic Cranbrook Walk Downtown

Why Go:

We had a slightly negative impression of Cranbrook from the highway. But the historic downtown is where the city’s personality really lives. I personally did a solo wander while Audrey and baby Aurelia relaxed at the park. This was the moment Cranbrook really clicked for me. The heritage buildings, small-town charm, and especially the murals add a surprising dose of colour and character that you don’t see from the commercial strip.

This striking locomotive mural is one of the standout pieces along Cranbrook’s heritage walking tour, paying tribute to the city’s legacy as a key railway hub in the Kootenays. The detailed artwork brings historic rail travel to life as you explore the downtown core.

Practical Info:

Best time of day: Morning for quiet streets and clean photo light, or golden hour for warmer tones on brick buildings and mural shots.

How long to budget: 45–90 minutes for an easy loop; longer if you stop for coffee or pop into shops.

Cost feel: Free (unless you snack/shop).

Family notes: Great as a split-plan option—one of you can do a quick downtown stroll while the other does park time.

Who It’s For:

First-timers who want the “real” Cranbrook vibe, photographers, mural lovers, and anyone who enjoys low-effort, high-reward wandering. Also perfect for travelers who want a calm, walkable activity between bigger outdoor adventures.

Audrey Bergner takes baby Aurelia for a peaceful lakeside stroll at Idlewild Park, a favourite local spot for relaxed walks and family outings. With its calm water, shaded pathways, and easy access, the park is a great choice for visitors looking for a gentle nature break in Cranbrook.

Idlewild Park

Why Go:

This was the most tranquil and relaxing of all our outdoor stops in Cranbrook. The vibe is simply calm, peaceful, and wonderfully family-friendly. Audrey and I loved that it felt like an easy, everyday local park—exactly the kind of place that makes you understand why people enjoy living here. It also paired beautifully with traveling with a baby: open space, a calm pace, and lots of room to breathe.

Idlewild Park reveals its quiet beauty from above, with forested slopes, calm water, and a covered dock tucked along the shoreline. This high vantage point highlights why the park is a favourite spot for relaxed walks, stroller-friendly loops, and easy nature time close to downtown Cranbrook.

Practical Info:

Best time of day: Late morning or early evening for the softest light and calmest atmosphere.

How long to budget: 45–60 minutes for a relaxing visit; 1.0–1.5 hours if you add a picnic and playground time.

Cost feel: Free.

On-the-ground feel from our visit: We came geared for baby-friendly park time—picnic blanket for crawling, and it’s an easy place to slow the pace when you’re traveling with little ones.

Accessibility/family ease: We noticed how much of our Cranbrook visit was naturally stroller-friendly, and Idlewild fits that low-stress, family outing rhythm.

Bonus pairing: This park connects nicely with the broader green-space vibe in town and can be a gentle warm-up before a Community Forest walk.

Who It’s For:

Families, anyone traveling with a baby or toddler, slow-travelers, and those who want a peaceful reset between hikes. If your trip goal is “small city, big breathing room,” this is one of the best places to feel that.

Fort Steele’s striking 1898 façade makes a beautiful backdrop for a family wander, with Audrey and baby Aurelia exploring the historic town at an easy stroller pace. The wide paths and open grounds make this one of the most relaxed heritage sites to visit with little ones in tow.

Day Trip: Fort Steele Heritage Town

Why go: 

To experience a living history town from the 1890s gold rush era. Fort Steele is an open-air heritage park just a 10-20 minute drive northeast of Cranbrook, and it ended up being one of our favorite excursions. Walking into Fort Steele is like stepping into an old Wild West movie set – except everything is real and restored. There are more than 60 heritage buildings (homes, shops, a schoolhouse, blacksmith, etc.) populated with costumed interpreters who bring pioneer life to life. We saw horse-drawn wagons rolling down the dirt street, townsfolk in period dress, and even farm animals (the site keeps heritage breeds like Clydesdale horses, sheep, and chickens).

We spent a half-day exploring here. A few highlights from our visit: we watched an old-fashioned blacksmithing demo and peeked into shops like the general store and bakery (yes, they sell fresh baked goods – the cinnamon buns smelled heavenly). As a history nerd, I loved the museum in the old hotel, which showcased artifacts and had an area where you can dress up in Victorian costumes. Perhaps the most memorable moment was ducking into the Victorian-era “Dentist Office” which advertised “Painless Dentistry” – inside, the antique dental tools looked anything but painless, giving us a good laugh (and some chills).

Fort Steele is very family-friendly. Kids can run around the wide-open grounds, interact with gentle farm animals, and learn history in a fun way. Aurelia enjoyed the sights and sounds from her stroller – though she was too young to participate.

This distinctive wooden tower is one of Fort Steele Heritage Town’s most recognizable structures, offering a glimpse into the architectural style of frontier-era British Columbia. Set above sweeping views of forest and mountains, it captures the quiet, wide-open feel of the region.

Practical info: 

Open year-round, with peak programming in summer (heritage interpreters, shows, rides) and reduced hours/activities in winter (verify schedule on their website). Admission is required (approx. $17.95 adult, $12.95 child; family passes available – verify current pricing). Wagon rides and other special activities may cost a few extra dollars. Time needed: At least 3–4 hours to experience most of the buildings, possibly a full day if you watch all the demos and tours. There is a café on-site for lunch (plus the bakery and an ice cream shop in summer), so you won’t go hungry.

Who it’s for: 

All ages, but especially families and history enthusiasts. This is a must-do day trip if you’re in Cranbrook. It’s fun, educational, and provides great context about the region’s frontier past. 

Samuel couldn’t resist trying for a strike at Encore Brewing Co., a fun local hangout that pairs craft beer with bowling, arcade games, and pizza. The mix of retro lighting and lively atmosphere makes it an easy spot to unwind after a day of exploring Cranbrook.

Encore Brewing Co. – Beer, Bowling, Pizza & Arcade

Why go: 

For a dose of pure fun in the evening. Craft beer and pizza plus bowling under one roof. We hadn’t planned on going bowling in Cranbrook (it wasn’t on our radar at all), but a happy coincidence changed that. While having lunch at the Fire Hall pub, we noticed a poster about Encore Brewing in the bathroom (of all places!) advertising a special pizza + bowling special. Bowling and pizza? Say no more! We decided on the spot to make it our “date night” activity – and we’re so glad we did.

Encore Brewing Co. turned out to be the place to be on at night in Cranbrook. It’s essentially a modern entertainment center meets restaurant meets brewpub. The vibe is fantastic: imagine locals sipping house-made ales and families and friends cheering strikes in the bowling lanes, and the sounds of arcade games pinging in the background. We grabbed a lane and waited for our pizza to arrive. While we bowled (rusty skills and all – neither of us had bowled in like 15 years), we also enjoyed a tasty pizza delivered right to our lane and I washed it down with one of Encore’s beers. Pizza, beer, and bowling – does it get any better? Halfway through our game, our baby fell asleep in her stroller. This gave us a rare chance to feel like kids ourselves.

Encore’s bowling alley has a fun, welcoming vibe, and this close-up look at the marbled blue bowling balls sets the scene before a game even gets started. The warm lights and soft reflections along the polished lanes make it an easy place to unwind.

Practical info: 

Encore Brewing is located in downtown Cranbrook. It’s open in the afternoons and evenings. Bowling costs around $40 per hour for a lane (up to 6 people), plus shoe rentals – pretty reasonable when split with a group. They often have specials on certain nights (like trivia nights, etc.). The beer selection features their own brews (including the pale ale) and the food menu (of course) includes pizza. 

Who it’s for: 

Honestly, anyone who enjoys fun. It’s a perfect rainy day or evening activity. Even if you’re not a big drinker or a serious bowler, the combination of activities makes for a memorable night out. Encore is “where adults can be kids again”.

Samuel couldn’t resist ordering one of Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap’s signature gourmet burgers, served inside Cranbrook’s beautifully restored 1929 fire hall. The playful presentation and hearty stack make it a must-try stop for hungry travelers exploring downtown.

Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap (Heritage Gastropub)

Why go: 

To enjoy craft beer and epic burgers in a historic fire station. The Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap quickly became our favorite dining spot in Cranbrook. Housed in the city’s old fire hall (built in 1929), this gastropub oozes character – from the red brick facade to many original features. Talk about dining with a sense of place! We stopped by for lunch and were immediately impressed by the welcoming, family-friendly atmosphere. Locals were hanging out on the patio and digging into towering plates of burgers.

The menu is all about elevated pub food with Kootenay flair. We couldn’t resist trying their signature burgers. And wow – they were freakin' huge and delicious. I had a “loaded” Burger which came with two patties, goat cheese, avocado, and bacon – it was so massive I could barely fit it in my mouth. Every bite was juicy and flavorful (totally worth feeling like I needed a nap afterward!). Audrey tried another signature burger – topped with fried brie cheese, chutney salsa, and truffle mayo – an unusual combo that she absolutely loved. I washed it down with a pint of Fernie Brewing Company on tap. Despite the hearty portions, we somehow made room for a slice of key lime pie to share – sweet, tart, tangy and fresh, a perfect finale.

Beyond the food, the Fire Hall’s vibe is on point. It manages to be both a family-friendly pub and a craft beer haven. We visited at lunch with our baby and felt totally comfortable. The staff were super friendly – in fact, our server shared that he had moved back to Cranbrook after years away because he missed the community, which says a lot about the town. 

The bar at Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap is one of the most inviting spaces in Cranbrook, blending heritage fire hall features with a modern craft-beer lineup. With its bright tile, warm wood tones, and sprawling chalkboard menu, it’s a great spot to sample local taps.

Practical info: 

Located in downtown Cranbrook on 11th Ave it's easy to find. They’re open for both lunch and dinner. Prices are reasonable for the quality/portion. They have a great local BC beer selection. We didn’t need a reservation at lunchtime visiting slightly offseason. Best time to go: Lunch for a relaxed meal. The patio is lovely in summer and early fall.

Who it’s for: 

Everyone – couples, families, solo travelers, you name it. If you’re a craft beer lover or burger enthusiast, you’ll especially appreciate it. The Fire Hall delivers. It’s one of those places that makes you feel like a temporary local. 

This hearty Pad Thai from Family Thai Restaurant hits all the right notes—tangy, savoury, and just the right amount of crunch from the peanuts and sprouts. It’s a generous plate ideal for a post-exploring meal, served with fresh toppings you can mix to taste.

Family Thai Restaurant (Authentic Thai Cuisine)

Why go: 

A taste of Thailand in the Kootenays. After days of typical road trip food, we were craving something different – and having lived in Thailand for a while, Audrey and I have a soft spot for Thai cuisine. To our delight, Cranbrook has Family Thai Restaurant, a cozy little spot that serves up very authentic Thai flavors. It was our first dinner in town and hit the spot.

This is a family-run restaurant (as the name suggests), and when we walked in, we were greeted with warm smiles and the delicious aroma of stir-fry and spices. The menu covered all the Thai classics. We went all-out and ordered two of our favorites: Pad Thai and a Green Coconut Curry (Thai spicy level). The pad thai came out piping hot, with that perfect balance of tangy tamarind and peanut sweetness – it took us right back to the street stalls of Chiang Mai. The portion was generous, and they didn’t shy away from authenticity. But the real adventure was the green curry. We asked for it spicy and oh boy, they delivered – it was fiery! Rich, coconut-creamy, loaded with meat, eggplant, and basil, and a slow heat that had Audrey sniffing and reaching for water. “Thai spicy” in Cranbrook is no joke – which made us incredibly happy.

This fragrant green coconut curry at Family Thai Restaurant is comfort in a bowl—creamy, aromatic, and layered with tender meat, bamboo shoots, and bright herbs. Paired with jasmine rice, it’s a satisfying choice for anyone craving authentic Thai flavours in Cranbrook.

Practical info: 

Family Thai is located on Cranbrook Street North (the main drag). It’s a modest, unassuming place with simple décor and just a few tables – cozy ambiance and very clean. They do a brisk takeout business too. Prices are very reasonable and portions were ample. 

Who it’s for: 

Anyone who loves Thai food or just wants a break from burgers and pub grub. Vegetarians will find options (tofu can be substituted in many dishes). It’s family-friendly. After days of Canadian cuisine, our taste buds were thrilled to have that burst of lemongrass, chili, and lime. For Audrey and I, an unexpected gem in Cranbrook.

We visited St. Eugene Mission Resort at golden hour, when the gardens glow and the historic stone building looks especially grand. Audrey and baby Aurelia enjoyed a peaceful walk along the flower-lined paths. It’s a beautiful stop for travellers interested in history, nature, and scenic photography.

St. Eugene Mission Resort (Historic Hotel & Golf Course)

Why go: 

To stay (or play) at a beautifully transformed historic site – equal parts luxury resort, golf destination, and cultural experience. Audrey and I ended our Cranbrook visit with a night at St. Eugene Resort, and it was a memorable capstone to the trip. This magnificent Spanish-colonial style building was once the St. Eugene Mission School (a residential school for Indigenous children, operating until 1970). Rather than let the place languish, the Ktunaxa Nation reclaimed and restored it into a upscale resort – turning a dark chapter of history into a positive, healing space . As a guest, you’re not only enjoying a lovely hotel, but also witnessing a story of resilience and reconciliation. A quote from Elder Mary Paul hangs in the lobby: “Since it was within the St. Eugene Mission School that the culture of the Kootenay Indian was taken away, it should be within that building that it is returned.” – and you really feel that spirit of reclamation throughout the property.

On arrival, we were struck by the grandeur of the place set against the Rocky Mountains. The rooms were comfortable and historic. We took an evening stroll around the grounds: there’s a stunning 18-hole golf course (one of 7 championship courses in the area), and the sunset over the greens with the Mission building in the background was photo-worthy. Even if you don’t golf, the grounds are worth walking. You can also visit the small on-site Interpretive Centre which shares the history of the Mission school and the Ktunaxa people.

For dinner and entertainment, St. Eugene has several options: we dined at one of the golf restaurant which served local fare. You can also try your luck at the Casino of the Rockies attached to the resort. The resort also features an outdoor pool and hot tubs (open seasonally) and a spa, which unfortunately we didn’t have time to use. Our biggest regret was no fully enjoying all of the amenities.

Our stay at St. Eugene Mission Resort included a bright and comfortable room with two inviting beds and warm wood accents. The seating nook by the window quickly became our spot to unwind after sightseeing around Cranbrook. A restful base for exploring the region.

➡️ Check St. Eugene rates & availability on Booking.com

Practical info: 

St. Eugene Resort is about a 10 to 20 minute drive north of Cranbrook (and just a few minutes from the airport). Accommodations: It’s a popular wedding and golf resort, so book ahead especially in summer. Rooms range from around $150–$250+ CAD per night depending on season and room type – a fair price for the quality and setting. Even if you don’t stay overnight, visitors are welcome to come dine at the restaurants or play the casino and golf course (tee times for the public are available). 

Who it’s for: 

Couples seeking a unique stay, golfers, history and culture enthusiasts, and anyone looking for a tranquil retreat. Families are welcome too (they have spacious rooms and the pool to entertain kids). 

🏨 Where to Stay in Cranbrook (Our Top Hotel Picks)

⭐️ Quick Booking Box: Cranbrook Hotels (Compare Rates)

PickBest forVibeBooking link🏆🏨 Top PickFirst-timers who want an easy, reliable baseComfortable “no-regrets” stayCompare stays at Prestige Rocky Mountain Resort Cranbrook (Booking.com)💎🏰 Luxury Stay“Make it a treat” nights (views + resort feel)Historic resort energyCheck rates at St. Eugene Golf Resort & Casino (Booking.com)🏙️🛏️ Mid-RangeDowntown convenience + walkable vibesHistoric building, simple + centralSee availability at The Baker Hotel (Booking.com)💰🛣️ BudgetRoad-trippers + practical over fancySimple, wallet-friendlyFind deals at Days Inn by Wyndham Cranbrook (Booking.com)

🔎🏨 Want to browse all options instead?

Compare all Cranbrook hotels on Booking.com

Samuel capped off the afternoon with a crisp Fernie Brewing Company pint at Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap, one of Cranbrook’s most welcoming gastropubs. The historic setting and cold craft beer made for the perfect post-exploration pause. A relaxed moment in a lively local favourite

🎟️ Book a Guided Tour or Experience

If you want to explore beyond simple sightseeing, a guided experience lets you hit the region’s best without planning stress.

✨ Great options near Cranbrook include:⛰️ Guided East Kootenay outdoor tours🏞️ Wildlife & scenic drives🚴‍♀️ Bike + nature interpretive tours🍷 Culinary or heritage experiences

✅ See top-rated Cranbrook & East Kootenay tours on Viator

More Amazing Things to Do in Cranbrook (We Didn’t Cover in the Video)

(Cranbrook and its surrounds have plenty more to offer than what we personally managed to see. Here are some additional top attractions and activities to round out your itinerary – including iconic sights, outdoor adventures, and local favorites that we plan to check out on our next visit!)

Quick Picks for First-Timers

Key City Theatre

Why it’s worth it: A fun, low-effort evening plan if you want culture without another hike.

Who it suits: Couples, rainy-day travelers, anyone needing a rest day.

Best time of day: Evening.

How long to budget: 2–3 hours.

Cost feel: $$.

Verify before publishing: Show calendar, ticket pricing.

Outdoors + Parks (Close to Town)

Eager Hill Viewpoint (Community Forest)

Why it’s worth it: A more rewarding viewpoint-focused alternative to longer forest wanders.

Who it suits: Hikers who want a short but “worth it” climb.

Best time of day: Morning or sunset.

How long to budget: 1.5–2.5 hours.

Cost feel: Free.

Verify before publishing: Trail conditions, route map.

Family-Friendly Bonus Stops

Jimsmith Lake Provincial Park

Why it’s worth it: Quick swim/picnic option on warm days.

Who it suits: Families, summer visitors.

Best time of day: Afternoon.

How long to budget: 1–3 hours.

Cost feel: Free (day-use).

Verify before publishing: Seasonal water conditions, facilities.

Easy Day Trips Near Cranbrook

Kimberley Platzl

Why it’s worth it: A quirky, walkable, food-and-shops break from Cranbrook’s outdoors-heavy rhythm.

Who it suits: First-timers, families, anyone wanting a cute small-town vibe.

Best time of day: Afternoon into dinner.

How long to budget: 3–5 hours.

Cost feel: $–$$.

Marysville Falls

Why it’s worth it: High payoff for minimal effort.

Who it suits: Everyone.

Best time of day: Morning.

How long to budget: 20–40 minutes.

Cost feel: Free.

Wasa Lake (Warm-Weather Play)

Why it’s worth it: One of the easiest “lake day” upgrades in the East Kootenays.

Who it suits: Summer travelers, families.

Best time of day: Midday.

How long to budget: Half day.

Cost feel: Free (day-use).

Verify before publishing: Seasonal access, water temps.

Big Adventure Pick

Fisher Peak (Expert-Level)

Why it’s worth it: A true local brag-worthy summit day.

Who it suits: Experienced hikers only.

Best time of day: Early start.

How long to budget: Full day.

Cost feel: Free.

Verify before publishing: Route conditions, glacier/snow status, trailhead access.

🏨 Where to Stay in Cranbrook (Compare Best Rates) 🛏️

Choosing your base can set the tone for your whole visit — whether it’s downtown convenience or scenic stays near the mountains.

🚶 Staying downtown → 🍽️ Close to dining, museums, and the heritage walk

🦆 Near Elizabeth Lake → 🌿 Tranquil nature + stroller-friendly walks

🏔️ Near ski areas / Community Forest → 🥾 Best for outdoor adventurers

👉 Compare Hotels in Cranbrook on Booking.com

💡 Tip: Cranbrook fills up quickly in summer and event weekends — book ahead and use free cancellation if your plans change.

Fast Planning Grid

ExperienceBest ForTime NeededCost FeelSeasonWhy It’s Worth ItDowntown Heritage WalkFirst-timers1–1.5 hrsFreeYear-roundThe “real” Cranbrook vibeIdlewild ParkFamilies1 hrFreeSpring–FallEasy, calm outdoor resetEager HillShort-view hikes2 hrsFreeSpring–FallQuick reward elevationKey City TheatreEvening plans2–3 hrs$$Year-roundGreat rainy-day upgradeKimberley PlatzlDay-trippers3–5 hrs$–$$Year-roundCute alpine town energyMarysville FallsQuick nature stop30 minFreeBest spring/summerHuge reward for little effortWasa LakeSwim/picnicHalf dayFreeSummerClassic Kootenay lake dayFisher PeakAdvanced hikersFull dayFreeSummerLegendary local summit

#### Cranbrook vs Fernie: Which East Kootenay Town Is Better? (Pros, Cons + Our Verdict)
We road-tripped into the East Kootenays from southern Alberta in early September—peak patio season, late-summer light, and that magical window where it still feels like summer but the crowds have wandered back to work/school. We had the baby with us, a stroller, a backpack carrier, and exactly the kind of optimism that makes you say things like “Sure, we can squeeze in one more stop.”

Our family exploring Fernie and Cranbrook, British Columbia—two unforgettable East Kootenay towns with totally different personalities. Fernie offers dramatic mountain scenery, while Cranbrook surprises with quirky venues, food, and heritage charm.

If you’re trying to choose between Cranbrook and Fernie, here’s the short version: Fernie is the mountain town you put on a postcard. Cranbrook is the practical hub that keeps surprising you—especially if you’re traveling as a family or you like variety. We loved both, for different reasons, and the “better” pick depends on what you’re chasing: ski resort energy, mellow lakeside stroller loops, brewery patios, museums, or a basecamp that makes day trips easy.

https://youtu.be/RoRAhuPKiRE
First up on our BC road trip was Fernie! Please check out this video and then the Cranbrook one below to help you decide which town to visit.

https://youtu.be/JV-ON-tbFJY
And here is our Cranbrook travel guide on Samuel and Audrey YouTube channel. I think you'll notice that both places we visited on our BC road trip are fascinating.

Quick Verdict table 

If your trip priority is…PickWhy it wins (in plain English)A classic mountain-town “wow” factorFernieThe scenery hits fast, the town feels purpose-built for outdoors, and it’s easy to have a full trip without leaving town.A flexible base with more everyday servicesCranbrookIt’s the region’s hub: great for families, road-trippers, and anyone who wants variety without overplanning.Ski-first weekend energyFernieResort-town identity and big mountain vibes.Shoulder-season value + lower stressCranbrookEasier logistics, lots of space, and a “stack short wins” itinerary style.Easy nature + short activities with a baby/kidsTieFernie has simple in-town loops; Cranbrook has wetlands, parks, and easy stops that layer beautifully.The best overall tripBothCranbrook for variety + convenience, Fernie for the epic finale.If you can only visit oneFernieIt’s simply more epic: stronger scenery and the full mountain-town feel.

🧭 Quick Booking: Your Cranbrook Travel Essentials ✈️

If you’re planning your trip to the East Kootenays, these are the four bookings that make everything smoother — your base, adventures, transport, and freedom.

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit

🔖 What to Book💡 Why It’s Worth It🔗 Quick Link🎟️ Tours & ExperiencesSkip the logistics and explore Cranbrook, Kimberley & the Rockies with expert local guides👉 Browse Cranbrook & Kootenay Tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & StaysStay close to dining, lakes & heritage sites — perfect bases for day trips👉 Find Cranbrook Hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car RentalsFreedom to explore Fernie, Kimberley & hidden mountain lakes at your own pace👉 Compare Car Rentals on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus TicketsReliable routes for regional travel through the Kootenays and beyond👉 Check Bus Routes on BusBud

Fernie vs Cranbrook in one frame: a Fernie Brewing Company pint after a day outside, versus Encore Brewing in Cranbrook where the beer comes with bowling lanes and pizza—proof that the East Kootenays can do both “mountain-town chill” and “quirky night out.”

🧭 Quick Booking: Your Fernie Travel Essentials ✈️

If you’re planning your trip to the East Kootenays, these are the four bookings that make everything smoother — your base, adventures, transport, and freedom.

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit

🔖 What to Book💡 Why It’s Worth It🔗 Quick Link🎟️ Tours & ExperiencesSkip the logistics and explore Fernie + the Elk Valley with local guides (easy wins when weather turns or time is tight)👉 Browse Fernie & Elk Valley tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & StaysLock in the right base (walkable town vs. ski hill vs. highway convenience) — especially on weekends + peak season👉 Find Fernie hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car RentalsThe easiest way to do day trips, chase viewpoints, and keep your schedule flexible👉 Compare car rentals for Fernie on DiscoverCars (pick in up Cranbrook)🚌 Bus TicketsIf you’re piecing together regional transport, checking schedules early saves headaches👉 Check bus routes to/from Fernie on Busbud

The Vibe Test: Cranbrook or Fernie… which one are you, spiritually?

Answer honestly. No one’s watching.

1) Your ideal morning beverage is…

Your answerYou are…Pick“Coffee I can drink while walking somewhere pretty.”A Scenic WandererFernie“Coffee I can drink while planning three stops and a nap window.”A Tactical OptimistCranbrook“Coffee… but make it a full breakfast sandwich the size of a throw pillow.”A Fuel-First HumanFernie (Big Bang Bagels energy)

2) Your vacation pace is best described as…

Your answerTranslationPick“One iconic thing per day, then a patio.”You’re emotionally healthyFernie“Four small things per day, then a weird activity we didn’t expect.”You’re a road-trip aficionadoCranbrook“We’ll see how the baby feels.”You now live by tiny-dictator lawTie

Fernie vs Cranbrook, side by side: our Island Lake Lodge hike near Fernie delivers dense forest, mountain-town energy, and an “easy wow” feeling, while Cranbrook’s Elizabeth Lake walk is wide-open, stroller-friendly-adjacent, and quietly scenic for a relaxed family wander.

3) Your relationship with hiking is…

Your answerWhat that meansPick“I want maximum scenery for minimum suffering.”You’re efficientFernie“I like trails, but I also like variety and short walks.”You’re balancedCranbrook“I’m carrying a baby and calling it ‘strength training.’”You’re usTie 

4) Your ideal ‘reward’ after outdoors is…

Your answerPickBecause…“A brewery patio and the smug glow of accomplishment.”FerniePost-hike pint culture. “A brewery… with bowling… because why not.”CranbrookEncore Brewing is peak “not on the bingo card.”“A meal so good we talk about it later.”FernieIsland Lake Lodge / Bear Bistro energy. 

5) Your ideal ‘unexpected highlight’ is…

Your answerPickBecause…“A calm lake loop with stroller-friendly vibes and ridiculous reflections behind a grocery store. What?”FernieMaiden Lake is that easy win. “Feeding fish at a hatchery and feeling oddly delighted about it.”CranbrookTrout hatchery is quietly awesome. “A historic town where I learn things AND make jokes about medieval dentistry.”CranbrookFort Steele delivers.

Fernie vs Cranbrook in one glance: Fernie City Hall (left) faces off with Cranbrook’s historic Fire Hall building (right) in the East Kootenays, British Columbia—an easy visual for comparing small-town character, downtown sights, and photo-worthy landmarks.

Cranbrook vs Fernie snapshot: vibes, logistics, and who each place suits

CategoryCranbrookFernieOverall vibeHub city / basecampMountain town / destinationFirst impressionCommercial edges, then it gets better fastCharming almost immediatelyBest forFamilies, variety seekers, road trips, budget travelersSki trips, outdoor weekends, mountain-town seekersGetting aroundCar-friendly, spreads outWalkable core + short drivesOutdoorsTrails + wetlands + easy day tripsIn-town trails + waterfall hikes + resort accessFood sceneSolid and surprising (and more than you’d expect)Strong “treat yourself after the hike” energyOur “signature memory”Trout hatchery + deer at the wetlands + brewery bowlingMaiden Lake reflections + Fairy Creek Falls + Island Lake Lodge magic

The decision matrix: choose your best match (no overthinking required)

Give yourself 10 points to “spend.” Put them where you care most. Whichever column ends up higher is your winner.

QuestionCranbrook points if you say “YES”Fernie points if you say “YES”We want a base with lots of services and easy logistics+2We want the most iconic mountain-town feel+2We like stacking short, kid-friendly activities+2+1Our trip is ski-first (or resort-first)+2We want mellow, low-crowd, shoulder-season vibes+2+2We’re fine driving to experiences (and like variety)+2+2We want to walk to food, coffee, and “town atmosphere”+2+2We want a single place to anchor a 2–4 day trip+1+2

You can also do the “gut check” method: if you read “Fernie is the postcard,” and your brain immediately went “YES, give me postcard,” you already know.

How far apart are they, really? (and why that matters)

Cranbrook and Fernie are close enough that you can treat them like neighboring personalities in the same friend group. The drive is roughly an hour-ish depending on conditions, which means:

You can split your stay without feeling like you’re wasting travel time.

You can use Cranbrook as the “hub” and Fernie as the “mountain-town finale” (a narrative structure that practically writes your trip recap for you).

Our trip logic: we wanted easy stops, patios, and plenty of “short wins” with the baby, so we leaned into that hour-radius flexibility.

Getting there: flying vs road tripping (and what we’d do)

Most people arrive by road, and both towns work beautifully as part of a Southern Alberta → BC loop. If you’re flying, the sneaky advantage is that Cranbrook has the region’s main airport, so Cranbrook is the easiest “fly in, grab a rental car, start exploring” base. Fernie is then a simple hop down the highway for the mountain-town portion of the trip.

On the ground, think of it like this:

Cranbrook is easier for “set up camp and branch out.”

Fernie is easier for “park the car and live the mountain town life.”

Fernie, British Columbia train tracks photographed from a low angle, highlighting the weathered wooden ties and steel rails that cut through town. These tracks are a reminder of Fernie’s deep railway roots and how the railroad shaped this East Kootenay mountain community’s history and growth.

When to choose Fernie (and when it’s not the right call)

Fernie wins when you want the full mountain town experience: scenery, trails, a walkable core, and that feeling that your day is naturally organized around “outside first, food second, brewery third, collapse into bed fourth.”

Fernie is the better pick if you want…

A trip where the town itself is the destination

Ski resort energy (even if you’re visiting in summer, the identity still shows up)

A place that feels immediately charming and “vacationy”

In-town trails you can access without building a complicated itinerary

Fernie might not be your best pick if…

You want a trip that’s mostly about variety and day trips

You’re traveling with someone who needs more services and convenience right on hand

You get stressed by the “destination town” vibe in peak seasons and would rather have a calmer base

Fernie doesn’t fail at practicality—it’s just that Cranbrook quietly wins at “we can solve any problem today” energy.

A striking horse mural in Cranbrook, British Columbia, painted across a downtown building and visible from the street. The bold colors and abstract design celebrate the area’s Western roots while highlighting Cranbrook’s growing public art scene in the East Kootenays.

When to choose Cranbrook (and when it’s not the right call)

Cranbrook wins when you want flexibility and a “hub” that makes the whole region easier. It’s not trying to be a ski postcard 24/7—and that’s exactly why it can be such a smart choice.

Cranbrook is the better pick if you want…

A basecamp with more everyday services

A trip that mixes outdoors + history + food + random surprises

Easy family-friendly activities that aren’t all full-day hikes

A place that’s often better for value and low-stress planning

Cranbrook might not be your best pick if…

You want that immediate “wow, we’re in a mountain town” feeling

You prefer your trip to be walkable and centered on one compact downtown

Your whole identity for the weekend is “ski, ski, ski” (Fernie tends to win that vibe battle)

Cranbrook’s superpower is that it gets better as you explore—like a movie that starts slow and then suddenly you’re invested.

Audrey Bergner and baby Aurelia visiting the historic CPR railway station in Fernie, British Columbia, a beautifully preserved wooden depot that highlights the town’s railway history, heritage architecture, and walkable, family-friendly downtown in the East Kootenays.

Our early-September Fernie experience: what we did, what hit, and what felt most “Fernie”

Fernie greeted us with that “back in BC” feeling—mountains, crisp-ish air, and a downtown that looks like it’s been photographed for tourism brochures since the beginning of photography.

A striking sculpture along the Miner’s Heritage Walk in Fernie, British Columbia, honoring the town’s coal-mining past while showcasing one of Fernie’s most meaningful public art installations and walkable historic attractions in the East Kootenays.

Day 1: food-first, history-second, charm-all-day

We arrived hungry, because that is our most consistent travel tradition. The first stop was Luchadoro Burrito Co for burritos with serious personality. This was also the moment the baby got her own “meal” in the form of fruit purée, which is basically the toddler equivalent of a tasting menu.

From there, we went straight into Fernie Museum, which is an underrated move because it gives you context. Fernie has a history of disasters—fires, floods, and mining tragedies—and what stood out was how the town kept rebuilding and reinventing itself. It makes the modern Fernie feel earned, not just pretty.

After the museum, we did what Fernie is designed for: wandering. We strolled downtown, admired the City Hall gardens, and did little “stop-and-look” moments that are stroller-friendly and low effort. We also grabbed a Heritage Walk brochure (a fun way to turn “walking around” into “I am a serious person doing cultural activities”).

An unreal reflection at Maiden Lake in Fernie, British Columbia, where calm water perfectly mirrors the surrounding mountains and trees, making this lakeside walk one of the most peaceful and photogenic nature spots in the East Kootenays.

Day 2: the Fernie rhythm (bagels → lake loop → waterfall → brewery)

If Fernie had an official daily schedule, it would start with breakfast that feels like a reward. We hit Big Bang Bagels, which is famous enough that you’ll hear about it before you even arrive. We ordered the Avolauncher and the Switchback Salmon, and yes, we made the “we got banged” joke.

Then we went to Maiden Lake, which turned out to be one of the best “family travel” wins of the whole trip. It’s an easy loop, stroller-friendly, peaceful, and photogenic in that reflective, calm-water way that makes you feel like a competent adult with a well-planned itinerary (even if you arrived five minutes ago and didn’t know it existed).

Fairy Creek Falls in Fernie, British Columbia spills gracefully over layered rock cliffs, creating a dramatic waterfall framed by dense forest, fallen logs, and mossy stone—one of the most rewarding and photogenic short hikes in the East Kootenays.

After Maiden Lake, we did Fairy Creek Falls. This one is more of a “work for it” stroll, especially if you’re carrying a baby in a backpack carrier. We checked in at the Visitor Centre first (bathrooms, trail info, and a quick safety chat), then did the hike with the kind of “okay, we’re doing this” energy that parents develop somewhere between diaper blowouts and airport security lines.

Finally, we did what any civilized person does after a hike: we went to Fernie Brewing Company. It’s a classic post-hike patio stop, and it plays perfectly into early September travel. You get that late-summer patio atmosphere without the peak-season chaos.

Island Lake Lodge in Fernie, British Columbia offers next-level alpine scenery, with crystal-clear water, towering evergreen forest, and dramatic Rocky Mountain peaks. Audrey Bergner soaking in the calm lakeside views perfectly captures why this is one of Fernie’s most unforgettable mountain escapes.

The Fernie grand finale: Island Lake Lodge (the “how is this real?” day)

If you only steal one idea from our Fernie trip, steal this: do a day trip to Island Lake Lodge, even if you don’t stay overnight. The place feels like someone took a luxury lodge, dropped it into an alpine postcard, and then said, “Sure, let’s also make the food excellent.”

We ate at Bear Bistro, and the meal felt like the kind of thing you talk about later like it was a concert. The views, the easy trail access, the lake scenery—it’s a whole package. We didn’t stay overnight and we still think about it, which is the travel equivalent of leaving a party early and then checking Instagram with regret.

The Kootenay Trout Hatchery near Cranbrook, British Columbia is a relaxed, family-friendly stop in the East Kootenays, perfect for stretching your legs while learning about local fish conservation. Audrey Bergner and Aurelia visiting the outdoor displays highlights why this hatchery is an easy, educational detour when driving through the region.

Our early-September Cranbrook experience: what we did, what surprised us, and why it works so well as a hub

Cranbrook is the place that proves first impressions are unreliable. We drove in and saw the commercial zone and had a brief moment of “Uh oh. Is this Red Deer?” And then we started doing things—real things—and Cranbrook completely flipped the script.

The “Cranbrook stacks well” activity style

Cranbrook is perfect for trips where you want multiple stops that don’t require full-day commitment. With a baby, that’s priceless. You can do a short attraction, a short walk, a meal, another attraction, and nobody loses their mind. That’s a win.

Kootenay Trout Hatchery: the unexpectedly adorable stop

The Kootenay Trout Hatchery was a surprisingly great start. It’s quick, it’s easy, and it’s genuinely fun—especially if you like the “small, local, educational” kind of travel stop. We fed fish, watched the baby stare intensely at aquatic movement like she was analyzing a stock chart, and then we were back on the road without needing to commit to a multi-hour excursion.

Elizabeth Lake in Cranbrook, British Columbia offers a peaceful nature escape with wetlands, reflective water, and forested hills framing the landscape. It’s an easy, low-effort spot in the East Kootenays for enjoying quiet scenery, spotting birds, and slowing down while exploring the area.

Elizabeth Lake: wetlands, birds, deer, and “we have the place to ourselves”

Then we hit Elizabeth Lake, which was one of those quiet, peaceful highlights that feels like a secret even though it’s right there. Wetlands, birds, and deer wandering around like they owned the place (which, to be fair, they kind of do). It’s an easy walk and it’s exactly the kind of thing you appreciate in early September: calm, golden light, and no crowd soundtrack.

Inside the Cranbrook History Centre, visitors can explore colorful historic interiors, railway-era exhibits, and interpretive displays that tell the story of Cranbrook’s development and its deep connection to the Canadian Pacific Railway in British Columbia’s East Kootenay region.

Cranbrook History Centre: trains, kid-friendly learning, and a surprisingly strong indoor anchor

The Cranbrook History Centre was a huge “this is better than we expected” moment. It’s great for families, great for rainy days, and honestly just interesting if you like heritage and rail history. We did the toddler tour vibe (short attention spans, stroller logistics, strategic snack deployment), and it still felt worthwhile.

Nomadic Samuel enjoying an over-the-top gourmet burger at Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap in Cranbrook, British Columbia, a former fire hall turned restaurant that perfectly represents the city’s unexpectedly strong food scene and its growing reputation as a worthwhile stop in the East Kootenays.

Food that punches above expectation (plus repurposed-building charm)

Cranbrook also delivered on food in a way that felt… unfairly competent. We ate Thai that hit that “I miss Chiang Mai” note, and we also had a meal at a restaurant inside a repurposed firehall, which is the kind of detail that makes a place feel distinct.

Bowling lanes inside Encore Brewing Co. in Cranbrook, British Columbia, where craft beer, pizza, and classic bowling combine to create one of the city’s most memorable and unexpected date night spots in the East Kootenays.

Encore Brewing + bowling: the most delightfully random “how is this here?” activity

And then Cranbrook went fully unhinged (in a good way) with Encore Brewing because it’s a brewery… with bowling... and pizza It’s also the perfect early-September evening plan when you want something fun that isn’t a nightclub.

A classic rural scene at Fort Steele Heritage Town near Cranbrook, British Columbia, where visitors can experience pioneer-era life up close, including horses, historic buildings, and hands-on demonstrations that bring the East Kootenays’ past vividly to life.

Fort Steele + St. Eugene: the day trip layer that makes Cranbrook shine

Cranbrook’s big advantage is how easy it is to layer in day trips. Fort Steele gives you that open-air history experience with enough quirky details to keep it fun (we learned things and also made jokes about old-time dentistry, because we’re human). And St. Eugene adds a deeper, more reflective stop—one that asks you to pay attention and be respectful, and that’s worth including in a grown-up travel guide.

Outdoors head-to-head: trails, lakes, waterfalls, and “how hard is this with a baby?”

This is where Fernie and Cranbrook feel the most different.

Fernie outdoors: compact, dramatic, and easy to “just do”

Fernie is built around outdoors. Even your “casual day” ends up involving a lake, a trail, or a scenic view you didn’t earn but will happily accept.

Our favorites:

Maiden Lake for stroller-friendly loops, reflections, and “rest day” energy

Fairy Creek Falls for a short hike that feels like an accomplishment

Island Lake Lodge for “this is the best scenery of the trip” moments

Fernie’s outdoors are about impact. You don’t need to drive far to feel like you’re somewhere special.

Cranbrook outdoors: variety, easy wins, and a different landscape feel

Cranbrook’s outdoors are less dramatic at first glance but excellent in practice. You’re getting wetlands, parks, and forest trails that work well for:

Short walks with a stroller

Quick nature hits between meals

Multi-stop days where you don’t want one big hike to dictate everything

Our favorites:

Elizabeth Lake for wildlife and calm and the Cranbrook Community Forest and Idlewild Park for community vibes

The general park-and-trail system for quick access

The “day trip radius” effect: you can do lake days, heritage days, forest days

Stroller and carrier reality check

If you’re traveling with a baby or small kid, here’s the practical truth:

Fernie gives you stroller-friendly wins (Maiden Lake) but also encourages “carry the baby, embrace the burn” hikes (Fairy Creek Falls).

Cranbrook offers more “flat and calm” options that stack nicely when you’re trying to keep nap schedules from collapsing your whole trip.

Winter & skiing head-to-head (even if you’re visiting in summer)

Even if your trip isn’t winter-based, it matters because the winter identity shapes the town.

Fernie in winter

Fernie feels like a ski town because it is. It’s the kind of place where you can imagine the rhythm: powder days, après patios, and people casually talking about conditions like they’re discussing global politics.

Fernie wins for:

Ski-first trips

Resort-centric weekends

People who want that “mountain town in full winter mode” vibe

Cranbrook in winter

Cranbrook is more of a winter base. It’s practical, it’s convenient, and it’s the place you stay when you want to ski nearby but also want other options in your evenings—especially if you’re traveling with kids or you like having more choice for dining and logistics.

Fernie vs Cranbrook, but make it delicious: Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge (Fernie) goes head-to-head with Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap (Cranbrook) in a torn-paper burger showdown—two East Kootenay meals that absolutely earn a detour on a road trip.

Food & drink head-to-head: where you’ll eat happiest (and how we’d do it again)

We judge places by scenery, yes—but also by whether the post-hike meal feels like a reward or a tragedy.

Fernie food: high-reward, “treat yourself” energy

Fernie’s food rhythm fits the outdoors rhythm. You’re hiking, then you’re eating like you deserve it.

Our Fernie highlights:

Luchadoro Burrito Co: big flavors, fast satisfaction

Big Bang Bagels: legendary breakfast fuel

Fernie Brewing Company: the ideal “we earned this” patio

Bear Bistro at Island Lake Lodge: destination-level meal with destination-level scenery

Fernie wins if you like travel days that end with: “That meal was worth the drive.”

Cranbrook food: better than expected, plus excellent “quirky venue” points

Cranbrook delivered food that felt genuinely memorable—especially when layered with its surprise-factor activities.

Our Cranbrook highlights:

Family Thai Restaurant (our “we miss Southeast Asia” fix): Pad Thai + green coconut curry (Audrey went 3/5 and paid the sinus-clearing price), plus mango sticky rice and deep-fried banana for the sweet victory lap. 

Fire Hall Kitchen & Tap (repurposed firehall charm done right): signature burgers and a craft beer moment that felt way fancier than “hub city lunch” has any right to be. 

Encore Brewing (brewery + bowling + pizza = “how is this a thing?”): the most perfectly random evening plan, and honestly a top-tier rainy-day / shoulder-season move. 

Cranbrook wins if you like travel food that comes with: “Wait, this is actually really good and nearby.”

Culture & history head-to-head: museums, heritage, and rainy-day plans

If you’re building a trip that isn’t 100% outdoors, this section matters a lot.

Fernie’s history vibe

Fernie’s history hits hard because the town has survived a lot. The museum gives you a meaningful sense of place, and the heritage walk-style exploration makes the town feel textured, not just scenic.

Fernie wins for:

“Small town with a big story” energy

Easy, walkable heritage moments

Pairing culture with outdoors in a compact trip

Cranbrook’s history vibe

Cranbrook’s history and heritage offerings are broader. The History Centre is a strong anchor, and the day trip layer (Fort Steele especially) makes it feel like you can go deep without repeating yourself.

Cranbrook wins for:

Variety of indoor and heritage options

Family-friendly history experiences

Day trips that keep things fresh

Fernie vs Cranbrook — a family-friendly showdown. On the left, Audrey Bergner and baby Aurelia enjoy a stroller walk at Maiden Lake with the mountains of Fernie in the background; on the right, a tranquil scene unfolds by the dock at Idlewild Park in Cranbrook. Two East Kootenay moments, each with its own calm beauty.

Family travel head-to-head: what it’s like with a baby (and what we learned)

Traveling with a baby doesn’t ruin travel. It just turns it into a tactical sport.

What Fernie did well for family travel

Easy downtown wandering: low effort, high charm

Maiden Lake: stroller-friendly loop, minimal stress

Visitor Centre strategy: bathrooms + trail intel + “are there bears today?” conversations

Fernie felt like the place where you can still do “mountain town things” while keeping the baby comfortable.

What Cranbrook did well for family travel

Stackable short activities: hatchery, wetlands, parks, museum

More “everyday convenience” vibes: easier to solve problems quickly

Indoor backup plans: great when the weather sucks and you're with baby

Cranbrook felt like the place where you can keep moving without overcommitting.

The packing truth

Bring the stroller for loops and parks.

Bring the carrier for short hikes where a stroller becomes a cruel joke.

Plan for one “big” thing per day and let everything else be a bonus.

Budget & value: where your money feels better spent

This is where your travel style matters.

Fernie value realities

Fernie is a destination town, which often means:

Higher demand in peak seasons

More pressure to book ahead for certain lodging styles

A general “vacation town” price vibe

But you also get the payoff: the town atmosphere is part of what you’re paying for.

Cranbrook value realities

Cranbrook often feels like:

Better for travelers who prioritize practical spending

Easier to find the “solid and comfortable” option without hunting

A good base if you want day trips without paying destination-town premiums every night

If you’re doing a longer road trip and trying to control costs, Cranbrook can possibly be a sneaky win.

Where to stay: best areas for each town (with quick picks)

Fernie: where we’d base ourselves

AreaBest forWhy it worksDowntown / near the coreFirst-time visitorsWalkable charm, easy meals, quick access to trailsNear the highway (for road-trippers)ConvenienceSimple logistics, easy in/out, still close to townCloser to the ski area (seasonal)Ski-focused tripsThe “wake up and go” winter rhythm

Cranbrook: where we’d base ourselves

AreaBest forWhy it worksNear parks / trail accessFamiliesEasy morning and evening walks without driving farNear the coreVisitors who like walkabilityMore character, easier dining“Practical base” locationsRoad tripsEasy parking, quick access to highways and day trips

Best things to do: Fernie vs Cranbrook, category by category

Best “easy win” activity (minimal effort, maximum payoff)

TownActivityWhy it’s perfectFernieMaiden Lake loopCalm, scenic, stroller-friendly, instant “we love this town” energyCranbrookElizabeth Lake wetlandsWildlife, quiet, easy walking, feels like a local secret

Best “we actually learned something” stop

TownActivityWhy it stands outFernieFernie MuseumA resilient town story that gives you contextCranbrookCranbrook History CentreGreat indoor anchor with heritage depth (and kid-friendly appeal)

Best “reward meal” moment

TownMealWhy it winsFernieIsland Lake Lodge / Bear BistroScenic + memorable + feels like a splurge worth doingCranbrookThai + firehall meal comboSurprisingly strong food day with distinct venues

Best quirky evening plan

TownOptionWhy it’s funFernieBrewery patio + downtown strollClassic mountain-town evening rhythmCranbrookBrewery + bowling + pizzaThe “how is this a thing?” surprise-factor activity

The Kootenays Reality Check

What I thought would matter vs what actually mattered

I went into this Fernie + Cranbrook stretch of our BC road trip thinking I’d be making Big Outdoors Decisions. You know the type: Which hike is the most scenic? Which viewpoint is the most epic? How many kilometres can we casually stroll before lunch like we’re characters in a Patagonia catalogue? And then we arrived with a baby and reality gently placed a hand on my shoulder and whispered, “You will plan nothing. You will adapt. You will also spend a surprising amount of time thinking about bathrooms.”

The fantasy version of this trip

In my head, this was going to be all about big hikes, big views, and noble suffering. I pictured us “earning” the scenery, being rugged and outdoorsy, and returning to the car with that smug glow of accomplishment… like we weren’t also carrying an entire mobile nursery in the trunk.

The real version of this trip

Here’s what actually mattered: stroller surfaces, nap windows, snack availability, and whether a place had the kind of calm, low-effort loop that lets you feel outdoorsy without sweating through your shirt while carrying a tiny human like an unevenly distributed kettlebell. Maiden Lake in Fernie? That’s not just a pretty spot—it’s a tactical masterpiece. Elizabeth Lake in Cranbrook? Same deal. These places are basically the MVPs of family travel because they give you the “wow” without the meltdown.

Food became the itinerary (and I regret nothing)

In a pre-baby timeline, we would’ve been the kind of travellers who hike first and eat later. In the current timeline, we operate on fuel-first logic, because hunger plus parenting is a recipe for becoming a person you don’t recognize. Fernie understood this immediately and handed us Big Bang Bagels like a peace treaty. Cranbrook understood it too, but in a different way: it’s the place where you think you’re just grabbing dinner and suddenly you’re in a repurposed firehall having a genuinely great meal, and then the next night you’re at a brewery that has bowling and you’re asking yourself if you’re still a travel vlogger or if you’ve become a suburban dad on a fun weekend (no disrespect—suburban dads are living their truth).

The moment Fernie quietly wins

And here’s the part where Fernie takes the cake: it’s more epic without you trying. Cranbrook stacks experiences like a highlight reel—hatchery, wetlands, museum, food, weirdly wholesome activities—and it does it with zero drama. But Fernie has the kind of scenery that makes you stop mid-sentence. It’s not that Cranbrook isn’t beautiful. It’s that Fernie feels like the mountains are leaning in closer, like they’re trying to get into your shots. Even on an easy day—lake loop, short waterfall hike, patio reward—you feel like you’re in a proper mountain town.

The honest takeaway

The best way I can describe it is this: Cranbrook is the trip that runs smoothly. Fernie is the trip you brag about later. Cranbrook is the Swiss Army knife: practical, flexible, full of surprises. Fernie is the postcard: dramatic, scenic, and somehow always a little bit better than you expected. Do both if you can—Cranbrook makes the whole experience easier and more varied—but if you’re forcing me to choose one place that delivers maximum mountain-town magic per minute? Yeah. Fernie. Every time.

Sample itineraries (the easiest way to plan this trip)

2 days: Fernie-only (mountain town hit, no fluff)

Day 1

Arrive, burritos, downtown wander

Museum + heritage walk vibe

Easy dinner + early night

Day 2

Big Bang Bagels

Maiden Lake loop

Fairy Creek Falls

Fernie Brewing patio

Optional: Island Lake Lodge if you have the time and want the big wow

2 days: Cranbrook-only (hub city that stacks)

Day 1

Trout hatchery

Elizabeth Lake wetlands

Old town wander + coffee

Thai dinner

Day 2

History Centre

Idlewild and Community Forest

Firehall meal

Encore Brewing + bowling

4 days: the best of both (our favorite strategy)

Day 1–2: Cranbrook

Use Cranbrook for stacked activities, easy family rhythm, and day-trip potential

Day 3–4: Fernie

Finish with the mountain town magic: lake loop, waterfall, brewery, and Island Lake Lodge

This split itinerary gives you variety first, then a scenic finale. It also makes early September feel especially perfect: patios, light, and just enough warmth to keep things comfortable.

Practical planning tips (so your trip runs smoothly)

When to visit

Early September is elite for this region if you want:

Patio season without peak crowds

Warm-ish days and cooler evenings

Trail time that feels comfortable, not punishing

What to pack

Layers (mornings and evenings can flip fast)

Stroller + carrier combo if traveling with a baby

Trail snacks that can double as emergency peace offerings

Wildlife and trail safety

Use local visitor info, pay attention to trail signage, and default to common-sense trail behavior. We asked about bear sightings before one hike and stayed a little more alert.

✨ Ready to start planning your Fernie route?

🎟️ Explore tours & experiences (Viator)

🏨 Compare Fernie hotels (Booking.com)

🚗 Reserve a rental car (DiscoverCars)

🚌 Book bus tickets (Busbud)

The final call: which is better, Cranbrook or Fernie?

If we’re being forced to choose—like a travel game show where the host is smiling and we’re quietly panicking—Fernie wins.

Cranbrook is the smart, underrated hub: it stacks activities beautifully, it’s easy with a family, and it surprised us in the best way (wetlands + deer sightings, a genuinely solid history centre, and a brewery that also has bowling… which still feels like something invented by a happy committee of dads). It’s practical, flexible, and it makes the whole region simpler to explore.

But Fernie is the one that feels epic.

Fernie has that instant mountain-town hit—the scenery is more dramatic, the vibe is more “we’re here for the mountains,” and the whole place feels like it was built for people who want to spend the day outside and then reward themselves with a great meal and a patio pint. Even doing “easy” stuff like a lake loop or a short waterfall hike feels big because the backdrop is doing half the work for you (and I say that with love, because I’m a huge fan of backdrops doing work).

So our real recommendation stays the same: visit both. Use Cranbrook for the hub energy and variety, then finish in Fernie for the mountain-town grand finale—especially in early September when patio season is still humming but the crowds are mercifully elsewhere.

But if push came to shove and you only had time for one? Fernie is the stronger “wow” destination.

✨ Ready to start planning your Cranbrook route?

🏙️ Explore tours & experiences (Viator)

🛏️ Compare Cranbrook hotels (Booking.com)

🚗 Reserve a rental car (DiscoverCars)

🚌 Book bus tickets (BusBud)

Cranbrook vs Fernie FAQ: planning help for real travelers (and real decision paralysis)

Is Fernie worth it if we don’t ski?

Yes. Fernie’s summer and shoulder-season appeal is legit: lakes, short hikes, a charming core, and easy “reward meal” energy that makes the outdoors rhythm feel satisfying.

Is Cranbrook worth it if we want “mountain scenery”?

Yes, with the right expectations. Cranbrook is less “instant postcard” and more “basecamp with access to scenery,” plus it shines when you mix nature with heritage and food.

Can we visit Fernie as a day trip from Cranbrook?

Yep. It’s close enough to do comfortably, especially in summer and early fall. Splitting time is even better if you can.

Which town is better with a stroller?

Both have wins. Fernie’s Maiden Lake loop is a standout. Cranbrook’s wetlands and parks stack well for stroller days.

Which town is better for hiking?

Fernie is better for “dramatic payoff per effort” close to town. Cranbrook is better for variety and short trail hits that fit around other activities.

Where should we stay if we only have one night?

If you want a mountain-town night, Fernie. If you want the easiest logistics and more “hub” convenience, Cranbrook.

Which town has better rainy-day options?

Cranbrook has a stronger indoor anchor lineup for families. Fernie still has solid museum and town-wander options.

Is Island Lake Lodge doable as a day trip?

Absolutely, and it’s one of the best ways to level up a Fernie itinerary even if you don’t stay overnight.

Which town is better for foodies?

Fernie wins for “treat yourself after the hike” moments. Cranbrook wins for “surprisingly strong food day plus quirky venues.”

Which is better for a longer road trip stop?

Cranbrook often fits better as a flexible base on a longer road trip, while Fernie is the better “destination” stop when you want to soak up the vibe.

#### Do You Need Trekking Poles in El Chaltén? Real Lessons From Our Hikes
El Chaltén has a funny way of turning normal, snack-loving humans into “serious hikers” for a week. You wake up early, you promise yourself you’ll eat a hearty breakfast, and then—somewhere around kilometer nine—you realize you’re basically a hungry wind-sail with legs. Audrey and I went to El Chaltén expecting epic views (delivered), great food (also delivered), and a few “pleasant hikes”.

And yet… here we are, writing the trekking poles article.

Hikers using trekking poles ascend the Laguna de los Tres trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, following a forested mountain path toward the Fitz Roy massif, a classic scene that shows why poles help on steep and uneven terrain.

Because the question isn’t really “Do you need trekking poles in El Chaltén?” The question is: Do you want to feel steadier, safer, and less demolished on the descents—especially on the big-ticket hikes—without turning your arms into instant ramen? If you’re stacking big days back-to-back (hello, Fitz Roy and Torre), trekking poles can be the difference between “We’re doing another hike tomorrow!” and “Please airlift me directly to La Waflería.”

This guide is part science, part practical gear advice, and part “we learned this the hard way.” We’ll tell you when poles are genuinely worth it, when they’re optional, how to use them so they actually help, and how El Chaltén’s specific terrain and weather make this decision different than, say, a friendly stroll in a polite national park that doesn’t try to wind-slap you into another dimension.

https://youtu.be/TJZ-lgmwE2Q

The short answer

Let's get one thing straight. Most hikers in El Chaltén don’t strictly need trekking poles for every trail. But for the hikes most people travel across the planet to do—especially Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy viewpoint) and Loma del Pliegue Tumbado—poles are a smart tool for steep, rocky sections, long descents, and tired legs. Official trail guidance also warns about snow or mud near the end of some routes in autumn/spring, with a steep rocky slope where it can be dangerous to progress safely.

If you’re only doing short viewpoints and easy half-day walks, poles are optional. If you’re doing the big hikes (or you’ve got sensitive knees, a heavier pack, or shoulder-season conditions), poles are a “rent them and thank yourself later” item.

For context: I had six nights in town and still needed a full recovery day after Fitz Roy, plus one day where the wind made hiking feel like an extreme sport nobody consented to. That mix—big hikes + fatigue + conditions—is exactly why poles go from “optional accessory” to “smart decision.”

The Senda Fitz Roy Km 9 trail marker in El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina, marking the infamous final steep and rocky kilometer on the Laguna de los Tres hike where tired legs, loose terrain, and strong wind make trekking poles a smart companion.

Our El Chaltén origin story: KM 9 made believers out of foodies

We spent six nights in El Chaltén with one goal: hike hard, eat harder, repeat until our legs capsized. We tracked hikes by kilometer markers like it was a video game, which is great for morale… until you realize that kilometer nine has its own personality.

On our Fitz Roy day, breakfast was early (El Chaltén accommodations understand hikers), the sky was clear, and we immediately did something very on-brand: we forgot our trail map on the nightstand. So we wandered around town, found the trailhead anyway, and got moving.

Seriously folks, Audrey and I left our trail map behind, which turned “early start” into “urban orienteering.” Nothing like beginning Patagonia’s most iconic hike with a 45-minute scavenger hunt for the trailhead.

Somewhere around 9 a.m. we were already eating our lunch. I was being piggy. I ate my sandwich. Audrey was the responsible one with a rice salad situation—big chunks of cheese, lots of egg, the kind of meal that says, “Yes, I plan.”

Epic views at Laguna Capri in El Chaltén, Patagonia, where hikers rest beside the shoreline and gaze toward the towering Fitz Roy massif across a deep blue mountain lake—an unforgettable reward stop on the Laguna de los Tres trail.

At Laguna Capri we had the classic fork-in-the-road debate: loop back toward town, or keep going to Laguna de los Tres. The weather was good, it was still early, and the daylight felt endless—so we went for the crown jewel, fully aware that the last kilometer had a reputation.

You’ve done the long approach, crossed rivers, admired granite peaks doing their best CGI impression… and suddenly the trail narrows, the slope kicks up, the surface gets rockier and looser, and the wind turns up like it’s trying to win an argument.

That’s kilometer nine. The longest and toughest kilometer of the whole trek.

KM 9 was also where the trail turned into a little bottleneck of shared suffering: tired hikers, steeper terrain, loose rock, and that feeling that your quads are all kinds of toast. If there’s one place in El Chaltén where poles feel like a cheat code, it’s that stretch.

We kept going partly because hikers coming down kept saying, “Keep going! The views are insane!” They were not lying. Reaching Laguna de los Tres was the most impressive view of our entire week of trekking in El Chaltén.

It was windy beyond belief and we were ravenous, so we literally hid behind a rock like frightened snacks on legs. Our gourmet summit meal was: one granola bar, some candy, and pure gratitude—then we started the long descent back down.

That’s why trekking poles are worth discussing.

Nomadic Samuel carrying camera gear walks the Laguna Torre trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, following a winding path through a green mountain valley and rocky cliffs — a real-life moment showing how easy it is to forget trekking poles before a long Patagonian hike.

What makes El Chaltén different (and why poles are unusually helpful here)

El Chaltén is famous because the hiking is spectacular and accessible. It’s also… not gentle.

The “long descent back to town” reality

Many of the iconic routes are out-and-back. You don’t finish at a cozy shuttle stop; you finish by turning around and walking back the same distance. That means you often do the hardest/steepest section when you’re already tired, and then you still have hours of descending and rolling terrain after the “payoff.”

Poles shine on the way down because they can help reduce load on the lower body and make you feel more stable when your legs are wobbling like newborn deer.

Patagonia wind and fast-changing conditions

Patagonia is famous for changeable weather and strong winds. You can have sun, gusts, clouds, and “why is my face frozen?” in the same day. Poles can help with balance in wind and uneven terrain, but they can also be annoying if you’re constantly adjusting your grip or trying to keep your hands free for layers, photos, and snacks (a critical system).

Audrey and I had one day where the wind basically vetoed our hiking ambitions. We tried going out and immediately got that cartoon feeling of being pushed sideways—so we pivoted to a café day and saved our energy (and dignity) for a better window.

Hikers ascend the steep and rocky final section of the Laguna de los Tres trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, making their way across loose stone terrain toward the towering Fitz Roy massif—a demanding stretch where trekking poles become especially useful.

Rocky finishes, loose gravel, and steep sections

Some of the classic hikes have steep, rocky final sections (Laguna de los Tres and Pliegue Tumbado are the usual suspects). If those are wet, muddy, or snow-covered (common in shoulder season), they get more serious. Official trail descriptions explicitly warn about snow/mud toward the end and a rocky steep slope where it can be dangerous to progress safely.

Multi-day hiking fatigue

El Chaltén trips often involve stacking big hikes: Fitz Roy one day, Torre the next, then you get ambitious and start eyeballing another viewpoint like you’re invincible. Poles can help you manage cumulative fatigue by spreading some work to the upper body and helping reduce muscle damage after big mountain days.

We learned quickly that we’re “foodies” first and hikers second. Six nights gave us room for a full recovery day after Fitz Roy (12 hours of sleep, stiff legs, and dramatic hobbling), plus flexibility when Patagonia decided to throw a weather tantrum.

A close-up trekking pole rests on a lichen-covered rock at Laguna Capri in El Chaltén, Patagonia, with Fitz Roy softly blurred in the background, capturing a bokeh-style moment that highlights essential hiking gear against calm lake waters and iconic Patagonian mountain scenery.

What trekking poles actually do 

Think of trekking poles as a multi-tool with four jobs:

1) Extra points of contact (stability)

Two feet good. Two feet plus two poles is… often better. Poles can help with balance on uneven ground, loose rock, and slippery sections. Reviews of the research generally find poles can increase balance and stability, particularly when carrying a larger external load.

2) Brakes on descents (knee-friendlier returns)

Downhill is where many hikers feel the biggest benefit. Biomechanics research has measured knee joint forces during downhill walking with and without poles, and this is the core reason poles are beloved by people with cranky knees: they let you share some of the load.

An illustrated infographic showing what trekking poles actually do for hikers in El Chaltén, Patagonia, breaking down four key benefits: added stability on uneven ground, knee-friendly braking on descents, improved rhythm and pacing when tired, and small climbing assistance on steep mountain trails.

3) Rhythm and pacing (especially when you’re tired)

Poles can help you keep a steady cadence. On long days, they can act like metronomes for your legs. This sounds silly until you’re seven hours into a hike and your brain is negotiating with gravity.

4) A small “assist” on climbs (if you use them correctly)

Poles can help on steep climbs by letting you push a bit with your arms, keeping your torso more upright, and distributing effort. But this is not Nordic walking; you don’t need to turn it into a full-body ski workout unless you want the extra exertion.

The tradeoff: poles can increase cardiovascular demand

Poles can make hiking feel easier on joints and stability, but they can also increase cardiovascular demand because you’re involving more of your body. For many people, that tradeoff is worth it—especially when the goal is to finish strong and hike again tomorrow.

The El Chaltén trekking pole decision matrix infographic breaks down when hikers should bring or rent trekking poles for Patagonia trails, including Laguna de los Tres, Pliegue Tumbado, Laguna Torre, and shorter miradores based on terrain, weather, fatigue, and pack weight.

The El Chaltén Trekking Pole Decision Matrix

Use this like a quick diagnosis. Read across, find yourself, and you’ll know whether to bring poles, rent them, or skip them.

Your situationPoles are…Why it matters in El ChalténDoing Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy viewpoint)Strongly recommendedSteep rocky finish + long return descent + fatigueDoing Pliegue TumbadoStrongly recommendedLong day, exposure/wind, steep rocky upper sections, early start advisedDoing Laguna Torre (full trek)HelpfulLong day; poles help rhythm and return-leg fatigueOnly doing miradores / short walksOptionalGenerally lower difficulty; poles are preferenceKnee sensitivity, past injuries, or you hate steep descentsStrongly recommendedPoles can reduce downhill load and increase confidenceShoulder season (autumn/spring) with snow/mud riskStrongly recommendedSlippery surfaces + disorientation risk near steep rocky sectionsCarrying a heavier daypack (photo gear, extra layers, baby carrier)Strongly recommendedMore load = more benefit from stability and load sharingYou love having hands free for photos, layers, mates, snacksMaybePoles can be annoying; consider renting just for big hikes

Trail-by-trail: where poles pay off the most

El Chaltén has a mix of “wow, that’s approachable” and “why are my calves on freakin' fire?.” Here’s how poles fit into the main hits.

A hiker (Nomadic Samuel) walks the Laguna de los Tres trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, crossing wooden boardwalks through wetland terrain as the towering Fitz Roy massif rises above green forested hills and rugged granite peaks in the distance.

Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy viewpoint): the classic “yes, poles” hike

This is the hike that turns tourists into quasi-hikers. The approach is beautiful, the scenery escalates, and then the final section asks: “How do you feel about steep rock and gravel, while tired?”

In autumn or spring there may be snow or mud toward the end where the trail crosses a rocky area with a steep slope, and that it can be dangerous to progress safely and easy to become disoriented. That’s the precise kind of terrain where poles are not a luxury. They are a safety and comfort upgrade.

Where poles help most on this hike:

The steep final climb (especially if loose or slick)

The descent back down that same steep section (this is where knees beg for mercy)

Any windy, uneven traverses where you want extra stability

Our personal lesson:

The first 9 km felt “intermediate.” The last kilometer is where it tests you. That’s where poles earn their keep.

Close-up of a trekking pole resting on a rock at Loma del Pliegue Tumbado in El Chaltén, Patagonia, with a bokeh view of a distant mountain lake and rugged peaks, capturing a quiet moment that highlights essential hiking gear in Patagonia’s trekking heartland.

Loma del Pliegue Tumbado: long, exposed, and proud of it

This hike is a full-day commitment and often recommended to start very early, ideally at first light, paying attention to daylight and carrying a flashlight. If you’re a “we’ll just see how it goes” person, this is the hike that gently turns that personality trait into planning.

There is potential snow or mud toward the end, again with a rocky steep slope where it can be dangerous to progress safely and easy to become disoriented. Combine that with exposure and wind, and poles make a lot of sense.

Where poles help most:

Long sustained climbs (rhythm)

Windy, open sections (stability)

Fatigue management late in the day (you still have to get back)

Hikers traverse the rocky terrain of the Laguna Torre trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, moving across a barren valley surrounded by rugged slopes and snow-capped peaks—an iconic Patagonian trekking scene that captures the raw scale of the landscape.

Laguna Torre: the “maybe yes” hike that can feel better than Fitz Roy

Laguna Torre is a long day, but it often feels less punishing than Fitz Roy because the grade is more forgiving after the early elevation, and the route offers a lot of variety along the way. It’s also a great example of how Patagonia can change: it might be windy in town and calmer in the forest.

Laguna Torre was actually our most comfortable long day in El Chaltén. We finished it without feeling wrecked the way Fitz Roy wrecked us, which is a nice reminder that not all “big hikes” hit your body the same—and your pole decision can change depending on what you did yesterday.

If you’re someone who likes rhythm, poles can make this a smoother day. If you’re a confident hiker with good knees and you hate extra gear in your hands, you can absolutely do it without poles.

Where poles help most:

Keeping cadence on long, rolling terrain

Smoothing out tired return legs

Stability if conditions are muddy or slick

A hiker (Nomadic Samuel) stands on the rocky summit of Mirador de los Cóndores in El Chaltén, Patagonia, overlooking the town below and a winding river valley, holding camera gear while soaking in sweeping mountain views at sunset.

Los Cóndores / Las Águilas viewpoints: great, quick, and pole-optional

These are low-difficulty viewpoints often done in a couple hours, with short distances and big views over town and the surrounding landscape. This is the “I want El Chaltén energy without committing my entire skeleton to it” option.

I did Mirador de los Cóndores on our first evening and it was the perfect “welcome to El Chaltén” hike: short, steep, and wildly rewarding. We were absolutely buzzer-beating the daylight like half the town, and within 45 minutes the valley opened up into those panoramic views that make you forget you’re sweating.

Poles are optional unless:

It’s muddy or icy

You’re using poles for knee confidence

You’re carrying extra load and like the stability

The “wildcard” factor: conditions (Patagonia laughs at your plans)

Conditions change everything. The same hike can feel easy, moderate, or “why is this happening” depending on wind, mud, snow, and visibility.

A playful infographic comparing reasons hikers will love and hate trekking poles in El Chaltén, Patagonia, highlighting benefits like stability, knee-friendly descents, and confidence on tired legs, alongside drawbacks like wind juggling, rock snags, and having hands full while hiking.

Poles vs. no poles: the real tradeoffs (no shame either way)

Let’s make this honest. There are real reasons people love poles, and real reasons people leave them behind.

Reasons you’ll love poles in El Chaltén

You feel steadier on loose rock and uneven terrain

Descents feel less harsh on knees and quads

You can hike longer days with less “day-after” damage

You feel more confident when tired (which is when slips happen)

Reasons you might hate poles

You like your hands free

You find poles annoying in rock gardens (snag city)

Wind + poles can feel like juggling

You don’t like the extra arm/shoulder involvement

You’re constantly taking photos and don’t want to manage gear

This isn’t a moral decision. It’s a tool decision. If poles help you enjoy the hike more and reduce risk, use them. If poles make you annoyed and clumsy, skip them—or rent them only for the biggest day.

Buying or renting: what to choose for El Chaltén

If you’re flying internationally and trying to keep life simple, renting in El Chaltén is common and easy. If you hike often and know you like poles, bringing your own can be more comfortable and reliable.

Also, El Chaltén is wonderfully compact. Our guesthouse (Vertical Lodge) was a short walk from the bus terminal, which made everything—from gear errands to trailhead starts—ridiculously easy. If you’re on the fence, renting poles for just your biggest day is a low-effort experiment.

Quick pick guide

You are…Best optionWhyOnly hiking in El Chaltén onceRentNo need to travel with polesDoing multiple Patagonia tripsBring/buyBetter fit, reliability, familiarityUnsure if you like polesRent for big hikes onlyTest-drive before committingHiking in shoulder seasonRent or bring + consider tractionSnow/mud changes the stakesCarrying extra gearBring/rentStability and load sharing matter more

Renting in town (what to look for)

El Chaltén has multiple rental shops offering trekking poles and other mountain gear, and local resources explicitly mention renting trekking poles as a common solution to lighten your travel load. You'll find one-piece poles and LEKI three-piece poles as separate rentals (priced per pole), which makes “rent for the big day” pretty straightforward.

Before you walk out the door:

Check the locks (flick locks or twist locks should hold firmly)

Extend and compress a few times to ensure they don’t slip

Confirm tips and baskets (ask for baskets if there’s any snow/mud chance)

Make sure straps are comfortable and adjustable

If you’re tall/short, confirm the poles extend to your needed length

Prices change fast. Confirm locally.

How to choose trekking poles (without falling into gear rabbit holes)

If you buy poles, you don’t need the lightest carbon unicorn pole forged by mountain elves. You need something reliable that fits your hiking style.

The big choice: adjustable vs fixed

For El Chaltén, adjustable poles are usually the best call because you can shorten for climbs and lengthen for descents.

Folding “Z” poles vs telescoping poles

Folding poles pack smaller and deploy fast, great for travel and stashing in a daypack.

Telescoping poles are often more adjustable and can feel sturdier for some users.

An illustrated trekking pole buying matrix infographic for El Chaltén, Patagonia, breaking down essential features like reliable locking mechanisms, comfortable grips, wrist straps, weight, durability, and replaceable tips—helping hikers choose the right poles for rugged Patagonian trail conditions.

A quick buying matrix

FeaturePrioritize it if…Why it mattersReliable locking mechanismYou’ll use poles on descentsSlipping poles are chaosComfortable grips (cork/foam)You hike long daysBlisters and hand fatigue are realWrist straps that fit wellYou want less grip fatigueProper strap use mattersWeightYou hate carrying extra stuffLighter poles are easier to live withDurabilityYou’re hard on gearPatagonia rock doesn’t care about your gear budgetReplaceable tips/basketsYou hike varied conditionsMud/snow/rock all want different setups

Pole sizing: the simple rule

A common fit guideline is that when the pole tip is on the ground near your feet, your elbow should be around a 90-degree bend and the handle sits near waist/hip height. This is your starting point, not a rigid law.

How to adjust poles for El Chaltén terrain

Small changes make a big difference.

TerrainAdjust polesWhat you’re aiming forFlat/rolling trailBaseline 90-degree elbowRhythm and stabilitySteep uphillSlightly shorterKeep shoulders relaxed, plant closeSteep downhillSlightly longerExtra “brakes” and balance pointsRock gardens / bouldersOften shorterControl and quick placementMud / slick trailNormal or slightly longerStability without overreachingWindy exposed areasNormal/shorterQuick, stable plants near the body

The two-minute “pole sanity check” before a big hike

Walk 30 seconds on flat ground and make sure your elbows feel relaxed (not shrugged up like you’re doing a stress workout).

Flick your wrists and confirm the straps are supporting your hands so you can loosen your grip.

Plant the poles beside your feet a few times; if you keep overreaching, shorten slightly and keep plants closer.

Do three “mini descents” on a small slope near the trailhead: lengthen a touch, plant, step down, repeat.

If your poles slip even a little when you load them, fix the locks now.

How to use poles so they actually help (and don’t just become metal annoyances)

Use the straps correctly (this matters more than people think)

If you’re death-gripping the handles, you’ll tire your forearms and hate poles. The strap is there so your hand can relax.

If you do straps wrong, you’ll spend the day white-knuckling the grips and wondering why your forearms feel like you’ve been churning butter since breakfast. When straps are set right, your hands relax—and that’s when poles stop being annoying and start being helpful.

A common approach:

Put your hand up through the strap from below

Let the strap support your wrist/palm

Grip the handle lightly, not like it owes you money

You want “supported grip,” not “stress squeeze.”

Plant close, not far

Plant the pole tips roughly beside your feet, not way out front. Overreaching makes poles less stable and more likely to snag.

On descents: think “two extra feet”

Downhill is where poles shine. Place them slightly ahead and to the side, then step down. You’re creating a stable triangle with your body. This helps on steep rocky sections where footing is less predictable.

On climbs: use poles for balance, not brute force

On steep climbs, poles can help you keep an upright posture and steady rhythm. You don’t need to pull yourself up the mountain like you’re rowing. Think “support and cadence,” not “arm-powered summit attack.”

A playful infographic showing common trekking pole mistakes in El Chaltén, Patagonia, from poles getting stuck in rocky terrain to painful over-gripping and clunky movement, along with practical fixes that help hikers use poles smoothly and confidently on mountain trails.

Common mistakes (and how to avoid them)

“My poles keep getting stuck between rocks”

Shorten them slightly in rock gardens and plant more vertically. Also: don’t plant in obvious cracks unless you enjoy sudden stops.

“My hands hurt”

Check grip size, strap setup, and whether you’re over-gripping. Foam grips can be more forgiving for sweaty hands.

“I feel clunkier with poles”

Try poles on an easy hike or viewpoint trail before using them on the steepest day. The goal is muscle memory, not improvisation on a scree slope.

What about trekking poles and Leave No Trace?

Poles are useful. They can also scar rocks, poke holes in fragile vegetation, and chew up muddy trails if you’re not mindful. Leave No Trace guidance emphasizes minimizing impact, especially on wet and muddy trails, and using rubber tips when appropriate to reduce scarring on rock.

El Chaltén is stunning because it’s still wild. Keep it that way:

Use rubber tips where they reduce scarring (especially on rock-heavy sections)

Stay on established trails

If the trail is very muddy, step through the mud instead of widening the trail around it

Be mindful passing others (poles swing; knees do not enjoy surprise jabs)

Poles + shoulder season: when they jump from “nice” to “smart”

If you’re hiking in autumn or spring, you may encounter snow, mud, or icy patches—especially near higher viewpoints and steep final sections. Local trail guidance explicitly warns that these conditions can appear toward the end of routes like Laguna de los Tres and Pliegue Tumbado, where steep rocky slopes can become dangerous.

In those conditions, poles do two important things:

Provide additional stability on slick terrain

Help you move more deliberately, especially when visibility is poor

Can you fly with trekking poles?

Rules vary by country and by how security interprets your pole tips. In the U.S., TSA guidance states blunt-tipped hiking poles are allowed in carry-on or checked bags, while sharp-tipped hiking poles are not allowed in carry-on luggage.

Internationally, enforcement can differ. If you want to avoid drama:

Pack poles in checked luggage when possible

Use tip protectors

If you’re traveling light, renting in El Chaltén is the simplest path

The “we’re just being honest” verdict

So… do you need trekking poles in El Chaltén?

Yes… for some hikes and some bodies.No… for other hikes and other bodies.And “maybe” for everyone who thinks they’re fine until kilometer nine reminds them gravity is undefeated.

If you’re doing the biggest hikes (Fitz Roy / Pliegue Tumbado), if you’re hiking in shoulder season, if your knees have opinions, or if you’re stacking multiple big days, poles are a smart call. If you’re keeping it mellow with viewpoints and shorter trails, poles are optional.

Our biggest lesson from El Chaltén is simple: bring the tools that help you stay safe and enjoy the day. Nobody gets a prize for suffering unnecessarily—except maybe a personal sense of pride and a bigger appetite at Senderos.

Practical pre-hike checklist infographic for El Chaltén, Patagonia, outlining essential steps before big hikes: checking trail conditions, packing extra snacks, ordering lunchboxes, bringing wind layers, starting early, inspecting trekking pole locks and straps, and considering traction when trails are slippery.

Quick pre-hike checklist (the boring stuff that saves your day)

Check trail status and conditions before you commit to a big hike

Pack more snacks than you think you need (future-you is hungry)

If your accommodation offers lunchboxes, order the night before for full-day hikes

Bring layers for wind and sudden temperature changes

Start early for full-day hikes (daylight is your friend)

If using poles: check locks, tips, straps, and adjust before the steep section

If conditions are slick: consider traction + poles instead of wishful thinking

Trekking Poles in El Chaltén FAQ: What to Bring, When You’ll Want Them, and How to Use Them Without Looking Like a Baby Giraffe

Do I need trekking poles for Laguna de los Tres (Fitz Roy)?

Maybe. Not because it’s impossible without them, but because the steep, rocky final section and the long descent are exactly where poles shine—especially if you’re tired, it’s slick, or your knees have strong feelings.

Do I need trekking poles for Laguna Torre?

Maybe. If you like steady rhythm, want help on the return leg, or you’re hiking after another big day, poles are helpful. If you’re confident on uneven trails and prefer free hands, you can skip them.

Are trekking poles worth it if I’m only doing Los Cóndores / Las Águilas?

Probably not necessary. Those trails are short and low difficulty. But if it’s muddy/icy or you want extra knee confidence, poles can still be nice.

Do trekking poles actually help your knees on descents?

Yes. The main benefit many hikers feel is on downhill sections, where poles act like extra brakes and help reduce load on the lower body.

Will trekking poles make me hike faster?

They can, but that’s not always good. Poles can give you rhythm and confidence, which can push your pace. If you go too fast early, you’ll pay later. Patagonia always collects.

Are poles annoying in strong Patagonian wind?

Sometimes. If the wind is wild and you’re constantly adjusting layers, poles can feel like juggling. The trick is planting close to your body and using poles mainly for stability, not speed.

Should I use one pole or two?

Two. Using a pair gives you symmetry, stability, and better downhill support. One pole can help, but two is the real upgrade.

What’s the best way to adjust poles for downhill?

Slightly longer than your flat-trail setting. You want extra reach so the poles can act as brakes without forcing you to hunch.

How do I use the wrist straps correctly?

Think “strap supports the hand, hand lightly grips the handle.” If you’re death-gripping, you’ll tire fast and wonder why poles exist. Adjust straps so they carry some of the load.

Can I rent trekking poles in El Chaltén?

Yes. Multiple local rental shops offer trekking poles, and it’s a common way to avoid traveling with gear.

Should I bring poles from home or rent locally?

If you hike often and love your poles, bring them. If you’re unsure, renting is the easiest test. If you’re traveling light, renting is the simplest plan.

What kind of pole is best: carbon or aluminum?

It depends. Carbon is lighter but can be less forgiving in certain impacts. Aluminum is often more durable for rough handling. For most travelers, reliable locks and comfort matter more than material.

Do trekking poles damage trails?

They can. Be mindful on muddy trails, avoid widening trails, and consider rubber tips where they reduce rock scarring. Use poles as tools, not spears.

What if I don’t want poles—what can I do instead?

Nope. You’re not doomed. Prioritize good footwear, pace yourself, take breaks, and be extra careful on steep descents. In shoulder season, traction devices can matter more than poles—but poles still help balance.

#### Eating Thai Food: Guide to Thai Cuisine Interview with Mark Wiens
Recently I had the pleasure of meeting up with Mark Wiens in Seoul, South Korea.  As an expert in travel and food in Asia, it was Mark's first time to Korea and I figured nothing short of a traditional feast in Seoul would be sufficient.  Mark runs the ever popular Migrationology travel blog showcasing his passion for travel and food.  

I'm often dreaming of Thailand these days and I couldn't think of a better person to interview regarding eating Thai cuisine:

Why Is Thai Food So Popular?

Q1)  I've often heard individuals mention Thai food as their favourite cuisine.  What do you think sets it apart from others and makes it one of the most popular destinations for tourists?

I think it's the range of vibrant flavors that makes Thai cuisine so remarkable and appetizing. Nearly every Thai dish is balanced in flavor, a little sour, spicy, salty, and a often a sweet aftertaste. All your taste buds alive and aroused with each bite is why so many people love Thai food!

Another reason would be the fresh ingredients, the herbs like holy and sweet basil, lemongrass and kaffir limes leaves, and other tropical ingredients like fresh coconut milk and wonderful fruit.

Eating Thai Food Website: Mark Wiens

Q2)  Many know you from you flagship travel blog Migrationology but you've also got another fantastic site Eating Thai Food.  What inspired you to make this site and what can readers expect to find?

When I first started blogging I was traveling all around, but eventually I decided to remain in Thailand (mostly Bangkok) on a long term basis. After staying in Thailand for a few months I soon realized I had so many Thai food photos and Thai dining experiences that there was no way to publish it all on my original blog.

A passion for eating paired with so much Thai food content was the reason for beginning a site strictly dedicated to eating all sorts of delicious Thai food. You can expect to find top Thai food lists, restaurant reviews (mostly Bangkok), tips on how and what to order, and lots of food photos to get you excited about exploring Thai cuisine!

What Thai Street Food Should Visitors Try First?

Q3)  One cannot sepearte Thai cuisine from street food.  What are some dishes you recommend to others experiencing Thai food on the streets of Bangkok for the very first time?

You're right about that, Thai street food is everywhere you look and it's quick, convenient and delicious.

Here are a few of the most popular local Thai dishes you shouldn't miss in Bangkok:

Pad Gaprao Gai Kai Dao (Stir fried chicken with holy basil and a fried egg on top) - This is like the hamburger of Thailand, a tasty dish that's widely available and easy to eat on the go.

Kuay Teow Tom Yum (Noodles in hot and sour soup) - Hot noodle carts can be found on just about every street in Bangkok serving freshly boiled noodles in flavorful broth. It's then up to you to add vinegar, chili flakes, fish sauce, or even a spoon of sugar to make it taste even better!

Som Tam Thai (Green papaya salad) - The texture of the green papaya is crisp and it is dressed in lime juice and fish sauce and laced in chilies for an extra kick you'll love!

Bold and Spicy Thai Food!

Q4)  For those who are bold (in terms of their willingness to try exotic or spicy delicacies) what are some dishes that you would recommend? 

First of all, if you really enjoy eating spicy, you can bump up the heat by ordering everything "phet mak mak," or very spicy!

Here are a couple dishes you should try if you're looking for exotic or hot dishes:

Goong Dten - Translated to "dancing shrimp," that's exactly what it is - live mini shrimp are mixed with dressing and served still wriggling as you eat them !

Larb Neua Dip - You may have heard of normal larb (common minced pork salad), but there are other versions, like this one made with raw beef and blood.

Som Tam Pla Raa - Som tam as mentioned above is Thai green papaya salad, but instead of that limey fresh dressing like in the other version, this variety includes the famous "pla raa," or pickled preserved fish. The flavor is pungent and can be intense.

Hardcore Backpacker Meal Plan In Bangkok

Q5)  What do you think is the ultimate meal plan for a hardcore budget backpacker with adventurous tastebuds roaming around Bangkok for the day?

Stick to the streets and get away from the main touristy areas of Bangkok to eat. Head into one of the local fresh markets like Khlong Toey or Pak Khlong Talat where you can find great local style food on the cheap. Look for street stalls that are buzzing with lots of action so you know the food is fresh and good.

If you're really on a budget, you may want to go to a "khao rod gaeng," stall that serves rice and a variety of pre-made curries. You can get a huge plate of rice and a few different dishes on top for 25 to 35 THB (around $1).

Thai Sweet Tooth: Thai Desserts

Q6)  For those with a sweet tooth, what are some dishes they could sample to fix that craving?

If you enjoy sweets, you'll have the time of your life in Thailand as there is such a variety of desserts and sweet snacks. Many Thai desserts are flavored with fruit and rich coconut cream.

Khao Neow Mamuang (Sticky rice and mango) - One of the most prized Thai desserts is sweet sticky rice paired with ripe yellow mango and doused in coconut cream. I also love Khao New Toorien - durian replacing the mango!

[vsw id="1adfMcTV4V8" source="youtube" width="800" height="650" autoplay="no"]

Khanom Takoh (Coconut cream pudding)

Fuktong Sangkaya (Pumpkin filled with egg custard)

Itim Gati (fresh Thai coconut ice cream, sometimes served with sticky rice and roasted peanuts)

Learning How To Cook Thai Food

Q7)  Eating Thai food back home can be pricey at times.  Do you have any suggestions for a farang looking to master a few dishes before heading back home?

While Thai food and cooking really focuses on balancing all flavors, it's really up to the personal eater (or chef) to determine what's balanced.

Thais often order their dishes exactly to their liking, extra sour or sweet or extra spicy. For this reason it's important to get a feel for what Thai food should taste like, and when you cook it's necessary to sample until each dish is the way you want it to taste.

Thai cooking is not only about using the right amount of ingredients, but also about using the correct levels of heat and methods of preparation. For instance grinding chilies and garlic with a mortar and pestle really makes a difference to bring out the flavor!

Overall, have fun with Thai cooking and make everything so it's most appealing to yourself or whoever you're cooking for!

What Is The Ultimate Thai Meal

Q8)  Finally, this is an unfair question but what would be your ultimate full course Thai meal if you had to make such a decision?

This is a jumbled mixture of different dishes from around the country, so it would be hard to actually eat all these dishes in one single restaurant meal, but here are a few of my favorites!

Pla Chon Lui Suan - Steamed snakehead fish with vegetables and herbs

Pad Sata - Stir fried sink beans!

Gaeng Som - Hot and sour southern Thai soup (a southern Thai food staple)

Pad Pak Gachet - Stir fried water mimosa

Nam Prik Kaphi - Shrimp paste chili sauce eaten with fresh or steamed vegetables

I'd end my meal with a mega chunk of fresh durian!

How to Eat Thai Food Without Getting Completely Overwhelmed

Heat, traffic, tuk-tuks, and then suddenly a tiny cart on the corner is turning out stir-fries that taste better than most restaurants back home. The good news is: you don’t need to be an expert or a food blogger to eat really, really well in Thailand.

You just need a loose game plan.

Think of Thai food as a set of levers you can play with: sweet, sour, salty, spicy, crunchy, fresh. When you mix a couple of dishes at each meal, you start to understand why people get hooked for life.

Let’s break it down in a way that helps you actually plan your trip and your meals, not just drool over photos.

Bangkok as Your Thai Food Bootcamp

If you’re flying into Thailand for the first time, Bangkok is basically your orientation camp for Thai flavours. It’s chaotic, yes, but it’s also where you can sample dishes from all over the country in one day if you want.

Choosing a Food-Friendly Base in Bangkok

You can eat well almost anywhere in Bangkok, but some neighbourhoods make life easier when your main daily objective is “what are we eating next?”

Here’s a simple way to think about a few popular bases:

AreaVibeFood HighlightsBudget FeelOld Town (Rattanakosin)Temples, riverside, old shophousesClassic shophouse restaurants, noodle stalls, local sweetsLow–MediumChinatown (Yaowarat)Neon, chaotic, night street foodSeafood, noodles, roast duck, dim sum, dessertsLow–High (wide range)Sukhumvit (Asok–Thong Lo)Modern, expat-heavy, BTS accessTrendy restaurants, cafes, street stalls in side soisMedium–HighVictory Monument / AriLocal, commuter, everyday BangkokNoodle shops, boat noodles, cheap canteensLow–MediumKhao San AreaBackpacker centralTourist-aimed Thai, some good stalls on side streetsLow–Medium

If your main goal is food and you’re not terrified of a bit of chaos, Chinatown after dark is a great initiation. For a softer landing with lots of options and easy metro access, Sukhumvit does the job.

A One-Day Thai Food Game Plan in Bangkok

Use this as a template for your first full “eat Thai all day” experience.

Breakfast: Rice, Noodles, or Something Sweet

Thais don’t really have “breakfast food” the way we do. They just eat. That’s good news for you.

Look out for:

Jok (rice porridge) with minced pork and egg

Khao kai jeow – crispy Thai-style omelette over rice with chili sauce

Simple noodle soups with fish balls or pork

If you’re easing in: toast and coffee at a local café plus a small bag of fried dough sticks

If your hotel buffet has rice dishes and curries, don’t be shy about going savoury early. It sets the tone for the day.

Late-Morning Market Snack

Head to a fresh market or a local wet market.

You’re hunting for:

Bags of cut tropical fruit (mango, pineapple, guava)

Small grilled skewers (pork, chicken, fish balls)

Fresh herbal drinks or iced teas

Eat little, but often. You don’t want to fill up before lunch. There is always another bowl of something waiting around the corner.

Lunch: Your First Proper Street Stall Feast

By lunchtime, pick a busy corner shop or stall. Busy is the keyword.

Easy “first lunch” options:

Pad kraprao gai kai dao – basil chicken and fried egg over rice

Kuay teow tom yum – tom yum noodle soup with your choice of noodles

Khao man gai – chicken rice with clear soup

If there’s a stall with trays of curries and stir-fries (khao gaeng), point, smile, and let them heap two or three dishes over rice. Budget-friendly. Hugely satisfying.

Afternoon Coffee and Thai Sweets

When the heat peaks, duck into:

A café for iced coffee or Thai tea

A stall with khanom (Thai sweets): coconut puddings, pumpkin custard, or anything wrapped in banana leaf

Sticky rice pops up here too: coconut sticky rice with grilled banana, or later in the day mango sticky rice if it’s mango season.

Dinner: Shared Dishes and Cold Drinks

Dinner is when you can start thinking in terms of “spread” instead of one plate.

A good dinner for two or three people might look like:

1 spicy salad (som tam or larb)

1 stir-fry (morning glory, water mimosa, or basil pork)

1 curry (green curry, panang, or gaeng som if you’re feeling bold)

Steamed rice for everyone

If you’re near a night market, add skewers and snacks on top of that: grilled chicken, sausages, little coconut pancakes.

You’ll sleep well.

Ordering Like You Know What You’re Doing

Half the fun of Thai food is ordering. The other half is eating. Learning a couple of phrases goes a long way.

Simple Thai Food Phrases That Actually Help

You don’t need full sentences. You just need these magic words:

Phet nid noi – a little spicy

Mai phet – not spicy

Phet mak mak – very spicy

Aroy mak – very delicious

Khao – rice

Gai (chicken), moo (pork), neua (beef), goong (shrimp), pla (fish)

So you can say something like:

“Pad kraprao gai, phet nid noi” – basil chicken stir-fry, a little spicy

“Tom yum goong, mai phet” – shrimp tom yum, not spicy (it will probably still have a kick)

Smile, point, and don’t be afraid to laugh at yourself a bit. People are generally pretty forgiving when you’re clearly trying.

Balancing a Thai Meal: How to Mix Dishes

The easiest mistake is to order three spicy dishes and then wonder why you’re sweating through your shirt.

Think in categories:

Dish TypeFlavour FocusExample DishWhen to Add ItSpicy saladSour, spicy, saltySom tam, larb, yum seafoodTo wake up your palateStir-frySavoury, garlickyPad kraprao, pad pakYour “comfort” dish with riceCurryRich, aromatic, sometimes sweetGreen curry, massaman, panangFor depth and warmthSoupLight or fiery, aromaticTom yum, tom kha, gaeng somTo balance a dry spreadSide veg / greensMild, crunchy, garlickyStir-fried morning gloryTo give your tongue a break

For two people, one dish from three different rows plus rice is a nice balance. For four people, you can happily go up to five or six dishes without overdoing it.

Regional Thai Food Roadmap

One of the best things about Thailand is that “Thai food” isn’t one thing. The flavours shift as you move around the country.

Using Bangkok as your classroom, you can then fan out and chase regional specialities.

Central Thailand & Bangkok

Flavour profile: balanced, a bit of everything, classic dishes you see in cookbooks.

What to look for:

Tom yum goong – hot and sour prawn soup

Green curry – coconut-based, usually with chicken or fish balls

Pad thai – yes, there is good pad thai, especially at busy local stalls

Boat noodles – rich, aromatic noodle soups, often around canals or specific markets

Expect:

Plenty of rice and noodle dishes

A mix of sweet, sour, and mildly spicy

Lots of choice on every corner

Northern Thailand (Chiang Mai, Chiang Rai)

Flavour profile: aromatic rather than blisteringly spicy, smoky, herbal.

Dishes to hunt down:

Khao soi – coconut curry noodle soup with crispy noodles on top

Sai ua – grilled northern sausage, full of herbs and chilies

Nam prik ong / nam prik num – chunky chili dips with vegetables

Gaeng hung lay – Burmese-influenced pork curry

Market nights here are gold. Live music, grilled meats, bowls of khao soi, and mango sticky rice for dessert.

Isaan (Northeast Thailand)

Flavour profile: bold, sour, spicy, lots of grilled meat and sticky rice.

Signature foods:

Som tam in all its forms: with peanuts, with salted egg, with fermented fish

Gai yang – grilled chicken with dipping sauces

Larb and nam tok – minced meat salads bursting with lime, chili, and herbs

Sticky rice with almost everything

This is the region you’re channeling when you tell someone you “love real spicy Thai food” and then sweat through your shirt five minutes later.

#### El Chaltén Travel Guide: Best Things to Do in the Hiking Capital of Patagonia, Argentina
El Chaltén is the kind of place that makes you feel athletic just by stepping off the bus. The mountains loom. The air smells like cold water and sun-warmed dust. And everybody you meet looks like they were born wearing a softshell jacket.

And yet Audrey and I showed up… in full foodie mode.

Laguna Capri, El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina: Nomadic Samuel takes in the Fitz Roy skyline from the iconic lakeshore lookout on the Laguna de los Tres route—our favorite ‘stop and breathe’ moment before deciding whether to push on or call it a perfect half-day win.

Our jeans were staging a quiet protest. We were “rotunding,” as we lovingly called it, and we were absolutely not the best versions of ourselves. But we had six nights in Patagonia’s trekking capital, an irresponsible amount of daylight, and Mount Fitz Roy calling our name. So we did what any sensible travel couple would do: we ate pizza, bought groceries, panicked about Wi-Fi, then immediately marched up a steep little hill for a sunset viewpoint like we were training for an expedition.

Audrey Bergner at Laguna de los Tres, El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina: the spectacular payoff after hours of hiking through wind, forest, and moraine. With Fitz Roy and the glacier-tinted turquoise lake behind her, this is Patagonia’s most iconic “we actually made it” moment.

That’s El Chaltén in a nutshell. It’s equal parts jaw-dropping landscape and practical logistics. It’s a town designed around hikes, weather windows, and the sacred post-trek meal. And if you’re building a trip around El Chaltén, you don’t need to be an elite hiker—but you do need a plan, a sense of humor, and a healthy respect for the wind.

This is the travel guide to our El Chaltén series: hopefully a lethal combo of personal experience, quirky storytelling, and the practical details that make the difference between “best trip ever” and “why are we eating granola bars whilst getting blasted by wind?”

Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner hiking in El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina—soaking up the mountain air and loving the rhythm of life on the trail. With Fitz Roy’s distant peaks ahead and lush Patagonian forest all around, this was one of those pure “we’re exactly where we should be” travel moments.

Planning snapshot

El Chaltén sits at the northern end of Los Glaciares National Park and functions like a hiking basecamp with espresso machines. Your daily rhythm is simple: wake up, check the sky, eat something that won’t betray you on a climb, hike until your legs file a formal complaint, then refuel with carbs and existential gratitude.

A visual snapshot of El Chaltén travel essentials — this infographic breaks down ideal trip length, trekking vibe, Patagonia’s famous wind challenges, realistic fitness expectations, and smart planning tips, all set against the dramatic Mount Fitz Roy skyline.

🧾 Quick Booking: Your El Chaltén Travel Essentials 🥾✨

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit (Book These 4 Things)

✅ What to book💡 Why it’s worth it🔗 Quick link🥾 Tours & experiencesEasy way to lock in a glacier day, a Lago del Desierto adventure, or a guided option when weather turns moodyBrowse El Chaltén tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & staysEl Chaltén sells out fast in peak season — booking early = better locations + fewer “only the priciest rooms left” momentsFind El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car rentals (optional)Best for freedom days: Ruta 40 viewpoints, flexible timing, photo stops, and a smoother Lago del Desierto runCompare car rentals in El Calafate (gateway to El Chaltén) on DiscoverCars🚌 Bus ticketsThe classic El Calafate ↔ El Chaltén route is simple — but popular departure times fill upBook El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud

👉 One-click backup (reverse direction): Book El Chaltén → El Calafate buses on Busbud

El Chaltén in one table

TopicWhat to knowOur takeIdeal stay4–6 nights if you want the classics without rushingWe stayed 6 nights and finally stopped feeling behindBest vibeDIY trekking, big mountain views, frontier town energyIt feels like a colorful little oasis surrounded by teethy peaksBiggest challengeWind + rapidly changing conditionsPatagonia keeps you humble and makes your hood the main characterFitness realityYou don’t need to be ultra-fit, but big hikes will punish “foodie mode”We survived, but we also fantasized about being carried out on a sedan chairPlanning must-doBuild in rest days and weather buffersThe mountain doesn’t care about your schedule

Iconic Mount Fitz Roy towering above El Chaltén, Patagonia — a dramatic panorama of jagged granite spires, snow-draped ridgelines, and passing clouds that defines the legendary scenery of Argentina’s hiking capital and rewards every trekker who makes the climb.

What first-timers get wrong (so you don’t)

Packing a single “nice day” plan. El Chaltén is a “Plan A / Plan B / Plan C” destination.

Underestimating how much daylight tempts you into doing too much. A late sunset does not mean your legs have extended daylight hours too.

Treating the big hikes like casual strolls. They’re doable, but they’re real.

Skipping snacks. We once fueled a massive day on “one granola bar and candy,” which is not a nutrition strategy so much as a cry for help.

A sweeping view of a towering glacier in Los Glaciares National Park near El Chaltén — fractured blue ice, deep crevasses, and roaring silence combine to create one of Patagonia’s most humbling natural spectacles.

Decision matrix: pick your El Chaltén vibe

Your vibe todayDo thisTimeLegs requiredWind toleranceWhy it works“We need a big iconic win.”Fitz Roy / Laguna de los Tres dayFull dayHighMedium–HighThe signature “wow” that makes you forgive everything“Scenic but kinder.”Laguna TorreFull dayMediumMediumHuge views without the same final-wall brutality“Short hike, big payoff.”Mirador de los Cóndores (sunset)1–2 hrsLow–MediumMediumSteep but short; instant “we’re in Patagonia!” moment“Easy nature, minimal suffering.”Chorrillo del Salto1–2 hrsLowLow–MediumWaterfall reward with a mellow effort-to-payoff ratio“Recovery day. Please.”River walk + cafés + admin2–5 hrsVery lowLowKeeps you moving without wrecking tomorrow“Weather hates us.”Museums/chapel + coffee crawl + planning2–4 hrsVery lowNoneYour Plan B that still feels like a real day

Audrey Bergner pauses proudly on the Laguna Torre trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia, framed by lenga forest and the dramatic snow-covered Cerro Torre massif — a perfect snapshot of the classic hiking experience in Argentina’s trekking capital.

Best things to do in El Chaltén: the hikes

El Chaltén is not a “do one hike and leave” destination. It’s a place where you stack days, learn the rhythm of the trails, and slowly become the kind of person who says things like “Let’s just check the wind at the portal” with a straight face.

To make this guide useful, we’re grouping hikes by effort level and payoff:

Iconic full-day hikes: the reason most people come.

Medium adventures: big scenery without maximum suffering.

Easy walks + viewpoints: short, sweet, and wildly satisfying.

https://youtu.be/V3sbqsXetEQ

Iconic full-day hike #1: Mount Fitz Roy + Laguna de los Tres (aka “the one that humbled us”)

If El Chaltén is the hiking capital, Laguna de los Tres is the national anthem. This is the hike that fills your camera roll, drains your legs, and makes you feel like you accomplished something slightly unreasonable.

I started the day feeling brave. Too brave. The kind of brave that comes from long daylight and optimistic snack math.

A close-up of the Laguna de los Tres trail marker in El Chaltén, Patagonia — the classic “Senda Fitz Roy Km 3 de 10” wooden sign that keeps hikers oriented on the long but rewarding trek toward Mount Fitz Roy, one of Argentina’s most iconic mountain adventures.

One of the things we loved about trekking in El Chaltén is the kilometer markers. They’re small, but psychologically huge. They tell you exactly where you are in the story. At kilometer 3 you feel heroic. At kilometer 8 you start bargaining with your life choices. At kilometer 9 you realize you’ve entered the “last kilometer” stage of the journey—except that last kilometer is basically a steep, rocky negotiation with gravity.

What the hike feels like (from our very non-elite perspective)

Early-morning hikers on the Laguna de los Tres trail in El Chaltén, Patagonia — a quiet start on the rocky path toward Mount Fitz Roy, with lenga forest, fresh air, and snow-draped peaks setting the scene for Argentina’s most legendary full-day trek.

The early kilometers are steady and scenic. You get viewpoints, forests, and that growing sense of “Oh wow, the mountains are actually revealing themselves.” If you only hike as far as Laguna Capri, you already get a ridiculous Fitz Roy view and you get to keep your soul intact.

At Laguna Capri we hit the campground facilities, sat down for a snack break, and had a very real couple-conference about whether to push onward. The near-10 p.m. summer light made us feel invincible… which is a dangerous emotion to have in Patagonia.

Audrey Bergner presenting the breathtaking Laguna Capri viewpoint in El Chaltén, Patagonia — a vivid turquoise lake reflecting Mount Fitz Roy’s jagged peaks, offering one of Argentina’s most rewarding mid-hike stops and a perfect introduction to the legendary trekking scenery of Patagonia’s hiking capital.

Then comes the final push to Laguna de los Tres. The word “steep” begins to feel inadequate. The trail turns into loose rock, gravel, and a kind of upward crawling that makes you intensely aware of your knees.

Audrey and I were exhausted at this points. There were moments where we could have used trekking poles, and there were moments where encouragement from hikers coming down was the only thing keeping us going.

El Chaltén, Patagonia, Argentina: Nomadic Samuel joins the hiking train across the rocky moraine for the final push to Laguna de los Tres. With Fitz Roy’s jagged spires looming above the glacier, this is the classic “one more switchback” section where the views get insane and your calves start filing formal complaints.

And then you crest the top and the lagoon is there, waiting just for you. The wind can be beyond belief, but the view is so astonishing you forgive the wind for being the wind.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Nomadic Samuel and Audrey Bergner snap a summit selfie at Laguna de los Tres, grinning in the fierce mountain wind as Mount Fitz Roy towers above the turquoise glacial lake. This is the unforgettable payoff moment on Argentina’s most iconic hike.

I ended up ducking behind rocks to escape the worst of the wind, inhaling our remaining snacks like it was a survival exercise. We also did the classic “wind in our faces” selfie—because if Patagonia is going to humble you, it should at least be documented.

Otherworldly views at the payoff point of the Laguna de los Tres hike in El Chaltén, Patagonia — a brilliant turquoise lake framed by glaciers and Mount Fitz Roy’s needle-like peaks, proving every steep step of Argentina’s most famous trek is absolutely worth the effort.

Our biggest takeaway

This hike is absolutely worth it… but it is not a casual stroll. The first stretch can be “intermediate” for reasonably fit people. The last section is where it really tests you. If you’re not a regular hiker—if you arrived like us, in full foodie mode—you will feel the tightness the next day.

The “don’t do what we did” food note

We were ravenous. Our “fuel plan” at one point was basically “one granola bar and candy,” which is not a plan. Bring real snacks and enough water. Your future self will thank you. We brought a lunchbox but ate it too early. We definitely could have loaded up with more (and better) supplies.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Nomadic Samuel appears almost miniature on the trail as the jagged peaks of Mount Fitz Roy dominate the horizon. This kind of dramatic scale is what makes hiking in Argentina’s trekking capital feel truly otherworldly.

The walk back (and the sedan chair fantasy)

On the way back, we were spent. The kind of spent where you put the cameras down and walk in silence. There were points where we weren’t taking breaks out of convenience, but because our legs were genuinely refusing to function.

At one point I remember fantasizing: what would it be like to be carried out on a sedan chair right now? What if we called the emergency number and requested an airlift? (To be clear: a joke. A dramatic, theatrical, “my quads have left the chatroom” joke.)

Our feet were aching. Throbbing. But we made it back to town, and that’s when El Chaltén revealed its second superpower: food.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Nomadic Samuel’s blue cheese risotto at Senderos, topped with toasted walnuts and artistic beet drizzle. Gourmet meals like this are a delicious reward after long hiking days in Argentina’s trekking capital.

Post-hike reward: Senderos (our “hidden gem” dinner)

We found this small restaurant called Senderos near the bus terminal, tucked inside a high-end guesthouse. It felt boutique and intimate—like six or seven tables—so when we walked in they seemed mildly surprised, as if we had crawled out of the mountains and into their dining room purely on instinct.

I had a blue cheese risotto with walnuts and sun-dried tomatoes. Audrey went for a hearty lentejas. We split a full bottle of Syrah (taking a very rare break from Malbec). Then we made the extremely responsible decision to order two desserts.

We waddled back and were in bed by around 8:00 or 8:30 p.m. We slept something like 10–12 hours. Patagonia doesn’t just give you big hikes—it gives you big sleep.

Practical tips for Laguna de los Tres

Start early. Not because you need the daylight, but because you want a calmer trail and more buffer for breaks.

Consider trekking poles for the final steep section.

Bring layers. The top can feel dramatically different from town.

Decide your turnaround point before you’re exhausted.

If you’re not feeling it, do Laguna Capri as your “smart compromise” and still go home with a Fitz Roy win.

👉 Check out El Chaltén hotels, resorts and lodges on Booking.com

https://youtu.be/TJZ-lgmwE2Q

Iconic full-day hike #2: Laguna Torre (big scenery, kinder vibes)

Laguna Torre is the hike we recommend when someone says, “We want a full day out, we want to see something spectacular, but we also don’t want to be destroyed tomorrow.”

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Audrey Bergner stands proudly beside the Senda a Laguna Torre trailhead sign, the starting point for the legendary Laguna Torre hike. Trailhead moments like this capture the excitement before stepping into Patagonia’s wild mountain landscapes.

It’s still a long day. It’s still Patagonia. But for us, it felt more manageable than Laguna de los Tres—less “final boss,” more “steady quest with a gorgeous payoff.”

I went into Laguna Torre with legs that were still recovering from a 20+ km Fitz Roy day—but we woke up to perfect weather and told ourselves this was the “easier” 18 km choice. (Reader: it was still 18 km.)

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Nomadic Samuel walks through the twisted lenga forest on the Laguna Torre trail, where wind-shaped trees and fallen trunks create an almost haunted atmosphere. Scenes like this make Patagonia’s hiking trails feel wild, remote, and unforgettable.

What we loved about this hike

The scenery changes along the way: forest, valley views, and that feeling of moving deeper into the mountain world.

The payoff is stunning, especially if the weather cooperates.

It felt like a hike we could actually enjoy while still walking at a human pace.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Cascada Margarita cascades down a dramatic rock wall wrapped in bright green moss, offering a refreshing and photogenic stop

Early on we caught Cascada Margarita thundering down in sections, and once we got into the forest the wind finally stopped trying to fight us personally. That sheltered feeling made the whole day calmer—more “scenic quest,” less “hood-flapping endurance sport.”

A note on weather windows

Patagonia loves mood swings. One day can be warm and calm, the next can feel colder, rainier, and significantly windier. For this reason, Laguna Torre is the perfect example of why you don’t schedule every day like it’s a guarantee. If the weather looks spicy, you can swap this hike with a rest day or a shorter viewpoint day without losing the plot.

When we reached Laguna Torre, Cerro Torre was hiding in dense cloud and the water looked cold and murky—with a few little icebergs drifting near shore like tiny reminders that you’re in a serious landscape. We wandered over to the De Agostini campsite, and briefly romanticized the campers cooking ramen. Could you please share with us?

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Audrey Bergner hiking the Laguna Torre trail as dramatic Patagonian peaks rise in the distance. Scenic forest paths like this make the journey to Laguna Torre just as memorable as the final viewpoint.

Practical tips for Laguna Torre

Pack more snacks than you think you need.

Bring a wind layer that you actually trust.

Don’t treat “it looks fine right now” as a weather forecast.

If you’re feeling sore, keep your pace slow and steady and treat it like a scenic long walk rather than a race.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — eerie white lenga tree trunks create a hauntingly beautiful forest landscape, a reminder that hiking here isn’t just about mountain views but also discovering strange, delicate, and unforgettable natural textures along the trails.

Medium adventures: big rewards without maximum suffering

Not every day needs to be a heroic suffer-fest. El Chaltén is best when you mix big hikes with medium days, so your body can keep up with your ambition.

Medium-hike decision table

HikeBest forTimeEffortPayoffNotesLaguna CapriFitz Roy views without doing “the last kilometer”Half dayMediumHighYour smart alternative or add-onChorrillo del SaltoEasy-to-moderate waterfall win1–2 hrsLowMedium–HighGreat in mixed weatherMirador de las Águilas add-onExtending the viewpoint day2–3 hrsLow–MediumMediumCombine with Los Cóndores for a loop vibe“Choose-your-own loop” town circuitsGentle movement and photos1–2 hrsLowMediumIdeal for arrival days and rest days

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Audrey Bergner at the Laguna Capri viewpoint, smiling beside the lake as Mount Fitz Roy dominates the skyline. It’s one of the most rewarding and accessible hikes in Argentina’s trekking capital, delivering postcard-perfect scenery without the full Laguna de los Tres climb.

Laguna Capri: the “we still got Fitz Roy” option

If you want a meaningful mountain day without committing to Laguna de los Tres, Laguna Capri is your friend. You’ll still get those iconic Fitz Roy views and that “Patagonia delivered” feeling, but you’ll finish with enough energy to enjoy the rest of your day like a functioning person.

This is also a perfect “Plan B” if you start the big hike and realize early that you’re not feeling it. Turning around is not failure; it’s strategy.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Chorrillo del Salto roars down a dramatic rock face into a crystal-clear stream, an easy and family-friendly waterfall hike offering big scenery without the big effort just minutes from town.

Chorrillo del Salto: the waterfall that loves your rest day

Chorrillo del Salto is the kind of hike you do when you want something outside, something scenic, and something that doesn’t turn your legs into noodles. It’s also a fantastic arrival-day or recovery-day activity because it feels like a proper outing without demanding a full-day commitment.

On our final days, after all the big hiking, we did Chorrillo del Salto and then pushed ourselves onward to Mirador de las Águilas (Mirador de los Cóndores redo)—because apparently we only learn moderation slowly.

https://youtu.be/wselXYT-3N0

Easy walks and viewpoints: tiny effort, ridiculous scenery

This is where El Chaltén becomes addictive. You don’t always have to commit to a full-day epic to feel like you’re in the middle of something spectacular. Sometimes you just need a short, steep climb, a panoramic lookout, and the late Patagonian light doing its thing.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — photographing the town from Mirador de los Cóndores, where an easy uphill hike rewards you with panoramic views of the river valley, surrounding cliffs, and mountain-backed village below.

Our favorite “short but iconic” viewpoint: Mirador de los Cóndores

On our first evening we went straight for Mirador de los Cóndores. It’s short. It’s steep. And it gives you that instant, cinematic “we’re really here” moment.

We did it as a sunset hike because daylight was stretching late and we wanted to squeeze in one quick win on arrival. From the lookout, El Chaltén looked like a splash of color in a dramatic valley—more frontier town than polished resort. The higher we climbed, the more mountain ranges revealed themselves. It was the perfect first impression.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — soaking in the vast steppe and winding river valley from Mirador de las Águilas, a short uphill hike that delivers one of the quietest and most rewarding panoramic viewpoints in town.

Add-on: Mirador de las Águilas

If you’ve got extra energy (or you simply enjoy collecting viewpoints like Pokémon), extend the walk to Mirador de las Águilas. The vibe shifts from “town panorama” to broader views outward toward the landscape beyond.

Easy-hike menu (quick reference)

Walk / viewpointTypical timeDistanceEffortBest momentMirador de los Cóndores30–60 min~1 km upSteep-shortSunset / golden hourMirador de las Águilas1.5–3 hrs~2 km+ (add-on)Easy–moderateClear days, softer windMirador Río de las Vueltas15–30 minShortEasyWhen you want scenery without sweatTown circuits + La Lagunita45–90 minShortEasyRest day walks and photo hunts

Mirador de los Cóndores is ~1 km / ~30 minutes, and the Mirador de las Águilas spur branches shortly before Los Cóndores.

Why these matter (especially for your itinerary)

They’re perfect for arrival day when you’re excited but not fully organized yet.

They’re perfect for rest days when you need movement but not training.

They’re perfect for “weather isn’t ideal but we want to do something.”

El Chaltén, Patagonia — the iconic Bienvenidos sign marks your arrival in Argentina’s hiking capital, a colorful wooden welcome that signals the start of trail networks, cozy cafés, gear shops, and unforgettable mountain adventures.

Multi-Day Trekking in El Chaltén (For Big-Hike Addicts)

Most visitors stick to day hikes — and honestly, that’s plenty. But if you’re experienced in backcountry trekking, El Chaltén also lets you link iconic trails into multi-day adventures through remote valleys, glaciers, and wild campsites.

Here are the two classic routes:

RouteNightsCampsHighlightsDifficultyFitz Roy ↔ Laguna Torre Traverse2Poincenot → De AgostiniConnects both legendary hikes in one tripHardHuemul Circuit3–4Backcountry campsGlacier crossings, raw wilderness, solitudeExpert

Multi-day treks here are remote, exposed, and weather-dependent. Attempt them only if you already have solid mountain and navigation experience.

Trailhead signs in El Chaltén, Patagonia, pointing toward Laguna Torre, Mirador Maestri, and Camp de Agostini. These markers help hikers and multi-day trekkers understand how major routes connect, making it easier to navigate overnight adventures through Argentina’s national park trail network.

How the Main Trails Connect

One of the coolest things about El Chaltén is that major hikes don’t just start and end in town — many can be linked together if you’re trekking overnight.

StartFinishLinkable?NightsNotesLaguna de los TresLaguna TorreYes2Via Campamento Poincenot → De AgostiniLaguna TorrePliegue TumbadoNo—Separate trailheadsLaguna CapriFitz Roy BaseDay hike0Common acclimation route

If you’re sticking to day hikes, you’ll start and finish in town every night. If you’re trekking, this table shows how the puzzle pieces fit.

A quiet forest campsite in El Chaltén, Patagonia, where multi-day trekkers pitch tents beneath lenga trees. Camping like this allows hikers to link iconic trails such as Laguna de los Tres and Laguna Torre, creating unforgettable overnight adventures deep in Argentina’s wild mountain landscapes.

Campsite Reservations & Park Rules

Campsite reservations are managed through the Argentine National Parks (APN) booking system. In peak summer season, you’ll want to reserve camps ahead of time — especially for Poincenot and De Agostini.

A quick rules snapshot:

ItemNeeded?WherePark entry ticketYesAPN onlineCamping reservationYes (summer)APN bookingTrail permitsNo—

Leave-no-trace principles are strictly enforced. Pack it in, pack it out.

Can You Rent Hiking Gear in El Chaltén?

Short answer: a little — but not everything.

ItemAvailable?NotesTrekking polesYesEasy to find in townWaterproof jacketsLimitedSmall selection onlyHiking bootsVery limitedDon’t rely on thisFull camping kitsNoBring your own tent + stove

If you’re planning any overnight trek, arrive fully equipped.

Multi-Day Trek Reality Check

Patagonian weather changes fast. Winds can hit without warning. Trail conditions shift daily. River crossings may become impassable.

Multi-day trekking here is incredible — but it’s not casual hiking. Experience, preparation, and flexibility are essential.

Trailhead signage in El Chaltén, Patagonia, pointing toward Camp de Agostini and Laguna Torre. These forest paths guide hikers and multi-day trekkers moving between major routes, helping campers navigate overnight adventures through Argentina’s rugged national park backcountry.

Quick Planning Snapshot (Permits & Logistics)

QuestionAnswerCan I hike without a guide?Yes for all main trailsDo I need advance park tickets?Recommended in summerAre trails marked?Very wellIs there phone signal?Limited once hikingCan I rent camping gear?No

Best Things to Do in El Chaltén Beyond Hiking

Yes, El Chaltén is a hiking town. But the best trips aren’t 100% trail, 0% town. The town itself is part of the experience—the frontier feel, the colorful buildings, the gear shops, the nervous energy in the mornings, and the post-hike limping parade in the evenings.

If you build even a half-day of “town time” into your plan, El Chaltén stops being just a trailhead and starts feeling like a place.

Wander the town like it’s part of the itinerary

El Chaltén is small enough that wandering can become an actual activity—especially if you treat it like a scavenger hunt instead of “killing time.”

El Chaltén’s town center offers plenty of small, charming moments beyond the hiking trails — here Audrey Bergner relaxes beside a hand-carved wooden climber statue, soaking in local life, colorful storefronts, and mountain views in Patagonia’s trekking capital.

Fun little “micro-quests” that make town wandering feel purposeful:

Pick a daily ritual: choose one bakery, one café, or one ice cream spot and commit to it like it’s your training base.

Do a gear-shop loop: walk into shops even if you don’t “need” anything—Patagonia has a way of changing your mind fast.

Find your favorite view-from-town corner: a quick lookout, a river bend, a street where Fitz Roy peeks out between rooftops.

Spot the morning mood: pre-hike jitters, last-minute blister tape purchases, stove fuel panic, trail mix restocking.

Watch the evening vibe: muddy boots, sunburnt faces, and people telling the same story five times because it still feels unreal.

Tiny-town bonus: it’s hard to “waste time” here—everything you do makes tomorrow’s hike easier (food, gear, intel, recovery).

Stop at the visitor / tourist information centers early

If you want to level up your trip instantly, go early in your stay (ideally your first afternoon). This is where you get real-time info that no blog post can promise on any given day.

Ask about:

Trail conditions (mud, ice, wind exposure)

Closures / reroutes / river crossings

Sunset timing + best quick viewpoints from town

Wind direction (it matters more than you think)

What’s realistically doable with your daylight + fitness + weather window

Grab:

Updated maps and trail notes (whatever they have available)

Safety guidance (especially wind + rapid weather shifts)

Any posted notices about current conditions

El Chaltén, Patagonia — the Capilla de los Escaladores (Climbers’ Chapel), a small white church dedicated to mountaineers, standing proudly with Mount Fitz Roy towering in the distance. It’s a meaningful cultural stop that reflects the deep climbing heritage of Argentina’s trekking capital.

Capilla de los Escaladores: small place, big meaning

The Capilla de los Escaladores isn’t just a pretty building — it’s one of El Chaltén’s most emotionally resonant cultural landmarks, and a rare urban space in town that connects visitors to the history of climbing and human risk in Patagonia.

What it is:Built as a memorial chapel dedicated to the Austrian–Italian climber Toni Egger, who died in 1959 after an avalanche during a descent from the legendary Cerro Torre, the chapel is a symbol of remembrance for all climbers who have lost their lives in the surrounding mountains.

How it came to be:

The chapel was completed in February 1997 on land originally designated for the town cemetery, oriented toward Mount Fitz Roy and Cerro Torre — the peaks that define the region’s climbing lore.

In the 1990s, Austrian climber Edward Müller — a friend of Egger’s — visited the region to learn more about where his friend had died.

He offered to donate a replica of the Saint Michael chapel from Veneto, Italy, as a tribute to Egger and all mountaineers who never returned.

All the materials — from the campanile and wrought iron to the wooden shingles and interior fittings — were shipped from Europe and assembled in El Chaltén, with local supervision.

Out on the Laguna Capri trail, Audrey Bergner pauses to photograph Mount Fitz Roy rising beyond the lake — one of those unforgettable El Chaltén hiking moments where Patagonia’s wild scenery begs to be captured frame by frame.

Photography, sunsets, and “you don’t need a summit”

You don’t need to do a major hike every day to come home with epic photos. Some of our favorite visual moments came from simple things:

Late light hitting the ridgelines

The town glowing in golden hour

Clouds shifting so fast it felt like someone was changing a stage backdrop

Quick viewpoints that gave a huge sense of scale

If you’re traveling with a camera (or just a phone you treat like a camera), give yourself permission to do small walks and spend time just looking.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — a rustic bowl of gourmet lentejas at Senderos, served with thick toasted bread. This hearty lentil stew is the ultimate post-hike comfort meal in Argentina’s trekking capital.

👉 Browse El Chaltén tours (plus nearby Patagonia options) on Viator

Food and drink in El Chaltén: recovery carbs, cozy cafés, and “we earned this” dinners

If you ask us, El Chaltén has two main hobbies: hiking and eating afterward. And if you arrive in “foodie mode” like we did, you’ll feel extremely at home.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — a generous breakfast spread at Vertical Lodge with fresh bread, eggs, jam, and local meats as Audrey Bergner preps a hearty meal before heading out for a full day of hiking. Fuel like this is essential before tackling Patagonia’s legendary trails.

Our El Chaltén food philosophy

Eat a real breakfast, especially on big hike days.

Don’t pretend one granola bar is a meal.

Plan at least one “proper dinner” after your hardest day. It turns pain into poetry.

On windy days, lean into café culture. Patagonia basically invented the concept of “deserved hot drinks.”

Arrival-night energy: pizza, groceries, and restraint (sort of)

On our first night we had pizza and then tried to act responsible because we were hiking the next day. We even skipped beer because we were doing “a little hike” (which is hilarious because our definition of “little” in El Chaltén quickly became unhinged).

We also learned an early El Chaltén lesson: grocery selection can be limited and expensive. I joked about paying “a dollar per apple,” but it’s also a real heads-up—don’t assume you’ll find everything you want at the store, and don’t assume prices will feel like the rest of Argentina.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — an elegant gourmet chocolate dessert at Senderos, finished with whipped cream, rich chocolate drizzle, and a crisp caramel sugar shard. A decadent post-trek treat in Argentina’s hiking capital.

Post-hike dinner #1: Senderos (our boutique hidden gem)

After Laguna de los Tres, we needed a meal that felt like a warm hug and a victory lap. Senderos delivered.

It’s near the bus terminal, inside a high-end guesthouse, and it’s small enough that you feel like you’ve discovered a secret. We ate like people who had been living on trail snacks: blue cheese risotto with walnuts and sun-dried tomatoes, a hearty lentil dish (lentejas), a full bottle of red, and two desserts because obviously we were making excellent decisions.

That meal turned a brutally hard hike into one of our favorite travel days of the year.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — a classic burger loaded with bacon, melted cheese, lettuce, and tomato, paired with crispy golden fries at La Zorra Taproom. One of the most satisfying post-trek comfort meals in Argentina’s hiking capital.

Post-hike dinner #2: burgers + happy hour at La Zorra (and ice cream, because balance)

On another day we went the casual route: burgers, fries, and happy hour at a spot with great energy at La Zorra, followed by artisanal ice cream. El Chaltén has a way of making simple meals feel celebratory because you’re always slightly hungry and slightly proud.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — a pair of perfectly layered café lattes on a wooden table while Audrey Bergner relaxes in the background, enjoying a slow weather day indoors. Cozy cafés like this are part of the El Chaltén experience when the wind or rain calls for a well-earned rest.

Café days: the wind-proof cure

There will be days when the wind is so strong you feel like you could lean forward and just hover. On those days, cafés become your best friend. A “café day” can include:

A slow breakfast or brunch

A second hot drink because you’re “warming up” (again)

Cake because you’re “carb loading” (for tomorrow)

A little trip planning while watching the weather do weird things outside

More Great places to eat & drink in El Chaltén

Here are some our favs from our trip — whether you’re after a casual pint, cozy café vibes, plant-based fuel, or celebratory post-trek dinners:

El Chaltén, Patagonia — nothing tastes better after a full day on the trails than a cold craft beer at La Zorra Taproom. A dark stout and a golden ale rest on the wooden table by the window, marking the perfect post-hike reward in Argentina’s trekking capital.

🍺 Beer & casual meals

La Cervecería Chaltén – Classic brewpub with its own beers and hearty pub fare; perfect for post-hike locro, empanadas, stews, and a refreshing pint in a relaxed, social atmosphere.

La Zorra Taproom Chaltén – Popular taproom with craft beer flights, hamburgers and comfort food, and a lively vibe for happy hour or a chill evening. Locals and travelers alike rave about the beer selection and casual setting.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — La Waflería’s famous loaded waffles topped with deep berry ice cream, fresh fruit, and caramel drizzle. This is the ultimate post-hike recovery meal after tackling Laguna de los Tres or Laguna Torre in Argentina’s hiking capital.

🧇 Sweet treats & relaxed cafés

La Waflería – Beloved waffle café where you can indulge in sweet or savory waffles with toppings — ideal for a relaxed brunch, afternoon snack, or dessert after a long day.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Cúrcuma’s signature healthy bowl loaded with quinoa, roasted vegetables, and fresh greens. It’s the ideal nutrient-packed meal to refuel between big hiking days in Argentina’s trekking capital.

🥗 Healthy & plant-friendly options

Cúrcuma – A cozy vegan and gluten-free restaurant beloved by travelers seeking fresh, nourishing meals with generous portions and creative plant-forward dishes — a perfect “reset” meal after a few heavy days of trekking.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Patigonicus serves up one of the best post-hike meals in town. This freshly baked pizza loaded with tomatoes, onions, garlic and gooey cheese is the perfect reward after a long day on the trails of Argentina’s hiking capital.

🍕 Comfort food & classic eats

Patagonicus – Casual spot known for pizza and comfort dishes, ideal for sharing after a long day out on the trails.

Other food & drink spots

La Tapera – Well-regarded for grilled meats and Patagonia specialties.

Fuegia bistró – Cozy, elevated bistro with hearty, satisfying mains.

Maffia Trattoria – House-made pasta and Italian classics in a friendly setting.

Ahonikenk – Rustic local favorite for hearty Argentine staples with generous portions.

Patagonia Rebelde – Another solid choice for lamb and classic Patagonia fare.

La Senyera – Traditional Argentine cuisine with a warm, local atmosphere.

B&B Burger Joint – Casual burgers and bar food if you need a simple, quick meal.

The lunchbox system (again, because it’s that useful)

If your accommodation offers lunchboxes, it’s one of the easiest ways to simplify full-day hikes. Ours did. It was about $10 when we visited. Order the night before, grab it in the morning, and you’ve instantly reduced decision fatigue. Yes, it can feel pricey, but it often pays for itself in convenience and sanity.

Audrey Bergner excited to board the Marga Taqsa bus in El Calafate, Patagonia — the classic overland connection to El Chaltén that most travelers use to reach Argentina’s legendary hiking capital before starting their trekking adventure.

Getting to El Chaltén and getting around

Most trips to El Chaltén run through El Calafate, the larger hub with an airport, more services, and that slightly more polished “tourist infrastructure” feel. The overland stretch from El Calafate to El Chaltén is about 215 km and ~3 hours.

For us, that “~3 hours” included the classic pre-departure routine: one more hot drink, one more snack at Olivia's, and printing our bus tickets because we didn’t want our entire travel fate resting on unpredictable Patagonia internet.

🚌 Book Buses to Make the Whole Trip Easier

If you’re doing the classic “fly into El Calafate → bus to El Chaltén” plan, booking your seat ahead of time keeps things smooth.

✅ El Calafate → El Chaltén bus tickets (Busbud)

✅ El Chaltén → El Calafate bus tickets (Busbud)

The main routes (quick-glance table)

We rode up with Chaltén Travel, and it was simple and comfortable—but this is Patagonia/Argentina, so schedules and prices can shift. Treat any price you see online (including this sentence) as “check again right before you go” information.

Starting pointTypical routeRough timeBest forNotesEl CalafateBus or car to El Chaltén~3 hoursMost travelersThe classic approach; easy and straightforwardEl Calafate airportTransfer into town, then onwardHalf dayAnyone flying inPlan buffers if you’re connecting same dayOn the road (Ruta 40 vibes)Self-drive across PatagoniaVaries wildlyRoad trippersMagical, but distance and wind add up fast

As of the current season, the standard one-way bus ticket between El Calafate ⇄ El Chaltén costs AR$ 50,000 per person. There’s also a separate municipal bus terminal fee of AR$ 2,000 per person, paid at El Chaltén’s terminal (Window 7, open from 7:00 a.m.).

Quick budget math (per person)

One-way fare: AR$ 50,000

Round-trip fares: ~AR$ 100,000

El Chaltén terminal fee: AR$ 2,000 (separate from the bus ticket)

Schedule basics (what to expect)

Runs year-round

At least two daily departures (generally morning + afternoon)

More departures in peak season (roughly October–April), so summer travelers usually have plenty of flexibility

Typical departure windows

From El Calafate: departures often start around 8:00 a.m. and continue through the afternoon/evening

From El Chaltén: return options can range from very early pre-dawn services to midday and evening departures—handy if you’re syncing with flights

Handy detail for flight connections

Buses pick up and drop off directly at El Calafate Airport, so you can often land and head straight to El Chaltén without detouring into town.

The legendary drive from El Calafate to El Chaltén unfolds across the open Patagonian steppe — a long, empty highway leading straight toward the jagged skyline of Mount Fitz Roy and the surrounding peaks of Los Glaciares National Park. Even before reaching the hiking trails, this road trip sets the tone for the wild, remote adventure ahead.

Bus vs. car: a simple choice

Choose the bus if you want the easiest logistics and you’re not desperate for side-road freedom. You can nap, stare out the window, and arrive with “legs” still in the bank.

The bus ride itself was part of the experience: big empty Ruta 40 energy, endless sky, and that iconic La Leona stop where you stretch your legs and feel like you’re pausing at a Patagonian outpost halfway between worlds.

Choose a car if you want flexibility for viewpoints, slower pacing, and the ability to bail on weather windows more dynamically. A car also turns “rest day” into “tiny adventure day” without committing to a full hike.

🚗 Rent a Car for Maximum Freedom in Patagonia (Day Trips Made Easy)

A rental makes sense if you’re building a Patagonia road trip, want full control of photo stops, or you’re timing weather windows.

👉 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars (best gateway for El Chaltén)

Getting around once you’re there

El Chaltén is walkable. The town is super compact. Many trailheads begin right at the edge of town. That’s part of the magic: you can finish breakfast, wander two blocks, and suddenly you’re hiking toward glaciers and granite.

I loved that El Chaltén felt more like a frontier hiking base than a polished resort—colorful buildings, dusty streets, packs everywhere, and that constant buzz of people quietly plotting their next weather window.

The El Chaltén Visitor Information Center in Patagonia — home to park rangers, trail maps, and up-to-date hiking information for Parque Nacional Los Glaciares, serving as the essential first stop before setting out on Argentina’s legendary trekking routes.

National park logistics: tickets, portals, and the “don’t mess this up” rules

El Chaltén sits inside the broader Los Glaciares National Park system, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and one of Argentina’s most spectacular protected areas. The trails around El Chaltén — including all the classic hikes (Fitz Roy, Cerro Torre, Laguna de los Tres, Laguna Torre, Pliegue Tumbado, etc.) — are inside the park, and as of October 2024 / 2025, there’s now a mandatory park access fee for the North Zone / Portada El Chaltén.

Official fee structure (2025–2026 season) — North Zone / Portada El Chaltén

Visitor TypeDaily Fee (one day)NotesGeneral (foreign visitors)ARS 45,000Most international travellers fall into this category.Argentine nationals (domestic tourists)ARS 15,000You must show ID/ARG passport.Residents of Santa Cruz ProvinceARS 5,000Local residents pay the lowest rate.Students (with valid ID)ARS 7,000National parks reduced student category.Exempt (no payment required)FreeIncludes: children 0–5, people with disabilities, pensioners, veterans of the Malvinas war, local residents of El Chaltén/El Calafate, and park staff.

👉 These fees apply per park entry day (not per trail). That means once you’ve bought a valid entry for a day, you can hike multiple official park trails that same day without extra cost.

Quick example: If you pay ARS 45,000 for one day, you could do Laguna de los Tres in the morning and Laguna Torre in the afternoon (time, weather, and stamina permitting) without paying extra.Multi-day passes & savings (Flexipass options)

If you plan to stay and explore multiple days, multi-day passes can be more economical:

3-day Flexipass: Typically ARS 90,000 for general visitors (saving money compared to buying three single days).

7-day Flexipass: Around ARS 157,500 for general visitors.

Annual National Parks Pass: A single pass that covers all Argentina’s national parks for 12 months; cost varies but can make sense if you’re itinerary includes Iguazú, Tierra del Fuego, etc.

Tip: If you’re hiking multiple long routes on consecutive days (e.g., Fitz Roy one day, Torre the next + side trails), the Flexipass almost always works out cheaper.How park access is controlled

Tips to avoid the “windy portal panic”

Buy ahead of time: If you’re in El Chaltén the night before a big hike, buy your ticket online (Administración de Parques Nacionales website) and screenshot it.

Screenshot everything: Signal is patchy; having screenshots + booking IDs removes stress.

Match names & IDs: If paying online as an Argentine national, make sure ID matches.

Understand what it covers: One ticket = one day of park access for all trails. You don’t need separate tickets for each trail.

Summary: What you actually pay

International visitor (daily): ~AR 45,000

Argentine national: ~AR 15,000

Santa Cruz resident: ~AR 5,000

Students: ~AR 7,000

Exempt categories: Free

Multi-day passes can significantly reduce per-day cost.

What you’ll see at the trailheads

El Chaltén’s classic hikes fan out from several portal areas. In practice, you’ll encounter signs, maps, and a “this is where your day begins” energy at the main access points.

A few park etiquette basics (the Patagonia version)

No drones. This is not negotiable, and also: the wind would probably eat your drone anyway.

Respect wildlife and the trails. Stay on path, pack out trash, don’t turn fragile places into shortcuts.

If a friendly town dog wants to follow you, discourage it from joining your hike. It’s not just about safety—it helps protect local wildlife too.

Reality check: connectivity

El Chaltén can have shaky mobile data and inconsistent Wi-Fi. We experienced payment processing issues at our hotel because the Wi-Fi kept dropping. There is also a public Wi-Fi option in the central plaza, but don’t build your entire trip plan around perfect connectivity.

Nomadic Samuel showing off the spacious accommodations at Vertical Lodge in El Chaltén, Patagonia — a bright, comfortable room with twin beds and plenty of space for backpacks and hiking gear, making it an ideal base for exploring Argentina’s legendary trekking trails.

Where to stay in El Chaltén

Your lodging choice affects everything: how early you can get on trail, how quiet your nights are, and how quickly you can collapse into bed after a 20-kilometer day.

We stayed near the bus terminal, which turned out to be a quietly brilliant move. It was easy on arrival, easy on departure, and it put us close to some useful services—plus it meant we accidentally discovered one of our favorite meals in town right when we were at our most ravenous.

We based ourselves at Vertical Lodge and it genuinely fit our “trekking basecamp” needs: a spacious room, a proper desk for camera/admin life, and a big bathroom situation that felt hilariously luxurious after a day of being sandblasted by wind.

Base selection matrix: pick your stay style

Stay styleBest forProsConsOur adviceNear the bus terminalEasy logistics, quick arrival/departureConvenient, often quieter at nightSlightly less “main street” energyGreat if you’re doing a lot of early startsAlong the main stripFirst-timers who want everything outside the doorRestaurants/cafés steps awayCan be noisier, more foot trafficIdeal if you love strolling and snackingEdge of townQuiet sleepers, star-gazers, “I came for nature” peoplePeaceful, often big viewsLonger walk to dinner in wind/rainWorth it if you value silence over convenienceHostel / budget baseSocial travelers, solo hikersTrail intel, community vibeNoise, shared spacesGreat if you want hiking buddiesCabin/apartmentFamilies, longer stays, kitchen peopleSpace, self-cateringCan book out fastPerfect for food prep and recovery days

🏨 Where to Stay in El Chaltén (Our Top Hotel Picks)

⭐ Quick Booking Box: El Chaltén Hotels (Compare Rates)

PickBest forVibeBooking link🏆 Top PickFirst-timers who want an easy, reliable baseComfortable “no-regrets” stayCompare top stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com💎 Boutique / Treat-YourselfCouples, hikers celebrating a big trek, views + comfort seekersCozy-luxe Patagonia energyBrowse boutique stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com🏘️ Mid-range (great value)Most travelers who want comfort without splurgingWarm, practical, walkableFind mid-range El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com💰 BudgetRoad-trippers + hikers who only need a clean baseSimple, wallet-friendlySee budget stays in El Chaltén on Booking.com

🔎 Want to browse all options instead?👉 Compare all El Chaltén stays on Booking.com

Our lodging rhythm (what worked for us)

Early breakfast (we had breakfast available around 6:30 a.m.), then hit the trail while the town was still sleepy.

Evenings were for laundry-by-hand, charging batteries, reorganizing gear, and pretending we were the kind of people who do this all the time.

We went to bed while it was still bright outside because Patagonia’s daylight tries to trick you into living a double life.

That 6:30 a.m. breakfast became our superpower. Being fed and moving early made El Chaltén feel calmer—less crowded trails, more breathing room, and way more “we are competent hikers” energy (even when we absolutely weren’t).

A classic Laguna Torre hiking scene in El Chaltén — trekkers cross a wildflower meadow toward ancient glacier ice and jagged granite peaks, embodying the raw adventure and untouched beauty of Patagonia.

Essential logistics: money, Wi-Fi, groceries, and the lunchbox hack

El Chaltén is not complicated, but it is particular. It’s a hiking town at the end of the road, and that means you plan for a little friction. If you do it right, the “friction” becomes part of the charm. If you do it wrong, you’ll be standing in a shop whispering, “Why is an apple doing this to my budget?”

Money + payments

Expect card payments to sometimes fail due to connectivity. Don’t assume a second attempt will magically work.

Carry some cash as backup for small purchases, tips, and the occasional “technology is on strike” moment.

If you’re relying on online ticket purchases, have at least one reliable payment method ready (and ideally a second backup card).

Wi-Fi and data (the honest version)

We had stretches of “basically no internet.” Mobile data didn’t reliably work for us, and the Wi-Fi would drop, sometimes at the worst possible moment—like when we were trying to process a hotel payment. We’re not complaining; this is simply Patagonia being Patagonia. Build your trip so that your happiness does not depend on a stable connection.

Groceries: limited variety, Patagonia pricing

Grocery selection can be limited, and prices can be higher than you expect for Argentina. Our mental benchmark (yes we've now mentioned this multiples times) became “a dollar per apple,” which is both funny and a bit spooky at the same time.

The lunchbox hack (highly recommended)

Many hotels and guesthouses offer a packed lunch (often called a lunchbox) that you order the night before and pick up in the morning. We paid around the equivalent of $10 USD per lunchbox. Pricey for Argentina, but convenient—especially if your accommodation doesn’t have a shared kitchen or mini-fridge.

One of our lunchboxes was basically the Patagonia hiker starter kit: rice + veggie salad, peanut bars, apples, muffins, a few candies, and bottled water—exactly the kind of practical fuel that prevents your “granola bar fantasy” from becoming a real problem.

The “tomorrow-proofing” checklist (do this in 10 minutes)

Charge phones, camera batteries, power banks.

Repack your day bag: water, layers, snacks, sunscreen, lip balm.

Check your weather window and set a realistic start time.

Confirm your lunchbox (or shop snacks) so you’re not panic-buying in the morning.

Decide your “bail point” in advance for big hikes: where you’ll turn around if time/energy/weather aren’t cooperating.

🥾 Plan B Adventures: Tours & Easy Day Trips from El Chaltén

Even hardcore hikers end up with a “Plan B” day in Patagonia. When the wind is feral, legs are toast, or you just want someone else to handle the logistics, these Viator options are easy wins.

👉 Browse El Chaltén tours (plus nearby options) on Viator

OptionBest forBook it🚌 El Chaltén “Complete Experience” day tour (from El Calafate)A low-effort way to “see El Chaltén” without committing to a big hikeEl Chaltén Complete Experience Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)🧊 Perito Moreno Glacier full-day + optional boat safariClassic Patagonia bucket-list day that doesn’t require hardcore hikingPerito Moreno Glacier Full-Day Tour with Optional Boat Safari (Viator)🚤 “Todo Glaciares” navigation (Upsala + Spegazzini)Big-glacier scenery with max comfort (aka: let the boat do the work)Glaciares Gourmet Navigation: Upsala & Spegazzini Navigation (Viator)🗿 El Calafate city tour + Walichu CavesA cultural/history reset day (great when the weather is moody)El Calafate City Tour + Walichu Caves (Viator)🚙 Nativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (4x4 style)Off-road adventure + viewpoints when you want something different than trailsNativo Experience: Lakes & Caverns (Viator)🇨🇱 Torres del Paine full-day trip (from El Calafate)Maximum “Patagonia wow” in one day (long day, huge payoff)Torres del Paine Full-Day Tour from El Calafate (Viator)

Day trips from El Chaltén less than 2 hours away

Not every “day trip” needs to be a full-body endurance event. One of the best parts about El Chaltén is that you can get a completely different Patagonia vibe—lakes, valleys, river viewpoints, quiet ranch roads—without spending half the day in transit.

Here are genuinely close options (think short drives/transfers), so you can stay flexible with weather and energy levels.

Quick-glance table: the best short day trips (under ~2 hours one-way)

Day tripHow far from El ChalténWhy it’s worth itBest forHow it usually worksLago del Desierto~37 km from townBig lake scenery + boat options + a totally different “edge-of-the-world” feelRest days, “we want Patagonia without grinding” daysGo by transfer/bus/taxi or drive; spend half or full day; boat add-ons availableRío Eléctrico / El Pilar area~15–20 km-ish rangeFast access to the Fitz Roy valley vibes + river scenery + trailhead energy (even if you don’t go far)Photography, low-commitment days, weather-window scoutingShort transfer/drive to the area; do a small walk, viewpoint, or simply soak it inPiedra del Fraile access~16 km to the bridge/approachQuieter, more “local” feel—valley scenery, river, and a sense of getting away from townPeople who want something calmer than the main classicsTypically drive/transfer to the access point; choose your own adventure from “short look” to longer walkRuta 40 viewpoints + La Leona-style “road trip energy” (micro day trip)Within ~1–2 hours depending how far you goPatagonia emptiness, sky, wind, wide-open nothingness (in a good way)Anyone who loves landscapes and hates crowdsBest with a car or taxi/driver; stop where the light looks ridiculous

✅ See top-rated El Chaltén tours on Viator

Rest day in El Chaltén: the secret ingredient to a great hiking trip

A rest day in El Chaltén is not a failure day. It’s a strategy day.

This is Patagonia. The hikes are big. The weather is dramatic. And your body is not a vending machine where you insert motivation and receive unlimited energy.

We had two different kinds of rest days:

The “we are wrecked” rest day after Laguna de los Tres.We didn’t leave the room. We were stiff. We slept 10–12 hours. We woke up, realized our legs were still negotiating, and went back to sleep like it was our job.

The “the wind has declared martial law” rest day.We had a day where the winds were so insane that standing upright felt like a group project. That became a café day—warm drinks, slow wandering, and a lot of “okay, Plan B it is.”

One rest day was basically “gear Tetris”: reorganizing bags, hand-washing whatever had become morally questionable, charging everything, and doing one tiny walk just to keep the body from turning into a creaky wooden ship. Then we rewarded ourselves with something warm and sweet, because recovery is a real sport.

Rest day decision matrix (choose your recovery style)

Your situationRest day planWhat to doWhat to avoidLegs are stiff, feet are angryActive recovery dayEasy walk + stretching + early dinnerA “quick” big hike that becomes a full dayWind is brutalWind-proof dayViewpoint if safe + cafés + town wanderingExposed ridgelines and ego-based decisionsRainy or coldCozy dayMuseums/chapel + bakery crawl + planningSitting in wet clothes pretending it’s fineYou’re behind on logisticsAdmin dayTickets, cash, laundry, groceries, lunchboxesLeaving everything for 6:30 a.m. chaosYou’re mentally friedReset dayDo one simple thing, then rest guilt-freeDoom-scrolling weather apps for five hours

A perfect “we’re wrecked but happy” rest day (sample schedule)

Sleep in. Actually sleep in. Patagonia will still be there at noon.

Big breakfast, preferably something warm.

Gentle walk: 20–60 minutes, max. River path, town stroll, viewpoint if you feel good.

Coffee stop. You’ve earned it.

Afternoon: gear reset (laundry, charging, repacking), then a nap that makes you feel like you’ve time-traveled.

Early dinner. Early bed. Let your body bank recovery for tomorrow.

A perfect “windy day” rest day (sample schedule)

Slow morning café breakfast while you watch the wind slap the flags around like it’s auditioning for a role.

Short viewpoint only if it feels safe and reasonable.

Tourist info stop for updated conditions and advice.

Bakery crawl. Hot drinks. Maybe soup. You are now a professional comfort-seeker.

Make tomorrow’s plan: pick the hike that matches the weather window, not your pride.

The rest-day admin checklist (the stuff that makes tomorrow smooth)

Laundry: socks, base layers, whatever smells like “I climbed a gravel wall.”

Charge everything: phone, camera, headlamp, power bank.

Refill snacks and water plan.

Confirm lunchbox orders if you’re using them.

Repack your day bag so you’re not rummaging at dawn.

Decide your start time and your bail point.

The best “rest day” activities in El Chaltén

Rest days are at their best when they still include one small Patagonia moment, even if you’re moving slowly.

Short walks and viewpoints

Mirador de los Cóndores: short, steep, iconic.

Mirador de las Águilas: an optional extension if you’re feeling good.

Mirador Río de las Vueltas: quick scenery with minimal effort.

Town circuits and La Lagunita-style wandering: gentle, photogenic, low stakes.

Town culture

Visitor centers and maps: get conditions, closures, and smart planning tips.

Capilla de los Escaladores: a meaningful stop that connects you to El Chaltén’s mountain culture.

Gear browsing: even if you don’t buy anything, it’s part of the hiking-town atmosphere.

Food as recoveryRest day is when you eat like a responsible adult:

Protein and something hearty

Fruit and snacks for tomorrow

A hot drink that makes you feel human again

The mental game: why rest days are actually part of “doing El Chaltén right”

El Chaltén can tempt you into thinking every day has to be a major hike because the scenery is right there and the daylight stretches late. But the real pros build in buffers.

A rest day does three powerful things:

It protects your next big hike from becoming a suffer-fest.

It gives you flexibility when Patagonia’s weather does its thing.

It turns the trip into a rhythm instead of a grind.

We came to El Chaltén as foodies pretending to be trekkers. By the end, we were still foodies—just with stronger legs and a deeper respect for planning.

Bright red calafate blossoms — a signature Patagonian plant — add bursts of color to El Chaltén’s rugged landscape, a small but unforgettable detail spotted along hiking trails in Los Glaciares National Park.

👉 Check El Calafate ↔ El Chaltén bus schedules + prices on Busbud

Sample itineraries (3–7 days) to build your El Chaltén game plan

El Chaltén rewards slow travel. If you only have a couple of days, you can still get a massive experience—but the sweet spot is giving yourself enough time for weather buffers, rest days, and at least one “we’re just wandering” day.

Itinerary builder matrix

Days in El ChalténBest forCore hikesRest-day bufferVibe3 daysFast classic hit1 iconic + 1 mediumMinimalEfficient, intense4 daysBalanced first trip2 full days + 1 short1 bufferBest all-around starter5 daysThe “do it right” plan2 iconic + 2 medium1 bufferComfortable, flexible6–7 daysDeep immersionAdd day trips + extra viewpoints1–2 buffersPatagonia rhythm unlocked

A colorful El Chaltén 3-day itinerary infographic mapping the perfect classic-highlights sprint — arrive and catch sunset at Mirador de los Cóndores, tackle an iconic Fitz Roy or Cerro Torre hike, then finish with Laguna Capri or Chorrillo del Salto before heading onward.

3-day itinerary: the “classic highlights” sprint

Day 1: Arrive, settle in, short viewpoint (Mirador de los Cóndores at sunset if you have daylight).Day 2: Iconic hike day (Fitz Roy / Laguna de los Tres, or Torre if you want kinder vibes).Day 3: Medium day (Laguna Capri or Chorrillo del Salto) + depart.

This itinerary works, but it’s tight. If the weather fails you, you’ll feel it.

A detailed El Chaltén 4-day itinerary infographic designed for first-time visitors — arrive and explore town with a Mirador de los Cóndores sunset, conquer Laguna de los Tres, enjoy a restorative café and viewpoint day, then finish with Laguna Torre or a medium hike based on weather and energy.

4-day itinerary: the most sensible first-timer plan

Day 1: Arrival + town wander + Mirador de los Cóndores.Day 2: Big hike #1 (Laguna de los Tres if conditions look good).Day 3: Rest day or easy day (café day + viewpoint + admin).Day 4: Big hike #2 (Laguna Torre) or medium day depending on legs/weather.

This is the plan that acknowledges reality: the big hike might wreck you, and Patagonia might have opinions.

A relaxed yet adventure-packed El Chaltén 5-day itinerary infographic — settle in with a sunset viewpoint, hike Laguna de los Tres or Capri, recharge with a true rest day, tackle Laguna Torre, then enjoy Chorrillo del Salto and Mirador de las Águilas before an unhurried town evening.

5-day itinerary: our favorite “comfortable but still epic” plan

Day 1: Arrival + sunset viewpoint.Day 2: Laguna de los Tres (or Capri + partial if you prefer).Day 3: Rest day (sleep, easy walk, food, admin).Day 4: Laguna Torre.Day 5: Chorrillo del Salto + Mirador de las Águilas, plus an unhurried town evening.

This is where you start feeling like you belong. You’re not rushing, and you’re not living on adrenaline.

6–7 day itinerary: the full El Chaltén experience

Add one or two of the following:

A second rest day if you’re stacking hard hikes.

Extra viewpoint days to chase good light and clear skies.

A day trip option (like Lago del Desierto) if you want variety.

A “weather window” day where you choose the big hike based on the best forecast, not the calendar.

When you give El Chaltén a full week, you stop trying to control it and start flowing with it. That’s when Patagonia feels the most magical.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — hikers make their way up the rocky Laguna de los Tres trail, a reminder that Fitz Roy’s most iconic hike is also the busiest. Starting early and choosing shoulder-season dates can make this legendary trek far more peaceful.

Weather, wind, crowds, and safety (Patagonia’s greatest hits)

El Chaltén is famous for dramatic weather, and that drama is part of the experience. One day can feel calm and warm, the next can feel colder, windier, and downright moody. Build your trip assuming you’ll need to swap days around.

How we handled the wind 

Start earlier when possible. Wind often builds later in the day.

Have a “short hike” option ready for any day you wake up to chaos.

Save the exposed viewpoints for calmer windows.

Accept that a café day is still a valid Patagonia day.

Crowd hacks (without turning into a hiking snob)

The iconic hikes are popular for a reason. Go early for a calmer trail.

If the main hike feels too busy, choose an alternate: viewpoints, waterfall walks, or a medium day.

Make friends with golden hour. Even short walks feel epic when the light hits.

Following the famous Laguna de los Tres trail in El Chaltén, hikers make their way toward the jagged spires of Mount Fitz Roy — a classic Patagonian trek that delivers some of Argentina’s most unforgettable mountain scenery.

Trail etiquette and safety basics

Dress in layers and bring a real windproof shell. Patagonia loves to test your zippers.

Keep snacks, water, and a small “just in case” layer in your bag even on shorter days.

Stay on trail. The landscape is beautiful and also fragile.

If you’re unsure about conditions, stop by the tourist information office early in your stay (it’s located at the bus terminal and has long daily hours).

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Audrey Bergner wheels her luggage from the bus station toward Vertical Lodge, a familiar sight for budget travelers arriving in town. Moments like this show the simple, walkable nature of Argentina’s hiking capital.

Budget game plan (so Patagonia doesn’t eat your wallet)

El Chaltén can be done on a range of budgets, but it helps to know where the costs concentrate.

The big cost buckets

Accommodation: varies widely; book earlier in peak season.

Food: groceries can be limited and pricey, and restaurant meals add up fast after big hiking days.

Transport:  bus or car rental from El Calafate is often the main “getting there” expense.

Park access: Los Glaciares / Portada El Chaltén has an entrance fee schedule that can be significant for international visitors.

Our “spend smarter” tips

Use lunchboxes on big hike days to avoid expensive last-minute food runs.

Mix restaurant meals with simple grocery dinners.

Build in rest days so you’re not “forced” into paid tours due to fatigue.

If you’re relying on the North Zone portals, remember that ticketing is handled online/QR and payment is by card (not cash).

The biggest money-saving move is also the simplest: plan your hikes well so you don’t lose days to bad timing, bad food prep, or weather surprises.

El Chaltén, Patagonia — Nomadic Samuel gives a thumbs up on the Mirador de los Cóndores hike, a short but scenic trail overlooking the town and surrounding valleys. It’s one of the best easy hikes for sunset views in Argentina’s trekking capital.

✨ Ready to lock in your El Chaltén plan?

🥾 Browse El Chaltén tours on Viator 

🏨 Find El Chaltén hotels on Booking.com 

🚗 Compare El Calafate car rentals on DiscoverCars 

🚌 Book El Calafate → El Chaltén buses on Busbud 

Detailed traveler FAQ for planning an unforgettable El Chaltén trip (without getting wrecked by the wind)

How many days do we actually need in El Chaltén?

Honestly: 4–6 nights is the sweet spot. Three days works, but you’re one bad weather day away from missing something iconic. With 5–6 days you can hike, rest, and still have flexibility.

Is El Chaltén only for hardcore hikers?

Nope. Look at us. You can do easy viewpoints, short waterfall walks, and medium hikes with huge scenery. The town is built for DIY trekking at many levels—it’s about choosing the right hike for your day.

What’s the single best hike for first-timers?

If conditions are good and you’re up for a challenge: Laguna de los Tres. If you want a slightly kinder classic: Laguna Torre. If you want the “smart compromise”: Laguna Capri.

Do we need a rest day?

Yes. Even if you feel strong, rest days are part of the Patagonia rhythm. They protect your next hike and give you buffer when the weather does its chaos thing.

How bad is the wind, really?

Bad enough that it becomes a character in your trip story. Some days are calm. Some days are “why is my hood speaking to me?” Plan for flexibility and bring a real windproof layer.

Are the trails well marked?

Generally, yes. You’ll find signage, trailheads, and (on many routes) kilometer markers that help with pacing and decisions. Still, don’t treat this like a city park—conditions change fast.

Do we need trekking poles?

Not mandatory, but they’re very helpful for steep, loose sections and for tired legs on the way down. We didn't bring them and we certainly regretted that. If you’re doing Laguna de los Tres, we’d seriously consider them.

Can we rely on Wi-Fi and mobile data?

Don’t count on it. You might get decent moments, but you might also have outages and payment glitches. Download maps, save key info offline, and keep a backup plan.

Do we need to book accommodation in advance?

In peak season, yes. El Chaltén is small and fills up. If you want a specific stay style (apartment, cabin, certain location), booking ahead makes the trip smoother.

Are lunchboxes worth it?

Usually, yes—especially on full-day hikes. Ordering the night before saves you morning stress and avoids scrambling for trail food when stores are limited.

Is El Chaltén doable on a budget?

Yes, but be strategic. Mix grocery meals with restaurant splurges, use lunchboxes selectively, and plan your hikes well so you don’t “waste” days or end up paying for last-minute alternatives.

What’s the most underrated thing to do?

The short viewpoints. For example, Mirador de los Cóndores (especially at sunset) gives you a huge emotional payoff for a small effort, and it’s a perfect arrival-day or rest-day win.

What’s the best time of year to visit El Chaltén?

For most people, the sweet spot is the warmer hiking season (roughly late spring through early fall in Patagonia). You’ll get longer daylight, more services running, and more reliable trail access. Shoulder season can be quieter but moodier—more “bring extra layers and backup plans.”

What time should we start the big hikes?

Earlier than you think. Not because you’ll “run out of daylight” in summer, but because early starts usually mean calmer conditions, fewer crowds, and more buffer for snack breaks, photo stops, and the inevitable “we need to sit down for a second” moment.

Do we need a guide for the classic hikes?

Most people don’t for the standard trails (Laguna de los Tres, Laguna Torre, etc.) because they’re popular and generally well marked. A guide can still be worth it if you want deeper interpretation, extra safety margin in tricky conditions, or you’re aiming for more technical objectives.

What should we pack for a day hike in El Chaltén?

Think layers and wind protection first, then snacks. A simple winning combo is: a real windproof shell, a warm mid-layer, hat/gloves even in summer, sunglasses, sunscreen, lip balm, enough water, and more food than your optimistic brain says you’ll need. Patagonia has a way of turning “quick hike” into “longer story.”

Is tap water safe to drink in El Chaltén?

Generally, yes—most travelers treat town tap water as safe. That said, if you have a sensitive stomach or you’re coming off a long journey, it’s totally reasonable to ease in, use bottled water for a day, or ask your accommodation what they recommend.

Are there ATMs in El Chaltén?

Sometimes, and sometimes they’re a little… Patagonian about it. Availability and reliability can change, and machines can run out of cash. The smart play is bringing some cash from El Calafate and not leaving your entire payment strategy up to one lonely ATM at the end of the road.

What’s the best way to handle crowds on the popular trails?

Two moves: start early and hike mid-week if you can. If you still hit crowds, don’t let it ruin your day—build in a viewpoint sunset walk or an easier Plan B trail so you’re not stuck thinking the only “valid” El Chaltén experience is the busiest one.

Can we do El Chaltén without a car?

Absolutely. That's what Audrey and I did. El Chaltén is one of the best no-car hiking destinations because the town is walkable and many trailheads start right from town. A car is a bonus for flexibility and side trips, but it’s not required for a top-tier first visit.

Plan your El Chaltén trip (quick recap)

El Chaltén is at its best when you treat it like a rhythm, not a checklist: one big hike, one medium day, one easy viewpoint, one rest/reset day, repeat. Start early, respect the wind, eat like a professional carb enthusiast, and build buffers so Patagonia’s weather can’t ruin your joy. Show up as a “foodie,” leave as a “faux trekker,” and accept that the real summit is making it back to town in time for dinner.

We also learned the hard way that the “quiet” parts of the trip are what make the big days possible: screenshot your tickets and maps in advance, don’t assume Wi-Fi will behave when you need to pay for something, and treat lunchboxes/snacks like actual strategy—not an afterthought. And if Patagonia hands you a day of chaos wind or moody skies, don’t fight it. Do the café crawl, wander town, reset your gear like you’re playing hiking-basecamp Tetris. Then pounce on the next good weather window with fresh legs and a slightly smug sense of preparedness.

Finally, don’t sleep on the journey moments: that Ruta 40 emptiness, the La Leona stretch-your-legs stop, the first time El Chaltén appears like a colorful little outpost under teethy peaks. Those “in between” scenes are the glue of the whole experience—because El Chaltén isn’t just the hikes. It’s the full Patagonia storyline.

#### Emilia-Romagna Travel Guide for Food Lovers: Italian Cuisine Delights!
Emilia-Romagna is a paradise for food lovers and in this travel guide we'll cover all of the delights you can try!

If for some strange reason I was forced to eat only five different cuisines for the rest of my life, Italian food would be right at the top of that list. It may be hard to believe, considering I've turned into a bit of a foodie. But there was a time during my teenage years where my list of preferred foods consisted of only pizza, lasagna, pasta, ribs and cheesecake.

Basically, 75% of what I liked was Italian food prepared Canadian style. Salad? Forget about it! Rice? Yuck!

Blue hour views of Bologna, Italy in Emilia-Romagna

Emilia-Romagna Food Guide

It is funny how your taste buds evolve as you get older. These days I couldn't fathom visiting a country and not diving deep into its local cuisine.



Just a few weeks ago I had the opportunity to revisit Italy for the second time. This time travelling to the region of Emilia-Romagna. I couldn't help but chuckle at how my teenage self would be dancing on the ceiling with excitement over the anticipation of eating freshly prepared pasta.

Even though my palate has expanded, my excitement for Italian food hasn't waned a bit.

Delicious Italian meat on a serving tray to sample

Two years ago Audrey and I visited Italy for the first time. We couldn't believe how much better Italian food is in Italy compared to anywhere else in the world. Milan-oh-me-oh-my!

The Italian food I was having at home was like cardboard compared to what I ate in Italy. Now that I mention it, pasta literally does come out of a cardboard box more often than not when served in Canada.

In Italy, though, it is all about fresh ingredients. Time-tested recipes. And big meals. Shared with friends and family.

Wolfing down your food isn't an option. Thank heavens for that! We tried hard to find a bad cappuccino. A lackluster plate of pasta. An inferior risotto. We failed. The food is just that good.

Now come join us as we give you an overview of our time in Emilia-Romagna. This includes our travel and dining experiences.

Food Lovers in Italy!



Downtown Bologna, Italy at night with the lights shining brightly

Bologna Old Town at Night

Although we only had half a day in Bologna, the city really left an impression upon me. Our first activity was to visit Torre Prendiparte. Once a defense tower and prison. It was built in the 12th century. Now it's an B&B. But still full of antiques and palpable history.

As we climbed up the rickety old steps I kept reminding myself that it was worth it for the views. Although I didn't feel nearly as nervous as when we did the hot air balloon ride in Costa Brava, it still was quite the climb. Upon reaching the top my jaw almost dropped.

Although I've visited many impressive cities in terms of architecture and sheer scale, Bologna has one of the most impressive combinations of medieval towers, ancient buildings and impressive churches I've ever seen.

After having an aperitivo and dinner we walked around the Old Town. I kept telling Audrey that we'd have to come back and revisit.

A Walk Through History

Imagine wandering through narrow, cobbled streets under a canopy of twinkling lights. Welcome to Bologna's Old Town at night. It’s an immersion into centuries of culture, architecture, and Italian charm.

Bologna’s Old Town is a living museum. As you stroll, you’ll pass medieval towers, ancient porticos, and stunning piazzas. Every corner tells a story. The architecture, illuminated against the night sky, gives you a sense of stepping back in time.

By night, the Old Town becomes the heart of Bologna’s social life. Locals and tourists fill the streets - enjoying the lively atmosphere. The piazzas are bustling. Cafes and bars spill out onto the sidewalks. And the air is filled with the sounds of laughter and conversation.

Foodies rejoice! Bologna is known as the food capital of Italy. At night, the city’s eateries come alive, offering everything from traditional tagliatelle al ragù to modern culinary twists. Sit down at a cozy osteria, or grab a quick bite from a street vendor—either way, your taste buds are in for a treat.

La Scienza in Cucina L’arte Di Mangiar Bene by Artusi

Italian Cooking at Casa Artusi

Audrey and I both know we're good at devouring Italian pasta. But how would we fare trying to make it from scratch? Using the excuse that I'd be the photographer/videographer Audrey was the only one who got her hands sticky in the flour and eggs.

As she was making pasta from scratch with the help of an instructor, I spent some time wandering around Casa Artusi in Forlimpopoli. Pellegrino Artusi, the father of modern Italian cookery penned La scienza in cucina e l’arte di mangiare bene known as The Science of Cooking and the Art of Eating Well.

If you can believe it not a single publisher was interested in publishing his book at the time. Today it's a classic in almost every Italian household!

A Culinary Pilgrimage

Nestled in the charming town of Forlimpopoli, Casa Artusi is a haven for food lovers. Dedicated to the art of Italian home cooking, this culinary institution is a tribute to Pellegrino Artusi, the godfather of Italian cuisine. If you're venturing through Emilia-Romagna, a cooking class at Casa Artusi is a must-do. Here, tradition meets taste in the most delightful way.

Imagine rolling up your sleeves and diving into the heart of Italian culinary tradition. Casa Artusi offers you just that—a hands-on experience where you learn the secrets of making perfect pasta, authentic sauces, and mouth-watering desserts. It's not merely a cooking class; it's a journey through Italy's rich culinary heritage.

You’ll learn recipes that have been passed down through generations. You'll gain insights into the cultural significance of each ingredient and technique. It's a rare opportunity to connect with Italian traditions on a deeper level.

Whether you're a seasoned cook or a kitchen novice, Casa Artusi offers a fun, interactive environment. You’ll be mixing, kneading, and tasting alongside fellow food enthusiasts. The atmosphere is relaxed and welcoming, making it a great way to meet new people and share a few laughs.

The best part? You get to enjoy the fruits of your labor. After the cooking session, sit down to a delicious meal of the dishes you've created. Pair them with fine local wines, and you have a dining experience that's as rewarding as it is tasty.

Pinching the dough we created during our cooking class in Italy

We visited Acetaia Di Giorgio to take a traditional Balsamic vinegar tour

Wine and Vinegar Tours

After lunch we visited the Drei Donà estate. Located in between the towns of Forlì, Castrocaro and Predappio in the ancient Romagna hills. After a tour of the premises we sat down to sample the wine and nibble on a few bites. What often impresses me about vineyards in Europe is that they have so much history. And are typically family run dating back generations.

We also had the opportunity to visit Acetaia Di Giorgio in Modena. This traditional balsamic vinegar producer prepares its products using traditional methods. When it was time to sample some, I couldn't believe how rich and flavorful it was. I've never had balsamic vinegar that even compares to what they produce.

Introduction to Wine and Vinegar Tours

Picture this: rolling vineyards, the scent of aging barrels, and the rich flavors of artisanal wines and balsamic vinegars. In Emilia-Romagna, wine and vinegar tours offer a sensory journey through one of Italy’s most celebrated regions. These tours are more than just tastings—they’re an exploration of tradition, craftsmanship, and the land’s bounty.

Wine and vinegar have deep roots in Emilia-Romagna’s history. Touring a vineyard or acetaia (vinegar house) allows you to step into the world of local producers who’ve honed their craft over generations. You'll learn the meticulous processes that transform grapes into exquisite wines and vinegars. Making each sip a taste of history.

This region is renowned for its culinary excellence. Wine and vinegar are at the core. The tours provide a behind-the-scenes look at how these essential ingredients are made. This will enhance your appreciation for their role in Italian cuisine.

Imagine walking through sun-drenched vineyards with views that stretch for miles. The landscape of Emilia-Romagna is breathtaking, with its gentle hills and picturesque valleys. A tour here isn't just about tasting—it's about soaking in the beauty of the region. From robust reds and crisp whites to the complex sweetness of aged balsamic vinegar, the variety on offer is astounding.

Views from outside of the Enzo Ferrari Museum shaped like a Ferrari engine

Enzo Ferrari Museum

Any kid growing up in the 80's and 90's remembers seeing iconic Ferraris in at least one of their favorite flicks. For me, it was Ferris Bueller's Day Off. Having a chance to tour the collection of vehicles in the museum really gave me a greater appreciation for the car. Especially, the style, sophistication and pure muscle of these cars. We got to drive one in Las Vegas.

The engines impressed me the most. I enjoyed that the museum showcased both racing and 'everyday' cars. The building itself is built like a Ferrari engine. And I think even those with no appreciation or interest in cars would still be impressed by a visit to this museum.

Experiencing the Enzo Ferrari Museum:

Imagine stepping into a world where the roar of engines and the sleek curves of iconic cars ignite your passion for speed and style. Welcome to the Enzo Ferrari Museum in Modena. It's a shrine to the life and legacy of the legendary founder of Ferrari. If you're exploring Emilia-Romagna, this museum is a must-visit, offering an unforgettable journey through the history of one of the world's most renowned automotive brands.

The Enzo Ferrari Museum is a celebration of Enzo Ferrari's life and vision. Here, you'll witness a stunning array of Ferrari models, each representing a milestone in automotive innovation and design. The museum showcases both classic and contemporary cars. It highlights the evolution of Ferrari's engineering prowess.

Interactive displays allow you to delve deeper into the technology and artistry behind each vehicle. You can even step into a simulator and feel the thrill of driving a Ferrari on a famous race track. It's a unique adrenaline-pumping adventure. The museum itself is a work of art. Designed by Jan Kaplický, the main building's sleek, futuristic design resembles a giant hood of a sports car. Its bright yellow roof pays homage to Modena's automotive heritage.

An incredible collection of Parmigiano Reggiano wheels at Hombre farm

Parmigiano Reggiano Dairy Farm

A visit to Hombre - a Parmigiano Reggiano dairy farm and Panini Private Collection - is a must for anybody stopping in or around Modena. Starting off as just a side-project for Umberto Panini in the 80's, the Parmigiano-Reggiano farm soon turned into a full-time business.

The storage facility, where they keep the Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese while it ages, is unlike anything I've ever seen before. There are wheels upon wheels of cheese. As far as the eye can see.

We were fortunate enough to sample some. And unlike the kind you find in Canada, this was served thick and tasted infinitely better.

Experiencing Hombre

At Hombre, you step into the world of Parmigiano Reggiano, one of Italy's most iconic cheeses. The farm adheres to traditional methods, ensuring every wheel of cheese is crafted with care and expertise. Witnessing the cheese-making process from start to finish is a fascinating insight into this time-honored craft.

Adjacent to the dairy farm, the Panini Private Collection showcases a stunning array of vintage cars and motorcycles. This collection, amassed by the Panini family, features rare and classic models that any automotive enthusiast would drool over. It’s a visual feast that complements the culinary experience.

Start your visit with a guided tour of the dairy farm. Watch as skilled artisans turn milk into the world-famous Parmigiano Reggiano. From the giant copper vats to the aging rooms lined with wheels of cheese, each step is a testament to craftsmanship and tradition. The tour culminates in a tasting session, where you savor the complex flavors of aged Parmigiano.

The Panini Private Collection is a hidden gem. As you stroll through the collection, you’ll encounter a variety of vintage vehicles, each with its own story. From gleaming Ferraris to classic Maseratis, the range and quality of the collection are impressive. It’s a rare chance to see some of the finest examples of automotive history up close.

#### Enjoying Slow Travel In Germany: Relaxed Visit To Spreewald
My first visit to Germany was all about cities. For a month Audrey and I rented an apartment in Berlin where we stayed a mere stone throw away from Mauer Park.

In terms of side trips, we visited other large metropolitan areas such as Leipzig and Frankfurt. It was a solid introduction to Germany, however, this time around we wanted to focus on smaller locales with a specific focus on German culture and traditions. With this in mind our first destination was Spreewald, a quaint German town surrounded by forests and divided by canals.

Mastering The Art Of Slow Travel in Germany

The first thing I noticed upon our arrival was the slower pace of life. Highways and busy city streets were replaced by country roads. Outside of our hotel window we spotted more deer and insects than we did people. After shaking off our jet-lag it was time to delve into the cultural activities on offer. Our first stop was the Freilandmuseum Lehde, an open-air living museum that felt as though we were stepping back in time. Many of the well preserved homes from the 19th century (and earlier) offered a sobering reality as to what life was like centuries ago prior to modern amenities.



Featuring low ceilings functionally designed to preserve heat, I found myself having to duck at times in order to avoid banging my head. Families used to huddle up at night in close quarters with generations rubbing elbows together. It wasn't uncommon for husband and wife to be sharing a bed with elderly parents or even a child. The concept of theme rooms simply didn't exist. Bedroom, kitchen and living room were all combined into a room. Functionality and practicality over creative design. I couldn't help but feel thankful for many of the modern conveniences we enjoy today.

Why Choose Spreewald for Slow Travel?

If you're looking to embrace the principles of slow travel, Spreewald is the perfect destination. Here’s why:

Unspoiled Nature

Spreewald’s landscape is simply beautiful. Imagine a lush network of rivers, forests, and wetlands all weaving together into a peaceful paradise. As you float through the canals or cycle down quiet paths, you’ll be surrounded by pristine nature, with only the sounds of birds and rustling leaves to keep you company.

Lush forests: Ideal for nature walks and birdwatching.

Meandering waterways: Perfect for quiet boat rides and reflecting on the beauty of your surroundings.

Serene landscapes: Everywhere you look, tranquility abounds.

Traditional Lifestyle

One of the highlights of visiting Spreewald is experiencing the rich cultural heritage of the region. The area is home to the Sorbs, a Slavic minority group with a unique language, traditions, and way of life. Their influence can be seen in the local architecture, cuisine, and handicrafts. As you explore the villages, you’ll feel as though you’ve stepped back in time.

Sorbian culture: Learn about local traditions through festivals, museums, and interactions with locals.

Historic villages: Discover charming villages with traditional houses, each telling its own story.

Cultural immersion: Take the time to talk with locals and learn about their way of life.

Slow-Paced Activities

There’s no need to rush when you’re in Spreewald. The region encourages you to take your time and engage in activities that help you connect with nature and the local culture. From cycling along quiet paths to punting through Spreewald’s famous canals, each experience invites you to slow down and soak in your surroundings.

Cycling: Explore the region’s hidden gems and quiet corners at your own pace.

Punting: Punt through calm waterways and get up close with nature.

Walking: Take leisurely strolls through forests, fields, and villages.

Tip: Embrace a slower pace by opting for eco-friendly transportation like bicycles or canoeing through the Spreewald waterways.

Top Activities for Slow Travel in Spreewald

Here are some of the best activities to consider for those seeking slow travel in a destination like Spreewald.

German Open Air Museum

Visiting the German Open Air Museum in Spreewald is like stepping into a time capsule. This charming museum showcases traditional German homes, giving visitors a glimpse into life as it once was in this picturesque region.

As we continued to tour the premises one of my favorite sections were the outdoor games. Old familiar favorites, such as the potato sack race, were on display. Even as a cumbersome 30 something year old I enjoyed hopping around like a kid again. Things became somewhat more challenging when it came time to try stilt-walking. Trying to get both feet on the foot rests proved more difficult than I expected. After nearly twisting my ankle I finally gave up.

Potato sack race: A classic game that’s fun for all ages.

Stilt-walking: Surprisingly tricky but adds to the fun and challenge.

Interactive exhibits: Perfect for families and individuals who want a hands-on experience.

Tip: Don’t be afraid to jump in and participate in these activities! You might just surprise yourself with how much fun they are—even if you aren’t as agile as you used to be.

Reflecting on Time and Change

Overall, the visit to this cultural museum was an immersive experience that allowed us to step back in time for over an hour. I left with a greater appreciation of how times have changed rapidly in recent decades/centuries. I can only wonder, sometime in the not too distant future, when relics of my childhood may be on display in an open-air museum.

Traditional homes: Offering a glimpse into the craftsmanship of the past.

Outdoor games: Bringing history to life through interactive activities.

Cultural immersion: An educational and enjoyable experience for all ages.

Tip: Take your time as you explore the museum. There's so much to see, touch, and learn, and the more you engage with the exhibits, the more you'll appreciate the rich history of Spreewald.

German Pickle Museum

When it comes to quirky travel experiences, visiting a pickle museum might not be at the top of most people's travel wish lists. But if you’re in Spreewald, Germany, this quirky gem is an absolute must-visit. Known as the Gurkenmuseum (Pickle Museum), this little corner of Spreewald is dedicated solely to the region’s most famous export: pickles. It might sound unusual, but trust me, it’s anything but boring.

Our Experience Visiting the Gurkenmuseum

After wandering back to our hotel it was time to visit the Gurkenmuseum. Now I've been to several food museums over the years, however, I've yet to encounter anything quite as quirky as a museum dedicated solely to the production of pickles. One might think such a niche museum would be boring; it was anything but. On the walls were photos of ladies who had been championed 'cucumber queen' from years past. Each one of them vying for the top recipe of the year.

The winner, was fortunate enough to have her recipe used and produced locally until the next champion was crowned. With several samples on offer we couldn't wait to do a taste test. I naturally selected the winning recipe first and enjoyed the deliciously sweet taste of the pickles. My favorite one though was a more salty and sour mixture featuring mustard which made Audrey scrunch up her face.

Cucumber Queen competition: Local women compete for the best pickle recipe each year.

Historic photos: The walls are adorned with photographs of past winners, showcasing their pride and accomplishments.

Local production: The winning recipe is produced and sold locally until the next competition.

Tip: Don’t miss the chance to learn about the local pickle-making process, which has been passed down for generations. It’s more intricate than you might think!

Punting In Germany

On our second day we awoke to spot a deer outside of our lodge window. In many ways, it was an auspicious precursor to what would be an entire morning dedicated to exploring the plethora of canals by punt.



What exactly is punting you say?

A punt is a flat-bottomed boat featuring a square-cut bow, designed specifically for navigating shallow rivers. It is propelled by a pole, typically 4 to 5 meters long. As we sat down and relaxed taking in all of the wildlife, forests and isolated traditionally built German homes we passed on the canals, I couldn't help but marvel at the technique and stamina of our punter guide.

With graceful skill he pushed our boat down the shallow river bed. At one point in time these punts were used to transport animals, and today mail is delivered to homes on tiny islands. I was almost tempted to give it a try, however, my previous experiences doing such things as standup paddleboarding in Finland made me think twice given my lack of coordination on the water. Instead I gladly captured as many photos and video clips as possible.

Punter’s skill: A combination of strength, balance, and experience.

Graceful movements: Watching the punter navigate the boat is part of the experience.

Attempt or relax?: While tempting to try, punting requires more coordination than it appears.

Tip: Keep your camera ready—there’s so much natural beauty to capture as you glide through the canals.

Here are some more photos from our time spent in Spreewald:

Best Time to Visit Spreewald for a Relaxed Experience

Choosing the right time to visit Spreewald can make a big difference in your travel experience. Each season offers its own charm, but some times of the year are particularly suited to slow travel.

Spring and Summer

From April to September, Spreewald is in full bloom. The forests and meadows come alive with vibrant greenery, and the waterways sparkle under the warm sun. This is the best time for outdoor activities, whether you’re paddling down a canal or cycling through scenic paths.

Mild weather: Ideal for outdoor activities like cycling and canoeing.

Blooming nature: Enjoy the beauty of wildflowers and lush green landscapes.

Extended daylight: Take advantage of long days to explore more at a relaxed pace.

Autumn

If you’re looking for a quieter, more reflective time to visit Spreewald, consider the autumn months. From September to November, the region is bathed in warm, golden hues as the leaves change color. The crisp air and fewer crowds make this the perfect time for picturesque walks and soaking in the natural beauty.

Crisp air: Perfect for long walks through forests and along the canals.

Changing leaves: A stunning display of fall foliage.

Quieter atmosphere: Fewer tourists, allowing you to enjoy a peaceful experience.

Tip: Visit in late spring for ideal temperatures, blooming gardens, and fewer tourists.

Immerse Yourself in Local Culture and Traditions

Slow travel is all about connecting with the culture of the place you’re visiting. In Spreewald, the local Sorbian culture adds a rich layer of history and tradition to your experience.

Sorbian Culture

The Sorbs are a Slavic minority group that has lived in Spreewald for centuries. Their unique traditions, language, and way of life are still very much alive in the region today. Visiting museums or attending local festivals can give you a deeper understanding of their culture.

Learn about local traditions: Festivals, music, and art play an important role in Sorbian culture.

Visit museums: Discover the history of the Sorbs and their contribution to the region.

Meet locals: Engage with the Sorbian people and learn about their way of life firsthand.

Local Crafts

Spreewald is known for its artisan crafts, many of which have been passed down through generations. Basket weaving is one of the most traditional crafts in the region, and visiting an artisan workshop is a wonderful way to see these skills in action.

Watch artisans at work: Visit local workshops to see basket weaving and other crafts.

Handmade souvenirs: Purchase authentic, handmade items directly from artisans.

Support local traditions: By purchasing local crafts, you help preserve these traditional skills.

Culinary Delights

No visit to Spreewald would be complete without indulging in the local cuisine. The region is famous for its Spreewald pickles, but there’s so much more to taste! Traditional Sorbian dishes, made with fresh, local ingredients, offer a delicious way to immerse yourself in the culture.

Spreewald pickles: A must-try specialty of the region.

Traditional dishes: Savor hearty, flavorful meals made with locally sourced ingredients.

Local markets: Visit farmers’ markets to taste fresh, seasonal products and homemade treats.

Tip: Don’t miss the chance to visit local markets for fresh, seasonal products and homemade treats.

Where to Stay in Spreewald for a Slow Travel Experience

Accommodation plays an important role in slow travel. In Spreewald, you’ll find plenty of options that allow you to experience the region’s charm while maintaining a slower, more relaxed pace.

Traditional Guesthouses

For an authentic experience, stay in a traditional guesthouse. These cozy accommodations are often run by local families and offer a warm, welcoming atmosphere. It’s the perfect way to feel at home while exploring the region.

Cozy atmosphere: Enjoy the comfort of a home-like setting.

Local character: Each guesthouse reflects the culture and traditions of the area.

Personal touch: Hosts often provide insider tips and stories about the region.

Eco-friendly Hotels

If you’re passionate about sustainability, there are plenty of eco-friendly accommodations in Spreewald. These lodges and hotels focus on minimizing their environmental impact while providing comfortable, nature-inspired stays.

Sustainability-focused: Stay in accommodations that prioritize eco-friendly practices.

Nature-friendly design: Enjoy modern comforts while staying close to nature.

Environmentally conscious: Support businesses that are committed to preserving the region’s beauty.

#### Excuses Not To Travel: I'm Too Old + Not Enough Money + Career Ruin?
Imagine yourself standing on the peak of an awe inspiring mist awning mountain with nothing more than nature´s glory sprawling out at you in every direction.  If that doesn´t tickle your fancy, how about visiting that sacred temple that you thought was only accessible through the sticky pages of National Geographic Explorer?

It doesn´t take a lot of convincing to express that the rewards and benefits of extensive and extended travel are almost inexhaustible; however, the excuses why ´most´ never get out and experience adventures on the road are numerous.  The most typical excuses aren´t exclusive to just travel, but there are some that seem more unique/specific to this given topic.

I Can't Travel Because = It's Just Too Expensive

The truth is that travel in developing countries is far CHEAPER than the cost of living for an average month if you hail from a first world developed nation.  The expenses you avoid while traveling are numerous.  The cost of living the high life with the swanky pad, vehicle, insurances, various (essential and non-essential) subscriptions, taxes and a multitude of other cash deplete-rs simply do not exist while you´re carrying nothing but a backpack.

As a rule of thumb, one can get by quite comfortably in areas such as South East Asia and many other developing nations with a daily budget of $20 to 40 which stretches anywhere between $600 to 1200 USD a month.  Oneis not scrimping with this kind of budget feasting on three square meals of generous sized portions of local food per day, sight-seeing most afternoons, going on occasional organized tours, semi frequent nightlife and transportation to and from  place to place.

Some have a harder time giving up creature comforts they find back home while others become frugal in ways they had never imagined.  The budget I´ve given allows for the flexibility of the subjective traveller with all of their specific needs and individual quirks.

And while flights can be a little pricey, there are ways around that too. By obtaining travel credit cards via sites like Frugal Flyer, you can travel for free (or FAR less)... all while treating yourself to the occasional business class seat!

Anyhow, the verdict is in. Travel in most parts of the world is significantly cheaper than the boxed-in lifestyle (one often wracked with anxiety and discontent) back home.

Real-Life Example:

This backpacker has been on the road for over two years having left home with nothing more than $500 in his pocket.

I'm Not Able To Travel Because = I'll Ruin My Career

I think this might be the most common excuse I´ve heard by far.  I´ll be destroying my career if I take X amount of months off or a whole year from work or study.
I won´t be able to get hired or pick up my studies again and I´ll have a hole the size of the Rocky Mountains in my otherwise spiffy and impressive resume.  What one often doesn't realize is that the job you feel that won´t be waiting for you back home is likely not the only option one has to consider.
If one absolutely feels they're limited to living in a specific city, house and job; however, if you have skills that are highly employable you´ll land that cushy job once again with nothing but ease.  If you´re a trained professional you won´t find any shortage of students to teach, needles to poke or jerks to sue.
The conditions and reality of life doesn´t change overnight just because you´re not there for a year.  I´ve seen numerous people quit and then find even better jobs after they´ve come back home.  The truth of the matter is that backpacking changes you immensely and more often than not in a positive manner.
When you realize you can get by for an entire year with nothing but a 12 to 15kg pack on your back you´re probably less likely to go back home and continue hoarding, polishing, collecting and spending money on stuff in ridiculous ways that never even came close to fulfilling you in the first place.
Personally, I´ve found employers are often fascinated by those who have done ´unique´ things and backpacking definitely is given high priority in this  broad category.  The time away from the hamster wheel of daily routines may also give one a broad new perspective leading one towards an exciting new career that otherwise would have never been discovered.
Real Life Example:
This nomad has been abroad since 2003 requiring nothing more than a laptop and an internet connection.

I'm Shouldn't Travel Because = I'm Too Old

I must admit this one makes me chuckle.  I´m in my late twenties and feel the world is my oyster, but I´ve seen a few seasoned and jaded characters in my day who wouldn´t have done much to convince me that they were backpacker material; however, I´ve since changed my global opinion considerably when I witnessed with my own two eyes individuals in their 70´s and 80´s doing jungle treks, mountain climbing, safaris and white water rafting.

They screamed, roared  and laughed loader than the crowd less than half their age and had a common thread of being young at heart and full of adventure, excitement and enthusiasm.  It´s never too late to get off your ass and get out of your well defined and ridiculously rigid comfort zone, but it does take a bit more initiative and enthusiasm I would imagine as you advance in years.

I´m not even thirty, totally healthy and physically fit, so I can´t comment too much on the area of daily physical challenges but just let it be known that there are those who are much older than you who are enjoying the times of their lives without the aforementioned aches, pains and moaning that might be associated with a more mature traveller. The bottom line is simply this – travel can be done at any age.

Real Life Example:

This digital nomad hit the road to successfully pursue a travel career as a writer and photographer around the time when most individuals are thinking more towards a lifestyle of retirement.

The Benefits of Travel: Why You Should Overcome Your Excuses

Lack of Time

One of the most common excuses is the belief that there’s simply not enough time to travel. Work, family, and other responsibilities seem to fill every moment, leaving little room for adventure. However, travel doesn't always mean a long, extended break. Weekend getaways, short road trips, or even day trips to nearby towns can offer the same sense of escape and exploration.

How to Make Time for Travel:

Schedule trips in advance to block off time and treat them as a priority.

Plan around long weekends or public holidays to maximize your vacation time.

Opt for "micro-travel"—short trips that allow you to recharge without needing a lot of time away.

Remember, even a short trip can break up your routine and rejuvenate your spirit.

Lack of Money

Another major hurdle for many people is the cost of travel. It’s easy to believe that only those with deep pockets can afford to explore the world, but that’s not true. There are countless ways to make travel affordable without sacrificing experience.

Budget-Friendly Travel Hacks:

Travel during the off-season for cheaper flights and accommodations.

Choose budget destinations where your money stretches further. Southeast Asia, Eastern Europe, and Central America are great for affordable adventures.

Use points from credit cards or frequent flyer miles to cut travel costs.

Stay in hostels, Airbnb, or even try house-sitting to save on lodging.

Use local transportation and eat street food to experience culture on a budget.

With careful planning, travel can be accessible to almost anyone.

Fear of the Unknown

Traveling to unfamiliar places can feel intimidating. Concerns about language barriers, cultural differences, or navigating a foreign city are understandable, but they can be overcome with preparation.

#### Fernie Travel Guide | Best Things to Do in Fernie, British Columbia
Fernie didn’t just kick off our BC road trip—it hijacked it in the best possible way.

We rolled into town with a car full of camera gear, hiking boots and baby toys, and within a couple of days Fernie had completely won us over: burritos on a sunny patio, mining stories that read like a Netflix drama, stroller-friendly flower walks, a waterfall hike with our “chunky monkey” snoozing in the backpack, craft beer with big mountain views, and an alpine lodge so dreamy it felt like Banff and Lake Louise had a quieter, cooler cousin.

A sunny family hiking moment at Island Lake Lodge as we explored the lakeside trails surrounded by towering evergreens and crystal-clear water. Samuel carries baby Aurelia in the backpack while Audrey leads the way with a big smile—one of our favourite Fernie memories. The calm lake and forest backdrop capture the peaceful alpine vibe perfectly.

For context: I grew up in small-town British Columbia, and we’re currently based just over the border in southern Alberta, so we’ve spent years road-tripping the Rockies. Fernie instantly reminded me of my hometown (Gold River) in all the best ways—industry roots, tough history, and a community that reinvented itself around the outdoors. That lived-in, local feel is a huge part of why we loved it.

If you’re planning your own Fernie travel guide in real life—maybe a family weekend, a ski road trip, or a summer loop through BC—this article walks you through the best things to do in Fernie, split into two clear sections: what we actually did and filmed, and extra ideas we didn’t get to this time.

Audrey enjoys a quiet moment overlooking the still waters of Island Lake Lodge, one of the most scenic spots we visited in Fernie. The mountain backdrop, lush evergreens, and classic wooden chairs capture the perfect blend of calm and alpine beauty. It felt like the kind of place you never want to leave. We certainly didn't!

Fernie, BC Snapshot

TopicQuick AnswerRegionElk Valley, East Kootenay, southeastern British ColumbiaSettingCompact small city fully surrounded by the Canadian Rockies on the Elk RiverVibeLaid-back, outdoorsy, a little scruffy in the best way: ski-bum energy meets small-town BCWho It’s ForOutdoor lovers, road trippers, families, skiers, bikers, low-key nature seekersOur Trip Style2-day family visit with a baby, focusing on easy hikes, history, and great foodCost FeelMid-range mountain town: casual bagels & burritos, plus splurge-worthy alpine lodgeGetting ThereOn Highway 3 (Crowsnest), ~1 hr from Cranbrook, ~3-4 hrs from Calgary by carCar Needed?Strongly recommended for trailheads, lakes, Island Lake Lodge, and the ski resortBest Time to VisitSummer for hiking and lakes; winter for skiing; shoulder seasons for quiet & dealsSignature ViewsLizard Range and surrounding peaks looming dramatically over downtown Don’t MissFairy Creek Falls, Historic Downtown & museum, Maiden Lake, Fernie Brewing Co., Island Lake Lodge

🧭 Quick Booking: Your Fernie Travel Essentials ✈️

If you’re planning your trip to the East Kootenays, these are the four bookings that make everything smoother — your base, adventures, transport, and freedom.

🎒 Your Travel Toolkit

🔖 What to Book💡 Why It’s Worth It🔗 Quick Link🎟️ Tours & ExperiencesSkip the logistics and explore Fernie + the Elk Valley with local guides (easy wins when weather turns or time is tight)👉 Browse Fernie & Elk Valley tours on Viator🏨 Hotels & StaysLock in the right base (walkable town vs. ski hill vs. highway convenience) — especially on weekends + peak season👉 Find Fernie hotels on Booking.com🚗 Car RentalsThe easiest way to do day trips, chase viewpoints, and keep your schedule flexible👉 Compare car rentals for Fernie on DiscoverCars (pick in up Cranbrook)🚌 Bus TicketsIf you’re piecing together regional transport, checking schedules early saves headaches👉 Check bus routes to/from Fernie on Busbud

https://youtu.be/RoRAhuPKiRE

Top Things To Do in Fernie, BC (From Our Video)

This section is 100% first-hand: what we actually did, ate, walked, and filmed over two days in Fernie with baby Aurelia in tow.

Samuel digs into a loaded burrito at Luchadora Burritos, one of our first and tastiest stops in downtown Fernie. The casual patio, warm weather, and generous portions made it the perfect fuel for a full day of exploring. It’s a great first bite for anyone arriving hungry in town.

Lunch at Luchadora: Burrito Fuel for the Trip

We rolled into Fernie right at lunchtime and made a beeline for Luchadora Burritos in the historic downtown. Think sunshine and giant burritos that require both hands. I ordered a beef burrito loaded with rice, cabbage and sauce; Audrey went for fried cod with beans; baby Aurelia happily squeezed fruit purée and judged us for not sharing. 

It was that classic first-lunch-of-the-road-trip moment: hungry, slightly frazzled adults, happy baby, and the feeling of, “Okay, NOW the trip has finally officially started.”

This macro shot from Luchadora Burritos shows just how stacked and flavour-packed our first Fernie meal really was. Warm tortilla, creamy sauce, tender beef, crunchy cabbage, seasoned rice—every bite hit differently. A must-stop spot if you’re arriving hungry.

Why it’s worth it:Burritos are a perfect pre-adventure base—lots of carbs, flavour, and easy to customize. Plus you’re already in the heart of downtown, so you can roll straight into exploring.

Who it suits:Road-tripping couples, hungry families, anyone who wants fast, good food before sightseeing.

Best time of day:Lunch or early afternoon. Luchadora is seasonal patio-style

How long to budget:45–60 minutes including ordering, eating, and wrangling small humans.

Cost feel:Budget to mid-range for a solid, filling meal.

A closer look inside the Fernie Museum, where interactive exhibits and historic photos bring the town’s mining past and early disasters to life. It’s a compact but highly informative stop that adds depth and context to any visit. Perfect for travelers wanting to understand Fernie beyond the trails.

Fernie Museum: Mining Disasters, Firestorms & a Reinvention Story

From Luchadora, we walked over to the Fernie Museum, housed inside a handsome brick building that used to be the Home Bank. Inside, the permanent exhibit reads like a mini-series: coal boom, mine explosions, fires, banking scandal, prohibition-era rum-running, and eventually reinvention as an outdoor tourism hub.

A few pieces of Fernie history that really stuck with us (and that you’ll see echoed around town):

1902 Coal Creek mine disaster:Around 128 miners killed in a single explosion, one of the worst coal mining disasters in Canadian history. 

1904 downtown fire:A massive fire tore through the commercial district, taking out around 65 buildings. 

1908 Great Fire:The entire town went up in flames in under 90 minutes; only the mine office survived, which today is Fernie City Hall. 

1923 Home Bank collapse:The national bank that operated here failed spectacularly, wiping out local savings and hitting towns like Fernie hard.

1986 onward:The last underground mine closed, and Fernie began leaning harder into tourism: skiing, hiking, biking, river sports, and mountain culture. 

These beautifully preserved vintage tins at the Fernie Museum offer a glimpse into the brands and household products that once filled local pantries. From biscuits to shortening and lard, each container reflects the everyday life of early Fernie residents. It’s a quirky little detail that adds personality to the museum’s broader mining and settlement story.

We loved how the museum connects all of this to real people and places. You’re not just reading panels; you’re seeing photos of miners and artifacts that are part of its unique history. It also mirrors stories from other BC towns we’ve visited and, for me, echoed the ups and downs of my own hometown of Gold River on Vancouver Island.

Why it’s worth it:It turns Fernie from “cute mountain town” into a place with real depth. You’ll understand the architecture, the murals, and even the rum-running stories much better afterward.

Who it suits:First-time visitors, history lovers, curious teens, and anyone needing a weather-safe activity.

Best time of day:Late morning or mid-afternoon—great if the weather is extreme (too hot, too cold, or pouring rain).

How long to budget:60–90 minutes for the exhibits, plus a quick browse in the small gift shop.

Cost feel:Admission is typically by donation, which is incredible value and ensures maximum flexibility for visitors

Samuel pauses for a photo in front of Fernie’s beautiful City Hall, a landmark known for its stone façade, turret-like details, and colourful flower gardens. It’s one of the most charming civic buildings in the Kootenays and a great first stop for anyone exploring downtown Fernie. The perfect mix of heritage and small-town pride.

City Hall Gardens & Fernie Heritage Walk: Stroller-Friendly Charm

Stepping out of the museum, we did exactly what I recommend you do: wander toward Fernie City Hall. The building itself is part of Fernie’s survival story—the former mine office that somehow made it through the Great Fire of 1908, now standing in front of manicured gardens buzzing with bees and butterflies. Our baby was absolutely transfixed by the flowers while we checked out the miner statue and mountain views.

We picked up the Fernie Heritage Walking Tour brochure (you can also find it via QR code) and began spotting historic buildings as we walked:

The courthouse and its grand architecture

Brick-clad commercial blocks along 2nd Avenue

A beautiful church up the road

The library and other civic buildings

This quiet moment outside the Fernie Courthouse highlights the community’s war memorial, a statue honouring local soldiers who served and sacrificed. The red-brick courthouse creates a striking backdrop, adding depth and texture to the scene. It’s one of those spots that reveals Fernie’s deeper stories beyond the adventure trails.

It’s an easy, stroller-friendly route and a great way to get your mental compass set: where the river is, which streets have the best views, and where you want to come back for coffee or dinner later.

Why it’s worth it:You get architecture, history, mountain scenery, and “life in Fernie today” all in one loop.

Who it suits:Families with strollers, casual walkers, photographers, and anyone easing into town after a long drive.

Best time of day:Late afternoon or early evening for softer light and cooler temps.

How long to budget:1.5–2 hours at a relaxed pace with plenty of photo and coffee stops.

Cost feel:Free, aside from snack and drink breaks.

Need to know:The museum often offers guided heritage and themed walking tours (including ghost tours and cemetery tours) in peak seasons—these add even more storytelling if you’re into it.

Audrey dives into the Switchback Salmon Stack, one of Big Bang Bagels’ most iconic creations. Loaded with cream cheese, sprouts, red onion, and that rich, buttery salmon, it’s basically a West Coast classic wrapped in everything-bagel goodness. A perfect fuel-up before hitting Fernie’s trails and cafés.

Breakfast at Big Bang Bagels: “Getting Banged” Like a Local

Day two started strong at Big Bang Bagels, Fernie’s bagel HQ and the place where everyone seems to converge in the morning. Locals talk about “getting banged” (in the most wholesome way possible): you order a stuffed bagel sandwich with a fun name and roll out with a hot coffee in hand.

Our lineup:

The Avo Launcher: Avocado, cheddar, cream cheese, red onion, and herby mayo on a fresh bagel—ridiculously satisfying trail fuel.

Switchback Salmon Stack: Cream cheese, alfalfa sprouts, red onion… basically a West Coast classic in bagel form.

The hand-drawn chalkboard menu at Big Bang Bagels sets the tone for Fernie’s favourite breakfast stop, packed with playful names and hearty combinations. From classic cream cheese spreads to loaded bagelwiches, it’s the kind of menu that makes choosing almost impossible. A must-see (and must-eat) stop for hungry travellers.

We sat inside watching people grab takeaway bagels and coffees before heading to the trails, and it immediately felt like we’d tapped into the morning routine of the town.

Why it’s worth it:Fast, filling, and portable—we ate on-site but noticed most patrons were in grab and run mode

Who it suits:Everyone: families, vegetarians, fussy eaters, hangry hikers.

Best time of day:Early to mid-morning; it gets busy, especially on weekends and powder days.

How long to budget:30–45 minutes to order, eat, and caffeinate; 10–15 minutes if you just swoop in for a takeaway.

Personal note:We ordered two different bagels and used them as our main breakfast —strong endorsement from both parents and one very curious baby.

A perfect mother-daughter moment between Audrey and baby Aurelia at Maiden Lake, where the calm water and towering Lizard Range peaks frame an already heart-melting scene. This easy loop is ideal for families, giving little ones fresh mountain air and parents a chance to soak in Fernie’s beauty. One of our favourite peaceful stops in town.

Maiden Lake: Baby-Friendly Loop with Big-Mountain Backdrop

From downtown, we drove to Maiden Lake, a pretty little pond-lake hybrid with a flat loop trail with epic mountain views. Locals use it as a quick walk, a place to cool off, or a jumping-on point for the Fernie Valley Pathway, a 5.3 km paved multi-use path that connects the Visitor Centre, Maiden Lake, Annex Park, and Mount Fernie Provincial Park.

We pushed the stroller around the lake while Aurelia yelled encouraging things at the ducks (baby talk, but we got the gist). It was mellow, beautiful, and exactly what we needed to kick off our day. 

A peaceful stroller-friendly walk around Maiden Lake, with Fernie’s Lizard Range rising in the background, made this outing an easy family favourite. Audrey and baby Aurelia enjoyed the smooth path, big mountain views, and the gentle quiet that makes this loop perfect for new parents. An ideal low-effort, high-reward stop in Fernie.

Why it’s worth it:Minimal effort, maximum payoff: mountain reflections on the water, easy walking, and a great spot to stretch your legs or let the kids run around.

Who it suits:Families with young kids, anyone recovering from a bigger hike, or travellers breaking up a long drive.

Best time of day:Morning for reflections and cooler air; evenings for golden-hour photos.

How long to budget:30–60 minutes for the lake loop; longer if you connect onto the Valley Pathway.

Cost feel:Free.

Need to know:The trail and wider wetland area are used by wildlife—keep an eye out for birds, turtles, and the usual mountain suspects.

Fairy Creek Falls is one of Fernie’s most rewarding yet accessible hikes, and the waterfall looks especially magical with the soft motion blur of a long exposure. Surrounded by mossy rock walls and shaded forest, it’s a peaceful spot to take a break before looping back to town. A perfect family-friendly nature fix.

Fairy Creek Falls: Our “Chunky Monkey” Waterfall Hike

If you only have time for one hike in Fernie with kids, Fairy Creek Falls is hard to beat. The trail starts right from the Fernie Visitor Information Centre on Highway 3, which is honestly one of the nicest trailheads you could ask for: clean washrooms, spacious bathrooms for baby changes, interactive displays, maps, and helpful staff. We chatted with them, grabbed a map, and then strapped Aurelia into the hiking backpack—our “sedan” for the day.

The hike itself is classic Fernie:

Gentle but steady forest trail

Avalanche terrain signage (we were there in summer, but it’s a good reminder that this is real mountain country)

Final payoff at a pretty waterfall tumbling into a rock bowl

Aurelia slept through most of the climb while I sweated like a pack mule. She woke up right at the falls, looked around like, “Yes, good job, team,” and made it instantly feel worth the effort.

Fairy Creek Falls made for such a fun family outing, with Samuel carrying our little “Chunky Monkey” in the hiking carrier as we wandered through Fernie’s gorgeous forest. The trail is easy, shaded, and full of that mossy mountain magic that makes the Kootenays so special. A great hike for parents wanting fresh air without the stress.

Stats-wise, Fairy Creek Falls is generally described as an easy-to-moderate hike: roughly 4–5 km return, about 100–140 m of elevation gain, and around 1–1.5 hours for most walkers.

Why it’s worth it:You get a legit waterfall and forest experience without committing to a long or technical hike. It also feels like a “locals’ favourite” rather than a big-ticket tourist spot.

Who it suits:Families, casual hikers, photographers, and anyone who can handle a couple of hours on uneven trail.

Best time of day:Morning or late afternoon to avoid midday heat and crowds; we went in cooler weather and it was perfect.

How long to budget:1.5–2 hours at a relaxed pace with photos and snack breaks.

Cost feel:Free.

Need to know:

Trail conditions can be muddy in spring or after rain.

In winter, sections can be icy and you may need traction aids.

This is bear country—carry bear spray, make noise, and check local advisories. 

Nothing hits quite like a post-hike pint, and Samuel wasted no time diving into a Ridgewalk Red at Fernie Brewing Company. The taproom has such a relaxed, mountain-town vibe—perfect for cooling down after a big day on the trails. If you love trying local craft brews when you travel, this is an essential Fernie stop.

Fernie Brewing Co.: Ridgewalk Red & Reward Beer

Post-hike, we did what any good Canadian mountain town visitor does: Fernie Brewing Company. Set slightly out of downtown, it has a relaxed tasting room and a patio with big views of the surrounding peaks. I ordered a Ridgewalk Red Ale, which tasted even better knowing I’d just hiked with a sleeping baby strapped to my back.

Fernie Brewing is very much a “beer and snacks” kind of place: expect pints, flights, and simple bites (chips, pretzels, etc.) rather than a full sit-down meal. That's not an option. We treated it as our post-hike reward stop and prelude to our lunch / dinner.

Ridgewalk Red Ale takes center stage in Fernie Brewing Company’s cozy taproom, catching the light just right to show off its deep amber color. It’s the perfect reward after a mountain adventure—or honestly, even without one. A must-try pour for craft beer lovers passing through Fernie.

Why it’s worth it:Excellent craft beer. It also gives you a feel for Fernie’s young, outdoorsy side.

Who it suits:Beer lovers, couples, groups of friends; kids are often welcome (Aurelia was a happy camper)

Best time of day:Late afternoon après-hike or après-bike.

How long to budget:60–90 minutes for a tasting flight or a couple of pints.

Cost feel:Mid-range; craft pints are never cheap, but the quality is there.

Need to know:Don’t show up starving expecting a full meal—this is a “drinks and snacks” stop. Check their website or socials for current hours, patio openings, and any special releases. 

If you look closely, you’ll spot a tiny canoe drifting across Island Lake—a reminder of just how massive and humbling these mountains really are. The layered peaks and dense pines make this one of Fernie’s most cinematic backdrops. It’s the kind of place that stops you in your tracks, even if you’ve seen a thousand alpine lakes before.

👉 Check out Fernie hotels, resorts and lodges on Booking.com

Island Lake Lodge: The “Is This Even Real?” Alpine Finale

Our grand finale in Fernie was Island Lake Lodge, and it honestly felt like the trip levelled up BIG TIME. You drive about 30 minutes from town, much of it along a gravel road through tall old-growth forest, and then suddenly the trees part and you’re in a mini alpine kingdom: wooden lodges, a turquoise lake, and huge peaks towering behind everything.

Audrey couldn’t resist diving into a steaming bowl of ramen at Bear Bistro, made even better by the unreal mountain views surrounding Island Lake Lodge. There’s something magical about enjoying comfort food with crisp alpine air all around you. This is easily one of Fernie’s most scenic lunch spots.

We had lunch at the Bear Bistro, which hit that perfect sweet spot of comfort food and mountain views:

A steaming bowl of ramen that transported Audrey straight back to Japan

A smashed-patty burger that felt suspiciously like a mountain-town Shake Shack

Desserts: a salted caramel ice cream sandwich and a nostalgic Jos-Louis-style cake

Meanwhile, Aurelia… slept through the entire meal like an absolute legend, giving us one of the most peaceful lunches we’ve had since becoming parents.

Audrey pauses on the trail at Island Lake Lodge, framed by enormous evergreens that make every hiker feel wonderfully small. This path winds through some of Fernie’s most tranquil old-growth forest, offering cool shade and soft light even on warm days. A perfect moment for anyone who loves quiet alpine walks.

After lunch, we walked down to the lake and followed an easy lakeside trail, watching the reflections shift as clouds moved across the peaks. Island Lake is also the base for longer hikes into the Lizard Range (trails like Spineback and Tamarack), and more than 100 km of routes crisscross the surrounding terrain.

We both instantly agreed: next time, we’re coming back to stay a few nights—ideally in a snowstorm so we can get “stuck” here on purpose.

Why it’s worth it:It feels like a high-end Banff/Lake Louise experience, but tucked away and much less crowded. Food, scenery, and trails are all superb.

Who it suits:Couples, foodies, hikers, photographers, and families looking for a splurge day or overnight escape.

Best time of day:Late morning to late afternoon; lunch plus a short hike is a perfect combo. Golden hour on the lake is stunning.

How long to budget:At least a half-day; a full day or overnight stay is even better.

Cost feel:Splurge compared to in-town options; worth it if you treat it as a highlight or celebration meal.

Need to know:

Summer: Road access, restaurant hours, and guided hikes follow a seasonal operations calendar. 

Winter: Vehicle access may be restricted; Island Lake operates as a backcountry cat-skiing lodge with specific access rules.

This low vantage point along the rail line in Fernie creates a striking sense of depth, with the tracks pulling your eyes straight toward the horizon. The soft haze and quiet surroundings make it feel like a moment of stillness between passing trains. A simple but atmospheric scene you’ll spot all over the Elk Valley.

🏨 Where to Stay in Fernie (Our Top Hotel Picks)

⭐ Quick Booking Box: Fernie Hotels (Compare Rates)

PickBest forVibeBooking link🏆 Top Pick: Best Western Plus Fernie Mountain LodgeFirst-timers & families who want a comfy, well-reviewed base with great facilitiesIndoor pool, hot tubs, restaurant, solid location near town👉 Compare Best Western Plus Fernie Mountain Lodge (Booking.com)⛷️ Ski-Area Stay: Fernie Slopeside LodgePowder days & ski access without long drivesSki-area convenience plus mountain views👉 See Fernie Slopeside Lodge (Booking.com)🏨 Mid-Range: Lizard Creek Lodge or Fernie Stanford ResortWalkable town stays with a bit more character & amenitiesClassic mountain-town hotels with pools/hot tubs👉 Browse mid-range Fernie hotels (Booking.com)🌲 Cabins / Cozy Stay: Snow Creek Lodge or Pinnacle Ridge CondosCouples & small groups who want more space + scenic staysMountain views, hot tub, private space👉 Check Snow Creek Lodge & cabins (Booking.com)💰 Budget: Canada’s Best Value Inn & Suites FerniePractical choice for road-trippers & value seekersSimple comfort with pool & sauna close to town👉 Find Canada’s Best Value Inn & Suites Fernie (Booking.com)

🔎 Want to browse all options instead?

👉 Compare all Fernie hotels on Booking.com

More Amazing Things to Do in Fernie (We Didn’t Cover in the Video)

Now let’s talk about the stuff we didn’t manage to squeeze into our two days, but absolutely would add on a longer Fernie trip. I’ll keep these shorter, since your core “must-do” loop is everything above.

Ski or Ride Fernie Alpine Resort

Fernie Alpine Resort is legendary for its five big alpine bowls, deep snow, and long thigh-burning runs. In winter you’re riding lifts into proper Powder Highway terrain; in summer you get scenic chairlift rides, alpine hiking, and a full-on bike park with dozens of trails from beginner to expert. a

Good for: Skiers and riders in winter; hikers, bikers, and families seeking lift-accessed viewpoints in summer.

Time needed: Half-day to full day.

Cost feel: Mid-to-high

Ride the Fernie Mountain Bike Network

Fernie quietly punches way above its weight in mountain biking. A mix of cross-country trails, technical descents, and bike-park laps at the alpine resort gives you endless options. Names like Stove Trail, Project 9, and Dem Bones show up frequently on local trail maps. 

Good for: Everyone from beginner riders (with guidance) to experts.

Time needed: Anywhere from a quick 1-hour spin to a full day.

Cost feel: Free if you own a bike; mid-range if renting or joining shuttles/lessons

Explore More of Mount Fernie Provincial Park

We sampled the Fairy Creek side of things, but Mount Fernie Provincial Park has a web of forested trails, creeks, and viewpoints only minutes from town. It’s ideal for hikers, trail runners, and anyone wanting that “deep forest” feeling.

Good for: Intermediate hikers, nature lovers, trail runners.

Time needed: 2–6 hours depending on route.

Cost feel: Low or free day use

The Elk River is at its most peaceful here, with crystal-clear water drifting past wild grasses and smooth riverside stones. Even on a hazy day, the layers of forest and distant peaks create a soft, dreamy backdrop. It’s the kind of spot that makes you slow down and breathe a little deeper.

Paddle, Float or Raft the Elk River

The Elk River is the backbone of the valley. In summer, local operators run whitewater rafting trips, scenic family floats, and sometimes guided SUP outings on sections of the Elk and nearby Bull River.

Good for: Adventure lovers (whitewater) and families/photographers (gentler sections).

Time needed: Half-day or full day.

Cost feel: Mid-range for guided river activities

✅ See top-rated Fernie & East Kootenay tours on Viator

Cross-Country, Snowshoe & Winter Extras

If your Fernie visit is a winter one, don’t just stop at downhill skiing. You’ve also got cross-country trails at places like the Fernie Nordic Centre, fat biking routes, snowshoe loops, and winter events that make evenings feel festive.

Good for: Mixed-interest groups where not everyone skis or boards.

Time needed: 2–4 hours per activity.

Cost feel: Mostly mid-range; gear rentals and passes add up, but some loops are free if you already have equipment.

This iconic carved bear greets visitors along one of Fernie’s forest paths, blending perfectly with the surrounding trees and shifting seasons. It’s a fun little landmark that adds character to a walk or hike. If you spot it, you know you’re officially in Fernie territory.

🚐 Book Transport & Car Rentals for Greater Flexibility

Whether you’re flying in, driving over, or planning day trips, locking in transport early usually means better prices + fewer last-minute compromises.

Your planBest optionLink🚗 Local exploring + day tripsCar rental👉 Compare Fernie car rentals on DiscoverCars (Cranbrook pickup)🚌 Regional connectionsBus tickets (where available)👉 Book bus routes to/from Fernie on Busbud

💡 Tip: If you’re planning to explore beyond Fernie (lakes, lookouts, nearby towns), a rental car keeps your trip flexible — especially if weather changes your plans.

Neighbourhood & Area Clusters: How to Group Your Days

Fernie is small, but thinking in “clusters” helps you plan efficiently and avoid zig-zagging back and forth.

1. Historic Downtown Fernie

What’s here (and nearby):

Fernie Museum and Visitor Information

Heritage walking route & City Hall gardens

Cafés, bakeries, Big Bang Bagels

Independent shops, outdoor gear stores, galleries

Evening hotspots like Nevados (for tapas and tequila)

Best for:Your first half-day in town, bad-weather windows, and low-key exploring days.

2. Highway 3 Corridor: Visitor Centre, Fairy Creek & Maiden Lake

What’s here:

Fernie Visitor Information Centre (trail maps, exhibits, washrooms)

Fairy Creek Falls hike

Maiden Lake & McDougall Wetlands

Access to parts of the Fernie Valley Pathway

Best for:An easy “active” day with kids or a leg-stretch break during a road trip.

3. Mount Fernie Provincial Park & Fernie Alpine Resort

What’s here:

Winter: ski/board terrain with five alpine bowls and deep Powder Highway snow

Summer: alpine hiking, scenic lifts, bike park trails 

Nearby provincial park trails and campgrounds

Best for:Full adventure days that revolve around one big area rather than bouncing all over town.

4. Island Lake Lodge & Upper Valley

What’s here:

Island Lake Lodge (Bear Bistro, lodge dining, spa) 

Island Lake Loop Trail and connecting hikes 

Old-growth forest, scenic drive, and serious photo potential

Best for:Special-occasion days, romantic getaways, or when you want to spoil yourself.

5. East Fernie & Elk River

What’s here:

Fernie Brewing Co.

Access to the Elk River for floats and fishing (with proper licensing and operators) 

Best for:A chill afternoon: hike or float first, brewery second.

Fernie Experiences Comparison Table

ExperienceBest ForTime NeededCost FeelSeasonWhy It’s Worth ItFairy Creek FallsFamilies, casual hikers1.5–2 hrsFreeSpring–Fall; some winter accessAccessible waterfall hike straight from the Visitor Centre with full forest vibes and a rewarding payoff. Island Lake Lodge & Lake LoopCouples, foodies, photographers, hikersHalf-day+SplurgeLate Spring–Fall; winter lodge staysAlpine lodge setting with big views, great food, and easy-to-access trails, all in a more intimate setting than bigger resorts. Fernie Museum + Heritage WalkFirst-timers, history fans2–3 hrsLowYear-roundTurns Fernie into a story you can follow: mining booms, fires, bank failures, and grit. You’ll see the town differently afterwards.Big Bang BagelsEveryone30–45 minsBudget–MidYear-roundLocal breakfast institution and the easiest way to feel like you’ve joined the Fernie morning routine.Maiden LakeFamilies with small kids30–60 minsFreeSpring–FallFlat, stroller-friendly loop with mountain reflections and access to the wider trail network. Fernie Brewing Co.Beer lovers, social groups1–1.5 hrsMidYear-roundExcellent craft beer and a patio that showcases the surrounding peaks. Fernie Alpine Resort (Winter)Skiers & snowboardersFull dayMid–HighWinterDeep snow, big bowls, and a proper Powder Highway ski experience without mega-resort vibes. Fernie Alpine Resort (Summer)Hikers, bikers, familiesHalf-day+Mid–HighSummerLift-accessed alpine scenery and a full-service bike park for all levels.Elk River Raft/FloatAdventurous travellers, familiesHalf-day–Full dayMidLate Spring–SummerSee the Elk Valley from the water with a mix of rapids, scenery, and potential wildlife spots. Downtown Food & Heritage StrollEveryone2–4 hrsFlexibleYear-roundEasy way to combine food, history, and shopping with constant mountain backdrops. 

(All operations, prices, and trail conditions are subject to change)

Fernie Mini-Itineraries

1 Day in Fernie: “Quick Hit” Fernie Travel Guide

Perfect if you’re passing through on a BC or Alberta road trip.

Morning

Arrive in town and grab breakfast or early lunch—Big Bang Bagels if it’s morning, Luchadora if you’re rolling in around midday.

Visit Fernie Museum to get your head around the mining history, the fires, and the Home Bank drama.

Do a short heritage loop via City Hall gardens and a few key buildings on 2nd Avenue.

Afternoon

Drive to the Visitor Information Centre and hike Fairy Creek Falls.

If you have time and energy, add a spin around Maiden Lake on your way back.

Evening

Reward yourself at Fernie Brewing Co. with a Ridgewalk Red or a tasting flight.

Head back to downtown for dinner (taproom, pizza, tapas, or classic pub vibes) and a last stroll under the mountains.

2 Days in Fernie: Food, History & Nature

Day 1 – Downtown & Origins

Breakfast: Big Bang Bagels or a local café.

Late Morning: Fernie Museum (take your time with the exhibits).

Lunch: Luchadora burritos or another downtown option.

Afternoon: Full Heritage Walking Tour loop, including City Hall gardens and some of the side streets.

Evening: Drinks and dinner in downtown—Nevados for tapas or a cozy pub; then wander 2nd Avenue with an ice cream or hot chocolate depending on the season.

Day 2 – Lakes, Waterfalls & Beer

Morning: Head to the Visitor Centre and hike Fairy Creek Falls while temps are cool.

Midday: Picnic or snack stop at Maiden Lake; let the kids play or just soak up the views.

Afternoon: Downtime back at your accommodation (naps, reading, hot tub if you’re lucky).

Late Afternoon: Fernie Brewing Co. for après.

Evening: Easy dinner in town and, if you have energy left, a short walk along the Elk River or back through downtown.

3 Days in Fernie: Fernie Travel Guide “Deep Dive”

Day 1 – Orientation & Downtown Vibes

Arrive, check in, and wander downtown to get your bearings.

Spend a relaxed afternoon at the museum, City Hall gardens, and a partial heritage walk.

Treat yourself to a nice dinner—this is your “we made it to Fernie” night.

Day 2 – Waterfalls, Lakes & Beer

Bagel breakfast at Big Bang Bagels.

Fairy Creek Falls hike from the Visitor Centre.

Maiden Lake loop and possible detour onto the Fernie Valley Pathway if you have time.

Long nap / kids’ playground time / café break.

Fernie Brewing Co. for sunset-ish drinks, followed by dinner downtown.

Day 3 – Big Mountain or Alpine Lodge Day

Pick your flavor:

Option A – Fernie Alpine Resort (Winter or Summer):

Ski/board all day in winter; in summer, ride the lifts for hiking or biking.

Après at the base area, then head “home” for a cozy night.

Option B – Island Lake Lodge (Summer/Shoulder):

Drive up to Island Lake Lodge, have a long lunch at the Bear Bistro, and walk the lakeside loop or a slightly longer hike if you’re up for it.

Leave time to just sit on the dock and stare at the peaks. 

Either way, finish your third night with an easy dinner and that bittersweet feeling of, “We’re definitely coming back.”

A classic downtown Fernie moment, where heritage brick buildings, hanging flower baskets, and slow traffic set the tone for an easygoing mountain town. Big Bang Bagels sits just across the street, making this stretch a natural hub for morning coffee, people-watching, and wandering between shops.

Plan Your Trip to Fernie: Checklist Recap

✅ Choose your season:Deep powder and ski culture in winter; hiking, biking, and lakes in summer; shoulder seasons for fewer people and lower prices. 

✅ Book key pieces in advance:Island Lake Lodge dining and stays, ski lift tickets, bike rentals, rafting trips, and spa appointments. 

✅ Plan days by cluster:Downtown, Highway 3/Visitor Centre + Fairy Creek, Mount Fernie + resort, Island Lake Lodge, and East Fernie/Elk River.

✅ Pack for mountain mood swings:Layers, waterproofs, warm midlayers, and sun protection—even in summer.

✅ Think family logistics:Stroller for downtown and Maiden Lake; hiking backpack or carrier for Fairy Creek Falls and any longer trails.

✅ Check current conditions:Trail reports, avalanche bulletins, river levels, and road conditions—especially for winter driving and higher-elevation routes. 

✅ Respect the wildlife:Carry bear spray where recommended, make noise on forested trails, keep a clean campsite or rental, and give animals plenty of space.

✅ Support local:Choose independent cafés, restaurants, and shops; visit the museum; and consider local guides or lessons.

✅ Leave breathing room:Fernie shines when you have time for an extra coffee, an unplanned walk, or one more slow lap around downtown with the mountains glowing in the background.

If you love smaller, character-filled places with big scenery and even bigger stories, Fernie is one of those towns that quietly burrows its way into your “we need to go back” list. We kicked off our BC road trip here, but honestly? It could easily have been the whole trip. Heck, we're even thinking of moving here someday. How's that for a first impression?

#### Guide To The World Nomad Games in Kyrgyzstan: Sporting Event!
Being nomadic and traveling nearly 365 days of the year is in many ways a dream job for me. However, one thing that I really miss about being back home in Canada is having the opportunity to follow sports throughout the year. When I had the opportunity to attend the World Nomad Games in Kyrgyzstan, the dormant sports junkie inside of me jumped at the opportunity.

Opening Ceremony fireworks to kick of the World Nomad Games in Kyrgyzstan

World Nomad Games in Kyrgyzstan

The World Nomad Games are a sports and cultural event held in Cholpon-Ata, Kyrgyzstan (not Bishkek) and they are an attempt to preserve and promote nomadic culture and traditions throughout Central Asia. This was only the second year the event was held, yet it featured 23 sports and drew athletes from over 40 different countries.

Imagine a festival where ancient traditions, thrilling competitions, and vibrant cultural celebrations come together in a spectacular display. This unique gathering showcases the rich nomadic heritage of Central Asia and beyond, making it an essential experience for anyone visiting the region.

Why Is It a Must-Try Experience?

Cultural Extravaganza: The World Nomad Games offer a deep dive into the diverse cultures of the nomadic peoples. From traditional music and dance to stunning crafts and delicious cuisine, the event is a celebration of nomadic life. It's an immersive cultural experience that provides insights into the customs and traditions that have shaped these communities for centuries.

Exciting Competitions: At the heart of the games are the thrilling competitions that test the skills and endurance of the participants. Events like horseback wrestling, eagle hunting, and Kok-Boru (a rugged team sport involving a goat carcass) are not only exciting to watch but also steeped in historical significance. These contests highlight the physical prowess and spirit of the nomads.

What Makes It So Epic?

Spectacular Setting: The World Nomad Games are set against the stunning backdrop of Kyrgyzstan's mountains and valleys. The natural beauty of the location adds an epic dimension to the event. Imagine watching a fierce game of Kok-Boru with snow-capped peaks in the distance—it's a sight you won't soon forget.

Global Gathering: This event brings together participants and spectators from around the world. It's a global celebration of nomadic cultures, creating a unique atmosphere of camaraderie and cultural exchange. Meeting people from different backgrounds and sharing in this collective experience is truly epic.

What Makes It a Great Experience for Visitors?

Interactive and Engaging: The World Nomad Games are designed to be interactive. Visitors can participate in workshops, try their hand at traditional crafts, and even sample nomadic cuisine. This hands-on approach makes the experience more engaging and memorable. You’re not just a spectator—you’re a participant in the festivities.

Family-Friendly Fun: The games offer activities and entertainment for visitors of all ages. From kid-friendly workshops to mesmerizing performances, there’s something for everyone. It’s a fantastic way to spend time with family while learning about different cultures and traditions.

Rich History and Tradition: Attending the World Nomad Games is like stepping back in time. The event celebrates ancient traditions that have been passed down through generations. Watching these traditions come to life is both educational and inspiring, providing a deeper appreciation for the resilience and creativity of nomadic peoples.

How to Arrange the Experience?

Getting There: Bishkek, the capital of Kyrgyzstan, is well-connected by international flights. Once you arrive, local transportation options like taxis and buses can take you to the event venue. It’s advisable to plan your travel in advance, as the games attract a large number of visitors.

Booking Tickets: Tickets for the World Nomad Games can be purchased online through the official event website or at designated ticket booths in Bishkek. It’s a good idea to buy tickets early to secure your spot, especially for popular events and competitions.

What to Bring: Dress comfortably and be prepared for varying weather conditions. Layered clothing is ideal, as the weather can change quickly. Don’t forget your camera or smartphone to capture the incredible sights and moments. A reusable water bottle and some snacks will keep you refreshed throughout the day.

Tips for Visitors

Explore Beyond the Games: Take time to explore Bishkek and the surrounding areas. The city has much to offer, from vibrant markets to historical landmarks.

Engage with Locals: The local people are incredibly hospitable. Don’t hesitate to strike up a conversation and learn more about their culture and traditions.

Stay Informed: Keep an eye on the event schedule and plan your days to make the most of your visit. There are often multiple events happening simultaneously, so prioritize the ones that interest you the most.

The following post will share some of the highlights of the World Nomad Games through photos and videos.

World Nomad Games Video:

In this video you'll see our experience attending the World Nomad GamesIf you have trouble viewing this video click here:  http://youtu.be/KwDoJVCLm2Y

World Nomad Games: Favorite Sports

As mentioned previously there were 23 different sports at the games. Here is a brief overview of some of my personal favourite sports. Keep in mind none of these sports were familiar to me at all prior to attending the games!

Kok-boru:

This sport was my personal favorite and it was definitely the most popular event at the World Nomad Games. Basically, two teams on horseback play something that sort of resembles polo, except instead of using a ball, they're carrying and tossing a goat carcass with the intention of scoring a goal against their opponent. I was fortunate enough to have the opportunity to get right on the field during the game. I got a little overzealous at one point getting too close to the action and I had to retreat suddenly as horse-mounted players galloped in my direction. My favorite match was between Kyrgyzstan and Kazakhstan with the Krygyz team coming out on top.

Mas-wrestling:

Two wrestlers face each other with the soles of their feet on opposite sides of a wooden board. In their hands they're holding a stick, and it's basically a tug-o-war to either get the stick or pull their opponent over to their side of the board. These typically massive men were physically exhausted by the end of a match even if the game only lasted a few brief seconds.

Salbuurun:

This was my favorite hunting/prey event involving eagles. The competition was to see how fast eagles can fly while chasing after a fox skin over a stretch of 200 meters. It wasn't only the human athletes that impressed me during these games!

Other Sports At The World Nomad Games

The World Nomad Games in Kyrgyzstan celebrate the rich traditions of nomadic cultures through a variety of thrilling and unique sports. Here's a detailed look at the diverse sports featured at this extraordinary event:

Kok-Boru (Buzkashi)

Description: A traditional Central Asian team sport similar to polo but played with a goat carcass instead of a ball.

Objective: Players on horseback try to grab the carcass and score by placing it in the opposing team's goal.

Significance: Demonstrates the strength, agility, and teamwork of nomadic horsemen.

Er Enish (Horseback Wrestling)

Description: A physically demanding sport where two wrestlers try to unseat each other while riding horses.

Objective: The goal is to throw the opponent off their horse.

Significance: Highlights the importance of horsemanship and physical prowess in nomadic cultures.

Kyrgyz Kurosh (Traditional Wrestling)

Description: A form of wrestling unique to Kyrgyzstan, combining elements of judo and freestyle wrestling.

Objective: Competitors aim to throw their opponent to the ground using various holds and techniques.

Significance: Reflects the traditional combat skills of Kyrgyz warriors.

Tyin Emmei (Coin Pickup)

Description: A horseback sport where riders pick up coins from the ground at full gallop.

Objective: Collect as many coins as possible within a set time.

Significance: Demonstrates the precision and agility of horse and rider.

Jereed (Equestrian Javelin Throw)

Description: A traditional Turkish sport involving horseback riders throwing javelins at each other.

Objective: Hit the opposing rider or their horse with the javelin.

Significance: Simulates ancient cavalry battles, showcasing horsemanship and accuracy.

Salburun (Hunting with Birds of Prey)

Description: A hunting tradition using trained eagles and falcons.

Objective: The birds hunt small game like hares and foxes.

Significance: Highlights the symbiotic relationship between nomads and their hunting birds.

Ordo

Description: A strategic game played with sheep knuckle bones.

Objective: Players aim to knock out a central bone using other bones as projectiles.

Significance: Combines skill, strategy, and a deep connection to traditional nomadic life.

Mangala

Description: An ancient board game similar to mancala, involving the strategic movement of stones.

Objective: Capture more stones than the opponent.

Significance: Reflects the intellectual and strategic aspects of nomadic culture.

Toguz Korgool

Description: A traditional nomadic board game akin to mancala, popular in Central Asia.

Objective: Capture the most "korgools" (game pieces) through strategic play.

Significance: Encourages strategic thinking and planning.

Archery

Description: Traditional archery using bows and arrows.

Objective: Hit targets at various distances.

Significance: Demonstrates ancient hunting and combat skills.

Traditional Horse Racing

Description: Various forms of horse racing, including long-distance and endurance races.

Objective: Be the first to cross the finish line or complete the course.

Significance: Celebrates the endurance and speed of the horses and their riders.

Alaman Baige (Long-Distance Horse Race)

Description: A grueling long-distance race over challenging terrain.

Objective: Test the stamina and endurance of both horse and rider.

Significance: Reflects the nomadic lifestyle’s reliance on horses for long journeys.

Cirit

Description: A traditional equestrian team sport from Turkey, similar to jousting.

Objective: Riders throw javelins at opponents while galloping.

Significance: Simulates ancient battle tactics and horsemanship.

At Chabysh (Endurance Horse Racing)

Description: An endurance race over a set distance, testing the stamina of both horse and rider.

Objective: Finish the race in the shortest time possible.

Significance: Demonstrates the bond and endurance between nomads and their horses.

Mas-Wrestling

Description: A test of strength where two competitors try to pull a stick out of each other’s hands.

Objective: Wrest the stick away from the opponent.

Significance: Highlights physical strength and determination.

Here is a complete list of the sports from the World Nomad Games.

#### How To Create A Successful Travel Blog In Your First Year Of Blogging
When I first started my travel blog just over a year ago I knew that it was going to be successful.  It had to be. Failure was never an option.

A lot of people start travel blogging wondering 'how' they will be able to compete with some of the other top travel blogs who are already established and have been plying their craft for years.  I've heard some say it's nearly impossible to break into a field that is already saturated.  Why even bother when the odds are stacked against you?

In a word - passion.  Passion to travel.  Passion to share stories.   Passion to take photos.  Passion to create travel videos.  Passion to give advice that is going to help others.  Ultimately, passion is the determining factor of whether or not you are going to be successful with your travel blog.  The more 'unrealistic' you are with your dreams, goals and imagination, the more likely it is that you are going to achieve 'incredible' things.

How to create a successful travel blog the first year of blogging

How To Create A Successful Travel Blog

Nomadic Samuel travel blogging on top of Machu Picchu, Peru in a joking manner

Passion is going to ignite a level of confidence in yourself.  With a high degree of confidence and certainty you'll be catapulted to take massive action towards achieving your goals.  With massive action you'll start to see results that will help confirm your belief that what you're doing is worthwhile.  With impressive results you'll grow even more passionate about your projects.  It's the feedback loop of success.  This isn't limited to just travel blogging -  it's really the determining factor in just about any field.

The good news is that hard work, determination and consistent effort is going to help you achieve your blogging goals.  The bad news is that hard work alone isn't going to cut it.  It's about working 'smart' and realizing that what it takes to make a successful travel blog is more than just creating posts on your own site and leaving things up to chance.  There are a number of phases a travel blog must endure before it is considered mature or successful:

Phase 1 (Building The Snowball)

Every travel blog - even the top travel sites today - started out from scratch.  My travel blog was once bare bones and so was yours.  All of us have pressed 'publish' for the first time wondering who on earth -other than friends and family - is actually going to read this post?  Phase 1 is the most clumsy phase but it is also the most crucial.  Any travel blog that I've noticed achieve success, in a short period of time, absolutely crushes it during this phase.

This is the phase where you need to eat, sleep & breathe your site day in and day out.  Without a herculean effort it becomes a daunting task for your travel blog to receive any sort of traction.  In order for a snowball to accumulate mass and eventually propel itself down the hill, it first requires a considerable effort.  The following is a list of things that I feel are essential for a site to reach its full potential in phase 1:

1) Consistent Content

You're going to be wanting to churn out content on your own site as consistently as possible.  Posting sporadically or whenever 'inspiration' comes just isn't going to cut it.  Imagine a serious athlete training for an event.  Do they take days/weeks off when they 'don't' feel like' training?  Nope.  If you want your site to do well creating a consistent posting schedule is a key component.

But it doesn't have to be a struggle. By leveraging content tools like a summarizer, a content calendar, or AI design, you can elevate your content creation process. For example, using an AI design tool can generate creative social media posts, automate design processes, and enhance the creativity and impact of your articles. Don't be afraid of the latest technology - embrace it. By harnessing its potential, you can streamline your writing workflow, and in turn, that will contribute significantly to the overall success of your site.

2) Rocking Social Media

In the beginning stages 'Google' is not your best friend.  They tend to favour the kid who has been around the block a few times.  Sites that have mature domains, loads of content and a strong link profile get all of the love from the search engines;  however, social media is a way you can light a fuse under your site and watch it blow up quickly.  Rocking platforms such as facebook, stumble upon, twitter and pinterest are going to help drive traffic to your site.  Once again, this is something that cannot be done sporadically.  Consider social media the travel blogging equivalent of brushing your teeth.  I doubt you'd go a day without brushing your teeth and I wouldn't suggest letting a day pass without engaging in social media in some capacity.

3) Getting Your Name Out There

You're a complete nobody when you first start out.  It's great having 'Mom follow along' but in order to create a successful travel blog you need a solid readership.  In the initial stages, one of the easiest ways to attract this for your site is to become a fully immersed in the travel blogging community.  Commenting, tweeting, stumbling and promoting the work of others is the name of the game.  It's all about being a 'team player' and hoping that others eventually reciprocate.  The travel blogging community is for the most part full of incredible people willing to help one another out.  Although there has been a lot of posts and chatter lately about things being somewhat toxic, it's really only a few that are actively seeking to spoil the party for others.  Anyhow, you want to be a bit like the Tasmanian Devil cartoon character, propelling yourself in a kamikaze like fashion in as many places as you possibly can to get your name out there.

4) Building Links

Building links is the 'travel blogging' equivalent of training for an event.  One doesn't notice the gruelling hours spent in the gym, track or field, but this is where the elite competitors separate themselves from the pack.  It's not enough to have a nice blog design, write compelling prose, tantalize with stunning photography or set the world on fire with cleverly composed travel videos.  Without a strong link profile your ship (travel blog) is left out at sea.

The truth of the matter is that links are still (and even in the future when social signals play a more significant role) the currency of exchange when it comes to how well your site is going to do in the search engines.  Without new eyeballs on your site each and every day, growing your blog readership and fan-base is like trying to swim laps in quicksand.

There are a number of ways to build links.  Doing link exchanges, guest posting & commenting on other blogs & forums are all part of the equation.  One of the easiest ways to check the progress of your site's link profile is to track its domain authority (which is updated roughly once a month) by installing the SEOmoz toolbar.

ETA:  This stage is the make or break period for successful travel blogs.  A lot of travel bloggers burn out in this phase and give up inches before they've crossed the finish line.  The truth is that this phase can last a while or it can be over within a few months.  Whether one is the tortoise or the hare, has a lot to do with the passion, effort, commitment and skill-level one has during this phase.  Many bloggers mention the first 6 months as the time period before things really start to take-off.  I've seen sites get beyond this stage in less time than that.  On the other hand, I've seen sites that have required a lot more time than this.  The main thing is to NOT GIVE UP during this phase.

Phase 2 (Gaining Traction with the Snowball)

In phase 2 things start getting a little easier.  If phase one is the gang initiation period, phase 2 is where you've earned your stripes.  At this point, the efforts you've made to create consistent content, rock social media, get your name out there and build links have paid off in spades.  At this point your site has achieved a solid readership base and is well known within the travel blogging community.  It also has a strong social media footprint and receives solid traffic from Google and other search engines.

The good news is that you can let the pedal off of the gas a bit from time to time at this stage.  Some signs that you've reached this stage include traffic not dropping off significantly when/if you haven't posted in a while and other sites linking to you on a consistent basis.

This is the phase when you can start thinking beyond the blog.  This is a great time to start other projects (other sites, ebooks, youtube videos, freelancing, etc) because the effort needed to grow your site in phase 1 is no longer necessary in stage 2.  You will, of course, still need to post consistently, utilize social media, get your name out there and build links; however, the main difference is that you can do it more moderately at this stage.

This is an exciting stage for your blog because at this point you're no longer the rookie and your efforts don't fall upon deaf ears.

ETA:  It could take months or years to reach this stage.  The majority of travel blogs (even some of the most successful ones) will likely plateau in this area for a considerable period of time or never reach the next level.  In order to reach the final stage it takes a lot of effort and dedication and likely years of hard work and expertise to finally arrive at that level.

Phase 3 (No Longer a Snowball - You're an Avalanche)

Yes.  At this point you're truly crushing it.  This is when you've made it.  Your site receives enormous traffic, has a huge following and is a respected authority within your field.  Companies are lining up to work with you and industry professionals are requesting you to speak at conferences.  This is the level I aspire to be at in some given point in time.

When you've reached this level you'll be ranked near or at the top of every top travel blogging list.  No matter what metric is being measured, your site at this given point in time will be elite in all areas.  Some sites that have achieved this level of success and respect are The Planet D and Stuck in Customs.  Aside from working hard on all of their sites and having a refined skill-set they have another important thing in common:  they've been doing this consistently for years.

The key formula to reaching this level is to pass through phases one and two and stick with your site with the same level of commitment over a significant period of time.  When defining the career of any successful writer, athlete or politician, it's not done over a period of weeks or months, but instead it takes years - or possibly even decades - for the final chapters to be written.

Designing Your First-Year Game Plan

So you’ve got the passion, you understand the phases, and you’re ready to roll up your sleeves.

Now comes the unsexy part that actually moves the needle: turning that passion into a clear, simple plan for your first year.

You don’t need a 47-page strategy document. You need:

A direction (what kind of travel blog you’re building)

A rhythm (how often you’ll publish and promote)

A simple system (how you’ll grow, connect, and eventually earn)

Get those three aligned, and suddenly the snowball you’re pushing uphill doesn’t feel quite as heavy.

Decide What Kind of Travel Blog You’re Actually Building

“Travel blog” is vague. The clearer you are about what you’re doing, the easier everything else becomes: titles, topics, partnerships, even what you say in your bio.

You don’t have to marry a niche for life, but you do want a strong angle for year one.

Pick a Core Angle You Can Show Up For

Ask yourself:

What kind of trips do you actually take?

What do friends already ask you about?

What could you talk about for hours without getting bored?

Then use that to shape your angle.

#### Karakol Travel Guide: Top 15 Things to Do in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan
Are you ready to uncover one of the hidden gems of Central Asia? Karakol is a city that might not be on every traveler’s radar. But it should be. Karakol offers a unique adventure for those willing to venture off the beaten path. Come check out our Karakol travel guide for some unique things to do in the city!

Last year I had the privilege of visiting Kyrgyzstan for the first time. I attended the World Nomad Games, got a taste of adventure travel around Song Kol and briefly visited Karakol. We then lingered for while in the capital city of Bishkek. In many ways, it was the perfect introduction to the country. However, I left wanting more.

 Source: From Our Travel Channel Samuel and Audrey covering things to do in Karakol

Having the chance to revisit Kyrgyzstan and come back to Karakol for a few days (I had previously just done a day trip). This allowed me to experience this part of the country more in depth. I got to really appreciate all it has to offer.

Sitting on the eastern shores of Issyk Kul, Karakol is considered the adventure capital of Kyrgyzstan.

Travellers come here to arrange hikes, horse treks and camping adventures. However, the town also warrants considerable exploration. Especially, when it comes to culture and local cuisine.

Yuriy Gagarin statue in Barksoon, Kyrgyzstan

Why Visit Karakol?

Visiting Karakol is similar to visiting Bishkek. It rewards those who linger.

You can enjoy the laidback pace of life, discover its unusual attractions, do a bit of cafe hopping, and come to appreciate its many quirky charms.

Karakol is merely a stone’s throw away from some of the most dramatic landscapes in Central Asia. Whether it's hiking through the rugged Tien Shan mountains or relaxing by the vast Lake Issyk-Kul, you've got options galore.

Are you a culture vulture? With its eclectic mix of Russian, Kyrgyz, Dungan, and Uighur influences, you'll have opportunities to visit attractions such as a Dungan mosque and Russian Orthodox Cathedral.

Moreover, Karakol's food scene is as diverse as its people. You can easily indulge in authentic Kyrgyz dishes. Enrich your tastebuds by sampling Dungan delicacies, or treat yourself to Uighur cuisine. Local markets brim with fresh produce and vibrant spices. Make your own Silk Road dreams become reality.

So, welcome to our Karakol travel guide—the base camp for your next big adventure!

With this in mind, let's discover 15 things you can do while visiting Karakol.

source: Our YouTube travel channel Samuel and Audrey visiting Karakol

15 Things to Do in Karakol Travel Guide

Distinct wooden door in Karakol, Kyrgzstan

1) Karakol Walking Tour

Looking for an authentic way to explore Karakol? Jump on a free walking tour! It’s a casual yet informative experience.

As a first-time visitor, one of the best ways to get acquainted with Karakol, is to take one of the free walking tours. These tip-based tours are put on by the tourist office and run three times a week.

Free walking tours are led by guides who actually live in Karakol. They know these streets like the back of their hands. And can tell you not just the history, but also the stories behind the places you visit.

It's a great way to get a feel for the town while checking out some of the major landmarks. You'll discover quirky attractions you wouldn't have found on your own.

Plus you have a local guide who can answer any questions you may have about the place. They'll offer suggestions on other things to do. More information here: https://destinationkarakol.com/tours/karakol-walking-tour

Dungan Mosque in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

2) Dungan Mosque

Our first stop of the walking tour was the Dungan Mosque. This architecturally-unique mosque looks a lot like a Buddhist temple. This is because it was built by the Dungan community, an ethnically Chinese people group who follow Islam. But they incorporated architectural elements from their own culture.

Hence, this vibrant building bursts with color and intricate design. A reflection of a fascinating blend of Chinese and Islamic architectural styles.

Built in 1910 by Dungan (Chinese Muslim) immigrants, its colorful timber features and pagoda-style roof make it a must visit attraction for photographers. It's a harmonious blend of Islamic practices with Chinese aesthetics.

The mosque’s history is as compelling as its architecture. The Dungan people fled China in the late 19th century to escape persecution. Thus, the mosque is not just a place of worship, but a symbol of resilience and cultural fusion. It represents the Dungan community's successful integration into Karakol society while preserving their unique identity.

As a fun fact: apparently this mosque was built without the use of nails (though some nails have been spotted from modern-day repairs). Further information: https://destinationkarakol.com/what-to-do/attractions-museums/

Holy Trinity Russian Orthodox Church wooden cathedral in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

3) Holy Trinity Russian Orthodox Church

Another iconic place of worship in Karakol (Каракол) is the Holy Trinity Russian Orthodox Church. This is a traditional Russian wooden cathedral complete with onion domes.

Built in 1895, the Holy Trinity Church is a prime example of traditional Russian Orthodox architecture. It was constructed from wood; yet it stands firm over a century later. Its iconic blue dome, topped with a golden cross offers a picturesque view against the mountainous backdrop.

The church's history is nothing short of fascinating. Over the years, ( especially during Soviet times, when many religious buildings were repurposed or destroyed) it has been used as a sports hall, school, theatre, coal shop and dance hall, just to name a few!

The church's interior is adorned with religious icons and murals. Here, you can feel a palpable sense of history.

As a pro tip, if you're wearing a hat be sure to take it off! I made that mistake myself.

Antique Shop Aleksandr Korablev for Soviet era souvenirs in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

4) Antique Shop of Aleksandr Korablev

If you’re an avid souvenir collector then you’ll want to peruse Aleksandr Korablev's Antique Shop. This little one-room shop is overflowing with treasures from the Soviet era. They have things like old cameras, porcelain sculptures, and even busts of Lenin.

It's like a portal into the past. The collection is as eclectic as it is eccentric. Believe me when I say this isn't just any old antique shop. It's a treasure trove of history, stories, and curiosities. It'll captivate anyone who steps through its door.

Opening its doors in the early 1990s, shortly after Kyrgyzstan gained independence, Korablev's collection has grown from a modest hobbyist's corner to a cultural landmark. This shop isn’t just about buying antiques. It’s about preserving a piece of history that might otherwise be forgotten.

I wanted to purchase many items but due to the lack of space in my suitcase. I only ended up buying a Soviet-Era border guard hat to add to my ever growing collection of hats from around the world. They had quite a few hats to choose from, and we learned that the color of each hat denotes whether it was an official cap for the army, navy, police or border control.

This quirky spot is a must-visit for both serious collectors and curious travelers alike.

Monument busts at Victory Park and World War II Memorial in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

5) Karakol's History Museum

Are you a history buff? If so, be sure to add Karakol's History Museum to your itinerary. Located in a beautifully preserved old Russian building, this museum offers a journey through time via its collection of artifacts.

So, what makes the museum a top thing to do in Karakol? .

The small museum is home to an impressive taxidermy collection. Its eclectic collection that narrates the town’s history from its early days as a Russian garrison outpost to its current status as a cultural melting pot. You'll find traditional Kyrgyz clothing, Russian Orthodox religious relics, and artifacts from the Dungan people.

Plus when we visited there was an exhibition of photos by Ella Maillart, a swiss traveler who photographed her travels through Central Asia in the 1930s.

The Karakol History Museum is an essential stop for anyone wanting to fully understand the fabric of this region.

Victory Park and World War II Memorial in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

6) Victory Park and World War II Memorial

For a green escape, we also visited Victory Park and World War II Memorial located in the Przhevalsk District. Located amidst towering pine trees, the park offers a quiet retreat from the bustling city life. It’s a place where history and tranquility intersect.

Victory Park, coupled with its World War II Memorial, stands as a testament to the bravery and sacrifices of the soldiers from the Karakol area who fought in the war. The memorial is prominently featured within the park. Marked by a solemn statue in memory of the fallen.

However, the memorial isn’t just a relic. It's an active part of the community's cultural and civic activities. Commemorations and veteran gatherings are held throughout the year.

Everything here, from the many busts to imposing monuments, is done on a grand scale. And if you look closely enough you'll see how tiny I am on the left of the above picture snapped by Audrey.

Nomadic Samuel enjoying delicious food in Kyrgyzstan

7) Fat Cat Karakol for food and drinks

Looking for a cozy spot to eat and drink in Karakol? Our favorite place to spend a lazy afternoon in the city was hands down the Fat Cat Karakol located on the corner of Gagarin and Alybakova. First recommended to us by two Dutch travellers we met at Bel Tam Yurt Camp.

This chill cafe served up some amazing cakes, as well as pizzas and grilled cheese sandwiches paired with craft beers.

Nomadic Samuel drinking beer in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

What makes this place even more special is that the owner, Zhamila, has used her business to do a lot of good in the community, including organizing projects to raise funds for school supplies and empower women to start their own businesses. This fact alone made including Fat Cat to our Karakol travel guide a must.

Whether you're starting your morning with a cup of their renowned coffee, stopping by for a leisurely lunch, or ending the day with a cheeky pint, Fat Cat's welcoming atmosphere makes it the perfect any-time-of-day spot. You can make new friends or simply chillax by watching the world go by.

Ashlyanfu (Ашлян-фу) for dinner as part of an 8 course meal in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

8) Visiting local markets

Meandering through the local markets was another one of our favorite things to do in Karakol. It's a slice of the town's culture and daily life.

It’s a place where vibrant colors, enticing smells, and the buzz of daily commotion blend into an unforgettable sensory experience.

Karakol’s markets are treasure troves of local produce, handicrafts, and culinary delights. You'll find just about everything here ranging from fresh produce to boxing gloves.

And in the food department, you can't go wrong with a bowl of Ashlyan-fu (or three), but more on that local dish later. Furthermore, don’t miss the chance to try some local specialties like kurut (dried yogurt balls) and beshbarmak (a traditional noodle and meat dish), which are staples.

What makes shopping here unique? It’s the authentic interaction with the locals. This direct trade supports local families and the community. A win-win for everyone.

Moreover, each visit to the market can be a different adventure. You might find yourself sipping on locally brewed kymyz (fermented mare's milk) one day, and picking out the perfect handmade woolen hat the next.

Out of of all the things to do in Karakol this may be my personal favourite.

Incredible group meal together in Kyrgyzstan with a host family

9) Dungan 8-course meal

For the culture vulture and foodie interested in Kyrgyz cuisine, arranging an eight course meal with a Dungan family is another must.

What's on the menu? Dungan cuisine is a delectable fusion of Chinese techniques with Central Asian ingredients. At a typical 8-course meal, you'll start with laghman (hand-pulled noodles) and progress through dishes like manta (steamed dumplings), shorpo (mutton soup), and various stir-fried vegetables seasoned with local herbs and spices.

So, what makes Dungan food unique? It’s the meticulous preparation and the artful combination of flavors. Cooking methods often involve braising, steaming, and quick-frying—techniques that highlight the freshness of the ingredients.

Dungan cooks use a palette of seasonings. These might be familiar to fans of Chinese food but mixed in ways that surprise and delight.

Spiral shaped lagman noodles at a Uyghur Cooking Class in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

Before the food was served, we had the opportunity to help prepare Ashlyanfu (Ашлян-фу) - a cold soup featuring different kinds of noodles. Additionally, a vinegar based broth and a combination of bell peppers, garlic, cilantro and tomatoes thrown in for good measure.

The dinner itself was a feast of feasts. According to Dungan tradition no less than 8 different dishes appear at the table. We came with our best intentions to finish everything served.

But we didn't even come close to accomplishing that.

A meal with a Dungan family in Karakol is more than just a dinner. It’s an immersive cultural experience. It offers deep insight into a unique culinary tradition.

You can book this experience through Destination Karakol: https://destinationkarakol.com/tours/dungan-village-family-dinner/

Our cooking host showing us how to stretch lagman noodles at a Uyghur Cooking Class in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

10) Uyghur Cooking Class

With our love of indulging in local cuisine, another experience we really enjoyed was a cooking class where we learned to make a traditional Uyghur dish: laghman (Лагман). We had Gulya as our guide in the kitchen.

She taught us how to stretch the noodles. Let's just say I was all thumbs in the kitchen.

The magic of this class? You’ll learn from a Uyghur chef who will teach you the authentic way to pull noodles. Along with balancing the unique spices that give this dish its signature flavor.

But Laghman is more than just noodles. It's a staple of Uyghur cuisine that has spread across Central Asia. This dish typically features hand-pulled noodles, hearty vegetables, and meat, all simmered in a rich and spicy broth.

After a fun demonstration, we left it to the experts to continue with the recipe. We just watched as they fried the ingredients and worked on the broth.

This cooking class offers an opportunity connect with Karakol's vibrant Uyghur community. The best part? You get to eat what you make. There’s nothing quite like tasting Laghman that you’ve made with your own hands.

Once again, you can arrange this cooking class through Destination Karakol: https://destinationkarakol.com/food-drink/kyrgyz-food/#karakoldishes



11) Eat a bowl of lagman

Speaking of the dish I just mentioned, lagman (Лагман) is a popular Uyghur dish. A true staple of Kyrgyz cuisine. The hand-pulled noodles can be served either soupy or fried. Coming with plenty of meat and vegetables. It's another dish that you'll want to sample in the local restaurants or markets.

What's in a bowl? Laghman is more than the sum of its parts. But those parts are pretty darn spectacular. Thick, hand-pulled noodles are the star of the dish. They swim in a savory broth alongside chunks of meat (usually beef or lamb) and a medley of vegetables such as bell peppers, radishes, onions and carrots. All of that is topped with fresh herbs. It's such a unique combination of textures and flavors. Hearty noodles, succulent meat, and crisp vegetables makes each spoonful a delight.

If you're in Karakol, indulging in a bowl of Laghman is a must. This hearty noodle dish isn't just food; it's a dive into the rich tapestry of Central Asian culinary traditions. Packed with flavors and history, here's why enjoying a bowl of Laghman in Karakol is an unforgettable experience for any visitor.

So, when in Karakol, don’t miss the chance to wrap your fork around the steaming strands of this beloved noodle dish. Sit down, tuck in, and let the rich flavors transport you through the history and culture of this fascinating region.

Writing this Karakol travel guide has made me awfully hungry!

Views of a rowboat during our sunset cruise on Lake Issyk-Kul Ысык Көл Иссык Куль Przhevalsky Bay in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

Sunset views during cruise on Lake Issyk-Kul Przhevalsky Bay in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

12) Sunset Cruise on Lake Issyk-Kul

Picture this! Imagine gliding across the second largest alpine lake in the world as the sun dips below the mountains, painting the sky in hues of orange, pink, and purple.

Hence, one of our last activities in Karakol was a sunset cruise on Przhevalsky Bay located on the eastern shores of Lake Issyk Kul (Ысык-Көл).

Surrounded by friends, we enjoyed a spectacular sunset with drinks in hand. With calm waters we marveled at mountains off in the distance.

Lake Issyk-Kul, known as the "Pearl of Kyrgyzstan," is surrounded by the snow-capped peaks of the Tian Shan mountains. The lake itself never freezes, thanks to its slight salinity and geothermal activity. Thus, it providing a year-round haven for visitors.

Here you'll create postcard-worthy images that you’ll want to share with everyone back home. Moreover, it's the perfect way to unwind after a day of hiking or sightseeing.

Further information about the cruise: https://destinationkarakol.com/tours/karakol-sunset-cruise/

Views of Jeti Oguz Jeti-Ögüz in Kyrgyzstan

Stunning scenery of yurts with mountain backdrop in Kyrgyzstan

13) Jeti Oguz Valley for hiking

Our favorite day trip from Karakol was a short 30-minute drive to Jeti-Ögüz.

Translated, it means 'seven bulls.' It was named so for the seven plus hills (vibrant red sandstone cliffs) that make up the formation. These iconic formations are a stunning backdrop to a network of trails that wind through lush meadows and pine forests.

The best part? Panoramic views of the snow-capped Terskey Alatau mountains in the distance.

This is hiking and horse-trekking paradise.

Trails range from short loops that offer easy walks to longer, more demanding routes that lead up to higher elevations like the stunning Eagle's Nest viewpoint.

However, Jeti Oguz isn't just famous for its natural beauty. It’s steeped in local folklore. The most famous being the tale of the "Broken Heart," a rock that is said to represent the heart of a beautiful woman torn between two suitors.

Pack a picnic lunch like a Kyrgyz visitor. Or stay longer in one of the yurt camps.

What to bring? Make sure to pack plenty of water, some snacks, and suitable clothing for variable weather. Don’t forget your camera. A pair of binoculars for bird watching and wildlife spotting is ace.

Hiking information: https://destinationkarakol.com/what-to-do/trekking/

Barskoon Waterfalls in Kyrgyzstan

14) Barskoon Gorge

To extend the day trip a little longer, we continued on to the nearby Barskoon Gorge.

You'll find numerous waterfalls here along with some great hiking trails. Known locally by names such as "Tears of the Snow Leopard", these cascading waters are accessible via well-marked trails.

You can reach some of the smaller waterfalls within 15 minutes of hiking. But the main one is 1.5 to 2 hours away on foot.

You'll also discover a bust of Yuri Gagarin! his is a nod to space exploration. Yuri was the first cosmonaut who apparently had a particular fondness for this area.

It's a popular spot for photos. And a moment of reflection on the feats of exploration - both terrestrial and celestial.

Preparation is key for this day trip. Pack suitable hiking gear, plenty of water, snacks, and don't forget your camera. Dress in layers, as the weather can change quickly in the mountains.

Views of Karakol, Kyrgyzstan during our day hiking trip

Scenic forest walk during our day hike in Karakol, Kyrgyzstan

15) Karakol Day Hike

Lastly, we couldn't visit the adventure capital of Kyrgyzstan without doing at least one hike! So, lace up your hiking boots and hit the trails! Karakol is renowned for its spectacular natural surroundings. And a day hike here offers not just exercise but an immersive nature experience. You'll be treated to breathtaking views of the town from above and the serene beauty of alpine landscapes.

How did we do it? With a local guide from Eco-Trek and a dog friend in tow, we set off on a scenic journey starting from the village of Jorgolot. With highlights including panoramic views of Karakol. We also enjoyed a great picnic in the valley. And a walk through the forest trails to finish off.

Of course, far more ambitious hikes, horse-treks and yurt stays are best arranged from Karakol. However, a day hike is a good option.

You've got options galore. Whether you're short on time or need a little help deciding whether you want to commit to something more challenging or not. Trust me. It's worth it.

How to Arrange Your Hike

Planning your day hike in Karakol is easy. You can book a guided tour through a local travel agency or organize a self-guided walk. Here’s how you can arrange it:

Guided Tours: Local tour operators offer a variety of guided hikes that include transport, a knowledgeable guide, and sometimes even meals. This is a great option if you're unfamiliar with the area or prefer a more structured experience.

Self-Guided Adventures: For those who prefer to explore on their own, Karakol’s trails are well-marked. Grab a map from the local tourist office or download one from a reliable outdoor app, and you’re good to go.

Preparation Tips:

Wear appropriate footwear and clothing for mountain weather, which can change rapidly.

Pack essentials like water, snacks, sunscreen, and a basic first aid kit.

Start early to maximize daylight and enjoy the tranquility of morning trails.